DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR.

BULLETIN

THE UNITED STATES

GEOLOGICAL AND GEOGRAPHICAL SURVEY

OF

THE TERRITORIES.

F. V. HAYDEN,

U. Ss. GHEOQLOGIST-IN-CHARGE.

HS:3/2).

MEARNS
COLLECTICK

WiO@dL Wenn). WE: ay

WASHINGTON:
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE.
1882.

Sito

s

By
:

PREFATORY NOTE.

U. S. GEOLOGICAL AND GEOGRAPHICAL
Pia, © SURVEY OF THE TERRITORIES,
Washington, July 31, 1882.

Bulletin No. 3 completes Volume VI and ends the series. With this
number are issued index, title-page, table of contents, list of illustra-
tions, &c., for the whole volume. The separately published numbers
should be preserved for binding, as there is no issue of the Bulletins in
bound volumes, and as back numbers cannot always be supplied to
complete deficient files.

In issuing the final volume of Bulletins, a word regarding the origin
and progress of this publication will not be out of place. The issue
began in 1874, when it was found desirable to establish more ready
means of communication with the public and with scientific bodies than
the regular reports of the Survey afforded; the design being to publish,
without the delay incident to the appearance of more elaborate and ex-
tended articles, such new or specially interesting matter as should be
contributed to the general results of the explorations under my charge
by the members or the collaborators of the Survey. The practical im-
portance of prompt measures in such cases is well recognized, and sufii-
ciently attested by the success which the Bulletins have achieved.

The First and Second Bulletins, which appeared in 1874, are sepa-
rately paged pamphlets, without ostensible connection with each other
or with subsequent ones, but together constituting a “First Series” of
the publication. Bulletins which appeared in 1875, being those of a
‘Second Series” and six in number, are continuously paged. With
No. 6 were issued title, contents, index, &c., for all the numbers of both
“series” which had then appeared; the design being that these should
together constitute Volume I, in order that the inconvenient distinction
of “series” might be dropped. |

With Bulletin No. 1 of 1876, the publication was established as an
annual serial; the four consecutively paged numbers of that year con-
stituting Volume II.

The four Bulletins of 1877 constitute Volume ITI.

The four Bulletins of 1878 form Volume IY.

The four Bulletins of 1879 and 1880 constitute Volume V, and Volume
VI, which contains three numbers, issued during 1881 and 1882, closes

the publication. It is to be regretted that Article I of No. 3 remains
iii

IV PREFATORY NOTE.

incomplete, owing to the unfortunate sickness of the author, Professor
Allen, which prevents the continuation of the abo srra uy of the
Cetacea and Sirenia in the serial.
Volumes IV and V were issued under the supervision of Dr. Elliott
Coues, U.S. A., and Volume VI was.completed by W. H. Holmes.
F. V. HAYDEN,
United States Geologist.

CONTENTS OF THE WHOLE VOLUME.

BULLETIN No. 1.—february 11, 1881.

I.—The Vegetation of the Rocky Mountain Region, and a comparison with
that of other parts of the world. By Asa Gray and Joseph D.

HOO KOM a seteniae see sis ne neeeteweiec asm snciscmeten ees hte o success
II.—On some new Batrachia and Reptilia from the Permian Beds of Texas.
yeh Dy Cone) sacscac essa see eieks se siseee emelesi oes eceecl cca. Jae
III.—On a Wading Bird from the Amyzon Shales. By E. D. Cope -..-..-----
IVY.—Osteology of Speotyto Cunicularia var. Hypogea. By R. W. Shu-
feldt, Acting Assistant Surgeon, U. S. Army -...--.....---.--------
V.—Osteology of Eremophila Alpestris. By R. W. Shufeldt, Acting As-
SIS CAMEO UE MOM, Wes Os ANI Ye racis mein sta is erate Eee ne nll ahe ei aminls
ViI.—Preliminary list of the North American species of Agrotis, with de-
ScRIpoonsi by A. Rs Globe) sooc) =. oo ae eee eee seer a ae ermciceme
VII.—On the Nimravide and Canide of the Miocene Period. By E. D.

BPD OOM Sae arjsemia cia et cicis ateiattaciors sis tee eee ema eine ete reine ones

BULLETIN No. 2.—September 19, 1881.

IX.—Annotated list of the Birds of Nevada. By W. J. Hoffman, M.D ..-.
X.—North American Moths, with a Preliminary Catalogue of Species of

Hadenay andy Pola. By Ac he GLOUG) aso qos = aanys oe ees ee
XI.—The Tertiary Lake Basin of Florissant, ee between South and
Hayden Parks. By Samuel H.\Scudder,jge2<.-- - 25-2 52--22 c2e6 5-0
XII.—Revision of the Genus Sciurus. By E-L. Trouessart .......--...----

XIII.—Osteology of the North American Tetraonide. By R. W.Shufeldt---.
XIV.—Osteology of Lanius ludovicianus excubitorides. By R. W. Shufeldt..
XV.—Review of the Rodentia of the Miocene Period of North America. By

ee Di COpe eas sack ses ka ostaaise cre oe oa eee aeteeette mea spars ols Soe
XVI.—On the Canide of the Loup Fork Epoch. By E. D. Cope.........-.-.
XVII.—On a Cray-fish from the Lower Tertiary Beds of Western Wyoming.
By A. 8. Packard - Sema SFe enema Seideiee Sersaa eh ad a ses alsaa5 Sys

BULLETIN No. 3.—August —, 1882.

XYVIII.—Preliminary List of Works and Papers relating to the Mammalian Or-
ders Cete and Sirenia. By Joel Asaph Allen.............--.-
XIX.—New Moths, with Partial Catalogue of Noctuz. By A.R. Grote, ia M.
XX.—New Moths, principally collected by Mr. Roland Thaxter, in Maine,
with notes on noxious species, and remarks on classification. By A.
eG EGLO aerate cena cto tac on a Pesan, cision ein sale eee nee

Page.

119

149

165

183

203
207
279
301
309
dol

361
387

391

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.

PLATES.
1A i Skeletonlof: Speotyto) Cumicmlariaes ses) 5-- = seeeeee eee eee
Pi ue —Osteolosy of Speobyto Cunicularia .-e- 2-5-2 ee eee eee eee
Py LiL Osteolory ot Speotyto Cunicularia see soe ee selene eee
PI Vi— Osteolosyjot Lremophila Alpestris\].--—5 425 eee see eee
Py Ve Osteology of American Tetraonidas 225.202 cee =e a= ae eee
Pei Osteolocysot American etraonidse sees eee een eee eee eee eee
evade —Osteolooysot American mletraonid =a sae— eee eee eee eee eee
PIS Vill —Osteolosy of American Metraonidee -25.55 -esacs 42 ea-e ose eee eee eee
ese ——Osteolocyiot American Retraonidce-sseeeeeeeeeee ese se Seco eee
PI, -x¢-_Osteology of American) letraonidiae-sa-enee eee eee ee ae eee eee
ie scle—— OSbeology ote American etraomidles ese ree
sella — OS ceoloovsorAmenican he braonid sys ee eee ee ee eee slate
PT xthl—Osteology of American Tetraonidss 22eee sss ea- 4-2 a eee eee eee

Pl. XIV.—Osteology of Lanius Ludovicianus excubitorides ........-...- -.<--

Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

CUTS IN TEXT.

—Anolesioriskl lon Hremophila n= acess. =e see eer Seis ete eee
—Showing distribution of Vegetation _.-__.-----._.-. 2-2: 2.5
—Slowine distribution of Veretation ----5.---4s--2 eee See ee eee
a Manrof Nevada Sense cor fe. joe Sack. coeeeece ee ees odicia Joe eee
—-Mapiofbionssant, Colorado... -.- .. +--+ -<-eseeeeeeee eee eee
= Mossi Cray fel co < octae< soe sci vin a, nlnie ntbneie ici ea aivee eee Gee ee

vi

DHPARIMENT OF THE INTHRIOR.
UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL AND GEOGRAPHICAL SURVEY.
F. V. HAYDEN, U. 8. GEOLOGIST-IN-CHARGE.

BULLETIN

THE UNITED STATES

GEOLOGICAL AND GEOGRAPHICAL SURVEY

OF

THE TERRITORIES.

VOLUME VI....-NUMBER 1.

WASHINGTON:
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICH.
February 11, 1881.

BULLETIN

OF THE

UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL AND GEOGRAPHICAL SURVEY
OF THE TERRITORIES,

NUMBER 1.

VoLumeE VI. 1880.

Art. 1.—The Vegetation of the Rocky Mountain Re-
gion and 2a Comparison with that of other Parts
of the World.

By Asa Gray and Joseph D. Hooker.

I.
THE VEGETATION OF THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN REGION.

The vegetation of the wide central tract which lies between the At-
lantic United States and those which border on the Pacific is replete
with interest and importance, both scientific and economical. We are
to sketch its general features, as made known to us by personal obser-
vation, by the published observations of others, and by the botanical
studies to which we have been devoted. For doing this to much pur-
pose, it is necessary to compare or to contrast the vegetation of the dis-
trict in question with that of the more fertile regions on both sides, and
with a somewhat similar wide interior district in another part of the
northern temperate zone.

By “the Atlantic States,” as contradistinguished from those of the
Pacific, we here mean not only those which touch upon the Atlantic
Ocean, but also those which border the Mississippi River, on its western
as well as its eastern side; the great woodless plains being taken as
their western limit. The term “Rocky Mountain Region,” here used in
its widest sense, and in the lack of a better appellation, we propose to
apply in general in such wise as to include the gradually elevated pla-
teau which flanks the eastern base of the Rocky Mountains on the one
hand, and the equally elevated district or plateau, thickly traversed by
mountain ranges, which extends westward to the eastern base of the
Sierra Nevada of California, and the Cascade Mountains further north.
As to the Rocky Mountains themselves, it is most convenient and nat-
ural, from our point of view, to comprise under this general designation
all the ranges as far west as the Wahsatch inclusive.

We understand the term Cordilleras, brought into use by Professor

1GB

2 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVRKY. | Vol VI.

Whitney, to be a comprehensive appellation for the whole system of
mountains, from the most eastern Rocky Mountains to the Sierra Nevada
inclusive, and the continuation of the latter in the Cascade Mountains
of Oregon and British Columbia. The region which we are to treat
botanically might take the name of the Cordilleran Region of North
America. But it will, on several accounts, be better to adhere in this
essay to the designation used in our title. For, although the term ‘“cor-
dilleras” would be the only appropriate one if we had the whole vast
mountain system in view, from Patagonia to the Arctic sea-coast, it 1s a
term which belongs primarily and mainly to South America, and our
survey is to embrace only a few parallels of latitude, in fact just those
which contain the ranges which early took the name of the Rocky Mount-
ains, both at the north, where they were traversed by Lewis and Clarke
at the beginning of this century (1803-1806), and at the south, where
they were reached on the frontiers of New Mexico by Pike a year or two
later.

With these Rocky Mountains proper, 7. e. the eastern and dominating
ranges, as the central line of our field of view, the horizon should extend
eastward to where the gradually subsiding plain becomes green with a
rich prairie vegetation, to be at length fringed with forest, and westward
to the base of the Sierra Nevada and the Cascades, the eastern verge of
the Pacific forest region.

In a developed treatise, the physical geography and the climatie ele-
ments of the region would have to pass under review, and the multi-
farious and scattered botanical data would have to be collected, dis-
cussed, and tabulated. We cannot undertake an exhaustive task like
this, nor could we add much to what has already been done in various well-
considered and well-known government reports. The climatology and
the practical considerations deducible from it form the subject of Major
Powell’s “ Report on the Lands of the Arid Region of the United
States,” the second edition of which was issued in 1879. In the “Gen-
eral Report” which forms the introduction to the botanical volume of
Clarence King’s celebrated “ Survey on the Fortieth Parallel” (and
which prefaces that elaborate systematic treatise which was too mod-
estly styled a “Catalogue,” and so has by some been cited as such),
Mr. Sereno Watson has thoroughly and ably discussed the elements of
the flora of the Great Basin, exemplifying it with lists and other details.
And for a district further south, Professor Rothrock, in his volume on
the Botany of Wheeler’s Surveys, has within the last year published
his instructive notes on the characteristic features of the botany of Colo-
rado, New Mexico, and a part of Arizona. Professor Sargent has given
a useful sketch of the arboreal and frutescent vegetation of Nevada in
the American Journal of Science for June, 1879; and among Professor
Hayden’s very important reports, that of Henry Gannett, “ On the Ara-
ble and Pasture Lands of Colorado” (1875, reprinted in 1878), is note-
worthy.

No.1.1 GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA. 3

Our sketch must be, like our observations, a rapid and cursory recon-
naissince, noting some features which arrested our attention, drawing
some comparisons, and suggesting inferences which seem to us probable.
The phytogeography of the temperate portion of the North American
continent, in broad outlines is evidently this: An Atlantic forest region;
a Pacific forest region; and, between the two, the wide interior, main]*
non-forest, region—the special subject of our essay; a region not easy to
name nor to describe succinctly, but of which the eastern half is a vast
woodless plain, gradually and evenly rising, so that its western margin
is about 5,000 feet above the sea-level; then a mountain belt, the high-
est ridges and peaks of which rise from 11,000 to 14,400 feet; then, shut
out from moisture by these mountains on the east and the Sierra on the
west, an arid interior district of plains, at an average of 5,000 feet
above the sea. This is mainly desert, and is traversed by many mount-
ain ranges, generally of north and south direction, and reaching an ele-
vation of 9,000 or 10,000 feet, or rarely higher. This whole interior, of
miles average breadth—like other great interiors not very exceptionally
favored—is marked by the scantiness or absence of arboreal vegetation
and of rainfall, the former being in great measure dependent on the lat-
ter. Its plains are treeless except along water-courses; the mountains
bear trees along sheltered ravines and on their higher slopes, upon
which there is considerable condensation of moisture; but, whenever
they rise to a certain height (about 11,000 feet in latitude 37° to 419),
they are woodless from cold and other hardship attending elevation,
although they enjoy an abundant condensation of moisture, mostly in
the form of snow.

The Rocky Mountain region may be therefore divided vertically into
three botanical districts:

1. An arid and woodless district, which oceupies far the greater part
of the area.

2. A wooded district, in some places covering, in others locally adorn-
ing, the mountain slopes.

3. An alpine unwooded district above the belt where trees exist. But
in some places, slopes woodless from dryness merge into tracts woodless
from cold, no proper forest belt intervening.

These three botanital districts may be separately investigated.

The smallest in area—since it is restricted to mountain summits and
the least peculiar, is—

I.—THE ALPINE REGION.

Botanically the alpine regions of the temperate zone in the northern
hemisphere are southward prolongations of arctic vegetation, almost
pure in the boreal parts, but more and more mixed with special types in
lower latitudes, these special types being a part of the flora which is
characteristic of each continent in those latitudes.

4 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [ Vol. VI-

Leaving out of view a considerable number of temperate species which
here and there become alpestrine or persist in dwarfed forms within some
truly alpine regions, the alpine flora of the United States does not

‘comprise a large number of species. It may be useful to present a tab-

ulated list of them, 7. ¢., of the phenogamous portion, under three heads,
placing the ampler Rocky Mountain alpine flora in the center and the
more restricted Atlantic and Pacific alpine floras one on each side.

It will be understood that the survey is limited to the United States
proper, reaching latitude 47° on the Atlantic and 49° 40’ on the Pacific
side, in all of which the proper alpine flora is confined to high altitudes,
from about 5,000 to over 14,000 feet above the sea-level. On the At-
lantic side it is only a matter of a few isolated summits in New England
and Northern New York, the Alleghanian or Apalachian chain and its'
dependencies not being high enough in New York and Pennsylvania,
and being in too low latitude notwithstanding their greater elevation in
the Carolinas, to have more than alpestrine vegetation, although a few
properly alpine species linger on the summits. On the Pacific side we
have to do only with the Sierra Nevada and its northern prolongation ;
and there, too, we make latitude 47° the northern limit, because north
of that parallel, we cannot at present well determine the limit between.
what belongs to the Rocky Mountains and what to the continuation of
the Cascade Mountains.

The species which are not arctic are distinguished by italic type;
when the genera are peculiar to the region, the generic name is printed.
in small capitals. ‘To save space in the columns, the names are printed
without reference to authorship.

The left-hand column is so insignificant, that it might have been
omitted. We cannot amplify it by adding alpine plants from farther
north, such as the stragglers about the Gulf of Saint Lawrence and the
Labrador flora, for these are found nearly at the sea-level and are ex-
tensions of the proper arctic flora.

Atlantic United States Alpine. Rocky Monntain Alpine. Pacific United States Alpine.

Thalictrum alpinum.

Anemone narcissifiora. Anemone narcissiflora.
Anemone occidentalis (A. Baldensis
Hook).
Ranunculus Hschscholtzii. Ranunculus Eschscholiziz.
Ranunculus pygmeaus. Ranunculus pygmeus.

Ranunculus adoneus.
Ranunculus Macauleyi.
Ranunculus oxynotus.

Papaver alpinum (nudicaule). Papaver alpinum (nudicaule).

Parrya macrocarpa. Parrya macrocarpa.
Cardamine bellidifolia. Cardamine bellidifolia. Cardamine bellidifolia.

Draba aurea. Draba aurea.

Draba alpina. Draba alpina.

Draba hirta or arctica.

Draba crassifolia. Draba crassifolia.

Draba stellata or muricella. Draba stellata or muricella,

;Draba ventosa. Draba eurycarpa.

Draba Douglasii.
Draba 5.2

No. 1]

GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY, MOUNTAIN FLORA.

5

Atlantic United States Alpine.

Silene acaulis.

Arenaria Grenlandica.
Arenaria yerna or vars.

Astragalus alpinus.

Rubus Chamzmorus.
Dryas octopetala ?

Geum radiatum, Peckiv.
Potentilla frigida.

Sibbaldia procumbens.

Saxifraga rivularis.

Saxifraga stellaris.

‘Saxifraga oppositifolia.
Sedum Rhodiola.

Solidago humilis, var. alpina.

(Greenland.)

-Gnaphalium supinum.

Rocky Mountain Alpine.

Smelowskia calycina.
Thlaspi alpestre.
Lychnis (Melandrium) Kingii.

Silene acaulis.
Cerastium alpinum.

Avenaria verna or vars.
Avenaria Rossii.

Arenaria biflora.

Arenaria arctica.

Sagina nivalis.

Claytonia arctica, megarrhiza.
Calandrinia pyymeen.
Lrifolium nanwn.

Trifolium andinum.
Trifolium dasyphyllum.
Trifolium Parryi.
Astragalus calycosus.
Astragalus alpinus.
Oxytropis podocarpa.
Oxytropis Uralensis, arctica.
Oxytropis nana.

Oxytropis multiceps.

Rubus Chamzmorus.
Rubus arcticus.

Dryas octopetala and var.
Geum Rossii.

Potentilla frigida?

Potentilla diversifolia.
Potentilla nivea.

IvESIA Gordont.

Sibbaldia procumbens.
Saxifraga adscendens.
Saxifraga Jamesii.
Saxifraga rivularis.
Saxifraga debilis.
Saxifraga cernua.
Saxifraga Hireulus.
Saxifraga chrysantha.

Saxifraga stellaris.

Saxifraga punctata.
Saxifraga Dahurica.
Saxifraga nivalis.
Saxifraga czespitosa.
Saxifraga bronchialis.
Saxifraga tricuspidata.
Saxifraga flagellaris.
Saxifraga oppositifolia.
Chrysosplenium alternifolium.
Sedum Rhodiola.
Sedum rhodanthum.
Epilobium latifolium.

CYMOPTELUS alpinus.
CYMOPTERUS nivalis.

APLOPAPPUS pygmeus.
APLOPAPPUS Lyallit.
Solidago humilis, var. alpina.

| TOWNSENDIA condensata.

TOWNSENDIA Rothrockii.
Aster andinus.
Aster alpinus.

Erigeron uniflorum.
Brigeron grandifiorum.
Drigeron ursinum.
Brigeron radicatum.
Antennaria alpina.

ACTINELLA grandiflora.
ACTINELLA Brandegei.
Hurska algida.
HAUrsrA nana.

Pacific United States “Alpine,

ttl ore

Smelowskia calycina.
Thlaspi alpestre.

Lychnis (Mel.) Oalifornica.
Silene acaulis.
Cerastium alpinum.

Arenaria verna or vars.

Arenaria biflora.
Avenaria arctica.

Calandrinia pygmed.

Astragalus alpinus.

Briogynia pectinata,

Rubus arcticus.
Dryas octopetala.

Potentilla gelida.
Potentilla Breweri.
Potentilla diversifolia.

Potentilla villosa.
IVESIA Gordoni.
Ivresia Muirii.
Sibbaldia procumbéns.

Saxifraga rivularis.

Saxifraga cernua.

Saxifraga Tolmier.
Saxifraga stellaris..
Saxifraga bryophora.
Saxifraga punctata.
Saxifraga Dahurica.
Saxifraga nivalis.
Saxifraga czespitosa.
Saxifraga bronchialis.
Saxifraga flagellaris.
Saxifraga oppositifolia.
Chrysosplenium alternifolium.
Sedum Rhodiola.

Epilobium latifolium.
Epilobium obcordatum.

CYMOPTERUS cinerascens.
CYMOPTERUS Nevadensis.

Aplopaoppus Lyallit.

Brigeron compositum.
Erigeron uniflorum.

Brigeron ursinum.

Antennaria alpina.

aa

6

BULLETIN UNITED

Atlantic United States Alpine.

Artemisia borealis, L. Sup.

NABALUS nanus.
NaBALUS Booitit.

Vaccinium cespitosum.

Arctostaphylos alpina.
Cassiope hypnoides.

Bryanthus taxifolius.
Rbododendron Lapponicum.

Loiseleuria procumbens.
Diapensia Lapponica.

Veronica alpina.
Castilleia pallida, var sept.

Euphrasia officinalis (gracilis).

Oxyria digyna.

Polygonum viviparum.

Salix herbacea.
Salix Uva-Ursi?
Empetrum nigrum.
Habenaria obtusata.

wuzula spicata.
zuzula arcuata.

STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.
Rocky Mountain Alpine. | Pacific United States Alpine.

Artemisia borealis.
Artemisia scopulorum.
Artemisia arctica.
Senecio Fremontt.
Senecio anuplectens.
Senecio Soldanella.
Crepis nana.
Hieracium triste.

Taraxacum levigatum.
Campanula uniflora.

Vaccinium cespitosum.
Arctostaphylos alpina.

Cassiope tetragona.
Cassiope Mertensiana.

Bryanthus empetriformis.

Bryanithus glanduliflorus.
Rhododendron Lapponicum.

Primula angustifolia.
Primula Parryit.

Douglasia nivalis.
Douglasia montana.
Androsace Chamejasme.
Gentiana barbellata.
Gentiana tenella.
Gentiana propingua.
Gentiana arctophila.
Gentiana prostrata.
Gentiana glauca.
Gentiana frigida.

Gentiana Parryt.

Phlox bryoides.

Phlox muscoides.

Phlox ccespitosa.

Giuia Brandeget.
Polemonium confertum.
Polemonium viscosum.
.Polemonium humile.
Hritrichium nanum.
Mertensia alpina.
‘CHIONOPHILA Jamesit.

SYNTHYRIS alpina.

Veronica alpina.

Castilleia pallida, var. sept.

Castelleta breviflora.
~Huphrasia officinalis (gracilis).
| Pedicularis Grenlandica.
Pedicularis Parryi.

Pedicularis scopulorum.
Pedicularis flammea.
Paronychia pulvinata.
Hriogonum undrosaceum.

Briogonwm Kingit.
Koenigia Islandica.
Oxyria digyna.

Polygonum viviparum.
Polygonum minimum.
Salix arctica, var.
Salix reticulata.

Salia phlelophylla.

Habenaria obtusata.
.Tofieldia palustris.
‘Tofieldia coccinea.
Lloydia sentina.
Luzula spicata.
Luzula arcuata.

Artemisia arctica.
Senecio Fremonti.

Crepis nana.
Hieracium triste.

Vaccinium cespitosum.

Cassiope tetragona.
Cassiope Mertensiana.
Cassiope lycopodiotdes.
Bryanthus Brewer.
Bryanthus empetriformis.

| Bryanthus glandulijfiorus.

Primula angustifolia.

Primula suffrutescens.

Androsace Chamejasme,

Gentiana Newberryt.

| Phlox ceespitosa.

Polemonium confertum.

Polemonium humile.
Eritrichium nanum.

Veronica alpina.
Castilleia pallida, var.

| Pedicularis Grenlandica.

| Pedicularis ornithorrhyncha.

| Briogonum incanum.
| Briogonum Lobbit.

Briogonum pyrolefolium.

Oxyvia digyna.
Polygonum Shastense. —
Polygonum viviparum.

Salix arctica, var.
Salix reticulata.
Salix phlelophylla.

Lloydia sentina.
Luzula spicata.
Luzula areuata.

[ Vol. VI.

No.1.) GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA, 7

Atlantic United States Alpine. Rocky Mountain Alpine. Pacific United States Alpine.

Juncus trifidus.
Juncus triglumis.
Juncus biglumis.

Juncus Parryt. 4 Juncus Parryt.
Juncus Drummond. Juncus Drummondii.
Juncus castaneus. Juncus castaneus.

det Actua Juneus chlorocephalus.
Kobresia scirpina.
Kobresia caricina.

Carex Pyrenaica. Carex Pyrenaica.
Ret Carex nigricans. Carex nigricans.
Carex scirpoidea. Carex scirpoidea. Carex scirpoidea.

Carex obtusata.
Carex Lyoni.
Carex capitata. Carex ecapitata.
Carex Breweri.
Carex incurva.
Carex atrata. Carex atrata. Carex atrata.
Carex alpina. Carex alpina.
Carex fuliginosa.
Carex frigida.

Carex feetida. Carex fotida,

Carex lagopina. Carex lagopina.
Carex rigida. Carex rigida.
Carex rariflora. Carex rariflora.

Carex podocarpa. Carex podocarpa.
Carex capillaris. Carex capillaris.

Carex filifolia. Carex filifolia.

Carex concinna.
Carex luzulefolia.
Alopecurus alpinus.
Phleum alpinum. Phleum alpinum. Phleum alpinum.
| Agrostis rubra, etc.
Calamagrostis Pickeringit. |

Hierochloa alpina. Hierochloa alpina.
Trisetum subspicatum. Trisetum subspicatum. Trisetum subspicatum.
Aiva atropurpurea.
Poa laxa. | Poa laxa.
Poa arctica.
Poa alpina. Poa alpina. Poa alpina. .
| Festuca brevifolia or rubra. Festuca brevifolia or rubra.
52 sp. 184 sp. 111 sp.

The analysis of this alpine flora need not detain us. The botanist sees
at a glance that it is the arctic flora, or rather prolongations of it, ex-
tended southward aiong the mountains of sufficient elevation, with cer-
tain admixtures of types pertaining to the vegetation of the regions.

The peculiar elements in the scanty alpine flora of the Eastern United
States are only five species, viz: One grass of arctic affinity, Calamagrostis
Pickeringti ; an orchid, Habenaria obtusata ; a Geum, which has its princi-
pal home on the subalpine summits of the Alleghanies farther south,
and is nearly represented by a species on the Northern Pacific coast;
and two species of Nabalus, which will be allowed to be altered states of
species peculiar to North America and nearly peculiar to the Atlantic
side.

The Pacific alpine flora has a higher proportional number of non-arctic
species, as must needs be, considering its long stretch through so many
parallels of latitude; but the number pertaining to non-arctic genera is
small. They are—

Calandrinia pygmea. Cymopterus, 2 species.
EBriogynia pectinata. Aplopappus Lyallii.
Ivesia, 2 species. Eriogonum, 3 species.

All of them are of genera peculiar to America. Besides these, only
38 species are peculiar to America, and between a third and a quarter

8 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VI.

of these are known to extend to Arctic America. Of the whole 111
species about 50 are not known in Europe and Asia in identical species.
The list of Rocky Mountain alpine species reaches the number of 184.
Those of the Sierra in California, and northward up to the British
boundary, to 111.
Those of the mountains in the northeastern part of the Atlantic States

_. (the Alleghanies, though reaching a greater altitude, are not high enough

for the latitude to have any alpine vegetation, though they verge on it)
are only 52.

The comparative meagerness of this last list is not surprising when
we consider how very restricted the alpine area altogether is in Maine,
New Hampshire (which has most of it), and the northeastern corner of
New York. And we have not taken into account the arctic-alpine spe-
cies which descend to the sea-level on the shores of the Gulf of Saint
Lawrence, nor the few which occur on the bleak northern shore of Lake
Superior. The latter, as some one has well suggested, owe their exist-
ence or continuance there neither to the absolute elevation nor to the
latitude, but to the moist bleakness of a wind-swept coast, which gives
them congenial summer conditions, on ground which forest cannot stand
upon, Owing to the severe exposure. Yet this forest resumes its sway
northward, as soon as some shelter is given.

The Pacific alpine region, notwithstanding its long stretch along the
mountain tops of a continuous but narrow north and south range, is
also a restricted one. In California only the very culminations of the
Sierra Nevada can be said to be alpine, and they are too arid in summer
for the development of a true alpine flora. In Oregon and Washing-
ton Territory there is equal height under more northern parallels of
latitude, abiding snow, and summer rain. The botany of these heights
is far from well known. Probably all the arctic species of the Rocky
Mountain column also belong there, and a fair share of exclusive
species.

It is difficult to say what are or are not alpine species in the Sierra.
Nevada, especially southward, where, notwithstanding the heavy winter
fall of snow, the higher elevations are unwooded from dryness as much
as from cold. But, as we have excluded species which show themselves
to be at home at lower altitudes, and have included all arctic-alpine
types, the number of questionable character is very small.

Nor, except that we know their ranges and aptitudes better, is there
much less difficulty in drawing a line between truly alpine and alpes-
trine species in the other regions. There are a goodly number of spe-
cies which are normal to low altitudes or to the sea-level in the northern
temperate zone, such as Campanula rotundifolia, Taraxacum Dens-leonis,
Androsace septentrionalis, Eriophorum alpinum, polystachyon, &e., and
Festuca ovina, which also flourish in an alpine station. And, indeed,
these same species, and others like them (such as Hrigeron compositum,
which flourishes at the base as well as on the highest summits of the
Rocky Mountains, and also in Greenland), make a part of the extreme

No.1.) GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA. 2

arctic flora. Any list will therefore be to some extent arbitrary. For
example, in the Atlantic alpine list, while Cardamine bellidifolia, Silene
acaulis, Sibbaldia procumbens, Gnaphalium supinum, Rhododendron Lappo-
nicum, Diapensia Lapponica, and the like, are strictly and exclusively
alpine, Arenaria Grenlandica and Geum radiatum (Peckii) are included
for reasons which any botanist who has ascended these mountains will
appreciate, although a form of the Arenaria sparingly oceurs at low
levels in Southern New England and New York, and both on the tops
of the higher Alleghanies, where no characteristically alpine species
accompany them, and where such summits as are bare of trees are not
woodless on account of cold or any other incident of mere elevation.

Notwithstanding the geographical extent of the country over which it
is spread, the North American alpine flora is meagre in species com-
pared with that of Europe. This will abundantly appear in the com-
parison to be made in another part of this report. Reasons connected
with geographical configuration and climate will account for this, but it
must also be remembered that the botany of the European Alps is
thoroughly known; that of the Broeey and other western mountains
quite imperfectly 5h

Ii.—TuHE ForREST REGION.
1. Its trees.

The most conspicuous portion of the vegetation of a country, and the
most important under more than one point of view, is its trees. Their
importance is most manifest in the district under consideration, where
less than a quarter of the area is capable of producing them, and of
which, owing to fires and other causes, only about half of what Major
Powell designates as “ timber regions” are actually covered with forest.
Toward the north the case is more or less altered, especially in British
America, where, in a wide tract with moderately abundant and well
distributed rainfall, and summers not excessively warm, the Atlantic
and Pacific forests join and intermingle. Southward, and indeed nearly
up to the northern boundary of the United States, trees are borne only
on the mountains and high plateaux, and along the immediate banks of
streams descending from these.

The species of the whole Rocky Mountain region (taken in the widest
extent) which may claim the name of trees—even of tree-like shrubs—
are not long to enumerate.* They are these:

Sapindus marginatus, Willd. Morus microphylla, Buckley.
Acer grandidentatum, Nutt. Populus angustifolia, James.
Negundo aceroides, Moench. ale balsam ile L.

*We are much ataedsi in ree Seboeenn by Prof. C. ‘Ss. Sargent’s Edaeioua on 1 The Forests
of Central Nevada, in Amer. Journ. Sci., ser. 3, xvii, June, 1879, and by his Catalogue
of the Forest Trees of North America, 1880, printed by the United States Census
Bureau.

10

Olneya Tesota, Gray.
Parkinsonia Torreyana, Watson.
Prosopis juliflora, DC.

Prosopis pubescens, Benth.
Acacia Greggit, Gray.

Prunus Pennsylvanica, lL. *
Cercocarpus ledifolius, Nutt.
Pyrus sambucifolia, Cham. & Schl.
Orateegus—near rivularis, Nutt.
Amelanchier alnifolia, Nutt.
Cereus giganteus, Engelm.
Sambucus glauca, Nutt.
Arbutus Menziesvi, Pursh, var.
Fraxinus anomala, Torr.
Fraxinus pistacicfolia, Torr.
Fraxinus viridis, Michx., f.
Chilopsis saligna, Don.
Platanus Wrightii, Watson.
Juglans Californica, Watson.
Juglans rupestris, Engelm.
Quercus Emoryt, Torr.

Quercus hypoleuca, Kngelm.
Quercus undulata, Torr.

Betula occidentalis, Hook.

BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

[ Vol. Vi,

Populus Fremontii, Watson.

Populus monilifera, Ait.

Populus tremuloides, Michx.

Populus trichocarpa, Torr. & Gray.

Juniperus occidentalis, Hook.

Juniperus Californica, Carr.

Juniperus Virginiana, L.

Juniperus pachyphlea, Torr.

Abies concolor, Lindl.

Abies subalpina, Engelm.

Pseudotsuga Douglasti, Carr.

Picea Engelmanni, Engeln.

Picea pungens, Engelm.

Larix oecidentalis, Nutt.

Pinus edulis, Engeln.

Pinus flexilis, James.

Pinus aristata, Engelm.

Pinus Chihuahuana, Engelm.

Pinus contorta, var. Murrayana, Eng.

Pinus monophylla, Torr.

Pinus ponderosa, Dougl., var. scopu-
lorum, Engelm.

Pinus Arizonica, Kugelm.

Yucea brevifolia, Kngelm.

This mere botanical enumeration of about fifty species of trees, or at
least arborescent plants, gives no proper idea ot the arboreal flora as it
presents itself to the view of a botanical traveler. It includes all the
trees we know to inhabit any part of a vast tract, extending from the
eastern base of the Rocky Mountains to the eastern base of the Sierra
Nevada and Cascade ranges, and from the Mexican boundary, in lati-
tude 32°, to the northern limit of forest, in about latitude 56°. The
characters of the flora at the two extremes are most widely different,
There is a far greater development of forest in the northern part, but it
consists of the fewest species; and to the southern portion an undue
appearance of richness is given toa very scanty sylva—first, by the enu-
meration of so many species which are only arbuscule in their best
estate, and are commonly mere shrubs; second, by including species
which belong only or mainly to the Mexican frontier region—to the south-
ern part of Arizona and New Mexico.

Of the latter sort are Yucca brevifolia, the only monocotyledonous arbo-
rescent species (tree it cannot well be called); the giant Cactus, Cereus
giganteus, of the Lower Giladistrict; Pinus Chihuahuana and P. Arizonica,
which barely cross the Mexican line; Sapindus marginatus, Arbutus
Menziesti, or what seems to be a mere geographical variety of the
Californian Madroia, which is not uncommon in Mexico, and which
reaches Southwestern Texas; Fraxinus anomala and F. pistaciefotia,

No.1.) GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA, lf

Platanus Wrightii, &c., Quercus Emoryi and Q. hypoleuca, &c. Along.
with these, as equally foreign to the timber region of the Rocky Mount-
ains and the accessory ranges, we should eliminate and place by them-
selves those trees which are characteristic of the southern arid plains,
rather than of the mountains. A few of these come into Utah and
Nevada, but they mostly belong to Arizona, and to a district, which,
with all its aridity, receives a portion of the subtropical summer rainfall.
To this category belong—

Olneya Tesota, a peculiar genus of papilionaceous Leguminosae.

Parkinsonia Torreyana, the Palo Verde (Cercidium of authors).

Prosopis juliflora, the true Mesquite, and P. pubescens, the Screw Bean
or Screw-pod Mesquite, the pods and seeds of which furnish food and
forage, the bark a kind of gum-arabic, and the wood good fuel.

Acacia Greggii, the only one which in this district becomes abores-
cent.

Chilopsis saligna, the Desert Willow, fringing water-courses in the
arid district.

Morus microphylla, a Texas Mulberry which extends along the south-
ern part of New Mexico and Arizona.

It might be expected that a fair number of trees represented in the
moister and cooler district of the Northern Rocky Mountains would dis-
appear from the scantier, interrupted or scattered or restricted woods of
the southern mountains; but we miss from them only one of the north-
ern trees above enumerated, namely, the Larch of the region, Larix
occidentalis, while we miss from the northern mountains no small number
of those in the southern.

This is not the place to institute a comparison between the Rocky
Mountain forest and the eastern; but it may be remarked that, while
angiospermous, round-headed, and deciduous-leaved trees prevail in the
latter, largely in the number of species and genera and conspicuously
in the extent of surface occupied, the Rocky Mountain sylva, in its char-
acteristic features, is gymnospermous, spiry, and evergreen. In the
importance cf its useful products, such as lumber, the difference between
the two sorts, as a whole, in the Atlantic forest cannot be great. But
with perhaps only one exception, that of the so-called Mountain Ma-
hogany, Cercocarpus ledifolius (a small tree or more commonly a shrub),
the economical value of the Rocky Mountain forest is almost wholly in
its coniferous trees, and in the mountains these alone strike the eye.

Disregarding unesseutial and inconspicuous features, and eliminating
those outlying small trees of the Mexican border, we may say that the
Rocky Mountain forest is composed of the following species, which are
arranged somewhat in the order of their conspicuousness and impor-
tance :

_ Pinus ponderosa, called Yellow Pine, and sometimes Long-leaved Pine,
which distinguishes it well from the next. It is acomposite species, and
the form of it which we are concerned with, and to which Engelmann

12 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. _ [Tol-VI.

assigns the name of scopulorum (7. e., the Rocky Mountain variety), is
the one to which the term “long-leaved” least applies. It is one of the
largest trees of the proper Rocky Mountains, along which it ranges from
latitude 51°, according to Dr. G. M. Dawson, to New Mexico, is rare on
any of the ranges which traverse the Nevada desert, and takes its fullest
development and predominance in California and Oregon, extending also
into the central dry region of British Columbia. It becomes a large
tree even on the interior mountains, in the southern part mostly on slopes
between 7,000 and 9,000 feet above the level of the sea, in the most
northern ceasing at three to four thousand. Its heavy and coarse-
grained lumber is suitable for the ruder building and the mining pur-
poses to which it is devoted.

Pinus contorta, singularly called Tamarack in California, but in British
Columbia Bull or Black Pine, and in Utah Red Pine, is also a rather °
composite species, one of equally great geographical range, but in higher
altitudes and latitude than the preceding. It replaces it on the mount-
ains of Colorado at between eight or nine and ten or eleven thousand
feet; is naturally absent from the Nevada and most of the Utah ranges;
in British Columbia, according to young Dr. Dawson, ‘it is the charac-
teristic tree over the northern part of the interior plateau, and densely
covers great areas. In the southern part of the province it is found only
on those parts of the plateau which rise above about 3,500 feet, where
the rainfall becomes too great for the healthy growth of P. ponderosa.
It grows also abundantly on sandy beaches and river flats at less ele-
vations.” Loving moisture and coolness, it is also a coast species even
as far south as Mendocino County, California, whence it extends to the
Yukon River, in latitude 63°. Northeastward it gets beyond the Rocky
Mountains, in latitude 56°, and is replaced by the Banksian Pine “ at
the watershed between the Athabasca and Saskatchewan.” The wood
is white and light (so that the tree is sometimes called Spruce or White
Pine), but fairly durable; but the tree never attains a great girth. In
Loudon’s Encyclopedia of Trees and Shrubs, where this species is first
published on Douglas’s specimens, it is named in English “ The Twisted-
branched Pine.” Douglasis thought to have given the name in refer-
ence to the dead and denudated slender lower branches, which persist
for a long while and curve downward and inward, but do not twist; at
least this is the habit of the tree in the mountains. The trunk is per-
fectly straight.

Pinus aristata of Engelmann, the only form in our region of the earlier-
named P. Balfouriana of California (from which it differs only in the
armed tip of the cone-scales), is well called Fox-tail Pine from the ap-
pearance of the leafy branches, on which the closely set leaves persist
for a dozen years. It belongs only to high mountains and to latitudes
north of the forty-first parallel, and is nowhere found out of the drier
districts and their immediate borders. It is a small tree, of only botan-
ical interest except in the mountains of Nevada, in the southern part of

No.1] GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA. 13

which it abounds at the elevation of 7,500 or 8,000 feet, or rather once
abounded, for, as Professor Sargent states, the trees within reach are
fast being cut away to supply the mines with timbering. For this pur-
pose its strong and close-grained, tough, and reddish wood is preferred
to that of any other available tree.

Pinus monophylla, the single-leaved Nut Pine, is a most characteristic
_ tree of the interior basin, mainly of the western and southern part of it,
which it only slightly overpasses in Arizona and Southeastern Califor-
nia. It is a tree of slow growth, and of only ten to twenty feetin height,
yet with trunk sometimes two feet in diameter, and with white and soft
resinous wood, furnishing valuable fuel, and in this region of narrow
choice it is much used for making charcoal. The great importance of
the tree was, and still is, in the crop of large and delicately flavored
seeds which it yields, constituting a staple article of food for the Indians
of the Great Basin.

Pinus edulis, the Pifion or Nut Pine of the Southeastern Rocky
Mountains, extends from the Arkansas to New Mexico and Arizona, a
tree not larger than the foregoing, also has its importance in its edible
seeds, and in the value of its wood for fuel.

Pinus flexilis, the White Pine of the Rocky Mountains, and belonging
to the same general section as the Atlantic White Pine, but peculiar in
its thick cones and good-sized edible seed, inhabits the higher region of
the Rocky Mountains from Montana to New Mexico and the higher
Nevada ranges. What is considered as a short-coned variety of it (albi-
caulis) is the highest tree, commonly reduced to a shrub, on and around
alpine summits of the Sierra Nevada throughout allits length, and even
northward in the Cascade Ranges to latitude 53°, in British Columbia.
In the Rocky Mountain region this tree becomes large enough to be
sawn into boards; and its ight and soft wood is the best substitute for
the Eastern white-pine lumber.

Pseudotsuga Douglasii, the Douglas Spruce, the most valuable timber
tree of the west coast (with the possible éxception of the Redwood), is
hardly one of the second rank in such of the interior districts as it in-
habits. But it is apparantly absent from all the ranges west of the
Uintas and south of the forty-second parallel until the western slope of
the Sierra Nevada is reached, and is not very abundant in those of Col-
orado and New Mexico. It extends along the northern Rocky Mount-
ains almost to latitude 54°, and a stunted variety descends on its east-
ern flanks. It is found scattered among other Conifer at middle ele-
vations. But from Oregon to British Columbia, toward the coast and
jn the river valleys, this noble tree forms entire and vast forests, and
takes a development in size and in numbers which is truly extraordi-
nary. A large-fruited variety (macrocarpa) occurs at the southern ex-
tremity of the Sierra Nevada at no great elevation, and extends even
into Mexico.

Picea Engelmanni (Abies Engelmanni of Parry, the discoverer), the

14 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VI.

Spruce of the higher Rocky Mountains, is an important and good-sized
timber-tree. It forms the principal part of the forest in Colorado
between 8,500 and 11,000 feet, and at the upper tree-line is dwarfed to
a Shrub, accompanying Pinus contorta, but growing also at higher ele-
vations. It is the representative of the Atlantic Spruces, in aspect and
in the character of the lumber resembling Black Spruce, while the cones
are just intermediate between those of the White Spruce and of the fol-
lowing. Distinct as they are on the whole in character and in station,
it does seem as if these ran together in a series of specimens; while, on
the other hand, on its northeastern limits, between the Peace River
plateau and the Athabasca, east of the Rocky Mountains, in latitude 549
and 55°, P. Engelmanni seems to pass into P. alba. This species extends
southward into Arizona, westward somewhat into the higher mount-
ains of Nevada, and northwestward into the interior plateau of British
Columbia. It should there be studied in its relations to P. Sitchensis of
the northwest coast, the original Abies Menziesii.

Picea pungens, as Dr. Engelmann now calls it, the “Abies Menzies”
of Colorado, to the Rocky Mountains of which it is nearly confined,
belongs to an elevational range just beneath that of P. Hngelmanni,
being sparsely associated with Pinus ponderosa, while the latter attends
(and generally dominates) P. conterta, both, however, affecting moister
soil, as is the habit of the Spruces. The timber of the two is probably
not unlike. The rigid and prickly-pointed leaves render the name of
P. pungens appropriate. This species takes kindly to cultivation both
in England and in the Northern Atlantic States. A portion of the
young trees display a very glaucous foliage, and are much admired.

Abies concolor, the more southern of the two Firs of the Rocky Mount-
ains, accompanies Picea Hngelmanni and Pinus contorta in the southern
part of Colorado, and extends to New Mexico, where Fendler collected
the specimens originally named. It passes westward in the mountains
of Southern Utah and Arizona, and thence extends, according to Engel-
mann’s identification, into and through the whole length of the Sierra
Nevada, from 8,000 down to 3,000 or 4,000 feet of elevation, there
becoming a pretty large tree. Its soft wood, like that of the eastern
Balsam Firs, is of little account. The same is to be said of—

Abies subalpina, the more southern Rocky Mountain Fir, with smaller
cones, Which most resembles the eastern A. balsamea. This, from Cen-
tral Colorado and from towards the upper forest limit, extends north-
ward to British Columbia, and northeastward to beyond the mountains
(where it may meet and even pass into the Balsam Fir), and northwest-
ward perhaps almost to the Pacific coast. Inthe United States at least,
it nowhere constitutes any important portion of the forest.

Larix occidentalis, the Western Larch, belongs only to the northern
part of the Rocky Mountain forest region, and to the moister portion of
this. Even there it seems to be an unimportant tree.

Juniperus Virginiana, the Red Cedar and Savin, is a tree of great

No.1.) GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA, 15

range, as 1{ extends from the Gulf of Saint Lawrence to that of Mexico,
and northwestward into British Columbia, while soufawestward it
reaches Utah. In the Northern Rocky Mountains it is associated with
«J. savina; in the Southern with the following species. Invaluable as
its wood is, the tree is not large or abundant enough in the region under
consideration to be of much account.

Juniperus occidentalis and J. Californica, the Western Red Cedars,
have also a great range, a dubious variety of the former (too near a
Mexican species) being the Cedar of Western Texas. The two in their
various forms are very striking and characteristic trees of the dry inte-
rior region. Like the eastern species, they are sometimes mere shrubs,
sometimes large but low trees.

Juniperus pachyphlea, named for its very thick bark, which is likened
to that of a Pine or of White Oak, takes the place of these species in
Western New Mexico and adjacent parts of Arizona.

These are the trees of which the forest is composed, and which are
the sole reliance for construction and fuel. Of their value to the
country, of the importance to the country of their preservation, of the

sad inroads that are made upon them by fires, and of their rapid con-
sumption by the inhabitants, especially in mining, it is superfluous here
to discourse.

The few angiospermous trees are of quite inferior importance, and the
following are the only considerable ones:

Cercocarpus ledifolius, called Mountain Mahogany, is peculiar to the
mountains of the Great Basin and of its borders. Itis commonly a mere
shrub, but at between 6,000 and 8,000 feet on the mountain sides it forms
a small tree of 20 to 40 feet in height and a trunk which has in some
eases reached the girth of 7 feet at base. The wood ‘is of a bright
mahogany color, and susceptible of a beautiful polish, is exceedingly
hard, heavy, and close grained, but very brittle, and so liable to heart-
shake and difficult to work as to be useless in the arts. It is, however,
sometimes employed for the bearings of machinery, where it is found to
wear as well as metal.” “It is,” continues Professor Sargent, from
whom these extracts are taken, “probably the only North American
wood which is heavier than water,” its specific gravity being deter-
mined by him to be 1.117 and its rate of growth so slow that “ an exam-
ination of several specimens from one to two hundred years old shows
an annual increase of wood only one-sixtieth of an inch in thickness.”

Negundo aceroides, the Ash-leaved Maple, is found in valleys along
water-courses in the southern part of the Rocky Mountains, and as far
west as the Wahsatch, and‘south to New Mexico and Arizona, while in
California it is represented by a closely allied species. Its eastern ex-
tension is to Canada and the borders of New England. Sugar is some-
times made from its sap.

More important and conspicuous are the Poplars, which, growing
wherever there is running water traversing even very arid districts,

16 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [ Vol. VI.

form a feature where streams issue from the mountains, and are the
principal available shade-trees in places artificially irrigated, while their
soft white wood is of some account in the absence of better. The Pop-
lars of this kind, or the Cottonwoods of the region, are: .

Populus monilifera, the Eastern Cottonwood, which reaches the eastern
slope of the Rocky Mountains, but probably does not cross them.

Populus Fremonti, a Californian species, a doubtful variety of which
(or perhaps P. Mexicana) is the prevalent Cottonwood of the southern.
part of the interior district.

Populus trichocarpa, a kind of Balsam Poplar, which ranges from:
British Columbia to Southern California, and reaches Western Nevada..

Populus balsamifera and its broad-leaved variety, candicans, North-
eastern Poplars, which reach and more or less cross the Rocky Mount-
ains; and the related—

Populus angustifolia, the common Balsam Poplar of the middle part
of the whole region under consideration.

Populus tremuloides, the American Aspen, is perhaps the most widely
distributed of North American trees, and economically one of the most
insignificant, except that the soft wood is used of late for paper pulp,
and in Utah it is said to be employed in turnery and for floormg. It
ranges from the Arctic coast to all the cooler parts of the Atlantic States,
through the Rocky Mountains to New Mexico and Arizona, and on the
western side of the continent to the middle of California. It is always
a small tree, fond of moist bottoms and slopes, but on the higher mount-
ains southward it takes to the higher ridges, and forms thick copses
toward the upper limit of tree growth.

Betula occidentalis is a sparing but somewhat noteworthy element of
the Rocky Mountain forest along its northern border in British Columbia,
and is found down to Colorado and New Mexico, yet only as a shrub;
also along the Sierra Nevada, where, at its southern known limit, above
Owen’s Valley, and in a dry region bordering the Great Basin, “‘it is
reported to be abundant, and often the main reliance of the settlers for
timber for fencing and*other purposes.” (Bot. Calif., ii, 79.)

From the whole region Oaks are conspicuously absent as trees, though
Quercus undulata and the forms referred to it are prominent as shrubs
southward on the eastern slopes of the Colorado Rocky Mountains, and
around them into New Mexico and Arizona, and although one or two
Mexican types, such as Q. hypoleuca, @. Emoryi, and Q. reticulata, form
small trees in the southern portions of Arizona.

The shrubby vegetation might be taken into account in connection
with the forest growth. But in this regidén, where almost everything
that is perennial becomes more or less lignescent, and where a predom-
inant part of the vegetation of the woodless districts is suffruticose, the
herbs and shrubs may as well go together.

Without entering here into a comparison of the Rocky Mountain forest
with any other, it may be noted that the species are peculiar to the

No.1.) GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA. 17

region or the vicinity of it, with a few exceptions. Prunus Pennsylva-
nica, Populus balsamifera, monilifera, and tremuloides, may be said to
come in from the northeast, and only the last extends far into the dis-
trict. ‘She Negundo and Juniperus Virginiana, with Fraxinus viridis,
belong to the Atlantic forest region, and do not penetrate far, unless we
count the Californian Negundo as a derivative form. The connection with
Pacitic forest species is closer; and for the rest they are mainly Mexi-
can plateau types, of which the botanical district in question may be
regarded as a northern extension.

2. Characteristics of the herbaceous and shrubby vegetation of the Rovky
; Mountain forest region.

It was convenient and, indeed, needful to take the sylva of this region
into one view, extending from British Columbia to New Mexico and Ari-
zona, and from the Rocky Mountains to the western verge of the Great
Basin. But in its northern part the distinction between woodland and
woodless country is less marked, and the general botany is comparatively
homogeneous throughout the whole latitude, the Atlantic and Pacific for-
ests being there in fact confluent. Along the southern border, under
very different conditions and with little and sparse forest, there is an
analogous intermingling of the botanical elements, and the general
vegetation of these wide-apart extremes is very different. Our personal
observations were made on a middle and typical belt, on which the bot-

‘any of the central region under notice is most largely developed and
purely exhibited, and where Atlantic and Pacific botany are most widely
separated geographically. We shall do well, therefore, to restrict our
sketches to this central belt, comprising Colorado and the southern part
of Wyoming on thé east, Utah in the center, and Nevada at the west.

And when treating of the vegetation which is fostered by the forest,
there is, in fact, only the eastern half of the district to consider, 7. e., the
proper Rocky Mountains, the Wahsatch, and the Uintas, which connect
these two systems. Far westward, throughout the Great Basin proper,
there is not forest enough to impress any botanical character upon the
humbler growth, although wherever there is moisture there is a vegeta-
tion to correspond.

As has already been suggested, the timber region is more extensive
than the grounds actually bearing forest. The contraction of the latter
to its present limits is, no doubt, largely a consequence of forest fires
through a long course of years; but we suppose that it is also due to
an antecedent or accompanying stage of increasing desiccation of the
country—a stage which, however, had passed its crisis before our ac-
quaintance with the region began, the turn being testified to by the in-
crease in the height of the water in the Great Salt Lake during the last
thirty or forty years. We shall not strain the facts, in any case, it we
inelude in the botany of the forest region, not only the plants which are
now sheltered by forest, but those which extend either downward or

1G EB

18 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. | Vol. VI.

upward over ground which might well nourish the same kind of tree
growth. This is the vegetation of the mountains, as distinguished from
that of the high plains.

The peculiar shrubs of the Rocky Mountains (including the Wahsateh
Range and corresponding ranges farther north) are only Jamesia Ameri-
cana, a Hydrangeous genus of no near. affinity to any other, except
Fendlera, which (equally unique) belongs to a lower region in New
Mexico and Western Texas, Robinia Neo-Mexicana, which is an out-
lying species on the southeastern border, Quercus undulata, Rubus
deliciosus, Philadelphus microphyllus, Ceanothus Fendleri, and Berberis
Fendleri, the latter a species of the Vulgaris type... They are all south-
ern; the Northern Rocky Mountains have no characteristic shrub, as
they have no characteristic tree. The principal shrubs which they share
with the Pacific forest region are Acer glabrum, Prunus demissa, Rubus
Nutkanus, Spirea discolor, Ribes, 3 or 4 species, Symphoricarpus oreophilus
and rotundijolius, Ledum glandulosum, Salix Geyeriana, and, if we come
down to such low frutescent growth, Pachystima Myrsinites, and Berberis
repens.

Arctostaphylos pungens, a species of the Mexican plateau, which appears
to have taken a wonderful development and diversification in California,
of which it is the prevalent shrub, has reached the western portion of
the Rocky Mountain Region as high in latitude as the forty-first parallel,
and at an altitude which brings it among the forest shrubbery.

The shrubs which are common to this and to the Atlantic forests are
not numerous nor of sufficient interest to be specified. They are such
as Ampelopsis, Cornus stolonifera, and the like. The genus Shepherdia,
however, is somewhat noteworthy. S. argentea, the Buffalo Berry, which
seems most at home in the Northeastern Rocky Mountains, and which
extends much beyond them in the same direction, along with its rela-
tive Hlaagnus argentea, extends southward even to New Mexico, and
westward to the Sierra forming that rim of the Great Basin; and it is
accompanied by S. Canadensis, a characteristic shrub of the northern
border of the Atlantic forest. The third species of the genus is peculiar
to Southern Nevada.

Of the shrubs which traverse the continent and completely enter the
Pacific forest the following are the principal:

Rhus glabra. Betula glandulosa.

Rhus aromatica. Alnus incana ?

Neillia opulifolia. Corylus rostrata.

Pyrus sambucifolia. Juniperus communis.
Symphoricarpus racemosus. Juniperus sabina ?

Symphoricarpus occidentalis. Arctostaphylos Uva-Urst, if we con--
Lonicera involucrata. descend to one so low.

Sambucus racemosus (pubens).

The last three and the Sambucus are of the Old World, North Asiatic
as well as European. They are all of northern range, and are there

No.1.) GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA. 19

somewhat continuous across the continent, although extending well
southward along the mountains.

A full analysis of the herbaceous vegetation would run too far into
details. We can mention only the peculiar types and some of the genera
which are characteristically prominent.

The three genera (each of a single species) which are wholly restricted
to the Rocky Mountains are Chionophila, which is strictly alpine, and
has been already mentioned as such, and Leucampyx, an Anthemideous
Composita (both of southern habitat), and Orogenia, S. Watson, a little
Umbelliferous plant, with habit of Hrigenia, but too little known to
speak of.

Synthyris, a Scrophulariaceous genus of seven species, is a character-
istic but not quite a peculiar type, one of the seven species being of
more western habitat, and one on the eastern verge of the Atlantic
region.

Hesperochiron of S. Watson is a peculiar Hydrophyllaceous type, but
both species occur also in the Sierra Nevada.

Lewisia is a most characteristic and almost peculiar genus; but the
original species has been found even in California, and a second one oc-
eurs on the southwestern rim of the Great Basin.

Townsendia is a highly characteristic genus, but some species belong
to the alpine regions above and some to the dry plains below the forest
region, and a few have a more western range.

Sidalcea candida is a restricted species of a genus peculiar to our and
@ more western region.

Glycosma, Cynapium of Nuttall (now in Ligusticum), Camassia, Cory-
dalis Caseana, Parnassia fimbriata, Gaultheria Myrsinites, and the con-
siderable genera Wyethia and Helianthella, are in very similar case.

Calochortus is a most characteristic type of numerous species, some of
the Rocky Mountains, more of them Californian, and a few Mexican.

Adenocaulon bicolor (of a peculiar genus, which is also both Eastern
Asiatic and Chilian) is rather a western coast plant, which has traversed
the Rocky Mountains at the north, even to Lake Superior.

Frasera, a marked and wholly North American genus, has given one
species to the Atlantic forest, and shared two or three with the western
region.

But the characteristic features of the Rocky Mountain herbaceous
vegetation in the region specified, taken as a whole and in reference to
abundance both of forms and of individuals, are imparted by the follow-
ing genera, which have assumed their maximum development in and
west of these mountains, and are mainly if not quite peculiar to North
America.

Gilia, Collomia, Phlox, and Polemonium, of the order Polemoniacee.

Pentstemon, Castilleia, and Mimulus, of the order Scrophulariacee ; and
_ Pedicularis here takes its principal American development in the higher
regions.

20 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [| Vol. VY.

Phacelia in Hydrophyllacec, but most of the species are below the for-
est district and of westward range.

Eriogonum of Polygonacee, of which the same is to be said, although
a few species are conspicuous in the wooded region. .

Composite are very prominent, as they are throughout North America,
and the genus Aplopappus might be added to the foregoing; but the
most characteristic genera are not in the wooded region. ‘There, too,
the species of Solidago and of Aster are less numerous than at the Hast,
and Hrigeron is more prominent than Aster.

The number of species of Astragalus in the Rocky Mountain and more
western districts is inferior only to those of Asia, but they mostly affect.
the unwooded plains.

Peculiar to and conspicuous in the cooler wooded region are the two
beautiful long-spurred species of Aquilegia, A. eerulea and A. chrysantha,
the former alpestrine, the latter at lower elevations, neither found north
of Colorado.

A few of the Rocky Mountain wooded-region shrubs occur on the
higher mountains and ravines of the Great Basin, probably more of them
than are yet recorded. Of additional species only two come to mind,
and both are peculiar. They are—

Shepherdia rotundifolia of Parry, in the mountains of Southern Utah.

Peraphyllum ramosissimum, Nutt., a peculiar Pomaceous genus, along
the western rim of the Great Basin.

A few other higher-mountain species of Ceanothus come in from Cali-
fornia, as to various herbs; but we call to mind no characteristic species
of the basin which belong unequivocally to the forest district.

II.—WoopLEss REGIONS BELOW FOREST.

These may be distinguished into the lower mountain slopes, the west-
ern arid district, of which the so-called Great Basin is the center and
the exemplar, and the less arid, unbroken plains east of the proper
Rocky Mountains.

1. The Lower Rocky Mountain Slopes, including the “ parks,” so called,
of Colorado and valleys which are not condemned to a saline vegetation,
partake of the growth above and helow, but they have a good number
of characteristic plants. The prevalent characteristic shrubs are largely
Rosaceous. They are: 7

Cercocarpus parvifolius, along with CO. ledifolius when that is not reck-
oned among the trees; the former a species which is even more common
on all Californian foot-hills. These districts are the headquarters of
this peculiar genus, although the latter was founded on a Mexican
species.

Cowania Mexicana, which is likewise Mexican, as the name intimates.

Purshia tridentata, which extends much farther north than the others,
but not ascending above the base of the mountains.

No.1.) GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA. 21

Spirea discolor, which in its various forms flourishes under exceed-
ingly different altitudes.

Spirea Millefolium, which is quite peculiar to the Gréat Basin.

Spirea cespitosa should be added, although it spreads in mats over
the face of rocks, concealing its trunk, instead of rising into the air.

Coleogyne ramosissima, a highly peculiar genus of a single species,
found only on the southern border of the Great Basin.

Prunus Andersonii, of the Amygdaleous type, restricted to its south-
western rim.

Hardly elsewhere is such an assemblage to be found. Of other shrubs,
Ceanothus velutinus and Ribes cerewm are the most widespread and abun-
dant. One species of Hphedra extends along the mountains almost to
the northern border of the Great Basin, and two or three more are
among the characteristic shrubs of the region south of it.

As to herbs, the genera and the groups mentioned above as predomi-
nant ata greater elevation (especially Gilia, Pentstemon, Phacelia, and
Eriogonum) still play a prominent part. <Astragali become more numer-
ous, as also do white-flowered species of Ginothera,and Helianthoideous,
Helenioideous, and Senecionoideous Composite are conspicuous, yet not
more so than in other parts of North America. Few Composit are
peculiar tothis zone, and few genera are peculiar to the Rocky Mount-
ain region as distinguished from the Californian. The more character-
istic genera of the whole region may be adverted to in another connec-
tion.

2. The arid or desert interior district, namely, that between the Rocky
Mountains and the Sierra Nevada, the central part of which is the
Great Basin proper, with no exterior drainage, but which also extends
far north between the Rocky Mountains and the Cascades, and is there
drained by the Columbia River, and far south over the district through
which flow the waters of Rio Colorado and the Gila, with also an exten-
Sive eastern outlier between the Wahsatch and the Colorado Rocky
Mountains, and, as well, north of the Uintas, drained by the Green River,
the main and farthest source of the Colorado, where an arid woodless
tract, with all the features of the Great Basin, broadly intersects the
wooded Rocky Mountain ranges. The mountains which traverse and
diversify these deserts are thought to occupy about half the area, and al-
though many of them appear to be as bare as the intervening valleys,
yet their varied surface and exposure and the condensation of moisture
which they compel, even from an unwilling air, nourish a different veg-
etation, consisting of a larger number of species. This having already
been noted, only the botany of the valleys and plains is under present
consideration.

The region, in a general botanical view, is one of undershrubbiness ; and
the prevalent growth is composed of Artemisias, Chenopods, and lig-
nescent small-flowered Composite. It cannot be better described than

22 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VI.

in the terms employed by Mr. Watson in King’s Exploration (Rep. xxiv,
xxv), which is here accordingly cited:

“No portion of this whole district, however desert in repute and in
fact, is destitute of some amount of vegetation even in the driest seasons,
excepting only the alkali flats, which are usually of quite limited extent.
Even these have frequently a scattered growth of Sarcobatus or Halos-
tachys, surmounting isolated hillocks of drifted sand, compacted by
their roots and buried branches.

“This vegetation, covering alike the valley plains, the graded incline
of the mesas, the rounded foot-hills, and the mountain slopes, possesses
a monotonous sameness of aspect, and is characterized mainly by the
absence of trees, by the want of a grassy-green sward, the wide distribu-
tion of a few low shrubs or half-shrubby plants, to the apparent exclu-
sion of nearly all other growth, aud by the universally prevalent gray
or dull olive color of the herbage. * * * The turfing ‘ Buffalo’ or
‘Grama’ Grasses, which make the plains east of the Rocky Mountains a
vast pasture for the bison, deer, and antelope, are here unknown. There
are, indeed, various other species more or less abundant in localities,
but always growing in sparsely scattered tutts and dying away with the
early summer heats, or to be then found only in favored spots in the
mountain cafions. Two or three species that may be said to mat into a
sward are confined to alkaline meadows, and are nearly worthless for
pasturage.

‘Of the more predominant species which form the mass of the shrubby
and perennial vegetation of the entire region, some are confined almost
wholly to the more saline localities. Of these the Halostachys occiden-
talis is an exclusively alkaline shrub, growing where almost no other
plant will. Much more widely distributed and abundant is the Sarcoba-
tus vermiculatus, found nearly everywhere in the lower valleys where
there is a decided amount of alkali, but rarely extending much beyond
such limits. The more frequent plants accompanying these are Salicor-
nia herbacea and several species of Suceda, and other mostly Chenopodia-
ceous plants, and, if there are grasses at all, Brizopyrum spicatum and
Spartina gracilis.

‘On the somewhat less alkaline and drier portion of the valleys are
found in frequent abundance Atriplex confertifolia and canescens, or the
nearly as common Grayia polygaloides, and rather less abundantly
Artemisia spinescens, Eurotia lanata, and [Kochia prostrata. Sometimes
mingled with them, but, wholly free from alkaline preferences, and
beyond their range usurping entire predominance, is the ‘ Everlasting
Sage Brush,’ the Artemisia tridentata. This is by far the most prevalent
of all species, covering valleys and foot-hills in broad stretches further _
than the eye can reach, the growth never so dense as to seriously obstruet
the way, but very uniform over large surfaces, very rarely reaching the
saddle-height of a mule, and ordinarily but half that altitude.

‘The ‘ Broom Sage’ Bigelovia graveolens occurs in considerable abun-

No.1.) GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA. 23

dance along the dry valleys, often accompanied by Tetradymia canescens ;
but upon the gravelly foot-hills the smaller Bigelovia Douglasii is much
more frequent.”

One or two names are changed in copying so’ as to conform to the
more recent nomenclature. Hurotia lanata, though it happens not to
come into the above extract, is among the commonest of these plants,
and is one of the widestinrange. Some Astragali, various Hriogona and
Gilie, also several Phacelie and CGinothere, would be next in promi-
nence, the Hriogona much the most so. But the peculiarity of the
basin flora lies as much in the absence of other genera which charac-
terize adjacent districts as in the ubiquity of those which have been
mentioned.

The genera peculiar, or nearly so, to the Great Basin proper and its
borders are chiefly—

Physaria, a genus which was confounded on mere habit with Vesicaria,
belonging to the foot-hills rather than to the valleys, the principal species
extending around the whole limits of the region, a peculiar one at the
north and another at the south,

Platyspermum, Hook., a little Cruciferous: annual of the western
border.

Purshia, DC., a Rosaceous shrub, already mentioned.

Tricardia and Conanthus, of 8S. Watson, Hydrophylaceous herbs, the
latter close to Nama, the former a peculiar genus.

Oryctes, Watson, a rather obscure Solanaceous herb of Western
Nevada.

Nitrophila, Watson, an Amarantaceous herb of alkaline soil.

Grayia, Hook., a Chenopodiaceous undershrub, already enumerated as
one of the most characteristic of the desert plants. (Sarcotatus would
go with it, except that it crosses the Rocky Mountains and abounds on
the upper waters of the Missouri, where it was first known, being the
Pulpy Thorn of Lewis and Clark.)

Hermidium, Watson, a Nyctagineous perennial of the western edge of
the basin, intermediate between Bougainvillea and Mirabilis.

Oxytheca, Nutt., an offshoot of the great genus Hriogonum.

Tetradymia, DC., characteristic shrubby Senecioneous Composite of
two or three species, which slightly overpass the borders of the basin.

Glyptopleura, Eaton, of two species, and Anisocoma, Gray, of one, de-
pressed Cichoraceous annuals or biennials.

Chetadelpha, Blepharipappus, and Rigiopappus, each of a single species,
and Psathyrotes of two, southern in range, also Composite.

There is, besides, Caulanthus of S. Watson, of two or three very char-
acteristic desert species, but some Californian, and the genus is only
artificially distinguished from Streptanthus, species of which reach the
Pacific coast on the one hand and Missouri to Texas on the other.

Eremochloe, S. Watson, is @ peculiar genus of grasses, one species pe-
culiar to the basin, another to the southeastern part of New Mexico.

24 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

The arid region south of the Great Basin we propose only in a gen-
eral way to refer to. It is one in which there is no barrier to the spread-
ing of the same species from the Gulf of California to the Gulf of Mex-
ico, and in which the plants of the basin region, of Southern California,
of Texas, and of the Mexican plateau and mountains meet and mingle.
This district has also a good number of peculiar genera of shrubs: Sal-
azaria, in Labiate ; Holacantha, a spiny Simarubacea; Canotia, a rather
doubtful Rutacea, to which might be added Thamnosma except that a
second species is Texan; and Chilopsis, which extends into Mexico; among
herbs, Canbya, a singular little Papaveracea; Petalonyx, in Loasaceze
(also Cevallia, which extends both to Texas and Mexico); Hesperocallis,
in Liliaceee ; Dithyrea, which has been joined to the Old World genus
Biscutella ; Wislizena and Oxystylis, in Capparidacez ; Achyronychia,
jn Mlecebracee ; and among Composite the genera Baileya, Riddellia,
Hymenoclea, Hymenothrix; and here also are the headquarters of Lap-
hamia and Perityle.

3. The eastern woodless plains.

If the arid district of the interior of the United States west of the east-
ern Rocky Mountains is denominated the region of ‘“ Sage Brush” (7. ¢.,
of shrubby Artemisia and Chenopods), the mostly less arid, less saline,
equally homogeneous, and even more extensive plains between the Rocky
Mountains and the eastern forest region may be characterized as the
region of Buffalo Grasses. Its full development is between latitude 35°
and 45°, where it occupies an average of ten degrees of longitude. North
of this it is narrowed or interrupted, and then merges into a district
which is woodless from cold or from the nature of the soil, and at length
arctic. Southward it is equally broad, and it trends westward and loses
itself in the New Mexican plateau region, which has a certain character
of its own, but in which the eastern forms of vegetation mingle first with
those of the Rocky Mountains, with those of the Mexican plateau, and
at length with those which prevail in the Great Basin.

The whole region rises very gradually westward and abuts against
the mountains at an elevation of, for the most part, fully 5,000 feet. The
annual rainfall on its eastern border is from 24 to 32 inches, tolerably
well distributed; in its western part 14 to 16 inches. Upon the climatie
characteristics, topography, &c., which have been well presented in
various reports and summaries, especially in those published by Dr.
Hayden, it is not our purpose to enter.

Nor have we here any special call to discuss the vexed “ prairie ques-
tion,” viz, why it is that the eastern border of this broad district should
be treeless, except along river banks, even where the annual rainfall is
from 28 to 32 inches, and 8 to 10 inches of this in summer—as much rain
as is in the upper part of Michigan and on the Canada shore of Lake
Huron; also why prairies exist as deep bays or islands within the Atlan-
tic forest region. Suffice it to note that the prairies east of the Missis-

No.1.) GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA. 25

sippi are mainly restricted to places having little or no more rainfall
than that mentioned above; also that where annual fires have been pre
vented, original prairie surfaces are changing into forests,* and that,
generally, trees properly planted or raised from seed, with some nurs-
ing at the start, are found to thrive along this whole border.

In view of this, and of the well-known habit of the Indians to burn
over the dry vegetation of the plains and prairies in autumn, we had

thought it most probable “that the line of demarkation between our
woods and our plains is not where it was drawn by nature”; that “ be-
tween the ground which receives rain enough for forest and that which
receives too little, there must be a debatable border, where compara-
tively slight causes will turn the balance either way,” and where “ dif-
ference in soil and exposure will tell decisively.” And along this bor-
der, annual burnings, for the purpose of increasing and improving buf-
falo feed, practiced for hundreds of years by our nomade predecessors,
may have had a very marked effect in carrying this woodless district
farther eastward than it otherwise might have reached.t

Along with this,a more hypothetical cause may be assigned, which,
if valid, will help in other explanations. That natural rain-gauge, the
Great Salt Lake in Utah, informs us that the rainfall is now increasing
over the western border of the region under consideration. We know
what the maximum height of the water was very long ago; but we know
not the minimum. Itis not improbable that this era of increasing moist-
ure is of no recent commencement, but has supervened on an earlier one
of greater dryness than the present, and that this affected the great
plains east, as well as the great basin west, of the interposed Rocky
Mountains. In that case districts may now bear forest, under man’s
care, which would have been incapable of it before this cycle commenced
or had attained the present condition.

The western portion of these plains is not only drier, but in some
parts alkaline, or with other characters of soil uncongenial to forage
grasses, especially at the north, where there are only two inches of rain
in the three summer and no more in the three winter months. A good
deal of the southern part gets about four inches of summer rain, but only
half as much in winter. In some parts, accordingly, the characteristic
vegetation of the ultramontane plateau intrudes. The Pulpy Thorn,
Sarcobatus, and its Chenopodeous associates are largely developed on the
Upper Missouri waters, accompanied by a peculiar Sage-Brush, Arte-
mesia cana, While the A. tridentata is rather rarely established on this
side of the mountains.

We have termed this district the region of Buffalo Grass. The grasses
form such an inconspicuous and unimportant a feature in the interior
arid region that it has not been worth while to mention them, and even
on the mountains, except in the alpine region, they are of small account.

*Vide Prof. C. A. White, in Amer. Jour. Sci., Oct., 1878.
+See Forest Geography and Archeology, in Amer. Jour. Sci., 1878, Ser. 3, xvi, 94,—

26 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VI.

On the eastern plains they are the characteristic feature. When we get
beyond the eastern prairie border, the grasses of which are prevailingly
eastern in character, we come upon plains which are generally covered
with the very low and tufted grasses peculiar to the drier plains, which
form, if not a sward, yet something which serves as a substitute for it,
not green, except in early spring, but of a dull grayish hue, and the
characteristic species usually rising only a hand-breadth above the sur-
face. These are the Buffalo Grasses or Bunch Grasses, which have
nourished hordes of bison and flocks of antelopes down to a few years
ago, and which are now the capital of the herdsmen or ranchmen, and
the nutritious food of increasing numbers of domestic cattle.

The Buffalo Grass, par excellence, and by its abundance, is Buchloé
dactyloides of Engelmann. This is a dicecious Chlorideous grass, the
male and the comparatively scarce female plants of which were very
naturally thought to be of quite different genera until their relation-
ship was suspected and determined by Dr. Engelmann, and this apt
name was applied to it.

Munroa squarrosa of Torrey (Crypsis squarrosa, Nutt.), another much
depressed and peculiar Chlorideous grass, is next in importance. Both
are wholly peculiar to this region.

Bouteloua, a Chiorideous genus of a more ordinary type, of several
species, chiefly endemic to this region and to corresponding districts in
Mexico, is the third in rank. These are the “ Grama” Grasses—a name
which probably came from the Spanish. They are taller, of sparser
growth, and make good forage.

Pleuraphis Jamesi, Torr., is a Buffalo Grass peculiar to the conineee
part of the region, with se westward extension.

Vaseya comata, Gray, represents another peculiar genus; but the spe-
cies extends to the Californian region.

Hriocoma cuspidata is the Bunch Grass of the very driest soils, and
naturally extends across the Great Basin.

Sporobolus airoides, Torr., abounds over the whole length of the region
and beyond it, in the more low and subsaline soils. It is accompanied
by Beckmannia (also a North Asiatic grass), by Distichlis maritima, by
one or two wide-spread species of Atropis, &c. The drier ground in
many places bears species of Stipa and Aristida. Hordeum jubatum and
the peculiar Hlymus Sitanion are characteristic grasses.

Of other dominant and more or less peculiar forms of vegetation—hav-
ing chiefly in view the central tract—we should mention a great white-
flowered Argemone (A. hispida, Gray); Stanleya, and the greater part of
the known species of Vesicaria; Cleome integrifolia; the whole genus
Callirrhoé; a Krameria; a Glycyrrhiza; the herbaceous Sophora sericea ;
the principal development of the peculiar genus Petalostemon, and south-
ward numerous species of Dalea (which go on increasing into Mexico);
also of Psoralea ; most of the species of Gaura, several of Gnothera, and
the peculiar genus Stenosiphon, allied to Gaura; a good number of Cac-

No.1] GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA, 27

tacee (chiefly Opuntie and Mamillaric), increasing southward; a thick-
rooted perennial Cucurbita (perennis), with some relatives southwest-
ward; the species of Macheranthera, or biennial Asters; Aplopappus
spinulosus and some other species; Bigelovia and Gutierrezia in charac-
teristic forms ‘which are shared with the ultramontane arid district,
and a great development of Senecionoid Composite, perhaps not exceed-
_ ing the other parts of the United States, yet more conspicuous to the
eye; the two species of Solanwm with prickly calyx closed over the fruit;
Pentstemon in species equaled only by California; Hedeoma and Mo-
narda; Leucocrinum, which, however, extends westward.

Besides those variously mentioned, a goodly number of genera are
peculiar to this and the more western districts, which we need not here
enumerate. Of absolutely peculiar genera, there is Selenia, in Cruciferae;
Cristatella, in Capparidacee ; Museniwm, Polytenia, and Trepocarpus, in
Umbelliferse ; Thelesperma (except for a Buenos Ayrean species), Engel-
manna, Bradburia, Diaperia, &c., among Composite; Stephanomeria,
Lygodesma and Troximon are very characteristic Cichoraceous genera,
which also abound far westward.

The characteristics of the Rocky Mountain flora—whether taken as a
broad whole or in its constituent geographical parts—are in no small
degree negative. What this flora lacks is perhaps more remarkable
than what it possesses. This will appear on a comparison of the vege-
tation of the three great regions: the Atlantic naturally wooded region;
the Central region, woodless except on mountains; the Pacific region,
largely but not wholly wooded.

HF

COMPARISON. OF THE ATLANTIC, PACIFIC, AND ROCKY MOUNTAIN
REGION FLORAS.

A full and eritical comparison would require a tabulation of the gen-
era and species of the North American flora, and of their geographical
distribution, and this would be a large and difficult undertaking.

Even the sketch of the principal or salient features, which we may
here present, it is best to confine to the central belt, along which the
three regions are particularly well defined, namely, to the United States
north of the peninsula of Florida (which has considerable tropical vege-
tation) and of Texas, leaving out of view the Texano-Arizonian region,
which, with the adjacent parts of Mexico, has in general a vegetation
of its own, and is not very distinctly separable into wooded and wood-
less, or even into eastern, middle, and western, districts. The same is
ti.e case, in a different way, in the country north of the United States
boundary, as has been already explained.

The comparison attempted is, therefore, that of the flora of ‘the
Atlantic States between the Gulf of St. Lawrence and the Gulf of
Mexico, on the one hand, with that of California and Oregon and with

28 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [V¥ol.VI.

the broad district between them, stretching from the plains of Arkansas
to Dakota on the east to the Sierra Nevada and Cascade Mountains on
the west. Then the alpine vegetation, already treated of, is left out of
view, except in the case of endemic genera or forms not belonging to
to the arectic-alpine flora. And itmust be kept in mind that the eastern
slopes and outliers of the Sierra and its continuation, below the wooded
portions, belong to the Great Basin or to the region reckoned with it.
So we do not reckon Pinus monophylla, nor Chilopsis saligna, nor Leuco-
crinum, and the like, as common to the Great Basin and the Pacific
floras, but as pertaining to the former only; and generally we do not
take account of species which merely overpass the border of the region
they belong to. For example, we should not reckon Anemone Nuttal-
liana, nor Dalea alopecuroides, nor Collinsia parviflora, and hardly Rubus
Nutkanus as constituents of the Atlantic United States flora. Such
limitations heighten the contrast between the compared floras, but
render the comparison more manageable and effective, and also, as to the
broad outlines, really more faithful to nature than they would be if the
materials were indiscriminately collected from the descriptive books and
every denizen of the frontiers regarded as a true citizen.

All naturalized plants and weeds of cultivation are, of course, neg-
lected, including such as may be of American origin but which have
accompanied man, even the aborigines of the country, almost everywhere.
They belong to no particular flora, or at least are not characteristic of
any.

The natural orders may be taken up seriatim.

RANUNCULACEZ.—Are represented on the Atlantic side by eighteen
genera, on the Pacific by fourteen, in the intermediate region (the Rocky
Mountain flora in the broadest sense) by twelve. The species are in
nearly the same relative proportion, and a considerable number are com-
mon even to all three floras, the most striking case of this being that of
Clematis (Atragene) verticillaris. All the generaof the Rocky Mountain
flora (if we except Crossosoma) areamphigean.* Of such genera, Paonia
is peculiar to the Pacific, and Hepatica (if ranked as a genus) only to the
Atlantic flora. The peculiar genera are Trautvetteria, Atlantic and
Pacific; Hydrastis and Xanthorrhiza, wholly Alleghanian; and Cros-
sosoma of California, a genus of dubious affinity, but probably nearest
Peonia, in two species, one which belongs to the Arizonian district.
The species of Delphiniwm increase from the Atlantic westward, and are
remarkably prominent in California.

MAGNOLIACEZ.—Of three genera and eleven species in the Atlantic
flora; are wholly absent from the westward floras.

ANONACE#.—Have a peculiar genus (the so-called Papaw) in the
Atlantic flora, but nothing to the west of it.

* This is the most convenient designation of the genera indigenous to Europe and
Northern Asia as well as to America.

No.1.) GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA. 29

MENISPERMACE 41.—Of three genera and as many species in the
Atlantic flora; are equally wanting westward.

BERBERIDACH 4.—This is a marked family in North America. The
amphigzan genus Gerberis has genuine Atlantic and one (southern)
Rocky Mountain species ; the western mountains have a characteristic
and common low Mahonia (and another on the southern border); and
there are two or three more on the Pacific side. Of herbaceous types
the whole central region has none; the Pacific coast has Vancouveria and
Achlys, peculiar genera of single’ species; the Atlantic has those four
special genera, Caulophyllum, Diphylleia, Jeffersonia, and Podophyllum
peculiar to it and to Northeastern Asia, of single species to each conti-
nent.

NYMPH HACE ai.—Of the typical genera, Nymphea is represented only
in the Atlantic flora and by two peculiar species (with others in Florida
and Texas), and Nuphar by three species ; a peculiar Nuphar belongs to-
the two western floras. Nelumbium has only an Atlantic species, which
even reaches to the West Indies. Brasenia, that genus and single spe-
cies of wonderful distribution, is common on the eastern and not very
rare on the western coast. Cabomba is peculiarly Atlantic.

SARRACENIACE &.—This wholly American order of Pitcher-plants has
its leading genus of six species confined to the Atlantic border ; a single
curious representative, Darlingtonia, on the mountains of California;
the third genus is on a mountain in Guiana.

PAPAVERACE A.— This small order, the typical genus of which is rep-
resented in America only by an arctic-alpine species, has its largest and
most remarkable generic diversification in North America, and in the
belt of country now under observation, partly on the Atlantic yet more
strikingly on the Pacific side. But, except for an Argemone which is
very conspicuous over the great plains, and the alpine Papaver, spar-
ingly met with on the highest peaks, the order is absent from the Rocky
Mountain flora in general. No European type is indigenous to Eastern
North America, and only one of the American is Japano-Asiatic, viz,
Stylophorum, of course on the Atlantic side. The other Atlantic genus
is Sanguinaria, which has no fellow. But California has a species of the
European genus Meconopsis and the following endemic genera: Romneya
of Southern California, with a large poppy-like flower; Arctomecon,
poppy-like, except in its stigmas and the anomaly of persistent petals ;
Canbya, a curious little plant with the same anomaly (the last two really
belonging to the Arizonian border of the interior desert region, although
within California) ; Platystigma, including Meconella ; Platystemon, with
gynecium singularly separating into its constituent carpels, so as to
simulate a Ranunculaceous plant; Dendromecon, a shrub in an otherwise
herbaceous family; and Hschscholtzia, the only genus which extends
into the Great Basin, and the singular characters of which are familar
from the forms in common cultivation; add Hunnemannia from the
Northern Mexican plateau. Next to the Sequoias, perhaps, these Papa-
veracex form the most characteristic note of the Californian flora,

30 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VL

FUMARIACEZ.—Three genera, of which only the larger one, Corydalis,
is amphigean. Its species are of Hastern Asiatic rather than European
types and relationship. C. aurea and its kindred forms, rather than
species extend across the whole continent and to Japan; the striking
species described as C. Caseana, of the western Rocky Mountains to the
Sierra, appears to break into analogous forms which have recently been
taken for species. Dicentra, peculiar to North America and the Japano-
Himalayan floras, has perhaps a majority of American species. They
belong wholly to wooded districts. One species crosses the whole con-
tinent along the northern border of our belt; in another case Pacific
and Atlantic species hardly at all differ; the three or four others are
peculiar. Adlumia, the remaining genus, is of a single Atlantic species.

CRUCIFER4.—For an order of over 170 genera and more than 2,200
species, North America, in her about 40 indigenous genera, none of
over two dozen species, cannot be said to have a large share; and the
exclusion of Arctic alpine forms reduces the number considerably. The
Atlantic Cruciferee are almost all European in type; Leavenworthia and
Warea are the only peculiar genera. The eastern border of the plains
has a, local genus, Selenia, and there begin the characteristic genera
Streptanthus and Stanleya, and species of Vesicaria multiply southward ;
the Rocky Mountains exhibit no characteristic type, unless itis Physaria,
but the arid region beyond begins to share with California in the abun-
dance of Lepidiwm, and in the several endemic genera, of which Thysano-
carpus is the most characteristic. Itis the Arizonian region that furnishes
_the American representatives of the Old Word genus Biscutella, the
Dithyrea of Harvey.

CAPPARIDACEA.—Within the limits specified North America has
no Capparee, but all the genera of Cleomec except two are indigenous
and the greater part of them peculiar to it—all in the warmer parts, the
number of species and types increasing southwestward, and extending
into Mexico. The peculiar types, Cristatella, Cleomella (of several spe-
cies), Wislizenia, and Oxystylis, are characteristic of the southern part of
the central region.

RESEDACEZ we exclude, believing Oligomeris subulata to have been a
Spanish importation.

CISTACE.—Two of the four genera of this more conspicuously ori-
ental order, Hudsonia and Lechea, are peculiar to the Atlantic States, to
which also three species of Helianthemum are indigenous, and there is one
species on the coast of California. The order is wanting to the whole
intervening portion of the continent.

VIOLACE#.—In species of Viola North America is as rich as the Old
World, and the Pacific flora as rich as the Atlantic and with greater diver-
sity of type; a few species common to each, but most of them peculiar.
The central flora has hardly any except in the alpestrine region, and these
few and of wide-spread species. A Mexican Jonidium reaches Arkansas
and Arizona.

No.1.| GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA. 31

POLYGALACEAi.—Represented by Polygala. The Atlantic flora is rich
in species, all of them peculiar; the Pacific flora has only two, of a
peculiar type. The Texano-Arizonian region has several, some of them
Mexican, but from both the mountains and valleys of our belt the genus
and the order are nearly absent.

KRAMERIACEZ.—Should be separately reckoned, whatever view be
taken of the affinity of the warm-American (chiefly Mexican) genus
Krameria. One species reaches the plains of Arkansas, and has obtained
a lodgment on the coast of Florida; two or three more extend along the
Mexican frontier, but hardly infringe upon the region under consid-
eration.

FRANKENIACE &.—Of a single genus, of warm temperate and subtrop-
ical coasts; has a Californian and Arizonian species; no Atlantic repre-
sentative, but there is a quite peculiar species at the southeastern base
of the Rocky Mountains.

CARYOPHYLLACEZ.—The Silenece are feebly represented (by Silene
only) in the Atlantic flora, yet by peculiar species; are nearly wanting
from the Great Plains, scanty in the Rocky Mountains, but of increas-
ing number and diversity as the Pacific flora is approached. The Al-
sine, moderately numerous, call for no remark, except for the increased
number of species of Arenaria in the interior flora, most of thenr peculiar.
Stipulicida is of a single strictly Atlantic species.

TLLECEBRACE2.—Nowhere very numerous, but most of the species and
genera in the Old World. Paronychia is represented in the Atlantic
flora; also in that of the plains and the eastern part of the Rocky
Mountains. Anychia and Siphonychia are peculiar to the Atlantic flora;
Pentacena to that of the Pacific coast,extending to Chili. Achyronychia,
a remarkable genus, of one species, belongs to the Arizonian rather
than the California flora.

PORTULACACAA.—This may be regarded as an American order, al-
though the Purslane has accompanied man all over the world. The
single species of Montia has an immensely wide distribution over the
cool parts of the world. One of Claytonia and several of Calandrinia are
Australian, and two small genera are South African. So, as relates to
distribution, it is a very suggestive order. The Atlantic States have
only the two earliest known species of Claytonia and a Talinum; New
Mexico has a peculiar genus (TZalinopsis), too like an African one; the
Rocky Mountain region has the characteristic and remarkable genus
Lewisia, and more species of Claytonia, &c.; Spraguea and Calyptridium
are peculiar to the whole country west of the Rocky Mountains proper ;
Calandrinie are all western; and the Pacific flora contains most of the
species of Claytonia.

ELATINACE&.—Two of our three species of Hlatine occur in the At-
lantic, Rocky Mountain, and Pacific floras; one is restricted to the
latter. The Texan Bergia very sparingly occurs in the Great Basin and
on the Pacific coast.

32 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VI.

HYPERICACE &.—Represented by three genera, of which the two
small ones, Ascyrum and Hlodes, are peculiar to the Atlantic flora
(except European relatives of the latter), which is rich in endemic
species of Hypericum; the Pacific flora has three or four endemic species
of the latter, the intervening region nothing of the order.

TERNSTRGMIACH 4.—This Hastern American and Eastern Asian order
is represented only east of the Alleghanies, and by Stuartia, two species
(the third in Japan); Gordonia, two species, and several hardly genuine
species in tropical Asia.

MALVACE@.—This is one of the great and cosmopolitan orders, of
which North America possesses a fair but not excessive representation.
The species and forms here increase in number southwestward. Indige-
nous plants only being regarded, no genus is common to North America
and Europe excepting Lavatera, represented by two or three singular
and mostly shrubby species of the Californian coast. Napca is strictly
peculiar to the Atlantic flora, as also is the unique Sida Napea. Callir-
rhoé is peculiar to the borders of the same district and the plains adja-
cent. Sidalceais peculiar to the Rocky Mountain and Californian floras.
Ingenhouzia (which is Thurberia) belongs the Western Arizonian flora.

Malvastrum and Spheeralcea (too near generically) are numerous in spe-

cies on the plains and through the valleys of the Rocky Mountain region.

Kosteletzkya is represented on the Atlantic coast, but most of the species.

are Mexican.

BoMBACEZ.—Fremontia Californica belongs wholly to the forest dis-

trict of the Sierra Nevada, and its only relative is Cheirostemon, the
Hand-flower of Mexico.

TILIACEA.—Hxcepting one or two outlying plants on the southern
borders, this order is represented only by the genus Tilia, in two species
of the Atlantic States, which hardly cross the Mississippi.

Linacre ai.—Three or four Atlantic species of Linum, as many more on
the plains or Rocky Mountains, one species from the plains to the Pa-
cific coast, and the same is an Old World species, or nearly so; and,
moreover, in California and Oregon an unique group of seven species
(Hesperolinon), in which the carpels are reduced from five to three, or
even two.

ZY GOPHYLLACE &.—Leaving out the species of Tribulus or Kallstre-
mia and the Texano-Arizonian representatives, among which Fagonia
Californica should be ranked, notwithstanding the specific name, only
the Creosote Bush remains, Larrea Mexicana, a shrub of the Mexican
plateau, which has passed into or near the southern border of our belt
all along from Texas to California.

GERANIACE.—In the restricted sense, are few in North America,
consisting only of a few species of Geranium; the eastern and western
perennial ones different; a biennial species of a weedy character is seat-
tered over the continent.

LIMNANTHE@.—Are exclusively North American; Limnanthes, of two-

No.1.) GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN PLORA. 33

or three species on the Pacific side, the reduced type Flerkea on the
Atlantic side also; all wanting to the Rocky Mountain flora.

OXALIDEA.—A very few species of Ovalis, one peculiar to the east
and one to the west, one to the east and middle, and the O. corniculata
both east and west.

BALSAMINE Ai.—Two species of Impatiens in the Atlantic States; none
farther westward.

RuvTAcEa.—Mainly a tropical and subtropical order and not largely
American, it is only to be noted that the Rutew are represented along
the southern border by Thamnosma, a Texan species of which reaches the
southern Rocky Mountains, and another belongs only to the southern
border of the Great Basin. Ptelea extends quite across the continent,
whether in one or in three species is uncertain; and two species of Xan-
thoxylum are restricted to the Atlantic border. COneoridium is a little
Californian shrub which rather belongs to this order. The American
Simarubacee are south of our range.

CYRILLEZ.—Two strictly Atlantic genera, one tropical American
and a West Indian one, compose the group.

AQUIFOLIACE 4 are represented only in the Atlantic flora by a dozen
species of lex and the peculiar monotypic genus Nemopanthes.

CELASTRACEZ.—The single Celastrus is restricted to the Atlantic
flora, which has also two species of Huonymus; the Pacific coast has
one. Pachystima is a genus of two species, one common through the
mountains from the Pacific to the Rocky Mountains, the other extremely
local in the Alleghanies of Virginia.

RHAMNACE Z.—Excluding the Texano-Arizonian forms and the sub-
tropical of Florida, we are concerned only with Rhamnus and Frangula,
one species of which crosses the continent northward, two Atlantic only,
and two Pacific; Sageretia and Berchemia, each having one Atlantic
coast species; and the great American genus Ceanothus. The original
species and three others are restricted to the Atlantic flora; three are
Mexican; but the rest, twenty or more species, belong to the Rocky
Mountains, where there are few, and to the Pacific flora, where they are
perhaps the most abundant and characteristic shrubs, forming a large
part of the chaparral.

VITACE.—Ampelopsis belongs to the Atlantic flora, but reaches the
southern Rocky Mountains. Vitis has eight or nine species in the same
flora, and is therefore more developed here than in any other part of the
temperate zone. California has one species; the Rocky Mountains and
their outlying districts none at all.

SAPINDACE Zs. argely tropical, except that there is a Sapindus
along the southern frontiers; are represented only by certain genera.
Four species of Wseulus characterize the Atlantic flora; one, of a dif-
ferent type, the Pacific flora; and there is none between. [ive species
of Acer are peculiar to the Atlantic, two to the Pacific flora ; one occurs
only in the western Rocky Mountains; one is common to the latter and

36GB

34 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

to the Pacific flora. MNegundo, which is hardly distinct from Acer, has
an Atlantic species extending to and through the Rocky Mountains; a
second but closely related species takes its place in California. Staphy-
lea, which affects only forest regions, has an Atlantic and a (local) Pacific
species. Glossopetalon is peculiar to the intermediate dry region; the
original species occurs on and beyond the southern borders of the
Great Basin; a second one is on its northwestern border. Ungnadia of
Texas is rather too far southwest to be well reckoned in the Atlantic
forest flora, yet it belongs to it.

ANACARDIACE %.—Represented by the genus Rhus. The only species
which extends across the continent is #. aromatica, in a peculiar western
variety. &. glabra, the low Sumach, extends to and beyond the Rocky
mountains. The common Sumach, the Poison Dogwood, and some others
are wholly eastern, while Rhus Toxicodendron reaches the Rocky Mount-

-ains; on the Pacific side it is replaced by an equally poisonous and very
similar species. Southern California has two other species of South
American type. p

LEGUMINOS#.—This being one of the very largest orders in most
parts of the world, only characteristic features can be noted. The At-
lantic flora is rich in genera, but poor, comparatively, in species; the
Pacific is very poor in genera, but several of the genera are very numer-
ous in species. The intervening region-on the western side has the Cal-
ifornian character. They may be referred to under the suborders.

PAPILIONACE Z.—The great preponderance of Pacific species is attrib-
utable mainly to the great development of four genera, viz: Astragalus,
Lupinus, Trifolium, and Hosackia. The latter is the only purely Ameri-
can type of the four, though very near to the Old World genus Lotus,
and, but for one species which has nearly reached the Atlantic seaboard,
would be wholly western.

The only peculiar Pacific genus is Pickeringia, of a single species.
There is no peculiar genus of the Rocky Mountain flora, Olneya being
Arizonian. The exuberance of Atiantic genera is largely due to genera
which are divided between the Eastern United States and Eastern
Asia, such as Wistaria, Apios, Amphicarpcea, Lespedeza, Cladrastis, and
to some exclusive genera, such as Baptisia, Robinia, Petalostemon ;
also to the absence toward the Pacific of genera which the Atlantic
States share with Mexico and South America, such as Tephrosia, Indigo-
Sera, Sesbania, Stylosanthes, Desmodium (the largest Atlantic States
genus), Hrythrina, Clitoria, Centrosema, Galactia, Rhynchosia. More-
over, the botany of California should surrender its eleven species of
Dalea, since they all properly belong to the Arizonian and Great Basin
floras rather than to that of the Pacific region. It is a characteristic .
genus of the Mexican plateau and of its extension northward. Astra-
galus, feebly represented in the Atlantic States, and its appendage,
Oxytropis, have their American headquarters in the plains and mount-
ains of our interior region, under conditions not unlike those of Northern

No.1; GRAY AND TIOOKER ON TIE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA. 35

_ and Central Asia, where a great majority of the rest of the Astragalee
flourish. Amorpha is shared by the Atlantic and Pacific floras. Ther-
mopsis, with three local Atlantic species, one in the Rocky Mountains
and two in California, has also Eastern Asian species.

C HSALPINEA.—Hxcluding the Texano-Arizonian forms, the only
Pacific representative is a single Cercis; the central region has none,
except, perhaps, a Hoffmanseggia or two; while the Atlantic has a Oercis
of its own, rising to the size of a forest tree, also stately trees in Gym-
nocladus and Gleditschia (two species), and of herbs a few species of
Cassia. .

MIMOSEZ are in nearly similar case. Not one is truly to be reckoned
in the Pacific flora or in the Rocky Mountain flora within our proper
bounds, though several representatives appear a little farther south;
but Schrankia, a Mimosa, a Neptunia, and two or three species of Des-
manthus (all herbaceous) come within our limits on the ultra-Mississip-
pian plains and barely enter the Atlantic flora. The shrubby or
arboreal Méimosece (Mimosa, Prosopis in its two forms, Acacia, &¢.) char-
acterize the Texano-Mexican bordering district.

RosacEz.— This important order has very characteristic North
American genera. ‘Unlike the preceding order, the western genera are
more numerous than the eastern, and also about as numerous in species.
Taken under their suborders or great groups—

CHRYSOBALANE &.—Are represented only on the Atlantic coast, and
by a single Chrysobalanus, excluding, of course, the tropical one in
Florida. -

AMYGDALEZ.—Occur in the Atlantic flora only under the true Pru-
nus, Padus, Cerasus, and Lauro-cerasus sections, except that in Texas
forms approaching Amygdalus occur. The Pacific flora has scanty rep-
resentatives of the same types. The southern and western borders of
the Great Basin are marked by two peculiar Amygdalus-like species,
Prunus Andersonii, in which the exocarp falls from the stone in two
valves like an almond, and P. fasciculata, on which Torrey founded a
genus, Hmplectocladus. Then, the Pacific coast has the curious and
unique genus Nuttallia, Torr. & Gray, which is regularly pluricarpellary.

The trne Rosacee have Spirwa in several types, Neillia, Rubus,
Geum, Fragaria, Potentilla, Agrimonia, Poterium, and Rosa, in common
over the continent, the species of Potentilla much increasing westward.
Peculiar to the Atlantic flora are only Neviusa (of Japanese affinity),
Gillenia, and Datlibarda ; to the Pacific flora, Chamebatia, which abounds
over the western slope of the Sierra Nevada, and Adenostoma, which
forms a large part of the chaparral or chamisal (the shrub is called
“Ohamiso”) of the foot-hills and coast-ranges. Peculiar to the Rocky
Mountain flora, mostly to the Great Basin and to its southward exten-
sion into Mexico, are Coleogyne, a single and very local shrub of the
desert, Cowania, Fallugia. Peculiar, or nearly so, to the two western
regions are Oercocarpus (with one Mexican species) and the two poten-

?

36 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. — [Vol.V2.

tilliform genera or subgenera, Horkelia and Ivesia, the former of which
might rather be ranked among the exclusively Pacific types. A single
Acena is one of the Chilian forms which has reached California. Wald-
steinia, on the Atlantic side, is an Old World type. j

PomE#&.—The amphigzan generaor groups, Crategus, Malus, Sorbus,
Amelanchier, extend across the continent at the north, one Sorbus in the
very same species; only Crategus on the Atlantic side displays a con-
siderable number of species; and. the Adenorachis group is peculiar to
the latter district. Heteromeles, of Asiatic type, is confined to the coast
of California. Peraphyllum is a peculiar shrub of the western verge of —
the Great Basin.

CALYCANTHACE &.—Are all North American, except the. single Ché-
monanthus of China; two species of Calycanthus peculiar to the Atlantic
flora, one to that.of California.

SAXIFRAGACEZ.—An order hardly inferior to. Rosacez in extent, in
amount of diversification, and in wideness of distribution. Of the am-
phigean types, headed by Saaxifraga, it is unnecessary to discourse, ex-
cept to mention that noble and most peculiar Californian species S. peltata..
The peculiar North American genera are, on the Atlantic side, Sulli-
vantia and Decumaria; of the Rocky Mountain flora, Jamesia, and far-
ther south, Fendlera; of the Pacific flora, Leptarrhena, Tolmica, Bolan-
dra, Sucksdorfia, Carpenteria ; of the Rocky Mountain and Pacific floras
in,common, Tellima, Whipplea; of the Atlantic and Pacific floras, but —
not in the intervening, Boykinia ; of all three floras, Heuchera ; of all
three northward, with extension merely into Northeastern Asia, Tiar-
ella and Mitella, also, with intervening species farther south, Philadelphus.
Then, Astilbe, Hydrangea, and Itea are genera strictly divided’ between
the Atlantic flora and that of Himalaya-Japan. In Lepuropetalon we
have the rare case of a species peculiar to the Atlantic and the Chilian
floras, with no known connection. The genus Ribes assumes its max-
imum development and fullest diversification in North America and on
its western borders. Even with the alpine species included, Saxifraga is
comparatively weak in this country.

CRASSULACEZ.—The amphigean genera Tillea and Sedum are not
largely represented in North America. A Mexican group, Echeveria,
extends well north along the Pacific coast, but is wanting in the inte-
rior. Diamorpha, an unique genus of a single species, allied to Sedum, is
of the Atlantic flora. Penthorwm, equally peculiar, is of a single species,
restricted to the Atlantic States and to China and Japan.

DROSERACE.Az.—Appear to be absent from the whole Rocky Mount-
ains, except in the cool regions far north; the Pacific flora northward has
the two common amphigzean species; the Atlantic flora has four pecu- —
liar species, and also rejoices in Dionea.

HAMAMELIDEZ.—Ave divided between Atlantic North America, South
Africa, and Asia (to which most of the genera and species belong); our
single Hamamelis does not cross the Mississippi; the monotypic Fother-

No.1] GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA. 37

gilla hardly crosses the Alleghanies; the single Liquidambar is equally
of eastern range, though it extends into and through Mexico.

HALORAGE.—Are of small account. The amphigzean Hippuris and
one or two of Myriophyllum extend across the continent northward; but
Proserpinaca, of two species, is restricted to the Atlantic flora.

MELASTOMACE®.—Khewvia of the Atlantic flora alone represents this
great typical order in a temperate climate.

LyTHRrAcni A.—Largely tropical or subtropical; two or three species of
Ammannia and Lythrum are of wide distribution; and the Atlantic States
have a Cuphea and a Neswa, Hastern South American types. The pecu-
liar genus Didiplis is nearly an aquatic Ammannia.

ONAGRACEAI.—A largely American order. Zpilobiwm, a cosmopoli-
tan genus, is most diversified in the Pacific flora. Clarkia, Boisduvalia,
Dulobus, Bucharidium, and Heterogaura are restricted to it; Zauschneria,
Gayophytwm, and the principal wealth of the great genus @nothera, to
the Rocky Mountain and Pacific region; Gauwra and Stenosiphon mainly
to the great plains east and southeast of the Rocky Mountains. Zud-
wigia and the diurnal yellow-flowered Gnotherc, with clavate capsules,
are Atlantic types. Godetia is one of the most characteristic of Pacific-
coast genera, but also Chilian.

LOASACE @.— Are wholly American, with the odd exception of a South
African genus of a single species. It is wanting from the Atlantic flora,
but well represented in the Rocky Mountain and Pacific floras by various
species of Mentzelia. The most showy vespertine species, Jf. ornata and
M. nuda, are very characteristic on the plains between the Mississippi
and the Rocky Mountains. Hucnide and Petalonyx are Texano-Arizo-
nian genera. ;

TURNERACEA.—Tropical plants; one or two species of Turnera on
the southern borders of the Atlantic flora.

PASSIFLORACE 2.—Are equally unknown to the Rocky Mountain and
Pacitic floras. A very few species of Passiflora are indigenous to the
Atlantic States, one extending as far north as Ohio.

CUCURBITACE Z&.—Are few in this country, and from the interior re-
gion within our proper Jimits they are absent. The true ELchinocystis is
peculiar to the Atlantic States; two or three species of Megarrhiza char-
acterize the Pacific flora ; perennial and tuberous rooted species of Cucur-
vita belong to the plains east of the Rocky Mountains (C. perennis) and
through drier Texano-Arizonian regions.

DATISCACEZ.—A _ single Datisea in California, far away from all its
relatives.

CACTACE A.—Are abundant in and characteristic of the Rocky Mount-
ain region, and still more of the Texano-Arizonian, as of the Mexican
. plateau. Two species of Opuntia extend along the Atlantic coast to New
England. Twenty-six species are enumerated in the Botany of Cali-
fornia, but a majority of them belong to the Arizonian district.

FicoipE.a.—Are extremely few and uninteresting. The early natu-

38 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. — [Vol.V».
ralization and great abundance of Mesembrianthemum on the coast of
California is somewhat wonderful.

UMBELLIFER@.—This great order of over 150 genera is not notably
large in North America. The number of genera in the Atlantic and the
Pacific floras is about the same, but the species of the latter are much
more numerous, and the interior region is equally well supplied. The
largest western genera are Cymopterus and Peucedanum, the former
peculiar to the region. Phellopterus, a plant of the northern Pacific sea-
coast, is also on the coast of Japan.. Angelica Gmelini is common to the
two, also to the mountains and the sea-shore of Northern New England.
Cryptotenia of the Atlantic flora is identically the same in Japan. Os-
morrhiza consists of two Atlantic species, two Rocky Mountain and Pa-
cific, and one of Japan, all closely related. Orantzia lineata, a little
plant of the Atlantic States seaboard, occurs on the border of Mexico
and in South America, and again on the seaboard of Chili and Patago-
nia, on the Falkland Islands, and even in New Zealand and Australia.

ARALIACE#.—Are few in North America, but interesting for distribu-
tion. Apparently there are none at all in the whole Rocky Mountain re-
gion, except one in Southern New Mexico. There are only two in the
Pacific flora; one of them is very close to the Atlantic Aralia racemosa
and is Californian; the other, Fatsia horrida, forms an undergrowth in the
Coniferous woods of the coast farther north, and is also in the northern :
part of Japan. The Atlantic flora contains Aralia spinosa, the A. race-
mosa already mentioned, A. hispida, A. quinquefolia, the American Gin-
seng, and A. trifolia. Nearly all of these have close representatives in
the Northeastern Asian (and Himalayan) region and not elsewhere.

CoRNACE.—Are of equally interesting distribution. Ofthe ordinary
Cornels, four Pacific species are thought to be distinct from the seven
of the Atlantic flora, although the characters are not very well made
out, and they meet more or less in the Rocky Mountains. Then, Cali-:
fornia only has a species (C. sessilis), of the European and Japanese C.
mas type. C. florida of the Atlantic flora hasa more showy represent-
ative in C. Nuttallii of the Pacific forest, and less close relatives in East-
ern Asia. The herbaceous C. Canadensis crosses the continent at the
north, and in Japan meets the allied C. Suecica. Nyssa, of the Atlantie
flora, has congeners in the mountains of Asia, while Garrya of the Pacifie
flora has them in the Texano-Mexican region and the West Indies.

CAPRIFOLIACE@.—Of the amphigzean genera there is little to remark,
except the considerable development of Viburnum in the Atlantic flora.
in species strictly cognate if not sometimes identical with those of Japan;
their absence from the Rocky Mountains, except well northward, where
‘two cross to the northwest coast; and the occurrence on the Pacific side of
only one endemic species. Symphoricarpus, a wholly American genus,
has one or two species common to all three floras, one or two peculiar to
each, in the central region a peculiar Mexican type. Triostewm is con-
fined to the Atlantic flora and to Northeastern Asia, with the Himalaya.

Wo..1.1 GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA. 39

RUBIACEa.—This vast order of over 300 genera and 4,000 species
forms an insignificant feature in North America, and in the northern
temperate zone throughout. But the poverty of the Rocky Mountain
and the Pacific floras is eXtreme. There are some species of Galiwm
in all, and Cephalanthus is on both sides of the continent and of south-
ern extension. Besides, the Pacific flora has only the peculiar mono-
typic genus Jelloggia, with no near relative in the northern hemisphere.
The Atlantic flora nearly monopolizes the genuine species of Houstonia,
and its specially characteristic genus is Mitchella, which is repeated in
a very similar species in Japan.

VALERIANACE.—A small family, is here unimportant. The only
peculiar genus is Plectritis of the Pacific coast and that of Chili.

Composit #.—No detailed analysis can be expected here of the dis-
tribution of an order which is thought to make up one-tenth of flowering
plants and which composes a still larger proportion of those of North
America. Yet afew points may be brought to view, taking the tribes
separately.

VERNONIACE&.—Are known only in the Atlantic region, the princi-
pal genus, Vernonia, however, extending over the prairie border of the
plains. Stokesia is one of those strictly peculiar genera of a single spe-
cies with which the Atlantic flora abounds.

EUPATORIACE A.—This is almost an American tribe, the maximum in
South America, the minimum in our Pacific Territory, which has only
four or five species. But into the Rocky Mountains and the Great
Basin extends, more largely than into the Pacific flora, the genus Brick-
ellia, founded on an outlying species of the Atlantic flora, yet mainly a
Texano-Mexican genus. But the Atlantic flora is better supplied, and
with peculiar genera, viz, Sclerolepis, Trilisia, Carphephorus (the South
California species is hardly congeneric), the fine and rather large genus
Liatris, which, however, reaches nearly to the Rocky Mountains and
into Mexico, and Auhnia, which is in the same case. Garberia of Flor-
ida, taken from Liatris, is too southern to be properly counted. The
great genus Hupatorium is also well represented on the Atlantic side,
and here only is the northern extension, in a single species, of the huge
South American genus Mikania.

ASTEROIDE .—Are eminently American, and in no other single dis-
trict are they so numerous as in the belt across the continent which is
under consideration. Aster, Solidago, and Bigelovia are the great genera;
Aplopappus, Chrysopsis, Erigeron, and Townsendia are next in importance.
About four-fifths of the Asters and Solidagos belong to the Atlantic flora,
with some extension into the plains beyond, and there also are more
species and forms (but fewer individuals) of Chirysopsis; the amphigzen
genus Hrigeron has its fullest development and diversification in our west-
ern regions; Aplopappus is divided between our Rocky Mountain flora
(with southward extension and into that of the Pacific) and that of Chili.
Townsendia and Bigelovia are the most characteristic genera of the whole

40 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VL

Rocky Mountain region, although a few species of the latter reach the
Pacific, while the original one belongs to the Atlantic coast. Grindelia
and Gutierrezia are equally characteristic over the plains and quite over
tothe Pacific, and both are sparingly represented in extratropical South
America. Lessingia, Corethrogyne, and Pentacheta are peculiarly Cali-
fornian. Boltonia and the Bellis integrifolia are peculiarly Atlantic.
Baccharis, with an immense development in South America and Mexico,
has penetrated northward on both coasts to about latitude 41°, eastward
in a single, westward in very few species.

INULOIDEZ.—Are sparingly represented in America, and mostly in
the Gnaphalineous type. They are particularly few in the Atlantic flora,
and increase in number and diversification westward.

HELIANTHOIDEZ.—On the contrary, are mostly American, and
largely North American. Here are almost all the true species of Heli-
anthus, the perennials mainly Atlantic, the annuals more western. The
Atlantic flora is characterized by Silphiwn, Chrysogonum, Tetragonotheca,
Echinacea, and the greater part of Rudbeckia and Coreopsis, and it alone
has a Heliopsis ; the eastern plains have Thelesperma (more developed
farther.south, and reproduced in Buenos Ayres!), Hngelmannia, most of
Berlandiera, &c.; the Rocky Mountains, Balsamorrhiza, Wyethia, Helian-
thella, &c., which they share with the Pacific flora; the latter repro-
duces the Coreopsoid type in Leptosyne and Pugiopappus.

GALINSOGEZ and MApIEz.—Being exclusively American (and Ha-
waiian), and more related to the following than to the preceding tribe, de-
serve separate mention. Baldwinia and Marshallia are peculiar to the
Atlantic flora; Blepharipappus to the Pacific. The rest’ are Madiew,
and are specially characteristic of our Pacific flora—are peculiar to it,
indeed, except for the two Hawaiian Island genera, for the extension of
the common Madia into Chili, and for the eastward extension of some
species into the plains. MMadia, Layia, and Hemizonia, in numerous spe-
cies, many of them showy, are predominant Composite in California.

HELENIOIDEZ (including the groups assigned to this tribe by Ben-
tham).—Are specially American, are few in the Atlantic flora (where the
few representatives are all of western types), are more numerous and
characteristic in and towards the Rocky Mountains, while beyond them,
as well as south of them and on the Pacific coast, they attain their fullest
development. We will not enumerate the numerous mostly endemic
genera.

ANTHEMIDE @.—Chiefly of the Old World; would be most insignifi-
cant in North America except for the number of naturalized weeds and
for the remarkable development of species and individuals of Artemisia,
especially of those which compase the Sage-brush on either side of the
Rocky Mountains. These have already been spoken of. For anything —
like this development, as well as of the Chenopodiacez, which accom-
pany the Wormwoods, only corresponding parts of Northern Asia can
be looked to.

No.1.) GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA. 41

SENECIONIDE .—Somewhat equally distributed over the world; offer
little for remark. There is no peculiar type in the Atlantic flora nor
east of the Rocky Mountains, but beyond them Tetradymia and Psathy-
votes are truly characteristic of the Great Basin; Raillardella (the rel-
atives of which are only in the Sandwich or Hawaiian Islands) is pecu-
liar to the high Sierra Nevada, and Luina to the Pacific coast ranges.
Western North America is, morever, the headquarters of Arnica.

CYNAROIDE&.—Are restricted to Cnicus, of which the Atlantic States,
the Rocky Mountains and their accessory western ranges, and the Pa-
cific side of the continent have about an equal and a moderate number
of species (more or less peculiar), and the showy Centawrea Americana,
now well known in cultivation, which inhabits the plains of Arkansas
and Texas.

MUTISIACE& (including all the Bilabiatiflore of De Candolle).—A ffect
the southern hemisphere, but come into a temperate region both in North
America and Asia. In the former most are of the Texano-Arizonian
district—Leria, Trixis, Perezia—and are outliers of the Mexican flora;
but one of the latter genus fairly reaches California, and the original
Chaptalia is of the Atlantic Southern States.

CICHORACE, or the Liguliflorw.—A very moderate number of the
sixty genera are indigenous to North America. Apogon, Krigia, and
Cynthia are peculiar to the Atlantic flora or its borders, Purrhopappus
to this and the nearer parts of Mexico, and Nabalus has only one extra-
neous northwestern species; but the open western country nourishes
the greater part of our representatives of this tribe. From the plains
to the Pacific spreads the genus Troximon, accompanied by Lygodesmia
and Stephanomeria, and even by Malacothrix ; Glyptopleura, Anisocoma,
and mainly Calycoseris are peculiar types in the Great Basin ; and fifteen
species of Malacothrix are peculiar, or nearly so, to the Pacific flora,
which has also Rajinesquia, Apargidium, and Phalacroseris. The paucity
of the large and difficult Old World genus Hieracium in America is a
wonder and a relief to botanists.

LOBELIACE &.—Lobelia is essentially wanting from the Pacific and
the Rocky Mountain floras, but well represented in that of the Atlantic.
Instead, the Pacific flora is characterized by four peculiar genera,
Downingia, Howellia (an aquatic plant of Oregon), Palmerella, and the
curious Nemacladus. It has also a peculiar Lawrentia, which extends
eastward to the Rocky Mountains, where it is the only representative of
the family.

CAMPANULACE@.—Are not numerous; but Campanula has a few
representatives in all three floras (in the interior only on the mountains) ;
Specularia has fewer; and two genera of single species, Githopsis and
Heterocodon, are peculiar to the Pacific flora.

ERICACE A:.—This important order needs to be considered under its
suborders.

VACCINE A3.—In the northern hemisphere affect the eastern side of

42 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [ Vol. VI.

continents. The five species of Gaylussacia (Huckleberries), and the
dozen or more eastern endemic species of Vaccinium, as also the
peculiar genus Chiogenes, sparingly enter even the eastern part of the
Mississippi Valley. Only amphigzan types occur in the Rocky Mount-
ains and in the alpine or alpestrine region. The moister parts of the
Pacific coast nourish two or three species of Vaccinium, but no other
forms; yet all the Atlantic types, except Gaylussacia, occur again in
Northeastern Asia.

ERICINE &.—In North America are not unequally divided between
the Atlantic and Pacific floras; but the interior region has very few,
not one peculiar, and none except upon high mountains or of equivalent
northern range. The Pacific flora is remarkable for having an Arbutus
and ten species of Arctostaphylos of the Mexican type, for its solitary
Leucothoé far away from congeners, its shrubby Gaultheria, and its spe-
cies of Bryanthus; also for the peculiar Ledum which it shares with the
Northern Rocky Mountains. It has one peculiar genus, Cladothamnus.
The specially Atlantic Ericineous genera are Hpigea (yet with a Japan-
ese counterpart), Oxydendrum, Kalmia, Leiophyllum, and Elliottia, this
shared with Japan. This flora is particularly rich in Andromedec of
eight or nine types, and here alone in the temperate zone we find a
Bejaria. Only the counterpart Asiatic region excels it in Rhododendron
and Azalea; yet the Pacific flora has three or four fine representatives
of these. Menziesia in one species oceurs over the breadth of the con-
tinent at the north, adding a second species on the way; thence to
Japan, where there are more.

PYROLINEZ (including Clethra as the type of a peculiar tribe).—The
two species of the latter genus are characteristic in the Atlantic flora;
they are not found west even of the Alleghanies, to which one of them
is restricted. North America is the headquarters of Pyrola and the
related genera, having, nearly all the known species; and the western
floras possess their full share.

MoNnNoTROPEA.—Al|so are strikingly American, notwithstanding the
wide distribution of the typical Monotropa from South America to
Himalaya, and to Europe of Hypopitys. All the genera and species,
except one in Himalaya, occur in North America, and all but the peculiar
Atlantic genus Schweinitzia are in the Pacific flora, to which half the
genera are peculiar.

LENNOACEA —A Mexican group of three genera, having the habit of
Monotropec; has one genus, Pholisma, on the coast of California, and
another very singular one, Ammobroma, Torr., beyond its borders at the
head of the Gulf of California.

DIAPENSIACE A, upon which we have elsewhere dilated, consist of the
arctic-alpine Diapensia Lapponica and a congener in Himalaya, of two
monotypic genera in the Atlantic United States (Pyxidanthera and
Galax), of another (Shortia) divided between the Alleghanies (where it is
apparently verging to extinction) and Japan, of a related genus in the

ra

No.1.) GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA. 43-

latter country, and of another in Tibet. From our western floras it is
totally absent.

PLUMBAGINACE &.—In this country very few, and confined to the sea-
coasts; are not noteworthy.

PRIMULACEA.—Need little mention, most of the genera being amphi-
gean and widely distributed over the country, although few in species,
many of them alpine or alpestrine. The most peculiar genus, Dode-
catheon, spans the continent in very various forms, which seem to be
connected into one species. The true species of Lysimachia are only on
the Atlantic side, and so mainly is the peculiar genius Steironema,
although the commonest species extends northward to the Pacific.

SAPOTACE a@.—Tiis is one of several orders which, although mainly
tropical, have temperate representatives in the Atlantic United States,
where there are at Jeast three species of Bumelia.

EBENACE &.—Arein similar case. Diospyros Virginiana, our Persim-
mon, extends north to latitude 41°, and barely crosses the Mississippi-
A Texan species lies beyond our line. Westward the order is wanting.

STYRACACEA.—Are found on both sides of the continent, but not at
all in the intermediate regions. The order is one of those that affect
the eastern side of continents. Accordingly, the Atlantic flora has
three genera (Symplocos, Halesia, Styrax) and eight species; the Pacifie
flora only a single Styrazx.

OLEACE.A.—Avre fairly well represented in the Atlantic flora by six
or seven species of Fraxvinus, a few of Forestiera, a Chionanthus, and an
Osmanthus ; two species of I’raxinus are the sole representatives in the
Pacific flora. The wide intervening region has none except a Frarinus,
with simple leaves, on the southern border, where also flourish one or
two species of Forestiera and of the Texano-Mexican genus Menodora.

APOCYNACE &.—The two species of Apocynum make a part of all three
floras; the Pacitic has a peculiar genus, Cycladenia ; the Atlantic, a plant
referred to the Northeastern Asian genus Trachelospermum, and Amsonia
(which is also Japanese), the latter reaching the southern borders of
. the Great Basin.

ASCLEPIADACE4—Most of Asclepias is North American, and the spe-
cies, as to number, are not very unequally divided between the three floras,
at least if New Mexico and Arizona be taken into the account. This
southern frontier and the country beyond is rather rich in the order. The
Pacific flora has three species nearly related to Asclepias; one of them
is made the type of a peculiar genus, Schizonotus, the other two are re-
ferred to the chiefly African genus Gomphocarpus. The Atlantic flora
divides with that of the plains up to the Rocky Mountains the genera
Acerates and Aselepiodora, with tropical parts of America the genus
Enslenia, and is also rich in Gonolobus; and it monopolizes the genera
Podostigma and Anantheriz.

LOGANIACE@.—As our species of Buddleia and the genus Hmorya
belong to the Texano-Arizonian region, it may be said that this order

44 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. _ [Vol. VI

is here restricted tothe Atlantic flora. This divides Gelsemium with East-
ern Asia, Spigelia and Polypremum with tropical America, Mitreola with
both.

GENTIANACEZ.—The Gentians, generally most numerous in mount-
ain districts, preponderate in our western floras; yet the Atlantic States
do not lack species. The amphigzan genus Hrythrea is finely repre-
sented in the Pacific flora and in the Texano-Arizonian region, sparingly
in the Rocky Mountain region, while in the Atlantic States there is
probably no indigenous species north and east of Arkansas. Mierocala
has probably reached California from South America. Menyanthes tri-
foliata is all around the northern part of the temperate zone. MM. crista-
galli is one of the few plants which the Pacific flora shares with that of
Japan. The two species of Limnanthemum are strictly Atlantic, and are
connected with tropical species of the eastern side of the continent.
Halenia is at the same time a high-northern and an Andean genus.
Swertia is absent from the Atlantic side of the continent. As to the
peculiarly American genera, the finest is Frasera, with one Atlantic spe-
cies, and a few others both of the Rocky Mountains and of the Pacific
side of the continent. Hustoma reaches from the Texano-Arizonian
region just within our border over to the eastern border of the plains.
Sabbatia, of thirteen species, Bartonia, and Obolaria are wholly peculiar
to the Atlantic flora.

POLEMONIACEA.—Although not wholly absent from Europe and
Northern Asia, compose a truly characteristic American order, and, al-
though half the genera are Mexican and South American, at least nine-
tenths of the species must belong to the United States. Of these, an
equally large proportion adorn the western regions, whether the mount-
ains, the valleys, or the plains, under the various forms of Gilia, Col-
lomia, and Phlox. Yet, to the Atlantic States belong the herbaceous
perennial species of the latter genus, which have longest been known to
botanists.

HYDROPHYLLACEA.—This is more strictly an American, and even
more predominantly a Western North American, order than the pre-
ceding. A very large part of our species and forms inhabit the Rocky
Mountain region, chiefly its plains and valleys, and fewest the At-
lantic region. No genus is restricted to the latter, though into it only
extends the southern Hydrolea; into the lower parts of the intermediate
regions extends the mainly Texano-Mexican genus Nama ; to it belongs
Conanthus, Tricardia, and essentially Lemmonia ; to it and to the Pacific
flora belong Hmmenanthe, Hesperochiron, Eriodictyon ; to the Pacific
flora alone belong Draperia and Romanzoffia.

BOBRAGINACE#%.—This is a larger order, and is found all over the
world. The tribes or suborders other than the Borragee hardly come
at all within our limits, excepting two or three species of Heliotropiwm,
one of which is very characteristic of the plains east of the Rocky Mount-
ains (viz, H. convolvulaceum, the Euploca of Nuttall, and it has also

No 1.) GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA. 45

been found in the Great Basin), and excepting the Tiquilia section of
Coldenia, which extends to the northwestern verge of the interior wood-
less region. The genera and species are few in the Atlantic flora. Its
only characteristic genus is Onosmodium ; the yellow-flowered and showy
Tithosperma of the section Batschia it shares with the plains. The great
genus of the whole Rocky Mountain flora, though shared with the Pa-
_ cific, is Hritrichium ; the characteristic genus of the Pacifie flora, of which
its neighbor takes a part, is Amsinckia. Mertensia has most of its spe-
cies in the Rocky Mountains and their accessories, yet the finest of them
is M, Virginica, peculiar. to the Atlantic States. Pectocarya may have
been brought from Chili to California. Some peculiar genera of the
Arizonian flora are hardly within, our scope.
-CONVOLVULACEA:.—There are no peculiar genera in. North, America,
and, nothing notable, in distribution. Phere, are many more Atlantic:
ve Pacific species.

SoLANACE2:,—As to truly indigenous species, are few north and east of
Texas, and, not, numerous through the western portions of the country.
Physalis is the largest. genus. The only peculiar genera are Chamesa-
racha and the very little known. Oryctes, neither of salient character,
both of the interior region. Into the southern part of the Rocky Mount-
ains. extend, from Mexico two,species or forms of the Potato type.

SCROPHULARIACE.E. —North America has 37 indigenous genera of
this. very large. order, several of them numerous in species. They are
fewest. in the Atlantic flora, which yet has some peculiar genera, and it
is noteworthy that only one of them (Schwalbea) is of near affinity to:
Japano-Himalayan types. Throughout, the types which are not distinct-
ively American are rather European, Mimulus, however, being an ex-
ception. Thus, in California there is a remarkable development of the:
genus Antirrhinum. Of the several tribes, there is one which is particu-
larly characteristic of the Atlantic flora, namely, that which contains.
Gerardia (of over 20 species), and is augmented by Macranthera, Sey-
meria, and Buchnera. Some species abound on the eastern part of the
plains, but none reach the Rocky Mountains or appear in the country
beyond them. Of genera which are sparingly represented in the At-
lantic flora or near its borders, and are in fuller strength westward, the
more characteristic are Collinsia, and the great genus Ventstemon, with
about 4 species at the east and nearly 40 in the Pacific flora; Mimulus,
with 3 Atlantic and at least 23 Pacific species; Synthyris; Castelleia,
with 3 or 4 Atlantic and about 20 western species ; Orthocarpus with one
species on the northeastern plains and 24 in the western floras, chietly
on the Pacific side, while its relatiyes in Cordylanthus add halt as many
more. So Began is, with only 2 Atlantic species, increases westward
to over 20.

OROBANCHACEA.—The four North American genera are wholly dis-
tinct from the European, and from the Asian also, except for an Eastern
Asian species of Boschniakia. Here also, although two of the genera

A6 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VI.

are wholly Atlantic and one is divided (Aphyllon), the Pacific species
are more than twice the number of the Atlantic.

LENTIBULACE&.—Both Utricularia and Pinguicula are of good num-
ber and diversity in the Atlantic flora, are nearly absent from the Rocky
Mountain flora, and are very few on the Pacific side.

BiGNONIACE@.—For a mainly tropical order, are pretty well repre-
sented in the Atlantic flora by four species belonging to three genera
(and the most distinct genus, Catalpa, alsoin Japan and Northern China),
but would be wholly absent from the western floras except for a Mexican
shrub (Chilopsis) which reaches the southern borders of the Great
Basin.

PEDALIACEZ.—Are sparingly represented in the Texano-Arizonian
region, but probably are not indigenous to the north of it.

ACANTHACE Z.—An immense tropical and subtropical order, but prob-
ably without a single representative in the Rocky Mountain or Pacific
floras within our limits, yet with severalin the Texano-Arizonian district.
But the Atlantic flora has an Hlytraria and Hygrophila, one or two.
species of Calophanes, as many of Ruellia and of Dianthera, a Dicliptera,
and a plant of a peculiar genus, Gatesia.

VERBENACE®.—Of the eleven genera enumerated in the flora of
North America, only four are of such northern range as to come within
our limits. Verbena and Iippia enter into all three floras. Callicarpa
and Phryma are restricted to the Atlantic flora and to a solitary species.
Both the latter are Eastern Asian, the Phryma in the same species.

LABIAT&.—A large and important order, but after excluding the
naturalized plants and those which range south of the present survey,
neither the American species nor the genera are particularly numerous,
nor is their distribution such as to call for much remark. They are
most conspicuous in the Pacific forest in the Rocky Mountain region,
most diversified in genera in the Atlantic States. Of the North Ameri-
can types, Physostegia, Lophanthus, Pycnanthenum, and Trichostema are
common to both sides of the continent, the latter most largely on the Pa-
cific; the latter numerously on the Atlantic side, with a single Californian
species far away from its congeners. .The peculiar Atlantic genera are
Isanthus, Cunila, Collinsonia, Oonradina, Ceranthera, Blephilia, Monarda
(which extends into the Rocky Mountains), Brazoria, Macbridea, Synan-
dra. The Pacific peculiar genera are only Monardella, Pogogyne, Acan-
thomintha, Audibertia, the first and the last extending eastward to the
Rocky Mountains in single species. Hedeoma is a remaining character-
istic genus, with headquarters in the Texano-Mexican district, extending
over the eastern plains, and one species to the Atlantic. The great
genus Salvia is meager on both sides of the continent, almost absent
from the interior, except on the eastern plains toward the south, but
fairly numerous in species throughout the Texano-Arizonian region.

PLANTAGINACEA.—Are few in species. Plantago Patagonica, which
abounds on the plains and on the Pacific coast southward, is very poly-

No. 1.1 GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA. 47

morphous and of immense geographical range. It is worth noting here
that the other genus, Littorella, till now supposed to be wholly European,
has been detected at three or four stations within and near the northern
borders of the United States.

NYCTAGINACE@.—Are essentially absent from the Atlantie flora,
abundant in the Texano-Arizonian; are represented by Oxybaphus on
the plains east of the Rocky Mountains and by Abronia beyond them;
also by Quamoclidion or Mirabilis with several-flowered calciform invo-

_Iuere. The Great Basin has a peculiar genus, Hermidiwm of S. Wat-
son, allied to Bougainvillwa of South America, but herbaceous.

AMARANTACE Ai (weeds excluded).—Are chiefly of the Rocky Mount-
ain region in its warmer and drier parts. Acnida, however, is more
eastern.

_ CHENOPODIACE.—Are of similar distribution, but far more numer-
ous and diverse. They are the most characteristic and abundant of the
plants of the dry interior region, as has been elsewhere stated, and
‘they naturally extend into the Pacific flora more than into the Atlantic.
Atriplex is the great genus. Grayia and Sarcobatus are the endemic
shrubby genera. Spirostachys is of an extratropical South American
type. Cycloloma and Suckleya are herbs peculiar to the eastern plains.
PHYTOLACCACE&.—Are represented only in the Atlantic flora, and
by asingle Phytolacca, Rivina belonging farther south.
“POLYGONACE4@.—The genuine Polygonee on the Atlantic and Pacific
sides by Polygonum and Rumex, and by Polygonella in the southern part
of the former; and there are a few in the interior, where Rwmex venosus
is a characteristic plant. But the most characteristic plants of the two
western floras, and the most numerous in species, if not in individuals,
are the Hriogonece. The genus Lriogonum, founded at the beginning of
the century upon the single-known and still the only Atlantic species,
now comprises nearly 100 species in our western floras, and the subsid-
iary genera (Oxytheca, Centrostegia, Chorizanthe, Nemacaulis, Hollisteria,
and Lastarreia, all mainly Californian, and three of them also Chilian)
about three score more. Pterostegia, of California, proves to be most
related to the arctic-alpine Kenigia. Another type is represented in
the southern part of the Atlantic flora by the peculiar genus Brunnichia.
PODOSTEMACEZ.—Aquatic plants of tropical or subtropical rivers,
mostly of the southern hemisphere. A single Podostemon, on which
the genus and order were founded, belongs to the Atlantic United States.
Its congeners are all in Brazil, Madagascar, and India!

ARISTOLOCHIACE Ai.—Absent from the whole intermediate region,
there are three species of Asarwm in the Atlantic and three others in
the Pacific flora; three of Aristolochiain the former and one in the latter.

PIPERACEZ, tribe Saururee.—A Saururus in the Atlantic flora, the

only other one Chino-Japanese; a Houttuynia (if not a good genus,
Anemiopsis) in California and thence to Mexico; its relatives also East
African.

48 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. (Vou. VI.

LAURACEA.—Mainly tropical or subtropical all around the world,
yet there are three genera in the Atlantic flora (one, Sassafras, a fine
tree, and all of Asiatic affinities) and a peculiar one in California.

THYMEL ACE Z.—Most developed in the southern hemisphere. In
North America is only Dirca, one species in the Atlantic flora, the other,
very local, in the Californian.

ELZAGNACE.—Two of the three genera of this little order are North ~
American. The two species of Shepherdia nearly traverse the continent
at the north, and a third species has been discovered on the southern
rim of the Great Basin. An Eleagnus belongs to Rocky Mountain region.

LORANTHACEZ.—Are represented by two genera, allied to Viscum.
Phoradendron is peculiar to America. The common species in some its of
forms traverses the continent; another belongs to the Californian dis-
trict. and adjacent parts; the others are more southern. Arceuthobium
is amphigzan, of three or four American species, mostly Pacific or south-
ern, one.sparingly represented in the Northern Atlantic States.

SANTALACE@.—Are most largely of the southern hemisphere. The ©
distribution of our four genera is interesting. Comandra, consists of. a
European species, two North American ones, which traverse the conti-
nent northward, and a fourth, which belongs mainly to the Rocky
Mountain region southward. Buckleya consists of an Atlantic (Alle-
ghanian) species and one in Japan; Darbya of a single and local Atlan-
tic species, of some ambiguity, because the female plant is unknown;
Pyrularia of an Alleghanian species and a Himalayan.

EUPHORBIACE&.—An immense order of 3,000 species and, at the least,
200 genera. The world-wide and prolific genus Huphorbia is very mod-
erately represented in the Atlantic flora, sparingly in the Pacific, numer-
ously in the drier parts of the intermediate country, especially south-
ward. The other large and non-peculiar genera are mainly southern in

‘range. Peculiar genera are very few—Hremocarpus in the Pacific flora 5.
Crotonopsis in the Atlantic. Of the Buxinew, there is Simmondsia on the
Californian coast, of Wo near affinity; Pachysandra, in the Alleghanies,.
which has a congener in Japan.

EMPETRACE @.—Have all three genera in the Atlantic flora, and not
elsewhere—Hmpetrum alpine and northern ; Corema on the coast of the:
United States, the other species on the opposite Atlantic coast in Ror-
tugal; Ceratiola in the Southern Atlantic States.

CERATOPHYLLEA.—Probably of a single species, amphigzan, both
Atlantic and Pacific.

URTICACEZ.—Taken in the large sense, may be referred to under
their suborders.

UrtTIicEa.—Are few on either side of the continent, nearly absent |
from the Rocky Mountains and Great Basin, an Urtica or two, and the:
same of Parietaria ;-Hesperocnide is divided between California and the
Hawaiian Islands; Laportea, of the Atlantic States, has its congeners.
mainly in Hastern Asia. The solitary North American Pilea is confined.
to the Atlantic States, and the same of Behmeria.

No.1.) GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA. 49

ULMACEa.—There are four fine Elm trees in the Atlantic flora, and
one farther southwest, also the Planera; none of these in the Rocky
Mountain or the Pacific floras; Celtis, either a form of the common
eastern or a peculiar species, extends into the Rocky Mountains and even
to Oregon.

CANNABINE 4.—The common Hop of the Old World is indigenous in
the Atlantic States and in the Rocky Mountains; the other species is
Chino- Japanese.

Morria.—Morus rubra is of the Atlantic States, extending far south-
ward and thence westward, perhaps passing into a small-leaved species.
Maclura aurantiaca, the Osage Orange, belongs to the northwestern bor-
ders of the Atlantic district. None in the western floras.

PLATANACE &@.—There is one Atlantic and one Californian Platanus ;
but none intervening, except on the Mexican borders.

LEITNERIE2.—The anomalous Leitneria, of Florida, is of a single spe-
cies, of wholly obscure affinity.

JUGLANDACE®.—Juglans cinerea and J. nigra or the Walnut trees
of the Atlantic flora, J. California of the Pacific; Carya is of seven
species, restricted to the Atlantic flora.

CUPULIFER &.—Are most fully represented in the Atlantic flora, are
prominent in the Pacific flora, but are wanting in the whole interior
region, excepting a Scrub Oak or two on the Rocky Mountains and their
accessories. There are twenty-one Oaks, two Chestnuts, and a Beech in
the Atlantic flora; nine Oaks and a Castanopsis in the Pacific flora;
one Oak in the Rocky Mountain flora, or perhaps more than one; and
two or three others in the district between it and Mexico.

CoRYLACE&.—An Ostrya and a Carpinus and two species of Corylus
represent this group in the Atlantic flora. The two western floras want
all but one of the latter, which traverses the continent.

BETULACE@.—Are represented in the Atlantic flora by seven Birches
and three Alders. One of the smaller Birches and perhaps one of the
Alders, extends over to the Pacific flora, along with another Rocky
Mountain Birch, and two or three Alders are added.

MyRICACEa.—The amphigzan Myrica Gale is of the Atlantic flora;
one very like it in the Pacific. Of the Bayberry Myrice, there are one
or two on the Atlantic, and another on the Pacific coast. The Comp-
tonia is peculiar to the Atlantic flora.

SALICINE &.—There are about fifteen Willows indigenous to the At-
lantic States, nineteen in the Californian flora, very few of them iden-
tical; the Rocky Mountains have a few of these and one or two more of
alpine type. There are six Poplars in the Atlantic States; three or four
in California and Oregon; one or two in the intermediate country, be-
sides P. tremuloides, which, passing along the mountains, is common to
all three floras.

The Gymnospermee may best be exibited under the particular groups.

GNETACEA.—Ephedra, the only extratropical genus, is absent from

4GB

50 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.V1.

the Atlantic flora, has three or four species in the Texano-Arizonian
region, two of which enter the Great Basin, and one belongs to the
southern part of California.

TAXINEZ are absent from the Rocky Mountain flora. The Atlantic
flora has the depressed Taxus Canadensis at the north, and an upright
arborescent and perhaps peculiar species in the northern part of Florida.
There is a similar one in the woods of the Pacific side of the continent.
The Atlantic flora possesses the original Torreya; California another ;
the two remaining species are of Northeastern Asia.

CUPRESSINEa.—The amphigzean Juniperus communis traverses the
continent at the north; and a prostrate form of J. Sabina probably does
the same; also J. Virginiana, the eastern Red Cedar. But on a south-
ern range the latter species hardly passes out of the Atlantic region.
J. occidentalis and J. Californica are the characteristic species of the
mountiuins bordering and traversing the southern part of the Great Basin
and of California. Cupressus is wanting to the Atlantic and to the
Rocky Mountain floras, but there are three species in the Pacific flora.
Chamecyparis is of one species in the Atlantic flora, two in the Pacific,
the remainder in Japan. Thwa is of two species, one of the Atlantic
flora, the other of the Pacific and of Japan. JLibocedrus is represented
by a peculiar species only in the Pacific flora.

TAXODINEX.—Of Taxodium distichum, in the Atlantic flora; Sequoia.
gigantea and S. sempervirens, the Big Trees and Redwoods, in California.

ABIETINE &.—Are more numerous in North America than elsewhere.
Like the preceding, they prefer the sides to the center of the continent,
yet are not wanting to the mountains of the latter. Pinus is represented
in the Atlantic flora by twelve species; in the Rocky Mountains and
those of the Great Basin by six different species, not counting those of
Arizona; in the Pacitie flora by eleven species, four of which are in the
preceding flora. Larix has a single Atlantic and two Pacific species,
one or both of which occur in the Northern Rocky Mountains. Picea, the
Spruces, two in the Atlantic, two others in the Rocky Mountain, and two
in the Pacific flora, one of the latter a Rocky Mountain species. Tsuga,
one (Hemlock Spruce) in the Atlantic, and one almost the same in the
Pacific flora, which has also the peculiar T. Pattoniana or Williamsonii.
Pseudotsuga Douglasii, of the Pacific and the Rocky Mountain flora, most
abundant in Oregon. Abies, the Firs or Balsam. Firs, two in the At-
lantic, two in the Rocky Mountain, and four or five in the Pacific flora,
one of them common ?

CYCADACE&.—Being represented only by a Zamia on the peninsular
part of Florida, are beyond our limit.

The monocotyledonous orders must be more briefly dispatched.

PALME #.—Are represented on the Atlantic coast and north of the —
Florida peninsula by four species in two genera. Three species in two
genera are described in the Botany of California; but two of them are
known only beyond the United States boundary; the other belongs
properly to the Arizonian flora.

No.1] 'GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MJUNTAIN FLORA. Dl

ARACEA.—Absent from the whole interior region; represented by
seven genera in the Atlantic flora, of which Peltandra and Orontiwm
are peculiar, and Symplocarpus, except that it is reproduced in Japan;
on the Pacific coast only a relative of the latter, Lysichiton, of which the
same species occurs in Japan.

LEMNACEZ, TYPHACE2.—Both nearly the same on the two sides of
‘the continent.

NAIADACEa.—In similar case, except that the Pacific coast adds
Lilea and Phyllospadix.

- ALISMACEZ:.—Not dissimilar, except that the Atlantic flora has sey-
eral species of Sagittaria and the Pacific only one, but it has the Euro-
pean type of Damasonium.

HYDROCHARIDACEH.—The Atlantic flora possesses Zimnobium and
Vallisneria as well as Anacharis; the Pacific, only Anacharis; the
intermediate region none.

BURMANNIACE.—Two Atlantic genera and species of South Amer-
ican affinity ; none in the western floras.

ORCHIDACEH.—Are much fewer in the Pacific flora than in the
Atlantic, and are wanting in the intermediate region, except on the
mountains, and there in mostly amphigzean species. The Atlantic flora
has the peculiar genera Tipularia and Arethusa (but the latter is in
Japan), and some peculiar Habenaric ; the Pacific possesses two Euro-
pean genera, Cephalanthera and LEpipactis, but the latter is also in
Texas, and an Huropean species of it has recently been detected in the
State of New York.

CANNACEZ.—Two genera and three species in the southern part of
the Atlantic flora only.

AMARYLLIDACEH.—Are represented in the Atlantic flora by five
genera, none of them peculiar, and several species. There are none in
the two western floras except Agave, and those of Mexican type, and
only along the southern border.

H#MODORACE#.—Three genera, all strictly peculiar to the Atlantic
States.

BROMELIACE &.—Tillandsia only along the Atlantic coast; one spe-
cies north to Virginia; others in Florida and its northern border.

IRIDACEH.—Two peculiar genera in the Atlantic flora or its borders,
besides Lris and Sisyrinchiwm, which are more numerous in the Pacific
flora; the former along the mountains between.

DIOSCOREACEH.—A single Dioscorea, in the Atlantic flora only.

SmiLACEzs.—A dozen species of Smilax in the Atlantic flora; one of
them barely reaches the Rocky Mountains; a single and ferabed species
in California.

ROXBURGHIACEA.— Oroomia, asingle species, in the Southern Atlantic
States; a close congener in Japan; all other relatives Asiatic.

LiL1AcE.a.—Here taken in the extended sense, are largely represented
{by twenty-four genera) in the Atlantic flora; are not very few in the

52 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.vI.

Rocky Mountain region, yet of few genera; and are remarkably devel-
oped and diversified in the Pacific flora, which has thirty-three genera,
several of them peculiar. Only eleven of the forty North American
genera are European, but several of those otherwise peculiar are shared
with Eastern Asia, especially the Melanthiee. The characteristic feat-
ures of the Liliaceous vegetation of the two western floras are given by
the endemic genera, Brodiwa and relatives, Leucocrinum, Chlorogalum,
Calochortus, &e., by Yucca, which is also Atlantic, and by the great
development of the genus Alliwm, exceeded only in Northern Asia.

JUNCACE4.—Are numerous and well distributed over the continent,
but require no special remark.

PONTEDERIACE&.—Tropical aquatics, except the three genera of the
Atlantic flora, one of which (Schollera) reappears in its single species.
on the Pacific coast.

CoMMELYNACE&.—Also mainly tropical; are represented by two
genera and several species in the Atlantic flora; one or two of these
barely reach the Rocky Mountains southward; all are absent from the
Pacific flora.

XYRIDACE Al.— Mayaca, a South American aquatic, and sixteen spe-
cies of Yyris are characteristic of the Atlantic flora; are wanting to the
others.

HRIOCAULONEA.—Chiefly Atlantic South American; are of three
genera and several species in the Atlantic flora, but none at all western.
The remarkable thing is that the most northern Hriocaulon has effected
a lodgment on the coast of the British Islands.

CYPERACEZ.—The number of species and genera in the Atlantic
flora is nearly double that of the Pacific, and the Rocky Mountain flora.
has few.

GRAMINEZ, which would be well worth a particular analysis, are more
equally AVtee, at least as to genera. Of these the western floras have
many, chietly of Texano-Arizonian and Mexican types, which are un-
known at the east. The Atlantic flora possesses a few peculiar genera,
Zizania, Brachyelytrum, Monanthochloa, Hydrochloa, Ctenium, Oryzopsis,
Graphephorum, Diarrhena (reproduced in Japan’), Gymnostichum, Trip-
sacum. —

It is hardly worth while to extend this survey into the Cryptogamia,
even to the Ferns.

“The subjoined tabular view of the Phznogamous orders presents to
the eye some of the facts which the preceding pages have brought out.
as regards respectively their presence or absence or their relative im-
portance in the three floras which we have been comparing. The name in
full capitals indicates that the order or group has its headquarters in the
flora of that column. Small capitals indicate a full or a notable tepre- -
sentation, at least comparatively. The name in ordinary Roman letters
indicates a more or less considerable representation ; in italic type, a
less or scanty representation ; the initial with a dash (as N in the

No.1.) GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA. 53

sixth line), indicates a feeble representation ; the blank means that the
order is not indigenous to that flora. Thus, the second, third, and fourth
orders are not represented, so far as we know, in the Rocky Mountain and
the Pacific floras, 7. ¢., they do not extend westward beyond the Atlantic
forest region. The next line declares that the order Berberidacee is,
considering the size of the order (in this instance small), richly repre-
sented in the Atlantic flora, sparingly in that of the Rocky Mountains
(inclusive of the plains on the east and the desert basin on the west),
more numerously in that of the Pacific district. Nympheacee are in the
same case, having very full generic representation in the Atlantic flora
but hardly any in that of the Rocky Mountains, and a little more on the
Pacific side of the continent. Sarraceniacece take full capitals in the first
column, not that the species or types are numerous, but because the
few and remarkable Sarracenias represent the whole order, excepting
two species; one of them is in California, and the Pacific column is en-

tered accordingly,

general way it tells the story.

Such a presentation is only approximate, but in a

Crassulacer.
-DROSER ACE.

Crassulacee.

D

|
| Pacific Flora.

Atlantic Flora. Rocky Mountain Flora.
Ranunculacez. Ranunculacezx. | Ranunculacee.
MAGNOLIACER.
Anonacez.
Menispermacez.
BERBERIDACEE. Berberidacee. Berberidacesz.
NYMPH ACER. Nympheacee.
SARRACENTACEA. Sarraceniacee.
Papaveracez. 12 PAPAVERACEE.
ariacee. Fumariacec. Fumariacez.
‘Crucifere. Crucifere. Crucifere.
Capparidacez, CLEOME. Capparidacez, CLEOMEZ. Capparidacer, Cleomess,
Cistacezx. C :
Violacex. _ Violacece. Violacez.
Polygalacez. :
K Saas & Krameriacee. K A
Frankeniaces. Frankeniacex.
Caryophyllacez. Caryophyllacez. Caryophyllacess
ILLECEBRACE. Tlecebracez. Illecebracece.
Portulacacee. PORTULACACER. PORTULACACEZ
Elatinacezr. Elatinacez. Elatinaceer.
HYPERICACER. Hypericacee.
Ternstremiaceex.
Malvacezr. Malvacez. Malvacez.
Bombacez.
Tiliacee.
Linacee. Tinacee. Linacee.
Zygophyllacec.
-Geraniacee proper. Geraniacee. Geraniacee.
Limnanthes. LIMNANTHEZ.
Oxalidee. Ozalidee. Oxalidece.
Balsaminex.
Rutacex. R——. R
CYRILLEE.
Aquifoliacer.
-Celastraceex. C ‘ Oelastracee.
Rhamnacex. Rhamnacex. RHAMNACER.
VITACER. 5 Vitacee.
SAPINDACEZ. Sapindacee. Sapindacee.
ANACARDIACEX. Anacardiacee. Anacardiacesr.
PAPILIONACER. Papilionacez. PAPILIONACEZ,
Cesalpinez. i
Mimosee. Mimosee.
‘Chrysébalanec.
yedalex. Amygdalee. Amygdalee.
Rosacex propria. Rosacex. Rosacex.
Pome. Pomee, Pomee.
CALYCANTHACEZ. Calycanthacee.
SAXIFRAGACEZ. Saxifragacex. | SAXIFRAGACER.

Crassulacex.
D

54 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.Vz.

Atlantic Flora.

Hamamelides.
Haloragez.
_Melastomacex.
Lythracez.
Onagracez.

Turneracee.
Passifloracex.
Cucurbitacee.
Oactacee.
Ficoidee.
Umbelliterz.
Araliacez.
Cornacez.
Caprifoliacex.
Rubiacezx.
Valerianacez.
Vernoniaces.
Kupatoriaces.
Asteroidex.
Inuloidec.
Helianthoidex.
Galinsogec.

Helenioidee.
Anthemidee.
Senecionidee.
_ Cynaroidee.
Mutisiacee.
Cichoracee.
Lobeliacex.
OCampanulacee.
VACCINE.
ERICINE.
PYROLINEZ.
MONOTROPES.

DIAPENSIACEA.
Plumbaginaeece.
Primulacez.
Sapotacce.
Ebenacee.
Styracacez.
Oleacez.
Apocynacez.
Asclepiadaces.
Loganiacece.
Gentianacez.
Polemoniacez.
Hydrophyllacee.
Borraginacee.
Convolvulacez.
Solanacee.
Scrophulariacex.
Orobanchacex.
Lentibulacez.
Bignoniacez.
Acanthacez.
Verbenacez.
Labiate.
Plantaginacee.

Amarantacee.
Phytolaccacec.

Polygonacez, proper.

Podostemacee.
Aristolochiaceze.
Saururee.
Lauracee.
Thymeleacec.
Eleagnacee.
Loranthacec.
SANTALACEA.
Huphorbiacee.
EMPETRACE.
Urticee.
Ulmacee.
Cannabiner.
Moree.
Platanacez.
LEITNERIEA.
JUGLANDACEZ.
CUPULIFERZ.

Rocky Mountain Flora.

H—.

L
ONAGRACER.
LOASACEA.

Cucurbitacee.
CACTACER.
Ficoidee.
UMBELLIFERZ.

Cornacee.
Caprifoliacee.
Rubiacee.
Valerianacece.

Hupatoriacee.
Asteroide.
Inuloidec.

| Helianthoidex.

Madiee.
HELENIOIDER.
Anthemidezx.
Senecionidex.
Cynaroidee.
Mutisiacee.
Cichoraceez.
Lobeliacee.
Campanulacec.
Vaecinee.
Bricinee.
Pyrolinee.
Monotropec.

12 a
Primulacezx.

O

Apocynacee.

Asclepiadacesx.

Gentianacex.
POLEMONIACES.

HYDROPHYLLACEA.

Borraginacee.
Convolvulacece.
Solanacece.
SCROPHULARIACES.
OROBANCHACE.
B——_.

A ‘:
Verbenacee.
Labiate.
Plantaginacece.
Nyctaginacez.
Amarantacee.

POLYGONACEA.
ERIOGONEZ.

Elzagnacez.
Loranthacece.
Santalacece.
Buphorbiacee.

v——.
U :
Cannabinec.

Pacific Flora.

H——.

L——.
ONAGRACEA.
Loasacez.

Cucurbitacee.
Cactaceze.

UMBELLIFERA.
Araliacee.
Cornacess.
Caprifoliacec:
Rubiacee.
Valerianacesz.

Eupatoriacex.
Asteroidec.
TInuloidess.
Helianthoidee.
G

MADIEA.
HELENIOIDE.
Anthemides.
Senecionidee.
Cynaroidece.
Cichoracee.
LOBELIACE.
Campanulacee.
Vaccinee.
Ericinez.
Pyrolinee.
MONOTROPEZ.
Lennoacez.

Plumbaginacee.
Primulacee.

Ss 4
Oleacee.
Apocynacee.
Asclepiadaceee.

Gentianacee.
POLEMONIACEA,

| HYDROPHYLLACEA.

Borraginaceer.
Convolvulacece.
Solanacee.
SCROPHULARIACEZ.
Orobanchaceer.

A :
Verbenacee.
Labiate.
Plantaginacee.
Nyctaginaces.

| Amarantacec.

POLYGONACEE

| ERIOGONEZ.

Aristolochiacex.
Saurureze.
Lauracec.

| Thymeleacece.
| Eleagnacec.

Loranthacee.

| Santalacece.
| Huphorbiacec.

| Urticece. .

Platanacez.

Juglandacee.
Cupulifers.

No.1.) GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA, 55

Atlantic Flora. Rocky Mountain Flora. Pacific Flora,
Corylacez. Cc A Cc :
BETULACER. Betulacece. Betulacesx.
Myricaces. Myricacee.

icinex. Salicinee. Salicines.
Gnetaces. Gnetacee.
Taxinex. : Taxiner.
Cupressines. Oupressinee. CUPRESSINEZ.
Taxodinesx. Taxodines.
' Abietines. Abietinece. ABIETINER.
Palmee. Palmee.
Araces. Aracee.
Lemnacez. L——. Lemnacen.
pyRnecer. Typhacee. Typhacesx.
ismaces. A: - Alismaces.
Hydrocharidaceax. .
Burmanniacex.
Oannacec.
Orchidaces. Orchidacee. Orchidaces.
Amaryllidacez.
Hemodoracen.
Bromeliacec.
Tridacex. Tridacee. Iridaces.
Dioscoreacece.
Roxburghiacesx.
Smilacez. S - Smilacece.
Liliacee. Liliacex. LILiAckz&.
Juncaces. Juncacez. Juncaces.
Pontederiaces.
Xyridacex.
Eriocaulones.
CYPERACER. Oyperacee. Cyperaces.
Graminez. Gramines. Graminez.

The groups in this tabulation, it will be observed, have not all the
rank of orders. Such as they are, the—

2 SISO TNO ae AAs Oe eee Meee i Merc Rey rk ea 156
Rocky Mountain flora (in most extensive semse)....---..--------- 112
Te SoMTEG TOI) obi elorge eo ae se Sie aetna eect ear a se 5 Sa, eee

But of the groups very slightly represented there is only one in the
first, while there are twenty-four in the Rocky Mountain flora and fifteen
in the Pacific. If these be omitted the greater diversification of the At-
lantic flora will be the more apparent—

Atlantic orders or groups..........-- Beeb teen At aah EEE ease IS 155
Rocky Mountain............ Eheveh rate a. RT soe NOSE MP eT aS ar 88
LEE SVE vere eps yb anes ae IN le Ni el aa ea de NS oy) ASE,

As to the numerical extent, respectively, of these three great divisions
of the United States flora, exactness would be attainable only through
much labor; and an approximation is nearly as valuable as would be a
close count from present and still changing data. Mann’s Catalogue of
the Phzenogamous Plants of the United States east of the Mississippi,
may be taken for the Atlantic flora, excluding for our purpose the intro-
duced species and those of the Florida peninsula. The official Botany
of California, mainly by S. Watson, now just completed, includes or men-
tions the greater part of the Pacific species and genera, but includes
many which, though indigenous to that State or near its borders, really
pertain only to the flora of the interior basin. Mr. Watson’s careful
elaboration of the botany of this basin and its borders, presented in his
volume (V.) of Clarence King’s Explorations and Surveys on the For-
- tieth Parallel, sums up and analyzes the vegetation of this distriet; but

56 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. (Vol. VI.

for the proper Rocky Mountains and the eastern plains no such summary
is at hand, although Porter and Coulter’s Flora of Colorado has brought
together some of the materials.

We may estimate that the Atlantic flora north of the thirtieth parallel
(and wholly excluding Texas) consists of 850 Phenogamous genera and
3,400 species; that the Pacific flora as now known does not exceed 620
genera and 3,000 species. Mr. Watson ten years ago had knowledge of
1,235 species in 439 genera (and 84 orders) in the Great Basin and the
adjacent Wahsatch and Uinta Mountains. If the ratio of genera and
species to orders is the same as in the Atlantic States, the whole Rocky
Mountain flora, from its eastern plains to the Sierra, and within the
designated parallels of latitude, would contain about 480 genera and
1,930 species; and this is probably not far from the mark.

The botanist will see at a glance the principal contrasts between the
Atlantic and Pacific floras. The Atlantic is the region of round-headed
and deciduous-leaved trees; the Pacific of spire-shaped, evergreen,
Coniferous trees; and the Rocky Mountain forest is of the same type as
that of the Pacific, only on a diminished scale, and with the more strik-
ing forms left out.

The Atlantic flora has almost three times as many genera and four
times as many species of non-Coniferous trees as the Pacific, but it has
rather fewer genera and almost one-half fewer species of Coniferous
trees than the Pacific.

The forest of the Atlantic States is, with one exception (that of North-
eastern Asia), much the most diversified, 7. ¢., the richest in genera and
orders, as well as species, of any other temperate region. That of the
Pacific is one of the least diversified, except for its Conifere. Both
together are remarkable for the persistence in them of certain peculiar
archeological types of the latter, namely, Taxodiwm and Torreya on the
Atlantic side, Torreya, Libocedrus, and, above all, Sequoia, on the Pacific.

The Atlantic forest is of no inferior grandeur; few parts of the north-
ern hemisphere equal it in the stateliness of its trees, but the grandeur
of the Pacific forest growth as to Coniferous trees is wholly unequaled.

These points have been brought out in a discourse by the present
writer (entitled Forest Geography and Archeology), which was pub-
lished in the American Journal of Science and Arts, ser. 3, xvi, 1878,
and which, having been prepared in view of this report, it is proposed
to append ane more important portions of it.

There are certain orders or groups in which the diversification of
types and the number of forms in the Pacific flora much surpasses that
of the Atlantic, and it is to these that the salient features of the former
are mainly to be attributed; and in referring to these, the western
interior flora, sharing in these features, may be taken with the Pacific
flora proper.

The largest of all the Phenogamous orders, the Composite, used to be
reckoned as constituting a tenth part of the Phenogamous vegetation

No.1] GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA. 57

of the world and an eighth part of that of North America. It forms
fully an eighth part of the Atlantic flora. It appears to form between
a sixth and aseventh part of the species in the district west of the Rocky
Mountains, and a still larger proportion of the genera. Here are found
most of the Helenioidew and almost all the Madiew, and of the other
tribes there is no lack, except of Vernoniacew.

The Scrophulariacec are far more conspicuous and preponderant on the
western side of the continent, not so much, if atall, in genera, but vastly
in the number of species. This is mainly owing to the wonderful devel-
opment of certain genera (Pentstemon, Mimulus, Castilleia, Orthocarpus), -
as has been already stated.

The Polemoniacee form an even more marked feature, the western
flora having more genera, indeed five times as many forms and five times
as many species as the eastern.

‘The Hydrophyllacew are in nearly a similar case; the Borraginacee
approach to it, and so do the Chenopodiacee.

The Hriogonee, however, claim the first rank; considering the num-
ber of the species and the distribution of the group, no other group of
ordinal or subordinal rank is so completely characteristic of Western
North American botany as this.

Finally, as to the Liliacew (in the extended sense), although the At-
lantie flora is rich in them, yet the Pacific region considerably surpasses
it in the number of genera, and largely surpasses it in the number of
Species and in the conspicuousness of the flowers.

JOR
NORTH AMERICAN TYPES IN SOUTH AMERICA.

The botany of the southern part of the eastern great plain of the
interior arid district, and of Southern California, merges in that of the
Texano-Arizonian belt, and.this into that of the Mexican plateau. It is
probable that from these plateaux our western regions received the
greater part of their present forms and types.

We may expect soon to know more than we now do of the botany of
the cooler parts of Mexico, and to have this knowledge in a conveni-
ently available form.

It appears, however, that the Texano-Arizonian species or their repre-
sentatives do not prevail far down into Mexico, and that the arctic-
alpine species and other northern types of the higher mountains are
soon replaced southward by andine forms.

There are clear if not very numerous indications that there has at
some former time been greater opportunity than now for the extension
of North American species and types into the southern hemisphere.
And it appears that this has taken place mainly along the western side
of the American continent, on which the mountains abut on the coast—
that is. as respects American plants which have found their way to

58 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [ Vol. VI.

extra-tropical South America. On the Atlantic side there appears to
have been only a slight commingling of warm-temperate United States
plants with the flora of the nearer tropical districts. Thus, the island
of Cuba has Pinus Elliottii (Cubensis), [llicitum parviflorum, some species .
of Asimina, all the Nymphceacece of the Atlantic flora, Ascyrwm ampleat-
caule, &e., our Ampelopsis and Vitis bipinnata, Ilex Dahoon, a Rhexia,
Oldenlandia glomerata, Houstonia patens, Pterocaulon, Andromeda nitida,
Cyrilla, Sabbatia gracilis, Mitreola petiolata, Lachnanties tinctoria, Mayaca,
&e. These, the Ampelopsis excepted, are peculiar to the Atlantic coast.
Cuba, moreover, has a species of Kalmia !

But more speculative interest arises from the consideration of the
North American types, and in many cases the actual species, which re-
appear beyond the tropic in South America, on the western and not
rarely on the eastern ‘side of that continent. There are a number of
plants indigenous to Chili, the presence of which in California—where
they are seemingly no less indigenous—may be accounted for by the
immigration of men and cattle. This may have been the case with
Senebiera, Pentacena, Acena trifida, Plectritis (Betkea) samolifolia, Bow-
lesia lobata, Amblyopappus pusillus, Pectocarya, Lastarriea, and the like.
For Erodium cicutarium, Medicago denticulata, Melilotus parviflora, Oli-
gomeris subulata, and Avena fatua, which are now equally at home in.
California, probably arrived by that route rather than direct from Hu-
rope. But we cannot in this way explain the presence in the two tem-
perate zones of plants such as the following, which we assume to be
North American species or types dispersed into South America. Some
few of them might with equal likelihood be viewed as Chilian types
with abnormal northern dispersion. We enumerate only such as come
to view without particular search, and exclusive of those which may
have been dispersed under man’s unconscious agency. Identical species
in italics :

Anemone decapetala.

Anemone multifida.

Myosurus aristatus.

Sisymbrium canescens.

Vesicaria, said to be arctica.

Malvastrum of North American
type.

Spheralcea of North American type.

Modiola multifida (Atlantic).

Sida (Pseudo-Malvastrum) sulphu-
rea.

Hlatine Americana.

Larrea.

Rhus § Lithreea.

Lupinus microcarpus.

Trifolium Macret.

Trifolium microdon.

Hosackia subpinnata.

Lathyrus maritumus.

Hoffmanseggia.

Prosopis (Algarobia) julifiora.

Prosopis (Strombocarpa) sp. aff.

Fragaria Chilensis.

Lepuropetaton spathulatum (Atlantic
and Chilian).

Gayophytum sp.

Cinothera sp. aff.

CGinothera dentata.

Ginothera cheiranthifolia.

Boisduvalia sp.

Godetia sp.

Mentzelia sp. aff.

No. 1.]

Crantzia lineata.

Hydrocotyle ranunculoides, Sse.

Osmorrhiza.

Galium § Relbunium.

Galium § Trichogalium.

Mikania scandens ?

Gutierrezia.

Grindelia.

Aplopappus.

Nardophyllum (aff. Bigelovia).

Micropus.

Adenocaulon.

Polymnia.

Thelesperma scabiosoides!

Madia sativa.

Jaumea linearifolia.

Lasthenia obtusifolia.

Bahia.

Sehkuhria.

Blennosperma Chilense.

Actinella sp.

Gaillardia (Cercostylis) (Bonaria).

Soliva (North American species im-
migrated ?).

Centaurea (Plectocephalus) Chilen-
SiS.

Microseris pygmea.

Downingia pusilla.

Specularia biflora.

Menodora sp.

Primula farinosa.

Microcala quadrangularis.

GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN

59

FLORA.

Erythreea Chilensis.

Collomia gracilis, &e.

Gilia pusilla.

Gilia (Navarretia) involucrata.

Gilia laciniata.

Phacelia circinata.

Phacelia (Microgenetes) Cumingii.

Coldenia § Tiquilia.

Hritrichium fuloum, &e.

Amsinckia angustifolia.

Solanum eleagnifolium.

Physalis viscosa.

Mimulus luteus.

Orthocarpus australis.

(Verbena § Glandularia, &c.)

Plantago Patagonica.

Plantago hirtella.

Plantago maritima (Hu. &c.).

Oxybaphus sp.

Allionia incarnata.

Spirostachys sp.

Oxytheca dendroidea.

Chorizanthe sp.

Lastarreia Chilensis (mentioned
above).

Podostemon.

Lileea subulata.

Scirpus riparius.

Scirpus tatora.

Hemicarpha subsquarrosa.

Gramine, several.

Ilere are near upon 90 species or genera, and almost half of them are

identical with a few proximately related species.

the Chilian side of the continent.
eastern side.

Most of them affect

One or two are known only on the
The most remarkable of these are the Gaillardia and the

Thelesperma, of Buenos Ayres; the former closely related to an equally
anomalous Texan species; the latter almost identical with a Texano-Ne-
braskan species. One of the Strombocarpa species of Prosopis, of the
southern end of Texas, is hardly and perhaps not specifically distinguish-
able from one of Buenos Ayres. Of the 40 or more identical species,
only 17 belong to the Atlantic flora; apparently only two of these are
peculiar to it as respects North America, namely, the little Lepuwropetalon
of the Atlantic coast, not again met with this side of Chili, and the in-
significant Modiola multifida. Quite possibly the latter was introduced
into North America as a ballast weed.

60 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VI.

The natural and obvious line of communication between the botany of
the northern and southern temperate zones has been along the central
part of North America and Mexico, and along the western part of South
America. When our cool temperate flora flourished only along or near
the southern borders of the United States, the warm-temperate (to
which most of the above-enumerated forms belong) were still further
south. When the climate became again warmer, a portion of these
plants were as well placed for southward as for northward retreat.

ID
NOTES ON THE SOURCES OF THE NORTH AMERICAN FLORA.

Before yielding the pen to his associate, who will develop the rela-
tions of the whole North American flora to those of other parts of the
northern hemisphere, the present writer may sum up, without develop-
ing them, one or two of the probable or plausible inferences or theo-
retical deductions which the present state of our knowledge, gathered
from a great variety of data, appear to enable us to draw. They are
conclusions the acceptance of which affords at least a clue to the expla-
nation of the condition, constitution, and seeming anomalies of the actual
geographical distribution of the genera and species of our part of the
world. The non-professional reader may best apprehend the ground of
these deductions by a perusal of the discourse already referred to, which
is appended to this report.

The present vegetation of the world is a continuation with successive
modification of that of preceding geological times, and the plants indige-
nous to any country are completely adapted to its climate, and there-
fore are capable of enduring its extremes.

Accordingly the explanation of the present assignment of species and
genera is to be sought partly in the geological past, partly in the actual
climate. Questions of the latter kind are comparatively simple. There
is no difficulty in understanding why our Atlantic region was naturally
covered with forest, why the great plains toward the Rocky Mountains:
are woodless, and why plains with a saline soil are abandoned to a vege-
tation resembling that of sea-coasts. There is no insuperable difficulty
in comprehending how high mountains may nourish forests, even when
favored with little absolute rainfall. The difficulty is in ascertaining
how a particular species of tree or other plant came to be a constituent
of a certain flora, at stations widely separated from its nearest relatives,
or even from other members of the same species. This is not a difficulty,
but only a sterile wonder, to those who suppose that facts of this order
have no scientific explanation, or none which they can hope to reach.
It is one only to those who assume that all the members of a species,
and even all the species of a natural genus, were derived at some time
or other from a common stock; but this is the assumption now generally
made in natural history. A reference to the existing state of things will

Nol.) GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA. 6h

seldom answer questions of this kind; but a reference to the past may
sometimes do so.

Although the vegetable paleontologist goes farther back, the botanist
of our era, in the discussion of his problems, may take the Tertiary
period for his point of departure. At least, the key to the distribution
of the flora of the temperate regions of the northern hemisphere—
with which we are concerned—is afforded by the later Tertiary botany.

Our knowledge—fragmentary, yet real—of the flora around us begins.
with a period when it or its direct ancestors occupied the zone between
the arctic circle and the pole, and doubtless several lower degrees of
latitude. There it must have flourished until the coming on of that
change of climate which culminated in the glacial period. It must at
that time have encircled that portion of the earth much as the arctic
flora now does. During the period of maximum refrigeration, its north-
ern limits, abutting upon an arctic flora then in low latitude, must
have been so far south in the Atlantic States that the vegetation of the
northern shore of the Gulf of Mexico probably resembled that of the
southern shore of the Gulf of Saint Lawrence now. Of this northern
limit there cannot be much doubt; yet we could not hazard an opinion
as to where the warm-temperate vegetation of that day merged into the
subtropical, as it now does in Southern Texas.

The change between that period and the present, in the opposite di-
rection, has been an amelioration of climate which has carried the are-
tic flora back to the arctic circle, with which we now associate it, except-
ing the portions which, in the retreat, have ascended the mountains
and persisted there, forming the navi. alpine vegetation. This, as we
have seen, is very scanty in the Atlantic district, where it has abided
only on the most northern mountains; while the more elevated ranges
of the western part of the continent have afforded ampler refuge.

A similar advance and. ensuing retrogression, consequent upon the
coming and going out of the Glacial epoch, must have taken, place in
other parts of the northern hemisphere. Under these great and, pro-
tracted movements, of transference, we suppose that a common, flora,

‘which was comparatively homogeneous round the new arctic zone, has.
been differentiated into the several existing north-temperate floras, and
that their common features, and the occasional very unexpected identi-
ties or similarities (such as those between Japanese and North Ameri-
can botany) are thus explained. Their respective peculiarities are
thought to have resulted from the different vicissitudes and the different
climatic conditions to which the primeval stock has been, exposed in
Asia, Europe, and America, and upon the opposite sides and great in-
teriors of continents, the climates of which—greatly different now—haye
probably been so from very early times. The plants which were most
adapted or adaptable to the one could not be expected to survive in
another, or in any other than one of similar or analogous climate. But
this is not the place for considering the application of these principles

62 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VL

to the botany of the northern hemisphere generally. When they come
to be applied to the theoretical elucidation of the great difference be-
tween the Atlantic and the Pacific floras it will need to be noted that
the two sides of the continent, at the time when they received the pro-
genitors of the present vegetation, were more completely separated than
now; that they seem to have been, as it were, two long peninsulas
stretching southward from a mainland at the north, the great plains
between our eastern district and the Rocky Mountains being then under
water.

It may be inferred that the Atlantic side of the continent was more
open than the western to the reception of the ancestral flora from the
north, and so received it in larger measure and variety, or that it has
been since that time more free from disturbance and catastrophe. Proba-
bly the two causes may have conspired in the production of the result.
‘There is, moreover, reason to suspect that the recession of the glaciation
was earlier on the Atlantic side of the continent than in the more ele-
vated central and Pacific regions; and that, from all these causes, its
preglacial flora was more completely restored to it than to that of the
Pacific side.

And, finally, we infer that the Pacific region, while preserving through
all vicissitudes a moderate number of boreal types, and receiving a few
Eastern Asiatic ones probably at a later date, has been mainly replen-
ished from the Mexican plateau, and at a comparatively late period.
A large part of the botany of California, still more of Nevada, Utah, and
Western Texas, and, yet more, that of Arizona and New Mexico, may be
regarded as a northward extension of the botany of the Mexican plateau.

This may, at least, be said: that two types have left their impress
upon the North American flora, and that its peculiarities are divided
between these two elements. One we may call the boreal-criental ele-
ment ; this prevails at the north, and is especially well represented in
the Atlantic flora and in that of Japan and Manchuria; the other is the
Mexican-plateau element, and this gives its peculiar character to the flora
of the whole southwestern part of North America, that of the higher .
mountains excepted.

[From the American Journal of Science and Arts, Vol. XVI, 1878.]
FOREST GEOGRAPHY AND ARCHAOLOGY.

By ASA GRAY.

[A lecture delivered before the Harvard University Natural History Society, April 18, 1878.}

* * * Tt is the forests of the northern temperate zone which we are to traverse.
After taking some note of them in their present condition and relations, we may in-
quire into their pedigree; and, from a consideration of what and where the compo-
nent trees have been in days of old, derive some probable explanation of peculiarities
which otherwise seem inexplicable.

In speaking of our forests in their present condition, I mean not exactly as they are
to-day, but as they were before civilized man had materially interfered with them.

No.1.) GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA. 63
'

In the district we inhabit such interference is so recent that we have little difficulty
in conceiving the conditions which here prevailed, a few generations ago, when the
“forest primeval”—described in the first lines of a familiar poem—covered essentially
the whole country, from the Gulf of Saint Lawrence and Canada to Florida and Texas,
from the Atlantic to beyond the Mississippi. This, our Atlantic forest, is one of the
largest and almost the richest of the temperate forests of the world. That is, it com-
prises a*greater diversity of species than any other, except one.

_ In crossing the country from the Atlantic westward, we leave this forest behind us
when we pass the western borders of those organized States which lie along the right
bank of the Mississippi. We exchange it for prairies and open plains, wooded only
along the water-courses—plains which grow more and more bare and less green as we
proceed westward, with only some scattering Cottonwoods (i. e. Poplars) on the imme-
diate banks of the traversing rivers, which are themselves far between.

In the Rocky Mountains we come again to forest, but only in narrow lines or patches;
and if you travel by the Pacific Railroad you hardly come to any; the eastern and the
interior desert plains meet along the comparatively low level of the divide which here
is so opportune for the railway; but both north and south of this line the mountains
themselves are fairly wooded. Beyond, through all the wide interior basin, and also
north and south of it, the numerous mountain chains seem to be as bare as the alka-
line plains they traverse, mostly north and south, and the plains bear nothing taller
than Sage-brush. But those who reach and climb these mountains find that their ra-
vines and higher recesses nourish no small amount of timber, though the trees them-
selves are mostly small and always low.

When the western rim of this great basin is reached there is an abrupt change of
scene. This rim is formed of the Sierra Nevada. Even its eastern slopes are forest-
clad in great measure; while the western bear in some respects the noblest and most
remarkable forest of the world—remarkable even for the number of species of ever-
green trees occupying a comparatively narrow area, but especially for their wonder-
ful development in size and altitude. Whatever may be claimed for individual Eu-
calyptus trees in certain sheltered ravines of. the southern part of Australia, it is
probable that there is no forest to be compared for grandeur with that which stretches,
essentially unbroken, though often narrowed and nowhere very wide, from the south-
ern part of the Signe Nevada in latitude 36° to Puget Sound, beyond latitude 49°, and
not a little farther.

Descending into the long valley of California, the forest changes, dwindles, and
mainly disappears. In the Pacific coast ranges it resumes its sway, with altered feat-
ures, some of them not less magnificent and of greater beauty. The Redwoods of the
coast, for instance, are little less gigantic than the Big-trees of the Sierra Nevada, and
far handsomer, and a thousand times more numerous. And several species which are
merely or mainly shrubs in the drier Sierra become lordly trees in the moister air of
the northerly coast ranges. Through most of California these two Pacific forests are
separate; in the northern part of that State they join and form one rich woodland
belt, skirting the Pacific, backed by the Cascade Mountains, and extending through
British Columbia into our Alaskan Territory.

So we have two forest regions in North America—an Atlantic and a Pacific. They
may take these names, for they are dependent upon the oceans which they respectively
border. Also we have an intermediate isolated region or isolated lines of forest, flanked
on both sides by bare and arid plains—plains which on the eastern side may partly be
called prairies—on the western, deserts.

This mid-region mountain forest is intersected by a transverse belt of arid and alka-
line plateau, or eastward of grassy plain—a hundred miles wide from north to south—
through which passes the Union Pacific Railroad. This divides the Rocky Mountain
forest into a southern and a northern portion. The southern is completely isolated.
The northern, in a cooler and less arid region, is larger, broader, more diffused. Trend-
ing westward, on and beyond the northern boundary of the United States, it approaches,

64 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [ Vol. VE..

and here and there unites with, the Pacific forest. Eastward, in northern British
territory, it makes a narrow junction with northwestward prolongations of the broad
Atlantic forest.

So much tor these forests as a whole, their position, their limits, Before we glance
at their distinguishing features and component trees, I should here answer the ques-
tion, why they occupy the positions they do; why so curtailed and separated at the
south, so much more diffused at the north, but still so strongly divided into eastern
and western? Yet I must not consume time with the rudiments of physical geography
and meteorology. It goes without saying that trees arenourished by moisture. They
starve with dryness and they starve with cold. A tree is a sensitive thing. With its
great spread of foliage, its vast amount of surface which it cannot diminish or change,
except by losing that whereby it lives, it is completely and helplessly exposed to every
atmospheric change; or at least its resources for adaptation are very limited, and it
cannot flee forshelter. But trees are social, and their gregarious habits give a certain
mutual support. A tree by itself is doomed, where a forest, once established, is com-
paratively secure.

Trees vary as widely as do other plants in their constitution; but none can with-
stand a certain amount of cold and other exposure, nor make head against a certain
shortness of summer. Our high northern regions are therefore treeless, and so are the
summits of high mountains in lower latitudes. As we ascend them we walk at first
under Spruces and Fir-trees or Birches; at 6,000 feet on the White Mountains of New
Hampshire, at 11,000 or 12,000 feet on the Colorado Rocky Mountains, we walk through
or upon them; sometimes upon dwarfed and depressed individuals of the same species
that made the canopy below. These depressed trees retain their hold on life only in
virtue of being covered all winter by snow. At still higher altitude the species are
wholly different, and for the most part these humble alpine plants of our temperate
zone—which we cannot call trees, because they are only a foot or two or a span or two.
high—are the same as those of the arctic zone, of Northern Labrador, and of Green-
land. The arctic and the alpine regions are equally unwooded from cold.

As the opposite extreme, under opposite conditions, look to equatorial America, on
the Atlantic side, for the widest and most luxuriant forest-tract in the world, where
winter is unknown, and a shower of rain falls almost every afternoon. The size of the
Amazon and Orinoco—brimming throughout the year—testifies to the abundance of
Tain and its equable distribution.

The other side of the Andes, mostly farther south, shows the absolute contrast, in
the want of rain and absence of forest; happily it isa narrow tract. The same is true-
of great tracts either side of the equatorial regions, the only district where great des-
erts reach the ocean. .

It is also true of great, continental interiors out of the equatorial belt, except where
cloud-compelling mountain-chains coerce a certain deposition of moisture from air
which, could give none to the heated plains below. So the broad interior of our coun--
try is forestless from dryness in our latitude, as the high northern zone is forestless.
from cold.

Regions with distributed rain are naturally forest-clad. Regions with scanty rain,
and at one season, are forestless or sparsely wooded, except they have some favoring
compensations. Rainless regions are desert.

The Atlantic United States in the zone of variable weather and distributed rains,
and with the Gulf of Mexico as a caldron for brewing rain, and no continental expanse
between that great caldron and the Pacific, crossed by a prevalent southwest wind in
summer, is greatly favored for summer as well as winter rain.

And so this forest region of ours, with annual rainfall of 50 inches on the Lower
Mississippi, 52 inches in all the country east of it bordering the Gulf of Mexico, 45 to-
41 in all the proper Atlantic district from East Florida to Maine, and the whole region
drained by the Ohio—diminished only to 34 inches on the whole Upper Mississippi and
Great Lake region—with this amount of rain, fairly distributed over the year, and the -
greater part not in the winter, our forest is well accounted for.

No.1.] GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA. 65

The narrow district occupied by the Pacific forest has a much more unequal rainfall,
more unequal in its different parts, most unequal in the different seasons of the year, ,
very different in the same place in different years.

From the Gulf of Mexico to the Gulf of St. Lawrence the amount of rain decreases
moderately and rather regularly from south to north; but, as less is needed in a cold
climate, there is enough to nourish forest throughout. On the Pacific coast, from the
Gulf of California to Puget Sound, the southerly third has almost no rain at all; the
middle portion less than our Atlantic least; the northern third has about our Atlantic
average.

Then, New England has about the same amount of rainfallin winter and in summer ;
Florida and Alabama about one-half more in the three summer than in the three winter
months—a fairly equable distribution. But on the Pacific coast there is no summer
rain at ail, except in the northern portion, and there little. And the winter rain, of

forty-four inches on the northern border, diminishes to less than one-half before reach-

ing the Bay of San Francisco; dwindles to twelve, ten, and eight inches on the
southern coast, and to four inches before we reach the United States boundary below
San Diego.

Taking the whole year together, and confining ourselves to the coast, the average
rainfall for the year, from Puget Sound to the border of California, is from eighty
inches at the north to seventy at the south, %. ¢, seventy on the northern edge of
California; thence it diminishes rapidly to thirty-six, twenty (about San Francisco),
twelve, and at San Diego to eight inches.

The two rainiest regions of the United States are the Pacific coast north of latitude
forty-five, and the northeastern coast and borders of the Gulf of Mexico. But when
one is rainy the other is comparatively rainless. For while this Pacific rainy region
has only from twelve to two inches of its rain in the summer months, Florida, out of
its forty to sixty, has twenty to twenty-six in summer, and only six to ten of it in the
winter months.

Again, the diminution of rainfall as we proceed inland from the Atlantic and Gulf
shores, is gradual; the expanse that is or was forest-clad is very broad, and we wonder
only that it did not extend farther west than it does.

On the other side of the continent, at the north, the district so favored with winter
rain is but a narrow strip, between the ocean and the Cascade mountains. East of the
latter the amount abruptly declines—for the year from eighty inches to sixteen; for the
winter months, from forty-four and forty to eight and four inches; for the summer
months, from twelve and four to two and one.

So we can understand why the Cascade Mountains abruptly separate dense and
tall forest on the west from treelessness on the east. We may conjecture, also, why
this North-Pacific forest is so magnificent in its development.

Equally, in the rapid decrease of rainfall southward, in its corresponding restric-
tion to one season, in the continuation of the Cascade mountains as the Sierra Nevada,
cutting off access of rain to the interior, in the unbroken stretch of coast ranges near
the sea, and the consequent small and precarious raintall in the great interior valley
of California, we see reasons why the Californian forest is mainly attenuated south-
ward into two lines—into two files of a narrow but lordly procession, advancing
southward along the coast ranges, and along the western flank of the Sierra Nevada,
leaving the long valley between comparatively bare of trees.

By the limited and precarious rainfall of California, we may account for the limi-
tations of its forest. But how shall we account for the fact that this district of
comparatively little rain produces the largest trees in the world? Not only produces,
alone of all the world, those two peculiar Big-trees which excite our special wonder
their extraordinary growth might be some idiosyneracy of a race—but also produces
Pines and Fir-trees, whose brethren we know, and whose capabilities we can estimate
upon a scale only less gigantic. Evidently there is something here wonderfully favor-

5GB

66 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [ Vol. VI.

able to the development of trees, especially of coniferous trees; and it is not easy
to de ermine what it can be.

Nor, indeed, does the rainfall of the coast of Oregon, great as it is, fully account
for the extraordinary development of its forest; for the rain is nearly all in the
winter, very little in the summer. Yet here is more timber to the acre than in any
other part of North America, or perhaps in any other part of the world. The trees .
are never so enormous in girth as some of the Californian, but are of equal height—
at least on the average—three hundred feet being common, and they stand almost
within arms’ length of each other.

The explanation of all this may mainly be found in the great climatic differences
between the Pacific and the Atlantic sides of the continent; and the explanation of
these differences is found in the difference in the winds and the great ocean currents.

The winds are from the ocean to the land all the year round, from northwesterly in
summer, southwesterly in winter. And the great Pacific Gulf Stream sweeps toward
and along the coast, instead of bearing away from it, as on our Atlantic side.

The winters are mild and short, and are to a great extent a season of growth,
instead of suspension of growth as with us. So there is a far longer season available
to tree-vegetation than with us, during all of which trees may either grow or accu-
mulate the materials for growth. On our side of the continent and in this latitude,
trees use the whole autumn in getting ready for a six-months winter, which is com-
pletely lost time.

Finally, as concerns the west coast, the lack of summer rain is made up by the
moisture-laden ocean winds, which regularly every summer afternoon wrap the coast
ranges of mountains, which these forests affect, with mist and fog. The Redwood,
one of the two California Big-trees—the handsomest and far the most abundant and
useful—is restricted to these coast-ranges, bathed with soft showers fresh from the
ocean all winter, and with fogs and moist ocean air all summer. It is nowhere found
beyond the reach of these fogs. South of Monterey, where this summer condensation
lessens, and winter rains become precarious, the Redwoods disappear, and the gen-
eral forest becomes restricted to favorable stations on mountain sides and summits.
* * * The whole coast is bordered by a line of mountains, which condense the
moisture of the sea-breezes upon their cool slopes and, summits. These winds, con-
tinuing eastward, descend dry into the valleys, and, warming as they descend, take
up moisture instead of dropping any. These valleys, when broad, are sparsely
wooded or woodless, except at the north, where summer rain is not very rare.

Beyond stretches the Sierra Nevada, all rainless in summer, except local hail-storms
and snowfalls on its higher crests and peaks. Yet its flanks are forest-clad; and, be-
tween the levels of 3,000 and 9,000 feet, they bear an ample growth of the largest Co-
niferous trees known. In favored spots of this forest—and only there—are found those
groves of the giant Sequoia, near kin of the Redwood of the coast-ranges, whose trunks
are from fifty to ninety feet in circumference, and height from two hundred to three
hundred and twenty-five feet. Andin reaching these wondrous trees you ride through
miles of Sugar Pines, Yellow Pines, Spruces, and Firs, of such magnificencein girth and
height, that the Big-trees, when reached—astonishing as they are—seem not out of
- keeping with their surroundings.

I cannot pretend to account for the extreme magnificence of this Sierra Forest. Its
rainfall is in winter, and of unknown but large amount. Doubtless most of it is in
snow, of which fifty or sixty feet falls in some winters ; and—different from the coast
and in Oregon, where it falls as rain, and at a temperature which does not suspend
vegetable action—here the winter must be complete cessation. But with such great
snowfall the supply of moisture to the soil should be abundant and lasting.

Then the Sierra—much loftier than the coast-ranges—rising from 7,000 or 8,000 to
11,000 and 14,000 feet, is refreshed in summer by the winds from the Pacific, from
which it takes the last drops of available moisture; and mountains of such altitude,
to which moisture from whatever source or direction must necessarily be attracted,

Wo.1.) GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA. 67

are always expected to support forests, at least when not cut off from sea winds by
interposed chains of equal altitude. Trees such mountains will have. The only and
the real wonder is that the Sierra Nevada should rear such immense trees!

Moreover, we shall see that this forest is rich and superb only in one line; that,
beyond one favorite tribe, it is meagre enough. Such for situation, and extent, and
surrounding conditions, are the two forests—the Atlantic and Pacific—which are to
be compared.

In order to come to this comparison I must refrain from all account of the interven-
ing forest of the Rocky Mountains, only saying, that it is comparatively poor in the
size of its trees and the number of species; that few of its species are peculiar, and
those mostly in the southern part, and of the Mexican plateau type; that they are
common to the mountain-chains which lie between, stretched north and south en eche-
ion, all through that arid or desert region of Utah and Nevada, of which the larger
part belongs to the Great Basin between the Rocky Mountains and the Sierra Nevada;
that most of the Rocky Mountain trees are identical in species with those of the Pacific
forest, except far north, where a few of our eastern ones are intermingled. I may add
that the Rocky Mountains proper get from twelve to twenty inches of rain in the year,
mostly in winter snow, some in summer showers.

But the interior mountains get little, and the plains or valleys between them less;
the Sierra arresting nearly all the moisture coming from the Pacific, the Rocky Moun-
tains all coming from the Atiantic side.

Forests being my subject, I must not tarry on the woodless plain—on an average
500 miles wide—which lies between what forest there is in the Rocky Mountains and
‘the western border of oureastern wooded region. Why this great sloping plain should
be woodless—except where some Cottonwoods and their like mark the course of the tray~
ersing riyers—is, on the whole evident enough. Great interior plains in temperate
latitudes are always wvodless, even when not very arid. This of ours is not arid to
the degree that the corresponding regions west of the Rocky Mountains are. The
moisture from the Pacific which those would otherwise share, is, as we have seen,
arrested on or near the western border, by the coast-ranges and again by the Sierra
Nevada; and so the interior (except for the mountains) is all but desert.

On the eastern side of the continent the moisture supplied by the Atlantic and the Gulf
of Mexico meets no such obstruction. So the diminution of rainfallis gradual instead
of abrupt. But this moisture is spread over a vast surface, and it is naturally be-
stowed, first and most on the seaboard district, and least on the remote interior. From
the Lower Mississippi eastward and northward, including the Ohio River basin, and
so to the coast, and up to Nova Scotia, there is an average of forty-seven inches of
rain in the year. This diminishes rather steadily westward, especially northwest-
ward, and the western border of the ultra-Mississippian plains gets less than twenty
inches.

-Indeed, from the great prevalence of westerly and southerly winds, what precipita-
tion of moisture there is on our western plains is not from Atlantic sources, nor much
from the Gulf. The rain-chart plainly shows that the water raised from the heated
Gulf is mainly carried northward and eastward. It is this which has given us the
Atlantic forest region ; and it is the limitation of this which bounds that forest at the
west. The line on the rain-chart indicating twenty-four inches of annual rain is not
far from the line of the western limit of trees, except far north, beyond the Great
Lakes, where in the coolness of high latitudes, as in the coolness of mountains, a less
amount of rainfall suffices for forest growth.

We see, then, why our great plains grow bare as we proceed from the Mississippi
westward; though we wonder why this should take place so soon and so abruptly as
it does. But, as already stated, the general course of the wind-bearing rains from
the Gulf and beyond is such as to water well the Mississippi Valley and all eastward,
but not the district west of it.

It does not altogether follow that, because rain or its equivalent is needed for forest,

68 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol'Vi.

therefore wherever there is rain enough, forest must needs cover the ground. At
least there are some curious exceptions to such a general rule—exceptions both ways.
In the Sierra Nevada we are confronted with a stately forest along with a scanty rain-
fall, with rain only in the three winter months. All summer long, under those lofty
trees, if you stir up the soil you may be choked with dust. On the other hand, the
prairies of Iowa and Illinois, which form deep bays or great islands in our own forest-
region, are spread under skies which drop more rain than probably ever falls on the.
slopes of the Sierra Nevada, and give it at all seasons. Under the lesser and brief
rains we have the loftiest trees we know; under the more copious and well-dispersed
rain, we have prairies, without forests at all.

There is little more to say about the first part of this paradox, and I have not much
to say about the other. The cause or origin of our prairies—of the unwooded dis-
tricts this side of the Mississippi and Missouri—has been much discussed, and a whole.
hour would be needed to give a fair account of the different views taken upon this
knotty question. The only settled thing about it is that the prairies are not directly
owing to a deficiency of rain. That the rain-charts settle, as Professor Whitney well
insists.

The prairies which indent or are inclosed in our Atlantic forest-region, and the—
plains beyond this region, are different things. But, as the one borders—and in Iowa
and Nebraska passes into—the other, it may be supposed that common causes have
influenced both together, perhaps more than Professor Whitney allows.

He thinks that the extreme fineness and depth of the usual prairie soil will account
tor the absence of trees; and Mr. Lesquereux equally explains it by the nature of the
soil, in a different way, These, and other excellent observers, scout the idea that im-
memorial burnings, in autumn and spring, have had any effect. Professor Shaler,
from his observations in the border land of Kentucky, thinks that they haye—that
there are indications there of comparatively recent conversion of oak-openings into
prairie, and now—since the burnings are over—of the reconversion of prairie into
woodland.

I am disposed, on general considerations, to think that the line of demarcation be-
tween our woods and our plains is not where it was drawn by nature. Here, when
no physical barrier is interposed between the ground that receives rain enough for
forests, and that which receives too little, there must be a debatable border, where
comparatively slight causes will turn the scale either way. Difference in soil and
difference in exposure will here tell decisively. And along this border, annual burn-
ings—for the purpose of increasing and improving buffalo feed—practiced for hun-
dreds of years by our nomade predecessors, may have had a very marked effect. I
suspect that the irregular border line may have in this way been rendered more irregu-
lar, and have been carried farther eastward wherever nature of soil or circumstances
of exposure predisposed to it.

It does not follow that trees would re-occupy the land when the operation that de-
stroyed them, or kept them down, ceased. The established turf or other occupation
of the soil, and the sweeping winds, might prevent that. The difficulty of reforesting
bleak New England coasts, which were originally well wooded, is well known. It is
equally but probably not more difficult to establish forest on an Iowa prairie, with
proper selection of trees.

The difference in the composition of the Atlantic and Pacific forests is not less
marked than that of the climate and geographical configuration to which the two are
respectively adapted.

With some very notable exceptions the forests of the whole northern hemisphere in
the temperate zone (those that we are concerned with) are mainly made up of the
same or similar kinds. Not of the same species; for rarely do identical trees occur in
any two or more widely separated regions. But all round the world in our zone the
woods contain Pines and Firs and Larches, Cypresses and Junipers, Oaks and Birches,
Willows and Poplars, Maples and Ashes, and the like. Yet with all these family like-

No.1.) GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA. 69

nesses throughout, each region has some peculiar features—some trees by which the
country may at once be distinguished. 1

Beginning by a comparison of our Pacific with our Atlantic forest, I need not take
the time to enumerate the trees of the latter, as we all may be supposed to know them,
and many of the genera will have to be mentioned in drawing the contrast to which I
invite your attention. In this you will be impressed most of all, I think, with the
fact that the greater part of our familiar trees are ‘‘ conspicuous by their absence” from
the Pacific forest.

For example, it has no Magnolias, no Tulip-tree, no Papaw, no Linden or Basswood,
and is very poor in Maples; no Locust-trees—neither Flowering Locust nor Honey
Locust—nor any leguminous tree ; no Cherry large enough for a timber-tree, like our
wild Black Cherry ; no Gum-trees (Nyssa nor Liquidambar), nor Sorrel-tree, nor Kalmia;
no Persimmon or Bumelia; nota Holly; only one Ash that may be called a timber-tree;
no Catalpa or Sassafras; not a single Elm nor Hackberry; not a Mulberry, nor Planer-
tree, nor Maclura; not a Hickory, nor a Beech, nora true Chestnut, nor a Hornbeam ;
barely one Birch-tree, and that only far north, where the differences are less striking.
But as to coniferous trees, the only missing type is our Bald Cypress, the so-called
Cypress of our southern swamps, and that deficiency is made up by other things. But
98 to ordinary trees, if you ask what takes the place in Oregon and California of all these
missing kinds, which are familiar on our side of the continent, I must answer, noth-
ing, or nearly nothing. There is the Madrona (Arbutus) instead of our Kalmia (both
really trees in some places) ; and there is the California laurel instead of our southern Red
Bay tree. Nor in any of the genera common to the two does the Pacific forest equal the
Atlantic in species. It has not half as many Maples nor Ashes nor Poplars nor Walnuts
nor Birches, and those it has are of smaller size and inferior quality ; it has not half as
many Oaks; and these and the Ashes are of so inferior economical value that (as we are
told) a passable wagon-wheel cannot be made of California wood, nor a really good
one in Oregon.

This poverty of the western forest in species and types may be exhibited graphic-
ally, in a way which cannot fail to strike the eye more impressively than when we
say that, whereas the Atlantic forest is composed of 66 genera and 155 species, the
Pacific forest has only 31 genera and 78 species. * Inthe appended diagrams the short
side of the rectangle is proportional to the number of genera, the long side to the num-
ber of species.

Now the geographical areas of the two forests are not very different. From the
Gulf of Mexico to the Gulf of Saint Lawrence about twenty degrees of latitude inter-
yene. From the southern end of California to the peninsula of Alaska there are twenty-
eight degrees, and the forest on the coast runs some degrees north of this; the length
may therefore make up for the comparative narrowness of the Pacific forest region.
How can so meagre a forest make so imposing a show? Surely not by the greater
number and size of its individuals, so far as deciduous (or more correctly non-conifer-
ous) trees are concerned; for on the whole they are inferior to their eastern brethren
in size if not in number of individuals. The reason is that a larger proportion of the
genera and species are coniferous trees; and these being evergreen (except the
Larches), of aspiring port and eminently gregarious habit, usually dominate where
they occur. While the East has almost three times as many genera and four times as
many species of non-coniferous trees as the West, it has slightly fewer genera and
almost one-half fewer species of coniferous trees than the West; that is, the Atlantic
coniferous forest is represented by 11 genera and 25 species; the Pacific by 12 genera

* We take in only timber trees, or such as attain in the most favorable localities to
a size which gives them a clear title to the arboreous rank. The subtropical southern
extremity and keys of Florida are excluded. So also are one or two trees of the Ar-
izonian region, which may touch the evanescent southern borders of the Californian
forest. In counting the coniferous genera, Pinus, Larix, Picea, Abies, and Tsuga are
admitted to this rank, but Cupressus and Chamcyparis are taken as one genus.

70 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [ Vol. VE.

and 44 species. This relative preponderance may also be expressed by the diagrams,
jn which the smaller inclosed rectangles, drawn on the same scale, represent the con-
iferous portions of these forests.

Indeed, the Pacific forest is made up of conifers, with non-coniferous trees as occa-
sional undergrowth or as scattered individuals, and conspicuous only in valleys or in
the sparse tree-growth of plains, on which the oaks at most reproduce the features of
the ‘‘oak openings” here and there bordering the Mississippi prairie region. Perhaps
the most striking contrast between the West and the East, along the latitude usually
traversed, is that between the spiry evergreens which the traveller leaves when he:
quits California, and the familiar woods of various-hued round-headed trees which
give him the feeling of home when he reaches the Mississippi. The Atlantic forest is.
particularly rich in these, and is not meagre in coniferous trees. All the glory of the:
Pacific forest is in its coniferous trees. Its desperate poverty in other trees appears in
the annexed diagram.

RoE ENN ieee) ie
1. 2. 3. 4.
1. Atlantic American forest. 3. Japan-Manchurian forest.
2. Pacific American forest. . 4. European forest.

These diagrams are made more instructive, and the relative richness of the forests.
round the world in our latitude is most simply exhibited, by adding two or three simi-
lar ones. Two will serve, one for Europe, the other for Northeast Asia. A third
would be the Himalay-Altaian region, geographically intermediate between the other
two as the Arizona-Rocky Mountain district is between our eastern and western.
Both are here left out of view, partly for the-same, partly for special reasons pertaining
to each, which I must not stop to explain. These four marked specimens will simply
and clearly exhibit the general facts.

Keeping as nearly as possible to the same scale, we may count the indigenous forest
trees of all Europe at 33 genera and 85 species, and those of the Japan-Manchurian’
region, of very much smaller geographical area, at 66 genera and 168 species. I here
include in it only Japan, Eastern Manchuria, and the adjacent borders of China. The
known species of trees must be rather roughly determined, but the numbers here given
are not exaggerated, and are much more likely to be sensibly increased by further
knowledge than are those of any of the other species. Properly to estimate the sur-.
passing richness of this Japan-Manchurian forest, the comparative smallness of geo-
graphical area must come in as ah important consideration.

No.1.] GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA. 7T1

To complete the view, let it be noted that the division of these forests into conifer-
ous and non-coniferous is, for the—
Genera. Species.

Iimopean) DOD-COMMELOUS Pasa uer ath sevens. <2\- 2 45-420 ence ae oe bcmeme eames 26 68
BIO PE Ally COMMON GUS meena pete eter alate aratais me =)ele © H/-) syne oat oja (cyclase eer eras 7 17
33 85

- Japan-Manchurian non-coniferous ......--.-..---2-.---seesceeeee---- AT 123
Danan ManchnriainiCOMIMEPOUS se e\riciinm s)--\e+)-n 2 scncee---cciiatisase 2-2 AO 45
66 168

In other words, a narrow region in Eastern Asia contains twice as many genera and
about twice as many species of indigenous trees as are possessed by all Europe; and
as to coniferous trees, the former has more genera than the latter has species, and
over twice and a half as many species.

The only question about the relation of these four forest regions, as to their com-
ponent species, which we can here pause to answer, is to what extent they contain
trees of identical species. If we took the shrubs, there would be a small number, if
the herbs, a very considerable number, of species common to the two New World and
+o the two Old World areas, respectively, at least to their northern portions, even after
excluding arctic-alpine plants. The same may be said, in its degree, of the North
European flora compared with the Atlantic North American, of the Northeast Asiatic
compared with the northern part of the Pacific North American, and also in a peculiar
way (which I have formerly pointed out, and shall have soon to mention) of the North-
eastern Asiatic flora in its relations to the Atlantic North American. But as to the forest
trees there is very little community of species. Yet this is not absolutely wanting.
The Red Cedar (Juniperus Virginiana) among coniferous trees, and Populus tremuloides
among the deciduous, extend across the American continent specifically unchanged,
though hardly developed as forest trees on the Pacific side. There are probably, but
not certainly, one or two instances on the northern verge of these two forests. There
are as many in which eastern and western species are suggestively similar. The Hem-
lock-Spruce of the Northern Atlantic States and the Yew of Florida are extremely like
corresponding trees of the Pacific forest. Indeed, the Yew-trees of all four regions
may come to be regarded as forms of one polymorphous species. The White Birch of
Europe and that of Canada and New England are in similar case, and so is the com-
mon Chestnut (in America confined to the Atlantic States), which, on the other side
of the world, is also represented in Japan. A link in the other direction is seen in
one Spruce-tree (called in Oregon Menzies Spruce) which inhabits Northeast Asia,
while a peculiar form of it represents the species of the Rocky Mountains.

But now other and more theoretical questions come to be asked, such as these :

Why should our Pacific forest region, which is rich and in some respects unique in
coniferous, be so poor in deciduous trees ?

Then the two Big-trees, Sequoias, as isolated in character as in location—being
found only in California, and having no near relatives anywhere—how came California
to have them?

Such relatives as the Sequoias have are also local, peculiar, and chiefly of one
species to each genus. Only one of them is American, and that solely eastern, the
Taxodium of our Atlantic States and the plateau of Mexico. The others are Japanese
and Chinese. |

Why should trees of six related genera, which will all thrive in Europe, be restricted
naturally, one to the eastern side of the American continent, one genus to the western
side and very locally, the rest to a small portion of the eastern border of Asia?

Why should coniferous trees most affect and preserve the greatest number of types
in these parts of the world?

Voy BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICALSURVEY. [ Vol. VI.

And why should the Northeast Asian region have, in a comparatively small area, not
only most coniferous trees, but a notably larger number of trees altogether than any
other part of the northern temperate zone? Why should its only and near rival be
in the antipodes, namely, here in Atlantic North America? In other words, why should
the Pacific and the European forests be so poor in comparison, and why the Pacific
poorest of all in deciduous yet rich in coniferous trees?

The first step toward an explanation of the superior richness in trees of these an-
tipodal regions, is to note some striking similarities of the two, and especially the
number of peculiar types which they divide between them. The ultimate conclusion
may at length be ventured, that this richness is normal, and that what we really have
to explain is the absence of so many forms from Europe on the one hand, from Oregon
and California on the other. Let me recall to mind the list of kinds (i. e. genera) of
trees which enrich our Atlantic forest but are wanting to that of the Pacific. Now
almost all these recur, in more or less similar but not identical species, in Japan, North
China, &c. Some of them are likewise European, but more are not so. Extending
the comparison to shrubs and herbs, it more and more appears that the forms and types
which we count as peculiar to our Atlantic region, when we compare them, as we first
naturally do, with Europe and with our West, have their close counterparts in Japan
and North China; some in identical species (especially among the herbs), often in
strikingly similar ones, not rarely as sole species of peculiar genera or in related generie
types. I was a very young botanist when I began to notice this; and I have from
time to time made lists of such instances. Evidences of this remarkable relationship
have multiplied year after year, until what was long a wonder has come to be so com-
mon that I should now not be greatly surprised if a Sarracenia or a Dionza, or their
like, should turn up in Eastern Asia. Very few of such isolated types remain without
counterparts. It is as if Nature, when she had enough species of a genus to go round,
dealt them fairly, one at least to each quarter of our zone; but when she had only
two of some peculiar kind gave one to us and the other to Japan, Manchuria, or the
Himalayas; when she had only one, divided these between the two partners ‘on the
opposite side of the table. The result, as to the trees, is seen in these four diagrams.
As to number of species generally, it cannot be said that Europe and Pacific North
America are at allin arrears. But as to trees, either the contrasted regions have been
exceptionally favored, or these have been hardly dealt with. There is, as I have in-
timated, some reason to adopt the latter alternative.

We may take it for granted that the indigenous plants of any country, particularly
the trees, have been selected by climate. Whatever other influences or circumstances
have been brought to bear upon them, or the trees have brought to bear on each other,
no tree could hold its place as a member of any forest or flora which is not adapted to
endure even the extremes of the climate of the region or station. But the character
of the climate will not explain the remarkable paucity of the trees which compose
the indigenous European forest. Thatis proved by experiment, sufficiently prolonged
in certain cases to justify the inference. Probably there is no tree of the northern
temperate zone which will not flourish in some part of Europe. Great Britain alone
can grow double or treble the number of trees that the Atlantic States can. In all
the latter we can grow hardly one tree of the Pacific coast. England supports all of
them, and all our Atlantic trees also, and likewise the Japanese and North Siberian
species, which do thrive here remarkably in some part of the Atlantic coast, especially
the cooler-temperate ones. The poverty of the European sylva is attributable to the
absence of our Atlantic American types, to its having no Magnolia, Liriodendron,
Asimina, Negundo, no A‘sculus, none of that rich assemblage of leguminous trees
represented by Locusts, Honey-Locusts, Gymnocladus, and Cladrastis (even its Cercis,
which is hardly European, is like the Californian one mainly a shrub); no Nyssa, nor
Liquidambar; no Ericacex rising to a tree; no Bumelia, Catalpa, Sassafras, Osage
Orange, Hickory, or Walnut; and as to conifers, no Hemlock Spruce, Arbor-vitx,
Taxodium, nor Torreya. As compared with Northeastern Asia, Europe wants most of

No.1.) GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA. 173

these same types, also the Ailantus, Gingko, and a goodly number of coniferous genera.
Icannot point to any types tending to make up the deficiency; that is, to any not
either in East North Americaor in Northeast Asia, or in both. Cedrus, the true Cedar,
which comes near to it, is only North African and Asian. I need not say that Europe
has no Sequoia, and shares no special type with California.

Now the capital fact is that many and perhaps almost all of these genera of trees
were well represented in Europe throughout the later Tertiary times. It had not
only the same generic types, but in some cases even the same species, or what must
pass as such, in the lack of recognizable distinctions between fossil remains and living
aualogues. Probably the European Miocene forest was about as rich and various as
is ours of the present day, and very like it. The Glacial period came and passed, and
these types have not survived there, nor returned. Hence the comparative poverty
ef the existing European sylva, or, at least, the probable explanation of the absence
ef those kinds of trees which make the characteristic difference.

Why did these trees perish out of Europe, but survive in America and Asia? Before
we inquire how Europe lost them, it may be well to ask how it got them. How came
these American trees to be in Europe? And among the rest, how came Europe to
have Sequoias, now represented only by our two Big-trees of California? It actually
possessed two species and more—one so closely answering to the Redwood of the coast
ranges, and another so very like the Sequoia gigantea of the Sierra Nevada, that, if
such fossil twigs with leaves and cones had been exhumed in California instead of
Europe, it would confidently be affirmed that we had resurrected the veritable ances-
tors of our two giant trees. Indeed, so it may probably be. ‘‘ Calum non animam
mutant,” &c., may be applicable even to such wide wanderings and such vast inter-
vals of time. If the specific essence has not changed, and even if it has suffered some
change, genealogical connection is to be inferred in all such cases.

That is, in these days it is taken for granted that individuals of the same species,
or with a certain likeness throughout, had a single birthplace and are descended from
the same stock, no matter how widely separated they may have been either in space
or time, or both. The contrary supposition may be made, and was seriously enter-
tained by some not very long ago. It is even supposable that plants and animals
originated where they now are, or where their remains were found. But this is not
science—in other words, it is not conformable to what we now know, and is an asser-
tion that scientific explanation is not to be sought.

Furthermore, when species of the same genus are not found almost everywhere,
they are usually grouped in one region, as are the Hickories in the Atlantic States,
the Asters and Goldenrods in North America and prevailingly on the Atlantic side, the
heaths in Western Europe and Africa. From this we are led to the inference that all
species closely related to each other have had a common birthplace and origin. So
that, when we find individuals of a species or of a group widely out of the range of
their fellows we wonder how they got there. When we find the same species all round
the hemisphere, we ask how this dispersion came to pass.

Now, a very considerable number of species of herbs and shrubs and a few trees
of the temperate zone are found all round the northern hemisphere ; many others are
found part way round—some in Europe and Eastern Asia, some in Europe and our
Atlantic States, many, as I have said, in the Atlantic States and Eastern Asia—fewer
(which is curious) common to Pacific States and Eastern Asia, nearer though these
countries be.

We may set it down as useless to try to account for this distribution by causes now in
operation and opportunities now afforded, i. ¢., for distribution across oceans by winds
and currents and birds. These means play their part in dispersion from place to
place, by step after step, but not from continent to continent, except for few things
and in a subordinate way.

Fortunately we are not obliged to have recourse to overstrained suppositions of
what might possibly have occurred now and then, in tke lapse of time, by the chance

74 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VL

conveyance of seeds across oceans, or even from one mountain to another. The plants
of the top of the White Mountains and of Labrador are mainly the same; but we need
not suppose that it is so because birds have carried seeds from the one to the other.

I take it that the true explanation of the whole problem comes from a just general
view, and not through piecemeal suppositions of chances. And I am clear that it is
to be found by looking to the north, to the state of things at the arctic zone—first, as
it now is, and then as it has been.

North of our forest regions comes the zone unwooded from cold—the zone of arctic
vegetation. In this, as a rule, the species are the same round the world ; as exceptions,
some are restricted to a part of the circle.

The polar projection of the earth down to the northern tropic, as here exhibited,
shows to the eye—as our maps do not—how all the lands come together into one region,

‘and how natural it may be for the same species, under homogeneous conditions, to
spread over it. When we know, moreover, that sea and land have varied greatly since
these species existed, we may weli believe that any ocean-gaps now in the way of
equable distribution may have heen bridged over. There is now only one considera-
ble gap.

What would happen if a cold period were to come on from the north, and were very
slowly to carry the present arctic climate, or something like it, down far into the tem-
perate zone? Why, just what has happened in the Glacial period, when the refrigera-
tion somehow pushed all these plants before it down to Southern Europe, to Middle
Asia, to the middle and southern part of the United States, and, at length receding,
left some parts of them stranded on the Pyrenees, the Alps, the Appenines, the Can-
casus, on our White and Rocky Mountains, or wherever they could escape the increas-
ing warmth as well by ascending mountains as by receding northward at lower levels.
Those that kept together at a low level and made good their retreat form the main
body of present arctic vegetation. Those that took to the mountains had their line
of retreat cut off, and hold their positions on mountain tops under cover of the frigid
climate due to elevation. The conditions of these on different continents or different
mountains are similar, but not wholly alike. Some species proved better adapted to
one, some to another part of the world. Where less adapted or less adaptable, they
have perished ; where better adapted they continue, with or without some change,
and hence the diversification of alpine plants, as well as the general likeness through
all the northern hemisphere.

All this exactly applies to the temperate zone vegetation and to the trees that we
are concerned with. The clew was seized when the fossil botany of the high arctic
regions came to light; when it was demonstrated that in the times next preceding the
Glacial period—in the latest Tertiary—from Spitzbergen and Iceland to Greenland and
Kamitschatka a climate like that we now enjoy prevailed, and forests like those of New
England and Virginia and of California clothed the land. We infer the climate from
the trees, and the trees give sure indications of the climate.

Thad divined and published the explanation long before I knew of the fossil plants.
These, since made known, render the inference sure, and give us a clear idea of just
what the climate was. At the time we speak of, Greenland, Spitzbergen, and our are-
tic Sea shore had the climate of Pennsylvania and Virginia now. It would take too
much time to enumerate the sorts of trees that have been identified by their leaves
and fruits in the arctic later Tertiary deposits.

I can only say at large that the same species have been found all round the world;
that the richest and most extensive finds are in Greenland ; that they comprise most
of the sorts which I have spoken of as American trees which once lived in Europe—Mag-
nolias, Sassafras, Hickories, Gum-trees, our identical Southern Cypress (for all we can see
of difference), and especially Sequoias, not only the two which obviously answer to the
two Big-trees, now peculiar to California, but several others; that they equally com-
prise trees now peculiar to Japan and China, three kinds of Gingko-trees, for instance,
one of them not evidently distinguishable from the Japan species, which alone sur-

No.1.) GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA. 75

vives; that we have evidence, not merely of Pines and Maples, Poplars, Birches, Lin-
dens, and whatever else characterize the temperate-zone forests of our era, but also of
particular species of these, so like those of our own time and country that we may fairly
reckon them as the ancestors of several of ours. Long genealogies always deal more
or less in conjecture, but we appear to be within the limits of scientific inference when
we announce that our existing temperate trees came from the north, and within the
bounds of nigh probability when we claim not a few of them as the originals of pres-
ent species. Remains of the same plants have been found fossil in our temperate re-
- gion, as well as in Europe.

Here, then, we have reached a fair answer to the question, how the same or similar
species of our trees came to be so dispersed over such widely separated continents. The
lands all diverge from a polar centre, and their proximate portions, however different
from their present configuration and extent, and however changed at different times,
were once the home of those trees, where they flourished in a temperate climate. The
cold period which followed, and which doubtless came on by veryslow degrees during
ages of time, must, long before its culmination, have brought down to our latitudes,
with the similar climate, the forest they possess now, or rather the ancestors of it.
During this long (and we may believe first) occupancy of Europe and the United
States were deposited in pools and shallow waters the cast leaves, fruits, and, occa-
sionally, branches, which are embedded in what are called Miocene Tertiary, or later
deposits, most abundant in Europe, from which the American character of the vege-
tation of the period is inferred. Geologists give the same name to these beds in
Greenland and Southern Europe, because they contain the remains of identical and.
very similar species of plants, and they used to regard them as of the same age, on
account of this identity. But in fact this identity is good evidence that they cannot
be synchronous. The beds in the lower latitudes must be later, and were forming
when Greenland probably had very nearly the climate which it has now.

Wherefore the high, and not the low, latitudes must be assumed as the birth-place
of our present flora ;* and the present arctic vegetation is best regarded as a derivative
of the temperate. This flora, which when circumpolar was as nearly homogeneous.
round the high latitudes as the arctic vegetation is now, when slowly translated into
lower latitudes, would preserve its homogeneousness enough to account for the actual
distribution of the same and similar species round the world, and for the original en-
dowment of Europe with what we now call American types. It would also vary or
be selected from by the increasing differentiation of climate in the divergent conti-
nents, and on their different sides, in a way which might well account for the present
diversification. From an early period the system of the winds, the great ocean cur-
rents (however they may have oscillated north and south), and the general proportions
and features of the continents in our latitude (at least of the American continent)
were much the same as now, so that species of plants, ever so little adapted or pre-
disposed to cold winters and hot summers, would abide and be developed on the east-
ern side of continents, therefore in the Atlantic United States and in Japan and Man-
churia: those with preference for milder winters would incline to the western sides ;
those disposed to tolerate dryness would tend to interiors, or to regions lacking sum-
merrain. So that if the same thousand species were thrust promiscuously into these
several districts, and carried slowly onward in the way supposed, they would inevit-
ably be sifted in sach a manner that the survival of the fittest for each district might
explain the present diversity.

Besides, there are resiftings to take into the account. The glacial period or refrig-
eration from the north, which at its inception forced the temperate flora into our lati-

period, as neither paleontology nor the study of arctic sedimentary strata afford any
evidence of it. Or if there were any, it was too remote in time to concern the present
question.

76 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

4ude, at its culmination must have carried much or most of it quite beyond. To what
extent displaced, and how far superseded by the vegetation which in our day borders
the ice, or by ice itself, it is difficult to form more than general conjectures—so difter-
ent and conflicting are the views of geologists upon the Glacial period. But uponany,
er almost any, of these views, it is safe to conclude that temperate vegetation, such
as preceded the refrigeration and has now again succeeded it, was either thrust out of
Northern Europe and the Northern Atlantic States, or was reduced to precarious ex-
istence and diminished forms. It also appears that, on our own continent at least, a
milder climate than the present, and a considerable submergence of land, transiently
supervened at the north, to which the vegetation must have sensibly responded by a
northward movement, from which it afterward receded.

All these vicissitudes must have left their impress upon the actual vegetation, and
particularly upon the trees. They furnish probable reason for the loss of American
types sustained by Europe. sis

I conceive that three things have conspired to this loss. First, Europe, hardly ex-
tending south of latitude 40°, is all within the limits generally assigned to severe
glacial action. Second, its mountains trend east and west, from the Pyrenees to the
Carpathians and the Caucasus beyond, near its southern border ; and they had glaciers
of their own, which must have begun their operations, and poured down the north-
ward flanks, while the plains were still covered with forest on the retreat from the great
iee-wave coming fromthe north. Attacked both on front and rear, much of the forest
amust have perished then and there. Third, across the line of retreat of those which
may have flanked the mountain-ranges, or were stationed south of them, stretched the
Mediterranean, an impassable barrier. Some hardy trees may have eked out their ex-
istence on the northern shore of the Mediterranean and the Atlantic coast. But we
doubt not Taxodium and Sequoias, Magnolias and Liquidambars, and even Hickories
and the like were among the missing. Escape by the east, and rehabilitation from
that quarter until a very late period, was apparently prevented by the prolongation
of the Mediterranean to the Caspian and thence to the Siberian Ocean. If we accept
the supposition of Nordenskiéld, that anterior to the Glacial period Europe was
“pounded on the south by an ocean extending from the Atlantic over the present
deserts of Sahara and Central Asia to the Pacific,” all chance of these American types
having escaped from or re-entered Europe from the south and east is excluded.
Europe may thus be conceived to have been for a time somewhat in the condition in
which Greenland is now, and indeed to have been connected with Greenland in this
or in earlier times. Such a junction, cutting off access of the Gulf Stream to the polar
sea, would, as some think, other things remaining as they are, almost of itself give
glaciation to Europe. Greenland may be referred to, by way of comparison, as a
country which, having undergone extreme glaciation, bears the marks of it in the
extreme poverty of its flora, and in the absence of the plants to which its southern
portion, extending six degrees below the arctic circle, might be entitled. It ought to
have trees and might support them. But, since destruction by glaciation, no way has
been open for their return. Europe fared much better, but suffered in its degree in a
similar way.

Turning for a moment to the American continent for a contrast, we find the land
unbroken and open down to the tropic, and the mountains running north and south.
The trees, when touched on the north by the on-coming refrigeration, had only to
move their southern border southward, along an open way, as far as the exigency
required; and there was no impediment to their due return. Then the more southern
latitude of the United States gave great advantage over Europe. On the Atlantic
border proper glaciation was felt only in the northern part, down to about latitude -

-40°. In the interior of the country, owing doubtless to greater dryness and summer
‘heat, the limit receded greatly northward in the Mississippi Valley, and gave only
local glaciers to the Rocky Mountains; and no volcanic outbreaks or violent changes
of any kind have here occurred since the types of our present vegetation came to the

No. 1.) GRAY AND HOOKER ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA. 77

land. So our lines have been cast in pleasant places, and the goodly heritage of
forest trees is one of the consequences.

The still greater richness of Northeast Asia in arboreal vegetation may find expla-
nation in the prevalence of particularly favorable conditions, both ante-glacial and
recent. The trees of the Miocene circumpolar forest appear to have found there a
secure home; and the Japanese Islands, to which most of these trees belong, must
be remarkably adapted to them. The situation of these islands—analogous to that
of Great Britain, but with the advantage of lower latitude and greater sunshine—
their ample extent north and south, their diversified configuration, their proximity
to the great Pacific gulf-stream, by which a vast body of warm water sweeps along
their accentuated shores, and the comparatively equable diffusion of rain through
out the year, all probably conspire to the preservation and development of an
originally ample inheritance.

The case of the Pacific forest is remarkable and paradoxical. It is, as we know,
the sole refuge of the most characteristic and wide-spread type of Miocene Conifers,
the Sequoias; it is rich in coniferous types beyond any country except Japan; in its
gold-bearing gravels are indications that it possessed, seemingly down to the very
beginning of the Glacial period, Magnolias and Beeches, a true Chestnut, Liquidambar,
Elms, and other trees now wholly wanting to that side of the continent, though com-
mon both to Japan and to Atlantic North America.* Any attempted explanation of
this extreme paucity of the usually major constituents of the forest, along with a
great development of the minor or coniferous element, would take us quite too far,
and would bring us to mere conjectures.

Much may be attributed to late glaciation;t something to the tremendous out-
pours of lava which, immediately before the period of refrigeration, deeply covered a
very large part of the forest area; much to the narrowness of the forest belt, to the
want of summer rain, and to the most unequal and precarious distribution of that of
winter.

Upon all these topics questions open which we are not prepared to discuss. I have
done all that I could hope to do in one lecture if I have distinctly shown that the
races of trees, like the races of men, have come down to us through a prehistoric (or
prenatural-historic) period; and that the explanation of the present condition is te
be sought in the past, and traced in vestiges, and remains, and survivals; that for
the vegetable kingdom also there is a veritable archzology.

*See especially, Report on the Fossil Plants of the Auriferous Gravel Deposits of
the Sierra Nevada, by L. Lesquereux, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zodlogy, vi, No. 2.—Deter-
mination of fossil leaves, &c., such as these, may be relied on to this extent by the
general botanist, however wary of specific any many generic identifications. These
must be mainly left to the expert in fossil botany.

+ Sir Joseph Hooker, in an important lecture delivered to the Royal Institution of
Great Britain, April 12, insists much on this.

th Ree mea rio Wem eee sgragiibd Me ts

{ Sea Re, RT Se a a chivle’§

pron can Sede teh ats ae dy hs 4 WO oe

1

Peet Ek: oe} OR ta ny TE Re

= By ein aes
: . is tu
jg ORES Re AEN Fall: ioe bs Ath
ri
2 ag TER ae IB! Ae pie P We iiss
byt A MMS She EP OEE TR, 7 Be 9G 2 BS
\iilndy er eter ot mesh
hs mp itty BO tak) CHD tae amd RHE mA ht at ryitet fs
whem y tier) ae aie fh i i ay "
"i Ye CPS, AEC I TE Mh se Songs %, ‘ PaE CR
ti ; wea hts i ‘7

= i
sae Pyle Ae
TE ASL diy _ A Wh a tas | ee re Te a ee a4

che Heth) is Ope le baptyoete eed 88 sou i sand sida 146

rf aio, GET at uy en

e

mit ames Lal vite, hae secede ‘ae sa Ah ich bine a ve

ip

Dae Ean GEMOS Ly Purely A ieee er? aly: Oi hie 298
Lamond! bie <i ry! annie ‘pane phy Laer Gi)
bl a Lonel Wyk a ge ih Tay aA gue ii

Me iy bi ye SEN: ial Hust gen i oy
ua oui i dose Funioutl

hae

Avt. I1.—Omn some new Batrachia and Reptilia from
the Permian Beds of Texas.

By E. D. Cope.

PANTYLUS CORDATUS gen. et sp. nov.

Char. gen.—Represented by one species, which is as yet only known
from crania. In these the superficial ossification is complete, leaving
only nostrils, orbits, and parietal fontanelle. Surface sculptured. Man-
dible with an angular process. Teeth shortly conic, obtuse, and with-
out grooves or inflections, increasing in size towards the anterior parts
of the jaws. Mandible supporting several rows of teeth, which oppose
a pavement of obtuse teeth on the palate. These are situated on either
the palatine or anterior part of the pterygoid bones. Quadratojugal
and malar bones well developed. No lyra or mucous grooves.

This genus is first of the Stegocephali from the Permian formation of
‘Texas, whose cranial structures indicate a habit of obtaining nutriment
by crushing hard bodies. Without vertebrz it is not possible to ascer-
tain whether it pertains to the Microsaurian, Embolomeran or Gano-
¢ephalous divisions. It may be compared with the Sparodus of Fritsch
in the general characters of its dentition, but may be easily distin-
guished from it by the numerous series of teeth on the mandibular
rami. Some of these are on the dentary bone, while others are on an
inner element, but whether opercular or splenial I cannot now deter-
mine.

Char. specif—The skull of the Pantylus cordatus is about as large as
that of a fully grown snapping tortoise, Chelydra serpentina, and has
somewhat the same form of outline. The vertex is flat; the postor-
bital region is swollen, and the muzzle is abruptly acuminate. The
orbits are lateral with a slight vertical exposure, and are widely sepa-
rated. The front is deflected from opposite their posterior margins, and
the muzzle protrudes considerably beyond the lower jaw. The pre-
maxillary bones form a triangle whose apex does not appear on the
superior surface of the muzzle, and the nares are rather close together,
and lateral in their vertical presentation. The upper surface of the ex-
tremity of the snout is occupied by the large nasal bones, which are fol-
lowed by the larger frontals. The lachrymal and prefrontal are both well
developed, the latter extending backwards to meet the postfrontal near
the middle of the superior border of the orbit. The posterior border of

the skull is damaged, but enough remains to show that it was concave.
79

80 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. {Vor-Vi.

The symphysis mandibuli is short. The rami are wide, and are flat
below, the inferior surface forming a rounded right angle with the in-
terior surface. The angular process is in line with the external border
of the ramus.

The sculpture of the cranium proper is strong, consisting of pits sepa~
rated by strong, narrow ridges, forming a honeycomb pattern. The
fosse are smaller on the buccal regions. On the anterior part of the
mandible the fosse are distinct; on the median and posterior part the:
ridges become linear. A narrow triangular space on the external side
posteriorly, with its long apex on the inferior margin, %s smooth.

There are two subequal obtuse teeth, on the border of each premaxil-
lary bone. I cannot count the number on the maxillary, but there are:
four anterior to the line of the anterior border of the orbit. Of these
the next to the anterior one is larger than the rest, though of the same
shortly-conic, obtuse form. These teeth are rather large for the size of
the skull. At a point near the middle of the ramus of the mandible,
where it is broken off, there may be counted five teeth in a transverse
series. Of these the second from the external border is the largest, and
has a regularly rounded crown. Six teeth may be counted on a trans-
verse fracture of the palatine bone. Of these the four external have
obtusely rounded crowns, and the third from the external border is the.
largest. The crowns of all the teeth are hollow.

' Measurements.

M..
Length of cranium to transverse line connecting posterior borders of quadrates- .077
Width between same points. .t o.oo es seece a orcas ce aes ace aoe eee eee eee 082
Length of axis of cranium to line connecting anterior borders of orbits......... 018
Interorbital. width csi. p2<j-\ts) =-uedses ee tee’ 2 PSS eee 032
Longitudinal diameter of orbits. o.-- 2 35-- --t2-eesseys- ates tah. eee eee 016.
eneth trom iorbit to nostril 2 205--eaen ee ae eee e poeee ee eee eee eee atte: «OES:
Brojection onmuzzle beyond mandtblepease=seeaeeanee see heen a ee eee eeeee 010
Length of alveolar edge of premaxillary.----.....------.---------- ja esis eclepertere 007 -
Heizhtior crown of large maxillary tooth: <--2-..---2--- 2--- .-cee. ---2 eee eee 0045
Fore-and-aft;diameter, of maxillary: ci ein de 4665-2 i .0035
Width of mandibular ramus below at middle....--.-......-..---- ,--202------ -020

This species considerably exceeds in size those referred by Dr. Fritsch
to Sparodus, as it was probably rather larger than the Protonopsides of
recent waters. Its physiognomy is peculiar, as the prominent muzzle.
and lateral orbits are unusual among Batrachia.

DIMETRODON SEMIRADICATUS sp. nov.

A considerable part of the skull and some limb bones represent this.
species. There are no vertebre referable to the specimen, but the two.
maxillary and premaxillary bones support nearly all the teeth in an
excellent state of preservation. Continuity of the dental series is.
preserved by one maxillary bone or the other, excepting just at the ex- _
tremity, where there is a slight interruption on both sides. On one of-
them it must be very slight.

No. 2.] COPE ON PERMIAN BATRACHIA AND REPTILIA, 81

There are three teeth in each premaxillary bone. In the maxillary
IT count seventeen, with the bare possibility of a necessity for adding
one more. The first premaxillary and third maxillary teeth are of nearly
equal size and are much larger than the others, the second premaxillary
only approaching them. The section of the base of the first premaxil-
lary is subtrifoliate, there being one grove on the inner, and two on the
external face. The section of the middle of the crown is more than a
semicircle, with the base convex. The two angles are the sections of two
ridges which are both presented posteriorly, the one on the inner the
other on the external face of the crown. The crown of the second pre-
maxillary has the same form, but the base has only slight traces of the
grooves. The chird premaxillary is a diminutive of the second.

The crowns of the maxillary teeth differ from those of the premaxil-
laries in the opposition of the cutting edges, which present anteriorly and
posteriorly. The external face is more convex than the internal. The
crown of the large third tooth is not expanded above the root, but its
antero-posterior diameter contracts regularly to the apex. The crowns
of the other teeth are wider at the base antero-posteriorly than the
root. They are all slightly curved backwards, and their edges are more
or less regularly crenate.

Several peculiarities distinguish this species from the D. incisivus,

with which it agrees in size. In the first place, the section of the root,
at and below the base of the crown of the third or large maxillary tooth
and of the seventh tooth posterior to it, is of the form of a. figure «
directed antero-posteriorly. This is dueto the deep erooving of the
tooth on the opposite sides at this point; the grooves not extending on
the crown. The grooves are deeper on the smaller teeth, giving it an
almost biradiculate character. In D. incisivus the sections of these
teeth are subquadrate.
_ In the second place, the section of the base of the first incisor differs
from that in D. incisivus, where it is subquadrate with two subopposite
shallow grooves. Next, the nostril excavates the border of the maxil-
lary bone; in D. incisivus, the nostril is separated from that bone by
the intervention of the nasal. In that species there are but two pre-
maxillary teeth; in D. semiradicatus, there are three. The teeth which
accompany specimens of D. cruciaer have the same form and propor-
tions as those of the D. incisivus.

Measurements.
M.
Oo TIGR itil series) po.) eee een cen one er 252
Length of premaxillary series (and bone)...-...---.------------ ---------- SM SSAT- 049
SERSUHNOL GIASUOMIG oe eo ote ene none wee ce co cene meen ene enensecwneee 8 024
Length of first premaxillary tooth from alveolar border-.-.---.------------------ 057
‘oan: se i anteroposterior ...---. .022
Diameter of first premaxillary tooth at alveolar border a v
: transverse .....------- .015
Length of third maxillary from alveolar border..-.--..--.-------------------+--- .067
: : : anteroposterior. ..---.-------- .020
Diameter of third maxillary at alveolar border} Ban =
EAUSVCISG acm <2 sacra eee .005

OGB

82 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [ Vol. VI.

M.
Diameter of third maxillary at base of crown } ABCOLOROSIGIIC’ sad aaea ai are ek
i tIAMS VTS. 2252 =) 42 eee eee .015
Mencthvof seventh maxillary tromalveolus s2s-2--ss5e. sose ae eas eee ee eae 026
Diameters of crown at base of cutting edges } ADUEPODOSUOELOE ge oo ea ee a
; HUbraMSVELse:. fac) SI .009

The approximation to a two-rooted condition in some of the teeth is
a marked peculiarity of this species. The median groove is most ex-
tensive on the smaller maxillary tooth, extending into the base of the
crown. I'rom observation on this species and on certain Dinosauria, I
am under the impression that the two-rooted mammalian tooth is the
result of constant absorption of the median portion of the wide root of a
wide crown, due to the presence and pressure of the successional tooth.

DIMETRODON CRUCIGER Cope, Paleontological Bulletin No. 52, p. 7.

This species was abundant during the Permian period. One of the
best preserved individuals in my collection is represented by the greater
part of the vertebral column and the pelvic and scapular arches.

The pelvic arch resembles that of the D. gigas in its general charac-
ters. For a description of the latter see Paleontological Bulletin No. 32,
p.6. The scapular arch also agrees with the descriptions I have given,
but possesses some parts which have been hitherto wanting. These are
the clavicles, as I suppose them to be. Each of these consists of a hori-
zontal portion and an ascending portion. The former is nearly a quar-
ter of a circle in form, with its convex outline presenting inwards and
backwards. The border is marked by radiating ridges which terminate
in a suture-like rugosity of the edge. The lower surtace curves rapidly
into the ascending portion, which is narrow and acuminate and about
twice as high as the horizontal portion extends inwards from its interior
border at the base. It displays on its external border an extensive
sutural surface for union with the scapula. The anterior extremity of
the epicoracoid lies on the superior (internal) face of the horizontal
portion of the clavicle, extending nearly to its anterior border. Its ex-
ternal margin thins out in contact with the clavicle.

The above structure is peculiar among Reptilia in the widely-expanded
subtriangular distal part of the clavicle. It presents no greater resem-
blance to any known mammal. Its character is more that of the Stego-
cephalous Batrachia, and it is a good deal like the lateral thoracic shield
of the animals of that group, as, for instance, Actinodon of Gaudry and
Cricotus m. From the sutural character of the borders of this part I
anticipate the discovery of a median or mesosternal element. It is pos-
sible that the piece attached to its superior face, which I have above
alluded to as epicoracoid, may be a part of this bone displaced lateraily. -

The resemblance of the humerus of this and of allied genera to that
of the mole was reported by the writer in the American Naturalist, 1878,
p. 408 (June), and the nearer resemblance to Echidna was asserted in
the same journal, 1878, p. 830 (December).

Art. 1ll.—Ona Wading Bird from the Amyzon Shales.
By E. D. Cope.

The formation which I have called the Amyzon Shales is a lacustrine
deposit of Tertiary age which is found in the South Park of Colorado, in
Northeastern Nevada, and probably in Central Oregon.* Its material
-is laminated, and is occasionally highly carbonaceous. It contains many
specimens of fossil fishes, of plants, and of insects, and allied articulates.
Its age is uncertain, but it is probably near the Upper Eocene or Lower
Miocene. Remains of birds are very rare, the best-preserved specimen
yet found being that of a Passerine species. Under the impression that
it belongs to the Fringillide, Mr. J. A. Allen describes it under the name
of Palcospiza bella.t

The present communication relates to a second species of bird from
the same formation. The specimen includes three vertebre anterior to
the pelvis; the pelvis, with the vertebre which it incloses, and the
caudal vertebre; both femora; the tibia and part of the tarsometatarse
of the right leg, with the greater part of the left tibia. One-half of the
tail is preserved, the feathers lying in almost undisturbed relation.
There are also various light and downy feathers of the base of the tail
and adjacent parts of the body lying on the block, some in place, others
loose.

The characters displayed by the bones and feathers are those of a
species of the order Gralle and tribe Limicole (Totanideés A. Milne
Edwards). In the absence of important parts of the skeleton, it is not
possible to ascertain the family characteristics, but it is more easy to
assign the species to its genus. I cannot detect any features which for-
bid its reference to the genus Charadrius in the large sense. It presents
important resemblances to the species of Totanus, but there are some
reasons, to be mentioned later, why this reference is inadmissible. It
is clear that there are various genera of Scolopacide to which it cannot
be referred, on account of the form of its ossa ischii. I therefore intro-
duce it to the scientific record under the name

CHARADRIUS SHEPPARDIANUS.
Chars.—Femur one-half the length of the tibia; nine caudal vertebra;
tail gently wedge shaped, apparently without color cross-bars.

* American Naturalist, May, 1879.
t Bulletin U. 8. Geol. Survey Territories, Vol. IV, 1878, p. 443, Pl. I.
83

84 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VI-

Description.—The preiliac vertebre are distinct from each other and
have only moderately elongate centra. The diapophyses are of moderate
length and less width, and are truncate at the extremity. Those of suc-
cessive vertebre are connected by but few osseous ligamentous spicules.
The caudal vertebre are short and wide, and have short diapophyses,
except the first, which has a long narrow diapophysis. The last three
are in profile, and do not display hypapophyses. The ploughshare bone
is an elongate triangle, considerably produced to its superior angle. The
basal cotylus for articulation with the centrum immediately infront, is.
well excavated.

The pelvis is short and rather wide posteriorly. The fossil presents a,
superior view of it, with both the pubic bones turning their externa}
faces upwards. The external borders of the anterior plates of the
ilia are broken away, but enough remains of their inner portion to show
their anterior extent. The postacetabular ridges diverge outwards and
terminate in a prominent angulation of the posterior border which is
about equidistant between the vertebral border of the ilium and the ex-
terno-inferior border of the pubis. The posterior outline thus differs
from that seen in various genera of Scolopacide, where the angle is much
nearer the vertebral border, and where a second angle is produced by a
notch at the point of junction of the ischium. The pelvis of Totanus is
however, much like that of the present species. External to the angular
projection described, the border is notched, and then turns posteriorly,
forming a gentle curve, which continues from the ischium to the slender
pubis. The pubis is long and very narrow, and extends well posterior
to the ischium. It isof uniform diameter, and is not expanded distally.
The ischiopubic foramen is long and narrow, about one-seventh as wide
as long. The obturator foramen is about one-third the length of the
ischiopubic, and is oval. A transverse line cutting the anterior border
of the acetabulum divides the pelvis between the posterior angular pro-
jection of the ilium (the true crest, fide, Gegenbaur) and the anterior
extremity, into two parts of equal length.

The leg bones are quite slender, and are similar in proportions to those
of several species of Charadrius and Totanus. They are more slender
than in various species of Scolopax, Strepsilas, Tringa, &c., and less so
than in Himantopus and Recurvirostra. The former is just half as long as
the tibia, and seen in profile is almost straight. The crest of the tibia
is very prominent, but is not produced proximally. The distal extremity
of the tibia and proximal part of the tarsometatarse are so damaged as
not to furnish satisfactory characters.

There are five rectrices visible in the specimen. Those which are in
all probability median are the longest, while the external two are Of)
equal length. This gives the outline a rather short wedge shape as the
feathers lie closed. The expanded tail would be rounded with a slight
median angulation. The extremities of the feathers are rounded, and

No.3.) COPE ON A WADING BIRD OF THE AMYZON SHALES. 85

their whole structure is soft and delicate. The length of the longest
rectrix is just about that of the tibia.

Measurements.
M,
MEIC He PLeMIaChVOKLO NLC qfa\-)Seicere sana o~ sn eec+ sa scan gevesccewesese . 010
MemenMNOL centrum Of ATSh VELbeDE- 2 oia- Sess ooo ewe cee cce eocems seen . 0035
Se raRr a ECS GAS UC HIDE ere eater tel ealstaaia aiiathe aio a\< Win lnn c's oncne sao nennoweaaaseen . 021
PmonuOL Caidal VeTue Ores OM CULVE /-- 2. eee ce occ e ween ence enon saee . 0145
Eo KOLO SMATey MONG) LOrA OX tela lcta (win lo/elel=ole=\<inin el cine «alee soe mie sciniselaamele . 005
enc cut Migr $5005, eongea dog be sees lee chee ee SOC aes eo ee eae er tempo . 024
Beono oo Of Wim) tO AGcbAbDUIUM i. - os oe eo enn nen ence ce cececcceee - 012
Henepnvot ischinm from acetabulum) <----. 2-22... 2-20 622 5 -ose neon cone coon . 016
Men amor pUDIS trom ACetADWIUM =o. 22 oo. Coe coon woe nee co cned enews cane . 019
Wadth between posterior angles of iia... 22. 02.25 -1-e os cece e cone cece enon . 009
Coca GY TSOP Does cb she Seg oeseebed co ces uscsue > CSeoue JOUs Hamner ee EOopEre . 024
Pameror OL fenniT ab MIC CLS oe a. eas see elelai= wel sainiwine sca ea cece nonce cacinme = . 003
eter DMM ate la teed anol te alee ole elaine wlan elnino mw ninininiwie nino an es =e 047
AMUCO=DOSLELIOL diameter ab head 5. 2s,52.. <- coe ens ee secre wee cess ones eee . 006
Pee renee or Siti IMO GLC. 2. cee acl s ao aiterele sass aa aeleenalsseee-leceenae . 0027
Diameter of head of tarsometatarse........-.....-.------------------ soptee - 004
Length of median rectrix from plowshare bone........-....--..------------ . 046
Length of external rectrix from plowshare bone....-.-. E Balbo. oa Seba eeeenues . 040
Wook onporblom of tall preserved 05-222 s+ -- secs cecesecee secs acess aay 020

The strongly contrasted light and dark shades of color are not unfre-
quently preserved in the insects of this formation. I suspect that had
the rectrices of this species originally displayed the alternating white
and dark cross-bars characteristic of the Totani, some trace of them
would be discoverable in the fossil, in spite of the fact that the entire
feather is represented by carbon only. The brown tint of the specimen,
both light and dark, is uninterrupted by pattern of any kind.

The tail is rather longer than in the Tring, about equal to that of
many plovers and Totani, and shorter than that of Actiturus.

The Charadius sheppardianus was discovered near Florissant, Color-
ado, by Dr. G. Hambach, a skillful naturalist. I have named it in honor
of Edwin Sheppard, of Philadelphia, an excellent ornithologist and
skillful artist.

ot ih

Dn rae AY, Ba «

AVS ORs ee 4

a eee 24 &

Oem oe fie) tr
cm Moa pE rd an side: Pr na ta creer
etki A ous Ihnen ty ean Ap a Re A Bea SI > nae
SEMEN: Hosoi guawehay eorsvenie 04 Relat Me) Ga oh kote ee
Oahivin Bhd deel vient Biphy hee nee bi CS
alk ees hee aL eee cial ees vy ms
i RANE TE LOLS TORRES CE mie) re ene
shad COP TDR pcos Steet, any ON, Loni hich fehl
. yearned ak dive Hehe: erie elite
Pe ilek Asante Trig) Bde they 4 Be ee ( Ngearta if
© Weavak ot be ickigie vet! I pentnent sty anne
Bag tayo Snood (och Rea Oba ia dst essa yj

a Y

Art. LV.—Osteology of Speotyto Cunicularia
var. Hypogzea.

By BR. W. Schufeldt, Acting Assistant Surgeon, U. S. Army.

In the United States we have but one species of Burrowing Owl, and
this is a variety only of the bird found in South America. Our bird
occurs on the prairies west of the Mississippi, notably in the villages of
species of marmot squirrels, the deserted burrows of which it occupies
for the purpose of nidification. Its behavior and habits are extremely
unique and interesting. Perhaps no species in the great order to which
it belongs have less limited power of flight, none so habitually congregate
together in certain localities and choose the open, treeless country as
their resort, and make their nests underground. So, in the study of
the bony framework of this bird we may expect to find it modified
to correspond with these habits, and presenting equal points of inter-
est. Without further remark, then, upon its natural history, we will
proceed to an examination of its skeleton. In enumerating and describ-
ing the separate bones, smaller sesamoids than the patelle and the
ossicula auditus (two of the latter bones being merely represented in
cartilage) will not be taken into consideration. The latter are more prop-
erly treated in the study of the organ of hearing.

The skull.—As a general rule, it is only in the young of the Class Aves
that the many bones of the skull ‘can be separated from one another ;
the majority of the primitive segments of ossification of the four ver-
tebre that go to form this, the superior expansion of the vertebral col-
umn, being firmly anchylosed together, with their sutures completely °
obliterated when the bird has attained maturity. This is eminently
the case in the adult skull of the species we have before us, so much so,
in fact, that, with the exception of certain bones that remain perma-
nently free during life, we will undertake to describe the skull only as it
presents itself to us in the adult asa whole. In referring to certain
points for examination, then, in this part of the skeleton, we will have
to rely largely upon the reader’s familiarity with general anatomy, the
extent and position of the bones as they occur in the variously shaped
heads of immature birds, and as to which of the two divisions of anthro-
potomists and some comparative anatomists, ‘bones of the cranium”
and ‘bones of the face”, they belong. The major part of the occip-
ital lies in the horizontal plane, only that portion which originally con-
stituted the superoccipital segment and the posterior third of the ex-

‘

88 BULLETIN UNITED STATIES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. (Vol. VI.

occipital segments curving rather abruptly upwards to mect the mas-
toids and parictals. All its primary parts are thoroughly coalesced,
and its articulations with the surrounding bones obliterated, save a fine
ridge, running transversely, just anterior-to the condyle, separated from
it by a depression which seems to indicate the remains of the occipito-
basi-sphenoidal suture. Posterior to the foramen magnum the bone rises
and displays a well-marked “ cerebellar prominence”, with a depression
on either side of it. On the summit of this prominence, in the median
line, just before we arrive at the foramen magnum, we find the super-
occipital foramen. This foramen varies in size and shape in different
individuals—in size, from one to two millimetres ; in shape, froma circle
to a transverse ellipse, though it is usually small and circular. It is
said to be formed by a thinning of the bone due to muscular pressure
from without and the pressure of the cerebellum from within; in the
fresh specimen it is covered by a thinmembrane. Lying in the horizon-
tal plane, anterior to the cerebellar prominence, is the foramen magnum.
In shape it resembles a square with the four angles rounded off. Its
average measurement is five millimetres transversely and four millime-
tres antero-posteriorly, the latter diameter being encroached upon by
the occipital condyle iu the median line. The occipital condyle is sessile,
though raised above the level of the basis cranii, hemispheroidal in form,
with a minute notch marking it posteriorly in the middle. Immediately
beyond the condyle appears a depression, on either side of which are
seen the precondyloid foramina for the transmission of the hypoglossal
nerves; they are extremely small, and open anteriorly. External to
these, lying in the same line transversely, is seen a group of usually
three foramina for the passage of the eighth nerve and the internal jugu-
lar vein. The lateral terminations of the occipital, the paroccipital pro-
cesses, are large, thin, pointed forwards, and on a lower level than the
rest of the bone, forming a large part of the floor of the tympanie eavity.
The semi-elliptical contour of the cranium, regarding it from a basal
view, is well carried out laterally by the wing-like and attenuated mas-
toids. They contribute largely to the formation of the walls of the tym-
panic cavity internally, and externally assist in some degree towards
completing the temporal fosse. These fosse are deep; commencing
posteriorly on either side at the external borders of the depressions
already mentioned that bound the cerebellar prominence laterally, they
take a course upwards and outwards, terminating at a foramen that lies
just within the posterior periphery of the orbit, which foramen allows
the passage of the tendon of the temporal muscle. From the upper
boundary of the temporal fossze to where the frontals suddenly abut
against and even overhang, to some extent, the nasals, the external and
Superior surface of the skull is of a pearly whiteness and very smooth in
the dry skeleton, presenting nota trace of the sutures between the bones
that go to form it, the frontals and parietals. This surface is divided
by a well-marked furrow, that extends in the median line between the

No. 4.) SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF SPEOTYTO. 89

cerebellar prominence and tie upper mandible. It is deepest in the
parietal region. Close inspection of this area reveals minute ramifying
grooves for the lodgment of vessels, one set running in the direction of
the temporal fossz and another towards the orbits. In the “ bird of the
year” the skull-cap is very thin and brittle in the dry condition; but a
very different state of affairs presents itself when we remove a section
of the cranial vault from above, in the adult, where the skeleton is full-
grown, such as we have before us. We find exposed to our view one of
the common characteristics of the family; the two tables are light, thin,
but compact, with a goodly supply of diploic tissue between them, at-
taining a thickness in some localities, notably above the exit of the olfae-
tories, of two millimetres or more. Owing to the large orbital cavities,
the brain-case is crowded to the rear to such an extent that the fossz
for the cerebral hemispheres are situated immediately over the cavities
intended for the other encephalic lobes. We find the internal opening
of the foramina, already described, at the base of the brain. The petro-
sals have the appearance of two white leaves, harder than the surround-
ing bone, slightly turned upon themselves, with their stems leading to-
wards the fossa for the hypophysis. They present for examination the
openings for the portio dura and portio mollis, the former foramen being
on a lower level and anterior to the latter. In the median line running
from the cerebellar fossa to the exit of the first pair of nerves along the
roof is a raised crest, grooved on its summit for the longitudinal sinus.
It sinks for a little distance, in the fresh specimen, into the cerebral in-
terspace. The “sella turciga” is deep, its long axis being perpendicular
to a plane passing through the foramen magnum. It has at its base the
openings for the carotids. Immediately beyond its anterior superior
border is seen the niche, with its foramen at either end, for the passage
of the optic nerves and lodgment for the optic chiasma. Above the optic
foramina, situated still more anteriorly, is a conical pocket, pointing for-
wards and a little upwards, with the olfactory foramina at its apex, two in
number, giving passage for the nerves to the orbits. The basi-sphenoid is
thoroughly united with all the bones it comes in contact with, except the
pterygoids, palatines, and tympanics. Its anterior process—the basi-pre-
sphenoid—loses itself with the vomer in the interorbital septem, not atrace
remaining of the original margins of the two bones. Its wings, the orbits,
and the ali-sphenoids share the same fate with the bones that surround
them. They form the larger part of the posterior wall of the orbital cav-
ities. With the body of the bone the ali-sphenoids assist in closing in
the tympanic eavitics. The “pterapophysial” processes of the basi-
sphenoid are present; they are short, thick, and elliptical on section,
crowned by facets of the same figure at their distal extremities, which
look downwards, forwards, and outwards, articulating with a similar
facet at the middle, third, and posterior border of each pterygoid. The
bone also presents for examination the usual nervous and arterial foram-
ina and grooves for the Eustachian tubes, the foramina being partieu-

90 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [ Vol. V1.

larly worthy of notice on account of their marked individuality, all of
them being distinct and nearly circular. The tympanics are free bones,
and carry cut all the usual functions assigned to them. The mastoid
condyle is long, affording by its extension an additional margin at the
under side at the end of the bone for attachment of the ear-drum; the
neck between it and the orbital process is somewhat constricted, and
presents a large pneumatic foramen on the inner surface. The pointed
orbital processes extend upwards, forwards, and inwards, slightly clubbed
at their extremities ; they project into the space half-way between the
pterygoid and wing-like post-frontal. The mandibular condyle is double;
the inner one isa semi-ellipsoid, placed transversely ; the outer an irreg-
ular figure, and separated from the inner by a shallow pit. The oval,
cup-shaped cavity for the reception of the tympanic extremity of the -
squamosal looks directly forward. Between the orbital process and inner
mandibular condyle, on the free edge of the bone, is seen a small artic-
ular surface for the tympanic extremity of the pterygoid. The pterygoids
diverge from each other towards the tympanics by a very open obtuse
angle. They are slender and scale-like, being compressed from above
downwards, twisted on themselves at their tympanic extremities, caus-
ing the long axis of the articular facets for the articulation with these
bones to be vertical. As already described, they have a mid-posterior
facet, which meets the pterapophysial process of the basi-sphenoid. An-
teriorly they do not touch each other, but articulate with the extremities
of the palatines, and the combined four bones touch, and in the living
bird glide over for a limited distance the lower border of the rostrum of
the basi-presphenoid. The anterior ends of the palatines articulate by
an anchylosed schindylesial articulation between the lower surfaces of
the maxillaries and the thin upper surface of a bony process extending
backwards from the intermaxillary. From this point they slightly di-
verge from each other and become broader, being broadest about their
middles; they then rather abruptly approach each other posteriorly, where
they form the joint with the pterygoids already described. Their pos-
terior ends are kept slightly apart by the lower border of the presphe-
noid. They are flattened from above downwards throughout their en-
tire extent. Their outer borders are sharp, and form from one end to
the other a long convexity. As the inner and concave borders ap-
proach each other posteriorly they develop a raised rim on their under
sides, thereby affording a greater surface for muscular attachment.
Above, near their middles, they aid the maxillaries (and in large part de-
veloped from them) in supporting on either side an irregular spongy bone,
that serves the double purpose of narrowing the apertures of the poste-
rior nares and adding bony surface to the roof of the mouth by constric-
tion of the palatine fissure. As is the rule in nearly all birds, the tym-
panic end of the infraorbital bar is on a lower level than the maxillary
extremity ; it is received into the cup-like articulating cavity on that
bone. The two oblique sutures, persistent in many birds, and denoting

No. 4.1 SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF SPEOTYTO. Ot

the original division of this bony style into three separate bones, the
maxillary, malar, and squamosal, are here entirely effaced. As a whole,
it is compressed from side to side, and of ample size in comparison with
other bones of the head. At about the locality of the malo-zymotie
suture the bone throws upwards a thin expansion that meets the de-
seending postfrontal, thus completing the orbital circumference at that
point. Its anterior and fixed extremity is made up by the maxillary,
Here it forms externally a portion of the posterior surface of the bill.
while internally it assists in forming the roof of the mouth and floor of
the nasal cavities, and otherwise behaves as already described. The
lachrymalsare extremely spongy in texture, covered by an outside delicate,
compact bony casing. They articulate above by a ginglymoid joint with
the posterior border of the nasals, resting below on the spongy bones de-
veloped from the superior surfaces of the maxillaries. They are limited
toa slight movement inwards and outwards, and aid in separating the or-
bital cavities from the rhinal chamber. Externally they present for ex-
amination a shallow groove traversing the bone obliquely downwards and
forwards and alittle inwards for the lachrymal duct. The orbital cavities
are very large, and remarkable for the completeness of their bony walls
and the near approach their peripheries make to the circle, any diam-
eter of which measures the merest trifle above or below two centimetres.
The septum in the adult bird has rarely more than one small deficiency
of bone in it. This usually occurs in about the position shown in Pl. I.
The sutures among the various bones have entirely disappeared, nothing
_ being left to define the exact outline of the vomer especially. The groove
for the passage of the olfactory nerves forward is well marked, the cra-
nial foramina for them being distinct, one in each orbital cavity. This
also applies to the openings for the optic nerves. The extent of the roof
is increased on either side by a superorbital process (shown in PI. I,
Fig. 1) that points downwards, backwards, and outwards, and serves for
membranous attachment. The posterior walls are marked by ramifying
erooves for vessels. They have a direct forward aspect, which is en-
hanced by the low descent of the broad and thin postfrontals. Ante-
riorly, the aperture between these and the rhinal vacuities is diminished
by the lachrymals externally and by a wing-like plate thrown off from
the prefrontal internally. This latter bone here terminates in a sharp
concave border, with a descending ridge on either side just within it.
The floors of the orbits are more complete than is usually seen in the class,
due to the flatness and position held by the pterygoids and palatines,
the wing-like process of the ethmoid just referred to, and the pterapo-
physial processes of the basi-sphenoid. The sclerotals number from
fifteen to sixteen, all of them being about the same length, but varying
as to their width; in figure they are trapezoidal and universally oblong,
with the short parallel side in the circumference of the cornea and the
opposite one resting in the periphery of the posterior hemisphere. We
‘have never observed one that was wide enough to appear square.

92 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VI.

‘They are rather thin, concave outwards, very slightly movable at their
opposed edges, and carry out their usual function of maintaining the
form of the optical apparatus. The orbital periphery very nearly ful-
fills that rare condition in birds of a complete bony cireuit. It is
only deficient at the point where the lachrymal fails to touch the
maxillary. The upper mandible of this bird is made the more conspicu-
ous and distinet from the remainder of the skull by the abrupt way in
which it is attached and the much firmer texture of the bone. The
mandibular culmen is perfectly convex from the tip of the sharp-pointed
extremity to where it suddenly terminates under the slightly overhang-
ing frontals, or, more correctly, the minute surface appearance of the
prefontal, for although it is not evident in the adult that that bone
makes itself visible at this point, yet it may be demonstrated in skulls
of younger specimens. The culmen, as in other birds, is formed by the
intermaxillary, which is here firmly united with the nasals, and the two
in conjunction form the peripheries of the truly elliptical external nasal
apertures or nostrils, the first bone bounding them anteriorly, while the
latter completes their arcs in the rear. These in the dry skull measure
through their major axes seven millimetres, and through their minor
ones barely five millimetres. They have a distinct ring raised around
their circumference, which is wanting, however, where they nearest ap-
proach each other anteriorly atthe culmen. The plane of the nostril faces
upwards, outwards, and forwards; the nostrils are completely separated
from one another by a vertical bony septum, developed from the intermax-
illary, not a2 common occurrence in birds. They have, in addition, a con-
eave bony floor, that rises behind into a posterior wall, leaving really two
semicircular openings just beneath the culmen, separated from each other
by the vertical septum. The osseous mandibular tomium, also a part of
the intermaxillary, is as sharp as when the bill is sheathed in its horny
integument. The arc is concave, and falls off rapidly as it approaches
the tip of the beak. Occasionally, in very old birds, the ethmo-turbinal
bones in the nasal passages may ossify. The nasals form here the sides
-of the bill, and are firmly anchylosed to the bones they meet, except the
lachrymals. The movability of the fronto-mandibular articulation is
limited. The dry skull is extremely light and brittle, giving one the
‘sensation in handling it that he might experience while examining an
egg from which the contents had been removed. A line drawn from the,
tip of the upper mandible to the outermost point of one tympanic,
around the are of the cranium to a similar point on the opposite side,
and back to the point of departure, describes nearly the sector of a circle.
The longest radius, which is in the median line, measures four and one-
half centimetres, the chord between the tympanics about three centi-
metres.

The hyoid arch.—The hyoid arch is suspended from the base of the
skull by its usual attachments. In this Owl it consists of but six very
delicate little bones, involving five articulations. The tips of the up-

No. 4.} SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF SPEOTYTO. 93

turned posterior extremities are about opposite the lower borders of the
temporal fosse, its two limbs diverging from each other at an angle equal
to that made by the lower mandible. The cerato-hyals are rather large
in comparison with the other bones. They are joined both anteriorly
and posteriorly by bony bridges, forming a fenestra between them, to
be filled in by a thin membrane. The amount of divergence they make
from each other is less than that made by the hypo-branchial elements
of the thyro-hyals. Anteriorly, the bone connecting them supports a
cartilaginous glosso-hyal, while the posterior connection presents for
examination the usual smooth articulating surface that enters into the
arthrodial joint it makes with the basi-hyal. The basi-hyal and uro-
hyal are confluent, not a sign of the point of union remaining. The
latter bone is continued a short distance posteriorly by a tip of cartilage.
The anterior end of the basi-hyal is devoted to the articular surface for
the bone connecting the cerato-hyals, forming the joint mentioned above.
It is concave from above downwards, convex from side to side, the lower
lip being the longer. It will be plainly seen that this combination grants
to the tongue a movement in the vertical and horizontal planes. The
anterior articulating heads of the hypo-branchial elements of the thyro-
hyals are opposite each other, each being received into the diminutive aceta-
bulum intended for it at the side of the united basi- and uro-hyals, and
most probably at the junction of the two latter bones. These two ele-
ments are long bones having a cylindrical shaft, terminating at either
end in an articulating head. They are the longest bones in the hyoid arch,
and have a gentle curvature upwards throughout their extent The inner
heads form an arthrodial joint on either side with the outer heads of
the cerato-branchial elements of the thyro-hyals. These, the last bones
of the arch, are joined in the manner already shown above. Their inner
ends are quite pointed, even as far as the bone goes, the extreme points
being finished off with cartilage. They curve upwards from about their
middle thirds, and, like the tirst elements of the thyro-hyals, they are
long bones, but with curved cylindrical shafts, the outer eud, however,
being the only true articulating one.

The lower mandible—( Pls. I and II, Fig. 3.).—That portion of the bone
which originally was separate as the dentary element, and as far back as
to include the interangular vacuity, is firm and compact, while the re-
mainder has much the same character as the bones of the cranium, being
cellular and light, having only a very thin outside layer of the harder
tissue. Allof the primary segments are firmly knitted together, the only
sutural trace to mark the margins of any one of them being the posterior
border of the dentary elements as they bound the fenestra before and
slope away beneathit. The articular extremities are some little distance
below the upper outline of the bone. Their superior surfaces are in-
dented so as to accurately receive the condyles of the tympanics on
either side, forming the joint that allows the opening and closing of the
mandibles. Their under surfaces are smooth and rounded, baying a

94 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VL

fine ridge running across them transversely. Internally they are drawn
out gradually into subeylindrical processes that point upwards, in-
wards, and a little forwards, exhibiting superiorly on each, about the
middle, an oval pneumatic foramen. The upper edge rises rather ab-
ruptly from the articular ends, presenting as it arrives near the general
level a rudimentary coronoid for the insertion of the tendon of the tem-
poral. With the exception of a little elevation where the dentary ele-
ment meets the surangular, the superior outline is unbroken; it falls
away rapidly as it approaches the symphysis, where, with the opposite
border, it completes a little notch at the extremity. The tomium is
not as sharp as in the upper bill, and the mandibles do not fit nicely to
each other until covered with their horny sheaths. The inferior border
is rounded throughout its extent, and on a level at its posterior com-
mencement with the under surfaces of the articular ends and running
nearly parallel with the superior. The curve described by the rami
before they meet at the symphysis inferiorly approaches the parabola in
outline. The sides of the jaw are nearly smooth internally and exter-
nally. The vacuity that occurs in so many birds at the junction of the
middle and inner thirds is rather large, long, and spindle-shaped, and
filled in, in the fresh state, by an attenuated membrane.

The spinal column ; cervical portion.—There are fourteen cervical ver-
tebre, each one having a more or less free movement with the one be-
yond and behind it, maintaining in all positions some variation of the
usual sigmoid curve observable in the division of the vertebral column
throughout the class. The arrangement, as well as the direction, of
the planes of the zygapophysial articular surfaces allow considerable
rotary movement in the vertical plane, with combinations of the two.
It is a common habit of this bird, among other of his antics, to duck
his head smartly downwards and again upwards, several times in sue-
cession, upon being approached. The relative position of the cervicals
has been figured in Plate I from the dead bird, placed in the act of
this particular maneeuvre, in a specimen after careful dissection. The
calibre, as well as shape, of the neural canal in this portion of the spinal
column varies at different points. It originates at the atlas as a trans-
verse ellipse, with a major axis of four millimetres and a minor axis of
a little less than three millimetres ; this is about the maximum capacity
throughout the entire canal. From the atlas to the sixth or seventh
vertebra the ellipse gradually approaches the circle, with a marked di-
minution in size, its diameters being at the seventh about two milli- ©
metres in any direction. From this point to the twelfth, inclusive, it
rises as it fell, from the atlas, and in the same manner, when we again
discover a transverse ellipse, perhaps a jot smaller than the one de-
scribed in speaking of the atlas. In the thirteenth the canal is smaller
than, though in all other respects resembles, the twelfth, but an’ abrupt
change takes place in shape as we pass to the fourteenth or last cervi-
eal, where the form of the neural tube suddenly approximates the cir-

No.4.) ' SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF SPEOTYTO. 95

cularity of the dorsal vertebra. The vertebral canal begins, circular, on
either side at the third cervical vertebra, most of its length being im-
mediately beneath the prezygapophyses of each segment. It is formed
in the usual manner by the di- and par-apophysial processes uniting
laterally with the pleurapophysial elements. Small at the cephalic
extremity of the column, its calibre gradually increases in each ver-
tebra as we proceed toward the thoracic extremity, until it attains its
maximum capacity at the eleventh vertebra. In the twelfth the in-
tegrity of its walls is lost by a parting of the par- and pleur-apo-
physial elements, with a disappearance of the former, leaving it no
floor, so that in this vertebra it ceases to be a closed canal. The most
prominent object presenting itself for examination in the atlas, superi-
orly, is the deep reniform cavity for articulation with the occipital con-
dyle of the basi-cranii. It makes up to the entire superior articulating
surface of what would first appear to be the centrum of this vertebra,
unless we should not consider such to be the case until the odontoid
process of the vertebra next below, the true centrum of the atlas, lends
its assistance, in which event the surface of this articulation is only
complete when made so by the extremity of the process just alluded
to. A membrane, however, always stretches across this interspace,
separating the extremity of the odontoid from the condyle of the oc-
ciput. This is not invariably the case, either, as in many of the
individuals we have examined a minute vacuity usually exists, allowing
the process to come in immediate contact with the condyle at one point.
Below and posteriorly there is another articulating surface, convex for
the centrum of the axis and concave for its odontoid process, accurately
meeting the opposed surface of this vertebra and forming the atlo-axoid
articulation. A lip of bone, a portion of the hypapophysis of the verte-
bra we are now describing, projects downwards and shields this joint in
front, overlapping, indeed, a good part of the axis. The neurapophyses
of the atlas are slight in structure. The concave postzygapophyses ar-
ticulate with the convex prezygapophyses of the axis. The bone is de-
void of a neural spine. In the axis we find both an hypapophysis and
neural spine developed, the former being prodced from the ridge on the
anterior aspect of the centrum of the bone. The odontoid process arises
vertically from the posterior margin of the upper surface of the centrum.
Its summit and anterior face are convex and articulating, while behind
it is flat and continuous with the spinal canal. The facet for articula-
tion with the centrum of the third vertebra looks downwards and in-
wards, is convex from side to side and concave in the opposite direction.
The postzygapophyses are concave, look downwards and outwards, the
conditions in the prezygapophyses being exactly the opposite; this is
the rule throughout the cervical portion of the column. After we pass
the atlas and axis, we find in the third cervical vertebra here, as in
most vertebrates, parts that are common to the series of this portion of
the column, deviating but slightly from each other as we examine them

96 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VI.

in seriation; but gradually as this deviation proceeds, some requisite con-
dition is brought about when the climax is attained. The fact of the
presence of a neural spine on the axis is conveyed, though in a less
marked degree, to the third or next vertebra below, where it occupies a
position about in the middle of the bone. As we descend, this process
becomes less and less prominent, being found set further back on each
successive vertebra; it disappears about entirely at the tenth, after
which it rapidly begins to make its appearance again, assuming its for-
mer position in the middle of the vertebra, being quite evidentin the twelfth
in the shape of a pointed spine, while in the fourteenth it bears the quad-
rate form, with extended crest, being the first step towards an assumption
of that notorious feature found further on in the dorsals. In the third
vertebra the space between the pre- and post-zygapophyses is almost en-
tirely filled in, a minute foramen on either side alone remaining, by a lam-
ina of bone extending from one process to the other, giving to this ver-
tebra a much more solid appearance, which in reality it possesses above
that attained by any of its fellows. This bony lamina is reduced in the
fourth vertebra to a mere “ interzygapophysial bar” connecting the pro-
cesses, while in the next succeeding one or two vertebre it occurs only
on the prezygapophyses more as a tubercle, being directed backwards,
then disappearing entirely, is to be found again only on a few of the
last cervicals as an ill-defined knob, still retaining its original position.
The diapophyses at first project nearly at right angles from their re-
spective centra, then approach the median line by being directed more
backward near the centre of the cervical division of the column, and on
nearing the dorsals again gradually protrude more and more directly
outward. The prezygapophyses of the ninth cervical support well-
marked unapophysial tubercles, which are feebly developed also on a
vertebra or two both above and below the ninth. The joints between
the bodies of the cervicals of this Owl are upon the same plan as those:
found throughout the class; the anterior facet being concave from.
side to side, convex from above downwards, the reverse being the case:
with the posterior facets, and when articulated fitting accurately into:
each other. The pleurapophysial elements, well-marked in all the cervi-
cals after passing the axis, become in the thirteenth vertebra a free
cervical rib, about three millimetres in length, without neck or true:
head, being merely suspended on either side from the diapophysis of
the vertebra, and freely movable on its exceedingly minute articulating
facet.

Attached to the last cervical we find the second pair of free pleura-
pophyses, about two-thirds as long as the first pair of dorsals or true
ribs of the thorax, terminating in pointed extremities and articulating
with the vertebra by both capitula and tubereula, the former on ellipti-
eal facets, placed yertically on either side of the centrum at the anterior
margin of the neural canal, and the latter on rounded facets beneath
the diapophyses. The tubercle on one of these ribs is nearly as long as,

No. 4.} SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF SPEOTYTO. 97

the neck; at the junction on the posterior side is found a pneumatic
foramen of considerable size. These ribs are more or less flattened
above, from before backwards being convex anteriorly, concave poste-
riorly, becoming rounded below. [rom the third to the ninth vertebra,
inclusive, appear beneath the vertebral canal anteriorly well-developed
styliform parapophysial processes, directed backwards and downwards.
They are best marked on the segments of the middle of the neck. There
is no instance in this bird of these processes being produced so far
backwards as to touch the next vertebra below; their tips, as a rule,
about overhanging the middle of the centrum of the vertebra to which
they belong. We have found in specimens of Dubo virginianus the
parapophyses of the fourth vertebra overlapping and touching the fifth
for a millimetre or more. The third and fourth cervicals have, beneath
in the median line posteriorly, strongly developed hypapophyses, quad-
rate in form, a process that exhibits itself on the fifth vertebra, ante-
riorly, merely as a small tubercle. On the sixth this tubercle has disap-
peared, and has been supplanted by two others that are now found just
within the periphery of the anterior facet of the centrum on the para-
pophysis of each side, beneath and inclined toward each other. These
processes, now a double hypapophysis apparently developed from the par-
apophyses, continue to increase in size and inclination towards each other
on the next three vertebre, so that on the ninth, where they last appear,
they nearly form a closed canal. The passage between them is intended
for the carotids, to which they afford protection. The hypapophysis of
the tenth, eleventh, and twelfth vertebre is single, large, quadrate, and
directed forwards and downwards. There are three on each of the last
two vertebre, each having an independent root, the two lateral ones
directed downwards, forwards, and outwards, with characteristics similar
to the one in the median line. Several pneumatic and nutrient foramina
perforate each cervical vertebra at various points, except in the axis
and atlas, where, after diligent search, aided by the lens, we have sig-
nally failed to discover them.

Dorsal vertebrae; vertebral and sternal ribs; sternum.—The dorsal
vertebra number five ; the anterior one articulates with the last cervical
and the last dorsal with the first sacral. _Although the dorsals of this
bird fit-very snugly to each other, it requires no further masceration to
separate them from one another than it does to remove the ribs from
their attachments. This close interlocking, however, greatly diminishes
the movement of this division of the spinal column, bestowing upon it a
rigidity only exceeded by the anchylosed vertebra of the sacrum; yet,
it must be understood, they do enjoy, in this Owl, a considerable degree
of movement, especially laterally. The neural spines have here attained
their maximum development, forming, when taken together, an elevated
and compressed median crest, with a thickened summit, and having a
firm hold upon the remainder of the vertebre below. Taken separately,
the last is the smallest, the fourth next, the first next, and the second

7GB

98 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VI.

and third the largest. Their anterior and posterior borders are concave,
allowing, when articulated, spindle-shaped apertures to exist among
them, while their summits are produced backwards and forwards, thick-
ened, and wedged into each other. This wedging is performed in the
following manner: The posterior extremity of the crest forming the sum-
mit of the neural spine of the first dorsal divides and receives the an-
terior extremity of the crest of the second. This same arrangement ex-
ists between the second and third, and at the summit between the third
and fourth, but the fourth immediately below the junction also divides
for a little distance and receives the edge of the posterior rim of the
third, just beneath the union of the crests. This latter method of join-
ing is feebly attempted between the fourth and last. (See Pl. I.) The
neural canal is nearly cylindrical in the dorsal region, its calibre being
less at the sacral extremity, and rather compressed from side to side, as
are the centra as we approach that end, each one being a little more so
than its neighbor beyond. Viewing these five vertebrae from above in
the articulated skeleton, we observe the spinous crest already described ;
we are struck with the regularity with which the postzygapophyses over-
lap and adjust themselves to the prezygapophyses from before back-
wards, like the scales in some fishes, the facets of the former facing
downwards and outwards, the opposed surfaces of the latter facing up-
wards and inwards. The neurapophyses are horizontally compressed
and rather broad; the diapophyses jut from them at right angles from
points about their middles. There is an inclination for the latter to
be directed slightly backwards as we near the sacrum. The diapophy-
sis of the first dorsal is the shortest and stoutest, that of the last the most
delicately constructed. Superiorly, these processes support metapophy-
sial ridges at their extreme outer borders. These ridges on the diapophy-
ses of the first dorsal are the largest, rounded at both ends, extending
a little both backwards and forwards, but far from touching the ridge
either in front or behind them. The metapophysials of the last dorsal
are smaller, sharp, styliform, and project only forwards, though they
do not by any means touch the diapophyses in front of them. On
the intermediate vertebra they change gradually between these two-
extremes, but in no instance meet the diapophyses of the vertebra be-
fore or behind thein, and thus constitute an additional aid to the rigid-
ity of the back, as it does in other species of this family and in many
other birds. The centra increase in depth beneath the neural canal the
nearer they are to the sacrum. In the first dorsal the body measures
about one millimetre, the vertical diameter of the canal being three; in
the last dorsal it equals the diameter of the canal. The interarticular
facets are in the vertical plane, with their concavities and convexities op-
posed to each other, as they were described when speaking of the last cer-
vical vertebre. The bodies are about of a length, constricted at their mid-
dles and expanding towards their extremities. The first two dorsals each
bear in the median line, beneath, an hypapophysial process of consider-

Wo. 4.] SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF SPEOTYTO. 99

able size, affording abundant surface for attachment of some of the muscles
of the neck. The processof the first dorsal has one common trunk, with a
compressed midprong and two lateral and pointed subprocesses. (See
PL. II, Fig. 5.) The second dorsal possesses a single long hypapophysis,
quadrate in form, dipping into the chest further than the first. There
is not a trace on the remaining dorsals of this appendix. Parapophysial
processes, so prominent in nearly all the cervicals, afford in the dorsal
vertebree simply articulating facets for the capitula of the pleurapophy-
ses situated just within the anterior margin of the neural canal of each
centrum, never extending to the vertebra beyond, forming the demi-facet
of andranatomia. Immediately above these facets, on eitler side, may be
noticed a group of pneumatic foramina of various sizes and shapes, and
again, anterior to these foramina, the rim of the body of the vertebra for
alimited distance becomes sharply concave, being opposite to a like con-
cavity in the next vertebra, the two, when opposed and articulated, form-
ing the oval foramen for the exit of the dorsal nerves. Elliptical artic-
ulating facets for the tubercula of the pleurapophyses, looking down-
wards and outwards, are seen on the inferior ends of the diapophyses,
with a midridge running from each facet to the base of the process, to
be expanded and lost on the sides of the centra. As there are five dor-
sal vertebre, so are there five pleurapophyses articulating with them and
with the hemapophyses below. Each rib is attached to a single verte-
bra, as shown while speaking of the dorsals. The necks of these ribs
become more elongated the nearer they are to the pelvic extremity of
the body, the first possessing the shortest. This is exactly reversed in
regard to the pedicles bearing the tubercula, being the longest in the
first pleurapophysis and shortest in the last. This contraction of the
pedicles is progressively compensated for by the lengthening of the cor-
responding and respective diapophyses of the vertebra to which they
belong. Viewing the ribs from the front, in the skeleton, the curve they
present resembles the quadrant of a shortened ellipse, the vertex of the
major axis being situated at the base of the neural spines ; viewed lat-
erally, the curve is sigmoidal, though a much elongated and shallow one,
with the hemapopbysial extremity looking forwards and the facet of
the tubercle backwards. The first rib is the shortest and generally,
though not always, the broadest; the last being the longest and most
slender, the intermediate ones regularly increasing in length and dimin-
ishing in breadth from the first to the last. In form, the ribs of this
Owl are flattened from side to side, widest in the upper thirds, narrowest
at their middles, and club-shaped at their lower extremities, where they
articulate with the sternal ribs by shallow facets. On the inner surfaces
we find the necks produced upon the bodies as ridges, running near their
anterior margins and becoming lost at about the junction of the upper
and middle thirds in the body of the rib. Pneumatic foramina, from
two to three in number and of considerable size, are found just within
the commissure between neck and tubercle, posteriorly. All the verte-

.

100 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VI.

bral ribs bear a movably articulated epipleural appendage, each resting
in a shallow cavity designed for it upon the posterior borders. They
leave the rib at right angles, but soon turn upward with a varying ab-
ruptness. The appendage of the first rib is situated lowest of any on
its rib, that of the last the highest; the facets of the others are found
in the line joining those of the first and last. They all make acute
angles with the bodies of the ribs to which each belong, above their points
of insertion. The angle made by the last is the least, and it increases to
the last. The epipleurals of the leading pleurapophyses are the widest
and generally the longest (the one on the second rib in a skeleton of
this bird now before me is as wide as the rib at the point from where it
starts), the one on the last rib being always-the smallest.

Clubbed at their superior extremities, each one overlaps the rib behind
it, and in this manner add stability to the thoracic parietes, which is
undoubtedly the function these little scale-like bones were intended to:
fulfil. The hempapohyses connect the vertebral ribs with the ster-
num. There are six of them, one articulating with each vertebral rib
and having a concave facet to receive it, while the last meets the sacral
rib above and articulates with the posterior border of the fifth below.
' The first one is the shortest and most slender of all; the fifth is the.
longest. With the exception of the last, their superior ends are enlarged
and compressed from side to side, while below their middles they be-
come smaller; then turning upon themselves, suddenly enlarge again, so:
as to be flattened from before backwards, when each terminates by a
transverse articular facet for articulation with the hemal spine. Quite
an interspace exists between their points of contact with the sternum.
They all make a gentle curve upwards just before meeting their respect-
ive ribs. The hemapophysis that articulates with the sacral rib is in-
serted in a long, shallow groove on the posterior border of the sternal
rib that articulates with the last dorsal pleurapophysis, but does not
meet the sternum—simply terminating in a fine point on the posterior
border of the sternal rib mentioned. From before backwards the ster-
nal ribs make a gradually decreasing obtuse angle with the vertebral |
ribs, while the angle they make with the sternum is a gradually increas-
ing acute from the fifth to the first. On the anterior surfaces of their
expanded sternal ends are to be found on each a minute pneumatic fora-
men or two. The anterior third of the lateral borders of the sternum is
the space allotted for the insertion of these bones.

The Burrowing Owl being a bird not possessed of any considerable
_ power of flight, a circumstance arising from the life it was destined to
lead, or the necessity of having that flight ever long sustained, we would
naturally expect to find, in the course of a study of its anatomy, those
characteristic modifications of the various systems which pertain to spe-
cies of the class in which that gift has always been a secondary consid-
eration. Nor are we disappointed in this expectation, for a single
glance at the size of the sternum of this Owl, when compared with the

No. 4.] SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF SPEOTYTO. 101

remainder of its skeleton with regard to areas for muscular attachments,
reveals to us the disproportion of the surface supplied by that bone for
the attachment of the pectorals. That its dimensions are relatively
contracted is proved by actual, comparative, and proportional measure-
ments of the bones with other species of its family, individuals of which,
at the best, are not noted for their powers of flight as a rule, and con-
sequently the hzemal spine does not present so prominent a feature of
the skeleton as it does in other species of the Class Aves where vigor-
ous flight is habitual. Life-size figures of this bone, viewed from the
three principal positions for the purpose of study and measurement, are
offered to the reader in Pl. I and Pl. II, Figs 5 and 6. The concave
dorsal aspect of the body is smooth, being traversed in the median line
by avery shallow groove that lies immediately over the base of the
keel. This groove terminates, within five millimeters of the anterior
border, in a little depression, at the bottom of which are discovered
pneumatic foramina, two Or more in number, leading to the anterior
thickened vertical ridge of the carina beneath. Other minute openings
for the admission of air into the interior of this bone are seen among
some shallow depressions just within the costal borders. The bone does
not seem to be as well supplied in this respect as it is in some other
Owls. The costal borders supporting the transverse articular facets for
articulation with the hzemapophyses occupy about one-third of the en-
tire lateral border on either side anteriorly. At the bases of the major-
ity of the depressions that occur between these facets are found other
pneumatic foramina. The anterior border is smooth and rounded, with
a median shallow concavity occupying its middle third. At its extrem-
ities, laterally, the costal processes arise with a general forward tendency
at first, but with their superior moities directed backwards. The costal
borders terminate at the posterior borders of these processes, at a higher
level than the anterior sternal margin does at their anterior borders.
The coracoid grooves are just below the anterior border. They are
deep, continuous with each other, having a greater depth behind the
manubrium in the median line than observed at any other point. Their
general surface is smooth and polished, looking upwards and forwards,
and lying principally in the horizontal plane. They melt away into the
body of the bone laterally, at points opposite and not far distant from
the posterior articulations on the costal borders. The margin that
- bounds them below is sharp, travels at right angles from the median
line at first to a point; posterior to the costal processes, then making a
little dip downwards, then again curving upwards, disappears gradually
with the groove it bounds. That portion of it from the point where it
changes its direction to its termination is described by authors as the
subcostal ridge. The manubrium, occupying its usual position in the
middle line, is comparatively small, quadrate in form, compressed below,
slightly notched and flattened above, its posterior surface forming the
inner anterior surface of the coracoidal groove. All the borders bound-

102 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Val.VI.

ing the posterior parts of the bone are sharp; the lateral one, taken
from the apices of the costal processes to their other and lower termi-
nations, are concave. As is the arrangement generally among Owls,
the xiphoidal extremity of the sternum is four-notched, two on either
side, the outer notches being the deeper. Both have rounded bases, and
the processes that separate them are ample and possess rounded ex-
tremities. The border upon which the keel ends posteriorly is square,
though we have met with specimens in which it was slightly notched in
the median line. The body is oblong, and, if we include the xiphoidal
processes on either side, has a length half as long again as its width.
The ventral and convex surface, like the dorsal, is smooth and presents
but two points for examination. The pectoral ridge, faintly marked
throughout its extent, originates on each side at a point near the outer
borders of the coracoid grooves, running inwards and backwards, and dies
away at the base of the keel nearits middle. This little ridge denotes the
line between the pectoralis major and minor. The keel is moderately
well developed, the distance from the base of the manubrium to the
carinal angle being equal to the distance from the same point at the
base of the manubrium to the base of either costal process or outer an-
terior sternalangle. It is compressed, smooth, and thin, but its stability
is greatly aided by the carinal ridge on either side, which commences
strong and well marked at the base of the manubrium, just within the
anterior border running parallel with the latter, and disappears as it ap-
proaches the carinal angle. The anterior border of the keel is sharp and
concave; the inferior border is convex, with the edge slightly thickened.
The point of intersection of these two borders anteriorly is rounded .
and forms the carinal angle. The inferior border expands posteriorly,

and the keel terminating a short distance before arriving at the poste-

rior sternal border, the two become blended with the surface of the body

of the bone.

Sacral vertebrae ; pelvis; and coccygeal vertebre.—It is no uncommon
occurrence to find in the skeletons in many species of birds at least one
or more of the anterior sacral vertebre articulating with a greater or
less amount of freedom with one another, but in the sacrum of the Owl
now under consideration, with the exception of a few faint lines indicat-
ing the original individuality of the vertebre, the bones are thoroughly
anchylosed together and to the ossa innominata. From inspection of
this compound bone in immature birds, we find the usual number of.
sacral vertebre composing the sacrum to be thirteen. The anterior
face of the first possesses all the necessary elements for articulation with
the last dorsal. The neural spine has a thickened crest that soon meets.
the ilia on either side ; its anterior edge is thin, and gives attachment below
to the interspinous ligament. The neural canal is circular, and the
prezygapophyses well marked. The articular facet of the centrura is in
the vertical plane, with its curvatures similar to those ascribed to the an-
terior facet on the centra of the dorsals. The neurapophyses are broad

No. 4.] SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF SPEOTYTO. 103

and the diapophyses are strong and raised, with their enlarged extrem-
ities expanded upon and firmly united with the iliac bones. There is but
one pair of sacral pleurapophyses, and they are free ones. Long and
slender, they articulate with the first vertebra in the usual manner, but
the relation is much more intimate, as they touch the diapophyses for
some little distance beyond the tubercula towards the capitula. The
lower extremities of these ribs are terminated by little roundish knobs,
which articulate with the hemapophysis on either side, described as
being inserted in the posterior border of the fifth sternal rib. View-
ing the bone dorsal-wise, it is to be seen that the thickened crest of the
neural spine of the first vertebra protrudes from the angle made by the
ilia meeting it anteriorly to a greater or less distance. This broad and
compressed crest, then continued backwards, is firmly wedged between
the ilia until we pass the third vertebra; at this point the ilia diverge from
each other to another point just anterior to the acetabula, then converge,
terminating in the posterior sacro-iline border within five or six milli-
metres of each other. The sacrum completely fills in the lozenge-shaped
space thus formed from the third vertebra—first, by continued broaden-
ing and compression of the neural spine, that soon becomes one with the
neurapophyses; and, secondly, by the expanded extremities of the di- and
par-apophyses, the processes themselves also taking due part. The integ-
rity of the surface is unbroken, save posteriorly, where afew pairs of fora-
mina exist among the expanded transverse processes, increasing in size
from before backwards. Anterior to a line joining the acetabula this
surface is in the horizontal plane; posterior to this line there isa decline,
which declination is accepted also by the innominate bones; this gives
the entire pelvis a shape that seems to be characteristic of the majority ot
both the diurnal and nocturnal Raptores. The ‘ ilio-neural” canals here
present open by small apertures posteriorly, at about the point where
the ilia commences to diverge, passing obliquely downwards and _for-
wards; their anterior openings are large enough to allow a view of their
internal walls. The neural spine that divides them throughout is com-
pressed from side to side; the ilia which form their outer boundaries are
convex; the neuro-spinal crest forms the roof, the basal surface being.
deficient, formed merely by the spine-like di- and par-apophyses of the
vertebre and the confluent neural arches. The first vertebra occupies
the lowest level, the bird supposed to be standing asin Pl. I. Now, a
line drawn mesial on the centra below, from the first centrum to the last,
gradually rises until opposite the anterior borders of the ischiadic fora-
mina, then curves rather abruptly downwards to its termination. The
centra of the first two or three vertebrz are compressed from side to side
to such an extent as to cause them to appear wedge-shaped, the common
apex or edge being below; after that, however, they rapidly broaden,
become compressed vertically and more cellular in structure ; they are
very broad from the fourth to the ninth, inclusive—then as rapidly be-
come contracted as they approach the coccyx. Minute but numerous

104 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. Vol. VI.

pneumatic foramina are seen at ornear the usual localities. The largest
foramina for the exit of the roots of any pair of sacral nerves is gen-
erally in the fifth vertebra; they decrease in size as they leave them
either way. In the young only the last few of these foramina are double;
they are all double in the adult and placed one above another, a pair on
the side of each centrum attheir posterior borders, for the exit of the roots
of the sacral nerves. The diapophyses of the anterior five sacral verte-
bre are thrown out against the internal surfaces of the ilia, to which
they are firmly attached, and act as braces to hold the engaged bones
together. The parapophyses of the first form facets for articulation
with the sacral ribs; the second and third have none; in the fourth and
fifth they also act as braces in the manner above described, joining the
ilia just before their divergence commences. Reliance seems to have
been placed entirely in the completeness of the sacro-iliac union in the
last vertebra, for the apophysial struts terminate in that portion of the
pelvic vault formed by the sacrum itself, except in the last two verte-
bree, where the parapophyses abut against the iliac borders. The para-
pophyses of that vertebra which is opposite the acetabula are promi-
nent, they being long and ample, reaching to the border and reénforcing
that part. of the pelvis that requires it the most, the vicinity of the
leverage for the pelvic limbs. In other Strigide several apophyses are
thrown out at this point. The posterior opening of the neural canal in
the last sacral vertebra is subcircular, its diameters being about a milli-
metre in length. This vertebra also possesses small postzygapophyses,
looking upwards and outwards for articulation with the prezygapophyses
of the first coccygeal vertebra; the articulating facet of the centrum is
also small, long transversely, notched in the median line, the surface on
either side being convex. At every point where the sacrum meets the
iliac bones union is firm and complete, though both upon the internal
and external surfaces the sutural traces are permanently apparent.
The anterior iliac margins, as they diverge from the sacral spine, form an
acute angle, concave forwards; they have a well-marked rim or border,
nearly a millimetre in width, raised above the general surface of the
bone, which disappears on the outer borders as we followthem backwards.
The two anterior and outer angles overhang the sacral and fifth or
last dorsal pleurapophyses. From these last the marginal boundaries,
which necessarily give the bones their form, are produced backwards and
outwards to a point opposite the centrum of the third sacral vertebra,
then backwards and inwards, forming at the above points two lateral
angles. From the apices of the two lateral angles to where the borders
terminate on either side in front of the acetabula with the pubic bones,
the direction is such as to form a concavity on each side; the line joining
the bases of these concavities, points opposite the posterior openings of
the ilio-neural canals, being the narrowest part of the pelvis. The upper
and at the same time the inner margins of the bones in question, from
the anterior and median angle, at first approach, soon to diverge from

No. 4.] SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF SPEOTYTO. 105

each other, and form the gluteal ridges and borders of those seale-like pro-
Jjections of the posterior portion of the ilia that overhang the acetabula.
Produced now as the “gluteal ridges”, they tend almost directly back-
wards, though very slightly inwards, to terminate in the ischial mar-
gins. The preacetabula dorsal iliac surfaces are generally concave,
while the postacetabula, and at the same time that surface which
occupies the higher plane, is flat, having a slope downwards and
backwards, with a ventral reduplication after forming the rounded and
concave posterior boundary of the pelvis. The preacetabula super-
ficial iliac area is nearly double the extent of the postacetabula.
The antitrochanterian facets that surmount the cotyloid cavities have
the usual backward direction, though their surfaces look downwards,
outwards, and a little forwards. ‘The external surfaces of the ischia look
upwards and outwards, having just the reverse direction ventrally.
Posteriorly, these bones are produced beyond the ilia into finely pointed
extremities, tending to approach each other. The slender pubic bones,
after closing in the obdurator foramen on either side, touch and unite
with the inferior borders of the ischia as far as the pointed ends of the
latter, beyond which they are produced nearly to meet behind. The in-
terval between the free extremities of the pubic bones in some individ-
uals, notably “ birds of the year ”, is very slight, less than a millimetre
sometimes, approaching a closed pelvis. The circular and thoroughly
perforated acetabula are formed in the usual manner by the three pelvic
bones. They have a diameter of about three millimetres, and their cir-
cumferences are in the vertical plane. The ischiadic foramina are ellip-
tical and large; they are, as usual, posterior to the acetabula and above
the obdurator foramina. These last are also elliptical, and about one-
third the size of the others. Should the major axes of these two ellipses
be produced backwards, they would intersect and form an acute angle
just within the posterior pelvic border. Viewing the pelvis ventral-
wise, we observe, in addition to points mentioned when speaking of the
sacrum, the reduplication of the ilia, forming pockets behind and inter-
nally, that open outwards through the ischiadic foramina and inwards
into the general pelvic cavity. The pelvic passage is subcireular, un-
closed, with an average diameter of 1.7 centimetres vertically, and a
little less transversely. The narrowest part of the pelvis measures 1.2
centimetres, the widest 2 centimetres, being taken between the iliae pro-
jections over the acetabula; the average length, including anterior neural
spine, is 3 centimetres. Pneumatic foramina occur in the shallow an-
fractuosities, between the antitrochaniers and gluteal ridges in the ilia.
None of the caudal vertebra are grasped by the pelvis, the posterior ex-
tremity of the sacrum always assisting to form the curve of the pelvic
passage. The usual number of these vertebre is seven, though occa-
sionally an additional one is found, making eight in some individuals.
This enumeration does not include the modified and ultimate coccygeal
vertebra, the pygostyle. They are all freely movable upon one another,

106 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VE

and the first upon the last sacral vertebra. The articular facets upon
the centra vary in shape throughout the series; that upon the first is
long transversely, with a double convexity so arranged as to accommo-
date itself to the one on the extremity of the sacrum; they soon become
uniform, to pass to the subcircular one existing between the last verte-
bra and the pygostyle, on which it is concave.

The pleurapophyses and parapophyses are very rudimentary or en-
tirely suppressed. Each vertebra bears a prominent neural spine, which,
from the first to the sixth, inclusive, is bifurcated; in the last two it ap-
pears as a mere primitive knobule. The transverse processes are all
deflected downwards and outwards, very small in the first and still more
so in the last; are largest in the fifth and sixth. Prezygapophyses are
well marked ; they reach forwards and articulate with the feebly devel-
oped postzygapophyses. In a few of the posterior segments there ap-
pears to be an effort on the part of the neurapophyses to overlap the
vertebra next beyond them. The neural canal is pervious throughout,
commencing in the first with a calibre equal to that in the end of the
sacrum; it gradually diminishes, and terminates in a minute, blind, con-
ical socket in the pygostyle. Hypapophyses are produced downwards
in a few of the ultimate vertebre. They hook forwards and articulate
with the centrum of the vertebra next beyond them. Sometimes they
are observed to be free, or rather resting upon a facette on the anterior
margin of one centrum and extending over to the anterior margin of the
centrum of the vertebra anterior to it, to meet a similar facette, as a
tiny styliform process. The spinal column is completed posteriorly by
the pygostyle—that ploughshare-shaped segment that articulates with
the last coccygeal vertebra. Above its cup-shaped facet this bone arises
as a laterally compressed plate, extending backwards and bifurcated at
its extremity, as if to imitate the neural spines of the vertebre of the
series of which it is an ultimate appendage. Below the facet it projects
forwards and completes the median sequence of hypapophyses of the
centra, being rather larger than any of them. The posterior curve is
simply inflected downwards and forwards from its apex.

The scapular arch—(See Pl. 1).*—The three elements that constitute
this arch are all represented and independent bones; the coracoids ar-
ticulate with the sternum and scapule; coracoids and clavicle, con-

_nected by ligaments, lend their share to form or strengthen the shoulder-
joints. The coracoid, comparatively large and strong, forms in the
usual manner an arthrodial joint of restricted movement with the ster-
num, its lower end being in the coracoid groove on the anterior part of
that bone. The inner angle of its base is about 2 millimetres from the
mesial line, and 4 millimetres intervening between it and its fellow of

*Tt will be seen that in this figure, corresponding limbs, and other parts that are
alike on either side of the body, have not been reproduced, it being thought the bet-
ter way, as the bones on the side towards the observer would necessarily obscure the
more remote one, complicate the figure, and show nothing additional.

No. 4.] SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF SPEOTYTO. 107

the opposite side in the groove. This extremity is broad, its outer
angle being beneath the third sternal rib at its point of meeting the
costal border; it is compressed from before backwards. The articular
facet, looking downwards, backwards, and a little inwards, is trans-
versely concave, with a slight dividing ridge, running antero-posteriorly,
converting the general concavity into two smaller ones. The coracoid
when in position is produced upwards, forwards, and outwards, making,
with the vertical line through its base, rather an acute angle. A limited
portion of the middle third of the bone only is subelliptical on section
and at all shaft-like, due to the fact that the coracoid in this bird
being perhaps less than the average length as compared with the
size of the bird, and, secondly, tothe unusually enlarged extremities,
features observable, more or less, in Raptores generally. The anterior
groove of the upper extremity, that is arched over by the head of the
clavicle above, is deep, and occupies fully the upper third of the bone.
The coraco-clavicular process springs, thin and compressed, from the
inner side of the shaft of the bone, at junction of upper and middle
thirds, to turn upon itself, so as to be projected upwards, forwards, and
a little outwards, terminating with an elliptical facet for articulation with
the clavicle. The upper border of this process is concave lengthwise and
articulates throughout its extent with the inferior margin of the acro-
mial process of the scapula. The lower and thin edge of the coraco-
clavicular process tends obliquely downwards, to be lost on the inner
surface of the shaft of the bone near its middle. The outer wall of the
anterior groove is formed by the coracoid itself, the process just de-
scribed being really nothing more than a wing-like extension forming
the inner boundary of the groove in this bird; it terminates above both.
clavicle and scapula in a rounded, tuberous head. Below this head, an-
teriorly and still more inwardly, the coracoid affords a vertical, elongated
facet for the clavicle, while behind, looking a little outward, is the con-
cave elliptical facet that constitutes about one-third of the glenoid cay-
ity for the humerus, internal to which, and running first directly up-
wards, then making aright angle and continuing forwards, a little up-
wards, and outwards, the last direction being the upper margin of the
coraco-clavicular process, is another facet, for the scapula. Behind and
below, this bone displays one or two lines and depressions, boundaries.
of muscular attachments. In the middle of the anterior groove, oppo-
site the base of the coraco-clavicular process, the shaft of the bone is.
perforated; this perforation is elliptical lengthwise with the shaft, and
passes directly through to make its appearance on the posterior convex
surface just below the scapula. This foramen transmits a branch of
that cervical nerve coming from between the twelfth and thirteenth
cervical vertebrae. This nerve branch, after passing through the bone,
is distributed to the under surface of the pectoralis minor muscle, and
its filaments ascend among its fibres. This foramen is observable also
in other Owls, as Bubo virginianus, and in some of the diurnal Raptores,

108 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [ Vol. VI.

as in Accipiter cooperi; in very many birdsit isabsent. The scapula pre-
sents little that is unusual in that bone among the class generally. It
lends the additional two-thirds of articular surface to form the glenoid
cavity with the coracoid; internal to this the acromion process extends
forwards, touching the coracoid as described, and having a limited bear-
ing on the clavicle. Posteriorly its blade-like length is produced, ex-
panding, turning slightly outwards to terminate in an obliquely trun-
cate extremity, with its point over the second dorso-pleurapophysial
interspace.

What the scapula lacks in interest is amply made up by the changes
observed in the last bone of the group, the clavicle. This element is
broad above, much compressed from side to side throughout; it spans
the anterior groove of the coracoid and touches the scapula as described
above, rapidly diminishing in size as it is produced downwards and in-
wards by a gentle curve towards the fellow of the opposite side. The
upper extremities in adult birds are separated by an average distance
of 2.3 centimetres. If the sternum pointed to feebleness of flight in
this little Owl, it is still further carried out by the ill-developed clavicles,
which constitute that arch in birds, where they are thoroughly and
firmly united below, that assists to resist the pressure of the humeri when
the wings are depressed in flight, and send them back to their former
position after the completion of the action. In examining again Pl. I,
which represents the skeleton of an old male, we find this bone to be
simply a pointed styliform process; in other individuals, and adults too,
it does not even attain the length here shown; but, as if to bid defiance
to all law or invariable rule governing it, we again find in very young
birds cases where it becomes confluent with its fellow, forming a broad
U-shaped arch, though never a very strong one. In a ‘case of this kind
the bone was finely cancellous throughout, with an extremely attenuated
layer, scarcely covering it outside, of compact tissue. In Pl. J, and
other individuals like it, the clavicles were pneumatic. Again, in both
young and old, it may have any of its lower parts completed by carti-
lage, or unite with the manubrium by means of the same material; it
never displays a mesial expansion of bone at the point of confluence.
As already shown, the superior entrance of the anterior groove on the
coracoid is a complete circuit, formed by the three bones of the group.
The head of the coracoid overhangs it above; next below is the clav-
icle, closing it in anteriorly; lowest of all the scapula behind. A plane
passed through the superior margins of this aperture would look up-
wards, inwards, and backwards. All the bones of the scapular arch are
pneumatic, with the exception sometimes seen in the clavicle, and the
foramina, to allow the air to enter their interiors, look into the enclosed
groove of the coracoid just described. In the scapula the foramen is
usually single and in the acromion process, single again in the clavicle;
it is seen in the broadest part of the head, while in the coracoid there
is generally a group of these little apertures, situated in the depression
on the surface that overhangs this entrance to the coracoidal groove.

No, 4. SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF SPEKOTYTO. 109

Of the upper extremity—The upper extremity consists of ten distinct
bones in the full-grown bird, omitting minute sesamoids that might ex-
ist. These are the humerus of the arm, the radius and ulna of the fore-
arm, two free carpals, the metacarpal, and four phalanges. (See Pl. I.)
The humerus is a long, extremely light, and smooth bone, and when
viewed from above in its position of rest, with the wing closed, it re-
minds one of the curve in. the small italic letter /, being concave above
towards the scapula; and this bone is so twisted that this same curve
is exhibited, though not quite as well marked, when viewing it laterally.
The humerus is 5.5 centimetres long, subcylindrical on section at mid-
shaft, at which point a minute aperture exists for the passage of the
nutrient vessels that are distributed to the osseous tissue and its inter-
nal lining. This foramen enters the bone very obliquely, its external
orifice being the nearest the proximate extremity. This end is well ex-
panded and surmounted above by a strongly developed radial crest that
overhangs the shaft slightly towards the palmar aspect. It occupies a
line on the bone from the articular facet for the shoulder-joint to an
extent shown in Pl. I. The ulnar crest, or lesser tuberosity, encloses.
quite an extensive fossa below, which acts also as a partial screen to the
pneumatic foramina, for the humerus is highly pneumatic. They usually
consist of one circular opening, surrounded by a group of many smaller
ones. In young birds a very large foramen is generally present ; this
closes in as age advances. Between the two tuberosities is the vertical
and elliptical convex facet for articulation with the glenoid cavity of the
shoulder-joint, constituting the “head of the humerus”. The radial crest
displays palmad, a ridge for the insertion of the tendon of the pectoralis
major. The distal end of the humerus is also expanded in the vertical
plane and gently convex anconad, the reverse condition of the proximal
extremity. It presents, for examination, the articular facets for the
ginglymoid joint it forms with radius and ulna, and the superior and
inferior condyles. The larger, and at the same time the superior, of these:
two facets is intended for the cup-shaped depression in the head of the
radius, as well as a portion of the articular surface on the ulna. It is.
ovoid in form and placed obliquely on the bone, the inferior end of the
long axis of the oval being situated the nearer the proximal extremity
of the shaft. This facet is separated from the trochlea surface for the
ulna by a well-marked depression; this latter is a knob-like tubercle
when compared with the radial facet. The condyles and the entire ar-
ticular surface are about in the same plane posteriorly; that is, neither
increases the length of the bone, one more than another. Passing from
the trochlea surface for the ulna towards the inner aspect of the shaft, there
is to be observed a shallow depression, which corresponds to the olecra-
non fossa of human osteology, and in full extension of the limb allows
room for that process of the ulnain this bird. The radius has an average
length of 6.6 centimetres, and the ulna a corresponding length of 6.8.
centimetres, so that their distal extremities, when articulated, as we ex

110 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL

amine them in the closed wing, extend beyond the head of the humerus.
In this position also the radius occupies a higher level than the ulna,
and is the innermost bone of the two. The radius is slender, the trans-
verse diameters of its subcylindrical shaft varying but little throughout
its extent, though its extremities are expanded. From the elbow-joint,
when the two bones are in position, it at first diverges from the ulna at
a moderate curve, to approach that bone again to nearly absolute con-
tact at the junction of middle and distal thirds, by a more gentle curve ;
from this latter point it lies parallel with the ulna to the wrist. The
head of the radius is elliptical, being crowned by a depression for artic-
ulation with the oblique facet on the distal end of the humerus. Beyond,
below, and to the outer aspect of this facet is another of similar form,
though convex for articulation with the ulna, while still more advanced
toward the distal end we find the bicipital tuberosity, and, beyond, the
minute nutrient foramen; all of the bones beyond the humerus being
non-pheumatic. The distal extremity of the bone in question is termin-
ated by a little fan-like expansion that caps the ulna and articulates by
its anterior convex margin with the scapho-lunar of the wrist. It is
- marked above by the longitudinal groove for the tendon of the extensor
metacarpi radialis longus. The shaft of the ulna is nearly three times
as large as thatof theradius. Its outer half is straight, its inner curved
towards the humerus, thereby increasing, at the proximal moiety, the
interosseous space, by the assistance of the opposite curve made by the
radius. The stronger end is the one involved in the formation of the
elbow-joint; here is to be observed the depression for the head of the
radius, or the lesser sigmoid cavity, while the articular surface beyond
that occupies the entire end of the bone, directed downwards, inwards,
and backwards, presents for examination the greater sigmoid cavity, the
olecranon and coranoid processes, and the cavity for articulation with
the oblique facet of the humerus. The greater sigmoid cavity is sub-
circular and of some depth; its lower and produced lip represents the
coranoid process, as does its upper, better marked, and more tuberous.
prolongation represent the olecranon of andranatomia. Extending
radiad is another concave, quadrate, articular facet for the oblique tuber-
cle of the humerus, as the first-mentioned concavity articulates with the
ulnar tubercle or trochlea. <A little beyond this articular surface are
various small tuberosities and depressions for the origin and insertion of
muscles. Approaching the wrist, the shaft is seen to be generally smooth,
and diminishes in calibre at junction of middle and proximal thirds in
the nutrient foramen, while along its entire length, at certain intervals,
are the slight elevations for the apices of the quills of the secondaries.
The distal extremity of the ulna enters into the formation of the wrist-
joint; it is not nearly as large as the proximal end. The articulating
surface has a deep mesial cleft in the vertical direction, limited exter-
ternally by an elliptical curve, internally by a double, tuberous knob for
articulation with the irregularly formed cuneiform of the carpus, while

No. 4.] SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF SPEOTYTO. po) 3

above is a roughened surface that is covered by the expanded end of the
radius.

The carpus is composed of the scapho-lunar, os magnum, and cuneiform.
The scapho-lunar articulates with radius, os magnum, and ulna. The
radial articulation is a rather deep and elliptical concave facet, its lower
border gliding over the ulna, while the distal end of the radius plays in
the concavity. The opposite face of this six-sided little bone is also
smooth, and is a nearly flattened surface that articulates with os mag-
num. The upper and lower surfaces, as well as the ends, are simply
roughened and fashioned to give the proper form to that part of the joint
into which it enters, and for the attachment of ligaments. Os mag-
num has become confluent with the mid-metacarpal, forming its troch-
lear surface for articulation with scapho-lunar, cuneiform, and ulna. The
- cuneiform is an extremely irregularly shaped bone; it appears to be
rather the larger of the two free carpals, and is the lower in regard to
position. It articulates with ulna and os magnum, simply. Its outer
ulnar facet is elliptical and shallow, monopolizing the entire face of the
bone; its inner facet is very irregular, being formed so as to accommo-
date itself to the ulnar tubercles, with which it articulates. Projecting
towards the metacarpus, this little bone has two prongs or limbs, the
inner aspect of the extremities of each possessing a subcircular facette
that articulates, the outer and shorter limb with the internal trochlear
margin of os magnum, on the same side; the inner and longer limb strad-
dles the metacarpal and glides over a surface, during movements of the
joint, at a point about where magnum becomess confluent with mid-meta-
carpal. The cuneiform has also attached to it ligaments that enclose
the wrist-joint beneath—capsular ligaments of the carpus.

The metacarpus is formed in the usual manner, by the amalgamation of
the index, medius, and annularis metacarpals, the first, second, and
third, respectively. It is 3.3 centimetres long, articulating with scapho-
lunar, ulna, and cuneiform at its proximal extremity by means of os mag-
num, that has become anchylosed with mid-metacarpal and the pha-
langes at its distal end. The first metacarpal is short, and fused with
the second just anterior to the boundary of the trochlear surface of os
magnum; it makes an angle with the shaft of the second metacarpal,
its extremity being directed upwards. Atits base, close to the shaft of
mid-metacarpal, it bears a uniform facette for articulation with the index
phalanx, a free, three-sided, pointed little bone, about 9 millimetres in
length. The second metacarpal is straight; its enlarged proximal ex-
tremity is formed chiefly by the confluent os magnum; its shaft is in-
clined to be subtrihedral, with its broadest face looking forwards ; its
distal extremity is terminated by a knot-shaped enlargement, that is
still further enhanced by the confluence with the third metacarpal. It
bears a digit composed of two phalanges, the proximal one bearing on its
posterior border, for nearly its entire length, a quadrangular expansion,
that has a raised margin, leaving a single concavity radiad; a similar con-

Lay? BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VI-

cavity occurs on the ulnar side, but is there divided bya ridge, sloping
downward into two shallow depressions. This little bone somewhat re-
minds one of a cleaver, with the end of its handle attached to the meta-
carpus. Itsupports at its distal extremity the second phalanx of this digit,.
a bone having very much the same appearance and shape as the index
digit, only being longer and more pointed. The proximal ends of all the
phalangeal segments are more or less expanded, in order to support the
ample facets of articulation that occur among them, and the metacarpus.
The third metacarpalis expanded transversely above, slender below, where
it falls a little beyond the medius after its confluence with it. It also.
has a small, pointed phalanx, freely attached to its distal extremity, and.
lying in that recess formed by the shaft and posterior expansion of the
first phalanx of the second digit. Ata very early date, comparatively,
in the life of this Owl, ossification is normally extended to many of the
tendons of important muscles of the antibrachium and pinion.

Of the pelvic limb.—The lower extremity is composed of twenty dis-
tinct segments, including the patella, or just double the number found.
in the pectoral limb. This increase. will not surprise us when we recol-
lect the greater number of small bones devoted to the foot above those:
found in the hand. Its most striking feature, next to those osteological
characteristics common to the family, is its extreme length, due princi-
pally to the tibia and tarso-metatarsus. All the bones of the lower
limb in this species are non-pneumatic. The femur is comparatively of
good size and strong; articulated in the usual manner, it measures 4 |
centimetres in length and 7 millimetres across the condyles at their
widest part. At the proximal extremity, externally, above the shaft,.
there is a flat and roughened surface, bounded above by the curved
trochanterian ridge. This surface forms the major part of the great
trochanter. There is no trochanter minor present. The trochanterian
ridge is the highest part of the bone, when it is held vertically; it lies.
in the antero-posterior plane, with the femur in its natural position, the
bird standing erect; from it, sloping directly inwards and occupying the
remainder of the summit between it and the head, is a smooth articu-,
lar facet, broadest externally, merging into the globular head internally.
With the head it constitutes the articular surface for the pelvis—it be-
ing opposed to the antitrochanterian facet of the ilium, while the caput
femoris plays in the cotyloid ring. The excavation for the ligamentum
teres on the latter is conical and deep, consuming a good part of the
bone; it is situated on its upper and inner aspect. In looking into the
relation existing among head, neck, and shaft of the femur of this bird,.
we must observe that if the straight line lying in the middle of the
surface of the internal aspect of the shaft were produced upwards, it
would pass through the centre of the facet at the summit—if anything,.
nearer the trochanterian ridge than it does to the head. This facet also
is notably narrower just before arriving at the head than at any other
point. Again, the plane passing through the external and circular bound-

No. 4] SHUFELDT ON TIIE OSTEOLOGY OF SPEOTYTO. 113

ary of the head makes an angle of a good 45° with this line, so that
with these facts in view we can hardly assert in the case of the species
before us, as do some authors on comparative anatomy in describing
this bone in general, that the axis of the head of the femur is either
nearly at right angles with or is sessile with the shaft. It would ap-

pear, though, that it has quite as much of a neck to boast of as the ana-
tomical neck of humerus or the neck of the seapula in works on hu-

man anatomy. The shaft throughout its length, until it begins to ap-
proach the distal condyles, where it is subcompressed and expanded
antero-posteriorly, is nearly cylindrical, bent slightly backwards at its
lower end, and offers for examination merely the intermuscular ridges,
with the linea aspera, feebly marked, and the nutrient foramen, all of
which maintain their usual positions on the bone. At the distal ex-
tremity the rotular canal, the intercondyloid notch, aud the popliteal
fossa are all strongly produced, giving due prominence to the condyles,
internal and external, between which they form the dividing tract. The
external and lower condyle is divided in two by a vertical excavation,
deepest above. Of the two facets thus formed, the inner articulates
with the tibia, the outer with the head of the fibula. The external sur-
face of this condyle is flat and continuous with the shaft. The inner

_ condyle, broad posteriorly, has a slight depression in the surface that

bounds it on the tibial side, and as a rule the usual sites for ligamentous
attachments about this extremity are at best but feebly represented.
The patella, encased in the tendon of the quadriceps femoris, is situated
about 3 millimetres above the rotular crest of the tibia, anteriorly, hav-
ing the form of an oblate héemispheroid with its base directed upwards,

‘the long diameter of which measures 3.5 millimetres. The tibia is the

longest bone in this bird’s skeleton, and at the same time, taking this
length into consideration, the least curved or bent along the shaft; it
has, however, a slight and just appreciable gradual curvature forwards
that is most apparent about the junction of middle and upper thirds.

_ Its average length, measured on the inside, is 6.7 centimetres ; its ex-

tremities being expanded for articulation, above with the fermur, below
with the tarso-metatarsus. These expansions are of about equal dimen-
sions, though differing vastly in form, in this respect being unlike some
of the diurnal Raptores, in which the distal condyles constitute the
smaller end of the bone.

Among the most important points presented for examination about
the head is the articular surface that crowns it above for the condyles
of the femur. This is subquadrate in form, uneven, highest at the in-
ner and anterior angle, sloping gradually to the opposite one, bounded
almost entirely around by a raised margin, that is most feebly devel-
oped posteriorly, and at a point anterior to the head of the fibula, where
itis absent. In front this border may be nominated the rotular or epi-
cnemial ridge, though it is no more prominent there than at any other
point, but in many birds it is so produced as to produce a process of

8GB

~

114 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

some size, to which these terms are applied. Externally and poste-
riorly the margin is roughened for the attachment of ligaments that bind
the head of the diminutive fibula to this bone. In the middle of this
articular surface is to be seen a tuberosity, on either side of which are
the depressions for the femoral condyles. Produced downwards, ante-
riorly from the rotular ridge are the cnemial ridges; these have their
crests bent slightly outwards, and they merge into the shaft below,
abreast the superior point of the fibular ridge. Of the two, the outer
or ecto-cnemial is the shorter; that is, it does not extend so far down —
the shaft as the inner or pro-cnemial. They have between them an
ovate concavity, with the larger end above, the lower end subsiding
upon the shaft with the ridges themselves. The vertical elevation on
the external aspect of the shaft for articulation with the fibula runs
down the side but a short distance; a little below its abrupt termination
may be observed, in a line with it, the nutrient foramen, entering very
obliquely from above downwards. After leaving the fibular ridge as far
as the point where the bone begins to expand transversely at the distal
extremity, the shaft isremarkably smooth and nearly cylindrical. This
transverse and distal expansion is checked, both anteriorly and pos-
teriorly, by abruptly meeting the distal condyles, the point of meeting
perhaps being rather the higher behind. The condyles, differing
but little in size, are singularly uniform as to shape, with their curved
surfaces downwards, being flat on their outer aspects, with a raised
rim bounding them in each case. They stand out prominent and apart.
Anteriorly their convex surfaces are the widest, behind they slightly
approach each other, and the articular convex surface is narrowest on
the outer condyle. The intercondyloid notch is deep, and appears —
equally well marked throughout its extent. Immediately above it, ante-
riorly, there is a deep triangular depression; another, and more shallow
one, is found behind in the corresponding locality. Up the shaft a short
distance on the inner side, anteriorly, is a little tubercle, to which is at-
tached the ligament that binds down some of the strong tendons of the
extensors. This ligament crosses the anterior triangular depression
mentioned above, obliquely, to be inserted near the external condyle
superiorly. This is the arrangement also in Bubo virginianus, but in
some of the Hawks this ligamentous bridge has become thoroughly ossi-
fied, forming a strong bony band across the concavity in question. It
is interesting to remark here, however general the rule may be as ap-
plying to the diurnal and nocturnal Raptores, that whereas this band is
ligamentous in the tibia in some of the Owls, a bony one fulfilling the
same function is found in them just below the head of the tarso-meta-
tarsus; these conditions are just reversed among some of the Hawks. —
Usually, in old birds of this species, the fibula is firmly anchylosed to the
entire length of the fibular ridge of the tibia; arching outwards, its head,
surmounted by an antero-posteriorly elongated facet, rises a little above
that bone at the point where it is attached to it by ligament. This is

No. 4.] SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF SPEOTYTO. 115

the larger part of the shaft in regard to size. Below the ridge this bone
becomes simply a delicate little spine, that merges into the shaft of the
tibia at about the junction of middle and distal thirds, though it may
be traced after this as far as the middle of the outer condyle, where it
terminates by a minute tubercle. The head is notched externally, near
the centre, and has lodged at that point a small sesamoid that is in the
lateralligamentof the knee-joint. Posteriorly on the shaft, about midway
down the superior tibio-fibular anchylosis, we observe a small tubercle
for the insertion of the tendon of the biceps. The long segment that
exists between the tibia and the phalanges of the pelvic limb is the bone
tarso-metatarsus, or the confluent metatarsals of the second, third, and
fourth toes with certain tarsal bones at its proximal extremity. It meas-
ures down the anterior aspect, mesially, 4.6 centimetres, and has its ex-
tremities enlarged for articular purposes, in common with other long bones
oftheskeleton. Atits proximal end the bone presents superiorly two con-
cave articular surfaces for the condyles of the tibia. They appear nearly
on a level with each other, the bone being held vertically. The inner and
larger of the two is elliptical in outline, antero-posteriorly; the outer and
smaller is fashioned off behind by a tuberous process, directed upwards
and outwards. Between these two surfaces arises a prominent tuber-
osity, that in the articulated limb enters the intercondyloid notch of the
tibia quite accurately, and is intended for ligamentous attachment. An-
teriorly and internally a groove exists that runs down the shaft, to dis-
appear a little above its middle. This canal is deepest immediately be-
low the articular expansion, and is here bridged over by a little arch of
bone, a millimetre in width, that serves to bind down and ‘hola in its
proper place the tendon of the long extensor of the toes. Posteriorly
there is a much deeper and longer tendinal canal, that extends the entire
length of the shaft, being shallowest at the middle and most capacious
at the proximal extremity; this is bounded over and internally for a
short distance below the head of the bone by the calcaneal process, a
thin lamina of bone that has a foramen near its base; this process is
surmounted by an elliptical and compressed tuberosity, placed vertically.
The opposite wall, above, of this groove is also thin, and extends, in
common with the calcaneal process, directly backwards. There are two
other foramina seen at this end of the tarso-metatarsus; one just at the
external termination of the bony bridge mentioned above, and the other
outside and a little above it. Their posterior openings are immediately
behind the anterior ones, or, in other words, they do not pierce the shaft
in any way obliquely. The shaft of this bone is notably square on sec-
tion for the major part of its extent, being encroached upon, however,
both before and behind, by the aforesaid tendinal grooves. The tendons,
especially those that occupy the posterior canal, are very prone to ossi-
fication, forming quite sizable bones in the adult, the largest of these
. being equal to the fibula in bulk, exclusive of course of the head of that
bone, and not being as long. Returning to the tarso-metatarsus, we find

116 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI-

at its distal extremity, for examination, the trochlee that articulate with
the rear segment of all the toes except hallux. Viewing this end with
the bases of these trochleze towards one, we find the general outline
made by them to be truly crescentic, with the horns baving a tendency
to approach each other behind. The outer trochlea is the highest and
longest from before backwards; the other two are about on the same
level, the inner one haying a posterior and internal process, while the
middle one is possessed of a median cleft traversing its face antero-
posteriorly. They are sharply divided from each other by narrow slits,
that extend up as far as the articulating part, and are continued on the
anterior aspect of the shaft for a short way as delicate groovelets. A
foramen is situated in the outer of these, that gives passage to the an-
terior tibial artery, and is comparatively larger than usually seen in the
Owls. Behind, the tendinal groove expands, and is bounded distally by
the concave border formed by the trochlee. Upon its internal margin,
just above the extremity of the bone, it shows an elongated but feebly
marked depression of about 3 millimetres in length. This facet articu-
lates with the os metatarsale accessorium, which is joined to the bone
by ligament. This little bone in this bird has an average length of 4
millimetres. It is twisted upon itself, and bears upon one border a con-
vex, smooth surface for the tarso-metatarsus, while distally it has an
articulating surface, resembling more the mid-trochlea than any other,
for the proximal segment of the hallux. Above it is sharply grooved
for the tendon that goes to that toe. The toes are four in number, and
their bony segments follow the rule that governs the greater part of the
class Aves; that is, first, second, third, and fourth toes have 2, 3, 4, and
5 phalanges allotted to them, respectively. The first phalanx of the
hind toe is more compressed from side to side than in the other toes,
possessing more of the characteristics of the second joints. Its posterior
facet, that articulates with the accessory metatarsal, fits accurately into
the cleft surface seen on that little bone. Anteriorly the facet has a
median groove, forming two vertical convexities for the double concave
facet on the claw, with its dividing ridge. The claws areall a good deal
alike, varying in size, the rear one being the most compressed laterally. —
They are pointed, arched, and nearly conical, the horny thece that cover
them during life only being grooved on the under side. Their proximal
ends have an articulating facet for the next phalanx behind them; this
is so arranged that they can be more smartly flexed than any of the
other joints of the foot, due to the convex articulating surface extending
well beneath on the phalanx they meet. On the under sides of their
proximal extremities is a tuberosity for the attachment of the flexor
tendons; it has on either side, below, an oval foramen to allow vessels —
and a nervelet to pass to the extremities of these ungual phalanges. The
first joint of the second toe, and the first and second of the third, are
thickset and short, articulating internally with the tarso-metatarsus, and_
having their facets so arranged as to allow of motion only in the one

No. 4.) SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF SPEOTYTO. 117

plane. These bones may almost be said to interlock with each other,
with their superior projecting processes behind fitting closely into the
deep groove intended to receive them on the anterior faces of the joints
to their immediate rear. The other undescribed phalanges of these two
toes resemble the proximal segment of hallux. The fourth or outside
toe possesses five phalanges, but the three innermost segments are very
short, and are really nothing more than one of the middle type of pha-
langeal bones, such as the third on the mid-toe, divided into three nearly
equal parts, the proximal and distal pieces retaining all the character-
istics of that bone, while the middle segment is simply a mid-section of
the shaft. This arrangement, however, together with the manner in
which the proximal phalanx, if it may be termed so in this bird, articu-
lates with the long and elevated trochlea on the tarso-metatarsus, gives
this toe a versatility and a power to be thrown outward and, to a limited
extent, to the rear, not enjoyed by any of the other toes, constituting one
of the most interesting anatomical features that we find in the family
Strigide.

a

ae ihe fools nee oe
ge ities Hae ae ct) Diet aboae He f ae)
Prem aii hy coon vobpaiian aie SO AAA: af SW Cd: i
| hal pies a? Ss (HeLa: Rerlinaaertian een: tae last
oe” bo OE a a Avesta ihatizanic ihe
9 2 aa a oye &, wor hieiopgeiah eel Ohi sop aealily ot
ie 4 HN abies ESTAS RAST OG Baty, ieee
MeL ih ft habe “ith Patt Peal ieiky sede Ni, ahh Ree BREN eK 1 aS .
bod partiiley Hah ti ies munities’ Bonaice “erepaity: Leraag Elite: mei
hen Hb Dicom se fetiatee ad diisenrnn pliant ati: 54 nd :
He solisioiee mkt eds: mee i (ert ee chal chaacakin gy co lsat ude
say Aa PATE Bi axt ches Ose eee ek PE TE Rena. haere
Geta. uipanntes on iaated od av. asian Ditavele find, aol ' "
PMPAAINE OY Cob: Teshen Sr 508 2 t15 Las erRs re ant ob Mowoey a Tayi
Pane aailntitcinion coos tdlh odd toy ce Rate, ia eas
seen iit sb fos i ov lath aynilidt Inahetheda palais

Y
i

.,
,
i! i’
¢ yer ine a
1) ; Y
ay "
ay ai
i ee hy
Y y i , ’
, 7
va a =i i
( a
~
x
: }
7
’
1
-
1
wna ve I
‘
sm oy
r Le yy oy
c tA :
i in ye ra
RAS : i
1 :
inet a
Bb ie ax
See at an | -
' ; na) Wa ee AS ae én
Dicer (ARMY MoI n'y » ot
° /
i)
rf
.
\
r
.
.
ay ine
-
f a
‘ he -
‘ ,
‘» if : vt
) ; eae
i 7

PLATE IL.
The skeleton of Speotyto cunicularia hypogea.

BULL. U.S. GEOL. SURV. VOL. VI. : PLATE }

SKELETON OF SPEOTYTO CUNICULARIA var. HYPOGAA.

Hh eet

eae baat) 1 PLE A id

i 3 ; % ; Ri Ae te Me MT a Tee Pl, |
f fale ‘, 2 Pe
a, fiat Bal
ws $ 1 tite eb ’ aaa yt
a ae Lye D> St nk Paes

' ; cdg pod reared: oF
ie rer eit auw ou 4 F Shey Dhetealy # sith Waly 62 ae o) 10 ye rar beat | win * MA

it, * : POM ALO REL: Ofte tpl bid) arti terie a Phir), ef.

eres tte Ny Oe vod ae aun ia ie
ae fn. shih

"
\ r
ne
e
‘ ie
ipa
* 4
i,
ki
|
>»
. tet
-
d
y ,

PLATE IL.

The skull, sternum, pelvis, etc., natural size.

Fig. 1. The skull from above.

Fig. 2. The skull from below.

Fig. 3. The mandible from above,

Fig. 4. The pelvis from below.

Fig. 5. Transverse section of thorax, showing a dorsal vertebra, with the corre-
sponding pair of ribs and corresponding section of the sternum.

Fig. 6. The sternum from below.

BULL. U.S. GEOL. SURV. VOL. VI. i PLATE Il.
te

Thos. Sinclair & Son, Lith

OSTEOLOGY QF SPEOTYTO CUNICULARIA var. HYPOGAEA.

Art. V.—Osteology of Eremophila alpestris.

By R. W. Shufeldt, ee ctr, ekoeee erent Surgeon United States
rimy.

The 11th of March, 1880, was a particularly severe day at Fort Fetter-
man.* ‘A violent wind and snow storm prevailed during the entire
twenty-four hours. In the creek bottom, below the fort, where the wind
had exposed the ground of some land that had been used for gardening
purposes the year before, thousands of Horned Larks congregated.
They seemed disinclined to vacate their partially sheltered position, pre-
ferring to face the few death-dealing fires I delivered them rather than

be tossed over the prairie by the freezing storm. At each shot, the flocks
~ arose, skimmed low over the ground, soon to alight again. These sim-
ple manceuvres afforded me abundant opportunity to secure many speci-
mens, and several hundred were taken. As they afterwards lay upon
the table in my study, one would almost have said, before submitting
them to careful scrutiny and examination, that not only was true alpes-
tris represented, but both the varieties, leucolema and chrysolema, de-
seribed by modern writers. Certainly it was that there were many
shades of their normal coloring among them, accompanied by differ-
ences in size that were not due to sex. I feel sure my reader will par-
don the liberty I take in adding to an article upon the osteology of this
interesting bird a life-size portrait of it, selected from the large number
before me on the occasion referred to. The hind claw in this individual
(Pl. IV, Fig. 22) was longer and straighter than any of the others ex-
amined by me, but this member, as well as the areas of the different col-
ors of its plumage, are, in my representation, the results of careful meas-
urements and comparison. Ihave never seen the black pectoral crescent
of this ‘bird in the low position in which Audubon represents it in his
work (B. Am., VIII, No. 100, Pl. 497), where he figures his Alauda
rufa, the Western Shore Lark. The bird figured in my plate was taken
jn that section of our country where the variety leucolema is usually
found breeding during the season, and probably belongs to series de-
seribed as such, but certainly has attained a style and brilliancy of col-
oring that brings it very near to true alpestris, its size excluding it from
the variety chrysolema. Interesting and important as this part of the
subject is in the life history of this bird, we must, with these few re-

* Wyoming Territory, United States, lat. 42° 23/35’ N., long. 105° 21’ 4" W.
119

120 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VI.

marks, allow it to rest here and proceed with the true object of this
paper, a description of its skeleton, simply reminding the student that
of all the several genera that go to make up the family Alaudide, or
Larks, but one genus has fallen to the lot of the North American fauna,
and that the genus contains but one species, with its varieties, the oste-
ology of that species being the subject of the present article.

The skull—(P1. IV, Figs. 22, 25, and 26).—It is a striking characteristic
in the skulls of nearly all adult birds that certain bones become firmly
united, their sutures entirely disappearing; perhaps in no species of the
highly organized suborder Oscines has this almost universal avian feature
been so thoroughly carried out as in our present subject, the Horned
Lark. Occasionally we do find, however, a trace to guide us in locating
the original boundaries of the primitive elements, even among the Os-
cines, as the sutures, amidst the parietals and frontals in the cranium of
Lanius, when maceration is carried to a high degree, but in Hremophila,
as already stated, there is a total absence of any such indication. If we
remove the lower mandible from the skull in any of the class Aves, and
place the remainder on the horizontal plane, with the basi-cranii down-
wards, we observe that in different skulls there exists in this position
differences in equilibrium, and differences in, what we will call, the an-
terior and posterior bearing points, or the points upon which this part
skull we are studying, we find, when it is placed as directed above,
of the skull rests on the horizontal plane. To illustrate this in the
that its equilibrium is quite stable, and that it rests posteriorly upon
the tympanics, anteriorly upon the tip of the superior mandible, which
constitute, respectively, its posterior and anterior bearing points. In
this case there is but one anterior bearing point, with two posterior
ones. This is a very common result, but there are at the same time
many exceptions to it, as in Nwmenius and many species of the family
Anatide.

Again, if we erect a perpendicular from one of the posterior bearing
points, or the posterior bearing point, for sometimes it is the condyle,
we find that the planes passing through the circumference of the fora-
men magnum and the occipital vertebra, and the point where the foot
of this perpendicular and the posterior bearing points coincide, make
certain angles with the horizontal plane (the ordinary horn protractor
is the best instrument to take these angles with), which we will call, re-
spectively, the angle of the foramen and the angle of the base. These two
angles, in many instances, practically coincide, as in our Lark, where
they make an angle of 40° with the horizontal plane. In the cut, H H’
is the horizontal plane ; a the anterior and p the posterior bearing points.

These angles also differ in many birds; ¢.g., the anterior bearing
point in Ardea herodias is the tip of the upper mandible, the posterior
ones being the inner of the three facets on each tympanic; the angles
of the planes of the base and foramen about coincide, and is 50°. In
many of the Owls and diurnal birds of prey, the bearing points being

No. 5.] SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF EREMOPHILA. by |

the same as in the last example (it being, however, the inner facet of
two on the tympanics, as a rule), the combined angles, or either of them
separately, is very small, or the base and foramen may be found to lie
nearly in a plane parallel to the plane upon which the skull rests, or the

10°

AT -H’

SS
angles are 0°. We see then that in the present case, the bearing points
being given, the angle of the combined planes is 40°, which fact, even
without actually taking the angles in question, conveys to our minds
about the “pitch” or relation of the basi-cranii to the other salient fea-
tures of the skull. Taken accurately, these angles, itis obvious, would
have a certain value when we come to compare the various skulls of the
class.

The primary elements of the occipital, or first cranial vertebra, have
become completely fused together, and with such other bony elements of
the vertebra beyond, of the mesencephalic arch, with which they usually
articulate. The well-marked superior curved line that limits muscular
attachment above would seem to be, and in all probability is, about the
position of the lambdoid suture, and the superior boundary of the bone
we aredescribing. This curved line descends and is gradually lost along
the boundaries of the mastoids and occipitals on either side. Exter-
nally and inferiorly we find the occipital pierced by the usual foramina
of the basi-cranii. The group for the exit of the eighth pair of nerves,
being the most anterior of all, are situated on either side, in well-marked
depressions or pits, some 7 millimetres apart. Back of these and nearer
together are the minute precondyloids, looking forwards and outwards for
the passage of the hypoglossal nerves. These last foramina are just an-
terior to the border of foramen magnum; this latter aperture is of good
size, comparatively, having antero-posterior and transverse diameters
of 3 millimetres each, with an additional millimetre for the oblique
diameters, making the latter 4 millimetres each. It is subcirenlar in
outline, its anterior rim passing around a depression that lies just in

_ front of the condyle, giving the latter the appearance of jutting out

into the foraminal space. The condyle is nearly sessile, having the
merest trace of a neck, hemispheroidal in form, with an horizontal

122 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL

and average diameter of .5 of a millimetre. Above and midway, later-
aliy, the borders of the foramen are encroached upon by the petrosal on
either side, giving it rather a constricted appearance; from these points,
as we follow the posterior moiety of the foraminal periphery, we find it
to be grooved, each groove ending posteriorly within a millimetre of each
other, in a minute foramen that traverses the internal table of the cra-
nium upwards, outwards, and forwards for a short distance, thence to
arch around, as a sinus, the epencephalic fossa, meet in the longitu-
dinal sinus coming from above. This arrangement obtains in the Cor-
vide, and some other families, where it is more strongly marked. The
diapophyses of the occipital vertebre are in a plane but a little lower
than the basi-sphenoid ; they: form, as is quite common, the horizontal
floor of the cavity of the otocrane, and blend with the surrounding bones.
A moderately well-marked ‘‘ cerebellar prominence” occupies its usual
site in the middle line; no openings or foramina are ever to be discovered
either at its summit or laterally, as seen in some other birds (Anatide,
Strigide). It divides the shallow temporal fossze that slope away from
it on either side, and varies somewhat in size in different individuals.
From the upper region of the ear and the superior boundaries of the tem-
poral fossze to the line of that psuedo-articulation, the fronto-mandibu-
lar, this bird’s cranium is remarkably smooth, and of a clear white, and,
owing to the extraordinary amount of dipldic tissue, possessing a pe-
culiar translucency. The median furrow is only well marked as it passes
between the orbits; the superior peripheries of these cavities, as con-
stituting one of the boundaries of the surface under consideration, are
sharp at first, rounding as they include the lachrymals, and entirely de-
void of any notches or indentations. As is usual, all sutural t:aces are
absent (Pl. IV. Fig. 25). The transverse line of the fronto-mandibular
juncture is slightly concave backwards along its middle third, the extremi-
ities sloping a little Cownwards and backwards. The joint motion is
only moderately free. No well-marked suture defines its exact locality,
as in Harporhynchus and others. The bones that go to form the supe-
rior mandible, both above and below, are mutually confluent at all their
usual points of contact and articulations, with complete obliteration of
their original borders. The nearly perpendicular nasals on either side
form the anterior boundary of atriangular opening, of which the lachry-
mals and maxillaries form, respectively, the posterior boundary and base.
These triangles are not complete, insomuch as the lachrymals do not
meet the infraorbital bars at the inferior and inner angles. They lead
into the rhinal vacuity on either side. It must be borne well in mind
by the reader that in describing the upper mandible in the skulls of all
birds, it invariably presupposes the removal of its horny integumental
sheath that it wears during life, and gives to this portion of the cra-
nium a vastly different shape. Hither tomial edge is curved and quite
sharp ; their anterior mergence, or point of the beak, is decidedly rounded,
and fully a millimetre in width.

No. 5.] SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF EREMOPHILA. 123

The superior mandible is rather broad at its base; the eulmen, origi-
nating in a flattened space just anterior to the fronto-mandibular artic-
ulation, is rounded throughout its extent and gently curved downwards,
while below, the line joining the middle points of the bases of the triangles
above mentioned, averages 7 millimetres in length. The sides of the in-
_ter-maxillary are smooth,presenting only occasionally a row of very mi-
_ nute foramina for examination ; sometimes a faint suture shows itself on
either side, extending almost down to the nostril, between this bone and
each nasal. Beneath, the palatine fissure is broad and rounded ante-
riorly, the roof of the mouth beyond being gently concave and grooved
mesially for its entire length, and marked by a few foramina. The ex-
ternal apertures of the nostrils are quite large, nearly elliptical in out-
line, approaching each other within less than .5 of a millimetre above.
Their borders, formed by the nasals behind, are sharp; anterior, more
rounded. The major axes of these openings average 4 millimetres,
the corresponding minor axes 3 millimetres. The planes passed through
their peripheries look upward, outward, and forward. The nasals are
fan-shaped, both above and below, the expansion being slightly twisted,
jn order to accommodate themselves to the form of the bill. The broad
lachrymals, assisted by the prefrontal, effectually separate the orbital
vacuities from the rhinal chambers. The latter are remarkably open,
owing to the size in the skull of the various apertures leading into
them from without, already described, and devoid of all septa or bony
offshoots, although the prefrontal, intermaxillary, and palatines together
occasionally develop irregularly formed ethmo-turbinals, that extend into
this space from behind and afford the necessary surface for the pitui-
tary membrane. But there is nothing that has the slightest semblance
to an osseus septum narium. The anterior olfactory foramina, narrow
slits one millimetre long, are found between the lachrymals and pre-
frontal, close to the vertical septum of the latter; their outer extremi-
ties being the superior, they are seen to look downward and forward
as they open into the nasal cavities from the bases of the concavities
formed by the bones above mentioned.

The orbital cavities are capacious, having rather a forward look; at
the same time they look a little downward. Their limiting borders are
ovate in outline, with the greater end backward, being incomplete be-
low. <Anteriorly the septum that divides them is remarkably entire and
of considerable thickness; posteriorly and above there exists quite a
deficiency, of a shape shown in Pl. IV, Fig. 22; this is situated just in
front of the large quadrilateral rhinencephalic foramen, and allows a good
passage from either orbit into the brain-case. The same condition ob-
tains below with the opening for the exit of the optic nerves, only the
latter is much smaller and quite circular; to its outer side there are
several minute foramina that lead directly into the brain-case. The
groove for the first pair is distinct anteriorly on either side, and opens
into slits between the prefrontal and lachrymals, similar to those described

424 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

when speaking of them in connection with the nasal cavities. These,
the anterior rhinal foramina, together seem to be the homologue of the
‘“‘eribriform plate” of anthropotomy. The anterior wall of an orbit is
formed by a lachrymal; this boneis larger than usually found in avian
crania of this size. Itis quadrilateral in form, concave posteriorly, thor-
oughly confluent with the frontal, nasal, and ethmoid, but not coming
in contact either with the palatines or suborbital style. About the mid-
dle of its outer border it presents a rounded notch for the lacrymal duct.
Its anterior surface, forming the posterior wall for the rhinal vacuity, is
undulating, though generally convex.

The superior wall of the orbit is narrow, gently concave, and formed
as usual by the frontal. It looks downwards and outwards and merges
into the orbito-cranial septum behind, conformably with the shape of the
cavity under consideration. The posterior wall of the orbit presents
quite a number of interesting points for examination. Internally and
above we find the posterior rhinal foramen, and below it the foramen
opticus, already described. In addition to other minute openings men-
tioned above, we have the foramen ovale, occupying a lower plane than
any of the others, and situated more external to them, being almost di-
rectly behind the orbital process of the tympanic. Above it we observe
a thin circular convexity, indicating the locality of the mesencephalic
fossa; this sometimes develops at its outer border a sharp, vertical,
osseous spine or plate, that points downwards, forwards, and inwards
into the orbital cavity. Still beyond this, outwardly, we find another
~ process, or rather two processes combined, with an elliptical foramen
between them, placed vertically. The inner portion consists of a square
lamina of bone, looking upwards and forwards; the other smaller and
outer portion is a trihedral spine that descends, apparently from the
frontal, to meet its external margin. The arrangement gives to the en-
tire posterior wall a certain facing, directly forward, forcing upon the
cranium of this little bird an aspect peculiar to another family, from which
it is far removed—the Strigide.

The osseous floor of the orbital cavity is always more or less imperfect
throughout the class, and is here formed by the customary bones, the
tympanic, pterygoid, slightly by the lachrymal, and limited externally by
the malo-maxillary squamosal bar.

The palatines nowhere come in contact with each other, and the pala-
tine fissure is very wide, broadly rounded at both ends. The anterior
extremity of each of these bones articulates in the usual manner, im-
movable, with the maxillary and intermaxillary. Back from this point
as far as the under surface of the lachrymals, on either side, they are but
very slender, straight, and horizontally flattened little bones, without
plate or process; at this latter point they suddenly expand into quadrate
posterior ends, each slightly inclined downwards towards the median
plane, throwing out a thin, nearly vertical plate for articulation with
the fan-like and anterior ends of the pterygoids, while mesially they de-

No. 5.| SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF EREMOPHILA. 125

velop two other slender horizontal plates, the superior one being pro-
longed forward as a fine spicula of bone to meet the ethmo-turbinal mass,
as above described.

They lightly touch the rostrum of the sphenoid, in company with the
pterygoids, forming the usual arthrodial joint at this point in avian
structure. Above they are smooth, look upwards and outwards, and
form a portion of the floor of the orbit on either side. The union among
the basi-presphenoidal process, vomerine, and prefrontal plates is com-
plete, all sutural traces having disappeared, and the included bones form
the interorbital septum as already described. The zygomatic style,
very slender, straight, and throughout its continuity nearly of uniform
calibre, descends from before backwards from its maxillary articulation
to the tympanic, about 4 millimetres, the skull being horizontal.

The coalescence among its three original elements is unasually per-
fect. Its anterior horizontal expansion is very slight, being crowded
towards the intermaxillary osseous tomium on either side by the widely
separated palatines.

Its posterior extremity is club-shaped and turned upwards, bearing
on its inner aspect a hemispheroidal articular facette for the cotyloid.
cavity of the tympanic. In nosingle articulation found in the skeleton
throughout the class does there seem to be more variation in plan, to
meet the same end and carry out the same function, than we find in the
pterygo-palatine with the rostrum of the basi-sphenoid.

In our present subject, as in Pica and Corvus and many others, this
extremity bears a thin expansion that articulates by its anterior edge
with the palatine plate and neatly grasps the rounded and inferior side
of the rostrum, the two bones not usually coming in contact. The
shaft of the pterygoid also slightly expands horizontally just before this
articular surface is developed, more particularly in the angle between
the two, adding greatly to the strength of the bone, and somewhat to
the floor of the cavity of the orbit. The angle of divergence of the
pterygoids in the present instance is exactly 45°; the intertympanic
chord, 7 millimetres. The shaft of this bone is comparatively slender,
prismoidal in form, somewhat twisted, and develops among the older
birds sharp projecting edges. The enlarged tympanic extremity bears
a subelliptical articulating facette, that glides upon a similarly formed
surface surmounting the pterygoidal process at the base of the orbital
process of the corresponding tympanicelement. These two little bones
are well separated from the basi-sphenoid, and never any evidence of
the development of pterapophysial processes is to be observed. As is
generally, though by no means universally, the case among birds, the
mastoid process of the tympanic in this Lark is distinctly bifid, each
limb presenting for examination at its extremity an elliptical convex
facette for articulation in a cup-shaped cavity intended for its reception
in the roof of the aural vacuity. Of the two surfaces, the outer and at
the same time the anterior looks outwards, forwards, and upwards, while

126 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol VL

the inner and posterior one, surmounting the shorter limb or bifurcation,
looks backwards and upwards. These two projections of the mastoid
process are further separated posteriorly by a deep non-articular de-
pression. The orbital process is well developed, long and slender, ter-
minating in a knobbed extremity, the whole extending well within the
orbital space. It has at its base, internally, the facette for the ptery-
goid already alluded to. This process is subcompressed from before
backwards, and has throughout a gentle curvature upwards, having
much the form of the thorn of the common rose, withoutits sharp point.

There are two articular facettes on the inferior side of the mandibular
end, divided by rather a deep depression. Of the two, the inner is the
larger and more symmetrical in form, being transversely elliptical. The
outer one seems to be borne on rather a constricted neck, having on its
outer aspect the acetabulum for the hemispheroidal facette on the squa-
mosai. The anterior surface of the body is smooth and triangular in
outline; the opposite and inner surface, somewhat similar in appearance,
presents for examination, just below the mastoid process, a large, oval,
pneumatic foramen; other of these openings may exist in the depression
on the posterior surface of the body of the bone already described.

The inferior surface of the basi-sphenoid is convex outward, and slopes
away gradually into the rostrum, anteriorly. The external orifices of
the Eustachian tubes are extremely minute, as are the foramina for the
entrance of the branches of the common carotid to the cranium. As
already intimated when speaking of the pterygoids, there are no ptera-
pophysial processes.

The external aperture to the cavity of the otocrane is an elliptical
slit, 1.5 millimetres wide at its widest part, looking almost directly for-
wards, its lower end being the innermost or nearest the median plane.
The mastoid, however, does not extend so far forwards but that in a
direct lateral view we may see, through the opening, the funnel-shaped
internal orifice of the Eustachian tube. The stability of the ear cavity
is here, as in many birds, highly enhanced by the presence of numerous
osseous trabecule, acting as struts and braces to its walls.

An examination of the interior of the brain-case shows the fosse for
the several cephalic lobes to be large—indicating a brain of good size
for the bird. As already defined, the foramina for the first and second
pairs of nerves are in each case single, and as a whole more or less oval.
A constriction, however, takes place in their outlines at the middles,
formed by the encroaching interorbital septum, so that, looking out of
the cavity, the foramen in either case appears double, whereas a view
from an orbit reveals the fact of there being but one opening in either
case. The olfactory foramen is very large—in the dry cranium—the
deficiency being made up by firm membrane in the living Lark. The
minute openings for the carotids at the base of the pituitary depression
are placed, as usual, side by side transversely. The posterior wall of the
sella turcica is deeply notched.

No. 5.] SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF EREMOPHILA. 124

The longitudinal sinus is best seen along the superior and median
erest, just before it arrives at the olfactory foramen. The middle fossa
for the accommodation of the cerebellum is distinctly marked by long
transverse concavities, admitting the rugz upon the lobe in question
when the brain is in situ. With regard to the structure of this bird’s
cranium, we may say that itis largely cancellated, the intermaxillary
and petrosal approaching nearest the compact variety of bone; this fact
jends to this part of the skeleton a great lightness, and well-prepared
skulls of this Lark are very pretty objects.

The most remarkable feature to be observed, however, is the great
amount of separation between the tables of the vault of the brain cavity,
being fuily a millimetre, and in some localities more, the interspace being
filled in by quite an open diploic tissue. This condition we well know
to be a striking feature in the anatomy of the Strigidw, but here is a
bird that has the same arrangement as well marked, we believe, for its
size, as any Owl in the North American fauna. The outline of the base
of the cranium in Hremophila approaches the sector of a circle, a figure
more or less true in all birds, and here, as in most others, the greatest
departure from that figure being a too ed convexity of the subtending
are. The length of the radius represented by the middle line is 3.2 centi-
metres, the intertympanic chord, including the bones, being 1.4 centi-
metres. We will only mention here. in regard to the free osseous ele-
ments of the sense capsules, that the sclerotals retain their usual form
and arrangement, numbering in each eye from thirteen to fifteen. The
attachment among them is rather firm, remaining as shown in Pl. IV,
Fig. 41, after a considerable amount of maceration. The ossicula auditus
are also present, but a lens of some power is required to study their form
and arrangement.

The hyoid arch—(P1. IV, Fig. 37, seen from below).—This, the hemal
arch of the parietal vertebra, in no way deviates in this little Lark from
the usual ornithic characters possessed by it among living birds, in being
freely suspended beneath the cranium and acted upon by certain mus-
cles. The glosso- and cerato-hyals seem to be confluent, and the bone
thus formed consists in two narrow little affairs, that for their anterior
two-thirds run alongside of each other with a greater or less intimacy,
to have their tips slightly diverge anteriorly. Posteriorly the ends have
a still greater amount of divergence, and at the junction of the middle
and posterior thirds there is a transverse bony bridge, that bears the
facette for articulation with the basi-hyal behind. Scarcely any antero-
posterior curvature exists. The posterior tips overhang the articula-
tion of the thyro-hyals with the confluent basi- and uro-hyal. These
latter have an expansion to accommodate the articulation referred to,
bearing on either side small, elliptical, articular surfaces, looking
backwards and outwards for the heads of the hypo-branchial elements
of the thyro-hyals.

The bone is subcompressed from above downwards, the uro-hyal being

123 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [ Vol. VE.

produced behind by cartilage, or rather tipped by that material, while
the articulation at the anterior extremity of these confluent bones is
hidden from view in the superior aspect of the arch by the glosso- and
cerato-hyals ; and, as is common, the inferior lip that the basi-hyal lends
to this joint is the longer, and protrudes forward.

The hypo- and cerato-branchial elements of the thyro-hyals are very
long, slender, up-curved little bones, produced posteriorly, as the uro-
hyal, by cartilaginous tips.

The shaftlets of these delicate elements are slightly flattened from
above downwards, as are the articular heads. The free extremities have
a tendency to curve inwards a little, or towards the median plane, as
well as upwards.

The lower mandible—(Plate IV, Figs. 22 and 29).—Hremophila is an-
other example exhibiting the non-approximation of the tomal edges of
the mandibles in the dry skull, this feature being more often absent
among Grallatores and many of the Natatores, where these edges come
in contact with almost an equal amount of exactness as where the bill
is armed with its horny theca.

The lower mandible of the Horned Lark seems to be, in point of struct:
ure, composed almost entirely of compact tissue, and, owing in addition
to the thorough coalescence of its primary Sen, a very firm and
strong bone. Sutural traces, the indicators of the boundaries of pris-
tine segments, have entirely disappeared, and no one would ever suspect,
in examining it, the presence of nine original parts, were he not familiar
with avian osteology or had the opportunity of dissecting the young.
The inferior surfaces of the articular ends are on a level with the major
part of the under rim of the rami, but they are well below the coronoidal
elevations on either side. They present superiorly the usual undulatory
surface to meet and articulate with the condyles of the tympanics.
Below appears a longitudinal ridge, due to the extension upon that side
of the ramal edges. A knob-like process projects behind, and the true
articular processes are sharp and ratherlong. They are directed inwards,
upwards, and then forwards, having the usual pneumatic foramen above
and near their pointed extremities. The superior margin of the inferior
maxilla starts at once from each articular surface, to rise by a moder-
ate angle to the representative coronoids, a distance of 4 millimetres;
jt then falls gradually to the rounded and anterior termination of the
bone. It exhibits about its middle, on each side, a long but very low
convexity, the corresponding shallow coneavities being between them
and the coronoidal elevations. The “coronoids” are marked by deep:
groovelets with raised borders, that extend forwards and downwards as
far as the interangular vacuity.

The inferior boundary of the bone, as already stated, rises on each
side in the inferior articular surfaces, to ascend first for two-thirds of
its extent on each ramus, then to fall at about an equal angle, to sweep:
round and form the anterior and curved termination in the dentary ele_

No. 5.] SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF EREMOPHILA. 129

ment. The median line on the dentary segment averages 5 centimetres,
this portion of the bone being quite thick and concave above, convex
‘below. The general surface, both inside and out, between the bounda-
ries just defined, is in each case depressed, smooth, and translucent until
we arrive at the solid dentary portion, where we find it marked by a
row of minute pits. Of some dozen or more lower maxilla before me,
one of the most striking differences existing among them seems to be
the variation in size of the interangular vacuity or foramen. This is
elliptical in outline with the major axis of the ellipse in the long axis of
the bone, and in some specimens squarely meet the raised ramal borders
within, while in other individuals, even though the bone be larger, this
foramen is markedly smaller. A large concavo-convex sesamoid is found
between the tympanic and articular end on each side. The long axes of
these bones are placed vertically, and their concave surfaces look for-
wards. They are attached to the middle of the pointed articular pro-
cesses behind by a delicate ligament, and above by the saine means; by
a somewhat broader attachment to the squamosals and tympanics, pos-
teriorly.

Spinal column, cervical portion—(Pl. IV, Figs. 22 and 35).—In making
a study of the vertebral column of this Lark, the student will find
that he will be materially assisted if he make use of an engraver’s eye-
lens, or, better still, one of the low-power objectives of a good micro-
scope, as some of the points for examination are rather minute, and are
not to be so easily or satisfactorily demonstrated by the unarmed eye.
The cervical portion of the column is composed of thirteen vertebre ;
these enjoy, from the atlantal throughout the entire series, a perfectly
free movement among each other by their several articular surfaces ; and
some form of the sigmoidal curve, characteristic of the bird-neck, is in-
variably preserved during life and action. We find, too, the majority
of the salient points pertaining to these segments described by ornithol-
omists present and strongly marked, and the chief functions of this
- jointed and bony isthmus well carried out—as affording protection for
the myelon in its passage from the brain to the body below, and the
vessels from their centre to the brain above. The neural canal, begin-
ning in the atlas as a transverse ellipse, rapidly becomes circular, re-
taining this form throughout the tube, only to resume the elliptical again
in the last two or three segments, where in the thirteenth it seems to be
of a larger calibre than at the cranial extremity, the ellipse still being
placed transversely.

The usual processes of ten of these vertebra, the third to the twelfth,
inclusive, afford protection to the vertebral artery and sympathetic
nerve. By an apparent contraction of the parapophyses in the twelfth,
the canal is open laterally in this segment. It is confined to the anterior
third on each side of the vertebrae enumerated, and is exceedingly small
throughout its extent; its largest calibre being at its commencement,
its finest in the tenth or eleventh. Among the long vertebra in the

IGB

|

130 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL

middle of the neck the anterior entrance of the vertebral canal are
ellipses placed vertically. They become more circular as we approach
the thoracic end of the chain. On the eighth vertebra, mesially, and’
beneath anteriorly, we find, bounded on either side by the parapophysial
processes, the commencement of the interhyapophysial groove or canal
for the carotid artery. It extends through the fourth vertebra with
about an equal amount of distinctness and depth. (For names of parts,
see Explanation of Plates at the end of this paper.)

It will be seen that the carotid in this Lark is single, and bifureate at
a point about opposite the third cervical vertebra, the branches pursuing
their usual courses above.

A neural spine is feebly developed upon the axis posteriorly, this
process becoming more strongly marked on the summits of the next
three succeeding vertebrex, the remainder of the cervical segments being
devoid of this feature, though we have occasionally found an evident
attempt at its reproduction in the ultimate cervical. The nethermost
portion of the pseudo-centrum of the first vertebra has been considered
to be the atlantal hypapophysis Be this as it may, the hypapophysis
of the axis certainly has a much greater claim to be termed a process,
while on the third and fourth segments this spine constitutes one of
the most marked features of the vertebra, being a longitudinal and quad-
rate lamina of bone, equally well developed on the two vertebre in ques-
tion, directed immediately forward. In the case of the fifth cervical, the
hypapophysis has again degenerated to a minute median point, to be
entirely obliterated from the sixth. At the ninth it again makes its
appearance as a delicate and flattened plate at the anterior margin of
the vertebra beneath, at the point at which in the carotid canal it is first
seen in the eighth. In the remaining ones it is prominently developed
and directed forwards from the median plane in each vertebra as a quad-
rate lamina. It is usually triplicate in the last, but does not arise from
a common stem, as in other birds.

Parapophysial processes appear as lateral spines first on the third
cervical; in the middle of the series they are very long and delicate,
being parallel with the centrum of the vertebra to which they belong.
They become markedly suppressed near the termination of this division
of the spinal column.

Anterior and posterior zygapophyses retain throughout the cervical
vertebre their most common ornithic features; in the middle of the
neck the postzygapophysial processes are long and bent slightly towards
the neural canal, leaving quite an extensive lozenge-shaped space be-
tween them in this region where the cord is unprotected by bone; the
interarticular facets among the centra likewise retain their most com- ~
mon avian characteristics. The bodies for the most part seem to be
slightly compressed from side to side, with a faint inferior median crest.
The fourth vertebra has a delicate and outwardly arched interzygapo-
physial bar, that includes within it an elliptical foramen on each side of

No. 5.) SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF EREMOPHILA. Toe

some size. This bony connection in the third vertebra nearly fills in the
interzygapophysial space, a very minute vacuity alone remaining.

- All the cervical vertebra appear to be pneumatic, but the foramina
in somé of them are excessively small and difficult of detection.

What could be more exquisite in texture or offer a prettier subject for
study than the atlas of one of the smaller vertebrates such as our pres-
ent subject? When we see it analyzed in the minutest details, carried
beyond its mere gross anatomy, what interest, what wonder we experi-
ence, and how we marvel still when we realize the significance of this
bone, with its variously modified autogenous and exogenous parts—
a vertebra.

Here, in the atlas of Hremophila, the bird-head, as far as its bony sup-
port is concerned, rests in a diminutive cup not half a millimetre wide
or deep, that may or may not be perforated by the odontoid process of
the axis; in fact, quite an amount of osseous tissue intervenes, which
seems to be due to a short odontoidal style in the majority of instances,
rather than a lengthening of that part of the atlas that receives it.

A square bony plate projects from below, more anterior than any
other part of the bone, that covers the atlo-axoid articulation in front.

The arch that connects the neurapophyses is broad and smooth,
and assists greatly in the protection of the myelon between the two
bones. ‘ .

The odontoid process on the awis is concave in front, flat behind, with
aroundish summit. It averages one millimetre in length, and is directed
slightly backwards. The articular surface at its base is reniform in
outline, the centrum that supports it being contracted below. : The
postzygapophyses show faint traces of anapophysial tubercles; these
are better marked in the latter cervicals. The last or thirteenth verte-
bra has freely suspended from beneath each diapophysial articular sur-
face a rudimentary pleurapophysis that averages about two millimetres
inlength. These little bones represent the only true cervical ribs, though
we must admit here that in several individuals we found the first pair
of dorsal pleurapophyses unconnected with the sternum by the usual
hemapophyses, and ending in pointed extremities. Should such a speci-
men alone be examined, we would have to recognize fourteen cervical
vertebra, the last two bearing free pleurapophyses, but the common rule
must dictate here as elsewhere, and the condition just mentioned be
reckoned as the exception.

Dorsal vertebre, vertebral and sternal ribs, sternum—(P1. IV, Figs. 22,
24, 27, and 38).—The number of vertebr devoted to the dorsal portion
of the spinal column in Hremophila seems to be invariably jive. They
are easily detached one from another, and after ordinary maceration of
the skeleton drop apart almost as readily as the cervical vertebra, so
that during life there is at least quite a little amount of free movement
among these bones.

The neural canal, as it passes through this series, starts with the

132 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

transverse ellipse as we left it in the last cervical, in the vicinity
of the dorsal expansion of the myelon, to terminate nearly circular, and
much diminished in calibre, in the ultimate segment of the sacral ex-
tremity.

The neural spines form by their interlocking a continuous ridge above.
The thickened crest of this ridge is produced by what we will call the
arrow-head joint, a true schindylesial articulation to be found in many
of the class. The superior margin of each spine becomes pointed ante-
riorly, extends forward, and is received into a fissure of the posteriorly
produced superior margin of the neural spine of the vertebra next be-
yond it. This arrangement has the appearance of so many little arrow-
heads placed in similar juxtaposition, and constitutes one of the elements
of stability of the dorsal vertebra in this bird. The open spaces remain-
ing among the bodies of the spines below, between their produced crests.
and the several neural arches, are filled up by connecting ligament and
membrane.

The diapophyses of the dorsals are a very much horizontally flattened.
series. They are all slightly tilted upwards, the anterior ones being the
broadest and shortest, and the ultimate one, by a gradual departure in
this regard from the first, the narrowest and longest. In the middle of
the series, moderately well developed and antero-posteriorly produced
metapophysial ridges are found limiting the diapophyses externally; they
do not reach from one vertebra to another. The pneumatic foramina at
the bases of these processes are very minute and scarcely discernible
by the naked eye.

The inferior diapophysial facettes for the pleurapophysial tubercula
are concave-elliptical surfaces, with their major axes parallel to the
median line. The anterior ones are the more circular.

The zygapophysial processes, to assist in the intimate proximity of
these vertebra, are short and thick. The anterior ones look upwards and
inwards, the reverse being the case with the posterior series, which lat-
ter develop pointed spines that overlap above, each in its turn, on
either side, the vertebra next behind, at the base of the common neural
spine. The longer of these processes are found anteriorly; they gradu-
ally disappear as we near the sacrum.

The first dorsal hypapophysis consists of three plates, arising from the
centrum of the vertebra separately, and arranged as shown in Fig. 38.
On the second dorsal we find only a single quadrate plate in the median
plane, directed forwards. It occupies a position at the anterior margin
of the vertebra, but is produced posteriorly as a low, thin lamina of bone,
along the remainder of the centrum mesial to the raised and posterior
margin. The third vertebra takes it up in this form, and it is thus
passed along the series, constituting a continuous hypapophysial ridge,
intersected by the expanded anterior and posterior borders of the cen-
tra. '

The articular surfaces among the bodies retain their usual characters.

No. 5.] SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF EREMOPHILA. 133

They extend into the ridge just described. The centra of the dorsal
vertebra are somewhat compressed in a slightly increasing degree from
before backwards; each lateral and anterior margin supplies a nearly
circular parapophysis for the pleurapophysial capitula, while at points on
the posterior margins in the same plane we find the major share of the
notch, which in coaptation of the segments constitutes the subcireular
- foramina for the exit of the dorsal nerves.

There is a free pleurapophysis for each dorsal vertebra, but the first is
not always connected with the sternum by a sternal rib, as already de-
fined ; it sometimes has all the characteristics of a movable cervical rib ;
again, when it connects with the sternum, its hemapophysis articulates
rather high on the costal border (Pl. IV, Fig. 22). It may or may not
bear an epipleural appendage.

The vertebral ribs of this Lark articulate, as usual, by tubercula and
capitula, with the dorsals, meeting par- and di-apophyses in the ordinary
manner. The necks of the ribs in the middle of the series are the long-
est, and often we find among the ultimate ones a slight projection be-
yond the tubercle, that is received in a corresponding notch at the outer
border of the diapophysis it meets. There is but little difference in the
width of these flat bones; perhaps the anterior ones have rather the ad-
vantage in thisrespect. Minute apertures, to allow the air to enter their
bodies, are observed in the usual localities.

The laterally viewed curve of a dorsal rib is barely sigmoidal; viewed
from in front it approaches a portion of the curve of an are of an ellipse.

A ridge continuous with the neck is carried down the inner aspect of
each bone, to gradually disappear near its middle. The lower extremities
of these ribs are slightly enlarged, to afford space for articulation with
the sternal ribs ; the surface is convex.

The epipleural appendages of the dorsal pleurapophyses are conflu-
ent with the posterior edges of the bones, and situated below their mid-
dies. Occasionally the one in the middle of the series has sufficient
length to overlap two ribs; in young birds of this species they are much
shorter, and the best-developed ones show an angle on their inferior
borders just after leaving the rib, as if they had left that bone with the
original intention of proceeding downwards and backwards at a gentle
angle, but suddenly changing mind, proceeded directly upwards and
backwards at an equal angle; hence the condition alluded to.

When the first dorsal rib articulates with the hzmal spine below by the
intervention of a sternal rib, this latter bone is quite small and delicate,
averaging about 3 millimetres in length, and but slightly curved. The
remaining dorsal hemapophyses become longer and more curved as we
follow them backwards. They are all flattened from side to side, their
lower extremities being abruptly twisted at right angles with their shafts,
enlarged, and terminating in a flattened articular surface for the costal
border of the sternum. These articular surfaces are dumb-bell shaped,
a. é., contracted in their middles. The upper ends of these sternal ribs

134 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VI.

are also enlarged and laterally flattened for articulation with the verte-
bral ribs. These latter enlarged ends are sometimes larger, sometimes
smaller, than the extremity of the pleurapophysis they meet.

Through the teachings of philosophical anatomy, we must recognize
in the avian hmal spine or the bone sternum, developed as it may be,
the confluent hzemal spines; and in it, in its maturity, see one of the
most interesting bones to contemplate, it being one of the most diversi-
fied in form in the bird skeleton. Owen styled the type of this bone, as
found in the Lark now under consideration, ‘“ cantorial” (Anat. and
Phys. of Vert., Vol. II1). It is certainly typical of the suborder Oscines,
as far as American ornithology is concerned; good examples as testify-
ing to this I have now before me, in the hemal spines of Turdus mi-
gratorius, Ampelis garrulus, Mimus polyglottus, Lanius, and many others.

In Hremophila the sternum is very light and delicate in structure; so
thin is it in some individuals that we find deficiencies occurring, usually
in the body, as foramina of no mean size (1.8 millimetres). Its outer
surface, indeed the entire surface of the bone, has the appearance as if
it were venated, the solid bony veins being thicker and more opaque
than the general surface of the bone, and *branching from the various.
borders.

The carina is moderately well developed, measuring in the vertical
line below the coracoidal groove 9 millimetres. Its inferior border, ex-
panded behind, is rounded and somewhat thickened; this thickening
disappears on the anterior border, which is sharper and continuous with
a conspicuous crest on the front of the manubrium.

The carinal angle, with an aperture of 70°, is quite prominent and
produced anteriorly. Just within the anterior margin of the keel we
find a rather prominent carinal ridge, its lower extremity branching
backwards, and by its ramifications taking part in the superficial vena-
tion referred to above. The keel arises abruptly from the inferior and
median angles formed by the sides of the body where they meet mesiad..

The xiphoidal prolongation is profoundly notched once on each side.
These notches have the outlines of isoceles triangles, with their angles.
rounded, and apices but a short distance from the costal borders. These:
deep indentations of the xiphoid give rise on either lateral sternal bor-
der to a long, stout process, extending backwards and outwards, with
dilated extremity.

The outer surface of the body of the sternum presents for examination
well-marked pectoral ridges, and, running from the bases of the xiphoidal
processes to the outer angles of the coracoidal depression, clearly defined
subcostal ridges. —

The manubrium is aprominent, superiorly bifurcated, trihedral process,. _
jutting out from a substantial base in the median plane, forwards and
upwards, from the angle formed by the coracoid groove and the front
border of the carina. At its base internally there is an extensive oval
pneumatic foramen. Its bifurcations are rounded, and give attachment

No. 5.1 SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF EREMOPHILA. 135

at their extremities to firm ligaments, that pass directly to the coracoidal
capitula above.

The groove for the coracoids is markedly impressed and continuous in
front, extending from costal process to costal process; its boundaries
form the thickest and stoutest part of the bone we are describing.

The costal processes, possessed of broad bases, arise as thin but prom-
inent lamina, upwards, forwards, and outwards, terminated by flattened
summits. Their posterior margins bear the costal facets for the articu-
lating ends of the sternal hteemapophyses.

The sides of the body of the sternum on its ventral aspect make an
obtuse angle with each other. The line of meeting in the mesial plane
is quite evident; its anterior half is the seat of a row of various-sized
pneumatic foramina. There are upon each costal border five, sometimes
six, transverse facettes for the sternalribs; the shallow depressions among
them are scantily supplied with pneumatic foramina.

The mid-xiphoidal border, in which the keel terminates posteriorly, is
thickened ; its other boundaries are sharp, with raised ridges below,
just within their edges. The greatest length of the sternal body is a
little more than two centimetres, and its greatest width a little more
than one centimetre, the last measurement taken to the rear of the cos-
tal processes.

Sacral vertebre and ribs, pelvis, coccygeal vertebre—(P1. IV, Figs. 22,
23, and 28).—The first sacral vertebra has become thoroughly confluent
with the ossa innominata on either side and with the vertebra behind
it. Its diapophyses seem to have spread out upon the under surface of
the ilia, combining with them, for we observe that the first sacral pleu-
rapophyses articulate in the ordinary manner with the transverse pro-
cesses and the parapophyses, the tubercula being situated just near the
outer iliac borders. This rib may become, as a rare event, confluent
with the pelvis, but is usually free. Its hemapophysis is the longest of
the series, and the articular facette on its lower extremity meets the
last facette upon the sternal costal border. This sacral pleurapophysis
may possess an epipleural appendage, though it seems to be the excep-
tion.

The second sacral rib is a delicate hair-like bone of uniform thickness,
that does not show any decided tubercle, merely, after leaving the ver-
tebra, coming in contact with the under surface of the ilium, on each
side, for the entire interspace between the tubercle and head. It, too,
may become confluent with the pelvis on its lower surface.

Extending downwards and forwards by a gentle curve,it meets its
hzemapophysis through a miniature articulation. This latter style articu-
lates along the posterior border of the sternal rib of the first sacral
pleurapophysis, never reaching the costal border, and the second sacral
rib never bears an epipleural spine on its posterior border.

The sacral vertebre are invariably confluent throughout the chain in
the pelvis of the Horned Lark ; indeed, it is only by a process of staining

136 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VI.

this remarkable compound bone, and the aid of a strong light, that they
can with any satisfaction be counted. There are eleven of them; excep-
tionally, twelve.

The neural canal, circular at the outstart, shows the usual pelvic swell,
chiefly anterior to the acetabula, conformable with the ventricular dila-
tation of the myelon in that locality. The exit of this tube distally is
likewise nearly circular. The foramina along the bodies of the centra,
in the vicinity of the dilatation referred to, are double and placed one
above another, for the separate egress of the roots of the pelvic plexus:

The anterior aspect of the first sacral vertebra presents every element
and process requisite for articulation with the ultimate dorsal segment.
It is largely overshadowed by the ossa innominata. Opposite the iliae
contraction, in the neighborhood of the fourth and fifth sacrals, these
vertebre throw out their par- and di-apophysial processes far enough to
meet and brace the iliac bones. We donot meet with such braces again
until arriving opposite the acetabula and beyond, where the parapo-
physes project upwards and unite with the outer margins of the trans-
verse processes, the ilia articulating with the free and united borders.

Foraminal deficiencies not unusually occur among these processes, more
particularly between the last two sacrals, where they seem to be con-
stant, though of varying size and shape in different individuals. _

The last sacral vertebra is markedly compressed from above down-
wards, retaining, however, all the elements required in articulation with
the first and much-modified coceygeal vertebra.

Viewing the confluent sacral vertebree, or the “sacrum”, from above,
we find the united neural spines, as a vertical lamina, dividing the ante-
rior interiliac space into two capacious ilio-neural grooves at that moiety
of the bone.

This common neural spine and the ilio-neural grooves proceed back-
wards until the gluteal ridge of the ilium curves outward to the antitro-
chanter on either side. At this point the spine disappears with the
grooves, the sacrum becomes nearly flat and spreads out, to gradually
contract again before its ultimate dilatation in the diapophyses of the
last vertebra.

The ornithotomist will find, in reviewing the skeletons of our avian
types that the ilio-neural grooves, as seen in this bird, are very fre-
quently converted into canals in other orders, by meeting of the inter-
ested bones above. The condition as defined, however, in the previous
paragraph, as relating to Hremophila, seems to be characteristic of Amer-
ican Oscines. The sacrum is slightly convex from before backwards on
its upper surface, moderately concave along the confluent centra below.

The pelvis of this bird is uncommonly wide and short, and the isehi- »
adie and pubic posterior extremities remarkably flared outwards. The
anterior and inner angle of each ilium, apparently assisted by the dia-
pophysis of the first sacral vertebra from beneath, is pointed ; the ante-
rior border slopes backwards gradually, for a distance of 3 or 4 milli-

No. 5.) SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF EREMOPHILA. 137

metres, to the rounded anterior external angle of the ilium. Between
this point and the acetabulum the iliac border is markedly concave in-
wards, as is the surface of the bone above it, the preacetabular being
included between this border and a well-defined gluteal ridge. The
superior postacetabular iliac surface is nearly square in outline, convex,
and equal to a little more than one-third of the bone. It is thin and
translucent, its outer and posterior borders receiving the greater share
of osseous reénforcement, particularly in the vicinity of the antitro-
chanter.

Posteriorly, this bone, slightly aided by the ischium, is carried out
from an ilio-ischiadic, overhanging crest, as bony processes, with their
points turned slightly inwards.

These processes are strongly marked in another of our Oscines, Har-
porhynchus rufus, a bird that has a notoriously angular and unique pelvis.

The antitrochanter is subelliptical in outline, and faces downwards,
forwards and outwards. The articular surface is produced downwards
as far as the cotyloid cavity, upwards slightly above the general sur-
face of the ilium, and is bounded posteriorly by the ischiadic notch.

The foramen at the base of the truly hemispherical cotyloid cavity
has so far absorbed the bone that really scarcely anything remains of it
beyond a cylindraceous acetabular vacuity, the internal and external
apertures being circles of equal diameter, and the femur consequently
relying almost exclusively upon its fleshy and ligamentous attachments
to retain its head in the ring.

Sutural traces of the margins of the pelvic bones as the components
of this osseous ring have entirely disappeared, having been obliterated
during the pelvic consolidation.

The ischium, for its major part, is like the iltum—very thin, more par-
ticularly so at its free posterior borders; joining with the ilium behind,
it shuts off a large and elliptical ischiadic foramen, the superior are of
which is situated just beneath the ilio-ischiadic crest described above.
The major axis of this ellipse is directed downwards and backwards.

The posterior extremity of the ischium has an odd-appearing, foot-like
termination, that is bent down to meet the pubis.

This latter bone is an extremely slender style, that, immediately after
assisting in the formation of the cotyloid ring, closes in a small, in fact
the smallest of the group, subcircular obturator foramen behind; then,
running parallel with the ischium, by touching its further end encloses
another long spindle-shaped vacuity ; it is finally produced beyond that
bone by a pointed extremity, that curves backwards and inwards.

It only remains now to say of the pelvis, as far as its internal aspect
is concerned—after what we have said in regard to its extreme lightness,
its translucency, its sacrum, and its borders—that, in general, superior
convexities cause or create internal concavities, and vice versa. It is ea-
pacious and firmly united; any attempt to remove the ossa innominata,
in the adult bird, from the sacral border, invariably results in failure and
usually longitudinal iliae fracture.

138 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VI.

There are seven coccygeal or caudal vertebree, rarely only six, and the
pygostyle ; they are in the skeleton so arranged and articulated that
they have, as a whole, a gentle curve upwards, terminated by the quad-
rate ‘“ coccygeal vomer”.

These segments are all free, being easily individualized, even before
maceration, by simple section of the ligaments that bind them together.

The subcircular neural canal, that passes through them, almost capil-
lary in its dimensions, terminates without passing into the pygostyle.

There is no hemal canal developed, and indeed hypapophyses are
found as stunted tubercles only on the last two or three vertebre.

A neural spine is developed on each, as a prominent and curved “ pro-
cess” pointing forwards; this spine is wanting, however, on the last
caudal.

Of the lateral apophyses the transverse processes seem to be the only
ones entitled to any consideration; these, as broad, flattened lamina,
extend from each vertebra, downwards and outwards, decreasing in
width from before backwards; in fact, each vertebra in the coceygeal
series becomes more and more rudimentary as we proceed in that di-
rection.

The articular facettes upon the centra start reniform, to terminate
almost circular in the last vertebra; and the zygapophysial processes
are exceedingly elementary in character.

The pygostyle'is parallelogramic in outline, articulating with the ulti-
mate coccygeal vertebra by an unperforated cup-shaped depression, at
the middle of its long anterior side. The edge of the bone above this
point rests on the posterior border of the neural spine of the last caudal;
below it is free.

The superior angle is more or less produced, and the posterior corner
of the parallelogram is expanded laterally; this expansion is highly
developed in many birds, as in Colaptes mexicanus and other members of
the family Picide. The caudal vertebre are non-pneumatic in our pres-
ent subject, whereas in the pelvis we find these foramina in their usual
localities. .

The scapular arch—(Pl. IV, Figs. 22, 30, 32, 33, and 34).—This arch
is very strong and perfect in this bird, as it is among the Oscines gen-
erally. :

The bones can be easily separated from each other by maceration,
though during life they are remarkably well strapped together and to
the sternum by their numerous ligaments.

The scapula lays along the dorsum in its usual position ‘over the dorsal
pleurapophyses, parallel with the vertebre, with its posterior point
touching the fifth one in the vast majority of the specimens.

Certain bones in all skeletons force upon us their resemblance to fa-
miliar objects, and we know many of them have received their distinct-
ive appellations through such likenesses; more particularly is this the
case in the skeleton of man, where the bone we are describing is fre-

No. 5.] SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF EREMOPHILA. 139

quently termed the shoulder-blade, but how much more blade-like is the
scapula in this Lark and many other birds, as far as shape is concerned.
It is truly aminiature bony cimeter in Hremophila. This is not true for
scapulz of all birds, however, for no one would ever be struck by such a
resemblance while regarding the J-shaped scapula of Colaptes mexicanus,
or the straight, almost square-cut bone in some of our natatorial birds.

In the Horned: Lark the scapula is pointed and obliquely truncate
behind for more than a third of its slightly dilated posterior portion, on
the side towards the vertebre.

The outer border is reénforced by a rounded ridge for nearly its en-
tire length, while the inner is quite sharp.

The blade becomes stouter and subcompressed as we near the gle-
noidal process; this broad tuberosity extends downwards, forwards, and
outwards, and is crowned on its entire summit by a curved, subcireular,
articular facet, that supplies rather more than one-third of the glenoid
cavity for the Wes of the os humert.

The acromial process is bifurcated, and the clavicular head rests in the
fork. The larger bifurcation is the lower, and both rest against the
coracoid, on the inside and just below the head, creating the usual
scapulo-coracoid foramen, which in this case is not very extensive.

The scapula is pneumatic, and the foramina are to be found at the ex-
tremity of the larger bifurcation of the acromial process, and in the notch
between the two.

The coracoid can boast of a very fair subcylindrical shaft between its.
head and inferior expansion. This flared extremity is quite thin out-
wardly, stouter within, where it appears to be more of an extension and
spreading of the shaft in its course downwards. Below there is a nar-
row crescentic facet for the sternum, and at the upper edge of the exterior
and thin side of the dilated end we find a notch, sometimes a foramen,
that appears to be constant.

The upper extremity of the coracoid is an irregular tuberosity, con-
sisting of a lower, inner, and smaller process for articulation with the
clavicle, and an upper, superiorly convex head, that curls over mesiad to
create a fossa, at the base of which we discover a group of various-sized
pneumatic foramina. Anteriorly the head shows rather a well-marked
process, into which the ligament coming from the horn of the sternal
manubrium, of the same side, is inserted.

To the outer aspect, and below the head, is the reniform and vertical
facet that, with the scapula and os humero-scapulare, goes to complete
the glenoid cavity.

The os humero-scapulare is a free bone, rather larger than the patella,
found at the upper and posterior angle of the glenoidal process of the
scapula. It is an elliptical disc, with a peg-like process extending from
it from behind. The outer surface is concave and articular for the com-
pletion of the glenoid cavity. This ossicle is held in position by various
fibrous ligaments stretching from its borders to the scapular arch and
the humerus.

140 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. {Vol-VI.

The clavicles are thoroughly fused together, forming one deeply U-
shaped bone; their cylindrical and curved lengths support at the union,
mesially and below, a long lamina of bone, in the median plane, thatis .
directed upwards and backwards, parallel to the anterior carinal crest,
to which it is united by ligament in the living bird. Their upper ends
are expanded and placed in the skeleton flat-wise against the acromial
process of the scapula and the head and the lower or clavicular process
of the coracoid. The acromial process, through its bifureation, partially
grasps the hind border of this expanded end of the furculum, on either
side.

This bone seems to be non-pneumatic, while the coracoids are hollow
almost throughout their entire extent, having in their composition very
little cancellous tissue and a thin though firm, compact layer. The scap-
ule are hollow for some little distance into their blades, to be terminated
by a cancellous structure, with an external and attenuated outer compact ~
coat.

With the scapula arch in situ, we observe that the coracoids do not
meet below in the coracoidal groove of the sternum, but approach only,
on each side, as far as the periphery of the pneumatic foramen at the
base and behind the manubrium.

They are directed upwards, forwards, and outwards, at an angle of
about 45° with the horizontal plane, the skeleton being erect; and, as a
consequence, we find their upper ends further apart than any other part
of the bone.

The aperture between scapula and coracoid isin nearly a right angle,
and the straight part of the inner scapular borders are parallel, their
obliquely cut ends alone slightly turning outwards.

A scapula is 2.5 centimetres long, a coracoid 3 centimetres, the in-
terclavicular space above being 1 centimetre.

In Turdus migratorius, as perhaps the best representative of avian
structure among the Oscines, we find the scapula shorter in proportion
when compared with the other bones of the arch; the coracoids more
depressed, 7. ¢., more in line with the sternum; and the furculum in its
direction backwards showing a gentler curve.

The upper extremity—(P1. IV, Figs. 22, 31, 36, and 43).—The pectoral
limb in Hremophila maintains the usual ornithic characters of a great
number of the class, both in arrangement and number of the bones com-
prising it. The skeleton arm has ten distinct segments; of these, we
find one devoted to the brachium, two to the carpus, one to the metacar-
pus, and four to the phalangeal portion of the manus.

In ornithotomy we find the head of the os humeri playing in a shallow
glenoid cavity, composed of the glenoid process of the scapula, the hu-
meral facet of the coracoid, and here, in addition, the os humero-scap-
ulare; the homologue of the humerus summus not entering into the
scapulo-humeral articulation as an overarching and protecting process,
as we find it in human anatomy. ;

No, 5.) SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF EREMOPHILA, 141

The bone humerus in this bird is more remarkable for its lack of curv-
ature than anything else, being short and straight, as in others of the
suborder among which our subject is classed and belongs.

The head of the bone is broad and moderately flexed anconad, de-
veloping only a very narrow and thin radial crest, which is bent for its
entire extent toward the palmar aspect. This crest, answering to the
“oreater tuberosity” of anthropotomy, and giving attachment to the
usual muscles, extends along on a straight line on the upper aspect of the
shaft longitudinally for only about half a centimetre.

The ulnar tubercle, or lesser tuberosity, makes up the thickened and
proximal border of the confines of the pneumatic foramen; a deep little
pit on its palmar side or margin lodges the extremity of a strong liga-
ment coming from the head of the coracoid of the same side, and mate-
rially assists in keeping the head of the humerus in its socket.

The elliptical and convex articulating facet of the head curls over an-
conad, and from its middle a line runs down the bone for a short dis-
tance, being one of the angular boundaries of this the trihedral extrem-
ity of the bone. Quite a notch exists between the facet just described
and the wall of the pneumatic foramen. This latter is on the under side
of the head of the bone, surrounded on its upper, proximal, and lower
aspects by a firm bony wall, the lower and proximal parts of which are
continuous with the smooth and otherwise unbroken surface of the ex-
panded and palmar side of the “ head”.

The pneumatic fossa thus formed is deep, having at its bottom the
foramen alluded to. Quite often the aperture is multiple, and vast
differences in size exist, being very large in some individuals, nearly
consuming the base of the fossa where it is found. Fyrom the lower
boundary of the pneumatic enclosure another longitudinal line is seen
on the proximal end of the shaft, limiting the anconal face of the trihe-
dral end of the humerus in this direction. The palmar aspect of the
head, broad and smooth, arches gradually inwards and towards the
articular facet; it is also slightly convex from above downwards,
supposing the bone to be in situ and in its position of rest,as we do
during the course of our description.

The shaft of the humerus is subcompressed from within outwards,
smooth, and, viewing it laterally, it is barely convex above, by virtue of
the ends being bent slightly down; viewing it from above, we may say
that it is almost straight.

It retains its form until close under the expanded distal extremity,
which is curved palmad. On the radial side of this end of the bone we
find the transverse and convex elliptical trochlea below, for the sigmoid
articulating depression of the ulna. This has inferiorly the quadrilat-
eral internal condyle.

The ulnar convexity is separated from the oblique tubercle for the ra-
dius most effectually by a deep, well-marked, though narrow, notch.

The oblique tubercle maintains its usual position as formed on this
bone in birds generally.

142 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [ Vol. VI.

The trochlea surface does not extend inwards very far; 7. e., does not
pass over the end of the bone. Above it and towards the proximal end
appears a distinct and prominent ‘external condyle”.

Anconad this extremity of the humerus presents for examination the
upturned internal condyle and a longitudinal tendinal groove, situated
opposite the radial convexity, with intervening indentations. This ar-
rangement lends to this aspect of the bone rather an uneven and tuber-
ous look. The nutrient foramen, almost too minute to be observed by
the naked eye, is found at the middle and inner aspect of the shaft.

The radius is a long, delicate bone, with a bent’ and compressed shaft.
A moderately well-expanded and circular “head” presents the usual
concavity for the oblique tubercle of the humeral trochlea, while below
is a feebly marked “ ulnar facet ” and bicipital tuberosity ; beyond this,
again, the shaft develops a sharp, protruding edge, that extends nearly
to mid-shaft and into the interosseous space.

The distal extremity of this bone is spread transversely and curved
downwards. It articulates with the upper surface and distal end of the
ulna, and is lined above by very minute tendinal grooves. The outer
border of this extremity presents a transverse lamina of bone that seems
to be superadded to the truly dilated end.

In articulation, the radius at first curves away from its companion,
the ulna, to approach it again towards the carpal end, for about the outer
third of the shaft, to remain with it until both arrive at the wrist. The
distal border of the radius is transversely convex for an articular facette
on the scapho-lunar. The ulna is the main bony support of the forearm,
and, indeed, its shaft is nearly equal in size and strength to that of the
humerus itself, having the appearance of being the true continuation of
the pectoral limb, so diminutive and slender is the accompanying radius.

Its proximal extremity is the larger, and is gently curved anconad,
to meet the corresponding flexure of the brachium to form the elbow-
joint, the articular surface engaged being quite extensive and vertically
expanded. The lower, circular, and markedly concave trochlea is the
greater sigmoid cavity, and is intended for the ulnar tubercle of the
humerus. Its proximal margin is so produced as to form a strongly
defined “olecranon process”, the lower lip of the cavity being the homo-
logue of the “‘coronoid process”, and is so feebly developed as to scarcely
deserve the distinction. In close proximity to the greater sigmoid cav-
ity, above, there is another articular surface, quadrilateral in outline,
decidedly concave from above downwards, much more shallow in the
opposite direction, for the oblique tubercle. Immediately beyond its
distal margin is a weak and shallow facette for the side of the head of
the radius, so that the oblique tubercle articulates in a cavity furnished —
by the cupped-head of the radius and the larger quadrilateral trochlea
of the cubitus, the two being almost continuous.

The outer aspect of this extremity presents simply certain feeble ele-
vations and depressions for muscles and the ligaments surrounding the
joint.

No. &.) SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF EREMOPHILA. 143

From the proximal extremity the nearly cylindrical shaft curves
gently palmad from its inner third only ; after that it takes a compara-
tively straight course for the wrist. The anconal aspect of the shaft
presents at the junction of the inner and middle thirds an elliptical nu-
trient foramen, that enters the bone almost perpendicularly to its long
axis. The tubercles for the insertion of the bases of the quills of the
secondaries, so prominent on this bone in some birds, as in Colaptes,
seem to be entirely absent. We find them barely present in Harporhyn-
chus, quite strongly marked in Lanius. The carpal extremity of the
‘ulna is likewise articular, being vertically cleft and curved downwards.
Anconad it develops a rough eminence, and above a depression for the
fan-like expansion of the radius. This end, as in the majority of the
class, articulates with the three carpal bones and the radius above.

The humerus measures 2.4 centimetres, the ulna 3 centimetres, and the
radius 2.7 centimetres; but the bones in situ and the wing closed, the
anti-brachium projects beyond the brachium about 5 millimetres. The
bones of the forearm, though hollow, are apparently non-pneumatie, as
is the case with the carpals and long bones of the manus.

As in the great majority of the class, the bird-wrist is composed of
the two free carpals and the os magnum, which is confluent with the
proximal extremity of the second metacarpal.

The superior and smaller carpal is the scaphoid, here an irregularly
shaped bonelet, introduced among the cubitus, the radius, and the conflu-
ent os magnum, with a distal articular face for the latter and two proximal
ones for the trochlez of the anti-brachium. Between the scaphoid and the
cuneiform, the other free and inferior carpal, there exists an interspace,
where the ulna meets the os magnum.

The cuneiform has an elongated facet on its outer aspect for the ulna,
and two articular processes that grasp the metacarpal below—an arrange-
ment that admirably meets the action required of the avian wrist.

The last carpal merely constitutes the trochlear head of the confluent
metacarpals; by a gentle and backward sweep its general surface is
directed inwards.

The composition of the metacarpal bone of this bird does not deviate
from the general rule, as applied to the class, in any important particu-
lar. The three long bones comprising it are firmly anchylosed together
and bear the fingers. The shortest and first metacarpal, obliquely fused
with the anterior and upper end of the second, supports a free and pointed
jndex digit. The second, or ‘“‘medius”, supports, first in order below, a
phalanx peculiar to birds, that is at once recognized by its expanded
posterior border. It is here deeply concave on its inner surface, which
concavity is partially divided by a feeble transverse line.

The “blade” of this bone is quite thin in some birds, though the gen-
era] surface is absorbed, leaving nothing but the rounded and limital
borders, as in Larus delawarensis and others.

The neck of this bone is but moderately constricted between the blade

144 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [ Vol. VI.

and articular facet for the metacarpal to which it belongs. It bears be-
low another, and the smallest, phalanx of the hand, a little, free, sharp-
pointed finger, markedly compressed, that completes the skeletal bird-
arm distally, it being the ultimate segment.

The third metacarpal, termed annularis, a slender, ribbon-like bone,
fast above and below to medius, and extending slightly beyond it, also
articulates distally with another free phalanx, of the general character
as the index digit and the ultimate joint of the mid-metacarpal, although
it is longer than either of them. . Measuring along the anterior aspect,
from the summit of mid-metacarpal to the point of its last phalanx, we"
find the manus in Hremophila to average 2.6 centimetres.

This, the pectoral limb, as we have endeavored to picture it in this.
Lark, with its brachium, anti-brachium, and pinion in proportionate
equipoise as to length of segments, with its various bones smooth,
markedly straight, and devoid of those evidences of being acted upon
by powerful muscles, would require but a single glance from the student
of avian skeletology to pronounce it as belonging to a bird possessed
of a flight barely mediocral in rapidity and power.

Of the pelvic limb—(P1. IV, Figs. 22, 39, 40, 42, 44, and 46).— The inner
aspect of the upper extremity of the femur presents the usual globular
head for articulation with the cotyloid ring of the pelvis. It is nearly
sessile with the shaft, the neck amounting to almost nil. A shallow and
inconspicuous excavation occurs on the head for the insertion of the
ligamentum teres. The articular surface that originates with this hem-
ispherical protuberance extends outwards over the summit of the bone,
constantly spreading, until limited by the trochanterian ridge, In a
plane with the outer aspect of the shaft; it occupies a slightly higher
level than the head, and itis opposed to the anti-trochanter in the articu-
lated skeleton.

Anteriorly the trochanterian ridge and line are quite prominent, ex-
tending a short distance down the shaft, to be lost on the general surface}.
posteriorly it projects outwards horizontally from the articular surface,
over a shallow concavity that is found immediately below, that presents.
at its base a circular foramen that leads to the hollow shaft, and is
probably pneumatic, though the femur of this bird does not have the
appearance of a bone possessed of pneumaticity; the orifice, if nutrient,
is certainly situated in an unusual place, though we must confess that a
careful search over the entire shaft with a powerful lens failed to reveal
any other opening. The trochanter minor is not represented.

The shaft, for the greater part of its extent, is cylindrical, with a clean
superficies, undivided by any intermuscular ridges or lines, or, if so,
very faintly, and decidedly convex forwards.

The distal extremity of the femur enters largely into the knee-joint, and
is more bulky than the proximal extremity of the bone. It is directed
backwards, and, as usual, is divided by an antero-posterior shallow in-
tercondyloid notch, which is continued up the shaft anteriorly, as the

A
No.5.) SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF EREMOPHILA. 145

“rotular channel,” soon to disappear into internal and external condyles.
The larger and lower external condyle is longitudinally cleft posteriorly,
so as to afford an additional and outer condyloid surface for the head of
the fibula, with which it articulates.

A tuberosity is found behind, just above this cleft, and a few others,
less prominent and situated more internally, are seen on this aspect of
the bone, in the popliteal fossa.

The limiting margin of the internal condyle is sharp and distinct.
The ordinary features, as tuberosities and muscular lines and markings,
usually sought for at this end of the bone in nearly all birds, are very
feebly reproduced in our present subject.

The proximal extremity of the tibia has a very interesting form, due
to the prominence of the cnemialridges. These are attached to the head
of the bone, well above the horizontal articular surface for the condyles of
the femur. Their superior border is continuous and convex upwards;
their inferior borders meet the shaft abruptly, and there terminate.
Both of these wing-like processes are turned towards the fibular side of
the bone, the procnemial process being the larger in every respect; and
the ectocnemial sometimes is produced downwards into a very sharp
and needle-like spine, a characteristic of other Oscines. They include
between them a triangular concave and rather deep recess. The expan-
sion supporting the superior articular surface projects over the shaft of
the bone in all directions, being quadrilateral in outline, and having an
articular facet for the fibula on the outer side, while in the middle
of the surface, above, a tuberous spine of the tibia exists, a concavi-
ties on either side for the condyles of the thigh-bone.

The shaft is remarkably straight, light, and hollow, though apparently
non-pneumatic, no apertures having been discovered to allow the air
access to the interior.

A fibular ridge, 4 millimetres long and 1 millimetre deep, is developed
in the upper third of the shaft, perpendicular to its outer aspect, for the
lower articulation of that bone.

Huxley and Gengenbauer maintain that the distal extremity of the
tibia represents the astragalus among the Class Aves, and there certainly
seems to be some foundation for this assertion, for if we examine this
bone in the young of any of the Gallina, as in Centrocercus, we find the
segment that eventually ossifies with this end of the tibia to be rather
too extensive for a mere epiphysis, and may represent that tarsal bone.
Without further remark, then, upon this important and still unsettled
question here, we will observe that in Hremophila, and in all birds, the
leg-bone terminates distally by two anteriorly placed condyles, separated
by a well-defined intercondyloid notch. These condyles, approaching
each other behind, diverging in front, are reniform in outline and shape,
with their convex surfaces downwards. They are higher on the shaft an-
teriorly, and the articular portion is more extensive. Likewise, anteriorly
the shaft is grooved below, to be bridged over just above the “notch” by

10GB

146 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [ Vol. VI.

a narrow bony span, arched outwardly, that holds the tendons of the deep
extensors in position.

The inner end of this arch is the higher on the bone, and just above
it, on the shaft, we find a minute tubercle, that gives attachment to a lig-
ament that is extended to another tubercle lower down on the shaft, and
on the opposite side. :

The fibula is the merest apology for a bone, represented only by a
slender spine on the outer side of the tibia. It has a superior and knob-
like head, that articulates with the horizontally expanded head of its
sizable companion; lower down it meets the fibular ridge, and is firmly
attached to it by a strong, fibrous, and close-fitting connection.

Below the ridge the fibula is continued, hair-like in dimensions, to meet
the tibia below the middle of its shaft, to become thoroughly and indis-
tinguishably confluent with it.

The patella (Pl. IV, Fig. 22) is a free bone, and is found in the ten-
don of the quadriceps extensor. It is compressed antero-posteriorly,
with an elliptical base above.

From the points representing the vertices of the major axis of this
ellipse, bounding lines pass, to meet broadly concave below. ‘The ante-
rior surface, limited by these boundaries, is convex outwards; the pos- .
terior surface, slightly concave, is divided by a vertical ridge into two
unequal parts, the outer of which is the greater. The femur averages
2 centimetres in length, the tibia 3.2 centimetres, and the bone now to
be described as the tarso-metatarsus nearly 2.3 centimetres, falling be-
tween the thigh and leg-bone.

The metatarsals of the second, third, and fourth toes, and certain tar-
sals at the upper extremity of the bone, coalescing, form the segment,
tarso-metatarsus, next in order below the tibia, with which it articulates.

The articular surface of its summit is so arranged as to accommodate
itself to the condyles of the tibia, consisting essentially of an inner and.
outer antero-posterior facet, and a prominent spine on the anterior mar-
gin, that accurately fits in the intercondyloid notch 6f the bone above.

On the posterior aspect of the bone above we find the “calcaneal”
process, here approaching aright parallelopiped in form, being vertically
pierced by four minute cylindrical canals, two next the shaft and two
parallel with them and above. They are for flexor tendons, which pass
through them. The shaft is straight, subcylindrical, and hollow, ex-
panding below for the trochlee for the phalanges. For its upper half
and posteriorly, ranging below the calcaneal process, it develops a sharp
vertical crest, that gradually subsides below.

The anterior aspect of the shaft is faintly grooved longitudinally,
and where it dies out below, just above the notch between the third and —
fourth terminal trochlex, we observe a minute perforating foramen for
the anterior tibial artery. Upon the inner margin of the shaft below
there is the well-marked though shallow facet for the os metatarsale acces-
sorium. This diminutive bone is, as usual, slung to the tarso-metatar-

No. 5.] SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF EREMOPHILA. 147

sus by aligament, articulating beyond with the hallux. It represents the
first metatarsal, and has all the appearances of one of the larger-sized
phalangeal segments, divided obliquely through the shaft, with the cut
surface closed in and forming the articular surface for the tarso-meta-
tarsus.. Its position, in situ, is figured in PI.IV, Fig. 44. The lower and
- expanded end of the tarso-metatarsus, bearing the trochlez of the re-
maining phalanges, is further conspicuous for the marked manner in
which the bone is compressed antero-posteriorly, causing the trochlear
ends to be placed side by side, transversely. The middle one is the
larger and grooved entirely round, the one for the second toe being
slightly the higher and bent a little outwards; finally, the fourth is the
smallest. Slit-like spaces among these “ processes” completely divide
them.

The joints of the toes are arranged upon the most common plan, and,
we believe, upon the general rule for all Oscines; 1. ¢., the hallux pos-
sesses two phalanges, second toe three, third toe four, and the outer and
last toe five.

These joints are not impressed with anything particularly remarkable,
beyond what is found in them among the class generally. Their verti-
cally cleft and anterior extremities articulate with the joint beyond,
which is diminished in size and articulates in like manner with the next
anterior segment.

The claws are grooved laterally, and show a process at their proximal
and lower aspects.

A glance at P1.1V, Fig. 22, will be sufficient to satisfy ourselves that
the great length of the claw of the hind toe sometimes seen in Hremo-
phila, and always characteristic, is due almost entirely to the growth of
the horny theca that encases it, and not to the length of the osseous
claw.

+ In the figure just referred to, the hallux, with the first metatarsal, has

been drawn backwards in the skeleton, not only to show the os meta-
tarsale accessorium, but also a sesamoid, of no mean size, that is found
on its outer side, an ossicle that betrays its possessor and declares the
habit he has of spending a good share of his time upon the ground.

"Rs %y 4)

a. eee

PLATE Ill.

Various bones of the skeleton.

Fig. 7. Anterior view of skull, the lower mandible having been removed.

Fig. 8. H, humerus; i, ulnar tubercle; #’, oblique tubercle for radius and ulna;
h, radial crest; S A and S’ A’, scapular arch; S and 8’, scapula; C and C’, clavicle;
Cr and Cr’, coracoid ; f, perforating foramen.

Fig. 9. H’, humerus; h’’, radial crest; pf, pneumatic foramina; S A” and § A’”’,
scapular arch; S” and S’”, scapula; C’’ and CO’, clavicle; Cr’’ and Cr’’, coracoid;
f', perforating foramen.

Fig. 10. H A, hyoid arch; a, superior view of atlas; a’, the same viewed laterally ;
b, the axis; 0, its odontoid process. ;

Fig. 11. Right carpus of Bubo virginianus, outer aspect, with the bones composing
it moved partly from their normal positions to show articulating surfaces; rd, radius;
ul, ulna; s, scaphoid; c, cuneiform; m, metacarpus; d, index digit.

Fig. 12. Right radius and ulna, Speotyto, inner aspect; wu, ulna; 7, radius; y, artic-
ular facet for oblique tubercle of humerus, y’ for ulnar tubercle of humerus.

Fig. 13. The same bones, inferior surface, when in position and the wing closed:
r’, radius; wu’, ulna.

Fig. 14. Posterior surface, right metacarpus. The differences in form and position
of such portion of the articular surface in the metacarpus as is shown by 2 and 2’, in
Figs. 11 and 14, between Bubo and Speotyto, are here seen; flat and rounded below in
the first, prominent and pointed in the second.

Fig. 15. Anterior surfaces, right tibia and fibula; Ff, fibula; 7, tibia.

Fig. 16. Posterior surfaces, same bones; £’, fibula; 7’, tibia.

Fig. 17. Right femur; v, posterior surface; v’, anterior surface.

Fig. 18. Anterior surface, right tarso-metatarsus; m, bony bridge over tendons; J,
foramen for anterior tibial artery; v, facet for outer toe, /, for middle, and ¢ for inner toe.

Fig. 19. Posterior surface same bone; j’, the foramen for the anterior tibial artery ;
e facet for outer toe, l’’ for middle, and ¢’” for inner toe; k, facet for os metatarsale
accessorium.

Fig. 20. A, right os metatarsale accessorium, superior surface; B, base or in-
ferior surface of right tarso-metatarsus; e’, facet for outer toe, i, for middle, and ¢’ for
inner toe. The section of the shaft shows just above the middle facet, on the
posterior aspect, ranging near the middle third of the bone.

BULL U.S. GEOL. SURV. VOL. V1.. Ate Un

OSTEQLOGY OF SPEOTYTO CUNICULARIA var. HYPOGAA.

WP hot
tek

i

Bis, 32.

Fig. 33.

Fig. 34.
cavity.

Fig. 35.

Fig. 36.
Fig. 37.

Fig. 38.

PLATE IV.*

. Skeleton of Hremophila alpestris.

. Sacrum and pelvis from above.

. The sternum from below.

. The skull from above.

. The skull from below.

. The sternum from above.

. Sacrum and pelvis from below.

. Lower mandible from above.

. The clavicular furculum from in front.
. Left humerus, anconal aspect.

Left scapula and coracoid, internal aspect.
Scapular extremity of clavicle.
Left scapula and coracoid, external aspect, showing extent of glenoid

The thirteenth cervical vertebra, showing first pair of free pleurapophyses.
Left humerus, palmar aspect.

Hyoid arch from below.

Anterior view of sternum, first dorsal vertebra, with its movable pleurapo-

physes and hemapophyses, in situ.

Fig. 39.
Fig. 40.
Fig. 4l.
Fig. 42.
Fig. 43.
Fig. 44.

Right tarso-metatarsus, anterior aspect.

Right femur, anterior aspect.

Sclerotals, right eye.

Right tibia and fibula, anterior aspect.

Right ulna, anconal aspect.

Right foot, with a portion of the podotheca removed to show the os meta-

tarsale accessorium, in sitn.

* The figures on this plate are numbered in continuation with the author’s plates and figures to his

Memoir on the Osteology of Speotyto cunicularia hypogea.

BULL. U.S. GEOL. SURV. VOL. VI.

a

=—— epee?

—

WsaP yee

ae"
LAR IAS SO

OSTEOLOGY OF EREMOPHILA ALPESTRIS.

Art. VI.—Preliminary List of the North American
Species of Agrotis, with descriptions.

By A. R. Grote.

To the kindness of many correspondents I owe a large amount of
material in the genus Agrotis, and although this is insufficient to allow
of a complete revision of our numerous species, yet it has enabled me
to prepare the present preliminary list, which will, I hope, be of service
to future students. In my collection I have representatives of nearly
all the species here cited, and the types of amajority of the forms described
by authors in America. Lederer divides the genus into groups, depend-
ing on the tibial armature, vestiture, the shape of the genitalia, and the
Structure of the antennze. I cannot follow this arrangement now, since
of several species I have only one sex, and of others in my specimens
thefeet are imperfect. The listis then mainly of value for the synonymy ;
its issue at this time is demanded by the increased attention which is
being paid to this department of natural history. The perfect insects
belonging to this group are characterized by the eyes being naked, the
tibiz armed (either all or only the middle and hind pair), and the body
untufted. The front tibiz never have a claw, but sometimes the two
terminal straight spines on the sides of the joint are notably longer than
the rest (Pleonectopoda). Ihave included in this list two species, aratrix
and chortalis, which undoubtedly belong to Ammoconia, a group which
seems to me to differ only from Agrotis by a mesial ridge of scales on the
thorax; two other species, parentalis and decipiens, also show this ridge,
but in other characters are more like the typical Agrotids. It remains
to be seen whether other species, as yet separated by me, will not come
to swell the large genus, such as Pseudorthosia variabilis and the spe-
cies of Pseudoglea and Chephora. It must be remembered that Agrotis
saucia has a divided thoracic crest.

In the European fauna 170 species are enumerated by Staudinger.
Our forms are doubtless much more numerous, since our territory is larger
and is but partially explored. In my Check List of 1875 I enumerate
165 North American species. I now cite 205 names. With Europe we
have Chardinyi, baja, C-nigrum, fennica, ypsilon, saucia, carnea, plecta,
prasina, occulta,in common. The Iceland species islandica and rava are

also found in our territory. It is uncertain whether this list is to be
149

®

150 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VI.

further increased by the addition of augur (haruspica), obelisca (obelis- |

coides), and segetum (texana?). Species which are nearly allied to
European forms, but which may be distinguished, are, for instance,
Normaniana, which resembles triangulum, and clandestina, which recalls.
ravida; and the differences between the allied forms have been worked
out by Dr. Speyer. Other species remain to be compared, as perqui-
ritata and speciosa. Although it is probable that among the species here:
cited some are not entitled to that rank, the number of such names is,
I believe, very small, and a very much greater number of distinct forms.
awaits discovery.

The principal writers who have described our species of Agrotis are
Harris, Guenée, Walker, Mr. H. K. Morrison, the late Mr. C. T, Robin-
son, and myself; Dr. Speyer has also investigated the allied forms of
Europe and America. In the insects injurious to vegetation Dr. Harris
mentions five species. The charm of this author’s style makes his work.
a classic, and renders one forgetful of the necessity for greater clear-
ness which his subject demands. Of his five species, telifera is a name
for American specimens of ypsilon, and inermis for saucia. South Amer-
can specimens of this last species, which enjoys a wide geographical
range, have been also renamed by Dr. Packard (Ortonii). Dr. Harris.
considers his messoria as the representative of the European segetwm.
This cannot be the case, if, as is almost certain, repentis is this species.
of Dr. Harris’s, too vaguely described to be readily recognized. It has
been more recently redescribed by Mr. Riley as Agrotis Cochranit. An-
other species described by Dr. Harris, under the name tessellata, was by
Dr. Fitch considered as a variety of the European nigricans, under the
name maizi. The last of Dr. Harris’s species of Agrotis are clandestina
and Brace’s devastator, which latter, with its unarmed tibiz, I have re-
ferred to the genus Hadena.

M. Guenée refers our species to the distinct genera Agrotis and Noc-
tua ; the yellow-winged species of Triphena are also separated by him
generically. We have but one of this latter group in our fauna, Char-
dinyi, originally referred to Anarta by its describer, the late Dr. Bois-
duval. Among the species described by Guenée which I do not recog-
nize in my collection are ochrogaster, elimata, and spissa. Guenée’s vari-
ety of tritici may be tessellata.

Mr. Walker’s descriptions are so indifferent that a careful examina-
tion of the British Museum collection may disturb our synonymy. His.
Mamestra (!) unicolor is a new name for our clandestina.

The extensive collection of Mr. Henry Edwards contains the unique
types of pallidicollis, niveivenosa, vancouverensis, and of Milleri, the lat-
ter, perhaps the handsomest of the genus, named for the poet of the
Sierras, Joaquin Miller. In Mr. Tred Tepper’s collection are many of
Mr. Morrison’s types; Mr. Hulst has the types of dolis and sublatis ;
the collection of Mr. E. L. Graef contains many varieties in the genus.
I am under special obligations for specimens to Professor Snow and Dr.
James S. Bailey.

ee) °

Ble arn

No. 6.] GROTE ON NORTH AMERICAN AGROTIS. 151

In different papers, Mr. H. K. Morrison has described many species
of the genus. In one of his earliest communications, Proc. Bost. Soc.
N. H., p. 162, Dec., 1874, Mr. Morrison says: “‘I give below a prelimi-
nary list, with short descriptions of some new species of Agrotis, which
will be fully illustrated and compared with allied forms in my forthcom-
ing paper on that genus.” The promise has not been fulfilled, and, from

the fact that Mr. Morrison has disposed of several of his types, perhaps

it cannot be. The species briefly characterized and named are twenty-
twoinnumber. Itis safe to say that the species could not be recognized
from these ‘“‘short descriptions”. The species with which they are com-
pared are often not the species nearest to the new form, as, for instance,

sigmoides, with which the new species saxigena and claviformis are said

to be allied. Now, sigmoides is not at all nearly related to these forms;
M. Guenée would place them in distinct genera; nor are they similar in
appearance. Sasigena is, I believe, certainly the same as the Labrador
species imperita of Hiibner; claviformis is more nearly related to Pach-
nobia carnea than to sigmoides, which latter belongs to the genus Noctua,
according to Guenée. Again, plagigera is said to be allied to 4-dentata,
but Mr. Morrison’s type belongs to a species more nearly related to mes-
soria than to 4-dentata. The question as to whether these descriptions
are valid or not is simplified by the fact that Mr. Morrison has redescribed
a number of them, so that they can be recognized, while in three instances
(bochus, simplicius, and redimacula) he has altered and modified the orig-
inal names. It would seem to be right that these species should only
date from their full description, and that the names not again mentioned
should be dropped from the lists. It is not necessary here to go over
the argument by reprinting any of these “short descriptions”. No stu-
dent who knows the difficulty of the group can hesitate in throwing
aside these descriptions as worthless. Atleast half of them would cover
a dozen or more species besides the one intended. Of these twenty-two
I have myself described two, intrita and rufipectus, under Mr. Morrison’s
names. Of the twenty remaining, Mr. Morrison has described elsewhere
seven, viz, simplaria, claviformis, brocha, redimicula, plagigera, Rileyana,
gladiaria ; of the thirteen left, seven must goinas synonyms; saxigenal be-
lieve to be the same as imperita ; permunda, Mr. Morrison wrote me, was
a redescription of fumalis and perpura of Euroides ; scropulana, from the
alpine region of Mount Washington, is, I believe, the same as carned,
from Labrador, and opipara, from the same locality, the same as islandica ;
while I regard manifestolabes as the male of Catherina (I have been in
error in considering my type of Catherina a male); and unimacula being
preoccupied in the genus, must give way to haruspica for the North
American species which represents the European augur. There remain,
then, six names, of which two, decolor and exsertistigma, have found their
way into collections. As to decolor, Mr. Morrison returned me a form,
which I had sent him for description, as the “typical form of decolor” ;
but my campestris has also been distributed by him as “ decolor”, and is

152 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. | Vol VI.

in many collections under that name. I have described, in the Bulletin
of the Buffalo Society, Mr. Morrison’s specimen returned to me as decolor ;
but I have my doubts that the form is another species from campestris.
I have also illustrated exsertistigma from specimens returned to me by
Mr. Morrison, to whom I originally communicated the species as new.
I find that a specimen of the related form, observabilis, is labelled as the
type of “‘exsertistigma” in Mr. Graef’s collection; and, as is the case with
“‘decolor”, it is evident that distinct forms have been confounded under
one name by Mr. Morrison. I believe also that this has happened with
dilucida and Morrisoniana; the “type” of dilucida, in Mr. Thaxter’s col-
lection, is the dilucida of my collection and papers, while, I think, from
the description, that Mr. Morrison has originally included specimens of
janualis with dilucida, and that in collections we shall find “type” labels
of dilucida affixed to specimens of janualis. I also think that Mr. Mor-
rison’s Morrisoniana, from Texas, Proc. Bost. 8. N. H., 214, 1875, is gla-
diaria. Of the remaining, one, viz, stigmosa, is, I believe, a valid spe-
cies, though very near volubilis; the remaining three, viz, tenuicula,
monochromatea, cinereomacula, are unknown to me, and should have no
standing as described species. It cannot be thought improbable that
Mr. Morrison should have worked carelessly with these descriptions
when we reflect that he has redescribed such a commonly known species
as Hyppa xylinoides as new, under the name Hadena ancocisconensis, and
a species of Anarta as Orthosia perpura and Mamestra curta, thus refer-
ring the same form to different genera easily distinguished by the
structure of the eyes. He has also described Galgula subpartita as a
new Telesilla, and a species of Hustrotia (Hrastria) as a Hadena, and again
as a second species of Lithacodia! Tn an anxiety to find me in error,
Mr. Morrison (Proc. Bost. 8. N. H., 117, 1875) refers my gilvipennis as
the same as Chardinyi, from Siberia, and adds, “there is not even the
usual slight geographical difference in color noticed by Dr. Speyer in
insects common to Europe and America”. Aside from the fact that
Siberia is not in Europe, and that the color of Mr. Morrison’s geography
is rendered doubtful by his remark, there remains another fact, and that is
that the color of the American specimens of Chardinyi varies greatly, so
that Mr. Morrison isincorrect also in this respect. Maine specimens have
the fore wings and thorax purply brown. Mr. Couper’s collections in
Anticosti varied from reddish brown to a faded yellowish fuscous tint.
The size also shows a considerable range of variation. The hind wings
also vary in the depth of the band and the consequent extent of the
yellow base. It is possible that Mr. Strecker, who, as we have abun-
dantly shown elsewhere, does not understand the structure of moths, —
and Mr. Morrison, who has made several bad mistakes as to species, are
a little hasty in their reference of our single yellow-winged form, but I
think that the inspiration has come originally from a European natural-
ist who has compared the two, which I have not been able to do, and I
adopt here the reference as correct.

No. 6.) GROTE ON NORTH AMERICAN AGROTIS. Lae

It is by no means impossible for Mr. Strecker and others to make
important changes in synonyms without seeing the species in question,
and apparently without reading the original description. So, C. celebs,
which I have originally described as having the wings gray and black,
and looking like consors, is referred by him as a synonym to badia, on the
strength of dark and well-marked brown specimens of badia, which are
christened “ celebs”, without reference to what “celebs” really is. The
true celebs has been taken in Canada by Mr. Norman, in Northern New
York by Mr. Hill, and in Maine by Mr. Allen. It has deep-black pri-
maries, much shaded exteriorly with gray; the lines distinct, velvety
black; the hind wings are like badia, to which the form is nearest allied.
It seems to connect badia with antinympha. Festina lente!

Agrotis apicalis n. s.

Deep brown, shaded with black. Fore wings uniform deep brown,
with the veins blackish and shaded with black from the reniform to
the external margin, the black color spreading to the costal edge of
the wing. Median lines propinquitous, subparallel, black, lunulate,
geminate. Stigmata concolorous, moderate, indistinct. Claviform ob-
solete. Posterior ine feebly exserted superiorly, angulate on vein 4.
Some terminal interspaceal linear shades; no traces of subterminal line
apparent; anterior line perpendicular, more noticeably waved and gem-
inate than the posterior line. Hind wings fuscous, beneath paler, with
mesial line. Thorax and abdomen untufted, smooth. Head and collar
blackish ; thorax brown, with deeper edges to the tegule. Tibie all
armed, anterior pair with two long, terminal, straight spines; eyesnaked ;
clypeus rough. Colorado. Length of primary, 15 mil. Resembles
opaca; the apical shading gives the species a resemblance to some forms
of celodasys. Very distinct by its color and the course of the median
lines.

This species belongs to the section Pleonectopoda, which I have incor-
rectly taken as a fresh generic type. It is characterized by the spinose
fore tibiz having the rows of spinules terminated by a much longer
spine on each side of the joint. The term may come to be used for a
section of the genus when the armature of all the species becomes known.
It has been incorrectly used by Mr. Morrison, who afterwards pointed
out to me that the type of the genus, Lewisii Grote, was not generically
separable from Agrotis, and that the characters given by me are unes-
sential. (Bull. B.S. N.S., 1, 136.)

Agrotis cloanthoides n. s.

?. All the tibiz spinose, the anterior pair with two longer straight
spines at the end of the joint. Eyes naked; body untufted. Closely
allied to albalis, from Nevada, but differing by the clear whitish fuscous
and blaek colors, whereas albalis is shaded over with soft grayish white,
obscuring the markings. Colors of lagena. The stigmata are quite
small, as in albalis; the cell black; the orbicular elongate white

154 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VI.

streak; the reniform upright. Lines obliterate. A fine white basal ray,
edged below with a black line and above with a blackish shade. The
interspaces are shaded longitudinally with fuscous and blackish. The
white subterminal line is as in albalis, but followed by interspaceal black
and fuscous stripes and marks. Fringes fuscous, cut with whitish at
extremity of veins. Hind wings white. Thorax fuscous gray, with
black lines on the tegule. Expands 35 mil. Colorado, Mr. Graef. The
interspaceal dark stripes give the insect the appearance of an Actinotia
(Cloantha).

Agrotis rubefactalis n. s.

g 2. In size, ornamentation, and structure this species closely resem-
bles Agrotis meéssoria, a species which occurs with but little variation
from east to west across the continent. The new species differs at once
by the red-tinged fore wings and thorax, by the fact that the collar has
a broad black line, and by a prominent black and even shade which pre-
cedes the subterminal line on primaries. Lines geminate, black, filled
in with the paler ground-color. Stigmata smaller than in messoria,
pale-ringed ; orbicular round, with dark central dot; reniform upright,
excavate outwardly, with dark centre; median shade black, diffuse, and
quite distinct. Secondaries dark fuscous, nearly unicolorous in both
sexes, with paler fringes. Washington Territory. Two fresh specimens.
The color is that of messoria and its allies, but shot with reddish, so that
the species looks like brunneigera with the ornamentation of messoria.

AGROTIS Hiibn. Tentamen.
(Type: Noctua segetum S. V.)

Chardinyi Boisd., Index, 94; Guen., Noct. 1, 317; gilvipennis Gr., 6th
Peab. Rep. 28. .
North. N. Y.; Anticosti; White Mountains; Maine.
badicollis Gr., Bull. B. 8. N. 8. 1, 136.
N. Y.; Mass.
dilucida Morr., Proc. Ac. N.S. Phil. 55, 1875.
N. Y.; Mass.
janualis Gr., Bull. Geol. Surv. 4, 169.
N. Y.; Mass.; W. Va.
pallidicollis Gr.; Agrotis cinereicollist Grote (non. Guen.), Bull. B.S. N.
S. 3, 79, pl. 4, fig. 6.
California.
opacifrons Gr., Bull. Geol. Surv. 4, 170.
RENE
sigmoides Guen., Noct. 1, 320.
N. Y.; Eastern States.
perattenta Gr., Can. Ent. 6, 131.
Maine; N. Y.
attenta Gr., Can. Ent. 6, 131.
Maine; N. Y.

No. 6.] GROTE ON NORTH AMERICAN AGROTIS. 155

stellaris Gr., Can. Ent. 12, 153.
Wash. T.; Nevada.
Mig llophora Gr., Bull. B.S.N.S. 2, 61; Dahlii var. Guen., Noct. 1, 332.
Can.; N. Y.
Tebitera Gr., Can. Ent. 7, 207; rubit Gr.
Can.; N. Y.; Eastern States.
conflua Tr., 6, 405.
Anticosti.
perconflua Gr., Ann. Lyc. N. H. N. Y. 9, 1876.
N. Y.; Eastern States.
rosaria Gr., Bull. Geol. Surv. 4, 172.
California.
telimata Guen., Noct. 1, 333.
Georgia.
Hilliana Harvey, Can. Ent. 10, 55,
N. Y.; Nevada.
baja S. V., 77; Speyer, Stett. Ent. Zeit. 122.
Hur.; Can.; Middle and Eastern States; Vancouver.
Normaniana Gr., Tr. Am. Ent. Soc. 89, 1874; obtusa Speyer, Stett. Ent.
Zeit. 124.
Can.; Eastern and Middle States.
Fishii Gr., Bull. U. 8. Geol. Surv. 4, 175.
Maine; Mass.
conchis Gr., N. Am. Ent. 1, 43.
Colorado.
mirabilis Gr., N. Am. Ent. 1, 39.
Colorado.
C-nigrum Linn., 8. N. 10, 516; Speyer, Stett. Ent. Zeit. 126.
Eur.; Can.; Middle and Eastern States.
canes Gee Noct. 1, 328; Feltia ducens Walk., C. B. M. Noct. 203;
Grote, List, 9.
Can.; Middle Sa Eastern States.
innotabilis Gr., Proc. A. N. 8. Phil. 202, 1874; Can. Ent. 12, 154.
Calif.; Wash. Terr.
Treatii Gr., Can. Ent. 7, 186.
Mass. \
juncta Gr., Bull. U. S. G. Surv. 4, 171.
Nova Scotia.
haruspica Gr., Bull. B. S. N. S. 2, 214; wnimacula Morr. (non Staud-
inger); augur var. grandis Speyer, Stett. Ent. Zeit. 122.
Can.; Eastern and Middle States.
sierre Harvey, Can. Ent. 8, 37.
Sierra Nevada.
mercenaria Gr., Bull. U. 8. G. Surv. 4, 171.
Texas.
inconcinna Harvey, Bull. B. 8. N.S. 3, 9.
Texas.

156 | BULTETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [ Vol. VI.

auxiliaris Gr., Bull.B.S.N.S8.1,196. var. agrestis Gr., Bull. U. 8. Geol.
Surv. 3,118. var. introferens Gr., Proc. A. N.S. Phil. 423; Bull.
B.S. N.S. pl. 3, fig. 10.
Colorado; Texas.
perexcellens Gr., Tr. Am. Ent. Soc. 115, 1875; excellenst Gr. (n. b. ¢.).
Vancouver Island.
Wockei Moeschl., W. E. M. 130, 1862, F. 1, 2.
Labrador.
tokakensis Pack., Labr. 38, 1867.
“ Labrador.”
tumbrata Pack., Proc. B.S. N. H.11, 37
‘“¢ Labrador.”
gularis Gr., Proc. A. N. 8S. Phil. 424, 1875
Canada.
turris Gr., Can. Ent. 226, 1875.
Now.) Can.:) Mich.
tspissa Guen., Noct. 1, 261.
‘Am. Sept.”
fennica Tausch., M. Mose. 1, T. 13, 4; Guen. 1, 270.
Kodiak; Can.; Middle and Eastern States.
evanidalis Gr., Bull. U. S. Geol. Surv. 4, 172.
California.
subgothica Hav.; ss 2, 126, pl. 22, fig. 3; Agr. jaculifera Guen., 1,
262, pl. 5, fig. 4.
Can. ; Bastern and Middle States.
tricosa Lintner, 26th Ann. Rep.159. var. A, jaculifera Guen., Noct. 1, 262.
Can.; U.S., east of Rocky Mts.
herilis Gr., Bull. B.S. N. 8.1,96. ? var. B, jaculifera Guen., Noct. 1,
262.
Can.; U.S., east of Rocky Mts.
plecta Linn., F. 8. 321; Grote, Proc. E. 8. Phil. 1, 218.
Can.; Middle and Eastern States.
ftochrogaster Guen., Noct. 1, 327.
“6 Am. Sept.”
vittifrons Gr., Proc. E. 8. P. 3, 527, pl. 5, fig. 8.
Colorado.
‘Obeliscoides Guen., Noct. 1, 293; sexatilis Gr., Bull. B. S. N.S. 1, 100.
Colorado; Eastern and Middle States.
lacunosa Morr., Bull. U.S. Geol. Surv. 4, 172.

California.

insularis Gr., Bull. B. S. N.S. 3, 82.
encores

costata Gr., Bull. B. 8S. N. 8. 3, 80.
Vancouver.

idahoensis Gr., Bull. U. S. Geol. Surv. 4, 171.
Idaho; Nevada.

No. 0.) ’ G@ROTE ON NORTH AMERICAN AGROTIS. 157

formalis Gr., Bull. B. S. N.S. 2, 61.
California.
facula Gr., Bull. B. S. N.S. 3, 82.
California.
emarginata @r., Bull. B. 8S. N.S. 3, 82.
California.
exsertistigma Morr., Bull. B.S. N.S. 3, 79, pl. 4, fig. 8.
California.
observabilis Gr., Can. Ent. 7, 144.
California.
bicollaris Gr., Bull. U. S. Geol. Surv. 4, 173.
California.
letula Gr., Bull. B. 8. N.S. 3, 83.
California.
cupidissima Gr., Can. Ent. 7, 101.
California.
cupida Gr., Proc. Ent. Soc. Phil. 3, 525, pl. 5, fig. 7. var. brunneipennis:
Gr., C. HE. 7, 187.
Can.; U. S., east of Rocky Mts.
alternata Gr., Proc. E. S. Phil. 3, 236, pl. 5, fig. 8. var. preec. ?
Same localities.
minimalis Gr., N. Am. Ent. 1, 45.
Colorado.
placida Gr., Ann. N. Y. L. N. H. 305, 1876.
N. Y.; Colorado.
orbis Gr., Bull. B. S. N.S. 3, 83.
Colorado; California.
variata Gr., Bull. B. 8. N. 8. 3, 83, pl. 4, fig. 12. var. ? varie Gr. id.
Calif.; Nevada.
discoidalis Gr., Bull. B. 8. N.S. 3, 82, pl. 4, fig. 9.
California.
brunneicollis Gr., Proc. E. S. Phil. 3, 524, pl. 5, fig. 5.
Middle and Hastern States.
clandestina Harr., Ins. Inj. Veg. 448; Grote, Trans. A. E. S. 2, 309;
Speyer, S. E. Z. 131; Mamestra unicolor Walk., O. B. M. 233, 1856.
Canada; Eastern and Middle States.
var. havile Gr. This form is paler, with the dentations of the lines
more prominent. Hy. Edw., No. 5627.
California; Nevada.
rufipectus Morr., Ann. N. Y. L. N. H. 304, 1876.
New York.
§ ANICLA Grote.
incivis Guen., Noct. 1, 274; Anicla alabame-Gr., Bull. B. 8S. N. 8S. 2,
159.
Southern States.
lubricans Guen., Noct. 1, 323.
U.S., east of Rocky Mts.

158 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VL

cenis Gr., N. Am. Ent. 1, 44.
Colorado.

simplaria Morr., Proc. B. N. H. 210, 1875.
Texas.

N. B.—This species is not yet adequately described. It isdusky gray
the primaries darker outwardly, a black streak on the cell, the small
reniform black-ringed, a black submedian streak, a black dotted line
before the fringe. Thorax concolorous, unlined. Hind wings whitish.
nigrovittata Gr., Bull. B. S. N.S. 3, 77.

Texas.
tdigna Morr., Proc. B. 8. N. 8. 115, 1875.

‘ Texas.”
bostoniensis Gr., Proc. A. N.S. P. 203, 1874.

Eastern and Middle States.
scandens Riley, Ent. Rep. 76.

Ohiog NY.

N. B.—This species varies in the fore- wings-and thorax becoming
flushed with reddish.
murenula G. & R., Tr. Am. Ent. Soe. 1, 352.

Middle and Eastern States.
dolis Gr., N. A. Ent. 1, 91.

Colorado.
catenula Gr., N. A. Ent. 1, 44.

Colorado.
choris Harvey, Can. Ent. 8, 37.

Nevada.
atrifera Gr., Bull. U.S. G. 8. 4, 173.

California.
vernilis Gr., Can. Ent. 11, 57.

Nevada.
imperita Hiibn., Zutr. 447; comparata Moesch., W. E. M. 6, 131, pl. 1,

fig. 5; saxigena Morr.

Mount Washington; Labrador.
perquiritata Morr., P. B. S. N. H. 136 (Polia!), 1874; Baileyana Gr., N.

Am. Ent. 1, 92. An spec. seq.?

White Mts.; Northern New York.

t speciosa Hiibn., 491; Moesch., W. E. M. 8, 196.

Labrador.
euroides Gr., Pr. A. N. 8. P. 202, 1874; Agr. perpura Morr.

California.

Milleri Gr., Bull. B. S. N.S. 3, 78, pl. 4, fig. 4.

Sierra Nevada.
vocalis Gr., Can. Ent. 11, 56.

Nevada; Colorado.

Hollemani Gr., Can. Ent. 6, 153.

California.

Rb. 6: GROTE ON NORTH AMERICAN AGROTIS. 159

silens Gr., Can. Ent. 7, 167.

Nevada.

albalis Gr., Bull. U. S. Geol. Surv. 4, 175.
Nevada.

cloanthoides Gr., n. 8.
Colorado.

infimatis Gr., N. Am. Ent. 1, 93.
California.

lagena Gr., Can. Ent. 7, 26.
Nevada.

biclavis Gr., Bull. U. 8. Geol. Surv. 5, 206.
Arizona.

pluralis Gr., Bull. U. S. Geol. Surv. 6, 144.
Nevada.

pleuritica Gr., Check List, 47.
Canada.

pitychrous Gr., Bull. B.S. N.S.1, 82; Agr. personata Morr., P.B.S.N. H.

238, 1876.

Middle and Eastern States.
niveivenosa Gr., Bull. U. 8. G.S. 5, 206.
Colorado.
olivalis Gr., N. Am. Ent. 1, 43.
Colorado.
4-dentata G. & #., Proc. E. 8. P. 4, 491, pl. 3, figs. 2, 3.
Colorado.
cicatricosa G. & R., Proc. E.S. P. 4, 492, pl. 3, fig. 4.
Colorado.
recula Harvey, Can. Ent. 8, 37.
Oregon.
Ridingsiana Gr., Bull. B. 8. N.S. 2, 305.
Colorado.
Lewisii Gr., Bull. B.S. N.S. 1, 137, pl. 4, fig. 10.
Colorado.
tessellata Harr., Ins. Inj. Veg. 445. var. atropurpurea, Gr., B.U.8.G. 8.
3, 118.
Middle and Eastern States; Colorado.
versipellis Gr., Can. Ent. 7, 172, pl. 1, fig. 9.
Can.; Middle and Eastern States; Calif.
campestris Gr., Can. Ent. 7, 118, pl. 1, fig. 6. var. decolor Morr., Bull.
B.S. NLS: 3, 202.
Can.; Middle and Eastern States.
albipennis Gr., Bull. B. 8. N. 8. 3, 80.
Calif. ; Middle States.
2 var. nigripennis Gr. This form differs by the blackish secondaries,
I only know females from N, Y.

160 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [ Vol. VI..

redimicula Morr., P. A. N.S. Phil. 57.
Colorado; Eastern and Middle States.
N. B.—Varies by the thorax becoming brown and the primaries suf-
fused with dark brown.
verticalis Gr., Bull. B. E. S. 3, 29.
Colorado.
strigilis Gr., Bull. B. S. N.S. 3, 81.
Vancouver.
apposita Gr., Bull. U. S. G. 8S. 41, 170.
Vancouver; Wash. T.
geniculata G. & #., Tr. Am. E. Soc. 1, 349, pl. 7, fig. 54.
Eastern and Middle States.
collaris G. G f., Tr. Am. HE. S. 1, 348, pl. 7, fig. 53.
Eastern and Middle States.
badinodis Gr., Can. Ent. 6, 13.
Texas; Middle and Eastern States.
Bollii Gr. ; Agrotis hilarist Gr. (n. b. 1.), Can. HE. 12, 153.
Texas.
N. B.—There is already a European species hilaris.

thero Morr., Proc. B. 8. N. H. 238, 1876.

“Mass.”

N. B.—This species must differ from Bollii, for the fore tibiz are said.
to be unarmed, whereas in Bollit they are spinose; the color also differs. ©
and the lines are said to be “simple” and “dark brown”; the discal spots.
on secondaries and beneath are said to be present in hero, whereas in.
Bollit they are absent.
atrifrons Gr., Bull. B. 8. N.S. 1, 97

Colorado.
piscipellis Gr., Can. Ent. 10, 233.
Colorado. }
citricolor Gr., Can. Ent. 12, 154.
Colorado.

N. B.—Some specimens have the fore wings more marked than my
type and shaded with reddish. This species must not be confounded
with Copablepharon absidum Harvey (redescribed by Mr. Strecker as.
dophron grandis), which has also spinose tibize and is without mark-
ings, of a deeper yellow, varying by having longitudinal grayish fuscous.
shadings on the fore wings, and is, I believe, generically distinct from.
Agrotis. i : ;
perpolita Morr., Proc. B. S. N. H. 237, 1876.

Middle and Eastern States.
velleripennis Gr., 6th Ann. P. Rep. 29.

N. Y.; Mass.; Calif.
tfauna Morr., Proc. B. S. N. H. 237, 1876.

‘Lower California.”

No. 6.] GROTE ON NORTH AMERICAN AGROTIS. 161

balanitis Gr., Bull. B. 8. N.S. 1, 97.
Colorado.
messoria Harr., Ins. Inj. V. 444; repentis G. & R.; Cochranii Riley.
Can.; Atlantic States to Calif.
friabilis Gr., Can. Ent. 7, 187, pl. 1, fig. 5.
Can; N.Y.
tinfracta Aorr., Proc. B. S. N. H. 115, 1875.
“Colorado; Texas.”
fuscigera Gr., Can. Ent. 6, 155.

California.

brunneigera Gr., Bull. B. 8. N. 8. 3, 80.
California.

rubefactalis Gr., n. s.
Washington Terr.

satis Harvey, Can. H. 8, 36.
California.

micronyx Gr., Bull. U. S. G. Surv. 10, 171.
California.

plagigera Morr., Proc. A. N.S. Phil. 57, 1875.
Colorado; Western States.

fumalis Gr., Bull. B. 8. N. 8. 1, 98.
New York; Eastern States.

comosa Morr., Proc. B. 8S. N. H. 238, 1876.
Colorado.

Rileyana Morr., Proc. A. N. 8. P. 58, 1875.
Iil.; Miss.; Calif.

feniseca Harvey, Check List, 25.

California.

littoralis Pack., Proc. B.S. N. H. 11, 36.
Labrador. .

intrita Morr., Can. Ent. 7, 68.
Vancouver.

carrissimna Harvey, Check List, 25.
California.

eriensis Gr., Bull. U. S. G. S. 4, 172.
New York.

rava H.-8., 544; Moesch. W. EH. M. 4, 367.
eedor

fusca Boisd., Sc. 48,4; g septentrionalis Moesch., W. E. M. 133, 1862.
don.
toblata Morr., Proc. B. N. H. 116, 1875.
“Anticosti.”
- islandica Staud., S. E. Z. 232, 1857 ; opipara Morr.
Mt. Washington; Labr.; Iceland.
dissona Moesch., W. E. M. 4, 365, Taf. 9, fig. 4.
Labrador.
11GB

162 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Voi.VI.

Worthingtoni Gr., N. Am. Ent. 1, 91.
Indiana.
sublatis Gr., N. Am. Ent. 1, 91.
Colorado.
munis Gr., N. Am. Ent. 1, 38.
Colorado.
violaris G. d &., Tr. A. E. 8. 1, 353, pl., 7, fig. 59.
Middle States.
+ Staudingeri Moesch., W. HE. M. 132, Taf. 1, fig. 4.

Labrador.
+ Westermanni Staud., Stett. Ent. Z. 303, 1857.
Greenland. |
+Drewseni Staud., S. E. Z. 302, 1857.
Greenland.
t olivia Morr., Proc. B. 8. N. H. 238, 1876.
Utah.
Wilsonii Gr., Bull. B. S. N.S. 1, 35.
California.
equalis Harvey, Can. Ent. 8, 36. var. prec. ?
California.
specialis Gr., Bull. B. S. N.S. 2, 62.
California.
basalis Gr., N. Am. Ent. 1, 38.
Colorado.

mimallonis Gr., Bull. B.S. N.S. 1, 98; rujfipennis Gr., Can. Ent. 7, 83.

Middle States ; Colorado; Nev.
gagates Gr., Can. Ent. 7, 68.

Colorado.

N. B.—The male of this species has the hind wings white. It is
distinguished from mimallonis by the dark-brown color, by the orbicular
spot being annulated with pale, and by the pale subterminal line. I
have the typical mimallonis also from Colorado, and there can be no
doubt that gagates is distinct, though at first I overlooked their near
resemblance.

Catherina Gr., Can. Ent. 117, 1874, 2 (not 3); C. H. 1875, pl. 1, fig. 73
$ manifestolabes Morr.
- Can.; Eastern States.
tmanifesta Morr., P: B.S. N. H. 116, 1876.

New York.

thortulana Morr., P. Ac. N.S. P. 430.
California.

ttristicula Morr., P. A. N.S. Phil. 429. .
‘¢ Maine.” i

Fernaldi Morr., P. A. N. 8. Phil. 429.
Maine.

Ho. 6.] GROTE ON NORTH AMERICAN AGROTIS. 163

forthogonia Morr., P. B. 8. N. H. 239, 1876.

Nebraska.
brocha Morr, P. A. N.S. Phil. 56, 1875.

Colorado; Neb.; Nev.

Morrisoniana Riley.

Missouri.
gladiaria Morr., P. S. N.S. P. 59, 1875.

Texas; Kansas.

N. B.—My specimens are of a smaller species than Morrisoniana, of
which latter Professor Riley has sent me types; the hind wings are paler;
otherwise the species are very similar. There is some doubt whether
this identification is correct, but I believe I saw this species among Mr.
Norman’s collections in Canada. I cannot understand why Mr. Mor-
rison has not compared the two.

tacclivis Morr., Ann. N. Y. L. N. H. 93, 1875.
“New York. ”
venerabilis Walk., C. B. M. Noct. 328, $; 2 incalliida Walk., 330.
Can.; Eastern iad Middle States.
Ben gay oreiisis Gr., Bull. B. 8. N. 8. 1, 184, pl. 4. fig. 4.
Vancouver.
stigmosa Morr.
Eastern and Middle States.
N. B.— Allied to volubilis, but of a more grayish faded brown; the hind
wings darker.
volubilis Harvey, Bull. B.S. N.S. 2, 118.
Eastern and Middle States.
gravis Gr., Bull. B. S. N.S. 2, 155.
California.
vapularis Gr., Bull. B. S. N. 8. 3, 81.
California.
gneipennis Gr., Bull. B. 8. N.S. 3, 81.
California.
opaca Harvey, Bull. B.S. N.S. 3, 72, pl. 3, fig. 1.
Texas.
rudens Harvey, Bull. B.S. N. 8. 2, 271.
tsegetum S. V., 81; Speyer, 8. EB. Z. 135.
“Mass.”
annexa Treits., 1, 154; Guen., Noct. 1, 268.
Middle, South., and Western States.
malefida Guen., Noct. 1, 267.
Southern States.
ypsilon Rott., Nat. 41, 141; suffusa S. V.; telifera Harr.
Europe; North Am.
saucia Hiibn., 378; inermis Harr. Ortonit Pack.
‘Europe;. North and South Am.

164 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL

texana Gr., P. E. S. P. 2, 273, 1863, pl. 6, fig. 2.
Texas; Colorado.
pyrophiloides Harvey, Can. H. 8, 37.
California. .
trabalis Gr., Can. Ent. 9, 198.
Middle and Eastern States.
pressa Gr., T. Am. E. 8. 90, 1874.
Western, Middle, and Eastern States.
prasina Fab., Maut. 169; Speyer, E. Z. 136.
Europe and Atlantic States; Can.
occulta Tinn., 8S. N. 4, 514.
Europe and Atlantic States ; Can.
astricta Morr., Proc. B.S. N. H. 135, 1874.
New York.
tprefixa Morr., P. B.S. N. H. 117, 1875.
“Rocky Mountains.”
§ ANYTUS Gr.

sculpta Gr., Bull. B.S. N.S. 1,114; N. Am. Ent. 1, 93.
§ AMMOCONIA Led.

sculptilis Harvey, Bull. B.S. N.S. 3, 73, pl. 3, fig. 2.
Texas.

chortalis Harvey, Bull. B. 8S. N.S. 3, 74, pl. 3, fig. 9.
Texas; Arizona; Colorado.

aratrix Harvey, Bull. B. 8. N.S, 3, 74, pl. 3, fig. 8.
Texas; Arizona; Colorado.

parentalis Gr., Am. Ent. 1, 44.
Colorado.

decipiens Gr., Am. Ent. 1, 45.
Colorado.

§ PACHNOBIA Guen.

alaske Gr., Bull. B. 8. N.S. 3, 38, pl. 4, fig. 1.
Alaska.
carnea Thunb., M. N. 72, fig. 1; Moeschl. W. EH. M. 4, 163; Agrotis
scopulana Morr.
Mt. Washington; Labr.; Lapland.
Orilliana Gr., Can. Ent. 7, 154; Agrotis claviformis Morr., Proc. B.S. N.
H. 115, Oct. 1875.

§ AGROTIPHILA Gr.
montana Morr., Ann. N. Y. L. N. H. 94; Grote, id. 108, 1875.

N. B.—This form has ovate-narrowed eyes, differing in this respect
strongly from Agrotis, and approaching the Heliothid group of the
family, Anarta, etc. The ornamentation is like Agrotis, but not unlike
Anarta. I have included it here, but unless we refer all the Noctuids
with spinose tibiz to Agrotis, it cannot remain united with that genus.

Art. VEIL.—On the Nimravidz and Canidz of the
Miocene Period.

By E. D. Cope.

In following the general series of the Carnivora, we pass, as in other
orders, from the generalized to the specialized types. That we should
begin with the Procyonide and their allies is indicated by all the char-
acters to be especially considered in the case. They have five toes on
all the feet, and are plantigrade, resembling in these points all primitive
Mammalia.* They have the original number of molar teeth, seven on
each side, and of these none are distinctly developed sectorials. The
condyloid and carotid foramina are distinct, and there is a postglenoid
foramen. If, starting from this point of departure, we arrange the suc-
ceeding families of Carnivora according to their resemblances and differ-
ences in these respects, we have a tolerably consecutive series of
divisions.

Passing at present over the families Mustelide, Viverride, Cryptoproc-
tide, and others with five toes on all the feet, we reach those in which the
hind foot has lost a digit, leaving the number 5-4. These are the Pro-
telide, Canide, and Felide. Wecan take but one step further in this order;
that is to those species where the anterior foot has also lost a toe, which
constitute the family Hycenide. The toes are therefore, here, 4-4. For
the well-marked characters of the three families mentioned just before,
I refer to another page, and proceed to define briefly the division which
has been heretofore termed the Felide. In doing so I am compelled to
omit several of the characters generally employed to define that family,
since I have found them to be wanting from various extinct genera. The
only comprehensive definition which I can give is the following:

Digits 5-4; sectorial teeth well developed in both jaws; not more than
one true molar tooth in the upper nor more than two true molar teeth in the
lower jaw. Glenoid cavity grasping mandibular condyle anteriorly as
well as posteriorly.

Professor Gill, who has devoted much attention to the definition of
the families of the Mammalia,t gives the following skeletal characters

*See Homologies and Origin of Types of Molar Teeth of Mammalia Educabilia,
Journal Academy Phila. 1874, March.

t Arrangement of the Families of Mammals,-Smithson. Miscell. Coll. 230, 1872, p. 56.

165

166 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI-

in his diagnosis of the Felide, and of the three comprehensive divisions
within which he places it: ‘I. Skull with the paroccipital process ap-
plied closely to the auditory bulla; the mastoid process small or obso-
lete; external auditory meatus very short or imperfect. Div. A. Carotid
canal minute and superficial or obsolete; condyloid foramen and foramen
lacerum posticum debouching into a common fossa; glenoid foramen
minute ornull. Ospenisrudimentary. Subdiv.1. Otic bulla divided by a
septum into posterior and anterior chambers, communicating by a narrow
aperture (Flower). Subdiv. a. Skull with no alisphenoid canal.” All
of the parts above mentioned I have found to be important in the defi-
nition of the natural divisions of the Carnivora, excepting those derived
from the paroccipital and mastoid processes. But their condition in the
extinct Carnivora which have been hitherto arranged with the Felide,
and which resemble them very much in superficial characters, does not
coincide with Professor Gill’s definition. Thus, in the various American
genera which are allied to Drepanodon, the carotid canal is distinct from
the foramen lacerum posterius, and the condyloid foramen is also sepa-
rated from it by quite a space. These are characters which belong to:
most of the Carnivora with five digits on all the feet. Further, the
postglenoid and postparietal foramina are present; also characters of
the lowest Carnivora, as the bears and certain extinct dogs. Then,
there is an alisphenoid canal, which is also found in bears, dogs, and
the cat-like Cryptoprocta. I cannot demonstrate that the otic bulla is.
divided, as the above diagnosis requires, in any of the fossil species. I
have verified these characters on species of the following genera, of
which I have well-preserved skulls: Archelurus, Nimravus, Dinictis,
Pogonodon (except those of the basal axis of the skull), and Hoplophoneus.
Three genera as yet only found in Europe are similar in general char-
acters, and probably agree with them. I allude to Proclurus Filh.,
Mlurogale Filh., and Husmilus Gerv. On the other hand, the genus
Smilodon, which includes the American saber-tooths of Pliocene age,
agrees with the true cats in the points in question; 7. ¢., the alisphenoid,
postglenoid, and postparietal foramina are wanting, the carotid foramen is.
either internal or wanting, and the condylar enters the jugular foramen at
itsmouth. This surprising condition of affairs makes itimportant to learn
the characters to be found in the species of the longest-known genus,
Drepanodon, of the European beds. But although there are several
good crania in European museums, I can find no description of their
minute characters, and no mention made of their foramina. The proba-
bilities are, on various grounds, that this genus agrees with Smilodon in
the latter characters. The reasons in favor of this supposition are the
agreement in special dental characters, and the Pliocene age of the typ1-
cal species, D. cultridens. Whether the middle Miocene species of San-
san and Epplesheim agree with this one in structure, is of course un-
certain.

Seven, and perhaps eight, genera, then, constitute a group to be dis-

4
No.7.) NIMRAVIDZ AND CANIDZ OF THE MIOCENE PERIOD. 167

tinguished from the true Felide, and, as it appears to me, as a distinct

family. Should we ignore the characters adduced in this instance, we

abandon at the same time the definitions of several of the other families
of the order, and in fact throw the system into confusion. I have pro-
posed to call this family the Nimravide, and have contrasted it with the

Felide in the following definition. Both are included in the division

already defined on a preceding page.

No distinct carotid foramen nor alisphenoid canal; condylar foramen
entering the foramen lacerum posterius. No postparietal and gen-
ErAliganOepOStslenOid LOLAMIIMA «ccc dapensralotX erecapan)2hoo'<c~ abr rminrengnie yn Felide.

Carotid and condylar foramina entirely distinct from the foramen
lacerum posturius; an alisphenoid canal, and postglenoid and post-
Sprerieves UALR TOR AMUIT A epg po gesny al that pehctahchaxciual ts icc eielapeiardige'a 3): Nimravide.

NIMRAVIDA.

The dental characters of the Nimravide are in general, those of the
Felide, the higher genera having the same dental formula. Descending
the scale, the number of molar teeth increases at both ends of the series
in the lower jaw, and anteriorly only in the upper, but the number of
the true molars never exceeds 4. The following table gives the defini-
tions of the genera. Iam unfortunately ignorant of the characters of the
foramina in Proewlurus and Pseudcelurus, as well as in Aflurogale and
Eusmilus.

I. Lateral and anterior faces of mandible continuous; no inferior flange.
a. Inferior sectorial with a heel; canines smooth.
Molars $ 4; inferior sectorial with interior tubercle -..........,...-. Proelurus.
Molars $+; inferior sectorial without interior tubercle.-.--.. pees Pseudelurus.
II. Lateral and anterior faces of mandible separated by a vertical angle; no inferior
flange ; incisors obspatulate.
a. No anterior basal lobe of superior sectorial; inferior sectorial with a heel
(and no internal tubercle); incisors truncate.

Molarst 1+ -scanine smoophesiaica4-cb isk sobl seb eskeeidewnds Jose ce Archelurus.
NMEGIAES 5 Fe, BC AMINS CenbiGmlate jc sacie he an ows wel eel See otraa news Alurogale.
Molars 3-4: canine denticulate.... .....--c02 ccseccieccat,coee ance cece Nimravus.

III. Lateral and anterior faces of mandible separated by a vertical angle; an inferior
flange; incisors conic; canines denticulate.*
a. No anterior basal lobe of superior sectorial; + inferior sectorial with a heel; no
posterior lobes of the crowns of the premolars.

OVE ES) BRS! SSE A Sea oe oe ees DEE meh ete) SeenON OE EME Oe) D5 (1 Y61 kB
MO Ems a hae eee reise eam aiGw cepacia ener n ey ciraeloi@ ese einicls stew a wSclenie Pogonodon.
inh aST GAS He Tes acco is ea AMIS tel Dea i Hoplophoneus.
ALIGN SOS 8 SR ee AS ae Lg a A a a Eusmilus.

It is readily perceived that the genera above enumerated form an
unusually simple series, representing stages in the following modifica-
tions of parts: (1) In the reduced number of molar teeth; (2) in the

* Gervais’s figures of the canines of Eusmilus bidentatus represent no denticulations,
but the figure is not clear.
t Rudimental in Hoplophoneus.

168 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

enlarged size of the superior canine teeth; (3) in the diminished size of
the inferior canine teeth; (4) in the conic form of the crowns of the in-
cisors; (5) in the addition of a cutting lobe to the anterior base of thé
superior sectorial tooth; (6) in the obliteration of the inner tubercle of
the lower sectorial, and (7) in the extinction of the heel of the same;
(8) in the development of an inferior flange and latero-anterior angle of
the front of the ramus of the lower jaw; (9) in the development of cut-
ting lobes on the posterior borders of the larger premolar teeth.

(1) The reduction in the number of molar teeth. The dental formula
of Proclurusis that ofsome Viverride and Canide, and the reduction from
this point to the end of the series is obvious. In Husmilus, as in Smilodon,
the number of molars is less by one in the inferior series than in Lynx
and Neofelis, where the formula is the smallest known among Felide
proper, viz: $4. (2) Theenlarged size of the superior canine teeth. In
Proclurus and Pseudelurus the canines of both jaws are developed,
as in recent Felide. In Archelurus the superior is the larger, but
does not, relatively to the molars, exceed that of Felis. It is rather
compressed in form and has a sharp cutting edge posteriorly. In
Nimravus the superior canine begins to have the enlarged size of the
saber-tooths, but. its form is peculiar in the V. gomphodus, being spike-
shaped rather than saber-shaped. We find the true saber shape first in
Dinictis, where it is compressed, and with a denticulate cutting edge on
both front and rear. In Pogonodon it has reached a very large size, and
it does not display much increase in this respect until we reach the ~
last genus of the series, Husmilus, where its proportions are enormous,
almost as large as in the feline genus Smilodon, where they appear to
have been an inconvenience to the animal. (3) The diminished size of
the inferior canines becomes evident in the lower genera of the third
division (supra) of the Vimravide, but is most decided in the highest
genera, Hoplophoneus and Husmilus. (4) The incisor teeth have the usual
obspatulate or obovate outline in the genera of the first and second di-
visions of the family, including Nimravus. They are conic in the true
saber-tooths with flared lower jaw, beginning with Dinictis and ending
with Husmilus. (5, 6, and 7) The structure of the sectorials. The pres-
ence of a heel and an inner tubercle of the lower sectorial are well-known
characters of a majority of the Carnivora. In only the most highly or-
ganized genera are they wanting, and among them are included all those
of the Felide that still exist. In the Nimravide the inferior genera
have both in a reduced degree, and they soon disappear as we ascend
the scale. Thus, the inner tubercle is only present in the species of
Proclurus, Dinictis, and Hoplophoneus. The heel, on the other hand, re-
mains throughout the entire family. The anterior basal lobe of the
superior sectorial has the same history, its absence being characteristic
of the inferior Carnivora, and of all the genera of Nimravide except
Hoplophoneus, where it is rudimental. It is well developed in Drepano-
don as in recent Felide, and is sometimes double in Smilodon. (8) The

No.7.) NIMRAVIDA AND CANIDZ OF THE MIOCENE PERIOD. 169

development of the inferior flange and latero-anterior angle of the man-
dibular ramus. There is a successive advance in the development of
these characters, beginning with the second group, for in the first they
are wanting. The latero-anterior angle is developed in Archelurus and.
allied genera, and is merely continued: on the inferior border of the
ramus. In the third group itis much more acute, and is deflected down-
wards, forming the well-known flange of the saber-tooths. It is longest
in the Husmilus bidentatus Filh. (9) The highest genera of Nimravide,
e. g. Hoplophoneus, differ from the true Felide in the absence of the cut-
ting lobes on the posterior edges of the crowns of the larger premolar
teeth. But, according to Filhol, these lobes are present in the generalized
genera Procelurus and Pseudelurus, which are thus brought into a re-
lation with the Felide not possessed by other Nimravide.

A characteristic perfection of the Felidew is seen in the genus Smilo-
don ; that is, the vertical direction of the ungual phalanges, by which the
claws become retractile. This is well displayed by the two splendid
specimens of Smilodon necator from Buenos Ayres, which have been
preserved.* Unfortunately, these phalanges have not yet been de.
scribed in any species of the Nimravide, and it is not yet certain what
their structure really was. Among the true Felide the genus Cynelurus
displays a less degree of development in this respect than the other
genera, the ungual phalanges lacking the proximal process below the
articular facet. Such a condition is to be looked for among the less per-
fect genera of Nimravide.

The succesion of genera above pointed out coincides with the order
of geologic time very nearly. Those belonging to groups first and sec-
ond belong to the Lower and Middle Miocene, except 4lurogale, which
is perhaps Upper Eocene, and Pseudelurus, which is Middle Miocene.
The genera of the first group of division third have the same Lower
Miocene age, except Husmilus, which has been found in the same forma-
tation (Phosphorites) as the dilurogale. Drepanodon is Upper Miocene,
and Smilodon is Pliocene.

The relations of these genera are very close, as they differ in many
cases by the addition or subtraction of a single tooth from each dental
series. These characters are not even always constant in the same
species, so that the evidence of descent, so far as the genera are con-
cerned, is conclusive. No fuller genealogical series exists than that
which I have discovered among the extinct cats.

As to the phylogeny of this family, there are flesh-eaters of the Eocene
period which may well have been the ancestors of both the Nimravide
and Felide.t I have suggested that this position is most appropriately
held by the Oxycenide, a family of several genera, which included the most
formidable, rapacious mammals of that early period in both continents.

*See American Naturalist, December, 1880, fig. 12.
tSee On the Genera of the Creodonta, by E. D. Cope, Proceed. Amer. Philos. Soc.
July, 1880. ;

170 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [ Vol. VI.

The interval between them and the Nimravide is, however, great, for in
- the Oxyenide, when there is a superior sectorial tooth, the first true molar
in the upper jaw is utilized instead of the last premolar, and the second
true molar below is a sectorial as well as the first. Several intervening
forms must yet be found to complete the connection, if it have ever ex-
isted. It is, however, very likely that the true Felidw were derived
from the genus Proclurus, through Pseudclurus, if indeed these two
genera be not the primitive members of that family, for, as above re-
marked, the evidence of their possession of the characters of the Nim-
ravide has not yet been obtained. There can be no reasonable doubt
that the genera Drepanodon and Smilodon in the Felide are the descend-
ants of Hoplophoneus and allied genera. In fact, the Nimravide and
Felide are “ homologous groups”, having corresponding terms in the
manner I foreshadowed as a general principle in 1868 (Origin of Genera).

In looking for causes in explanation of the modifications of structure
cited, one can easily discover that there is a close relation between the
arrangement of the teeth and the mechanical laws involved in the per-
formance of their function, that of seizing an active prey and of cut-
ting up their carcasses into pieces suitable for swallowing. Itis obvious
that in the latter case the flesh-teeth bear the resistance and the masseter
muscle is the power, and that the nearer these parts are together the
better is the function performed. As a matter of fact, the sectorial teeth
in modern Carnivora are placed exactly at the angle of the mouth, which
is nearly the front border of the masseter muscle.

Both the muscle and the teeth have, however, moved forwards in con-
nection with the shortening of the jaw behind. This has been due to
the necessity of bringing the power (masseter) nearer to another point
of resistance, viz, the canine teeth. In the early carnivores (as
Hyenodontide) the long jaws supported more numerous teeth C=
than in any modern families, and the fissure of the mouth was probably
very wide. The canine teeth were evidently very ineffective weapons.
The animals probably only snapped with their jaws, and did not attempt
to lacerate or hold on, as do the cats. The dogs of to-day are long-jawed,
and they snap in a manner quite distinct from anything seen among
the cats. The only dogs that hold on are the short-jawed bulldogs.

So in the use of the canines, we have the ground of the shortening
of the jaw behind and before, and the consequent change of structure,
which resulted in the modern perfected Felide.

No.7.1 NIMRAVIDA AND CANIDA OF THE MIOCENE PERIOD. 171

The following list shows the number and distribution of the species
of the Nimravide. The position of a cross on a line indicates an inter-
mediate geological position.

pelo Lower Miocene.| Upper Miocene. Pliocene.
; 5

© >) S Co) s g §

5 5 5 5 a EN bekei=

5 A g = A ae A

| cal ica <q 4 4
Proslurus}julieni Milhs=-2es.cceeessecessee|ossece.
Prowxlurus lemanensis Filh........-..-.---.|...-----
Pseudelurus hyenoides Blv
Pseudielurus edwardsi Filh- --..- Beis
Pseudelurus intrepidus Leidy..............|--------|--------|--------|-------- | RRs erscscm-
Pseudelurus sivalensis Lydd..-.....--..--.|--------|--.----- enecoepalleaeabecol|oodsere Soe ae a oeaeeoee
Archelurus debilis Cope. ..-.--..-----------]--------|-------- ary | |lececracel|secocaee Saseeaed naocck— Pi
Aflurogale intermedia Filh ................-- ap) |labesedoaloesoadsal|sesaeemellesoacase | lssecoeee| paced a-
PANO SA OPAC HbAL AAW yore q tale e aloet ome motets lee ele ee | =olemin te all ecletel«melleaketalet2| saeco clos cone ce |yemonmne
Nimravus gomphodus Cope. .-..-...--.---.-|--------|------0, Gp |[espodzealaneaeces|jocoanssal|siscae oc
Nimravus confertus Cope..-------------.---|-----+--|-------- ster | Epmneerctetail Aa a te iaiae liateiet wists ine | Maree
Dinictis felina Leidy Ge) Wecededes| osuacds|isscqaee lace usa £
Dinictis cyclops Cope socelfes Gp) |eesoteselle-cacbedl|eodoaacd seccscae
Dinictis squalidens Cope.-.-.-..--...----+--|-----+--|-----ee- BR log God Hon Mocw Bed SenennEs ice mcrec
Pogonodon platycopis Cope .....-...---.--.|--------|-------- Spo edscrnccl socccc cal Mosose a4 aSeoseae
Pogonodon brachyops Cope ..-.---- Bete ieials Jecteererets cere stters ae llapecicood| Wenaunee Seeeneed| |ssoesee
Hoplophoneus oreodontis Cope ...-..------.|.-------|-------- SEW alles mndon|seaeesee ssc coedl Sued eoe ES
Hoplophoneus primevus Leidy.-...-----.---|--------|----.--- Oe iceocooce becueeds GAenoe tcl Gosorece
Hoplophoneus occidentalis Leidy....-...-..|----.---|--....-- Abel Wl Spaedono| Sboticass||boceeere loooscoae
Hoplophoneus cerebralis Cope. ...-....-----|.-------|--.--06- A Rb aoc Osha sceeioa Hal emer ciae Sear
Eusmilus bidentatus Filh .-....-.........-. ce leeoodoorllsacdasca|lacomacelladacacsdleaoceood Sasceeoe

DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES.

NIMRAVUS GOMPHODUS sp. nov.
Nimravus brachyops Cope, Proceed. Academy Philad. 1879, p. 170, not Macherodus
brachyops Cope, Proc. Am. Phil. Soc. 1878, p. 72.
This carnivore is represented by parts of three individuals; one of
them by a nearly complete skull. The species is rather larger than the
average Uncia concolor.

Measurements of skull.

M.
Axial length from occipital condyles to premaxillary border..............---- . 206.
Axial length from inion to premaxillary border..............----------------- . 220°
Axial length from premaxillary border to canine tooth.........--...-....----- . 017

Axial length from premaxillary border to anterior border of superior sectorial.. . 066
Axial length from premaxillary border to posterior extremity of maxillary bone. . 097

Axial length from premaxillary border to postglenoid process. ....-....-- Seeco oles
Peneph bi nacaljbone irom masal motel: 4-520 508 sss 22 sek) Jews Useelbe oe . 065-
onehhion Sreltialerest from Anion <2 52s i epbeemeancokiel acne ec veep cect . 082
SL OfepremaxUlary ONC: (OTEALCSE) wc monte cacdwsas adoeeejcnecce, Jade pauecac . 019
MUMNOL CACHsHANAL NOHO Ab HUOGIG << kt oe deiclccs wcicasa:spac cesses scacosuncens . 008:
Width of each frontal bone at middle of orbit.... 1.2.2. 1.222. wenn wen ween ones . 028
Width of each frontal bone at postfrontal angles..............-.-.----------- . 035
Width of skull at anterior part of zygoma...........--. ..---------- eee ee eee . 098:
Widthiof gysomata at temporal fossa 126 <n, aoccen-cccen cd eaes vacelse sce becweee lL
SRR OtesiclL ah THOALN, AMCULOTIIS: «625 cu voces Yaccinets cote eweceednsashun . O74
Width of skull between apices of paroccipital processes...-..---.-..--------- . 054
TOR DTDRC TAG Scher eynar tii cen i208 eR ER . 044

Width of foramen magnum............-.-. Naso asUteudalsceueaueeek eee kee . 024

172 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI

M.

ilovation\ of, occiput abovestoramencr nen nee eee sas ene =o celee eee eee eee . 036
Wiaidthrofichin at. base soo Seisonsmeceicicieeeereeinie sis aaeiecie eee eee aie eee . 022
NWrdthof chin ‘at summit: (52 een sseemee cence me esac sae) se cee eee eee eee . 028
Depth: of Chins. -sss leet oe seme eee ee Se eS oa See ee eee re AEC)
Wepthofsramusiatidiastemamseeee see acess ee eee ceseee sla ccc ues eee Cane . 027
Depth of ramusibelow “lastpremolareesessecees. ooo oos ce eackco eee en ceeee eee . 031
Meng th ofiramus.-osee- o-Ps ee He Seek eae ccc ee ee cone ccee Soeeceee eee . 157
Blevationiof condyles stact pact co sede ate dice skoeeisSeceew eur scree eee ee eee
Elevationvof Coronoid Process® .s2n.. oo oe +e eens feces eioe onan e eee eee eee al
length: of isuperioricamines soc 5. o.2s snece wee cles weee sc aoe (eee . 045
Diameters of base of superior canine { pie abesinineemt: eieyenree == >> iar

LADS VOLO «crs =/<i's eee ete ee eee . 008
Anteroposterior diameterat middlessccessesseceiasone cee cecee ese eee eee . 010
Distance tromicanines to bhird premolaresss esses ss eee eee ee eee eee eee . 016
Length of molars, including’ third premolar... - -----s<:<2- ese. seen cep eeeeene . 045
dieneth-of base of third-premolar,. 2-552 lect tases sce see. Se ee ee
Blevation ot cusp of third premolar. lc. seas centers eae coe ee Se eee eee lis
eno thiot base ‘of ‘sectorial 2.202 o io cee so ece pcos eens - nee ee . 025
inlevation-of cusp of sectorialiec. osteee seems eee nee eee ce See ee . 015
Wiadthvot tubercular... jc. sasub S202 Sa. Sen adeeo-n ces cee ee ee
milevationof inferior canine. ss cesses enc ke eco ce Se ee eee eee Cee ee eee . 024
Antero-posterior diameter of inferior canine at base..--.---...---..--..-----.. .012
HenNe th OF WNerlor diastOMae. seen -eeeee ceieaieeieeie ee ise eee eee eer eee . 022
Menoth of inferior molar Series... 225 4-\.-ceec cu ce cece esc cee eee eee eee . 063
mengthiof third premolarss. 2222 oo. Sec sic ce see ce -cte oo elec's sack ee ee eee . 0175
Mlevation of third premolars... - cossccc ane < eoocee «dec ce sce aces seat eee eee . 0175
Hength of fourth premolar: o<\- 2-5 sacevdmevicetccselsciceeasSec ceases see eee
Elevation of fourth premolar...--...............-- De ocvaease ect Sea eee . 015
MES VOPSCCLOTIAL tes os nee nce R eo cene hee oe aco hee eee te cee eee . 025
iMlevaiion or median) cusplot sechoniale-sno sere sieecenese ce sence eee eee . 016

The characters of this species will be fully detailed in my final report
to Dr. Hayden, now passing through the press.
From the John Day River, Oregon.

NIMRAVUS CONFERTUS sp. nov.

This species is as yet represented by a mandibular ramus only. It is
one-third smaller than that of V. gomphodus.

The inferior border of the ramus is broken off, excepting for a space
below the diastema. The general form is narrow, as in NV. gomphodus, and
there is a projecting ledge along the inner base of the sectorial similar
to that seen in the latter species. The angle separating the side from
the front of the ramus is rather stronger than in NV. gomphodus, but there
is no indication of an inferior flare. The diastemais shorter than in the.
typical species, its length equalling that of the base of the third (first) —
premolar; in NV. gomphodus it is half as long again. The symphysis is
correspondingly shorter, ceasing a little in advance of, and at the pos-
terior border of, the inferior canine tooth, while in NV. gomphodus it con-
tinues for one diameter of the canine behind its posterior border.

The crown of the inferior canine tooth is directed backwards, and its

No.7.) NIMRAVIDZ AND CANIDZ OF THE MIOCENE PERIOD. 173

serrate cutting edge is presented almost entirely inwards. The interno-
anterior face of the crown is flat, and has a low shoulder at the base. The
molars have the proportions of those of NV. gomphodus, differing only in
their smaller size, which is very apparent, as can be seen by the measure-
ments. The first (third) premolar is a little longer on the base than high,
has no anterior tubercle, and has a short cutting basal heel. The fourth
premolar has subequal anterior and posterior basal cutting lobes, and the
base is longer than the elevation of the median cusp. Thesectorial tooth
has a short cutting heel, but no trace of inner tubercle. The anterior lobe
is as long as the median, but not so high. It overlaps the fourth premo-
lar as far as the base of the median cusp. No incisor teeth are pre-
served in the specimen. Tubercular small.

Measurements of skull.

M.
PGHUMEOMEAMUS ab CIASCOM A: <2 <ye diac ciseeisiae<oinisieiniotwls.cinicciec sisiewlcicicejeebinweeciace - 020
HS Pt NOdy CHIN ats actus aelaisio's aieia slots taicia Sec me RSE Sa Se ee eae een See Rees . 027
Be MONEO MIN LeETION CANING 556.52 posh a cee mmc n es wiaidn be wae biotemlsGiae a waar . 016
MeMHetcMmUHMirerorl CAMNO,Ab DAO) <ho-6 casicee ssmisclecc cs acne Vaiss cas ceicles ct . 010
Meet MOIRITCTION CLASbOUNG ose emus nec se stcstrccices steccuicccase coscek sens .014
eaiinoninterionimolar series! U3. MAISLEe Tit. ke SR. PS . 053
HermeanivOtmt hind premolar jcc spd sccjosaeuweesalddse os oleae See EAR . 014
PU oMHEO SetMITG PTC MOAT. ay (u/s 2\cetalst- conse Senet ai cowepens Saeidersakioetine oeewe . 010
ee SURE LO TED Ma TOMO AD 2 a) «ce tointe lento eens oho, Nia o ee Sire maa SOE Ooo . 016.
Seep One CM OUNLMSPLOMO! ATs qjote, ac cleteteis sails a.ajs'aia)els Wi=1a)a ciel maintais sieciarctel wresae ae 013
Me MROIMSOCUOLI Alt scoters sete ott ocr ests shes cecacota cacweces cncieescwuacac ce . 022
Blevationof median cusp’ of sectorial: 12.2.2 2.2 0c. ho ce cele cece ce cle eee eee . 015

One specimen, from the John Day Valley, Oregon, found in the Truckee
formation, by J. R. Wortman.

COLOREODON RYDERANUS Sp. Nov.

Represented by a nearly complete skull, without lower jaw. These
indicate the third and smallest species of the genus. The specimen be-
longed to an adult animal, as indicated by the condition of ube last two
molar teeth.

Besides the small size, two characters may be cited as distinguishing
this species from those already known. First, the temporal ridges con-
verge very gradually, so that the sagittal crest does not appear anterior to
the line of the otic bullz, posterior to which point the skull is broken
above. Second, the face is constricted immediately posterior to the po-
Sition of the fundus of the alveolus of the canine teeth. The position of
this alveolus is prominent, and occupies the superior half of the maxil-
lary bone, which is excavated beneath it. This excavation is bounded
behind by the infraorbital foramen. The lachrymal bone presents an
angle into the orbit. The latter is open posteriorly, but the opposing
processes approach each other. The zygomata are slender.=:The enamel
of the molars is slightly wrinkled.

a

174 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. (Vol. VI.

Measurements of skull.

M.
Total length from left side of inion to front of canine .-....--..--.........---- . 147
Hromusame:to end of maxillary DOR. ees eeeee esses eae eeeeer en eee eee . 075
Hromisame:to palatalnotehts secs seas eee eee cneec access Stee ee sense eee . 087
asensth ofdiastemea Ss55 si Scc esc kee fosee ce aeate ccioeaciac ciguetec oe aerate ae - O11
Hheneth of molar series pec 2 see ete Se aS OS ota St ee ee . 059
Wenoth of true molarsiiss.c S558 Aes adic tee Gl se wsce eens eae Goce cee eee . 035
‘ ANLETO=POSTCTIOR cise, o< seem ele ro cnieie cee ae Les
Diameters of second true molar {

TTAMSVELSC,« <<< dinje cca se oe oe se Soetiseeee .015
tELO-POSLELIOL . 0 oo scceascp cece sone cee eee . 015

Diameters of third true molar i ait? teh os
TANS VETSO. cee win Scene sncje So =e clciniseys ieee eee . 019

The linear measurements of this skull are three-fourths that of C. ferox,
and three-fifths that of C. macrocephalus.

Found by J. L. Wortman, on the John Day River, Oregon.

Dedicated to my friend John A. Ryder, of Philadelphia.

PALAZOCHGRUS PLATYOPS sp. noy.

Established on a nearly complete skull, which lacks the muzzle ante-
rior to the third premolar teeth, the lower jaw, and parts of the zygomata.
The last superior molar is not protruded, and it is probable that the
fourth deciduous premolar still remains in the jaw.

The size of this species exceeds that of any other member of the genus-
The postorbital process is also more elongate, so as to inclose the orbit
to a greater extent than is usual in Palcocherus. The temporal ridges
are strong, and rise into a convexity above the anterior part of the tem-
poral fossa. From this point they converge gradually to form the sagit-
tal crest, which has a truncate edge. Between the ridges the surface is
concave, the basin widening forwards as far as a line passing through
the posterior third of the orbits. The frontal bone rises steeply from the
orbit to the edge of this basin, and is regularly convex in front of it.
The profile descends forwards, so that the section at the infraorbital.
foramen is broadly convex, and not compressed, as in the species of
Palcocherus from the Truckee beds of Oregon. The emargination of the
palate extends as far forwards as the line of the anterior border of the
second true molar. The posterior border of the infraorbital foramen is
above the middle of the anterior root of the fourth premolar. The post-
glenoid, mastoid, and postparietal foramina are present; the last named
rather small and in the inferior part of the parietal bone.

The base of the fourth premolar is remarkably extended antero-pos-
teriorly. Its crown has a posterior basal cingulum, and is in contact
with those of the molars anterior and posterior to it. The crown of the
first true molar is narrowed inwards, the anterior border being more
oblique than the posterior. Both of these borders have a wide cingu-
lum. There are two large external cusps, with antero-posterior continu-
ous edges, two small median cusps, and a larger internal cusp. No
internal or external cingula. The second true molar is also narrowed
inwards, but less so than the first, and the posterior border is the only

=

No.7.) NIMRAVIDA AND CANIDZ OF THE MIOCENE PERIOD. 175

oblique one. There are wide posterior and anterior cingula, and five
cusps arranged as in the first molar. The internal cusp is relatively

larger in this tooth.
Measurements of skull.

M.
Length from occipital condyles to anterior border of last premolar ........-... . 186
Length from occipital condyles to palatal edge ............-.-.-.------------- . 135
Length from occipital condyles to line of anterior border of glenoid fossa... ... . 051
SCO SLIR OF MOCO CIDO WERE So ete aC seOEs CESEES \COSceCE EE BOBO ere mBerraerr sath. . 046
Width at posterior origin of zygomata ...-...-.---.-----..------------------- 071
Wwadthebetweenl orbits (leash) esol ec cts cence neon cole nonce ctcoe etme .077
Width at middles of first molar teeth..--.. .... 2-2-2. 22 - ee. cee eee eee ee ee eee . 098
Width between first: molar teeth ....---..-.--. .22-20 2-22 ene eee eee eee eee . 040
Elevation of occiput, with condyles .-....---.---------- +--+ e222 2 eee eee eee . 082
Elevation of muzzle at front of fourth premolar-........---..----.------------ . 043
Bhectors frst molar \ AMLELO-POSLE LOL see een sete Settee een see cic se ee nae ces . O21

RANSVETSOs eevee tose cee esis ieee oeterineaaicecese seas . 016
’ “AN bCLO-pOSsterlOlma. 4154552 acse~ = yess Veeltiaciesteninie . 022
Diameters second molar { Re rg bul Se Sa ee a ee 019

This species is easily distinguished from those which have been dis-
covered heretofore, by its large size, by the peculiar form of its molar
teeth, and by its flattened muzzle. The specimen above described was
- discovered by Capt. Emmett Crawford, Third Cavalry, U.S. A., on the
upper waters of the Big Cheyenne River, Dakota, in a bed of the White
River formation. It was presented to me by Dr. William H. Corbusieur,
U.S. A., to whom my especial thanks are due.

PROTOLABIS PREHENSILIS sp. nov.

This camel is supposed to have existed on the evidence of portions of
the mandibles of two individuals. These include the symphyseal por-
tion, and one of them the ramus as far posteriorly as the first true
molar, inclusive. These remains indicate a robust species of the size of
the Procamelus angustidens, or between the P. gracilis and P. robustus.

The most marked peculiarities of this species are the following: The
canine and first premolar are very robust, and the latter is one-rooted
and with an oval section at the base like the canine. The second pre-
molar is aiso one-rooted, while the third and fourth are two-rooted, and
differ very little in size from each other. The first true molar is abruptly
larger, although narrowed in front. The root of the second premolar
is round and of robust proportions, its diameter being one-half linear
that of the first. The roots of the incisors are robust, that of the first
being rather larger than that of the third. The symphysis terminates
a little behind the line of the first premolar. The mental foramen is
unusually extended in the antero-posterior direction.

Measurements of skull.

M

Pen UNOS TIN PLY Sisi (NOs) peeeEe ns cines sai So sea cinciccine 66s oonis aciccpinieeie . 080
EmPoH OL HANES Of INCISORS aNO. CAVING <2 <5 cowie cnc o oe coc cce seen acum cnneenee . 043
SNUGLO=POSUCK Ole eee eeiena no acon ees nee ea ceecceaslone eee . 016

Diameters of canine }
URNS VOINO be reer erence ste cece suemce aes PES SLE ¢ . O11

176 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VI.

M.

Diameters of premolar } antero-posterior ----------------- 2.2222 econ seen - 014

EEANS VISE enc a secs science se soln ceisa See e eee ee eee . 009
Length of last three premolars on base‘(No. 2) -..-.. .-.. ----20 o-ce cece econ eee . 034
eneth.of base of fourth premolars eanecas—s2 see <-e 2 eee neces aoe eee eee 011
enoth of base of firsh true anolar i. sete eee aetna t eee cls a a eee ae eee + .019
Henebh of first diashema(NO. 2) icp o as sess: ence ces oe coat eeee eeee 017
enoth of secondidiastpemai(NOw er eee coe. eee ot Saas ae oe ae . 026
Mepth;at second) diastemal@NOww)) sees es ae ese see eee eee ee ee . 033
Depthat) first true molar sete esse eee cee Soe eoee Seen ee . 048

The generic position of this species is uncertain. I place it provis-
ionally in Protolabis on account of the large development of the infe-
rior incisors. Its robust canine and first premolar, and small third and
fourth premolar distinguish it from any of the species described.

Found by R. H. Hazard, in the Loup Fork beds of Southern Ne-
braska.

EUMYS LOCKINGTONIANUS Sp. nov.

This rodent is represented by a nearly perfect skull, which is without:
lower jaw. Its specific characters separate it widely from the ZL. elegans:
Leidy and E. nematodon Cope. It is considerably larger than either,
and the temporal ridges are very obsolete and do not unite posterior
to the orbits, as in L. elegans, resembling in this respect the EH. nemato-
don. The parietal region is wide and flatabove. The interorbital region:
is only moderately contracted. The muzzle is rather short as compared.
with the total length of the skull. The interorbital region is gently
convex above, and the top of the muzzle is flat. The zygoma is quite
slender, and the otic bullz are large and prominent. The notch of the
palate extends as far forwards as the posterior part of the last superior:
molar. The infraorbital foramen is very large and round.

The anterior face of the superior incisor is nearly plane, and it is.
marked by a weak groove near the inner and a strong groove near the
external border. In JZ. elegans this face is convex and without grooves.
The molars are rather small for the size of the skull; their crowns are
worn by use. The third is subround in section, and its diameter is about
half that of the first; the latter has the anterior odd lobe quite small.

Measurements.
: M.

Hofallensth of seal 4 25.0- soe eee 3. cee eee oes. ee -0380°
leneth) (@xial)to front iof orbits $2. Sse ees aces one eiacle clone otside = oe eee .0140
Menethy(axial) to palatalmotehys <5 sacs. eaeeee eee see ieee eee cee .0190
Menoth (axial) to first molars ic. .iic2 ce see ce esewenee eacigaes cee es eee eee 0120
Wadthratiotic Dullsogees Soe cliente oie ais ste ae eee ee eee ee tee ae ee 0205
Wadth at middle otmyogomatats. oc 22.6 - oe. oe ee ee oe ee eee ee -0220-
Wadth ior interorbitalispacejs- cei eccee < clees cae ecrne ene e eee: cee eee -0060
Width: between firstamolars;: S205. - ose es seer Gee ces soe e ons cae nee See eee eee .0055
dieneth of molar/semes- 27 )22c. = one cence soe a a aenny noes ae eee eee ee 0070:
henobhof first mola 26. 22k scene cs weet sc emeninc ete ees eee eee 0030 »
Width, of superior imeisor 25. 324.022 22 See ania eese se Se ee ee 0015 =

This species is dedicated to my friend W. N. Lockington, the well--
known naturalist of San Francisco.

No.7.) NIMRAVIDA AND CANID® OF THE MIOCENE PERIOD. 177

SCIURUS BALLOVIANUS sp. nov.

This squirrel is the second species of its genus supposed to occur in
the Truckee beds of Oregon, and the third Sciwrus obtained thus far from
the Lower Miocene or Oligocene of the West. Thetypical specimen for-
tunately includes the cranium, with both rami of the mandible, so that
_ its reference to the genus Sciwrus rather than to Gymnoptychus is assured.
Like the latter genus, the infraorbital foramen is reduced to a slit, but,
unlike it, there is but one internal tubercle of the crowns of the superior
molars instead of two.

The skull is flat above, and the interorbital space is also flat, and is
remarkably wide. Temporal ridges none. Muzzle short and narrow.
Palate wide, its posterior notch extending as far forwards as the last
superior molar. The ascending ramus of the mandible originates oppo-
site the anterior part of the last inferior molar. The massateric fossa
extends to opposite the anterior border of the second inferior molar. The
mental foramen is near the superior border of the posterior part of the
diastema. The second and third superior molars, the only ones pre-
served, have two cross-crests and a strong anterior cingulum. The
external extremities of the cross-crests are little elevated, and there are
no other cingula. The inferior molars have basin-shaped grinding faces,
with a lobe at each angle. There is a small tubercle between the lobes
of the inner and outer pairs. The incisors of both jaws are much com-
pressed, strongly convex in front, and, in the lower jaw at least, without
sculpture.

Measurements.
M.

Mere metas KUL GOWOLDUb sash cae kisscltees wet eek see seaee. whet cane cso cnene . 0090
URS MEN WTEOMY ORDINS S55 oes eer ee coke tee « Ase wees tote chide Ssh Sad eee saseks . 0090
Nis ECS MEAT TZ) Cre Pe Rae ees ee oes ae as Ska emo! teases ac nls ete . 0047
RMOiuENGnCenMlaste Mm Olans= access ae ccekese le oe wee See os SN eae 0040
MeMciMOTs HU pellorsaentaly SCViCsss.,=2 2a. c see semiciees sacs an see e eee . 0054
Diameters of second molar } antero-posterior .---.- ------ +-2- 222-27 e222 sooo UUs

EAMSVOLSO So oS.c% eta see Sa eka eats cee ed PL ste tn . 0016
Pirchibvor cuperLorgemeisor ys: 222/42, tek ee Lest eg aes PBs SIIB . 0013
Merce aos man cub mare amuU see veya eos eae oie Ouse tae oeabetacice st . 0150
Biles ONsO fe FAMUSiAby COLONOIG:wi2a0s 4/2. a ec eo a Soe ate es oases lets . 0080
Ladli@ill OF GONG GES Sas SRA Oe eae See Sees set ane eles is saa pene eee . 0030
Mme IOrIO€ GENGAl RELICS. o62 oa a 2a2e Se ses~ cock Seieeen pec eee sees. nook . 0070
WEGiHFCananUs a BOCOrd Mola wes2 toot. se. soseie seas ewcc se oeese sete ose sa aicee . 0045

This species is much smaller than the Sciurus vortmani, from the same
horizon of Oregon. The type specimen was discovered by Mr. L. Se
Davis, of Mr. Wortman’s party. The name is given in honor of Mr.
M. H. Ballou, of Chicago, a naturalist and journalist.

CANID.4E.

Species of this family were very abundant during the Miocene period

- in North America as in Europe. Those of the Lower and Middle

Miocene epochs belong to genera allied to, but distinct from, Canis;
while those of the Upper Miocene (Loup Fork) and later horizons, per-
12GB

178 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL. SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

tain to the latter genus, with few exceptions. The characters of the
genera are as follows:

I. Molar formula 4 3.

Humerus with epitrochlear foramen - ....-....-..-.---- ssse00 nose eaee Amphicyon.
II. Molar formula¢3.

Humerus with epitrochlear foramen.

Inferior sectorial heel trenchant. -.-..-.-.---.---------.--- HASAESE Temnocyon.
Inferior sectorial heel basin-shaped < 222: 52-2. ca-cce vecwce soescse Galecynus.
Humerus without epitrochlear foramen.
Inferior sectorial heel jbasin-shaped -2-. --5. 2 --- <2 inetd on Sees eee Canis.
III. Molar formula 3 3.
Heel of inferior sectorial trenchant -.-.-..-..---..-...--------.----Hnhydrocyon.
IV. Molar formula 4 4.
Heel of inferior molar basin-shaped).-</- 4 -2.4..sso-e eecaie= scl oon ese elacee Icticyon.
V. Molar formula #4.
First inferior molar two-rooted -....--..-.--+2 ------ 2+ ---- 222 oo =o LY ENOCYON,

To these genera I refer nineteen species of the American Miocenes.

AMPHICYON Lartet.
Bulletin Société Géologique de la France, 1836, vii, 217-220; Blainville,
Comptes-Rendus, 1837, v, 434; L’Institut, 1837, v, 18-19; Blainville, Osteo-
graphie, ix, Subursus, 78-96.

Dental formula: I. 3; C.1; Pm.4; M.3. The true molars of the su-
perior series all tubercular; the last two of the inferior series also tuber-
cular. First inferior true molar a sectorial, with an internal tubercle
and a heel with a superior groove, bounded by raised borders. Hu-
merus with an epitrochlear arterial foramen.

Much is yet to be desired in the elucidation of the characters of this
genus, especially of the American forms, which are less abundant and
of smaller size than those of Europe. The typical species, Amphicyon
major Blv. was the largest, equalling a bear in size. It is derived from
the Miocene of Sansan, and a smaller form of it is found, according
to Pomel, at San Gerand-le-Puy. Other species are derived from the
latter locality, and all are typical of the. Miocene formation in Europe.
In the “‘ Mio-pliocene” of India a single species has been discovered, the
A. paleindicus of Lydekker. Three species occur in the Lower and Mid-
dle Miocene of North America, the largest of which about equals the
wolf in size. On accountof the large development of the inferior tuber-
cular teeth, I have suspected that the Canis ursinus Cope, from the
Loup Fork group of New Mexico, would prove to be an Amphicyon. If
So, it is the only representative of this genus in our Upper Miocene.

The three American species differ as follows: The <A. cuspigerus is
small, not exceeding the kit-fox in dimensions. The A. hartshornianus -
is about the size of the coyote, and has rather small tubercular molars,
especially of the lower series. The A. vetus is a little larger, but has
the tubercular molars disproportionately larger than those of the A.
hartshornianus.

No.7.) NIMRAVIDA AND CANIDAZ OF THE MIOCENE PERIOD. 179

TEMNOCYON Cope.

Paleontological Bulletin, No. 30, p. 6, December 3, 1878; Proceedings Ameri-
can Philosophical Society, 1878, p. 68.

Dental formula: I. 3; C.+; Pm.4; M.2. Two molars in each jaw
tubercular. Inferior sectorial with well-developed heel, which is keeled
with a cutting edge above. An internal tubercle of the same. A post-
glenoid, but no postparietal foramen. Humerus with an epitrochlear
arterial foramen.

The characters on which I rely at present for the discrimination of
this genus from Canis are two. The first is the presence of a cutting
edge on the superior face of the heel of the inferior sectorial, in place of
a double row of tubercles surrounding a basin. When well developed,
these characters present a broad contrast, but indications of transitional
forms are not wanting. Thus, in some extinct Canes the internal crest
of the heel is less elevated than the external, which is the homologue
of the single crest of Zemnocyon, and in some specimens of Temnocyon
corypheus there is a cingulum on the inner side of the median keel,
which represents the internal crest of Canis. Secondly, the epitrochlear
foramen of the humerus, a character common to all of our Lower
Miocene Canide yet known.

The keel of the sectorial, which defines this genus, is simply a repeti-
tion on that tooth of the heel which belongs to the posterior premolar
teeth of many Carnivora. It finds resemblances in such Eocene forms
as Mesonyx and Palwonyctis. Among recent Canide it is apparently
unknown, and is very rare in other groups. The Cynodictis crassiros-
tris Filhol, from the French Phosphorites, strongly resembles the SPECIES
of Temnocyon in generic characters.

Three species of the genus are known to me. They may be distin-
guished as follows. A fourth species, 7. josephi, is provisionally placed
with these:

I. First superior tubercular molar with a wide median fossa, bounded within by a
tubercle.
Length of superior molar series from canine, .070; of true molars, .0215.
; T. altigenis.
Length of molar series from canine, .067; of true molars, .014.
T. wallovianus sp. Novy.
II. First superior tubercular molar with narrower basin, bounded within by a Y-shaped

crest.
Length of dental series from canine, .055; of true molars, .014 ...... 7. corypheus.
Length of dental series from canine, .051; of true molars, .013; muzzle narrow,
ZY LOM A NMVIAO fe oan Saget we rah os civntann 6 5 - iemawice wae «he JOBCDNG SDs HOME

All of the above species have been derived from the Truckee Miocene
beds of Oregon. I, however, anticipate the discovery of these or other
Species of the genus in the White River beds of Dakota and Colorado.

180 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VI.

GALECYNUS Owen.
Quarterly Journal Geological Society London, 1847, iii, 54-60.—‘‘ Cynodon
Aymard, Annales Société du Puy, 1848, xii, p.244.—Cynodictis Bravard et
Pomel, Notice sur les Ossemens Fossiles de la Debruge, 1850, p. 5.—Cyo-
therium Aymard, Ann. Soc. d’Agric. du Puy, 1850, xiv, p. 115”; Bronn.

Dental formula: IL 3; C. +; Pm. 4; M. 2. Inferior sectorial with
internal tubercle, and with a heel with raised or tubercular internal
and external borders. First premolar in both jaws one-reoted. <A post-
glenoid but no postparietal foramen. Humerus with an epitrochlear
arterial foramen.

This genus, which is abundantly represented by species and individ-
uals, existed during the Upper Eocene epoch in Europe (in the Phos-
phorites), and also during the White River or Oligocene in North
America. As the structure of the feet of the numerous species from
these epochs is not yet known, and, therefore, some doubt as to their
correct generic reference may still exist, I only regard the genus as a
certain inhabitant of North America during the Truckee or Middle
Miocene epoch. This is indicated by the Galecynus geismarianus, where
the number of the toes on the posterior foot has been ascertained.

All the species of the genus from Eocene and Lower Miocene beds, as
well as most of those of the Loup Fork epoch, are characterized by the
relatively small size of their sectorial teeth. In this they resemble the
Amphicyons, Temnocyons, and other forms of Canide of the same period,
and differ from such true Canes as C. ursinus, C. scevus, and C. hayden,
which display the enlarged sectorial teeth of the existing species of the
genus. Of course there is every gradation in this respect between the
two types. In the older species the internal tubercle of the inferior
sectiorial tooth is more largely developed than in the later ones, thus.
approaching some of the species of Viverride, where it is still more
largely developed. As in other characters, there are gradations in this
also, so that neither in it nor in the relative size of the sectorials do I
find ground for the separation of the species in question from the genus
Canis, as has been proposed in the case of some of the species in Europe.
Through the kindness of M. Filhol, I possess jaws of a number of the
species found by himself and others in the Phosphorites of Central
France, including the Canis velaunus, the type of the genus Cynodon of
Aymard. These agree very nearly with the species of dogs from the
American Miocene beds as to generic characters. Professor Owen, in
the paper above cited, proposed to distinguish the genus Galecynus on
account of the greater length of the pollex as compared with that found
in the existing species of Canis. This character appears to me to be
of an unsatisfactory nature, owing to the fact that gradations in the
length of a digit are difficult to express with precision in other than a
specific sense; and the gradations may certainly be expected to occur.

I find in the G. geismarianus a character which separates the genus

from Canis, viz, the presence of the epitrochlear foramen of the hu-
merus. In this point it agrees with Amphicyon and Temnocyon. I ar-

No.7.| NIMRAVIDA AND CANIDZ OF THE MIOCENE PERIOD. 181

range cotemporary and generally similar species under the same gen-
eric head, as the most reasonable course in the absence of direct evi-
dence.
The American species of Galecynus, then, may be arranged as follows:
i. Smaller species with little or no sagittal crest.
* Temporal ridges uniting close behind orbits; otic bull small.
Small; no external ridge on inferior sectorial....--.-.---- G. gregarius Cope.
** Temporal ridges uniting early; otic bulle large.
Larger; no external ridge on inferior sectorial; teeth robust.
@ “. geismarianus Cope.
‘Smaller; an external ridge on lower sectorial; teeth more robust.
G. latidens Cope sp. nov.
** Temporal ridges not uniting anteriorly ; otic bulle large.
Least; muzzle narrow; superior tuberculars wide; no external ridge on in-
ETLOTSe CUOLLA Wer cai nereeors chain ios ce eens estas ala! lainieisie G. lemur Cope.

Hy ZNOCYON Cope.
Paleontological Bulletin, No. 31, 1879, p.3 (Dec. 24); Proceedings American
Philosophical Society, 1879, p. 372. :

This genus rests on the characters furnished by a single species,
which is represented by but few remains. Its family position is doubt-
ful, and my reference of it to the Canide is only provisional. It may,
so far as the evidence goes, be a member of the Mustilide or even of
the Felide.

Dental formula: I.2; C.+; Pm.4; M.. Last superior molar rather
narrow, transverse. Inferior premolars all two-rooted, and with well-
developed posterior cutting lobe. Inferior sectorial large, with heel.
Probably no inferior tubercular tooth.

The characters above given agree with those of Icticyon in the su-
perior series, but differ in the inferior in the absence of the Pm. I. and
the M. IT.

The only known species is the Hycenocyon basilatus (Enhydrocyon basi-
latus Cope olim.), from the Truckee beds of Oregon.

IctTicyon Lund.

Kongl. Danske Vidensk. Selsk. Afhandl. naturvidensk. og math. Classe, ix,
Deel, 1842 (October, 1841) fide Burmeister; Van der Hoeven Wissen. en
natuurk. Verh. der Koninkl. Akademie Amsterdam, Deel iii; Burmeister
Erlauterungen zur Naturgesch. Brasiliens, 1856, 2.—Cynalicus Gray, Ann.
‘Magaz. Nat. Hist. London, xvii, no. 112, 293.—WMelictis Schinz. Revue et
Magaz. de Zoologie, 1848, 176, fide Burmeister.

The dental formula is, I, 3; C.4; Pm.4; M. 3. The single superior
tubercular molar is similar in general to that of other Canide. The in-
ferior sectiorial has an internal cusp and posterior heel, the latter with
a low cutting edge on one side. Inferior tubercular well developed.
One existing and one extinct species have been found in Brazil, the
latter in the caves. I described a species from the Miocene which I can-
not separate from them generically. This is the Icticyon crassivultus
Cope (Proceedings Academy Philadelphia, 1879, p. 190).

a Bak lagu & pa

che pee ae Ha Ieee ott ae pean abinanag leone |

SMES RY SAY TOR y? «= 2p bpm en Per me alee et Ri aeRO: g beard 1s Mee

VO es eer Ts, haahs ot aa

_isinaca PA ‘ix gh vo Podge wiiven wiht Mahe wien

MME Hie Soil Mtained

OOO Sta Tyr hick) cla ey Rae ate at ei re 6%
Lt Het SO i eno Saas t ss a

od 2 oat Tone ia tanga ara eheaaeny

pits

‘ seat < i ty erie
tern ie nosh 6p Peet ead bat ant edd avert ‘reaioneg:
ve y i em 2 ries ed Git sey heel hat
aati sete alg pent ee: chpts xastibiiy ciel)

age ee) nathiat gite 14 cer oraa ates if
i ana Seanernt tie Anh eae HAi8 USL ee VTE fateh ty i au
eeiih,} whee deny Pe ee Y 5
AGIOS ODEN Migr phat emane torre ae OBES Pet “Ch Re, 4 a
Erte oppo oweih asthe oy: jet
ys ichegi orale" ibis, son haps tate earn
“Ah sit usb. ier, Gr io0lW coal mr rie Gee

oy
m

a igi fi! wae tpt , ny
! j i
Ea a Eri ee eEeR wee aes ii dit:
$ j it, St At ee ia. todagh f

mesots ebiceiiindy ¥ itor? AE: .eltinhet et te edhe

Ly,
meme 81) Siocon iw BE Reais Med os sh To ane
4 2 ope tr

ae

oft to maple ag haa as

: :
ees Fo ea ee

Meise takine vol wags Oe J, IM ‘i Pres £ op Yer ie ‘ae
Tw eee ome ows fi Ms hiveboharee RSE Rawat 3
ont ae gull idubiraid notte

sre MN) Shh. HANNS ISL. be SPE die Hare te i aol Aide
Puente’ i 4h) in mothers ahh oe qubigia pith ns aeitoe sok

Ba

AP PR AD \ A J fi +o Leer in

ry ae rae a: sie tA Pd ifae gAhel oe ee}: .

sb wees tty! Crean Neo ® p. fie res moreipion ui Aye ‘| sail Asis sta' he
ae asm iver “ “iach plihtanues Mads iad Bie! eagle

vay bse

Bi. ti tats |
a ae

Art. VIII.—On the Vertebrata of the Wind River
| Eocene Beds of Wyoming.

By E. D. Cope.

The Wind River, the principal source of the Big Horn, rises in the
Wind River Mountains, in Western Central Wyoming, and flows through
a bad-land region for a hundred miles. This region was explored by
Dr. F. V. Hayden in 1858, who makes the following observations re-
specting it (American Naturalist, 1878, p. 831):

Along the east side of the Wind River Mountains, and filling up the Upper Wind
River Valley, is a great thickness of Tertiary strata that has been weathered into
very remarkable forms, and which are known in the West as ‘‘bad lands”. The
strata are most beautifully variegated with various shades of pink or brick-red color,
so that they sometimes remind one of the Jura-Trias red beds. This formation was
described by me in 1859 in detail, and named the Wind River group. It covers a
broad area in this region, extending from the source of Wind River to the Sweet
Water Mountains, south, more than one hundred miles, and west an average width of
one to five miles. The aggregate thickness of this group cannot be less than 5,000
feet. On the west side of the Wind River Mountains no formations older than the
Wasatch group are found. This group rests, doubtless, on the Archzan nucleus, in-
clining at the base 5 to 10 degrees. All the older sedimentary rocks have been entirely
swept away from the granites for a distance of 100 miles; while on the opposite or
east side, all the corresponding strata are visible, from the Silurian to the Cretaceous
The Wasatch beds cover a large part of the Green River Valley, especially about its

sources.

During the past summer I sent a party into the Wind River Basin,
under direction of Mr. J. L. Wortman, already well known from his
numerous important paleontological discoveries in Oregon. This gen-
tleman made a thorough exploration of the bad lands, and probably ob-
tained all the fossils found on the surface in the region. The following
list of forty-five species shows that the collection embraces nearly all of
the characteristic types of the American Eocene, and that twenty-six
Species are new to science. Among the most remarkable of these I
may cite the large flesh-eater Protopsalis tigrinus, the largest of the
HKocene period yet known, and the Amblypod, Bathyopsis fissidens, an
important addition to the forms of that peculiar order.

Mr. Wortman’s explorations were not accomplished without accident,
he having lost most of his outfit on his first crossing of the Wind River.
The bad lands form a most forbidding region, mostly waterless, and at
an elevation which is unfavorable to the sparse vegetation which is
permitted by the dryness of the climate.

183

184 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

PISCES.
1. CLASTES sp.

Seales of this genus are moderately abundant.

2. PAPPICHTHYS Sp.
Vertebre of this genus occur in the collection.

LACERTILIA.
3. PLACOSAURUS.

A species probably of this genus is not rare; and vertebre indicate
two or three species of lizards.

TESTUDINATA.

Tortoises are not abundant; a portion of the plastron of a species
probably of—
4, DERMATEMYS—

Being the only determinable fragment procured by Mr. Wortman.

CROCODILIA.
5. CROCODILUS sp.

Not very common.
RODENTIA.

6. PLESIARCTOMYS BUCCATUS Cope.
Three individuals.

- 7, PLESIARCTOMYS DELICATISSIMUS Leidy.
Four individuals.

8. PLESIARCTOMYS DELICATIOR Leidy.

Eight individuals.

CHIROPTERA.
9. VESPERUGO ANEMOPHILUS Cope.
American Naturalist, 1880, p. 745.

Represented by the anterior part of a skull without lower jaw. Den-
tition: 1.2; C.1; Pm. 2; M.3. Posterior molar narrow, its posterior
external V rudimental; first and second molars subequal. Fourth
premolar elevated and acute, with an external basal cingulum; second
premolar simple, acute. Profile steeply elevated behind orbital region,
less steep in front of it; zygomas wide. Length from interorbital region
to above canine alveolus in front, .010; interorbital width, .005; width
of zygomas, .012; width between outsides of last molar teeth, .010; length
of molar series, .008; length of true molars, .004.

BUNOTHERIA.
TANIODONTA.

10. CALAMODON CYLINDRIFER sp. nov.

The only individual of this species discovered by Mr. Wortman is
represented by fragments of the jaws, with several teeth, both loose

No. 8.] COPE ON EOCENE VERTEBRATA OF WIND RIVER. 185

and imbedded in matrix. The former show that the molars have but
one root. The latter include the large rodent-like incisors in a frag-
mentary condition, and a nearly complete tooth intermediate in charac-
ter between the flat-banded teeth and the molar teeth of the known
species of Calamodon. It may occupy an intermediate position in the
jaw, but I do not know of any appropriate place for it in the mandible
of Calamodon arcamenus. I think there is little doubt the individual
belongs to a species with narrower teeth than any of those of the two
species already named.

The characteristic tooth in question is nearly cylindric, and the part
preserved is quite long and slender. Its grinding surface is worn con-
eavely, as in the flat teeth of the known species of Calamodon. The
enamel is in two bands, one wider than the other, and each of equal
width throughout. The space of cementum separating them on one
side is nearly twice as wide as that on the other. The cementum layer
is not so thick as in the species of the genus hitherto described. The
shaft of the tooth is slightly curved, and the wider band of cementum
is on the inner side of the curve.

Measurements.
M.
PenrrmOte ena me Ol (aro MCISON . oa celee cite! aterat eae oi 2 ocin ala aineinin s woes 2 cle . 018
ede mhom enti Ot CylINGT1C POObME Semen cei etemee maietn eles cels velse ae ale mn alee . 041
2 Bits oes: f f evlindri nf antero-posterior -.........--.- . O11
Diameters of grinding surface of cylindric tooth ) 4. nsverse ....-...-2-. 2... 010

INSECTIVORA.

11. ESTHONYX ACUTIDENS sp. nov.

The largest species of the genus, and represented by two individuals.
The first of these includes the last molars of both series and an
anterior true molar; the second includes most of the dentition of one
maxillary bone, the last true molar being probably the only tooth miss-
ing. Four of the molars of this specimen are in place, and three are
loose. Under the circumstances, I estimate seven molars, of which the
fourth premolar is like the first true molar, and the third premolar has
its internal lobe very much reduced. Thetwo preceding premolars have
one root, and short, compressed, and acute crowns. The second is
abruptly very much smaller than the third, and is close to it; the first
is close to the second, and is a little larger. The canine is larger still,
and is somewhat compressed. Externally viewed, it looks like the
canine of a carnivorous mammal; but viewed from within, it displays
marked peculiarities. It has here a median rib, separated from the fore
and aft edges of the crown by a groove. This ridge is without enamel,
and the edges are produced and very sharp. The enamel of the exter-
nal face extends twice as far towards the base as on the interior side. The
enamel of this tooth, with that of the premolars, is wrinkled; that of the
molars is smoother.

186 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VI.

The details of the inferior teeth preserved do not differ much from
those of the HL. bisulcatus, excepting that the heel of the last true molar
is much more produced.

The LH. acutidens is considerably larger than either of the species of
the genus heretofore described.

Measurements.
No. 1.

M.
WelblCalyeceensmace aio! Salnatececee Seu eee ces . 0065
Diameters of last inferior molar} anberoposterion- asses eeeee. sass eee eee eee . 0130
tratisverse) oe: ie St RE eee . 0064

: anteroposterior: ;J3- ks 41 42365- -)-6- 6) ce -seteeeee 0095 .
Diameters of a true molar } Ha NS VOTRE). Sates eat ioe oar clase a 0074
. : § ANETOPOSLELIOR. — eee = cee ee eee . 0097
Diameters of last superior molar ) Lamecarne Jr aoeie EA ae

No. 2.

Length of five superior molars preserved ...-...-- 2-2 222-222 eee eee ee eens eee 0410
Hength ot premolar series ~2--- .2 22-6 Soesen -oamtelentde tee r = totes tae ee - 0325
Denothvof bases\of Pim. T and eee eee cee == erin ania . 0125
: § Antero POSbOLON = seme seyoea tbs. - aoc Sslnce seinen seeeeee . 0097
Diameters of Pm. II py TREBHERN GHEE) GG555c Goness cbc s55 sooD cosa caDdod SS CoaSoR Cone . 0098
: BNLeTOPOsterlOLr /--.. 5 ceee at esee see eee eeee ee . 0086
Diameters of first true molar } ei ew er Sie. 0133
Anteroposterior width of base of crown of canine ...............2..----.------ . 0080
Transverse, width. of base of crown Of canine -.-- 22.5 2.2.6. 5-2 woes woes onsen . 0050

12. ESTHONYX SPATULARIUS Cope.
American Naturalist, 1880 (Nov. 25), p. 908.

Represented by five molar and premolar and two incisor or canine
teeth, apparently belonging to one individual. These are about the size
of those of H. bisulcatus, but present several differences of detail. Thus,
the basin of the heel of the last inferior molar is not obliquely cut off by
a crest which extends forwards from the heel, but is surrounded by an
elevated border, which rises into a cusp on the external side. The
incisor-canine teeth are more robust than those of EH. bisulcatus, one of
them especially having a spoon-shaped crown, with the concave side
divided by a longitudinal rib, on which the enamel is very thin. The
enamel descends much further down on the external than the internal
side of these teeth. The rodent-like tooth does not accompany the speci-
men. Length of base of last inferior molar, .009; width anteriorly, .005;
length of crown of canine-incisor No.1, .009; width at base, .005; length
of crown of second canine-incisor at base, .012; width, .006.

MESODONTA.

13. HYOPSODUS PAULUS Leidy.
Numerous specimens.

14. HYOPSODUS VICARIUS Cope.
Less abundant.

No. 8] COPE ON EOCENE VERTEBRATA OF WIND RIVER. 187

15. PELYCODUS JARROVII Cope.

A jaw fragment supporting the last two molars presents the charac-
ters and dimensions of this species. The genus Pelycodus differs from
Tomitherium in that the second premolar resembles the later ones in
having two roots instead of having but one root like the first, as is found
in the latter genus. .

16. PELYCODUS TUTUS Cope.
Tomitherium tutum Cope, Report Expl. Sury. W. of 100th Mer. under Capt,
Wheeler, iv, pt. ii, p. 141.

Represented by numerous specimens.

17. PELYCODUS NUNIENUM §p. nov.

Fragmentary jaws of six individuals of this species were found by
Mr. Wortman. They indicate a species intermediate in dimensions be-
tween the P. tutus and P. frugivorus, which is further defined by the
form of the last inferior molar.

The best preserved ramus supports all the teeth posterior to and in-
cluding the third premolar. The last-mentioned tooth has an elevated

acute crown, without any anterior basal tubercle, and a very short pos-

terior heel. The fourth premolar is very stout; its cusps are not muck
elevated, and the heel is short. The anterior basal tubercle is quite
small. All of the true molars have a second cusp in front of the anterior
interval, but it is quite small, excepting on the first, where it is more
distinct. The external crescents of all the molars are well defined, but
the posterior does not inclose the crown behind with an extension of its:
horn. The last molar is a little longer than the others, and its posterior
border is produced into two cusps. A simple raised border is found here
in P. frugivorus.

Measurements.
M.
Length of molar series from third premolar, inclusive...-....-...--..---------- . 0228:
Parsee UENCE CLARO MM ans af hrs ches tacveiawa nies eicadaticnpielsn cade tces cus heme e cons . 0150
: : anteroposterior 32/3 32.2 ae Joo ke ists soko CObe
Diameters of first true molar } Sie Tea Vere A Mires Piet ta) (bciem 9 Celts I a 0038:
} ANUErOPOSteEOL). coes = ce sicee, ose bo See - 2 . 0065.
Diameters of last true molar } Aes 8 ah Ss CMTS HS STD eee ein te 0040
[Desir GH hea tereyen Teen OL i se See ye ore eS 0 Se ee eee ey . 0095
Wepitonramusiatllast truelmolarcd = ss2e<celas Gade s eek even bata cece exaeceteot . 0095

18. PANTOLESTES SECANS sp. nov.

Represented by the adherent rami of a mandible, on both of which
the posterior four molar teeth are preserved.

The species is about the size of the P. chacensis, and hence larger than
the P. longicaudus. It differs from both in the proportions of its teeth,
and especially in the large size and sectorial character of the fourth pre-
molar. The length of the latter exceeds a little that of the third true
molar, while in the other species it is shorter. This length is caused by
the extent of the anterior basal tubercle and posterior heel. The latter

188 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VL

is entirely surrounded by a cingulum, and its median line is elevated
into a blade, which is continuous with the posterior edge of the princi-
‘pal cusp. Both edges of the anterior tubercle are also trenchant. The
two cusps of the anterior inner tubercle of the first and fourth molars
-are well developed, but on the second molar there is but one cusp. This
is probably a character to be relied on in distinguishing the species from
the P. chacensis. No external basal cingula; enamel smooth.

Measurements.
M.
iencthvofilast tourmmolarsss-cee. oe ecos ce sees mce ce venice see cen eel eee eee . 0218
encthvoffourth premolar.o ss... S225 sso sce eee Ses eseie ose sincere eee eee . 0068
Hlevationof fourbhipremolar. <tc = cee aie nae ete ae apse oe eee eee ena
Length of last true molar.----- Viste eins ‘e[salg, ate wip’ Sse prj win tare cies elie a neee eee . 0057 —
Depihiorf ramus attirst true molars 24242 ccemiecice Gee eckls Se Lee eee e ee eee ee ORC)

As is the case with the species of Pantolestes already known, the P.
secans seems to have been rare.

19. MICROSYOPS SPEIRIANUS Cope.
American Naturalist, 1879, p. 908.

Established on a portion of a mandibular ramus which contains the
three true molars in perfect preservation. As the number of premolar
teeth is unknown, its reference to this genus is provisional only. The
last true molar has the form of that of the WM. gracilis Leidy. It is dis-
tinguished by its very small size, since it is considerably less than the
Hi. vicarius (H.? minusculus), and by the equality in size of the molars.
The heel of the third molar is very small, and the two cones of the inner
side of the crowns of all the molars are acute. The external crescents
are very well defined, the anterior sending a horn round the anterior
extremity of the crown. The posterior is connected with the corre-
sponding internal tubercle by a median conic posterior tubercle. Length
of true molar series, .008; length of second molar, .0026; width of sec-
ond molar, .0022; length of last true molar, .0025; width of last true
molar, .0016 ; depth of ramus at second molar, .0043. Dedicated to my
friend Mr. Francis Speir, of Princeton, N. J., who, in connection with
Messrs. Scott and Osborne, has made important additions to our knowl-
edge of the Eocene Vertebrata.

20. MICROSYOPS GRACILIS Leidy.
Represented by numerous jaws.

21. MICROSYOPS SCOTTIANUS Sp. nov.

A nearly entire left mandibular ramus is all that I have seen of this -
species. The crowns of the fourth and sixth molars furnish the only
dental characters available, but the number and forms of the bases of
the others are readily ascertainable.

The ramus of the jaw is more slender than in M. gracilis, and the last
true molar has quite a different form. Instead of being shorter than in

No. 8.] COPE ON EOCENE VERTEBRATA OF WIND RIVER. 189

allied species, this tooth is rather longer, evidently in consequence of a.
well-developed heel. The fourth premolar has a strong inner tubercle,
and no anterior cusp or cingulum. Its heel has an elevated posterior
border, enclosing a fossa with the principal cusps. No external or inter-
nal cingula. Third premolar with two roots. —_Alveolus of the second,
large and apparently simple; it is filled with matrix. Canine large,
directed forwards, and occupying all the space between a short dias-
tema and the symphysis. The latter extends posteriorly to below the
anterior part of the third premolar. The ramus is compressed and
maintains an equal depth to the end of the molar series. Its inferior
border descends below the coronoid process, and is not incurved, but
the external face is convex. The anterior masseteric ridge is well
marked, descending to below the middle of the ramus. Masseteric:
fossa flat. Mental foramen below the third premolar.

Measurements.
M.

MenonhyOtuhe raz omenb OL TAMUS\ same fo= seleejeniels siecle © solsiaiele “eines eaciamieine ioe .0435
enoumomdental Series) wathowt incisors). asses ee sacs easelsee lanl cles .0280

: ; aMmibero-POSteLlOL 2242 st sau Sood akuaves selene sacieeie sees .0040
eae tersioh canine (ERAN S WV CLSC aa arse Mae pas ee etoaytee niches sinsiasicisia gente stceemias .0025
MeIHimCHE PROMOL AL ISOLICS <= cen. cajots soetee aioli ion seem © alsin wilted aareelel duieeiseereinyes .0100
Mencshontourbh premolar 2 2s6cc-ss-2=- ci \-2es lc. Sese <a reel a teas Resists .0040
MrcdunTOLourbhspremolar behind: (2 -- secwecee css se ocr eete ee cne ce eeceae .0027
Metin nLOmhCNe MOlaM SCTECS) <<) a ~ coic cece soces ces tees Se ac ae a .0136
Menavhotlastirueimolan! sums Lscess eo a sess eslnw esau dactae as dekhleste ces enctns 0052
Macrinomlastiruce molamianteriorly.):224:05-/2.-263-5-ss-2 22 Soee seis cele isc 52) 0080
Wepuorrannnsatpbhirdipremolar 325. da-6)asescerocse -c tees Se smnncissies be ceae = 5 .0090
WME HulmOimnramuUs aulast MOlal see's anson comes see ees bess cae ece se cie cee ace cs 0090

This species is dedicated to my friend Prof. William B. Scott, of the:
College of New Jersey.

CREODONTA.

22. MIACIS CANAVUS sp. nov.

Established on the mandibular rami of two individuals, which display
the roots and some of the crowns of all the teeth exclusive of the in-
cisors.

The root of the canine indicates that the crown is of large size and
compressed at the base. The first premolar is one-rooted, and is sepa-
rated from the second by a short diastema. The second has two well-
distinguished roots, which are separated from those of the third by a dias-
tema like that in frontofthem. Posterior to this there are no diastemata.
The second root of the fourth premolar is much larger than the anterior.
The sectorial, though the largest tooth, is of but moderate dimensions ;
its heel supports two posterior tubercles. The first tubercular is a lit-
tle shorter. It has a raised border, and the anterior part two angu-
lar tubercles. The second tubercular is a very small tooth, but has two
roots, the posterior of which is posterior to the anterior border of the
ascending ramus.

190 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VI.

According to Leidy’s measurements, this species is about the size of
_ his M. voraz of the Bridger formation. That species has, like the two
others of that horizon, a second tubercular tooth with only one root.

Measurements.
M.
Length of dental line posterior to canines .....--..------- 2-2 e202 eee ene wen eee . 0440
eng bor premolar SeMesssesee acres sews nae selec soe decom scien eee ete eee . 0250
Henethotbasejof fourth premolar=ae- os se. wes- 20s 5+ - cee ccneeeeee eo ee eee . 0065
ienoth of baseor sectorialy.2o-< 5see o-oo eee Jae eee eee ee Eee ee eee . 0085
Mength ofbaseiotdinsi tubercular =. << (occcos sae ain alee ee pea a eee eee . 0060
length of baseiot secong tubercular -2----o-cceceese case sooo ene eee - 0040
Wepth-oframustatisecond premolar :2o ss. so. ses oae alesse e eae ae Seana . 0150
Depth’ of ramus at second true molar-:_5. 22.4--...5 2 esos 2 ws ose . 0100

This species was probably about the size of the gray fox.

23. MIACIS BREVIROSTRIS Sp. nov.

This species differs from those of the Bridger epoch in the same way
that M. canavus does, i. ¢., in the biadicate lastinferior molar. Its dimen-
sions are intermediate between those of M. edax and WM. vorax, hence a
little smaller than those of the I. canavus. This difference is partially
seen in the shortening of the premolar series of teeth. They are closer
together than in the WM. canavus, and the roots are larger. The sec-
torial tooth is shorter. The fourth premolar has a low anterior basal
cingulum ; the posterior part of the crown is robust. The first tuber-
cular molar is wide, and consists of a basin-shaped heel and a short
anterior portion which is more elevated. The latter consists of two
cusps, which are connected by an anteriorly convex ledge, but there is no
third anterior tubercle as in WM. parvivorus. The ramus is quite robust,
and the basis of the canine tooth is unusually large. Mental foramina
are below the anterior parts of the second and fourth premolars, respect-
ively. Last inferior molar small. .

Measurements. nhs

: M.

Wen ebh Ofmolar iSeries... as. ios ae, wowiciasiela\enis sale elciscn ape seinem eat eee eee . 0380
Men ciMompremolarsiss cose «fae oes ne cee eennleceine alee cic eae eee . 0200
Length of base of fourth pia Crees esae scieecctes alice cca ss acc ie ee ee oe
Length of base of sectorial ..:2-....-.....---/.-- tbo leeed. ek See eee . 0072
Length of base of first.-tubercular ~... ...6 dso tb acdewecs taweid- cts chap SUE Re Uae
Length of base of second tubercular... . 2 -sjes-sejee eee eite tage a meee eke Semone fe 0d
Depth of ramus atisecond premolar... 3. saseccece see bee paris soon ae eee 0140
Depth of ramus at second true molar...... .. 22.2 eee eee sbecacuasboooss< . 0140

24. DIDYMICTIS ALTIDENS Cope.
American Naturalist, 1880, Oct. p. 746.
Represented by several specimens. The species is larger than the
D. protenus, or about equal to the coyote; but the tubercular molar is
relatively smaller, and has the three anterior cusps better developed.
The heel of the tubercular sectorial is longer and the three cusps more

No. 8.1 COPE ON EOCENE VERTEBRATA OF WIND RIVER. 191

elevated than in D. protenus. Diameters of latter tooth: Length antero-
posteriorly, .015; length of heel, .006; elevation of external side of
crown anteriorly, .015; width at same point, .009. Length of crown of
tuberular, .009; width of same, .006; elevation anteriorly, .005.

25. DIDYMICTIS LEPTOMYLUS Cope.
: American Naturalist, 1880, Dec. p. 908.

Represented by the posterior three inferior molars. These indicate a
species of smaller size than the D. protenus, with the tubercular molar
relatively narrower, and perhaps longer. The anterior part of the latter
has the three cusps well defined and close together, and behind them is
an oblique longitudinal cutting edge. The middle of the posterior
margin rises into a tubercle. The anterior cusps of the tubercular sec-
torial are elevated; the heel has a strong external cutting edge and
internal ledge. Length of tubercular sectorial, .009; width of same,
005; length of tubercular, .007; width of same in front,

26. DIDYMICTIS DAWKINSIANUS sp. nov.

This flesh-eater is represented by more or less imperfect mandibular
rami of three individuals. The most complete of these lacks only the
portions posterior to the coronoid process, and those anterior to the
first premolar, and supports all the teeth excepting the first and second
premolars. The premolars are all two-rooted excepting the first. The
base of the fourth premolar is considerably longer than that of the
third. Both of these teeth have a short posterior heel, and above it a
cutting lobe. The fourth has a well-marked anterior basal tubercle.
The heel of the sectorial is relatively short, and the anterior portion of
the tooth elevated. The anterior and inner cusps are high, and about
equal, but the external cusp ismuch higher. The external border of the
heel is more elevated than the inner. The tubercular molar is elongate,
and has a small triangular anterior portion somewhat elevated, in slight
resemblance to the sectorial tooth. This portion consists of two opposite
cusps and a lower one in frout of the anterior inner, which connects
with the external by an anterior ledge. The posterior portion has a
tubercle on the external side, besides a posterior elevation. The ramus
is rather slender, and the masseteric fossa is bounded by a prominent
ridge in front, but fades out below.

The measurements show this to be the smallest species of the genus,
being much less than the D. leptomylus.

Measurements.
M.
Length of dental series, including first premolar...-..-....-.---------+-+----++ + 0265
eH SL HOO! PLaMOlay-SeLiGSs.ec lajses scans cement «ciccme undo cceces cctiaeweneveugm - 0168
PaO! DAS6l OL MONTE E BRC MOLT 2266 )o co we cca on one enewnendes ones neee taste . 0055
Serene _DASG GL SOCiGiN Ne =. - wari nwe ed La shisc ae coe vesans wewdened ducman . 0053
MvidGlr Of base Of SecLorial abide... 222. f.- 52 cece enc nns seem ence ccenee ust sOUGd

RET OUET ASE CLOUD AEE cne clei selec Salas vo celebs decocawe es tewbweadeue . 0055

192 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VI.

M.
TLD Cree AAU) WO) PRS Soe soa ns sooo Sens 3485 So50 dee Sse denon ss ssoSse cess = . 0044
Wwadvh of first true molar in tron; on cee sees eae eee oe eat sete eee eee . 0028:
GAP MOMLOE sds HENS wAOleye WAI ROH s 6 65 coon ehande goou 600000 550656 ceascs = . 0025
Depth of ramus at second premolars os. “22s-- 2s .)s22 Se ee cee = oe ee . 0064

Depth of ramus at tubercular molar eeec ec] oe sect o-oo ae ao ee ee

This species is dedicated to my friend Prof. W. Boyd Dawkins, the
distinguished geologist and paleontologist, of Manchester, England. ;

27. STYPOLOPHUS STRENUUS Cope.
Portions of two individuals, with lower jaws, ete.

28. IcTOPS BICUSPIS Cope.
Stypolophus bicuspis Cope, American Naturalist, 1880, Oct. p. 746.

The genus Jctops was determined by Leidy from a species, the I. dako-
tensis Leidy, from the White River formation. The animal now men-
tioned is identical with it in generic characters, so far as they are ascer-
tained. The J. dakotensis is established on a specimen which does not.
contain all the teeth, but the parts preserved indicate that those which
are wanting are like the corresponding parts of Leptictis Leidy and Meso-
dectes Cope, with which the present species also agrees. It is unexpected
to identify a genus found on the White River horizon with one from the
Wasatch. IJctops agrees very closely with Didelphys. The fourth supe-
rior premolar has an internal cusp, which is wanting in Didelphys, and
the inferior border of the mandible is not inflected. There are also but
three superior incisors on each side. Under these circumstances I pre-
fer to refer this genus to the Bunotheria rather than to the Marsupiaha,,
but whether its proper place is in the Creodont or Insectivorous subdi-
visions I cannot yet determine.

Char. specif.—Smaller than the Stypolophus minor Filh., and not very
different in dimensions from the Ictops dakotensis Leidy. It is repre-
sented by a nearly complete skull, with entire dentition of both jaws..
Premaxillary bones rather elongate; general form of skull that of a civet.
Crowns of second and third superior premolars compressed, with a promi-
nent cusp behind the principal one. First and second true molars with
two distinct external cusps and a strong external basal cingulum. Infe-
rior first premolar one-rooted, third with a posterior heel, and fourth
with strong anterior and especially posterior heels. Heels of true mo-
lars well developed (last broken). Length of superior dental series to I.
1, .031; length of molar series, .020; length of true molars, .006; depth of
mandible at second true molar, .007; depth at canine, .0035. The double-
lobed third premolar and the smaller size distinguish this species from
the Stypolophi.

29. ICTOPS DIDELPHOIDES sp. nov.

Established on a left mandibular ramus, which supports the last three
molars. ‘This demonstrates the former existence of a species of larger

No. 8.] COPE ON EOCENE VERTEBRATA OF WIND RIVER. 193

size than any of the Leptictide hitherto known. The general form of the
inferior true molars is a good deal like that of Stypholophus, but they
may be distinguished by three characters in which they at the same
time, agree with the Ictops bicuspis: First, the elevated border of the
heel, with a strong external cusp and weaker posterior and internal ele-
vations; second, the small development of the anterior cusp; third, the
posterior production of the heel of the third true molar, giving an indica-
tion of a fifth lobe. The external anterior cusp of the third molar is ele-
vated ; on the first molar it is less so, and the anterior cusp is small. The
enamel is smooth, and there are no internal nor external cingula. The
mandibular ramus is compressed and deep.

Measurements.
M.
Menotheol bases of three trie Molar) <5 3 te de soe cc tae. Spee cote wieoe Sree e's . 0165
wie i ANGEL GPOSbOIMO I teers seat oe ose soins ac =o waicalela . 0055
Diameters of first true molar) eee behind poe
Diameters of last true molar } EPO SD EIS Ca Ok a leila ae
: HERING) BOS6 conenoo5 S660 666 76g 0055 Uae rooDaES . 0050
Depth of ramus at anterior root of last true molar ....-..---.. --.------.------ . 0095

The jaw fragment described indicates a skull about the size of that of
the common opossum.

30. PROTOPSALIS TIGRINUS Cope.
American Naturalist, 1880, p. 745.

Char. gen.—Probably Oxyenide,* but as the type species is only

known from two true molars and a canine of the inferior series, with
bones of the skeleton, this point remains to be ascertained. Femur
with a weak third trochanter. Inferior molars: one like those of Oxy,
cena, i. e., With large heel and internal cusp; another, probably the last-
larger, without internal tubercle, and with a rudimental heel, thus re-
sembling the inferior sectorial of various existing Carnivora.
_ Char. specif.—Size about that of the tiger or jaguar, exceeding that of
any other flesh-eater of the Wasatch epoch. The heel of the smaller
tubercular-sectorial is not large, and has a plano-concave superior sur-
face. The principal cusp is much elevated, while the internal cusp is
small. The sectorial differs from that of a Hyena in having the poste-
rior cusp more, and the anterior cusp less elevated; the heel is only a
strong posterior cingulum, which is continued as a narrow line along
the inner base of the tooth. A rough cutting ridge forms the poste-
rior inner angle of the principal cusp. There is a wide longitudinal
groove of the inner face of the inferior canine, whose enamel surface is
impressed-punctate. The shaft of the femur is nearly straight. Diam-
eters of crown of sectorial, anteroposterior, .025; transverse, .014; ver-
tical, .022; length of heel of tubercular-sectorial, .006; width of same,
-006; vertical diameter of base of crown of canine, .022; depth of
mandible at last molar, .044; length of femur (condyles inferential),
.300; diameter of shaft at middle, .034.

* See Proceed. Amer. Philos. Soc. 1880, July.
13GB

194 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VI.

AMBLYPODA.
PANTODONTA.

31. CORYPHODON CUSPIDATUS Cope.
Part of the dentition of one individual.

32. CORYPHODON RADIANS Cope.
Apparently an abundant species.

DINOCERATA.

30. BATHYOPSIS FISSIDENS gen. et sp. nov.

Char. gen.—These can only be given as seen in the mandible, the
only part of the skeleton in my possession. Dentition: I.3; C.1; Pm.
4; M.3. Incisors, canine, and first premolar forming an uninterrupted
series, which is separated by a diastema from the molar series. The
molar and premolar teeth are constructed on an identical pattern, pre-
senting slight modifications from front to rear. This consists of an an-
terior elevated transverse crest, and a posterior heel with raised poste-
rior border; between these is situated on the external side an elevated
cusp, which sends a low ridge inwards and forwards. The inner ex-
tremity of the anterior crest is cusp-like, and is accompanied by a second
internal anterior cusp immediately posterior to it. The mandibular
ramus has great vertical depth, its inferior border being convex down-
wards throughout its entire length. Symphysis coéssified.

The above characters indicate a new genus of considerable interest.
Its form differs from that of the two genera where it is known, viz,
Uintatherium and Loxolophodon, in the much greater development of the
inferior expansion. In Loxolophodon it has been shown by Messrs.
Speir and Osborne to be represented by a mere convexity. In Uinta-
therium Marsh has discovered it to be confined to the anterior part of the
jaw, as in the sabre-tooth cats. In Bathyopsis it extends to the entire
length of the ramus, giving an outline in profile much like that of Mega-
therium. The anterior extremity of the symphysis projects beyond the
line of the anterior border of the inferior expansion.

The characters of the inferior molars in this and other genera of Dino-
cerata are very peculiar. In Bathyopsis they are constructed on the plan
of those of insectivorous marsupial and placental mammals, so as to lead
to the suspicion that its food consisted of crustacea, or insects of large
size, or possibly of thin-shelled mollusca.

Char. specif.—This species was probably about the size of the Malayan -
tapir. Thesymphysis mandibuli is quite narrow, and its superior exca- -
_ vation is deep. It extends as far posteriorly as the middle of the dias-
tema. It has considerable vertical thickness. The anterior edges of
the lateral expansions are truncate, and present an obtuse angle out-
wards, which forms the anterior boundaries of the slight concavity of the
lateral face. The middle of the expansion below the first premolar tooth
is slightly convex. This wall encloses alarge internal expansion of the

No. 8.J COPE ON EOCENE VERTEBRATA OF WIND RIVER. 195

dental canal, which issues in a large mental foramen. This foramen is
situated near the middle of the vertical diameter of the expansion, and
below the anterior part of the diastema. It looks downwards and for-
wards. The external face of the posterior part of the ramus is nearly
plane. The inner face is vertical to a line which corresponds with the
inferior border in Coryphodon, and then slopes obliquely outwards to the
inferior margin. The base of the coronoid process rises vertically from
the line of the alveolar border, and its external edge forms an anterior
border for the masseteric fossa. The inferior border of the fossa is not
defined. The inferior border of the ramus is decurved posteriorly, and
projects inwards considerably beyond the plane of the jaw.

The premolars differ from the molars in having all their diameters ex-
' cepting the vertical, reduced. The fourth premolar only differs from the
first true molar in the less elevation of the posterior border of the heel,
and in a little smaller transverse diameter. The external part of the
heel of the last molar rises into an obtuse cusp; the remainder of the
border is tubercular. The heels of the other true molars end in simple
recurved transverse edges. On the premolars their posterior extremi-
ties are not recurved. The anterior face of the anterior cross-crest of
all the molars is concave, and on the second premolar it looks obliquely
inwards. The posterior or second anterior inner cusp is obsolete on the
second premolar. The enamel on all of these teeth is, excepting where
worn, rather finely wrinkled. The first premolar is not preserved, but
its alveolus indicates that it is one-rooted and rather robust. The sizes
of the alveoli of the other anterior teeth are arranged in the following
order, commencing with the largest: C.; 1.2; 1.3. The alveolus of
the canine is compressed, and has more than twice the anteroposterior
diameter of the largest incisor. The alveoli of the first and third are
subround ; that of the second is somewhat compressed.

Measurements.

M.

Length from the middle of the second incisive alveolus to the extremity of the
LSS; TLL Ra SEN CG BEE AARC Nis ok Se ase Sa ie San eas § RS ed oy ene ee .1950
Length of the series of consecutive molars.......-. 2.2 22 coo cone cnc ene weoees 1170
Wo BL EUS GU GDEST ADT Aas Ee Age BONS Dae SE Oe ee ee 0240
Peeetienoven sively Of bing Tso (oth a Mee A eet on. 2 0080
MEH BICEOllVeDLUS OLiGATIING 22242 224. sob 84 otis bow bce cade keldccoccke cece Sead .0250
ese PLOMIO ALS ese msc lee a. oe aie ea Swen ease aed sas onic merc anon Seeeeebeod -0460
WEEDIC Aa teat e nen tee aa eoct cod ee cccesearn coe -0130
Diameters of Pm. n.} AULOLO POSUCEIOR ese oe eet ain doeeles suse ncceed aswene 0130
ULANSVCLSO aches ots ee ec cote ek cole cade access cece ODIO
VWOHUIIGE Soosc cote SoGe SO SEO Se ea eae ee oor .0120
Diameters of Pm. wv} ALELOPOSLETIOLssas tase clececwe es wicccees ouse) coe bueno .0105
ULDATEN VETS: Gee. Gc CEO eae ts eee ee ane ee See Es Fe -0120
WO TUL Cat letra tees oatsave «Sct teiaicj oon wil tla oc omnes capa ews eme OU
Diameters of M. 1.3 TT SIMU RUGUIT SAE SEU SS eee oe ee te .0155
UMA MOLSG Roe ee rs Sais cca elemacoodd Goce cadet Gamat couse mmeen
GNbIGd renee ction oe oe ic cain wdseiccesns cu Guth coueceee .0176
Diameters of M. nm... ABCOLOPOSPOLIOPNse es ee oo cca nice wo'a Sewn criceatteccawunee -0260
ERM VELSO Mace stensid:nwslcns claw ecwe dd ade ccapesccee eee ee sOlee

196 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VI.

The appearance of the ridges of the anterior part of the jaw of the
Bathyopsis jfissidens, together with the remarkably large dental canal
and mental foramen, strongly suggest that the animal possessed a large
and perhaps prehensile lower lip.

PERISSODACTYLA.

34, PALZZOSYOPS BOREALIS Cope.
American Naturalist, 1880, p. 746.
Founded on a portion of the right maxillary bone, which supports -
the three true molars and one premolar. Size of Limnohyus fontinalis,
or much smaller than P. levidens. Anterior median tubercle well de-
veloped ; anterior and posterior cingula strong, not rising to inner cones.
A low ridge extending outwards and forwards from posterior cone. En-
amel smooth. Differs from P. junior Leidy in the presence of the inter-
mediate tubercle and crest, and in the weak externalcingulum. Length
of true molar series, .063; diameters of first true molar, anteroposterior,
.019; transverse, .020.
Portions of several individuals were obtained by Mr. Wortman.

35. LAMBDOTHERIUM POPOAGICUM Cope.
American Naturalist, 1880, p. 748.

Char. gen.—Dentition much as in Limnohyus, excepting that there is
a diastema in front of the second inferior premolar. Presence of first
inferior premolar not ascertained. Fourth inferior premolar without pos-
terior cusps. Superior molars with an angular ridge extending inwards
from each inner cusp. Last inferior molar with heel. This genus
differs from Oligotomus in the simplicity of the fourth premolar, which
has in the latter two posterior cusps. The V-shaped crests of the in-
ferior molars separate it from Hyracotherium.

Char. specif—The heels of the second and third premolars have a
median keel; the third only has an anterior tubercle. The crest of the
heel of the fourth forms an imperfect V. Heel of the last true
molar small. Nocingula; enamelsmooth. Length of molar series, .080;
of true molars, .044; of last molar, .019; depth of ramus at first premolar,
.021; at last molar, .031. Second specimen: Diameters of crown of last
superior molar, anteroposterior, .014; transverse, .016. About the size
of the Hyrachyus agrestis.

This species was probably the most abundant perissodactyle of the
epoch of deposit of the Wind River beds.

36. LAMBDOTHERIUM BROWNIANUM Sp. nov.

Considerably larger than the Z. popoagicum, and about equal to the
Tapirus terrestris. The greater part of a lower jaw represents the
species, and on this unfortunately only one of the premolar teeth
remains. The three premolars are all two-rooted, and the posterior lobe
of the last true molar is well developed. The inferior part of the exter-

No. 8.] COPE ON EOCENE VERTEBRATA OF WIND RIVER. DIG

nal side of the ramus contracts or retreats rather abruptly posteriorly,
below the last molar. It presentsa slight external convexity below the
second and third premolars. The alveolar line rises rapidly posteriorly,
so that the last true molar is quite oblique. The second (first) premolar
has a considerable heel, which is narrow and elevated on the middle
line. The principal cusp is large and compressed, but obtuse, and has
no anterior basal tubercle.

Measurements.
M.
Length of six molars......------ +--+ ----- +--+ = eee eee cee eee ee eee tenes eee -090
Length of true molars ......---- ----.---- ---- 2 ene ene ee eee ce ene ce eens ones 055
WORN! ca cood scsanecosbuosorebous copbodno< .009
Diameters second (first) pronlary anteroposterlor....------.----0.------------ .012
LPANSVCLSC oes et Seats oi silele es aes io alacf= 006
Length of TTS: Ce bes) TAA) CAPS a Soo ee og ec- ereoce Goee 34 6 eee BOE Oce bre eae 015
Width of base of first true molar ...-.....-..---- yee ag AA ts Naetiamie ae atolee .009
Length of base of third true molar...---..----- tt Mel en uh eat RN, Maa ae 2 .023
Wadthot baseor third troemolans----sece. eo cce snslone seclatie) ecinicelsee esse ena 011
Depth of ramus at second premolar_----2 25-22 5.22 ee sete pce cewss oo - vn =- -030
at front of tooth .-.-....---. .-...----- Saadeocecacad .039
Depth oframus at M. III ; ki Gtcl OB HGR as ee) Ck TORY vl gat Oily do eT 047

Dedicated to my friend Arthur E. Brown, superintendent of the Phila-
delphia Zodlogical Garden.

37. PACHYNOLOPHUS CALCICULUS COPE.
Lophiodon calciculus Cope.
American Naturalist, 1880, p. 747.

Represented by lower jaws of two specimens. Transverse crests of
inferior molars not connected by oblique ridges. Last true molar with
a very small tubercle-like heel. A weak external basal cingulum ;
enamel smooth. Third and fourth premolars with wide heels, each
with a single low ridge. Length of molar series, .053; of true molars,
.033 ; of last true molar, .014 ; depth of ramus at penultimate molar, .025;
diameters of penultimate superior molar at No. 2, antero-posterior, .012,
transverse, .014.

This species is referred to Pachynolophus from its analogy to the P.
ventorum in most respects.

38. PACHYNOLOPHUS VENTORUM Cope.
Lophiodon ventorum Cope, American Naturalist, 1880, p. 747.

Larger than the last, and differing in having a large heel of the last
true molar, and an elevated external tubercle on the heel of the fourth
premolar. Enamel wrinkled; no external cingulum. Second premolar
with a very short heel with an acute tubercle. Length of molar series,
.064; of true molars, .040; of last true molar, .016; depth of ramus at
second premolar, .020; at third true molar, .030. Seven individuals in
the collection, one with complete series of maxillary teeth. These in-

198 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [ Vol. VI.

clude four premolars (the first one-rooted), so that the formula M. 4 3 is
that of Pachynolophus Pom. rather than of Lophiodon. I refer another
species to the same genus, by analogy, as it agrees in the dentition of
the inferior jaw.

39. HYRACOTHERIUM ANGUSTIDENS Cope.

Apparently an abundant species. There are three sizes which I refer
here, which may represent different species, but this cannot be deter-
mined without better material :

A. Depth of ramus at last premolar or first true molar, .0120; length
of crown of first true molar, .0070; length of last true molar, .0100.
Lower jaw of one specimen.

B. Depth of ramus, .0140; length of first true molar, .0065; of last
molar, .0100. One lower jaw.

C. Depth of ramus, .0155; length of first true molar, .0075; of last
true molar, .0100. Two individuals.

Portions of lower jaws of three other individuals in the collection are
apparently referable to the H. angustidens.

40. HYRACOTHERIUM VENTICOLUM sp. nov.
Hyracotherium vasacciense Cope, American Naturalist, 1880, p. 747; not Report
Expl. Surv. W. of 100th Mer. iv, p. 264.

Represented by an entire skull, with some bones of the skeleton, of
one individual.

In general, this species is to be distinguished from its near ally, the
H. vasacciense, by the slender mandibular ramus. The depth of this
bone is about equal to that found in the larger varieties of the H. angus-
tidens, but the teeth are much larger, having the proportions of those of
the H. vasacciense. This remark applies especially to the last inferior
molar.

The inferior canines form part of an uninterrupted series with the
incisors. The superior canine is separated from the superior incisors
by a diastema. The first premolar in both jaws is isolated. The second
superior premolars have two cusps, and an internal ledge posteriorly.
The third and fourth superior premolars are similar, the fourth display-
ing a little larger transverse diameter. The true molars are of subequal
dimensions. Their external cusps are subconic. All the molars except
the first and second premolars are entirely surrounded by a basal cin-
gulum, which rises into a low cusp at the anterior external angle of the
crown. The third inferior premolar has its two median cusps well
separated and a wide posterior heel. The heel of the last premolar is
wider, but carries no internal cusp. The external cusps on all the teeth
wear into well-defined Vs. The posterior five molars have an external
basal cingulum, but no other.

The mandibular ramus is compressed. The ascending ramus rises
almost vertically a short distance posterior to the last molar. The sym-
physis is narrow, and extends to below the middle of the first premolar.
The infraorbital foramen opens above.

No. 8.] COPE ON EOCENE VERTEBRATA OF WIND RIVER. Sg,

Measurements.
M.

Length of consecutive superior molars.......---..---- SEAM Spoccetccde cerisccee . 04500
Length of diastema between Pm. I and II ........... sidisia Weln alata setetetare(aetstshelea= . 00350
MenPTaOL ScGONd PromOlal sa citalscsuce cisieewiscbece ascses secesedacsealasiicasee . 00700
Width of second premolar posteriorly -..---- 2.222 .---20 e200 eee enn e ee ween . 00500
Diameters fourth premolar} anteroposterior Se ee ee eee Oe) Oe Oe, OO ee eee oe a ee 00700
UDPTDRWGHS) 400550 shan Seca COOUUOOCOOUn Goce Basacesee . 00900

Diameters second true molar} ANLELOPOSLETIOT ------ 20a eno no so--ae eae ona ne - 00850
HLA SVCTSO lees ererisivielsione siete oe) oles alo eletetararatalaretatete . 01120

Length of entire inferior premolar series....---.--.--- e200 eee ne wees eee n ee cone . 05800
Length of entire inferior true molar. .. ..-. .-...---2- eneees o----- enne-------- + 00282
Diameters first true molar } amteroposterior.----. ----+2e-e-----ec0e-------- + 00800
TERI GLE ooagne choo GonDoD CoeDopOoDooe Hoeenocee . 00600

Diameters last true molar } HEARST DOU ERAEIE coe coc ce coat Hosea aReRoy ca Oak: a
HEPES sScono Geass coDoKO cono oe ononsed aobes . 00650

Depth of ramus at fourth premolar..--.. ..-.-. .----.--- 220 coe eee eee eee eee ee . 01650
Depth of ramus at third true molar in front ......---.--..---2+--2-2--------- . 01650

The lower jaw of a second individual agrees with the type in its pro-
portions.

41. HYRACOTHERIUM CRASPEDOTUM Cope.
American Naturalist, 1880, p. 747.

Size of H. tapirinum, but the tubercles of the inferior molars are not
connected by cross-crests, and they all possess a strong external basal
cingulum, which also extends round on the posterior base of the I and IT
true molars. Heel of fourth premolar with a diagonal ridge; two ante-
rior cusps well separated, and no tubercle in front of them. Second
premolar with narrow heel; last true premolar with wide heel. Length
- of molar series, .056; of true molars, .033; of last molar, .014; depth of
ramus at second premolar, .018; at last true molar, .023.

This is the largest species of the genus found in the Wind River beds.
Parts of two individuals were obtained by Mr. Wortman.

42, OROTHERIUM VINTANUM (‘ Marsh”) Cope.
Report Expl. Surv. W. of 100th Mer. iv, p. 255.
A portion of the mandible of a single specimen, containing the charac-
teristic fourth premolar and other teeth.

ARTIODACTYLA.

A species of this order is represented by an astragalus. This is the
first indubitable evidence of the existence of this order during the
Wasatch epoch that I have seen. The following species are referred
here provisionally only, as no part of their skeletons is known.

43, PHENACODUS VORTMANI Cope.
Hyracotherium vorimani, American Naturalist, 1880, p. 747.
This species is represented by portions of mandibles of four individ-
uals. One of thesesupports the posterior four molars, another the pos-
terior two, and another the last premolar and first true molar.

200 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [ Vol. VI.

These indicate an animal of much smaller size than the P. primevus,
but with a similar constitution of the molar teeth. The teeth support
four conic cusps, which do not incline to fuse transversely, as is gener-
ally the case in Hyracotherium. Those of the posterior pair are sepa-
rated by a tubercle, and a rudimental tubercle stands behind the notch
between those of the anterior pair. The posterior median tubercle
is developed into a heel on the last molar. On prolonged wear, the re-
sulting pattern represents two Vs, the posterior limb of the posterior
being regularly convex backwards. There are no cingula on any of the
molars. The ramus is rather robust and is not deep.

Measurements.
No. 1.
M.

Length of bases of posterior five molars-.-..-.-.------------------- Rise aeaee . 0440
Length of bases of true molars....--.-..----.------ sees bdSse SS sSbseesc == - - 0250
Depibiof camus ao em. ellos ee eee see a eeeeae ee aele ees ee eof eee . 0160
Depth of ramus ah. Min tront cess sess ae eee alee ee eee . 0190

No. 2.
Motors of Mi. i anteroposterior. ..< - 612s .1csece aces sae se aneee eee . 0080
tAMSYVCISC 4-3 ~ -sseqceds ek ca)ss bene jes techie cca ee ee ORG
Minimotors ol ML i ANGELO POSteLOl s2 a sae ais-2 oe sisee se cee ae eee eee . 0080
: ELANSVOISO: .. 2 w Lose Succ ceSesees «aQss0 -5c62 .35e eee . 0055

The characters of the typical specimen are as follows: The jaw frag-
ment indicates an animal of about the size of the Hyracotherium craspe-
dotwm, but with the opposite cones of the inferior molars not united by
cross-crests. There is a tubercle between the posterior pair of the first in-
ferior true molar. The anterior tubercles of the fourth premolar are close
together, and there is a strong cusp anterior to these. No basal cingulum
on this tooth. Length of molars 3+ 4+ 5, .025; depth of ramus at
Pm. IV, .018.

44, PHENACODUS PRIMZVUS Cope.

A fragment of a lower jaw, with teeth.

45, PHENACODUS TRILOBATUS Cope sp. nov.

A lower-jaw fragment, supporting the three true molars, of one indi-
vidual, represents this species. It is of the dimensions of the P. prime-
vus, and displays the same general constitution of the teeth. The only
difference noticeable is an important one. The anterior internal tuber-
cle is accompanied by two others of less elevation—the one immediately -
anterior, the other immediately posterior to and not deeply separated
from it. The internal face of these tubercles slopes obliquely outwards
on the second and third true molars. The external tubercles have their
external faces sloping inwards on all the true molars. There are no
cingula.

No. 8] COPE ON EOCENE VERTEBRATA OF WIND RIVER. 201

Measurements.
M.
BENET MVOL LENOIINO LAL SOLIS scumavicscccecccces sauces coc-ssccerapecueeauearede 2 0390
Bleiricrs af fest tide wolat ; ARTELOPOStETIOY . 266. cos. ccs cuss coedieuh o scow>s 9107
TUADAVORAG: 5 soc \cn Scene ch deakeu ool » «besser ~0097
‘ F ANLELOPOSOTIOL |. swicciees o% viele spe bewlpaoMeebe aio » 0130
Diameters of third trae molar § TLADSVOLSCMD ICON satin os) cemopaie cco comeriacee 0100

GENERAL OBSERVATIONS.

Until the faunsz of the Wasatch and Bridger epochs are better known
it will not be possible to fix the relation which that of the Wind River
beds holds to them. It is, however, quite evident that in some respects
it differs from both, both by what it possesses and what itlacks. In
the following lists these differences are displayed so far as they relate

to genera. The left-hand column represents the Wasatch, the middle

the Wind River, and the right hand the Bridger.

Wasatch.
Clastes

Crocodilus.
Plesiarctomys.

Calamodon.
Esthonyx.
Ectoganus.

Didymictis.
Oxyena.
Pachyena.
Stypolophus.

Pantolestes.
Pelycodus.

Coryphodon.

? Pachynolophus.
Hyracotherium.
Orotherium.

Phenacodus.

Wind River.
Clastes.
Pappichthys.
Crocodilus.
Plesiarctomys.

Vesperugo.
Calamodon.
Esthonyzx.

Ictops.

Miacis.
Didymictis.

Protopsalis.
Stypolophus.
Microsyops.
Pantolestes.
Pelycodus.

Coryphodon.
Bathyopsis.

Palceosyops.

Lambdotherium.

Pachynolophus.
Hyracotherium.
Orotherium.

Phenacodus.

Bridger.
Clastes.
Pappichthys.
Crocodilus.
Plesiarctomys.
Myops.

2 Vesperugo.

Anchippodus.
?Ictops.
Mesonyx.
Miacis.

2

9

2

2
Stypolophus.
Microsyops.
Pantolestes.

9
Tomitherium.

Anaptomorphus.

Uintatherium.
Paleosyops.
2

2

?
Hyrachyus.

202 §§BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [VoniVE

From the above it is evident that the Wind River fauna:in-
cludes genera which have been hitherto restricted to either the W4a-
satch or Bridger lists. Of these, especially Bridger genera, there are
six;. that is, six genera which have not yet been detected in beds of the
Wasatch epoch. On the other hand, there are nine genera which have
been found in Wasatch beds and not in those of the Bridger. Three
important Wasatch genera have not been found in the Wind River
formation, while seven of the characteristic genera of the Bridger are
not included in the list of those of the Wind River. The result, imper-
fect as it is, indicates a considerably greater conformity to the Wasatch
epoch than to the Bridger in the faunal characters of the Wind River
beds, and points to the confirmation of Dr. Hayden’s views as to the
identity of the two epochs.

The new species above described will be fully illustrated in the fourth
volume of the.Report of the United States Geological Survey of the Ter-
ritories, F. V‘-Hayden in charge, now passing through the press.

vo ON Rhee

a hit dee iy

ie

BULLE EN No ds VOI Nie

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

ART. L—The Vegetation of the Rocky Mountain Region, and a com-

parison with that of other parts of the world. By Asa
Gray and Joseph D. Hooker. pp. 1-78. |

ART. II.—On some new Batrachia and Reptilia from the Permian
Beds of Texas. By E. D. Cope. pp. 79-82.

ART, HI.—On' a Wading Bird from the Amyzon Shales. By E. D.
Cope. pp. 83-85.

ART. IV.—Osteology of Speotyto Cunicularia var. Hypogea. By R.
W. Schufeldt, Acting Assistant Surgeon, U. S. Army.
pp. 87-117.

ART. V.—Osteology of Eremophila Alpestris. By R. W. Schufeldt,
Acting Assistant Surgeon, U.S. Army. pp. 119-147;

ART. VI.—Preliminary List of the North American Species of Agrotis,
with descriptions. By A. R. Grote. pp. 149-164.

ART. VII.—On the Nimravide and Canide of the Miocene Period. By
E. D. Cope. pp. 165-181. |

ART. VUI.—On the Vertebrata of the Wind River Eocene Beds of Wyo-

ming. By HE. D. Cope. pp. 183-202.

DHPARTIMENT OF THER INTHRIOR.
UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL AND GEOGRAPHICAL SURVEY.
F. V. HAYDEN, U. 8. GEOLOGIST-IN-CHARGE.

BULLETIN

OF

THE UNITED STATES

GEOLOGICAL AND GEOGRAPHICAL SURVEY

VOLUME VI....-.NUMBER 2.

WASHINGTON:
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE.
September 19, 1881.

THE TERRITORIES.

BULLETIN

OF THE

UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL AND GEOGRAPHICAL SURVEY
OF THE TERRITORIES,

VOLUME VI. 1881. NUMBER 2.

Art. EX.—Annotated List of the Birds of Nevada.

By W. J. Hoffman, M. D

PREFATORY NOTE.

The present paper is based partly upon notes and observations made
in Nevada during the field season of 1871, The northernmost point vis-
ited was Bull Run Mountain, from which locality the several field parties _
spread toward the west and east in their southward journey, the former
crossing the State line and entering California near the 118th meridian,
while the latter continued nearly southward along the 115th meridian to
Gold Mountain, thence westward to Owen’s Valley, California, from which
point one party travelled irregularly toward the southeast, crossing
Death Valley, Armagosa and part of the Mojave Deserts to Fort Mo-
jave, continuing the journey up the Colorado River, by boat, to a point
beyond the State boundary. The other party, upon leaving Owen’s
Valley, continued nearly eastward along the “Old Spanish Trail” as
far as Saint George, Utah. The greater portion of the southern interior
of the State consists of arid deserts, which, together with our unavoid-
ably forced marches, permitted but little work to be accomplished in
ornithology.

To complete the list as far as possible I have quoted from the reports
of several prominent authorities who visited the localities beyond the
one just described. They consist of—I, that furnished by Mr. Ridgway,
whose observations extended over an area about 70 miles in width, be-
ginning at parallel 39° at the southeastern limit to that of 42° at the
northeastern, including most of the northern portion of Nevada; II,
Mr. Henshaw’s observations in the vicinity of Carson City ; III, the notes
furnished by Mr. Henshaw and Dr. Yarrow regarding the fauna of South-
eastern Nevada in connection with a list of the birds of Utah; and IV,
the observations of Dr. Cooper, at Fort Mojave, Arizona. This military
post is situated upon the elevated eastern bank of the Colorado River,
while about the immediate vicinity of the post the groves of timber oc-

203

204 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

cupy the low bank on the opposite side. The country receding from
either shore is covered to some extent by generally worthless shrubbery,
though northward the valley widens in several places and presents a
pleasing landscape.

Further information regarding the reports of the authorities cited, in
addition to others relating to the birds of the region under consideration,
will be found by reference to the Appendix.

W. J. HOFFMAN, M. D.

WASHINGTON, D. C., February, 1881.

REMARKS ON THE DISTRIBUTION OF VEGETATION IN NE-
VADA AS AFFECTING THAT OF THE AVI-FAUNA.

There is probably no other area of like extent within’the confines of
the United States that presents a greater variety of physical features
than Nevada; and as the distribution of birds is closely correlated with
that of the vegetation, it becomes a matter of propriety as well as of in-
terest to refer to the subject more fully than would under ordinary cir-
cumstances be necessary. Extending from latitude 35° to 42° north,
aud from longitude 114° to 120° west, this region embraces about 112,000
Square miles of surface, presenting nearly every variety of geologic con-
figuration and condition of soil, from the fertile and cultivated valley to
the parched and arid desert, exhibiting also extreme forms of vegeta-
tion, from the lichens of the zone of perpetual snow to the sub-tropic va-
rieties of Cactacece, &c.

The average altitude of Nevada is about 5,600 feet. The greatest de-
pression—which receives all the drainage of the northern half of the
State—is located in the western portion, while toward the east there is
a gentle rise in elevation, as well as southward, until at a point between
Mount Nagle and Mount Magruder, when the descent toward. the Colo-
rado River and the Mojave Desert becomes. more rapid. Throughout
the northern portion the water-courses are more numerous, furnishing
an abundant flora, while in the southern half of the State there exist
immense areas which are nearly, if not totally, destitute of vegetation,
with scarcely any indications of moisture save an occasional spring of
brackish or saline water; here also we find the ridges and mountain
peaks with scarcely any arboreal growth, unless their summits penetrate
the zone of Conifere. |

In a previous paper* on the distribution of vegetation in portions of
Nevada, &c., the flora was divided into four distinct classes, viz: I, the -
flora of the mountains; II, the flora of the foot-hills; III, the flora of
the plains ; and IV, theflora of thesaltmarshes. ‘To these may be added
the aquatic, as well as other subdivisions of which further notice will

7

*Am. Nat. x, 1877, pp. 336-343.

No. 2.) HOFFMAN ON THE BIRDS OF NEVADA. 205

be of no special interest in this connection. In addition to the fact that
the timber-line increases in elevation as the latitude decreases, every
other succeeding zone of vegetation follows in regular sequence.

The following table, representing a series of prominent localities
arranged according to latitude from the extreme northern portion of,
Neyada southward and slightly eastward to a point in Arizona, will
serve to illustrate this fact more distinctly :

Altitude ; ‘Elevation of
Locality. Latitude. | above sea- Hievauion of |” surround-
level. im Der-nnes |. ing san

o ! Feet. Feet. Feet.
Compe Dermitiiie cassie occas cise scesee accel aesi-ie= 42 58 ATOOR | preceitate ieee [-ceuieeece
SIMON NOUNCAIN ce )-\2 csc acca kemeacascacaes ccc 41 40 8, 450 8, 300 5, 800
ERG S POC UPEM ULB eta c/a = a fercrermiwisimreratepnysielatwtereietelessiareieinicias 39 30 9, 650 9, 400 6, 000
XG HMAOMUMG ODRe Anne Pele Scie asicicdaciiedie wae cacleselew ca 82 40 12, 000 9, 700 7, 000
Avior eth: NICHE SERA BDSSaaBaoSHo ES esocecoAEeOooneroeae 37 46 11, 000 *11, 000 7, 200
Wok aycveig sy IY Heaifeg eves C2) ee ae ae Sa a ee aN 37 40 11, 500 11, 150 7, 200
San Francisco Mountain (Arizona) ....-......----. 35 13 13, 500 f ne ae Ci on

* The summit of Mount Nagle does not reach the altitude of the timber-line.

tSan Francisco Mountain is referred to as illustrating the elevation of the timber-line in its southward
course, there being no peak in Nevada, south of Mount Magruder, of sufficient height to do so.

tCamp McDermitt is located near the motith of a cation formed by a break in the Santa Rosa Mount-
ains, through which runs a very clear and pure stream, known as the East Branch of Quinn’s River.
(Report of the Hygiene of the United States Army, &c., Circular No. 8, War Department, Surgeon-
General’s Office, Washington, 1875, p. 514.)

If we take, for example, the zone of Conifere at any given point in
the northern portion of the State, as at Bull Run, we find the timber-
line at an elevation of about 5,800 feet, while the lower range of the
trees composing this belt terminates irregularly where the mountain
mahogany—Cercocarpus ledifolius—begins, presenting a thickness in
altitude of perhaps 2,000 feet. When this zone is again examined at
one of the southernmost peaks, we find the timber-line to have risen to
more that 11,000 feet above sea-level, or more than 5,200 feet above the
altitude of the same line at Bull Run. In the mean time, the mountain
mahogany—which had existed at Bull Run as but a narrow zone anil
rested upon one composed chiefly of Salicacie—has been replaced by
the coniferous trees above and the salicaceous below, but the latter has
also risen with the preceding, as do the zones succeeding the latter, e. 7.,
Composite, Artemisic, &c. The Artemisia at Mount Magruder, instead
of occupying the plains as at Bull Run, covers the foot-hills, while the
lower slopes show numerous examples of Yucca brevifolia, Cactacee, &c.,
these zones having risen in elevation with their predecessors, so that
the plains present species not found north of this latitude, while south-
ward this new zone again rises ia elevation, again presenting a still
newer form beneath it, and so on.

The regular and successive elevation of vegetation is more fully repre-
sented in the accompanying illustrations, sections I to V.

The lines of demarcation, indicating the termination of one zone and
the beginning of another, are often abrupt and so remarkably distinct

206 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI

as to be visible from any elevated. point of observation, this being due
to the characteristic coloration of the foliage of plants composing the
zones. Frequently, however, the limit of growth of plants or trees
upon a mountain slope can only be approximately ascertained by ob-
‘serving the altitude where the representatives of two zones appear to
be about equal, and either way from which point the species of one or
the other will begin to predominate in greater number to the exclusion
of the other. This is the case upon the mountains in the southern por-
tion of the State; the lower line of the zone of Conifercee is represented
chiefly by the nut-pine (Pinus monophyllus) and the western cedar (Juni-
perus occidentalis) which, resting upon the upper edge of the zone of
Salicacice, marks the line below which the Pillion Jay (Gymnokitta cyano
cephala) is seldom found, while in the lower zone we find the Robin
(Merula migratoria propinqua), Hammond’s Flycatcher (Hmpidonax ham-
mondt), and Gairdner’s Woodpecker (Picus pubescens gairdneri), which
may be considered peculiar to that zone and seldom ascending into the
one above it. In addition to the species just named as characteristic
of, or generally resorting to, the Conifere, are Sialia arctica, Lanivireo
solitarius plumbeus, and Lanius ludovicianus excubitorides.

Although the zone of Salicacic is readily determined, representatives
of it diverge to either side along the the mountain canons where there
is moisture, and sometimes away out into the adjacent plain. The more
common species of trees composing the zone proper, as well as the
branches which follow the water-courses, are the willows, cottonwood,
and aspen; and some of the more prominent species of birds frequenting
them in greater or less number are Dendreca estiva, Geothlypis trichas,
Tachycineta bicolor, Passerina amena, Icterus bullocki, Asio americanus,
Tinnunculus sparverius, &c. These represent only a few of the constant
summer visitors to this wide-reaching zone, but they are confined to cer-
tain elevations and genera of trees composing the zone with more char-
acteristic persistency than most any other species which I had the op-
portunity to note.

Upon the plains in Northern Nevada, where the sage-brush (Artemisia
tridentata) predominates, the characteristic species are Oreoscoptes mon-
tanus, Spizella breweri, Phalenoptilus nuttali, Centrocercus urophasianus,
and most prominently so Amphispiza nevadensis. In the southern inte-
rior of the State O. montanus, P. nuttali, and C. wrophasianus were found
in the same belt of vegetation, which had risen to an elevation of over
8,000 feet, while in the former region the same vegetation occurs mainly
below 6,000 feet.

In the zone of vegetation below the Artemisie, which appears in con-
sequence of the elevation of the latter in the southern part of the State, -
we detect in regular order Yucca baccata, Y. angustifolia, Cacti of vari-
ous sub-genera, and toward the deserts Hriodiction, Algarobia, and Pro-
sopis. Amongst the latter, especially in the regions east, northeast, and
north of Fort Mojave, the avi-fauna is that of the Colorado Valley

Elevation
above
Sea Level

SECTION I. BULL RUN MT.

9,000 ———— -- —— --— ——— — ~—— — —
BO a ey
TW) = SSS SSeS SSS

4 <3 hel esa
6,000 Pall |

SECTION le FIXROSPECT Irie

2 mee ee caterer a Senn ate tip _

Seas ee Woh a ls bho gna coded Bh aass

aD Wim gap nn

are |

Wo. 2.] HOFFMAN ON THE BIRDS OF NEVADA. 207

proper, the species thus far found being mentioned in the list under
their respective names.

There are a number of species, resident during the winter in the
greatest depression of the northwestern portion of the State, which as-
sume a vertical migration during the summer, crossing the different zones
until they reach the cooler wooded summits of the mountains. The most
prominent examples are Regulus callendula and Certhia familiaris ameri-
cana. Species whose vertical range is very great, though not resident,
are Merula migratoria propinqua, Pyranga ludoviciania, Picus villosus
harrisi, Selasphorus platycercus, and Colaptes auratus mexicanus.

Over the arid deserts of the northern half of Nevada, three species
appeared common, viz, Hremophila alpestris chrysolema, Zenidura caro-
linensis, and Corvus corax carnivorus. The occurrence of Trochilus colu-
- bris at an elevation of 9,700 feet (near the timber-line) is only consistent
with what has been stated before regarding the elevation and distribu-
tion of the several zones of vegetation as marking the limit beyond which
certain species of birds do not usually pass. In the tropics this species
has been detected at an altitude of 14,600 feet, the altitude of the same
zone, while its northern and southern migrations extend respectively to
latitude 61° and Tierra del Fuego. That certain species of birds extend
over a great vertical range in the tropics is well known, and this can
readily be attributed to the great altitudes at which the several zones
of vegetation are found in that region, which ascend from both the north-
ern and southern parallels of latitude, to which von Humboldt refers in
the following passage: “The great elevation attained in several tropical
countries, not only by single mountains but even extensive districts,
enables the inhabitants of the torrid zone to behold also those vegetable
forms which, demanding a cooler temperature, would seem to belong to
other zones. Elevation above the level of the sea gives this cooler temper-
ature even in the hottest parts of the earth, and cypresses, pines, oaks,
berberries, and alders nearly allied to our own cover the mountainous
districts and elevated plains of Southern Mexico and the chain of the
Andes at the equator.”*

The zones of vegetation characteristic of the upper portion of Mexico
occur in the tropics at altitudes corresponding to the mean temperature
of the former localities, which would place the outside limit of elevation
at about 10,000 feet. M. Becquerel says: ‘In the equatorial zone no
change is observed in the vegetation from the level of the sea to the
height of 600 metres (1,969 feet), and beyond this even to an altitude of
1,200 metres (3,937 feet) we still recognize the flora of the tropical zone.” t

From the preceding remarks it will be observed that the absence of
birds in large areas of Nevada, and their abundance in certain locali-
ties, can mainly be attributed to the peculiar distribution of the vege-
tation. With the birds as with insects, particularly the Coleoptera,

* Aspects of Nature, &c. Tr. by Mrs. Sabine. Philada., 1849, pp. 245, 246.
tSmithsonian Report, 1869, p. 401.

208: BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURWEY. [Vol. VL

if an area of vegetation, composed of a certain class, be found, we gen-

erally know what may be expected as typival of,that area. The greater

altitudes attained in the Rocky Mountains have furnished additional

facts regarding the breeding of certain species which may truly be con- |
sidered sub-alpine when compared with their northward range. Future
investigations will throw much light upon this subject, especially so in
connection with the region under consideration.

LIST OF BIRDS.
TURDIDA.

Hylocichla ustulata (Nutt.) Baird.—Russet-backed Thrush.

Appears to be a rare visitor in Nevada, Mr. Ridgway having obtained
but a single specimen not far from the eastern base of the Sierras, in
the Truckee Valley. It occurs more frequently, according to this ob-
Server, in the pine-elad regions of the mountains.

Hylocichla ustulata swainsont (Caban.) Ridgw.—Olive-backed Thrush.

Was found by Mr. Ridgway in the eastern portion of the State at the
East Humboldt Mountains. No specimens were noted in the interior of
Nevada.

Hylocichla unalasce (Gmel.) Ridgw.—Dwarf Thrush.

Of rare occurrence. Mr. Ridgway secured but one specimen at Trout |
Creek, Upper Humboldt Valley, and Dr. Cooper saw but a few in the
Colorado Valley, where they seem to remain only for the winter, and none
after April 1.

Merula migratoria propinqua Ridgw.—Western Robin.

Usually found in abundance along the timbered bottom lands of the
upper portion of the State. During breeding season occur in the tim-
bered mountains, as at Bull Run, where these birds were building dur-
ing the latter part of May, although the snow had not all disappeared in
the ravines about the foot-hills. Mr. Ridgway found this species ex-
tremely abundant in the vicinity of Carson City from the middle of
March until the middle of April, and again in the valley of the Truckee,
below the “ Big Bend,” in August, being attracted thither by the fruit
of the buffalo-berry (Shepherdia argentea). According to Dr. Cooper but
few came about Fort Mojave during the winter, though flocks are said
to wander as far south as Fort Yuma.

The Robin is said to be a winter resident, selecting the underbrush,
willows, and cottonwoods fringing the streams. The only difference be-
tween this and the eastern species is the general pallor of the plumage, —
for which it has been distinguished as a geographical race, and for which
Mr. Ridgway at first proposed the name Turdus migratorius propinquus,
Ridg.*

* Bull. Nuttall Ornith. Club, v. ii, 1877, p. 9.

Elevation
above
Sea Level.

SECTION IV. MT. NAGLE

iM) s22Sseeceassece saa aN

SECTION V. MT. MAGRUDER

Illustrating the Distribution CONIFERA. C.LEDIFOLIUS. SALICACIA.
OF THE
PREDOMINATING VEGETATION Anavvert “
ON SOME OF THE COMPOSITA. ARTIMISIA.- CACTACEA., YUCCA
MOUNTAINS OF NEVADA.
Es R by ye x Bb a Ss hy by oe
PROSOPIS. Y. BREVIFOLIA.

VERTICAL SCALE. (RARE)
1000 2000 3060 4000 Sooo

FEET.

2 ’ .

ere
FM ra a

71

Te ORS aRE Se FAN
o - fe ot, +

No. 2.] HOFFMAN ON THE BIRDS OF NEVADA. 209

Hesperocichla nevia (Gmel.) Baird.—Varied Robin.

This species is distributed more particularly over the northwestern
coast region of the United States, thence northward to Alaska. Lieu-
tenant Ives’ party procured one specimen in the Colorado Valley in 1858,
which thus far seems to limit its southern range. Dr. Cooper found it
in the lower portion of California in winter, and states that it is very
probable that some breed in the evergreen forests of the north, as they
do near the mouth of the Columbia, and that in October they come down
to the valleys, and are quite common in winter near San Francisco. Mr.
Henshaw* says: “ A male of this species which I saw confined in a cage
in a store in Carson City was said by the owner to have been captured
during the previous spring (1876) in the adjoining mountains. For this
statement I cannot vouch, but give it for what itis worth.” This thrush
had not been recorded from any locality east of the Sierras, except-
ing four instances of its occurrence on the Atlantic coast, all within a
limited area, though, as Mr. Henshaw says, there seems to be no reason
why during the migrations, as in the case of other birds possessing a
similar summer habitat, the species may not occur along the eastern
slope. Since the above notes were published by Mr. Henshaw the fol-
lowing has been received from him regarding this species :t “‘ In winter
occurs along the eastern slope [of the Sierras] and is found in Nevada
at the base of the mountains at least as far south as Carson; leaves for
the north about the first of April.”

Oreoscoptes montanus (Towns.) Baird.—Mountain Mockingbird; Sage
Thrasher.

Of frequent occurrence throughout the northern and middle sections
of the State; found in the valleys amongst the sage-brush, though
usually in greater numbers in the vicinity of streams, as in Independ-
ence Valley, Humboldt Valley, near Mineral Hill, and Deep Spring
Valley. Mr. Ridgway records Carson City, Austin, and the Humboldt
Valley, at Oreana, as localities. None were again seen south of Bel-
mont, though favorable localities were found.

Mimus polyglottus (Linn.) Boie.—Mockingbird.

The Mockingbird found on the Pacific coast appears, according to Dr.
Cooper, “ to form a peculiar variety, differing from the eastern in being
larger and having the tail more graduated, besides some minor differ-
ences of color.” At Fort Mojave this species was rare in March, and so
shy that no shot could be had at them. The same observer further
states that they were common in May along the Mojave River, and west-
ward to San Diego.

*Ann. Rep. Geog. Sur. west of the 100th meridian. Being Appendix N N of Ann,
Rep. Chief of Eng’rs, 1877, p. 1315.
1 Letter dated December 5, 1878.

14GB

210 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI

Harporhynchus redivivus lecontei (Lawr.) Coues.—Leconte’s Thrasher.

Dr. Cooper states that he secured two near Fort Mojave, along the
route in the Colorado Valley to the San Bernardino Mountains. Dr.
Coues secured a specimen in 1865, about 15 miles east of the Colorado
River, at a point a little above Fort Mojave. Itis very probable that
the species will yet be recorded from within the limits of Nevada, as
the valley in the vicinity of, and northward from Fort Mojave contains
considerable shrubbery and groves of cottonwoods; as well as the more
elevated portions of the valley and the sandy foot-hills contain an
abundance of Cacti, Algarobia, Yucca brevifolia, &c., certainly not pre-
senting the most pleasing aspect, but affording sufficient retirement to
birds during the breeding season.

Harporhynchus crissalis Henry.—Rufous-vented Thrasher.

Dr. Cooper found this species rather common at Fort Mojave, but
very shy. At Cottonwood Island, and again near the mouth of the
Black Cation, several specimens were seen, which, from our position in
the boat, appeared to resemble this species. They had been flying from
bush to bush at some distance ahead of us, when at the first break in
the undergrowth they disappeared.

CINCLIDA.

Cinclus mexicanus Swains.—American Water Ouzel.

Mr. Ridgway reports this species as occurring in the West Humboldt
Mountains and the Truckee River, east of the Sierras. I have met with
it only on the western slope of the Sierra Nevada, in a cation leading
down toward King’s River. The large stream rushing down this
rocky channel was fed by the lakes of snow water near the summit,
and seemed a favorite resort, especially about the deeper pools imme-
diately below the successive falls. The cafions leading down the eastern
Slope of the mountains toward Independence were also well watered,
but no specimens were noted, although they may occur.

SAXICOLIDA.

Sialia mexicana Swains.—Californian Bluebird.

This bird was obtained by Mr. Ridgway at Carson City, west of
which locality, according to Mr. Henshaw, it was also observed to be
mumerous among the pines at an elevation of about 7,000 feet, during
September and October. Dr. Cooper states it as a probable summer
resident of the Colorado Valley.

Sialia arctica Swains.—Rocky Mountain Bluebird.

This species was found distributed over the middle and northern por-
tions of Nevada. During the last week in May it was abundant through-
out the timbered hills, especially at Antelope Creek and the mountains

No. 2.] HOFFMAN ON THE BIRDS OF NEVADA. 211

around Bull Run, where it appeared to be confined more particularly
to the areas covered with mountain mahogany. None were observed
south of Hot Spring Cation, 60 miles northeast of Belmont. Mr. Hen-
shaw says “they winter among the pines and in the brushy ravines,”
probably referring to the eastern slope of the Sierras west of Carson
City, where most of his observations were made. Mr. Ridgway found
this bird on the Ruby Mountains in July and August, “only in the upper
portion of the timber belt at an elevation of from 9,000 to 11,000 feet,
where it nested both among the rocks and in the deserted holes of
woodpeckers among the stunted pine, cedar, or mahogany trees. The
same observer also found this species at the East and West Humboldt
Mountains, in the Toyabe Mountains, and Washoe and Truckee Valleys.
Dr. Cooper says it has been found at Fort Yuma in winter. It is very
probable that the species winters in the wooded portions of the Colorado
Valley, north of Fort Mojave, but as the warm weather approaches it
no doubt follows the timbered ranges west of that region, as the country
immediately west and north of the river is a desert region with but few
examples of arboreal vegetation, though instead, furnishing an abund-
ance of Cactacece, Yucca, &e.

SYLVITIDA.

Myiadestes townsendi (Aud.) Caban.—Townsend’s Solitaire.

This species seems to prefer the higher coniferous regions, and is more
frequently found on the Sierras, northward to the Cascade Mountains
and westward, than on the eastern slopes. Mr. Ridgway reports it as
occurring on the timbered interior ranges, especially among the cedar
groves. ;

Phainopepla nitens (Sw.) Scl.—Black-crested Flycatcher.

Mr. Ridgway found this bird in the western portion of Nevada, where
it is supposed to be a rare summer visitor. It was observed, however,
in the valley at the northern slope of Mount Magruder, on the eastern
timbered foot-hills of the Inyo Range, west of Columbus, and again at
Spring Mountain, near the “Old Spanish Trail,” though only at rare in-
tervals. Dr. Cooper found this species numerous on the Colorado in the
winter, and states that they “do not migrate much south of latitude
35°,” leaving again in April for the north. When once seen, this bird
is not easily mistaken for any other species on account of its brilliant
black plumage and the white spot on the spread wings, which become
very prominent and conspicuous in flight.

Polioptila cerulea (Linn.) Sct.—Blue-gray Gnateatcher.

This species is reported from the Colorado Valley, where it was noted
on March 20. Mr. Ridgway remarks: “In the chaparral of the western
foot-hills of the Sierra Nevada we observed in July a species of this

212 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL

genus, in considerable plenty. To all appearance it was the same spe-
cies as that found in the East, but as no specimens were obtained we
cannot be positive that the individuals in question were not P. plumbea.
They were certainly not P. melaneura [californica], which would have been
recognized by its black crown.” The most northern range on the Pacific
coast is fixed at 42° by Dr. Coues, while on the Atlantic seaboard the
Connecticut Valley seems to be the terminus of their eastern migration.
Although not actually reported from Nevada, excepting the instance of
the Colorado Valley—which is not positively definite as to exact loca-
tion—the species is undoubtedly to be found there, as future investiga-
tions may show.

Polioptila plumbea Baird.—Plumbeous Gnatcatcher.

Dr. Cooper gives this as a winter resident about Fort Mojave, in small
numbers, where he procured one in February.

Polioptila californica Lawr.—Black-tailed Gnatcatcher.

This species is only recorded from Fort Mojave, by Dr. Cooper, where
he found it rather common during the whole winter. Mr. Gruber found
it as far north as 39°, on the Sierra Nevada, and it is probable that its
easternmost range in that latitude may bring it down to the foot-hills
into Nevada.

Regulus calendula (Linn.) Licht.—Ruby-crowned Kinglet.

Abundant during the fall months among the pines on the eastern slope
of the Sierras, near Carson City.—(Henshaw.) At this place it was found
most numerous in April—(Ridgway.) The species was also observed at
West Humboldt Mountains and in the Truckee Bottom, near Pyramid
Lake, by the latter authority.

Regulus satrapa Licht.—Golden-crowned Kinglet.

One of the most diminutive of the birds of Nevada, excepting the
Humming Birds, and appears to be rare. Mr. Ridgway observed “a
few individuals in the canons of the West Humboldt Mountains, among
the thick bushes along the streams.”

PARID AL.

Lophophanes inornatus (Gamb.) Cass.—Plain Titmouse.

This species has thus far been reported only from the eastern foot-hills
of the Sierras, where Mr. Henshaw found it “a resident, but not numer-
ous.” Mr. Ridgway also notes its occurrence near the same locality as.
frequenting the cedar and pifon forests.

Parus montanus Gamb.—Mountain Chickadee.

Mr. Ridgway states that ‘the distribution of this species seems to be
governed entirely by that of the coniferous woods; consequently, we

No. 2.] HOFFMAN ON THE BIRDS OF NEVADA. Zio

find it in all pine forests, as well as the more extensive of the pition and
cedar woods on the interior ranges.” Two specimens were collected by
him at Carson City.

Psaltriparus plumbeus Baird.—Lead-colored Tit.

This bird has been noted by Mr. Ridgway as occurring at Carson City,
West Humboldt Mountains, where it was common in September, and
among the cedars on the Virginia Mountains in November, where it was
in company with Gray Titmice (Lophophanes inornatus). In the southern
portion of the State it has not yet been found, although Dr. Cooper thinks
it probable that some come down to the Colorado Valley along the east-
ern branches, where Dr. Kennerly found it; still it is doubtful whether
_ this would bring it within the limits of the State.

Psaltriparus melanotis (Hartl.) Bp.—Black-eared Tit.

On the 4th of August, 1868, we saw near our camp on the eastern
slope of the Ruby Mountains what was unquestionably a bird of this
species, since the black patch on the ear-coverts was distinctly visible.
Its restless movements made ineffectual our attempt to shoot it, and be-
fore we were prepared for another shot it disappeared among the cedar
trees and could not be found again. This we believe is the first known
instance of its occurrence within the limits of the United States, though
it has been obtained near our borders, and is a common bird of the high

mountain portionsof Northern Mexico; but it probably occurs in greater
_ or less numbers in suitable places throughout our southern Rocky Mount-
ains.—(hidgway.)

Auriparus flaviceps (Sundev.) Baird.—Yellow-headed Tit.

This bird is mentioned as occurring at Fort Mojave, where Dr. Cooper
found it in the thickets of Algarobia.

SITTID A.

Sitta carolinensis aculeata (Cass.) Allen.—Slender-billed Nuthatch.

This bird was not observed in any locality within the interior of the
State, and, as Mr. Ridgway states, is strictly confined to the elevated
coniferous regions, procuring several specimens near Carson City.

Sitta canadensis Linn.—Red-bellied Nuthatch.

Like the preceding this species is confined to the dense pine regions.
Mr. Ridgway noticed it in the aspen groves along the streams in the
Upper Humboldt Valley in September, and late in the same month in
the Clover Mountains, at an altitude of nearly 11,000 feet. Lieutenant
Ives’ party found it as far south as Fort Yuma, though this may have
been an exceptional find.

214 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL

Sitta pygmea Vig.—Pigmy Nuthatch.

Also occurs in the elevated pine regions, and appears more abundant
than either S. carolinesis aculeata or S. canadensis. Dr. Cooper notes
one from Lake Tahoe, in the Sierras, as larger than the specimen from
Monterey, Cal., the original locality of the species, though this differ-
ence may have been owing to age. Mr. Ridgway secured specimens at
Carson City from February to April.

CERTHIIDA.

. Certhia familiaris rufa (Bartr.) Ridgw.—Brown Creeper.

Is found in the pine regions during summer, and retires, according to
Mr. Ridgway, to the timbered valleys during the winter. Specimens of
what appeared to be this species were observed at Bull Run Mountain
about May 25. Mr. Ridgway found it more or less common in the val-
leys of the Truckee and Carson Rivers during winter, the date of cap-
ture of his specimen being marked December 7.

TROGLODYTIDZ.

Campylorhynchus brunneicapillus (Lafr.) Gray.—Cactus Wren.

This species was met with only in the sandy deserts, about 30 miles
northwest of Fort Mojave, among the cactus and yucca. Its northern
limit on the Californian side is fixed at about 36°, though on the eastern
side of the Sierras it is noted by Mr. Henshaw as occurring at Saint
George, Utah. In the interior basin it is probably confined more par-
ticularly to the deserts of Southern Nevada, west of the Colorado River,
which abound in cactus in considerable variety and profusion.

Salpinctes obsoletus (Say) Caban.—Rock Wren.

Dr. Cooper notes of this species, “Their song begins to be heard at
Fort Mojave in February, and continues through the spring.” They
probably leave the valley upon the approach of warm weather, follow-
ing the mountains in their northern migration, which extends as far as
the upper boundary of Nevada. Mr. Henshaw states it to be very com-
mon throughout the eastern portions of the State, while Mr. Ridgway
procured specimens in March and April at Carson City, and during Sep-
tember and October in the West Humboldt Mountains.

Catherpes mexicanus conspersus Ridgw.—W hite-throated Wren.

Probably a winter resident of the State, Dr. Cooper finding itin April
at Fort Mojave. Mr. Ridgway states that its distribution and habits
are somewhat similar to the Rock Wren (S. obsoletus), although no speci-
mens are actually mentioned as secured either at the eastern slope of
the Sierras nor at any other locality favorable to its occurrence.

No. 2.) HOFFMAN ON THE BIRDS OF NEVADA. 215

Thryomanes bewicki spilurus (Vig.) Baird.—Californian Bewick’s Wren.

During the winter was observed at Fort Mojave by Dr. Cooper, where
it left, probably for the mountains, in April. Mr. Ridgway noticed what
seemed to be this species at Glendale, Nev., in November. ‘The speci-
men in question was seen among the willows bordering the river, and
disappeared before we could decide whether it was this species or the

Wood Wren (Troglodytes parkmant).”

Troglodytes aédon parkmanni (Aud.) Coues.—Western House Wren.

This bird is widely distributed in Nevada, being found with consider-
able frequency along the interior valleys near the settled districts, and
where shrubbery abounds; was found breeding at Morey in June, the
nest being built in a hollow log projecting from the corner of a deserted
hut. This species is abundantly noted from the upper portions of the
State, specimens being procured at the West and East Humboldt Mount-
ains, Truckee Bottom, and Secret Valley. None were found south of
Belmont after July 1, though the barrenness of the country may have
caused this to some extent.

Anorthura troglodytes pacificus (Baird.) Ridgw.—Western Winter Wren.

As far as known, this species appears to be rare in Nevada. One in-
dividual only was observed by Mr. Ridgway, which he also secured, in
the Truckee Bottom, near Pyramid Lake.

Telmatodytes palustris paludicola Baird.—Tule Wren.

Occurs generally in marshy localities, especially where there is a
growth of tule (Scirpus validus). The southernmost locality where this
species was found was in the valley immediately north of Mount Ma-
gruder, the whole valley being extremely favorable for birds, though
few species were found. It was also found along the head-waters of
the several tributaries of the Humboldt, especially so in Independence
Valley, Maggie Creek, &c. Mr. Ridgway procured specimens in the
Truckee Bottom, and the Meadows.

MOTACILLID i.

Anthus ludovicianus (Gm.) Licht.—American Titlark.

Quite common in the latter part of summer and in the fall in Eastern
Nevada. (Henshaw.) Mr. Ridgway found this species abundant in
winter, in localities of a nature calculated to attract them. “At the
Truckee Meadows they came in immense flocks in November, and
spread over the soggy meadows, where they remained during the mod-
erately cold weather, during the greater portion of the winter, occa-
sionally congregating by thousands about the haystacks and corrals.”
They were also found in moderate numbers at Rose’s Ranch, north of
Battle Mountain, and in the vicinity of Tuscarora during the latter part
of May.

216 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL

SYLVICOLIDZ.

Helminthophaga lucie Cooper.—Lucy’s Warbler.

Although not reported from Nevada, Dr. Cooper, the discoverer of this
species, found it upon the eastern bank of the Colorado River, at Fort

Mojave. It is probable that the bird will yet be found upon the western
shore, the country presenting similar physical characteristics, with a gen-
eral distribution of mesquite and other comparatively worthless vegeta-
tion common to the deserts.

Helminthophaga virginie Baird.—Virginia’s Warbler.

This species was not found west of the Ruby Mountains by Mr. Ridg-
way where it was rather common in July and August, but eastward,
on all the ranges having equally extensive growths of timber. It is not
noticed by Dr. Cooper as occurring in the vicinity of Fort Mojave, but
was found to be a summer resident at Fort Whipple, Arizona, where Dr.
Coues secured a young bird in August.

Helminthophaga ruficapilla (Wils.) Baird.—Nashville Warbler.

Although widely distributed over temperate North America, this bird
seems to be an occasional visitor, if we can judge from the records so
far published regarding it. It was found in Secret Valley, Kast Hum-
boldt Mountains, in September, ‘ where it was more or less common at
that season of the year in the thickets along the streams in the lower
portion of the caions.” (Ridgiway.) The specimen procured by the
gentleman just quoted, furnished the type of H. ruficapilla var. gutturalis
(Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway, Hist. N. A. Birds, i, 1874, 191, pl. xi, fig.
8), characterized “ by the yellow of the throat confined strictly within the
maxille, and not, as in true ruficapilla, covering the cheeks. Should
this peculiarity prove constant, the western birds may be distinguished
by that name.”

Helminthophaga celata (Say) Baird.—Orange-crowned Warbler.

Mr. Ridgway reports this ‘‘as most frequently met with during its
autumnal migration, at which time it was the most abundant of all the
species of the family.” In the fall they are found in the shrubbery of
the lower cations. It is supposed that this species has its western range
at the localities given—Upper Humboldt Valley, at Deering’s Creek—
their greater abundance occurring in the Wasatch Mountains, Utah,
and the Rocky Mountains, still further east.

Helminthophaga celata lutescens Ridgw.—Lutescent Warbler.

The brightly-colored specimens representing this variety were found
by the discoverer to prevail in the western depression of the Great
Basin, but not east of the upper portion of the Valley of the Humboldt.

San es

No. 2.] HOFFMAN ON THE BIRDS OF NEVADA. 217

Dendreca cestiva (Gmel.) Baird.—Summer Yellow Bird.

A summer resident in most favorable localities. Dr. Cooper notes its
arrival at Fort Mojave about the middle of April. I found this species
quite abundant throughout the areas covered by willows and the mount-
ain mahogany, south of the Pacific Railroad, as at Eureka, and the hills
south, east, and west, where streams were found. None were observed
south of Belmont after July 5.

Dendreca auduboni (Towns.) Baird.—Audubon’s Warbler.

As is the case with other species the migrations of this one seem to be
mainly if not entirely vertical, its summer home being, according to Mr.
Ridgway, among the pine forests of the mountains, while during the
winter it retires to the thickets of the lower valleys. In habits it re-
sembles the eastern species, D. coronata, to which it also bears some re-
semblance. In May, June, and July numbers of these birds were noticed
in the more fertile and timbered tributaries of the Humboldt River,
though none were found south of Mount Nagle.

Geothlypis macgillivrayt (Aud.) Baird.—McGillivray’s Warbler.

This bird arrives at Fort Mojave during the latter part of April, where
Dr. Cooper noticed it. Its distribution is general throughout the north-
ern half of the State where the country is favorable, its haunts being in
the fertile valleys and caflons amongst the shrubbery.

Geothlypis trichas (Linn.) Caban.—Maryland Yellow-throat.

Not observed in the lower portions of the State, though it occurs in
the upper part quite frequently. Found in the vicinity of water-courses
in shrubbery ; wherever found they were associated with individuals of
the preceding form, which is the only one found breeding in the mount-
aiDs.

Icteria virens longicauda (Lawr.) Coues.—Long-tailed Chat.

Dr. Cooper notes the arrival of this species from the south about the
20th of April. At the same locality a nest was found on May 19 con-
taining three eggs, besides a parasitic one— Molothrus ater. It breeds in
the upper portions of the State about twenty days later than the time
noted tor the last-named locality. Mr. Ridgway also found this species
scattered across the State, along the line of his journey of observation.

Myiodioctes pusilla (Wils.) Bp.—Black-capped Yellow Warbler.

I have not found any direct reference to the occurrence of this species
in Nevada, except that of Mr. Ridgway’s, who found it a rare summer
resident, though becoming exceedingly numerous inautumn. Its haunts
are nearly the same as those of Dendreca cestiva.

Myiodioctes pusilla pileolatus (Pall.) Ridgw.—Pileolated Warbler.
This variety differs from the true pusilla in the brighter yellow on the
fore parts and the head. Habitat similar to the preceding.

218 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL

Setophaga ruticilla (Linn.) Swains.—American Redstart.

Although not mentioned by any of the authorities who have more
particularly had occasion and opportunity to investigate the distribu-
tion of the avi-fauna of the Great Basin, or more especially that area
under consideration, it is very probable that this species will yet be re-
ported from the eastern part of Nevada, where the country is more favor-
able on account of the well watered and timbered valleys, found near
the head-waters of the various tributaries of the Humboldt River. The
bird has been noticed as occurring in Utah, where Mr. Ridgway found
it common throughout the summer in the Wasatch district, remarking
its abundance also in the valleys and lower portions of the canons, but
not in the mountains. Its western limit extends to the arid, treeless
areas, indicating the eastern borders of the Great Basin proper; still its
occurrence in isolated, though favorable localities, may very possibly
bring it within the limits of Nevada.

VIREONIDZ.

Vireosylva gilva swainsoni Baird.—Western Warbling Vireo.

This species occurs from the willows of the bottom-lands up to within
a short distance of the timber-line. It is also noticed as being widely
distributed, by Mr. Ridgway, who obtained specimens from various local-
ities between the Truckee Valley and Great Salt Lake. Dr. Cooper
says they occupy the country west of the Sierras from San Diego to
Puget’s Sound during the summer, but probably leave the State (Cali-
fornia) in October.

Lanivireo solitarius (Vieill.) Baird.—Blue-headed Vireo.

One specimen was obtained by Mr. Ridgway in September among the
canon thickets of the western slope of the Clover Mountains. Dr. Cooper
found a “few at Fort Mojave, Colorado Valley, after May 14, when they
began to make themselves conspicuous by singing, but in a few days
seemed to have passed away towards the north.” :

Lanivireo solitarius cassini (Xantus), Ridgw.—Cassin’s Vireo.

This rare and little known species was noticed only in the cafions of the
West Humboldt Mountains, where it was not uncommon in September.
Those found had probably migrated from the region tothe northwestward,
or from the Cascade Mountains or the country adjacent.—(Ridgway.)
The points regarding this supposed species as differing from solitarius
are summed up as follows:* “Its much duller and more brownish oliva-
ceous, with little contrast between the head and back, impurity of the -
white loral line and orbital ring, together with a general buffy or ochra-
ceous tinge of the under parts, where solitarius is pure white.” Mr.
Henshaw says of this variety: ‘‘ They were, however, here [Mount Gra-

* Birds of the Colorado Valley, p. 514.

No. 2.] HOFFMAN ON THE BIRDS OF NEVADA. 219

ham, Ariz.| quite rare as compared with solitarius ; but, near Camp Crit-
tenden, the last few days of August, quite a number were seen among
the deciduous trees. Their seeming preference for the deciduous trees
over the coniferous timber is the only point wherein their habits seem
to differ from those of the Solitary Vireo.”

Lanivireo solitarius plumbeus (Coues) All.—Plumbeous Vireo.

This species, belonging more particularly to the Rocky Mountain
region, was found by Mr. Ridgway on the eastern slope of the Ruby
Mountains. According to Mr. Henshaw, it is common during summer
among the pines of the mountains.

Vireo belli Aud.—Bell’s Vireo.

But afew years since Mr. Henshaw secured a single individual on
the Gila River, Arizona, showing its occurrence in the Southwest. If
Dr. Cooper’s notice at Fort Mojave is correct, the species is no doubt to
be looked upon in Nevada as an extremely rare visitor, although Dr.
Cooper’s belli has long been supposed to be V. pusillus.

LANIID A.

Lanius borealis Vieill.—Great Northern Shrike; Butcher Bird.

Noted by Mr. Ridgway at Carson City during February and March,
where it occurred in the sheltered ravines along the foot-hills of the
mountains. This species appeared at all times less common than ez-
cubitorides.

Lanius ludovicianus excubitorides (Sw.) Coues.—White-rumped Shrike.

Dr. Cooper found this bird common at Fort Mojave during the winter,
leaving for the timbered canons and hills in spring. Over nearly the
whole of the area from Bull Run Mountain southward as far as Bel-
mont and westward toward the Inyo Range, California, we found this
species in the higher belts of timber. At Eureka, especially along the
western slope of Prospect Hill among the groves of Cercocarpus, thence
southward toward Hot Spring Cafion, along the densely-covered hills,
this bird was conspicuous, being frequently observed in its search for
food by suddenly darting from a dry projecting branch upon which it
had been patiently and silently watching. In the Valley of the Hum-
boldt, and as far north as Independence Creek, the cottonwood groves
seemed the favorite resort of this bird, a fact due, perhaps, more to the
general abundance of cottonwood trees to the exclusion of pines.

AMPELID.

Ampelis garrulus Linn.—Northern Wax-wing.

The only report regarding this species is that by Dr. Cooper, who saw
it at Fort Mojave in January, 1861, which is the first instance of its oc-
currence in the United States.

220 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI

Ampelis cedrorum (Vieill.) Baird.—Cedar Wax-wing.
Found in the Upper Humboldt Valley in September along the streams
flowing from the Clover Mountains.—( Ridgway.)

HIRUNDINID AL.

Progne subis (Linn.) Baird.—Purple Martin.

Apparently not as common as other species of this family. Mr. Ridg-
way found them at Carson City, and at Virginia City only one individual
was seen on the 18th of June. Dr. Cooper has not seen them in the Col-
orado Valley, although they are common on the Pacific coast at a much
higher latitude, from which they leave for the south in August.

Petrochelidon tunifrons (Say) Lawr.—Cliff Swallow.

This species is usually abundant in the vicinity of rivers, streams,
and even large springs in fertile valleys, as at one locality near the divide
between Deep Spring and Smoky Valleys. In many places against the
face of the limestone cliffs the nests of these birds were built and appar-
ently heaped upon one another in the greatest profusion. Immediately
beneath the ledges, which were vertically about 80 feet high and ex-
tended horizontally for about 100 yards, there was continuation of the
pinion woods visible in every direction, except about an eighth of a mile
below, where the timber ended and the grassy valley stretched away
toward the east. The springs and a small rivulet rising in the hills on
the south were fringed with an abundance of willows and small cotton-
woods, where we first noticed these birds during the afternoon of our
going into camp. The next day, however, we found their habitations,
and even saw the birds flying in all directions over the hills above the
cliff in pursuit of insects, as various localities, though presenting an ab-
sence of timber, were amply covered with various flowering plants upon
and about which there appeared sufficient numbers of lepidoptera and
orthoptera, furnishing perhaps the principal food of these birds in this
portion of the State.

Hirundo erythrogastra Bodd.—Barn Swallow.

Although a species of general distribution, its occurrence in many
portions of Nevada has yet to be recorded. Mr. Ridgway found it most
abundant around Pyramid Lake, while Dr. Cooper reports its passing
Fort Mojave for the north during the last week in May. In the timbered
hills south of Eureka, along a short range of cliffs, were found great
numbers of Cliff Swallow (Petrochelidon lunifrons) who had constructed
their nests in nearly every available spot. Specimens were noticed
amongst the latter, supposed to be erythro HR, but none were secured
so as to definitely wile the question.

Tachycineta bicolor (Vieill.) Caban.—White-bellied Swallow.

Mr. Ridgway found this species on the Wasatch Mountains, at an
altitude of 8,000 or 9,000 feet. Its occurrence in Nevada is also noted,

No. 2.] . HOFFMAN ON THE BIRDS OF NEVADA. 220

more especially throughout the western portion of the State, near Pyra-
mid Lake, Carson City, &c. They are not very gregarious during the
breeding season, and but few are found together at any particular local-
ity at that time, though later in the season they have been found in
large flocks, probably preparatory to migration. Dr. Cooper thinks
this species is to some extent a constant resident in California, a few
wintering in the extreme southern portion.

Tachycineta thalassina (Swains.) Caban.—Violet-green Swallow.

This species is reported from Pyramid Lake and the East Humboldt
Mountains, where Mr. Ridgway found it abundant, and frequented the
cliffs of calcareous tufa, where they were observed to enter the fissures
of the rock to their nests within.

Cotile riparia (Linn.) Boie—Bank Swallow.

Noted by Mr. Ridgway as rather abundant at Truckee Reservation in
May. Found at Provo, Utah, by Mr. Henshaw. This species appears
to associate with the Rough-winged Swallow (Stelgidopteryx serripennis),
its habits being similar, though it is found less abundant.

Stelgidopteryx serripennis (Aud.) Baird.—Rough-winged Swallow.

Dr. Cooper found this species as early as February 27, and Mr. Ridg-
way observed it in April at Carson City, where it was the most abundant
species of the family. I noticed these birds also along the banks of the
Humboldt River, north of Battle Mountain, during the last days of
May, where they are probably summer residents. They build in bur-
rows in the sandy banks, the openings leading to the nests being from
one to two feet below the upper edge of the bank, similar in this respect
to those of the preceding species.

TANAGRID A.

Pyranga ludoviciana (Wils.) Bp.—Western Tanager.

Found rather common in the timbered areas along the water-courses
during the month of June, though later was found in the wooded re-
gions of the interior. Mr. Ridgway states that the note of the young
is like the complaining call of the Eastern Blue-bird (Sialia sialis), but
louder; on the contrary, the song of the adult is scarcely distinguish-
able from that of our P. rubra.

Pyranga estiva cooperit Ridg.—Cooper’s Tanager.

This beautiful bird is reported as quite common in the Colorado Val-
ley, at Fort Mojave. Although resembling to some extent our Eastern
P. estiva, in which the head above is more dusky like the back, the same
region in cooperi is similar to the red of the throat, readily furnishing
the means of identification.

Singular as it may seem, the call-note of this bird, according to Dr.

222 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL

Cooper, is “ Ke-dik,” which, in the Mojave language, means “Come here.” "

«They also sing in a loud, clear tone, and a style much like that of the
robin, but with the faculty of making the sound appear very far dis-
tant, which is a protection to birds of such bright plumage.”

FRINGILLIDA.

Carpodacus cassini Baird.—Cassin’s Purple Finch.
Found in the vicinity of Carson City, and on the East Humboldt
Mountains, by Mr. Ridgway.

Oarpodacus frontalis (Say) Gray.—House Finch.

Found rather common, and generally distributed over the northern
half of the region under consideration. Frequents the settlements,
where it is reported as rather injurious to some forms of vegetation.
The species was observed on the southern slope of Spring Mountain,
near the “Old Spanish Trail,” and has also been noted on the Colorado,
by Dr. Cooper.

Loxia curvirostra americana (Wils.) Coues.—American Crossbill.

Found on the East Humboldt Mountains by Mr. Ridgway, who states
that the species may breed on the higher portions of the loftier ranges
in the interior. Their chief food is obtained from the seed-cones of the
pines, although they are reported as destroying the buds of trees, and
eyen tearing open apples merely to get at the seed. I have noticed
these birds in confinement and watched their manner of picking up
seeds (rape, hemp, and canary), which could only be successfully done
when several layers deep, on account of the apparently deformed bill.
Although not strictly a songstcr when in a wild state, the males learn to
sing very readily, sometimes closely imitating Canaries and other birds
of a similar class, though the voice still retains some of its harshness,
which can be easily noticed. The practice of snaring and trapping
these birds for the market has been rather successfully carried on by a
German bird-catcher in Reading, Pa., for the past six or eight years,
where the observations on the captive specimens were made.

Loxia leucoptera Gm.—White-winged Crossbill.

A male of what was probably this species was noticed by Mr. Ridg-
way on the eastern slope of the Ruby Mountains. He thinks it prob-
able that the species breeds sparingly on the loftier ranges. Mr. Ridg-
way further states that “‘ when first seen, this individual called instantly
to mind the adult male of Pyranga erythromelena, of Mexico and Cen-
tral America, so rich and uniform was the bright carmine-red of the
plumage, while the pure white wing-bands contrasted conspicuously
with the deep black of the wings and tail. It is scarcely possible, how-
ever, that it could have been this southern Tanager, which has not yet
been taken near our southern border. It should be considered, how-

——— we a

No. 2.] HOFFMAN ON THE BIRDS OF NEVADA. 228

ever, that a specimen of Psaltriparus melanotis, also a Mexican bird,
not before detected in the United States, was observed in the same
locality at nearly the same time.”

Considering the abundance of this species in the regions directly
north of Nevada, it is not improbable that its occurrence within the
State limits, upon the elevated ranges, may be rather frequent.

During the present winter (1880~81) I had occasion to visit Pennsyl-
vania, and while in Reading learned that a flock of about twenty indi-
viduals were frequently noticed in the cedar groves on Mount Penn, in
company with the common L. curvirostra americana. One year ago a
-small flock was observed in the same locality, several specimens of
which were secured. The extremely cold weather during the present
season no doubt caused this extreme southern range, as within the past
twenty years, during which time I have been always on the lookout for
northern species, I have neither seen this species, nor heard of its oc-
currence so far south in that portion of the State.

Leucosticte tephrocotis Swain.—Gray-crowned Rosy Finch.

This species has been taken at Lake Tahoe, in the Sierra Nevada
Mountains, and were said to be plentiful there during extremely cold
weather. Captain Stansbury found them common at Salt Lake City in
March, 1850, and it is more than probable that during extremely cold
winter weather they may be found along both sides of the Sierras, from
the Oregon line southward.

Leucosticte tephrocotis littoralis (Baird) Coues.—Hepburn’s Rosy Finch.

This is the largest of the Leucosticte, and the only note of observation
of either of the species occurring in the United States, relating specific-
ally to Nevada, is that given by Mr. Ridgway. He states that “a sin-
gle flock of this species was seen on the 5th of January in the outskirts
of Virginia City, Nev. The flock comprised perhaps fifty individuals,
all busily engaged in gleaning from the surface of the snow, flitting
restlessly over one another in the manner of Lapland Longspurs, at the
same time uttering a twittering note.”

Astragalinus tristis (Linn.) Cab.—American Goldfinch.

Although found to be common in various localities west of the Sierras,
in California, this species does not appear, excepting at rare intervals,
east of that range. The plants furnishing the seeds preferred by this
bird, such as thistles, &c., are of rare occurrence in the dry regions
of Nevada, but where these are found, as on the foot-hills in the southern.
extremity of Smoky Valley, the species was also observed, though there
were less than half a dozen individuals, who may at that time have been
mere migrants.

Astragalinus lawrencei (Cass.) Bp.—Lawrence’s Goldfinch.

Although found in California the occurrence of this species is rare in
the Interior Basin, the only observation being that of Dr. Cooper, who

224 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VIL

saw a few at Fort Mojave, and says it seems more of a sylvan species
than tristis, sometimes feeding on the ground on grass-seeds as well as
on the buds of various plants and trees, but prefer the willows and cot-
tonwoods growing in wet places. Inthe Colorado Valley they fed upon
the seeds of Artemisia, sp. (?)

Chrysomitris pinus (Wils.) Bp.—Pine Goldfinch.

Occur during the summer in all the pine forests. They have the same
gregarious habits as C. tristis, though they rarely descend to the sur-
face vegetation, preferring the pines, feeding upon the seeds of various
coniferous trees, willows, Se.

Centrophanes lapponicus (Linn.) Caban.—Lapland Longspur.

Mr. Ridgway recognized this species during the severe winter weather
among the large flocks of Horned Larks (Hremophila alpestris) around
Carson City. It is probable that during the cold weather they visit the
northern portions of Nevada, as their southern limit east of the Rocky
Mountains extends farther south during similar seasons.

Passerculus sandwichensis alaudinus (Bp.) Ridgw.—Western Savannah

Sparrow.

This variety has been found by nearly all observers throughout the
marshy districts of the northern and middle regions of the State, and
is one of the most abundant of the genus.

This species is chiefly represented on the California coast by anthinus,*
and from the Columbia River northward to Alaska by P. sandwichensis
savanna.t

Poccetes gramineus confinis Baird.—Western Grass Finch.

Abundantly distributed over the plains in the upper portions of the
State, arriving at Carson City, according to Mr. Ridgway, in April.
They migrate southward during the autumn, and have been found a win-
ter resident in the Colorado Valley.

Coturniculus passerinus perpallidus Ridgw.—Western Yellow-winged
Sparrow.
Generally distributed over the valley portions, as Mr. Ridgway found
it, though not near the marshes, like the Savanna Sparrow, but upon
the drier grassy plains. Was found to breed near Eureka.

Chondestes grammica strigata (Sw.) Ridgw.—Western Lark Finch.
- Common in favorable localities over nearly the whole of Nevada. Dr.

Cooper did not find it in the Colorado Valley in the vicinity of Fort Mo-
jave, though it has been obtained at Fort Yuma. :

of the Pacific coast, has a slender bill, and is much more heavily marked below with
small dark and distinct spots.

t P. sandwichensis savanna (Wils.), Ridgw.—This species was found on the Columbia
River in spring and fall only, during their migrations from the north and south.
Dr. Cooper thinks, therefore, that as they were absent from that locality from April to
October, they probably spent the winter in Southern Oregon and California.

No. 2.] ; HOFFMAN ON TIIE BIRDS OF NEVADA. 225

Zonotrichia leucophrys (Forst.)—White-crowned Sparrow.

What Mr. Ridgway now considers to be this species was found by
him breeding very abundantly at Summit Meadows, the highest point
of Donner Lake Pass, in the Sierra Nevada, in July, 1867.

Zonotrichia gambeli intermedi Ridgw.—Intermediate White-crowned

Sparrow.

What Mr. Ridgway thought to be this species was found by him breed-
ing very abundantly at the Summit Meadows; but Mr. Ridgway now
considers it more probable that the bird observed there was Z. leucophrys.
Numerous specimens were also obtained by him in the West Humboldt
Mountains. This species was met with several times in the more south-
ern portions of the State, particularly in the elevated and fertile valleys
just north of Mount Magruder; again, sparingly, east of Spring Mount-
ain, in September.

Zonotrichia coronata (Pall.) Baird.—Golden-crowned Sparrow.

The only specimen seen of this species was captured by Mr. Ridgway,
who states that it was shot from a flock of Z. intermedia. ‘Its oceur-
rence on the West Humboldt Mountains may be accounted for by the
fact that many of the Pacific coast species have a tendency to straggle
eastward during their migrations, among those which reach this range,
besides the bird under consideration, being Melospiza guttata, Pipilo ore-
gonus, Lanivireo cassini, Helminthophaga lutescens, &¢e.”

Spizella montana (Forst.) Ridgw.—Tree Sparrow.

A common species throughout the northern regions, though farther
south was found more sparingly and only in the more elevated and fer-
tile areas. This species is very widely distributed, specimens having
been procured on the Yukon River, where it also breeds. Captain Ben-
dire mentions it as occurring about Tucson during winter; have found
it in Dakota during the winter months, also in Pennsylvania during
February and March.

Spizella domestica arizone (Coues) Ridgw.—Western Chipping Sparrow.

Found generally distributed throughout the wooded districts of the
upper half of the State. Was rarely seen in the Colorado Valley during
September, although Dr. Cooper found it wintering there in large num-
bers.

Spizella brewert Cass.—Brewer’s Sparrow.

Quite common in the northern and middle areas, where it was noticed
more particularly in the vicinity of settlements. In its predilection for
fields or any bushy localities, Mr. Ridgway also found this species a
counterpart of the eastern S. pusilla, which it resembles only in this re-
spect, as its nest and eggs are widely different, being more like those
of S. socialis. Dr. Cooper found small flocks of this species, after the

15GB

226 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

20th of March, frequenting the grassy spots among low bushes, and
thinks they remain in the Colorado Valley during the summer. Dr.
Coues also found it in small numbers at Fort Whipple, where they are
said to breed.

Junco oregonus (Towns.) Sel.—Oregon Snowbird.

Winters in the western portions of Nevada, and has also been noted
in the Colorado Valley during the same season. According to Dr. Coues,
is an abundant winter resident in Arizona, arriving at Fort Whipple early
in October, where they remain until the middle of April. Those remain-
ing in Nevada during the mild winters retire to the Sierra Nevada
Mountains upon the first approach of moderating weather in spring.

Amphispiza bilineata (Cass.) Coues.—Black-throated Sparrow.

Like A. nevadensis this species also occurs throughout the sage-brush
regions in the northern and middle portions of the State, but in the
southern regions was found in the elevated deserts, between Spring
Mountain and the Colorado, containing an abundant growth of Alga-
robia and Yucca baccata. According to Dr. Cooper they descend to the
hills near the Coiorado during the winter.

Amphispiza belli nevadensis Ridgw.—Sagebrush Sparrow.

According to Mr. Ridgway, the distribution of this species seems to
be strictly governed by that of the sage-brush (Artemisia), since it 1s
present in nearly all the districts abounding in this class of vegetation,
while it is apparently wanting in localities of any other character. This
species probably occurs in the Colorado Vailey as far north as Fort
Mojave, it having been observed farther south, and on the Gila in Ari-
zona.

Melospiza fasciata fallax Baird.—Mountain Song Sparrow.

Rather common, though more particularly so in the eastern and south-
eastern portions of the State. Mr. Ridgway’s collection seems to have
been obtained chiefly in Utah, though the Humboldt Valley furnished
some specimens. .

Melospiza fasciata heermanni Baird.—Heermann’s Song Sparrow.

Appears to be more particularly distributed along the extreme border
near the Sierras, while in the eastern portions of the State it appears
to be less common; here fallax occurs and seems to replace it to some
extent. Occurs also in the southern part of Nevada, opposite Fort
Mojave, and westward toward the Pacific coast, where Dr. Cooper
found it.

Melospiza fasciata guttata (Nutt.) Baird.—Rusty Song Sparrow.
Individuals of this variety were met with in the West Humboldt
Mountains by Mr. Ridgway.
The remaining varieties of the ordinary type have been arranged by

No. 2.] HOFFMAN ON THE BIRDS OF NEVADA. 227

Mr. Ridgway and Dr. Coues into gouldii (from the California coast, San
Francisco, and southward), rujina (from the Pacific coast north of Brit-
ish Columba), insignis (from Kodiak and Oonalashka), and mexicana
(from Pueblo, Mexico).

Melospiza lincolni (Aud.) Baird.—Lincoln’s Finch.

Was found during the summer only in the elevated parks of the higher
mountain ranges by Mr. Ridgway, though during its migrations was
abundant in the lower valleys.

Passerella iliaca megarhyncha (Baird.) Ridgw.—Thick-billed Sparrow.

This interesting bird was met with by Mr. Ridgway only in the
ravines of the Sierra Nevada, near Carson City and Washoe. It was
found mostly in damp or swampy places in the lower portion of the
mountains. It is considered as strictly a migrant at the above localities,
arriving from the.south about the 20th of April.

Passerella iliaca schistacea (Baird.) Allen.—Slate-colored Sparrow.

This occurs at the same locality as P. megarhyncha, though earlier,
from which Mr. Ridgway supposes that a few remain over winter, find-
ing shelter in the dense willow thickets along the river. The same au-
thority observed it again in September in similar localities in the Upper
Humboldt Valley.

Pipilo maculatus oregonus (Bell) Coues.—Oregon Towhee.

A straggler of this species was secured in October, 1867, on the West
Humboldt Mountains by Mr. Ridgway.

Pipilo chlorurus (Towns.) Baird —Green-tailed Towhee.

This species was first observed in the upper portion of the State dur-
ing the middle of May, frequenting the shrubbery and trees along the
ravines. This may have been rather an unusual resort, as, according to
Mr. Ridgway, it ordinarily frequents the brushwood and rank herbage
of the flowery slopes, characteristic of the higher mountain regions. In
numerous localities the snow was still upon the ground, especially upon
the northern slopes, the ravines being well timbered with mountain ma-
hogany and pines, thus appearing to furnish the best retreat during the
unexpected recurrence of colder weather. In crossing the divide be-
tween Hot Spring Cafion and Belmont this species was again seen.
According to Dr. Cooper it winters in the Colorado Valley, though
rather sparingly. j

Pipilo aberti Baird.—Abert’s Towhee.

This bird is reported from the Colorado Valley by Dr. Cooper, but as
the latitude is not specified we can only suggest that the observation re-
fers to the vicinity of Fort Mojave, as the gentleman named was sta-
tioned at that post, where most of his investigations were carried on.

228 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL

Zamelodia melanocephala (Swains) Coues.—Black-headed Grosbeak.
Found in the cafons along the northern border of Independence
Valley, and at Bull Run Mountain, from the upper limit of the growth
of mountain mahogany down to the termination of ravines; was again
noticed two miles south of Mineral Hill, but nowhere south of that

| locality. Mr. Ridgway also secured specimens of the species in the West

Humboldt Mountains. Dr. Cooper reports it as a summer Visitor at
San Diego and Santa Cruz, while Dr. Coues states it to be abundant at
Fort Whipple during the summer, remaining as late as the end of Sep-
tember. Has not been reported from the southern portion of Nevada,
although presume it to occur in the elevated regions at Mount Nagle and
Mount Magruder.

Guiraca cerulea (Linn.) Swains.—Blue Grosbeak.

This species was met with in the valley north of Mount Magruder,
and on the western border of Deep Spring Valley, along the base of the
Inyo Range, California. Dr. Cooper saw this bird first at Fort Mojave,
on the 6th of May, although becoming rather more common later, fre-
quenting the trees and bushes along the river.

Passerina amena (Say) Gray.—Lazuli Bunting.

Is found in nearly all fertile regions along the mountain slopes and
valleys. Several specimens secured were found associating with Sialia
arctica at Bull Run Mountain, though they had probably just arrived
there, May 25. Found later in the season throughout the lower interior
portion of the State in the elevated valleys near Mount Nagle, Mount
Magrnder, and Spring Mountain.

Calamospiza bicolor (Towns.) Bp.—Lark bunting.

The discovery of this species in Snake Valley, by Dr. Yarrow, is the
first notice of its occurrence within the borders of the State. Mr. Ridg-

way found one specimen near Parley’s Peak, Utah, and Mr. Henshaw
noted its residence near Zuiii, (?) N. Mex., fale in the Valley of the Gila,
in Arizona. Colorado is aa given as a Tee especially about Fort
Garland, thus presenting a wide geographical range beyond the area of
its original discovery. I found no traces of the species in Northern
Nevada, although the most favorable localities were searched for birds
generally; still it is probable that the species is more generally distrib-
uted over that portion of the State than we have at present any knowl-
edge. My opportunities for observing the habits of this interesting
bird during the breeding season occurred later in the upper portion of
Dakota, especially along Knife River, which appeared to be the only
lecality in that portion of the Territory where the species was common,
or rather occurred at all as far as could be ascertained. The birds were
not so shy as generally reported, and in several instances the men at-
tached to the command actually trod upon the very borders of the

a a

No. 2.) IWOFFMAN ON THE BIRDS OF NEVADA. |. 229

nests before the parent birds would leave them. The nests were gener-
ally built upon the ground near the tufts of grass, thoigh sometimes
within the tufts where not too compact, and constructed rather loosely
of grass, fine rootlets, &c. The eggs number from four to five, and in
a number of instances were found parasitic eggs of Molothrus ater.

The plumage of the males changes nearly to that of the females later
in the season, though I found in several instances, upon male birdssecured *
in June, quite a sprinkling of white feathers about the neck and breast,
as though there might be a tendency toward partial albinism. The
males have a habit of rising a short distance above the nest, over which
they hover while singing, thus acting as a guide, without which many
hours might have been spent in searching for the desired localities. In
the region just referred to the Skylark (Neocorys spraguei) was found a
common associate of this species.

ICTERID 24.

Dolichonyx oryzivorus (Linn.) Swains.—Bobolink; Reed-bird; Rice-bird.

The discovery of this bird in Nevada was made by Mr. Ridgway at
the Overland Ranch, in Ruby Valley, where it was common in August,
in the wheat fields. It was not met with in summer, and itis considered
doubtful by the above author whether it breeds anywhere in the interior
south of the 40th parallel. Mr. Henshaw says it is “rather common in
the fields in the vicinity of Provo, Utah. The parent birds were noticed
feeding their young, scarcely fledged, July 25.”

Molothrus ater (Bodd.) Gray.—Cow-bird; Cow Blackbird.

This species is rare according to the observations of Mr. Ridgway,
but three specimens being noted and obtained by him. Mr. Henshaw
_reports it from Utah, where he secured several specimens in Provo
Canon. Dr. Cooper thinks that a few pass the winter in the Colorado
Valley, and, perhaps, also in the San Joaquin Valley, but he saw none
at any time nearer the coast. Several specimens were seen at Camp
Independence, Cal., in August, but nowhere else during the expedition.
This genus is represented farther south by M. obscurus, but has not been
reported from any locality north of the southern portion of Arizona,
belonging more properly to the Northwestern Mexican fauna.

Xanthocephalus icterocephalus (Bonap.) Bd.—Yellow-headed Blackbird.

This large and handsome bird was found common in all the marshy
regions and grassy meadows from Independence Valley southward to
Fort Mojave, excepting in the southern interior valleys, which appear
too much isolated and constricted. They seem to prefer the cultivated
areas in the vicinity of settlements, and were frequently found in great
numbers in and about the corrals and gardens of the frontier ranches.
The Red-winged Blackbird was usually found in the same region with
this species, though they appeared to breed in settlements by them-

230 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL

selves, mingling more freely while searching for food during the morn-
ing and late afternoon. They are known to winter in the Colorado
Valley, though only in moderate numbers. Mr. Ridgway observed a
few individuals at Carson City during the winter, showing that the
species is only partially migratory. The habit of frequenting the vicin-
ity of settlements was observed, also, on the Upper Missouri, where
these birds were very destructive to the early vegetables in the post
garden.

Ageleus pheeniceus (Linn.) Vieill.—Red-and-buff-shouldered Blackbird.

This bird is common in nearly all the marshy districts of the whole
State, in the northern and middle regions being found in company with
Xanthocephalus icterocephalus. At Grapevine Springs, at the head of
Armagosa River (?), a single male was seen and secured. The most in-
teresting feature of the locality is, that the spring and its outlet covers
less than a mile in length, and is isolated from all other oases by many
miles of desert country. This specimen and one of Tringoides macularius
were, with the exception of several Green-winged Teals, the only birds
seen at this isolated spot.

Ageleus pheniceus gubernator (Wagl.) Coues.—Red-and-black-shouldered
Blackbird.

The occurrence of this species is doubtful in the Colorado Valley,
though in the upper portion of the State it was noted by Mr. Ridgway
at Carson City and the Truckee Reservation.

Ageleus tricolor (Nutt.) Bp.—Red-and-white-shouldered Blackbird.

A rare species in the Colorado Valley, though apparently very com-
mon nearer the Pacific coast, in California, as far as Santa Barbara,
from which point, according to Dr. Cooper, they seem to pass north.
toward Klamath Lake and Southern Oregon by a more interior route.

Sturnella neglecta Aud.—Western Meadow Lark.

This bird is reported by nearly all observers as generally abundant in
suitable localities. The first specimen was secured on the Humboldt
River, near Carlin, on the 20th of May, although the snow was still ly-
ing on the shady slopes of the foot-hills. The grassy valleys are the
usual resort of this variety, although the adjacent prairies are also
visited, especially in the northern portion of the State, where the undu-
lating country is more abundantly covered with Composite, the south-
ern regions being either bare of vegetation or presenting Artemisia, &c.,
in excess. The song of the Western Lark has been so often referred to
by various authors that it is scarcely necessary even to mention the fact.
When I heard the bird for the first time, not knowing the author, it ap-
peared a strange medley of musical notes, no particular bar of which
could be attributed to any known species. Whenever I have observed
this bird singing it was perched upon the top branch of a bush or low

No. 2.] HOFFMAN ON THE BIRDS OF NEVADA. 231

tree, with the head partly elevated as in our S. magna, but often there
appeared a studied care in the delivery of the musical clianges, as if the
song had been but recently acquired or was not thoroughly familiar to the
singer. Then again there would flow forth arun of melodious notes that
strongly suggested a more proficient songster than one would suppose to
find in this bird. The nesting habits observed later in the season cor-
respond with observations made subsequently in Dakota Territory,
where they appeared to select the tufts of tall grass in the more fertile
regions, between or near which they constructed their nests, consisting
of grass, Xe.

As regards the coloration of the western variety nothing need be said,
but I have observed quite a number of specimens secured in the Schuyl-
kill Valley, Pennsylvania, especially from Reading, as far southeast as
Philadelphia, some of which resemble neglecta so closely that, were the
locality of capture unknown, identification would be almost impossible.
As arule, however, that persistency of coloration characteristic of neglecta
does not prevail in the eastern variety, in which it is found rather vari-
able, and rarely the deviation consists only of a slight pallor of the
breast and neck, the yellow patch becoming more ashy and not so in-
tense as in magna proper. The song of the eastern form is also like
that of magna, and this variation of plumage appears about as frequently
as instances of total or partial albinism in Passer domesticus.

Ieterus purisorum Bonap.—Scott’s Oriole.

The only probable instance of the occurrence of this bird within the
latitude of the lower extremity of the State is that given by Dr. Cooper,
who says: “This species is abundant at Cape St. Lucas, and has been
found at rare intervals all along the southern border of the United States
as far east as Texas. I sawa bird at Fort Mojave, in April, which I
supposed to be this, but could not obtain it.” Mr. Henshaw, in his An-
notated List of the Birds of Arizona, says itis not uncommon in the ex-
treme southeastern part in summer, and Captain Bendire adds that he
found it breeding at Tucson. Considering the general uniformity of the
physical characters between the two regions (Fort Mojave and Tucson),
it is more than probable that individuals may wander as far up the Col-
orado River as Mojave, as future observations will no doubt prove.

Icterus bullocki (Swains.) Bp.—Bullock’s Oriole.

This beautiful bird is common throughout the timbered bottom lands,
and holds the same place in the Interior Basin that the Baltimore Oriole
does in the east. They make their appearance about the middle of April
in the vicinity of the Humboldt Valley, and begin to build about the
10th or 15th of May. In the willow groves along the tributaries of the
Humboldt River and Independence Creek this species was constantly
heard during the day. The nest, as described by Dr. Cooper, is * built
near the end of a branch, often overhanging the road or house, and

232 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL

constructed of fibrous grasses, horse-hairs, strings, rags, down of plants,
wool, and fine bark. Sometimes one or two materials alone are used,
such as white horse-hair and cotton twine, which I have found in one
instance. These are neatly and closely interwoven in the form of a deep
bag, suspended by the edges from the forks of a branch near its end.”
The nest, as described by Mr. Ridgway, ‘‘is very similar in its structure
and composition to that of the Baltimore (I. baltimore), but it is less fre-
quently pendulous, and seldom, if ever, so gracefully suspended. Its
usual position is between upright twigs, near the top of the tree, thus
resembling more that of the Orchard Oriole (I. spurius), which, however,
is very different in its composition.” The latter description conforms
_ more nearly to my own observations. Of the great number of nests exam-
ined during May and June, very few were similar to those of the eastern
Baltimore Oriole as far as the pendulous form is concerned, by far the
greater number being more globular and secured between several up-
right branches, or in the forks of the same. One nest in particular, re-
ferred to on a former occasion, was closed over at the top, leaving two
openings, one on each side, though near the top. The materials em-
ployed consisted chiefly of grasses of several species, and the upper ends
were so interwoven in securing the nest to the upright branches as to
close that portion entirely. The necessity for this was apparent in this
instance, though it was at first considered intentional as the nest was
located on the same horizon and only about 8 or 10 feet distant from one
occupied by a breeding Hawk (Buteo swainsont), both species apEORE RE
until the time of our visit to live in perfect harmony.

A nest similar in some respects is described by Dr. Coues, whieh
though “ suspended from the forked twig of an oak and draped alee
_ to concealment with leaves, had a remarkable peculiarity, being arched
over and roofed in at the top, with a dome of the same material as the
rest, and had a little round hole in one side just large enough to let the
birds passin.” Both instances are probably exceptional, though inter-
esting in illustration of the variety of form adopted.

Scolecophagus cyanocephalus (Wagl.) Caban.—Brewer’s Blackbird.

This Blackbird was met with more particularly in the southwestern
portion of the State, in the more elevated regions. They frequent the
lower valleys during the winter, retiring in the summer to the timbered
cailons and higher valleys. On the western coast they are reported by
Dr. Cooper as resident as far north as the Columbia.

CORVIDA.

Corvus corax carnivorus (Bartr.) Ridgw. —American Raven.

- This bird is everywhere more or less abundant, and a permanent resi-
dent. Dr. Cooper, in referring to this species, gives the following state-
ment: “I obtained numbers of the raven at Fort Mojave, which, though
more brilliant than usual in northern specimens, did not seem to differ

—_—

Pa vere

No. 2.1 HOFFMAN ON THE BIRDS OF NEVADA. 23a

enough in size or proportions to separate them as a distinct species.
The only approach to Professor Baird’s C. cacalotl was in the more grad-
uated tail feathers of one, in which the outer were 2.10 inches shorter
than the middle, other specimens having them nearer alike. He gives
the difference in CQ. cacalotl at 2.30, while in C. carnivorus it ranges from
1.60 to 1.90.” The Doctor does not consider these specimens a distinct
species, although their average size is smaller than the northern speci-
mens, and the plumage, though more lustrous, is due probably to the
climatic effects of that region.

Corvus frugivorus Bartr.—Common Crow.

The Crow was found to be rare east of the Sierras by Mr. Ridgway,
who noted its occurrence near the Humboldt marshes and at the Truckee
Meadows. Along the cliffs, a few miles southeast of Bull Run Mount-
ain, and again in a similar locality, at the southern extremity of Smoky
Valley, we found these birds in considerable numbers; their nests being
perched in the crevices from one hundred to two hundred feet above the
base of the nearly perpendicular walls of rock. None were observed
farther north in Nevada, though specimens were seen in California, near
Partzwick, just across the line.

Picicorvus columbianus (Wils.) Bp.—Clarke’s Nutcracker.

The only locality where specimens were seen during the whole journey
was on the northern slope of Mount Nagle; one or two were secured
which proved their identity, the flight and habits generally so closely
resembling a woodpecker’s as to sometimes mislead the most accurate
observer at first sight. All the reports given indicate that this species
frequents the coniferous regions of the most elevated mountains.

Gymnokitta cyanocephaia Max.—Maximilian’s Nutcracker; Pion Jay;
Blue Crow.

This species was found rather common throughout that belt of conif-
erous trees represented by the pifion (Pinus edulis), extending more
particularly and uninterruptedly from Eureka southward to below Hot
Spring Cafon. Again, at the occurrence of the same belt at Mount Nagle
and at Mount Magruder, the species was detected, but not so frequently,
owing, perhaps, to the rather limited amount of food-supply, the chief
source being obtained from the above-named tree, though when this
fails, as is the case with the pifion, which does not bear every year, they
resort to other berries, as juniper, cedar, &c. Like the preceding, they
do not resemble the Crows in habits, but partake more of the nature of
true Jays.

Pica rustica hudsonica (Scop.) Baird.—Black-billed Magpie.

Was found rather numerous in the mountainous portions of the lower
interior of the State. This species is reported as having been found by
nearly all observers throughout the Interior Basin, from the Sierra Ne-
vada eastward. Resident.

234 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL

Aphelocoma woodhousei (Baird) Ridgw.—Woodhouse’s Jay.

Rather common, and frequents the watered cations of the mountain
ranges. Henshaw and Yarrow report it from the eastern portions of
the State, while Mr. Ridgway mentions it as abundant on the western
slope of the Humboldt Mountains in September. Dr. Coues found it
very abundant in Arizona, ‘being found everywhere, but preferring
open hillsides among the serub-oaks.” This bird was found very com-
mon in the juniper groves on the western border of the Colorado Plateau
in Arizona, about 25 miles south of the Colorado River; they appear to
feed upon the berries at that season (October).

Aphelocoma californica (Vig.) Caban.—California Jay.

This variety is reported by Mr. Henshaw to cross the Sierra range,
and is found along the eastern slope of the mountains. “It reaches,
however, no farther than the foot-hills, but is soon replaced to the east
by the closeiy allied form, the Woodhouse’s Jay (A. woodhousei).”

ALAUDIDZ.

Eremophila alpestris (Forst.) Boie.—Shore Lark.

This species* is common over nearly the whole of the area under con-
sideration, and as my own limited experience does not vary from that
of Mr. Ridgway’s I shall give his remarks entire: ‘‘ No locality is too
barren for it, but,on the contrary, it seems to fancy best the most dry and
desert tracts, where it is often the only bird to be seen over miles of
country, except an occasional dove (Zenaidura carolinensis), or a solitary
raven seen at wide intervals. Neither does the altitude appear to affect
its distribution, except so far as the character of the ground is modified,
since we saw them in July and August on the very summit of the Ruby
Mountains, at an altitude of about 11,000 feet, the ground being pebbly,
with a stunted and scattered growth of bushes. The small, deep-col-
ored race known as chrysolema was the usual form found in summer,
but in winter most of these seemed to have migrated southward, their
place being taken by flocks from the north, composed of migratory in-
dividuals of the races called alpestris and leucolema, of which the former
predominated.”

In reference to the arid regions of the southern portion of the State I
can say that it was rather uncommon, but upon any of the higher eleva-
tions upon the sides of which were any moist spots, or springs furnishing
sufficient moisture for the growth of a varied flora, this species was al-
ways to be found in greater abundance. In the Colorado Valley noue
were found excepting near the mouth of Virgin River. Dr. Cooper
states that he “‘saw these birds in considerable flocks about Fort Mo-

* E. alpestris, var. leucolema, Coues, represents the pale variety (or race), which
breeds on the interior plains, while variety chrysolema is smaller and brighter, and oc-
curs in the southwestern regions into Mexico.

No. 2.) HOFFMAN ON THE BIRDS OF NEVADA. 235

jave about the end of February, but all of them seem to have left the
valley by the end of March.”

TYRANNID A.

Tyrannus carolinensis (Linn.) Temm.—Kingbird; Bee Martin.

‘Not common. One specimen only, supposed to be this species, was
seen in camp in the southern extremity of Smoky Valley. Mr. Ridgway
says of it: “‘ In the rich valley of the Truckee River, in western Nevada,
two or more pairs of this familiar eastern bird had their abode among
the large cottonwood trees near our cam}; in fact this species seemed
to be no more rare in that locality than the 7. verticalis, which, however,
was itself far from common. On the eastern border of the Great Basin
it was more abundant, being quite as numerous in the Salt Lake Valley
as the T. verticalis, both frequently nesting in the same grove.”

Tyrannus verticalis Say.— Western Kingbird.

Rather more common than 7. carolinensis, and noticed in various re-
gions presenting more fertility than is ordinarily observed in an ex-
tended tour through the State. Was found breeding in June south of
the Central Pacific Railroad, in the valleys between Austin, Hot Spring
Canton, and Belmont, in the cottonwood groves.

Myiarchus cinerascens Lawr.—Ash-throated Flycatcher.

“A few were observed among the cottonwoods of the Lower Truckee
in July and August, and it was also a not infrequent summer resident
in the cafons of the Ruby Mountains, where it was most often observed
perched upon a gnarled cedar or mountain mahogany overhanging the
top of a rocky gorge or high cliff..—( Ridgway.) Dr. Cooper found one
Specimen at Fort Mojave as early as January 15, and thinks a few may
habitually winter in the Colorado Valley. Several specimens were
found in the river bottom 11 miles north of the post, but they appeared
nowhere aS common.

Sayornis sayt (Bonap.) Baird.—Say’s Pewee.

“ Throughout the country eastward of the Sierra Nevada this inter-
esting bird was found in all suitable places, though it was not abundant
anywhere, since it was seldom that more than one pair inhabited a re-
stricted locality.”—(Ridgway.) Mr. Henshaw obtained a single specimen
in September, but thinks it iscommon during the summer. The species
is distributed over the northern portion of America, and, according to
Richardson, as far as latitude 60°. Dr. Cooper considers it amere win-
ter visitor in the southern and western portions of California, where he
saw none after March.

Contopus borealis (Swains.) Baird.—Olive-sided Flycatcher.
This species has been found a common summer resident, but its dis-
tribution is confined to the more elevated coniferous regions, its south-

236 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

ern range being in accordance with the survival or presence of that zone,
at least as far south as Belmont.

Contopus richardsoni (Swains.) Baird.—Western Wood Pewee.

Common throughout the northern and more timbered regions, but
rather rarein the southern interior. It was again met with at Spring
Mountain, where it appeared abundant about the beginning of Septem-
ber.

Empidonax digficilis Baird.—Western Yellow-bellied Flycatcher.

This rare species may properly be included in the present list, as its
occurrence on the eastern slope of the Sierra Nevada is recorded by Mr.
Ridgway. The same writer says also: “It is with little hesitation that |
we consider this bird as distinct specifically from H. flaviventris. Not
only are there very conspicuous and constant differences in proportions
and colors (especially the former), but numerous observers have noticed
remarkable and important peculiarities in the nesting habits, the pres-
ent species almost invariably building its nest in cavities, either of
stumps, trees, or rocks, or on beams inside of buildings, a habit not yet
noticed in HL. flaviventris, nor indeed in any other species of the genus.”
Dr. Cooper says, “ the differences in the two races seem to be wholly in
shades of color and size, and not in proportions, as formerly supposed,”
which is a mistaken view according to the observations of Mr. Ridgway.

Empidonax pusillus (Swains.) Baird.—Little Flycatcher.

Common throughout the watered valleys. Was especially abundant
along the Humboldt River and the tributaries from the north, frequent-
ing the willow groves. Dr. Cooper noted its occurrence in the Colorado
Valley, at Fort Mojave, as early as the 1st of May, where he found sev-
eral inhabiting a dark dense thicket. Yarrow and Henshaw found it
sparingly in Eastern Nevada.

Empidonax hammondi (Xantus) Baird.—Hammond’s Flycatcher.

In noting this bird Mr. Ridgway says “it was not met with anywhere
as a Summer resident, but during its autumnal migration was found to
be very common on the East Humboldt Mountains.” Its occurrence in
the Colorado Valley is noted by Dr. Cooper, who states that he obtained
but one specimen at Fort Mojave on May 20.

Empidonax obseurus (Swains.) Baird.—Wright’s Flycatcher.

This species was found rather common at Bull Run Mountain as early
as May 25, and again at Prospect Hill in June. Dr. Cooper found it at
Fort Mojave about April 1,and a few afterwards until May 25. Mr.
Ridgway mentions it as more abundant in the aspen copses of the high
canons of the lofty Toyabe range near Austin than anywhere else, while
Yarrow and Henshaw found it rather scarce in Hastern Nevada.

No. 2.| HOFFMAN ON THE BIRDS OF NEVADA. 200

Pyrocephalus rubineus mexicanus (Scl.) Coues.—Vermilion Flycatcher.

The probable discovery of this bird at Fort Mojave on May 24, its cap-
ture in the Colorado Valley, at latitude 34°, on the 18th of April, and the
statement by Heerman that itis quite common at Fort Yuma during the
spring, is sufficient evidence to consider it a visitant species.

“The North American species, originally supposed to be identical with
that inhabiting South America, has lately been described by Dr. Sclater
as distinct.” Dr. Cooper further suggests that “it may, however, per-
haps be fairly questioned whether here, as in many other instances, there
is anything more a a slight difference produced by peculiarities of

climate, &e. %
TROCHILID A.

Trochilus alexandri Boure and Muls.—The Black-chinned Hummingbird.

Was found in the valleys of the northern interior of the State. Dr.
Cooper did not find it at Fort Mojave, but states that it has since been
obtained in the Colorado Valley by Mr. Holder, on the 20th of March.
The species closely resembles the Eastern Ruby-throat (T. colubris).

Calypte coste (Boure.) Gould.—Costa’s Hummingbird.

Was observed at Fort Mojave by Dr. Cooper, but is not common; is
said to be extremely abundant at Cape Saint Lucas, occurring also on
the eastern side of the Gulf of California, at Guaymas, &c.

Selasphorus platycercus (Swains.) Bonap.—Broad-tailed Hummingbird.

Observed on the Ruby Mountains by Mr. Ridgway, where it was
found in company with Stellula ANODE

Selasnhor us rufus (Gmel.) Aud.—Rufous Hummingbird.

Found by Mr. Ridgway among the sun-flowers (Helianthus) in the
Valley of the Truckee, in August ; also, later in the season, in the cations
of the West Humboldt Mountains.

Stellula calliope Gould.—Calliope Hummingbird.

This species was noticed at Prospect Hill, and again in Owen’s Vv al-
ley, California, where it was found ne in July. One nest with
eggs was found perched over and within a short distance of a noisy
mountain stream, where it was no doubt frequently subjected to the
dashing spray. Mr. Ridgway found this bird on the Ruby and East
Humboldt Mountains, at an altitude of from 7,000 to 10,000 feet.

CYPSELID A.

Cypselus saxatilis Woodh.—White-throated Swift.

Rather common in the more elevated regions, building in and about
the fissures and projections of cliffs; was noticed again in the upper
portion of the Black Caiion of the Colorado Valley, in September. Dr.

238 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. (Vol. VI.

Cooper considers it probable that this species winters in the caiions,
_ though he saw none at Fort Mojave until May, probably stragglers from
their favorite mountains.

Cypseloides niger borealis (Kennerly) Ridgw.—Black Swift.

This bird was found in the Valley of the Truckee by Mr. Ridgway,
in a mutilated form, consisting of the sternum, wings, feet, and tail,
which were, as it is stated, the remains of an individual which had been
devoured by a hawk or an owl. This bird flies at great elevation, and,
as Dr. Cooper says, “like other swifts, flying habitually almost out of
sight, and rarely coming near the ground, except.in cloudy weather, it
would very readily escape the attention of travellers in the West, how-

ever abundant it might be.”
\

Chetura vauxi (Towns.) De Kay.—Vaux’s Swift.

“‘ During our sojourn at the Truckee Reservation, near Pyramid Lake,
in May and June, 1868, we saw, nearly every. evening, but never until
after sundown, quite a number of small Swifts, which must have been
this species; but they always flew at so great a height that we found it
impossible to obtain a specimen in order to determine the species.”—
(Ridgway.) This bird is recorded from California by Dr. Cooper, and
Dr. Townsend also found it on the Columbia River, and it is more than
probable that, from its geographical range, it may yet be found within
the State limits.

CAPRIMULGIDA.

Phalenoptilus nuttalli (Aud.) Ridgw.—Poor-will.

This species, unlike the Eastern Caprimulgus vociferus, is, according
to both Mr. Ridgway and Dr. Cooper, an inhabitant of the sage-brush
country. I met with the bird several times, the first locality being in
the valley west of Hot Spring Cafion, on the road to Belmont. They
appeared rather frequently in the vicinity of Green Mountain district
and north of Mount Magruder. According to Mr. Ridgway, both sexes
incubate.

Chordeiles popetue henryi (Cass.) Allen.— Western Nighthawk.

Was found south of Eureka, on the northern slopes of Prospect Hill.
Mr. Ridgway also found this species a common summer inhabitant over
the region traversed by him.

Chordeiles acutipennis texensis (Lawr.) Ridgw.—Texan Nighthawk.

The first of this species was observed by Dr. Cooper at Fort Mojave _
on the 17th of April, soon after becoming quite numerous, hunting in
company after sunset, and hiding during the day on the ground under
low bushes. They flew like C. popetue, but sailed rather more in small
circles.

No. 2.] HOFFMAN ON THE BIRDS OF NEVADA. 239

PICID &.

Picus villosus harrist (Aud.) Allen.—Harris’s Woodpecker.

Not uncommon in the timbered districts over the greater portion of the
State. None were seen in the southern regions, however, although Dr.
Kennerly notes it as descending to the eastern branches of the Colorado
River in winter.

Picus pubescens gairdneri (Aud.) Coues.—Gairdner’s Woodpecker.

Mr. hidgway states this species to be unaccountably rare, a few being
found in September among the thickets by one of the streams flowing
from the lofty.Clover Mountains into the Upper Humboldt.

Picus scalaris Wagl.—Texan Woodpecker.

Abundant in the Colorado Valley, and sometimes seen on the bushes
covering the neighboring mountains. In habits they are the exact rep-
resentatives of P. nuttalli, which they so much resemble.—( Cooper.)

Xenopicus albolarvatus (Cass.) Baird.—White-headed Woodpecker.
Was found common by Mr. Ridgway on the eastern slopes of the
Sierra Nevada, near Carson City, during the winter, keeping entirely

among the pines, though sometimes coming down to the lower edge of
the woods.

Picoides arcticus (Swains.) Gray.—Black-backed Three-toed Woodpecker.

One specimen only was found by Mr. Ridgway near Carson City in
February.

Sphyrapicus varius nuchalis Baird.—Red-naped Woodpecker.

Rather common in favorable localities throughout the northern regions.
Dr. Cooper obtained a female specimen at Fort Mojave in February,
which he thinks may have wandered in a storm from the mountains,
being the only one he saw.

Sphyrapicus varius ruber (Gmel.) Ridgw.—Red-breasted Woodpecker.

Occurs chiefly on the western slope of the Sierra Nevada, though Mr.
Ridgway is under the impression that he saw it once near Carson City.
Mr. Henshaw has obtained it at Lake Tahoe since the time of the for-
mer’s observations.

Sphyrapicus thyroideus (Cass.) Baird.—Black-breasted Woodpecker.

Found throughout the elevated coniferous regions. This species was
formerly considered a species distinct from 8. williamsoni, when in fact
they are female and male of the same species, a fact first pointed out
by Mr. Henshaw in 1874.* Dr. Cooper found his first specimen a strag-
gler to the Colorado Valley in the winter of 1861.

* American Naturalist, vol. viii, p. 242.

240 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL

Centurus uropygialis Baird.—Gila Woodpecker.

At Fort Mojave Dr. Cooper “found this Woodpecker abundant in
winter, when they fed chiefly on the berries of the mistletoe ( Viscum),
and were rather shy. They had aloud note of alarm, strikingly similar
to that of Phainopepla nitens, which associated with them in the mistle-
toe boughs.”

Melanerpes torquatus (Wils.) Bonap.—Lewis’s Woodpecker.

Not noticed by Dr. Cooper in the southern portion of the State, al-
though it is not an uncommon species throughout the wooded areas of
the northern part.

Colaptes auratus (Linn.) Swains.—Yellow-shafted Flicker.

Mentioned as probably occurring, by Mr. Ridgway, who noticed sev-
eral individuals, but was unable to definitely determine. Several feath-
ers shot from one specimen presented the pure bright gamboge-yellow,
without the faintest trace of orange. Whether this may or may not have
been hybridus, it is impossible to state with certainty, though it is more
than probable that it was the typical auratus, both on account of the
geographical considerations and the absence of the orange tint, which
is seldom, if ever, absent in hybridus.

Colaptes auratus hybridus (Baird) Ridgw.—‘ Hybrid” Flicker.

A specimen obtained in Washoe Valley by Mr. Ridgway has, accord-
ing to this observer, the ‘‘ general appearance of typical mexicanus, hav-
ing ashy throat and scarlet ‘moustaches,’ but occiput with a distinet
searlet crescent, and the red of the remiges and rectrices inclining de-
cidedly to orange.” Dr. Cooper found several specimens at Fort Mojave
which he considers a mixture of mexicanus and auratus, including as one
variety the form described by Audubon as C. ayresti, synonymous with
the above.

Colaptes auratus mexicanus (Swains.) Ridgw.—Red-shafted Flicker.

Common. Along the Colorado, Dr. Cooper found this bird very shy,
probably on account of their being much hunted by the Indians for their

bright feathers.
ALCEDINIDA.

Ceryle alcyon (Linn.) Boie.—Belted Kingfisher.

Common in favorable localities. Mr. Ridgway found it resident in
the lower valleys, but only a summer visitant in the mountains.

Ceryle americana cabanisi (Tschudi) Coues.—Texan Kingfisher.

The occurrence of this diminutive species along the southern border
of the United States, and its presence in the Colorado Valley at several
points between Fort Mojave and Fort Yuma, where Dr. Coues noted it,
may be sufficient to warrant us in predicting its probable capture within

No. 2.] HOFFMAN ON THE BIRDS OF NEVADA. 241

the limits of the State, the general uniformity of the physical characters
of the valley aiding greatly in the northward range of the more south-
ern forms.

CUCULID 2.

Geococcyx californianus (Lesson) Baird.—Chaparral Cock; Road-runner.

I found this bird only in the Colorado Valley in the vicinity of Fort
Mojave, where it was not of uncommon frequency. It appeared to resort
to the scattering underbrush of the banks, apparently in search of food ;
not shy, and could be approached to within 20 or 30 paces.

Coccyzus americanus (Linn.) Bp.—Yeliow-billed Cuckoo.

Not uncommon in the timbered regions of either the valleys or the
mountains. In referring to the peculiar notes of this bird, Dr. Cooper
says that on account of it this Cuckoo is known in the East as ‘“‘ Koubird.”
Dr. Coues, also, in treating the same subject, says that the “syllables
koo-koo-koo, indefinitely repeated, are probably uttered more frequently
during the atmospheric changes preceding falling weather, and have
given rise to the name of ‘Rain Crow,’ by which both our species are
universally known to the vulgar.”

In the woods of Pennsylvania I have frequently heard this bird pro-
duce the sound just referred to, and also another, closely resembling
the sound as of hammering upon a pine board, though very distant.
This species, as well as erythrophthalmus, is called “‘ Régafogel” (Rain-
bird) by the Pennsylvania Germans, and it is generally believed, even
among many of the more intelligent persons, that the utterance of the.
peculiar notes is indicative of a change of weather.

STRIGID A.

Asio americanus (Steph.) Sharpe.—American Long-eared Owl.

This species may be called a very common one, as it occurs through-
out the bottom lands amongst the thickets in every favorable locality.
First noticed on the 10th of May amongst the willows near Carlin, and
at various localities west and south of that place.

Asio accipitrinus (Pall.) Newton.—Short-eared Owl.

Have not found this Owl reported from the northern portions of the
State, although it is a more northern species than A. americanus, and
a winter visitant, and as it is reported from the Mojave River by Heer-
man, it will, no doubt, through future investigations, be found a regular
visitor.

Scops asio (Linn.) Bp.—Little Screech Owl.

Reported from Fort Mojave, where Dr. Cooper obtained one specimen,
which differed from a California example only in being rather smaller
and of a paler gray, adding, “as if its hue was affected by the hot,

16GB

242 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

dry climate, although it never exposed itself to the sunshine. It did
not, therefore, present the ‘darker’ color and more numerous better
defined transverse lines below, being scarcely more than light ash-color
in any part.” The Doctor further remarks, ‘‘ Being thus unlike Cassin’s
S. McCallii, I have considered it only a pale variety of S. asio, although
its southern locality would lead us to expect to find it to be S. McCallii,
if indeed that be a distinct species.” Mr. Ridgway thinks this was
doubtless S. trichopsis Wag].

Nyctale acadica Gmelin.—The Acadian Owl; Saw-whet Owl.

But a single individual of this species was obtained by Mr. Ridgway,
in Thousand Spring Valley. It is more common in the northern por-
tions of the United States, and as it is nocturnal, but little has been
learned of its habits.

“JT have seen in the museum of the German Academy of Natural
Sciences, of San Francisco, a specimen of this owl, brought from
Nevada, close to the boundary of California, about latitude 39°, altitude
7,000 feet.”—( Cooper.)

Speotyto cunicularia hypogea (Bonap.) Ridgw.—Burrowing Owl.

This Owl was found only on the southern slope of the hills near Ante-
lope Creek, about 60 miles north of Battle Mountain, where two indi-
viduals were seen flying from a deserted prairie-dog burrow, one of
which was subsequently shot and identified.

Micrathene whitneyi (Cooper) Coues.—Whitney’s Pigmy Owl.

This species was discovered by Dr. Cooper at Fort Mojave in 1860,
and is probably the smallest Owl known. From the doctor’s descrip-
tion we learn that it is arboreal, and partly diurnal, and feeds upon in-
sects. It has not been reported from the same locality by any later
observers, though several specimens are reported by Captain Bendire
and Mr. Henshaw as having been secured in Arizona.

FALCONID A.

Hierofaleco mexicanus polyagrus (Cass.) Ridgw.—Prairie Falcon.

Mentioned by Mr. Ridgway as a rather common species throughout
the upper interior portions of the State; saw a mounted specimen at
Carlin, which was said to have been shot near that place.

Falco peregrinus nevius (Gmel.) Ridgw.—American Peregrine Falcon;
Duck Hawk.
Was found by Mr. Ridgway at Pyramid Lake and along the Lower
Truckee, where he secured a-Specimen.
Aisclon columbarius (Linn.) Kaup.—Pigeon Hawk.

Not common in the northern portion of the State. Dr. Cooper
secured a specimen at Fort Mojave in winter, which differed from the

No. 2.) HOFFMAN ON THE BIRDS OF NEVADA. 243

typical form only in being paler, and of an almost ashy color, which
was doubtless the effect of the hot, dry climate of that region.

Tinnunculus sparverius (Linn.) Vieill—Sparrow Hawk.

. Is found generally abundant in the more favorable localities through-
out the upper portions of Nevada.

Pandion haliaétus carolinensis (Gmel.) Ridgw.—Fish Hawk; Osprey.

The Fish Hawk was found only along the lower portion of the Truckee
River by Mr. Ridgway, where it was common in May. It is supposed
to breed in that locaiity.

Oircus hudsonius (Linn.) Vieill—Marsh Hawk.

Common in the marshy districts of the middle and western portions
of Nevada.

Accipiter coopert Bonap.—Cooper’s Hawk.
Not uncommon.

Accipiter fuscus (Gmel.), Bp.—Sharp-shinned Hawk.

This miniature of A. coopert was observed by Mr. Ridgway only in the
Upper Humboldt Valley, where it was common in September along the
streams flowing from the Clover Mountains.

Buteo borealis calurus (Cass), Ridgw.—Western Red-tailed Hawk.

A common species throughout the wooded valleys in winter, ascend-
ing to the more elevated timbered regions in summer. Mr. Ridgway,
in his list of specimens secured, mentions two individuals as melanotic,
one being “very black,” the other “‘rufous-breasted.” I have recently
examined a specimen of typical borealis captured in Pennsylvania, which
was a nearly perfect albino. There was a grayish streak from the eyes
backward so as to nearly unite upon the occiput, and the outer tail
feathers presented a pale brownish rufous tinge, with darker transverse
bars, which were barely perceptible upon the rest of the tail feathers.
Other feathers, upon the back and sides, upon close examination, pre-
sented dusky median markings, though at several paces distant these
became undistinguishable.

Buteo swainsoni Bonap.—Swainson’s Hawk.

Frequently seen throughout the valleys, and appears to be more com-
mon during the autumn than the preceding—B. ealurus. The only nest
with eggs observed was one near Antelope Creek, which was built near
another of Icterus bullocki. In this instance both were breeding, and
the latter evinced no fear of their neighbors, as one would occasionally
fly back and forth from the nest immediately over that occupied by the
hawk. Has also been obtained in the Colorado Valley from Fort Mo-
jave northward.

244 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL

Archibuteo lagopus sanctijohannis (Gmel.) Ridgw.—American Rough-
legged Hawk.
According to Mr. Ridgway is common in the fertile valleys, and ap-
pears resident in the western portion of the State.

Aquila chrysaétus canadensis (Linn.) Ridgw.—Golden Eagle.

This species is not uncommon in the elevated mountain regions. They
were observed at Bull Run Mountain, Mount Magruder, and other simi-
lar localities. Mr. Ridgway noticed them from the Sierra Nevada east-
ward, usually finding them in pairs.

Halievétus leucocephalus (Linn.) Savig.—Bald Eagle; Gray Eagle.

Like the preceding this bird was found in the vicinity of Pyramid
Lake,.where, according to Mr. Ridgway, it was rare. Dr. Cooper quotes
Gambel as saying that these birds were “held sacred by the Indians,
which will in a measure account for their abundance and protection
by the natives.” This species is kept and protected by some of the
Pueblo Indians, and the Dakota and Absaroka Indians when hunting
this eagle for its feathers, seldom ever kill one, but catch them by selecting
an elevated peak where they hidein a cavity, which is then covered over
with grass and brush, upon which a rabbit or some other animal is se-
cured, so that when the eagle descends to grasp its quarry the bird is
seized by the legs and held until the confederates arrive, when the
choice feathers are plucked and the bird liberated.

CATHARDID i.

Cathartes aura (Linn.) Mlig.—Turkey Buzzard.

Arrives in the middle regions about the second or third week in March,
after which time it is common. Was also observed in the Colorado Val-
ley from Fort Mojave northward.

COLUMBID&

Columba fasciata Say.—Band-tailed Pigeon.

The only notice of this species as referring to the region under consid-
eration is that given by Mr. Ridgway, viz: “On the 19th of November,
1867, we saw a Single individual of what must have been this species,
flying to the southward over the Truckee Meadows. Its appearance.
and size was very much that of the common House Pigeon, but from the
manner of its flight it was evidently a wild bird.”

Ectopistes migratoria (Linn.) Sw.—Passenger Pigeon.

This bird is considered an occasional straggler by Mr. Ridgway, only
one stray individual having been captured by him in the West Hum-
boldt Mountains in September.

No. 2.) HOFFMAN ON THE BIRDS OF NEVADA. 245

Zenaidura carolinensis (Linn.) Bp.—Mourning Dove.

Generally distributed over the whole State. It is curious to see the
great numbers gathering about the springs about sundown, even in the
most isolated localities. At one spring on the southern slope of Gold
Mountain, where the water was extremely brackish and scarcely ex-
ceeded two bucketsful in quantity, the ground about the depression was
literally alive with these birds. In the northern parts of the country
they are abundant about the settlements, frequenting more particularly
the corrals.

Chamepelia passerina (Linn.) Swains.—Ground Dove.

The probable occurrence of this species in the southern portion of
the State is mentioned by Dr. Cooper in the following words: “This
pretty little dove, which is common in the South Atlantic States, Mex-
ico, and the West Indies, undoubtedly visits Fort Yuma, and I haye
heard of what I supposed to be the same as far north in the Colorado
Valley as Fort Mojave, latitude 35°, though I did not myself see them
there.”

TETRAONIDA.
Canace obscura (Say) Bp.—Dusky Grouse.

Appears to be strictly confined to the elevated coniferous regions of
the higher ranges. Though seldom found in the thick forests, this spe-
cies frequent the open areas amongst the scattered trees and brush.

Pediccetes phasianellus columbianus (Ord) Coues.—Common Sharp-tailed
Grouse.

Was found in moderate numbers at Bull Run Mountains. Mr. Ridg-
way also records it from the Upper Humboldt Mountains, where it is
known as the “ Prairie Chicken.”

Centrocercus urophasianus (Bp.) Swains.—Sage Cock.

The only locality where this bird was found at all common was near
Belmont. Specimens were also shot at Hot Creek Cafion. They appear
to frequent the sage-brush, upon the leaves of which they feed, often
causing the meat to be unfit for use.

PERDICID 24.

Oreortyx picta plumifera (Gould) Ridgw.—Plumed Quail.

Was found by Mr. Ridgway in Western Nevada, where it was rather
rare.

Lophortyx californica (Shaw) Bp.—Californian Quail.
Reported from Fort Mojave by Dr. Cooper, where it breeds.

Lophortyx gambeli Nutt.—Gambel’s Quail.
Numerous at Fort Mojave.—(Cooper.)

246 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL

ARDEIDA.

Ardea herodias Linn.—Great Blue Heron.

Is reported abundant about all bodies of water affording it a plentiful
supply of food. Mr. Ridgway also found it breeding at Pyramid Lake.

Herodias alba egretta (Gmel.) Ridgw.—American Egret; White Heron.

Mr. Ridgway saw a single individual on the Lower Truckee; our stay
in the localities favorable to the Herons was exceedingly short, and few
of this and kindred genera were seen.

Nyctiardea grisea nevia (Bodd.) Allen.—Black-crowned Night Heron.

Was found abundant in the Valley of the Humboldt, at Battle
Mountain.

Botaurus lentiginosus (Montag.) Steph.—American Bittern.
Apparently resident in the lower marshy valleys of the western inte-
rior portions of the State.

Ardetta exilis (Gmel.) Gray.—Least Bittern.

One individual of this diminutive Heron was seen in May, among the
willows along the Lower Truckee, the one in question being startled by
the approach of our boat.—(Ridgway.)

CICONIID A.

Tantalus loculator Linn.—Wood Ibis.

I noticed this bird only in the Colorado Valley, opposite Fort Mojave,
where the sloping bank was covered with brush and cottonwood trees
to within a short distance of the water.

IBIDID.

Plegadis guarauna (Linn.) Ridgw.—White-faced Glossy Ibis.
Was observed by Mr. Ridgway in September in the Humboldt Marshes,
where it was one of the most abundant water-birds.

CHARADRITDA.

Oxyechus vociferus (Linn.) Reich.—Killdeer.

This bird was common along all streams throughout the northern half
of the State. Mr. Ridgway says it is resident, but more numerous in
summer than in winter.

Gallinago media wilsont (Temm.) Ridgw.—Wilson’s Snipe.
Ts generally abundant. A single individual was secured at the head
of Armagosa River—a saline stream of several hundred-yards in length

No. 2.] HOFFMAN ON THE BIRDS OF NEVADA, 247

in summer—iu company with several Green-wing Teals (Nettion caroli-
nensis). This instance is noteworthy from the fact that the locality is
surrounded by arid sandy deserts for many miles, the nearest spring of
any consequence being over 70 miles distant, and the Colorado River,
in a direct line across Spring Mountain, about 150.

SCOLOPACID A.

Actodromas bairdi Coues.—Baird’s Sandpiper.

Reported from Pyramid Lake and the Humboldt Marshes by Mr.
Ridgway.

Actodromas minutilla (Vieill.) Bp.—Least Sandpiper.
Vicinity of Pyramid Lake in May, and at the Humboldt Marshes in
August.—( Ridgway.)

Pelidna alpina americana Cass.—Red-backed Sandpiper.

Found by Mr. Ridgway among the large flocks of Sandpipers and
other small waders in the vicinity of Pyramid Lake in May.

Ereunetes pusillus (Linn.) Cass.—Semipalmated Sandpiper.

Found in the valleys of the northern portion of the State. Was also
observed on the Colorado below the ruins of Callville.

Rhyacophilus solitarius (Wils.) Cass.—Solitary Sandpiper.
From all observations thus far noted this species is very rare.

Symphemia semipalmata (Gmel.) Hartl.— Willet.

A specimen in a small collection at Carlin was said to have been shot
at the Humboldt River, near the town. Mr. Ridgway found it numer-
ous on the southern shore of Salt Lake, and it is more than probable
that the species occurs along the Humboldt Valley from the east west-
ward.

Numenius longirostris Wils.—Long-billed Curlew.

Appears common in the marshy districts. Was found breeding in
Independence Valley ; and a dead specimen was found at Rose Caiion,
on the Telescope Range, California, where it had probably perished for
want of water after a long flight in the hot atmosphere of the surround-
ing country.

PHALAROPODID &.
Steganopus wilsont (Sab.) Coues.—Wilscn’s Phalarope.

Specimens were obtained by Mr. Ridgway at Pvramid Lake, where
they was shot from a flock of Sandpipers.

248 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

RECURVIROSTRID A.

Recurvirostra americana Gmel.—American Avocet.

Generally common about the interior lakes. Was also found rather -
common on the Colorado River near the mouth of an alkaline stream
several miles west of the ruins of Cailville.

Himantopus mexicanus (Miill.) Ord.—Black-necked Stilt.

This species is found nearly always in the same localities as the Avo-
cet, though in less numbers.—(Ridgway.) Several individuals were ob-
tained in the Colorado Valley below the Black Caton.

RALLIDZ.

Rallus virginianus Linn.—Virginia Rail.
Two or three specimens of this Rail were seen in May among the
sedges bordering a pond near Pyramid Lake.—( Ridgway.)

Porzana carolina (Linn.) Baird.—Sora Rail.

Common in the northern portion of the State in suitable localities.
Also found near the great bend of the Colorado River.

Porzana noveboracensis (Gmel.) Baird.—Little Yellow Rail.

‘¢On several occasions and at widely-distant localities we met with a
small Rail of a black color, which must have been this species, unless it
should prove to be one at present undescribed. It was first seen on the
5th of September, 1868, in Ruby Valley.”—( Ridgway.)

Fulica americana Gmel.—American Coot.

Found to be rather common during May and June, when it was ob-
served in the Humboldt Valley, in a marsh.

GRUIDA.

Grus canadensis (Linn.) Temm.—Sandhill Crane.

This species was found very abundant in the wet grassy meadows in
Independence Valley, where they evidently breed. On September 30
they were again seen on the Colorado River above the Black Cafion,
and, when disturbed, rose at once and followed the course of the river
southward.

ANATID A.

Olor buccinator (Rich.) Wagl.—Trumpeter Swan.

Mr. Ridgway found Swans exceedingly numerous in the vicinity of
Pyramid Lake, but as he obtained no specimens, there is no certainty
whether they were the Trumpeter or Whistler (O. americanus).

No. 2] HOFFMAN ON THE BIRDS OF NEVADA. 249

Chen hyperboreus albatus (Cass.) Ridg.—Lesser Snow Goose.
This Goose, almost universally known as the “ White Brant,” was an
abundant winter visitant to the lakes of the Great Basin.—(hidgway.)

Bernicla canadensis (Linn.) Boie—Canada Goose.

This species was the only one of the genus found breeding in the in-
terior by Mr. Ridgway, where it remained throughout the year about
the lakes.

Bernicla canadensis hutchinsi (Sw. and Rich.) Woodh.—Hutchins’s Goose.

This miniature of the Canada Goose was an abundant winter visitant
in Western Nevada, but it was not seen anywhere in summer, when all
had gone northward to breed.—( Ridgway.)

Bernicla nigricans (Lawr.) Cass.—Black Brant.
A rare winter visitant to Pyramid Lake, where Mr. Ridgway observed
it, but secured no specimens.

Dendrocycna fulwa (Gmel.) Burm.—Fulvous Tree Duck.
Several specimens obtained at Washoe Lake, by Mr. H. G. Parker.

Anas boscas Linn.—Mallard.
Common in all favorable localities.

Chaulelasmus streperus (Linn.) Gray.—Gad wall.
Mr. Ridgway found this to outnumber all the other species during the
breeding-season.

Dajfila acuta (Linn.) Bp.—Pintail.

Not abundant, but observed in November at the Truckee Meadows,
and in December near Pyramid Lake. Not seen during breeding-
season.—(hidgway.)

Mareca americana (Gmel.) Steph.—Baldpate.
A rather common summer resident.—( Ridgway.)

Spatula clypeata (Linn.) Boie.—Shoveller.
Common at Pyramid Lake in May.—( Ridgway.)

Querquedula discors (Linn.) Steph.—Blue-winged Teal.
Rather common in May at Pyramid Lake, where breeding in the
meadows.—( Ridgway.)

Querquedula eyanoptera (Vieill.) Cass —Cinnamon Teal.

This handsome species was common, though not abundant, through-
out the West, both in the Sacramento Valley and in the interior.—
( Ridgway.)

Nettion carolinensis (Gmel.) Baird.—Green-winged Teal.
According to his report, Mr. Ridgway obtained this Duck on Antelope

250 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI

Island, Great Salt Lake, Utah. Quite a number of specimens were ob-
tained at Grapevine Springs, near Spring Mountain, where the Pai-Ute
Indians had erected brush tents, from which they could shoot such
water-fowl as frequented the locality.

Aix sponsa (Linn.) Boie.—Wood Duck; Summer Duck.
One pair of this superb Duck was seen in July, among the cotton-
woods of the Truckee.—( Ridgway.)

Fulix marila (Linn.) Baird.—Seaup Duck.
Winter visitant to Pyramid Lake.—( Ridgway.)

Fuli« afinis (Byt.) Baird.—Little Blackhead.
Winter visitant to Pyramid Lake.—( Ridgway.)

Fuliz collaris (Donov.) Baird.—Ring-billed Blackhead.
Pyramid Lake in December.—( Ridgway.)

Aithyia vallisneria (Wils.) Boie-—Canvas-back.
Abundant during the winter at Pyramid Lake and the marshes.
Breeds in the same locality.

Aithyia americana (Eyt.) Bp.—Redhead.

Mr. Ridgway says: “In winter this is an abundant species on the
lakes of the Great Basin. It and the preceding species are frequently
used. by the Paiute Indians in making very artistic and elaborate decoys,
which have a body of bent and twisted dry tules (Scirpus), with the skin
stretched over it, the head prepared and poised in a style equal to that
of the most accomplished taxidermist. The floating decoy is anchored
by a stone tied to a string, the other end of which is fastened to the
bill.”

Clangula glaucium americana (Bp.) Ridgw.—American Golden-eye.
Pyramid Lake in December.—( Ridgway.)

Clangula albeola (Linn.) Steph.—Butterball; Bufflehead.

Winter resident on the lakes and larger rivers of the interior.—( Ridg-
Way.)
EHrismatura rubida (Wils.) Bp.—Ruddy Duck.

Mr. Ridgway obtained but a single individual (?) at Pyramid Lake
in December, being the only one seen.

Mergus merganser americanus (Cass.) Ridgw.—American Sheldrake.
Truckee and Carson Rivers, during the winter.—( Ridgway.)

Mergus serrator Linn.—Red-breasted Sheldrake.
Truckee River and Pyramid Lake, in December.—( Ridgway.)

No. 2.] HOFFMAN ON THE BIRDS OF NEVADA. 251

Lophodytes cucullatus (Linn.) Reich.—Hooded Sheldrake.

Occasionally met with in the wooded valleys of the Truckee and Car-
son Rivers, but it seemed to be rare.—( Ridgway.)

PELECANID 4.

Pelecanus erythrorhynchus Gmel.—American White Pelican.

Found in the interior of the State. Was noticed again opposite Fort
Mojave in September, and on the Colorado River below Ft. Yuma in
December, where they are probably resident.

GRACULID Zi.

Phalacrocorax dilophus (Sw. & Rich.) Nutt.—Double-crested Cormorant,

A specimen of this bird existed in a small collection at Carlin, which
was said to have been shot near that locality in the marshes at the mouth
of Maggie Creek. Said to occur at Pyramid Lake and along the lower
portion of the Truckee River, where Mr. Ridgway found this the only
species of the family.

Larus californicus Lawr.—California Gull.

Mr. Ridgway mentions this species as the only Gull found in the Great
Basin during summer, but entirely absent in winter, when its place is
supplied by L. delawarensis.

Larus delawarensis Ord.—Ring-billed Gull.
Was observed only as a winter sojourner at Pyramid Lake, being en-
tirely absent from there in summer.—( Ridgway.)

Sterna regia Gamb.—Royal Tern.

More or less common in May at Washoe Lake, and near Pyramid Lake,
and in September at the Humboldt Marshes.—( Ridgway.)

Sterna forstert Nutt.—Forster’s Tern.

Common throughout the summer in the vicinity of Pyramid, Ruby,
and Franklin Lakes, and the Humboldt Marshes.—(Ridgzay.)

PODICIPID A.

Aichmophorus occidentalis (Lawr.) Coues.—Western Grebe.

According to Mr. Ridgway, this species appears a permanent resident
at Pyramid Lake. The specimen in his collection was found “ snow-
bound” in the sage-brush near Carson City, “‘ being discovered by its
tracks in the deep snow, where it had scrambled along for a hundred
yards or more. It was headed toward the Carson River, and had evi-
dently come from Washoe Lake, about five miles distant, and becoming
exhausted by the long flight had fallen to the ground.” Mr. Henshaw
has also obtained this species in Nevada since Mr. Ridgway’s visit to
that region.

252 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL

Podiceps holbolli Reinh.— American Red-necked Grebe.

~ Quite numerous in August and September in Franklin Lake.—(Ridg-
way.)

Dytes nigricollis californicus (Heerm.) Ridgw.—American Hared Grebe.

A constant resident, and was usually found in localities with Achmo-
phorus occidentalis.—( Ridgway.)

Podilymbus podiceps (Linn.), Lawr.—Thick-billed Grebe.

This common Grebe was a resident species in all suitable localities.—
(Ridgway.) Several individuals were observed on the Humboldt River
at Battle Mountain, and again at Carlin Station. At the latter locality
two mounted specimens were found in a saloon, which were said to have
been secured during the previous summer.

APPENDIX.

The nomenclature adopted in the present paper is based upon the
catalogue just issued from the Smithsonian Institution by Mr. Ridgway,
amore extended notice of which will be found under his name in the
accompanying bibliography.

BIBLIOGRAPHY.

The following list comprises the chief publications relating either
directly or indirectly to the birds of Nevada. Other titles might be
added treating of the birds of the adjacent States and Territories,
though in none of them do we find any special information regarding
the geographic range of species which might bring them within the~
limits as rare or occasional visitors.

1853. BarrD, 8. F. Exploration and Survey of the Valley of the Great Salt Lake of
Utah, including a reconnaissance of a new route through the Rocky Mount-
ains. By Howard Stansbury, Captain Corps of Topographical Engineers, U.
S. Army. Printed by order of House of Representatives of the United States.
Washington: Robert Armstrong, Public Printer, 1853, 8vo. ill. > Birds. pp.
314-325. :

Treats of thirty-one species, and is of additional interest as recording the second instance
of the capture, within the United States, of a South American duck, Pterocyanea raflesii =
(Querquedula cyanoptera.) At the time of exploration Nevada formed part of Utah, and as
some of the species referred to in the work are mentioned as occurring over this territory,
Oregon, California, &c., the portion now constituting Nevada was evidently intended as
relates to geographical distribution.

1861. Barrp, S. F. Report upon the Colorado River of the West, explored in 1857
and 1858 by Lieutenant Joseph C. Ives, Corps of Topographical Engineers, un-
der the direction of the Office of Explorations and Surveys, A. A. Humphreys,
Captain Topographical Engineers, in charge. By order of the Secretary of
War. Washington: Government Printing Office, 1861. 4to. ill. > List of
Birds collected on the Colorado Expedition. Part v, pp. 5, 6.

Consists of a list of fifty-five species, found principally in the Colorado Valley from Fort
Yuma to the Big Cation.

No. 2. HOFFMAN ON THE BIRDS OF NEVADA. 253

1869. CoorrR, J.G. Some recent additions to the Fauna of California. < Proc. Cal,

Acad. Sci., v, pt. 1, for 1868, 1869, pp. 3-13. j
Reviews list of birds recently added to the fauna, and mentions some found in the Colorado
Valley.

1870. CoorreR, J.G. Geological Survey of California, J. D. Whitney, State Geolo-
gist. Ornithology, Volume I. Land Birds. Edited by S. F. Baird, from the
manuscript and notes of J. G. Cooper. Published by authority of the Legis-
latnre. 1870. 1 vol. large 8vo. 1 p. 1., pp. xi, 591, ill.

Account of the land birds of the State. The notes on species observed at Fort Mojaveare
of interest as illustrating the northern range of many of the Colorado Valley forms.

1870. Coormr, J. G. The Fauna of California and its Geographical Distribution.
< Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci., iv, pt. ii, 1870, pp. 61-81.

This paper was read Sept. 6, 1869; on p. 61, notes 21 spp. found in the Colorado Valley from
the Great Bend, Lat. 36°, to the mouth of the river, at Lat.32°, On pp. 74-76 is another list,
which might have been greatly increased had the author’s residence in the valley been pro-
longed.

1874, Barrp, S. F., Brewer, T. M., and Ridgway, R. A History of North American
Birds, by S. F. Baird, T. M. Brewer, and R. Ridgway. Land Birds. Vol. I
[—IIl]. Boston. Little, Brown and Company. 1874. 3 vols. sm. 4to. Vol.
I, pp. Xxviii, 1-596, vi, ill. and pll. Vol. II, 3p. UL, pp. 1-590, vi, ill. and pll.
Vol. III, 3 p. 11, pp. 1-560. 11., ill. and pll.

Avaluable history of the N. A. Birds, based upon the great amount of MS. contained in
the Smithsonian Institution in the form of correspondence, reports, field notes of collectors,
&c. Frequent reference is made to the area under consideration, of species, illustrative of
geographical distribution, migration, &c. The volumes relating to the Water Birds have
not yet been published, but a:e now, I learn, in the hands of the printer.

1874. Cours, Ettiott. Department of the Interior. United States Geological Survey
of the Territories, F. V. Hayden, U. 8. Geologist-in-Charge. Miscellaneous
Publications—No. 3. Birds of the Northwest: A Hand-book of the Orni-
thology of the region drained by the Missouri River and its tributaries. By El-
liott Coues, Captain and Assistant Surgeon U. 8. Army. Washington: Gov-
ernment Printing Office. 1874. 1 vol. 8vo. pp. i-xi., 1-791.

A well known and valuable work upon the birds found chiefly in that region extending
from the Mississippi River to the Rocky Mountains, and from the State of Kansas to the
Northern Boundary of the United States. The work is additionally valuable on account of
the complete synonymatic lists, notes on geographic distribution, and finally the monographie
treatises of three families, viz: Laride, Oolymbide, and Podicipedide, which are made the sub-
jects of special study.

1874. Horrman, W. J. [Notice of the breeding habits of Buteo swainsoni and Icterus
bullocki in Nevada.] <N. Am. Birds [Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway], IIL
1874, p. 269, 270.
[From author’s MS. report to the Chief of U. S. Geograph. Surveys West of 100th Me.
ridian. |
1874. Yarrow, H. C., and Henshaw, H. W., Engineer Department, U.S. Army. Geo-
graphical and Geological Explorations and Surveys west of the one hundredth
meridian. First Lieut. [now Captain] Geo. M, Wheeler, Corps of Engineers,
in charge. Report upon Ornithological Specimens collected in the years 1571,
1872, and 1873. Washington: Government Printing Office. 1874, 8vo. pamph.
1p. 1, pp. 148.
Contains four separate articles of which the first two only have special reference to Nevada.
The first, ‘‘ Report upon and list of birds collected by the expedition for explorations west of
the one hundredth meridian in 1872;” pp. 5-33, refers more particularly to the birds of south
western Utah and south eastern Nevada; the second, a “ List of birds collected by Lieut. G.
M. Wheeler's Expedition, 1871," pp. 34-36, consists of a list collected by that expedition be-
tween Bull Run Mountain. and Tucson, Arizona, the greatest number being taken in N eyada,
and form the basis of the remarks in the present paper.

254 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

1874-75. RipGway, ROBERT. List of Birds observed at Various Localities, contiguous
to the Central Pacific Railroad, from Sacramento City, California, to Salt Lake ~
Valley, Utah. <Bull. Essex Inst., vol. vi, No. 10, 1874, pp. 169-174; vol. vii,
No. 1, 1875, pp. 10-24; vol. vii, No. 2, 1875, pp. 30-40.

1875. HENSHAW, H. W. Annual Report upon the Geographical Explorations and

Surveys west of the one hundredth meridian, in California, Nevada, Nebraska,

Utah, Arizona, Colorado, New Mexico, Wyoming and Montana, by George M.

Wheeler, First Lieutenant, U.S. A.; being Appendix LL of the Annual Report

of the Chief of Engineers for 1875. Washington: Government Printing Office.

1875. 8vo pamph., pp. i-iv, 1 1., pp. 1-196, maps, ill., ete. >>App. 12, pp.
153-166.

Consists of an annotated list of the birds of Arizona comprising two hundred and ninety-

one species, based upon the author’s observations and supplemented by those of other ob-

servers, prominent among which is Dr. Cooper, whose notes form the authority for the west-
ern portion of the territory and the Colorado Valley.

1875. HENSHAW, H. W., Engineer Department, United States Army. Report upon
Geographical and Geological Explorations and Surveys West of the One Hun-
dredth Meridian, in charge of First Lieut. Geo. M. Wheeler, Corps of Engineers,
U.S. Army, under the direction of Brig. Gen. A. A. Humphreys, Chief of En-
gineers, U. 8. Army. Published by authority of Hon. Wm. W. Belknap, Sec-
retary of War, in accordance with Acts of Congress of June 23, 1874, and Feb-
ruary 15, 1875. In six volumes, accompanied by one Topographical and one
Geological Atlas. Vol. V.—Zoology. Washington: Government Printing
Office. 1875. 4Ato pp. 1021, pll. >Chap. III. Report upon The Ornitho-
logical Collections made in portions of Nevada, Utah, California, Colorado,
New Mexico, and Arizona, during the years 1871, 1872, 1873, and 1874, by H.
W. Henshaw. pp. 133-507, with xv col. pll.

The report is based upon the material gathered by the regular collectors of the expeditions
which, in a few instances, was increased by other of the survey assistants. Much valuable
matter is contained in the work in addition to the extensive synonymatic lists, the classifica-
tion and nomenclature followed being that adopted by Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway for the
Land Birds, and for the Water Birds, that given by Dr. Coues in his ‘‘Check List.”

1875. NELSON, E. W. Noteson Birds observed in portions of Utah, Nevada, and Cali-
fornia. <(Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. xvii, 1875, pp. 338-365.

Article III, pp. 349-352, notes 33 spp. found in the vicinity of Elko, Nev., bet. Aug. 9-14th;
followed by a list of 17 spp. (pp. 352-355) found 25 miles north of Elko.

1875. RipG@way, Robert. First Impressions of the Bird-Fauna of California, and
General Remarks on Western Ornithology. <(Scientific Monthly, 1875, pp.
2-13.

1876. HorrMan, W. J. Habits of Western Birds. <Am. Nat. x, 1876, p. 238, 239.
Treats of Icterus bullocki, Buteo swainsoni, Corvus americanus (= OC. frugivorus), and OC.
coraxz (= O. corax carnivorus).

1877. HENSHAW, H. W. Report on the ornithology of portions of Nevada and Cali-
fornia. By Mr. H. W. Henshaw. <Ann. Rep. Geog. Surveys West of the
100th Meridian, etc., being Appendix NN of the Ann. Rep. of the Chief of En-
gineers for 1877, Washington, 1877, pp. 1303-1322.

I. Consists of general remarks on the distribution of certain species, with notes on breed-
ing, migrations, etc., occupying pp. 1303-1307. II. ‘‘List of birds observed near Carson City,
Ney., from Aug. 25 to Sept. 16, and from Nov. 10 to Nov. 20, 1876, with notes,” enumerating
ninety-six species, pp. 1307-1315. III. ‘‘List of birds observed on the eastern slope of the
Sierras, near Carson City, Nev., from Sept. 16 to Nov. 7; with notes,”’ enumerating sixty-nine
species, pp. 1315-1322. In the present paper is noted for the first time the occurrence in
Nevada of the Fulvous Tree Duck (Dendrocycna fulva), and the Varied Thrush (Turdus
neevius). .

No. 2.)

HOFFMAN ON THE BIRDS OF NEVADA. 255

1877. RipGway, Rosert. Professional Papers of the Engineer Department, U. §.

Army, No. 18. Report of the Geological Exploration of the Fortieth Parallel,
made by order of the Secretary of War according to Acts of Congress of
March 2, 1867, and March 3, 1869, under the direction of Brig. and Bvt. Major
General A. A. Humphreys, Chief of Engineers, by Clarence King, U. 8S. Geol-
ogist. Washington: Gov’t. Printing Office, vol. iv, 1877. > Part III. Orni-
thology, pp. 305-643, and pp. 652-669.

Contains complete description of the birds obtained by the author while attached to the ex-
pedition, covering the area from San Francisco, Cal., to the eastward of Salt Lake City, Utah.
The area covered by Mr. Ridgway forms a narrow tract of about seventy miles in width, en-
tering Nevada from the parallel of 39° at the southwestern limit to that of 42° at the north-
eastern, including most of the northern portion of Nevada.

1878. Cours, ELtioTr. Department of the Interior | United States Geological Sur-

vey of the Territories | F. V. Hayden, U. 8. Geologist-in-charge | — | Miscella-
neous Publications—No. 11 | — | Birds of the Colorado Valley | A repository
of | scientific and popular information | concerning | North American Orni-
thology | By Elliott Coues | "HAS, 7A Se xyedid wy ualas Opas ky ove | — |

Part First | Passeres to Laniide | Bibliographical Appendix | Seventy Illustra-
tions | — | Washington | Government Printing Office | 1870 | 1 vol. 8vo. pp.
i-xvi, 1-807.

In this work ‘‘the whole subject of the bibliography of North American ornithology, and
of the synonymy of North American birds, has been worked up anew from the very bottom,
as a matter of original personal investigation admitting of nothing at second hand. Not only
the birds of the Colorado Valley, but also all others of North America, are thus exhaustively
treated, their synonymy and bibliography being at length placed upon a satisfactory basis.”
(From Prefatory Note by Dr. Hayden.) The report consists of a systematic treatment of the
families, genera and species, through Passeres to Lantide, represented in the region drained
by the Colorado River and its tributaries, including portions of Arizona, New Mexico, Col-
orado, Utah, Nevada, and that part of California lying in the Valley of the Colorado proper.
This comprises mainly that area between the Rocky Mountains on the east, and the Sierra
Nevada on the west, known as the ‘“‘Great Basin,” corresponding with the “‘ Middle Faunal
Province” of some writers, as distinguished from the ‘‘ Western” and “‘ Eastern” Provinces
respectively. The work may be regarded as complementary to the ‘‘ Birds of the Northwest”,
q. v.

In connection with the author’s own observations in the region treated, the labors of all
the other naturalists in the same field are either referred to, or quotations submitted in the
furtherance of the subject. This volume is one of the most important ever published upon
the subject, and it is hoped that the entire remaining work may be completed at an early day.

1878. HensHaw, H. W. Preliminary Report on the Ornithology of portions of Cali-

fornia and Nevada. By H. W. Henshaw, Field Season of 1877. < Annual

Report Geograph. Surveys West of the 100th Meridian, etc., being Appendix

NN of the Report of the Secretary of War, etc., Vol. II, Part iii, 1878, pp.
1607, 1608.

Notes the occurrence of Turdus nevius on the eastern slope of the Sierra Nevada, and the
breeding of Zonotrichia leucophrys.

1880. RrpGway, Rosrert. A Catalogue of the Birds of North America. < Proc. U.

S. Nat. Mus., iii. Aug. 24-Sept. 4, 188(, pp. 163-246.

This edition has not been published separately, although a number of extras were struck
off for private use. The catalogue forms the basis of the following one, viz:

1881. Rrpaway, Ropert. Nomenclature of North American Birds chiefly contained

in the United States National Museum. By Robert Ridgway. < Bull. Nat.
Mus. No. 21, 1881, p. 94.

In this catalogue the nomenclature has been brought fully up to date, supplying the wants
of ornithologists so long felt in consequence of the many changes since the publication of the
last Smithsonian list in 1859, the numerous accessions to our fauna, etc., ete. In this work
226 valid species and races are enumerated, which have either been first described or added to
the North American fauna since 1859, while on the other hand, ‘‘no less than 42 names of the
old catalogue have been relegated to the ranks of synonymy, and 20 more removed as extra-

256 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Voi. VI.

1881. RipGway, RoBERT—Continued.

limital. Furthermore, of the remaining 698 names over 300 have been more or less emended,
so that only 395 of the 760 names as given in the old catalogue are retained in the current
nomenclature!”—From Introduction. In the addenda (p. 85), the following named species
are given, which have been described as new to science, since the preceding 84 pp. of the list
were printed. These include all accessions up to January 1, 1881.

Polioptila californica Brewster.—Black-tailed Gnateatcher.

This was given in the 1st ed. of this catalogue as P. melanura Lawr., but Mr. Brewster has
recently determined that P. melanura was based upon the fully adult male of P. plumbea,
and is therefore a synonym of that species. The Californian bird being unnamed, Mr.
Brewster proposes for it the name californica, as above. (Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club, Apr., 1881.)

Helminthophaga cincinnatiensis Langdon.—Cincinnati Warbler.
Cf. Jour. Cine. Soc. Nat. Hist., July, 1880, pp. 119, 120, pl. iv; Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club, v, Oct.,
1880, p. 208, pl. viii.
Melanerpes formicivorus bairdi Ridgw.—Californian Woodpecker.

“In Hist. N. Am. Birds (vol. ii, p. 561), the Californian and Mexican specimens of this
species were separated as geographical races on account of certain well-marked differences,
and the name striatipectus proposed for the latter. Since it appears, however, that Swain-
son’s name formicivorus was based upon specimens from southern Mexico, striatipectus be-
comes a synonym. The Californian form being without a distinctive name (melanopogon
Temm. equalling formicivorus Swains.), I take great pleasure in dedicating it to Professor
Baird. MM. formicivorus bairdi replaces the true I. formicivorus throughout western Mexi-
co, down to Colima at least, the other race, angustifrons Baird, being peculiar to Lower
California.”

Eurinorhynchus pygmeus (Linn.) Pearson.—Spoon-billed Sandpiper.
From Point Barrow, Arctic coast of Alaska.
Hulica atra Linn.—European Coot.

A specimen in the Copenhagen Museum obtained in Greenland in 1876. (Dr. J. Reinhardt,
in epist. fide P. E. Freke.)

Fuligula rujfina (Pall.) Steph.—Rufous-crested Duck.
Fulton Market, New York, Feb., 1872. Specimen in U.S. National Museum.

—_ ~~ we

gg°

Bie

1

aN PA4L9 16"

pet

MAP

OF
NEVADA,
SHOWING LOCALITIES
Referred to in

ACCOMPANYING PAPER,
ey
BY
W. J. HOFFMAN, M.D.

1881.

\ZS

=

Mountain;

16°

ay

iy %
live

Ft. Mojave.

35°

Re a

7

BAA’

See

i eet) ra.

ham

(SRR utah ge
ae Ua fe Mega

Art. X.—North American Moths, with a preliminary
catalogue of the species of Madena and Polia.

By Aug. R. Grote.

Trochilium (Sciapteron) simulans Grote.

é. Antenne rather short, stout, black, slightly bluish, brown at tips
beneath. Head black with a yellow stripe on each side of the clypeus,
bordering the eyes in front. Palpi ascending, concealing the front,
yellow, with a fringing of black hairs at base. Vertex with a few yel-
low hairs between the antenne.. Collar yellow behind. Thorax black;
a yellow spot at insertion of primaries and another beneath. <A yellow
stripe on each side at the tips of the patagia. A transverse yellow
patch on the thorax behind. On each side of the metathorax are
patches of yellow hairs. Abdomen golden yellow abeve, with the basal
segment and part of the second ring black. The segments are very
narrowly black anteriorly and there is a mesial row of black dots not
very noticeable. Legs yellow; tarsi fulvous; middle and hind femora
shaded with black; coxz marked with yellow. Abdomen beneath with
the segments half black and yellow; anal hairs yellow over black and.
tipped with fulvous. Fore wings stained with brown; costal edge
blackish. <A transparent space at internal angle. Hind wings pellucid..
Fringes brown. Expanse, 36 mil.

This species is more wasp-like than any other North American species.
known to me. It is quite different from Denudatum or Marginatum. It
may be known by the stout yellow abdomen and the absence of discal
marks on the wings. In various papers I have described the following
species of North American Aegeriadae :

Aegeria pictipes G. & R. Tr. Am. Ent. Soc. Phil. 2, pl. 2, fig. 64;
Bailey, N. Am. Ent. 1, 17; Kellicott, Can. Ent. 13, 7.

N. B.—This species has the sexes much alike; the discal bar of fore
wings is narrower and the head smaller than in the male eritiosa, which
it much resembles.

Aegeria (Pyrrhotaenia) floridensis Grote, Can, Ent. 7, 14.

Aegeria lustrans Grote, Can. Ent. 12, 213 (Trochilium),

Zenodoxus maculipes G. & R. Tr. Am. Ent. Soe. 2.

Trochilium (Sciapteron) simulans Grote, B. B. E. 8. 3, 78.

Eutheca mora n. g. et sp.
?. I have several specimens of a Psychid (?) form which I cannot find
in the books, and in collections the speeies is always unnamed. The
LivG 8B 257

258 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL

antenne are simple, scaled. Eyes naked; ocelli wanting. Mavxille
not perceivable. Labial palpi slight, hairy, ascending, curved. Body
slender, sparsely haired. Legs rather stout and long; hind tibie with
two pairs of spurs. Fore wings elongate; costa arched; external mar-
gin oblique, even; internal margin rounded at base, retiring before in-
ternal angle. Veins 12, simple, cell divided; veins 2, 3, 4, equidistant
from the end of median vein. Vein 1furcate at base. Cellincompletely
closed. Veins 5 and 6 nearly equidistant between 4 and 7; 7 from ex-
tremity of the vein dividing the cell; 8, 9, 10 near together from upper
corner of cell, running to costa before apex; 11 out of subcostal vein
very near the base; 12 free. Hind wings 8-veined; veins simple; the
cell incompletely closed ; vein 2 out of median vein at within outer third;
veins tending to be equidistant. The fore wings are ochrey brown,
with costal dots noticeable before apices. A pale ochrey shade on in-
ternal margin at base, extending upwardly in a triangular manner be-
yond the middle. This shading is not always defined. <A curved discal
streak. Hind wings brownish fuscous. Fringes on both wings a little
darker; even, concolorous. Beneath much as above; costal region of
secondaries ochrey brown. The hairy body parts concolorous fuscous
brown; with paler hairs about the head and face. Expanse, 30 mil.
Hab.—New York. I have not seen the male. This form has a curious
resemblance to Hepialus, but the antenne are longer.

Heterocampa Chapmanii n. s.

2. Several fresh specimens of a fine species of Heterocampa are con-
tained in Mr. Thaxter’s collection, found in Florida. The thorax and
fore wings are pale gray green; the thorax behind is brown. The sub-
basal field is shaded with bright brown; the curved discal streak and
the thick subterminal line are dark brown; the subterminal field is
shaded with lighter brown. These brown or ferruginous shadings con-
trast. A fine brown line broken by the veins before the margin. The
median lines are in triplicate, of a darker gray than the wing, waved.
A broad white arcuate shade before the subterminal line, opposite the
cell, extending to costa. Hind wings gray with a mesial line, the anal
angle white. Beneath gray with a rusty subterminal straight shade
line on fore wings. This fine species expands 52 mil., and is named for
Dr. A. W. Chapman of Florida. it is readily distinguished from any of
our species, and from the diagnoses must be different from those men-
tioned by Harris in his Correspondence edited by Mr. Scudder.
Platycerura furcilla Pack.

The larva, discovered by Mr. Thaxter, resembles that of Charadra or
Diphthera, and is not at all like Cerura. The moth is related to Audela .
acronyctoides Walk., which I have referred to the Noctwidae and not to
the Bombycidae.

Agrotis quarta 0. s.

2. Fore tibize unarmed. Rosy brown, resembling baja. Lines brown,
badly marked; t. p. line broken into dots. Subterminal line subcontinu-

—_—

No, 2.] GROTE ON NORTH AMERICAN MOTHS. 259

ous, nearly straight. Orbicular round, nearly concolorous, with a bright
stain edging the fine incomplete annulus within. Reniform reddish
orange, contrasting, upright, with incomplete brown annulus, shaded
with ochrey. A faint dotted terminal line. Hind wings fuscous with
paler fringes. Beneath paler, shaded with rosy; with discal marks and
exterior irregular common line. Collar brighter than the rosy brown
head and thorax. Expanse, 40 mil. Sauzalito, Cal.

Agrotis Washingtoniensis n. s.

2. [have considered this a form of innotabilis (Can. Ent. 12, 154), but
a larger series of specimens collected by Mr. Morrison in Washington
Territory shows no nearer approach to my type of innotabilis from Cali-
fornia. In Washingtoniensis the median space is shaded with rich brown,
the claviform is outlined, and several fine black lines cross the median
space inferiorly. The orbicular is more oblique and is bright brown,
not concolorous as in innotabilis ; it is somewhat larger and squarer.
The collar is bicolorous in both, and else the two species are much alike.

Agrotis immixta n. s.

g. This species is paler than inconcinna, the ¢ antenne more length-
ily bristled, the fringes of the hind wings entirely pale. Pale grayish
brown, the lines indistinct but strongly indicated by double black cos-
tal marks. The stigmata small, not dark ringed, paler than the wing,
very inconspicuous. The s. t. line relatively well marked, broken. Hind
wings whitish with the veins soiled, a faint terminal border and the
fringes entirely pale; beneath with a dotted submarginal line. Fore
wings beneath smoky with an even curved extra-mesial line. Discal
marks indicated. Head and thorax pale brown; second joint of palpi
blackish at the side. Tarsi dotted. Expanse 32 mil. Texas, May 12,
Belfrage No. 518 (red label).

The exterior line on primaries is unusually removed outwards towards
the s. t. line. This cannot be a form of auviliaris, but it is not improb-
able that inconcinna is a form of that protean and widely distributed
species.

Agrotis docilis n. s.

2. Large-sized, resembling the type form of auviliaris, or perexcellens,
or Wockei in the markings. Lilac gray over blackish fuscous; the cell
filled with black between and around the spots. Stigmata large, far
apart, gray. Orbicular oblique, rounded above, straight below; clavi-
form filled with black; reniform upright, excavate outwardly, narrow and
long. Lines incompletely double, with pale included shades. T. p. line
forming a series of irregular black lunules, more uneven and drawn in
below median vein than in allied species. S. t. line consisting of a series
of broken cuneiform spots marked by pale shades outwardly. Hind
wings and fringes unicolorous pale fuscous. Beneath the hind wings
a little paler but nearly unicolorous pale fuscous without marks. Thorax
and head like fore wings; collar faintly lined; palpi and legs dark fus-
cous. Expanse, 48 mil. Colorado, Professor Snow.

260 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL

Agrotis viralis n.s.

é. Antennae ciliate beneath. Fore tibiz unarmed, unless accidentally
the spines are broken off, which sometimes occurs. Pale faded yellow fus-
cous; collar with a faint line. The lines obsolete. A blackish dash at
base; another below it on internal margin; a dash across submedian
space, and the cell before and between the stigmata darker shaded.
Stigmata pale, concolorous, moderate. Orbicularoutwardly oblique, near
the reniform at base; both stigrnata incompletely dark ringed. S. f.
line indicated; s. t. space paler; terminal space darker. Hind wings
paler, nearly concolorous with fore wings, darker shaded along outer
border. Body concolorous; beneath without markings; hind wings
quite pale. Expanse, 38 mil. Hab.—Nebraska.

Agrotis atrifera Grote, Bull. U.S. G. Surv. 4, 173.

Both sexes of thisspecies have been taken by Mrs. French at Orono, Me.
The Maine specimens only seem to differ from my California types by
the orbicular being complete and the black discal shade a little more
extended. The female has the hind wings a little darker.

Agrotis brunneigera Grote, B. B.S. N. 8.3, 80.

Specimens have been taken in Washington Territory by Mr. Morri-
son, and in Colorado by Mr. Neumoegen, which I cannot well separate
from my Vancouver types (¢s) of this species in my collection. The
stigmata are more obliterate and the color of a lighter fawn brown.
The median lines are variably distinct, vividly contrasting, or, in one
specimen, nearly obsolete. There is a black line on the collar as in fus-
cigera. The male antenne are brush-like.

The Noctuidae from Washington Territory belong in many instances to
the same species found in California, about San Francisco, and Vancou-
ver Island. Among such species are the following:

Hadena divesta.
curvata.
indirecta.

Mamestra cuneata.

cinnabarina.

Agrotis brunneigera.
gravis.

Plusia labrosa.

Deva palligera.

Actinotia Stewarti.

Hadena separans n.S.

é 2. Allied to devastatrix, but darker, shaded with blackish. The
subterminal line forms a more decided M-mark, but not cutting the
fringes; a black dash connects the small claviform with the exterior
line; the internal margin has a black streak at base. The terminal
space is shaded with blackish above and below its central constriction

No. 2.] GROTE ON NORTH AMERICAN MOTHS. 261

from the teeth of the s. t. line. Otherwise the two species are much
alike in markings, and I hesitate to insist on other differences. It will
be readily distinguished by the above characters. Expanse, ¢ 36, 2 40
mil. New York, in June, coll. A. R. Grote; Wisconsin.

Eladena violacea n. s.

I have hitherto regarded this western species as the same as our east-
ern Bridghamii, but it is evidently distinct. The ground color of pri-
maries is reddish washed with lilac at base and over the subterminal
space. The costal region is somewhat blackish. The stigmata are
large, discolorous, pale clay yellow, and the terminal space is pale clay,
interrupted with blackish at the middle and anal angle and leaving the
apices pale clay. The thorax is pale clay and the head, also base of
primaries; the abdomen is still paler and the hind wings white without
bands. Beneath white, reflecting the markings of fore wings. Expanse,
35 mil. The type in my collection was collected by Mr. Behrens at
Shasta, Soda Springs. A soiled specimen from Sierra Nevada is in
collection Hy. Edwards. The wings are longer and narrower in violacea,
as compared with our eastern Bridghamit.

Hadena characta Gr., Can. Ent. 12, 243.

Another female specimen in Mr. Tepper’s collection from Nevada
differs from the type in being more shaded with blackish, the claviform
being suffused with black, and the black shading before the s. t. line
being more evidently expressed. The reniform and orbicular are black-
ish centrally. The ochrey tinge behind the reniform always contrasts.
The blackish fringes are neatly cut with white. The fuscous seconda-
ries are indented on external margin opposite the cell. The species
belongs to the series of curvata, adnixa, and fumosa. It is more gray,
black and white, than the others, and looks a little like an Agrotis at
first sight.

Hadena tracta Grote, Pr. A.N.S. P. 204, 1874.

This differs from chalcedonia by the thorax and fore wings at base
being smooth pale fawn color or ochrey. But it is in other respects so
like the Texan species which I determine as chalcedonia, that there can
be no doubt it is a variety. The ‘“‘common species from New York pro-
visionally determined as chalcedonia,” with which I provisionally com-
pared it (1. ¢.), is not Hiibner’s species, and remains undetermined. It
is the “arna” of some collections, but not, I believe, of Guenée. It
bears a MS. name in my collection which I do not publish as the species
is so common (Massachusetts to Texas) it must be named in the B. M.
Lists, but what the name is cannot be made out from published data.

Hadena paginata Morr., P. A. N.S. Phil. 64, 1875.

I have examined Mr. Morrison’s type through the kindness of Mr.
Tepper. Itis not in very good condition, the wings a little crumpled
at the edges. It is a small glistening brown species looking like a

262 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL

Caradrina, and not unlike Guenée’s figure of Monodes nucicolora, pl. 4,
fig. 9. It is probably the same as five specimens collected by Mr.
Schwarz in Florida and which are before me. It differs from these only
in the lines being dark and broader (whereas they are generally fine
and pale with a dark edging in my fresher material), and in the sec-
ondaries (¢) being banded above. The primaries in paginata (type) are
glistening brown. The reniform is small, near the t. p. line and almost
touching it, preceded and followed by a blackish shade. The ft. p. line
runs out above the reniform obliquely, is angulate opposite to it, and
below it is roundedly indented. The median lines approach on costa ;
the inner line runs inwardly obliquely and somewhat curvedly below
the middle. With this, Mr. Schwarz’s specimens generally agree, ex-
cept that the lines are usually more pale, (when visible), the anterior
line usually forms a more acute outer angulation on the cell and is less
curved inferiorly. The wing is darker shaded outwardly, and the reni-
form touches inferiorly the t. p. line. It is barely possible that paginata
represents a distinct species; but it is probable that it is a- variety in
which the darker margins of the lines are broader than usual. The
material is not sufficient to finally decide the question.

Hadena fuscimacula n. s.

é. Allied to paginata but more robust, different in color, in the shape
of the stigmata and course of the lines and in the color of secondavies.
Hind wings concolorous dark brown or fuscous; beneath both wings
fuscous, with double exterior dark shade bands, brought into relief by
paler accompanying shades. Fringes pale at base. Fore wings dusky
brown, shaded with olivaceous. Lines continuous, dark, obsoletely
geminate. Half line present. Inner line outwardly oblique, nearly even,
approaching outer line oninternal margin. Orbicular small, round, dis-
colorous, dark fuscous. Reniform nearly upright, not lunate, somewhat
figure-of-8-shaped, dark, discolorous. Outer line with a rounded exser-
tion opposite the reniform, even, followed more or less distinctly by
black points. S. t. line pale, very indistinct, cutting the dusky brown
terminal shading. Expanse 21 to 24 mil. Three fresh males, one in Mr.
Tepper’s collection, two in my own.

HADENA Schrank.
§ LUCERIA.

delicata Gr. Tr. Am. Ent. Soc. 92, 1874; interna Gr., Check List 1, 24.
Can. Mass. N.Y.

Burgessi Morr. Bull. B. 8. N. 8. 2,109. Mass.

trelicina Morr., Pr. B.S. N. H. 216, 1875. Texas.

passer Guen., Noct. 1, 195; loculata Morr., B. B. 8. N.S. 2, 110. var. con-
spicua Morr. id. Mass. N. Y. Ill.

No. 25 GROTE ON NORTH AMERICAN MOTHS. 263
§HADENA Tyr.

tSommeri Lefb. Staud. Cat. No. 1398. Labrador.

exulis Zefb. Staud. Cat. No. 1406. Labrador.

ducta Gr. Bull. U. 8S. Geol. S. 4,176. Maine. W. T.

devastatrix (or) Brace, Am. J. Sci. vol. 1; Harris Ins. Inj. Veg. 445; ab-

jecta var. Guen. 194; ordinaria Walk. 232; Gr. B. B.S. N.S. 1, 108;

Speyer Stett. Ent. Zeit. 147. Calif. Hast. W. and M. States. W. T.
separans Groten.s. N. Y.; Wise.
castanea Gr, B. B. S. N. S. 2, 156; var. albina Gr. id. California.

cynosa Gr. Papilio, vol. 1, 34. W. T.
occidens Gr., B. U.S. G.S. 4 177. Nevada.
arctica 15500 Gen. 120; anna Harris 450; Hadena amputatrix Fitch

N. Y. Rep. Calif.; Tr Eastern & Middle States; Can.
Bridghamii G. & R., Pp, HK. 8. Phil. 6, Pl. 3, fig. 1. Eastern States.
violacea Gr. n. 8. California.
exornata Moeschl. W. HE. M. 4, 364, Taf. 9,5. Labrador.

Hulstii Gr., N. Am. Ent. 1, 93. Colorado.
dubitans Walk., 232; Gr. B. B.S. N.S. 1, 108; Speyer Ent. Zeit. 446.

European Alps; Vancouver; Eastern U.S.

N. B.—Considered a variety of the European lateritia by Dr. Speyer.
sputatrix (or) Gr., B. B.S. N.S. 1, 190. Can. West. & Middle States.
suffusea Morr., Proc. A. N. 8. Phil. 61, 1875. Can.; Middle & East.

States.

N. B.—There are two varieties of this species, one suffusca, the other
according to Walker’s det. his Agrotis illata, which latter name has pri-
ority.
apamiformis Guen. Noct. 1, 137; Gr. B. B.S. N. 8.1, 109. Eastern &

Middle States.
vultuosa Gr., Pr. A. N.S. Phil. 420, 1875. Hast. & Mid. States.

N. B.—Perhaps a form of the European rurea.
cristata Harvey, Bull. U.S. G. 8. 4,176. N.Y.
lignicolor (a) Guen., 1, 140; Gr. B. B. S. N.S. 1, 109. var. quaesita Gr.

Can. Ent. 9. Can.; West., Eastern & Middle States.
genialis Gr., B. B.S. YN. S. 2, 66. California.
auranticolor Gr., Bul. B.S. N.S. 1,109. Colorado. W. T.
cuculliiformis Gr., Check List, 24. California.
verbascoides Guen., Noct.1, 141. Middle & Eastern States.

Stipata Morr., Pr. A. N.S. Phil. 64,1875. Ill. Mass.

cariosa Guen., Noct. 1, 144. Middle & Eastern States.

tsectilis Guen., Noct. 1,141. “Am. Sept.” (?)

vulgaris G. & &., Proc. E. 8S. Phil. 6, Pl. 3, fig. 2. Middle & East.

States.
patina Harvey, B. B.S. N. 8. 3,7. Texas.
semilunata Grote, Pap. 1, 58. Wash. T.
inordinata Morr., P. A. N. 8. Phil. 63, 1875. Mass.

264 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI

remissa Hubn., 423. Eastern & Middle States.
N. B.—Considered by Guenée a form of the European gemina.

finitima Guen., Noct. 1, 206; Speyer, St. Ent. Zeit., 150. Eastern &
Middle States.
N. B.—Considered by Speyer a form of the European basilinea.

impulsa Guen., Noct. 1, 194. Hastern & Middle States. var. mixta
Gr. Texas.
N. B.—Guenée incorrectly describes this as a Mamestra, but there is

a black Mamestra (assimilis) which must not be confounded with impulsa.

A variety of impulsa has been collected by Belfrage in Texas; var. mixta

Gr., in which the pale powderings are more noticeable, the claviform

rounded, all the lines narrower and more distinct, the reniform pow-

dered with whitish, No. “628.” In this the general color is lighter and

there is no submedian shading from the claviform to the t. p. line.

leucoscelis Gr., 6th P. Rep. 30. Wisconsin.

olorina Gr., B. B.S. N. 8. 3,84. California.

EaitieG7.,-Anm. Neo N. TNS Ets. 0o, PStos Nae ve

algens Gr., Can. Ent. 10, 236. Maine.

vigilans Gr., B. U.S. Geol. 8. 4, 176. Maine.

senescens Gr., Can. Ent. 10, 235. N. Y.

diversicolor Morr., P. B.S. N. H., 132, 1874. Mass.

mactata Guen., Noct. 1, 207. Hastern & Middle States.

turbulenta Hubn., Zutr. fig. 67-68. N.Y.

indirecta Gr., Can. Ent. 7, 28. Cal.; Vane.; W. T.

divesta Gr., Can. Ent. 7, 28. Cal.; Vane.; W. T.

tusa Gr., B. U.S. G. 8S. 4,177. California.

tonsa Gr., Can. Ent. 12, 214. Nevada.

chryselectra Gr., Can. Ent. 12, 244. Colorado.

characta Gr., Can. Ent. 12, 243. Nevada.

genitrix Gr., Can. Ent. 10,236. Nevada.

adnixa Gr., Can. Ent. 12, 243. Nevada.

curvata Gr., Bull. B.S. N.S. 2,157. Cal.; W. T.

fumosa Gr., B. U.S. G. 8. 5, 205. Colorado.

longula Gr., B. U.S. G. 8. 5, 204. Colo.; Nev.; W. T.

tortilis Gr., B. Brook. E. S. 3, 46. Wash. T.

marina Gr., B. B.S. N. 8. 2, 67. California.

miselioides Guen., Noct. 2, 82; H.-S. Ex. 212. U.S. east of R. M.

chlorostigma Harvey, Can. Ent. 8, 53. Ill.; Texas.

t Dunbari Harvey, Can. Ent. 8, 52. Vancouver.

modica Guen., Noct. 1, 207; subcedens Walk., 264. Eastern & Middle
States.

vulgivaga Morr., P. B. 8. N. H. 144, 1874. Illinois.

fractilinea Gr., Can. Ent. 6,15. Can., N. Y.

modiola Gr., B. U.S. G. 8S. 5, 204. Wisconsin.

confederata Gr., B. B. S. N. 8. 2,143. Tex.; La.; coast of U.S. to
N. Y.; Jamaica, W. I.

No. 2.] GROTE ON NORTH AMERICAN MOTHS. 265

§
cylindrica Gr., Can. Ent. 12, 214. Nevada.
§ PSEUDANARTA Hy. Edw.

flava Gr., P. Ent. 8S. Phil. 1874; var. crocea Hy. Edw. B.Col.; Colo-
rado.

singula Gr., Can. Ent. 12, 215. Texas.

flavidens Gr., B. U.S. Geol. 8. 5, 205. Colorado.

aurea Gr., B. U.S. Geol. S. 5, 205. Texas.

§ OLIGIA Hubn.

chalcedonia Hubn. 404. var. tracta Gr. P. A. N.S. P. 204, 1874. Texas.
versicolor Gr., Pr. A. N.S. Phil., 204, 1874. Can.; N. Y.

tfestivoides Guen., Noct. 1, 220.

tarna Guen., Noct. 1, 222.

exesa Guen., Noct. 1, 222. Florida.

paginata Morr. P. A. N.S. Phil. 64, 1875. Florida.

fuscimacula Grote n.s. Florida.

REMARKS.—Dryobota jfibulata Morr., B. B. S. N. 8S. 112, 1874, is not a
Dryobota. I have seen the type, but could not examine it carefully ; it
seemed to me close to leucoscelis, if not the same. Hadena rasilis Morr.
P. B.S. N. H. 158, 1874, I would refer to Caradrina. I have referred
Hadena minuscula Morr. P. A. N.S. P. 431, 1875, to Parastichtis. Hadena
congermana Morr. Can. Ent. 6, 106, has hairy eyes, and I have, I am sure
correctly, referred it to Mamestra ; it comes so close to vindemialis, that
it has been suspected a form of that species, although there are not
enough facts to support this view. Hadena norma Morr., Can. Ent. 7,
216, is the same as Hustrotia mariae, and I would refer it to Hustrotia
(Hrastria of Authors). The species commonly named arna in collections
is not certainly that species from Guenée’s description. I have identi-
fied exesa (from Guenée’s description and an outline drawing of his) col-
lected by Mr. Schwarz in Florida. It is possible that Monodes nucicolora
Guen., either belongs to this group or Caradrina. Specimens, collected
by Mr. Schwarz in Florida, are in my collection, which seem to be Ha-
dena paginata of Morrison, and can hardly be this species of Guenée’s,
whose description seems to cover a form allied to this and resembles in
some points Platysenta atriciliata. itis perhaps impossible to identify
Guenée’s species without reference to the type, as there are several slen-
der Noctuids in our fauna more or less corresponding with M. Guenée’s
description. The different species called “ sectilis,” and one of which is
referred by Dr. Speyer (I know not on what authority) as “ sectilis of
Grote,” can none of them, I think, be identical with Guenée’s species,
whose description I have not applied to any form. I have seen the species
identified as cartosa, by me, called ‘“sectilis,” but other forms in collec-

266 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

tions occasionally receive this name. I am, myself, perhaps, responsi-
ble for part of this indecision, for some years ago I was not sure which
of our species were described by Guenée under Xylophasia cariosa and
sectilis, the description of the former being drawn up from a poor speci-
men. Allowing for this, Guenée’s description covers our common species,
while the phrase ‘“ La cdte est entierement claire,” seems to me decisive,
and to refer to the white shaded costa of the form which I call cariosa.
As to the British Museum Lists, they contain descriptions of several
species of North American Hadenoid forms under various genera, which
cannot be at all made out from published data and they are accordingly
omitted here. Finally, I believe the Dryobota paviae of Dr. Bebr to be a
later name for Hadena curvata. It is possible that a few of the forms
included here may be separated under other genera. The above list
contains Hadenoid forms agreeing in having naked eyes and unarmed
tibia. The thoracic tufts are usually present. They appear to be very
small and confined to the base of the thorax in confederata, which is an
aberrant form, nearest, perhaps, to our fractilinea, leading to subtropi-
cal species having somewhat the aspect of Prodenia. The abdominal
tufts are wanting in Oligia, and the frail species resemble Caradrina,
which latter genus, by the way, does not seem to have strong characters.
The abdomen remains conical in Oligia, however; it is flattened in rasi-
lis, which on this and other accounts I would not keep under Hadena.
The abdominal tufts are also very difficult to perceive in devastatria,
which latter, otherwise, is a typical Hadena. They are of very different
development in the several forms. The group needs a careful study
with the forms of the genitalia taken into account and a strict compari-
. son made with the European forms. The present list, however, appears
to me more exact than any I have yet published (and no other author
has yet attempted to arrange our species), and gives an approximate
basis on which to compare the representation of the genus in Europe
and America. Staudinger gives 53 species in 1871, belonging to the
European fauna. The present list gives 79 names.

POLIA Treitschke.

The following is a list of the North American species which I referto
the European genus Polia. Mr. Morrison’s confragosa and speciosa are
yet unknown tome. I have identified perquiritata of this author; it is
not a Polia, but an Agrotis, allied to the European A. speciosa and pos-
sibly identical with it. Moeschler records Agrotis speciosa from Labra-
dor. <Agrotis perquiritata has been taken in Northern New York and at
the camp of the Entomological Club on Mount Washington. For the
present I keep Pachypolia atricornis as generically distinct. The an-
tenn of the male are strongly bipectinate; they are serrate in acutis-
sima and medialis. A comparison with the European species is needed
to establish the limits of the group, and for want of complete foreign

No. 2.) - GROTE ON NORTH AMERICAN MOTHS. . ee

material I have not been able to decide the question. I arrange the
species provisionally in three groups; the first may come to be united

with Pachypolia.
Group A.

acutissima Grote, Check List 23. Can.
medialis Grote, Ann. Lyc. N. H. N. Y., 306, 1876. Can.; N. Y.

GROUP B.
illepida Grote, Can. Ent. 11, 95. Colorado.

Group C.

aspera Morr., Bost. S. N. H. 132, 1874; diffusilis Harv., Can. Ent. 10, 56.
Northern N. Y.

pallifera Grote, Can. Ent. 9, 88. Illinois.

tspeciosa Morr., P. Bost. S. N. H.137,1874. Mass.

teonfragosa Morr., P. Bost. S. N. H. 138, 1874. Canada.

aedon Grote, Can. Ent. 12,154. Nev., W. T.

theodori Grote, Can. Ent. 10, 237; id. 12,219. Colorado.

epichysis Grote, Can. Ent. 12, 219. California.

Gortyna impecuniosa nt. s.

A smaller and darker form, without clypeal tubercle, allied to cata-
phracta. Fore wings dark yellow with the outer margin washed with
purplish leaving a terminal yellow shade and the apices with a yellow
blotch. Median space shaded with rusty. Stigmata concolorous, sim-
ple, all present. Exterior line simple, less exserted than usual. Hind
wings pale fuscous. The type, a male in my collection, expands 25 mil.
I have seen other specimens, larger, in collections submitted to me for
determination. Massachusetts.

Gortyna erepta 0. s.

¢. A stout and rather aberrant form. Eyes naked; front unarmed;
tibiz unarmed; feeble dorsal tuftings on the abdomen. Yellow. Fore
wings dull orange yellow with the lines fuscous, simple. The exte-
rior well removed outwardly, a little waved between the veins. Half
line present; interior line uneven, a little outwardly projected below
median vein. Claviform a simple outline, incomplete. Orbicular con-
colorous, a small ringlet. Reniform small, a white half-moon in a black-
ish shade. Hind wings dull yellowish with faint discal mark and exte-
rior line. Beneath dull yellowish with faint exterior common line and
discal marks. The insect is nearly concolorous; fore wings and thorax
darker. An even terminal line on primaries. Antenne simple, ciliate
beneath. Expanse, 34 mil. Douglas County, Kansas, Professor Snow.

Gortyna juvenilis Grote, n. s,
I described this species some time ago; the MS. is in Professor
Snow’s hands. Itis a small form, allied to sera, with bright yellow fore

268 - BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

wings, deeper shaded over median space and along terminal margin of
fore wings. Stigmataconcolorous. Linesoblique,uneven. Hind wings
blackish. Thorax like fore wings. Hyes naked; tibiz unarmed. Ex-

panse, 29 mil. Taken by Professor Snow in Colorado. ;

Gortyna obliqua Harvey.

This species is the Californian representative of the Eastern immanis
of Guenée. The outer pale line is more oblique than in our species. In
color and markings the two are else much alike, but I have no doubt of
the specific validity of the Western form. Our Eastern stramentosa,
very different from immanis in color, resembles it in the shape of the
exterior line and just where obliqua differs from both our Eastern spe-
cies. Mr. Hy. Edwards, to whom I am indebted for my pair of obliqua,
has a number of specimens of the Californian form quite constant in
its characters.

Gortyna Harrisii n. s.

é2. This species is allied to rutila and between that species and pur-
purifascia. Fore wings varying from ferruginous orange to ochrey yel-
low, clouded and shaded with purply fuscous. lines distinct. Exte-
rior line double, the outer component line dark and thick; the line is a
little projected below costa, thence inwardly obliquely and evenly to in-
ternal margin. Base of the wing yellowish; a dot, sometimes whitish-
on median vein. Orbicular and claviform white, rounded, the latter in-
cluding a little spot superiorly. Reniform a yellow, angulated streak,
surrounded by a cluster of dots partly yellow and partly white. Thorax
purply or yellowish, dark; a tuft behind the collar; dorsum of abdomen
tufted; front without tubercle. Hind wings with a mesial line and ex-
terior shade; varying in pallor. Beneath more reddish, with discal
mark and line distinct on hind wings. Expanse, 36 mil. Massachu-
setts, reared by Mr. Roland Thaxter.

This species is represented in the Harris collection by two specimens
und r the number 361. I have been in doubt which species was in-
tended by Dr. Harris under the name Leucostigma ; it may be either this
or Rutila, but the question has no synonymical interest since there is a
very different Huropean species with the same name, not generically sep-
arable from Gortyna Hiibn., of which Micacea is the type.

The excellent collection of Mr. Thaxter enables me to present a few
notes on our species of Gortyna. Guenée’s figure of Rutila does not give
the details very distinctly, and in this genus the course of the transverse
posterior line must be observed. In Rutila it is bent opposite the dise;
this is indicated in Guenée’s figure, where it margins inwardly the pur-
plish subterminal space; in this same figure the subterminal line is
prominent, straight, and but slightly uneven. In studying the figure
this subterminal line must not be mistaken for the t. p. line, which is
not distinctly given. In his description Guenée does not mention it.

No. 2.] GROTE ON NORTH AMERICAN MOTHS. 269

I think Marginidens will prove to be founded on larger and darker speci-
mens of Rutila, but of this I am not certain. Harrisii has the t. p. line
thick, not bent opposite the cell, but with a slightly rounded costal pro-
jection, and double. In Purpurifascia the t. p. line is thick and straight,
angulated just at the costa, the angulation sharper than in Harrisii, than
which it is more orange and freer from fuscous shadings. Itwill be quite
difficult to separate Sauzalitae and Harrisii from the markings, but the
t. p. line is a little more drawn in below median vein in the Californian
species, in which the clypeus is mucronate, while in Harrisii it is smooth.
In Sauzalitae the projection is perpendicular and wedge-shaped; it can
be felt with a fine pin,-and under the glass readily perceived. In Buffa-
loensis the clypeus has a central conical projection, rising from all sides
to a blunt point. On account of this bulging of the clypeus I have re-
garded Sauzalitae and Buffaloensis as congeneric with the European Och-
ria Flavago.

Mr. Thaxter has a fine series of Quaesita and Rigida. The former,
with its evenly dark orange red color and the strong angulation of the
median shade and outward rounding of the t. p. line, is very distinct;
in some varieties the anterior stigmata are white. In its total appear-
ance this species recalls Nictitans var. Lucens, while larger, and quite dif-
ferent in the details of its markings. Rigida is the palest species. Of
a light straw yellow with purplish contrasting s. t. space and terminal
shadings, the concolorous spots finely outlined, it vaguely recalls the
European Dicycla Oo, without the red markings. It differs from Cata-
phracta again by the rigid t. p. line, and is perhaps usually a smaller
insect. Gortyna limpida may be distinguished from Cerussata by its
smaller size, darker color, and the shape of thereniform. In Cerussata
the reniform is long and narrow, the central bent yellow line surrounded
by small white spots as is usual, but the whole reniform is longer and
narrower than in any of the allied species. Of the other allied species
with white spots, Serrata from the West may be known by the pecti-
nated male antenne. Speciosissima, the largest and finest of them all,
an Eastern form from Rhode Island (Mrs. Bridgham) and Massachusetts
(Mr. Thaxter), has very marked characters and needs no further com-
ment. Including the section Apamea, which I have discussed in the
pages of the Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Phil-
adelphia, p. 205, 1874, and the two forms I have referred, as above noted,
to Ochria, we have twenty-three species in our fauna which may be con-
sidered as belonging to Gortyna Hiibner. For a notice of the generic
synonymy I refer the student to the Check List of Noctwidae, Part 2,
p. 37.

Orthosia decipiens n. s.
g. This form, although larger than any -ferrugineoides, at first seems

to be a variety of that protean species ; it differs by the clear yellowish,
unbanded secondaries, and in this approaches ralla. As to the latter, its

270 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

smaller size and dotted subterminal line must always distinguish it read-
ily. The new form has the primaries of a faded orange, all the lines faint,
concolorous, so that the wing wants all fuscous shadings. The mark-
ings are like ferrugineoides, except that they are not laid down in fuscous.
The stigmata are concolorous, the reniform upright with contrasting in-
ferior stain. Hind wings light yellow, immaculate. Beneath pale yel-
low with obsolete exterior line. Expanse, 38 mil. Northern Indiana in
June.

Orthosia inops n. s.

Bears about the same relation to ewroa that ferrugineoides does to
ralla. Smaller, brighter colored, the fuscous lines single. Slight
bodied; thorax and fore wings shaded with dusky orange red. Lines
much as in ewroa, the subterminal line continuous, not dotted as in
eurod. Hind wings whitish, with obsolete bands, tinged outwardly
with reddish. Beneath with faint double fuscous lines and discal marks.
Front and middle tibiz and femora brown. Expanse, 26 mil. Kittery
Point, Mr. Thaxter.

Lathosea n. g.

The head is broad, closely applied to the thorax. Ocelli. Palpi with
the third joint rather long and slender. Vestiture shaggy and coarse.
Tongue moderate. Eyes naked. Male antenne provided with a series
of lamelle, or plates, beneath, ciliated. Genitalia long and slender.
Thorax tufted behind. Wings entire. The species has the outline and
appearance of Aporophila Yosemitae.

Lathosea pulla n. s.

é. Gray; the veins on primaries black; the fore wings shaded with
blackish. Ornamentation simple, consisting only of the two median
lines, which are not very distinct. Inner line single, black, forming
three very large teeth, one on the cell, one on submedian space, another
below vein 1; a short tooth on costa. Outer line interrupted, uneven,
forming a tooth on vein 1; obsolete between the veinlets superiorly ;
forming black and white dots on the veins; its course is straight after
its costal extension, where it is black, continuous, distinctly lined with
white outwardly. Fringes white, soiled with blackish outwardly. A
terminal blackish shade band cut by white points at the extremity of
_ the black veins, which latter show a fine white edging. Traces of the
reniform spot. Hind wings blackish fuscous, subtransparent, the veins
darker, the fringes white, incompletely lined; no bands. Beneath
nearly concolorous; fore wings darker; the ground is fuscous, with a
‘mixture of white scales; the veins are prominently darker on hind
wings, which show a discal cloud. On fore wings the terminal darker
edging, interrupted by white points, is repeated beneath. The hirsute
bedy is blackish above on the abdomen; the thorax is mixed gray;
beneath, with the feet, paler. The fore wings show a very fine sub-

No. 2.) GROTE ON NORTH AMERICAN MOTHS. 271

median white basal streak, accompanied by a thinner black ray; they
are shaded with white or gray irregularly over costal region and sub-
terminally. The costa is straight, apices produced, external margin
oblique, even, very slightly rounded. The neuration can be nearly
made out, owing to the veins being darker than the wings. Length of
primary, 18 mil. Oregon, Mr. Hy. Edwards. One male specimen.

This singular form differs from any Noctuid I have yet seen. I place
it provisionally with Arzama and Admetovis.

Pseudoglaea decepta n. s.

é. Kyes naked; front flat with the vestiture converging from the
sides. Fore tibia unarmed. Middle and hind tibiz spinose. Aspect
of a Glaea, the abdomen a little flattened. Ornamentation simple, like
blanda and taedata. Color deeper, squamation close. Pale leather
brown, the terminal space paler, contrasting. Lines simple, black, the
jnner preceded, the outer followed by a pale shade line. Inner line out-
wardly oblique with a terminal outward inclination, undulate. Outer
line even. Stigmata large, concolorous, pale-ringed. Subterminal line,
subobsolete, with faint dots. A terminal waved hair-line, fringes con-
colorous. Secondaries blackish with brown fringes as on primaries.
Beneath a common even blackish band over the paler, fawn-colored
wings. Head and thorax like primaries. Terminal joint of palpi dis-
tinct, conical, paler than the rest. Expanse, 40 mil. Colorado. Differs
from taedata from Texas, and blanda from Vancouver, which nearly
agree, by the obsolete row of s. t. spots and color of hind wings.

Litoprosopus futilis G. & R., Tr. Am. E. S. 2, 202, fig. 73.

This species is not uncommon in a collection made on the Indian
River in Florida. It closely resembles a specimen in my collection from
Panama, which I believe to be L. conjfligens Walk., but differs decidedly,
as follows: On the secondaries the black ocelloid spot on the paler
marginal band shows chalybeous scales within and before it, between
the mesial pale band and the marginal band, in L. confligens, but not in
the Florida species. Again, the mesial pale band is angulated on vein
1, and again opposite the upper angle of the ceil, and is more even in
futilis; this character is more apparent beneath, where the two dusky
bands are farther apart and the wing itself is darker in the Florida
species. While the general color and the markings of the fore wings
are quite similar, the differences above detailed are evident on exami-
nation; in L. confligens the mesial band beneath is rounded, and on the
secondaries above more uneven than in fuwtilis. Three species of this
generic group are known: /futilis from Florida, confligens from Panama
and the West Coast, not as yet known to me from our territory, and
hatuey described by Professor Poey from Cuba.

Omphalocera cariosa Led., Pyr. 339, Taf. 6, fig. 12.
This species has been discovered by Professor Riley in Missouri.
The maxillary palpi are not wanting, but are small and concealed.

Die BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

Lederer thought they might be wanting. The ocelli are present. The
males have a tuft above the long basal joint of the antennz; this is
wanting in the females, a sex unknown to Lederer. 0. cariosa is red-
dish brown, with a row of pale dots along external border, and the
shortly dentate outer line is filled in by a similar row of dots, partly
continuous, which in Lederer’s figure (the colored copies) are repre-
sented by a pale band. The color and other markings agree closely,
and the structural characters, which are sufficiently unusual, and I have
no doubt that Lederer’s North American specimens belong to the same
species as Professor Riley’s. I myself captured a female example in
Alabama, which I thought a variety of Lederer’s species, but am now
satisfied belongs to a distinct form.

Omphalocera dentosa n.s.

2. A little larger than cariosa, with quite a different color, being
dusty olive brown, without any reddish brown tinges. The median
space is dark blackish brown. The pattern of ornamentation is the
same, but the outer line is composed of well-defined and rather broad,
open teeth. The line is double, filled in by a pale shade, and is brought
a little nearer the margin over the median nervules than in cariosa. The
interspaces beyond the t. p. line show dentiform shadings of the lighter
and darker colors of the wing. The fringes are dark. The terminal
dots do not contrast as much as in cariosa. The veins are darker
marked. O. dentosa has the under surface fuscous with a common ex-
ternal double line near the border, which seems a little less strongly
dentate than in cariosa. The abdomen is furnished with brown tufts
on the dorsum in both forms. In place of the discal mark (?) there is a
pale dot on the subcostal vein and one below it on median vein, quite
distinct in cariosa, hardly evident in dentosa, which expands 40 mil.

Botis capitalis n. s.

A large species, pearly white, with the thorax shaded with iridescent
brown, and this dark color spreads over the fore wings at base and along
internal margin. Reniform lunulate, very large, consisting of two thick
curved brown lines, not united at top. A series of three brown marks
on the interspaces of the median nervules just below and beyond the
reniform. The orbicular is far from the reniform, a rather small brown
ring, empty. The common exterior line is far from the cell and appears
to take the place of the s. t. line; it is brown, irregular, lunate, distinct,
outwardly rounded below median fold, not carried back as usual. The
terminal line is marked by a broad shade at apices and so also on second-
aries. There is a brown annulus on dise of secondaries and a brown
line below it on internal margin which is here diffusely stained with
brown. Abdomen stained with brown above, with a brown dorsal line
and two white marks on the brown sub-basal segment. Beneath white;
the reniform filled in on primaries, obsolete on secondaries. Palpi bi-
colorous, brown at tips; white at base. Legs white; fore legs marked

No. 2.} GROTE ON NORTH AMERICAN MOTHS. 2a

with brown on the tibie. Expanse, 38 mil. Florida,in May; one speci-
men in my collection collected by Mr. Schwarz.

Botis fissalis n. s.

This form is allied to 5-linealis and more remotely to gentilis and magis-
tralis. It has the same light brown color, a little paler than its ally.
The lines are uneven, and the outer line more projected opposite the cell
than in 5-linealis. The stigmata are open, not solid, and the reniform is
composed of two parallel lines, not closed in at top and bottom. There
is a submedian dash, as in magistralis. This species is not colored like
gentilis or pretextalis, but like 5-linealis and feudalis, of a yellowish pale
brown. Beneath it is paler than its allies, whitish opalescent. The disc
about the stigmata is pale; also the s. t. space; thes. t. line evident.
It is nearly as large as 5-linealis, expanding 30 mil. Two fresh females
- taken by myself near Buffalo, N. Y.

Botis augustalis n. s.

Allied to signatalis and the smaller roseate species, with a slightly
greater expanse of wing. Fore wings with the external margin more
oblique than usual; the primaries widen outwardly. Head and thorax
above brown, and this color extends over the base of the rather dark
vinous rosy fore wings, which show no markings except a rather large
pale yellow spot marking the inception on the costa of the exterior line
which is else lost or appears faintly as pale marks; fringes fuscous.
Hind wings semi-transparent, entirely fuscous, darker outwardly with
finely interlined and paler fringes. Beneath paler; the costal mark on
fore wings repeated. Colorado. |

Diphry<x prolatella n. g. et sp. Crambidarum.

This form has been represented for some time in my collection by a
Single 2 specimen which is somewhat stouter bodied than any Crambus
krown to me, and is excluded from that genus by the short labial palpi
which hardly exceed the face. Ocelli. Clypeus mucronate. Eyes
naked. Outline of wing that of Crambus (vulgivagellus), but the prima-
ries are a little broader than usual, with acute apices and rounded exter-
nal angle, the margin being nearly straight. The tongue is weak. In
the specimen the maxillary palpi are certainly absent. Fore wings, head
and thorax ochrey yellow, the thorax and inner half of primaries lighter.
No markings except a double oblique series of golden irregular spots on
the cell and on the interspace below median vein, the whole not promi-
nent. The gilt scales are mixed with brown ones; and there are scattered
gilt scale dots on the cell. Under the glass the surface is seen to be
irrorate with brown seales. There is a neat series of terminal black dots
before which a fine gilt dotted line, curving away from the margin at
apex. All this is hardly visible to the unassisted eye. The fringes are
gilt at base. Hind wings immaculate silky white with the fringes. Be-
neath pale, without markings. Expanse, 30 mil. Wisconsin, in Sep-
tember, collected by Mr. Westcott.

18 GB

ieee
274 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL

Prionopteryx olivella n. s.

g. Antennae simple; ocelli small but present; hence this species
differs from Professor Zeller’s diagnosis of the genus. External margin
of the primaries retiring below median fold where there is a projection of
the fringe. Maxillary palpi bushy, triangulate; labial palpi much as in
Crambus. Front mucronate. Olive fuscous with whitish or yellowish
markings on the fore wings. A pale shade along submedian fold from
the base outwardly. A pale mark at middle of costa and a larger blotch
beyond it at apical third. An outwardly curved line on the costa be-
yond the blotch and seemingly the commencement of the subterminal
line which it approaches on the median fold, but there terminates. The
narrow pale s. t. line itself is bent outwardly above the median fold,
running inwardly below it. The pale markings are relieved by darker
fuscous shades. There is a fuscous blotch on internal margin at basal
fourth and another at the middle which margins outwardly a very faint
angulated pale line which seems to connect with the first costal mark.
A narrow pale terminal line discontinued along the upper portion of the
external margin. Fringes pale at base, fuscous outwardly. Hind wings
pale fuscous, with whitish, finely interlined fringes. Beneath without
markings; fore wings fuscous; hind wings soiled whitish. Head and
thorax like primaries; palpi darker at the sides, light beneath. Hx-
panse, 25 mil. Hab.—Carbondale, IIl., collected in June by Professor
French.

In color this species is dull olive fuscous, there are no brown or cin-
namon brown shades; the markings are narrow, of a soiled yellowish
white relieved by blotches and margining shades of darker fuscous.
My type is in nearly perfect condition, and fresh.

Fernaldia n. gen. (Tineidae).

This generic term is proposed for a stouter form than Psecadia, differ-
ing by the long, narrow, curved third palpal joint and in the neuration.
Face thickly clothed with spreading hair. Maxillary palpi long, hanging.
Eyes naked. Wings long; fore wings 12-veined; 4 to 8 out of the end
of the cell, the upper outer corner of which is divided off by a longitu-
dinal vein, the extension of vein 8 back to the main subcostal nerve
midway between the origin of 10 and 11. Hind wings 8-veined ; a cross-
vein from veins 7 to 3; 5 and 6 nearly from one point at the angulation
of the cross-vein; median vein 2-branched. Labial palpi not exceeding
the front; third article longer than the thickly clothed second joint.

Fernaldia anatomella n. s.

Light brownish ocher, reticulated with dark brown. Primaries al-
_ most entirely covered with a large dorsal black brown patch, leaving
the internal margin narrowly pale and the external margin more broadly
pale brown over apical half. Lower edge of the patch uneven, running
obliquely downwards and outwards from the base to basal third when it
runs in again, letting the pale ground color obtain triangularly at before

——

No. 2.] GROTE ON NORTH AMERICAN MOTHS. 275

the middle. Costal edge pale brown, and there are three or four double
dottings of pale scales at regular intervals. Hind wings fuscous, with
a faint purply reflection, faintly dotted about apices. Beneath fuscous,
the edges of the wings pale ochrey, dotted and marked. Head and
thorax pale brownish ochrey; palpi with the second and third joints
largely fuscous, tipped with pale ochrey. Legs fuscous, dotted with
pale. Expanse, 34 mil. =Hab.—New York.

This large species has been for sometime in my collection under the
specific name here given to it. Professor Fernald has kindly assisted me
in my endeavors to determine it, and I conclude that, while it is near
Psecadia, it cannot be admitted into that genus, but forms a new generic

type. The species is in other collections, and Professor Fernald has dis-

tributed my MS. name; from its large size and simple markings it can be
easily identified.

Psecadia semiopaca 0. s.

é. White; the costal and larger half of primaries black. Third joint
of palpi white, second joint almost wholly black. Head white; the
clothing of the face is mixed with black scales. The antenne are ciliate ;
the basal joint black with some white scales beneath and at base. Tarsi
blackish, annulate with white. Tibize and femora of hind legs pale yel-
lowish. Middle and fore tibize blackish flecked with white. Abdomen
yellow, shaded with fuscous over the dorsum. Thorax white with a
black spot on each shoulder, and two more behind, larger, one on each
side of the dorsal line. Fore wings with the upper portion wholly black
or blackish except the tips, which are white and show distinctly the
black terminal dot of the interrupted series. Although the black por-
tion of the fore wings fades a little to costa it everywhere vividly con-
trasts with the pure white ground color. The lower edge of the black
portion of the wing is irregular. At basal third it runs upwards, leav-
ing a black spot on the white field of the wing. It runs in again more
deeply at outer third, and the black portion of the wing reaches the ex-
ternal margin narrowly below the apices, soiling the fringes. Fringes
pure white. A terminal row of black dots. Costal edge whitish. Hind
wings pale fuscous, becoming whitish translucent over internal region ;
fringes whitish. Expanse, 24 mil. Hab.—Colorado.

Differs from arctostaphylella by the larger black portion of the prima-
ries which extends to outer margin flecking the fringes. The fringes of
the hind wings are whitish interlined at base with fuscous, not yellow,
and the secondaries themselves are paler.

Oedemasia eximia, 1.8.

$9. This species is very much larger than badia, but similarly col-
ored. All the markings indeterminate. Ground color a dusty faded
ochrey with an olive tint. In some darker specimens there is blackish
shading over the disc and beyond. Internal margin washed with pur-
plish. A narrow purple brown basal streak, running downwards along

ri ae

276 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. Vi

submedian fold. The apices and a space along external margin before
the angle pale. Lines lost; the outer line can be made out waved, be-
low vein 3; on costa it appears outwardly oblique, even and double. A
dark discal dot. Hind wings faded fuscous, with faint mesial line.
Thorax faded olivaceous, stained with brownish on the edge of the tegu-
le and the metathoracic hairs. There are sometimes one or two dark
marks onsubterminal field of primaries on the interspaces between sub-
median fold and vein 3. Male antenn pectinate at basal two-thirds,
tips simple. Female antenne simple. Beneath without markings; the
males show a paler exterior shade cutting the fuscous ground color.
Costal preapical dots indicated. Expanse, 40 to 45 mil. New York;
Massachusetts, collected by Mr. Roland Thaxter.

Gortyna Harrisii, Grote.

The larva of this species has been found in the stems of Heracleum
lanatum by Mr. Thaxter.

I have commenced the manuscript of a second edition of my List of
the Noctuidae of North America, published in 1874, and the following is
an extract giving the first genera of the Noctuae nonfasciatae as far as
Apatela (Acronycta). There are many species unknown to me except by
name, and the hope that I shall find them and thus be able to present
a& more accurate list delays my completion of the work.

NOCTUAE Linn.
NONFASCIATAE Borkh.

DICOPINAE.

In this section are grouped genera with the head sunken, squamation
rough or thick, male antennz pectinate, legs unarmed except fore tibiz,
which have a stout claw, eyes naked, labial palpi short, ocelli present.
The species appear usually early in the year; the chrysalis hibernates.

EUTOLYPE Grote.
Rolandi Grote, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil. 198, 1874; Copipanolis ver-
nalis Morr. P. B. 8. N. H. 133, Dec. 1874. Eastern States to Texas.
Dicopis Grote.

Muralis Grote 6th Ann. Rep. Peab. Acad. Sci. 27. Eastern States to
Texas.

Thaxterianus Grote, Bull. B. S. N. S. 2, 196. Massachusetts; Tex.

Damalis Grote, Bull. U. 8S. Geol. Surv. 5, 208. California.

Depilis Grote, Papilio, 1, No. 4. Massachusetts ; Ohio.

COPIPANOLIS Grote.

Cubilis Grote, 6th Ann. Rep. Peab. Acad. Sci. 30. Hastern States to
Texas.

No. 2.) GROTE ON NORTH AMERICAN MOTHS. QUE
BOMBYCOIDEA.
AUDELA Walker.

Acronyctoides Walk., Can. Nat. Geol. 6, 37; Grote, Can. Ent. 9, 27; Pan-
thea leucomelana Morr. Proc. Ac. N. 8S. Phil. 428, 1875; Grote, B. U.
S. G. Surv. 4, 169. Canada; Western N. Y.; Maine.

PLATYCERURA Packard.

Furcilla Pack., Proc. Ent. Soc. Phil. 374, 1864. Larva on oak (Thaxter).
Canada; Hastern and Middle States.

CHARADRA Walker.

Propinquilinea Grote, Trans. Am. Ent. Soc. 4,293, Pl. 1, fig. 96; Goodell,
Papilio, 1,15. Hastern and Middle States; larva on the White Birch.

Deridens Guenée, Noct. 1, 35, Pl. 3, fig. 8; Acronycta cireulifera Walk.,
709; Charadra contigua Walk. Sup. 446; G. & R. Trans. Am. Ent.
Soe. 2, 86. Canada to Southern States.

Dispulsa Morr. Proc. Bost. Soe. N. H. 213, 1875. Texas.

Palata Grote, Can. Ent. 12, 258. Colorado.

RAPHIA Hiibner.

Abrupta Grote, Proc. Ent. Soc. Phil. 2, 336, Pl. 8, fig. 3, 1863. Eastern
and Middle States.
Frater Grote, Proc. Ent. Soc. Phil. 2, 435, Pl. 9, fig. 7, 1864. Eastern

and Middle States.
FERALIA Grote.

Jocosa Guenée, Noct. 1, 37; Grote, B. B. 8. N. S. 2, 58. Eastern and

Middle States.
MoMAPHANA Grote.

Comstocki Grote, B. B. S. N.S. 2, 59; Stett. Ent. Zeit. 195, 1875. New
York.
DIPHTHERA Hiibner.

Fallax H.-S. Exot. 80, fig. 211. Eastern, Middle, and Southern States.

id

a “ifr

£55 ee Me
1 WIGS 10 QiGdukinwe is ies snc ana
saldincnetia

Art. X1.—The Tertiary Lake-basin at Florissant, Col-
orado, between South and Hayden Parks.

By Samuel H. Scudder.

The following remarks are based upon collections and notes made
during a visit to Florissant in the summer of 1877 in company with
Messrs. Arthur Lakes, of Golden, Colo., and F. C. Bowditch, of Boston,
Mass. As five days only were spent in the place, most of the time was
given up to the collection and care of specimens, so that only a general
survey of the locality was possible. Mr. Lakes especially gave himself
to the study of the geology of the district, and as he was previously
familiar with the structure of the surrounding country and placed his
notes at my disposal, the first part of this paper should be considered

our joint production.
GEOLOGY.

The tertiary lake-basin at Florissant, already famous for its prolific
beds of plants and insects, is situated in a narrow valley high up in the
mountains at the southern extremity of the Front Range of Colorado, at
no great distance from Pike’s Peak. The first, and so far as lam aware
the only notice of it which has been published, is that by Mr. A. C.
Peale in his account of the geology of Hayden Park and the country
lying between it and the upper cafion of the South Platte.* <As it is
brief, it is given here in full:

“The latter [Beaver Creek] flows to the northwest, and empties into
the South Platte just below the upper caiion. About five miles from its
mouth, around the settlement of Florissant, is an irregular basin filled
with modern lake deposits. The entire basin is not more than five miles
in diameter. The deposits extend up the branches of the creek, which
all unite near Florissant. Between the branches are granite islands
appearing above the beds, which themselves rest on the granite. Just
below Florissant, on the north side of the road, are bluffs not over 50
feet in height, in which are good exposures of the various beds. The
following section gives them from the top downward :

‘1. Coarse conglomeritic sandstone.

“2. Fine-grained, soft, yellowish white sandstone, with bands that

* Ann. Rep. U. 8. Geol. Surv. Terr. 1873, p. 210. 8vo. Washington. 1874.
279

280 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

are more or less argillaceous, and containing fragments and stems of
leaves.

‘<3. Coarse gray and yellow sandstone.

‘“‘4, Chocolate-colored clay shales with fossil leaves. At the upper
part these shales are black, and below pass into—

‘5, Whitish clay shales.

‘« These last form the base of the hill. The beds are all horizontal.
Scattered around are fragments of a trachyte, which probably caps the
beds. In one of the valleys Mr. Taggart discovered, near an old well,
pieces of trachyte, which, on looking at the excavation, was found to be
the first layer penetrated. The point of overflow from which this ma-
terial came is probably to the southward, in Dr. Endlich’s district. The
lake basin may possibly be one of a chain of lakes that extended south-
ward. Ihad thought it possible that the beds were of Plioceneage. The
specimens obtained from bed No. 4, of the section above, were submitted
to Professor Lesquereux, who informs me that they are ‘Upper Ter-
tiary’ ‘But I do not believe, as yet, that the specimens of the Green
River group, to which your species are referable, authorize the conclu-
sion of Pliocene age. I rather consider it, as yet, as Upper Miocene.
The species known of our Upper Tertiary are as yet too few and repre-
sented in poor specimens for definitive conclusion. Your specimens
have a Myrica, a Cassia, fragments of Salix angusta (A. Br.), a Rhus, an
Ulnus, and a fragment of a Poa or Poacites,’

‘The shales were so soft and friable that it was rather difficult to ob-
tain any specimens.

“About one mile south of Florissant, at the base of a small hill of
sandstone, capped with conglomerate, are 20 or 30 stumps of silicified
wood. This locality has been called ‘ Petrified Stumps’ by the people
in the vicinity. The specimens of wood are not particularly good.”

This basin is shown on sheet 13 of the geological atlas of Colorado
published by Dr. Hayden’s survey, and its outlines are marked with con-
siderable accuracy, although upon a comparatively small scale. The
data upon which that sheet was constructed have formed the basis of
the accompanying map, in which the limits of the basin are given with
closer accuracy and in greater detail. The point of greatest difference
is in the valley of Fish Creek, where we noticed no extended prolonga-
tion of the lacustrine deposits; and as the contours of Dr. Hayden’s par-
ties themselves seem to forbid the probable extension of the deposits in
this direction, we have closely limited them to what we saw.

The ancient lake lies in the valley of the present South Fork of Twin
Creek, and of the upper half of the main stream of the same after the
South Fork has joined it. Following the road from South Park to Colo-
rado Springs, and leaving it just above Florissant Post-Office,* and then

* Florissant is merely a post-office at Castello’s Ranch, which is also provided with
a store, the basis of supplies for all the inhabitants within a radius of fifteen kilome-
ters. One would have to look far to find in Colorado a more comfortable hostelry than
that to which ‘‘ Judge” Castello will welcome us.

No.2] SCUDDER ON GEOLOGY OF FLORISSANT, COLORADO. 281

taking the track—half road, half trail—which leads over the divide
toward Canon City, we shall pass between the Platte River and the
Arkansas divide, through the entire length of the basin. This road
crosses the South Platte a short distance, say a kilometer and a half,
below the mouth of Twin Creek, climbs a long, gradual slope on the east
bank of the river to an open, grassy glade, about 2,500 meters above the
sea, and then descends a little more than three kilometers from the river
to join the valley of Twin Creek. We scarcely begin the descent before
our attention is attracted by the outcropping of drab-colored shales which
continue until almost the very summit of the divide is reached and the
descent toward the Arkansas begun, a traveling distance of not far from
thirteen kilometers.

By climbing a neighboring peak, thrice baptized as Crystal Mountain,
Topaz Butte, and Cheops Pyramid, we obtain an admirable bird’s eye
view of the ancient lake and the surrounding region. To the southeast
is Pike’s Peak; to the west, South Park and the cafion of the South
Platte, shown by a depression; to the extreme south, the grand caiion
of the Arkansas ; while to the north a few sharp, ragged, granitic peaks
surmount the low wooded hills aud ravines characteristic of the nearer
region. Among these hills and ravines, and only a little broader than
the rest of the latter, lies, to the south, the ancient Florissant Lake
basin, marked by an irregular L-shaped grassy meadow, the southern
half broader and more rolling than the northwestern, the latter more
broken and with deeper inlets.

Recalling its ancient condition, and it will appear that this elevated
lake must have been a beautiful, though shallow,* sheet of water.
Topaz Butte, and a nameless lower elevation lying eight kilometers to
its southwest, and which we may call Castello’s Mountian, guarded the
head of the lake upon one side and the other, rising three or four hun-
dred meters above its level. It was hemmed in on all sides by nearer
granitic hills, whose wooded slopes came to the water’s edge; some-
times, especially on the northern and eastern sides, rising abruptly, at
others gradually sloping, so that reeds and flags grew in the shallow
waters by the shore. The waters of the lake penetrated in deep inlets
between the hills, giving it a varied and tortuous outline; although
only about sixteen and a half kilometers long and very narrow, its mar-
gin’ must have measured over seventy kilometers in extent. Still
greater variety was gained by steep promontories, twenty meters or more
in height, which projected abruptly into the lake from either side, nearly
dividing it into a chain of three or four unequal and very irregular open
ponds, running in a northwest-southeast direction, and a larger and less
indented sheet, as large as the others combined, connected with the
southwesternmost of the three by a narrow chanuel, and dotted with
numerous long and narrow wooded islets just rising above the surface.

* The shallowness of the lake is indicated by the character of the fish, the sun-crack-
ing of some of the shales, and the erect sequoia stumps.

282 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

The ancient outlet of the whole system was probably at the southern
extremity; at least the marks of the lake-deposits reach within a few
meters of the ridge which now separates the waters of the Platte and
Arkansas; and the nature of the basin itself, the much more rapid de-
scent of the present surface on the southern side of this divide, with the
absence of any lacustrine deposits upon its slopes, lead to this conclusion.
At the last elevation of the Rocky Mountain chain, the drainage flow of
this immediate region was reversed ; the elevation coming from a south-
erly or southeasterly direction (perhaps from Pike’s Peak), the lake, or
series of lakes, was drained dry by emptying at the northwestern ex-
tremity. The drainage of the valley now flowed into a brook which fol-
lowed the deeper part of its former floor, and the waters of the region
have since emptied into the Platte and not the Arkansas, passing in
their course between Topaz Butte and Castello’s Mountain.

The promontories projecting into the lake on either side are formed of
trachyte or other volcanic lavas, apparently occurring in fissures directly
athwart the general course of the northwestern or upper series of lakes;
and masses of the same occur at many different points along the ancient
shore, such as the western corner where the waters of the lake were
finally discharged; in the neighborhood of Castello’s Ranch; along the
eastern wall of the lowermost of the chain of upper lakes, near where
the present road divides; and at points along both eastern and western
walls of the lower southern lake. In general the trachytic flows seem
to be confined to the edges of the lacustrine basin, but some, if not all,
of the mesas or ancient islands of the southern lake have trachytic flows
over them, and toward the southern extremity of the lake a larger island
will be seen upon the map, now forming a rounded hill with steep north-
ern walls, crowned by heavy beds of dark trachyte, and its slopes cov-
ered with quantities of vescicular scoriae. The rough and craggy knoll
immediately overlooking Castello’s Ranch, the reputed scene of Indian
combats,* was witness of hotter times than those; vertical cylindrical
holes, with smooth walls, in which a man could hide from sight, funnels
scored by heat, mark, perhaps, the presence of former geysers; the ba-
saltic rocks themselves are deeply fissured by the breaking up of the
planes of division between the columns, affording the best protection to
the Ute and Arapahoe warriors. But the very shales of the lake itself,
in which the myriad plants and insects are entombed, are wholly com-
posed of volcanic sand and ash; fifteen meters or more thick they lie, in
alternating layers of coarser and finer material. About half of this,
now lying beneath the general surface of the grouni, consists of heavily
bedded drab shales, with a conchoidal fracture, and totally destitute of
fossils. The upper half has been eroded and carried away, leaving, how-
ever, the fragmentary remains of this great ash deposit clinging to the
borders of the basin and surrounding the islands; a more couvenient
arrangement for the present explorer could not have been devised. That

* Their rude fortifications still crown the summit.

No.2.) SCUDDER ON GEOLOGY OF FLORISSANT, COLORADO. 283

the source of the voleanic ashes must have been close at hand seems
abundantly proved by the difference in the deposits at the extreme ends
of the lake, as will be shown in the sections to be given. Not only does
the thickness of the different beds differ at the two points, but it is dif-
ficult to bring them into anything beyond the most general concord-
ance. .

There are still other proofs of disturbance. Around one of the gran-
itic islands in the southern lake basin the shales mentioned were capped
by from one and a half to two and a half meters of sedimentary material,
reaching nearly to the crown of the hill, the lowest bed of which, a little
more than three decimeters thick, formed a regular horizontal stra-
tum of small voleanic pebbles and sand (A and B of Dr. Wadsworth’s
note further on); while the part above is much coarser, resembling a
breccia, and is very unevenly bedded, pitching at every possible angle,
seamed, jointed, and weather-worn, curved and twisted, and inclosing
pockets of fine laminated shales, also of volcanic ash, in which a few
fossils are found (C of Dr. Wadsworth’s note). These beds cap the
series of regular and evenly stratified shales, and are perhaps synchro-
nous with the disturbance which tilted and emptied the basin. The
uppermost evenly bedded shales then formed the hard floor of the lake,
and these contorted beds the softer but hardening and therefore more
or less tenacious deposits on that floor.

The excavation of the filled-up basin we must presume to be due to
the ordinary agencies of atmospheric erosion. The islands in the lower
lake take now as then the form of the granitic nucleus; nearly all are
long and narrow, but their trend is in every direction, both across and
along the valley in which they rest. Great masses of the shales still
adhere equally on every side to the rocks against which they were
deposited, proving that time alone and no rude agency has degraded
the ancient floor of the lake.

The shales in the southern basin dip to the north or northwest at an
angle of about two degrees, and an examination of the map will show that
the southern end of the ancient lake is now elevated nearly two hun-
dred and fifty meteits above the extreme northwestern point. The
greater part of this present slope of the lake border will be found in the
southern half, where it cannot fail to strike the observant eye upon the
spot, the southernmost margin, close to the summit of the divide, being
nearly two hundred meters higher than the margin next the school-house
hill.

Our examination of the deposits of this lacustrine basin was principally
made in a small hill, from which perhaps the largest number of fossils
have been taken, lying just south of the house of Mr. Adam Hill, and
upon his ranch. Like the other ancient islets of this upland lake, it
now forms a mesa or flat-topped hill about ten or a dozen meters high,
perhaps a hundred meters long and twenty-five broad. Around its
eastern base are the famous petrified trees, huge, upright trunks, stand-

284 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

ing as they grew, which are reported to have been five or six meters
high at the advent of the present residents of the region. Piecemeal
they have been destroyed by vandal tourists, until now not one of them
rises more than a meter above the surface of the ground, and many of
them are entirely leveled; but their huge size is attested by the relies,
the largest of which can be seen to have been three or four meters in
diameter. These gigantic trees appear to be sequoias, as far as can be
told from thin sections of the wood submitted to Dr. George L. Goodale.
As is well known, remains of more than one species of sequoia have been
found in the shales at their base.

At the opposite sloping end of the mesa a trench was dug from top
to bottom to determine the character of the different layers, and the
section exposed was carefully measured and studied. In the work of
digging this trench we received the very ready and welcome assistance
of our companion, Mr. Bowditch, and of Mr. Hill, the owner of the
grounds.

From what information we could. gain about the wells in this neigh-
borhood it would appear that the present bed of the ancient Florissant
lake is entirely similar in composition for at least ten meters below the
surface, consisting of heavily bedded non-fossiliferous shales, having a
conchoidal fracture. Mr. Peale does not say whether the well seen by
Mr. Taggart passed below the trachyte which he says it first entered,
Above these basal deposits, on the slope of the hill, we found the fol-
lowing series, from above downward, commencing with the evenly bed-
ded strata :

Section in southern lake.

[By S. H. ScuppER and A. LaKEs.]

Centimeters.
1. Finely laminated, evenly bedded, light-gray shale; plants and insects scarce
andapooEly preseivedtemcsee ras seseee or eerer ree ee alee eee eee 3.2
2, Light-brown, soft and pliable, fine-grained sandstone ; unfossiliferous--- - 5
3. Coarser, ferruginous sandstone ; unfossiliferous.-..-.-.------------------ 3.8
4, Resembling No. 1; leaves and insect remains ..--....----.----- -.------- 21
5. Hard, compact, grayish-black shale, breaking with a conchoidal fracture,
seamed in the middle with a narrow strip of drab shale; fragments of
ORIN caghen eases uHsdee4 secon s23c54 onbcod caEber ocms Y Onaséa Ghose0 3° 28
6. Ferruginous shale; unfossiliferous.---..-.---..--------- +--+ ------------ 1.5
7. Resembling No. 5, but having no conchoidal fracture; stems of plants, in-
Sects, and a small bivalve mollusk: — 2222 oo ece wees vm oo ee 9
8. Very fine gray ochreous shale; non-fossiliferous -..---.---..------------- 0.5
9. Drab shales, interlaminated with finely-divided paper shales of a light-
gray color; stems of plants, reeds, and insects .-..--------------.----- 46
10. Crumbling ochreous shale; leaves abundant, insects rare --------.-- ----- 7.5
ira shallesiian OMOsS US itera eee) aie te ets) rere eee eee eee eee eee 7.5
12. Coarse, ferruginous sandstone; no fossils....-...-.-...-. ---.------------ 3.8
13. Very hard drab shales, having a conchoidal fracture and filled with no-
duillesis/ mmkOssilitenO use een aes aa = elem = merece re ee eter er 63
14. Finely laminated yellowish or drab shales; leaves and fragments of plants,
MMO e UNTO IRA ses oe Choe SHOE bn Nae Shee Seas cars cacd esecsacoon 6 30

15. Alternating layers of darker and lighter gray and brown ferruginous sand-
SMovsypmona Cosas RS eo Ssoco sa osoocubaoed obtd oosd5a45 5000 68e0 10

Wo. 2.) SCUDDER ON GEOLOGY OF FLORISSANT, COLORADO. 285

Centimeters.
16. Drab shales; leaves, seeds, and other parts of plants, and insects, all in
UNL AT C Ome raya apet terete ores cova oie staa nisvaletaialale tae seine lene Sema eee ate 61
17. Ferruginous, porous, sandy shale; no fossils ........--.-.---.---------- 5.7
18. Dark-gray and yellow shales; leaves and other parts of plants ---..----- 9
19. Interstratified shales, resembling 17 and 18; leaves and other parts of
(olamits; Wit INSE CUS) <6 sole sae sctclaialeiar= a aaieict ctacln a taciatsectaaets Werte a raetare 17.8
20. Thickly bedded chocolate-colored shales; no fossils .........-...--.----- 41
21. Porous yellow shale, interstratified with seams of very thin drab-colored
SALES he pl amb Sesiamsercersiselssieis sie) aici maieisis\e<'s)omia/o sel acines = aerate See 7.5
22. Heavily bedded chocolate-colored shales; no fossils----...-...---..----. 30
23. Thinly bedded drab shales; perfect leaves, with perfect and imperfect
fragments of plants, and a few broken insects ..-.-.--..---.---------- 20
24. Thinly bedded light-drab shales, weathering very light; without fossils;
DORRTMNE THM SESSASS CaSsae cooeco noOuen aaebe SBE as He Cone Ine eEe ome eas 20
25. Thick bedded drab shales, breaking with a conchoidal fracture ; also des-
HULME KOM OSSU Scere toe ohm sepsis cncato wise aneearsiain seismcierarce a/areidnie wo 18
26; Coarse arenaceous shale;. unfossiliferous.... .---------<----c0---+-+s--- 9
. 27. Gray sandstone, containing decomposing fragments of some white mineral,
Merhaps;Calcuteps NO MOSSUG sen es poi eels ris Sere ae ne 18
28. Coarse, “oT! friable sandstone, with concretions of a softer ca
Tid emir ASTIN SNUS| OL SUCINS casein lee Scien ise tar ayelcian eo. ela aici esos 60 (?)
29. Thinly bedded drab shales, having a conchoidal fracture; somewhat lig-
MMC Wii Al tras m ents Of TOOLS INE Ce eae m celalm seine meee mae em ie ee 25
30. Dark-chocolate shales, containing yellowish concretions; filled with stems
aK! ROO GE EINES <ooo coco cota sedceseo doen boasuess soSSae Saas Oseeeaae 25

Total thickness of evenly-bedded shales (D of Dr. Wadsworth’s note)
ADOVORHOOL CEPOSIUS= ease eens faa ase eam el eaes oe eeenisee (Meters) 62665

The bed which has been most worked for insects and leaves, and in
which they are unquestionably the most abundant and best preserved,
is the thick bed, No. 16, lying half-way up the hill, and composed of
rapidly alternating beds of variously-colored drab siellew Below this
insects were plentiful only in No. 19, and above it in Nos. 7 and 9; in
other beds they occurred only rarely or in fragments. Plants were always
abundant where insects were found, but also occurred in many strata
where insects were either not discovered, such as beds 18 and 21 in the
lower half and bed 6 in the upper half; or were rare, as in beds 10 and
14 above the middle and bed 23 below; the coarser lignites occurred
only near the base.

‘he thickest unfossiliferous beds, Nos. 20 and 27, were almost uniform
in character throughout, and did not readily split into laminae, indicat-
ing an enormous shower of ashes or a mudflow at the time of their dep-
osition ; their character was similar to that of the floor-beds of the basin.

These beds of shale vary in color from yellow to dark brown. Above
them all lay, as already stated, from fifteen to twenty-five decimeters of
coarser, more granulated sediments, all but the lower bed broken up and
greatly contorted. These reached almost to the summit of the mesa,
which was strewn with granitic gravel and a few pebbles of lava.

Specimens of these upper irregular beds, and also of the underlying
Shales, were submitted to Dr. M. E. Wadsworth, of Cambridge, who

286 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

caused thin sections to be made from them, and has furnished the fol-
lowing account of their microscopical structure :

TUFA FROM FLORISSANT.

The method and scheme of classification employed here is that briefly sketched in
the Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy (vol. v, pp. 275-287). By this sys-
tem only do we think that the inclosed fragments could be named, for they contain
so few crystals that in most cases the base is the principal thing upon which the
decision must rest.

A.—THE FINER DEPOSIT JUST ABOVE THE SHALES.

A medium-grained gray tufa, containing crystals and fragments of feldspar, augite,
&c., cemented by a fine earthy groundmass.

In the thin section it is seen to be an epitome of the volcanic rocks of the Cordilleras.
The groundmass holds fragments of basalt, andesite, trachyte, and rhyolite, with de-
tached minerals derived from them.

The basaltic fragments have in part a dense globulitic base porphyritically hold-
ing ledge-formed plagioclase crystals and a few augite granules. Some of the basalt
is quite coarsely crystallized, approaching the doleritic type. Olivine was observed in
some of the fragments, but it is largely altered to a reddish-brown serpentine. Mag-
netite is abundant. In many of the fragments the groundmass has decomposed to a
reddish-brown mass, which is untransparent and holds clear crystals of plagioclase.
The basaltic fragments have suffered more from alteration and decomposition than
any others in the tufa.

Of andesite, both varieties pointed out by us (1. c., p. 280) occur in this tufa. The
first, which is nearest the basalt in composition, has a brown glass as its base, filled
with microlites. This base holds minute rectangular and oblong crystals of feldspar.
Large microlites of augite and grains of magnetite were seen. Fragments of this are
common, and are clear and unaltered. The second variety of andesite was seen to
have a dense gray micro-felsitic base, holding ledge-formed feldspars and magnetite
grains. Some contained the reddish brown fibers of the destroyed hornblende. Frag-
ments of this variety of andesite are quite abundant.

The trachyte has a light gray, felty, and glassy base, some fragments showing be-
sides this only faint traces of polarization caused by incipient feldspars. Other frag-
ments show minute, well-formed crystals that appear to be sanidin. Grains of mag-
netite occur scattered through the base. This is also quite abundant, and it, as well
as the basalt and andesite, surpasses the rhyolite in amount.

The rhyolite occurs in the form of a more or less clear glass, often cellular. The
cells are often drawn out in the direction of the original flow, forming a fibrous struc-
ture, which when of a grayish orreddish brown color resembles woody fiber. Some of
the fragments contain elliptical cells, and a few shards of water-clear glass free from
inclusions were seen.

Many crystals entire or broken are scattered throughout the groundmass of the
tufa. These crystals belong to plagioclase, sanidin, olivine, magnetite, augite, and
quartz. But little quartz was observed; one crystal contained trichites and vapor
cavities. The trichites are the same as those commonly seen in the quartz of granite,
but this appears to have been derived from the lava. The feldspar contains inclu-
sions of base, glass, and microlites, and through these the rock from which the feld-
spar was derived can often be told. The augites have the characters of andesitic
augite. A little palagonite and one crystal of microcline were seen.

The groundmass of the tufa is composed of comminuted and decomposed material
derived from the lavas before described. In the groundmass trachytic and rhyolitic
material appears to predominate. This specimen was chosen for description, as it best
represented the general characters of the tufas.

No.2.) SCUDDER ON GEOLOGY OF FLORISSANT, COLORADO. 287

B.—THE COARSER DEPOSIT JUST ABOVE THE SHALES.

This is more coarsely fragmental than any of the others, and is composed of a yel-
lowish brown earthy groundmass, holding fragments of quartz, feldspar, basalt, &c.
Some of the fragments appear to belong to the older rocks, but none of them were
seen in the section. Under the microscope the tufa is similar to the first one described,
but its fragments are larger and sometimes better marked. Some kaolinized feldspars
and a little biotite were seen. The hornblende in the andesite is in the usual broken
forms, with blackened edges.

C.—A SPECIMEN FROM FINER PORTION OF THE UPPER CONTORTED BEDS.

A yellowish earthy groundmass holding crystals and fragments of augite and feld-
spar. On one side is a layer of fine detritus composed of the same material as the
groundmass of the more coarsely fragmental portion. Its microscopic characters are
similar to those of A, except that its materials are more decomposed and sanidin is
more abundant. One kaolinized feldspar was observed.

D.—THREE SPECIMENS OF THE INSECT-SHALES.

These are brownish and grayish brown shales, being simply the finer material of the
tufas laid down in laminae of varying thickness and coarseness. One is very thinly
bedded.

This voleanic material has evidently been worked over by water, but the conditions
can of course best be told in the field. So far, however, as we can judge by micro-
scopic examination, when the water commenced its work the material was in loose
unconsolidated deposits. That it was thrown out as an ash, or rather deposited
as a moya near its present location, is the most probable supposition. It seems
then to have been taken up by the waves and spread out as it is now found. The
reason for this opinion is.that the fragments are not worn as they would naturally
be if they had been derived directly from solid rock by water action, and the decom-
position is not so great as we should expect. The deposition appears to have been
gentle but comparatively rapid, for there is no sign of violence or even of such decom-
position as we should expect in slow deposition ; and showers of ashes falling on still
water or a lake acting on an unconsolidated tufa bank answer best the conditions called
for here. It is probable from the kaolinized feldspars and the macroscopic fragments
of apparently older rocks that the latter are present in the tufa tosome extent. This
can best be explained by the supposition that it was deposited as a moya or mud-
flow within reach of the waters that have worked it over and deposited it in its pres-
ent position. As we said before, the field evidence must be relied upon mainly in
deciding such questions as these.

M. E. WADSWORTH.
CAMBRIDGE, MaAss., April 15, 1880.

Another section, less carefully measured and noted with less detail
than the other, was taken at or near the same place as Dr. Peale’s, men-
tioned at the beginning of this article, viz, at the extremity of one of
the promontories jutting in a southwesterly direction into the middle of
the upper chain of lakes, just west of the school-house* and about three
kilometers west of Casteilo’s Ranch. The top of the hill was covered with
granitic gravel and loose bowlders of dark scoriaceous trachyte; below

*Not the school-house before mentioned, which lies to the south of Castello’s Ranch.

288 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI

this we found, passing, as before, from above downward, the following

succession:
Section in the northwestern lake.

[By 8. H. ScupDDER and A. LAKEs.]
Decimeters (estimated).

1. Finely laminated yellow-drab shales; no fossils.....2....---.----.--------- 12
2. Coarse decomposing yellowish shales; no fossils..-.-...-. --.- +--+ s---e- ---- 12
3. Fine compact drab shales; perfect remains of plants and insects. Passing

TNT nas Seg sesso sS8od6 saSe5o ade o60 soddd5 cNSSON sdaSbo Saad Sses SaScud ossde: 15
4. Arenaceous shales; very, Wignitic. 2-2 seo -s- sae oe ot ee eet ete ee 6
5. Heavily bedded, coarse-grained, crumbling sandstone, of a grayish yellow

and whitish color, becoming ferruginous in places; partially lignitic..---- 60

6. Chocolate and drab colored shales having a conchoidal fracture, passing below
into whitish paper-like shales inclosed between coarse arenaceous lam-
inaes plants and: inséCtsis2s- 261-1 - Ce ees as als SSF ee Nea eee See 45

Total thickness of shales above floor deposits. -.--.-.-.(Meters, estimated) 15

These measurements being estimated are undoubtedly too great. The
composition of this bluff is coarser in character than that of the section
in the southern extension of the lake. The lignitic beds, which have
been used for quarrying purposes, contain numerous fragments of reeds
and roots not well preserved. The lower portions of the section corre-
spond better with the other than do the upper beds, where it is difficult
to trace any correspondence; No. 3 of the northwestern seems, however,
to correspond to No. 16 of the southern series. The whitish paper shales
lying at the base of this appear to be entirely absent from the southern
section, and the distorted beds which crown the mesa are not apparent
in the bluff, or, if present, are wholly regular. A more careful and de-
tailed section of the bluff (for which we had not time), and particularly
the tracing of the beds along the wall of the lake,.would probably bring
to light better correspondences. Directly in front of Judge Castello’s
house, at a level of a little more than 2,400 meters, is a bed of fossil fish.

Judging from the present physical condition of the basin, its age is
marked as later than the movements which closed the cretaceous epoch
and earlier than the last upheaval in the tertiary, which seems to have
taken place during or after miocene times, but there are no physical
data. yet at hand to warrant detinite conclusions on this head.

PALEONTOLOGY.

The insects preserved in the Florissant basin are wonderfully numer-
ous, this single locality having yielded in a single summer more than
double the number of specimens which the famous localities at Oeningen,
in Bavaria, furnished Heer in thirty years. Having visited both places
I can testify to the greater prolificness of the Florissant beds. Asa
rule, the Oeningen specimens are better preserved, but in the same
amount of shale we still find at Florissant a much larger number of sat-
isfactory specimens than at Oeningen, and the quarries are fifty times
as extensive and far more easily worked.

No. 2.] SCUDDER ON PALEONTOLOGY OF FLORISSANT, COLORADO. 289

The examination of the immense series of specimens found at Floris-
sant* has not gone far enough to yield data sufficiently definite for gen-
eralization of any value, or which might not be altered or even reversed
on further study. It may, nevertheless, be interesting to give a running
notice of what has been observed in assorting the collection, and to
make the single comparison with the Oeningen insect fauna which the
number of individuals will furnish. This is indicated by the following
table, based on-a rough count of the Florissant specimens, but which
cannot be far astray:

Percentage of representation by— Fl Bes Ma | Outen

LED RINE) OEE) So co eco an oconecoconaosoeSe ose bbe scconne secseepcee cocosesoceeceT 40 14
Diptera..---- Danco onsocssbessoconccesresosnssessonae spa gatensaconocHeocsecossee 30 7
Tieanee scobtoootdisceeagdtagedese cedcndoososdde gb ecnosonnedoderosetependess 13 48
ISOC cmc cabo be Sada Soo seniemondoedsaasngsbonsdsestoscaeoceccecoreeeoucce 11 12
IM STROM, -Secoc sencwoh ocd onogooacods seaqccodos songsadcnds suosSEsnEcoS saecuese 5 17
(OWA DIGHD, sooscensdodescns cocHccelse cbeoodanaHsapopO usonenceooab seduce ease 4 3
PACH HNL Als tstain na sieve tine a fataetateia io nse cine <= =/aieinls a atejselniejeiwio mies) c\siainidietemnicis = =\a)a2 (a0 x 4
Myriapoda.........--.. BC neta dye suc ate cae Gc ebecre Mateos sites cea atau des as

ILS UNCLE) sood Gaen boSHeaeo BD OC CO ee QCOSa EO COE nIOU See OO So DOEOBEODESOOGUCOOSE os ds

99. 58 101. 6

It will be seen that the proportion of specimens of each order is very
different in all that are well represented, with the sole exception of the
Hemiptera, while the same groups (Orthoptera, Arachnida, Myriapoda,
and Lepidoptera) are feebly represented in both. The greatest differ-
ence occurs in the Diptera, which are less than 7 per cent. of the. whole.
at Oeningen and about 30 per cent. at Florissant; in the Hymenoptera,,
which have less than 14 per cent. at Oeningen and 40 per cent. at Flo-
rissant, due largely to the prodigious number of ants; while the case is
reversed in the Coleoptera, which form nearly one-half the specimens
found at Oeningen and only 13 per cent. at Florissant. We possess no
count of the specimens found at Radoboj, in Croatia, which is regrettable,
since the fauna of Florissant appears to agree much better with it than
with any other, at least if one may judge from the comparatively. minor
part played by the Coleoptera and the great number of ants; these lat-
ter number 57 species in Radoboj, and one of them has furnished 500
specimens. Still the comparison cannot be carried very closely into
other departments; for instance, only one rhynchophorous Coleopteron
has been reported from Radoboj, while they are very numercus and rich
in species at Florissant, and local causes must have had much to do
with the fauna of each of these localities. It is hardly worth while to
institute any inquiries into the proportion of the groups represented at
Florissant and in amber, since the nature of the entombment is entirely
different.

Let us pass, then, to a rapid sketch of the Florissant insect fauna,

* Among these are included about 1,000 specimens submitted by the Princeton expe-
dition.
19GB

290 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

from which as yet only 16 species have been published; these will be
enumerated in their proper place.

In Hymenoptera none have yet been described. About a dozen speci-
mens are referred to Apidae and Andrenidae; several species are rep-
resented, but most of them are badly preserved; the largest appears
. to be a Bombus. Of Vespidae and other large wasp-like Hymenoptera
about 70 or 80 specimens have been found, referable to about 30 species,
one of which is a large Scolia or allied genus; several are Sphegidae,
including an Ammophila; one, which seems to be a Polistes, shows traces
of a blue-green metallic tint; another, apparently one of the Pompilidae,
represents a species with a large subapical fuliginous spot on the wing;
another, perhaps of the same family, has a circular clear spot in the
center of the wing, surrounded with fuliginous. The ants are the most
numerous of all insects at Florissant, comprising perhaps a fourth of all
the insects ; they form more than three-fourths, perhaps four-fifths, of
all the Hymenoptera; I have already about 4,000 specimens of perhaps
50 species (very likely many more); they are mostly Formicidae, but
there are not a few Myrmicidae and some Poneridae. I have noticed no
Mutillidae. Ichneumonidae are very numerous; of minuter forms, hay-
ing an expanse of wing of less than a centimeter, there are nearly 200
Specimens, unusually well preserved ; judging from a cursory examina-
tion they are exceedingly numerous in species, perhaps 80 all told, and
many genera are represented; the larger forms, whose wings expand
more than a centimeter, are even more numerous, both in species and
individuals, and most of them are very fine, including a great variety,
among which are especially noticeable a good assortment of species of
Pimpla and allied genera. I have looked in vain for Pelecinus, or any
long-taiied Rhyssae or Thalessae. The Braconidae, Chalcididae, Cyni-
pidae, and Chrysidae, exceeedingly few fossil species of which have ever
been described, are very abundant, but have not been fairly separated
from each other and from other small species; together they number
nearly 250 specimens and probably 50 species. Among others there is
a Chrysis, showing metallic green reflections on the abdomen; and also
more than half a dozen species of Chalcididae, with expanded femora,
represented by over 20 specimens. Finally, there are about 60 Ten-
thredinidae of 14 or 15 species, and several genera; besides a single
species of Uroceridae.

A few Lepidoptera occur. One butterfly in a most admirable condi-
tion has already been described under the name of Prodryas Persephone,
and there are two more diurnal species, each represented by a single
Specimen and each also generically distinct from any living forms, but
yyet falling in the immediate vicinity of those most nearly allied to
Prodryas, namely, among the highest Praefecti. Besides these there
are a couple of poorly-preserved butterflies of uncertain position, and
I have also set aside about a dozen specimens of perhaps 8 species of
nocturnal Lepidoptera; but they are obscure, mostly of small size, perhaps
Pyralidae or Tortricidae, and have not been critically studied.

No. 2.} SCUDDER ON PALEONTOLOGY OF FLORISSANT, COLORADO. 291

Nearly a third of all the specimens I have seen from Florissant belong
to the Diptera. Culicidae and Chironomidae are abundant, but not
generally very perfect. Tipulidae are abundant and admirably pre-
served; of the larger forms alone there appear to be several hundred
specimens, and apparently a considerable number of species. The
smaller Tipulidae, including the Limnobina, are also abundant and well
preserved. Some beautiful Mycetophilidae have been noticed, but these
have not yet been selected from the mass of smaller flies. Bibionidae
are the prevailing type among the Diptera; there must be 1,000 speci-
mens belonging to this family, and ona cursory view there appears to be
no great variety; probably both here and in the ants, as in some genera of
plants, it will appear that there are vast numbers of a single species; a
great many specimens are represented by bodies only, or these accom-
panied by insignificant fragments of wings; but even putting all these
aside, there remain a goodly number with tolerably perfect wings, and
some in which almost every part of the body is preserved; taken as a
whole, however, they are perhaps less perfect than specimens of almost
any other family. There are a dozen or more Stratiomyidae, of two or
three species; and several species of Midasidae or Hermoneuridae, one
admirable specimen of the latter family having been described as be-
longing to a new genus under the name of Palembolus florigerus. There
are nearly half a hundred Asilidae and Therevidae, many of them ex-
quisitely preserved, some of great size, and among them a fair variety
of forms. Bombylidae are somewhat less abundant, but show some
superb specimens of great size and in wonderful preservation ; there
are certainly six or eight species. Syrphidae are more abundant than
the last, nearly 50 specimens having been found, in which the patterns
of the abdominal colors are generally well marked, and among which
we find a considerable variety. There is a vast host of Muscidae and
allied groups, of which no account has yet been taken, and with which
no doubt many other forms are still commingled; but three or four
species of very pretty Ortalidae may be mentioned, with ten or a dozen
specimens.

About three-fifths of the Coleoptera belong to the normal series and
two-fifths to the Rhyncophorous division. There are 80 to 90 specimens
of Carabidae, including perhaps 30 species; many of them are very fine
and perfect, especially in the sculpturing of the elytra. Water-beetles
are not so numerous as would be anticipated; there are not more than
60 or 70 specimens, with perhaps twenty species;:there are no large
Dytisci, such as occur abundantly at Oeningen; the largest of our spe-
cies, perhaps .an Hydrophilus, not exceeding 12” in length. The
Staphylin dae are rather more numerous than the ground-beetles, with
nearly 30 species, some of them tolerably large. There are half a dozen
species of Nitidulidae. Some 60 or more Searabeidae show considerable
variety, there being nearly 30 species among them. Nearly as many
Buprestidae have quite as great a variety of form ; a considerable number

LS = aa,
2O2 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vel. VI.

of them are large and nearly all fairly preserved, some remarkably per-
fect; onespecies, Chrysobothris Haydeni, has been described. Elateridae
are more abundant, numbering more than 100 specimens, many of them
in beautiful condition; they are abundantin species, over 40 having been
separated, and are mostly of a medium, none of a large size. Consider-
ably over 100 specimens are to be referred to the Meloidae, Mordellidae,
and Malacodermata, but the specimens do not appear to be very well
preserved, although about 40 species may be distinguished. The Ceram-
bycidae are very beautiful, furnishing 30 or more specimens, representing
more than half as many species; one fine species of a new extinct genus,
Parolamia rudis, has already been described, and there are others equally
fine. There are a dozen or more species of Bruchidae, one of which,
Spermophagus vivificatus, has been published. Chrysomelidae are not
uncommon; thus far I have recognized about two dozen species among
the 60 or 80 specimens; one, Oryctoscirtetes protogaeus, belonging to a
new genus, has already been published. Nearly twenty species of Tene-
brionidae have been separated, rarely represented by more than a single
specimen each, and there are also a few (from 2 to 10 species each) of Sil-
phidae, Histeridae, Dermestidae, Ptinidae, and Coccinellidae, and a single
species each of Cleridae and Telephoridae, the latter already described
under the name of Chauliognathus pristinus. Two species of Rhyncho-
phora, Anthonomus defossus and Hurhinus occultus, have been described.
I have already mentioned the predominance of this type in opposition to
the European tertiaries. The species are very numerous, nearly 120
having been separated with over 500 specimens, and among them are a
goodly number of large and fine species; but some of the minutest are
most admirably preserved; especially is this true of the sculpturing
of the thorax and elytra; no attempt, however, has yet been made to do
more than rudely separate the species, so that no details can now be
given.
Among Hemiptera, to which eleven plates will be devoted in the report
in preparation, Heteroptera are somewhat more numerous than Homop-
tera, both in individuals and species. The Heteroptera present a great
variety of forms, over 100 species having been detected, three-fourths
of which can be referred to their proper place; they will occupy seven
plates. lLygaeidae, Reduviidae, and Pentatomidae abound. Corima-
laenidae of several species are very common; but the most common of
all are one or two species of Alydina (one of the groups of Coreidae), com-
prising perhaps a third of all the Heteroptera. There are two species
of Aradidae, and half a dozen specimens of a very pretty species of
Tingis, well preserved; but in general the preservation of the Heterop-
tera is not so good as of the Homoptera. Very few water-bugs occur,
but there are two or three species, among them a slender and very prettily
marked Corixa. There are about 65 species of Homoptera, of which
nearly one-half belong to the Cercopida. One genus, resembling Ptyelus,
is represented by a dozen or more species, comprising together perhaps

No. 2.) SCUDDER ON PALEONTOLOGY OF FLORISSANT, COLORADO. 293

nine-tenths of all the Homoptera, some of the species being represented
by 40 or.50 specimens. There are a few large Fulgoridae; one has the
long recurved process of the head almost perfectly preserved. Two gigan-
tic Aphrophorina have already been described as belonging to a new
genus, and been named. Petrolystra gigantea and P. heros ; but as a whole
the species are of medium size, with some minute and slender forms, the
position of which is as yet undetermined. Plant-lice are common, and
include probably 8 species, all Aphidiinae excepting one, which is
referred to Schizoneuridae; an entire plate is devoted to them. Many
of the Homoptera have their markings beautifully preserved ; especially
is this the case in a variegated Typhlocypha or allied genus, and the
venation of others is as complete as in the living form. No Stridulantia
have occurred.

Sixty or seventy specimens of @uigpied have been found, all the
families being represented excepting Gryllidae and Mantides. Six speci-
mens and nearly as many species of Locustariae are present; the finest,
belonging to a new genus, has been described under the name of Li-
thymnetes guttatus. There are about the same number of Acridii, a
single species of Phasmida, and two or three Blattariae, one of which
has been described under the name of Homoeogamia ventriosus. Butthe
mass of Orthoptera, including about 50 specimens and 8 to 10 species,
belong to the Forficulariae; two of them, Labidura tertiaria and L.
lithophila, have been described, but they are among the least interest-
ing, several of the species exhibiting forceps of very great length; an
entire plate has been devoted to them in a forthcoming report, and the
remaining Orthoptera will occupy another.

The Neuroptera are made up in large part of Phryganidae, but no
larval cases have been preserved; there are about 100 specimens repre-
senting 15 or 20 species which are determinable, and which occupy one
plate of the report and parts of others; besides these there are several
hundred which perhaps a severer study will classify; one species has
wings 2 centimeters long, while others are minute; several of the sub-
families appear to be represented, true Phry patindas certainly, and prob-
ably Rhyacophilidae, Leptoceridae, and Hydropsychidae. <A single fine
species of Panorpidae has been found, forming a new genus, and already
described as Holcorpa maculosa. Seven or eight species of Plannipen-
nia, including fifteen specimens, occupy a plate by themselves; they
mostly belong to Raphidia and Nothochrysa, or to new genera nearly
allied to them or to Chrysopa and Nymphen. A dozen specimens of
Odonata have occurred, among them two species each of Aeschna,
Agrion, and a new genus allied to Podagrion and Dysagrion (the latter
of the Green River shales), which I shall call Lithagrion; the wings are
preserved, some of them most exquisitely; besides these two larvae,
one of an Aeschna, the other of an Agrion. A single adult specimen
and one or two larvae of Ephemeridae have occurred; a single species
of Perlidae, represented by.adult specimens and others by immature

ee
294. BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL

individuals; and a single Lepisma. 26 specimens of Termitina have been
found, belonging to six species and three genera; among the specimens
is a single worker, with one exception the only one that has ever been
found fossil; four of the species and two genera belong to the section
with branched, the others to that with unbranched scapular vein. This
is the same “opment as holds with the sixteen species of the European
tertiaries, where eleven belong to the first, five to the second section ; of
living types, on the contrary, only 35 per cent. belong to the first, 65 ne
cent. to the second section. Three of the species belong toa nie genus
which I call Parotermes, apparently peculiar to America, but possibly
including some from the European tertiaries; another is doubtfully re-
ferred to Hodotermes, which has furnished fossil species from several
localities in Europe, as well as among living forms; while the other two
probably belong to Eutermes and are allied to species from Radoboj,
placed with many modern types in this group. Calotermes, which has
furnished species from amber and the Rhenish basin; Termopsis, which
has more fossil (amber) species than recent; and Termes proper, which
is represented at Oeningen and Radoboj, as well as in amber and on the
Rhine—all seem to be wanting at Florissant; the composition of the
tertiary white-ant fauna of of Florissant therefore differs considerably
from that of any locality in Europe; but it most nearly resembles that
of Radoboj in Croatia, where a like number of species has been found.

A single plate is devoted to the Arachnida, of which there are about
30 species and more than 70 specimens; all of them are Araneae; they
have not yet been carefully studied, but fully half of them appear
to be Epeirinae; of the others there are from three to five species each of
Theridioidae, Drassoidae, and Thomisinae, and one or two each of Aga-
lenoidae, Dysderoidae, and perhaps Attoidae; they belong, therefore,
mostly to the highest groups. Among the Epeirinae is one genus repre-
sented by several species, which seems distinct from any that have been
characterized ; it is a compact, short-legged form, whose front and see-
ond legs are remarkably stout. Unfortunately the eyes are scarcely ever
preserved in any of these fossils and the correct determination of their
affinities rendered much more difficult and uncertain. There is one
striking form, a species of Nephila, with spreading bunches of hair on
its legs asin our XV. plumipes, but yet differing decidedly from that. As
a whole the arachnid-fauna appears rather uninteresting, and to have
few features in common with that of the Prussian amber.

The only Myriapod is a large species of Tulus, represented by half a
dozen fragments, in which only the body segments are preserved.

Finally there is an odd form of animal, which although abundant and
tolerably preserved is still of doubtful position. It is flattened onisci-
form in shape, the body generally arched, and appears to be formed of
only four nearly equal segments; each of the first three bears a pair of
long swimming (?) legs bearing a two-jointed tarsus armed with a single
claw, both femur and tibia being compressed, expanded, and the latter
fringed with hairs. The first segment has a median slit anteriorly, but

ras,

~

No. 2.) SCUDDER ON PALEONTOLOGY OF FLORISSANT, COLORADO. 295

there is no sign of a head on the 30 or 40 specimens examined, although
the anterior portion of the alimentary canal appears to be extensile,
being frequently preserved as protruding beyond the limits of the body
and armed at the tip with a broken chitinous ring. There are no other
mouth parts nor signs of eyes or antenne. The abdomen is furnished
at tip with a set of harder converging parts, which look as if they
served the purpose of dragging the body backward. Larvae of any
sort are exceedingly rare in the Florissant deposits, and there is no
group known to me to which this seems to bear any similitude. There
are sometimes faint indications of several joints to the abdomen, but
when closely examined these appear to be illusory; and this would
certainly exclude it from the Crustacea, unless indeed it belonged, as
has been suggested to me by Professor Ei yaibe, to a parasitic type. It
is from 8 to 10™™ long.

Animal remains besides those of insects are rare at Florissant. The
most abundant is a species of thin-shelled Planorbis, which is not un-
common, and always occurs in a more or less crushed condition ; it is
the only mollusk yet found there (excepting a single small specimen of
a bivalve, referred to above in the section from the southern lake), and
according to Dr. C. A. White is probably undescribed, although very
similar to a species found in the Green River shales, differing from it
principally in its smaller size.

Fishes 1ank next in numbers. Hight species have been found, be-
longing to four genera; of Amiidae we have Amia scutata and A. dicty-
ocephala; of Cyprinodonts, Trichophanes foliarwm and T. Copei; of
Catostomidae, Amyzon pandatum, A. commune, and A. fusiforme; and
of Siluridae, Rhineastes pectinatus. All the species have been described
by Cope* excepting 7. Copei, which was published by Osborn, Scott, and
Speir.

Several bird’s feathers have been found in these beds, and a single
tolerably perfect Passerine bird, with bones and feathers, has been de-
seribed by Mr. J. A. Allen under the name of Palaeospiza bella, and
admirably illustrated by Blake. No other figure of a Florissant animal
has yet been published. Besides these, Professor Cope has just de-
seribed a plover, Charedinus sheppardianus, and writes that a finch is
also found in these beds.

The plants, although less abundant than the insects, are exceedingly
numerous, several thousand specimens having already passed through
the hands of Mr. Leo Lesquereux. Of these he has published 37 species
in his Tertiary Flora,t about two-fifths of which are considered iden-
tical with forms from the European Tertiaries. Of other specimens
which he received after the publication of that volume, he has already
given a cursory account in the annual report of Dr. Hayden’s survey for
1876. He has also mentioned others in his review of Saporta’s Monde

*Seo Bull. U.S. Geol. Surv. Terr. 2d ser., No. 1, pp. 3-5, 1875.
tReport U. S. Geol. Surv. Terr., vol. 7. 4to, Washington, 1878.

a ee) pian 3) ees

296 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. | Vol. VI

des Plantes, and still others in letters. From these sources and from
memoranda communicated by him based on the plates of the Florissant

- species prepared for the eighth volume of Hayden’s Report, the follow-
ing review is drawn:

Among the exogenous plants the following polypetalous families are
represented : j

Some flowers with long stamens are referred doubtfully to the genus
Bombax, one of the Malvaceae. Of Tiliaceae, a species of Tilia has
been found; of Rutaceae, one species of Ailanthus. Of Anacardiaceae,
three species of Rhus are described under the names Hvansi, rosae-
folia, and Haydent, and three or four others mentioned. Of Juglandeae
one species, and one of Zanthoxyleae. Of Rhamnaceae, Paliwrus Floris-
santi is the only species. A few leaves of Celastrus represent the Celas-
traceae. The Sapindaceae are very abundant, three genera occurring;
leaves of Staphylea acuminata, numerous specimens of Sapindus stellar-
taefolius and S. angustifolius, as well as of two or three other species
of the same genus, and two species of Acer, represented by flowers,
leaves, and fruit. The flora has a large number of Leguminosae, of the
genera Robinia, Colutea, and Cassia, besides Acacia septentrionalis and.
Mimosites lineartfolius, described in the report mentioned. The Rosa-
ceae show a Prunus, leaves of Rosa, and species of Spiraea, with very
finely preserved leaves of an Amelanchier, scarcely distinguishable from
some of the varieties of the living species. Liquidambar ewropaeum Al.
Br. represents the Hamamelidae; numerous leaves of Weinmannia, the
Corniculeae; and, finally, there is a single species of Araliaceae, closely
allied to Aralia multifida Sap. Excepting the Liquidambar none of the
Polypetalae have been shown to be identical with European forms.

Among the monopetalous plants the Ericaceae are represented by
Vaccinium reticulatum Al. Br., together with one or two species of Andro-
meda. Two species of Ilex, one described as I. subdenticulata, represent
the Aquifoliaceae; one of Diospyros, the Ebenaceae; a species of Catalpa,
the Bignonaceae. Oleaceae have a flowering branch of Olea and four
species of Fraxinus. one referred to Heer’s F. praedicta and another de-
seribed as new under the name of F. Brownelli.

The apetalous angiosperms show a great variety of forms at Floris-
sant, and among them many are referred to species from foreign tertia-
ries. Urticacea are the most numerous of all plants; three species of
Ulmus oceur, U. tenuinervis Lesq., peculiar to Florissant, U. Braunii
Heer and U. Fischeri Heer, both from the European tertiaries ; of Celtis
there are leaves having a close affinity to the existing C. occidentalis
and its variety integrifolia Nutt.; they may, however, represent two
species; a single species of Ficus represents a European form, J’. lan-
ceolata Heer; but the mass of specimens—nearly or quite one-half of
all that have been brought from this locality—represent species of Pla-
nera; Lesquereux states that he has at least two thousand specimens
of “leaves of Planera longifolia [Lesq.] and of its varieties, which come

No. 2.] SCUDDER ON PALEONTOLOGY OF FLORISSANT, COLORADO. 297

near Planert Ungeri [Kttingsh.], and perhaps another species of the

same genus.” The Juglandaceae are represented by single specimens.
of Juglans thermalis* and Pterocarya americana, besides species of Pal-

aeocarya and Engelhardtia. The six Cupuliferae recorded are all Euro-

pean species, viz: Quercus neriifolia Al. Br., Q. drymeja Ung., Q. salicina

Sap., Q. antecedens Sap., Carpinus grandis Ung., and C. pyramidalis Heer.

The Myricaceae are the next most abundant type after Planera, being

represented especially by Myrica acuminata Ung., and Callicoma micro-

phylla Ettingsh. (a true Myrica), both European species; there are, be-

sides, no less than seven other species of Myrica, one of them referable
to the European species, M. Ludviigi Schimp., another to a variety, acuti-

loba, of another European species, M. latiloba Heer; but the others
new and either considered allied to M. Zacchariensis Sap. and M. arguta

‘Sap. of the beds at Aix in Provence, or described under the names
M. Copeana, M. Bolanderi, and M. insignis ; of the last, two specimens
are mentioned; of the other two, only one. Of Betulaceae, Betula and
Alnus are represented by a single species each, Betula dryadum Brongn.

and Alnus Kefersteiniti Gopp., both again European forms; cones of the
latter are found. Salicaceae are tolerably abundant, Salix and Populus
being represented by four species each; the four species of Salix are all
identified as belonging to forms previously described from Europe or
Alaska, viz: S. Lavateri Heer, S. integra Gopp., S. media Heer, and 8.

varians GOpp.; one species of Populus is referred to P. latior Al. Br., of
the variety represented by Heer as denticulata ; two others are consid-

ered new, one belonging to the section of P. glandulifera Heer ; while the
fourth, represented by a large number of leaves, very variable, espe-

cially in size, is considered as identical with P. Heerii Sap. of the gypsum

beds of Aix. Finally, of undetermined plants in this group, there is a

species of Trilobium, and a Carpites, described as C. Pealei.

Among the Coniferae there is considerable variety, five species oceur-
ring, of four genera,.al] but one of the species represented in the Euro-
pean flora. There is, first, Pinus palaeostrobus ? Etiingsh.; next, well-
preserved branches of Taxodiwm distichum miocenicum Heer; and abun-
dant remains of Glyptostrobus Europaeus Heer ; as well as two species of
Sequoia, S. Langsdorfit Brongn., and 8. afinis Lesq. The presence of
the last-named genus is also well attested by the remains of gigantic
silicified trunks in an erect position.

Finally, in the lower orders of plants, the following have been found:
Of the Palms, a large specimen of a Sabal related to Sabal major Ung.
of the European miocene; of the Araceae, Acorus brachystachys Heer, tirst
described from Spitzenberg; of the Typhaceae, finely-preserved leaves
of a Typha; of the Naiadaceae, two species of Potamegeton; of the
Iridaceae, well-preserved leaves of an Iris; of the Gramineae, two frag-
ments of leaves of Phragmites; of Filices, numerous specimens of a

-** “Hot Springs, Middle Park,” is the locality given in the text of Lesquereux’s 1 Ter-
tiary Flora, but in the table, p. 327, it is also credited to Florissant.

298 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

single species; of Rhizocarpae, many specimens of Salvinia Alleni, de-
scribed from Florissant and Elko, Nev.; of Musci, Hypnum Haydeni,
likewise known only from this locality ; and of Characeae, two specimen
of a Chara.

M. Lesquereux has also found large numbers of leaves of a peculiar
plant without any kind of neuration, which is apparently referable to
the Proteeae.

We have thus from 90 to 100 species of plants already recognized from
these Florissant beds, of which nearly half the species belong to the
apetalous exogens. About 40 of the species are figured in the Tertiary
Flora of Lesquereux. .

According to this writer, such an assemblage of plants indicates a
climate like that of the northern shores of the Gulf of Mexico at our
epoch. ‘The preponderance of conifers, of shrubs, * * * of trees
of smallsize, * * * gives to the foraa general aspect which recalls
that of the vegetation of uplands or valleys of mountains.” Palms are
almost entirely absent, only a single specimen of one species of Sabal
having oceurred. ‘The leaves of some species are extremely numerous,
none of them crumpled, folded, or rolled, as if driven by currents, but
flat, as if they had been imbedded in the muddy surface of the bottom
when falling from the trees or shrubs along the borders of a lake.”

It is remarkable for the almost complete absence of hard fruits; and
this, with the presence of flowers, of unripe carpels of elm and maple,
and of well-preserved branches of Taxodium, which in the living species
“are mostly detached and thrown upon the ground in winter time or
early spring,” led Mr. Lesquereux to believe that the deposition of the
vegetable materials took place in the spring time, and that the lake
gradually dried during summer.

To this we may add that the occurrence of Acorus, of Typha, and es-
pecially of Potamogeton, leads to the conclusion that the water of the
lake was fresh, and not saline or brackish, equally proved by the fish,
according to Cope, and by the presence of larvae of Odonata and other
insects whose earlier stages are passed only in fresh water.

Neither the groups of fishes which have been found, nor the water-
plants, the water-insects, nor. the Planorbis exclude Mr. Lesquereux’s
suggestion of the annual drying of the body of the lake. Moreover, cer-
tain thin layers are found overlying coarser deposits, which are sun-
cracked through and through; but on the other hand the thickness of
the paper shales, upon which most of the fossil remains are found, and
which are composed of uniform layers of triturated flakes of volcanic
products, being necessarily the result of the long-continued action of
water, excludes this idea. The structure of the rocks rather indicates
a quiet deposition of the materials in an unruffled lake through long
periods, interrupted at intervals by the influx of new lava-flows or the
burying of the bottom sediments beneath heavy showers of volcanic
ashes.

No.2.) SCUDDER ON PALEONTOLOGY OF FLORISSANT, COLORADO. 299

The testimony of the few fishes to the climate of the time is not unlike
that of the plants, suggesting a climate, as Professor Cope informs me,
like that at present found in latitude 35° in the United States; while
the insects, from which, when they are completely studied, we may cer-
tainly draw more definite conclusions, appear from their general ensem-
ble to prove a somewhat warmer climate. White ants are essentially
a tropical family, only one or two out of eighty known species occurring
north of latitude 40°. In North America only three have been recorded
north of the border of the Gulf of Mexico, excepting on the Pacific coast,
where one or two more extend as far as San Francisco. Two species,
both belonging to the second ‘section, are found in the valleys below
Florissant, in 39° north latitude. Florissant itself is situated 2,500
meters above the sea, and the presence of so considerable a number of
white ants embedded in its shales is indicative of a much warmer climate
at the time of their entombment than the locality now enjoys. Investi-
gation of other forms increases the weight of this evidence at every
step, for nearly all the species (very few, certainly, as yet) which have
been carefully studied are found to be tropical or subtropical in nature.
As, however, most of those studied have been selected for some strik-
ing feature, too much weight should not be given to this evidence.

As noted above, the superabundance of specimens of single species
of plants (Planera and Myrica) is repeated in the insects, where certain
species of Formicidae among Hymenoptera, of Bibionidae among Dip-
tera, of Cercopida and of Alydina among Hemiptera are to be BESS
by fifties and hundreds.

The only other general feature which may already be noted among
the insects is an unexpected paucity of aquatic larvae or the imagos of
water-insects. Hardly a dozen neuropterous larvae have come to hand,
very few aquatic Hemiptera in any stage, and of Hydrophilidae and other
water-beetles no great number. The paucity of neuropterous larvae is
the more remarkable from the abundance of Phryganidae, while not a
a single larva-case has been found.

As to the age of these deposits, the opinions of Mr. Lesquereux, based
on the study of tertiary plants, and of Professor Cope, drawn from his
knowledge of tertiary fishes, are far more harmonious than one would
expect from their known divergence of view concerning the testimony
of the fossils to the age of other tertiary beds in the West. Such dis-
parity of ideas did hold at first, Mr. Lesquereux maintaining in his ear-
lier notices of the flora the probability of its later miocene age; in the
Tertiary Flora he placed it in the ‘‘Upper Green River” division of his
“fourth group,” together with the flora of Elko, Nev., the Green River
beds being placed directly beneath them. In Hayden’s report for 1876
he refers the Florissant deposits to the upper miocene. In his review
ot Saporta’s Monde des Plantes,* while still considering it as miocene,
he points out certain important relations which it bears to the flora of

*Am. Journ. Se. (3), xvii, 279.

300 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. |Vol. VL

Aix, in Provence, considered as eocene. But now, after a more careful
revision, drawn from more extended sources, he writes that while, by
the presence of many genera, ‘there is an evident relation of the Floris-
sant flora with that of the European miocene, yet by the affinities and
even identity of some of the species with those of the flora of the gyp-
sum of Aix, which, according to Saporta, includes types related to those
of the whole extent of the tertiaries from the upper cretaceous to the
oligocene and above, I should rather refer this group to the lower mio-
cene or oligocene.”

Both Lesquereux and Cope agree in placing the Florissant beds at the
same horizon as those of Elko, Nev., and also those directly below the .
Fish-cut beds at Green River, Wyoming. Lesquereux has identical
species also from White river, Colo., among specimens communicated by
Mr. Denton. Cope calls the Florissant and Elko deposits the Amyzon
beds, from the prevalence of that type of fish, and refers them to the
‘later eocene or early miocene.”

Mr. Clarence King places the Green River deposits in the middle
eocene, but considers the Elko deposits of the same age.

We may therefore provisionally conclude, from the evidence afforded
by the plants and vertebrates, that the Florissant beds belong in or near
the oligocene.

At present no geological conclusions can be drawn from what is known
of the insects. So/far as specific and generic determination has pro-
ceeded, nothing identical has been found in the Green River and Floris-
sant beds, but some remarkable affinities have been noticed. Toattempt,
however, to draw any conclusion as to the age of either of these deposits,
and especially of that of Florissant, before a closer examination is made,
would be folly. The entire series of fossil insects from the beds of Aix,
Oeningen, ard Radoboj requires a careful generic revision, the Coleop-
tera alone, perhaps, excepted, and until this is done it will be difficult,
to make much use of the information given us in the works of European
authors. This should not be considered as reflecting upon the character
of these works, for it must be remembered that they were nearly all
completed thirty years ago and could not be expected to meet present
demands. It is, indeed, not impossible that the richer American fields,
the exploitation of which has only just begun, may yet be found the best
basis for the study of the relationship of the tertiary insect faunas of
Kurope.

»
e i an

WF mi
|

(ies

YY

t
ATA
i

Yaa ;
i,

THE
TERTIARY LAKE BASIN

——— Ad => :
: =
— f =. E :

FLORISSANT,
. COLORADO. = f ad |

atte
Hy Ht i q
: wi NG :

| |
|

Lin

Mi '
\ ! ,

\ \ Wixi dh
Sth ind aliy t i

== =

|
(|

oe :

eg

ey

‘

ce therapies te

ag

ciptigas

Be Fee,

Art. XII.—Revisiom of the Genus Sciurus.

By Dr. E. L. Trowessart.”
[ Translated, with Notes, by Dr. Ett1orr Cougs, U. 8. A.t]

The Sciwride now consist of the genera Pteromys, Sciurus, Tamias, ©
Cynomys, Spermophilus, and Arctomys.{

If from the true Squirrels be separated the Chipmunks, which form a
separate genus (Tamias), well characterized by special habits, presence
of cheek-pouches, and some other peculiarities in relation with subter-
ranean mode of life, the genus Sciurus still consists of a large number
of species occurring in all parts of the world excepting the Madagascan
and Australian zoological regions.

‘Most modern authors likewise distinguish by the name Xerus certain
African Squirrels notable for their almost entirely prickly pelage. But
this characterizes nearly all the African species to some degree; and
writers are far from agreeing as to what are species of Xerus, some in-
cluding the greater number of African Squirrels in that genus, while
others restrict it to three or four species. In the present state of our
knowledge on this point, and until the African forms shall have been
fully monographed,§ we prefer to consider Xerus as a subgenus of Sci-
UrUs. \

*Extrait du Journal Le Naturaliste, No. 37, 1 Octobre 1880, pp. 290-293, et tiré a
part, in 8°, pp. 1-10, Paris, 1860.—Erratum 4 la ‘‘ Revision du Genre Ecureuil (Sciu-
tus).” Ibid., No. 40, 15 Novembre 1880, p. 315.

[t The editor’s acknowledgments are due to the author for a copy of this interesting
paper, in which numerous subdivisions of the genus Sciurus are proposed to be estab-
lished. As the publications of the Survey have already included much matter relating
to the American Sciuride, from the pen of Mr. J. A. Allen, it seems fitting to present
Dr. Trouessart’s studies in the same connection. (See Monogrs. N. A. Rodentia, 1877,
pp. 931-939, and this Bulletin, Vol. iv, No. 4, 1878, pp. 877-887.) The substance of the
author’s ‘‘ Erratum,” not to be overlooked in using the ‘‘ Revision,” is incorporated in
the body of this translation. The translator’s notes are bracketed and signed.—C. ]

(¢ The last-named added in the ‘‘Erratum.” No mention being made of Sciuropterus,
we are left to infer that the author would consider that form as a subgenus only of
Pteromys; from which, however, it would appear to be well distinguished.—C. ]

[§ The author’s “‘Erratum” is chiefly occupied with a revision of the African species,
based upon the almost simultaneous memoir of M. Huet, which is spoken of in the
following terms: “‘At the very time that our article appeared in Le Naturaliste, M.

301

302 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL

In 1867* J. E. Gray published a revision of Sciwrus and of the genera
which late writers have dismembered therefrom. But this article, in
which the author very briefly describes numerous new species and pro-
poses to name a number of subgeneric and other groups, is marred
(entaché, soiled) by the defect inherent in nearly all the productions of
this celebrated zoologist, the characters of his groups and subgenera
being for the most part imaginary, so that species could be named which
figure at the same time in two or three different sections under as many
different names.

Among the most important and durable works are those which J. A.
Allent and E. R. Alstont have bestowed upon the squirrels of the two
Americas. These writers enable us to reduce the number of well-de-
fined species to 15, from upwards of 40 admitted by Gray in 1867.

The Asiatic Squirrels have latterly been the subject of works of the
same kind. Schlegel, A. Milne-Edwards, || and Anderson§ have shown
the number of species to be far too large, and that the greater part of
them were only based on the variations in pelage, often of great extent,
which certain species present according to changes of season—variations
observed in a general way throughout the genus, but which are more
strongly pronounced in the species of Southern Asia and Malasia.

Such variations are in fact only an exaggeration of those known to
occur in our European squirrel, S. vulgaris, of which the Siberian Petit-
gris, the dark-colored S. alpinus of mountainous regions, and the tawny
S. persicus of Asia Minor, are only seasonal or local varieties. The
squirrels of tropical regions, especially in Asia, present extremely curi-

ous transition states of pelage (livrées de passage), the analogues of which
are scarely to be found except among birds, but which have neverthe-
less given rise to many nominal species. Thus the several striped-flanked
squirrels (Ecureuils & flancs rayés, 8. rafflesi, &c.), described as so many
distinct species, only represent individuals in change of pelage of the
single species for which the name S. prevosti Desm. should be retained.
Previous to Gray’s work, the French zoologist, Paul Gervais, had shown {
that the form of the skull, with some other secondary characters, enables
us to distinguish in Sciwrus several small groups which correspond quite

Huet, assistant naturalist of the Museum, published in the Archives of that establish-
ment (new series, vol. iii, p. 131, 1880), under the title of ‘‘Recherches sur les Eicu-
reuils africaines,” a monograph based on the national zoological collections. This
important work meets the want we expressed in saying that our classification of the
African species could only be provisional, until they should have been properly mono-
graphed.” The modified synopsis of African Squirrels and their allies, which the
author is led to give in consequence of M. Huet’s researches, is in the present trans-
lation substituted for the original text.—C. ]
*Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 3d ser., xx, pp. 270, 323, 415, 434.

+P. Z.8., 1878, p. 656.

+ Monogts. N. A. Rodentia, 1877; Bull. U.S. Geol. & Geogr. Surv., iv, No. 4, 1878, p.
877.

|| Bull. Soc. Philom., 1877, p. 16.

§Anat. and Zool. Researches (Exped. to West Yunnan), 1878, p. 214, et seq.

4] Mag. de Zool., 1842, pp. 1-7.

No.2.1 TROUESSART ON REVISION OF THE GENUS ScIURUS. 303

closely with their geographical distribution. We recur to Gervais’s
classification in attempting in our turn to subdivide the genus into a
certain number of natural groups which we call subgenera. Whenever
possible we have retained the prior names of other authors, such as Ma-
_erovus, Funambulus, Geosciurus, Spermosciurus ; but we differ with most
late zoologists in their limitation and characterization. Since only sub-
generic distinctions are in point, little inconvenience results from utiliz-
ing names usually considered as mere synonyms of Sciwrus or of Xerus.

The characters which can be used to the best advantage are the na-
ture of the pelage, the shape of the skull and number of premolars, the
relative length of the tail, and others of the same kind.

As to the ear-tufts, used by Gray to separate the true Sciwri from his
Macroxi, they are of no account, since species closely related in all other
respects differ only in this feature, which in others, again, depends upon
season.*

In certain intertropical species the shape of the tail is equally variable
according to season, being cylindrical in the rainy season, corresponding
to our winter, but becoming distichous in summer, or in the rutting
season. There are, however, many species in which the tail is always
cylindrical, while in others it becomes bushy but not distichous.

The pelage is equally variable according to season, as in mammals at
large. The African Squirrels are nearly all remarkable for the harshness
and bristly structure of the pelage, which is generally little mixed with
under-fur, if at all, and thinly scattered on the belly, which is almost
bare, at least in the warm season. ‘The species of this region, moreover,
require renewed study before the actual value of many of them and the
limits of the genus Xerus can be determined. Certain South American
species approach them in the stiff, bristly character of the pelage.

Upwards of 200 species of squirrels have been described; in our Cat-
alogue des Mammiféres and in the following Synopsis we reduce this figure
to about 80. This number itself is probably too large, and will be in
the end considerally reduced. A total of about 60 perfectly distinct
Species seems to us to be still nearer the truth; and this will probably
be attained when the Asiatic and African species shall have been as
thoroughly studied as those of America.

Genus Sciurus L.

Chars.—Two upper premolars, the first small, often deciduous or want-
ing; one under premolar. Limbs free; form fitted for agility. Skull
with more or less salient post-orbital processes; infra-orbital foramen
opening in front of the anterior fork of the zygoma; no cheek pouches.
Hars and tail varying with the species. Three or four pairs of teats in
most species; only two in the subgenus Xerus. Pelage varying in the

different subgenera. Dental formula: I. hae sce (OP aah

a . . = zs Me . : J
[* Forexample, among American species, the alleged Sciurus castanonotus of Baird.—C. ]

304 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL
The genus may be subdivided in the following manner:
I.—SQUIRRELS OF THE HUROPZO-ASIATIC REGION.

A. Head rounded, short, and depressed ; nose blunt (rond); tail*
longer than body and head, broad and distichous (in the breeding
pelage). Molars 4. Size very large.—Subgenus HEoscrurus, Trt.,
1880.

Type: Sciurus bicolor, Sparrm., of Asia and Malasia. We place in this
subgenus the following species, all of the same zoological region:

1. bicolor, Sparrm. (type). 4. maximus, Gm.

2. giganteus, M’Clell. 5. macrurus, Penn.
3. indicus, Erxl.

WB. Head broad and short, depressed ; tail broad, not distichous, but
bushy (en panache), shorter than body and head. Incisors broad,
rounded, finely grooved lengthwise on their front face. Molars 3. Of
large or medium size.—Subgenus REITHROSCIURUS, Gray, 1867.

Two Malasian species:

1. macrotis, Gray (type). 5 2. microtis, Jentink.

€. Head rounded, with the facial region more compressed, the inter-
orbital region less contracted ? (le chanfrein moins busqué) than in the
preceding ; tail terete or scarcely distichous, about as long as the body.
Molars $. Of medium size.—Subgenus HETEROSCIURUS, Trt., 1880.
Of Asia and Malasia:

1. erythreus, Pall., ferrugineus F. Cuv. 10. modestus, Mill. & Schleg.

(type). 11. diardi (Temm.), Jentink.
2. hippurus, Is. Geoftr. 12. chinensis, Gray.
3. prevosti, Desm. 13. tenuis, Horsf.
4. lokrioides, Hodgs. 14. philippinensis, Waterh.
5. lokriah, Hodgs. 15. steeri, Giinth.
6. lewcomus, Miill. 16. rosembergi, Jentink.
7. alstoni, Anders. 17. murinus, Miill. & Schleg.
8. pernyi, A. Milne-Edw. 18. lis, Temm.
9. rufigenys, Blanf.

BD. Head short, rounded, with compressed interorbital region? (a chan-
frein busqué), the muzzle attenuated ; tail rounded, cylindric, shorter
than the body. Molars ?. Size verysmall._Subgenus NANNOSCIURUS,
Trt., 1880.

Of Malasia:

1. melanotis, Mill. & Schleg. (type). .- 2. exilis, Miill. & Schleg.
EE. Head lengthened, with narrowly-compressed muzzle; tail as long

as or shorter than the body, cylindric. Molars 3, the first upper pre-
molar well developed. Pelage recalling Tamias in coloration, with dark

* NoTE.—The tail is measured without the terminal pencil of hairs which projects
beyond the end of the vertebrae.

No. 2.] TROUESSART ON REVISION OF THE GENUS scIuRUS. 3805

dorsal stripes. Of medium and small size.—Subgenus FUNAMBULUS,
Less., 1830.
Of Asia and Malasia:

1. berdmorii, Blyth. 6. tristriatus, Waterh.
2. quinquestriatus, Anders. 7. sublineatus, Waterh.
3. viltatus, Raffles. 8. layardi, Blyth.

4. plantani, Ljung. 9. maclellandi, Horst.

5. palmarum, L. (type). 10. insignis, F. Cuv.

F. Head lengthened, laterally compressed, muzzle narrow and elon-
gate; nose acute; tail as long as the body, distichous and bushy.
Lower incisors very long; molars =. Of medium size. Asia and
Malasia.—Subgenus RHINOSCIURUS, Gray, 1843.

1. davidianus, A. Milne-Edw. 2. laticaudatus, Mtill. & Schleg. (type).

G. Head short, broad posteriorly, the muzzle compressed, the inter-
orbital region contracted? (chanfrein busqué); tail longer than body
and head, bushy and distichous. Molars §.—Subgenus ScIURUS (re-
stricted).

Only one species, widely distributed over all the northern part of the
EKuropo-Asiatic continent ; from England to Japan, from Sweden and
Russia to Spain and Greece, from Siberia to Asia Minor and Persia,
in eastern Asia extending to the northern slope of the Himalaya
plateau, and in northern China to the environs of Pekin.

1. vulgaris, L.

IJ.—AMERICAN SQUIRRELS.

Hai. Head rather long, little widened posteriorly, @ chanfrein busqué;
tail as long as the body, bushy and well haired, rarely distichous.*
Molars j. Of medium or large size.—Subgenus NEoscruRvs, Trt., 1880.

Of North America to Panama:

1. carolinensis, Gm. 4. aberti, Woodh.

2. arizonensis, Coues. 5. fossor, Peale (nec auct).t

3. griseoflavus, Gray.

‘I. Head lengthened, contracted? as in the preceding subgenus; tail
broad and bushy, longer than the body. Molars #. Size large.—Sub-
genus PARASCIURUS, Trt., 1880.

Ore North American species:

1. niger, L.

J. Head lengthened, contracted? only behind the interorbital region
which presents an interocular depression, compressed in the nasal re-
gion; tail generally rounded, cylindric, as long as the body. Molars =
in the young, but often 4 in the adult, the rudimentary premolar being
more or less speedily shed. Of medium or small size.—Subgenus Ma-
CROXUS, G. Cuv., 1825.

{* The tails of species here enumerated appcur to be fairly distichous.—C. ]
[tis there any misunderstanding among authors respecting this well-marked spe-
cies ?—C.]

306 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. V1.

Of Central and South America:

1. aureigaster, G. Cuv. 4. deppti, Peters.
2. wstuans, L. (type). 5. chrysurus, Puch.
3. hoffmanni, Peters. 6. pusillus, B. Geoff.

Ki. Head lengthened; pelage coarse and stiff, seanty on the under
parts; tail lengthened, rounded, rather slender in most species. Molars
5, Of medium size.—Subgenus ECHINOSCIURUS, Trt., 1880.

Of Central and South America:

1. variabilis, Is. Geoftr. 3. hypopyrrhus, Wagl. (type).
_ 2. stramineus, Eyd. & Soul.

L. Head lengthened; tail very short, slender, not more than 2 as
long as the body. -Molars §, the first small and often caducous. A

narrow dark stripe on the flanks. Of small size.—Subgenus TAMIA-
SCIURUS, Trt., 1880.

One North American species:
1. hudsonius, Pall.

IIL.—AFRICAN SQUIRRELS.

Wa. Head oval, the front flat; muzzle short, the parietals inflated; tail
cylindric and scant-haired, as long as or longer than the body. Mo-
lars +. Of medium or small size.—Subgenus HELIOSCIURUS, Tit., 1880

1. stangeri, Waterh (calliurus, Buch). 9. bongensis, Heugl.

2. gambianus, Ogilby (rufobrachiatus, 10. ochraceus, Huet, 1880.
Waterh.; maculatus et punctatus, 11. poensis, Smith (olivaceus, M.-Edw.)
Temm). 12. aubinni, Gray.

3. palliatus, Peters. 13. musculinus, Temm.

4. annulatus, Desm. (type). 14. aubryi, A. M.-Edw.

5. multicolor, Riipp.(cepapi, Smith). 15. sharpii, Gray.

6. abyssinicus (Gm.), Prév. 16. pumilio, Le C.

7. pyrrhopus, BK. Geoff. & F. Cuv. 17. ? minutus, Du Chaillu.

8. erythrogenys, Waterh.

NW. Head short, oval; tail bushy, longer than the body; pelage very
soft and abundant, striped lengthwise on the back as in Funambulus.
Molars —? Of medium size.—Subgenus FUNISCIURUS, Trt., 1880.

One West African species:

iL lemniscatus, Le C. (isabella, Gray).

@. Head oval, lengthened; tail longer than head and body, generally
well haired, distichous (at least during the rut); pelage harsh, dry, and
brittle, often scattering on the belly, which is almost nude. Molars .
Of medium size.—Subgenus SPERMOSCIURUS, Less., 1836 (emend. Trt.,
1880).

Of Africa and Southwestern Asia:

1. gongicus, Kuhl, (type). 3. getulus, L. (trivittatus, Gray.)
2. flavivittis, Peters. 4, syriacus, H. & E. (fulvus, Blanf. )

»

No.2.) TROUESSART ON REVISION OF THE GENUS SCIURUS. 307

P. Head lengthened, front flat, post-orbital processes little devel-
oped; muzzled compressed ; tail cylindric, longer than the body; ears
very short and rudimentary. Fore claws strong and arcuate; pelage.
spiny, of bristly hairs mixed with flattened spines; belly naked; back
striped. Molars%. Habits terrestrial. Size medium.—Subgenus GE-
OScIURUS, H. Smith, 1849 (emend. Gray, 1867).

African:

1. setosus, Forst. (capensis, Thurnb.). 2. erythropus, F. Cuy. (leucumbrinus,

Riipp.).

@. Characters of the precedent still more strongly pronounced; pelage
almost entirely composed of flat, grooved spines; back not striped; ex-
ternal genitals of the male highly developed. Habits terrestrial. Size
medium.—Subgenus XERUS, Hemp. & Hhrenb., 1832 (emend. Gray,
1867).

African:
1. rutilus, Riipp. (brachyotus, H. & E.; 3. dabagala, Heugl.
type). 4. fuscus, Huet, 1880.

2. flavus, A. M.-Edw.

The three last subgenera together form the genus Xerus auct., notably
of M. Huet (loc. cit.) and of Mr. Alston (On the Classif. of the Order
Glires, P. Z. S., 1876, p. 77).

The complete synonyms of all these species will be given in our Cata-
logue des Mammiféres Vivants et Fossiles (RODENTIA).

fei Be tite wa

> ce #
begs aie ue fies

at ae
s }

on
‘

ord
i

sage * sly bi

aad ce >

Si ty bar ich
ong STR AR

ART. XUIi.—Osteology of the North American Tetra-
onidz.

By R. W. Shufeldt, M. D., First Lieut. Wed. Dept. U. S. A.

As far as the Tetraonide are represented in our avi-fauna, and the
varieties are not few in number, there has been but little question among
modern ornithologists as to the place they should occupy, and the man-
ner in which they should be classified and arranged. In the writings of
that distinguished naturalist, my friend Dr. Coues, we find him adher-
ing to the excellent and natural division of the Family into the two sub-
families, Tetraonine, the true Grouse, and Odontophorine, the Partridges,
with their genera and species, truly stating, as he does so, that the inter-
relation among the various representatives is so close that no violence |
is offered by the arrangement. Our labors have been confined princi-
pally to the study of the osteology of the Grouse, a complete collection
of which we have before us, and in this memoir we will only occasion-
ally refer to the osteological departures as observed in some of the
Quails.

No country in the world can boast of a fairer collection of species of
these noble birds than we find among the six North American genera, as
seen in Tetrao, Centrocercus, Pediecetes, Cupidonia, Bonasa, and Lagopus ;
and our Partridges yet exceed these in their brilliancy of plumage and
oddity of some of their feathery decorations.

The anatomical peculiarities of the order Galline has been the favorite
theme of many an able writer, and we find Huxley, Owen, Gengenbaur,
Coues, Parker, and others, in their several works, dwelling largely upon
the osteology of these birds, ably exposing the observed characteristics
of structure both by pen and pencil; but, as far asour knowledge extends,
no one has as yet devoted himself to the production of a paper devoted
exclusively to the osteology of the North American Grouse, such as the
writer here proposes to undertake with every hope of success, aided
as he has been by the kind assistance of many friends in different parts
of the Union, in sending him valuable material in the way of represent-
atives of the Family.

The author trusts that he may be allowed to carry out on some future
occasion his present intention of devoting himself to the study of other
systems of avian anatomy; in which event myology, the eye and ear,
and respiratory apparatus, will all receive their due share of labor; but

309

310 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

in this monograph we will omit, as we have in former ones now published,
any detailed description of the osseous elements of the ear, or the respir-
atory tube, small sesamoids, or such tendons as may ossify in the extrem-
ities. The hyoid as an arch of one of the cranial vertebre evidently is
not included in this category, and will in consequence receive the
attention it undoubtedly deserves in its proper place.

The study of the bones entering into the cranial vertebre has been
initiated at a stage in the chick’s life a few days after birth, and their
relation to each other and their development carried up to the adult
bird. It will be observed after a glance at the writer’s drawings in
Plate V that he has chosen the young of that grand old prairie-loving
Grouse, Centrocercus urophasianus, aS an example of the growth of the
skull from the time above referred to in the Tetrwonine.

In this plate the first three figures show respectively the skull of the
young of the Sage Cock a few days after the parent has led it from the
nest: 47 from above, 48 lateral view, with mandible, and 49 from below,
the mandible removed.

Fig. 50 shows the bird in August of the same year, and Fig. 51 the
disarticulated skull of the same, whereas in the next plate we observe
the skull of an old cock of the same species that has, no doubt, trod
the prairie for many a season. (Fig. 52).

In these birds the greatest amount of difference exists in point of size
among the sexes and in individuals of various ages of the same sex; so
we naturally find a corresponding amount of difference in the sizes of
their crania.

Fig. 52 is the skull of an exceptionally large adult, , chosen from a
bevy of several hundred others, with a view of affording the reader the
opportunity of seeing the proportions this Grouse may attain, as far as
this part of its skeleton is concerned. This peculiarity seems to be con-
fined to Centrocercus, and does not obtain with the other varieties, they
seemingly arriving at maturity of growth at a much earlier period of
their existence. Tetrao obscurus may form an exception to these re-
marks, but it is certain that it is not by any means so striking a char-
acteristic in this bird. Another interesting pomt to be observed here,
that no doubt has forced itself upon the reader since his inspection of
the plates already introduced, is the unusual length of time that the
original bony segments of this Grouse’s head retain their individuality,
over others of the class. This is indeed so, and in birds of one or two
years of age, if we exclude the epencephalic arch of the occipital ver-
tebra, if is not an unusual occurrence to be able to distinguish all the
sutural boundaries among the remaining elements, and these appear to
be persistent when applied to the nasals and the premaxillary bone of
very old birds. We are all well aware that this rule holds good in the
common barn-yard fowl.

Students of the works of that eminent anatomist and observer, Owen,
will remember that in his Comparative Anatomy and Physiology of

No, 2.] SHUFELDT ON NORTH AMERICAN TETRAONIDZ. 311

Vertebrates he seems to accuse the Struthionide alone of this singular
feature, orat least “those birds in which the power of flight is abro-
gated.” Now, such of my readers as have had the opportunity of ob-
serving the flight of the ‘Cock of the Plains,” after he has once been
induced to take wing, will agree that there is anything save an abroga-
tion of that avian privilege.

Craniaof the North American Tetraonine being placed on the horizon-
tal plane as described in my monograph on the osteology of Hremophila
alpestris (Bull. U.S. Geol. and Geogr. Surv. of the Ters., vol. vi., No. 1),
we observe that their equilibrium is moderately stable, the anterior
bearing point being the tip of the superior mandible, and the two pos-
terior bearing points being the external facets upon the tympanics.
The angles of the foramina magna average 70° while the centrum of the
parietal vertebree is the chief bone of what here must be the basi-cranii,
and is found to be nearly in the horizontal plane: the neural arch of the
occipital vertebree being, as a whole, gently convex outwards and lying
in nearly the same plane with the foramina magna.

The Skull.*—So distinct do we find the hemal arch of the first cranial
or occipital vertebre, and fulfilling such a diverse end, with its ap-
pendage the pectoral limb, in birds generally, that its description will
be undertaken further on under the subject of the “‘scapular arch” and
our attention be engaged at this point only with the neural or epen-
cepahlic arch of this segment of the cranium.

The primoidal elements of this, the superior arch of the vertebra in
question are seen to a greater or less extent in sitwin the young and
“bird of the year” of Centrocercus in Plate V, Figs. 47-50, and in the
disarticulated skull of the same, Fig. 51, as so, eo, bo, and po, lettering
respectively the essential elements “superoccipital,” “‘exoccipital” (the
parial bone and counterpart of this segment being intentionally omitted,
as are the duplicates of other segments), “‘basioccipital,” and the con-
nately developed process “ paroccipital” of the neurapophyses.

In Sage Cocks the size of those figured in Plate V, Figs. 50 and 51,
we find the neural spine of the first vertebra, so, to be a light, spongy
bone, one and a half centimeters wide by about one-half of a centimeter
deep—covered with a thin layer of compact substance. Its upper border
displays in the median line a demi-lozenged shaped notch that when
the bone meets the parietals, which latter have their posterior and inner
corners deficient, forms in many birds of this age a “fontanelle.” In
younger individuals this diamond-shaped vacuity is always present, the
‘anterior fontanelle” being formed in them in a similar manner, though
narrower and longer, between the frontals and parietals. The lower
border of the superoccipital presents a smooth, angular depression, that
in the articulated vertebra goes to complete the superior third of the
foramen magnum.

*The authors plates and figures illustrating this paper are numbered in continua.
tion with others of his published monographs.

aie BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

The lateral bodies of this bone are cellular masses with several aper-
tures opening forwards and outwards, the mastoids closing them in, in
the completed cranium. On its outer surface near the inferior angles
we observe two, one on either side, grooved foramina, leading upwards
and inwards, to open into the lateral sinuses on the inner surface of the
segment, nearer together. As age advances these canals contract, but
still exist throughout life.

The basioccipital segment, bo, also is largely cancellous in structure,
wedged shaped, having at its apex a long, rounded tubercle curving
outwards and backwards, overhanging a slight depression beneath it.
This tubercle in the complete vertebra forms the middle two-thirds of
the occipital condyle, which, in the adult, is found below the foramen
magnum, sessile, uniform in outline, with the rounded border below, and
all indications of its original division into three parts obliterated.

The neurapophyses of this vertebra, termed the “ exoccipitals ” (Plate
V, Fig. 51, eo), are each nearly as large as the neural spine ; on their inner
borders they present for examination the deeply-rounded margins to
complete the foramen magnum, and immediately beneath, the minute
tubercle jutting out that lends its assistance on either side to form the
condyle of the occiput.

The outer angles, quadrate in outline, deflected slightly downwards,
are the transverse processes of the vertebra, the ‘‘ paroccipitals.” The
precondyloid foramina are also to be observed here, with one still more
external, belonging to the group from which the eighth nerve makes its
way from the cranium. ‘The internal aspect of an exoccipital is a mass
of open, irregular cells, that are closed in when this segment is approxi-
mated with the mastoid, superoccipital, and the “ petrosal” (Fig. 51, 1),
that odd-shaped and spongy bonelet which constitutes the capsule of
the organ of hearing—and which has a foramen on its inner and smooth
surface for the passage of the auditory nerve—forming, also, by a bend-
ing forwards of a part of this surface, and aided by the basi-sphenoid,
the floor of the mesencephalic fossa on either side, while externally it
shares in forming the entrance from without to the otocrane.

With the exception of the petrosal, the elements thus far described,
when duly articulated, form the neural arch of the occipital vertebra, as
already intimated above. The basioccipital, the centrum of this verte-
bra, by its larger extremity, and the exoccipitals with the connate
diapophyses articulate with the basi-sphenoid in the basi-cranii below;
the latter, with the superoccipital, meet the parietals and mastoids above
and laterally. In old birds every trace, both sutural and otherwise,
becomes completely obliterated as the osseous amalgamation pro-
gresses, though throughout the group a well-defined ‘superior line”
limiting muscular attachment, indicates very nearly the terminating
borders above, and sometimes, as in Centrocercus, a fainter indication
exists in the vicinity of the union among the interested bones below.
On either side of the condyle, to its outer aspect we observe in a slight

x

No. 2.} SHUFELDT ON NORTH AMERICAN TETRAONIDA. 313

depression a group of usually four foramina—two external opening into
the otocrane, one into the cranial cavity, and one leading through the
basi-sphenoid to the base of the ‘sella turcica’ at the carotid openings ;
they transmit principally the eighth nerve and the internal jugular and
branches.

In some of the very old individuals of the Tetraonine quite a striking
characteristic presents itself in the capaciousness of the opening to the
otocrane, produced by a thin, wing-like expansion, recurved forwards,
formed by the out-growing and union of the centrum of the second
vertebra and the diapophysis of the first. This feature is not particu-
larly noticeable in the Odontophorine, nor in Lagopus, Cupidonia, and
Bonasa, still less so in the Sharp-tailed Grouse, among the Tetraonina,
but quite marked in old males, especially in Tetrao and Centrocercus
(Figs. 52, 74, 88, and 89). No very decided differences exist among the
Grouse with regard to the foramen magnum and the occipital condyle ;
the former is universally of good size for its owner, subcircular, and —
without any encroachments upon its margins beyond the condyle. This
latter, always sessile, occupies its usual position below the foramen,
with its long axis placed horizontally, and so nearly approaching the
typical haricot in form that one has no hesitancy in pronouncing it of a
reniform outline... In all the Grouse, save Tetrao and Centrocercus, it
slightly invades the marginal periphery of the great foramen of the
occiput, and in all the excepted genera is more or less shortened trans-
versely.

The second cranial segment constitutes the parietal vertebra, and its
elements are shown in the same plate, Fig. 51, where indicators pass
through its neural and hemal arches, P. V and P. V': P. V as the
mesencephalic arch, constituted in the complete cranium by the bones
P, the parietal or neural spine, when linked with its fellow; a. s., the
alisphenoids, the neurapophyses; m. s., the mastoids, the diapophyses ;
and 0. s., the basi-sphenoid, the centrum of the vertebra. The hemal
arch we see in the ‘“‘ hyoid,” which here shares the same fate of its an-
alogue in the occipital vertebra, insomuch as it is ununited to the su-
perior arch by either osseous connection or by articulation, for in all
living birds the hyoid, the well-known bony support of the tongue, de-
pends entirely upon its muscular and ligamentous connections to retain
its relations with the cranium. The manner in which the disjoined
neural spine of the parietal vertebra goes to form the posterior fonta-
nelle in the half-grown bird has already been sufficiently dwelt upon.
The bone P, as detached in an individual of that age, is quadrilateral
in outline, excessively spongy and light, owing to the paucity of com-
pact substance over quite a large share of diploic tissue, which is chiefly
deposited in a protuberance on its inner table, which protuberance, in
union with the fellow of the opposite side of the complete cranial vault,
forms two concave surfaces out of the remainder of the superficies, es-
sential portions of the ep- and prosencephalic fosse.

314 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL

Superficially, these elements are smooth and convex, and in the adult,
after consolidation, exhibit some faint evidence of a parietal eminence
on either side, —more marked elevations, however, occurring in the
spine of the vertebra beyond, immediately anterior to the suture termed
in Anthropotomy the “coronal.” With the exceptions of the tympano-
mastoidal articulation and the connections between the mastoids and
petrosals, the majority of the articulations of this vertebra in the mid-
aged bird may be classed among the variety known and described in
works upon human anatomy as the “‘ squamosal,” — the parietals being
bevelled above to accommodate themselves to the frontals.

The alisphenoids are separated from each other mesially by nearly
half a centimeter; above they meet the frontals, below the basi-sphe-
noid, and laterally the mastoids, —the lower and outer angles almost
reaching the cup-shaped articulation for the tympanics. This segment
seems to ossify from its borders towards the centre, leaving a foramen
that is eventually closed in. On its mid and lower border it presents
for examination the half of the “foramen ovale,” which is completed by
meeting the centrum of the vertebra. It is for the transmission of the
trigeminal nerve into the orbital cavity. lLaterally there is developed a
quadrate apophysis (the parapophysis of the vertebra?), which joins
with a similar, subsequently scale-like process coming from the mas-
toid, resulting in a foramen, cordate in outline above, elliptical below,
between them, giving passage to the fibres of the temporal muscle, that
is markedly characteristic of the Tetraonide.

Below the point of union this apophysis is triangular, with its apex
pointing forwards and downwards, flat, with its inner surface looking
forwards, upwards, and inwards. Internally, the alisphenoid is deeply
concave. (Plate VI, Fig. 52, and other skulls illustrating this paper).

The external appearance of the mastoid is well shown in Plate V, Fig.
50, and as m. s., Fig. 51. Internally, the half-cells observed close in by
the aid of similar excavations in the segments of the occipital vertebra,
the acoustic capsule; and a double-concave surface, assists in forming
cranial fosse.

We now come to examine the ornithic characters of one of the most
interesting segments of the bird-skull, the centrum of the parietal
vertebra, well termed by most ornithotomists and general anatomists as
the basi-sphenoid. At an early date in the life of the chick (Centrocer-
cus and others) this bone becomes confluent with the centrum of the
frontal vertebra beyond; this confluence takes place, if we may be
allowed to differ with such high authority as Owen, who makes the
rather sweeping assertion “that the pit for the pituitary body marks
the boundary” (Comp. Anat. and Phys. of the Vert., vol. ii, p. 45) in the
following manner, and the sutural trace is yet discernible in young birds
of the Family under discussion (Plate V, Fig. 51). The pre-sphenoid
lies beneath a tuberous process projecting anteriorly from the latter
bone, reaching nearly as far back as the carotid foramina. The com-

No. 2.] SHUFELDT ON NORTH AMERICAN TETRAONIDA. 315

bined bones, the centra of the two mid-cranial vertebra, thus constitute
the compound bone basi-pre-sphenoid of comparative anatomists.

Viewed from above we discover, proceeding from before backwards,
in the median line, 1. The upper aspect of the apophysis just mentioned,
and immediately to its rear the deep “sella turcica” with the osseous
canals of the carotids opening into one foramen at its base; 2. Two
smooth surfaces, one on either side and a little laterally, for the optic
chiasma to rest upon; 3. Another surface still more posteriorly for the
mesencephalic fossa, being perforated by diminutive parial foramina ;
4, A roughened open space for the articulation, with the head of the
wedge-like basi-occipital. Anteriorly and at the same time laterally,
broad and uneven borders for the alisphenoids, with their smooth
groovelets of the foramen ovale, while back of these again, on either
posterior angle, a concave wing-like expansion, the terminations of the
Eustachian tubes, that add to the parietes of the entrance of the otocrane.
Below and superiorly, at the base of the junction of the two bones, we
find the carotid foramina, with a depression between them mesially, and
still lower down, slightly protected by an attenuated offshoot from
beneath, the separate apertures of the anterior and buccal entrances of
the Eustachian tubes.

The remaining surface, unbroken in character, extending posteriorly,
goes to complete the basi-cranii. The coaptation of the elements form-
ing the neural arch of the parietal vertebra is shown in Plate V, Figs.
47-50, their amalgamation in the adult in Plate VI, Fig. 52.

The entire importance of the hemal arch of this vertebra depends
upon the bony support it affords the tongue, and the niche it fills in the
chain of problems of Philosophical Anatomy. In a fine specimen of an
adult Lagopus leucurus, kindly presented me by Mr. Robert B. McLeod,
then residing in Leadville, Colo., we find the following characteristics
presented to us for examination, and they extend with little deviation
to all the members of the family. The hyoid arch consists of, in the
specimen under consideration, seven bones. The confluent ceratohyals
and glossohyal, which latter is largely completed anteriorly by cartilage,
form one segment; the ceratohyals diverge from each other smartly
behind, and at their point of meeting afford the facette for the trans-
verse trochlea surface on the basi-hyal. This last bone, the second in
order, measures half a centimeter in length, being enlarged at both
extremities, flattened from above downwards, the anterior end being
fashioned to fulfill the purpose already mentioned, while the posterior
and larger extremity presents two facettes, looking backwards and out-
wards, to articulate with the hypobranchial elements of the thyro-hyals.
The third segment also meets this compound articulation at this point, a
Short urohyal, it too being completed atits posterior extremity by cartil-
age. The hypo- and cerato-branchial elements of the thyro-hyals make
angles with each other and curve upwards in conformity with the basi-
cranii.

316 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

The sub-cylindrical hypo-branchials are one and a half centimetres
long, and connected with the posterior elements by quite long and in-
tervening piece of cartilage of the same calibre; the smaller cerato-
branchials also taper off behind with the same material.

This arch in the Tetraonide long remains almost entirely cartilaginous,
the hypo-branchial elements alone being composed of bone, and a bird
must be of quite an advanced age before he can boast of a complete
osseous framework as forming a component part of his lingual apparatus.

The third cranial segment, now to be described, is the first of the series
in the skull of any of the North American Tetraonide in which one of the
autogenous elements seems to be generated by osseous extension from
continuous parts of the vertebra. The bone in the young and half-grown
Grouse is absent, but is eventually replaced in a manner that will be
discussed further on. We will ask the reader here, however, need any
one doubt or be daunted because an element is missing? There may
still be a greater modification in the ultimate segment; yet who would
question the claim of these cranial arches to their being defined as verte-
bre—distorted and expanded to meet certain required ends, as they are
—on such grounds? Would it be the student who has faithfully carried
his observations from the embryo vertebra from the mid-column of the
fish, stage after stage, till he has almost unconsciously passed through
the multifarious segments described in the adult piscine head, then any
of our lizards—or a tortoise, to man himself? Such a one well knows
that in every living creature that can vaunt of a vertebral column, that
that column’s most perfect, complete, and typical segments and arches
are found at its centre, and not at its poles. There are ways and modes
more difficult in nature of comprehension, as all her students and lovers
are well aware, than the fact that the pygostyle at one extreme of the
avian skeleton is composed of one or more vertebra, and the beak, the
hemal spines of two more at the other!

The neural arch of the vertebra now to be defined is the prosence-
phalic—its hzemal arch the “mandibular,” as its hemapophysis consti-
tutes the lower jaw, termed “mandible” in avian skeletology.

The fusing of the centrum of this segment with the basi-sphenoid has
already been elucidated; the rostrum thus formed is gently inclined
upwards and forwards, grooved along its entire superior aspect, tapering
to a sharp point anteriorly to receive the connate prefrontals in the bony
gutter at its distal third. Beneath it displays towards its base the
parial facet§ for the pterygoids and beyond the rounded surface for the
palatine articulation.

The orbito-sphenoids, as the neurapophyses of this arch, are the ele-
ments whose absence has already been hinted at above.

The author has taken members of this family in sufficient numbers
and ages to convince him of the fact that the rotund foramen for the
exit of the optic nerve from the brain-case and the smaller aperture for
the first pair above, seen in the adult skull, has been slowly formed by

No. 2.] SHUFELDT ON NORTH AMERICAN TETRAONIDZ. 317

osseous extension, chiefly from the ethmoid, frontals, and ali-sphenoids,
and that the basi-sphenoid sends up on either side two delicate bony
sprouts, that subsequently complete the periphery of the circular foramen
for the oculomotorial nerve. This fact has been likewise carefully
studied in the cranium of the common barn-yard fowl, and like conclu-
sions arrived at. So that in Plate V. Fig. 51, this, as it occurs in some
other birds, has been simply outlined and marked os.; in this same
figure Fr. is the “frontal,” ps. the prefrontal or centrum of the
vertebra, and x the usual site for the postfrontal—this exogenous ele-
ment, the diapophysis of the vertebra is not here found, its position
being occupied by a depressed roughened surface for the squamous
articulation of the mastoid. We have never personally examined any
bird in our avi-fauna where this bone is seen independent. Descriptive
ornithotomists, in their studies upon the skulls of Rheide and
Struthionide give the presence of this process as occurring free.

The neural spine of the frontal vertebra follows the example of the
parietal in being completely bifidated in the younger specimens. As a
whole it is perhaps the largest segment in the bird-skull—certainly as
far as our Grouse and Partridges are concerned. Either half of its
spine presents projecting anteriorly from the middle a flattened pro-
cess, directed gently forwards, downwards, and outwards; that at its
extremity is marked above by quite an extensive surface for one of the
nasals, and below by another, against which the head of the ethmoid
abuts. The concave surface below this process and the remaining
hinder moiety forms the vault of the orbit. Another scale-like pro-
jection is thrown out posteriorly, deeply concave within, correspond-
ingly convex without, to shield the prosencephalic lobes—the bones
being joined. Huxley terms the pleurapophysis of the hemal arch of
this segment the ‘‘quadrate ”—the “‘os quadratum” of the older anato-
mists. Owen defined it as the tympanic, it being the homologue of a
bone of the vertebral skull generally—it was the os carré, in birds, in
the writings of the eminent Cuvier. The tympanic forms no exception
here in the Tetraonide to birds of America generally, in being a free
bone, of various shapes in divers families and genera. So symmetrical
is it found to be in the Grouse, that little harm would be done, were
such a step advisable, to appoint it as a type for the Class. The mas-
toidal and orbital arms are about of alength and calibre, the first being
rather the larger, and is surmounted by a hemispherical articulating
head for the cup on the lower border of the mastoid. The neck below
the processes is moderately constricted before it expands to become the
“mandibular” end, that has beneath, its transverse elliptical facet out-
wardly, the intervening notch and then the inner and smaller one, all for
articulation with the mandible. The bone has likewise a surface to
articulate with the pterygoid below the orbital process, and is always
pneumatic. From the outer aspect of the mandibular extremity it sup-
ports its two appendages, the bony styles, termed “ squamosal” and

318 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

“malar”—the first by a diminutive “ball and socket” joint articulated
jn the usual manner. The “malar,” as we know, is the mid-style of the
“infraorbital bar”—the maxillary completing the connection anteriorly,
and although upon superficial inspection of this striking ornithic feature
of the lateral aspect of the skull, it seems to be firmly united in its schin-
dylesial articulation, it simply requires ordinary maceration in the adult
of any of the Grouse or Quails to have the three styles separate from
each other and from their tympanic and intermaxillary connections.

The lower jaws of the Tetraonine are singularly alike in all their
characteristics throughout the sub-family. The single bone is devel-
oped in the usual way by confluency of the “articular,” “ surangular,”
“angular,” and “ splenial” elements posteriorly, and the outer moiety by
the ‘“‘dentary” element, the hemal spine. (Plate V. See explanation
of plates for the above described bones.)

The mandible in the adult has a gentle and increasing curvature
downwards from the interangular vacuity forwards. The curvatures
at the extremities of the symphysisial suture are both parabolic, the
inner being the more open of the two. The interangular fenestra is a
flattened ellipse, which has distinct sutural traces leading from it, indi-
cating the borders of some of the original bits of bone of which it is
composed.

The ‘‘ coranoids” are but feebly developed and the articular ends not
far below them; these latter have the usual pneumatic foramen at the
ends of their in-pointed and blunt extremities, and sharp recurved pro-
cesses behind, in a line with the rami of the jaw, which apophyses long
remain in cartilage in immature birds. (Plate X, Fig. 71.)

On the lateral aspect of the bone, two muscular lines lead away from
the coronoidal elevations. These last two mentioned features are univers-
ally characteristic of the Tetraonide ; they are strongly marked in Lag-
opus. (Plate XIII, Fig. 88.) Minute foramina are found above and
below near the dentary margins, and two quite prominent, one beyond
the ramal fenestra on the inner surface of the jaw; still another just
anterior to a small tubercle below the coronoids on the same aspect.
The inferior ramal borders are markedly smooth and rounded, as are
the under surfaces of the articular ends where they originate in nearly
the same plane.

The divergence of the ramal limbs of the mandible in Odontophorine is
greater, owing tothe greater width of the skull when compared with its
length. :

In some fine specimens of Lophortyx Californicas, generously furnished
us by Mr. Charles A. Allen, of Nicasio, Marin County, California, we note
the striking departure from the mandible in the Grouse in the absence
of the interangular vacuity—this feature obtains, however, in the com-
mon Virginia Partridge and others. The deflection of the rami anteri-
orly is greater in these birds also, or at least more sudden, and so prom-
inent are these ramal borders that the inner sides towards the posterior
ends are converted into true fosse.

No.2.) . SHUFELDT ON NORTH AMERICAN TETRAONIDA. gig

Those interesting osseous and diminutive oblong plates, the sclerotals,
present in so many of the class, are found here occupying their usual posi-
tion. (Plate V, Fig. 51, 2, and Plate X, Fig. 75, in Cupidonia.) They num-
ber from thirteen to eighteen or twenty, and their function is so well
known that it will not be dilated upon here. They differ principally in
the amount of tenacity with which they retain their normal relation, after
prolonged maceration. Cupidonia holds a high place here, and the fact
seems to be due to the greater overlapping of the edges of these little
affairs and the toughness, or perchance the thickness, of the internal and
external sclerotic coats that cover them. Lately we saw in the case of
Sayornis nigricans where these platelets were apparently confluent; no
such condition ever occurs in the Grouse or Partridges.

The “lacrymal” (Plate V, Fig. 51, 3 and other figured skulls) is
found on the anterior margin of the frontal, enjoying a free harmonial
articulation that encroaches slightly on the nasal border. Hach is a
squamous, cordate lamella, with its larger end nearer the orbital cavity ;
this completes the bone in young birds, but in mature individuals it
sends down a curved and delicate style with its point directed outwards,
that encircles and gives support to the lacrymal duct on its passage to
the rhinal cavity (Centrocercus).

We now come to examine into the last of the cranial vertebra, and,
in the family under consideration, the one most modified. It is the
“nasal,” and its neural arch the “rhinencephalic,” the hemal, the
“ maxillary.”

In the Tetraonide its centrum, the “ vomer,” is missing. We make
this assertion boldly, for, after careful scrutiny in the embryo, we find
no special ossification for that segment, nor can we appropriate hon-
estly any part of the pre-sphenoid to compensate for the deficiency, and
we are the more convinced of the fact after examining crania of birds of
different ages. It is absent. Whether this be due to the foreshortened
skull of the Grouse, with its long sphenoidal rostrum rendering any fur-
ther extension superfluous, we cannot say. In the lengthened skull of
any of the Anatide, where such a bone is imperatively called for, as a
sub-interspinal partition, it is invariably present, and unusually promi-
nent (Plate V, Fig. 51, vr. vomer, is merely outlined to indicate its
position in other birds).

The neurapophyses of the arch are found in the connate prefrontals,
the bone called “ethmoid” in androtomy. It here, in the young
bird, is lodged in the outer third of the groove on the pre-sphenoid, rises
columnar, sub-compressed laterally, leaning forwards at a gentle angle
to expand above in a trihedral summit for the support of the frontals,
nasals, and intermaxillary, a short process being projected backwards
for the former. The posterior aspect of the column develops as the bird
grows, the interorbital septum, reaching to, and perhaps aiding in, the
formation of the exogenous orbito-sphenoids.

The nasals, or the divided neural spine of the arch, are squamous

320 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

lamella, twisted upon themselves in a manner to conform with the
superior base of the beak, overlap the frontals as already defined, are
separated from each other by the intermaxillary, throwing out below to
meet this bone a sharp process, thus forming a broad elliptical bound-
ary limiting the capacious osseous nares. In all adults of this family
they are easily detached by maceration. These bones are well shown
in Plate X, Figs. 71 and 73, in the cranium of Cupidonia, from an un-
usually fine bird sent with a number of others, for which our thanks are
graciously tendered to Captain Richards Barnett, Medical Department
United States Army. It will be observed that the bone becomes so at-
tenuated in some specimens as to give rise to a foramen, as seen in the
latter figure. The hzmal arch is ycleped “maxillary,” as its lower rib
and spine constitute the major share of the superior mandible or maailla.
The pleurapophyses seen in the palatines are long, rib-like bones with
their anterior ends much flattened from above downwards, to fit into a
fissure on either side made for them in the intermaxillary below the
maxillaries. Near their middles they curve moderately outwards to de-
velop compressed heads at their posterior extremities, fitting into a
notch in either pterygoid, and concave mesially for the rostrum of the
basi-sphenoid.

At their inner thirds they send off thin sheets of bone that curve up-
wards, barely to touch the ramphosial process of the sphenoid, accom-
panying it as far as it extends distad, then sloping away on the ribs of
the bones themselves. The hemapophysial maxillaries are elements
that seldom change their ornithic characters, and in Tetraonide seem
to be reduced to their simple typical form—in completing the delicate
infraorbital bar on the one hand—and just previous to becoming wedged
into the premaxillary above the palatines, dispatching a bony offshoot
on either side nearly to meet each other in the palatine fissure on the
other.

The remaining pair of bones found at the inferior aspect of the birds’
skull are the pterygoids. In the Grouse they are stumpy, subcompressed
concerns, with half-twisted shafts, having broad concave surfaces for
the facets on the rostrum, which are notched distally for the reception
of the palatines. The articulation with the tympanics is equally exten-
sive, monopolizing long, narrow facets beneath the orbital processes on
those bones.

We have arrived finally at the point in our descriptive skeletology of
the avian skull, where we have to deal with the anterior and ultimate
hemal spine, here fulfilling most important functions as the superior
mandible, as it does throughout the class at large. In Tetraonide, as
in the vast majority of birds, the intermawzillary or the “ premaxillary ”
of some authors is of much stouter material than most other bones of
the head, its use, being a very obvious reason for this. (Plate V, Fig.
51, N. Pf. ma, i.ma.).

From the moderately free fronto-maxillary and pseudo hinge-joint,

No. 2.) SHUFELDT ON NORTH AMERICAN TETRAONIDZ. joe

between the out-turned frontals, the culmen of this bone slopes by a
gently increasing are to the tip of the beak. This surface is rounded
and split in two from the enlarged inner extremity to a point over the
distal border of the nostril; this division lasts during life. The exter-
nal nasal orifices are unusually large and sub-elliptical in outline. The
head of the ethmoid shows in very young chicks, but is eventnally cov-
ered by this bone, which also fills in snugly the internasal space (Plate
X, Fig. 73).

The osseous maxillary tomia are even sharper than when they were
capped with the horny integumental sheath that the entire bill wears
during life; they are produced backwards on a triangular process of the
bone below the shaft of the maxillaries, touching them in the Quails.
A row of minute foramina encircle the beak anteriorly, where it is the
thickest, though the segment is non-pneumatic. The general surface
beneath is depressed below the tomial margins, though it is not very
extensive, as the wide palatine fissure occupies a good part of the space,
that terminates anteriorly in a U-shaped curve, opposite the outer nasal
border. In the Odontophorine the curve of the culmen is more abrupt,
and the frontals rise above, in some cases even jut over, the premaxil-
lary. The nasal apertures are also very large and of a shorter ellipti-
cal outline; the palatine fissure is likewise narrower in comparison, a
‘few of which differences are such as one would naturally look for in a
bird of so near kin, and whose beak has been more than proportion-
ately curtailed. ;

On removing the vault of the cranium in an adult female of Centro-
cercus, so as to obtain a free view of the brain-case, we discover the
usual nervous and vascular foramina present at their most common
sites, but beyond this we are more struck with the feebleness with.
which many of the salient points are developed, as compared with some.
of the other avian groups; we might sum it up by describing it as a
lack of angularity and depth. Itis true the various fossz are well,.
though not strongly divided, the superior median crest is present but
not very prominently developed, and the rhinencephalic fossa is barely
conical. The section shows the greatest amount of deploic tissue to be
in the basi-sphenoid, and bones of the occiput, where for potent reasons.
such material is most urgently in demand.

In the study of the crania of the adult Tetraonide as an entirety we
find among the most conspicuous features enlisting our interest the un-
usual number of bones that remain free in-them. The skull ean be so
stripped of its outstanding segments that nothing remains save the
cephalic casket with the interorbital septum. The rhinal chamber is
strikingly open, due to the great external nasal passages, and all its
internal structures, as the ethmo-turbinals, internasal septum, and floor
being formed only in cartilage. A pocket existing in the extremity of the
premaxillary, that fills in with a spongy osseous tissue during life, is
observed in Centrocercus, which is solid in the Odontophorine and Lago-

21GB

Aan BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VIL

pus—parial, subcircular pits placed side by side in like locality in Tetrao
obscurus.

The orbits are more fortunate in the completeness of their bony
enclosures—the heavy plate generously extended by the ethmoid to
divide these cavities very rarely shows any deficiencies. Of all the
crania before us Tetrao obscurus is the only delinquent in this respect,
though no doubt this may occur in others. In it quite a vacuity exists
near the middle of this septum. Anteriorly the prefrontal and frontal
throw out laterally squamous septa of greater or less completeness, that
divide these cavities from the common rhinal space. These plates may
coalesce with the processes of the lacrymal, as a rare coincidence, and
perchance meet the infraorbital style. The foramina for the passage of
the optic nerves and the first pair are, as a rule, singularly circular and
distinct, the minor apertures about them enjoying a like individuality.
They are noted for their greater patentcy among the Partridges.

A separate canal is devoted to each olfactory nerve immediately
below the orbital vaults, that usually at its outstart from the cranial
end has a small opening between it and the one of the opposite side.
About the entrance to the otocrane we notice principally a rounded,
squamous plate thrown down from above by the mastoid, that is pre-
sent in all the Grouse. Just below and within, this segment also devel-
ops a sharp spicula of bone, posterior to the tympanic articulation,
that evidently serves the purpose of keeping this free ossicle in its
socket in certain movements of the jaw.

Peculiarities of the floor of this cavity have already been described
above; in specimens of Tetrao canadensis, carefully selected for me by
Mr. William Brewster, of Cambridge, Mass., and forwarded to me by
Prof. J. A. Allen, of the Museum of Comparative Zoology, also of Cam-
bridge, to whom my grateful acknowledgments are due for so many like
fawors, we find, upon viewing the skull from below, the elevations or con-
vexities due to these ellipsoidal and wing-like formations, reminding
one of their marked resemblance to the acoustic bulle of the tympanic
found among the crania of Felide.

The author in his various plates and figures believes he has given suf-
ficient life size, as they all are, views of basal and superior aspects of
the skulls of these birds, will not enter here into any needless details
of measurements. The variation in size in this respect in Centrocercus
has already been dwelt upon; it isnot nearly so marked in other genera.
The surface of the skulls.above have a rough look caused by many
minute depressions and groovelets, then running out to the margins of
the orbits cause them in some to be finely serrated.

The Sharp-tailed Grouse is a unique exception to this, it being a bird
of rather a delieate skull with smooth cranial superficies. All save Cen-
trocercus possess rather depressed foreheads, apparently due more to a
slight tilting upwards of the superior orbital peripheries. The lateral
temporal fossze are shallow and scarcely noticeable, the muscles they
afford lodgment not being remarkable either for their size or strength.

No. 2.] SHUFELDT ON NORTH AMERICAN TETRAONIDA. Aa

Of the Vertebral Column.—In discussing the development and peculiar-
ities of the vertebral column, we will still continue to adhere to Centro-
cercus as our model, explicitly stating names of other species when oc-

®casion requires a departure therefrom.

In examining the atlas and axis as they occur together in the chick a
few days old, we find that the neurapophyses of the first have as yet
failed to fairly meet above in the median line; though they may in
some instances, as they undoubtedly do, soon touch each other. No os-
sific centre exists for an atlantal neural spine, as that process is not found
upon this bone in any of the Tetraonide. Below the arch the interest-
ing procedure is progressing in the appropriation of the centrum of this
segment by the axis. The inferior extremities of the atlantal neura-
pophyses have inserted between them a circular ossicle whose plane is in
the horizontal plane and on a level with the floor of the neural canal of
the axis. This bonelet eventually becomes the “‘odontoid process” of the
second vertebra. At this stage it is a little less than a millimeter in
diameter, and in the adult occupying the same position remains a sub-
sessile, and in comparison with the bulk of the bone it is attached to, an
insignificant tubercle, though unquestionably fulfilling all the impor-
tant functions required of it. Inless than six weeks the odontoidal lar-
ceny is complete, and no trace remains to lead one to suspect how mat-
ters stood at the earlier date.

Immediately beneath and a little posterior to the primoidal and dis-
tinct centrum of the atlas, there is another, and still larger, free ossific
centre, uniform in outline, concave above, surrounding the primitive
odontoid apophysis with its long axis lying transversely ; behind, and
in contact with it, are two more very minute and elliptical ones placed
side by side. The first of these unite with the atlas and latterly form
the bony ring for the occipital condyle to revolve in, and the surface for
the odontoid to move upon, and a notched lip of bone that projects from
it behind, that subsequently develops—the remaining two, the anterior
part of the body of the axis that bears the articulating surface for the
first vertebra. In the full grown bird the postzygapophyses of the
first vertebra projecting well to the rear look almost directly inward:
They meet the prezygapophyses of the axis that face in a contrary direc-
tion and a little backwards. The articulating facet for the centrum of
the axis is subelliptical, convex, of some size, and has in the segmented
column the inferior and convex surface of the odontoid playing just
above it, the superior and flat surface of the latter being confined by
intervening and delicate ligament forming a part of the floor of the
neural canal of this bone. In the axis of the adult the arterior part of
the bone with the odontoid process, that was separately added, projects
conspicuously forwards beyond the neural arch, and in birds of several
months of age it can be distinctly discerned where the union was estab-
lished between neurapophyses and centrum.

In the mature vertebra the neural canal is nearly circular. In the

O24 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

centre of the bone, above, a knob-like tubercle acts as the neural spine,
which has mesially and behind a deep pitlet for the insertion of the in-
terspinous ligament. Anapophysial tubercles are found above the post-
zygapophyses, which latter are of considerable size, concave, and faced®
downwards. The centrum of the axisis subcompressed from side to side
and supports mesially, just anterior to the second vertebral articulation
the first hypapophysis of the series. The first two segments of the ver-
tebral column are non-pneumatic. .

Vertebre throughout the chain in the young chick invariably show
the line of union between the centra and neurapophyses, but it is lost
as soon as the birds come to be two or three months old. At this age,
however, still very interesting points of development are strikingly visi-
ble in the third vertebra, which otherwise varies but slightly from the
same bone in appearance as seen in the column of an old male, such as
we. have before us.

The neural spine, more compressed than in the axis, is nearer the mid-
dle of the vertebra, still deeply pitted for the interspinous ligament be-
hind, and slightly so onits anterior margin. This characteristic becomes
very faint among the long vertebre in the middle of the neck, to be
markedly reproduced as we approach the. dorsals, the posterior depres-
sion always being by far the best defined. We find anapophysial tuber-
cles still present in the third vertebra. These also exist throughout the
cervical series, with more or less clearness; they form ridge-like lines
upon the elongated segments of the mid-neck. The zygapophysial pro-
cesses in general look upwards and inwards anteriorly, and vice versa be-
hind—the fourth vertebra having in common with the one we are now
describing an interzygapophysial bar, lending to these two segments _
that broad and solid appearance well known to ornithotomists, not pos-
sessed by any other of the cervicals. The neural canal in the third ver-
tebra is nearly circular, which is also its form in the adult, becoming
only moderately compressed from above downwards in the last three or
four cervicals. Regarding the third vertebra from below, we observe
that the articulating surface of the centrum for the axis to be quite con-
cave and turned alittledownwards. The processes that fall beneath the
prezygapophyses form what would be a canal with its lateral margins ;
this groove, however, in the “bird of the year” is converted into the ver-
tebral canal by an independent ossicle being placed over it on either
side, and, being below the rest, it causes a broad shallow concavity to
appear mesially and anteriorly.

These small bones have at the very outstart stumpy apophyses pro-
jecting backwards, and are the parapophyses of the vertebra—the pro-
jections they meet from above being the pleurapophyses, the groove they
form mesially being the broad termination of the carotid canal.

The fourth vertebra has the same general appearance of the third, that
we have just been describing ; it is a little longer, however, and in both
large pneumatic foramina are found laterally and beneath the diapoph-

No.2] § SHUFELDT ON NORTH AMERICAN TETRAONIDA. 325

yses. These apertures are found in the vertebral canal in the remain- ©
der of the cervicals. Again, in both, the bodies are rather compressed
from side to side, and it is not until the bird has arrived at maturity that
the hypapophyses are well seen in these two segments.

Now, taking up the cervicals from the fifth vertebra, we find certain
characteristics holding good throughout the series, with certain gradual
modifications. In the adult the neural spine in the fifth is prominent and
placed anteriorly ; it slowly subsides to the tenth, whereit is more tuber-
ous, nearer the middle of the bone, and bears evidence of having a
posterior projection overhanging the depression for the interspinous
ligament. This is thetype to include the thirteenth, the projection being
more and more prominent and slightly cleft behind; in the fourteenth
and fifteenth it suddenly assumes the broad quadrate spine of the dor-
sal type. Returning to the fifth vertebra, we note another change in
the lengthening of the postzygapophyses; the acme of this modification
is seen to be in the sixth andseventh vertebree. From these they gradu-
ally shorten again, while the anterior ones spread out with the dia-
pophyses to assume the form of the consolidated ones in mid-dorsal ¢ol-
umn. This arrangement allows lozenge-shaped apertures to exist be-
tween the segments above, and subelliptical ones laterally, that become
smaller and more circular above as the postzygapophyses shorten, and
quite large laterally as they approach the point opposite where the bra-
chial plexus is thrown off from the myelon.

In the adult and old Cock of the Plains we detect beneath, in the
fifth vertebra, well anteriorly, a strongly developed quadrate hypapophy-
sis. This process entirely disappears in the sixth, forin this segment the
centrum of the bone, anteriorly on either side, just where the paraop-
physes meet the body mesiad, a tubercle commences to make its appear-
ance, the apices slightly inclined towards each other. From the sixth to
the tenth inclusive these apophyses become longer, approach each other
below, but never meet so long as they have the “ carotid canal,” which
they form between them. In the eleventh they seem to have met tiirowgh-
out their extent to form a hypapophysis on the exact site they occupy
in the tenth, the tenth vertebra being the last cervical where there is
any evidence of the carotid canal; hence from this method of formation
Professor Owen is made to say (Comp. Anat. and Phys. of Vertebrates,
vol. 11, p. 190), ‘In the Common Fowl each carotid * * * enters (ing)
the canal formed by the hypapophyses.”

In the completed twelfth vertebra of the mature bird we find this
hypapophysis very large, with expanded extremity, and the parapophy-
sis, on either side, sending down long subsquamous processes. In the
thirteenth segment of the “bird of the year” the parapophyses begin to
takeonachange. This change develops in the adult still a perfeet hypa-
pophysis, but in the younger individual the parapophysial element

‘begins to be notched anteriorly, a part favoring the pleurapophysis, a

part the centrum, so that in the fourteenth vertebra of the adult the

326 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [ Vol. VI.

hypapophysis is still present anteriorly with a tubercle developing on
either side of it, with the parietes of the vertebral canal very much
slenderer. In examining this segment in the younger bird we ascertain
that the original ossicle is now a descending pleurapophysis meeting
the parapophysis, a delicate and independent process, which, in the fif-
teenth and last cervical vertebra, constitutes a free rib, while the hypapo-
phlysis consists of a mid-process and a smaller nodule on either side.
This beautiful metamorphosis can be thoroughly studied and easily com-
prehended in the cervical portion of the vertebral column in our Cathar-
tes aura.

So that, as a partial recapitulation of the first fifteen segments, we
find that they make up the ‘cervical portion” of the column. Their cen-
tra are universally subcompressed at their middles, they develop in the
young bird parapophysial projections that eventually produce free ribs
by the aid of the descending pleurapophyses, and their interarticula-
tions, as far as their bodies are concerned, bear out the general ornithic¢
law of being apparently proccelous on vertical section and opisthoce-
lous on horizontal section.

Backwards from the fifteenth the vertebral segments or the links of
the chain take on a metamorphosis that is characteristic of the Tetraon-
ide. It consists in, in all the adults of the genera, a consolidation of
the ensuing four vertebra. The confluent bone thus formed constitutes
the major part of the dorsal division of the spinal column and invariably
supports free pleurapophyses (Plate VI, Fig. 55, Centrocercus, ad. 2).

In Centrocercus these four vertebre can easily be distinguished from
each other until the bird is over a year old, but very soon after this all
sutural traces are entirely obliterated and we have the segment as rep-
resented in the plate.

The neural spines become one long parallelogrammic plate, occasion-
ally exhibiting a foramen or so at the site of the original interspinous ©
spaces.

Its crest is rounded, but has no independent rim. Muscular fascia at-
tached to it posteriorly often ossifies, leaving in the prepared skeleton
flattened spicule, on either side, directed backwards. _The anterior
aspect of this bone has all the necessary elements to meet the last free
vertebra beyond it. The first pair of diapophyses are the shortest, the
last pair the longest and most raised ; these processes are more or less
bound together by metapophysial offshoots of variously defined serrate
margins, that allow interdiapophysial vacuities to exist. Below, and
just anterior to the bases of the diapophyses, are the four subelliptical
and concave facets of the capitula of the dorsal pleurapophyses. From
their upper and posterior points sharp crests run beneath the transverse
processes to meet the out-turned and cordate facets at their extremities
for the tubercula of the ribs. At regular intervals, and nearly in a
right line among the diapophyses, are the elliptical orifices for the
transmission of the dorsal nerves.

No.2] | SHUFELDT ON NORTH AMERICAN TETRAONID. 525

Pneumatic foramina are found about the bases of the transverse pro-
cesses, the most anterior one being of some size.

The centra of these amalgamated vertebrae are very much compressed
- from side toside. This compression has its due influence upon the form
of the neural tube within, while the bone below is produced downwards
into an excessively thin and sharp crest, which is still further extended
into four inverted T-shaped hypapophyses of large size. They join each
other beneath to a greater or less degree in many of the genera. This
union more frequently takes place between the first and second, and the
first is always upturned and flanged out laterally, a feature prominently
reproduced in Lagopas and Bonasa. These winglike side extensions of
the lower margins of the hypapophyses not infrequently are continued
on two or three consecutive ones, and are sometimes the widest on the
second.— Tetrao.

Both in the Grouse and Partridges we find a free vertebra inserted
between the compound bone we have just been discussing and the first
sacral vertebra. This segment we must consider as belonging to the
dorsal series, although in Cupidonia and Pediccetes the upper and distal
aspects of its diapophyses are more or less moulded to conform with the
ilia. This bone is also figured in Plate VI, Fig 55, in conjunction with
the other dorsals, with which it has all its characteristics in common,
and such ones superadded as we might expect to find in a vertebra
naturally disjointed in the middle of the column. It has the longest
diapophyses of any of the series to which it belongs; facets for the
tubercula and capitula of its own free pleurapophyses; a hypapophysis
of no mean length that may or may not be expanded below.

Metapophysial spicule on its transverse processes sometimes are so
far produced as to reach vertebrae before and behind it.

This segment is likewise pneumatic.

_ There is a wonderful vein of regularity running through the dorsal
pleurapophyses, hemapophyses, and hemal spine or sternum. As to
the first pleurapophysis, or rather the first pair of these bones, we have
already described them as they are found in the ultimate cervical.
There we are aware it never reaches the sternum by the intervention of
a sternal rib; that they are usually found to possess thoroughly devel-
oped heads and tubercles for the vertebra, their shafts being less flat-
tened than the dorsal ribs, and only in Lagopus did we discover any epi-
pleural appendages.

As far as our observations extend, the consolidated portion of the
column of the dorsum has always consisted of four vertebrae, and con-
sequently we find in this portion four pairs of movable dorsal pleura-
pophyses and one pair for the free dorsal vertebra, reckoning five alto-
gether for this region. The first pair of dorsal vertebral ribs terminate
in free extremities, which are usually in line with the inter-hema-pleura-
pophysial articulations in old specimens, and as a rule support epi-pleural
appendages, characteristic of the species to which the rib belongs.

328 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL

- In the Tetraonide, following the general aphorism of the class, we ob-

serve a gradual dilation of the skeleton from the inter-coracoidal aper-
ture towards the pelvic extremity of the body. To compensate, or rather
what really gives rise to this, as far as the bird’s osseous structure is
concerned, among other things, is a lengthening of the diapophyses as
we proceed in that direction. The ribs also become longer; the xiphoidal
forks of the sternum flange outwards. So, too, we find a corresponding
shrinking of the tubercula on the dorso-vertebral pleurapophyses, and
a stretching of the correlative necks, so that the capitula may reach the
facet intended for them on the vertebra,

The vertebral ribs as seen in the Grouse are pneumatic, the foramina
being found on the posterior aspect of these bones immediately below
the tubercles, sheltered by the flattened bodies as they dilate in that
region.

As in nearly all birds, these ribs are compressed from within outwards,
aud in Centrocercus are wider below the uncinate processes, contract-
ing as they meet their sternal ribs. In these birds, too, the epi-pleural
appendages are firmly knit to the body of the rib—though in Bonasa, La-
gopus, and Tetrao they may be easily detached, leaving behind them in
each case 2 shallow concave facet. In the last dorsal rib this append-
age is the smallest, and is directed upwards nearly parallel with the body
of the rib, and sometimes (Centrocercus) the edge of its rib swells out to
meet its apex above; and this may have been the method by which the
unique and remarkably striking uncinate appendages were formed in
Cupidonia, a bird that constitutes itself an exception among the North
American Grouse in this respect (PI. XI, Figs. 79, 80), where not only
the vertebral ribs are unusually broad, but their processes much more
so, being great, odd, quadrate and compressed plates confluent with tlie
body of the rib, and only rarely condescending to be weakened by the
merest apology for a foramen to exist in them, asin Fig. 80. The Sharp-
tailed Grouse appears to come next in approaching this state of affairs;
it, too, invariably developing more or less expanded ribs. The only
sacral pair of pleurapophyses conform to the general shape of the series
to which they belong, and never support epi-pleural processes.

These bony protectors of the thoracic parietes were found to be
exceedingly delicate in specimens of Bonasa kindly sent me by Leslie
A. Lee, Esq., of Brunswick, Me.

Four hemal ribs ascend from the costal borders of the sternum to
meet the dorsal pleurapophyses in arthrodial articulations above the
mid-horizontal plane of the bird’s body. As is usual, their sternal ends |
are twisted so that the facets are situated transversely, while the upper
extremities are broad and flat, particularly in Cupidonia and Pediecetes.

The first pair are generally in advance of the others, and insert them-
selves higher up on the costal processes: The pneumatic foramina for
these bones are to be found just above their tranverse facets anteriorly.
The extremities of the hemapophyses of the sacral ribs meet the pos-

No. 2.] SHUFELDT ON NORTH AMERICAN TETRAONIDZ. 329

terior borders of the hemal ribs of the last dorsal pair usually about
the junction of their middle and lower thirds of the bodies of these
bones.

The distal or upper extremities of these, the last pair of hama-
pophyses, are sometimes very much expanded, and in a specimen of
Centrocercus, 2,a small bit of bone has been superadded, simulating an
additional hemal spine on either side, as if anticipating the descent
of another pair of sacral ribs to protect this otherwise feebly guarded
region of its owner’s anatomy.

The short pair of xiphoidal processes overlap the ultimate sternal ribs

of all the Grouse and Quails, on either side, as do the ilia the sacral pleu-
rapophyses above.
The Sternum, in the North American Tetraonide, is developed from five
points of ossification, and to these it seems to have added, later in life,
or before the bone becomes one entire piece, an ossific centre at the ex-
tremity of each of the four lateral xiphoidal prolongations from which
their subsequently dilated ends are produced. These later are easily to
be demonstrated in the hzemal spine of eaMaa pee in the “bird of the
year” (Plate VI, Figs. 53 and 56).

Tig. 53 represents the young of this last-named Gaanes a day or so
old, at which time all five of the primoidal points of development are
eminently distinct. The “body” of the bone is nearly circular. The
“keel,” of which only the anterior part has as yet ossified, dips well
down between the tender pectorals ; the manubrium, now only in carti-
lage, has at this date no evidence of the foramen that later joins the
coracoidal grooves. As to the rest, bands of delicate membranous tissue
bind them loosely together. The sternum in a bird of several months’
growth is shown in Fig. 56. Here the bone is rapidly assuming the
shape it is destined to retain during life. The body and with it the
keel is extending by generous deposition of bone tissue at its margins,
principally at the mid-xiphoidal prolongation. The manubrium, still in
cartilage, we find pierced at its base by the foramen just alluded to, and
a rim of the same material runs about the anterior border of the lophos-
teon, Fig. 56, 4, while a rapidly diminishing band also connects the ele-
ments known at this stage as the plewrosteon, ib.,6, and the metosteon, ib.,
5. In cases where severe maceration is resorted to with this bone, in
still older specimens, in which the sutures are not suspected, these parts
will still separate about the original points of ultimate union.

On the reverse side of the bone shown in Fig. 56 we find that even
at this stage it is deeply perforated by the pneumatic foramen ata
point immediately over the carinal ridge.

In the adult the sternuin is highly pneumatic, air having access to it
through such apertures not only at this point but also in the costal bor-
ders between the sternal ribs, and by a single foramen in the groove,
posterior to the manubrial process mesiad.

Thus it is that this bone is generated, and as an entirety we are well

330 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY, [Vol. VL

aware that it represents the confluent hzmal spines of the free thoracic
ribs, not developed in the order of a spine for a rib, completing the in-
verted hzmal arches separately, as in some vertebrates, which by their
peculiar skeletal topography such niceties become feasible, but, as we
have seen, and the fact is not new, by a fewer number of ossific centres, of
necessity, due largely to idiosynerasy of conformation as subservient to
purpose, and a convergence of the inferior extremities of the several
hemapophyses to which, as a whole, it belongs.

In Plate VI, Figs. 52, 54, and 55 are all parts of the skeleton of the
same bird—an old adult Sage Cock, Centrocercus—of which Fig. 54 is a
view from below of the sternum.

It will be seen that it has a length of 14 centimetres, and other meas-
urements can be easily obtained from it. We have never seen this bone
any larger, and, as it is, it represents the maximum size the hemal
spine attains among North American Grouse. The bone is shown in other
plates also, and their owners can be ascertained if the reader will kindly
turn to the “* Explanation of Plates” accompanying this paper.

The unique outline of the sternum of the Galline has long been known,
many authors having both figured and described it, and we will say here
that in the Tetraonide of our country no marked deviations are a be
noted from the more common type.

Anteriorly the manubrium juts out as a quadrate process with
rounded angles; its inferior margin is continuous with a line that runs
down between the slightly prominent carinal ridges, to become continu-
ous below with the anterior carinal margin.

Above, the general surface of the sternal body extends over it. A
subcircular foramen, connecting the coracoidal grooves, pierces it at
its base. The coracoidal furrow, thus becoming one groove, is biconvex,
being depressed mesiad behind the manubrium, in which depression
another pneumatic foramen usually occurs. Their upper and lower
margins are produced slightly outwards, the inferior being the sharper
of the two.

The *‘ costal processes ”-are exceedingly prominent, being bent over
anteriorly at their apices, which are rounded. Behind them are observed
the limited “ costal borders,” exhibiting the four transverse facets for
the sternal ribs and pneumatic foramina. The “carina” or keel affords
the greatest amount of osseous surface of the entire bone, greatly ex-
ceeding the body. Its lower margin is a long convex curve outwards,
and the ‘ carinal angle” protrudes forwards nearly as far as the manu-
brium, causing the anterior margin of the keel to be markedly concave.

The “carinal ridge” is thickened and heavy superiorly, where it
limits or rather constitutes the boundary of the bone in that direction.
Below it spreads out, and is gradually lost, within the boundary of the
carinal border proper.

“ Subeostal” and ‘ pectoral ridges” are nearly always well defined.

The superior and inferior xiphoidal processes are very characteristic

No. 2.] SHUFELDT ON NORTH AMERICAN TETRAONIDZ. 331

of the Tetraonidw. They terminate by dilated extremities of nearly simi-
lar shapes, Cupidonia being an exception; the ends of the apophyses
of the superior pair in this bird being rounded posteriorly (Plate XI,
Fig.82; see Plate XIII, Fig. 91, Lagopus, for the common pattern). These
processes arise from a common stem, and their shafts are flat internally,
with a raised ridge extending the entire length externally. The “body”
of the sternum is, as arule, very narrow, and notably concave anteriorly,
becoming nearly flat behind, where it is produced beyond the keel for
a greater or less distance.

The manner in which this part terminates varies in the different
Grouse.

In Centrocercus it is nearly square across ; in Lagopus roundly notched
in the middle line, as it is in Bonasa; in Tetrao canadensis it is broadly
cordate; while in Tetrao obscurus, Cupidonia, and Pediecetes it is dis-
tinctly cuniform. The body is very narrow in Bonasa, approaching
the Odontophorine, where it seems really to be nothing more than a
good ribbonelike finish to the superior border of the keel. In these
birds, too, we are struck with the double carinal margins anteriorly
formed by the projecting ridges, and the long spicula-form costal pro-
cesses that extend nearly half-way up the shafts of the coracoids.

So much do the sterni of the Grouse resemble one another in species
of average size that it would puzzle one not a little to tell them apart
if they were separated from the skeleton, and we were not allowed to
examine them in connection with other diagnostic features of the osse-
ous parts of the species to which they might belong.

Cupidonia and Pediecetes are particularly alike, but the former could
be recognized by its superior xiphoidal processes, Bonasa by the nar-
row body, Centrocercus by its size in the larger specimens, and so on.

We will still continue to consider such of the vertebral column as is
confluent in the old bird, or rather such vertebrze as become confluent
and are more or less embraced by the ossa innominata, as the sacrum,
and composed of sacral vertebra, attempting to make no such divisions
as Professor Huxley did,in his Anatomy of Vertebrated Animals, of
this compound bone.

There are sixteen of these segments that are to be so reckoned in
Centrocercus, but it is only in the “bird of the year” that they can be
counted with anything like accuracy, and even then great care must be
exercised, and various pelves examined and compared with the younger
birds at different stages and ages.

The first sacral vertebra possesses free pleurapophyses, whose haema-
pophyses do not reach the costal borders of the sternum, but articulate
in a manner to be described further on. Regarding the pelvis from be-
low in Centrocercus, we note that the anterior four sacral vertebre have
their combined par- and diapophysial processes thrown out as braces
against the expanded anterioriliae wings. After this the ilia change their
form to accommodate themselves to the basin of the pelvis, which they

332 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

assist in inclosing, and with this change the succeeding vertebre have
their diapophyses much elevated to meet the internal iliac margins,
This section consumes four additional vertebra, the centra of which go
to make up the latter moiety of the cavity for the “ ventricular dilatation”
of the myelon, and they show the double foramina on either side, one
above another, for the separate exit of the motor and sensory roots of
the sacral plexus.

A double row, é. e., one on either side of subcircular vacuities, exists
here also among the transverse processes (Plate XIII, Fig. 90, Tetrao
canadensis, 6). It is through this portion of the sacrum that we observe
in the chick the greatest amount of tardiness in sealing up of the neural
tube above by the superior union of the engaged neurapophyses.

The remaining eight vertebre become much compressed with ex-
panded processes that rarely allow apertures to remain among them,
forming an excellent mid-section to the broad and capacious pelvic
cavity, with nearly all signs of its original formation obliterated on the
outer and superior aspect. ’

The neural canal is distinetly circular as it enters the sacrum an-
teriorly, becoming only slightly flattened as it nears the coccyx.
Above we find the neural spine confluent with the ilia anteriorly
along its summit, and some additional bone deposited posteriorly in the
way of their lateral plates, to bridge over the ample “ ilio-neural”
canals. Opposite the “ gluteal ridges” the bones are yet firmly knit,
but for the remaining part of the sacro-iliac suture the interested bones
can be said only to snugly meet each other. Cupidonia alone has quite
an interspace present (Plate XII, Figs. 83 and 84).

The sacral wedge is quite thoroughly permeated by air, which enters
through foramina in the vertebre in localities similarly situated to
those described in speaking of the anterior part of the column.

In Centrocercus sometimes the first sacral vertebra bears a well-de-
veloped hypapophysis, and there may even be some evidence of this
process on the second segment. The expanded extremities of these
median processes are connected along their inferior margins by a deli-
cate ligament of a firmer consistence than that membrane, which fills in
the vacuities between the processes to which it is a limiting border.
Now, it depends how far this ligament is conducted backwards as to
how many of the anterior sacral vertebree bear hypapophyses, as from
its attachment to the hypapophysis (we have never seen it commence
on the cervicals, though the directions assumed by their processes bear
it out) of the first dorsal it completes a long shallow are of an ellipse,
in which the lower margins of the hypapophyses are found and assist
to complete. This semi-osseous, semi-membranous, attenuated median
plate dips down into the thoracic cavity in the living bird, for some
little distance, as an interpneumonic septum.

The number of free caudal vertebre in the adult Sage Cock is five,
and to these is to be added the pygostyle. They all have pretty much

No. 2.] SHUFELDT ON NORTH AMERICAN TETRAONIDA. 333

the same general appearance, differing principally in the length of their
outstanding transverse processes. In this respect the first and second
are about equal; in the third and fourth two or three millimetres are
added on either side, with a roughened tuberosity above; while the fifth
and last is in appearance and size very much like the first. These dia-
pophyses are rounded at their extremities, and all slightly deflected.

The centra are transversely elliptical and of good size. The neura-
- pophyses arise from them to inclose a subcircular neural canal, which is
roofed over by the bifid and clubbed terminations of the elements, that
hook or lean forward (Plate IX, Fig. 66; Plate XIII, Fig. 91). We
have never observed an hypapophysis upon any of them; and all the
elements and processes, as always occurs in the coccygeal series, are
more or less imperfectly developed.

The pygostyle is an acute subcompressed triangle with tuberous base.
Anteriorly and above it exhibits a bifureated process that simulates the
crests of the series; below this a shallow facet, for articulation with the
last caudal, and a feeble subconical depression to protect the termina-
tion of the myelon between the two. Behind it has, at its lower angle,
a deep groove, with a heavy bony rim or margin that shows a constric-
tion near its middle (Plate IX, Fig. 65). This formation is easily ex-
plained when we come to examine the development of this compound
appendage in the chick of aday or so old. This will reveal the fact
that the pygostyle is composed of three vertebra, that are fused to-
gether, distorted and modified as the bird grows, so as to eventually
result in the bone we have before us.

There is nothing more interesting to the student of comparative anat-
omy than to study the serial skeletons of birds of divers ages, demon-
strating and elucidating such a point as this, that could not be brought
to light in any other way.

We will now offer a few remarks upon: the vertebral column, as ap-
plied to others of the North American Tetraonide.

Of all the specimens examined, representing all the genera, the num-
ber of distinctly free vertebrae between the skull and the anchylosed dor-
sals has been found to be invariably fifteen, the last one supporting
movably-articnlated pleurapophyses, that in Lagopus, at least, possess
small epi-pleural appendages. This portion of the spinal column, then,
will constitute the cervical division, and in it we note that the third
and fourth segments have interzygopophysial bars present, becoming
so broad in the quails that the foramina they give rise to are sometimes
very minute.

The pleurapophyses become long and sharp in some and more con-
Spicuous than in others; this applies particularly to Cupidonia and Pe-
diwcetes. The last cervical in the former has osseous spicule leading
backwards from its neural spine and postzygapophyses, as in the anterior
dorsals. In the same vertebrz the hypapophyses become confluent to

334 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL

form one broad process placed transversely with a mesial keel in front
as the only indication of its original device.

The carotid canal seems to commence and terminate in the same ver-
tebre both in Tetraonine and Odontophorine.

Of the eminently characteristic dorsal bone little has to be said in
addition to what has already been noted above. The number of vertebrze
included in the anchylosis is never more nor less than four, and the
first vertebral ribs have no hemapophyses; so they never connect with
the sternum, though they invariably bear uncinate processes, and in many
species contribute a good share toward the stability of the thoracic
parietes. The metupopbysial processes vary principally in their ex-
tent: in Bonasa, Cupidonia, and Pediecetes. In several specimens they
nearly cover the tops of the diapophysial arms. In Lagopus a narrow
bar defines them, connecting the extremities of the transverse processes
with comparatively few offshoots. In Tetrao canadensis the bone is very
long and delicate. In T. obscurus it has the same general appearance as
in Centrocercus. The hypapophyses develop after the common type, but
often irregularly; they are found to be missing on the ultimate segment
or rather the pelvic end of the bone in the Quails.

The free and last dorsal may or may not have a hypapophysis; we be-
lieve it never does in the Odontophorine. It is overlapped by the iliain
Cupidonia and the Sharp-tailed Grouse. We find this to be avery marked
feature in the last, and well marked among some of these birds sent me
by Capt. James C. Merrill, Medical Department United States Army,
from Fort Custer, Mont., at a time they were particularly acceptable, and
when this erratic fowl became suddenly and unusually rare in many
localities, so that the gift was reckoned at the time as more than val-
uable desiderata. As far as the sacral vertebre are concerned, the same
general plan seems to be carried out: sixteen seems to be the allotted
number among the Grouse and, as a rule, among the Partridges. In
these birds the sacrum, 7. e., the anchylosed sacral vertebrze, is much
narrower, as is the entire pelvis, and much fewer perforations are to be
seen among the dilated processes that go to meet the ossa innominata.

In Cupidonia and Pediecetes the sacrum is very broad, conforming to
a pelvis in these birds that will be described further on. We find in a
specimen of Tetrao canadensis, for which we are greatly indebted to Mr.
Manly Hardy, of Brewer, Me., where the sacro-iliac anchylosis is so per-
fect, and original land-marks so obscure, that one might easily imagine
the pelvis in this individual as being developed from a very much fewer
number of ossific centres. The caudal vertebre number jive in all the
Grouse except Cupidonia and Pediccetes, these birds each having dis-
tinctly sixapiece. Wewould especially call the reader’s attention to this
fact, because when we come to discuss the pelves of these two birds, and.
recapitulate general skeletal data, it will be found that, as far as osteo-
logical simularities are concerned, they come very near to each other.
The coccygeal vertebra, otherwise, in common with the pygostyle, show

No. 2.] -SHUFELDT ON NORTH AMERICAN TETRAONIDZ. | 835

very few differences worthy of record. In Ortyx and Lophortyx there
are but four caudal vertebre and the vomer is markedly acute and long.
Occasionally the last segment is but feebly developed, as in Lagopus,
where it may be a mere nodule; and in Bonasa, too, sometimes a sixth
vertebra can be found, but usually requires force to detach it from the
pygostyle, and in our specimens seems to be one of those that originally
formed that bone—though we do not deny in the face of such evidence
that specimens of the Ruffed Grouse may be found that possess six of
these vertebrae.

Of the Scapular Arch and the pectoral limb.—This arch, with its con-
comitant, could have, with all propriety, been described in connection
with its vertebra, but so distinct has it become. and so far removed in
order to assist in carrying out such a notorious function as the bird’s
flight, that the author prefers to follow the general ruling of others by
discussing it separately. Nothing could be more entertaining in the
whole range of osteological research and study than the contemplation
of the various aviap shoulder girdles with their attached wing bones,
particularly the former, as exemplifying the law of equilibrium between
a bird’s habits, the never-varying part it is to play in nature, and its ©
skeleton or the framework that has been given it to carry that part out.
This thought invariably enforces itself upon me in every instance after
an examination of a collection of clavicles of different species of birds.
It seems that there could not be an equipoise established anywhere in
living nature more thoroughly compensatory than that ’twixt a bird’s
power and mode of flight, and its scapular arch and other bones about
the chest—to meet it, more essentially the clavicies. See the broad, ex-
cessively pneumatic, yet robust, clavicular arch in any of the genus Ca-
thartes, birds that sail aloft for hours apparently without fatigue, or the
very simularly shaped arch in the Canada Goose, but in the latter for
a very opposite style of sustained flight is non-pneumatic; the feeble
and often ununited arch in Spheotyto, a bird with scarcely any preten-
tions to being a good flyer at all ; in short one would, having a thorough
knowledge of a bird’s habits, be, in the vast majority of instances, able
to guess very near as to the pattern of the furculum he would expect to
find.

Now we have seen, in reviewing the skeletons of the Grouse, that in
many points some of the species, if we disregard size, simulate each
other very closely, as for instance in the various sterni and vertebrie.
The clavicles of these birds form no exception to this rule, as far as
general appearance goes. The common model is seen in Plate XII, Fig.
87, Cupidonia; but observe even here in these closely-related fowls how
habit still tells upon skeletal characteristics. The broad, and not deep,
pneumatic U-arch of Cathartes becomes the long non-pneumatic, almost
acute, V-arch of the birds we are describing; so, in view of being
familiar with the habits of the Sharp-tailed Grouse and Sage Cock,
need one be surprised to find in the fourchette of the first a depth of 4

336 ° BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL

centimetres (omitting the inferior clavicular expansion), with an inter-
space of 2.5 centimetres separating the superior articulating extremi-
ties, as compared with the bone in the second, where the depth is 6.2
centimetres, and the interspace above only 1.7 pees,

The bones of this arch are easily taken apart by maceration, and as
has already been hinted they resemble each other very closely among
the genera. The posterior angle between scapula and coracoid averages
for the species about 60°, and among the Grouse the distal end of the
shoulder-blade is usually found to overhang the fourth dorsal pleura-
pophysis on either side; but in the California Quail these bones actually
extend so far back as to overshadow the ilia for nearly a centimetre,
they being proportionately narrow for their unusual length. This bone
with the Grouse is only semi-pneumatic, its pneumaticity being confined
to its coracoidal extremity, where the foramen is found in its usual site.

The blade is thin behind, becoming stouter as it nears the glenoid
cavity, sharp along its inner border, rounded without, clubbed at its
pelvic end, and turned gently outwards along its entire length. Ante-
riorly it contributes about one-third of the surface for the humeral joint,
the coracoid the remaining two-thirds, while the acromial process with-
in reaches forward barely to touch the clavicle, forming, as it does so, the
usual interscapulo-coracoidal canal.

These bones are narrow in Bonasa and in T. canadensis, more curved in
Lagopus, and very stout in Centrocercus, a good medium being seen in
the Pinnated Grouse (Plate XII, Fig. 85).

The coracoids are quite stout bones, but devoid of any marked
peculiarities; after leaving their sternal beds they extend upwards,
forwards, and outwards, the furculum governing their distance apart
at their upper ends. The glenoidal process is extensive, and rises
nearly as high as the head of the bone; the clavicular process is faintly
bifurcated, and curls over slightly towards the fellow of the opposite
side. The shafts are compressed from before backwards, and soon
dilate into broad expansions below; anteriorly one longitudinal muscular
ridge marks the surface of the bone, while on the sternal aspect two or
three very distinct ones occur. The inner angle of the dilated base
nearly meets its fellow of the opposite side through the foramen, at the
root of the manubrial process; from this corner outwards, for about
two-thirds of the distance the surface is devoted to a curved articulating
facet for the coracoidal groove, while the outer angle is tilted upwards
and finished off by a distinctive little tubercle. On its posterior aspect,
about the middle of the dilated part, a large, irregular pneumatic fora-
men is found in all the Grouse, but seems to be absent in the Partridges.

The position of the united clavicles, or the free acromial extensions of
the scapule, is shown for Lagopus in my drawing in Fig. 91. Something
has been said about this bone already; we will add, however, that the
superior ends always terminate by rather tuberous enlargements, smooth
internally, but uneven as applied to the clavicular processes of the

No. 2.] SHUFELDT ON NORTH AMERICAN TETRAONIDZ. 337

coracoids. The shafts are gently curved, of even calibre, and fall nearly
directly downwards in some species, to be slightly expanded beneath in
order to give better support for the large median dilatation below; this
is triangular in outline, thickened in front, sharpened behind. In Ortyx
this process is sometimes produced backwards, so as to nearly touch the
sternum; this feature obtains, also, among some of the other Quails.

These bones are all well advanced in ossification in the young chick,
but do not develop their distinctive markings until a bird is pretty
well along in age; this applies more particularly to muscular lines on
the shafts, the base of the coracoids, and the clubbed extremities of the
scapule. In Bonasa, where we noticed how the body of the sternum
was narrow like the Quails, we find also the median process of the united
clavicles produced backwards towards that bone. This Grouse’s skeleton,
in fact, seems to have the greatest tendency Partridge-ward over any
other of the North American Tetraonine.

The free ossicle of the shoulder-joint, the os humero-scapulare, is not
present in any of these birds; a firm piece of inelastic cartilage seems
to supersede it and fulfill a like function.

The humerus (Plate VII, Fig. 57, H—Figs. 60, 61; also Plate X, Figs.
76, 77 of Cupidonia) of Centrocercus is so exceedingly regular that it
could be well chosen as the type of that bone in all birds in which it is
pneumatic. It is in due proportion for the size of the bird to which it
belongs, possessing the usual sigmoidal curves from lateral and superior
aspects (we describe the bone in sitw in the closed wing) in graceful, though
not decided, prominence. ‘The head or proximal extremity, slightly bent
anconad, displays the most usual points for examination about it; an
extensive convex, smooth surface is seen for the glenoidal cavity, below
it a deep notch, then the well-defined ‘“‘ uinar crest” or lesser tuberosity
curling over a large sub-elliptical pneumatic foramen, that is so patu-
lous that the osseous trabecule and net-work are plainly seen at its base.
The radial crest encroaches but very little upon the shaft, is quite stout,
and only at its summit shows any disposition to curve over palmad.

The shaft is smooth, markedly elliptical on section throughout its ex-
tent, and almost entirely devoid of any muscular markings or lines; it
swells gently in the vertical plane as it approaches the distal end of the
bone, upon which is placed the ordinary tubercles for articulation with
radius and ulna. The inferior condyle, the internal of human anatomy,
is the better developed of the two, and the ulnar tubercle is produced a
little beyond the bone distally, while the oblique tubercle is brought
down on the shaft. The olecranon fossa is rather shallow in the Grouse,
being decidedly better shown among the Quails. There are no promi-
nent points of difference in this bone among the Tetraoninw, except in
regard to size; Cupidonia, which has rather a heavy skeleton any way,
the humerus is moderately robust in accordance.

In Odontophorine the same characteristics are to be seeu; but we dis-
cover in addition at the proximal extremity of the bone, on its anconal

22 GB

338 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL

aspect between the greater and lesser tuberosities, a deep fossa that has
a great resemblance to the pneumatic orifice externally, and of about
the same dimensions, being only separated from that depression by a
thin bony wall; it seems to be designed simply for muscular insertion,
and has no communication with the general cavity of the hollow hu-
meral shaft.

The radius and ulna are also singularly typical in their avian charac-
teristics, as might have been looked for after our remarks upon the bone
of the brachium; their principal difference lies in their being non-pneu-
matic, although they are hollow like all long bones.

In the right arm of Lagopus leucurus, which we have before us, care-
fully dried, in its position of rest, with all the ligaments still attached,
in situ, we find the radius to be unusually straight, in fact almost in
line between the oblique tubercle of the humerus and the bone it meets
in the carpus. Its shaft is nearly cylindrical, and shows a muscular
line, upon an otherwise smooth surface, that travels along its proximal
two-thirds beneath. Distally it overlaps the cubit by a transversely
dilated extremity to articulate with its carpal bone. The head of the
ulna is large, and betrays the fact that it belongs to a bird of considera-
ble power of flight ; the olecranon process is a blunt, tuberous apophysis,
slightly bent anconad; the greater and lesser sigmoidal cavities are dis-
tinct and fairly marked, particularly the former.

The shaft of the bone is more than twice the bulk of that of its com-
panion, decidedly convex outwards, the curve being greatest at the
junction of the proximal and middle thirds; it is elliptical on section,
the major axis of the ellipse being vertical. The muscular lines of the
ulna are but faintly developed, as are the row of minute tubercles for
the bases of the quills of the secondaries.

Anteriorly the bone displays its usual trochlea head for its own carpal
segment; this surface is bounded palmad by a sharp and even curve,
convex distally, while the inner articulating surface beneath the ex-
panded end of the radius is uneven and- applied to the concavities and
convexities of the free pair of carpal elements.

These bones among the Partridges and other Grouse, except in size,
present tous no extraordinary departures from the description just
given of Lagopus.

We do not believe there is a bird in our country that can offer us better
facilities for the study of the bones of the carpus than the young of
Centrocercus urophasianus. Anchylosis of the various segments involved
is exceedingly tardy, and itis not at all necessary for the student of
this joint, that has puzzled so many comparative anatomists and orni-—
thotomists, to seek the primoidal ossicles in the very young chick, unless
he desires to ascertain the points as regards priority of ossification of
the carpal bones, a question we will evade here entirely, for these bones
are quite distinct and easily detached in the bird at six weeks or more
of age, such as we offer our reader in the plates.

No. 2.] SHUFELDT ON NORTH AMERICAN TETRAONIDZ. do”

In the old and mature Sage Cock, the carpus has the appearance of
this joint, as itis seen in nearly all of the class where there are two free
carpal bones, and the os magnum confluent with the proximal ex-
tremity of the metacarpus, and the mode of articulation is the same.
This we know to be, first, a free, six-sided, uneven bone, the scaphoid,
articulating chiefly with the distal extremity of the radius and the
metacarpus. This is the scapho-lunar of my former papers, and we retain
the application here; it is also the radiale of Prof. Edward S. Morse,
who has made such positive advances in the elucidation of the tarsus
and carpus in birds.

The second bone is the cuneiform, larger than the first, and engaged
principally by the cubit, but having also a process and an articulating
surface for the confluent carpal and metacarpals; this is the ulnare of
Morse.

These are the two carpals that remain free during life.

We will now devote ourselves to the joint as observed in the bird at
_ Six weeks of age. We have no trouble in finding scapho-lunar and cunei-
form whatever. At the summit of the second metacarpal there is found
a concavo-convex segment, that is universally taken to be the os mag-
num, termed also carpale by Morse (Plate VII, Fig. 59, om). It articn-
lates anteriorly with the upper end of the index metacarpal, covers the
entire proximal extremity of the second, and nearly or quite meets
another bone behind that is grasped by cuneiform ; this is the unciform
(Plate VII, Figs. 57 and 59, z). It has the appearance of being a detached
and bulbous extension of the third metacarpal, and is about the size and
shape of an ordinary grain of rice, having a shallow concavity on its
anconal aspect.

There is yet one perfectly free and distinct bone to be observed ; it is
found on the inner aspect, very near the extremity of second metacar-
pal, just below os magnum; it nearly meets unciform, and articulates
with the process of cuneiform behind. This little segment is flat and
very nearly circular, being applied by one ofits surfaces against the shaft
of the metacarpal, and held in position by ligaments. This segment we
do not find described by any author known to us, and here call it the
pisiform. The manner in which it eventually joins the metacarpus and
the conformation it gives to that bone in the adult are shown in Plate
VII, Fig. 58, and itis marked 8 in Fig. 59 of the young Sage Cock.
The metacarpal for the index digit is likewise detached, although even
at this early date it begins to assume a likeness to the bone as found in
the adult.

Medius and annularis metacarpals are also distinctly free, and their
_ size and position faithfully portrayed in the figure alluded to above.
The prominent process on the rear and upper third of the shaft of me-
dius of the adult is now found only in cartilage in the younger indi-
vidual. The rest of the bony part of the pinion is familiar to all of us;
it consists, in the adult ‘ Cock of the Plains,” as in all Grouse and the

340 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL

Odontophorine, of a trihedral phalanx for the first metacarpal, constitut-
ing the index ; two more for the medius metacarpal, the superior joint
or phalanx having the usual expanded blade, with the long free and
pointed finger-bone below; and finally the smallest phalanx of all, freely
attached to the distal end of the third metacarpal or annularis.

These bones are non-pneumatic, as are all the bones beyond the
brachium in the Tetraonide.

Of the Pelvis and the Pelvic limb.—After what we have said and seen
in regard to the dilatory manner in which originally primitive elements,
in these birds anchylose, and only after the lapse of weeks condescend to
amalgamate and form the confluent bones and cavities that occur in the
major division of the Class, we must not be surprised to find the same
routine and a like tardiness exhibited in the pelvic hemal arch, or the
pelvis, and its appendage the lower extremity.

A glance at the figures illustrating the condition of the bones in ques-
tion, of birds from one to two months old, will convince us at once that
the rule still obtains; in them we find the sutures among the ossa in-
nominata still ununited, and the three bones of either side of the pelvis
independent, and easily detached from each other about the cotyloid
ring.

In the young chick of Centrocercus (Plate VIII, Fig. 62), the ilium
is a scale-like bone that rests against the sacral vertebre. The pre-
acetabular portion is excessively thin and delicate, and at this period
constitutes the longest and widest part of the bone; its border mesiad
bears no vertebral impressions, but is sharp and brittle; the outer margin
is slightly rounded; this condition increasing as we near the diminutive
acetabulum, where it is the stoutest. The distal margin, imperceptibly
continuous with the inner presents a convex curve anteriorly; the in-
eluded surface viewed from above has a general concave aspect, espe-
cially near its central portion. As we proceed backwards, however, it
gradually becomes convex, to rise over the region opposite the cotyloid
ring to form the general convex surface of the post-acetabular portion.

The distal margin of the bone is nearly square across, and does not
extend as far back as the ischium, the two being bound together at this
age by cartilage, which has been removed in the plate. The outer and
anterior margin of this division of the bone is rounded and fashioned
to the cotyle, the anterior half of which it eventually forms. From this
point it arches backwards over the future ischiatic foramen. The inner
margin of the post-acetabular portion is rather more rounded than its
anterior extension, and directly opposite the “ring” presents for exami-
nation the depressions of the transverse processes of the ninth and —
tenth sacral vertebre in elongated and concave facettes. The ninth
vertebra met the ilia first; so we may consider the ilia as the pleura-
pophyses of the ninth sacral vertebra, and the ischia and pubic ele-
ments as the hemapophyses and divided hzmal spine, respectively, as
associate parts of the same arch, which arch has been exaggerated to

No. 2.] SHUFELDT ON NORTH AMERICAN TETRAONIDZ. 341

meet a certain requisite need, the bony dorsal vault to shield the gen-
erative and urinary apparatuses and bear the pelvic limbs. This arch
is so inclined that the remaining vertebre soon, by their outgrowing
apophyses, come in contact with it, ultimately fusing to develop the
compound bone, usually termed sacrum. A good idea may be gained
of the form of the ischium and os pubis by an inspection of Fig. 62,
Plate VIII, at this stage of the bird’s existence. For very obvious
reasons the stoutest part of the ischiatic element surrounds the acetab-
ulum; an inferior process, extending towards a similar one directed
backwards by the ilium, grasps the head of the os pubis between them.
From this point the ischium sends backwards a triangular thin plate,
rounded behind, that is intermediate in length between ilium and
pubis. This latter is satisfied to follow suit and direction by contribut-
ing a simple and diminutive spine. This crosses soon after the pubis
has given its share to the cotylis, the obduratic notch of the ischium,
converting, as the bones fuse, it into the obdurator foramen.

We give an additional figure in the Plate, 63, that exhibits the further
advances of these elements towards maturity. The bird is now nearly
two months old, and it will be seen that one after another the vertebre
impinge upon the iliac margins within. The ilia and ischia extend be-
hind, including vertebra after vertebra, from a series that at this age
might be easily taken for an extraordinary number of coccygeal seg-
ments. The head of the pubis at this time is entirely out of proportion
with its rib-like extension, it having so spread and insinuated itself into
the formation of the cotyloid ring as to form abougs one-fifth of its cir-
cumference. At this stage, too, the necessary cartilage begins to be
thrown out to form the future anti-trochanter on the ilium.

So much for pelvic development; now let us examine this bony basin
as it is seen in the full-grown representatives of the genera.

The manner in which the confluent sacral vertebre meet the ossa in-
nominata forming the ilio-neural canals and sacral sutures has already
been defined above, so that here nothing more need be said of the mid-
section of the pelvis taken as a whole. We give among the plates fig-
ures of the pelves of Centrocercus, Tetrao canadensis, Lagopus, and Cu-
pidonia from the skeletons of the adult birds, and if the reader will
compare the lateral views given of the Ptarmigan and the Sage Cock
he will see how few the differences are that exist between the two birds,
and the same may be said, we assure you, for its superior and inferior
views; in fact in the case of Lagopus it may be stated that its pelvis in
most instances is the perfect miniature of this bone found in Centrocereus
in all respects. This applies, also, though not quite as strictly, to
Tetrao and Bonasa. Of course certain minor differences are easily to
be picked out, such as a greater fulness there, as slightly deeper depres-
sion here, and so on; still our plate of Zetrao canadensis represents the
general pattern of the pelvis among all the North American Grouse, save
Pediecetes and Cupidonia. Inthe superior aspect of this confluent bone

342 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL

in a fine specimen of Tetrao obscurus, we find the pre-acetabular por-
tions of the ilia very much depressed below the general surface of the
bone, and quite concave. The convex anterior borders are embellished
with a flattened rim that bounds them, often produced forwards as two
median sharp-pointed processes. The post-acetabular surface is raised,
and including the sacrum forms a gently convex surface; the “ gluteal
ridges” dividing these two regions commence with the anterior iliac
borders and are conveyed clear round to form the posterior ones of the
same bones, describing two great Ss, the lower and outer curves of
which pass by the acetabular projections, points where in some birds
_ they terminate.

Among the principal features to be noted in a lateral view is that the
shaft of the pubis is in nearly all instances free from the ischium after
quitting the cotylis and forming the elliptical obdurator foramen. If it
anchyloses with this bone at all it usually occurs just behind that orifice.

The ischium overlaps the pubis at two points—one quite broadly near
its middle, and, again, by a process at its outer and inferior angle.

The “‘ischiatic foramen” is the largest vacuity of the group of three
that here present themselves; its boundary is sub-elliptical, with its
major axis depressed posteriorly if it were produced.

The cotyloid cavity, or ring rather, is markedly circular, both its in-
ternal and external margins, the former of which is not a little smaller,
thus affording a very good and quite extensive surface for the head of —
the femur; the anti-trochanterian process or facet directed backwards
1s likewise ample, so that the femora are well supplied with articulating
surfaces.

There seems to be among the Grouse a predisposition for the ilia to
overhang the region of the ischiadic foramina; it is most successfully
carried out in Cupidonia. Viewed from below, we are struck with the
amount of room and space these combined bones inclose ; the profundity
of the pelvic basin. This is very much enhanced by broad reduplicatures
of the ilia and ischia behind, and a general though even constriction of
a prominent rounded border or rather ridge that extends from the fourth
diapophysial abutment of the vertebra against the ilia on either side to
the outer angles of the ischia. Within, too, we often find about and at the
base of these iliac fosse apertures for the entrance of air into these bones;
such pneumatic foramina are also seen beyond the os pubis and below
the cotylis on either aspect.

The pubic extremities never meet behind, though in many species they
are very long and usually take the curve given them by the ischia just
before leaving these bones. Their distal extremities are flattened in Cen-
trocercus and generally more expanded than among the other varieties.

The pelvis of Cupidonia is so different from the general description
we have just given that the author felt justified in giving to his reader
two additional figures that present superior and lateral views of the bone
in that bird; in comparing it with other figures given one cannot avoid

No. 2.] SHUFELDT ON NORTH AMERICAN TETRAONIDZ. 343

being struck with these marked departures from the common type.
There is one other Grouse that affects this style of pelvis, and that is
Pediccetes, and the attempt is not a bad one. The principal points
wherein the Sharp-tailed Grouse has failed to make a perfect imitation
of the unique pelvis of his ideal are, the ilia have failed to produce such
ponderous overhanging lateral flaps, that nearly shut out from view the
ischiadic foramen on either side. Again, these bones in Pediacetes meet
the sacral vertebre for their entire length internally; and in this bird,
too, the pubic elements often unite all along the inferior borders of the
ischia. This does not occur in the Pinnated Grouse; otherwise the bones
are very similar and marked exceptions to the general pattern of the
other members of this subfamily.

After examining a large number of the pelves of our Grouse, and
noting their capacious cavities and great width from side tq side, one
cannot help but be surprised at the great change in outline, on turning
to these bones as they are found among the Partridges.

As a rule in these birds, the pelvis is elongated and unusually narrow,
though the drooping ischia behind give it additional depth in its more
posterior parts; the pubic bones are turned up behind after they extend
beyond the elements above them, and the lateral walls formed by the
ilia are, just beyond the acetabula, almost vertical; in fact, one would
almost suspect the pelvis of the common Virginia Partridge as belong-
ing to the skeleton of some variety of Curlew, had he not been sure of
the owner. This apparent departure from the more general model of
this bone in Gallinaceous Fowls, however, is not nearly so decided in
other varieties of the Odontophorine, as for instance in Lophortyx cali-
fornicus, and a very good drawing of the pelvis of this bird can be seen
and studied, in Mr. T. C. Eyton’s Osteologia Avium, London, 1867, Plate
22, figs. 1, 1, 1, 1; three of the figures here cited, however, are for the
palatine bones, inferior view of sternum, and anterior and posterior
views of the tarso-metatarsus. We have carefully compared the diam-
eters of these representations with the skeletons of the species in qucs-
tion, and find them quite accurate.

The femur in the young chick of Centrocercus is less than demi-de-
veloped; above, the head is almost entirely cartilage, while below the
condyles are very indistinct and the bone bears no signs of pneuma-
ticity. In a few weeks, however, these points rapidly exhibit them-
selves: a rounded trochanterian ridge is thrown out; the head essays to
assume its sphericity; the condyles become evident; the fibular groove
appearing last of all and about the same time with the vascular foramen
or medullary orifice at junction of upper and middle thirds. Regarding
this bone in a fine old ¢ from Cupidonia, and comparing it with others,
we find that it is remarkably well balanced in point of length and gen-
eral development.

The trochanterian ridge is markedly prominent and arches over the
articular facet for the ilium; the neck is distinct and makes an angle

344 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

of 45° with the shaft; the head is well formed, spherical, and in all
Grouse seems to bear a double depression for the ligamentum teres.
Anteriorly below the trochanterian eminence there is an extensive collec-
tion of pneumatic foramina. The “trochanter minor” never develops.

The shaft is smooth, bent slightly forwards; displays the usual mus-
cular lines and the medullary orifice; it is nearly cylindrical on section
about its middle, and before terminal expansion takes place. Below,
the rotular channel is very evident, separating the prominent condyles;
of these the external and lower one presents the usual fibular fissure;
behind, the popliteal depression is well sunken, one of the muscular
lines running into it, and often a foramen is found at its base. Slight
fosse are found laterally at the outer surfaces of the condylar enlarge-
ments, and sometimes a notch where shaft meets the internal one ante-
riorly. The bone is usually slenderer in Bonasa, Pedicecetes, and Tetrao
canadensis.

Among the Odontophorine the femur has the same general character-
istics; it is, however, non-pneumatic, the double pit for the ligamentum
teres is better marked, and the muscular lines are scarcely perceptible.

The patella is never absent in the Tetraonide, and occupies its usual
position as a free bonelet protecting the anterior aspect of the knee-joint.
It accommodates itself to the conformation of the rotular channel, hav-
ing a flattened surface superiorly, a rounded border below, and a double
surface behind, the most extensive aspect of which is applied to the side
towards the internal condyle.

The proximal extremity of tibia in the young chick of Centrocercus has
advanced so little toward assuming any of the definite characteristics
of the full-grown bird, that, almost in self-defense, we take up for exam-
ination the bone from a skeleton of a bird of the same species several
weeks older; here we discover the superior general condylar surface
still capped with cartilage, and the borders confining it, as yet, but
feebly produced. The most interesting point, by far, is the appearance
of an unusually large epiphysis, if it may be so termed, fashioned to
and resting upon the future location of the “rotular crest.”

Why this bone should be here added we cannot, as far as our knowl-
edge extends, exactly comprehend, for in the old and mature birds of
any of the Grouse the epi-cnemial crest is never very prominently pro-
duced, nor is itin any of their near kin. As age advances this seg-
ment becomes thoroughly confluent with the tibia, and leaves no trace of
its early existence.

The head of the bone in the adult Sage Cock is a very substantial
affair, with pro-and ecto-conemial ridges, that soon merge into the shaft,
well produced; the latter ridge is usually dilated on its anterior as-
pect, and the rather extensive concavity between them is direetly con-
tinuous with the shaft below.

The tibia never becomes pneumatic either in the Grouse or Quails,
and in the former sections of its shaft are universally transversely

No. 2.] SHUFELDT ON NORTH AMERICAN TETRAONIDZ. 345

oval; the fibular ridge of the upper and outer third of this portion of
the bone in Centrocercus is about 2 centimetres long, and appears to be
little more than a raised and roughened line, the merest apology for an
invitation to its delicate companion, the fibula, to ever form a lasting
and inseparable bond of union with it, a contract which this free and
independent little bone has never entered into, in any of the Grouse or
the Odontophorine, notwithstanding the fact that they are destined to
be the closest of associates their whole life through. Below the fibular
ridge we find the nutrient foramen, but otherwise the tibial shaft is very
straight and almost entirely devoid of any markings, at least to that point
anteriorly, where the ascending groove coming from between the con-
dyles impresses it, and that, with an increasing intensity to its termi-
nation over the intercondyloid notch; at this point a bony bridge is
thrown across obliquely, the outer abutment of which is the lower (Plate
IX. Fig. 69).

The most engaging points of interest so far as the tibia is concerned,
(as many a young Grouse that long since has yielded up his life to the
cause of ornithotomy can testify to) centre about the distal extremity of
the bone. After careful examinations of the recently-killed subjects,
dried skeletons, and carmine-stained specimens, the following results
seem to be presented with greater or less distinctness in every case,
and these results correspond very nearly with Professor Morse’s invalu-
able investigations and studies: In the young of Centrocercus, several
days after leaving the nest, we observe at the future site of the tibial
condyles, encased in the then articular cartilage, on either side, a free
reniform ossicle. These ossify to the surface in time, and the outer
becomes the jibulare, the inner the tibiale; both are tarsal bones. It
will take time and further research to decide definitely as to which is
the os calcis, and which the astragalus. Above the former, and a little
towards a mid-shaft position, there is yet another free ossicle; it is the
intermedium of Morse. That itis another tarsal bone there can be no
doubt, we believe, at this date; but before we decide upon its special
homology we must satisfy ourselves by further research and dissection
of the young at various stages of development in birds and other ver-
tebrates where this bone constitutes a feature of the skeleton.

It soon fuses with the tibiale, and the latter with the fibulare, so that
the faintest traces are alone discernible in the bird at two months of
age (Plate IX, Fig. 67, KE’), at which stage the subsequent bony span for
tendinous confinement above them has not commenced to ossify.

In the adult the apex of the intermedium affords attachment to the
oblique ligament that is attached higher up on the inner aspect of the
shaft, that also holds some of the extensor tendons in position. The
condyles in mature birds have an antero-posterior position at the
extremity of the tibia; these are of a uniform outline, and the inter-con-
dyloid notch that separates them can boast of no particular depth until
it arrives on the anterior aspect of the bone. Externally and laterally

346 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VI.

almost within the limits of the outline of the outer condyle we find two
tubercles, one above another; the lower is for ligamentous attachment,
the upper is the remnant and only existing evidence of the lower extrem-
ity of the fibula. A similar tubercle is found on the opposite side cor-
responding to the lower one just described on the outer aspect.

The fibula is freely detached and never completely anchyloses with
the tibia. Its proximal extremity is clubbed, enlarging very much as it
rises above the condylar surface of its companion from the fibular ridge;
it is laterally compressed and convex above at the summit. In many
Grouse the attenuated remains of its extension below can be traced on
the shaft of the tibia, which bone has nearly absorbed this third of its
weaker associate.

In my papers upon the osteology of Spheotyto and Hremophila the old
term of the “caleaneal” process was still retained for that prominent
projection found at the superior and hinder end of the bone tarso-meta-
tarsus. The older comparative anatomists gave it this name, probably,
in view of the fact that this apophysis might eventually be proved to be
the os calcis, but such advances have been instituted in the study of the
avian tarsus, that we may say that this process is not in any way enti-
tled to the term; it does not even come in contact with the primoidal
element of that tarsal segment, so this appellation will here be aban-
doned, and as far as we are concerned such an error will receive no fur-
ther encouragement in the way of ornithotomical recordation.

In the early life of the chick of the Grouse we have been discussing,
the combined tarsals are surmounted by a third plate of cartilage, that
subsequently ossifies, apparently by one centre. The bone thus formed,
the centrale, we believe undoubtedly to represent either a single tarsal
element or the connate bones of the second row.

At this age the metatarsals that combine to form the shaft of the
tarso-metatarsus are still easily individualized, though well on the road
toward permanent fusion. It will be observed that we still retain the
term tarso-metatarsus, and we think justly so, as the compound bone of
the mature bird has combined with it at least one of the tarsal bones.
The tibia could with equal reason be termed the tibio-tarsus, and again
the compound bone in manus, the carpo-metacarpus, but for obvious
reasons such innovations are not always advisable.

We discover in Cenirocercus and Tetrao canadensis—in that strong
inelastic cartilage that is found at the back of the tarsal joint in all the
Grouse, on the inner side—a concavo-convex free bone, nearly a centi-
metre long, in the Sage Cock, and two or three millimetres wide; this
ossicle must be regarded only as a sesamoid, though it is nearly as large
as the patella, and in no way as constituting one of the tarsal bones.

The posterior process, or the tendinous process (the “‘caleaneal” of the
older authors), at the head of the combined metatarsals, is both verti-
cally grooved and perforated for the passage of tendons ; from its inner
and posterior angle in many of the Tetraonine it sends down a thin plate

No.2.) _ SHUFELDT ON NORTH AMERICAN TETRAONIDA. 347

of bone that usually meets the shaft at junction of upper and middle
thirds, occasionally running further down to become confluent with it in
every instance; this feature is rarely present in the Quails. In Centro-
cercus and others the hinder aspect of the tarso-metatarsus is sharply
marked by muscular ridges. The superior and articulating surface of
this bone displays eminences and depressions fashioned to accommodate
themselves to the condyles of the tibia; a tuberosity on the anterior mar-
gin in the articulated skeleton fits into the intercondyloid notch of the
bone. Below this the shaft in front is scooped out, having at the base
of the depression two small elliptical foramina, side by side, and to the
inner side of its boundaries one or two pointed muscular tubercles. The
distal and transversely expanded end of the bone presents the foramen
for the anterior tibial artery, occupying its usual place, and the three
trochlear apophyses for the toes, the middle one being the largest and on
the lowest level. The two lateral ones, separated by wide notches from
the former, are thrown but a limited distance to the rear, so that the
concavity behind them is not peculiar for any great amount of depth.

The os metatarsale accessorium is situated rather high upon the shaft,
and bears more than an ordinary semblance to a demi-phalanx, with its
distal articular trochlea. As usual it is freely attached by ligaments.

The internodes are based upon the more common plan as applied to the
avian foot; ¢. ¢., in the order of the phalanges, from the first to the
fourth, 2, 3, 4, 5 joints, and of such a pattern they are markedly typical,
and justly equipoised for the size of the bird.

They possess the usual enlarged and bi-concave proximal extremities,
with the distal and convex bi-trochlear ends, with a more or iess subeylin-
drical shaft; the ungual joints being but moderately curved downwards.

There are but few or no striking differences to be noted as existing
among the lower extremities of our Tetraonide.

The bones are very delicately fashioned in Tetrao canadensis and the
Sharp-tailed Grouse; that is, the calibres of their shafts seem to be less
as compared with their general lengths, but they belong, we must remem-
ber, to very trim little game birds, as contrasted with our heavy and
ponderous old Sage Grouse of the western prairies. Our specimens of
Lagopus and Tetrao obscurus do not show the bony extension from the
tendinous process at the back of the tarso-metatarsus, apparently present
in all the others and alluded to above—Centrocercus sometimes proving
an exception—and this bone never normally develops a spur in any of
our North American Grouse, as seen in birds of near kin.

Tendons of the anti-brachium and pinion are very prone to ossify, and
one is quite constant on the anterior aspect of the metacarpus. This
applies with still greater force to the lower limb, where it seems that
every tendinous extension of the muscles of thigh and leg become bone
for their entire lengths, then forking sometimes over the fore part of
tarso-metatarsus as they branch to be distributed to the podium.

It may be found that Bonasa can claim normally six segments as rep-

348 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Voi. VI.

resenting the caudal vertebre, and we have in our possession a pelvis of
this bird where a rudimentary second sacral rib is evident, but this can
only be regarded in the light of an anomaly.

Interesting osseous malformations are occasionally to be seen, but they
are beyond the jurisdiction of this monograph to treat; nor will it be
practicable to enter into the engaging subject of the differences between
the pelves in the male and female birds. but that such differences do
exist there can be no reasonable doubt.

Did classification depend entirely upon external topography, appear-
ance, and structure, the author would say that the North American Tetra-
onine as they now stand are well classified; but strip them of these char-
acteristics, or, rather, permit them only to hold the subordinate place,
allow specific habits to have no weight, and then from an osteological
point of view, purely, we can perceive no good reason why Pediecetes
and Cupidonia should not be thrown into one and the same genus. As far
as their skeletal framework is concerned they are singularly alike, and
strikingly dissimilar from all the other genera; but as such changes will
only be generally suggested and tolerated as our knowledge of ornithot-
omy increases, it must of necessity remain to be seen how the anatomy
of the other systems of these two birds will support such a generic
reduction.

Fort FETTERMAN, Wyo., May 1, 1881.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.
PLATE V.

Fig. 47.—Cranium of young Centrocercus, three or four days old, viewed from above.

Fig. 48.—The same; lateral view, with lower jaw added, showing articular element
detached.

Fig. 49.—The same, viewed from below.

Fic. 50.—Centrocercus. Lateral view of skull of ‘‘bird of the year” four months old;
the hyoid arch has been detached.

Fic. 51.—The same aged bird as in Fig. 5¢, showing the disarticulated segments of
the four cranial vertebre: OV, neural arch of the occipital vertebra (epencephalic
arch), first of the skull; OV’, its hemal arch in outline (scapular arch); so, super-
occipital; e0,exoccipital; po, the connate paroccipital; bo, basi-occipital; PV, neural
arch of the parietal vertebra (mesencephalic arch), second of the skull; P. V.’, its hemal
arch (the hyoidean); P, the parietal; ms, the mastoid; as, the alisphenoid; bs, the
basi-sphenoid; gh, the glossohyal ; ch, the ceratohyal; bh, the basi-hyal; uh, the urohyal;
hb and cb, the hypo-branchial and cerato-branchial elements of the thyro-hyals,
respectively; F. V., neural arch of the frontal vertebra (proencephalic arch), third of
the skull; F.V.', its hemal arch (the mandibular) ; Fr, the frontal; x, the site of the
postfrontal in some of the class; os, the orbito-sphenoid in outline; ps, the basi-pre-
sphenoid; Tp, the tympanic; ar, the articular; S. an, the surangular; an, the angular;
se, the splenial element; and de, the dentary element; N.V.,the neural arch of the
nasal vertebra (rhinencephalic arch), the fourth and last in the skull; N. V.’, its hemal
arch (the maxillary); N, the nasal; P/, the prefrontal (ethmoid); Vr, vomer in out-

No. 2:] SHUFELDT ON NORTH AMERICAN TETRAONID!. 349 ©

line, as it does not occur in this bird; Pl, palatine; ma, maxillary; i. mx, intermaxillary
(or premaxillary); 1, the petrosal; 2, the sclerotals; 3, the lacrymal; Pty,the ptery-
goid, the diverging appendage of Pl, the palatine; sq and ma, the squamosal and
malar, respectively, are diverging appendages of Tp, the tympanic.

PLATE VI.

Fic. 52.—Lateral view of skull of Centrocercus, adult ¢,hyoid arch removed. Figs.
54, 55, 58, 61, 64, 65, 66, 68, 69, and 70 are from the skeleton of the same specimen,

Fig. 53.—Sternum of the chick, three or four days old; Centrocercus.

Fig. 54.—Sternum of Centrocercus, viewed from below; adult 3.

Fic. 55.—Dorsal vertebra, lateral view, left side, from the same.

Fic. 56.—Sternum of Centrocercus, ‘“‘ bird of the year” (two months old), showing
development of this bone: 4, lophosteon ; 5, metosteon; 6, plewrosteon.

PLATE VII.

Fre. 57.—Right pectoral limb of Centrocercus, same bird as the sternum in Fig. 56
was taken from. H, humerus, palmar aspect; 7, radius; wu, ulna; s, scaphoid (ra-
diale); c, cuneiform (ulnare); z, unciform; d, index digit; 9, third metacarpal (an-
nularis); 9’, second metacarpal (medius); d’, d’’, phalanges of the second metacar-
pal; d’’’, phalanx of the third metacarpal.

Fig. 58.—Left metacarpus of an adult Centrocercus.

Fra. 59.—Left metacarpus of the same bird as figured in 57, showing all the seg-
ments that go to make up the bone in Fig. 58: om, carpale or os magnum; Z, unci-
form; 7, index or first metacarpal ; 8, pisiform; 9’, second metacarpal ; 9, third meta-
carpal (annularis).

Fie. 60.—Left humerus (Centrocercus), taken from the same bird as in Fig. 57.

Fig. 61.—Left humerus, anconal aspect, Centrocereus ; adult.

Fig. 62.—Ossa innominata, Centrocercus, three or four days old, showing how the
pelvic bones form the acetabulum: X, ilium; Y, ischium; Z, os pubis.

Fic. 63.—Pelvis, same bird as in Fig. 57; Centrocercus; X, ilium; Y, ischium; Z,
os pubis.

Fic. 64.—The perfect pelvis, lateral view, as in 62 and 63, of Centrocercus; adult ¢.

PLATE IX.

Fia. 65.—Posterior view of pygostyle, adult Centrocercus.

Fie. 66.—The same, left lateral view.

Fic. 67.—Pelvic limb, anterior view, Centrocercus, taken from same bird as in Fig.
57: EH, Epicnemial epiphysis of the tibia; #’, the confluent tarsal bones found at the
distal extremity of the tibia at this age, tibiale (astragalus), and fibulare (0s calcis) ;
#{'', the centrale.

Fig. 68.—Left tarso-metatarsus, inside view, adult g, Centrocercus.

Fic. 69.—Anterior view of right tibia and fibula, from the same skeleton as 68.

Fic. 70.—Anterior view of right femur, same bird as shown in Figs. 68, 69.

PLATE X.

Fic. 71.—Right lateral view of skull of adult ¢ Cupidonia cupido.
Fic. 72.—Lower mandible from the same, viewed from above.

Fic. 73.—Skull from the same, lower jaw removed; seen from above.
Fic. 74.—The same from below.

Fic. 75.—Sclerotals, right eye from the same.

Fic. 76.—Right humerus, from the same, palmar aspect.

Fig. 77.—The same, anconal aspect.

350 BULLETIN UNITED STATES: GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol.VL_

PLATE XI.

Fic. 78.—Sacral vertebral rib with its hemapophysis, left side; w’, the pleurapophy-
sis, posterior view; w, the corresponding hemapophysis.

Fig. 79.—Fifth pleurapophysis with its corresponding hemapophysis attached;
from the same bird, dorsal vertebra, inside view.

Fig. 80.—Fourth pleurapophysis with its corresponding hemapophysis attached ;
from the same bird, (Cupidonia), dorsal vertebre, outside view.

Fie. 81.—Sternum from below; same bird.

Fyg. 82.—Sternum, left lateral view; same bird (Cupidonia cupido).

PLATE XII.

Fig. 83.—Pelvis from above; same bird.

Fic. 84.—Pelvis, right lateral aspect; same bird.

Fic. 85.—Right scapula and coracoid, in situ; same bird.

Fig. 86.—Left coracoid, posterior view, from the scapular arch of the same bird.

Fic. 87.—Right lateral view of clavicles, from the scapular arch of the same bird;
dotted lines show the outline viewing it from behind.

PLATE XIII.

Fic. 88.—Right lateral view of skull of adult g Lagopus leucurus ; hyoid arch has
been removed.

Fig. 89.—Cranium of Pediacetes phasianellus ; lacrymal, nasal and intermaxillary still
attached.

Fic. 90.—Pelvis, adult g Tetrao canadensis, viewed from above.

Fic. 91.—Portion of skeleton of Ptarmigan, Lagopus leucurus, showing thoracic and
pelvic bones in situ, with the scapular arch and caudal vertebre. The last cervical
vertebra still remains attached in order to show its free pleurapophysis.

we,

PLATE V

T. Sinclaic & Son Lnth.

SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF AMERICAN TETRAONIDA.

ina

SMALLS
UM ua
ne

AYA te. WY

%

ip
i

¥
|
4g

T. Smelar & Son,Lat

SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF AMERICAN TETRAONIDA.

My tia a i
oy a
a y

te ee

i) i
Fan
PAlMOOie

pl

1

PLATE VII

fe rake 9 nach tr a ah nsdn 8

T. Sinclaw « oun inn

SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOQLOGY OF AMERICAN TETRAOQNIDA.

J
7

PLATE VIII

T. Sinclair & Son Lith.

SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOQLOGY OF AMERICAN TETRAONIDA.

H)
2
RIN

oun

se

1X

PLATE

clair & Sen Lith.

-SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF AMERICAN TETRAOQNIDA.

Sm

3

ee te

PLATE X:

T Sinclar & Son Lith.

SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF AMERICAN TETRAONIDA.

WY on
UNG

Pelsy
ik Ges
an t

4 PANE
Mine ra

PLATE X

T. Smclaix & Sons Dahl
SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF AMERICAN TETRAONIDA. ;

PLATE X{l.

FI Nh ora eee ane

T. Sinclar & Son_Lath.

SHUFELDTF ON THE OSTEOQLOGY OF AMERICAN TETRAONIDA.

PLATE XIII

T. Sinclar & San Lath.

SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF AMERICAN TETRAONIDA.

Art. XIV.—Osteology of Lanius ludovicianus excubi-
torices.

By R. W. Shufeldt, M. D., First Lieut. Med. Dept. U.S. Army.

Mr. Robert Ridgway, in his carefully prepared check-list of North
American Birds (Bull. No. 21, Nomenclature of N. American Birds,
chiefly contained in the U.S. Nat. Mus., Washington, D. C.), gives us
the representatives of Laniide, the species borealis and ludovicianus,
with the two occidental varieties of the last, robustus and excubitorides,
which latter form we have chosen as the subject of this paper to demon-
strate the peculiarities of the skeleton of these interesting birds. The
habits of the Shrikes are well known to all ornithologists, so one will not
be surprised, after a view of Fig. 100, in the plate (where our subject has
been made, by the aid of the dissecting knife and maceration, to exhibit
one of the truest indices of his character), to find the large, semi-hawk-
like skull surmounting the remainder of a bony frame-work, that might
easily be mistaken as belonging to a Thrush or any other Oscine; but
it is this very characteristic that individualizes these truly passerine-
raptorial birds.

In the skull, divested of the lower jaw and hyoid arch in the adult,
we find that anchylosis of the primoidal segments has been very thorough;
outside of the bony parts of the sense capsules—the tympanic elements
and the pterygoids are the sole escapers of this notorious feature in
avian craniology—indeed, we discover in the skull of this species, before
it has left the nest, that the primitive segments of the occipital vertebra
are well advanced towards permanent union, especially about the condyle,
traces of its formation being extremely difficult of discernment, and in
the mature bird this hemispherical facet for the atlas is exceedingly
diminutive, measuring only .5 of a millimeter in diameter. About the
basi-cranii we find the usual foramina for the exit and entrance of vessels
and nerves, and note in our examination that the anterior apertures of
the Eustachian tubes are double, very small, and protected by an osse-
ous lip from the basi-sphenoid. The foramen magnum is sub-circular
and of medium size; together with the basi-cranii, it makes an angle
with the horizontal plane of 25°, the anterior bearing point being the
tip of the beak, and the two posterior bearing points being the internal
facettes upon the tympanics. That part of the cranium above, formed

by the frontals and parietals is very broad and smooth, and quite often
351

352 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

the sutural traces are easily made out, and in cases where maceration
is persisted in, the coronal suture may gape—beyond, the interorbital
region becomes slightly depressed. The pseudo fronto-maxillary articu-
lation is denoted by a transverse line nearly a centimeter long, and is
moderately flexible; the superior tips of the lacrymals form its lateral
boundaries. The superior mandible is made up of the usual bones, it
is very broad atits base, and gently deflected throughout; the nasal
bones bound posteriorly on either side vacuities that lead into the rhinal
chambers, but the true nostrils are found beyond these, as distinct
elliptical apertures. It is, however, the horny integumental sheath that
really gives to this bird’s beak its peculiar raptorial aspect, for when
stripped of this, the osseous tomia show no sign of notch or tooth be-
yond. Below, the palatine fissure is quite wide, and through its open-
ing we discover that the ethmo-turbinals are more or less developed,
together with a partial septum narium, and the space is further intruded
upon by a sub-compressed and originally distinct vomer, that is bifur-
cated behind to receive the rostrum of the basi-pre-sphenoid, lodging a
portion of the prefrontal in its fissure above.

The palatines have become amalgamated with the inter-maxillary
anteriorly, and form, with the pterygoids, the usual joint on the rostrum
of the sphenoid behind; they throw out sharp lateral apophyses that
are directed backwards. The pterygoids are very much expanded at
their mesial ends, their shafts being straight and delicate; and there
are no pleurapophysial processes; they meet the tympanics in sub-
circular heads, of no great size, just below the orbital processes. These
latter elements possess very broad and twisted mastoid prolongations,
with the usual double facet and intervening depression below; and the
orbital apophyses are pointed at their extremities, sometimes slightly
clubbed, being turned gently upwards. The segments composing the
infraorbital bar have long since become one single bone, a slender style
fulfilling its ordinary functions. A sub-elliptical sesamoid is found at
its proximal end, between it and the tympanic. The orbital cavities are
capacious, and well divided from the rhinal chambers by the broad,
quadrate lacrymals on either side; their vaults are concavely arched,
and their posterior walls quite extensive, looking almost directly for-
wards. The foramen for the exit of the first pair from the brain-case
has run into one irregular aperture; but rarely joins, in the adult, with
the elliptical foramina for the optic nerves below them. The orbital
septum is never complete, a vacuity of greater or less extent occurring
near the center of the plate. Laterally we observe shallow temporal
fossze above elongated openings to the otocrane, that look downwards, _
forwards, and outwards, standing out quite prominently from the side
of the skull. The mastoids throw forwards and downwards horizontally
flattened apophyses, which, by the aid of smaller ones from the ali-
sphenoids, help it to guide the temporal muscles to their points of
insertion. A moderately marked “cerebellar prominence” is found at

No. 2.] SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF LANIIDZ. 3538:

its usual site, above the foramen magnum behind; but we have never
observed the foramina, caused by bone thinning, to occur on either side
of it. In removing the cranial vault, we find the various fosse unusually
well defined, and bounded by sharp borders; the carotids enter by
separate openings at the base of the “sella turcica,” which latter has a
- deep notch, mesiad, in its posterior wall.

In the recent cranium, the internal and external tables are separated
by an interspace of a millimeter or more, that is sparsely filled in by
diploic tissue; but upon examining skulls that have been kept for a
long time, and consequently become thoroughly dried, we cannot
distinguish between the two tablets; the diploic tissue has entirely
disappeared, and the whole roof is extremely attenuated and jlexible.
We are not prepared to explain how this remarkable change comes
about. :

The hyoid arch bears out its usual ornithic and oscine characteristics,
and does not require any special description here, as the author intends
to furnish a more elaborate description of the skull when he comes to
touch upon the Vireonide ; a faithful outline of this arch is given,
however, from a superior view in Fig. 101 of the plate.

Before the young of this Shrike has left the nest the numerous elements
of the lower jaw have become fused together, so that during maceration
the two rami rarely separate at any other point except the symphysis
between the dentary elements. In the old bird it is a stout and strong
bone, with sharp-pointed extremity beyond, and deeply scooped-out
articular ends posteriorly, with blunted processes behind, and up-turned
ones looking towards each other, mesiad. Externally the “sides of the
jaw” are concave for their posterior two-thirds, and exhibit the usual
elliptic foramen (Fig. 102); while the superior ramal borders are
rounded and rise into slight prominences at the junction of the outer
and middle thirds. As to the sense capsules, we find that the sclerotals
are well developed, and very accurately matched together; the usual
ossicles of the organ of hearing likewise ossify.

There are thirteen vertebree devoted to the cervical portion of the
spine, and, although they make a faint attempt towards araptorial] ap-
pearance, they are more oscine in their character than anything else, and
are not noted for the prominence of any of their outstanding processes;
disregarding the atlas, the first four bear neural spines, this feature not
showing itself again until we find it in the last two, the thirteenth possess-
ing it as well developed as any of the dorsals. The post- and prezyga-
pophyses are markedly short, thus bringing all the segments quite near
together, giving considerable stability to this division of the column.
The parapophyses are very delicate where they are produced anteriorly
at mid-neck, and quite inconspicuous above; the first four and the last
six vertebrae bear hypapophyses, they being three-pronged on the last
two; this limits the carotid canal to the fifth, sixth, and seventh cervi-
cals, unusually slight protection for this important arterial branch. The

23 GB

354 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

vertebral canal commences in the tenth—i. e., in this segment it is com-
pletely surrounded by bone, and continues its course through the axis;
the last two or three vertebre are very broad from side to side, the ulti-
mate one bearing a free pair of pleurapophyses that have in their turn
distinct uncinate processes.

The neural tube as found in this section of the spine commences and
terminates broadly and transversely elliptical, merging into the sub-
circular as it nears its mid-portion at the middle of the neck; it is of
considerable caliber throughout. The dorsal division of the spine has
allotted to it five vertebra, closely locked together, yet easily detached
by ordinary maceration; their combined neural spines form one con-
tinuous quadrate crest. These are fastened together above by the
‘“‘arrow-head” point that we have described in other papers. Thereis very
little difference in the lengths of the transverse processes, from first to
last, so we do not find much change in the processes of the ribs they
sustain, as to length of pedicles and tubercula. Short metapophysial
ridges are found above the diapophyses; they never seem to attain
sufficient length to connect the vertebral segments, however.

The neural canal commences transversely elliptical, to terminate, much
diminished in caliber, in the subcireular form. In the first dorsal we
find a thin quadrate lamina of bone, projecting downwards and forwards
in the mesial plane, as a well-developed hypapophysis; the second sup-
ports the merest apology for this process, and the remaining dorsals have
none at all, though by compression of the centra a low ridge presents
itself along their middles, which is only faintly perceptible in the last.
There is a free pair of ribs for each dorsal vertebra, and these are mov-
ably connected with the sternum by corresponding pairs of hemapophy-
ses, the whole structure and appearance being distinctly oscine in char-
acter. The pleurapophyses are very slender below and not markedly
expanded above as they are in some other birds. Commencing with the
last cervical rib, and continuing entirely through the dorsals, we find the
series of epi-pleural appendages complete on either side, and freely artic-
ulated with the posterior borders of the ribs, with which they make an
angle of about 45°, and attain sufficient length to overlap the rib in their
immediate rear, though often in younger birds, and evensomeold ones, the
last uncinate process does not reach the free sacral rib. The sternal ribs
are quite delicately fashioned, and support, as usual, anteriorly the trans-
verse heads for articulation with the costal border of the sternum, while
posteriorly we discern the moderately upturned and clubbed extremities
with shallow facettes for the inferior ends of the vertebral ribs.

The sternum of the Loggerhead Shrike is almost or quite typically
“eantorial” in its outlines, but only feebly pre-eminent in those features
that stamp it as belonging to a bird of any great power of flight. The
manubrium, directed upwards and forwards, springs from a solid base to
become bifurcate at its anterior extremity and throw down a sharp
border below, that becomes continuous with the carinal margin in

No. 2.] SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF LANIIDZ. 355

front; the coracoidal grooves pass round laterally well beneath the
costal processes, and merge into each other, mesiad, their point of meet-
ing being denoted by an elliptical depression, at the base of which we
occasionally find a single pneumatic foramen. The costal processes rear
themselves upwards, forwards, and outwards, being broad but thin lam-
inz of bone, impressed upon their posterior margins by the five trans-
verse facettes for the sternal ribs. The “body” is concave above, sloping
to a shallow, osseous gutter, lying in the mesial plane directly over the
keel; beyond, in this groove we observe a few scattered foramina for
the admission of air to the more solid structures of this confluent hemal
spine. Behind, the bone is one-notched on either side, cutting out lat-
eral processes with expanded posterior ends and a broad mid-xiphoidal
portion—the direct continuation of the sternal body—(Fig. 92). The
‘‘earina” below averages about 7 millimeters at its deepest part; ante-
riorly it protudes as a rounded carinal angle, from which point its inferior
boundary sweeps backwards by a gentle convex curve to terminate in
a diminutive triangular space at the middle of the xiphoidal process
beneath. ;

The sides of the keel present for examination well-defined subcostal,
pectoral, and carinal ridges ; the latter falls on either side from the base
of the manubrial process to near the carinal angle, just within the bor-
der, and sometimes has a thickened backward branch starting from its
lower end. The confluent pelvis, in common with the majority of pas-
serine birds, has that strikingly angular outline, due largely to sharpened
borders and outstanding spiny processes. There are ten vertebre in
its “sacrum,” all unusually firmly fused together, vacuities only ocea-
sionly occurring among the diapophyses of the ultimate few, three or
four at most. The pre-acetabular region of the ilia on either side is
deeply concave, this concavity being carried up over the anti-trochanters
to terminate in shallow grooves over the ischiatic foramina. The greater
share of this surface looks almost directly outwards and only slightly
upwards. The ilio-neural canals are divided by the confluent spines of
the first four or five vertebre, they vary in width in different individuals,
and terminate at points opposite the cotyloid cavities, at which point
the neural spine suddenly becomes compressed, or rather annihilated, and
the sacrum sustains a flattened surface to the ultimate boundary of the
bone. The post-acetabular regions are of about one-third the extent of
the surfaces anterior to the cotyloid rings; they are produced behind in
strong and clubbed processes, the outer margins of which are the termi-
nations of the gluteal ridges or lines continuous with these ridges; these
surfaces are convex and narrowed by the encroachment of the broad
sacrum (Fig. 103).

Laterally the ilium overhangs the extensive and elliptical ischiatic
foramen, which is bounded in front by the anti-trochanter, directed back-
wards and slightly outwards; the cotyloid ring is markedly cireular and
but little difference exists between the diameters of its inner and outer

356 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. V1.

peripheries. The obdurator foramen is very small and varies in the fig-
ure of its outline, though generally assuming more or less the form of
the ellipse; the broad and thin hinder blade of the ischium again dips
down to meet the slender pubic shaft, just before its termination, to shut
in an elongated spindle-shaped tendinal vacuity. (Fig. 100.)

Upon the ventral aspect of the pelvis, we note that the bone affords
no shelter whatever for the important organs it incloses until we pass
the fourth sacral segment and the very decided vertebral swelling to
form the sinus rhomboidalis; it then drops into a deep depression on
either side, whose concavities and convexities correspond with those de-
scribed and attributed to the dorsal surfaces. The apophysial braces
thrown out by the vertebrae are extremely slender, except in the cases
of the first and fourth; the former segment bears a free pair of slender
pleurapophyses, whose hemapophyses articulate along the posterior
border of the ultimate sternal ribs, as do some of the inferior so-called
“‘ costal cartilages” in anthropotomy, lacking the necessary length to ar-
rive at the costal borders of the great ventral hemal spine, constituting
a common ornithic character. These sacral ribs rarely or never support
uncinate processes.

Six segments are devoted, in this Shrike, to the coceygeal division of
the column, exclusive of the pygostyle; they share the same fate, with
their fellows and representatives in nearly all of the class Aves, in hav-
ing many of their original vertebral components either rudimentary or
entirely suppressed; the neural spines, hooking over each other, ante-
riorly, become more and more feebly developed as we proceed backwards;
this order of things is just reversed when we come to examine the hypa-
pophyses on the nether aspects. The neural canal that passes through
them dwindles to mere capillary dimensions before reaching the “coe-
ey geal vomer”, into which bone it barely dares to enter.

The diapophyses of the caudal vertebre are bent downwards, com-
pressed horizontally, broad, and show but slight differences in length,
before reaching the last one, in which they are shorter. The lamina of
the pygostyle has the outline of an isosceles triangle, being truncate at
its apex; the ‘“‘body” below is of a substantial structure, barely dilated
behind, and otherwise presenting the usual characteristics as found
among the oscines.

The bones of the scapular arch are all free and independent of each
other, the stability of their relative position depending upon strong lig-
aments in the living bird. The blade of the scapula is quite narrow,
and, in the vast majority of cases, extends across the dorsal pleura-
pophyses, its distal end being obliquely truncate, from within, out-
wards; the blade-like portion is brought up in close juxtaposition with.
that portion of the bone that affords the scapular moiety of the glenoid
fossa. Its acromial process is very short, owing to the fact that it has
to proceed but a short way before it abuts against the much-expanded
head, of clavicle, on either side; it forms with the coracoid the usual ten-

No. 2.) SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF LAMIIDA. 357

‘dinal canal between the two bones. The head of the coracoid rears
‘well above the glenoid cavity, in order to afford the required surface
upon its mesial aspect for the broad clavicular extremity that rests
against it; upon its opposite side it offers the usual surface to assist in
completing the cavity for head of humerus. The shaft of the bone is
very slender and cylindrical for its major part, and the wing-like exten-
sion, so broad in many birds, is here but a meager osseous scale attached
to the side of the shaft, for its outer and lower half, becoming continuous
with the formal dilatation of the bone below; for the sternal articulation,
this is transversely concave and very narrow.

The minute pneumatic perforations of the scapule and coracoids oc-
cupy their usual sites back of the glenoid cavity, under the protection
of the tendinal canal, at the heads of the bones. The united clavicles,
or the furcuiwm, inclines decidedly to the U-shaped variety (Figs. 94,
95); we have already alluded to the fact as how broad, yet compressed,
their scapular ends are found to be; from these heads the shaft-like
portions fall downward, with a gentle curve backward to meet and sup-
port the mesial and usual clavicular lamina, in birds where it is found,
which here lies in that recess formed by the anterior and concave border
of the carina of the sternum (Fig. 100).

Directing our attention again to the shoulder-joint we discover that
this Shrike is another example of those birds in which that little peg-
like ossicle, the os humero-scapulare is found, here attached by its usual
ligaments to the upper and back part of the articulation and fulfilling
its ordinary function. The humerus of Lanius bears the closest resem-
blance to that bone as found in many of the family Turdide—particu-
larly does this apply to Mimus polyglottus, a bird the Shrike not un-
successfully apes in point of external coloration.

The head, in most individuals, is well bent, anconal, and supports a
short radial and not lofty crest, with the usual ulnar tuberosity over-
hanging an ample pneumatic fossa. The shaft is quite straight and
nearly cylindrical, its distal and expanded extremity presenting quite a
unique appearance (Figs. 96 and 97). The internal and external con-
dyles are distinct processes, the former projecting almost directly back-
wards, the latter forwards and upwards; the olecranon fossa is likewise
clearly defined, and on the palmar aspect we observe the oblique and
ulnar facets unusually prominent. The humerus is the only bone of the
pectoral limb that has air admitted to its interior, the bones of the anti-
brachium and pinion lacking this rather rare prerogative.

The ulna is more than four times the bulk of the radius, being, as in
most vertebrates, the main support of the forearm; there is scarcely any
pérceptible curvature along its well-balanced and cylindrical shaft, which
presents a row of distinct little tubercles for the bases of the quills of the
secondaries. Its proximal end presents for examination a prominent
olecranon process, directed backwards, and the greater and lesser sig-
moid cavities on its anconal aspect; the distal extremity is rather under

358 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY, [Vol. VI.

the average in point of eminence, but shows all the usual indentations
and surfaces to accommodate this end of the bone to the wrist and radius.
The radius differs principally in having a general curvature distributed
along its subtrihedral shaft, rather than having it confined to its proximal
third, as in many birds; otherwise it presents its ordinary orinthic char-
acteristics.

Among the mature birds representing the Laniide, as in so many
other families, the carpus is composed of the two free ossicles, the cwnei-
form and the scapho-lunar, which are here impressed by their usual
articulating facettes, for the radial and ulna trochlee and the metacarpus,
and although we have the young of this Shrike before us, the limits of
this paper will not allow a critical description of this interesting and
important region of the skeleton, that can only be obtained by careful
study of the youngling.

The manus contains its customary complement of bonelets, as seen in
the pinions of the major part of the class in general (Fig. 100); medius
and annularis metacarpals are firmly united together, and with the short
first metacarpal that bears the index; the broad phalanx of the second
is concave upon its anconal aspect and supports below the distal joint
of the hand; the smallest phalanx of all is freely attached to annularis,
which latter metacarpal extends some little distance below its stouter
fellow, the medius. The pelvic limb is non-pneumatic, and consists in
the adults of the usual number of bones, the patella being present.
The femur, less than 2.5 centimeters long, has no trochanter minor, and
the larger process of this name is but feebly produced; the head, with
its single depression for the ligamentum teres may justly be said to
be at right angles with the cylindrical shaft, which latter is slightly
convex forwards; the condyles are well developed and the outer one pre-
sents the usual fibular groove. The tibia presents nothing that differs
_in any marked extent from the oscines in general; it has no rotular
process, but the pro- and ecto-cnemial apophyses are well produced and
turned slightly outwards; at its distal end we observe, anteriorly, the
usual tendinal bony bridge for the extensor tendons. The fibula can be
detached from the tibia by maceration, but its lower extremity spins out
intoamere thread at thejunction of mid and lower thirds of the latter bone.
There are no free tarsal segments, and the same remarks apply here as
we used in speaking of the wrist-joint above. The tarso-metatarsus
(Fig. 99) is very delicately constructed below, while above it is stouter
and presents immediately back of its head the process we have called ten-
dinous, pierced by two pairs of foramina. A thin lamina of bone extends
along its shaft behind. We observe that the os metatarsale accessoriumis -
nnusually large, as is the toe it supports; but otherwise the internodes
are arranged upon the general plan of the oscine foot, which brings to
our mind nothing of a raptorial type, except, perhaps, as we know the
bird, the decided curvature of the hind claw, which is still further
increased and lengthened when armed with its horny theca.

PLATE Oi

T. Sinclar & Son Lith.

SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF LANIUS LUDOVICIANUS EXCUBITORIDES.
i

Fic.

SHUFELDT ON THE OSTEOLOGY OF LANIIDZ. 359

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XIV.

92.—The sternum, from below.

Fig. 93.—Right scapula and coracoid, outer aspect.

Fic.

94.—Clavicular arch, from in front.

Fic. 95.—Head of clavicle, right limb, outer aspect.

Fig.
Fig.
Fia.
FiaG.
Fig.

FIG.
Fig.
Fig.
Fic.

96.—Right humerus, palmar aspect.

97.—The same, anconal aspect.

98.—Right femur, posterior aspect.

99.—Left tarso-metatarsus, anterior aspect.

100.—Skeleton of adult ¢, Lanius ludovicianus cxucubitorides ; the left free ver-
tebral pleurapophyses and hemapophyses and pectoral limb have
been removed. :

101.—The hyoid arch, from above.

102.—The lower mandible, from above.

103.—The pelvis, from above.

104.—Superior aspect of skull, the lower mandible having been removed.

Fi?

ne Fey, it eet

Dae

~/-.

Art. XV.—Review of the Rodentia of the Miocene
Period of North America.

By E. D. Cope, N. A. S.

RODENTIA.

Members of this order were very abundant during the White River
and Truckee epochs in North America. They are referable to thirty-
one species and eight genera. Of these genera three still exist in the
regions where their fossil remains are found. These are Sciurus, Hes-
peromys, and Lepus. All of them occur in the Truckee beds, while the
first-named only has been found in the White River formation. All of
the species belong to the three great divisions of the order which now
inhabit North America, while the fourth, the Hystricomorpha, which is
very sparingly represented on the continent, has not yet been detected
in the formations in question. It appears in a single species of porcu-
pine in the Loup Fork beds.

The four primary divisions of the order Rodentia are thus defined,
principally after Brandt and Alston.

I. Incisor teeth $. Fibula not articulating with the superior condyle of the calca-

neum. No intertrochlear crest of humerus.
1. Mandible with the angular portion springing from the outer side of the bony

covering of the lowerincisor. Fibula distinct from tibia. ‘Malar bone not
supported below by a continuation of the maxillary zygomatic process.”
Anmintorpleny Old 1SsuLesenesaeeiene seieeserecee ee caees cee HYSTRICOMORPHA.

2. Mandible with the angle in the plane of or springing from the inferior edge
of the covering of the alveolus of the inferior incisor, more or less rounded ;
coronoid process high, faleate. Fibula distinct from tibia. No interptery-
PL OVGE SST G ae tetat tale ata aia ae ee ae eel) Ree a oe SCIUROMORPHA.

3. Mandible with the angular portion springing from the inferior edge of the
sheath of the inferior incisor (except Bathyerginw). Yibula codssified with
the tibia. Malar short, usually supported on a maxillary process. No inter-
pterygoid fissure (except in Bathyerging) ....---..--.-------- MYOMORPHA.

II. Incisor teeth $. Fibula articulating with the condyle of the caleaneum. An in-
tertrochlear crest of humerus.

4, No true alisphenoid canal; fibula ankylosed to tibia below; angle of man-
dible in the plane of the incisive alveolus. .........--------- LAGOMORPHA.

These groups, as is well known, include families and genera which

display adaptations to various modes of life. Some are exclusively sub-
re 361

362 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VE

terranean, others are arboreal, and some live on the surface of the
ground. Of the latter, some are provided with formidable spines as a
protection against enemies, while others depend for their safety on their
speed. Of the latter character are the Leporide of the Lagomorpha, and
I wish to note how that they have superadded to the ordinary rodent
structure certain points which also characterize the most specialized
Perissodactyla and Artiodactyla among ungulates. The fusion of the infe-
rior part of the fibula with the tibia (found also in the Myomorpha) belongs
to the higher types of these orders. The strong intertrochlear ridge of
the humerus is an especial feature of the groups mentioned, distinguish-
ing them from the lower types in all the orders. The articulation of the
fibula with the caleaneum, mentioned by Mr. Alston, is a character of the
of the Artiodactyla. Associated with these is the elongation of the
bones of the limbs, especially the posterior one. The modification of
the tarsus in Dipus (the jerboas) evidently has a direct relation to the
projectile force transmitted through the hind legs in rapid progression
by leaping. Here the metatarsals are codssified into a cannon bone,
though, as there are three bones involved, the result is somewhat dif-
ferent from the cannon bone of the Ruminantia.

The species of the American Miocenes, including Loup Fork formation,.
are distributed as follows:

White Low
River. Truckee. Fork.
HysTRICOMORPHA.
Hystricide.
LSB WaVTebS, Uh Cobre ashenesse cd sSscnestosaS=sSece Sed ebedeesss cesodedeecas| Seca s55eee||sosscinoc5 1
ScIMOMORPHA.
Mylagaulide.
in EyceMlinG), (Cas) sees ooo 55s cee tenes sores sp esas aeesos ceased basscsosse|bacosmece 2
Fam. ?
Jelelne@amniys) CO09 coosen de satsoscenscceenecnsoosresocdesss docoseceseces= 1) casaeeeeee Lee seireete
Castoride.
lbinaneiiime, Ile h tee eso sodase SosdcbSeossad See oesecads seoceseseonesectadlesscoscisad|lanconscns: 1
(CRSP, ys scso% Ssceoonte sade cS sce see Eno doce sce Sasa se sodipsectenac a! 2 1
Ischyromyide
TECHy ROMA ACI Y Scere nee ees eee eae nee eee alee Palen eee ee A) | eek osee| etecteete
Sciuride.
Wiemscamnyg. (CONS sosocdsoashocsssouoss Sado cesses ocho otcassoasssssenoediecsteccss: 4. | Sec cues
GAMO DMO HM COND soos seSeo sscsosppSsodb donpsocsbancbesdoososestosse Dae. Sees enero
Sine rsh Wn ee bo too ooh Sos tee Ac becocbescesb os Sonacescrisnseesses 1 Bh es 1
MYOMORPHA.
Muride.
Ibe Ey IDG N os Socks ccoopoac snes sone sooo j-seroesncesotascasoses Bh pees) see |omeesocess
Jes eo My WENGE D, 55-5 Speers se oS eb se Dac DIO SEE SEO Se Soo Hse oocsond)\oecorcesia- 1 1
PP CICS IO OPO see He en eee ie se eee enone eile oo Seine seeman eesneen leeeemineacr Pe De a
Geomyide.
JB GMO TGS, (CO ce adeccas ache SeososatecadSus otequesoasaacksooreadaatdollndoseseeec 8) |lecootos so
imtophyehus) Copes--- ser cseseae ee eee senses so emalen ean sme see nee | eee eee e 5 caeseatses
LAGOMORPHA.
Leporide.
iPalsoplacns) Weidhyes shee See e nee eee ee ae eee ee epee seen acer 4 bn ee ees

Rano axe COPOt rt se cess ccs sere ee eee emcee ten eeecee ce noe oee en mameccice |e aecet are lashes al
Lepus, Linn...------- +. 22-22-2222 nee n een nnn enn nnn ne nnn enn |nonnnee ne 1 eeecose =

*

No. 2.] COPE ON MIOCENE RODENTIA. 363

Many of the above genera stand in evident genetic connection with
existing forms. The Miocene Castors doubtless include the ancestor of
the modern beaver. The Ischyromys is a primitive type of the Sciuride,
and Gymnoptychus connects it directly with the existing forms by the
character of its molar teeth. Humys is the primitive form of Hesperomys,
as Paciculus is of Sigmodon. Entoptychus and Plewrolicus are the near
ancestors of the Geomyide of the Pliocene and present periods. Palao-
lagus, Panolax, and Lepus form a direct genetic line. The ancient genera
all differ from their modern representatives in the same way; that is,
in the greater constriction of the skull just posterior to the orbits and
accompanying absence of postorbital processes. This relation may be
displayed in tabular form as follows:

Skull wider behind orbits. Skull narrower behind orbits.

Postorbital processes. | No postorbital processes. | Postorbital processes. | No postorbital processes.

Castortiber: 222s. ree -seeetn-e seeiteeae cleat ee | Castor peninsulatus.....

“SORTED. Tec RL ag a Fa Ischyromys....---------
320.5052. 60H deoDESEeosEee HeSperomlysl-<--- eee ee | see eee ee- see eemace ese HOMYS: ..beecccs. sae ae
TGP ES os ssgc0 SoS GO RSeH be sees Sen SOR COSTED ObGS568 bons ad zona EacooDEseesrae | Paleolacus)sssoses-- pee

None of this species of this fauna are of larger size than their mod-
ern representatives. In the cases of the beaver, squirrels, and rabbits,
the ancient species are the smaller.

SCLU ROMO KP HA:
SCIURUS Linn.

In this genus the molars are or 4, the first superior small when
present. The grinding surfaces of the crowns when unworn present in
the superior series a single internal cusp, which is low and antero-pos-
terior. From this there extend to the external border of the crown two
low transverse ridges, whose exterior terminations are somewhat en-
larged. In the lower jaw the transverse ridges are not visible, and there
is a low tubercle at each angle of the crown, between which there may
be others on the border of the crown. Attrition gives the grinding sur-
face of the latter a basin-like character. The foramen infraorbitale is a
short, narrow fissure, situated in the inferior part of the maxillary bone
in front of its tooth bearing portion, but descending nearly to the level
of the alveolar border.

The well-known characters of this genus are found in the mandibles
of species which I obtained from the White River Miocene beds of Colo-
rado and Oregon. The teeth display the subquadrate form of this
genus, without any tendency to the transverse enlargement seen in
Arctomys, Cynomys, and Spermophilus. Two of the species, 8. vortmant
and S. relictus, are as large as our gray and red squirrels, respectively,
and the third, S. ballovianus, is about the size of the Tamias quadrivittatus.

364 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

GYMNOPTYCHUS Cope.

Paleontological Bulletin, No. 16, p. 5 (August 20, 1873); Ann. Report U. S. Geolog.
Sury. Terrs. 1873 (1874), p. 476. .
Dental formula: I. +; C.$; M. 4. Crowns of the superior molars sup-

porting two crescents on the inner side, and two cusps on the external

side opposite to them. Each cusp sends a transverse crest to the con-
cavity of the corresponding crescent. Theadjacent horns of the crescents
are united, and the connecting portion sends a transverse crest into the
interval between the cusps. The opposed horns of the two crescents

- each send a crest round the anterior and posterior sides of the crown,

of which they form the borders. Incisors simple. The walls of the

alveolus of the inferior incisor produced into a tuberosity on the external
side of the base of the ascending ramus.

The above characters define a genus which, when fully known, will
in all probability be referred to near the existing genus Sciurus. In
confirmation of this opinion, I add that the alveolar sheath of the infe-
rior incisor is in the vertical plane of the ramus; the incisive foramen
does not invade the maxiilary bones, and the foramen infraorbitale ex-
terius is a small fissure situated in the inferior portion of the maxillary
bone, well in advance of both the orbit and first molar tooth.

As compared with the existing genera, it differs in the structure of
the molar teeth. The arrangement of the tubercles and crests is more
complex than in any of them, excepting Pteromys. Thus in all of them
there is but one internal crescent of the superior molars, and but two
or three cross-crests; while in the inferior molars the arrangementis unlike
that of the superior teeth, the cross-crests being marginal only. In
Pteromys (I. Cuv.) the transverse valleys of the inferior series of Gym-
noptychus are represented by numerous isolated fossettes. ‘The structure
of the molars in the fossil genus is exactly like that which I have de-
scribed above as found in Humys, extending even to the details. Thisis
curious, as that genus is a Myomorph.

The protrusion of the posterior extremity of the alveolar sheath of
the inferior incisor on the outer side of the ascending ramus is not
exhibited by the North American Sciwride, which I have examined, nor
by any of the extinct genera herein described, excepting Castor and
the Geomyide. It is seen in a lesser degree in Mus musculus, Hes-
peromys leucopus, Meriones hudsonius, and Arvicola riparia, all Muride.

Whether this genus possesses a postfrontal process I have been unable
to ascertain. Its absence would not in my opinion isolate it from the
Sciuride, as I accord with Dr. Coues in his estimate of the value to be ©
attached to this character. ;

Of other portions of the skeleton I possess incomplete humerus,
‘ischium, femur, and tibia. Most of these are appropriate in size to the
G. minutus, which is also the most abundant species. <A fragment of a
jJarger femur belongs perhaps to the G. trilophus.

No. 2.| COPE ON MIOCENE RODENTIA. 365.

The humerus is rather slender, and the deltoid crest does not exhibit
the prominence so usual in the Muride. It is most prominent on the
antero-external aspect of the shaft near its middle; an external as well
as an anterior ridge diverges from it upwards. The condyles have no
intertrochlear ridge, and the external trochlea is not more extended
transversely than the internal, measuring from the fundus of the groove.
There is a moderate internal epicondyle, and the arterial foramen is
distal, and opens anteriorly below and on the external face above. The
bridge is slender and moderately oblique. The external border is acute
and twisted.

The ischium is characterized, like that of other Sciwride, by the
presence of a spine or process which is wanting in North American |
Muride, but is present in Perognathus. The bone is rather short, the
tuberosity is but little enlarged, and the pubic process not very wide.
The proximal end of a femur may belong to Humys elegans, but is too
small according to usual data. The great trochanter is elevated as
high as the head, from which a deep notch separates it; its posterior or
fossa is pronounced. The little trochanter is very prominent, projecting
at right angles to the shaft. The shaft is broken, so that the presence
of a third trochanter cannot be ascertained. The distal end of the
femur is characterized by a patellar groove of moderate width, with
fairly elevated ridges which are continued well posteriorly on the
Shaft, but not further than in existing Sciwride, and not so far as in
Paleolagus. The distal extremity of the tibia displays characters of
the Sciuride as distinguished from those of Muride and Leporide. The
fibula is of course distinct, and the external trochlear groove opens
from its fundus outwards. The internal groove is narrower and is
bounded internally by a vertical malleolus, which has no distal articu-
lar facets, and which does not project, but is flat on the inner side.
The greater part of the posterior face is occupied by the bones of the
wide groove for the tendon of the flexor longus pollicis muscle. Its
inferior edge is produced downwards as far as the malleolus, from which
is is separated by the deep groove for the tibialis posticus and flexor
longus digitorum muscles. This groove is marked on the inner side of
the distal portion of the shaft, its anterior border being especially well
defined.

Two species of this genus are certainly known. They belong to the.
White River horizon of Colorado. They differ, so far as known, chiefly
in size, and in the proportions of the inferior premolar tooth.

MENISCOMYS Cope.
Paleontological Bulletin No. 30, p. 5, Dec. 3, 1878; Proceedings American Philosoph-
icai Society, 1878 (1879), p. 67.
The characters of this genus are derived from the dentition of both —
jaws, and from portions of the cranium which are preserved. The
molars are rooted, and number § or ? 3. Those of the superior series

366 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

are without enamel inflections, and the triturating surface exhibits two
external and one internal crescentic sections of the investing enamel.
On the second superior molar there are three external crescents, and
the first molar is simply conic. Between the inner and external cres-
cents there are the curved edges of enamel plates directed obliquely and
transversely. The grinding surfaces of the inferior molars display, in
the unworn condition, curved transverse crests, connected longitu-
dinally on the median line; on wearing, the lateral emarginations of
the enamel become shallower, disappearing from the inner side, but
remaining on the outer. Incisor teeth not grooved. Foramen infra-
orbitale anterius small, inferior, and near the orbit. Postorbital pro-
cesses ; no sagittal crest.

The eheragiens of the dentition of this genus resembles those of the
genus Pteromys, which is now confined to Asia and the Malaysian
Archipelago. The superior molars differ from those of Pteromys in
wanting all re-entrant enamel inflection.

The general characters of the skeleton are unknown. A femur is
rather slender, and a tibia rather elongate, showing that the limbs are
not short.

Four species of this genus are known to me, all from the Truckee
Miocene of Oregon. They differ considerably in the details of the struct-
ure of the molar teeth. Their more prominent characters may be set
forth as follows:

I. Superior molars short-rooted, with the external face plane ; inferior molars with a
prominent median transverse crest.
Smaller; dental crests fewer, simple, not crenate--.----...---..----. M. hippodus.
II. Superior molars long-rooted; external face of crowns inflected forming two V’s;
no median transverse crest on inferior molars. *
a. Crests of superior molars fewer, simple, not crenate.

ID ANEEREEE (ONAN SIO oS he Genesco ono GooeSo Coseas cooeeS soe ses So5- M. liolophus.
aa. Crests of superior molars more numerous and much crenate.

Smaller; plications of inferior molars shallow; borders raised........ M. cavatus.

Larger; plications of inferior molars profound...-.......---.-.---.---- M. nitens.

There is a suggestive resemblance between the forms of the molar
teeth of the Meniscomys hippodus and those of the Haplodontia rufa now
living in Oregon. The two genera have doubtless had a common origin,
but the present differences are considerable. Thus the Haplodontia has
an extended osseous cavum tympani, which does not exist in Meniscomys.

This genus appears to be referable to the Sciuride.

ISCHYROMYS Leidy.

e
Proceed. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad. 1856, p. 89; Extinct Fauna Dakota and Nebraska
335.— Colotaxis Cope, Paleontological Bulletin, No. 15, p. 1.

Char. gen.—The essential features are, dentition, I.,1; C., ¢; M., $5
‘the molars with two crescents on the inner side above, each of which

*Not seen in M. liolophus.

No. 2.J COPE ON MIOCENE RODENTIA. 367

gives rise to a cross-ridge to the outer margin. In the mandibular
series the crests and crescents have a reversed relation. No cementum.

To the above characters given by Dr. Leidy, I have added the absence
of postfrontal processes, and the superior position of the infraorbital
foramen. I now add that the pterygoid fossa is large, and that its inner
and outer plates are well developed, and subequal. The palate is ex-
cavated posteriorly. The acuminate anterior part of the malar bone ex-
tends as far forwards as the front of the orbit. There is no tuberosity
on the side of the superior diastema near the premolar teeth. In the
mandible the posterior extremity of the incisive alveolus is not distinet
from the ascending ramus.

Nothing has been heretofore published respecting the characters of
the remaining portions of the skeleton. Those which I possess are
the distal extremities of humeri, and a tibia, astragali, and portions of the
pelvis. The condyles of the humerus are narrow antero-posteriorly. The
internal flange descends at once to the fundus, leaving a long external
cylindrical portion without intertrochlear ridge. Anteriorly this portion
is cut into for haif its length by the ligamentous fosse. There is a large
internal epicondyle, which is constricted by a neck at the base, and
presents a compressed edge inwards and upwards. The arterial canal
opens above on the interior side of the humerus. There is no external
epicondyle.

The section of the iliwm at its base and at its middle is triangular.
There is an angle along the middle of its external face which supports
a moderately prominent tuberosity, a little above the acetabulum. On
the anterior margin a little higher up is a short, compressed, rather
prominent process, which probably represents the anterior inferior spine.
From this point posteriorly the internal face of the ilium is deeply con-
cave, producing an attenuation of the inner wall of theacetabulum. The
ischium is rather narrow at the base.

The distal portion of the tibia is much like that of Arctomys, Gym-
noptychus, and other Sciwride. The posterior median process is very
large and is shallowly grooved ; the usual deep tendinous groove sepa-
rates it from the internal malleolus. The trochlear grooves are deep
and well separated; the fibular surface is short. The head of the as-
tragalus is horizontally oval, and is separated from the trochlear por-
tion by a neck of moderate length. It extends obliquely inwards, so
that the internal margin of the head is interior to the line of the inner
margin of the trochlea. The sides of the latter are vertical. It is con-
siderably wider than long; the trochlear carinze are marginal, and the
external is considerably more elevated than theinner. The separating
groove is profound but open. The posterior inferior fossa is small and
foramen-like.

Besides the very different form and position of the infraorbital fora-
men, this genus differs from Gymnoptychus in the excavation of the pos-
terior edge of the palate.

368° BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI~

Dr. Leidy remarks that this genus belongs to the family of the Sciu-
ride. This is indicated by the dental characters; but in some other
respects there is a greater divergence from the squirrels and marmots
than is the case with the preceding genus, Gymnoptychus. Thus, the
large foramen infraorbitale anterius occupies the elevated position at
the origin of the zygomatic arch seen in the porcupines and eavies.
There is no superciliary ridge nor postorbital process as in most Sciw-
ride, but the front is contracted between the orbits in the same manner
as, but to a less degree than, in Fiber, and the Eocene Plesiarctomys,
Brad. Both the last named and Ischyromys present many points of re-
semblance to Pomel’s tribe of Protomyide, but differ from any of the
genera he has included in it.

This family is thus defined by Pomel:* “infraorbital foramen large as
in the Hystricide, and by the position of the angular apophysis of the
mandible almost in the general plane of the horizontal ramus. The
jugal bone, at least in those species where we have observed it, is very
much enlarged at its anterior portion, and the orbit is almost superior.”

These characters apply to Ischyromys, excepting as regards the malar
bone, which is principally unknown in the latter.

Another family, the Ischyromyide, has been proposed by E. R. Alston
for the reception of this genus, to which he thinks with met Plesiarctomys
(= Pseudotomus) should be referred. Hethus defines the family:t¢ ‘ Den-
tition as in Sciuride ; skull resembling Castoride, but with the infra-
orbital opening large, a sagittal crest; no postorbital processes; palate
broad ; basioccipital keeled.”

Doubtless [schyromys belongs to an extinct family, but which of the
above names is available for it I do not yet know. I would character-
ize it as follows:

Dentition as in Sciwride ; infraorbital foramen large, superior; ptery-
goid fossa large, with well-developed exterior as well as interior walls;
a sagittal crest.

The superior position of the infraorbital foramen and the well-devel-
oped pterygoid lamine are characters found in the Muride.

But one species of this genus is known.

CASTOR Linn.

Syst. Nat. I, p. 78, 1766.—Steneofiber, E. Geoffr., Revue Encyclopédique, 1833.—‘*‘Chali-
comys Meyer, Neues Jahrbuch, 1838, p. 404, et 1846, p. 474.”—Palewocastor Leidy,
Extinct Mammalia Dakota and Nebraska, 1869, p. 338.

The family of the Castoride differs from the Sciuride in the absence
of postorbital angles or processes and the presence of a prolonged tube
of the meatus auditorius externus. In both of these points it agrees
with the Haplodontiide, a family which Mr. Alston has distinguished

*Catalogue Method. et Descr. de Vertcbrés Foss. dele Bass. de la Loire, 1853, p. 32.

t+ Annual Report U. 8. Geol. Survey Terrs. 1873 (1874), p. 477.
¢ Proceed. Zool. Society London, 1876, p. 78.

No. 2.) COPE ON MIOCENE RODENTIA. 369

from the Castoride on various grounds. I do not think any of his char-
acters are tenable, excepting that drawn from the form of the mandible,
which is expressed thus in Mr. Alston’s diagnosis: ‘angular portion of
mandible much twisted.” This character will be better described as
follows: Angle of mandible with a transverse edge due to inflection on
the one hand, and production into an apex externally; the inflection
bounding a large interno-posterior fossa.

Mr. Alston enumerates four genera of Castoride—Castor, Diobroticus,
Steneofiber, and Castoroides. J. A. Allen has shown that the last-named
genus cannot be referred to this family. The characters of Diobroticus,
as given by Alston, are as follows: “Skull much as in Castor. Third
upper molar and lower premolar elongate, with four enamel folds, the
rest with only two; all the folds soon isolated.” This diagnosis appears
to separate the genus satisfactorily. The definition of Steneofiber is as
follows: ‘Parietals not parallelogrammic; interparietal subhexagonal;
basioccipital not concave; grinding teeth as in Castor, the subsidiary
folds sooner isolated.” The distinction from Castor here rests exclu-
sively on the forms of the parietal, interparietal, and basioccipital bones.
This kind of definition is always of questionable validity, as the terms
‘“‘parallelogrammic,” “hexagonal,” etc., are not intended to be exactly
used and cannot be exactly applied. The Castor (Steneofiber) peninsu-
latus illustrates this fact, for there is no striking difference in the
forms of the two bones to which these terms are applied, as compared
with the Castor fiber. The basioccipital bone differs from that of the
beaver, but not so as to conform to J. W. Alston’s diagnosis of the genus
Bea byiber. Its inferior surface is concave, but doubly so, as a keel
occupies the median line. In the S. viciacensis, according to Filhol,
this region is shallowly concave, without median keel. Although im-
portant as specific characters, these variations do not appear to me to
require the recognition of as many genera. The possession of the epi-
trochlear foramen in the S. viciacensis is at first sight an important
character. Mr. Filhol, however, informs us that of thirty-four humeri
which he has studied, sixteen possess the foramen, and in eighteen it
is wanting.

The Castor tortus was described by Leidy from the Loup Fork forma-
tion. He coined the subgeneric name Hucastor for it without corres-
sponding definition. In his monograph of the Castoride, J. A. Allen
referred this species* to a genus distinct from Castor, and defined it,
using for it Leidy’s name Hucastor. This genus appears to me to. be
valid. The three genera of Castoride will then be defined as follows :
Molars and premolars with one inner and two or three outer folds ......-..... Castor.

“Inferior premolar and third superior molar elongate, with four enamel folds; the rest
DOV RAE Si IAL Ws GON SL peewee I a nsw nhs nce wn rence oped Diobroticus.

Superior premolar enlarged, with one inner fold; inferior molars small, with two
RECO emt Attala I 3 oon no wen mnie meme, gone esos tincastor.

* Monographs of North American Rodentia, Coues and Allen, U. S. Geol. Surv..Terrs.,
1877, xi, p. 450.

24 GB

370 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

Some affinity probably exists between this family and the Mylagaulide,
which followed in the Loup Fork epoch.

The species of Castor may be distinguished as follows. I do not know
the OC. nebrascensis* from the White River, nor the occipital bone of the
C. pansus,t from the Loup Fork formation.

I. Basioccipital bone deeply concave below:

Angle of lower jaw not deflected... ....-. ..---.------ ------ ------ ------ C. fiber.
II. Basioccipital shallowly concave below:

Angle of lower jaw deflected -.--.--.-..-...------ ---+------ =--=-- C. viciacensis.
III. Basioccipital concave below with a median keel: angle of lower jaw not deflected.

IPE enI®) WARS SAD WSC 45-25 ssSsee SoSs55 se55s5 SsSse3 o6055- C. peninsulatus.

alabemarrOWwelresiZeismallser san sees eee see ee eee neater C. gradatus. -

CASTOR PENINSULATUS Cope.

Steneofiber ? nebrascensis Leidy, Cope, Bulletin U. S. Geological Survey Terrs. V,
1879, p. 55.

This species is about the size of a large prairie marmot— Cynomys ludo-
vicianus. It was abundant in Oregon during the period of the Truckee
Miocene. Leidy originally described the closely allied C. nebrascensis —
from the White River beds of Nebraska, but I have never obtained it
from that formation. Another and similar species, C. pansus Cope, is
common in the Loup Fork beds of Nebraskaand New Mexico.

Several well-preserved skulls from Oregon display characters not vis-
ible in specimens heretofere collected, and which enable me to make
fuller comparisons with the European C. viciacensis, so fully described
by M. Filhol.i

The postorbital constriction is much greater in this species than in
the ©. viciacensis, and greater than in the C. nebrascensis from the White
River beds. The straight anterior temporal ridges are in line with the
superciliary borders, and unite into a sagittal crest at the constriction.
In the S. vicitacensis they continue separate beyond this point one-fourth
the distance to the supraoccipital crest. The zygomata are wide, and
the malar ridge is very prominent anteriorly, overhanging the face, and
curving rather abruptly to the base of the muzzle. The latter 1s rather
wide, with parallel sides, and is flat above. The brain-case expands
rather abruptly from the interorbital constriction, and is rather flat
xbove. The infraorbital foramen is a narrow vertical oval and is sit-
nated low down in the vertical] line with the anterior extremity of the
malar angularedge. It isa little nearer the line of the first molar than
the posterior border of the superior incisor. The incisive foramina
are relatively larger than in the beaver, and are chiefly in the premax-—
illary bone. The palate between the anterior molars is as wide as the
trausverse diameter of the first molar. There is no distinct fossa of the

* Stencofiber nebrascensis Leidy, Proceed. Academy Phila., 1856, 89 ; 1857, 89 ; ‘Chali-
comys nebrascensis Leidy, 1. c., 1857, 176; Palwocastor nebrascensis Leidy, Ext. Mamma-
lia Dakota and Nebraska, 1869, p. 338, xxvi, Figs. 7-11.

t+ Steneofiber pansus Cope, Report Capt. G. M. Wheeler, iv, pt. ii, 1877, p. 297.

t Etude des Mammiferes Fossiles de Saint-Grand-le-Puy, Allier. Bibl. de VEcole
des Hautes Etudes, XIX, Art. I, p. 44, 1879.

No. 2.] COPE ON MIJCENE RODENTIA. 371

maxillary bone in front of the orbit as represented by Filhol in the @.
viciacensis. The pterygoid fossa is wide, with the inner process the
longer, and reaching the otic bulla. The latter are large and obliquely
placed; the meatal borders are produced into a short tube which is not
so long as that of the C. fiber. Its superior berder is quite prominent,
overhanging the inferior, and projecting more than represented by Mr.
Filhol in the C. viciacensis. There is a strong ridge of the squamosal
bone extending posteriorly from the base of the zygomatic process,
which overhangs a fossa. This fossa is further define’ posteriorly by
the tympanic tube. The fossa is largerand deeper than in either C. fiber
or C. viciacensis. Below its superior bounding ridge is a large sub-
squamosal foramen. The mastoid bone is distinctly exposed between
the squamosal and the occipital, and its surface is separated from that
of the fcrmer by a groove which is not so well marked in the C. fiber. Its
inferior angle is in contact with the bulla, and is shorter than the parocci-
pital process. The latter is short, not extending below the line of the
condyles, and is directed downwards, not posteriorly as in C. fiber. The
occiput is nearly vertical and flat, excepting laterally, where there are
two fossz, a superior and inferior, the latter the longer, and extending
to the inferior surface.

The premaxillo-maxillary suture is just half way between the anterior
molar and the superior incisor, and is vertical to opposite the middle
of the incisive foramen, and then turns backwards. The fronto-maxillary
and fronto-nasal sutures are in one transverse line across the front.
The malar-maxillary suture is behind the anterior border of the zygoma,
thus confining the malar bone to the zygoma. The latter is much ex-
panded in a vertical direction, but has no postorbital angle, resembling
in this respect the C. viciacensis rather than the C. fiber. Its posterior
portion extends well posteriorly and below almost all of the squamosal
part of the zygoma. The parietal is of a parallelogrammic form; the
anterior inner border cut obliquely by tbe frontal, and the posterior inner
border cut out for the supraoccipital. The latter bone has an oval form,
narrowed anteriorly and truncate posteriorly.

I describe a mandibular ramus ct a second individual. It unfortu-
nately has the coronoid and the angle broken off. The base of the
latter is concave on the inner side. The external face of the ramus is
everywhere convex. The base of the coronoid is separated from the
molar line by a wide groove. The anterior base is opposite the second
molar. The incisive alveolus is continued upwards and backwards, and
ceases in a protuberance which is external to the plate which connects
the condyle with the ecoronoid process, and is separated from it by a
fossa. The condyle is subglobular, and has considerably more external
than internal artieular-surtace. The series of inferior molar teeth is
quite oblique, descending posteriorly.

Dentition.—The grinding surfaces of the superior molars are none of
them longer than wide, and in all but the first the transverse diameter
exceeds the antero-posterior. The dimensions diminish posteriorly in all

By BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [ Vol. VI.

the measurements. There is one inflection of the sheathing enamel on
each side of the crown in all the molars in their present state of wear.
The positions of the lakes indicate that in an earlier stage there were
two external inflections. At present all the molars display a fossette
external to the fundus of the internal inflection. Besides this there are
two others in the first molar, and one other in the fourth. Posterior to
the external inflection there is one fossette in the first and third molars,
two on the fourth, and none on the second, where it is probably worn
out. According to Leidy there are three in this position in all the mo-
lars in the C. nebrascensis, and two in the position first described. <Ac-
cording to Filhol, there is but one in each position, in about the same
stage of wear, in the C. viciacensis.

The inferior molars display a deep external inflection, and three trans-
verse lobes on the inner side. These probably represent inflections at
an earlier stage of wear; the median one is still continuous with the
sheathing enamel on the first molar (Pm. IV). Thesizes of the inferior
molars increase anteriorly regularly, excepting that the first is relatively
a little longer than the others.

Measurements of skull.

M.
enoth from inion to edge.of nasals...- - 22. 522-5 to conioscis oe wae y= eee . 067
Length from edge of nasals to interorbital constriction...--...---.-----.------ 034
Length of muzzle to preorbital angle of maxillary -.--....--..---- ---: --2----. . 018
Widihofiskall at paroccipitals 2s... ss. se se-eisec-ee ee See en ee eee ee eee . 025
Width of skull at posterior edge of squamosal ...--..-..-.....---. aesconacass . 034
Width at zycomata posteriorly: 2s. (hss. usec os eee ee Se eee . 056
Widsh at interorbitall constrichione=---. fo) a coe an foal e eolee ee eee eee . 006
Width between anterior parts Of OrDilSs-4- 2s -2s saeco ee eee eee ee eee Eee . 0275
Wadth-at base of muzzle<2 2. 5.223802 2.52 055 eee ae ee . 018
Length from occipital condyle to front of otic bulla, inclusive.---_. -... ..---. . 018
ieneth from ‘bulla to last molar ‘tooth... - 2-2-5 2-2-5. e-em. 5 seme eee . 008
Length from first molar to base of incisor ....-.-..---------.- sue e aan cee e sae . 023
aeacth.of superior molar semes::: 5-0) 5 io) neh eaove es soe hee eee eee . 0195
Diameters of first molar } anteroposterior. ...--..-..-------.-----+-+--------- . 0045
UlPh SW Gs) pe oe ee DE De Od ObOOS0 ADCO Rabo sade nascca Sece . 0045
Diameters of fourth molar} SURES KOMUSIENONS 2oSa2- 23253 boo ses02 sass 22 22222 ue
TLATISVCLS Coes oie cnr tosee Seren us ie eee ene eee . 0035
Measurements of mandible.
bene bhiefrom cond ylesto incisor: toobhis- 25 se een sees ee eee eee eee eeeee . 0390
Bensth from incisor to Pi. VV"... 2.2... 5... se tenn ce eeepiosck oe-e ke . 0105
Ihenathyor inferiormolanseries\-.- 31s. 22: os seis ees eee es eeee eee Oe eee eeeee . 0145
Dianieters of Pin. Te ; ANGEFOPOStELION: 22 [56 antec eteiiss ese se oie ee ee eee . 0047
: PEAS VEISC (3. 2)hac Sebocecieccnce sees seats esis eco eee .0040
Diamobars vee Me ANLELOPOSbELIOL, <b. ce sisoke ces ss eocc ce reeectisce ne ener eee . 0030
HEANSVETSC) isnt se) Scis sfore ieee mine meeeee esis eee eee Bees . 0040
DinceetorsonM: Iv} BNPETLOPOSberiGN, Lee... 46 ieee seer ae eee ale pe eee . 0030
KTADSVCLSC) Sees seio seed esis Jae ste ee eae ee . 0035
Deépthioframusiat:- diashemaweeosoweeee eos. se emcteee ose eee eee . 0100
Depth of ramus a@thiPm.: FV ee oe a se ee ee 2 ER ee ee ee ee eae

Déepshcoframus) at IVD see SSS ae a ab actin Sa pee e eo cee ee eee LO

No. 2.) COPE ON MIOCENE RODENTIA. aie

A few bones accompany the mandible, all having been cut from the
same fragment of matrix. The head of the femur is perfectly round,
and is bounded by a well-defined neck. The great trochanter incloses
a large fossa. The lesser trochanter is large; the third trochanter is
not prominent as it isin C. viciacensis. The shaft is generally flattened,
with its long diameter transverse. The condylar cxtremity is flattened,
and the rotular groove is wide, and the condyles well separated. The
epicondylar angles are distinct, but not so prominent as in S. viciacensis
(see Filhol, U. ¢., Pl. VI, Figs. 13, 14). The general form of the femur
is robust, as in that species.

The distal extremity of the tibia resembles that of Sciwride generally,
especially in the large size of the external posterior angle. Its diameters
are small, and the distal part of the shaft is slender and subcylindrical.
The crest extends well down from the proximal end, being much stronger
than in the true squirrels, and bounds a longitudinal fossa. The fibular
facet of the tibia overhangs extensively, and bounds a rather narrow
proximal fossa. This continues into a narrow shallow groove on the
posterior face of the shaft, which disappears near the middle of its
length. The proximal half of the shaft is much compressed. The inner
face is smooth and gently convex. The crest sinks rapidly into the
head, and the femoral facets are well separated. The tibia resembles
that of C. viciacensis, but is more compressed in its proximal half.

Measurements of hind leg.

M.
IL@GN OF UBM. 5 Seo oko base sao de cose bpRSUoros Beebo ee enodsr olccod edaecord 057
Wuirdilvormremtur at ihealet seta ses ol sh ES . 019
Width of femur shaft below third trochanter ....-.-. -:2---. - -----0 s2es-3- 2 oes . 009
Nirdlulmo ister at eplcomdiglesw a2 sou meceige ise eae see rtate ie mist han cele ceo oo OLD
NicieoMmcon dy lLeskorlemurssaane cies saree sme soso od aeee eed elaleineeice nel meee sa '= . 013
AITEELO-POStELIOL ClamMOLer ab CONGWICS ccc seene seme. sasccis See's! o aimin sis os <a) oeem . 011
Antero=posterior diameter of héad== =< -lsosb.s.2-2 5. 32-5. 2+ ee eee ee . 009
> 7 3)
Diameters of head of tibia } anteroposterior ..-..------+-----+-----+--------- - 012
TALS VePSC* a-ms sashes -Soece Bskteg- sce cee Mace s- . 014
Diameters of distal end of tibia § anteroposterior -..-.------+----+---+------+ weet
RAMS VCLSO nse seem ie wel ee Saeweers oe eats 20s WUeD
a * )
Antero posterior diameter} above middle... ---- .-+-++-+++ +++ ++2-2+ 2222-025 OW
below middlese sae { O5) 22) be te A sce (00d

I have referred to this species in former catalogues of te 3 ver “abe ate
fauna of Oregon as the Castor nebrascensis of Leidy. It is very nearly
allied to that species, but I find the following differences: First, the
postorbital constriction is narrower; second, there are fewer fossettes
on the posterior half of the molar teeth, but one or two. Leidy figures
two or three in the species described by him.

MYLAGAULUS Cope.

Bulletin U. 8. Geological Survey of the Territories, IV, p. 384, May 3, 1878
Inferior molars three, rootless; the first much larger than the others.
Enamel inclosing the first molar not inflected; but numerous fossettes

374 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL.

on the grinding surface of the crown, whose long diameter is antero-
posterior.

The only lower jaw of a species of this genus in my possession presents
a small part of the base of the angle and of the coronoid process. These
parts are so nearly in the plane of the incisive alveolus as to lead to
the belief that the genus Mylagaulus belongs to the suborder Sciwro-
morpha. The rootless teeth with deep enamel fossettes approximates
it to the Castoride, but it appears to me that a new family group must
be established for its reception.* Such characters are the presence of
only three inferior molars, and the entire independence of the enamel
fossettes of the external sheathing enamel. It is worthy of investigation
whether the Hystriz refossa Gery. has any relation to this family.

As a generic feature, the preponderance of the first true molar over
all the others isremarkable. It performed the greater part of the masti-
catory function, as the second molar is a small tooth, and the third one
quite insignificant, and in the JZ. monodon probably early shed.

The genus is only known from the Loup Fork formation. There are
two species, both from the adjacent regions of Kansas and Nebraska.

MYLAGAULUS MONODON Cope.

American Naturalist, 1881, July.

The larger species, and represented by a left mandibular ramus, from
which the more fragile parts have been broken. The form of the ramus
is rather compressed and deep, and the line of molar teeth is very little
oblique to its plane. The diastema is short and concave, and the in-
cisive alveolar margin is elevated. The base of the coronoid process
originates opposite the middle of the second molar. The internal and
external faces of the ramus are nearly plane, and the inferior border is
transversely rounded behind the position of the incisive alveolus. The
The masseteric fossa is not defined below, and its anterior oblique bound-
ing ridge is indistinct.

The alveolus of the third molar is close to the fundus of the incisive
alveolus, and is so shallow as to lead to the belief that it is readily and
early shed. Taoat of the second molar is much deeper; it is small, and
its long axis is directed‘at 45° angle inwards and forwards. The ledge
between it and the base of the coronoid process is rather wide. The
masticating surface of the first molar is longer than wide, forming an
oval rather narrower anteriorly than posteriorly. Its extent on a line
drawn through the centers of the alveoli is twice as great as that of the
second molar. The fossettes are linear, and lie in three parallel lines.
The internal line contains three fossettes, the middle one three, and the
internal one two. The anterior one of the internal line does not extend
so far anteriorly as the extremities of the other two lines; its posterior
end also is not in line with the posterior fossette of the same line, but
begins opposite the space between it and the last fossette of the middle

*See American Naturalist, July, 1331, where this is done.

No. 2.) COPE ON MIOCENE RODENTIA. 375

series. The inferior incisor is rather large. Its section is nearly trian-
gular. The enamel face is entirely smooth.

Measurements. M.
Length of ramus included in chord of incisor tooth ...--...----.-----.-------- - 0300
Pe eeu MOTT GHOLAMOlME SETIESL S322 so cias ola =o Sinan oe Su vase so seesmaae mee geaene OF0U
Diameters grinding surface M. I ; ANELOPOSteLiOL ---- .-- 2-2 - 22 cee naan2 sone 0105

LTANSVETSOeascas 2s wc oclewe ceeis sae Sees . 0050
Pevanon erpdine surace, M. Io,inner side... 22. 2... 252 cen. acen wees cone oe . 0032
ie OF CLES IRIII sas 5o8 po Sccu ese Seb bone (CSUs eECEO BEES pe BCee eer oem.noce<% . 0100
Madphianteriorsurtace Of INCISOL .S<o5s/.Se0 2. ston = ope he cciclses (esses sin aeelsese . 0050
Rerguntee ee Canns) ay Vega acs satiate Jae wisn! anion ainsi Gotews = wc » wl acicate ee ees

This species was about the size of the wood-chuck (Arctomys monaz),
to judge by the dimensions of its lower jaw. It is larger than the J.
sesquipedalis, and has a different arrangement of the enamel fossettes.
In that species, instead of being in three parallel lines, the middle line
is only represented by its extremities. At the middle of the crown the
fossettes of the internal line are incurved so as to be nearly in contact
with the fossettes of the external line.

The Mylagaulus monodon was discovered by Wilbur J. Brousin Hitch-
cock County, Nebraska.

HELISCOMYS Cope.

Synopsis of New Vertebrata from Colorado (Miss. Pub. U.S. Geol. Survey Terrs. ), 1873
(October), p. 3; Annual Report U. S. Geol. Survey Terrs. 1873 (1874), p. 475.
Inferior molars four, rooted, the crowns supporting four cusps in trans-

verse pairs. <A broad ledge or cingulum projecting on the external side

from base of the cusps. The inferior incisor compressed, not grooved,
and with the enamel without sculpture.

This genus is only represented by a small number of specimens,
which are mandibular rami exclusively. Its special affinities therefore
cannot be ascertained, and even its general position remains somewhat
doubtful. There is some probability however that it belongs to the
Myomorpha, as the type of dentition is much more like that of the gen-
era of that group than those of the Sciuromorpha. To the Hystrico-
morpha it does not belong.

As compared with known genera of Myomorpha, it is at once separ-
ated from many of them by the presence of a premolar tooth. Among
recent genera of this suborder, Sminthus possesses this tooth in both
jaws, and Meriones in the upper jaw only. It is present in both jaws in
the Sciwromorpha generally. The tubercles of the teeth resemble those
of the Muride, but their disposition is unlike that of any existing North
American genus. A remote approximation to it is seen in the genus
Syllophodus* of the Bridger Eocene formation, where there are four
subquadrate molars with tubercles; but the latter form two transverse
crests, with an additional small intermediate tubercle, and the wide
cingulum is absent.

But one species of Heliscomys is known, the H. vetus.

* Myops Leidy (‘‘ MW. ysops 2) preoccupied.

376 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

MYOMORPHA.
EUMYS (Liedy nom.) Cope.

Annual Report of the U. S. Geological Survey of the Territories, F. V. Hayden
in charge, 1873 (1874), p. 474.—Humys Leidy (name only), Proceedings Academy
Philada. 1356, p. 90; loc. cit. 1857, p. 89; Extinct Mamm. Dakota and Nebraska,
p- 342.

Dental formula: I. +; C. 9; M.2. Crowns of the superior molars sup-
porting two external cones, and two internal tubercles of crescentic
section which communicate with the former by transverse ridges. In-
ferior molars of similar constitution, but reversed, the conic tubercles
being interior and the crescentic exterior. The posterior tubercles of the
posterior molars reduced, and an additional one on the anterior extremity
of the first molar. Superciliary ridges none, but the supraorbital bor-
ders converging towards the middle line, and meeting above the post-
orbital region. No indication of postfrontal processes. Infraorbital
foramen rather large above, terminating below in a vertical fissure. Inci-
sive foramen entering the maxillery bone extensively. Incisor teeth not
grooved.

I only know this genus from the cranium anterior to the pterygoid
region, the mandibles, and the dentition. These parts display the char-
acters of the Muridc, and in particular of the existing genus Hesperomys.
The only character which I can find which has enabled me to distinguish
ELumys from the latter genus is the extension upwards of the orbital fos-
sz so as to form an interorbital crest. In none of the Sigmodont genera
of North America are the supraorbital borders contracted in this way,
but the crest is seen in Fiber and in various degrees in the genus Arvi-
cola, being as distinct as in Humys in A. xanthognathus.*

A single species is certainly referrible to this genus, the L. elegans,
which was abundant during the White River Miocene epoch. I have
referred to the same genus a second species, in which the same charac-
ters are seen in the inferior molars; but as the frontal region is un-
.known, the reference was provisional only. This is the Hesperomys
loxodon* Cope, of the Loup Fork Mioceneof New Mexico, a much smaller
Species than the LH. elegans.

The typical species was originally described by Leidy, who gave it
the generic name which I have adopted; but he at no time character-
ized the genus, or showed how it differed from others already known.
This was first done by myself as above cited.

HESPEROMYS Waterhouse.

This recent genus had a representative in the Miocene period in North
America, so far as the characters of the skull and dentition may be con-

_* See Coues, U. 8. Geol. Surv. Terrs. XI, Pl. IV, fig. 54.

No. 2.] COPE ON MIOCENE RODENTIA. OTT

sidered to be conclusive in evidence. It is not very probable that the
indications thus obtained will be invalidated by other portions of the
skeleton.

The molars are 3, and the crowns support alternating tubercles sepa-
rated by shallow open transverse valleys. These are, one on the inner
and two on the outer sides of the superior series, and one on the outer
and two on the inner side of the inferior. In the recent species, (H.
leucopus) there are two inflections on the inner side of the first molar,
but in the species here described that tooth is constricted at the posi-
tion of the anterior internal loop, and does not regain its width, but
continues narrowed to the anterior extremity. Theinfraorbital foramen
is rather large.

It is probable that there is a second species of this genus in the Loup
Fork beds besides the H. loxodon Cope.

PACICULUS Cope.

Paleontological Bulletin No. 31, p. 2, Dee. 24, 1879; Proceedings American Philosoph.

Society, 1879 (1880), p. 371.

Superior molars three, rooted. Enamel forming three entrant loops
on the external face of the crown, and one on the internal face.

While the number of the superior molars of Paciculus is as in the
Muride, the details of their structure is much as in Dasyprocta and
Fiber. Two species are known.

In the P. lockingtonianus the cranial characters are as follows: The
infraorbital foramen is very large, with a general triangular outline.
' The superciliary borders and temporal ridges are well separated, and
there is no sagittal crest. There are no postorbital processes. The
otic bullz are large, and furnished with a very large meatus audi-
torius externus. The malar is a narrow bone extending to the glenoid
cavity posteriorly, and resting anteriorly on a prominent peduncle com-
posed of the maxillary bone. It probably reaches the lachrymal.

This genus is probably one of the Muride, and a near ally of Sigmedon
and Neotoma. It differs from these genera in having three external in-
flections of the enamel in the superior molars instead of two. It dif-
fers from Hesperomys as these two genera do, viz, in having deep
enamel inflections instead of tubercles and valleys. It is true that the
deepening and narrowing of the valleys of the molars of Hesperomys
would result after wear in a pattern like that of Neotoma. The same
process in Humys would produce a pattern much the same as that of
Paciculus, but that genus is further characterized by the contraction of
the postorbital region and the production of a sagittal crest.

Two species of this genus are known to me, P. insolitus, a smaller,
and P. lockingtonianus, a larger one. Both are from the Truckee beds
of Oregon. They demonstrate an early origin for the American type
of Neotoma, as contemporaries of the first of the Hesperomys.

378 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. Iv.

ENTOPTYCHUS Cope.

Paleontological Bulletin No. 30, p. 2, December 3, 1878; Proceedings American Philo-
sophical Society, 1878 and 1879, p. 64.

Family Saccomyide.* The cranium is elongate, and presents inflated
periotic bones, and slender zygoma. The foramen infraorbitale is small
and anterior in position, entering the maxillary bone near Pits suture
with the premaxillary.

Generic characters.—Molars 4-4, rootless, and identical in structure.
The crowns are prismatic, and in the young stage present a deep inflec-
tion of enamel from one side, the external in the superior teeth, the
internal in the inferior. After a little attrition, the connection with the
external enamel layer disappears, and there remains a median trans
verse fossette, entirely inclosed by enamel. The tooth then consists of two
dentinal columns in one cylinder of enamel, separated by a transverse
enamel-bordered tube. Incisors not sulcate.

The teeth of this genus differ from those of Perognathus in being with
out distinct roots, and in having the enamel loop cut off and inclosed.
In Dipodomys, the molars are undivided simple prisms.

The skull is compact, and does not display the vacuities or large fora-
mina seen in some genera of Rodentia. The incisive foramina are rather
small and posterior in position. There is a foramen on the side of the
alisphenoid, which is nearly in the position of the anterior alisphenoid
canal of the Thomomys bulbivorus. The foramen rotundum is imme-
diately below and within the anterior part of the glenoid cavity. The
foramen ovale is not distinct from the foramen lacerum anterius, and is
on the ex ernal side of the apex of the petrous bone. The other fora-
mina lacera are closed, so that the carotid foramen pierces the inner
side of the otic bullz. The condyloid toramen is close to the occipital
condyle. The meatus anditorius externus is at the extremity of atubu-
lar elongation of the bulla, and is separated by a space from the zygo-
matic process of the squamosal bone. Between the bases of these is a
fossa which is bounded above by a ridge as in the genus Castor. Below
this ridge is a subsquamosal foramen, and above it a postsquamosal.
There are no postpareitals nor mastoid foramina.

There are deep pterygoid fosse, whose inner bounding laminz unite
on the middle of the palatine border, and whose external lamine are
continuous with the posterior extremity of the maxillary bone. The
otic bulle are not separated very distinctly from the mastoid. The
-latter looks like a continuation of the former, as in Thomomys, and occu-
pies considerable space between the exoccipital and the squamosal.
The latter sends downwards a process just posterior to the auricular
meatus, which forms the handle to a hammer-shaped laminar bone.
This is, no doubt, a dismemberment of the squamosal, as a similar pro-
cess iscontinuous with that bone in Thomomys, and one somewhat dif-

* Geomyide Alston.

No. 2.) COPE ON MIOCENE RODENTIA. BF 4)

ferent is seen in Neotoma, Hesperomys, &c. Supraoccipital distinct on
superior face of skull. Paroccipital process small or none. Mastoid
elongate, adherent to otic tube. No postfrontal process.

A well-marked character which distinguishes the skull of this genus
from Thomomys, Dipodomys, &c., is the separation of the meatal tube
of the otic bulla from the zygomatic process of the squamosal bone by
an interspace. There is no postsquamosal foramen in the recent genera.
In Dipodomys the otic bulla is more largely developed, but it has the
anterior bottle-neck prolongation seen in Hntoptychus.

In the mandible the coronoid process is developed, but. is not large
It is well anterior to the condyle, which it somewhat exceeds in height
The incisive aveolus forms a convexity on the outer side below the coro-
noid process. The angle is prominent, and is at first incurved below,
and then turned outwards at the apex. The degree of obliquity of the
grinding surfaces of the molar teeth vary with the species.

Parts of several skeletons are in my collection, but I cannot attach
them to any cranium. They present the general characters of the genus
Thomomys so far as they go. I describe some bones which apparently
belong to one individual. The sacral vertebre carry neural spines.
There was evidently a well-developed tail. The scapula has a narrow
glenoid cavity ending in a tuberosity adjacent to the coracoid hook.
The spine is robust, terminating in a stout acromion. The tuberosities
of the humerus are situated below the head, and are so rounded off as
to be little prominent. One side of the greater is continued into a very
prominent deltoid crest, which terminates abruptly below. The ilium
has a narrow trilateral neck, and a projecting anterior inferior spine.
The pubis is directed posteriorly at the base. The femur is not elon-
gate. Its trochanters are well-marked, including athird. This is want-
ing in Thomomys bulbivorus. The neck rises obliquely to the ratherlarge
head. The condyles are short and spreading, and the rotular groove is
Short and rather wide, and with well-marked ridges. The tibia is much
curved backwards at the proximal part. The crest is acute and is di-
rected outwards, but does not project much at the head.

Individuals of this genus were very abundant in Oregon during the
middle Miocene epoch. Theyrepresentseveral species, but how many it is
difficult to determine. The most noteworthy variations are found in the
development of superciliary ridges; then there are modifications in the
forms of the premolar teeth, differences in the length and width of the
muzzle, and some range in dimensions.

The following table represents the characters of the species so far as I
can determine them at present:

A. Thickened superciliary ridges wanting; front wide.
Superciliary borders obtuse, not continued into temporal ridges; front flat, or
or little concave; premolars narrow.

PPS ro Oy OS Kl RO4 Oe scmrente mie ae Sajat a axa wm meses Scin soyne aig EB. planifrons.
SHAUN OMS RCS mememmepenslcidanie dc <'s,n)05 <:00jassnieccins ohanem amas ..B, minor.

880 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

Superciliary borders sharp, vertical, continued into two straight temporal
angles, which form a V.

Premolars narrow; size of H. planifrons ...---.-----.--.----- EE. lambdoideus.
AA. Thickened ridge on the superior side of each supercilium; front narrower.
Superciliary ridges soon discontinued ; size of EH. planifrons-..---.- LH. cavifrons.

AAA. Superciliary ridges much thickened, soon uniting, and closing the frontal
groove behind. Front narrowest.
Premolar widened at the base; size of HE. planifrons.-..-.-..----. E. crassiramis.
Some differences in the form of the mastoid bone may be observed in
species of this genus. Thus it is flat behind, and bears a well-marked
‘lateral occipital” angle in H. planifrons and H. lambdoideus, while in
the remaining species it is convex, and with the angle little apparent.
In some specimens the loss of the hammer-shaped squamosal dismem-
berment, which I will call the posttympanic bone, gives a deceptive ex-
tension forwards to the mastoid.
Parts of more than a hundred individuals of Entoptychus are in my
collection.

PLEUROLICUS Cope.

Paleontological Bulletin, No. 30, p. 3, December, 1878; Proceedings Amer. Philosoph.

Society, 1878 (1879), p. 66. ;

Family Saccomyide. Superior molars rooted and short-crowned. . The
crowns with a lateral fissure bordered with an inflection of the enamel
sheath, extending to their bases. In the superior molars this inflection
is on the external side, and does not divide the crown. Superior inci-
sors not grooved.

This genus is curiously near to the existing Heteromys and Perogna-
thus, the two genera of Saccomyide with rooted molars. The former
differs in having the molars divided into two columns, each of which is
sheathed in enamel, while Perognathus only ditters, so far as lam aware,
in having the superior incisors grooved. It is also very nearly related
to Entoptychus, and two of the species correspond in various respects
with two of those of that genus. In view of the fact that most of the
specimens of the P. suleifrons are old individuals with well worn molars,
the idea occurred to me that the rooted character of the molars might
be common to the species of Entoptychus, but that it might not appear
until long use had worn away most of the crown, and the protrusion
had ceased. Examination of the bases of the long molars of H. plani- —
frons did not reveal any roots. It is also opposed to this view that the
maxillary bone in the Plewrolici has little depth below the orbital fossa,
appropriately to the short-rooted molars, while the depth is considerable
in the typical Entoptychi, though there is a complete gradation in this
respect. But I have demonstrated satisfactorily that Plewrolicus is a
distinct genus by observations on the P. leptophrys. Some of my indi-
viduals of this species are young, with the crowns of the molars little
worn, yet the roots diverge immediately on entering the alveolus, on
all the molars. In the species of Plewrolicus the lateral fissure of the

No. 2.] COPE ON MIOCENE RODENTIA. 381

crown descends to its base, and hence persists longer than in the typi-
cal Hntoptycht.

I am acquainted with two species of this genus. The posterior part
of the skull of an individual represents a third species, which I refer
provisionally to this genus.

The characters of the species are as follows:

I. Otic and mastoid bulle continuous.
Temporal ridges uniting into a sagittal crest; length of skull .043; supraor-

Duta rid Ses and CONCANG MOUs. eicmipes cite c nn ten a 8 ee pines P. sulcifrons.
Temporal ridges not uniting; length of skull .035; interorbital region flat ; no
MIGOCS o- Sead ee dce SOsG LASSE SSCA SS AS SUE ei ge ee ree an eae aa P. leptophrys.

II. Otic and mastoid bullz separated by a deep groove.
Temporal ridges not united; front concave; size medium; supraoccipital
WHO) 55 cea See Coshad dan a0d adomne cndece BocsGd HOOF OT Se SHenEmEnoe P. diplophysus.

LAGOMORPHA.

PALAEOLAGUS Leidy.

Proceedings Academy Philada. 1856, p. 89; Extinct Mamm. Dakota and Nebraska,

p. 331.— Cope, Ann. Report U. S. Geol. Survey Terrs. 1873 (1874), p. 477.

Family Leporide. Dentition: I. =; C. §; M. £; or, Pm. $, M. 3.
Superior incisors sulcate, inferior incisors not suleate. First and last
superior molars simple, intermediate ones with an enamel inflection of
the inner side, which soon wears out. First inferior molar of one more
or less transversely divided column; other inferior molars consisting of
two columns in antero-posterior relation. No postfrontal process.

The above characters approximate nearly those of the existing genus
Lepus. The only distinction between them signalized by Dr. Leidy, is
the more simple first inferior molar of the extinct genus, which consists
of one column more or less divided. In ZLepus this tooth consists of
two columns, the anterior of which is grooved again on the external
side in the known species. Iam able to reinforce this distinction by a
strong character, viz, the absence of the postfrontal process in Pale-
olagus. As compared with the extinct genus Titanomys of Meyer,*
the difference is well marked, as that genus has the molar teeth } instead
of $. The last inferior molar is cylindric, consisting of but one column.
The first inferior molar consists of two cylinders broadly united, as in
the corresponding tooth of Palaeolagus. As compared with Panolax
Cope,t which is only known from superior molar teeth, this genus may
be at once recognized by thesimplicity of thelast tooth. In Panolax it
consists of two columns.

Dr. Leidy’s descriptions and figures, which are available for the defi-
nition of this genus, relate exclusively to the dentition. Characters

*Amphilagus. Catal. Méth. et Deser. Vert@bres Fossiles de la Bassin de la Loire,
1853, p. 42.
t Report Lieut. G. M. Wheeler, 4 to, IV, p. 296. .

382 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

drawn from the skeleton generally can be derived from my material
and are now given.

The nasal bones are wide, and the suture which separates them both
from the frontal is concave forwards. The median frontal suture is
persistent. The ascending portion of the premaxillary, which attains
the frontal, is very narrow. The superior half of the facial plate of the
maxillary bone is sharply rugose with reticulate ridges, but whether
perforate or not I cannot certainly determine. The foramen infraorbitale
is small and round, and issues below the reticulate portion of the max-
illary. Theoticbullais compressed globular, with very thin walls. The
meatus is large and has prominent lips, which open upwards. The
mastoid is codssified with the bulla, and extends with a dense surface
from behind to above and in front of the meatus. The incisive foramina
are very large, enter the maxillary bones deeply, and are confluent pos-
teriorly. The palate may be said to extend to the last molar, but there
is a deep though narrow median posterior emargination.

The distal extremity of the humerus is not so extended transversely
as in Ischyromys, and exhibits a moderate epicondyle. The inner flange
of the condyles is well developed, and on the posterior face it is supple-
mented by a flange of the external edge of the condyles, which is as promi-
nent or even more so, forming an intertrochlear crest. The arterial
canal is inclosed by a slender bridge, and opens on the inner side above,
and anteriorly below. In an ulna supposed to belong to this genus the
coronoid process is elevated. ‘The radial facet forms a narrow transverse
- plane, nearly divided by a wide anterior emargination. The shaft is
compressed vertico-obliquely. A radius exhibits a transversely oval
humeral face of the head somewhat angulate at a superior and an
infero-lateral extremity, which are diagonally opposed to each other.
Beyond the middle the shaft becomes wider, and is flattened obliquely.

The peduncle of the tlium has a triangular section, the anterior face
being the narrowest, and inclined at a little more than a right angie to
the interior face. It expands but little at the sacral extremity, and the
crest is very Short. The external angle of the peduncle is very promi-
nent and runs into the anterior extremity of the crest, from which pro-
ceeds also the more obtuse angle which is continuous with the pectin-
eal line. A third longitudinal angle is seen cn the middle of the external
side of the sacral extremity, which is not continued on the peduncle.
There is a prominent tuberosity on the median or first-described angle, on
the peduncle which may or may not be homologous with the anterior
inferior spine. There is no tuberosity on the inner bounding angle of
the inner face as is seen in Gymnoptychus. The pubis leaves the ilium
at right angles. Acetabulum nearly round. |

The femur has well developed great and little trochanters, and a third
trochanter, which rises from the shaft in line with the inferior border
of the little trochanter. Thefossa ofthe great trochanter is well marked.
The head is not separated from the great trochanter by a deep emargi-

Wo. 2.] COPE ON MIOCENE RODENTIA. 383

nation, and projects well within the internal face of the shaft. Its articu-
lar surface is prolonged towards the great trochanter. Fossa ligamenti
teris isolated. The distal extremity of the femur exhibits the superiorly
prolonged patellar groove characteristic of this group of rodents. The
condyles are more than elsewhere produced downwards and posteriorly,
and are well separated.

The spine of the tibia is rudimental, and the crest is very obtuse. The
inferior continuation of the latter forms a prominent reverted keel on
the proximal front of the shaft, which is deeply concave on its inner
side. The posterior face is also concave and is separated by a lami-
nar external bone from the external side. The external border of the
head is not deeply notched asin Panolax. The fibula unites with the
tibia on the proximal part of the latter. The remainder of the shaft is
‘smooth. The external malleolus is large and at right angles to the long
diameter of the distal end of the bone, and its extremity is a facet for
contact with the caleaneum. On its external face is a prominent process
directed backwards. The external trochlear groove is deeper than the
internal, and is well separated from it. The internal malleolus can
scarcely be said to exist. It may be represented by a small process on
the inner side of the extremity of the shaft.

The astragalus is elongate and flat, and the trochlear portion is ob-
lique. The neck is elongate, and convex on the inner side; the con-
striction is on the inner side immediately behind the head. The long
diameter of the latter makes an angle of 45° with the horizontal plane.
The external trochlear are is much larger than the internal. The coty-
lus, which fits the external condyle of the caleaneum, posesses a peculiar
impressed area on its posterior surface. The caleaneum extends nearly
as far anterior to its condyle as posterior. The free portion is subcylin-
dric or subquadrate to the end. The internal process for the astragalus
is quite prominent. The cuboid facet is directed obliquely inwards,
running into a short longitudinal groove. The cuboid extremity is little
depressed. :

The skeletal characters above enumerated were taken from the bones
of P. turgidus and P. haydeni, excepting in the cases of the ulna, radius,
ilium, and caleaneum, which were derived from those of P. haydeni only.

A cast of the cranial chamber of a specimen of Palacolagus haydent
displays the superficial characters of the brain. As in the order gen-
erally, the hemispheres are small and are contracted anteriorly. The
greater part of the cast of the cerebellum is lost, but enough remains to
show that it was large. The olfactory lobes are large; they are not
gradually contracted to the hemispheres, but expand abruptly in front
of them, being separated by a constriction only. They are wider than
long, and than the anterior extremity of the hemispheres. Their cribri-
form surface is wide, and extends backwards on the outer sides. Traces
of the three longitudinal convolutions can be observed on the hemi-
spheres above the lobus hippocampi. The internal and median are con-

4

384 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL

tinuous at both extremities, and extend with the external to the base of
the olfactory lobes. There is no definite indication of the Sylvian fis-
sure. The lobus hippocampi protrudes iaterally a little beyond the bor-
der of the external convolution. Its form is depressed.

As compared with the brain of the rabbit (Lepus cuniculus) figured
by Leuret and Gratiolet*, that of the Palaeolugus haydeni is distinguished
by the absolutely much smaller size of the hemispheres, and by the ab-
solutely larger olfactory lobes, the excess being in transverse dimensions
apd not inthe longitudinal. An important difference is also the absence
of the median posterior production of the hemispheres seen in the rab--
bit, the prolongation in the extinct species being lateral, and extending
little behind the lobus hippocampi. The indications of the convolutions
of the superior surface are similar in the two.

As observed by Leidy, this genus presents the same number of teeth
as in the existing rabbits, viz, 1.2; C.@; M.£; and that the difference
consists in the fact that the first molar possesses two columns, while in
Lepus there are three. Having collected a great number of. remains of
this genus, [am able to show that it is only in the immature state of
the first molar that it exhibits a double column, and that in the fully
adult animal it consists of a single column with a groove on its external
face. The dentition undergoes other still more important changes with
progressing age, so as to present the appearance of difference of species
at different periods. These will be explained under the head of the P.
hnydeni, the most abundantly represented in the collections. It may be
mentioned here that in neither P. haydeni nor P. turgidus is there any
evidence that more than two anterior molars are preceded by deciduous
teeth. The latter are present in many specimens.

Four species of this genus are known to have lived in Colorado during
the White River epoch of the Miocene. Bones of two of the species
have been found also in Dakota. The P. haydeni was probably the
most abundant mammal of the fauna of that period.

Depth of ramus at penultimate molar, 6™™; length of inferior molar series, 10™™;

momhind lobestomolarsi=2esslscieeb coe eee eee sae eee P. agapetillus.
Depth of ramus at penultimate molar, 9™™; length of molar series, 10™™; no third
lobewtoimolars sco. ssc se hens ees an nee pe eee ee eee P. haydeni.
Depth of ramus at penultimate molar, 11™™; length of tooth series, 14™™; a third
posteriorlobelomthemolarss. =. 65 ssc eee eee eee eee eee eee P. triplex.
Depth of ramus at penultimate molar, 12-14™™; length of tooth series, 13-16™™; no.
ibhind lobe Se cenct- tac gos seems Sob aeeeeeneenisee detects P. turgidus.

LEPUS Linn.

Dental formula: I.i; C.$; P-m.$; M. 3. First superior molar sim-
ple; first inferior molar with two external grooves; last inferior molars
consisting of two cylinders. Postorbital processes present.

I am acquainted with but one extinct species of this genus, and this
is from the Truckee or Middle Miocene period. It proves the ancient

*Anatomie Comparée du Systeme Nerveux, Pl. III, Figs. 1, 2.

No. 2.1 ; COPE ON MIOCENE RODENTIA. 385

origin of this genus now so widely distributed over the earth. Species
of Lepus are reported by the Gervais from the Miocene (Montabuzard)
and Pliocene (Montpelier) of France.

LEPUS ENNISIANUS Cope.

This species is abundant in the Miocene beds of the John Day River
Oregon, associated with a species which I cannot distinguish from the
Palaeolagus haydent. The Lepus ennisianus exceeds the last-named species
in dimensions, being intermediate between it and the Palaeolagus turgidus.

The form of the skull and character of the postorbital processes re-
fer this species to the neighborhood of the Lepus auduboni and L. bach-
mant.* The former has the general outline of that of Lepus sylvaticus,
with which it nearly agrees in size. The postorbital processes are free
and shorter and narrower than those of the L. auduboni. The supra-
orbital notch is insignificant, and is not bounded by either an angle of
the border or a process. Behind the postorbital processes the cranium
isnarrower. The parietal region is convex in both directions. The in-
terorbital and base of the nasal region are flat. The middle of the su-
perior part of the occipital projects table-like beyond the lateral portions,
as in recent rabbits. The otic bulla is large and is flattend on the exter-
nal side. The mastoid presents some subvertical grooves. The paroc-
cipital proeess is rather short and is turned backwards at the apex.

The mandible has much the form of that of L. sylvaticus, with cer-
tain differences. A _ slight convexity of the anterior border of the
ascending ramus is the only trace of coronoid process. The posterior
border of the same projects very little behind the condyle, and is but
slightly concave below that point. The inferior border of the masseteric
fossa terminates below the anterior border of the base of the coronoid
process, which is posterior to the corresponding position in L. sylvaticus.
Here the masseteric fossa extends as far forwards as the line of the
posterior part of the fourth inferior molar.

The superior molars have the form usual in this genus. The crowns
are grooved on both the external and internal faces. The first has less
transverse extent than the others (except the sixth), and has a shallow
groove on the anterior face. The sixth molar is a small and simple
cylinder. Of the inferior molars, the first has the greatest antero-
posterior diameter, while the transverse is equal to that of the others.
Of its external grooves the posterior is the strongest. The last molar
is much the smallest, and its section is a figure 8, with the widest circle
next to the fourth molar. The anterior column of the other molars
wears so as to be higher than the posterior. Its inner edge carries a
shallow groove, while the external edge is narrow and smooth, and
their alveoli terminate in a swelling below the first molar (Pm. III).
The groove of the superior incisors is nearer the internal than the ex-
ternal side. The inferior incisors are perfectly flat.

*See Baird, Mammalia of the U. S., Pac. R. R. Surveys, VIII, p. 574.
25 GB

386 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VE

Measurements.
M.
Length of skull from inion to above Pm. II........-.-..----- ----0+ ------ ---- . 048
Length from inion to base of postorbital process (axial) ..-.-..-----.----.---- . 032
Wwadbhvot skulliatrelenoid (cavilbieseesseieee eels ees eeee sale el stele eee teeta . 020
Width of skull behind bases of postorbital processes ...--..----.------.------ . 009
Werbicalediameter OfOLrDiben] 25s e eee een nee ese sect eeneeeeee aaa eae . 0125
Depth of skull and mandible in place, at middle of orbit. .....---....---. --0+ . 0310
Depth of mandible at condyle <-sa- > ea nem ena as eae ese Cee owe oar ne eee . 0310
Length of mandible to exit of incisor........-....-.. ---------.--- Resssosnss- . 044
Mepiwtot mandi blelahlash molatecessessatees esate aces == ae loans eee Saeco eeieee - 011
Depth of mandible at middle of diastema...--. .--2.. ---- sseee eneene ------ oe . 605
Meno th ef superior molar Series -2..)-=— -== <---> eee eee - 012
Whodthrot emaatly @ibOve) ree sina ala oe ee ele eine eae . 002
VASA Oe WEE SR Soa Se nee ee Oger ao Seeman 52 eSsbosace soemce oc 223. - 003.
ene phiet DaferiOn Molar SClOCS: a= 2. ame me mente aia eine . 013
Lon GIP Timnkeygoyy Lei U0) Re SBS 55 See eso eS og ash oss coe sep oadoed aoodso5- . 003

A fragmentary skeleton is associated with jaws and teeth of this spe-
cies, and they are presumably parts of the same animal. They resemble
the corresponding parts of Lepus sylvaticus, but are relatively smaller.
The centrum of a lumbar vertebra is much depressed. There is a prom-
inent anterior inferior spine of the ilium. On the internal side of the
distal end of the tibia the ligamentous groove is more, and its bound-
ing process is less, distinct than in L. sylvaticus.

Measurements.

M.
NWadhhvofcentrum of lumbar vertebra p-ssscees sone ce see ee ae e es Cee eee . 0083
Depth otcentrum of lumbar vertebra). os 2<. . so o5 el Sc. sce msioeae na sean - 0040
Diamerernotacetabulumes a= een = 2 seo ceiee ls = ose ssc gdb eect h eee - 0060

Diameters of head of tibia ; ELLE TUDE GIES EES ae SSS oon oe art
tEANSVELSE 2S osc ook cdees ce cee eee eee . 0105
Diameter of distal end of tibia} PLUG OSM TS 95 oa - 0046

TLAMSVOEISO se. 258 wos Soeclss eA eee - 909

enethiof free part of calcaneum.....5scciese. cabs se he daiece ease ee . 007

From the John Day River and the north fork of the John Day River,
Oregon. C. H. Sternberg.

This rabbit is the oldest species which can be referred to the genus
Lepus. It is dedicated to my friend Prof. Jacob Ennis, of Philadelphia,
the distinguished mathematician and physicist.

= Bs

Art. XVI.—On the Canidz of the Loup Fork Epoch.

By E. D. Cope.

In the sixth volume of the Bulletin of the Survey, commencing at page
177, I gave an account of the Canide of the White River period, in its
two subdivisions, the White River and Truckee epochs. Fourteen
species were enumerated. At present I give a brief review of some of

_ the species of the succeeding or Loup Fork formation, whose age I have

placed as the highest Miocene. The number of species is not so large
as that found in the preceding period, and those that are known ap-
proach more nearly in character the existing dogs. Some of them ex-
ceed in size any of those of the other period, and none are so small as

' the least of the White River forms.

Dr. Leidy has described the Canes haydeni, saevus, temerarius and
vafer, and I have added Canes ursinus and wheelerianus, and Tomarctus
brevirostris.

Dr. Leidy also described an lurodon ferox, whose affinities he did
not decide, but which he thought to combine characters of dogs and
cats. Iam able to prove by material now in my possession, that the
Ailurodon ferox and the Canis seevus are the same species. The genus
Ajlurodon must be added to the Canide, and distinguished from Canis
proper only by the presence of an anterior cutting lobe of the superior
sectorial tooth, the character on which Dr. Leidy originally proposed it.
There are three species of the genus known to me, the 2. saevus, 4.
wheelerianus (Canis Cope), and a new one which I propose shall be called
AY. hyenoides. The character of the superior sectorial tooth above
mentioned is as much like that of Hycna as Felis, and the entire tooth
in the 4. hycnoides is much like that of the former genus. In all three
species the premolars are very robust, as though to aid the sectorials in
crushing bones, as they do in the hyenas. The second metacarpal
bone has on its inner surface a rough area of insertion, such as is pres-
ent in the dogs and absent in the hyznas, and which may indicate five
digits in the anterior foot, the general character of the Canide.

JAELURODON SAEVUS Leidy.
Canis saevus Leidy, Proceed. Acad. Phila.. 1858, p. 21.—lurodon ferox Leidy,
1. ¢., 1858, p. 22; Extinct Mammalia Dakota and Nebraska, Plate I, Figs. 9
and 13, 14.

I have a large part of the skeleton, with entire skull, of an individual
387

388 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

of this species, and part of the skull and dentition of a second. The
characters may be briefly given as follows:

Muzzle narrow and short, with small incisor and canine teeth; inner
anterior basal lobe of superior sectorial very small. First tubercular
very large, subtriangular. Mandibular ramus shallow; the external
face not divided into two planes. Masseteric fossa less defined below.

AQXLURODON WHEELERIANUS Cope.
Canis wheelerianus Cope, Report Explor. Surveys W. of 100th Mer., Lieut. G.
M. Wheeler, IV, pt. ii, p. 302, Pl. LXIX, Fig. 2.

This species was abundant in Nebraska, though originally discovered
in New Mexico in the Loup Fork beds. It is a more robust animal than
the C. saevus, and differs in various details. The skull was of about the
same size, viz., rather shorter, but stouter than that of the Canis lupus.
The characters are as follows:

Muzzle longer; canine teeth large ; external superior incisor nearly as
large at base of crown as canine. Anterior inner lobe of superior sec-
torial well marked. Mandibular ramus deeper and thicker, the external
face in two planes, separated by a rounded angle.

One of the marked characters of this dog is the very large third
superior incisor. In 4. saevus it is much smaller than the canine as in
most Canide. |

ZELURODON HYNOIDES Sp. nov.

This dog is indicated by a fragment of the skull which includes the
right premaxillary, maxillary, and most of the malar bones, codssified.
The alveoli of all the teeth, except the I. 1, are present, and crowns of
all the molars, excepting the Pm. I and M. II. The animal is adult,
and rather aged.

The external incisive alveolus is large, but not equal to that of the
canine. The latter is rather large, while that of the first premolar is
small. The second and third premolars are robust, and somewhat
swollen at the inner base. Each has a short heel but no median pos-
terior lobe. The principal lobe is robust, in the third molar as wide
as long at the base. The internal anterior lobe of the superior incisor
is very large, and its apex is distinct from the inner side of the rest of
the tooth. It is relatively larger than in the Crocuta brunnea. The
anterior lobe is well developed, but does not project so far as the other
lobes. The first true molar is somewhat wider near the inner extremity
of the crown than at the external extremity. The two external tuber-
-cles are not prominent nor well distinguished at the base from the
ledge-like external cingulum. The alveolus of the second molar indi-
cates a medium-sized tooth, and its anterior borders turned posteriorly
so that the long axis is directed as much backwards as inwards. En-
amel entirely smooth.

The muzzle was of medium length. The malar bone has a prominent
acute postorbital process. The orbit was relatively as large as in the

No. 2.) COPE ON CANIDZ OF LOUP FORK EPOCH. 389

wolf. The external infraorbital foramen is relatively and absolutely ’
large, and issues above the anterior border of the superior sectorial

tooth.
Measurements.

M.
Length of entire superior dental series on middle line of palate........----.---. . 067
Berea ttsy OFNIOL AT: SEIIOS Waicekl- ao nce cov vsclcce Caves san saees whites oodde dudes . 045
enepien hl VeOLUS) OL CAMINO =. 5.) eee ia aun decide vcuid wisn db Une nemcenewdtedemaeee . 010
EPR Ole HeMiO lat iSONl Ciera catia e ac aawine set Sew ccce sess sae eeEe tem ene =) Ree . 034
pei On SECLOTIA! OF DA8C/OL, CTOWD hacceey pina ineisi- 2 - <-<'c Sninieinelsje cua wieoussaeeee . 013
ne RO nM SECLODIAL ANMOMb veeme es cb 6 Joa) e\s bls aid/abenio\o ine sic tegeie wie cca seman . 010
Pr eciOlstsh true MOlMeOX CORN Uva se naa cpicmiaeyee be, sana a6 aafeieyemaesplomee noe ele . 008
MMuMOL nrst trae molanexternally sccm + sae ca ce -crcinc.ccimees sa cerewnccce -aae . 013

From the preceding it is evident that the Alurodon hycenoides differs
from the two other species of the genus in its inferior size, the relatively
smaller tubercular molars, which are wider interiorly, and the much
larger internal anterior lobe of the superior sectorial.

The specimen on which it rests was found in Southern Nebraska by
Mr. R. H. Hazard.

CANIS BRACHYPUS §p. nov.

This dog is represented by a considerable part of a skeleton, with
skull, in a moderately good state of preservation. Both superior sec-
torial teeth are wanting, as well as most of the dorsal vertebre and the
humeri, femora, and tibie. Some metacarpals and metatarsals with an
astragalus and some phalanges, give characters of the feet. The size of
the spec ies is about that of the Canis latrans.

As compared with the coyote, the prominent marks of distinction are
the small sectorial teeth, the elevated sagittal crest, and the small
feet. The sectorials have the character I have already ascribed to the
sectorials of all the older carnivora, including the dogs of the Lower
Miocene, and which has since been expressed by Huxley in the term
“microdont.” It prevails also among the dogs of the Loup Fork epoch,
although the species of d/lurodon may be regarded as exceptions. The
sagittal crest commences at a point above the anterior border of the
glenoid surface, and extends posteriorly to above the foramen magnum.
It is quite elevated and thin. Theastragalus is well grooved, and, while
as wide, is a little longer than that of the Canis latrans. The third me-
tacarpal is one-fourth shorter than that of C. latrans, and the fifth met-
atarsal one-fifth shorter than the corresponding bone of C. latrans.

The length of the pelvis is equal to that of the ramus of the mandible,
and is as large as the average of that of those of C. latrans. The cerv-
ical vertebra are about the size of those of the same species, and are
not so much depressed. The crest of the axis is considerably higher,
and extends well fore and aft. The otic bull are not very large, but
are much swollen. The paroccipital processes are well developed, and
project backwards nearly as far as the posterior face of the occipital

390 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. |Vol. VL

condyles. They are connected with the otic bulle by a plate of bone,

which, with the process, is larger than that of the wolf. In this respect
this species differs from all the Truckee and White River species, where
the paroccipital process is either in contact with the bulla or little sep-
arated from it. The mandibular rami are moderately robust, and the
masseteric fossa extends to the line of the posterior border of the first
tubercular tooth. The coronoid process is large and obtuse above.
The angle is prominent.

Measurements.

M.

Length of skull (axial) .----. .-.--. ------ +--+ -- e222 22 cece ee cece ee eee eee ec eee . 196
Length of superior dental series -------------. 22. -----+ +222 cen ee e225 ee eee . 093
Length of inferior dental series ..---.---------- --- ---- +--+ 2202 ++ +--+ e222 eee . 097
Length of inferior premolars.-.---- ----.------------+ -----5 ee eeee eeee eee eee a 049
Length of inferior sectorial base .----- ---- -2-+ 2-22 2-5 -202 --- + eee -- 22 eee eee . 019
Elevation of inferior sectorial from base --...... +2. ------e--0-e- 222-22 ene eee 011
Length of mandibular ramus ...--- ---------- +--+ +22 +--+ --0- eee eee 22 eee eee . 148
Elevation of ditto at coronoid ...-..------------------ -----+ -----+ ---- +222 - . 060
Elevation of ditto at sectorial ...- .----..----------- ------ ------ +--+ ------- . 030
Length of axis with odontoid .-.--.----.--.-------. --+- +--+ --+- +--+ --2-+----- . 044
Length of remaining cervicals --.-.----.---.--------0+ ---- +--+ ---- 222-22 ---- 119
Length of lumbar vertebra ---.---- -2-- ---- 2-22 ---0 200+ ee 22 eee een ee eee - 028
Elevation of lumbar vertebra.----. ---- ---- ---------- e-- 22+ eee eee -- = === ene . 045
Diameters centrum do. ; icacana teenie wea (tau pepngine passers oP ee
THB MIS OES) Gaanoodsooer sooonososcou ceEo so edaase cos oc . 021

Depth of pelvis at obturator foramen, obliquely --.----.---------------------- . 049
Diameter of acetabulum ...-....----------- ------ ------ ------ 2-202 oo = = =e - . 019
Length of third metacarpal ..-.-. ..---2------ s---20 eee eee eee e ee cece ee eee = eee . 048
Length of astragalus ...... ---.------------ -- +--+ ++ +--+ eee e coe eee enn eee . 028
Length of fifth metatarsal ........---------- ------ -----+ --22-- +2 222+ ++ 222-22 . 062

The fine specimen which is above described was discovered by my
assistant, J. C. Isaac, in a sandy bed of the Ticholeptus division of the
Loup Fork formation. This, as I have elsewhere shown, is lower in
position than the True Loup Fork. The locality is near Laramie Peak,
Wyoming Territory.

Art. XVEi.—On a Crayfish from the Lower Tertiary
beds of Western Wyoming.

By A. 8. Packard, Jr.

The discovery of two well preserved specimens of crayfish from the
Lower Tertiary beds of the western border of Wyoming Territory is
notable from the fact that while fossil crayfishes of the Cretaceous and
of probable Pliocene age were known, hitherto none have been found in
the Lower Tertiary deposits. The locality from which the specimens
were brought is the fish beds of the Bear River Valley, situated from
75 to 100 miles a little west of north of Evanston, Wyo., and near the
Utah line. These beds are rich in fine specimens of fossil fishes, includ-
ing a skate, which have been described by Professor Cope. They are
apparently much less rich in insect and plant life than the Green River
beds at Green River City, Wyo.

For the opportunity of examining and describing* these interesting
remains I am indebted to Prof. Joseph Leidy, who received them as a
loan from Dr. J. Van A. Carter, of Evanston, Wyo., in whose possession
they now are. ,

The two specimens are tolerably preserved; the smaller one presents
a dorsal view, and the larger a lateral view, though both have been
somewhat distorted, flattened, or compressed by pressure. The length
of the smaller specimen from the tip of the rostrum to the end of the
telson is 38™™; of the larger individual, 53™™,

The internal layer of the cornea of one eye in the larger individual is
preserved and is black, and of the size usual with living species of the
genus, but no marks of the facets are visible; the diameter of the eye
through the cornea is 3™™.

The first (and smaller) antenne in the small specimen show that they
are much as in the species of Cambarus, the two distal joints of the scape
appearing, however, rather thicker, probably owing to being flattened by
pressure. The flagellum (but one branch is visible) is of the usual
length and thickness. Length of the flagellum in the smaller specimen,
5mm; in the larger, 8™™.

The second antenne are of the usual size; the last joint of the seape of

* A preliminary description of these fossils was published in the American Naturalist

for March, 1880, vol. xiv, p. 222. .
391

392 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

the same size as in Cambarus; the flagellum is of the same size, extend-
ing to the terminal fourth of the abdomen, 7. ¢., quite to the base of the
penultimate abdominal segment. Length of flagellum in the large
example, 44™™.

The scale (exopodite) of the second antenne (Fig. 1) is quite similar in
form to that of Cambarus obesus var. latimanus and C. bartonit, but rather
narrower, the terminal spine being long and slender, acute; the thin edge,
blade, or expansion being narrow, and with the edge gradually narrow-
ing towards the spine, much more so than in C. obesus or bartonti. The
scale has several impressed lines as seen in the living individuals of
Astacus and Cambarus. The upper edge of the scale has a row of pits,
corresponding to the little tubercles for the insertion of the spinules in
the living species. The length of the scale is 7™™, and the breadth 2™™.

The end of the third joint of the first antennal scape in the smaller
specimen reaches to near the end of the last joint of the second antennal
scape, though these parts are somewhat misplaced ; still in this respect
the species is more like those of Cambarus than of Astacus, in which
(A. fluviatilis, from Europe) I observe that the joints of the scape are
very much shorter than in Cambarus, and that the end of the scape does
not reach beyond theend of the penultimate joint of the second antennal
scape.

Rostrum.—The shape of the rostrum can fortunately in the smaller
example be made out tolerably well. Its general shape is much as in
Cambarus affinis, but it is a little narrower, the frontal spine being
unusually long and narrow. The two lateral spines are present and are
situated about one-half way between the base of the rostrum and its
long slender acute tip. This relation is unusual, as in C. affinis, the tip
is much shorter and the lateral spines are situated near the tip. The
edges of the rostrum are raised; the lateral spines at the base, so well,

developed in the living species, are in these fossils obscurely marked on
one side, owing probably to the distortion of the carapace. Length of
rostrum, 7™™; breadth, 3™™.

Carapace.—The transverse curved lineof the carapace (cervical groove
of Huxley) is as usual in living Cambari, and there are indications of
the lateral spines. The surface is irregularly and finely pitted as in most
Cambari. Length (in the smallest and best preserved specimen) of
carapace, 18™™; breadth of posterior edge, 12™™.

The mouth-parts are not indicated, and the branchize cannot be de-
tected so as to ascertain how many pairs there are, and whether the
species belongs to Astacus or Cambarus.

The first, largest pair of legs, are rather shorter and stouter than in
living Cambari, the chela is moderately broad, and of much the same
proportions as in C. afinis, but the pincers (propodite and dactylopodite)
are rather shorter and stouter, and the surface of the chela and of the

-whole limb is much more coarsely tuberculate, being in this respect
somewhat as in Astacus fluviatilis of Europe. The third joint from the

No. 2.] PACKARD ON TERTIARY CRAYFI:H. 393

end (carpopodite) appears to be somewhat shorter than in Cambarus.
Length of chela in the larger example (partly estimated) 19™™; breadth,
s™™; length of carpopodite, 5™™; breadth, 6™"; meropodite, 10™;
breadth, 62™™.

The other pairs of legs are moderately stout and heavily tuberculated
and spined, more so than even in large adult specimens of Astacus flu-
viatilis, which is more coarsely tuberculated than in any species of Caim-
barus which we have seen.

Abdomen.—Of the usual proportion, but the surface is rougher than
usual, more so than in Astacus fluviatilis. The telson and the four rami
of the last pair of abdominal legs are of the same proportions and spined
in the same manner as in Cambarus; the lateral spines of the telson are
stout, proportionately more so than in a specimen of C. affinis twice its
size. The shape of the broad rami is the same as in most, if not all, the
species of Cambarus ; the straight line of small spines near the end of the
exopodite being well marked. Length of abdomen in the small speci-
men, 18™™; breadth of the third segment, 94™™; length of telson, 4™™;
breadth at base, 4™™. No traces of the abdominal appendages (except
the last pair just described) are to be seen.

As to the generic relationship of this species we must remain in doubt
until the discovery of additional specimens enables us to determine the
number of branchiz, the species of Astacus having eighteen, and that of
Cambarus having seventeen, the last pleurobranchia wanting in the latter
genus.

The species of Cambarus, as is well known, are not found west of the
Rocky Mountains, the genus on the Pacific coast being replaced by Asta-
cus, thus presenting an interesting analogy to the European fauna. Now
whether the Green River and Bear Lake beds contained a fauna more
analogous to the Atlantic or Pacific slope is as yet unknown.

However, judging from the form of the scape of the second antenne,
the tertiary species in question is apparently more closely allied to Cam-
barus than to Astacus, though the first pair of legs are rather shorter and
stouter than in Cambarus, and the body more coarsely tuberculated, while
in the large numerous tubercles it resembles Astacus.

Of all the species of Cambarus, judging by our specimens and the fig-
ures in Hagen’s Monograph; in the shape of the rostrum, the form of
the chelz and antennal scale it approaches most closely to Cambarus
afinis. This is an interesting point, since it is evident, as Mr. Uhler
originally pointed out to us, and as we think seems quite evident, that C.
affinis is the most generalized species of all our crayfishes, being appar-
ently the ancestral form from which the other American species have
descended or been thrown off.

We may in this connection refer to the three fossil forms from Idaho
Territory, described * by Prof. E. D. Cope, who has kindly allowed us to
examine his type specimens (those of A. subyrundialis excepted), which

* Proceedings Amer. Phil. Soc., 1870, p. 605, vol. xi, No. 85.

394 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

were collected by Mr. Clarence King, in charge of the Survey of the
Fortieth Parallel. The three species are Astacus subgrundialis, from a
fresh water deposit in the territory of Idaho, near Hot Spring Mountain,
Astacus chenoderma, and A. breviforceps from Catharine’s Creek, Idaho.

They are quite imperfect and are stained nearly black with iron,
and present a very different appearance from the fossils of the Lower
Tertiary (Eocene?) beds from which Oambarus primevus were obtained.
The beds containing the Idaho specimens, according to Cope, were asso-
ciated with fossil cyprinoid fishes (Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., xi, p. 538),
which were deposited in a fresh water basin, once a lake, which has, at
a comparatively late period of geological time, been elevated and desic-
cated. Of the six genera of fishes described from these deposits “one of
them, Semotilus, is recent, while three are closely allied to existing gen-
era, viz, Rhabdofario, Anchybopsis, and Oligobelus. Distichus and
Mylocyprinus are less nearly related to living genera.”

‘The molluscs of this formation have already been described by F. B.
Meek, and they, like the fishes, determine it to be lacustrine and fresh, as
already stated by Professor Newberry. The species are stated by Meek
(Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc. Phil., 1870, 56) to be distinct specifically, and in
some cases generically, from all others hitherto described from the West.
Leidy observes (Proc. Acad. Nat. Se. 1870, 67), that mammalian remains
received from Captain King’s expedition include portions of Mastodon
mirificus and Hquus excelsus, which indicate an age similar to that of
the Bad Lands of the Niobrara, which Hayden calls Pliocene. The re-
mains [of fishes] described in this paper furnish few means of determin-
ing the age of the deposit. There is, however, a great probability of
their being later than Miocene, and nothing to conflict with their determi-
nation as of Pliocene age.”

The fossil remains of two of the three species (I have not seen those of
Astacus subgrundialis Cope) show that they had attained as great a size
as the larger individuals of our existing species, and must have lived
under the most favorable conditions and in fresh water.

It is impossible from the remains to ascertain whether they belong to
the genus Astacus or Cambarus, as these specimens are very imperfect.
A. chenoderma in the carapace and chela seems to approximate in size
and form to Astacus fluviatilis of Europe, and it is not improbable that it
is an Astacus rather than a Cambarus. That this is the case is rendered
probable by the form of the tubercles at the base of the rostrum; but in
the form of the carapace and the absence of the group of spines low
down on the side of the carapace, which are also wanting in Astacus flu-
viatilis but present in Cambarus affinis (though absent in C. bartonit) the
fossil forms are allied-perhaps rather to Cambarus, but as these characters
are inconstant in Cambarus, they may not prove much as to the generic
affinities of the fossils. On the other hand, the rostrum is large, more
triangularly ovate in the Idaho fossils, and the scale of the larger an-

eis

er?
.

No. 2.] PACKARD ON TERTIARY CRAYFISH. } 395

tenn is longer than in living Astact or Cambari. The rostrum of A.
breviforceps is very long and acute.

C. primevus differs from Astacus breviforceps in the narrower chela,
and in the larger tubercles of the surface. It differs from A. chenoderma
in the different shape of the large chelz, those of A. chenoderma being
flatter and thinner, while the ornamentation or sculpturing is also
different, the tubercles of the carapace and limbs being higher and more
prominent in C. primevus than in either of the two Idaho species exam-
ined by me.

The Idaho Astact being probably of more recent age than the Mio-
cene, the Cambarus primevus is exceedingly interesting, from the fact
that it represents a period in which heretofore no fossil crayfish has
been found. The soft, fine, fissile, clayey shales of the Bear River ter-
tiaries contain not only a good many herring-like fish, but also genuine
skates. The presence of land plants mingled with marine animals,
shows that the waters were fresh, but communicated with the sea; the
conditions were apparently those of a deep estuary into which fresh
water streams ran, and in these rivers lived the crayfish. The deposits
were probably Eocene, if these divisions are to be retained for the Ter-
tiary deposits of the West, and may have been laid down nearer the
ocean than those of Green River. At any rate, it is safe to say that the
Cambarus primevus existed in the Bear River basin in early Tertiary
times (the Green River epoch), while the Idaho Astaci were of much
later age, possibly of so-called Pliocene or the transition period which
connected the Tertiary with the Quaternary period. The Cambarus
primevus may therefore be regarded as probably an Hocene crayfish.

It thus appears that there is a tolerably complete set of forms of the
modern type of crayfish, beginning with the Cretaceous period and ex-
tending through the Lower and Upper Tertiary, and culminating in the
present assemblage of Astact and Cambari, with allied forms peopling
the cooler parts of the northern hemisphere.

It was the intention of the writer to examine into the geological suc-
cession of the crayfishes, but since the specimens were received for exam-
ination the excellent and thorough work of Professor Huxley, entitled
‘The Crayfish,” has appeared, and his inquiries into the geological suc-
cession and probable genealogy of the existing crayfish completely cover
the ground. We will condense the statements of Professor Huxley, in
order that the reader may see the interest to be attached to the discovery
of the Wyoming fossils.

While the shrimps or Macrura date back to the Carboniferous, being
there represented by Anthrapalemon, with, however, no special affini-
ties to the Astaci, it isnot until we ascend to the Middle Lias and strata
belonging near the top of the Jurassic series that we find in the genus
Eryma, of which some forty species have been recognized, a genus which
is closely allied to Astacus and Cambarus. It was, however, a.marine
form, and no fresh-water types existed in the fresh-water beds of the

396 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vel. VL

Wealden. ‘In the marine deposits of the Cretaceous epoch, however,
astacomorphous forms, which are known by the generic names of Hoplo-
paria and Enoploclytia, are abundant.

“The differences between these two genera, and between both and
Eryma, are altogether insignificant from a broad morphological point of
view. They appear to me to be of less importance than those which
obtain between the different existing genera of crayfishes.

“< Hoploparia is found in the London clay. It therefore extends be-
yond the bounds of the Mesozoic epoch into the older Tertiary. But
when this genus is compared with the existing Homarus and Nephrops, it
is found partly to resemble the one and partly the other. Thus, on one
line, the actual series of forms which have succeeded one another from
the Liassic epoch to the present day is such as must have existed if the
common lobster and the Norway lobster are the descendants of Erymoid
crustaceans which inhabited the seas of the Liassic epoch.

‘Side by side with Hryma, in the lithographic slates, there is a genus,
Pseudastacus, which, as its name implies, has an extraordinarily close re-
semblance to the crayfishes of the present day. Indeed there is no
point of any importance in which (in the absence of any knowledge of
the abdominal appendages in the males) it differs from them. On the
other hand, in some features, as in the structure of the carapace, it
differs from Eryma, much as the existing crayfishes differ from Nephrops.
Thus in the latter part of the Jurassicepoch the Astacine type was already
distinct from the Homarine type, though both were marine; and, since
Eryma begins at least as early as the Middle Lias, it is possible that
Pseudastacus goes back as far, and that the common protastacine form is
to be sought in the Trias. Pseudastacus is found in the marine cre-
taceous rocks of the Lebanon, but has not yet been traced into the
Tertiary formations. )

““T am disposed to think that Pseudastacus is comparable to such a
form as Astacus nigrescens rather than to any of the Parastacide, as I
doubt the existence of the latter group at any time in northern lati-
tudes.

‘In the chalk of Westphalia (also a marine deposit) a single speci-
men of another Astacomorph has been discovered, which possesses an
especial interest as itis a true Astacus (A. politus von der Marck and
Schluter), provided with the characteristic transversely divided telson
which is found in the majority of the Potamobiide. * * *

“Tf an Astacomorphous crustacean, having characters intermediate
between those of Hryma and those of Pseudastacus, existed in the Jurassic
epoch or earlier; if it gradually diverged into Pseudastacine and
Erymoid forms; if these again took on Astacine and Homarine char-
acters, and finally ended in the existing Potamobiide and Homaria,
the fossil forms left in the track of this process of evolution would be
very much what they actually are. Upto the end of the Mesozoic epoch
the only known Potamobiide are marine animals. And we have already

rostrum, enlarged.

s Packard; a,

u

eV

rus prime

Fig. 1.—Camba

a

rus primevus; a, antenna, with

a
the scale, enlarged.

ot Camb

xample

Fig. 2.—Second e

No. 2.] PACKARD ON TERTIARY CRAYFISH. 397

seen that the facts of distribution suggest the hypothesis that they
must have been so, at least up to this time.

“Thus, with respect to the etiology of the crayfishes, all the known
facts are in harmony with the requirements of the hypothesis that they
have been gradually evolved in the course of the Mesozoic and subsequent
epochs of the world’s history from a primitive Astacomorphous form.”
(The Crayfish, p. 541-346.)

It will thus be seen that the discovery of an apparently fresh water
Cambarus in the Green River beds of Western Wyoming, which are
supposed to be Lower Eocene strata, fills up a break in the geological
series hitherto existing between the Cretaceous and Pliocene crayfishes,
and shows that the dynasty of fresh water crayfish now so powerfully
developed in the United States began its reign during the early Tertiary
period.

Weng ane auth

BULLETIN? No. 2; VOL VE

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

IX.—Annotated List of the Birds of Nevada. By W. J. Hoff-
man. pp. 203-256.

X.—North American Moths, with a preliminary catalogue of
species of Hadena and Polia. By A. R. Grote. pp.
257-278. )

XI.—The Tertiary Lake Basin of Florissant, Colorado, between
South and Hayden Parks. By Samuel H. Scudder. pp.
279-300.

XII.—Revision of the genus Sciurus. By E. L. Trouessart.

pp: 301-308.

ART. XIII.—Osteology of the North American Tetraonida. By R. W.
Shufeldt. pp. 309-350.

ART. XIV.—Osteology of Lanius ludovicianus excubitorides. By R.
W. Shufeldt. pp. 351-360.

ART. XV.—Review of the Rodentia of the Miocene period of North
America. By E. D. Cope. pp. 361-386.

ART. XVI.—On the Canide of the Loup Fork Epoch. By E. D. Cope.

| pp. 387-390.

ART. XVII.—On a Cray-fish from the Lower Tertiary beds of Western

Wyoming. By A.S. Packard. pp. 391-398.

DEPARIMENT OF THE INTHRIOR.
UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL AND GEOGRAPHICAL SURVEY.
F. V. HAYDEN, U. S. GEOLOGIST-IN-CHARGE.

BULLETIN
or |
|

THE UNITED STATES

a |
4 GEOLOGICAL AND GEOGRAPHICAL SURVEY

|
|

OF

THE TERRITORIES.
VOLUME VL... _NUMBER 3.

WASHINGTON:
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE.
August 30, 1882.

ASS oe

BULLETIN

OF THE

UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL AND GEOGRAPHICAL SURVEY
Of THE TERRITORIES.

VOLUME VI. 1881. NUMBER 3.

Art. XVHIt.—Prelimimary List of Works and Pa-
os Relating to the Mammalian Orders Cete and
irenia.

By Joel Asaph Allen.

Preparatory to undertaking the preparation of a history of the spe-
cies of the North American Cete and Sirenia, I began, some time since,
a systematic examination of the literature of the subject, taking titles
and making notes for future reference. It soon occurred to me that the
annotated list begun for my own use might be of service to other inves-
tigators in Cetology and Sirenology, and with this point in view I set
about the preparation of a bibliography of these subjects. The titles
thus far gathered are believed to cover nearly everything of importance
bearing upon their technical aspects, besides the more important of
those relating to their economical and commercial phases. The defi-
ciencies relate mainly to the latter, and consist in great degree of casual
notices of animals of the above-named orders in narratives of travel and
exploration, and in periodicals of an ephemeral or non-scientific char-
acter, relating generally to the capture or stranding of Whales at difier-
ent localities, and notices of Whaling. To make a bibliography which
should be exhaustive in these respects would be, it is needless to say,
the work of a lifetime, and would scarcely repay the labor expended
beyond a certain point of completeness, believed to have been nearly
reached in the collection of titles here presented. One department
of the subject of the Whale-fishery, for example, has been intentionally
wholly neglected, namely, legislation for its promotion and regula-
tion by different governments. This alone would furnish hundreds of
titles, which, while having only a remote bearing on the natural history
of Whales, would still have some importance in regard to the history of
Whaling.

The titles here given have been taken by the writer, when not oth-
erwise stated, from the works and papers mentioned, and the com-
ments, unless otherwise indicated, are based on personal examination
of the same. Many titles relating to the Whale-fishery have been copied
from D. Mulder Bosgoed’s invaluable “ Bibliotheca Ichthyologia et Pis-

400 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

catoria” (8°, Haarlem, 1873), especially many of those published in
the Dutch language. The titles have, in many cases, been taken by
preference from this author, for two reasons: first, they are generally
more fully given by him, and with greater regard to literal transcrip-
tion, than in many other works; and, secondly, they are usually accom-
panied with references to the particular portion of works, when of a
general character, relating to the special subject here in hand. The
titles unaccredited may be considered as representing the literary
resources in this field of research afforded by the principal libraries of
Cambridge and Boston, circumstances having thus far prevented me
from consulting those of other cities. In some eases the sets of period-
ical publications have proved incomplete, and in a few cases wholly
wanting. To cover these deficiencies, titles of works or papers known
to me through citation by authors have been taken from the Royal
Society’s “Catalogue of Scientific Papers,” or from other bibliographical
sources. In this way it is believed that few papers of actual scientific
value have escaped record. I have, however, proof of the incomplete-
ness of this “Preliminary List” in the considerable number of “catch
references” still in hand, which are too incomplete for insertion, but
which an effort will be made to perfect as opportunity may favor, to be
given later, with such others as may be met with, in a contemplated
reprint of the present “List.” In view of a probable later edition, the
author earnestly solicits the correction of errors that may be discovered
in the present, and would be glad to have his attention directed to any
omissions.

In regard to the plan of the present undertaking, it may be stated
that the titles are arranged chronologically, with an alphabetical
disposition of authors under each year. The index to the * List”
(the titles being consecutively numbered) will facilitate reference to
any particular author or paper desired. In the case of minor papers,
the annotations are intended as simply an amplification of the titl—
in other words, an explanation of the scope and nature of the article
cited. In works of a general character, containing brief references
to the matter here in hand, the particular portion of the work relating
to the subject is stated, with an indication of its extent and importance.
In the case of monographs, anatomical memoirs, or special works, the
contents are indicated by the transcription of sub-titles, when such
occur, and by further amplification when deemed desirable; in other
cases by supplied sub-headings. Each species formally mentioned or
figured is enumerated, with page-references, and in case of figures an
indication is given of their nature or bearing. As a matter of conven-
ience, the species are generally numbered with Arabic numerals in
heavy type, these showing at a glance the number of species formally
treated or recognized in the work or memoir. In the case of old
works, or where vernacular names are alone used, the modern current
systematic equivalent is frequently indicated. In every instance where
such occur, new species and new genera are especially distinguished.

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 401

Great care has been taken to make the transcription of titles strictly
literal, interpolations or emendations being inclosed in brackets.
Errors of transcription can, nevertheless, scarcely be otherwise than
frequent, as every bibliographer must be well aware. The orthography
and capitalization of scientific names are intended to be literal, or in
accordance with the usage of the particular work under notice, from
which, however, there are doubtless occasional lapses. The attempt
has been made to bring the “List” down to the end of the year 1880,
but a few later titles have been added, and there are doubtless many
deficiencies for the last year of the record.

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY,

Cambridge, Mass., September, 1881.

1495, ALBERTUS MaGNus. Diui Alberti Magni de Animalibus | libri vigintisex Novis-
sime Impressi. [First page.] fol. ll. 6, ff. 1-254,
Impressum Uenetijs per Joannem & Gregorium | de Gregorijs fratres. Anno
incarnationis dominice | Millesimo quadringentesimo nonagesimo quinto | die,
xxi. Maij. Regnante dno Augustino Barbadico | inclito Duce Uenetia [f. 254].
Cetus, f. 240; Delphinus, f. 241; Monoceros, f. 244. The interest attaching to the cetologi-
cal matter is purely historic. {1.]
1510. ANDREW, Laur. ‘The wonderful shape and nature of man, beastes, serpentes,
fowles, fishes, and monsters, translated out of divers authors by L. Andrew
of Calis, and printed at Antuerpe, by John Doesborow. (Doesborch, 1510.)
fol. With pictures.”
Not seen; title from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 2, no. 10. (2.]
1526. OvieDoO, G. F. DE. Ouiedo dela natural hy | storia delas Indias. | Con preuile-
gio dela |S. C. C. M. | [Por Gonzalo Fernandez de Oviedo y Valdés. Toledo.
1526.] 4°. ff. i-lij-+3 pp.
Delos manaties, f. xlviij (80 lines). The account of the Manatee here given is brief in com-
parison with that in the Hist. gen. Ind., 1535, q. v. [3.]
1533. Martyr, P. Petri Martyris | ab Angleria mediolanen. Oratoris | clarissimi,
Fernandi & Helisabeth Hispaniarum quondam regum | 4 consilijs, de rebus
Oceanis & Orbe nouo decades tres: quibus | quicquid de inuentis nuper terris
traditum, nouarum rerum cupi- | dum lectorem retinere possit, copiose, fideli-
ter, eruditig docetur. | Eivsdem praeterea | Legationis Babylonicae li | bri
tres: vbi praeter oratorii mvneris | pulcherrimum exemplum, etiam quicquid
in uariarum gentium mori- | bus & institutis insigniter preclarum uidit queg
terra marig acciderunt, | omnia lectu miré iucunda, genere dicendi politis-

simo traduntur. | [Design.] Basileae, |— | M.D. XXXIII.| fol. Il. 12, ff
1-92.
Manati, f. 60, C, D. [4.]

1535. OvieDo, G. F. DE. La historia general | delas Indias. | [Por Gonzalo Fernan-
dez de Oviedo y Valdés.] Con priuilegio imperial. [Sevilla, 1535.] | 4°.
ll. 4, ff. i-exciij.

Capitulo x. Del Manati y de su grandeza & forma: & de la manera que algunas vezes los
indios tomauan este grade animal conel pexereuerso: & otras particularidades. ff. evj-eviij, fig.

The account occupies 5 pp., and is important as the source whence many later compilers
drew their materials for the history of the Manatee, and is still historically of the highest in_
terest. There is a small, very rude cut, bearing some likeness to the general form of tho
Manatee—the earliest figure of the animal published. In the edition of 1547 the text (ff. evj-
cvijj) is the same as in the present, but the figure is slightly different, showing an attempt at
artistic improvement. fs. ]

26 GB

402 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1551. BELON, PrzrreE. ‘L’histoire Naturelle des Estranges Poissons Marins, avec la
yraie Peincture et Description du Dauphin et de plusieurs autres de son espece,
Observée par Pierre Bélon du Mans. A Paris, 1551. 4°. pp. 115.”

Not seen; title from Dr. David Cragie in Edinb. Phil. Journ., xi, 1831, p. 48, where he gives
a critical résumé (op. cit., pp. 48-48) of Bélon’s account of the anatomy of the Porpoise. [6.]

552. ARISTOTELES. Aristotelis et | Theophrasti | Historie, Cim de natura Anima-
lium, tum de Plantis | & earum Causis, cuncta feré, que Deus opt. | max.
homini contemplanda exhibuit, ad | amussim complectentes: nune iam suo
resti- | tute nitori, & mendis omnibus, quoad fieri | potuit, repurgate. | Cvm
Indice Copio- | sissimo: | Ex quo superfluum quod erat, decerpsimus: quod
uerod | necessarium nobis uisum est, superaddidimus. | Estote Prvdentes, |
[Vignette] | sicvt serpentes. | Lvgdvni, | Apud Gulielmum Gazeium, |
M.D.LII. | Cum Priuilegio Regis. | 8°. Il. 40, pp. 1-495, ll. 8 (animal.), Il.
28, pp. 1-399, ll. 7 (plant.).

De partu, & pullorum numero piscium uiuiparum, delphino, balena, vitulo marino, & reli-

quis, que cete appellantur. Liber vi, caput xiii, pp. 141-143.
Several earlier and numerous later editions and commentaries of this work are intention-
ally omitted. [7.]
1553. BELLON, P. [or Briton, P.] Petri Bellonii Cenomani | De aquatilibus, Libri
duo | Cum econibus ad viunam ipsorum effigiem, quoad | eius fieri potuit, ex-
pressis. | Ad amplissimum Cardinalem Castillioneum. | Parisiis. | Apud
Carolum Stephanum, Typographum Regium. | M. D. LIII. | Cum privilegio

Regis. ob]. 8°. Il. 16, pp. 1-448.

De cetaceis, ossibus preditis ac viniparis, pp. 4-18.—Balena, pp. 4,5; Delphinus, pp.7, 8,
fig., p.6 (apparently of Phocenacommunis); fig., p. 9 (apparently of Delphinus delphis); Nonesse
Delphinvm ineyrvvm, p. 9; fig., p. 10 (apparently of Delphinus delphis); Duo Delphini incurui,
dorso repando, ex antiquissimo numismate reo, figs., p. 11; Quid Delphinus a Tyrsione
distet, p. 12; Matricis Delphini cum fetu efformatio, fig., p.13; Delphini caluaria, text and fig.,
p. 14; Tvrsio, p. 15, fig., p. 16; Orca, pp. 16,17, fig., p.18. Dolphin-like figure with fetus at-
tached by feetal envelopes.

The figures were all reproduced by Gesner, and were also copied by various later au-
thors. [8.]

1554. GomaraA, F. L. pr. La Historia | general delas Indias, | con todos los descu-

brimientos, y cosas nota | bles que han acaescido enellas, dende | que se gane-
ron hasta agora, escri- | ta por Francisco Lopez | de Gomara, clerigo. | Afia-
diose de nueuo la descripcion y traga delas Indias, | con una Tabla alphabetica
delas Prouincias, Islas, | Puereos, Ciudades, y nombres de conquistadores | vy
varones principales que alla han passado. | [Cygnet.] EnAnvers. | Encasa
de Iuan Steelsio. | Attio M. D. LIIIT. | sm. 8°. 11. 16-+ff. 1-287.

Dela Pez que llaman enla Espaiiola Manati, cap. xxxi, ff. 37, 28. [9.]

1554, RONDELET, G. Gvlielmi | Rondeletii | Doctoris medici | et medicinae in schola |}

Monspeliensi Pro- | fessoris Re- | gii. | Libri de Piscibus Marinis, in quibus |
vere Piscium effigies express sunt. | Qu in tota Piscium historia contine-
antur, indicat | Elenchus pagina nona et decima. | Postremd accesserunt In-
dices necessarij. | [Design.] Lvgdvni | Apud Matthiam Bonhomme. | — |
M.D. LIII. | Cum Priuilgio Regis ad duodecim annos. 2°. Il. 8, pp. 1-583,
Ni. 12.

De Delphino, lib. xvi, cap. vili, pp. 459-473, fig., p.459 (a Dolphin with young in fetal
envelopes). De Phocena, lib. xvi, cap. ix, pp. 437,474. De Tursione, lib. xvi, cap. x, pp. 474,
475, fig. De Balzna vulgd dicta siue de Musculo, lib. xvi, cap. xi, pp. 475-482, fig., p. 475 (view
from above of some pisciform creature having more resemblance toa fish thana Whale. Also
fig. of a harpoon on same page). De Balena vera, lib. xvi, cap. xii, pp. 482, 483, fig. (anim. fict.).
De Orca, lib. xvi, cap. xiii, pp. 483-485, fig., p.483. De Physetere, lib. xvi, cap. xiiil, pp. 485-487,
fig., p.485. De Manato, lib. xvi, cap. xviii, p. 490.

The figure ‘‘De Delphino” greatly resembles Bellon’s figure of his ‘‘ Orca, Oudre, ou grand
Marsouin,”’ but differs in details, and is not the same. [10.]

1555. ‘‘BELON, P. La nature et diversité des poissons. Avec leurs pourtraicts repre-
sentez au plus pres naturel. Paris, Ch. Estienne, 1555. obl, 8°. 448 11.”
Not seen; title from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 3, no. 24. (11.]

_

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 403

1555. ““OLAUS MaGnus. Historia de gentibus septentrionalibus earumque diversis
statibus, condifionibus, moribus, ritibus, superstitionibus. Romae, de Viottis,
1555. 4°. [fol.?] Met houtegr.”

“Lib. xxi. De piscibus monstrosis; de modo piscandi Cetos et Balenas; de Spermate-ceti.
etc., etc.”

Not seen; title and reference from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 109, no. 1732.

This is said by Bosgoed to be the first and best edition of the work. Other editions ap-
peared later: Antwerp, 1558 (Latin) and 1561 (French); Venice, 1565; Basel, 1567; Amster-
dam, 1599; Frankfort, 1625; Leyden, 1645; Amsterdam, 1652; the form varying from 8° to fol.
and the text modified by abridgment, or amplified by the addition of extraneous matter. I
give infra, from Bosgoed, a collation of the Dutch edition of 1599, q. v. (12.]

1558. ‘‘BoussurTi, Fr. De natura aquatilium carmen, in universam G. Rondeletii,
quam de piscibus marinis scripsit historiam. Cum vivis eorum imaginibus.

Lugduni, apud M. Bonhomme, 1558. 2pt. 49.”
Not seen ; title from Bosgoed, op. cit., p.4, no. 35. (13.]

1558. GESNER, ConraD. Conradi Gesneri | medici Tigurini Historiz Animalium |
Liber ILII. qui est de Piscium & | Aquatilium animantium | natura. {| Cvm
Iconibvs singvlorvm ad | viva: expressis fere omnib. DCCVI. | Continentur
in hoe Volumine, Gvlielmi Rondeletii quog, | medicine professoris Regij in
Schola Monspeliensi, & Petri Bel- | lonii Cenomani, medici hoc tempore Lute-
tie eximij, de | Aquatilium singulis scripta. | Ad invictissimvm principem
divvym Ferdinan- | dum Imperatorem semper Augustum, &c. |. .. [motto in
Greek, 1 line.] | [Vignette.] Cvm Priuilegijs 8. Ceesareze Maiestatis ad octen-
nium, & poten- | tissimi Regis Galliarum ad decennium. | Tigvri apvd
Christoph. Froschovervm, | Anno M. D. LVIII. | gr. 2°. ll. 6, pp. 1-1297.
(Figg. in text.)

oD’

De Balaena vvlgo dicta, sive de Mysticeto Aristotelis, Mvsecvlo Plinii, pp. 132-141 (fig. p,
132). De Cetis vel Cetaceis piscibus, et Bellvis marinis in genere, pp. 229-237. De Cetis
diversis, pp. 237-256, fig., p. 255 (de . . . Cetis Oceani Germanici). De Delphino, pp, 380-410.
De Phocaena sey Tvrsione, pp. 837-839. De (Physalo Bellva, sev) Physetere, pp. 851-859.

Includes, in substance, the text of Belon and Rondelet, with much additional matter, mainly
from still earlier authors. The above-cited figures are, with possibly one exception, from
either Belon or Rondclet. At pp. 246-251 are descriptions and figures, mostly from Olaus
Magnus, of various fabulous marine monsters.

For editions of 1560 and 1563, see infra; later ones (not seen by me) are: Frankfort, gr. fol.,
1604, 1620. (14. ]

1558. RonDELET, G. Le Premiere Partie | de | Histoire | entiere des | Poissons, |
Composée premierement en Latin par maistre | Guilaume Rondelet Docteur
regent en Me- | decine en V’université de Mompelier. | Maintenant Traduite
en Frangois sans auoir | rien. . . [word torn out] necessaire 4 Vintelligence
Wicelle. | . . . [word torn out] portraits au naif. | [Vignette.] A Lion, }
par Mace Bonhome | a la Masse d’Or. |— | M.D. LVIII. | Avec privilege dv
Roy povr dovze ans. | 4°. ll. 6, pp. 1-418, 1]. 7. [Partie Seconde.] pp. 1-181,
ll. 5. [Numerous cuts in the text. ]

Le Seiziéme Livre des Poissons; Des Poissons Cétacées 6 grandes bestes marines. éspeci-
alement des Tortues, pp. 3386-364.—Du Dauphin, pp. 344-350, cut; Du Marsouin, p. 350, cut;
De la Balene vulgaire, pp. 351.353, cut; De la vraie Balene, pp. 353, 354, cut; De ]'Espaular,
pp- 354, 355, eut; Du Malar ou Sendette, pp. 355, 356, cut; De la Viuelle, pp. 356, 357, cut; De
la Scolopendre cetacée, pp. 357, 358, cut; Du Tiburon, pp. 358, 359; Du Maraxe, p. 359; Du
Manat, pp. 359, 360.

Le Seiziéme Livre includes not only the species above named, but also the Sea-Tortoises,
and various anthropomorphous marine monsters. The first four books treat of the general
economy of ‘‘ Fishes,” including their external and internal anatomy, their habits, faculties,
etc., and of modes of capturing them, including the Cetacea passim. The figures are the
same as those of the Latin ed. (1554), g. v. The second division of the work contains the
marine Invertebrates, the fluviatile Fishes, Amphibians, Reptiles, and Turtles, and also
the Beaver, ‘‘le Bieure.” {15.]

‘ 1558, THEVET, F. A. Les | Singvlari- | tez de la France an- | tarctiqve, avtrement
nom- | mée Amerique, & de plusieurs Ter- | res & Isles decouuertes de no- |
stre temps: | Par F, André Thevet, na- | tif d’Angovlesme. | [Sea!l.] A An-

AOA BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. .

1558. THEVET, F. A.—Continued.
vers, | De l’imprimerie de Christophle Plantin | a la Licorne dor. | 1558. | —
Avec Privilege dy Roy. | sm. 8°. ll. 8, 1-163-+-1. (Cuts in text.)

Description du manati, poisson estrange, p. 138. [16.]

1560. GrsNER, ConraD. Nomenclator | aqvatilivm animantivm. | Icones Anima-
livm a- | quatilium in mari & dulcibus aquis de- | gentium, plus quam Dcc.
cum nomen- | claturis singulorum Latinis, Grecis, Itali- | cis, Hispanicis, Gal-
licis, Germanicis, | Anglicis, alij’sq; interdum, per cer- | tos ordines digestz. |
Explicantvr autem singulorum nomipa ac nominwt rationes, pr- | certim in
Latina et Greca lingua vberrimé: et nominum confirmandorum causa }
descriptiones quorundam, et alia quedam, prasertim in magno nostro De
aquatili- | bus volumine non tradita, adduntur: deg singulis Rondeletij, Bel-
lonij, Saluiani et | nostre sententiz explicantur breuissimé. | Per Conradvm
Gesnervm Tigyrinvm. | Le Figure de pesei e d’ altri animali, li quali ui-
nono ne I’ acque | salse e dolci, piu che DCC. |] ... [The same repeated in
French, 2 lines, and in German, 2 lines.] | Cvm Privilegijs S. Ceesarze Maiesta-
tis, ad annos octo, & poten- | tissimi Regis Galliarum ad decennium. | Tigvri
excydebat Christoph. Froscho- | vervs. Anno M.D.LX. | 2°. Il. 14, pp.
1-374,1. 1. (Figg. in text.)

Ordo XII: De Cetis proprie dictis, pp. 160-185. Figg. Delphinus feemina cum feetu mss-
culoso, ut Rondeletius exhibuit [= Phoceena communis], p. 161; Alia Delphini pictura, quam
4 Corn. Sittardo habui [= Delphinus delphis], p. 161; Delphini caluaria é libro Bellonij [= D.
delphis], p. 162; Ex eodem, Delphini matricis cum fetu efformatio: que Phocens etiom
conuenit, p. 162; Ex eodem, Antiquissimi numismatis «rei pictura: quod Delphinos duos
dorso repando curuos ostendit, non qudd eiusmodi ueré sint: ... p. 162; Tursio, p. 163; Ba-
lene, fig. et descrip., pp. 166-169 (3 figg.): Pristris aut Physeter, horribile genus cetorum, &
ingens ex capite multum aque in naues efflat, & aliquando submergit, Olaus Magnus in Ta-
bule sux explicatione: ...p.170; Balena, Adden., pp. 366-368, fig., p. 367 [= Physeter macro-
cephalus]. Rostrum uel os 4 capite prominens, satis commodé exprimi uidetur: relicuum
uerd corpus ad coniecturam 4 Rondeletio effictum, p. 171.

The article ‘‘De Cetis”’ includes not only the true Cete but also Pinnipedia, and the pelagic
Turtles, as well as the many fabulous monsters of the sea depicted by Olaus Magnus, etc.

In this work, usually cited as Icon. Anim. Aquat., the text is much reduced from that of
the Hist. Animal., 1558, g.v. (from about 80 pp. to 24 pp.), but the cuts are nearly all repro-
duced (three or four only are omitted), and others are added, including a larger and much im-
proved one of the skull of the Dolphin in place of the former one. In the ‘“‘Addends” is a
description and figure of a Sperm Whale stranded June, 1755, on the coast of the Adriatic
Sea. This is one of the earliest figures of this species, and a better one than some published

two centuries later. (17.}
1560. Grovio, Paoto. Libro di | mons. Paolo Giovio | de’ pesci Romani. | tradotto in
Volgare da | Carlo Zancaruolo. | Con privilegio. | [Vignette with motto. ]
In Venetia, appresso il Gualtieri, 1560. 4°. pp. 1-198.
Del Capidoglio (= Orca), cap. 2, pp. 22-27. [18.]

1563. GresNEnR, ConraD. ‘‘Fisubuch Das ist ein kurtze, doch vollkomne beschreybung
aller Fischen so in dem Meer unnd siissen wasseren, Seen, Fliissen oder anderen
Bichen jr wonung habend, sampt jrer waaren conterfactur: zti nutz u. gitem
allen Artzeten etc. gestelt: insonders aber denen so ein lust habend zii erfaren
und betrachten Gottes wunderbare werck in seinen geschépfften. Erstlich
in Latein durch Ciinradt Gdssner beschriben; yetz netiwlich aber dureh Ciin-
yadt Forer etc. in das Tetitsch gebracht. (Mit eingedr. Holzschnitten.) In
Fol. Zirych, (1563 u.) 1575. roschover. (9 u. 404 8.)”
Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann, Bibl. Hist. Nat., i, p.433. For account of Ceto-
logical matter see the ed. prin., 1560. [19.]
1565. Brnzoni, G. La Historia del | Mondo Nvovo | Di M. Girolamo Benzoni | Mi-
lanese. | Laqval Tratta dell’Isole, | & Mari nuouamente ritrouati, & delle
nuoue | Citta da lui proprio vedute, per acqua | & per terra in quattordeci
anni. | [Portrait.] Con Priuilegio della Illustrissima Signoria | di Venetia,
Per anni xx [=1565]. sm. 8° by sig., 24° size. 11. 4, ff. 1-175. Reverse of f.
175: In Venetia, | appresso Francesco | Rampazetto. | MDLXY.
Manati, p. 96. [20.]

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 405

1565. Ramusio, G. B. Terzo Volvme | delle Navigatione et Viaggi | raccolto gia da
M. Gio. Battista Ramusio | nel qvale si contengono | ... [=13 lines de-
scriptive of contents]. Si come si legge nelle diuerse Relationi, tradotte dal
Ramusio di Lingua | Spagnunola & Francese nella nostra, & raccolte in questo
volume, | ...[=3lines]. | [Design.] In Venetia nella stamperia de’ Giynti. |
L’Anno M.D. LXY. fol. Il. 6, ff. 1-34, 1-456. Maps and cuts.

Manati, ff. 40, 71,72,159-161; cut, f. 159. The figure is a copy of Oviedo’s, appreciably
altered. The account given is also a translation from Oviedo. (21.]

1577 (cirea). ANON. ‘‘ Ware und eigentlicher Contrafactur eines Wallfisches, gefangen
in der Scheldt, nicht weit von Antorff, Am 5 Julij Anno 1577. (Als bovenschrift
van de prent. Van onderen een 16 regelig Hoogduitsch vers.) br. folio.”

Not seen; title from Bosgoed, op cit., p. 176, no. 2771, who says: ‘‘Zie: Muller, Beschrijvine
van Ned. historieprenten, no. 738.” [22.]

1578. BENZONI, GiroLAMO. Novae Novi | orbis Historie, | Id est, | Rerum ab Hispa-
nis in India Occidentali ha- | ctenus gestarum, & acerbo illornm | in eas gen-
tes dominatu, | Libri tres, | Vrbani Calvetonis | opera industridque ex Italicis
Hieronymi Benzo- | nis Mediolanensis, qui eas terras xiiii. anno- | ram peregri-
natione obijt, commentarijs descripti; Latini facti, ac perpetuis notis, argu-
mentis & lJocu | pleti memorabilium rerum accessione, illustrati. | His ab
eodem adiuncta est, | De Gallorum in Floridam expeditione, & insigni His-
panoruim | ineos feuitiz exemplo, Breuis Historia. | Anchora[ Design] Sacra. |
[Genevee.] | Apvd Evstathivm Vignon. |—|M.D.LXXVIII. 8°. Il. 16, pp.
1-480, ll. 6.

Manati pisces, cap. xiii, pp. 213, 214, 216,217. There is first in the text (pp. 213, 214) a short
account of the Manati of Nicaragua, and at the end of the chapter (pp. 216, 217) a further
account, based on that given by Peter Martyr (1533), qg.v. The last is additional to that of the
original edition, 1565, q. v. [23.]

1590. Acosta, J. DE. Historia | Natvral | y | moral delas | Indias, | en qve se Tratan
las Cosas | notables del cielo, y elementos, metales, plantas, y ani- | males
dellas: y losritos, y ceremonias, leyes, y | gouierno, y guerras de los Indios. |
Compuesta por el Padre Iogeph de Acosta Religioso | dela Compania de Iesus. |
Dirigida ala serenissima | Infanta Dota Isabella Clara Eugenia de Austria. |
[ Design. ] Con Privilegio. | Impresso en Seuilla en casa de Iuan de Leon. | — |
Ano de 1590. 4°. pp. 1-535, 11. 15.

De diuersos pescados, y modos de pescar de los Indios. Lib. iii. cap. “17” (7. e. xv), pp-
158-162. j

Manati, p. 158; Vallena, pp. 160, 161.

There are only a few lines about the Manati, and these are not important. The account
of the capture of Whales by the Indians of Florida, as related to him by ‘‘ some expert men,”
is of special interest, as being doubtless the origin of the relation, so often told later, of how
the Indians of Florida capture the Whale by getting astride his neck and plugging his nos-
trils with wooden stakes, to which they afterwards attach cords and by them tow the Whale,
thus killed, to the shore. It is doubtless on this description that the illustration of this man-
ner of killing Whales is based in De Bry. (See BE Bry, 1602.)

Of the numerous subsequent editions and versions of Acosta’s work a number are given
below, including an Italian (1596), a French (1598), and an English (1604). (See Acosta, J.
DE, under these dates.) There isa Latin translation in De Bry, fol., 1602 (partix of the ‘Greater
Voyages.”) (24.]

1593. Pirintus Secunpus, C. C. Plinij Secundi | Historie Mvndi | Libri xxxvii. |
A Sigismvndo Gelenio | summa fide eastigati, vetertimque tum excu- | sorum
tum manuscriptorum codicum atten- | tissima collatione restituti. | Accessere
ad marginem varie lectiones, ex | Pintiani, Tvrnebi, Lipsil, | aliorimque
doctissimorum qui pagina quarta | indicantur scriptis fideliter except. |
Opus tributum in tomos trescum Indice | rerum onnium copiosissimo, | Tomus
Primus [-Tertius]. | [Vignette.] | Apvd Iacobym Stoer. | — | M.D. XCIII.

The title changes in the second and third volumes to the following:

C. Plinii | Seevndi Histo- | riz Mvyndi | Tomus Secundus[-Tertius], A
Sigismvndo Gelenio diligenter | castigatus, vetertimque codicum colla- | tione

406 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL’ SURVEY.
1593. PLinius SECcUNDUS, C.—Continued. ;
restitutus. | Addits ad marginem varie lectiones ex | doctorum virorum scrip-
tis fideli- | ter except. | Que hoc Tomo continentur sequens | pagina indi-
cat. | [Vignette.] Apvd Iacobvm Stoer | —|M.D. XCIII. 3 vols. sm. 8°
by sig., 16° size. :
De balenis, & orcis, tom. i, liber ix, cap. vi, pp. 415, 416. De Delphinis, cap. viii, pp. 417-421.
De tursionibus, cap. ix, p. 421.
There are earlier and numerous later editions and commentaries of the work, but they are
intentionally omitted. (25. }
1594. POMET, PIERRE. Histoire | generale | des |-Drogues, | traitant | Des Plantes,
des Animaux, | & des Mineraux; Ouvrage enrichy de plus de | quatre cent
Figures en Taille-douce tirées d’aprés | Nature; avec un discours qui explique
leurs | differens Noms, les Pays d’ou elles viennent, la | maniere de connoitre
les Veritables d’avee les | Falsisiées, & leur proprietez, ot on découyre |
Verreur des Anciens & des Modernes; Le tout tres | utile au Public. | Par le
Sieur Pierre Pomet, Marchand Epicier & Droguiste. | [Design.]- A Paris, |
Chez Jean-Baptiste Loyson, & Augustin Pillon, sur le Pont au Change, | ala
Prudence. | Et au Palais, | Chez Estienne Ducastin, dans la Gallerie des
Prisonniers, au bon Pasteur. | — | Avec Approbation & Privilege du Roy. |
M.DC.XCIYV. fol. 11. 6, pp. 1-16; pt. i, 1-304; pt. ii, 1-108; pt. iii, 1-116, 11. 19.
Sur ]’Ambre gris, p. 3 (de sér. prem. de pag.); part ii, chap. xxvi, pp. 57-60. De la Balcine,
part li, chap. xxxi, pp. 73-75, 2 tigs. (Cachalot, ou Baleine Masle et Baleine Femelle). Du Nar-
wal, part ii, chap. xxxiii, pp. 78-80, 2 figs. (Licorne de Mer et Narwal). Du Lamantin, part ii,
chap. xxxv, pp. 82-84, fig.
The figures are very curious, as is also the text. The figures of the Cachalot represent the
process of flensing. The figure of the Manatee is apparently copied from an earlier design.
[26.]
1595 ? Gortzius, H. “Walvisch of Tonyn, gestrand te Zandvoort, 1595. Met adres
van (en door) H. Goltzius, en 14 regelig hollandsch vers. br. 4°.”
Not seen; title from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 176, no. 2772, who says: ‘‘Zie: Muller, Historie-
prenten, no. 1033.” [27.]
1596. Acosta, J. DE. Historia | Natvrale, e Morale | delle Indie; | scritta | Dal R. P.
Giosetfo di Acosta | Della Compagnia del Giesii; | Nellaquale si trattano le cose
notabili del Cielo, & de gli | Elementi, Metalli, Piante, & Animali di quelle: |
isuoiriti, & ceremonie: Leggi, & gouerni, | & guerre degli Indiani. | Noua-
mente tradotta della lingua Spagnuola nella italiana | Da Gio. Paolo Galveci
Salodiano | Academico Veneto. | Con Privilegii. | [Design.] In Venetia,
| -- | Presso Bernardo Basa, All’ insegna del Sole. | M.D.XCVI. 4°. ff. 24,
. 1-178.
Di diuerse pesci, & modi di pescare delli Indini, lib. iii, cap. xv, ff 48-50.
For comment, see the editio princeps, 1590. [28.]
1598. Acosta, J. DE. Histoire | Natvrelle | et Moralle | des Indes, tant Orientalles |
qu’Occidentalles. | Ow il est traicté des choses remarquables du Ciel, | des
Elemens, Metaux, Plantes &.Animaux | qui sont propres de ces pais. En-
semble des | mceurs, ceremonies, loix, gouuernemens & | guerres des mesmes
Indiens. | Composée en Castillan par Joseph Acosta, & | traduite en Frangois
par Robert | Regnault Cauxois. | Dedié av Roy. | [Vignette.] A Paris, |
Chez Mare Orry, rué S. Jaques, | au Lyon Rampant.|—]| M.D. XCVIII.
sm. 8°. Il. 8, ff. 1-375-+17.
De diuers poissons, & de Ja maniere de pescher des Indiens, liv. iii, chap. xv, ff. 102-105.—
Manati, f. 102; Pesche de la Balaine en Florida, f. 103. =
For comment, see the original ed. of 1590. [29.]
1598 (circa). ANON.? ‘‘Description du grand poisson baleine, qui s’est venue rendre &
Berkhey en ’an MDXCVIII le III Febvrier, etc. (Znd. pl. of jaar.)”
“Vertaling van het voorgaande, met dezelfde afbeelding op den titel.
“Bene Engelsche vertaling verscheen te London, 1569. 4°.”
Not seen; title and comment from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 175, no. 2760. [30.]

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 407

1598 (circa). ANON.? ‘‘Eene beschrijvinghe des grooten Vischs, die tot Berkhey ghe-
strandet is A®. 1598 den 2 Febr., met eene verclaringhe der dinghen die
daernaer ghevolght zijn. Met noch een cort verhael, enz. (Znd. pl. of jaar.)”

‘Met eene afbeelding van den walvisch op den titel.

““Zie: TIELE, Bibl. vanpamnetien. no. 431—Bor, Ned. Oorl., (1697), iv, f.434; (1621), 35° boek,
16 whey

Not seen; title and comment from Bosgoed, /. ¢., p. 175, no. 2759. [31.]

1598 (circa). Matnam, J. ‘‘Walvisch, gestrand tusschen Scheveningen en Katwijk in
1598. DoorJ. Matham, met 12 regelig hollandsch vers.—Van deze prent bestaan
verschillende kopyen, o. a. door G. van der Gouwen. br. fol.”

Not seen; title from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 176, no. 2773, who says: Zie: fuller, Historiec-
prenten, no. 1081-1084.”

(Muller’s Beschrijv. van Ned. historieprenten, here and elsewhere cited from Bosgoed, I have
been unable to see.) [32.]

1599. ‘‘OLaus MaGnus. De wonderlycke historic der Noordersche Landen, be-
schreven door Olaus de Groote. Ook after aen by ghevoecht verscheyden
waerachtige Nauigatien tegent Noorden ghedaen by onsen tyt, als op Nova-
Zembla, Groenlant en door de Strate van Nassouwen anders Weygats ghe-
naemt. Amsterdam, Cornelis Claesz.” (1599.) 49.

“‘ Zie aldaar, 21e en 22e boek: Van de visschen; van de vreemde en gedrochtelijke visschen,
en walvischvangst. De appendix bevat de reizen naar het Noorden van St. Burrough, Fro-

bisher, Pet and Jackman, en de drie eersten reizen der Hollanders. De 2e druk, 1652, 8°,
bevat tevens ‘Ken korte en klare beschrijving van Ijslandt en Groenlandt,’ door Dithmarius

Blef kenius.”
Not seen; title and comment from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 244, no. 3526. See, also, Latin ed.
of 1555. [33.]

1599.

The request of an honest merchant to a friend of his, to be aduised
and directed in the course of killing the Whale, as followeth. An. 1575.
<Hakluyt’s Navig. and Voyag., i, 1599, pp. 413, 414.

A series of questions respecting the provisioning and furnishing of a ship for a whaling
voyage. with detailed answers, ‘‘ which may serue as directions for all such as shall intend
the same voyage, or the like, for the Whale.” (34.]
1601. SAENREDAM, J. ‘‘Walvisch, gestrand onder Beverwyk, bezichtigd door Graaf
Ernst Casimir, 1601. Door J. Saenredam. (Met 32 regelig latijnsch vers door
T. Screvelius.)” gr. br. fol.
““Dezelfde prent met het adres van J. Janssonius, 1618. gr. br. fol.”
Not seen; title and comment from Bosgoed, op. cit., p.176, no, 2774, who refers to ‘‘ Muller,
Historieprenten, no. 1160.” [35.]

1602. [Acosta, J. DE.] De Novi Orbis Natvra et Ratione. <De Bry, Americe nona §
postrema Pars, 1202, pp. 1-362.

De diuersis generibus & formis piscium, in India nascentium, lib. iii, cap. xv, pp. 105-109.
For comment see orig. ed., 1590, and next title. [36.]

1602. DE Bry, Turoporvws, J. T., et J. I. 1dwa | vera et genvina, | Precipvarvm
Historia- | rvm omnivm, vt et variorvm | Ritvvm, Ceremoniarvm, consve-
tvdi- | numdue gentis Indic: Sicut & primarium ciuitatum, Insularum- | que
& arcium seu propugnaculorum: de quibus in hac | nona Americ seu Indix
Occidentalis histo- | riarnm parte pertractatur, | Cvilibet Historic designa-
tioni, | facilioris intellectus, maiorisG oblectationis causa, Icones ali- | quam-
multi, artificiosissimé in ws incisie, annexe | apposite sunt, | Sumptibus,
Studio & industria | Theodori de Bry, p. m. relict vidue, & Ioann. Theo-
do- | riac Ioann. Israel. filiormm. | [Design.] Francofvrti, | Excvdebat
Matthevs Becker. |—| M.DCII. fol. Tab. i-xxvi, cum texte.

Tab. i. De Indorym mira piscationis ratione. Plate and 15 lines of text, illustrating the

way in which the Indians capture whales, viz, by rowing up to them in their canoes and get-
ting astride the neck and then driving wooden stakes into their blow-holes, which speedily
causes their death by suffocation. They then attach lines to the stakes and tow the dead
whale ashore. In the background is seen a dead whale being thus towed by an Indian in a
canoe, and more in the foreground is an Indian astride a whale driving in the stakes, his canoe
resting on the whale’s back! The blow-holes are represented, as in other cuts of this date,

408 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1602. DE Bry, THroporvs, J. ‘T., et J. I.—Continued.
as tubular projections on the sides of the head! This absurdity is apparently based on Acosta’s
account of the capture of whales by the Indians of Florida. (See AcosTA, J. DE, 1590.)

The fasciculus having the above-given title forms part of De Bry’s celebrated Collection
of Voyages. In the copy examined it is bound as the second fasciculus of ‘‘Nona pars Ame-
rice,” containing the voyages of Sebalt de Weert. [37.]

1604. Acosta, J. pr. The | Natvrall | and Morall Historie of the | East and West |
Indies. | Intreating of the remarkeable things of Heaven, of the | Elements,
Mettalls, Plants and Beasts which are pro- | per to that Country: Together
with the Manners, | Ceremonies, Laws, Governements, and Warres of | the
Indians. | Written in Spanish by Ioseph Acosta, and translated | into Eng-
lish by E. G. [Edward Grimeston]. [Design.] London | Printed by Val: Sims
for Edward Blount and William | Aspley. 1604. 8°. 11. 10, pp. 1-590.

Of Sundry Fishers, and their maner of fishing at the indies, lib. 3, chap. 15, pp. 163-169.—
Manati; p. 164. Manner of capturing whales by the Florida Indians, pp. 166-168.

For comment see the orig. ed , 1590. [38.]

1605. CLustus, C. Caroli Clvsii Atrebatis, | Aule Cesare quondam Familiaris, |
Exoticorvm | Libri Decem: | Quibus Animalium, Plantarum, Aromatum, |
aliorumque peregrinorum Fructuum | histori describuntur: | Item | Petri
Belonii Observationes, | eodem Carolo Clusio interprete. | Scries totius operis
post Prefationem indicabitur. |— | Ex Officind Plantiniana Raphelengii,
1605. [Title-page with engraved border.] 2°. IL 8, pp. 1-378, ll. 5.

Cete admirabilis forme, p. 180, cum fig.; Aliud Cete admirabile, p. 131, cum fig.; Manati
Phoce genus, pp. 132-135, cum fig.

The ‘“Cete admirabilis form” is a Cetoid monster; the mouth is open, displaying a con-
tinuous row of sharp-pointed teeth in the lower jaw; there are neither pectoral nor dorsal
fins; the head is upturned, projects much beyond the lower jaw, and its termination may be
likened to a cap formed of a gigantic squid, of which the tentacles constitute a fringe around
the neck. The ‘‘Alinud Cete admirabile” is a Cachalot (Physeter macrocephalus), or ‘‘ Pot-
walvisch” (as the text states it to have been called by the Hollanders), described and figured
from a specimen stranded on the west coast of Holland in 1598. The figure is a halt-side
view, displaying the ventral surface, with the mouth open and the penis exserted. This is
noteworthy as being apparently one of the earliest figures extant of the Sperm Whale. A
specimen stranded three years later is also briefly described. Of the ‘‘Manati Phoce genus”
there is a quite characteristic, although rude, figure from a stuffed specimen brought to
Amsterdam in the year 1600 by a Dutch navigator ‘‘ex Occidentali Oceano.” In respect 10
the early history of the Manatee, Clusius justly holds the first place, his description and fig-
ure being the first based on an original examination of specimens.

There appcars to have been an earlier edition, the work being cited at 1601 by Bosgoed
(Bibl. Ichth. et Piscat.,p. 168). [39.]

1606. Gomara, F. L. pr. Histoire | generalle | des Indes occiden- | tales, et terres |
neuues, qui iusques 4 present | ont esté descouuertes. | Augmentee en ceste
cinquiesme edition de la description de | la nouuelle Espagne, & de la grande
ville de Me- | xicque, autrement nommee, | Tenuctilan. | Composee en Es-
pagnol par Frangois Lopez de Go- | mara, & traduite en Francois par le | S. de
Genillé | Marr. Fumeée. | [Design.] A Paris. | Chez Michel Sonnius, rué sainct

Taquez & Venseigne | de ’escu dé Basle. | — | 1606. | Avec privilige dv Roy.
sm. 8°. ff. 4, 1-485--19.
Des poissons qu’on appelle en l’Isle Espagnole Manati, chap. 31, f. 41 (2 pages). [40.]

1608. ANON. ? ‘‘ Ware Verthooning ende afbeeldinghe van een dooden. . . . Vis,
door die Zee aen der Strande opgheworpen den 20 Sept. 1608, tusschen
Catwijck ende Schevelingen. Middelburg, 1608. 4°. 20 bladz. tekst met
af beelding.”

Not seen; title from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 175, no. 2761. [41.]

1612. [Hupson, HEnRy.] ‘‘Beschryvinghe van der Samoyden Landt in Tartarien.
Nieulycks onder ’t ghebiedt der Moscoviten ghebracht. Wt de Russche tale
overgheset, Anno 1609. Met een verhael van de opsoecking ende ontdeckinge
van de nieuwe deurgang ofte straet int Noordwesten na de Rijcken van China
ende Cathay. Ende een Memoriael gepresenteert acnden Coningh van Spaen-

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPITY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 4()9

1612. [Hupson, Henry ]—Continued.
gien, belanghende de ontdeckinghe ende gelegenheyt van ’t Land ghenaemt
Australia Incognita. ’t Amsterdam, by Hessel Gerritsz. A°. 1612. 4°. Met
3 kaarten.” :

Not seen; title transcribed from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 233, no. 3427. The title as given by
Fr. Muller (Cat. Am. Books, 1877, p. 80) is abbreviated by the omission of the second and
third sentences, and also otherwise. As the two titles otherwise differ, it is doubtful whether
either is literally given, Bosgoed’s appearing to be partly modernized in orthography. Mul-
ler’s English rendering of his is as follows: ‘‘ Description of the country of the Samoyedes in
Tartary, With an account of the research and of the discovery of the new passage or strait
in the North-West to the empires of China and Cathay (by Henry Hudson). And a memorial

- offered to the King of Spain (by P. F. de Quir) concerning the discovery and the situation
of the Land called Australia Incognita.” (For the title of the Latin translation, published
the following year, sce 1613. Hupson, H.) .S

Respecting the present Dutch edition, Muller says: ‘‘ Of this oricinal Dutch edition of the
famous Detectio freti . . . hardly 4 or 5 copics are known in all the European libraries. . . .
This original book is the foundation-stone for the history of Hudson’s and other arctic expe-
ditions, etc. The collection formed by Hessel.Gerritsz consists of four tracts. by Is. Massa,
F. de Quir, and the editor, Hessel Gerritsz himself.”—F. MULLER, Cat. Amer. Books, 1877,
p. 80, no. 1425. [42.]

1613. ‘“GERRITZ. VAN AssUM, HESSEL. Histoire du pays nomme Spitsberghe. Mon-
strant comment qu’il est trouvée, son naturel et ses animauls, avecques la triste
racompte des maux, que nos pecheurs tant Basques que Ilamens, ont eu w
soutirir des Anglois, en l’esté passée l’An de grace, 1613. Escrit par H[essel].
G[erretsz].[de]A[ssum]. It en apres une protestation contre les Angloys, et
annullation de touts leurs frivoles argumens, parquoy ils pensent avoir droict,
pour se faire Maistre tout seul, dudict pays. En Amsterdam, a l’enseigne de
la carte nautiq. MDCXII [sic] Chez Hessel Gerritsz. 4°. Met 2 kaarten en
eene plaat.”

Not seen; title from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 236, no. 3462. Muller’s collation gives the date as
1613, and “2 maps and 2 pl.’ —(Cat. Am. Books, ete., 1877, p. 80, no. 1423.)

The original edition is ‘‘of the utmost rarity.” A fac-simile reprint (of 50 copies only) was
issued in 1872 by Fr. Muller (Amsterdam), ‘‘ with the real old types” of the 17th century, on
old paper. [43.]

1613. Hupsoz, H. Descriptio ac delineatio Geographica | Detectio- | nis Freti, | Sive
Transitus ad Occasum supra | terras Americanas, in Chinam | at@ Iaponem
ducturi. | Recens investigati ab M. Henrico Hudsono Anglo. | Item, | Exegesis
Regi Hispaniz facta super | tractu recens detecto, in quint&é Orbis parte, cui
nomen, | Avstralis Incognita. | Cum descriptione | Terrarum Samoiedarum,
& Tingoesiorum, in | Tartarid ad Ortum Freti VVaygats sitarum, nuperg}
sceptro Moscovitarum adscitarum. | Amsterodami | — | Ex Officina Hesselij
Gerardi. Anno 1615. sm. 4°. Il. 25, unpaged, 4 folded maps and 3 cuts.

Contains ‘‘ Veram Effigiem Balenarum” (a half-page cut), and 8 lines of descriptive text.
It occupies a separate leaf at the end of the book in two copies examined (in Harvard College
Library), occurring after the word “‘ Finis,” which closes the preceding page. It almost has
the appearance of not belonging to the book. Neither of these copies contain Hessel Ger-
rard’s remarkable picture of the Walrus, said to occur in some copies of this work. (Cf.
ALLEN, Hist. N. Amer.Pinnipeds, 1880, pp. 96, 97.)

“On this small but high!y important work, see at large: Tiele, pp. 179 to 190, and my:
Essai dune Bibliographie Néerl. Russe, 1859, pp. 71, 103-108, especially on the unknown author,
Is. Massa, of Haarlem. It contains: 1°. the discovery of the Hudson bay, ete. in 1611, with
map, with additions to the former edition of 1612; 2°. the account of F. de Quir on Anstralia;
3°. and 4°. the description of the Samoyedes, their country, etc., etc., by Is. Massa, of Haar- .
lem.’’—F. MULLER, Cat. Amer. Books, 1877, p. 85, no. 1493.

A facsimile reprint, ‘* with the real old types” of the 17th century, on old paper, has been
recently published at Amsterdam by Frederik Muller & Co. [44.]

1615 (cirea?) VELDE, Es. VAN DEN. ‘Pot-Walvisch, gestrandt by Noortwyek op Zee,
den 28 Dec. 1614. Door Es. van den Velde. kJ. br. fol.”

“Eene andere druk met adres van C. J. Visscher.—Van deze prent bestaat ook eene
teckening in sepia door J. van de Velde.”

Not seen; title from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 176, no. 2775, who refers to Muller's ‘‘ Histérie-
prenten, no. 1292-1293.” [45.]

410 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1617. Purcuas, S. Of King Iames his Newland, alias, Greenland: And Of The Whale
: And Whale-Fishing. <(Purchas his Pilgrimage, or Relations of the World § the
Religions observed in al Ages § Places, etc., 3d ed., 1617, pp. 920-924.

Of special interest as containing the earliest English, and the first distinct, description of
the Greenland Whale (Balena mysticetus)—detailed, exceedingly quaint, and in the main
quite correct. It was derived from information furnished by Master Thomas Sherwin, based
on his experiences in whaling in the year 1611. [46.]

1622. WHITBOURNE, R. A | Discovrse | and Discovery « of Nevv-fovndland, with |
many reasons to prooue how worthy and bene- | ficialla Plantation may there
be made, after a far | better manner than now it is. | Together with the lay-
ing j open of certaine enormities | and abuses committed by some that trade
to that | Countrey, and the meanes laide downe for | reformation thereof. |
Written by Captaine Richard Whitbourne of | Exmouth, in the County of
Deuon, and pub- | lished by Authority. | Asalso, an Inuitation: and likewise
certaine Letters sent | from that Countrey; which are printed in the | latter
part of this Booke. [Design.] | Imprinted at London by Felix Kingston.
1622. sm. 4°. Il. 11, pp. 1-107, 1]. 24, pp. 1-15.

Reference to cod-Sishing and whale-fishing (pp. 11-13) as carried on at the Grand Banks by
the Biscayners in 1615.

The work was first published in 1620, without the appendix of the present edition ; shen
is also a later (1623) edition, neither of which have I seen. The 1622 ed. seems to be the same
as the ed. of 1620, so far'as the body of the work is concerned, to which there is added, besides
tbe above-mentioned appendix, 2 preliminary leaves, containing also new matter. [47.]

1622-85. ‘‘WASSENAER, CLAES. Historisch verhael alder ghedenck-weerdichste Ge-
schiedenissé, die hier en daer in Europa, alsin Duitsch-lant, Vranckrijk ... en
Neder-laut, Asia, America en Africa, van den beginne des jaers 1621 tot Octo-
bri des jaers 1632 voorgevallen sijn. (Met platen, kaarten en portretten.)
Tot Amstelredam, by Jan Evertsz. Kloppenburgh, 1622-1624, J. Hondius,
1624, en Jan Jansz, 1625-35. 21 dIn.,7 bdn. 49.

‘‘Zie aldaar: Welvaert van de Noortsche Compagnie (gelukkige walvischvangst). De
inwoonders van Spitsberghen. Het verloop van de walvisschen, v, 1623, Septemb., bl. 157-
158. Vanhet eylandt Spitsbergen, alwaer de genereuse Willem Tas, capiteyn, zijn couragie
toont. Ook van de walvisschen, haer baerden en vinnen, baleynen genaemt, die Jan Osborn,
seer konstigh verwerckt. Handelingh van de Noordersche Compagnie. Verslag van de reis
van Willem Vermuyden, 1612. Wat recht de Engelschen pretendeeren op de walvischvangst
bij Spitsbergen, met de wederlegging van Petr. Plancius. Overeenkomst tusschen Ant.
Monier en Benj. Joseph, aangaande de verdeeling yan den vischgrond bij Spitsbergen en ver-
dere bijzonderheden betrekkelijk de walvischvangst, viii, 1624, Decemb., bl. 86-96. Ontde-
ckingen van Goenlant en Nieu-Nederlant, ix, 1625, April, bl. 43, 44. Placcaet der H. H. Staten
op den haringhvanghst, teghens d’ inghesetenen van Schotlandt haer wel te draeghen, ix,
1625, Mai, bl. 56, 57. Vervolgh van het ontdecken van de doorvaert in ’t Noorden. Toerus-
tinghe van cen nieuwe ontdeckinghe, door Waygatz, tusschen Nova-Zembla en 't vaste landt
Russien, ix, 1625, Julius. Van de Spitsberch-vaerders, met het succes van de walvisch-
van ghers, x, 1625, Decemb., bl. 106, 107. Verhael van de reyse op Wavgatz, na de Tarta-
rische zee gedaen, alsmede van de reyse door het Fretum Davis, om daerdoor nae eae te
gaen. Nieuwe walrus-vangers, xi, 1626, May, bl. 57.

‘‘Walvischvangst ghemist. De buysen verstoort. Walrusvanghen en ’t seylen door Way-
gats ghemist, xi, 1626, Sept., bl. 131-183. Wederom-comst van de walvischvanghers, alsmede
de Spitsbergh-vaerders, onder de Noortsche Compagnie, xii, 1626, Octob., bl. 8,9. Visscherije
op Spitsberghen, xvi, 1628, Novemb. Staet van Spitsberghen, xvi, 1628, Decemb.”

Not seen; title and references from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 251, no. 3603. [48.]

1624. ‘‘BauparTius, W. Memoryen ofte Cort Verhael der Gedenck-weerdichste,
Gheschiedenissen van Nederland, Vranckrijck, Hoogh-Duytschland, Groot
Brittannyen enz. Van den jaere 1603-1624. Tweede editie grootelicx ver-
meerdert. Met portretten. Arnhem, Jan Jansz. 1614. 2din. folio.

‘‘Zie aldaar: Enghelsche verhinderen de Hollanders in den walvisch-vanck. Boek v, bl.
43. Jacobus VI vernieuwt de questie van den harinck-vanck. xii, bl. 16. Nederlanders ende
Enghelsche int gevecht om de visvangh. Misverstant tussche de Enghelsche ende Neder-
landers om den walvisch-vanck. ix, bl. 97. Vier walvisschen bij den Hage (Scheveningen)
gevangen. ix, bl. 97, 202.”

Not seen; title and comment from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 232, no. 3424. [49.]

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 411

1624. “ LixscuoTEeN, JAN HUYGEN VAN. Voyasie, ofte schipvaert van Jan Huyghen
van Linschoten, van bij Noorden om langes Noorwegen de Noordt Caep, Lap-
landt, Vinlandt, Ruslandt, de Wittee Zee, de Kusten van Kardenoes, Swete-
noes, Pitzora, etc. door de Strate ofte Enghte van Nassouw tot voorby de
Reviere Oby. Waer inne seer distinctelycken Verhaels-gewyse beschreven
ende aen gewesen wordt, alle hetgene dat hem op deselve reyse van dach tot
dach bejegent ende voorgekomen is. Met alle do afbeeldtsels van alle de Kus-
ten. . . . Ghelyck als hij ’t alles selfs sichtelycken ende waerachtelycken nae
*t leven uyt-geworpen en geannoteert heeft, ete. Anno 1594 ende 1595. T’Am-
sterdam, by Jan Evertszen Cloppenberg. A°. 1624. folio.”

“Tweede druk met gefigur. titel en 15 platen, gegraveerd door J. en B. van Doetecom. De
eerste druk verscheen te Franeker bij Gerard Ketel. A° 1601. folio. Eene verkorte uitgave
zag in 1663 te Amsterdam, by Saeghman, het licht. 4°. Deze twee reizen van Linschoten zijn
vertaald opgenomen in: Tecueil de voyages au Nord. Amsterdam, J. I’. Bernard, 1731. dl.
iii, bl. 1-304. Zie verder: Tiele, Mémoire bibliogr., bl. 190-195.

“Zie betrekkelijk de walvisschen in dezen 2n druk: Walvissché in de haven van Toxar.
Vangen een walvisch daer se 20 tonné specks afkrijzhen. Wonderlycke liefde der walvissché
met den anderé. Eene teelt van walvissché in de haven van Toxar—‘“ende is te ghelooven,
dat soomender op toeleyde, ende op versien quam, men soude daer sonder twyffel een goede
visscherye afdoen.”” bl.7. Sien veel walvissché in de Tartarische zee. Dbl. 17. Vervolgens
Dl. 22%, 26, 315.”

Not seen; title and comment from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 241, no. 3503. [50.]

1625. Barrin, WitL1AM. A Iournall of the Voyage made to Greenland with sixe Eng-
lish ships and a Pinnasse, in the yeere 1613. Written by Master Milliam Baffin.
<Purchas his Pilgrimes, iii, 1625, pp. 716-720.

Short history of the adventures and achievements of the English whaling-fleet during the
year 1613. [51.]

1625. BArFIN, WILLIAM. [Letter] To the Right Worshipfull Master Iohn Wosten-
holme Esquire, one of the chiefe Aduenturers for the discouerie of a passage to
the North-west. [Signed, William Baffin.] <Purchas his Pilgrimes, iii, 1625,
pp. 843, 844.

Reference to the ‘‘Grand Baye Whales” of Newfoundland, ‘‘of the same kinde which are
killed at Greenland”; also to the ‘‘Sea Unicorne.” [52.]

1625. [Barriy, Wi111AM.] A briefe and true Relation or Iournall, contayning such
accidents as happened in the fift voyage, for the discouerie of a passage to the
North-west, set forth at the charges of the right Worshipfull Sir Tho. Smith
Knight, Sir Dudly Digges Knight, Master Iohn Wostenholme Esquire, Master
Alderman Jones, with others, in the good ship called the Discouerie of London;
Ltobert Bileth Master, and my self Pilot, performed in the yeere of our Lord
1616. <Purchas his Pilgrimes, iii, 1625, pp. 844-848.

Whale Sound (77° 30’ N. Lat.), named from the great number of whales seen in it, p. 846;

many ‘‘Sea Vnicornes”’ seen during the voyage. The context following shows the ‘ Rela-
tion’ to have been written by William Baftin. [53.]

1625. EpGr, Tuomas. A briefe Discouerie of the Northerne Discoueries of Seas, Coasts,
and Countries, deliuered in order as they were hopefully begunne, and haue
euer since happily beene continued by the singular industrie and charge of
the Worshipful Society of Muscouia Merchants of London, with the ten seuerall
Voyages of Captaine THoMAs EpGr the Authour. < Purchas his Pilgrimes, iii,
1625, pp. 462-473.

First Whale-killing (year 1611), pp. 465, 466. Whaling voyages of 1612-1622, pp. 466-470.
“The Description of the seuerall sorts of Whales, with the manner of killing them,” pp- 470-
472. *‘Kight seuerall kinds of Whales” are briefly described, as follows: 1. Grand-bay, taking
his name from Grand-bay in Newfoundland” = Balena mysticetus. 2. Sarda — Balena
biscayensis. 3. Trumpa= Physeter macrocephalus. 4. Otta Sotta—a whalebone Whale, gray
in color, and ‘‘hauing finnes in his mouth all white but not aboue half a yard long "'—probably
Agaphelus gibbosus, Cope. 5. Gibarta=some kind of Finner Whale. 6. Sedena, “of a
whitly colour, and bigger than any of the former, the finnes not aboue one foot long, and he

412

BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1625. EpGr, Tuomas—Continued.

yeelds little or no Oyle.” 7%. Sedena Negro. . . ‘witha bumpe on h's backe” =? Megoptera
longimana. &. Sewria, ‘‘of colour as white as snow,” etc. = Beluga catodon.

A map (pp. 472, 473s) of Greenland (i. e., Spitzbergen) accompanies Captain Edge’s memoir.
with border at sides and bottom consisting of views illustrative of the Whale and ‘‘Seamorce”’
fisheries. At the upper left corner is a picture of a Whale lying on its side, with the legend
“A Whale is ordinarily about 60 footelonge.” Immediately below this isa scene illustrating
the capture of a Whale, with 4 lines of descriptive text. Below this are two others illus-
trating respectively the cutting in of the Whale and the trying out of the blubber, each with
a descriptive legend 4 to 6 lines in length. On the right-hand border four of the five scenes
depict respectively the towing of the Whale to the ships, the towing of the blubber to shore,
the preparation of the fins (the legend reads: ‘‘'Thus they make cleane and scrape y° whale
fins’’), and *‘A tent and Coopers at worke.” [54.]

1625. FOTHERBYE, R. A Voyageof Discouerie to Greenland, &c. Anno1614. Written

by Ro. ForHEerRBYE. <Purchas his Pilgrimes, iii, 1625, pp. 720-728.
Gives an account of the capture of Whales during the voyage. [55.]

1625. Hutry, W., and others. Diuers other Voyages to Greenland, with Letiers of

1625.

those which were there employed, communicated to mee by Master William
Heley. <Purchas his Pilgrimes, iii, 1625, pp. 732-738.

Eleven letters, written by various persons, relating briefly to the history of Whaling by
the Englis}: during the years 1617 to 1623 inclusive. [56.]

“LAET, J. DE. Nieuwe Wereldt | ofte | Beschrijvinghe | van | West-Indien, |

wt veelerhande Schriften ende Aen-teekeningen | van verscheyden Natien by
een versamelt | Door | Ioannes de Laet, | Ende met Noodighe kaerten en Tafels
yoorsien. Tot Leyden, | Inde Druckerye van Isaack Elzevier. | Anno 1625. |
Met Privilegie der Ho. Mo. Heeren Staten Generael, voor 12 Jaren. | fol. pp.
(2), xxii, 526. Maps. :

“See ASHER'S ‘Essay,’ no.1. This invaluable work was much improved in the subsequent
editions and translations by the author, but the maps were unchanged.”

Editio princeps. Not seen; title and comment from Sabin, Bibl. Am., x, 1878, p. 15. For
notice of the account of the Manatee in Laet’s work, see infra the Latin ed., 1633. [57.]

1625. [Muscovy MERCHANTs.] A Commission for Thomas Edge our seruant, appointed

1625.

1625.

1625.

to goe as our Factor in the Ship called the Mary Margaret, of the burthen of one
hundred and fiftie Tunnes, for the killing of the Whale and Morses vpon the
coast of Greenland, or any other place in the North Ocean: Giuen the 31. of
March, 1611. <Purchas his Pilgrimes, iii, 1625, pp. 709, 710.

This is a letter of instruction issued by the ‘‘right Worshipfull Company of New Trades,”’
or ‘‘Muscouie Merchants,” as above. Among other things it directs the ‘procuring of sixe
men of Saint John de Luz” to act as whale-men; describes the different kinds of Whales to be
sought, and their products, ete., this information being evidently based on Thomas Edge’s
‘‘ Description of the seuerll sorts of Whales, with the manner of killing them,” as given in
Purchas, iii, pp. 471, 472. : [68.]

Poo.E, Jonas. A briefe Declaration of this my Voyage of discouery to Green-

land, and towards the West of it, as followeth: being set forth by the right
Worshipfuall Sir Thomas Smith, Gouernour of the right Worshipfull Company
of new Trades, &c., written by JoNaAS POOLE. < Purchas his Pilgrimes, 111, 1625,
pp. 711-713.

Short history of the first English whaling voyage to ‘‘Greenland”’ (i. e.. Spitzbergen),
made in the year 1611. [59. ]

Poor, Jonas. A relation written by Jonas Poole of a Voyage to Greenland,

in the yeere 1612. with two ships, the one called the JVhale; the other the
Sea-horse, set out by the Right Worshipful the Muscowie Merchants. < Pur-
chas his Pilgrimes, iii, 1625, pp. 713-715. [60.]

[PurcHAS, SAMUEL.] Extractsof GONZALO FERDINANDO DE OVIEDO his Sum-

marie and Generall Historie of the Indies. <Purchas his Pilgrimes, iii, 1625,
pp. 970-1000.
Description of the ‘‘Manati” at pp. 987, 989. (61.]

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 413

1628. ‘‘HrrRNANDEz, [F.] Rerum Medicarum Nove Hispaniz Thesaurus, seu Planta-
rum Animalium Mineralium Mexicanorum historia ex Francisci Hernandi
Noui orbis medici Primarij relationibus in ipsa Mexicana vrbe conscriptis a
Nardo Antonio Reccho ... . Collecta ac in ordinem digesta 4 Joanne Terren-
tio Lynceo notis illustrata; cum Indice, et Historiz Animalium et Mineralinm
libro. Nune primum in naturaliti rer’ studiosor gratia et utilitaté studio
et impensis Lynceorum Publici iuris facta Philippo magno dicata. Lome.
M.DCXXVIIII. Ex Typographeio Jacobi Mascardi. fol. Engraved title,
pp. 950, 17 1. ‘Historiz Anima lium,’ pp. 90 (6).

‘This edition was abridged and edited from the author’s MS. by Dr. Reeccho, of Naples;
pp. 345-455 are additions by Terrentius deConstance; pp. 460-840 by John Vaber; pp. 841-899
are annotations by Fabio Colonno; the tables by Prince Cesi. Leclerc, no. 457, describes:
Fabri (Joannis lyncei). Animalia Mexicana Descriptionibus, scholijq. exposita. Rome, 1628,
folio, which is merely an extract, pp. 460-840, from the foregoing.’’

Not seen; title and comment from Sabin, Bibl. Amer., vol. viii, p. 239. See infra edition
of 1651, for notice of cetological matter, etc. Sabin also gives (as do Carus and Engelmunn)
a Spanish edition, Mexico, 1615, sm. 4°, translated and enlarged by Fr. Francisco Ximenez.
Stevens (Bibl. Iist., p. 76, no. 891) cites an edition of date 1604.

See further on Hernandez and his work, Sabin, op. cit., pp. 239-241. See, also, Coues, Bds.
Col. Vall., p. 575. [62.]

1629. KITTENSTEYN, C. ‘‘Walvisch, gestrand by Noortwyk, 1629. Naer P. Mosijn,
door CO. Kittensteyn, br. fol.”

From Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 176, no. 2776. [63.]

1632. SAGARD-THEODAT, G. Le Grand Voyage | Dv pays des Hvrons, | situé en
VAmerique vers la Mer | douce, és derniers confins | de ]la nouuelle France, |
dite Canada. | Ot: ilest amplement traité de tout ce qui est du pays, des |
meeurs & du naturel des Sauuages, de leur gouuernement | & fagons de faire,
tant dedans leurs pays, qu’allans en voya-| ges: De leur foy & croyance;
De leurs conseils & guerres, & | de quel genre de tourmens ils font mourir
leurs prisonniers. | Comme ils se marient, & esleuent leurs enfans: De leurs
Me- | decins, & des remedes dont ils vsent 4 leurs maladies: De | leurs dances
& chansons: De la chasse, de la pesche & des | oyseaux & animaux terrestres
& aquatiques qu’ils ont. Des | richesses du pays: Comme ils cultiuent les
terres & accom- | modent leur Menestre. De leur deiiil, pleurs & lamenta- |
tions, & comme ils enseuelissent & enterrent leurs morts. | Auec vn Diction-
naire de la langue Huronne, pour la commodi- | té de ceux qui ont & voyager
dans le pays, & n’ont | intelligence d’icelle langue. | Par F. Gabriel Sagard
Theodat, Recollet de | S. Frangois, de la Prouince de 8. Denys en France. |
—|A Paris, | Chez Denys Moreav, rué S. Jacques, 4 | la Salamandre d’Argent.

| — | M.DC. XXXII. | Auec Priuilege du Roy. 1vol. 16°. Il. 12 (eng.

title, 1 1.; plain title, 1 1.; invocation to Jesus Christ, 2 1].; to Henry de
Lorraine, 2 ll.; to reader, 3 ll.; contents and royal privilege, &c., 3 ll),
pp. 1-380. Dictionaire de la Langve Hvronne, ll. 80.

Des Baleines, pp. 24-27; Marsoins blancs (= Beluga catodon), pp. 51, 52.

There is a late textual reprint of this rare work, published in 1865, ‘‘ giving fac-simile of
the original title-pages, indication of the original pagination, etc.” [64.]

1633. Lart, J. DE. Novyys Orbis | seu | Descriptionis | Indiz Occidentalis | Libri
XVIII. | Authore | Joanne de Laet Antwerp. | Novis Tabulis Geographicis et
variis | Animantivm, Plantarum Fructunmque | Iconibus illustrati. | Cum
Privilegio. | Lvgd. Batav. apud Elzevirios. A°. 1633. fol. ll. 15 (incl. engr.
title-page), pp. 1-104, 205-690, 11. 9. Maps and cuts.

Manati, p. 6, fig. The account occupies nearly a page; the figure is acopy from Clusius. [65.]

[1634?] SrGERsz VAN DeR BRuUGGE, Jacoz. ‘Journael, of Dagh-Register, gehouden
by Seven Matroosen, in haer Overwinteren op Spitsbergen in Maurits-Bay,
Gelegen in Groenlandt, t’ zedert het vertreck van de Visschery-schepen der
Geoctroyeerde Noordtsche Compagnie, in Nederlandt, zijnde den 30 Augusty,

~

1633 tot de wederkomst der voorsz. schepen, deu 27 May, Anno 1634. Beschre-

A414

BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

[1634?] SEGERSZ VAN DER BRUGGE, JACOB—Continued.

ven door den Bevelhebber Jacob Segersz van der Brugge. t’ Amsterdam, Ge-
druckt By Gillis Joosten Saeghman. (z.j.) 4°. [Circa 1634.]

“Het verhaal van de Overwinteringen in 1633 en 1634 vindt men verkort in: (Is. de la
Peyrére), Nauwkeurige Beschrijvingh van Groenland. Amsterdam, 1678. 4°. bl. 114-122.

“Tevens wordt van het bovengenoemde journael van Segersz een uittreksal gevonden in: De

Walvischvangst, ii, bl. 26-36.”
Not seen; title and remarks from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 239, 340, no. 3491. [66.]

1635. NIEREMBERG, J. E. Ioannis Evsebii Nierembergii | Madritensis ex Sociatate

Iesv | in Academia Regia Madritensi | Physiologiz Professoris | Historia |
Nature, | Maxime peregrine, | Libris xvi. Distincta. | In quibus rarissima
Nature arcana, etiam astronomica, & | ignota Indiarum animalia, quadru-
pedes, aues, pisces, | reptilia, insecta, zoophyta, plants, metalla, lapides, & |
alia mineralia, fluuiorumque & elementorum condi- | tiones, etiam cum pro-
prietatibus medicinalibus, descri- | buntur; nouze & curiosissimze quzestiones
disputantur, ac | plura sacre Scripture loca erudité enodantur. | Accedunt
de miris & miraculosis Naturis in Europa Libriduo: | item de iisdem in Terra
Hebrezis promisé Liber unus. | [Vignette.] Antverpiz, | ex Officina Planti-
niana Balthasaris Moreti. | M. DC. XXXYVY. 2°. Il. 4, pp. 1-502, 11.50. Figs,
num. in text.

Caput lix. De balenis pugnacibus, p. 261; caput lx (pp. 262-263), De piscatione balena-
rum. Contains a figure of a male Cachalot lying on the side and showing ventral surface—
from Clusius, many times copied by later compilers; also, a figure of a fabulous creature, from
Clusius, suggestive in some respects of the Cachalot, the two figures bearing the legend Cete
admiribilis forme. [67.]

1636. SaGarD TuEopaT, G. Histoire | duCanada | et | Voyages que les freres | Mineurs

Recollects y ont faicts pour | la conuersion des infidelles | divisez en quatre
livres | Ou est amplement traicté des choses principales ar- | riuées dans le
pays depuis l’an 1615 iusques 4 la pri- | se quien a esté faicte par les Anglois.
Des biens & | commmoditez qu’on en peut esperer. Des moeurs, | ceremonies,
creance, loix, & coustumes merueil- | leuses de ses inhabitans. De la conuer-
sion & baptes- | me de plusieurs, & des moyés necessaires pour les amener | a
la cognoissance de Dieu. | L’entretien or- | dinaire de nos Mariniers, & autres
particularitez | que se remarquent en la suite de histoire. | Fait & composé
par le | F. Gabriel Sagard, | Theodat, Mineur Recollect de la Prouince de

Paris. | — | A Paris, | Chez Claude Sonnius, rué S. Jacques, a /’Escu de | Basle,
& au Compas dor. | — | M.DC. XXXVI | Auec Priuilege & Approbation. sm.

8°. pp. 1-1005, ll. 22.
Marsoins, pp. 118, 124,135. Des Baleines, pp. 130-133. Marsoin blane, p. 1577.
A textual reprint of this rare work, in 4 vols., 12°, Paris, appeared in 1866. [68.]

1640. LarT, J. DE. L’Histoire | dv | Nonveau Monde | ou | Description | des Indes |

occidentales, | Contenant dix-huict Liures, | Par le Sieur Jean de Laet, d’An-
uers; | Enrichi de nouuelles Tables Geographiques & Figures des | Animaux,
Plantes & Fruicts. | [Vignette.] A Leyde, | Chez Bonauenture & Abraham

Elseuiers, Imprimeurs | ordinaires de ’Vniuersité. | — | Clg I9C XL. fol. I.
18, pp. 1-632, Il. 6.
Le Manati, p. 6, fig. [69.]

1616. ALBERTZ. VAN RAVEN, Dirk. ‘‘Journael ofte Beschrijvinge vav de reyse ghe-

daen bij den Commandeur Dirk Albertsz. Raven, nae Spitsberghen, in den
jare 1639, ten dienste vande E. Heeren Bewindt-hebbers van de Groen-
landtsche Compagnie tot Hoorn. Waer in verhaelt wordt sijn droevighe
Schipbrencke, syn ellende op ’t wrack, en syn blijde verlossinge. Met noch
eenighe ghedenckweerdige Historien. Alles waerdigh om te lesen. ‘Tot
Hoorn. Gedruckt by Isaac Willemsz. Voor Ian Iansz. Deutel. Ao. 1646.
4°. Met eenc plaat.

“‘Hierbij zijn geveogd nog drie Reisjournalen naar het Noorden, en wel van: Andrics
Jansz. van Middelburgh in 1634; van Raven in 1633; van Pieter Jansz. Pickman in 1616. Het

1646.

1647.

1648.

1648.

1650.

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 415

ALBERTZ. VAN RAVEN, Dirk—Continued.

journaal van Raven vindt men gewoonlijk als appendix achter het Iournael van de Oost
Indische Reyse van Willem IJsbrantsz. Bontekoe. Hoorn. 4°. Het is ook opgenomen in:
Hulsius Sammlung von 26 Schiffuhrten. Neurnberg, 1598-1640.”

Not seen; title and comment from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 240, no. 3492. [70.]

La PEyRERE, ISAAC DE. Relation | dv | Groenland. | [Par Isaac de La Peyrére. ]
[Vignette.]. A Paris, | Chez Avgvstin Covrbe, dans la | petite Salle dv Palais,

a la Palme. | — | M. DC. XLVII. | Auec Privilege dv Roy. sm. 8°, 11. 8, pp:
1-278, 1]. 2. Map and pill.
For notice of cetological matter sce infra, ed. of 1663. [71.]

Anon. ‘Kort verhael uyt het journael van de personen die op Spitsbergen in ’t
overwinteren, gestorven zijn. Anno 1634. Gedrukt te Hoorn, 1648.
“Behoort bij het Journaal van D. Alb. Raven.”

Not seen; title from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 249, no. 3576. Sce 1646. RAVEN, D. A. [72.]

““GUICCIARDINI, L. Belgium, dat is: Nederlandt, ofte Beschryvinge derselviger
provincien ende steden. Met veel bijvoegselen, landcaerten en de af beeldinge
der steden. Amsteld., J. Jansonius, 1648. 2°.

““Walvisschen, p. 302a.”
Not seen; title from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 70, no. 1100. (73.]

Jonston, J. Historie Naturalis | ‘De Piscibus et Cetis | Libri V. | Cum eneis
figuris | Iohannes Tonstonus Med. Doctor | concifianit. | Francofvrti ad Moe-
num | Impensa | Matth[wi] Meriani. [Seal.] [No date. Engraved title-
page.] 2°. pp. 1-228, pll. i-xlvii.

Historie Naturalis | De | Exangvibus | Aqvaticis | Libri IV. | Cum figuris
eneis | Joannes Jonstonus | Med. D. concinunavit. | [Seal.] .Francofvrti | ad !
Moenvm, | Impendio | Matthei Meriani. | — | MDC L. pp. 1-78, pll. i-xx.

The work is in two parts, with separate pagination and notation of plates, and the two title-
pages above transcribed. The index to the two series of plates is on one page, and the general
index to the two parts is partly on the same leaf. The first title-page is without date; the
second is dated M. DC. L., ostensibly the date of publication of the whole work.

Liber v. De Cetis (= Cetacea+Strenia et Pinnipedia), pp. 213-224, pll.xli-xliv. Capyt i,
De Cetis in genere, pp. 213, 214. Capvt ii, De Cetis in specie. Articulusi, De Balzna, pp. 215,
216, pll. xli, xlii; Articulus ii, De Balena vulgi, & Physetere, pp. 216,217; Articulus iii, De
Puste & Orea, pp. 217, 218, pl. xliii; Articulus iv, De Delphino, pp. 218-220, pl. xliv; Articulus
v, De Phocena & Scolopendra Cetacea, pp. 220, 221, pl. xli; Articulus vi, De Phoca, seu Vitulo
marino, pp. 221-223, pl. xli; Articulus vii, De Manati Indorun, pp. 223, 224, pl. xiii.

Pl. xli, 5 figg.: upper, “ Balena—Wallfisch” = Physeter macrocephalus; second fig., ‘‘Ba-
lena—Wallfisch” = Physeter macrocephatus, from Clusius ; middle fig., ‘‘ Balena Monstrosa”
(teeth in lower jaw, and some other features of Physeter, of which it may be a gross czrica-
ture); fourth fig., ‘‘Balena—Ein ander art Wallfisch,” apparently based on the Orca, but the
pectoral limbs terminate in curved claws; last fig., ‘‘ Phoczesna—Meer Schwein, Braunfisch”
= Phocena. Pl.xlii: ‘‘Balena. Ein Grosser Wallfisch von 60 Schuch lang vnd 41 Schuch
hoch,” a full-page figure, with scenery, of an unmist akable Physeter macrocephalus, lyiug on
its side. PI. xliii, 7 figg.: upper fig., ‘‘ Vtilis Piscis sersam ad instar Pristis habens "—2 fabu-
lous creature, with the sword of a saw-fish (Pristis) protruding from the top of the head;
second fig., ‘‘ Delphinus prior, Delphin”’ (not determinable); third fig., ‘‘Delphinus alter, Del-
phin” (probably an Orca); fourth and fifth figg., ““Artiq. Metal.,’’ obverse and reverse of an

cD")
ancient coin or medal, on one rude efligies of two Dolphins; sixth fig., ‘*Delphinus fceemina,
Delphin Weiblein’’ = Phoceena, with a young one attached by the fetal envelopes; seventh

fig., ‘‘Delphinus alius, Ein ander art Delphin’- Common Dolphin. PI. xliv, 8figg.: upper fig.,
““Caput Delphini, Delphins Kopf” = Phoceena ; second fig., ‘‘ Gladius piscis Serie, Der Kopf
des Schwertfisch,” skull of Pristis ; third fig., ‘‘ Scolopendra cetacea,”’ a fabulous creature with
some features of a Cetacean; fourth fig., ‘‘ Phoca siue Vitulus marinus, Seehund,” Seal; fifth
fig., ‘‘ Vitulus, Seehundt,” Seal; sixth fig., ‘‘Rosmarus, Wallross”’; seventh fig., ‘‘Rosmarts
Vetus, Ein Alt Meer Ros”; and eighth fig., ‘‘Rosmarus juuencus, Ein Iung Meer Ros,” from
the well known figure published by Gerard. In the article ‘‘De Manati Indorum” there is a
reference to “ Tab. xliii,’’ but there is no corresponding figure on the plate.

None of the figures are originel, most of them being copies from Belon, Rondelet, Olaus
Magnus, Gesner, ete. [74.]

416 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1651. ALBrRTUS MaGNus. Beati | Alberti | Magni, | Ratisbonensis Episcopi, | ordinis
predicatorvm, | de Animalibvs Lib. XXVI. | Recogniti per R. A. P. F. Petrym
Iammy, sacri Theologiz Doctorem, Conuentus | Gratianopolitani, eiusdem
Ordinis. | Nvne primvm in lvcem prodevnt. | Operum Tomus Sextus. | [Vig-
nette.] Lvgdyni, |

( Clavdii Prost.

| Petri & Clavdii Rigayd, Frat.
) Hieronymi Delagarde.

(Joan. Ant. Hvgvetan.

M. DC. LI. | Cvm privilegio Regis. fol. ll. 8, pp. 1-684.

Liber xxiv. De natura natatilium primo in communi, & consequenter in speciali, pp. 645-
661. De cetu, pp. 650,651. De delphino, pp. 653, 654. De gladio, p. 655. De monocerote, pp.
657. [75.]

Sumptibus Via Mercatoria. |

1651. HERNANDEZ, F. Nova | Plantarvm, Animalivm | et Mineralivm Mexicanorvm |
Historia | a Francisco Hernandez Medico | In Indijs prestantissimo primum
compilata, | dein a Nardo Antonio Reccho in volvmen digesta, | a Io. Terentio,
Io. Fabro, et Fabio Colymna Lynceis | Notis, & additionibus longe doctissimis
illustrata. | Cui demum accessere | aliqvot ex principis Federici Czsii Fronti-
spiciis | Theatri Naturalis Phylosophice Tabule | Vnacum quamplurimis Iconi-
bus, ad octingentas, quibus singula | contemplanda graphice exhibentur. |.
[Vignette.] | Romae MDCLI. | Sumptibus Blasij Deuersini, & Zanobij
Masotti Bibliopolarum. | Typis Vitalis Mascardi. Superiorum permissu.

[Or,] Rervm Medicarvm | Nove Hispanic | Thesavrvs | sev | Plantarvm
Animalivym | Mineralivm Mexicanorvm | Historia | ex Francisci Hernandez |
Noui Orbis Medici Primarij relationibus | in ipsa Mexicana Vrbe conscriptis |
a Nardo Antonio Reccho | Monte Coruinate Cath. Maiest. Medico | Et Neap.
Regni Archiatro Generali | Iussu Philippi II. Hisp. Ind. etc. Regis | Collecta
ac in ordinem digesta | A Joanne Terrentio Lynceo | Constantiense Germ? Pho.
ac Medico | Notis Illustrata | Nunc prima in Naturalit rer. Studiosor. gratia |
lucubrationibus Lynceort publici iuris facta. | Quibus Jam excussis accessere
demum alia | quor. omnium Synopsis sequenti pagina ponitur | Opus duobus
voluminibus diuisum | Philippo IIII. Regi Catholico Magno | Hispaniar. vtri-
us@ Sicilize et Indiara ete Monarche | dicatum. | Cum Priuilegijs. Rom Supe-
rior. permissu. Ex Typographeio Vitalis Mascardi. M. DC. XXXXXJI. fol. 1L9
[= ill. title (the one first given above), engr. title (the second given above),
dedic. to the reader, index], pp. 1-950, 1.1, pp. 1-90, ll. 3 [= index and errata],
ll. 10 [gen. index, index of authors, errata, and corregenda]. The leaves con-
taining the general index, etc., here placed at the end of the volume, are in
some copies bound in at the front of the general text. The ‘‘ Historiz Ani-
malivm et Mineralivm Novae Hispaniae ... Francisco Fernandez Philippi
Secundi primario medico avthore” (pp. 1-90-L1l. 3) is also similarly transposed
in binding.

There are earlier editions, none of which I have been able to see: the collation of that of
1€28 (q. v.) has been already given, copied from Sabin. On Hernandez and his works see Rich,
Books relating to America, 1493-1700, pp. 72-74.

The matter of special intcrest in the present connection is: De Manati, Nardi Ant. Reechi,
ix, cap. xiii, pp. 323, 324, 2 figg.

About 3p. of text, and 2 cuts, one in profile, the other from above, scarcely recognizable as
having any relation to the Manati: body elliptical, tail broad and rounded, with a ring at base;
head in profile, swi generis ; from above, somewhat calf-like ; fore-limbs quite long, feet hoofed,
and of a bovine form, especially as secn in the profile figure. The characters given by the
artist do not conform to those in the text, which is, compared with other early accounts, not
remarkable for accuracy.

Ambra grisea seu odorata, Io. Fabri Lyncei Expos., pp. 564-579. A long disquisinon about
Ambra grisea, its nature, origin, and medicinal properties, ete., with references passim to
Balene. [76.]

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 417

1652. ANon. ‘De Vrye Zee, aengaede haere vryheyt in ’t varenen visschen voor de
Veeren Nederlanden, verdedigt tegen alle bestryders der Gerechticheyt, inson-
derheyt teghen die hedendaechsche Regeringe in Engeland. [No place.]
1652. 49°.”

‘Pp. 55-62 treat of the Herring- and Whale-fishery and the pretensions of the English on
Greenland and Spitzbergen.”

Not seen; title and comment from-Fr. Muller, Oat. Amer. Books, 1877, p. 200, no. 3424.
(77.]

1655. ““N.N.” America: | or | An Exact Description | of the | West Indies: | More
especially of those | Provinces which are under | the Dominion of the | King of
Spain. | — | Faithfully represented by N. N. Gent. | — | London, printed by
Ric. Hodgkinsonne for Edw. Dod, | and are to be sold at the Gun in Ivy-lane,
1655. sm. 8° by sig. Il. 7, pp. 1-484, 1. 1, map.
The Manati or Oxe-fish, pp. 154,155. Account based mainly on Hernandez and Laet. (78.]

1655. Worm, OLaus. Museum Wormianum. | Seu | Historia | Rerum Rariorum,
Tam Naturalium, quam Artificialium, tam Domesticarum, | quam Exoticarum,
que Hafnie Danorum in | edibus Authoris servantur. | Adornata ab | Olao
Worm, med. doct. | &, in Regid Hafniensi Academia, olim | Professore pub-
lico. | Variis & accuratis Iconibus illustrata. | [Vignette.] Lugduni Bata-
vorum, | Apud Johannem Elsevirivm, Acad. Typograph. |—| Clg ts LV.
2°, 1. 9, pp. 1-390, 1.1. Cuts in text.

Cap. xiii, De Cetis, pp. 279, 280; cap. xiv, De Ceto dentato, Balen4, Monocerote, pp. 280-
287; cap. xv, De Delphino, Pristi, Phocé, Rosmaro, pp. 288-290. Skull of Narwhal figured,
three views, and a view of the tusk separate, pp. 283-285; also a grotesque figure of the ani-
mal, p. 282.

Cap. xiii, De Cetis, consists mainly of a briefly descriptive list of Whales from the cele-
prated Icelandic manuscript ‘‘Specvlum regale,” numbering 22 species. (Cf. Eschricht and
Reinhardt, ‘‘Om Nordhvalen,” 1861, p. 39, and the English translation, ‘‘Memoirs on Ceta_
cea,” Ray Society, 1866, p. 32.) The account and figures of the Narwhal are from the MSS.
of D. Thorlacus Sculonius. ~ [79.]

1657. ‘‘BARTHOLINUS, TH. Cetorum genera.”
“Zie: Th. Bartholinus, Historia Anatom., cent. iv, 1657, pp. 272-285."
Not seen; from Bosgoed, Bibl. Ichthyol. et Piscat., p. 157, no. 2477. [80.]}

1657. JoNSTON, JoHN. An | History | of the | Wonderful Things of Nature: | Set
forth in Ten severall Classes. | Wherein are contained |

I. The Wonders of the Heav- VI. Of Birds.
ens. VII. Of Four-footed Beasts.

II. Of the Elements. VIII. Of Insects, and things wanting
III. Of Meteors. blood.
IV. Of Minerals. IX. Of Fishes.

V. Of Plants. X. Of Man.

| — | Written by Johannes Jonstonus. | And now Rendred into | English, |
by | A Person of Quality [John Rowland]. | — | London, | Printed by John

Streater, living in Well-Yard near the Hospitall of | St. Bartholomew’s the
Lesse, and are to be sold by the Book- | Sellers of London, 1657. 8°. 811,

pp. 1-344.
Classis ix, chap. iii, of the Whale and Barbel, pp. 290, 291. Chap. xi, of Manaty, and the
Whiting, pp. 296, 297. Chap. xii, of Mirus, Mola, and Monoceros, pp. 297-298. (81.)

1658. ‘‘RocuEForT, C. pr. Histoire | Naturelle et morale | des | Iles antilles | de
lAmerique. | Enrichie de plusieurs belles figures des Raretez les plus | consi-
derables qui y sont décrites. | Vvec vn Vocabulaire Caraibe. | [Dessin.] |
A Roterdam, | Chez Arnould Leers, | — | M. DC. LVIIJ. 1 vol. 8°(orsm. 4°).
Engr. title, 8 prel. pp. incl. regular title, pp. 1-527, 6 ll. (contents),

This is the original ed. Not seen; title from Coues, Bull. U. S. Geol. and Geogr. Surv.

Terr., v, no. 2, Sept. 6, 1879, p. 240. For Cetacean matter, etc., see second ed., 1665. Also,
the Dutch version, 1662. [82.]

27 GB

418 - BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1660. Hnrrara, A. DE. Histoire | generale | des Voyages | et Conqvestes | des Castil-
lans, dans les Isles & Terre-ferme | des Indes Occidentales. | Traduite de VEs-
pagnol @’Antonio d’Herrara, Historiographe de sa | Maiesté Catholique, tant
des Indes, que des Royaumes de Castille. | Par N[icolas]. de la Coste. | Pre-

- miere Decade, contenant les Pre- |... [=etc., 7 lines]. | A Paris, | Chez Ni-
colas & Iean de 1a Coste, au Mont Saint Hilaire, & | ’Escu de Bretagne; et en
leur boutique, 4 la petite porte | du Palais, qui regarde le Qay des Augustins.

|—|M.DC.LX. Avee Privilege dv Roy. 3 vols. 4°. 1660-61.
Du poisson apellé Mauati [sic], tome i, pp. 378, 379. [83.]

1660. Jo[N]sTON, J. Naeukeurige beschryving van de natuur der viervoetige dieren,
der vissen en bloedloze waterdieren, der vogelen, der gekerfde of kronkeldie-
ren, slangen en draken, neffens haar beeldnissen. Uit het Latyn vertaeld
door M. Grausius. Amsterdam, Schipper, 1660. fol. Met 249 koperen platen.”

Not seen; title from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 10, no. 108. [84.]

1662. RocHEFORT, C. DE. Natuurlyke en zedelyke | Historie | van | d’Eylanden | de

Voor-Eylanden | van Amerika. | Verrijkt met vele schoone Platen, die uyt-

beelden @’ aller-aan- | merkelijkste seldsaamheden die’er in beschreven zijn. |

Met eenen Caraibaanschen Woorden-schat. | Door D. Charles de Rochefort

voor desen Bedienaar | des H. Enangeliums in d’ Eylanden van Amerika, en

tegenwoor- | digh Herder van de Kerke der Frangoysche Tale tot Rotterdam.
| Vertaalt in Nederduytsch door H[eiman]. Dullaert. | Alles na een Voor-
schrift door de Schrijver oversien | en veel vermenighvuldight. | [ Vignette. ]

Tot Rotterdam, | By Arnout Leers, Boekverkooper. | M.DC.LXII. sm, 4°.

ll. 20 (incl. engr. title and plain title), pp. 1-475, ll. 54 (contents). (The copy

examined lacks the folding plates of the French ed. of 1665, but appears to

have all the others.) i

XVII. Hooft-stuk: Van de Zee-gedrochten die in dese gewesten gevonden worden, pp.

151-159. Van de Marsoiiins, of Zee-verkens, p. 152: Wan den Lamantin, pp. 155, 156. Van

de Walvisschen, en andere Zee-gedrochten, p. 156. XVIII. Hooft-stuk: Bysondere beschrij-

ving van eenen Zee-Een-hoorn, die strande op de Rheede van het Eyland van de Schild-padde
in het jaar 1644, ete., pp. 159-177. XX. Hooft-stuk: Van den Ambergrijs; Van sijnen oor-

spronk, en van de teykenen des genen die goed is, en sonder vermengeling, pp. 190-194.

For comment on the cetological matter, etc., see the French ed. of 1665. [85.]

1663. LA PEYRERE, ISAAC DE. Relation | dv | Groenland. | [Par Isaac de La Peyrére. ]
[Vignette.] A Paris, | Chez Lovis Billaine, au second | pillier de la grand’
Salle du Palais, & la | Palme, & au grand Cesar. | — | M. DC. LXIII. | Avec
Privilege dv Roy. ll. 9, pp. 1-278, 1]. 2. Map and pll.

References to the Narwhal (le Licorne) and to Whales passim, but especially to the former
at pp. 192, 193, and to the latter at pp. 220-223. The plate facing p. 145 gives a figure of the
Narwhal (animal) and three views of the skull, evidently after Worm.

This appears to be a reissue, with a different imprint, of the edition of 1647 (ed. prin., q. v.).
There is a Dutch translation (Hoorn, 1678), and a German (Niirnberg, 1679). Itis also given
in English by Churchill (Coll. Voy.), and by the Hakluyt Society (Coll. Doc. on Spitz. and
Greenl., pp. 175-249). The cetological matter is unimportant. [86. ]

1664. BoucnER, P. Histoire | veritable | et | Natvrelle | des | Moevrs et Prodvetions

| dv Pays | de la | Novvelle France. | Vvlgairement dite | le | Canada. | [ Par
Pierre Bouchet.] [Ornament.] A Paris, | Chez Florentin Lambert, rué |
Saint Iaques, vis 4 vis Saint Yues, | 4 Image Saint Paul. | — | M. DC. LXIV.
| Auec Permission. 12°. ll. 12, pp. 1-168.

Noms des Poissons qui se trouuent dans le grand Fleuue S. Laurens, & dans les lacs &
riuieres qui descendent, dont nous auons connoissance. Chap. vii, pp. 74-87. Marsoin blane
[=: Beluga catodon), pp. 74, 75. .‘‘On en void des quantitez admirables, depuis Tadoussac
jusques 4 Quebec, qui bondissent sur la riuiere” (p. 75). [87.]

1664. ZESEN, Fries von. ‘Beschreibung der stadt Amsterdam, darinnen von dersel-
ben ersten ursprunge bis auf gegenwiirtigen Zustand, ihr unterschiedlicher
anwachs, herliche vorrechte, und in mehr als 70 Kupferstiikken entworfene
fiihrnemhste Gebeue, zusamt ihrem Stahtswesen, Kauf-handel und ansebn-
licher macht zur See, wie auch was sich in und mit Derselben markwiirdiges

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 419

1664. ZusEN, Fir1es von—Continued.
zugetragen vor augen gestellet werden. Zu Amsterdam, Gedrukt und verlegt

durch Joachim Noschen, Im Jahr 1664, 49°.”

‘*Zie aldaar: Fischmarkte, bl. 226, 227-231, benevens eenige bijzonderheden omtrent den
verkoop van visch. Grihnlandische Geselschaft, was vor freiheit sie habe, bl. 359. Griihn-
landische Pakheuser, bl. 358. Walfische, wie sie gefangen und der trahn daraus gesotten
wird, bl. 359. Hiarings-Pakkerei und Pakker-turn, bl. 76, 103, 172.

Not seen; title and references from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 253, no. 3613. [88.]
1665. ANoN. Of the New American Whale-fishing about the Bermudas. < Philos.
Trans. Lond., i, no. 1 [1665], pp. 11-13. [89.]

1665. [RocnErort, C. DE.] Histoire | naturelle et morale | des | Iles Antilles | de
VAmerique. | Enrichie d’un grand nombre de belles Figures en taille douce, |
des Places & des Raritez les plus considerables, | qui y sont décrites. | Avec un
Vocabulaire Caraibe. | Seconde edition. | Reveué & augmentée de plusieurs
Descriptions, & de quelques | éclaircissemens, qu’on desiroit en la precedente.

| [Par César de Rochefort.] [Dessin.] | A Roterdam, | Chez Arnout Leers,
]}—|M.DCC.LXV. sm. 4°. 18 ll. (incl. eng. title and plain title), pp.
1-583, Il. 64 (contents), 3 fold. pll., and numerous cuts of plants and animals.

Chapitre xvii. Des Monstres Marins qui. se trouvent en ces quartiers, pp. 190-200. [Con-

- tenant entre autres], Des Marsoiiins, p. 191; Du Lamantin, pp. 194, 195, fig., p. 199; Des
Baleines & autres Monstres de Mer, p. 195.

Chap. xviii. Description particuliere d’une Licorne de Mer, qui s’echoua & la rade de I’Lle
de la Tortué en l’an 1644. Avec un recit curieus, par forme de comparaison & de digression
agreable, touchant plusieurs belles & rares cornes qu’on a apportées depuis peu du détroit de
Davis; & de la qualité de la terre, & des meurs des Peuples qui y habitent, pp. 200-220, 2 figs.,
p. 204..

Chap. xx. De l’Ambre gris; De son Origine & des marques de celuy qui est bon, & sans
mélange, pp. 236-241.

The remarks about Marsouins and Baleines are brief and of no importance. The account
of the Lamantin (1 page and 3 lines in length) is explicit and interesting, describing correctly
the general appearance and habits of the animal, including its reproduction, and the use of itS
flesh as food by the natives. The cut (p. 199) is a very good figure (its date, of course, con-
sidered) of the animal—an old Lamantin folding its young one in its arms. The account of
the Licorne de Mer (pp. 200-202), said to have been stranded ‘‘au rivage de I’'Ile de la Tortué,
voisine de l’Ile Hispaniola, ou Saint Domingue,” is given in the words of M. du Montel, who
saw it. It was about 18 feet long, its body of the size of a barrel. It had 6 large fins—2 placed ‘‘au
defaut des ouyés,” the other 4 on the sides of the belly at equal distances. The body was cov-
ered with large scales; therefore, whatever it may have been, it was not a Cetacean. The horn
projecting from the front of the horse-like head was 94 feet long. The horn was preserved for
two years, and finally carefully boxed and shipped by the governor of the island, as a present,
to ‘‘Monsieur des Traucarts, Gentilhomme de Saintonge,”’ but, alas, the vessel was wrecked
on the passage, and this precious relic was lost, as well as all the merchandise. Following
this relation is a short account of the Narwhal with (on page 204) ‘‘les figures de la Licorne
laquelle s’echoiia en I’e de la Tortué, & d’une de celles du Nord,” to show how great is the
difference between the two species.

In the chapter on Ambergris, after stating the fact that it was unknown to the ancients.
and the various theories respecting its origin, the author observes: ‘‘ Mais c’est plus vrai-sem-

' blablement une sorte de Bitume, qui s’engendre au fond de la mer,”’ etc., and proceeds to give
his view of how it may be detached, ete. The whole account is one of special interest in
relation to the early history of Ambergris.

For the original edition of this work, see RocHEFORT, at 1658. There is also a later (‘‘der-
niere’’) edition (Rotterdam, 1681), of which Dr. Coues has recently given the collation (Bds.
Col. Vall., p. 241). An English translation was published in London in 1666 (not seen by
me), and a Dutch in 1662, g. v. [90.]

1666. ANon. A Further Relation of the Whale-fishing about the Bermudas, and on the
Coast of New-Lnglend and New-Netherland. < Philos. Trans. Lond., i, no. 8
[1666], pp. 182, 133. [91.]

1667. ‘‘MERRETT, C. Pinax | Rerum Naturalium | Britannicarum, | continens | Vege-
tabilia, Animalia, | et | Fossilia, | In hac Insula reperta inchoatus. | — |
Authore | Christophoro Merrett, | Medicinze Doctore utriusque Societatis |
Regiz Socio primoque Muszei Har- | veani Custode. | — | My 76 Adyw udvvov
GAAu | Epyw det voutfecbat Tove i7rpove. Hipp. | — | Londini, | — | Typis T. Roy-

420 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1667. ‘‘Mrrrett, C.—Continued.
croft, Impensis Cave Pulleyn. | MDCLXVII. Vol.unic. 16mo. Tit.1f. Epist.
dedic., 5f. Epist. ad Lect., 10f. pp. 1-223-+1.”
‘Edit. altera. Ed. princeps 1666. Ed. nova 1704.” é ;
Not seen; title from Coues, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., ii, 1880, p. 361. The work is also cited
by Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 102, no. 1619. ‘[92.]
1667. Norwoop, R. An Extract Of a Letter, written from the Bermudas, giving
an account of the Course of the Tides there, of Wells both Salt and Sweet,
digg’d near the Sea; of the Whale-fishing there practised anew, and of such
Whales, as have Sperma Cetiinthem. < Philos. Trans. Lond., no. 29 [1667], pp.
565-567. [93.]
1667. TERTRE, [J. B.] DU. Histoire | generale | des | Antilles | habitées par les Fran-
cois. | Tome ii. | Contenant 1 Histoire | natverelle, | Enrichy de Cartes &
de Figures. | Par le R. P. [Jean Baptiste] dv Tertre, de Ordre FF. Pre-
scheurs, | de la Congregation de 8S. Louis, Missionnaire Apostolique | dans les
Antilles. | Amis] A Paris, | Chez Thomas Iolly, au Palais, en le Salle des
Merciers | 4 la Palme, | & aux Armes d’Hollande. |—| M.DC.LXVII. |
Avec Privilege. 4°. [3 vols., 4°. Vol. i, vol. ii, 1667; vol. iii, 1671.]
Vol. ii, Traite iv. Des Poissons. Chap.i. Des Poissons de la mer, pp. 195-233.—§i. Des
Baleines, pp. 196-198. §ii. Des Sonffleurs, pp.198,199. §iii. Du Lamantin ou Manaty, pp.
199-209, fig. (pl. fac. p.195). The remarks about the ‘‘Baleines” and ‘‘Souffleurs”’ aro very
general and of little importance. The account of the Manatee is more detailed, treating of
its external characters, habits, products, and capture. The figure is like Laet’s, which isa
copy from that of Clusius, gq. v. : [94.]
1668. StarrorD, R. Of a Letter, written to the Publisher from the Bermudas by Mr.
Kichard Stafford ; concerning the Tydes there, as also Whales, Sperma Ceti...
< Philos. Trans. Lond., iii, no. 40 [1668], pp. 792-795. [95.]

1669. “‘MontTanus, ARN. Gedenkwaerdize Gezantschappen der Oost-Indische maat-
- schappy, aen de Kaisaren van Japan. Vervaetende wonderlijke voorvallen op
de togt der Nederlandsche gezanten. Beschryving van dieren, gewassen enz.
t? Amsterdam, by Jacob van Meurs, 1669. fol. Met gegrav. platen en kaarten.”
““Zie aldaar: Beschryving der walvisschen en der walvischvangst, bl. 448,449. Js syauscue

visschers, haer manieren van visschen. Met afbeelding, bl. 55 en 279.”

Not seen; title and comment from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 169, no. 2675. [96.]
1670. BARTHOLINUS, THOMAS. De Sirene Danica. <Lphem. Med.-phys. Germ. Acad.
Nat. Curios., i, 1670, pp. 85-89; edit. secund., 1684, pp. 73-79. [97.]

1670. ‘‘NiruHoF, JOAN. Het Gezantschap der Néerlandsche Oost-Indische Compa-
gnie,aen den grooten Tartarischen Cham, den tegenwoordigen Keizer van
China. Waerin de gedenkwaerdighste geschiedenissen. .Benefiens beschryving
der dieren, gewassen, enz. Verciert met over de 150 afbeeltsels. t’ Amsterdam,
by Jacob van Meurs, A°. 1670. fol.”
““Zie aldaar, Visschen: De walvisch, haar gestalte en teelt; hoe zy gevangen worden, bl.
157a-160a. Vliegende visschen. Met afbeelding, bl. 203, 204.”
Not seen; title and comment from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 170, no. 2682. [98.]
1670. Scrtta AGostiIno. La | Vana Specvlazione | disingannata | dal Senso. | Lettera
risponsiva | Circa i Corpi Mariné, che Petrificati fi trouano | in varij loughi
terrestri. | Di Agostino Scilla Pittore | Accademico della Fvcina, | detto lo
Scolorito. | Dedicata | all’ illvstrissimo Signore, | il Signor | D. CarloGregori |
Marchese di Poggio Gregorio, | cavaliero della Stella |—]| In Napoli, |
Appresso Andrea Colicchia. M.DC.LXX. | Con licenz a de’ Superiori. 4°.
ll. 5, pp. 1-168, pll. i-xxviit-+-frontisp.

At page 123 is a description of a fragment of a lower jaw containing three teeth; the frag-

ment is figured, pl. xii, fig. 1. The teeth are recognizable as those of Sqwalodon. (Cf. VAN
BENEDEN, ‘‘Recherches sur les Squalodonts,” in Mém. del’ Acad. roy. de Belgique, vol. xxxvi
1865,)

The work thus has the importance of containing the first unquestionable description and
figure of remains of Squalodonts. [99.]

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 421

1671. ‘‘MARTINIDRE, P. M. DE LA. Voyage des pays septentrionaux. Dans lequel se
voit les moeurs, maniére de vivre et superstitions des Norwéguiens, Lappons,

Sy bériens, Samojédes, Zembliens, Islandois. Paris,1671. kl. 8°. Met fig.”
“Herdrukken verschenen te Parjis, 1676. 8°, en te Amsterdam,1708 (zonder naam van
den schrijver). Eeene engelsche vertaling: London, 1674; eene hoogduitsche: Hamburg,
1675, en Leipzig, 1711; eene italiaansche in 1683. Zie voor de Hollandsche uitgave: De

Noordsche Weereld... [Zio 1685. MARTINIDRE en Marrpns.] Adelung geeft in zijn: ‘Ge-
schichte der Schiffahrten,’ bl. 298-319, een uitvoerig uittreksel van deze reis.”
Not seen; title and note from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 243, no. 3512. [100.]

1671. Ray, J. An Account of the Dissection of a Porpess, promised Numb. 74; made,
and communicated in a Letter of Sept. 12, 1671, by the Learned Mr. John Ray,
having therein observ’d some things omitted by Rondeletius. < Philos. Trans.
Lond., vi, no. 74 [1671], p. 2220; no. 76 [1671], pp. 2274-2279. [101.]

1672. ANon. ‘‘A proportional view of the large Spermaceti whale run aground on
Blyth Sand, and there killed himself. 30 Jan. 1672. [Pl. 8x14 inches.] Sold
by W. Tringham.”

Not seen; title from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 171, no. 2697. [102.]

1672. JOSSELYN, J. New-Englands | Rarities | Discovered: | In | Birds, Beasts,
Fishes, Serpents, | and Plants of that Country. | Together with | The Physical
and Chyrurgical Remedies | wherewith the Natives constantly use to | Cure
their Distempers, Wounds, | and Sores. | Also | A perfect Description of an
Indian Squa, | in all her Bravery ; with a Poem not | improperly conferr’d upon
her. | Lastly | A Chronological Table | of the most remarkable Passages in
that | Country amongst the English. |— | Illustrated with Cuts. |—] By
John Josselyn, Gent. |— | London, Printed for G. Widdowes at the | Green
Dragon in St. Pauls Church yard, 1672. sm. 8° by sig.,24° size. II. 2, pp.
1-114, cuts.

Reprinted in Archevlogia Americana or Trans. and Coll. Amer. Antiq. Soc., iv, pp. 133-238.

The Sperma Ceti Whale; What Sperma Cetiis; What Ambergreece is, pp. 35,36. ‘‘ Now
you must understand this Whale feeds upon Ambergrcece, as is apparent, finding it in tho
Whales Maw in great quantity, but altered and excrementitious: I conceive that Aimber-

_ greece is no other than a kind of Mushroom growing at the bottom of some Seas...” (p.36).
[103.]

1672. TuLprus, N. Nicolai Tulpii | Amstelredamensis | Observationes Medice. | Editio
Nova. | Libro quartior auctior, & Sparsim multis | in locis emendatior. |
[Vignette.] Amstelredami, | Apud Danielem Elsevirium, | Clg I1pC LXXII.
sm. 8°. ll. 7, pp. 1-392, pll. i-xviii.

Unicornu marinam, lib. iv, cap, lix, pp. 374-379, tab. xviii. The three very rude figures rep-
resent the animal in profile and the skull from above and below. They are the same as those
given by Worm, by whom they were copied from Tulpius.

The editio princeps I havo not seen; the dedication ‘‘Ad Petrum Tulpium filium” is dated
1641, which is probably the date of the first edition. There are numerous later editions, of
which editio quinta is the only one I have seen (q. v.—1716. TuLPIus, N.). [104.]

1673. BoyLE,R. <A Letter of the Honorable Robert Boyle of Sept. 13, 1673, to the Pub-
lisher, concerning Amber Greece, and its being a Vegetable Production. < Philos.
Trans. Lond., vii, no. 97, 1673, pp. 6113-6115.

Stated, on the authority of a factor of the Dutch East India Company, to issue from the
root of a tree. {105.]

1675. JOSSELYN, J. An | Account | of two | Voyages | to New-England. | Wherein
you have the setting out of a Ship, | With the charges; The prices of all
necessaries for | furnishing a Planter & his Family at his first com- | ing; A
Description of the Country, Natives and | Creatures; The Government of the
Countrey as | it is now possessed by the English, &c. A large | Chronologi-
cal Table of the most remarkable | passages from the first discovering of the
Conti- | nent of America, to the year 1673. | — | By John Josselyn Gent. | — |
The Second Addition. | — | [Quotation,6 lines.] | London Printed for G.
Widdowes at the Green Dragon in St. | Pauls Church-yard, 1675. sm.8° Il. 4,
pp. 2-279-+3.

422

BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1675. JOSSELYN, J.—Continued.

Orig. ed. 1664; the present is textually the same, except the title-page. Reprinted in the
Coll. Mass. Hist. Soc., 3d ser., iii, 1833, pp. 211-296, ‘‘and was again reprinted in 1865 by Wil-
liam Veazie, following the Harvard College copy” of the 1675 ed., from which copy the above
collation is taken. .

The Ambergreese-Whale, pp. 104,105, ‘‘Anno Dom. 1668 the 17 of July there was one of
them thrown up on the shore between Winter-harbour and Cape-porpus [near Boston], about
eight mile from the place where I lived, that was five and fifty foot long” (p.104). Nothing
else of importance relating to Cetacea. [106.]

1675. MARTENS, F. Friderich Martens | vom Hamburg | Spitzbergische oder Groen-

landische | Reise-Beschreibung | gethan im Jahr 1671. | Aus eigner Erfahrunge
beschrieben, die dazu erforderte | Figuren nach dem Leben selbst abgerissen,
(so hierbey in | Kupfer zu sehen) und jetzo durch den | Druck mitgetheilet. |
[Vignette.] Hamburg, | Auff Gottfried Schultzens Kosten gedruckt, | Im
Jahr 1675. sm. 4°. Il. 4, pp. 1-132, ll. 2, pll. A-Q = 16. :
Cetacea, pp. 92-127. Meerschwein oder Tunin, pp. 92,93. Butskopf, pp. 93,94. Weisfische
[= Beluga catodon], p. 94. Vom Einhorn [= Monodon monoceros], pp. 94,95. Sagenfisch ins ge-
mein genannt Schwerdtfisch [= Orca], pp. 95,96. Vom Wallfisch, pp. 98-109, pll. A and Q (figs.
a, b, Balena mysticetus). Vom Wallfischfang, pp. 110-118. Wie sie mit den todten Walfisch

-timbgehen, pp. 118-123. Von des Fetts,oder Trahns Brennerey, pp. 123-125. Von Finfisch -

[=Balenoptera sp.], pp. 125-127, pl. Q, fig. e.

Martens’s work in relation to Cetology is one of great interest and importance, not only
from its early date, but for the good account it gives of the Greenland Right Whale and the
Whale-fishery, and also especially for its very good figures of the Greenland Whale and of the
Finfish. They may be fairly considered as the first passable figures of these species, and those
of the first were the standard figures down to the time of Scoresby (1820), and as such were
many times copied. His references to the other northern Cetacea are intelligent, and of great
historic interest. The only separate translations of the work I have seen cited are an Italian
(Venice, 1680, 12°) and a Dutch (Amsterdam, 1710, 4°, qg. v.), but various versions, generally
more or less abridged, have appeared in collections of voyages, etc., as Vries’s (Amsterdam,
1685), Narborough’s (London, 1694), Harris’s (London, 1705), Bernard’s (French, Amsterdam,
1731), Adelung’s (German, Halle, 1768), etc. Also, White’s (1855, Hakluyt Soc.),g.v. _[107.]

1676. DrBEs, L. J. Ferow, & Feroa Reserata: | That is | A Description | of the |

Islands & Inhabitants | of | Feerce: | Being | Seventeen Islands subject to the
| King of Denmark, lying under 62 | deg. 10 min. of North Latitude. | Wherein
several Secrets of Nature | are brought to Light, and some Anti- | quities hith-
erto kept in darkness | discovered. | Written in Danish by Lucas Jacobson |
Debes, M. A. and Provost of the | Churches there. | — | Englished By J[ohn],
S[terpin]. Doctor of Physick. |—| Illustrated with Maps. | — | Printed
by F. L. for William Iles, at the Flow- | er-de-Luce in Little Brittain, over
against | St. Bartholomews Gate. 1676. 12°. Il. 12, pp. 1-408. [The copy

examined (Harv. Coll. Libr.) lacks the maps. ]

Chap. iii. Of the Waters Fertility, pp. 163-189.—Grind-Whales [= Globiocephalus melas],
pp. 171-179. Doglings [= Hyperordon sp.], pp. 179-184. Roar and Witch-Whale, pp. 184-188.

The chapter ‘‘ Of the Waters Fertility ” is full of quaint and curious information about the
myths and superstitions prevalent among the Foero islanders in the 17th century respecting
the marine mammalia found about these islands, as well as replete with interesting matter
relating to the natural history of the Seals and Cetaceans. The account of the Grind- Whale
(Globiocephalus melas) is especially important.

“The Fishes wherewith this people maintain themselves are of three sorts; first, small
Fishes, secondly Seals, and in the third place Whales” (p. 164).

The date of the original Danish edition I am unable to give. A German version (8°, Ko-
penhagen und Leipzig) was published in 1757, q. v. [108.]

1676. “Sacus, Paut Lupw. Monocerologia seu de genuinis Unicornibus. Dissert.

Raceburgi, 1676. 8°. pp. 182, pl. 1.”

Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann. ; i [109.]

1677. ANON. ‘‘Strange news from the deep, being a full account of a large pro-

digious whale lately taken in the river Wioner, within six miles from ? Col-

chester. (z. pl.) 1677. 4°.”
Not seen; title from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 171, no. 2695. f110.]

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 423

1677. CHARLTON, W. Gualteri Charltoni | Exercitationes | de | Differentiis & Nomi-
nibus Animalium. | Quibus accedunt | Mantissa Anatomica, | Et quiedam |
De variis Fossilium generibus, | Deque differentiis & nominibus Colorum. |
Editio secunda, duplo fere auctior priori, novisque iconibus ornata. | [ Vi-
gnette.] Oxonie, | E Theatro Sheldoniano, An. Dom. 1677. 4°. 11.10. Ani-
malia Quadrupeda, Serpentia, Insecta, Aves, pp. 1-119; Pisces, etc., pp. 1-106;
Fossilia, etc., 1. 1, pp. 1-78, ll. 10, Indices. (With figures in the text.)

Piscium Cetaceorum Classis [pars ii], pp. 46-50. I. Balena. 1. Balana vulgaris, the com-
mon Whale, p. 46; 2. Physeter, & Physatus, the puffing aut spouting Whale, p. 47; 3. Cetus
Dentatus, x Carolo Clusio, the Sperma-Ceti Whale, p. 47; 4. Pustes, the Swift Whale, p. 47;
5. Orca, the Ork, p. 47; 6. Monoceros, Unicornu Marinum, the Unicorn Whale, p. 47. II. Pris-
tis, p. 47. IIL. Delphinus, the Dolphin aut Grampus, p. 47. IV. Phocena, the Porpus aut
Porpes, p. 48. V. Scolopendra Cetacea, p. 48. V1. Phoca, p. 48. VII. Walrus, aliis Mors,
p. 49. VIII. Manati, p. 49. LX. Hippopotamus, p. 50. The Editio princeps, 1672, I have
not seen. {111.}

1678. ‘‘BarraoLinus, Tu. De Unicornn observationes novae, secunda editione auctio-
res et emendatiores, editae 4 filio Casp. Bartholino. Amstelodami, Wetstenius,

1678. kl. 12°. Met 2 platen en afbeeldingen in den tekst.”
Not seen; from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 157, no. 2478. {112.]
1678. CaAPEL, RuDOLFF. Norden, | Oder | Zu Wasser und Lande im Eise | und Snee,
mit Verlust Blutes und Gutes | zu Wege gebrachte, und fleisig | beschriebene
| Erfahrung und Vorstellung | des Norden, | Auss | Denen, welche | zu
unterschiede- | nen Zeiten gelebet, viel im Norden versu- | chet, viel auch
wmbsonst angefangen und ange- | wandthaben: | Auff guter Freunde Begeh-
ren zusammen gebracht | dargereichet, und ferner zu betrachten und | zuver-
mehren, | von | Rudolff Capel, der. H. Schrifft D. | und Historiarum P. P. |

aussgefirtiget. |— | Hamburg, | Bey Johann Nanmann. | und Stockholm |
Bey Gottfried Liebezeit, Im 1678sten Jahre der Christer. 4@. ll. 4, pp. 1-236,
ll. 12.

Das 5 Capittel. Georg Niclaus Schurtzen bericht, von der Natur und Eigenschaft, auch
Nachstellung und Fang des Walfisches, im Jahr nach C. G. 1672. aussgefertigtet, pp. 197-
212. There are also references to Whales at pp. 55 and 67. Chapter v gives a quite detailed
account of the external characters, habits, products, and capture of the Greenland Right

- Whale. The female is said to be the larger, etc. There are also other passing allusions to
Whalefishing (Walfischfangst), as at pp. 141, 158, 159, ete. There is also a large plate (13411
inches), bound (in the copy examined) to face p. 156, which is a faithful reproduction of Mar-
tens’s plate of the common Balena mysticetus (two figures), anda Finner Whale, with the
accessories of whale-louse, harpoon, and lance. {113.]

1678. ““EXQUEMELIN, ALEXANDRE OLIVIER. De | Americaensche | Zee Roovers. |
Behelsende een pertinente en waerachtige Beschrijving van alle de | voor-
naemste Roveryen, en onmenschlijcke wreedheden, | die de Engelse en Franse

_ Rovers, tegens de Spanjaerden | in America, gepleeght hebben. | Verdeelt in
drie deelen: | Het Eerste Deel verhandelt hoe de Fransen op Hispanjola ge-
komen zijn, de | aerdt van ’t Landt, Inwoonders, en hun manier van leven
aldaer. | Het Tweede Deel, de opkomst van de Rovers, hun regel en leven on-
der mal- | kander, nevens verscheyde Roveryen aen de Spanjaerden gepleeght.
Het Derde ’t verbranden van der Stadt Panama, door d’ Engelsche en Franse
Rovers gedaen, nevens het geen de Schrijver op siju Reys voorgevallen is. |
Hier achter is bygevoeght,'| Een korte verhandeling yan de Macht en
Rijkdommen die de Koninck van | Spanje, Karel de Tweede, in America
heeft, nevens des selfs | Inkomsten en Regering aldaer. | Als mede een kort
begrijp van alle de voornaemste Plaetsen in het selve Gewest, | onder Chris-
ten Potentaten behoorende. | Beschreven door A. O. Exquemelin. | Die self
alle dese Roveryen, door noodt, bygewoont heeft. | Met schoone Figuren,
Kaerten, en Conterfeytsels, alle na ’t leven geteeckent, versien. | t’ Amster-
dam, By Jan ten Hoorn, Boeckverkoper, over ’t Oude | Heeren Logement.

424

1678.

1678.
1678.

1678.

1680.

1681.

1681.

BULLETIN ‘UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

‘CE XQUEMELIN, ALEXANDRE OLIVIER.—Continued.
Anno 1678. | 4°. 2 titles, 1 of which is engraved, 21., pp. 186, 4 portraits, 6
copper-plates, and 2 maps.”

“First edition, of extreme rarity. Perhaps no book in any language was ever the parent of
80 many imitations, and the source of so many fictions, as this, the original of the buccaneers
of America. . . . ‘There is certainly no other book of that time which experienced a popu-
larity similar to that of the ‘‘Buccaniers of America,” which was, in the ten years following
its publication, translated into most of the European languages; and there is a fact most curi-
ous in the literary history of all times, that the original was certainly unknown to all trans-
lators but one. They were all inclined to take the Spanish edition for the original; nay, even
the learned editors of Mr. Grenville’s catalogue seem doubtful whether the Dutch edition
existed in print, or in MS. only.’”

Not seen; title and comment from Sabin, Bibl. Amer., vi, pp. 309, 310, no. 23468. There is
a later ‘‘very much altered”? Dutch edition, 4°, Amsterdam, 1700; a German, 12°, Niirnberg,
1679; a Spanish, 4°, 1681, ‘‘translated from the [first] Dutch’’; also, later Spanish editions.
The first French edition, ‘‘of extreme rarity,” was published in 2 vols., 12°, Paris, 1686, ‘‘a
translation from the English”; a second French, by the same publishers, in 1688; the colla-
tion of two later French editions (1744 and 1774, q. v.) is given infrd. Three English versions
(one said to be an abridgment), translated from the Spanish, appeared in 1684 (q. v.), with
several later editions, and possibly other translations into English. (See Sabin, Bibl. Amer.,
vi, pp- 309-318, 328, nos. 23468-23494.)

I have examined the following editions, the collation of which is given by Sabin (op. cit.):
4°, Spanish (translated from the English), 1631 (no. 23471 of Sabin), in which the account of
the ‘‘Manentines” occurs at pp. 294, 295 (14 pp. general account of external characters, qual-
ity of flesh, habits, and. mode of capture, with no figure); 12°, Spanish, ‘‘Impression Se-
gunda,” 1682 (no. 23473 of Sabin) ; account of the ‘‘Manentines”’ at pp. 438-440, and the same
as that of the 4° edition of 1681; no figure. Dutch, 4°, 1700 (no. 23469 of Sabin); account of
the ‘‘Zee-Koe” at pp. 131, 132 of Deel 1, substantially the same as the Spanish; no figure.
English, ‘‘The Third Edition,” 1704 (no. 23485 of Sabin); account of the ‘“‘Sea-Cows” at pp.
160-162 (8 lines less than one page in length, and substantially the same asthe Spanish). En-
glish, ‘‘ The Fifth Edition,” 1771 (no. 23490 of Sabin); account of the ‘‘Manentine,” or ‘‘Sea-
Cow,” at pp. 209, 210, of vol. i. In none of the editions above cited is there any figure of the
animal. French, 12°, 1744 (q. v.), and 1774 (q. v.). The accounts of the Manatee in these two
French editions is entirely different from that of the Spanish, Dutch, and English editions
just cited; besides being twice as long, and containing much new matter, there is an (appar-
ently) original figure. ; [114.]

MaJor, JOUANN DANIEL. De Respiratione Phocenex vel Tursionis. < Hphem.
Med.-phys. Germ Acad. Nat. Curios., 1677 (1678), pp. 4, 5. ets
PAULLINUS, CHRISTIANUS FRANCISCUS. De Singulari Monstro Marino. <Kphem.
Med.-phys. Germ. Acad. Nat. Curios., 1677 (1678), pp. 79, 80. [116.]
‘““SCHOLTZ, ADAM Si1GisM. Cerebrum Orcae vulgari supposita Spermatis Ceti

larva develatum. Lipsiae, 1678. 4°. IL. 12.”
Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann. : [117.]

LyYsER, PoLyc. Disputatio physico-philologica de Cetis. Lipsiae, 1680. 4°.

pp. 20.
Not seen; title at second-hand. pen Ss]

Buastius, G. Gerardi Blasii | Amstelredamensis, | Medic. Doct. & Prof. Ordin.
| Anatome | Animalium, | Terrestrium variorum, Volatilium, Aquatilium, |
Serpentum, Insectorum, Ovorumque, | structuram naturalem | Ex Veterum,
Recentiorum, propriisque Observationibus | proponens, | Figuris variis illus-
trata. | [Vignette.] Amstelodami, | Sumptibus Viduze Joannis 4 Someren, |
Henrici & Vidue Theodori Boom. | — | clo Ioc L xxx1. 4°. IL. 3, pp. 1-494,
pll. i-lx.
Cap. xvi. De Phocena s. Delphino septentrionalium, pp. 286-290, pl. li (animal, skull,
lower jaw, scapula, pectoral limb, ear bones, tail, etc. = 8 figg).
Cap. xxxv. De Tursione, pp. 306, 307. [119.]
GREW, N. Museum Regalis Societatis. | Or a | Catalogue & Description | Of
the Natural and Artificial | Rarities | Belonging to the | Royal Society | And
preserved at | Gresham Colledge. | Made | By Nehemjah Grew, M. D. Fellow
of the Royal Society, | and of the Colledge of Physitians. | — | Whereunto is
Subjoyned the | Comparative Anatomy | of | Stomachsand Guts. | — | By the

1681.

1681.

1681.

1682.

1683.

1684.

1684.

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 425

GREW, N.—Continued.
same Avthor. | — | London, | Printed by W. Rawlins, for the Author, 1681.
4°, ll. 7, pp. 1-386, 1. 1+]. 2, pp. 1-42, pll. i-xxxi. r

Of Viviperous Fishes, sect. i, chap. i, pp. 81-103. Includes Cetacea, Sirenia, and Finne-
pedia as wellas true Fishes. Descriptions are given of ear bones and yertebrw of Whales.
Narwhal tusks, head and tail of Dolphin, skeleton of ‘‘Porpess or Sea-Hog,”’ etc. {120.]

Masor, JOHANN THOMAS. De Anatome Phoczne, vel Delphini septentriona-
lis. <Ephem. Med.-phys. Germ. Acad. Nat. Curios., 1672 (1681), pp. 22-32,
figs. i, iii-ix.

Hig. i, Tursio integer, vel Phocena; fig. iii, Os sterni Phocena; fig. iv, Scapula sinistri;
fig. v, Pinna anterior sinistri, Manum exhibens; figg. vi, vii, Os petrosum sub meatu auditorio;
fig. viii, Cranium Tursionis; fig. ix, Maxilla inferioris pars dextra. _([121.]

“Tyson, EDWARD. Phocena: Or the Anatomy of the Porpus, dissected at
Gresham College: With a Preliminary Discourse concerning Anatomy, and a
Natural History of Animals. By Edward Tyson, M. D., London, 1681.”

Not seen; title at second hand. {122.]

SEGNETTE, —. Historia Ceti aut Balene ad littora Rupelle propulse. <Zo-
diacus medico-gallicus, annus secundus, authore Nicolao de Blegny. Geneve,
1682, i, pp. 63-67.

_ Not seen; cited by P. Fisher (Ann. sci. nat., 5° sér., xv, 1871, art. no. 3, pp. 8, 9), as giv-
ing a description (measurements, external characters, and parasites) of 2 Whale stranded
Feb., 1680, near the island of Ré. . {123.]

“ACHRELIUS, L. Cetographia, sive dissertatio historico-physica de cetis.
Aboae, 1683. Met 6 houtgravuren. 8°.”

Not seen; title from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 157, no. 2469. [124.]

“TOELEN, J. A. VAN]. De seldsaame en noit gehoorde Walvischvangst, voorge-
vallen bij St. Anna-Land, in ’t jaar 1682, den 7 October, mitsgaders eene perti-
nente beschryvinge van de geheele Groenlandse vaart, verhandeld in prose en
versen. Nevens verscheide saaken tot die materie dienende, door P. P. van
S., met schoone kopere prentverbeeldinge (van Luyken) versierd; dese 2e
druk merkelijk verbeterd en bijna de helft vermeerderd. Tot Leyden in
4 jaar 1684. 4°. (Zonder naam van uitgever.)”

‘Die vermeerdering bestaat o. a. uit het volgende: Ao1677. Ordre, beraamt bij deGecomm.
van de Groenlandse visserij, over ’t bergen der goederen, enz. Contract tusschen de Com-
mandeur en zijn volk na Groenland. Een beschrijving van het scheepsleven en het berijmd
‘verhaal’ enz.

‘“De le druk verscheen in 1683 onder den titel: Kort en opregt verhaal van het droevig
en ayontuurlijk wedervaren van Abr. Jansz. Oelen. Zie voor de beschrijving der walvisch-

vangst op rijm: Fr. Martens, Beschrijv. van Groenland. . . . en Zorgdrager’s Groenlandsche
visscherij.”
Not seen; title and comment from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 243, no. 3523. [125 ]

SIBBALD, ROBERT. Scotia Ilbustrata | sive | Prodromus | Historix Naturalis | in
quo | Regionis natura, Incolarum Ingenia & Mores, Morbi iisque medendi
Methodus, & | Medicina Indigena accuraté explicantur: | et | Multiplices Na-
ture Partuis in triplice ejus Regno, Vegetabili scilicet, Animali & Minerali |
per hancce Borealem Magnae Britanis Partem que Antiquissimum Scotia |
Regnum constituit, undiquaque diffusi nune primum in Lucem eruuntur, & |
varii eorum Usus, Medici presertim & Mechanici, quos ad Vite | cum necessi-
tatem, tum commoditatem prestant, cunctis | perspicué exponuntur: | — |
Cum Figuris Aneis. | Opus viginti Annorum | Serenissimi Domini Regis
Caroli. II. Magn Britanniw, &c.—Monarche Jussu editum. | — | Auctore
Roberto Sibbaldo M. D. Equite Aurato, Medico & Geographo | Regio, & Regii
Medicorum Collegii apud Edinbyrgym Socio. | — | [Vignette.] | — | Edin-
byrgi, | Ex officinid Typographic& Jacobi Kniblo, Josuz Solingensis & Jo-
hannis Colmarii, Sumptibus Auctoris. | — | Anno Domini M. DC. LXXXIV.
2°. Il. 2, pp. 1-102, 11. 3. *

Pars Secunda | Specialis. | Tomus Primus | de Plantis Scotiw | tam indige-

426

BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1684. SIBBALD, RoBERT—Continued.

nis | quam hortensibus | — | Qvz in Libro Primo et Secundo | tractantvr.
| — | [Vignette.] |— |... [Imprint as above.] 11.3, pp. 1-114, 11.3. |

Pars Secunda | Specialis. | Tomus Secundus | de Animalibus Scotiz | tam
feris quam domesticis | et de | Mineralibus Metallis | et | Marinis Scotiz.

| — | De Qvibvs in Libro tertio et quarto agitur. | — | [ Vignette, and imprint
as above.] Ill. 3, pp. 1-56, ll. 4, pll. i-xxii.

Sectio Quarta. De Piscibus. Caput ii (pp. 22, 23,16 lines). Balena, the Common Whale;
Physeter, the Spouting Whale; Cetus dentatus Clusii, in cujus capite Sperma Ceti reperitur ;
Porcus Marinus Harengos persequitur, & Delphinus esse creditur; Phoccena, the Porpus or
Porpoise, Delphini species. (126.]

1685.: MARTINIERE, P. M. DE LA, en MARTENS, F. ‘‘ De Noordsche Weerweld, vertoond

in twee nieuwe aenmercklycke Reysen, d’ eene van de heer Martiniére...
d’ andere van F. Martens. Vertaeld en dvorgaens met toedoeningen verrijkt
door 8S. deVries. Amsteldam, A. D. Ooszaen, 1685. 4°. Met platen.”

Not seen; title from Bosgoed, op cit., p. 252, no. 3604. See 1671. MARTINERE, P. M. DE LA,
and 1675. MARTENS, F., of which the present appears to be a Dutch translation. [127.]

1686. WILLOUGHBY, FRANCIS. Francisci Willughbeii Armig. | De | Historia Piscium |

Libri Quatuor, | Jussu & Sumptibus Societatis Regie | Londinensis editi. |
In quibus non tantum De Piscibus in genere agitur, Sed & species omnes, tum
ab a- | liis tradite#, tum nove & nondum edit bene multe, nature ductum
servante | Methodo dispositz, accurate describuntur. | Earumque effigies,
quotquot haberi potuere, vel ad vivum delineatz, vel ad | optima exemplaria
impressa; Artifici manu elegantissime in ws incise, ad de- | scriptiones illus-
trandas exhibentur. Cum Appendice Historias & Observationes | in supple-
mentum Operis collatis complectente. | Totum Opus | Recognovit, Coaptavit,
Supplevit, | Librum etiam primum & secundum integros adjecit | Johannes
Raius e Socitate Regia. | [Vignette.] Oxonii, | E Theatro Sheldoniano, Anno
Dom. 1686. 2°. ll. 4, pp. 1-343, 1-30 (Appendix), ll. 7, pll. 186-- —

Liber Secundus De Piscibus Cetaceis seu Belluis Marinis, pp. 26-43.—Caput primum. De
Cetis vel cetaceis Piscibus in genere, ex scriptis Rondeletii & Gesneri precipue, pp. 26,27. Cap.
ii. De Delphino: e Rondeletii, Gesneri, & aliorum scriptis, pp. 28-31. Cap. iii. Phoczena Ron-
deletii, Gesn. .. . Phoczxna seu Tursio Bellonii & Scxligeri. Cimbris Marsuin vel Poreus
marinus: Angl. A Porpesse, pp. 31-35. Cap. iv. Balewna Rondeletii, Gesneri & aliorum. The
Whale, pp. 35-38. Cap. v. Balena vera Rondeletii, Gesn. . . . pp. 38-40. Cap. vi. Orea
Rondeletii, & Bellonii, p. 40. Cap. vii. Physeter Rondeletii, Gesn. . . . A Whirl-Pool, p.
41. Cap. viii. Cete Clusio Exot., lib. 6. Descriptum Pot-Wallfisch Batavis maris accolis dic-
tum, pp. 41,42. Cap. ix. De Monocerote pisce, qui de genere Cetaceo esse fertur, pp. 42, 43.
De Pisce Monocerote, seu Unicornu, App., pp. 12, 13 (ex Tulpio).

The plates have an engraved special title-page, dated 1685—one year earlier than the text—
and are sometimes cited as a separate work. The following is a transcription of the title:

Francises Willoughby | Icthyographia | ad Amplissimum Virum | D.2™
Samnelem Pepys, | Preesidem Soc. Reg. Londinensis, | Concilium, | et | Socios
ejusdum. | Figure Nove, que non pauce sunt t notantur. | Sumptibus | Socie-
tatis Regalis | Londinensis | 1685.

Pl. 4.1. Pisces Cetacei. Fig.1. Delphinus; Fig. 2. Phocena (fig. orig.); Fig. 3. Physeter
(fig. ex Clusio). Pl. A.2. Piscis Monoceros ejusq. cornu a varijs authoribus exhibitum ; item
embryonis alicujus cornu. 7 figg.—animal, skull, horns; one fig. of horn orig. [128.]

1687. ‘‘BRUNSMANN, —. Diss. de Ceto Ionae, qua eum verum fuisse Cetum ostenditur.

Jen., 1687. 8°.”
Not seen; title from Donndorff, Zool. Beytr., i, 1792, p. 776. [129.]

1688. BARTHOLINUS, TH. Thome Bartholini | de | Unicornu | observationes nove. |

Secunda editione Auctiores & | emendatiores edite 4 Filio | Casparo Bar-
tholino. | [Vignette.] Amsteledami | Apud Henr. Wetstenium, | — |
CIj ICC LXXVIII. 12°. 11. 8, pp. 1-381, numerous cuts.

De Unicornn Groenlandico, pp. 108-125 (p..J21, 3 views of the skull of the Narwhal, and one
of the detached horn). [130.]

1689.

1690.

1690.

1692.

1693.

1693.

1694.

1694.

1696.

*

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 427

“BARING, —. De Ceto Ionae. Brem., 1689.”
Not seen; title from Donndortff, Zool. Beytr., i, 1792, p. 776. (131.]

CLryERUS, ANDREAS. De Ceto minore Ambrophago. <Hphem. Med.-phys.
Germ. Acad. Nat. Curios., 1689 (1690), p. 69, fig. 4.

The upper figure represents a fabulous monster nearly in profile, somewhat whale-like in
general form, but having twoupward-curving, slender, pointed tusks in the end of the upper
jaw and two. high bosses or humps on the front of the head. The lower figure shows the
creature partly on the side; the dorsal fiu, humps, and tusks are not shown, and the figure

has a much more whale-like aspect. [132. ]

FABER, J. Addenda ad A. Cleyeri Observationes de ceto minore Ambro-_
phago. ee Med.-phys. Germ. Acad. Deh Curios., 1689 (1690), p. 456.

See above, 1690. CLEYER, A. [133.]

“PreEIFER, —. Diss. piscem Jonae deglutitorem fuisse Balaenam. Lub.,

1692. 4°.”
Not seen; title from Donndorff, Zool. Beytr., i, 1792, p. 776. [134.]

Anon. An Account of a Book Intituled, Phalenologia Nova sive Obserrationes
de Rarioribus quibusdam Balenis in Scotiz Littus nuper ejectis, &c. Aut Roberto
Sibbald, Edinburgi in Quarto, 1692. < Philos. Trans. Lond., xvii, no. 205
[1693], pp. 972-976.

Review of the work. [135.]

CLayton, J. A Continuation of Mr. John Clayton’s Account of Virginia.
< Philos. Trans. Lond., xvii, no. 205 [1693], pp. 941-948.

Contains a notice of the discovery of Whale remains near Jamestown, Va. [136.]

“DROSSANDER, A. Dissertatio de Balaena. Upsaliae, 1694. 4°. Met eene

plaat.” [pp. 62.]
Not seen; title from Bosgoed, op. cié., p. 161, no. 25438. [137.]

“PECHLIN, —. De pisce Ionae deglutitore, non fuisse Balaenam. Lub.,

1694. 8°.”
Not seen ; title from Donndorff, Zool. Beytr., i, 1792, p. 776. [138.]
““SMALLEGANGE, M. Nieuwe Cronyk van Zeeland. Herste (éénig) deel. Vervat-
tende de voor dezen uitgegeven cronyken van de Heeren Jacobus Eyndius en
Johan Reygersberg, veel vermeerdert on:trent deres landschaps oudheden er
herkomsten, wateren en stroomen, eylanden, steden en heerlijkheden. .Met
vele kopere platen (en kaarten) verciert. Tot Middelburg. By J. Meertens,

1696. fol.”
‘““Walvisvangst, pp. 173-178; van de visschen in onse stroomen en eerst van de zeehonden.

zeekatten, bruinvisschen, pp. 178-181.”
Not seen; title and references from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 210, no. 3169. [139.]

1697. Lister, M. Of a Venomous Scratch with the Tooth of a Porpos, its Symptoms

and Cure. < Philos. Trans. Lond., xix, no. 233 [1697], p. 726. [140.]

1697. Motynrux, T. A discourse concerning the Large Horns frequently found

1697.

under Ground in Jreland, Concluding from them that the great American Deer,
call’d a Moose, was formerly common to that Island: With Remarks on some
other things Natural to that Country. < Philos. Trans. Lond., xix, no. 227
[1697], pp. 489-512, 3 figs.

Contains remarks upon the nature of ambergris, spermaceti, and on the occurrence of Sperm
Whales on the coast of Ireland. {141.]

TREDWEY, R. Part of a Letter of Mr. Robert Tredwey y, to Dr. Leonard Plukenet,
Dated Jamaica, Feb. 12, 16957, giving an Account of a great piece of Amber-
griese thrown on that Tela with the Opinion of some there about the way of
its Production. < Philos. Trans. Lond., xix, no. 232 [1697], pp. 711, 712.

Said to be produced by some unknown sea ‘Creature,’ which is believed ‘‘to swarm as
Bees, on the Sea-Shore, or in the Sea.” (142.]

428 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1698. ACUNA, CRISTOVAL D’, ACARETE, GRILLET, and BECHAMEL. Voyages | and | Dis-
coveries | in | South-America. | The First up the River of Amazons to | Quito
in Peru, and back again to Brazil, | perform’d at the Command of the King |
of Spain. | By Christopher d@’Acvgna. | The Second up the River of Plata,
and | thence by Land to the Mines of Potosi. | By Mons. Acarete [du Bis-
cay ]. | The Third from Cayenne into Guiana, in search | of the Lake of Parima,
reputed the richest | Piace in the World. | By M. [Jean] Grillet and [Francis]

Bechamel. | — | Done into English from the Originals, being the on- | ly Ac-
counts of those Parts hitherto extant. | — | The whole illustrated with Notes
and Maps. | — | London, | Printed for S. Buckley at the Dolphin over against |

St. Dunstan’s Church in Fleetstreet. 1698. 8°. pp. i-viii; [Pt.1i], pp. 1-190,
map; [Pt. ii], 1. 1, pp. 1-79, map; [Pt. iii], ll. 2, pp. 1-68.

Parts ii and iii have each a full title-page, and each part is separately paged.

[Pt. i.] A Relation of the Great River | of Amazons in South-America. |
Containing all the Particulars of | Father Christopher d’Acugna’s Voy- | age,
made at the Command of the | King of Spain. | Taken from the Spanish Origi-
nal of the | said Chr. d@Acugna, Jesuit. [Half-title.]

Chap. xxv. The great Plenty of Fish in this River, and which is the best sort of them, pp.
61,62. Consists almost exclusively of an account of the ‘‘ Pege Buey” [Manatus americanus],
describing its appearance, how it is taken by the Indians, and extolling its flesh as an article
of food. A note at the end refers to the trade in its flesh with the ‘‘ Antilles or Antego-Isl-
ands,”’ to which it is extensively exported.

The original of this ‘‘ Relation” (see op. cit., Introd., pp. iv, v) is said to have been published at
Madrid in 1641 (4°) with the title ‘‘ Nuevo descumbrimiento del gran Rio de las Amazonas,”
but immediately suppressed by Philip IV., so that copies of it quickly became exceedingly
scarce.

[Pt. iii.] A | Journal | of the | Travels | of | John Grillet, | and Francis Be-
chamel | into | Gviana, | In the Year, 1674. | In | Order to Discover the Great
Lake | of Parima and the many Cities | said to be situated on its Banks, and |
reputed the Richest in the World. | —| London: | Printed for Samuel Buck-
ley, 1698.

A ‘‘kind of Fish, which they catch in the Rivers with a sort of Harping Iron” is alluded
to at p. 63 as being the basis of a profitable trade to the Antego Islands. It is evidently the
Manatee. [143.]

2699. ‘‘DooREGEEST, E. A. VAN, enC. A. PossaGerR. Den Rijper Zee-postil, bestaande
in Xxii predicatién, toegepast op den Zeevaert. Tot onderwijzinge vermaninge
en vertroostinge in de ware godsaligheyt voor allerlei Zeevarende lieden, dog
voornamenthjk voor diegene, welke op den Haring en Walvischvangst uitgaen.
Mitsgaders nog en korte beschryvinghe aengaende de opkomst van Holland,
waer in ’t bezonder ook gehandelt word van ’t Eyland met zijn dorpen, dog
voornamentlijck rakende de eerste oorspronck en ware gelegenheyt der Haring
en Walvischvangst. ’t Amsterdam, bij Jac. van Nieuweveen, 1699. gr. 8°.”

“Zie aldaar: bl. 343-360.”
Not seen; title and reference from Bosgoed, op. cif., p. 235, no. 3446. (144.]

1700. ANoN. Description de la piece d’ambregris que la chambre d’Amsterdam a
recue des Indes orientales pesant 182 livres; avec un petit traite de son origine
& de sa vertu par Nicolas Chevalier a Amsterdam chez auteur. 1700. in 4°.

p. 67. <Philos. Trans. Lond., xxii, no. 263 [1700], pp. 573, 574.
Review of the work. See next title. (145.]

1700. ‘‘CHEVALIER, Nicou. Description de Ja piece d’Ambre gris que la chambre

d’Amsterdam a regue des Indes orientales pesant 182 livres. Avec un petit

-traité de son origine et de sa vertu. (Mit 5 Kpfrtaf. u. Abdruk einer Schau-
miinze.) in-4. Amsterdam 1700, chez auteur.”

Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann. [146.]

1702. ‘‘ENGELBRECHT, —. Diss. duae de pisce, Ionae deglutitore. Lips., 1702. 8°.”
Not seen; title from Donndorff, Zool. Beytr., i, 1792, p. 776. [147.]

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 429

1702. ReiseL, SAM. ‘‘De Unicornu marino duplici. <Hphem. Acad. Nat. Cur., Dec.
3, An. 7 et 8. 1699-1700 (1702), pp. 350-352.”
Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann. [148.]
1702. ‘‘SozTrBoom, H. Oudheden van Zaanland, Stavoren, Vronen en Waterland.
Amsterdam, 1702, 2dln. 12°.”
‘“Waarin ook over de visscherij (haring- en walvischvangst der verschillende Zaanland-
sche dorpen) gehandeld wordt.”
Not seen; title and comment from Bosgoed, ep. cit., p. 253, no. 3611. (149.]

1703. ANon. A | Collection | of | Voyages | Undertaken by the | Dutch East-India
Company, | forthe Improvement of | Trade and Navigation. | Containing | An
Account of several Attempts to find out the | North-East Passage, and the
Discoveries in | the East-Indies, and the South Seas. | Together | With an
Historical Introduction, giving an ac- | count of the Rise, Establishment and
Pro- | gress of that great Body. | — | Translated into English, and Illustrated
with se- | veral Charts. | — | London, | Printed for W. Freeman near Temple
Bar, J. Walthoe inthe | Temple... [ = 3 lines of names of booksellers]. 1703.

8°, ll. 16, pp. 1-336.

The name of the translator is not given, neither are those of the authors whose works are
here translated.

In the history of ‘‘ Third Voyage of the Dutch to find the Passage to China” (pp. 16-68)
occurs, at pp. 21, 22, an account of the ‘‘Beasts”’ of Spitzbergen, among which are included the
Whales. About half a page relates to the Greenland Right Whale, giving a quaint description
of its appearance and food. [150.}

1703-05. DamMPIER, W. A |New Voyage | round the | World. | Describing particu-
larly, | The Isthmus of America, several Coasts | and Islands in the West In-
dies, the Isles | of Cape Verde, the Passage by Terra del Fue- | go, the South
Sea Coasts of Chili, Peru, and | Mexico; the Isle of Guam one of the La- |
drones, Mindanao, and other Philippine | and East India Islands near Cambo-
dia, China, | Formosa, Luconia, Celebes, &c. New Hol-| land, Sumatra,
Nicobar Isles; the Cape of | Good Hope, and Santa Hellena. | Their | Soil,
Rivers, Harbours, Plants, Fruits, Ani- | mals, and Inhabitants. | Their | Cus-
toms, Religion, Government, Trade, &c. | — | Vol. I. | — | By Captain Will-
iam Dampier. | — | Illustrated with Particular Maps and Draughts. | — | The
Fifth Edition Corrected. | — | London: | Printed for James Knapton, at the
Crown in St. | Paul’s Church-yard, 1703. 8°. ll. 5, pp. i-vi, 1-560, 5 maps,
and several small woodcuts in text.

[1705.] Voyages and Descriptions | Vol. II. | In Three Parts, viz. | 1. A
Supplement of the Voyage round the World, | describing the Countries of
Tonquin, Achin, | Malacca, &c. their Products, Inhabitants, | Manners,
Trade, Policy, &c. | 2. Two Voyages to Campeachy; with a De- | scrip-
tion of the Coasts, Products, Inhabi- | tants, Logwood-Cutting, Trade,
&e. of | Jucatan, Campeachy, New Spaine, &c. | 3. A Discourse of Trade-
Winds, Breezes, | Storms, Seasons of the Year, Tides and | Currents of
the Torrid Zone throughout | the World: With an Account of Natal in |

Africk, its Products, Negro’s, &e. | — | By Capt. William Dampier. | — | H-
lustrated with Particular Maps and Draughts. | — | To which is added, | A
General Index to both. Volumes. |— | The Third Edition. | — | London, |

Printed for James Knapton, at the Crown in | St. Paul’s Church-yard.
MDCCY. 8°, in three separately paged parts, as follows: ll. 4 (title, 11.;
dedication, 11.; preface, 14 ll.; contents, $1.). Pt. i, pp. 1-184, map; Pt. ii,
pp. 1-132, map; Pt. iii, 1. 1, pp. 1-112, 2 maps. General Index, ll. 36; pub-
lisher’s Cataldégue of books, ll. 2.

[1703.] A | Voyage | to| New Holland, &c. | In the year, 1699. | Wherein
are described | The Canary Islands, the Isles of Mayo and | St. Jago. The Bay
of All Saints, with the | Forts and Town of Bahia in Brazil. Cape | Salva-
dore. The Winds on the Brazilian | Coast. Abrolho-Shoals. A Table of all

430

BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1703-05. Damprnr, W.—Continued.

the | Variations observ’d in this Voyage. Oc- | currences near the Cape of
Good Hope. | The Course to New Holland. Shark’s Bay. | The Isles and.
Coast, &c. of New Holland. | Their Inhabitants, Manners, Customs, Trade,
&c. | Their Harbours, Soil, Beasts, Birds, Fish, &c. | Trees, Plants, Fruits,
é&c. | Illustrated with several Maps and Draughts; also | divers Birds, Fishes,
and Plants, not found in | this part of the World, Curiously Ingraven on |

Copper-Plates. | — | Vol. III. | — | By Captain William Dampier. | — | Lon-
don: | Printed for James Knapton, at the Crown in St. Paul’s | Church-yard.
1703. 8°. Il. 12 (title, 1 1.; dedication, 2 1l.; preface, 6 ll.; contents, 3 11.),
pp. 1-162; index, 44 1l.; publisher’s cat. of books, 24 ll, 4 topographical pll.,
2 pill. of birds, 5 pll. plants, 3 pll. fishes.

Captain Dampier’s ‘‘ Voyages” thus form three volumes, the second of which also consists of
three parts, each separately paged, and with a general index to the first two volumes. In the
set I have here collated, vols. ii and iii are bound together. Vol.i belongs to the ‘‘fifth edi-
tion,” vol. ii to the ‘‘third,” and vol. iii to the first; the date of vols. iand iii is 1703; that of
vol. ii, 1705. The date of the first edition of vol. iis said to be . LI have references to 3
1702 ed. which correspond exactly with the 1703 ed. here collated.

As is well known, Dampier was an acute natural-history observer as well as a bold navi-
gator and adventurer, and his observations on the Beasts, Birds, and Fishes he met with
during his long voyages are among the best and most trustworthy of his time. His work is
of importance in the present connection for his very full account of the Manatee, which he
met with at numerous and widely distant points. There are also notices of Whales.

Manatee, or Sea-cow, vol. i, pp. 33-37—description of the animal, its habits, distribution,
products, and the manner of its capture by the natives of Blewfield (or Bluefield) River;
p. 41, in Darien River; p. 321, its occurrence at Mindenao, in the East Indies; p. 381, do.;
pp. 463, 469, its occurrence in New Holland; p. 547, the Manatee of Santa Hellena a Sea-Lyon
[t. e., aSeal]. Vol. 2, pt. ii, pp. 73, 109, 128, in Campeachy, and near Vera Cruz.

Whales and Whale-fishery of Bahia, Brazil, vol. i, pp. 57, 58; Sea-birds feasting on a dead
Whale, p. 95; Whales on the coast of New Holland, p. 131; Porpusses, p. 162, pl. ii, fig. 2.

Dampier’s references to the ‘‘Manatee, or Sea-cow,’’ as occurring in the East Indies and
New Holland, relate, of course, to the Dugong. His statement that the Manatees of the West
Indies are smaller than those of the American Isthmus and Guiana was seized upon by Buffon

as indicating a diversity of species. [151.]
1703. LA HONTAN, —, BARON DE. New | Voyages | to North-America. | Containing |
.. + [= 20 lines]. | — | Illustrated with Twenty Three Mapps and Cutts. | — |
Written in French | By the Baron Lahontan, Lord Lievtenant | of the French
Colony at Placentia in New- | foundland, now in England. | — | Done into
English. | — | In Two Volumes. | A great.part of which never Printed in the
Original. | — | London: Printed for H. Bonwicke in St. Paul’s Church-yard;°

| T. Goodwin, M. Wotton, B, Tooke, in Fleetstreet; and S. Manship | in Corn-
hill, 1703. 2 vols. sm. 8°. Vol. i, ll. 12. pp. 1-280, 12 maps and cuts.

Vol. i, pp. 243-247, gives a list of the ‘‘ Fish of the River St. Lawrence,” and ‘‘A Description
of the Fish that are not mention’d in the Letters.” The Cetaceans enumerated and described
are the ‘‘Balenot,” or ‘‘little Whale,” the ‘‘Souffleur,” and the ‘‘White Porpoise.” The last
is evidently the Beluga catodon, of which he says, ‘‘They are a ghastly sort of Animals, and
are frequently taken before Quebec”’ (p. 244).

The original (French) edition, which I have not seen, is said to have been published in 1703
(La Haye, 2 vols, 12°). In the second French edition (La Haye, 1705) the matter relating to
Cetaceans occurs in vol. ii, pp. 53, 55, 56. In the French editions of 1709 and 1715 (same pub-
lisher), it occurs at pp. 51, 53, 54, of the same volume. [152.]

1704, LEEUWENHOEK, A. VAN. A Letter from Mr. Antony van Leeuwenhoek, F. R. S.,

concerning the flesh of Whales, Crystaline humour of the Eye of Whales,
Fish, and other Creatures, and of the use of the Eye-lids. < Philos. Trans.
Lond., xxiv, no. 293 [1704], pp. 1723-1730, figg. 1-6.

The figures are of the crystalline lens of the eye of a Whale. [153.]

1704. Monck, JoHN. An | Account | of a most Dangerous | Voyage | Perform’d by

the Famous | Capt. John Monck, | In the years 1619, and 1620. | By the special
Command of Christian IV. | King of Denmark, Norway, &c. to Hudson’s

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 451

1704. Moncxk, Joun—Continued.
Straits, | in order to discover a Passage on that side, betwixt | Greenland
and America to the West Indies. With a | Description of the Old and New
Greenland, for the | better Elucidation of the said Treatise. | — | Translated
from the High-Dutch Original, printed | at Frankford upon the Maine, 1650.
<Churchill’s Coll. Voy. and Trav., i, 1704, pp. 541-569.

Unicorns, pp. 550, 551, figg. (skull, 3 views). [Unicorn horns an article of traffic], p. 558.
Different kinds of Whales, p. 567. An Account of the Manner of catching Whales, pp. 567-
569. A plate to face p. 567 gives a view of Whale-fishing, and another plate (to same p.), giv-
ing a view of a Whale lying on the shore, is entitled ‘‘A Whale Female and the Windlass
whereby the Whales are brought on shore.”’ One of the plates to p. 543 gives a view of a
male Whale. [154.]

1704. ‘‘Tappr, D. Fiinfzehnen jiihrige curiose Ost-Indianische Reise-Beschreibung, so
sich im Jahr Christi 1667 angefangen und im 1682 Jahre geendet hat. Han-
nover, Gottfr. Freytag, 1704. 4°.”

“Von Fisschen, Seeliiusen, Seekiihen, etc., pp. 199-209.”
Not seen; title and comment from Test op. cit., p. 136, no. 2146. ({155.]

1705. EpGr, THomaAs. The Ten several Voyages of Captain Thomas Edge and others
to Greenland (called by the Dutch Spitsbergen) at the Charge of the worship-

ful Muscovia Company. < Harris’s Coll. Voy. and Trav.,i, 1705, pp. 572-574.

Of the several sorts of whales and the manner of killing them, p. 574. oe [5651

1705. ‘‘ HARTEVSTEIN, —. De magno pisce, qui Ionam vatim deglutivit. Witteberg,
1705, 4°.” ;
Not seen; title from Donndorff, Zool. Beytr., i, 1792, p. 776. [157.]

1705. [MartTeEns, F.] [A Voyage to Spitzbergen, in the Ship call’d the Jonas in the
Whale, Peter Peterson of Frieseland, Master, in 1671.] <Harris’s Coll. Voy.
and Trav., i, 1705, pp. 617-633.

Of the Finned Fishes (includes ‘‘The Dolphin,” ‘‘The Butskopf or Flounder’s Head,”
“The Whitefish,” and ‘‘The Unicorn”’), p. 628. Of the Whale, pp. 629-631. The Finfish, pp.
631, 632. Plate facing p. 629 contains Martens’s figures of the Whale and Finfish; also a view
entitled ‘‘The Whale-fishing and killing of Morses” (two birds, a Walrus, and a small Whale
in the foreground resting on the shore; a Narwhal in the water, and boats attacking Whales
in the distance). The text is from Martens. The plate facing p. 617 gives another view of
Whale-fishing, also from Martens. The account of the ‘‘ Voyage to Spitzbergen”’ is an
abridgment of Martens’s ‘‘Spitzbergische oder Groenlandische Reise-Beschreibung gethan
im Jahr 1671,” Hamburgh, 1675, q. v. e [158.]

1705. Poot, J. The Voyages of Mr. Jonas Pool. < Harris’s Coll. Voy. and Trav., 1,
1705, pp. 588, 589.
Contains references to many Whales seen. [159.]
1706. CAMELLI, G. J. De Piscibus, Moluscis & Crustaceis Philippensibus. < Philos.
Trans. Lond., xxiv, no. 302 [1706], pp. 2043-2080 [i. e., 2085-2089].
Includes a description of ‘‘ Dugong Indorum.” {160.]
1706. ‘‘TycHontius, TycHo LASSEN. Monoceros piscis haud monoceros, ad veram
formam nuperi e mari Gronlandico hospitis depictus et descriptus, resp. Just.

Henr. Weichbart. Havniae, 1706. 4°. pp. 16.”
Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann, ii, p. 1371. (161.]

1707. ‘‘LARREN, —. Monoceros piscis haud monoceros ad veram formam nuperi ex
mari Groenlandico hospitis depictus et descripsus. Hafniae, 1707.”
Not seen; title from Donndorff, Zool. Beytr., i, 1792, p. 757. [162.]

1707. SteBaLp, R. Part of a Letter from Robert Sibbald, Knight, to Dr. Hans Sloane,
R. S. Seer., concerning a Second Volume of his Prodromus Historie Naturalis
Scotie ; with a Description of the Pediculus Ceti, &e. <Philos. Trans. Lond.,
xxy, no. 308 [1707], pp. 2314-2317. [163.]

1708. LrGuat, F. A New | Voyage | To the | East-Indies | by | Francis Leguat | and
| His Companions. | Containing their | Adventures in two Desart Islands, |

432 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1708. LeGuatT, F.—Continued.

And an Account of the most Remarkable | Things in Maurice Island, Batavia,
at the | Cape of Good Hope, the Island of St. He- | lena, and other Places in
their Way to and | from the Desart Isles. | — | Adorn’d with Maps and Fig-
ures. | — | London: | Printed for R: Bonwicke, W. Freeman, Tim. Goodwin,

| J. Walthoe, M. Wotton, S. Manship, F. Nicholson, B. Tooke, | R. Parker,
and R. Smith. MDCCVIII. 8°. ll. 4, pp. i-xv, 1-248, ll. 12.
Porpoise, p. 7, fig. (pl. fac. p. 7). Whale, pp. 22-24. Lamentin, pp. 67-70, pl. (fac. p. 67).
The remarks about Porpoises and Whales are of interest merely for their quaintness and
absurdities. The account of the Lamantin is one of the earliest descriptions of the African
Manatee, and is quoted by Buffon and other early naturalists. The figure of the Lamantin
displays a pig-like tusk in the lower jaw. It is represented as holding its young one in its

arms. ‘‘ The Lamentins, which other Nations call Manati, that is, having Hands, abound in
the Sea about this Isle [Maurice], appearing often in numerous Troops . . . ”’ (p. 67).
There is an earlier French edition of which this is a translation. [164.]

1709. Lawson, J. A New | Voyage | to | Carolina; | Containing the | Exact Descrip-
tion and Natural History | of that | Country: | Together with the Present
State thereof | and | A Journal | Of a | Thousand Miles Travel’¢ thro’ several |
Nations of Indians. | Giving a particular Account of their Customs, | Manners
&c. | By John Lawson, Gent, Surveyor | -General of North Carolina. | Lon-
don, | printed in the year 1709. [No publisher.] sm. 4°. ll. 3, pp. 1-258,
map, and 1 pl.

The Fish in the salt, and fresh Waters of Carolina, pp. 152-163. Of Whales he says: ‘Of
these Monsters there are four sorts; the first...isthe Sperma Ceti Whale...” Others
mentioned are ‘‘the Bottle-nosed Whale,” the ‘‘Shovel-nose,” and ‘‘another sort, . . . though
not common.” He also speaks of the ‘‘Grampois”’ and ‘‘Porpoises.” The short but inter-
esting notices of these Cetaceans occur at pp. 153, 154.

This is the original edition, issued as a part of Stevens’s ‘‘ Collection of Voyages,” of which
it forms no. 2. The copy examined (in Harvard College Library) lacks the title-page, but is
otherwise complete. The plate, however, is wrongly placed at p. 115 of the preceding memoir,
and the map is bound at the end of the volume. The title-page appears to be lacking in many
copies of the present edition. That above given is transcribed from Field.

There were later issues of the work, with different title-pages, but otherwise textually
identical with the present. See 1714 and 1718. Lawson, JOHN. The following is a transcript
of the title-page of Stevens's Oollection of Voyages, in which the work originally appeared :

A new | Collection | of | Voyages | and Travels, | Into several Parts of the
World, none | of them ever before Printed in | English. | Containing, |...
[here follow seven titles of works forming the collection, of which the sec-
ond is], | 2. A new Account of Carolina, by Mr. Lawson. | — | In Two Vol-
umes, Illustrated with several Maps and Cuts. | — | London, Printed for J.
Knapton, Andrew Bell, D. Midwinter, Will. Taylor, A. Collins, and J. Baker.
1711.

The dedication, addressed to the Hon. Edmund Poley, is signed John Stevens. The date
on the title-page of the first memoir is 1708.

A German translation of Lawson—Hamburg, Frankfurt, and Leipzig, sm. 8°—appeared in
1712, q. v. [165.]

1710. ‘‘MaRrTENS, FRED. Nauwkeurige beschryvinge van Groenland of Spitsbergen,
waerin de Walvischvangst, gelegentheyd van’t ys en haer wonderlijke kracht
en figuren en de visschen dezer contreyen, duydelijk wordt aengewezen. Oock
hoe de walvisschen gevangen, gekapt en gesneden worden. Alsmede de
Walvischvangst op rijm. Amsterdam, G. de Groot, 1710. 4°. Met gegrav.
platen.”

“Rene vroegere vertaling, met de reis van Martiniére door Noorwegen, Lapland, Groenland,
Nova-Zembla, enz. verscheen onder den titel: de Noordsche weereld met aanteekeningen van
S. de Vries. Te Amsterdam, bij A. Dz.Ooszaen. 1685. 4°. Met platen... Nog twee an-
dere uitgaven verschenen te Dordrecht, bij Hendrik Walpot. (znd. jr.) [1750? en 17607]; en
nog cene te Amst., bij Abr. Cornelis. 1770. 4°.”

Not seen; title and comment from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 242, no. 3511. [166.]

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 433

1712. [Lawson, J.] Allerneuste Beschreibung | der Provinz | Carolina | In | West-In-
dien. | Samt einem | Reise-Journal | von mehr als | Tausend Meilen | unter
allerhand | Indianischen Nationen. | Auch einer | Accuraten Land-Carte und
andern | Kupfer-Stichen. | Aus dem Englischen [von John Lawson] tibersezet

durch | M. Vischer. |—| Hamburg, | Gedruckt und verlegt, durch seel
Thomas von Wierings Erben, | bey der Bérse im gildnen A, B, C. Anno

1712. | Sind auch zu Franckfurt und Leipzig, bey Zacharias Hertelu | zu be-
kommen. sm. 8°. ll. 7, pp. 1-865, 1. 11/2.

Fische im Saltz- und Siissen- Wasser in Carolina, pp. 232-250. Cetaccen, pp. 232-236.

See original English ed., 1709. (167.]

1713. ‘‘MANDELSLO, J. A. Voyages célébres et remarquables faits de Perse aux Indes
Orientales. Contenant une description nouvelle et trés curieuse de l’Indostan,
de ’Empire du Grand Mogul, des iles et presqwiles de ’Orient, des royaumes
de Siam, du Japon, du Congo, de la Chine, etc. Traduits de l’original par A.
de Wicquefort. Nouvelle édition, revue et corrigée. A Leide, chés Pierre van
der Aa. 1713. 2dIn. 1 bd. folio. Met gegraveerde platen en kaarten.”

“‘Baleines qui se trouvent sur les cétes du Japon, p. 464; dans la mer prés de la ligne équi-

noctiale, p. 623; sur les cotes de Vile St. Thomas, p, 675.”
Not seen; title and comment from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 100, no. 1590. [168.]

1713. Ray, Joun. Johannis Raii | Synopsis | Methodica | Piscium. | [Vignette.] | — |
Londini: | Prostant apud W. Innys, | sub Insigni- | bus Principis in area Bo-
reali D. Pauli | CIg Ig CCXIIL. 8°. pp. 1-168, Il. 6.

Pisces Cetacei seu Bellue marin = Cetacea, pp. 6-17, 9 spp., to wit: 1. Balena vulgaris
edentula, dorso non pinnatu= Balena mysticetus. 2. Balena edentula corpore strictiore,
dorso pinnato = Physalus antiquorum. &. Orca Rondel. & Bellon. = Orea gladiator. 4. Cete
Pot Walfish Batavis maris accolis dictum Clus. Exot. lib. 6= Physeter macrocephalus. 5.
Albus piscis cetaceus = Beluge catodon. 6. Monodon piscis é genere Cetaceo: Narhual Islan-
dis = Monodon monoceros. 7. Delphinus antiquorum, The Dolphin = Delphinus delphis. S.
Phocena Rondeletii = Phoceena communis. Or:

1. Balena minor utraque maxilla dentata= Orca gladiator. 2. Balena minor, in inferiore
maxilla tantimm dentata, sive pinna aut spina in dorso= Beluga catodon. 3. Balena major,
in inferiore tanttum maxilla dentata macrocephala, bipinnis= Physeter macrocephalus. 4.
Balena major, in inferiore tanttm maxilla dentata dentibus arcuatus falciformibus, pinnam
seu spinam in dorso habens = Physeter tursio. 5. Balena macrocephalatripinnis, etc. = Physe-
ter tursio. 6. Balena major laminas corneas in superiore maxilla habens, bipinnis, fistula
carens = Balena mysticetus. 4%. Balena major laminas corneas in superiore maxilla habens,
fistul4 donata, bipinnis = Balena mysticetus. 8. Balena tripinnis, nares habens, cum rostro
acuto & plicis in ventre = Balenoptera rostrata. 9. Balena tripinnis, maxillam inferiorem
rotundam & superiore multd latiorem habens = Physalus antiquorum.

Eight valid species fairly defined and classified. See Clavis, p.17. Martens’s ‘ Butz-kopf”
is mentioned (p. 10), but not specifically recognized. [169. |

1714. “Lawson, J. The | History | of | Carolina; | containing the | Exact Descrip-
tion and Natural History | of that Country: | Together with the Present State
thereof. | And | A Journal | of a Thousand Miles, Travel’d thro’ several |
Nations of Indians. | Giving a particular Account of their Customs, | Manners,
&c. | — | By John Lawson, Gent. Surveyor General | of North-Carolina | — |
London: | Printed for W. Taylor at the Ship, and T. Baker at the Black- |
Boy, in Pater-Noster-Row, 1714.”

‘‘Tdentical in every respect, excepting the title, with the orig. ed., 1709, g. v. On actual
comparison, this seems to be only other copics of the original, furnished with a new title-leaf.”
Not seen; title and comment from Coues, Birds Col. Vall., 1878, p. 576. For account of
Cetological matter see orig. ed. (1709. LAWson, J.). {170.]

1715. ANON. ‘‘ Puro e distincto ragguaglio del gran pesce chiamato Balenotto Buifa-
lino, detto anco Capo d’Olio, preso in vicinianza del porto di Pesano 18 Aprili
1715. Venezia. folio. Met houtgrav.”

Not seen ; title from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 171, no. 2696. (171.]

1716. TuLprus, N. Nicolai Tulpii | Amstelodamensis exconsulis | Observationes Me-
dice. | Editio Quinta. | Cui brevis ipsius Authoris vit narratio | est prefixa,

23 GB

434

BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1716. TuLPrus, N.—Continued.

ac textuum auctorum | illustrationibus. | [ Vignette. ] Labore et coelifavore. |
Lugduni Batavorum. |

( Joh: da Vivie,
| Vid & Fil. C. Boutesteyn,

so oF Andr. Dyckhuysen,

L& J. A. Langerak. |
CIg Ig CCXVI. sm. 8°. 11. 10 (includes eng. title-page and illumin. title-
page), pp. 1-392, ll. 2, pll. i-xviii.

Unicornu marinam, lib. iv, cap. lix, pp. 374-379, tab. xviii.

The text and plates of the body of the work in this edition, even to the pagination, are the
same as the editio nova (1672, g.v.). There are added 3 prelim. leaves, giving a portrait and
biography of the author; also 2 supplem. leaves of ‘‘Illustrationes textuum Hippocratis,”’
ete., by Abraham Salomon vander Voort. [172.]

1718. Jonston, J. Theatrum | universale omnium | Animalium | Piscium, Avium

Quadrupedum, | Exanguium, Aquaticorum, Insectorum, | et Anguim, |
CCLX. Tabulis ornatum, | Ex Scriptoribus tam antiquis quam recentioribus,
| Aristotele, Theophrasto, Dioscoride, Aliano, Oppiano, Plinio, Gesne- | ro,
Aldrovando, Wottonio, Turnero, Mouffeto, Agricola, Boetio, | Baccio, Ruveo,
Schonteldio, Freygio, Mathiolo, Tabernomontano, | Bauhino Ximene, Busta-
mantio, Rondeletio, Bellonio, Czsio, The- | veto, Margravio, Pisone, & aliis
maxima curd 4 J. Jonstonio collectum, | Ac plus quam Trecentis Piscibus |
Nuperrime ex Indiis Orientalibus allatis, | Ac nunquam antea his terris visis,
locupletatum; cum Enumeratione morborum, | quibus Medicamina ex his
Animalibus petuntur, ac Notitid Animalium, | ex quibus vicissim Remedia
prestantissima possunt capi; cura | Henrici Ruysch M. D. Amsteleed. | VI.
Partibus, Duobus Tomis, comprehensum. | Tomus I. | [Seal.] | Amstele-
dami, | Prostat apud R. & G. Wetstenios. |— | MDCCXVIII. 2 vols., 2°.

Tomus i. Continet | Collectionem Novam Piscium Ambonensium ac Histo-
riam Naturalem | Piscium, & Avium. [Pars prima], Il. 2, pp. 1-40, pll. i-xxi.
[Pars secunda]. Historia naturalis Piscium, cura H. Ruysch, pp. 1-160, pll.
i-xlviii. Theatri universalis | Animalium | pars secunda. | Sive Historie
Naturalibus | de | Avibus | Libri vi, |] .. .| Cura Henrici Ruysch,... 11. 7,
pp. 1-160, pll. i-lxii.

Historie naturalis de Piscibus. Liber v. De Cetis, pp. 150-157, pll. xli-xliv, pl. xlv [fig. 1],
pl. xlvii.

Caput i. De Cetis in genere, pp. 150, 151; Caput ii. De Cetis in specie. Articulus i, De
Balena, pp. 151, 152, pll. xli, xlii; Articulus ii, De Balena vulgi, & Physetere, pp. 152, 153;
Articulus iii, De Puste & Orca, pp. 153, 154, pl. xliii; Articulus iv, De Delphino, pp. 154, 155,
pl. xliv; Articulus v, Phocwena & Scolopendra Cetacea, pp. 155, 156; Articulus vi, De Phoca,
seu Vitulo marino, pp. 156, 157, pl. xli; Articulus vii, De Manati Indorum, p. 157, pl. xliii.
Additamentum de cane Aristotelis, pp. 158, 159. Ad Librum v, De Phoca, p. 159. Figuri lviii
[= pl. xlviii]. Appendix Nova de Unicornu Marino, p. 160.

This work is a reprint of the ‘‘ Historia naturalis de Piscibus et Cetis”’ of Joh. Jonston
(1650, qg. v.), and of the ‘‘Historia naturalis de Avibus”’ of the same author, with the ‘‘Collec-
tio Nova Piscium Amboinensium partim ibi ad vivum delineatorum, partim et Museo Henrici
Ruysch M. D.” prefixed, and an original addendum to Liber v (De Cetis) of the ‘‘ Historia
naturalis de Piscibus, consisting of p. 160 and pl. xlvili. The text and the figures are other-
wise as in Jonston at 1650, except that the latter are colored. Pl. xlviii gives two figures of
the Narwhal (figg. 5 and 6), three views of the skull (figg. 1, 3, 4), and two (figg. 2 A, B,
of the tusk. This edition of the ‘‘ Theatrum”’ is often cited under Ruyscu, H., who was author
of part of the work, as now constituted, as well as editor. [173.]

1718. Lawson, J. The | History | of | Carolina; | containing the | Exact Description -

and Natural History | of that | Country; | Together with the Present State
thereof. | And | A Journal | Of a Thousand Miles, Travel’d thro’ several |
Nations of Indians, | Giving a particular Account of their Customs, | Manners,
&c. | — | By John Lawson, Gent. Surveyor-General | of North-Carolina. | — |
London: | printed for T. Warner, at the Black-Boy in Pater-Noster | Row, 1718.
Price Bound Five Shillings. sm. 4°. ll. 3, pp. 1-258, map and 1 pl.

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 435

1718. Lawson, J.—Continued.

This edition appears to be merely other copies of the original edition, issued, like the ed.
of 1714 (q. v.), with a new title-page. The present title-page differs from that of the 1714 ed.
only in the bookseller’s imprint. The Cetological matter is, of course, the same as in the earlier
editions. Field states that ‘‘ Neither of the first three editions of Lawson’s work is often
found complete, with the map, and animal plate.’’ The copy of the present edition examined
by me lacks the map, but has the plate. {174.]

1718. Ruyscu, Hpnry. See 1718. Jonston, J. (175.]
1719. StukELy, W. An Account of the Impression of an almost Entire Sceleton of
a large Animal in a very hard Stone, lately presented to the Royal Society
from Nottinghamshire. < Philos. Trans. Lond., xxx, no. 360 [1719], pp. 963-

968, 1 pl.
Possibly a Phocena. The plate represents the bones of nearly all but the head of the par-
4 tially preserved animal i situ. (176.]

1720. ZorGDRAGER, C. G. C: G: Zorgdragers | Bloeyende Opkomst der Aloude en
Hedendaagsche | Groenlandsche | Visschery. | Waer in met eene geoffende
ervaarenheit de geheele om- | slag deezer Visscherye beschreeven, en wat daar
in | dient waargenomen, naaukeurig verhandelt wordt. | Uitgebreid | Met
eene korte Historische Beschryving der Noordere Gewesten, | voornamentlyk
Groenlandt, Yslandt, Spitsbergen, Nova | Zembla, Jan Mayen Eilandt, de
Straat Davis, en | al’t aanmerklykste in d’ Ontdekking deezer | Landen, en
in de Visschery voorgevallen. | Met byvoeging van de | Walvischvangst, | In
haare hoedanigheden, behandelingen, ’t Scheeps- | leeven en gedrag be-
schouwt. | Door | Abraham Moubach. | Verciert met naaukeurige, correcte en
naar ’t leven geteeken- | de nieuwe Kaarten en kunstige Printverbeeldingen.

| LVignette.] | T’ Amsterdam. | By Joannes Oosterwyk, | Boekverkooper op
den Dam, 1720. sm. 4°. ll. 18, pp. 1-330, ll. 7, maps 6, pll. 7, and frontis-
piece.

Engr. title-page frontispiece, pl. back; printed title-page (as above given), illuminated, pl.
back; half-title, backed by poem entitled ‘‘ Verklaaring vande tytelprint,” signed A. Bogaert;
“Aan de Heeren Gecommitteerden der Hollandsche Groenlandsche Visschery,”’ 2 leaves;
“Aan den Lezer,”’ signed A. Moubach, 4leaves. Korte inhoudt der Hoofdtstukken, 1 leaf.

Eerste Deel. Inleiding. Handelende van d’ eerste Kust en Land-Ontdekkers in ’t alge-
meen, 9 leaves and 2 maps (no. 1, Nieuwe Kaart van de Noord-Pool; No. 2. Nieuwe Kaarct
van Oud en Nieuw Groenland als meede van de Straat Davis). I. Hoofdtstuk. Van d’ eerste
Ontdekkers van Groenland, en wie die waren, enz., pp. 1-5. II. Hoofdt. Ongemeene Vischry-
kheit der Groenlandsche Zee; en omstandig bericht van d’ Eenhoorns gegeeven, pp. 6-10, pl.
facing p. 7 [three views of the skull]. III. Hoofdt. Gesteltheit en gematigheit der Oud-
Groenlandsche Lucht, enz., pp. 10-12. IV. Hoofdt. Vruchtelooze togten der Deenen naar
Groenlandt, enz., pp. 12-21. V. Hoofdt. Groenlandsche Compagnie te Koppenhagen opge-
recht, zend Schapen naar de Straat Davis,.pp. 21-25. VI. Hoofdt. Onderzoek over Groen-
landts strekking naar Tartarié en America, en bericht over Spitsbergens byzonderheden,
enz., pp. 24-34. VII. Hoofdt. Yslandts strekking en uitgestrektheit, eerste Ontdekkers, en’s
Lands gelgentheit, en., pp. 34-47, enz Nieuwe Kaart van Ysland (p. 34), [pl. facing p. 38
eruption of a geyser]. WIII. Hoofdt. Handel en bedryf der Yslanders onderzocht, pp. 47-49.
IX. Hoofdt. ’t Aloude Landbestier van Yslandt, invoering van ‘t Kristendom, enz., pp. 49-53.
X. Hoofdt. Zeemagt der Yslanders eertyds, en @ aloude Bevolkers naagespeurt, pp. 53-60.
XI. Hoofdt. Verscheide gevoelens wegens Yslandts bevolking onderzocht, pp. 60-66.

Tweede Deel. I. Hoofdt. Eerste Ontdekkers yan Spitsbergen, en waarom dus genoemt, enz.,
pp. 67-71, en Nieuwe Kaart van ’t Eyland Spitsbergen (p, 67). II. Hoofdt. Ongemeene koude
te Spitsbergen, en den aart der Verheevelingen-beschreeven, enz., pp. 71-75 [pl. facing
p. 74 gives figures of a solar halo and various forms of snow-crystals]. III. Hoofdt. Gestelt-

d heit van ’t Ys omtrent Spitsbergen, enz., pp. 75-78. IV. Hoofdt. Spitsbergen en Jan Mayen
Eilandt, eertyds Vischryke Gewesten, enz., pp. 78-80, en kaart Jan Mayan Eyland, p. 79.
V. Hoofdt. Veelerly soorten van Walvisschen, waar onder d’ Eilandische Walvisch de voor-
naamste is, enz., pp. 80-87, en pl. p. 81, Walvisch achter over gekant zynde; Gapende Wal-
visch waar in den Stant der Barden werd aan geweezen. VI. Hoofdt. Hilandsche Wal-
visschen waar zich onthouden. ‘t Walvischaas beschreeven en waar meest gevonden word,
enz., pp. 87-90. VII. Hoofdt. Noordkapers Gewest beschveeven, als mede dat der Vin-
visschen, enz., pp. 91-98 [the pl. facing p. 7 gives a figure of the *‘ Vinvisch”’ described at
p. 92]. VII. Hoofdt. Of de Biskayers d’ eerste aanleiders tot de Walvischyangst zyn ge-

436

BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1720. ZORGDRAGER, C. G.—Continued.

‘weest, enz., pp. 98-103. IX. Hoofdt. ’t Walvisch Gewest van een ruime uitgestrektheit be-
schouwt, enz., pp. 103-106. X. Hoofdt. Verscheide gevoelens over den doortogt door de
Waigats onderzocht, pp. 106-123, en Nieuwe Kaart van Nova Zembla en ’t Waygat, enz.,
p. 106. XI. Hoofdt. Hoedanig de Walvisschen tot in de Tartarische Zee doordringen onder-
zocht, enz., pp. 123-134. XII. Hoofdt. Gedachten over de warmte der Zon en haare werk-
zaamheit, enz., pp. 134-139. XIII. Hoofdt. Koerschouding der Zuidys Visschen, en hoe men
die moet opspeuren, enz., pp. 140-150. XIV. Hoofdt. Zuidys Visschen van hun gewoon
Gewest kundig, en hunne vlucht voor den komst der Groendlandsche Vloot, enz., pp. 150-156.

Deerde Deel. I. Hoofdt. Westys Visschen waar voornamentlyk gevonden. Vaart op Spits-
bergen begonnen en wanneer, enz., pp. 157-164 [pl. facing p. 162, figg. of ‘‘ Walrus” and
‘*Zee Rob”; also ‘‘Cachelot of Potvisch”]. II. Hoofdt. Walrussen en Robben hoedanig
gevangen, enz., pp. 165-172. III. Hoofdt. Eerste opkomst der Walvischvangst, die voordee-
lig was, en door Compagnieschap omtrent de Bayen van Spitsbergen geoffent wierd, enz.,
pp. 172-175 [v. e., 185; pp. 184 and 185 are erroneously paged 174-175]. IV. Hoofdt. De Groen-
landsche Maatschappy allenks weder gezwakt en om wat reden, enz., pp. 175 [t. ¢., 185]-197.
V. Hoofdt. Eilandsche Walvisch von voor Spitsbergen verjaagt, en de Zeevisschery onderno-
men, enz., pp. 197-203. VI. Hoofdt. Ysvisschery ondernomen, en hoedanig. De wykende
Visschen nagespeurt, pp. 203-208 [pl. facing p. 204 gives a view of a fleet of vesscls engaged
in ice-fishing]. VII. Hoofdt. Westysvisschery hoe verre zich uitstrekt. Hooge Graden
gereeder dan laage om Visch op te doen, enz., pp. 208-211. VIII. Hoofdt. Werwaarts de
Visch te vinden, wanneer plaatsen en tyden wel worden onderscheiden, enz., pp. 211-215.
IX. Hoofdt. Visschery op laage Graden wanneer tydig is; Oud-Groenlands strekking voor
wiens Kusten Walvischaas gevonden word, waar zich veel Visch onthoud, enz., 215-221.
X. Hoofdt. Overwintering op Spitsbergen. Verscheide Observatién over ’t Noorderlicht,
pp. 221-235. XI. Hoofdt. Verscheide vreemde ontmoetingen en ongevallen den Groenlands-
vaarders bejegent. Loosheit tusschen de West en Zuidy8 Visschen hoe t’ onderscheiden,
enz., pp. 235-247 [pl. facing p. 239, ships in the ice]. XII. Hoofdt. Zaaken wegens de Vis-
schery noodig in acht te neemen, enz., pp. 248-260. XIII. Hoofdt. Misbruik in den Traan- en
Baarden handel afgeschaft. Voordeelen door de Visschery sedert eenige Jaaren behaalt, enz.,
pp. 260-283; Byvoegsel [description of Cachelot], p. 234; Groenlandsche Walvischvangst
in haar byzonder Sheepsleven en gedrag beschouwt, pp. 287-330.

Toegift voor de Groenlandschvaarders en Matroozen [poem], 1 leaf. Bladwyzer der voor-
naamste Zaaken, 5leaves. Drukfeilen, 1 page, backed by publisher’s list of books.

Zorgdrager’s work is by far the most important of the early authorities on the Northern
Whalefishery, and must always be one of the chief sources of information for the early his-
tory of the subject. It also gives one of the best figures of the Greenland Right Whale
(Balena mysticetus) published prior to the present century, and also one of the best early
figures of the Cachelot. Chap. xiii of pt. ili is statistical, giving the number of Dutch and
Hamburg ships annually engaged in the Greenland Whalefishery from the year 1670 to 1719,
the number lost each year, the number of Whales killed, the yield of oil and bone, and its
value. Also the names of the directors of Whalefishery companies, and of the masters of the
vessels engaged in Whalefishing from the Dutch, Hamburg, and Bremen ports. The closing
pages of the work give details of the equipment and expenses of vessels engaged in Whaling,
etc.

The general character of the work is sufficiently indicated by the abbreviated chapter-

headings above given, which are a transcript of the table of contents.

The German version (Leipzig, 1723, 4°, g. v.) is a translation of the present edition. A
second Dutch edition, revised and enlarged by the author, was published at Gravenhage in
1727 (q. v.), which was reissued, with new title-page but otherwise the same, at Amsterdam in
1728. The only other edition which I have seen is the German edition published at Niirnberg
in 1750, q. v. {177.]

1721. O11ver, W. Remarkables in a Journey through Denmark and Holland. <Phi-

‘los. Trans., Abridged by Jones, 1700-1720, v, pt. 2,1721, pp. 128-134.
¥rom Philos. Trans. Lond., no. 285, p. 1490. Contains a notice of the horn of a Sea-Unicorn
[Monodon monoceros] brought from Greenland. [178.]

1721. SrpBaLp, R. Of the Pediculus Ceti. < Philos. Trans., Abridged by Jones, 1700-1720,

v, pt. 1, 1721, pp. 25, 26, fig. 32.
From Philos. Trans. Lond., no. 308, p. 2314. [179.]

1722. ANoN. A Summary Relation of the Discoveries about the North Hast Passage.

< Philos. Trans., Abridged by Lowthorp [1665-1700], iii, 1722, pp. 610-614.
Notice of the reported passage of a Whale through the North-East passage. From Philos.
Trans. Lond., no. 118, p. 417. [180.]

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. A37

722. ANON. Whales and Whale Fishing about Bermudas. < Philos. Trans., Abridged
by Lowthorp [1665-1700], ii, 1722, pp. 842-845.

From Philos. Trans. Lond. [i], no.1, p. 11[-13] ; no. 8, p. 132 [133]. See suprd, Anon, at 1665.
[181.]

1722. [LaBAT, R. P.] Nouveau | Voyage | aux Isles | de l’Amerique, | contenant |
PHistoire Naturelle de ces Pays, | Origine, les Meurs, la Religion & le
Gouver- | nement des Habitans anciens & modernes. | Les Guerres & les
Evenemens singuliers qui y sont | arrivez pendant le long sejour que Auteur
y afait. | Le Commerce & les Manufactures qui y sont établies, | & les Moyens
de les augmenter. | Avec une Description exacte & curieuse | de toutes ces
Isles. | Ouvrage enrichi de plus de cent Cartes, Plans, | & Figures en Tailles-
douces. | [Par Jean Pierre Labat.] Tome Premier[-Seiziéme]. | [Design] A
Paris, Rue 8. Jacques, | Chez Pierre-Franc¢ois Giffart, pres | la rué des Mathu-
rins, 4 ’Image | Sainte Therese. | — | M. DCC. XXII. | Avec Approbation &
Privilege du Roy. 6 vols. 12°.

Description d’un poisson appellé Lamentin ou Manati, vol. ii, pp. 200-207, pl. fac. p. 200.—
Very full original account of externa! characters and mode of capture, with an original figure—
an adult clasping its young one to its breast. The figure, slightly altered, is given by Bellin,
1768, q. v. [182.]

1722. Lister, M. A venomous scratch with the Tooth of a Porpus. < Philos. Trans.,
Abridged by Lowthorp [1665-1700], ii, 1722, p. 842. :

From Philos. Trans. Lond. [xix], no. 233, p. 726. [183.]

1722. Motineux, G. Several Things in Ireland in common with the West Indies.
<Philos. Trans., Abridged by Lowthorp [1665-1700], iii, 1722, pp. 544-546.

From Philos. Trans. Lond. [xix], no. 227, pp. 507[-511]. See supra, this author, at 1697.

Relates to that portion only of Dr. Molyneux’s discourse which treats of ambergris, sper-

f maceti, and certain plants found in Ireland. [184. ]

1722. Starrorn, R. [Concerning Spermaceti Whales about the Bermudas.] < Philos.
Trans., Abridged by Lowthorp [1665-1700], ii, 1722, p. 845.

From Philos. Trans. Lond. [iii], no. 40, p. 793 [=792-795]. See supra, this author, at 1668.

[185.]

1723. ZORGDRAGER,C.G. ‘Alte und neue Groénlindische Fischerei und Wallfischtang
mit einer kurzen histor. Beschreibung von Grénland, Island, Spitsbergen, Nova
Zembla u.‘s. w. ausgefertigt durch A. Mouwbach. Aus dem Holliindischen
tibersetzt. ' Leipzig, 1723. 4°. Met kaarten en platen.”

Not seen; title from Boszoed, op. cit., p. 253, no. 3616. [186.]

[1724.] Boyitsron. Ambergris found in Whales. < Philos. Trans. Lond., Xxxiii, no.
385 [1724], p. 193.

The writer, Dr. Boy!ston. of Boston, Mass., states that according to the testimony of whale-
men ambergris is found in a cyst near the genital parts of Whales—probably the first an-
nouncement of its real source. {187.]

1725. DupLEY, PauL. An Essay upon the Natural History of Whales, with a particu-
lar Account of the Ambergris found in the Sperma Ceti Whale. In a letter to
the Publisher, from the Honourable Paul Dudley, Esq.; F. R. 8S. <Phil.
Trans. Lond., xxxiti, no. 587, ‘‘for the Months of March and April, 1725” (vol-
ume dated 1726), pp. 256-269.

‘‘But here I would have it noted, that the following Account respects only such Whale, as
are found on the Coast of New England” (p. 256). This short account of 14 pp. is the first of
importance relating especially to the Whales of the New England coast, in fact, is almost the
only one to the present date. The ‘‘divers Sorts or Kinds” mentioned are, 1. The ‘Night. or
Whalebone Whale” (pp. 256, 257); 2. The ‘‘Serag Whale”; 3. The Finback Whale”; 4.
The ‘‘Buneh or humpback Whale” (p. 258); 3. The ‘‘ Sperma Ceti Whale” (pp. 258, 259); 6.
The “Killer... without doubt the Orea that Dr. I'rangius (lege Franzius) describes ...”
p. 265.

Several of these became later the basis of species of systematic writers. Although de-
scribed briefly, their characters are so well indicated that it is not difficult to identify the
species in the light of present knowledge of the subject. Other portions of the memoir are
devoted to an account of ‘‘ Sperma Ceti Oil” (pp. 259, 260), ‘of the Ambergris” (pp. 266-269),
to the habits of Whales, and to the ‘‘ Way and Manner of killing Whiles.”

On the Killer of Dudley, cf. HAMEL, Proceed. Am. Assoc. Adv. Se., viii, 1855. ([188.]

438 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1725. ‘‘HEERFORT, CHRISTOPH. Diss. hist.-phys.- crit. de Sirenibus, seu piscibus hu-
mani corporis structuram quodammodoimitantibus. Resp. Andr. Bing. Haf-
niae, 1725. 4°. pp. 20.”

Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann. [189.]}

1726. “‘Hrerrara, A. DE. Historia General de los Hecht* de los Castellanos en las Islas
i Terra Firme del Mar Oceano. Escrita por Antonio de Herrara, Coronista
Mayor de su m¢ de las Indias y sv Coronista de Castilla, En quatro Decadas
desde el Afio de 1492, hasta el de [1]531. 4 vols., folio, vellum. En Madrid
en la Imprenta Real de Nicolas Rodriguez franco Ati de 1726.”

Not seen; title from Field (Cat. Libr., 1875, p. 182, no. 964). For the reference to Manati,
see ed. of 1728. [190.]

1727. STALPARTIUS, C., VANDER WieL. C. Stalpartii vander Wiel | Medici Hagien-
sis | Observationum | Rariorum | Medic. Anatomic. | Chirurgicarum | Centu-
¢ ria Prior, | Accedit | De Unicornu | Dissertatio. | Vtraque tertia parte auctior,
longeque | emendatior. | Editio novissima. | [Design.] Leidae, | Apud Joan-
nem a Kerkhem, 1727. sm. 8°. ll. 17 (ineluding frontis., eng. title, plain
title, etc.), pp. 1-516, Il. 8, pll. i-ix.
De Unicornu Dissertatio, pp. 463-516, pl. ix. Contains references passim to the Nar- .
whal. [191.]

1727. ZORGDRAGER,C.G. C:[ornelis]G:[ijsbertsz] Zorgdragers | Bloeijende Opkomst
der Aloude en Hedendaagsche | Groenlandsche | Visschery. | Waar in met eene
geoeffende ervaarenheit de geheele om- | slag deezer Visscherye beschreeven,
en wat daar in | dient waargenomen, naaukeurig verhandelt wordt. | Uitge-
breid | Met eene Korte Historische Beschryving der Noordere Gewesten, |
voornamentlyk Groenlandt, Yslandt, Spitsbergen, Nova | Zembla, Jan Mayen
Eilandt, de Straat Davis, en | al ’t aanmerklykste in de Ontdekking deezer |
Landen, en in de Visschery voorgevallen. | Met byvoeging van de | Walvisch-
vangst, | In haare hoedanigheden, behandelingen, ’t Scheeps- | leeven en ge-
drag beschouwt. | Door | Abraham Moubach. | Tweeden Druk. | Met aanmerke-
lyke zaaken vermeerdert, | nevens een Korte Beschryving | Van de | Terre-
neufsche Bakkeljaau-Visschery. | Verciert met naauwkeurige, en naar ’t leven
geteekende | nieuwe Kaarten en kunstige Printverbeeldingen. | [Vignette] In
s’ Gravenhage. | By P. van Thol en R. C. Alberts, Boekverkopers, 1727. | sm.
4°, ll. 20, pp. 1-392, ll. 7, 6 maps, 7 pll. (and frontispiece ?)

The copy examined lacks the frontispicce of the first edition, which must, however, have
been lost, as the poem explanatory of it backs the half-title leaf.

This edition differs from the first (1720) through the addition of some 60 pp. of new matter,
including nearly 20 pp. on the Newfoundland Cod-fishery. Tothe second part (Tweede Deel)
six chapters are added, giving nearly 20 pp. of new matter; there are, besides, considerable
additions at other points, together with omissions of matter contained in the first edition, so
that portions of Part ii are practically rewritten. The account of the Potvisch or Cachelotis
transferred from the Appendix to near the middle of Part ii, but the plate illustrating the
Walrus, Seal, and Cachelot is omitted (at least is lacking in the copy collated). The only new
illustration added is the plate facing p. 21, giving figures of an Eskimo boat. The statistical
portion is brought down to 1725,

The chapters apparently newly added are: If Deel. I. Hoofdt. Strekking der Kusten in en
omtrent de Straat-Davis, en welke koes men om de zelve te bevaren, te houden heeft, enz.,
pp. 71-73. II. Hoofdt. Aart en hoedanigheit, kleeding en gedrag der Inboorlingen omtrent de
Straat-Davis Kusten, enz., pp. 74-79. III. Hoofdt. Landdieren en ’t Gevogelte der Straat-
Davis Gewesten; hoe verre zich de gewoone Wischplaats uitstrekt, enz., pp. 79, 80. IV. Hoofdt.
Verraaderschen aart van eenige Bewooners der Straat-Davis Kusten, en hoe men zich daar
voor te wachten heeft, enz., pp. 81-83. V. Hoofdt. Westkust van de Straat-Davis en den aart
der Bewoonders Beschreeven, pp. 83, 84. XVI. Hoofdt. Verscheiden middelen aangewent,
uitgevonden en in *t werk gestelt om de lengte van Oost en West daar uit te vinden, doch to
vergeess, pp. 153-157.

For further list of contents and comments see the first edition (1820).

This edition was reissued, according to bibliographers, at Amsterdam the following year
(1728), with a new title-page but otherwise unchanged, forming the third Dutch edition. [192.]

U

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 439

1728. Herrara, ANTONIO DE. . Historia general | de las | Indias ocidentales; | 0 | de
los Hechos | De los Castellanos en las Islas y Tierra firme | del Mar Oceano, |
Escrita | por | Antonio de Herrara | coronista mayor de su Magestad | de las
Indias y de Castilla. | En ocho decadas. | Sigue a la ultima decada | la | De-
scripcion de las Indias | por el mismo Autor. | Tomo Primero[-quarto], | que
contiene las decadas | primera y segunda. | Nueva Impression enriquecida coa
lindas Figuras | y Retratos. | En Amberes, | Por Juan Bautista Verdussen,
Mereador de Libros. M.D. CC. XXVIII. 4 vols. fol. Vol. i, ll. 2 (inel. eng.
title-page), pp. 1-496, ll. 12, pll.
The first edition of this work (given above from Field) appeared in 1726, q. v.
El Manati, vol. i, dec. i, cap. xi, p. 118 (one-third page). A slightly abridged paraphrase of
Gomara’s account (see 1554. Gomara, L. F. Dr). [193.]
1730. Herrara, A. DE. Historia gene | ral de los Hechos | delos Castellanos | enlas
Islas i Tierra Fi | rme del Mar Oceano. Es | crita por Antonio de | Herrara
Coronista | Mayor de sv M4, de las | Indias y sv Coronis- | tade Castilla’| En
quatro Decadas des de el Afio de | 1492 hasta e] de [1]531. Decada primera—
Al Rey Nu’°. Sefior, | Eu Madrid | en Ja Imprenta | Real | de Nicolas Rodi-
guez [sic] | franco | Afio de 1730. , 4 vols. fol.
Los Manati, dec. i,.pp. 141, 142. (194. ]
There is another edition of this date differing apparently only in the title-page, as follows:
1730. HERRARA, A. DE. Descripcion de | las Indias ocide | ntales de Antonio | de
Herrera coro- | nista mayor de | sv Mag‘. de las Indias, y su Coronista | de
Castilla. | Al Rey Nro Sefior | En Madrid enla Oficina Real | de Nicolas Rodri-
guez Franco Afio de 1730. Eng. title-page. 4 vols. fol.
Los Manati, dec. i, pp. 141, 142. [195.]
1731. LA PEYRERE, —. Relations | de | VIslande, | et du | Greenland, Parla Peyere,
Auteur des Preadamites. < —ecueil de Voyages au Nord, Contenant divers
Mémoires trés utiles au Commerce & ila Navigation. Tome premier. Nouvelle
édition, corrigée & mise en meilleur ordre. Amsterdam, 1731.
The letter is dated ‘‘De la Haye le 13 Juin, 1646.”
Pp. 93-107 ase devoted to a discussion of the question whether the so-called horn of the
Narwhal is a tooth or a horn, and whether therefore the Narwhal is a fish. The conclusion
reached is that the ‘‘horn”’ is a tooth ‘‘de ce poisson, que les Islandois apellent Narhual, &
que ce n’est point une corne” (p. 106). The etymology of the Icelandic word Narhual is said
to be Hual, whale, and Nar, signifying a cadaver, because this whale feeds on cadavers (p. 97).
The animal and skull are figured in the plate facing p. 186. with the following legends:
Poisson nommé par les Islandois Narwal qui porte la corne, ou dent, que l’on dit de Licorne.
Teste de Poisson Narwal, avec un troncon de sa dent, ou de sa corne, long de quatre pieds.
The figures are copies from Tulpius, 1672 (q. v.). [196.]
1732. ‘‘JANICON, F. H. De republiek der Vereenigde Nederlanden. Uit het Fransch.
’s Gravenhage, J. van Duren, 1732. 4dIn. 16°.”
Kompagnie van ’t noorden of van den walvischvangst, ii, pp. 280-291.
Not seen; title and reference from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 239, no. 3485. [197.]
1732. Martens, F. Journal d’un Voyage au Spitzberguen &c. par Frédéric Martens
de Hambourg, traduit de ’Allemand. < Recueil de Voyages au Nord, ii (nou-
velle édition), 1732, 1. 1, pp. 1-282.
Du Dauphin, pp. 185-187. Du Butskopf, ou Téte de Plie, pp. 187-189. Du Poisson blanc,

pp. 189,190. Dela Licorne, pp. 190,191. De la Baleine, pp. 196-221, pl. fac. p.196. De la ma-
niére dont on prend les Baleines, pp. 221-238, pl. fac. p. 222. Ce qu’on fait d’une Baleine morte,

pp. 239-247. De la maniére dont on tire Vhuile . . . de la graise, pp. 248-251. Du Poisson &
nageoires, autrement Winne-fish, pp. 251-256. Addition qui concerne la Péche de la Baleine,
pp. 267-282. {198.]

1733. BAJER, JoH. Jac. ‘De pisce praegrandi Mular. <Acta Acad. Leop. Carol. Nat.
Cre, iii, 1733, pp. 2-6, pl.”
Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann. [199.]
1734. Boytston, Dr. Ambergris found in Whales, communicated by Dr. Boylston of
Boston in New England. < Philos. Trans., Abridged by Eames and Martyn, 1719-
1733, vii, pt. 3, 1734, pp. 423, 424.
From Philos. Trans. Lond., no. 385, p.193. Sce supra, BOYLSTON, at 1724. (200.]

440 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1734. DupLEy, P. An Essay upon the Natural History of Whales, with a particular
Account of the Ambergris fvuund in the Sperma Ceti Whale. < Philos. Trans.,
Abridged by Eames and Martyn, 1719-1733, vii, pt. 3, 1734, pp. 424-431.

From Philos. Trans. Lond., no. 387, p. 256. See supra, DUDLEY, P., at 1725. (201. ]

1735. ATKins, J. A | Voyage | to | Guinea, Brazil, and the | West-Indies; | In His
Majesty’s Ships, the Swallow | and Weymouth. | Describing the several
Islands and Settlements, viz— | Madeira, the Canaries, Cape de Verde, Sierra-
leon, Sesthos, | Cape Apollonia, Cabo Corso, and others on the Guinea Coast; |
Barbadoes, Jamaica, &c. in the West Indies. | The Colour, Diet, Languages,
Habits, Manners, Customs, | and Religions of the respective Natives and In-
habitants. | With Remarks on the Gold, Ivory, and Slave-Trade; | and on
Winds, Tides, and Currents of the several Coasts. | — | By John Atkins, |
Surgeon in the Royal Navy. |—|. . - [= quotation, 4 lines.] | [Vignette—

« ship.] London: | Printed for Cesar Ward and Richard Chandler, at the |
Ship, between the Temple-Gates in Fleet-Street; And Sold at their | Shop in
Scarborough. M.DCC.XXXY. 8°. 1.1, pp. i-xxv, 1-265.

The Manatea (in the Sierraleon River), pp. 42, 48. Its external characters and mode of its.
capture by the Negroes. {202.]

1735. Epiror. Editoris Recensio Experimentorum circa Ambram Gryseam & Domino
Joh. Browne, R. §. 8S. & & Dno. Ambrosio Godofredo Hauckewitz, R.S.S.
institutorum, cum D. Newmanni, R.S.S. Experimenti sui vindicatione. <Phi-

los. Trans., Lond., Xxxviii, no. 435, 1735, pp. 437-440. [203.]
1735. NEUMANNO, C. De Ambra Grysea. <Philos. Trans., Lond., xxxviii, no. 433,
1735, pp. 344-370; no. 434, pp. 371-402; no. 435, pp. 417-437. [204.]

1736. D[rspars]., N., en F. R. ‘‘Chronyke van Vlaenderen, vervattende haere vin-
dinge, naem, enz., alsook eene generale beschryvinghe van g’heel haer
bestreck, steden, casteelen, heerlyckheden, enz. Beginnende van ’t jaer 621-
1725. Door N. D(espars) en F. R. Met kopere platen. Brugge, Andr. Wijdts,
1736. 3 dln., 4 stukken folio.”

‘‘Zie aldaar: Groenland’s vaerders, d’ eerste in see gesonden door van Brugge. Ao. 1665,
iii, bl. 728, 731, 747. De visscherij belooft een goeden uitslag. De Franschen nemen eenige
visschers met hunne schepen, die sy beswaerlyk doen afkopen, ii, bl. 432.

Not seen; title and references from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 249, no. 3579. [205.]

1736. LANGEN, Jo. Jac. ‘‘Nachricht von dem Unicornu marino, oder Meereinhorn,
welches in Halle 1736 ist zu sehen gewesen. < Hallischen Anzeiger, no. 19,
1736.”

Not seen; title from Egede. [205.]

1736. QVELLMALZ, SAM. THEOD. ‘‘Observationes de unicornu marino, ex vicinia
Bremensi Lipsam delato. <Commere. litter. Norw., 1736, hebd. xxii, no. 4,
pp. 171-273.”

Not seen; title from Egede. [207.]

1737. BRICKELL, J. The Natural | History | of | North-Carolina. | With an | Account

| of the | Trade, Manners, and Customs of the | Christian and Indian Inhab-
itants. I1- | lustrated with Copper-Plates, whereon are | curiously Engraved
the Map of the Country, | several strange Beasts, Birds, Fishes, Snakes, |
Insects, Trees, and Plants, &c. | — | By John Brickell, M. D. | — | Nostra nos
in urbe peregrinamur. Cic. | — | Dublin. | Printed by James Carson, in Cog-
hill’s-Court, Dame- | street, opposite to the Castle-Market. For the Author,
| 1737. lvol. 8°. pp. i-vii, 1-408, woodcuts, map, and 2 folding plates of
animals.

Of the Fish of North Carolina, pp. 215-249. The cetological matter occupies pp. 215-226.
Pages 215-220, including the first half of the latter, appear to relate in a general and rather
vague way to the Right Whale of the North Atlantic (Balena cisarctica, Cope), but beyond
a few particulars respecting their capture near Ocacock Island, there is nothing of much
value. The two pages next following are merely a paraphrase of Lawson’s account of differ-
ent ‘‘sorts of Whales;” there then follow two paragraphs of original matter, the latter treat-
ing of ‘‘the Porpoise, or Sea-Hog.” The next reference to Cetaceans is at p. 226, which is
devoted to an account of ‘‘the Dolphin,”’ and is also new matter.

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 441

1737. BriIckELL, J.—Continued.

Field states that Brickell ‘‘stole the material” for his work from Lawson, ‘‘with scarcely
any disguiso,” and Coues refers to ‘‘a 4th ed. [of Lawson], Dublin, 1737, attributed to Briclc-
ell.” It is true that Brickell stole much of his material from Lawson, but to speak of
Brickell’s work.as a 4th edition of Lawson is quite misleading, since for the first 60 pp. of
Lawson there is nothing to correspond in Brickell. The part relating to the Indians is not
only substantially the same in both, but considerable portions are identical in phraseology.
The ‘Description of North Carolina” and the ‘‘ Natural History of North Carolina” given
by Lawson form the basis of the Natural History portion of Brickell’s work, the latter having
incorporated nearly all that the former has said, generally in Lawson’s own words, but with
the matter more or less transposed and augmented by often merely verbal additions. Brickell
has, however, added much that is new, and based evidently on his own observations, somo
of Lawson’s paragraphs being expanded by Brickell to several times their original length by
the addition of wholly new and often important matter. [208.]

1738. ARTEDI, P. Petri Artedi | sveci, Medici Ichthyologia | sive | opera omnia | de |
Piscibus | scilicet: | Bibliotheca Ichthyologica. | Philosophia Ichthyologica. |
Generum Piscium. | Synonymia specierum. | Descriptiones specierum. | Omnia
in hoc genera perfectiora, | quam Anthea ulla. | Posthuma | Vindicavit, Re-
cognovit, Cooptavit & Edidit | Carolus Linneus, | Med. Doct. & Ac. Imper.
N. C. | — | Lugduni Batavorum, | Apud Conradum Wishoff, 1738. 8°. Il. 10.
Pars i, ll. 2, pp. 1-66, ll. 2. Pars ii, ll. 2, pp. 1-92. Pars iii, ll. 4, pp. 1-84,
I]. 2. Pars iv, ll. 2, pp. 1-118, 1. 11. Pars v,1. 1, pp. 1-102 (4. ¢., 112), ll. 2.

[Pars Prima.] Petri Artedi | Angermannia-Sveci | Bibliotheca | Ichthyo-
logia | seu | Historia litteraria Ichthyologiz | in qua | Recensio fit Auctorum,
qui de Piscibus | scripsere, librorum titulis, loco & editionis | tempore, addi-
tis judiciis, quid Quivis | Auctor priestiterit, quali metho- | do & successu
seripserit, | disposita secundum | Secula | in quibus quisquis author floruit. |
Ichthyologie Pars I. | — | Lugduni Batavorum, | pae Conradum Wishoff,
1738. ll. 2, pp. 1-66, 11. 2.

[Pars Secunda.] Petri Artedi | Sveci | Philosophia | Ichthyologica | in qua
quidquid fundamenta artis | absolvit: Characteribus scilicet genericorum,
Differentiarum | Specificarum, Varietatum et No- | minum Theoria rationibus
de- | monstratur, et Exemplis | comprobatur. | Ichthyologiz Pars II. [Vi-
gnette.] Lugduni Batavorum | Apud Conradum Wishoff, 1738. ll. 2, pp. 1-92.

Pisces Cetacei, passim.

[Pars Tertia.] Petri Artedi | Sueci | Genera | Piscium. | In quibus | Sys-
tema totum Ichthyologiz proponitur | cum | Classibus, Ordinibus, | Generum
Characteribus, | Specierum differentiis, | Observationibus plurimis. | redactis

| Speciebus 242 ad Genera 52. | Ichtbyologiz Pars III. | — | Lugduni Bata-
vorum, | Apud Conradum Wishoff, 1738. 8°. Il. 4, pp. 1-84, ll. 2.

Ordo v. Plagiuri, pp. 74-81. [Gen.] xlii [lege xlvi]. Physeter (p. 74), cum spp. 2 [= Physeter
macrocephalus]. xlvii. Delphinus (p. 75), cum spp. 3 [= 1. Phocena communis ; 2. Delphinus
delphis ; 3. Orca sp.]. xviii. Ralwena (p. 76), cum spp. 4 [= 1. Balena mysticctus ; 2. Phy-
salus antiquorum? 3. Balenoptera rostrata? 4. Physalus antiquorum?] xlix. Monodon
(p. 78), cum 1 sp. [= Monodon monoceros]. 1. Catodon (p. 78), cum spp. 2 [= fl. ? Beluga cato-
don; 2. Physeter macrocephalus). li. Thrichechus [vel Trichechus] (p. 79), cum sp. 1 [= genn.
Manatus et Halicore}. lii. Siren (p. 81), cum 1 sp. [= sp. fab.].

[Pars Quatuor.] Petri Artedi | Angermannia-Sveci | Synonymia | Nomi-
num Piscium | fere omnium; | in qua recensio fit | nominum Piscium, omnium
facile Au-|thorum, qui umquam de Piscibus scri- | psere: Uti Graecorum,
Romanorum, | Barbarorum, nec non omnium in- | sequentium Ichthyologo-
rum, | una cum Nominibus inquili- | nis variarum Nationum. | — Opus sine
pari. | Ichthyologiz ParsIV. | [Vignette.] Lugduni Batayorum, | Apud Con-
radum Wishoff, 1738. ll. 2, pp. 1-118, ll. 11.

Ordo v. Plagiuri, pp. 104-108.

[Pars quinque.] Petri Artedi | Sveci | Descriptiones | Specierum Piscium |
Quos vivos preesertim dissecuit et | examinavit, inter quos primario | Pisces |
Regni Sueciz | facile omnes | accuratissime describuntur | cum non paucis

442 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1738. ARTEDI, P.—Continued.
aliis | exoticis. | Ichthyologiz Pars V. | [Vignette.] Lugduni Batavorum, |
Apud Conradum Wishoff, 1738. 6°. 1. i, pp. 1-102 (i. e., 112), ll. 2.
Ordo y. Plagiuri, Baleena, G. Pisc. 48, pp. 106-107. [209.]
1738. EGrpr, Hans. Omstendelig og udf¢rlig | Relation, | Angaaende | den Grgn-
landske Missions | Begyndelse og Fortszttelse, | samt | hvad ellers mere der
ved Landets Recognoscering, | dets Beskaftevhed, og Indbyggernes Vzesen
og | Leve-Maade vedkommende, er befunden; | Af | Hans Egede, | Férst Guds
Ords u-verdig Lerere for Bogens Menigheder | udi Nord-Landene derester
Kongelig Dansk | Missionair udi Grg@nland. | [Vignette.] | Kjébenhaven.
1738. | Trykt hos Joh. Christ. Groth, boende paa Graabr¢dre-Tory. 4°. 11.10,

pp. 1-408.
Contains passing references to Whalefishing by the Greenlanders. There is a German
translation, Hamburg, 1740, 4°. [210.]

1738. HamMpPr, JOHN HENRY. A Description of the same Narhual, communicated by
John Henry Hampe, M.D. F.R.S. <Phil. Trans., Lond., xl, no. 447, 1738, pp.

149-150.
A further and rather more explicit account of the external characters of the specimen re-
ferred to below (see next title). (211.]

1738. STEIGERTAHL, Dr. Part of a Letter from Dr. Steigertahl, F.R.8.,to Sir Hans
Sloane, Bart. Pres. R.S., giving an Account of a Narhual or Unicorn Fish, lately
taken in the River Ost, Dutchy of Bremen, dated at Hanover ran 1736. Trans-
lated from the French by T. S. M. D., &ce. < Philos. Trans., Lond., xl, no. 447,
1738, pp. 147-149, pl. i, fig. 1.

Monodon monoceros; account of capture and external appearance of a specimen taken
January, 1735, in the river Ost, Bremen. PI. i, fig. 1, animal, from ‘‘the Figure engrav’d and
printed at Hamburg.” [212.]

1739-1804. WAGENAAR, J., and others. ‘‘Staat (Tegenwoordige) der Vereenigde Neder-
landen (door J. Wagenaar e.a.). Amsterdam, Tirion, 1739-1604. 23 dln.
gr. 8°. Met platen en kaarten.”

“|, . Walvischvangst, door de West-Indische maatschappij zonder voordeel ondernomen, i,
bl. 533. Beginsels der walvischvangst, bl. 588. Wetten omtrent dezelve, bl. 592. Waar zij
geschiede, bl. 593. Onderzoel of er de reeders voordeel bij hebben, bl. 599. Kosten op de
uitrusting, enz., bl. 501, 506. Walvischbaarden, bl. 597, 599, 608. Walvischspek, hoe dik,
bl. 598.”

Not seen; title and references from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 210, no. 3170. [213.]

1740, FRIscH, JOHANN LEONHARD. De Phocena in Pomeranie lacu quodam inventa.
< Miscel. Berolinensia, vi, 1740, p. 124, pl. vi.
Phocena communis. 1 page of text and fig. of animal. [214.]
1740. Herrara, A. DE. TheGeneral | History | of the vast | Continent and Islands |
of | America, ] Commonly call’d, The | West-Indies, | from | The First dis-
covery thereof: | With the best Accounts the People could give of their |
Antiquities. | Collected from the Original Relations | sent to the Kings of

Spain. |— | By Antonio de Herrara, | Historiographer to His Catholick Ma-
jesty. | — | Translated into English by Capt. John Stevens. | — | Vol. I[-V1I].
| — | Illustrated with Cuts and Maps. | — | The Second Edition. | — | Lon-

don, | Printed for Wood and Woodward in Paternoster-Row. | MDCCXL.
6 vols. 8°.
The Manati, vol. i, p. 278. For additional comment, see edd. of 1728. [215.]

1740. Kirin, J. T. Iacobi | Theodori Klein | Historize | Piscium | Naturalis | Promo-
vende | Missus primus | de | Lapillis eorumqve Numero | in | Craniis Pisci-
um, | cum Praefatione: | de | Piscium auditu. | Accesserunt | I. Anatome 'Tur-
sionum | II. Observata in Capite Raiz. | — | Virgil. V. Mneid. 239. | Dixit:
eumque imis sub fluctibus audiit omnis Nereidum Phorcique Chorus. | Cum
Figuris. | [Vignette.] | — | Gedani, Litteris Schreiberianis. 1740. 4°, 1.1,
pp. 1-35.

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 443

1740. KLEIN, J. T.—Continued.

i. Anatome Phocene, auctore Dn. de la Motte; Gedanensi, M. D., pp. 24-28. Additiones
[auctore J. T. Klein], pp. 28-32, tab. iv [i. e., v], figg. A, B, cranium; fig. C, penis; fig. 1,
ductus thorac.; figg. 1-4, 7-9, ossa aud.; fig. 5, Srpaneaiat fig. 6, lobi et nervi olfact. {216 }

1741. Ecepr, H. Det gamle | Grgnlands | Nye | Perlustration, | Eller | Naturel His-
torie, | Og | Beskrivelse over det gamle Grgnlands Situation, | Luft, Tempera-
ment og Beskaffenhed; | De gamle Noorske Coloniers Begyndelse og Undergang
der | Samme-Steds, de itzige Indbyggeres Oprindelse, Veesen, | Leve-Maade og
Handtringer, samt Hvad ellers Landet | Yder og giver af sig saasom Dyer,
Fiske og Fugle &c. med | hosféyet nyt Land-Caart og andre Kaaber-Stykker |!
over Landets Naturalier og Indbyggernis | Handtzringer, | Forfattet af |
Hans Egede, | Forhen Missionair udi Grgnland. | — | Kjgbenhayn, 1741. |
Trykt hos Johan Christoph Groth, hvende paa Ulfelds-platz. 1 vol. sm. 4°.
611, pp. 1-131, 1. 1, map, and pll. 11.

Cap. vi. Hvad Slags Diur, Fiske og Fugle den Grenlandske, Sse giver af sig etc., pp. 36-55,
pl. facing pp. 37 and 42.

Finnefisk, p. 36, fig. pl. facing p. 37. Hvalvisk [Balena mysticetus], pp. 36-40, fig. pl.
facing p. 37. Nordkapper, p. 40. Sverdfisk [Orca], p. 40, fig. pl. facing p. 37. Cacheloter, p.
41. Hviid-Fisk, p. 41, fig. pl. facing p.42. Buts Kopper, pp. 41,42. Enhierning, pp. 42-44,
figg. of animal, three views of skull, and of detached horns. Marsvin, p. 45.

Cap. vil. Om Grenlendernes Handterenger, Nerings Brug og Redskab, saa vel som
Boerkab, pp. 56-62, pll. facing, pp. 57,59. Page 57 describes how the Greenlanders kill Whales,
and the plate facing the same page is a Whaling scene.

“Egede’s work is still one of the best existing on Greenland, and claims most of all the
title of truthfulness, the author having been no less than 15 years in that country.”

The present is the editio prineeps, of which there are numerous subsequent ones in various
languages.

A German translation appeared at Copenhagen in 1742 (q. v.); an English in 1745 (q. v.); a
Dutch in 1746 (Delft); a French in 1762 (Geneva and Copenhagen) ;.a German in 1763 (q. v.),
and in 1769 (Berlin); and probably, also, others, besides various abridgments to be found in
collections of voyages. [217.]

1741. KuEtn, J. T. Iacobi Theodori Klein | Historiz | Piscium | Naturalis | promo-
vend | Missus Secundus | de | Piscibus per Pulmones | spirantibus | ad ius-
tum numerum et ordinem | redigendis. | Accesserunt singularia: | de | I. Den-
tibus Balenarum et Elephantinis. | II. Lapide Manati et Tiburonis. | — |

Horatius: | Delphinum sylvis appingit, fluctibus Aprum, qvi variare cupit

rem | prodigialiter unam. | Cum Figuris. | [ Vignette. ] — | Gedani, Litteris
Schreiberianis. 1741. 4°. Ill. 3, pp. 1-38, 1. 1.
De Piscibus, per Pulmones spirantibus . . . [ete.], pp. 1-27, tabb. i-iii. i. De Dentibus

Balenarum et Elephantinis, pp. 28-32, tab. iv, figg. 1-4 (teeth of Physeter). ii. De Lapide
Manati et Tiburonis, pp. 33-38, tab. iv, figg. 5-7 (ossa petrosa Manati).
Horum Synoptica Tabula [p. 9]:

- In Dorso levi apinnes.
. In Dorso gibbo apinnes.
. In Dorso pinnate.

I. Edentule

one

f I. BALZNZE

1. Dorso levi apinnes.
II. Dentate 2. Dorso levi pinnate.
3. Dorso gibbo apinnes.
PHYSETERES 4. Dorso gibbo pinnate.
II. NARWHAL s. Monodon.
(1. Capite in rostrum porcinum, simum,
| exeunte: Orca:
Ii. DELrHAcEs s. Porcelli 2. Capite in rostrum porcinum rectum & lon-
gum protenso: Delphinus.
3. Rostro recto, brevi, obtuso: Tursios. Pho-
cena.
BALENZ EDENTULA [=Mysticete, auct. mod.] In Dorso levi apinnes. &. Balena vera

Zorgdrageri, p. 11 [= B. mysticetus]; 2. Balwna albicans; Weisfisch Martensii & Zorgdr.
[= Beluga catodon]; 3. Baliena glacialis= Fisfisch, Zud-Eisfisch, West-Lisfisch, Nordkapper,
Zorgdr. [= B. mysticetus, part.}. In Dorso gibbo apinnes. 1. Gibbo unico prope caudam
(= ‘Bunch or Hump-back Whale” of Dudley, hence Balena gibbosaauct. var., nec. Erxleben]
2. Balaena macra [= ‘‘Serag Whale” of Dudley]. In Dorso pinnate. 1. Ore Balene vulgaris,
a, Balena edentula, corpore strictiore, dorso pinnato Raji; b, senate (=? Physalus antiquo-
rum]; 2. Ore rostrato |= Hyperoodon bidens]).

A444

BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1741.. Kirin, J. T.—Continued.

BALZNZ DENTATZ. Dorso levi apinnes. 1. Cete Clusii [= Physeter smacrocephalus).
2. Cachelot s. Potfish Zorgdrageri [= Physeter macrocephalus]. Dorsolevi pinnate. 1. Ba-
lena major . . . Sibbaldi [=? Physeter macrocephalus]; 3. Mular Nierembergii [= Physeter
macrocephalus); 3. Linckii [=%]. Dorsogibbo apinnis. 1. Dudleji Balena [= ‘'Sperma Ceti
Whale” of Dudley, hence Physeter macrocephalus]. -Dorso gibbo pinnata. Balena, Tigridis
instar, variegata [—? sp. fict.].

NARWHAL. Monodon Artedi, etc., p. 18, tab. ii, C, anim. [= Monodon monoceros].

DELPHACES 8s. PORCELLI. 1. Orca itaqve est, qve Sibbaldo dicitur Balzena minor in utraqve
mandibula dentata, p. 23, tab. i, no. i, cranium; 2. Delphinus, p. 24, tab. i, no. ii, cranium,
tab. iii, A, anim. [= Delphinus delphis]; 3. Tursio sive Phocena, p. 26, tab. i, no. iii: cra-
nium, tab. ii, A, B, foetus, tab. iii, lit. B, anim. ad. [= Phoceena communis]. [218.]

1741. KUHN, JOHANN MicHAEL. ‘‘Merkwiirdige Lebens- und Reisebeschreibung,

dessen Schiffahrten nach Grénland und Spitsbergen. Gotha, 1741. 8°.

“‘Zie aldaar o. a.: Erste (und zwote) auf einem hamburgischen Schiffe nach Spitsbergen ge-
thane Reise, 1720-22. Adelung geeft in zijn: ‘Geschichte der Schiffahrten’ van beide reizen
ecn uittreksel. bl. 429-438.”

Not seen; from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 240, no. 3496. See 1768. ADELUNG, J.C. [219.]

1742. Eaupr, H. Des alten | Grénlandes | Neue | Perlustration, | Oder | Naturell-

Historie | Und | Beschreibung | Der Situation, Beschaffenheit, Lufft und des
Temperaments | dieses Landes; | Wie auch | Vom Anfange und Untergange
derer alten Nor- | wegischen Colonien daselbst; vom Ursprunge, der Sitten
Le- | bensart and den Gebrduchen derer jtzigen Einwohner, und was | Dieses
Land an Thieren, Fischen, Vogeln, etc. heget und mittheilet; Deme beyge-
fuget | Eine neue Land Charte und andere in Kupfer gestochene Figu- | ren
und Abbildungen der Naturalien und Handthierungen | derer dasigen Einwoh-
ner; | Verfasset und beschrieben | von | Hans Egede, | Vormaliger Missionair
in Grénland, | — | Aus den D&anischen ins Teutsche &bersetzt. | — | Copen-
hagen, gedruckt bey Johann Christoph Grothen, 1742. sm. 4°. 11. 6, pp. 1-144,
pl. 11, map.

This edition appeared almost simultancously with the original Danish, and was issued
at Copenhagen by the same publisher. The plates are from the original etchings, not even
the page references being changed, they still referring to the Danish edition instead of the
present one. In this edition chap. vi occupies pp. 44-66, and the account of how the Green-
landers kill whales occurs at p. 68. For fuller annotation see EGEDE, at 1741. [220.]

1742. LaBat, R.P. Nouveau | Voyage | aux Isles | del’Amerique, | contenant | ’ His-

toire Naturelle de ces pays, | Origine, les Meurs, la Religion & le Gou- |
vernement des Habitans anciens & modernes, | Les Guerres & les Evenemens
singuliers qui y sont | arrivez pendant le séjour que l’Anteur y a fait. | Par le
R. P. Labat, de ’Ordre | des Freres Précheurs. | Nouvelle Edition augn.enté
considérablement, & en- | richie de Figures en Tailles-douces. | Tome premier
[-huitieme]. | [Design.] A Paris, Rue 8. Jacques, | Chez Ch. J. B. Delespine,
Imp. Lib. ord. du | Roy, 4 la Victoire & au Palmier. | — | M.DCC.XLII. |
Avec Approbation & Privilege du Roy. 8 vols. 12°.

Description d’un poisson appellé Lamantin ou Manati, vol. ii, pp. 256-263, pl. fac. p. 256.
For comment see edition of 1722. [221.]

1744, CuarLEvorx, P. F. X. DE. Histoire | et | Description generale | de Ja | Nou-

velle France, | avec | le Journal historique | d’un Voyage fait par ordre du
Roi dans | ’Amerique Septentrionnale. | Par le P. [Pierre-Fran¢ois Xavier]
de Charlevoix, de la Compagnie de Jesus. | Tome premier[-troisieme ].—
[Vignette.] A Paris, Chez la Veuve Ganeau, Libraire, rue S. Jacques, pres
la rue | du Plitre, aux Armes de Dombes. | — | M. DCC. XLII. | Avee Appro-
bation et Privilege du Roi. 3vols. 4°. Vol. i, ll. 4, pp. i-lsj, ll. 14, pp. ix—
xxvj, 1-644,9 maps. Vol. ii, 11.2, pp. i-xvj, 1-582, 1-56, 8 maps, 22 pl. (of
plants). Vol. iii, 11.2, pp. i-xix, i-viv, 1-543, 10 maps.

The ‘‘ Histoire,” ete., comprises the first two volumes only, the title changing with the
third to the following:

Journal | d’un | Voyage | fait par ordre du Roi | dans | ’ Amerique sepentri-
onnale; | Adressé & Madame Ja Duchesse | De Lesdiguieres. | Par le P. de
Charlevoix, de la Compagnie de Jesus. | [etc. as above. ]

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 445

1744. CHARLEVOIX, P. ". X. pr.—Continued.

In the “Huitiéme Lettre’ occurs important cetological matter, as follows: De la Pécho
du Loup Marin, dela Vache Marine, du Marsouin, & des Baleines, pp. 143-149 (Marsouins,
pp. 147-149; Baleines, p. 149). The account relates mostly to the ‘‘ Marsouin blane” [Beluga
catodon] and its capture, from which it appears that there were two points, a few miles be-
low Quebec, in the Saint Lawrence River, at which these animals were then taken in consid-
erable numbers. A few Whales were still caught at the mouth of the Bay of Saint Lawrence.

Two editions of this work were issued at Paris, by different publishers, in the year 1744,
one in 8 vols., 4°, of which the title and collation are above given; the other in 6 yols., 12°, both
with the same titles, differing only in the breaking of the lines and in the publisher’s im-
print. The collation of the 12° ed. here follows: (222. ]

1744, CHARLEVOIX, P. F. X. DE. Histoire | et | Description generale | dela | Nouvelle
France, | avec | Je Journal historique | V’un Voyage fait par ordre du Roi |
dans l’Amerique sepentrionnale. | Par le P. [Pierre Fran¢gois Xavier] de Char-
levoix, de la Compagnie | de Jesus. | Tome premier[-sixiéme]. | [Design. }
A Paris, | Chez Pierre-Frangois Giffart | rue Saint Jacques, 4 Sainte Therese.

| —|M DCC XLIV. | Avee Approbation & Privilege du Roi. 6 vols. 12°.
Vo!. i, ll. 3, pp. i-viii, 1-454, 6 maps. Vol. ii,1.1, pp.1-501.3 maps. Vol. iii,
1.1, pp. 1-465,2 maps. Vol. iv,1.1, pp. 1-388, pll. 22,6 maps. Vol. v,1. 1, pp. i-
xxvilj, 1-456, 7 maps. Vol. vi, 1.1, pp. 1-434, 1.2, 3 maps.

In this edition the title changes with the fifth volume, the title of vols. v and vi of this edi-
tion being the same as that of vol. iii of the 4° ed., save, of course, the publisher’s imprint.

Fhe cetological matter is the same (as is the text in general) as that of the 4° ed. (q. v.),
and occurs in vol. v, pp. 217-220.

Of fhe ‘‘ Journal d’un Voyage,” etc., there are two early English versions, each in 1 vol.,
8° (London, 1761 and 17€3, g. v.). There is a recent English translation of the ‘‘Histoire” by
Dr. J. G. Shea (8 vols., roy. 8°, New York, 1865), but this does not include the ‘‘ Voyage,”
and consequently not the cetological matter. [228.]

1744, [DESPELETTE, —]. Cachalot échoué prés de Baionne. <Hist. de V Acad. roy. des

_ Sci. de Paris, ann. 1741 (1744), pp. 26-28.

This is perhaps editorial, based on a communication from M. Despelette. [224.]

1744. [DoorGerst, E. Az. vVAN.] ‘‘ Kort Verhael van eenige merkwaerdige geschie-
denissen van Holland [door E. Az. van Doorgeest |. Amsterdam, K. de Wit,
1744. 89.”

Beschrijving van de haringvisscherij en walvischvangst, pp. 78-96.

Not seen; title and reference from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 249, no. 3577. Said to be a short
extract from ‘‘Den Rijper Zee-postil,”’ ete., 1669, Doorgeest and Posjager. [225.]

1744. Green, J. Abstract of a Natural History of Greenland, by Hans Egedius, inti-
tuled, Det gamle Gronlands Perlustration, eller Naturel-Historie, af Hans Egede,
Kiobenhabn, 1741. 4°. Communicated by John Green, M. D., Secretary of the
Gentlemans Society, at Spalding. <Philos. Trans. Lond., xlii, no. 471, 1744, pp.
607-S15.

Chapter vi enumerates the Cetacea, Fish, and Birds common to Greenland. [226.]

1744, OEXMELIN, A. O. [== EXQUEMELIN, A. O.] Histoire | des | Avanturiers | Fli-
bustiers | Qui se sont signalez dans les Indes. | Contenant | ce qu’ils y ont fait
de remarquable, | avec | La Vic, +s Meurs & les Coutumes des Boucaniers, |
& des Habitans de 8. Domingue & de la Tortue; | Une Description exacte de
ces lieux; Et un Etat | des Offices tant Ecclésiastiqnes que Séculieres, | &
ce que les plus grands Princes de l’Europe y | Posstdent. | Le tout enrichi de
Cartes Géographiques & de Figures | en Taille-douce. | Par Alexander-Oli-
vier Oexmelin. | Nouvelle Edition Corrigée | & Augmentée de l’Histoire des
Pirates | Anglois depuis leur Etablissement dans | l’Isle de la Providence
jusqu’a présent. | Tome Premier[-Quatriéme.] | [Design.] A Treyoux, | Par
la Compagnie. |— | M.DCC.XLIV. 4vols. 12°. Vol. i, Jl. 7 (incl. eng.
and plain title), pp. 1-394, 1. 1, map and plates.

Histoire des Animaux et des Plantes qui sont sur les Isles de la Tortué & de Saint Domin-
gue, vol. i, pp. 315-383. Chap. vi, Des Reptiles de l'Isle de St. Domingue, pp. 359-383,
pl. fac. p. 373. Anatomie du Lamentin, pp. 372-376 (nearly 4 pp.), avec fig. du Lamentin.
This is an original account (at least written in the first person and evidently from observa-

AAG BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1744, OEXMELIN, A. O.—Continued. :
tion) of the external characters and internal structure of the Manatee, its habits, capture,
etc., with an (apparently) original figure. The figure, like Labat’s, represents an old Manatee
with a young one in her arms; the figure is more artistic than Labat’s, and has the head of
the young one directed forward instead of backward.

The first French edition, said to be of ‘‘extreme rarity,” and a translation from the Eng-
lish, was published at Paris in 1686, 2 vols., 12°. This I have not seen, and therefore cannot
say wherein the matter relating to the Manatee differs from that of the present ‘‘corrected
and enlarged” edition. This is the first edition of the Buccaneers I have seen which con-
tains a figure of the Manatee. The matter in this edition is almost entirely ditterent through-
out from that of the Spanish, Dutch, and English editions (see anted, 1678. EXQUEMELIN, A.
O.), and covers many points relating to the Manatee not mentioned in those. This is doubt-
less explained by the following transctipt from the translator’s preface of the present edition:
“‘La Relation qu‘il a écrite de ce que la nature produit dans les Isles de Saint Domingue & de
Ja Tortué se trouve & la fin du premier Tome, on achoisicet ordre pour ne pas interrompre le
fil de l'Histoire des Flibustiers; on l’a méme augmentée sur de nouveaux Mémoires conte-
nant la Relation du naufrage de Monsieur d'Ogeron a Puerto Ricco, l'Histoire du Capitaine
Montauban; les Expeditions de Campéche, de la Vera Cruz, de Cartagéne, & les courses de
plusieurs Capitaines Flibusters, dont la valeur est présentement aussi connue en Europe
qu’elle est estimée dans les Indes.” The plate illustrating the chapter vi here cited rep-
resents (upper half) the ‘‘ Maniére de Pécher la Tortué.” Below this is the figure of ‘‘le
Lamantin,’’ and at the bottom of the plate three different forms of harpoon used in captur-
ing Turtles and Lamantines.

The engraved title of this edition is dated 1743. The following is a transcript:

Histoire | des | Avanturiers | des | Boucaniers | et | de la Chambre | des
Comptes, | établie | dans les | Indes | 1743.

Respecting the various translations and editions of Oexmelin [=Exquemelin; also written
Esquemeling], see Sabin, Bibl. Amer., vi, pp. 309-318, 328, nos. 23468-23494; also, supra, 1678.
EXQUEMELD, A. O. (227. ]

1744. ‘““RorpE, —. Diss. de pisce qui Ionam deglutivit, cuiusnam speciei fuerit.
Hafn. 1744. 4°.”

Not seen; title from Donndorff, Zool. Beytr., i, 1792, p. 776. [228.]

1744. ‘‘WisBo, J. CAnzius. Dissertatio de balaenarum piscatu. Lugd. Bat., 1774.
ANS)

Not seen; from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 253, no. 3609. [229.]

1745. ‘““EGEDE, H. A | Description | of | Greenland. | Shewing | The Natural History,
Situation, Boundaries, | and face of the Country; the Nature of the | Soil; the
Rise and Progress of the old Nor- | wegian Colonies; the ancient and modern |
Inhabitants; their Genius and Way of Life, | and Produce of the Soil; their
Plants, Beasts, | Fishes, &c. | with | A new Map of Greenland. | And | Several
Copper Plates representing different Animals, | Birds and Fishes, the Green-
landers Way of Hunting | and Fishing; their Habitations, Dress, Sports |
and diversions, &c. | — | By Mr. Hans Egede, | Missionary in that Country
for twenty-five Years. | — | Translated from the Danish. | — | London: |
Printed for C. Hitch in Paternoster Row; 8. Austen in | Newgate-Street; and
J. Jackson near St. James’s Gate. | MDCCXLY. 1 vol. sm. 8°. pp. xvi+2
]]., 220, with 12 copperpll.”

‘“‘Chap. vi, pp. 65-99, ‘Of the Greenland Sea Animals, and Sea Fowl and Fishes.’”’
Not seen; title from Coues, Birds Colorado Valley, 1878, p. 578. [230.]

1745. GuMILLA, J. El Orinoco | Ilustrado, y Defendido, | Historia Natural, | Civil, y
Geographica | De este Gran Rio, | y de sus caudolosas vertientes: | Govierno,
Usos, y Costumbres de los Indios | sus habitadotes, con neuvas, y utiles noti-
cias de Animales, Arboles, | Fiutos Aceytes, Refinas, Yervas, y Raices medici-
nales; y sobrestodo, se hallaran convetsiones muy singulares a N. Santa Fé, |
y casos de mucha edificacion. | Escrita | Por el Padre Joseph Gumilla, de la
Comania de Jesus|. . . [= titles, 6 lines] | Segunda Impression, Revista y
Augmentada | por su mismo Autor, y dividida en dos Partes. | Tomo [Seal]
Primero | — ! En Madrid: Por Manuel Fernandez, Impressor de el Supremo |

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 447

1745. GuMILLA, J.—Continued.
Consejo de la Inquisicion, y de la Reverenda Camara Apostolica, | en la Caba
Baxa. Afio M.DCC.XLY. 2 vols., 4°. Il. 24, pp. 1-403, 11.2, map, and pl.
Variedad de Peces, y singulares industrias de los Indios para pescar: Piedras, y buessos
medicinales, que se han descubierto en algunos pescados, tom. i, cap. xxi, pp. 314-330.—
Manati, pp. 319-327. Account of the abundance of these animals in the Orinoco and its tribu-
tary waters, tho manner of their capture by the Indians, their habits and external appearance,
and the wonderful medicinal properties of their ear bones.
First edition, not seen; there is a later Spanish edition published in 1791 (q. v.); also a
French edition (1758, g. v.), and doubtless others. (231.]
1745. Smiru,[W.] A | Natural History | of | Nevis, | And the rest of the English Lee-
ward Charibee Islands | in | America. | With many other Observations on |
Nature and Art; | Particularly, An Introduction to | The Art of Decyphering. |
In | Eleven Letters from the Rev‘. Mr. [William] Smith, | sometime Rector of
St. John’s at Nevis, and | now Rector of St. Mary’s in Bedford; to the | Rev
Mr. Mason, B. D. Woodwardian | Professor, and Fellow of Trinity-College, in

Cambridge. | — | Cambridge: | Printed by J. Bentham, Printer to the Uni-
versity; |. . . [= names of four booksellers.] | MDCCXLY. 8°. 11.3, pp.1-
318, ll. 5.

Natural history, passim. Account of ‘‘ Millions of Porpusses” seen near the ‘‘ Leeward
Charibbee Islands,” pp. 185,186; two species, one of them ‘‘ with Noses in the exact form, —
and full as big as Quart Glass-bottles, on which account they have justly acquired the name
of Bottle-noses.” Account of a fight between the ‘‘Grampus” and the ‘‘Sword-Fish and
Thrasher as Allies,” pp. 198,199. Also account of a Baleen Whale, 35 feet long, stranded at
Burgh, Lincolnshire, pp. 199-201. (232. ]

1746. ‘‘ANDERSON, J. Herrn Johann Anderson, | I. V. D. | und weyland ersten Bur-
germeisters der freyen Kayserlichen | Reichstadt Hamburg, | Nachrichten |
von Island, | Grénland und der Strasse Davis, | zam wahren Nutzen der Wis-
senschaften | und der Handlung. | Mit Kupfern, und einer nach den nenesten
und in diesem Werke ange- | gedenen Entdeckungen, genau eingerichteten
Landcharte. | Nebst einem Vorberichte | von den Lebensumstiinden des Herrn
Verfassers. | [| Vignette.] | Hamburg, | verlegts Georg Christian Grund,
Buchdr. 1746. 1 vol. sm. 8vo, 8 leaves to a sig. Vignette facing title, title,
reverse blank, 14 unpaged ll. (‘ Vorrede’ and ‘ Vorbericht’), pp. 1-328, 3 un-
paged ll. (‘Register’); map, and 4 pll., at pp. 43.”

‘“... There are numerous editions; besides the three I here give (see 1750 and 1756),
there are these: German, Frankfurt u. Leipzig, 1747; Danish, Copenhagen, 1748; English,
London, 1758, folio; and two or three French versions of later dates than 1750.—See Cuvy.,
&. A., iii, 331; BOuM., Bibl., i, 769; AG. & STRICKL., Bibl., i, 127.”

Not seen; title and comment from Coues, Birds Col. Vall., App.. 1878, p. 579.

Anderson's work, from its early date and the detailed information it gives, is one of im-
portunce in its relation to Cetology. See later editions, especially the Dutch versions of 1750
and 1756.

Strange as it may seem, I have been unable to find any edition of Anderson in any of the
principal libraries of Cambridge and Boston, the collations here given being all at second
hand. (233. ]
1746. ANoN.? “‘Lijst (Naauwkeurige) van Nederlandsche schepen die sedert 1661 naar

Groenland, en sedert 1719 tot op dezen tegenwoordigen tijd naar de straat
Davis zijn uitgevaren. Amsterdam, C. van Tongerloo. 1746. kl. 8°. Een
veryolg op deze lijst vindt men bij: Honig.”

“In Fr. Muller's Catalogue of books on America, wordt onder No. 1781 een HoHandsch MS.
vermeld, bevattende aanteekeningen van de schepen, in de jaren 1753-1773 naar Groenland en
de straat Davids, ter walvischvangst vertrokken; en onder No. 1782 eene Lijst in weleke
jaaren de meeste en weinigste visschen uit Groenland en de straat Davids zijn aangebragt
(1669-1792). 1lvel. folio. No. 663: Lijst van de Hollandsche en Hamburger Groenlands- en

Straat Davids vaarders Ao 1764 uitgevaaren. Amst., J. M. Brouwer. 1765. 89.”
Not seen; title and note from Bosgoed, op. cit., pp. 241, 242, no. 3505. See, also, 1867. Ho-
NIG, J. (234. }

1746. “EGrpr, Hans. Beschrijving van Oud-Groenland, of eigentlijk van de zooge-
naamde Straat Davis; behelzende deszelfs natuurlijke historie, stands gele-

448 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

‘

1746. ‘“‘EGEpr, Hans.—Continued.

genheid, gedaante, grensscheidingen, veld-gewassen, dieren, vogelen, visschen,
enz. Mitsgaders den oorsprong en voortgang der aeloude Noorweegsche volk-
plantingen in dat gewest; benevens den aart, inborst, woonigen, levenswijze,
kleding, enz. der hedendaagsche inboorlingen. Eerst in de Deensche taal
beschreven door Mr. Hans Egede, en nu in ’t Nederduitsch overgebragt. Met
een nieuwe kaart van dat landschap en (10) aardige printverbeeldingen ver-
siert. Te Delft, bij R. Boitet, 1746. 4°.”

“Zie aldaar: Van de zec-dieren, zee-vogels en visschen, walvisschen, enz., bl. 54-67...
Van de gewone bezigheden als jagen en yisschen en de noodige gereedschappen daartoe, bl.
84-94.”

Not seen; title and references from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 235, no. 3451. For reference tothe
matter relating to Cetaceans, see the original Danish edition of 1741. [235.]

1746. Linn, C. Caroli Linnei|.. . [=titles, 2 lines] | Fauna | Svecica | Sistens |

1747

1747

1747

Animalia Svecize, Regni: | Qvadrupedia, Aves, Amphibia, | Pisces, Insecta,
Vermes, | Distributa | Per | Classes & Ordines, | Genera & Species. | Cum |
Differentiis Specierum, | Synonymis Auctorum, | Nominibus Incolarum, | Lo-
cis Habitationum, | Descriptionibus Insectorum. | — | Stockholmiz | Sumtu
& literis Laurentii Salvii | 1746. 8°. 14 11., pp. 1-411, pll. i, ii.

Classisiv. Pisces. I. Plagiuri —Cetacea, pp. 98-100, 4 genn., 6 spp., to wit: 1. Catodon
fistula in cervice, p. 98 = Physeter macrocephalus ; 2. Monodon, p. 98; 3. Balena fistula in
medio capite, dorso caudam versus acuminato, p. 98; 4. Balena fistula in medio capite, tubero
pinniformi in extremo dorso, p. 99; 5. Delphinus corpore subconiformi, dorso lato, rostro sub-
acuto, p. 99; 6. Delphinus rostro sursum repando, dentibus latis serratis, p. 100: [236. ]

. BROWNE, J., and others, or Epitor. An Account of the Experiments relating to
Ambergris, made by Mr. John Browne, and Mr. Ambrose Godfrey Hauckwitz,
FF. R.S., with Mr. Newman’s Vindication of his Experiment, drawn up by
C. Mortimer, R.S.Secr. < Philos. Trans., Abridged by Martyn, 1732-44, ix, pt. 3,
1747, pp. 366-368.

From Philos. Trans. Lond., no. 435, p. 487. See 1735. Epiror. (237. ]

. Hamper, J. H. A Description of the same Narhual Jas forms the subject of Dr.
Steigertahl’s communication]. < Philos. Trans., Abridged by Martyn, 1732-44,
44, ix, pt. 3, 1747, p. 72.

From Philos. Trans. Lond., no. 447, p. 149. See 1738. HAMPE. [238.]

7. Neuman, C. Of Ambergris... <Phil. Trans., Abridged by Martyn, 1732-44,

ix, pt. 3, 1747, pp. 339-346, 346-358, 358-366.

From Philos. Trans. Lond., no. 443, p. 344; no. 434, p. 371; no. 435, p. 417. See 1738. “NEv-
MANN. ; [239.]

. [Pr&tvost, A. F.] Sierra-Leona, par Atkins. < Hist. génér. des Voy., du Prévost,

lii, 1747, pp. 239-252.

Manatée ou Vache marine, pp. 240-241. External characters and mode of capture, based
on Atkins, Voy. en Guinée, ete., p. 43. (See ATKINS, under 1735.) ;

La Vache do mer ou le Lamantin, ibid., pp. 315-316. A compiled account, based largely on
Atkins, op. cit.

Poisson de mer & de rivieres [de la Céte d’Or], ibid., iv, pp. 256-262. Le Grampus on le
Souffleur, pp. 259, 260. Le Marsouin, p. 260.

Poisson de mer & d’eau douce [de Congo & d’Angola], ibid., v, 1748, pp. 91-95. L’Ambize
Angulo, pp. 92-938. Account of external characters, etc., compiled from Dapper. {240.}

1747. Scitta, AUGUSTINO. De | Corporibus Marinis | Lapidescentibus | que defossa

reperiuntur, | Auctore Augustino Scilla | addita dissertatione | Fabii Columnie
| de Glossopetris. | [Vignette.] Rom, Typis Antonii de Rubeis in via Semi-
narii Romani. | MDCCXLVII. | — | Superiorum permissu. 4°. ll. 5, pp. 1-73,
ll. 3, pll. i-xxviii+-frontispiece.
In this first Latin version of Scilla (see 1670. SciLLa) the description of Squalodont remains
occurs at p. 47. The plates are the same as those of the original edition, the Squalodont
remains being represented in fig. 1, pl. xii. ; (241. ]

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 449

1747. STEIGERTADL, [J. G.] Account of a Narhual or Unicorn Tish, by Dr. Stcigertahl,
F. R. S., dated at Hanover Apr. 20, O. S. 1736. Translated from the I’rench
by 7. S. M. D., &e. <Philos. Trans., Abridged by Martyn, 1732-44, ix, pt. 3,
1747, pp. 71, 72, pl. v, fig. 42.
From Philos. Trans. Lond., no. 447, p. 147. See 1788. STLIGERTAHL. [242,.]
1748. Barck, ABR. ‘‘De cornu Piscis plane singulari carivae navis impacto. < Acta
Acad. Caes. Nat. Cur., viii, 1748, pp. 199-217.”
Not seen; perhaps not Cetacean. Title from Carus and Engelmann. (243. |
1748. Exviis, H. A | Voyage | to | Hudson’s-Bay, | by the | Dobbs Galley and Cali-
fornia, | In the Years 1746 and 1747, | For Discovering a | North West Pas-
sage; | with | An accurate Survey of the Coast, and a short | Natural History
of the Country. | Together with | A fair View of the Facts and Arguments
from | which the future finding of such a Passage is | rendered probable. | By
Henry Ellis, Gent. | Agent for the Proprietors of said Expedition. | To which
is prefixed, | An Historical Account of the Attempts hitherto made | for the
finding a Passage that Way to the East Indies. | Illustrated with proper Cuts,
and a new and correct Chart | of Hudson’s-Bay, with the Countries adjacent.
|— | London: | Frinted for H. Whitridge, at the Royal Exchange. |
M.DCC.XLVII. l1vol. sm. 8°. pp. i-xxviii, 1-336, map, and cuts.
The plate facing p. 132 gives a figure of ‘‘The Great Harpoon for Whales, with its Barb,
Coil, & Bouy” used by the Eskimo. On the plate facing p. 134 are figures of ‘‘A Sea Uni-
corn” and ‘‘A Whale.” Inthe text there are merely incidental allusions to these animals.
The figure of the Whale was doubtless intended for that of Balena mysticetus, but the head
is very short in proportion to the whole length of the animal.
A German translation of Ellis appeared at G6ttingen in 1750, and a Trench and a Dutch
translation at Leiden the same year, each in 8°, g. v. [244.]

1748. Linn&, C. Caroli Linnzi | Archiatr. Reg. Met. et Bot. Profess. Upsal. | Sys-
tema | Nature | sistens | Regna tria Nature, | in | Classes et Ordines | Genera

et Species | redacta | Tabulisque nis illustrata. | [Monogram.]— | Cum
privilegio S. R. M. Polonice ac Elecioris Saxon. |— | Secundum sextam
Stockholmiensem emendatam & auctam | editionem. | — | Lipsiz, Impensis

Godofr. Kiesewetter. | 1748. ll. 3, pp. 1-224, ll. 15, pli. i-vii.

Pisces plagiuri (= Sirenia+ Cete), p. 39. Genera Trichecus (1 sp.), Catodon (2 spp.), Mono-
don (1 sp.), Balena (3 spp.), Delphinus (3 spp.), Physeter (2 spp.). Reference only to Artedi
and Faun. Suec. k

Pl. iv, fig. 1, Plagiurus cum cauda horizontali= Delphinus ? [245.]

1748-56. ‘‘Mryrr, J. D. Angenehmer und niitzlicher Zeitvertreib mit Betrachtung
curioser Vorstellung allerhand kriechender, fliegender und schwemmender,
auf dem Land und im Wasser sich befindender und niihrender Thiere. Sowohl
nach ihrer Gestalt und ausserlichen Beschaffenheit nach der Natur gezeich-
net, gemahlet und in Kupfer gestochen von J. D. Meyer. Niirnberg, 174e-
1756. _ 3 dln. folio. Met 240 gekleurde platen.”

Not seen; title from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 11, no. 126. [246.]

1749. CONDAMINE, M. DE LA. Relation abrégée d’un Voyage fait dans l’intérieur de
VAmerique méridionale, depuis la Cote de la Mer du Sud, jusques aux Cdtes
du Brésil & de Ja Guiane, en descendant la riviere Amazones. < Hist. de
VAcad. roy. des Sci. a Paris, ann. 1745 (1749), pp. 391-492, pl. ix.

Lamentin ou Poisson-beeuf, pp. 464, 465. [247.]

1749. Gomara, F. L. pr. Francisco Lopez de Gomara, Historia de las Indias. <His-
toriadores | primitivos | de las Indias occidentales, | que junt6, traduxo en
parte, | y facd 4 luz, ilustrados con ernditas No- | tas, | y copiosos Indices, |
el ilustrissimo Senor | D. Andres Gonzalez Barcia, | de! Consejo, y camara de
S. M. | Divididos en tres Tomos. | Tomo J[-III]. | [Design.] Madrid. Aino
MDCCXLIX. 3 vols. fol.

Del Pez, que aman en la Espafiola Manati, vol. ii, cap. xxxi, p. 25. External characters
and habits, one half page. (248. ]
29GB

A450 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1750. ‘‘ANDERSON, J. Histoire | Naturelle | de V’Islande, | du Groenland, | du Dé-
troit de Davis, | Et d’autres Pays situés sous le Nord, | Traduite de l’Alle-
mand | De M. Anderson, de ?Académie | Impériale, Bourg-mestre en Chef | de
la Ville de Hambourg. | Par M * *, de Académie Impériale, & | de la Societé
Royale de Londres. | Tome Premier [Second]. | [Device.] | A Paris, | Chez
Sebastien Jorry, Imprimeur- | Libraire, Quai des Augustins, prés | le Pont S.
Michel, aux Cigognes. | — | M.DCC.L. | Avec approbation & Privilége du
Roi. 2vols. 18°. Vol. 1, vignette facing title, pp. i-xl, map, pp. 1-314, fold-
ing pll.i,ii, opp. p. 84 (birds) and p.188.- Vol.2,1 p.1. (title), pp. i-iv, 1-391,
unnumbered pll. opp. pp. 54 (birds), 78, 108, 168, 220.”

‘‘See the orig. ed., 1746; there are said to be later French eds., of 1754 and 1764.”
Not seen; from Coues, Birds Col. Vaill., App., 1878, p. 580. [249.]

1750. ‘ANDERSON, Joh. LGeschrijving van JJsland, Groenland en de straat Davis.
Verrijkt met (6) platen en een nieuwe kaart van de ontdekkingen. Benevens
een voorberigt, bevattende de levensbijzonderheden van den schrijver. Uit
Let Hoogduitsch vertaald door J. D. T. Te Amsterdam, bij St. van Esvaldt.
750 ACs?

‘*.. Walvisch. Baarden, spek, traan, bl. 78-82. Waarin van andere visschen te onder-

scheiden, bl. 157. Onderscheidene soorten en nachrichten van dien visch, bl. 158. Wal-
vischdoder, bl. 194.

““Walvischvangst. Hoe de Groenlanders dezelve verrichten, bl. 221. Waarom de Hollan-
ders daarin beter slagen dan de Denen, bl. 129.”

Not seen; title and references from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 231, no. 3418. There is alater Dutch
edition (Amsterdam, 1756, q. v.), to which are appended Horrebow’s observations. {250.]

1750. ‘“‘Brine, S. De piscaturis in Oceano Boreali. Lund., Goth. 1750. 49°.”
Title from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 234, no. 3435. [251.]

1750. Evtis, H. Voyage 4 la Baye de Hudson, en 1744-47, pour Ja découverte d’un
passage au Nord-Ouést. Trad. de ’Angl. augmentée, Leide, 1720. 8°. pll.9.

This French translation is said to have been made by C. Sellius.
For account of the Cetological matter, see the original English ed. of 1748. [252.]

1750. Exiis, H. Reize naar de Baai van Hudson, ter ontdekkinge van cenen Noord-
Wester doortogt. Leiden, 1750. 8°. pli. 9, cuts in text.
Dutch translation of the English edition, 1748, q. v. [253.]

1750. ZorapRAGER, C. G. Cornelius Gisbert Zorgdrager’s | Beschreibung | des |
Grénlandischen | Wallfischfangs | und | Fischery, | nebst einer grindlichen
= Nachricht | von dem | Bakkeljau- und Stockfischfang | bey | Terreneuf, | und
einer kurzen Abhandlung | von | Grénland,, Island, Spitzbergen, Nova Zem-
bla, | Jan Mayen Hiland, der Strasse Davids u. a. | Aus dem Hollandischen
ubersezt, und mit accuraten Kupfern und Land-|Charten gezieret. | — |
Nurnberg, bey Georg Peter Monath, 170. 4°. Frontispiece, 11. 3, pp. 1-370,

15.

Frontispiece title-page, printed title-page, plain back. Vorrede des Verlegers, 2 li., with
the last backed by Erklirung des Kupfer-Blates. Tinleitung. Von den ersten Erfindern
der neuen Kusten und Lande insgemein, pp.1-15. Then follows the Alte und neue Grén-
lindischen Fischery, pp. 16-302. Zugabe (account of the Cachelot oder Potfisch), pp. 302, 303.
Grénlindischen Wallfisch-Fang, pp. 301-346. Summarische Nachricht von dem Bakkeljau-
und Stockfisch-Fang bei Terreneuf, in den nordlichen ‘heilen von America, aus den Scbriff-
ten des Herrn Denys gezogen, pp. 346-365. Erklirung etlicher fremd- und unbekannten
Worter, etc., pp. 365-370. Register, 5 leaves.

This is apparently a translation of the Dutch edition of 1720, with more or less abridg-
ment, especially the omission of the rhymed passages of the original, and the statistical lists
of the Greenland Whale-fishery, with the addition of the Account of the Codfish-fishery of
later editions. The copy handled, although apparently in the original binding, lacks all the
maps and plates except the frontispiece. [254. ]

1751. [DAUBENTON, L. J. M.] Cachalot. <Encyel., ow Dict. rais. des Sci., des Arts et
des Meétiers, ii, 1751, pp. 502, 503. [255.]

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 4)d1

1751. Kirin, J. T. Jacobi Theodori Klein | Secr. Civ.'ged. | Soc. reg. Lond. et Acad.
Scient. Bonon. | Membri | Qvadrvpedym | dispositio | brevisque | Historia
Natvralis. | [Vignette.]— | Lipsiae | apvd Ionam Schmidt, bibl. Lybee. | 1751.
4°, ll. 2, pp. 1-127, pll. i-iti + 2 unnumb.

Manatvs, pp. 94, 95. (256.]

1751. Srer“erR, GrorG. WILHELM. De Bestiis marinis. <Wov. Comm. Acad. sci. imp.
Petropolitanae, ii, 1749 (1751), pp. 289-398, pll.

Descriptio Manati seu Vaceae marinae Hollandorum, sea-cow Anglorum, Russorum Mor-
skaia Korowa. Occisad. 12. Tul. 1742, in insula Beringii Americam inter et Asiam in canali
sita, pp. 294-330. Descriptio partium externarum, pp. 296-309. Descriptio internarum par-
tium, pp. 309-318. Ossium brevis descriptio, pp. 318-320. Descriptio morum et naturac, pp.
320-330. [257.]

1751. [VANDENESSE, MJ. pDE.] Baleine. <Hneycl., ow Dict. rais. des Sci., des Aris et des
Métiers, ii, 1751, pp. 32-36.

Baleine, pp. 32, 33. Péche de la baleine, pp. 33-36. Le blanc de la baleine, p. 36. [258.]

1752. Hiri, Jonn. An | History | of | Animals. | Containing Descriptions of the |
Birds, Beasts, Fishes, and Insects, | of the | Several parts of the World; | and |
Including Accounts of the several Classes of Animalcules, | visible only by
the Assistance of Microscopes. | Inthese | The Characters, Qualities, and Forms
of the several, Creatures are | described, the names by which they are coin-
monly known, as well as those by | which Authors, who have written on the
Subject, have called them are explained: | And each is reduced to the Class to
which it naturally belongs. | Ilustrated with Figures. |— | By John Hill,
M.D. | Acad. Reg. Scient. Burdig. &c. Soc. | — | London: | Printed for Thomas
Osborne, in Gray’s-Iun. |— | MDCCLII. 2°. Il. 4, pp. 1-584, ll. 2, pl.
i-xxviii, colored.

Fishes. Class the Fifth. Plagiuri, Cetaceous Fishes, pp. 310-317. Physeter’, 2 spp., p. 310;
Delphinus, 3 spp., pp- 310, 311; Balena, 4 spp.. pp. 312-314; Monodon, 1 sp., p. 314, pl. xvi;
Catodon, 1sp., p.315; Trichechus, p.317. A short but very good general account of the subject.
The specific names adopted are English, but tbe species are referred to Linnzean genera. [259.]

1752. Scirta, AUGUSTINO. De | Corporibus Marinis | Lapidescentibus | que defossa
reperiuntur | Auctore Angustino Scilla | addita dissertatione | de Glossopetris

| Editio altera emendatior. | [Vignette.] Rome, MDCCLII. | Sumptibus Ve-

nantii Monaldina Bibliopole in via Curfus. | — | — | Ex Typographia Lingua-
rum Orientalium | Angeli Rotilii, et Philippi Bacchelli. | In Aidipus Maxi-
morum. | Superiorvm permissy. | 4°. pp. i-viii, 1-84, ll. 3, pll. i-xxviii+1
& frontis.

In this edition (see ScILLa at 1670 and 1747) the description of the Squalodent remains is at
p. 55. The plates are apparently from the original etchings. (260. ]

753. ANON. ‘‘Naamlyst ... van alle de Commandeurs, die sedert 1700 op Groen-
land en de Straat Davids voor Holland hebben gevaren . . . hoeveel vissen en
vaten spek ieder heeft aangebragt. Zaandam, 1753. 4°.”

Not seen; title from Fr. Muller’s Cat. Amer. Books, 1877, p. 127, no. 2214. For an appar-
ently later edition of the same work, see 1770. SANTE, G. VAN. (261. j
1753. Bonn, J. An account of a machine for killing of Whales, proposed by John Lond,
M.D. <Philos. Trans. Lond., xlvii, art. xxi, 1753, pp. 429-435.
On account of the difficulty in propelling the harpoon to a sufficient distance, the writer
recommends the use of the ancient balista, with certain modifications to suit the exigencies
of the occasion. [262.}
1753. STELLER, G. W. Georg Wilhelm Stellers | ausfihrliche | Beschreibung | von
sonderbaren | Meerthieren, | mit Erlanterungen und néthigen Kupfern | ver-
sehen. | [Vignette.]— | Halle, | in Verlag, Carl Christian Kimmel. | 1753. | 8°.
ll. 9, pp. 1-42.
Beschreibung eines Manati oder Meerkuh, welches Thier den 12ten Julii 1742 auf der Insul
Bering, die zwischen America und Asien im Canal gelegen ist, getédtet werden, pp. 48-107.
Detailed account of its external and internal anatomy. ‘This work contains, (1) * Zur Ein-
leitung. Anatomie eines Meerkalbes, von Johann Adam Kulmnus, in Actis Nat. Cur., vol. i,
obs. 5,” pp. 1-41; (2) ‘Georg Wilhelm Stellers Abhandlung von Mcerthicren,” pp. 41-218,
a translation of De Bestiis marinis. See 1751. STELLER, G. W. [263.]

452 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1753-54. PONTOPPIDAN, E. Erich Pontoppidans, D. | Biscbofs tiber das Stift Bergen in
Norwegen und Mit- | glieds der Kénigl. Dian. Societ&t der Wissenschaften |
Versuch | einer | naturlichen | Historie | von Norwegen, | Worinnen die Luft,
Grund und Boden, Gewas- | ser, Gewachse, Metalle, Mineralien, Steinarten,
Thiere, | Végel, Fische und endlich das Naturel, wie auch die | Gewohnheiten
und Lebensarten der Einwohner | dieser Konigreichs beschrieben werden. |
Erster Theil. | Aus dem Danischen tibersetzt | von | Johann Adolph Scheiben,

| K. D. C. | — | Mit Kupfern. |— | Kopenhagen, | Bey Franz Christian
Mumme, | 1753. Zweiter Theil, 1754. 8°. Erster Theil, pp. 1-367, mit 16
Tafeln; Zweiter Theil, pp. 1-56, 1-536, mit 14 Tafeln.

Wallfisch, Zweiter Theil, pp. 223-234.

The species designated are: 1. Hvaltisk, pp. 223-232. This relates mainly to the Green-
land Whale (Balena mysticetus), but also contains some reference to the Sperm Whale; the
figure (pl. facing p. 209) is that of Physeter macrocephalus. %. Tuequal (the Plockfisch of the
Germans), p. 232. 3. Rérqyal, p.232. 4. Troldqual, p. 232. 5. Springhval, pp. 232, 284, pl.
facing p. 285. G. Nebbe-Hval, p. 233, pl. facing p. 209, fig. orig. This last, named also Ba-
lena rostrata, is evidently one of the Beaked Whales, but the others are too briefly mentioned
to be identified. 7. Marsvin, p. 257. 8S. Narhval, p. 359, pl. facing p. 247.

¥or further comment see infrd@ (1755), the English ed. - [264.]

1753-54. WAGENAAR, JAN. Vaderlandsche | Historie, | vervattende de | Geschiede-
nissen | der Vereenigde Nederlanden, | inzonderheid die van | Holland, | van
de vroegste tydenaf: | Uit de geloofwaardigste Schryvers en egte Gedenk- |
stukken samengesteld. | Met Konst plaaten en Karten opgehelderd. | ... Te
Ansterdam, | By Isaak Tidrion. | 21 vols. 8°. 1749-1759.

Potwalvisch, by Kalwyk, gestrand, ix, 1753, pp. 87, 38. Begensels der Walvischvangst,
x, 1754, pp. 67 et seg. Walvisschen voor Scheveningen gestrand, x, p. 158. [265.]

1754. ANON. ? ‘‘Seeeinhorn. < Berlin. wéchentl. Relat. der Merkw. Sachen a. d. Natur-
reiche, 1754, p. 719.”

Not seen; title from Donnderff, Zool. Beytr., i, 1792, p. 756. [266.]

1754. CatesBy, M. The | Natural History | of | Carolina, Florida, and of the Bahama
Islands: | Containing the Figures of | Birds, Beasts, Fishes, Serpents, Insects
aud Plants: | Particularly the Forest-Trees, Shrubs, and other Plants, not
hitherto described, | or very incorrectly figured by Authors. | Together with
their Descriptions in English and French. | To which are added, | Observa-
tions on the Air, Soil, and Waters: | With Remarks upon | Agriculture, Grain,
Pulse, Roots, &c. | To the whole is prefixed a new and correct Map of the
Countries treated of. | By the Late Mark Catesby, F. R. S. | Revis’d by Mr.
[George] Edwards, of the Royal College of Physicians, London. | — | Vol. I
[II]. [French version of the title follows.] London: | Printed for C. Marsh,
in Round Court in the Strand; T. Wilcox, over-against the new Church, in
the Strand; and B. Stichall in Clare-Court. |— | MDCCLIV. 2 vols. fol.
pu. col.

This is said to be identical with the original edition of 1731-83. Coues (op. cit.) gives a col-

lation of the 1771 ed.
Page xxxii of the ‘‘ Account of Carolina and the Bahama Islands” contains 2 lines about

“Whales” and 10 lines about ‘‘The Porpesse,”’ neither of any importance. [267.]
1754. DAUBENTON, L.J.M. Dauphin, delphinus. <Enceyel., ow Dict. rais. des Sci., des
Arts et des Meétiers, iv, 1754, p. 645. |268.]

1755. ANON.? ‘‘Free and impartial remarks on the real importance of the Whalefish-
ery. London, Cooper. 1755. 8°.”

Not seen; from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 251, no. 3600. [269.]

1755. PONTOPPIDAN. The | Natural History | of | Norway: | containing | A particular

and accurate Account of the Temperature of the Air, the | different Soils,

Waters, Vegetables, Metals, Minerals, Stones, Beasts, | Birds, and Fishes;

together with the Dispositions, Customs, and | Manner of Living of the In-

habitants: Interspersed with Physiological | Notes from eminent Writers, and

Transactions of Academies. | In Two Parts. | Translated from the Danisb

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 493

1755. PoNTopripAN—Continued.
Original of the | Right Rev4, Erich Pontoppidan, | Bishop of Bergen in Nor-
way, and Member of the Royal Academy | of Sciences of Copenhagen. | Illus-
trated with Copper Plates, and a General Map of Norway. | — | [ Vignette. ]
— | London: | Printed for A. Linde, Bookseller to Her Royall Highness the

Princess Dowager of Wales, in Catherine-Street in the Strand. | — | MDCCLY.
fol. Pt. i, pp. i-xxiv, 1-206; pt. ii, pp. i-viii, 1-292, 11.6, map, pll. 18, mostly
unnumbered.

Part ii, pp. 118-151, Cetacea, passim. 1. Hval-fisk, or Qual, the Whale, pp. 118-123 =
Balena mysticetus, principally, but in the account of this species several others are inci-
' dentally mentioned; 2. Herring-Whale, pp. 120, 145, doubtless some kind of Finner Whale;
3. Tuequal, or Bunch-back’d Whale, p. 123=? Megaptera longimana; 4. Spring-hval, or
Springeren, p. 123—Balenoptera rostrata (ef. Fabricius, Faun. Groent., p. 40); 5. Balena
rostrata, or Nebbe-hval, the Beaked Whale, p. 123—= Hyperoodon rostrata; G. Doglingen, p.
124—? Globiocephalus melas; ‘7. Marsvin, or Porpesse, which is here called Nice, and also
Tumler, the Tumbler, p. 136—=Phocena communis, at least in part; S. Narhval, Unicornu
Marinum, the Unicorn Fish, p. 137, pl. marked ‘‘no..4,” but apparently no. 22 of the list at the
end of the volume—Monodon monoceros; 9. Spek-hugger, or Vabu, pp. 122, 150, figured on
pl. “no. 5”(=no. 21 of the list at the end of the volume), described as ‘in shape much like a
Porpesse, and about four feet long,” with a sharp snout and ‘‘yery keen teeth,” and “long
projecting jaws,” and is said to prey upon the Whales, but the account as a whole cannot be
referred to any known species. It is impossible to say whether it be realiy a Cefacean.

Plates described as ‘20, 21, 22, Of Fishes, page 103” in the directions to the binder on the
reverse of p. 291 of pt. ii, embrace, among numerous other figures not Cetacean, 1. The Whale
= Physeter macrocephalus, 2. ‘‘The Goosebilled Whale,”’.a caricature of probably some species
of Hyperoodon, 3. A Whale with two speta huggers, apparently a Delphinoid, attacked by
two of the ‘‘Spek-huggers” described at p. 150. There is no reference to these figures in the
text, and the names of none of them exactly correspond with those of the species there
described. 4. The Narwhal—an odd caricature copied from an earlier author. None of the
figures are in fact original.

Pontoppidan’s account of the Whale tribe is largely derived from preceding authors, the rest
being based mainly on accounts received from fishermen. The author frankly states that he
never saw a Whale except once, and then only the back of one as it came to the surface of the
water to breathe. It is of interest chiefly as a record of the myths then prevalent respecting
‘these creatures. His notices of them are interspersed among those of the Viviparous Fishes.
One specific name still current (Balena RosTRATA) for a species of Hyperoodon dates from
Pontoppidan. i (270.]

1756. ‘‘“ANDERSON, J. Beschryving | van | Ysland, | Groenland | en de Straat Davis.
| Bevattende zo wel ene bestipte bepaling van de ligging en | grote van die
Hilanden, als een volledige ontvouwing van hunne | inwendige gesteltenis,
vuurbrakende Bergen, heete en war- | me Bronnen enz. een omstandig Bericht
van de Vruchten | en Kruiden des Lands; van de wilde en tamme Landdie- |
ren, Vogelen en Visschen, de Visvangst der Yslanders | en hunne onderscheide
behandeling, tocbereiding en | drogen der Visschen, voorts het getal der In-
woon- | ders, hunnen, Aart, Levenswyze en Bezigheden, | Woningen, | Kle-
dingen, Handteering, Arbeid, | Veehoedery, | Koophandel, Maten en Ge- | ,
wichten, Huwelyks Plechtigheden, Opvoe- | ding hunner Kinderen, Gods-
dienst, Ker- | ken en Kerkenbestuur, Burgerlyke Rege- | ring, Wetten, Straf-
oeffeningen en wat | wyders tot de Kennis van een Land | vereischt word. |
Door den Heer | Johan Anderson, | Doctor der Beide Rechten, en in Leven
eerste Burgermeester | der vrye Keizerlyka Ryksstad Hamburg. | Verrykt met
Platen en een nieuwe naauwkeurige Landkaart der | ontdekkinge, waar van
in dit Werk gesproken word. | Uit het Hoogduits vertaalt. | Door | J. D. J. |
Waar by gevoegt zyn de Verbeteringen | Door den Heer Niels Horrebow, |
Opgemaakt in zyn tweejarig verblyf op Ysland. | [ Designs. ] | Te Amsterdam,
| By Jan van Dalen, Boekverkoper op de Colveniersburgwal | by de Staal-
straat. 1756. Lvol. sm. 4°. Full-page vignette, title, both backed blank,
7 more unpaged Il. (* Voorbericht’), map, pp. 1-286-+3 ll. (‘Bladwyzer’); with
5 pll. at pp. 34 (birds), 149 (birds), 172, 189, 216. To which is appended: Verbe-
teringen | Wegens de | Beschryving | Van het Groot Eyland | Ysland, | Be-
schreven | Door den Heer | Johan Anderson. | Opgemaakt in een tweejarig

454

1756.

BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

‘“CANDERSON, J.—Continued.

verblyf | op dat Eyland, | Door den Heer | Niels Horrebow. 5 unpaged I11.,
pp. 1-158.” ;

Not seen; title from Coues, Birds Col. Vall., 1878, p. 581. This is the later Dutch edition
referred to above at 1750. It is by the same translator, with the addition of Horrebow’s me- ,
moir, but is issued by a different publisher. See the references to the cetological matter
given from Bosgoed for the ed. of 1750. See, also, HoRnEBOW, N., at 1769. (271.]

1756. Brisson, M. J. Regnum animale | in Classes IX distributum, | sive | Synopsis

Methodica | sistens generalem Animalium | distributionem in Classes IX, &
duarum primarum | Classium, Quadrupedum scilicet & Cetaceorum, parti- |
cularem divisionem in Ordines, Sectiones, Genera & | Species, | Cum brevi
cujusque Speciei, | descriptione Gaauemibns Auctorum de iis tractantium, |
Nominibus eis ab ipsis & Nationibus impositis, Nominibus- | que vulgaribus. |
A D. Brisson, Historiz Naturalis Musei Realmuriani | Demonstratore. | Cum

Figuris eneis. | — | [ Vignette.] | Parisiis, | Ad Ripam. Augustinorum. | Apud
Cl. Joannem-Baptistam Bauche, Bibliopolam, ad | Insigne St®. Genovefe &
S#. Joannis in Deserto. | M. DCC. LVI. | — | Cum privilegio Regis & Approba-
tione. pp. i-vii, 1-382.

[Or],

, ue Regne Animal | divisé en IX Classes, | ou | Méthode | contenant la divi-
sion generale des | Animaux en IX Classes, & la division particuliere | des deux
premieres Classes, sgavoir de celle des | Quadrupedes & de celle des Cetacées,
en Ordres, | Sectiones, Genres & Espéces. | Aux quelles on a joint une |
courte description de chaque Espéce, avec les Citations | des Auteurs qui en
ont traité, les Noms qwils leurs ont | donnés, ceux que leurs ont donnés les
différentes | Nations, & les noms vulgaires. | Par M. [Mathurin Jacques] Bris-
son, Démonstrateur du Cabinet d’Histoire | Naturelle de M. de Reaumur. |
Avec Figures en taille douce. [Vignette.] A Paris, | Quay des Augustins. |
Chez Cl. Jean-Baptiste Bauche, Libraire, & ’Image Sainte | Geneviéve & S.
Jean dans le Desert. | M.DCC.LVI. | — | Avee Privilege du Roi & Approba-
tion. 4°. ll. 2, pp. i-vj,1.1, pp. 1-882,1.1. Text in both Latin and French.

Genus Odobeni= Sirenia + Walruses, pp. 48-51.—Le Lamantin, Manatus (= genn. Manatus
et Halicore), pp. 49-5.

Classe ii. | Les Cetacées. | [ou] Classis ii. | Cetacea. [half-title, p. 341], pp. 341-382.

The Cetacea are divided into four orders:

Order I. Cetacea edentula, with 1 genus, Balena, and 7 species, to wit: I. nee vulgaris
Groenlandica, p. 347= B. mysticetus ; 2. Balena Islandica, p.350— B. biscayensis; #. Balena
Nove Anglie, p. 351=‘** Bunch or Hump-back-whale” of the English; 4. ‘Halen hse sex
in dorso gibbis, p. 351= B. gibbosa, Erxleben or ‘‘Scrag Whale” of Dudley; Agaphelus gibbo-
sus, Cope; 5. Balzena tripinnis, ventri levi, p. 952; 6. Baleena tripinnis, ventre rugoso, rostro
rotundo, p. 353—Physalus antiquorum; 7%. Baleena tripinnis, ventre rugoso, restro acuto,
p. 355—= Balenoptera rostrata.

Order II. .Cetacea dentata in maxilld inferiore tantwm, with 1 genus, Cetus, and 7 species.
1. Cetus, p. 356= Physeter macrocephalus; 2. Cetus albicans, p. 359= Beluga catodon;
3. Cetus Nove Anglie, p. 360=‘'Sperma Ceti Whale” of Dudley, hence Physeter macro-
cephalus; 4. Cetus minor, p. 361= Physeter macrocephaius, juv.; 5. Cetus tripinnis, dentibus
acutis, rectis, p. 362— Physeter macrocephalus ; 6. Cetus tripinnis, dentibus acutis, arcuatus,
falciformis, p. 363— Physeter macrocephalus ; 7. Cetus tripinnis, dentibus in planum desinen-
tibus, p. 364= Physeter macrocephalus.

Order III. Cetacea dentata in maxilld superiore tentim, with 1 genus, Cor atodon, and 1 spe-
cies: Ceratodon= Monodon monoceros.

Order IV. Cetacea dentata in utrdque maxilld, with 1 genus, Delphinus, and 5 species, to
wit: 1. Delphinus, p. 369=Delphinus delphis; %. Phoccena, p. 311=Phocena communis ;
3. Delphinus pinna in dorso una Gladii recurvi emula, dentibus acutis, rostro quasi trun-
cato, p. 872— Physeter macrocephalus; 4. Orca, p.873=Orea gladiator; 5. Physeter, p. 374
= Physeter macrocephalus.

Total, 4 genera, 20 species. Of the latterno less than 7 are based on different accounts of the
Sperm Whale, the author compiling indiscriminately from Sibbald, Artedi, Klein, ete. [272.]

1756. Lixnh, C. Caroli Linnei | Archiatr. Reg. Med. et Bot. Profess. Upsal. | Sys-

tema | Nature | sistens Regna tria Nature | in | Classes et Ordines | Genera

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 455

1756. Linnt, C.—Continued.
et Species | redacta, | tabulisque eneis illustrata. | Accedunt vocabula Gal-
lica. | Editio multo auctior & emendatior. | [Vignette.] Lugduni Batayo-
rum, | Apud Theodorum Haak, | MDCCLVI. 8°. Il. 4, pp. 1-227, Il. 9-+44,
pl. i-viii.

Classis iv. Pisces. Ordo 8. Plagiuri. Genn. Trichecus, Catodon, Monodon, Baicena, Del-

phinus, Physeter (pp. 39, 40). Trichecus here includes the sinele species ‘1. Manatus . . . la
Lamantin.” Catodon has 2 species; Monodon,1; Balwna, 4; Delphinus, 3; Physeter, 2 —
geun. 6, spp. 13. (273.]

1757. Bonp, JouN. Bericht wegens een Werktuig om Walvissen te Schieten. <Hou-
tuyn’s Uitgezogte Verhandl. uit de Niewwste Werken van de Societicten der We-
tensch. in Luropa, ete., i Band, ii Deel, 1757, pp. 1-10.

From: Phil. Trans., 1757, vol. xivii, pp. 429 et seg. See 1751. Bonn, J. [274.]

1757. “DeBus, L. Jac. Naturliche und Politische Historie der Inseln Farée, worinn

die Luft, Grund und Boden, Gewiisser, Thiere, Végei, Fische, etc., das Natu-
rel, die Gewohnheiten, Lebensart der Einwohner dieser Inseln und ihre Ver-
fassung beschrieben werden. Aus dem Diinischen iibersetzt. Kopenhagen

und Leipzig, Pelt, 1757. 8°. Met kopergrav.”
Not seen; from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 50, no. 773. For account of the cetological matter of
Debes’s work, see-English version, at 1676. {275.]

1757. HorreBow,N. The | Natural History | of | Iceland: | containing | A particular
and accurate Account of the different Soils, burning Moun- | tains, Minerals,
Vegetables, Metals, Stones, Beasts, Birds, and Fishes; | together with the
Disposition. Customs, and Manner of Living of | the Inhabitants. Interspersed
with an Account of the Island, by | Mr. Anderson, late Burgo-master of Ham-
burgh. | To which is added, a Meteorological Table, with Remarks. | Trans-
lated from the Danish Original of N[iels]. Horrebow. And illustrated with a
New General Map of the Island. | — | London: |. . . [=names of booksellers,
4 lines]. MDCCLVII. 2°. pp. i-xx, 1-207, map.

Chap. lxv. Concerning the Whale. Chap. Ixvi. Concerning the porpus, pp. 85-87. Brief
account of the capture and uses of these animals. [276. |

1753. BorLAsE, WILLIAM. The | Natural History | of | Cornwall. | The | Air, Climate,
Waters, Rivers, Lakes, Sea, and Tides; | Of the Stones, Semimetals, Metals,
Tin, and the Manner of Mining; | The Constitution of the Stannaries; | Iron,
Copper, Silver, Lead, and Gold, found in Cornwall. | Vegetables, Rare Birds,
Fishes, Shells, Reptiles, and Quadrupeds: | Of the Inhabitants, | Their Man-
ners, Customs, Plays or Interludes, Exercises, and Festivals; | the Cornish
Language, Trade, Tenures, and Arts. | Illustrated with a new Sheet Map of
the County, and Twenty-Eight Folio | Copper-Plates from Original Drawings
taken on the Spot. | — | By William Borlase, A. M. F. R.S., | Rector of Ludg-
van, and Author of the Antiquities of Cornwall. |-—|- - - - - - - - - Natale
solum dulcedine captos | Ducit. | — | Oxford, | Printed for the Author; by W.
Jackson: | Sold by W. Sandby, at the Ship in Fleet-Street London; and the
Booksellers of Oxford. |— | MDCCLVIII. fol. pp. i-xix, 1-326, |. 1.

Sect. ii. Sea-fish, and first cetaceons, pp. 263, 264, pl. xxvii, fige. i, 2.

The ‘‘blower, or fin-fish (Physeter of authors),”’ p. 263. ‘‘The grampus, or Poreus marinus
major of Ray,” p. 263. ‘‘The porpesse, Porcus marinus seu Phocena vel Tursio,” ete., p. 264,
pl. xxvii, fig.2. ‘The dolphin, the Delphinus of the ancients and moderns,” p. 264, pl. xxvii,
fig. 1. The figures are from the drawings “‘ of that accurate Ichthyologist, the late Reverend
Mr. Jago of Loo.” (277.]}

758. GUMILLA, J. Histoire | Naturelle, Civile | Et Geographique | de | L’Orenoque. |
Et des principales Riviéres qui s’y jettent. | Dans laquelle on traite du Gou-
vernement, | des usages & des cofittumes des Indiens | qui l’habitent, des ani-
maux, des arbres | des fruits, des résines, des herbes & | des racines médici-
nales qui naissent dans | le Pais. On ya joint le détail de plusieurs | Conver-
sions remarquables & édifiantes. | Parle Pere Joseph Gumilla, de la | Com-
pagnie de Jesus, Supérieur des Missions de Orenoque. | Traduite de ’Espagnol

456

1758. GUMILLA, J.—Continued.
sur la Seconde | Edition, par M. Eidous ci-devant | Ingenieur des Armées fe
S. M. C. | Fome Second. | [Ornament.] A Avignon, | Chez la Veuve de F.
Girard, Imprimeur. | Et se vend, | A Marseille, | Chez D. Sibié, Imprimeur du
Roi, | & Jean Mossi, Libraire. | — | M.DCC.LVIII. 3 vols. 12°.
Poissons de !Orénoque. Moyers industrieux cont les Indiens se servent pour les prendre.
Vertus Médicinaies des Pierres & des Os qu’on trouve dans quelques uns. Yom. ii, chap. xxi,
pp. 36-58.—Manati, pp. 43-55. |
For comment, see the Spanish edition of 1745. [278.]
1758-77. *‘GMELIN, Pu. F., und CHRISTMANN, G. F. Onomatologia medica completa,
seu Onomatologia historiae natur ae oder voljstiind. Lexicon das alle Benen-
nungen der Kunstworter der Naturgesch. nach ihrem ganzen Umfang erkliret
u. den reichen Schatz der ganzen Natur durch deutliche u. richtige Beschrei-
bungen des niitzlichen u. sonderbaren von allen Thieren, Pflanzen u. Mine-
ralien sowohl vor Aerzte als andere Liebhaber in sich fasst zu allgemeinem
Gebr. von einer Gesellschaft naturforschender Aerzte nach den richtigsten
Urkunden zusammengetragen. 7 Bde. A-Z. (1-4 von Ph. I*. Gmelin, 5-7 von
G.F. Christmann). gr.8°. Ulm; Frankfortu. Leipzig, 1758, 61, 66, 73, 775,77.”
Not seen; title at second hand, but source not noted.
Cetaceen, passim. [279.]
1759. ScrtLta, AUGUSTINO. De | Corporibus Marinis | Lapidescentibus | que defossa
reperiuntur | Auctore Augustino Scilla | addita dissertatione | Fabii Co-
lunmee | de Glossopetris | Editio altera emendatior. | [Vignette.] Rome
MDCCLIX. | Sumptibus Venantii Monaldini Bibliopole in via Cursus.
| —|—| Ex Typographia Joannis Zempel | Prope Montem Jordanum. |
Svperiorvm permissy. 4°. 1.4, pp. 1-82. 11.3, pl. i-xxviii+1 and frontis.
This third Latin edition (see SCILLA, at 1670, 1749, and 1752) seems to be textually the same
as the first and second, with modifications of title-page and accessories. The matter relating
to the Squalodont remains occurs at p. 54; the plates are identical with those of the earlier
editions. [280.]
1760. Douatass, W. A | Summary, | Historical and Political, | of the | First Plant-
ing, Progressive Improvements, | and Present State of the British Set- | tle-
ments in North America. | Containing |

BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

I. Some general Account of ancient |
and modern Colonies, the grant- |
ing and settling of the British |
Continent and West India Island |
Colonies, with some transient |
Remarks concerning the adjoin- |
ing French and Spanish Settle- |
ments, and other Remarks of |
various Natures.

II. The Hudson’s-Bay Company’s |

IV. The Province of L’Acadie or |
Nova Scotia; with the Vicissi- |
tudes of the Property and Ju- |
risdiction thereof, and its present |
State.

VY. The several Grants of Saal
dahock, Province of Main, Mas- |
sachusetts-Bay, and New- Ply- |
mouth, united by a new Char- |
ter in the present Province of |

Lodges, Fur and Skin Trade. | Massachusetts - Bay, commonly |
III. Newfoundland Harbours and | calied New- England.

Cod-Fishery.

By William Douglass, M. D. | Vol. I. [-IL] | — | Ne quid falsi dicere andeat,
ne quid veri non audeat. Cicero. | — | London, | Printed for Kk. & J. Dodsley,
in Pall-mall. | MDCCLX. | 2vols. 8°.

The title-pages of the two volumes differ only in respect to the matter detailing the con-

tents of the volumes.
seems to be not textually different.

There appears to have been an earlier [1755] edition, from which this

A digression concerning whaling, vol.i, pp.56-Gi. Ambergris and spermaceti are described;
eight different kinds of Whales are brietiy described, with some account of the products of

each of the habits of Whales, and of whaling.
A digression concerning fisheries, ibid., pp. 294-304. I. Whales,

pp. 296-298. This gives

an account of the New England Whale-fishery as it existed in 1748, with remarks on the

habits of the Whales pursued, and is of especial importance.

[281.]

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 457

1761. CHARLEVOIX, P. [F. X. DE]. Journal | of a | Voyage | to | North-America. |
Undertaken by Order of the | French King. | Containing | The Geographical
Description and Natural | History of that Country, particularly | Canada. |
Together with | An Account of the Customs, Characters, | Religion, Manners
and Traditions | of the original Inhabitants. | In a Series of Letters to the
Duchess of Lesdiguieres. | Translated from the French of P. de Charlevoix. |
In two volumes. | Vol. I. | — | London: | Printed for R. and J. Dodsley, in
Pall-Mall. |— | MDCCLXI. 2vols. 8°. Vol. i, pp. i-viii, 1-382, 1 map.
Vol. ii, pp. i-viii, 1-380, I. 13.
The passage about Porpoises and Whales is in vol. i, pp. 227-230. See, also, CHARLEVOIX,
at 1744 and 1763. (282. ]
1762. Houtruyn, F. Natuurlyke Historie | of | Uitvoerige Beschryving | der | Die-
ren, Planten | en | Mineraalen, | Volgens het Samenstel van den Heer | Lin-
neus. | Met naauwkeurige Afbeeldingen. | — | Eerste Deels, Derde Stuk. |
Vervolg der | Zoogende Dieren. | [Vignette.] Te Amsterdam, | By F. Hout-
tuyn.|M DCCLXIT. 8°. 11.3, pp. 1-554, IL. 2, pll. xxii—xxviii.
Cetacea, pp. 423-554. 1. Eenhoorn-Visch, pp. 423-441; 2. Mysticctus, Groenlandsche Wal-
visch, pp. 442-477 (Historie der Walvisch-Vangst, pp. 457-477); 3. Physalus, Vinvisch, pp.
477-485; 4. Boops, Ossen-Oog, pp. 485-487; 5. Musculus, Breedsmoel, 487-500; 6. Cutodon,
pp. 503-505; ‘7%. Macrocephalus, Potvisch, pp. 505-530; 8. Microps, Klein-Oog, pp. 530-536;
9. Tursio, Mustvisch, pp. 536-539; 10. Phocena, Bruinvisch, pp. 540-543; 11. Delphis,
Dolphyn, pp. 543-547; 12. Orca, Botskop, pp. 547-554. [283.]
1762. ‘““Jonanus, W. Dissertatio de piscatura, cujus particula prima, de quibusdam
Balaenis in mari Islandico captis vel ad littora ejectis, earumque usu, praeci-
pue oceasione libri, dicti Su Konunglega Skuggsja, sive speculum regale,
resp. J. Jonaeus. Hafniae, 1762. 10 bladz.”
Not seen; from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 239, no. 3489. [284.]
1762. Spirman, H. ‘‘Cachelot, gestrand tusschen Zandvoort en Wyk op Zee, 1762.
Naar J. Augustini door H. Spilman. br. folio.”
From Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 176, no. 2777. [285.]
1762 (circa). VINNE, V. VAN DER. ‘‘Cagelot, lang 61 voeten, den 20 Febr. 1762 tussen
Zantyvoort en Wijk-op-Zee aangedreeven. Door V. van der Vinne. br. 4°.”
From Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 176, no. 2778. [286.]
1763. BeLiin, S. Déscription | Géographique de la Guyane. | Contenant | les Posses-
sions et les Etablissemens | des Frangois, des Espagnols, des Portugais, | des
Hollandois dans ces vastes Pays. | Le Climat les Productions de la Terre et les
Animaux | Leurs Habitans, leurs Moeurs, leurs Coutumes. | et le Commerce
qu’on y peut faire. | Avec des Remarques pour la Navigation et des | Cartes,
Plans, et Figures, | Dressées au Dépost des Cartes et Plans de la Marine | Par
Ordre de M le Due de Choiseul Colonel | Général des Suisses et Grisons, Mi-
nistre de la { Guerre et dela Marine. | Par le S. Bellin Ingenieur de la Marine et
du | Depost des Plans, Censeur Royal, de Academie de | Marine et de la So-
cieté Royale de Londres. | M.DCC.LXIII. 4°. pp.i-xiv (pl. title and engr.
title, which is the one here given, and ‘‘Avertissement”), 1. 1, pp. 1-294, 1.1,
maps, numerous plans, and pl. i-x.
Le Manati, pp. 65, 66, pl. v (Péche du Lamentin par les Indiens ; Lamenum, Manate, Vache
Marine). Description apparently original; figure a copy from Labat (see 1724. Labar
R. R.). [287.]
1763. CHARLEVOIX, [P.F.X. DE]. Letters | to the | Dutchess of Lesdiguieres; | Giving
an Account of a | Voyage to Canada, | and | Travels through that vast Coun-
try, | and | Louisiana, to the Gulf of Mexico. | Undertaken | by Order of the
present King of France. | By Father Charlevoix. | . . . [= 28 lines of small
type in 2 columns, giving description of contents of the work.] Printed for
R. Goadby, and Sold by R. Baldwin, in Pater- | Noster-Row, London. 1763.
8°, pp.i-xiv,11., pp. 1-384. Without maps.
The pass2ge relating to Porpoises and Whales is 2t pp. 81-88.
See the original edition, 1744; also the earlier (1761) English edition. [288.]

458

BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1763. Eaupr, H. Herrn Hans Egede, | Missionérs und Bischofes in Grénland, |

Beschreibung | und | Natur-Geschichte | von | Grénland, tbersetzet | von | D.
Joh[ann]. Ge[Lorg]. Krinitz. | [Vignette.]— | Mit Kupfern. | — | Berlin, |
verlegts August Mylius. | 1763. 8°. pp. i-xii, 1-237, i-xi Tafeln.

Cetacea, pp. 89-106,iv,v Tateln. 4. Fin-Visch, p. 89, Taf.iv; 2. Bart-Fisch, p. 90, Taf. iv;
3. Nordcaper, p. 95; 4. Schwerdfisch, p. 96; &. Cachelot, oder Pot-Fisch, p.97; @. Weiss-
fisch, p. 98, Taf. v; 7%. Buttskopf, p. 98—= Hyperoodon, sp.; 8. Seeeinhorn. Einhornfish.
Narwal, p. 99, Taf. vy, animal and skull; 9. Der Niser oder das Meerschwein, p. 105. Wall-
fischfang, pp. 124-127. [289.]

1763. Gronovius, LAUR[ENTIUS] THEOD[ORUS]. Zoophylacii | Gronoviani | Fasci-

culus primus | exhibens | Animalia | Quadrupeda, | Amphibia | atque |
Pisces, | quae in | Museo suo adservat, rite examinavit, syste- | matice dispo-
suit, descripsit, atque | iconibus illustravit | Laur. Theod. Gronovius, J. U. D.
| Ciyitatis Lugduno-Batavae Senator, Societatis Physico- | medicae Regiae
Londinensis, Basilaeensis, | atque Hollandicae Socius. | [Ornament.] Lug-
duni Batavorum | sumptibus Auctoris. | MDCCLXIII. fol. Fase. I. 2 1l., pp.
1-136; Fasc. II. Insectorum. 1764. pp. 137-236, i-iv, pll. i-xvii--viiis.
Plagiuri, pp. 29, 30.—The only species described is (no. 139) Balena dorso impenni,
(nearly = Balena mysticetus), of which there is a detailed account of the external characters,
including measurements. [290.]

1764. HorreBow, N. Nouvelle | Description | physique-historique, | civile et poli-

tique | de V’Islande, | avec | des observations | critiques | sur Histoire natu-
relle | de cette Isle, | Donnée par M. [Johann] Anderson. | Ouvrage traduit de
YAllemand, de M. | [Niels] Horrebows [sic], qui y a été envoyé | par le Roi
de Danemarck. | Tome premier [et second]. | — | A Paris, | Chez Charpen-
tier, Libraire, rue du Hurepoix, | 4 l’entrée du Quai des Augustines. | — |
M. DCC. LXIV. | Avec Approbation, & Privilegedu Roi. 2vols. 12°. Vol.i,
pp. i-xlij, 1-368; vol. ii, pp. i-v, 1-372.

De la Baleine, i, pp. 305-311. Du Marsouin, pp. 311-313.

This work is a critical commentary upon that portion of Anderson’s ‘‘ Nachrichten von
Island, Grénland,” ete., relating to Iceland. The matter relating to Cetacea is not of high
importance.

This French version, as the translator himself avows, is more or less abridged, and very
freely rendered.—Vol. iis wrongly paged from p. 264 to the end, through an omission in the
pagination of 9 numbers (265-272 inclusive). [291.]

1764. [KRASHENINNIKOF, 8S. P.] The | History | of | Kamtschatka, | and the | Kurilski

Islands, | with the | Countries adjacent; | Illustrated with | Maps and Cuts. |
[By Stepan Petrovitch Krasheninnikof.] Published at Petersbourg in the
Russian Language, by Order of her Imperial Majesty | and translated into
English | By James Grieve, M. D. | Glocester: | Printed by Raikes | for | T.
Jefferys, Geographer to his Majesty, London. |M.DCC.LXIY. 4°. 11.4, pp.
i-vii, 1-280, 5 pll. and two maps.

Manati or Sea Cow, pp. 132-136. Whales, pp. 137-142.

Krasheninnikof’s work is of special importance from its detailed account of the Sea Cow
(Rhytina borealis), its habits, abundance, and products.

Grieve’s version is a greatly abridged and condensed translation, but was the first and the
only one prior to 1768, when a French translation direct from the original Russian appeared
at Paris (q. v.), far superior to Grieve’s. Of Grieve’sabridged English version there appeared
a German translation in 1766, by J. T. Kohler (Lemgo), a French, by M. E[idous] (Lyon), in
1767 (q. v.), and also, it is said, a Dutch (Amsterdam), in 1770. See especially infrd, Kra-
SHENINNIKOF, at 1768. [292.]

764. NoorDE, C. vAN. ‘‘Cagelot of potwalvis, gestrand by Egmond op Zee, 1764.

Door C. van Noorde. br. folio.”
From Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 176, no. 2780. [293.]

1765. ANON. Lamantin. <Lncycel., ow Dict. des Sci., des Arts et des Meétiers, ix, 1765,

p. 220. [294.]

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 459

1765. [Burron, G. L. LECLERC, Compte de, et L. J. M. DAUBENTON]. Histoire |
Naturelle, | Générale et Particuliére, | Avee la description | du Cabinet du
Roi. | — | Tome Treiziéme. | — | [Vignette.] A Paris, | de L’Imprimerie Ro-
yale. | — | M. DCC. LXY. 4°. 11. 3, pp. i-xx, 1-441, 1. 1, pll. i-lix.
Les Phoques, les Morses, et les ‘Lamantins, pp. 330-441, pll. xliv-lix. Le Dugong, pp. 374-
377 (par Buffon). Le Lamantin, pp. 377-394 (par Buffon). Description d’un embryon de La-
mantin de la Guiane, pp. 425-430, pll. lvii-lix (par Daubenton). Description d’une téte de la
Lamantin du Sénégal, pp. 431, 482 (par Daubenton). La téte d’un Dugon, pp. 437-440, pl. lvi
(par Daubenton).
See later editions at 1792, 1802, and 1826. [295.]
1765. CRANZ, Davip. ‘David Cranz | Historie | von | Grénland | enthaltend | Die
Beschreibung des Landes und | der Einwohner &c. | inbesondere | die |
Geschichte | der dortigen | Mission | der | Evangelischen Brtider | zu |
Neu-Herrnhut | und | Lichtenfels. |— | Mit acht Kupfertafeln und einem
Register. | — | Barby bey Heinrich Detlef Ebers, und in Leipzig | in Commis-
sion bey Weidmanns Erben und Reich. | 1765. 8°. ll. 17, pp. 1-1132, 11. 13.
IM. Abschnitt. Von den See-Thieren, pp. 140-160. 1. Grénlindische Wallfisch (—Balena
mysticetus), pp. 141-145; 2. Nord-Caper (=B. biscayensis), p. 145; 3. Finnfisch, p. 145; 4.
Jupiter-Fisch, p. 146; 5. Pflok-Fisch, p. 146; @. Knoten-Fisch, p. 146; 7%. Einhorn-Fisch,
oder Narhval, Monoceros, pp. 146-148; 8. Sig-Fisch, Pristis, p. 148 (not a Cetacean); 9. Ca-
schelot oder Pottfisch, pp. 148-150; 10. Weisstfisch, p. 150; 14. Butzkopf, p. 151; 1:2. Meer-
schwein, p. 151; 13. Delphin, p. 152; 14. Schwerdtfisch (=Oreca), p. 152; 15. Eine andre
Art Schwerdt-Fische, p. 152. Wallfisch-Fang, pp. 155-160.
Of the 15 species here distinguished 14 are Cetaceans, and nearly all are recognizably.
described. [296. ]
1765. ‘“‘FERMIN, PH. Histoire naturelle de la Hollande équinoxiale; ou description
des animaux, plantes, fruits, etc., que se trouvent dans la colonie de Surinam;
avec leurs noms différents, tant frangois, que latins, hollandais, indiens et
néegre-anglais. Amsterdam, M. Magerus, 1765. gr. 8°.”
Not seen; title from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 56, no. 872. {297.]
1766. LInNE, C. Caroli a Linné, |... [=titles, 5 lines] | Systema | Nature | Per
| Regna tria Nature, | Secundum | Classes, Ordines, | Genera, Species, | cum

| Characteribus, Differentiis, | Synonymis, Locis. | Tomus I. | — | Editio
Duodecima, Reformata | — | Cum Privilegio 8S: R: M:tis Sveciz & Electoris
Saxon. |— | Holmiz, | Impensis Direct. Laurentii Salvii, | 1766. 8°. pp.
1-532.

Il. Bruta.> Sirenia. Trichecus Manatus, pp. 49,50 = Manatus et Halicore. Gen. Trichecus
inter Elephas et Bradypum sistens spp. I. T. Rosmarus; %. T. Manatus.

VII. Cete, pp. 105-108. #1. Monodon Monoceros; 2. Balena Mysticetus, p. 105; 3. Balena
Physalus; 4. Balena Boops; 5. Baleena Musculus, p..106; 6. Physcter Catodon; ‘7%. Phy-
seter macrocephalus ; 8. Physeter microps; 9. Physeter Tursio, p. 107; 10. Delphinus Pho-
cena; Li. Delphinus Delphis; 12. Delphinus Orca, p. 108.

Genn. 4; spp. 12.

In the Vindobone reprint (1767), styled ‘‘Editio decima tertia, ad Editionem duodecimam
reformatam Holmiensem,”’ the pagination and matter relating to these groups is the same as
here. [298. }

1767. ‘BECKMANN, JoH. Anfangsgriinde der Naturhistorie. 8°. Géttingin u. Bre-
men, 1767.”

Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann. Cited by Donndorff in connection with Ceta-
ceans.

A new and improved edition, 8°, Breslau, 1813, is also mentioned. [299.]
1767. CRANZ, DAvip. The | History | of | Greenland: | containing | A Description
| of | the Country, | and | Its Inhabitants: | and particularly, | A Relation of
the Mission, carried on for above | these Thirty Years by the Unitas Fratrum,
| at | New Herrnhuth and Lichtenfels, in that Country. | By David [Cranz]
Crantz. | Translated from the High-Dutch, and illustrated with | Maps and
other Copper-plates. |— | In two volumes. |—| Vol. I. |— | London, |
Printed for the Brethren’s Society for the Furtherance of the | Gospel among
the Heathen: | And sold by J. Dodsley, in Pall-Mall; . . . [=names of seven

460 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1767. CRANZ, Davip—Continued.
other booksellers] and at | all the Brethren’s Chapels. | MDCCLXVII. 8°.
ll. 2, pp. i-lix, 1-405, 2 maps, pll. iii—vii; vol. ii, 1. 1, pp. 1-498, pl. 2.
Cf other singular Sea-Animals, i, pp. 106-122: #. The Greenland Whale, pp. 107-109
(avowedly from Martens and Zorgdrager), and pp. 118-121 (the Dutch Whale-fishery—‘‘rela-
tion from the mouth of a Missionary”). &. The North-caper, p. 110. 3. The Fin-fish, p.110.
4. The Jupiter-whale, p.110. 5. The Bunch, or Humpback-whale, p. 111. &. The Knotted-
whale, p. 111. '% The Unicorn-fish, monocer‘os, also called narhval, pp. 111, 112. §. The
Saw-fish, pristis, p. 112 (not a Cetacean). 9. Cachelot, Catodon, or Pott-fisch, pp. 112-114.
10. The White-fish, p. 114. 112. The Grampus, p. 114. 22. The Porpoise, pp. 114, 115.
13. The Dolphin, cailed also Tumbler, p.115. #4. The Sword-fish (Orea), p. 115. 15.
Another kind of Sword-fish, the ardluit of the Greenlanders (Orca), pp. 115, 116. Whale-
fishery of the Greenlanders, pp. 121,122.
See above (1765. Cranz, D.) for the first (German) edition. Also the following: [300.]
1767. CRANZ, D. ‘‘ Historie van Groenland. Haarlem (or Amsterdam). 1767. 3 vols.
Son ple 2 maps
Dutch translation of the first German edition. The maps are said to be larger and better
than in the German edition. A later Dutch edition appeared in 1786, q. v.
Not seen; abridged title from a bookseller’s catalogue. [301.]
1767. [KRASHENINNIKOF, 8. P.] Histoire | de | Kamtschatka, | des Isles Kurilski, | et
des contrées voisines, | Publiée & Petersbourg, en Langue Russienne, par |
ordre de Sa Majesté Impériale. | [Par Stepan Petrovitch Krasheninnikof.] Ou
y a joint deux Cartes, l’une de Kamtschatka, & | Vautre des Isles Kurilski. |
ys Traduite par M. E***. [Mare Antoine Eidous.] | Tome premier [et second ].
| [Design.] A Lyon, | Chez Benoit Duplain, Libraire rue | Merciere, 4) Aigle.
| —| M. DCC. LXVII. | Avec Approbation & Privilege du Roi. 2vols. 12°.
Vol. i, ll. 4, pp. i-xv, 1-327, 1 map; vol. ii, ll. 4, pp. 1-359, 1 map.
Manati ou la vache marine, i, pp. 313-325. Baleines, ii, pp. 1-13.
This is merely a retranslation from Grieve, 1764, g.v. See, also, under 1768. [302 ]
1768. ““ADELUNG, Jou. Cur. Geschichte der Schiffahrten und Versuche welche zur
Entdeckung des Nordéstlichen Weges nach Japan und China von verschiede-
nen Nationen unternommen worden. Zum Behufe der Erdbeschreibung und
Naturgeschichte dieser Gegenden entworfen. Halle, bey Joh. J. Gebauer.
1768. 4°. Met 19 gegray. platen en kaarten.”
““Zie aldaar: Geschichte des Spitzbergischen Wallfischfanges. bl. 269-438.”
Not seen; title from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 231, no. 3416. [303.]

1768. ‘‘EBERHARDT, JOH. PET. Versuch eines neuen Entwurfs der Thiergeschichte.
Nebst ein. Anh. yon einigen seltenen u. noch wenig beschrieb. Thieren. Mit 2
Kpfrtaf. 8°. Halle, 1768.”

Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann. [304.]

1768. KRASHENINNIKOF, [S. P.]. Voyage | en Sibérie, | contenant | la Description | du
Kamtchatka, | ou Von trouve | I. Les Meurs & les Coutumes des Habitants
du Kamtchatka. | II. La Géographie du Kamtchatka, & des Pays circonvoi-
sins. | III. Les avantages & les désvantages du Kamtchatka. | IV. La réduc-
tion du Kamtchatka par les Russes, les révoltes arrivées en | différents temps,
& l’état actuel des Forts de la Russie dans ce Pays. | Par M. Kracheninnikow,
Professeur de Académie des Sciences | de Saint Pétersbourg. | Traduit du
Russe. | Tome Seconde. | [Design.] A Paris, | Chez Debure, pere, Libraire,
quai des Augustins, 4 Saint Paul. | — | M. DCC. LXVIII. | Avec Approbation,
& Privilege du Roi. 4°. pp. i-xvi, 1-627, ll. 2, pll. i-xvii, maps i—vi.

‘“*L’Ouvrage que l’on publie aujourd’hui, est dfi a l’esprit éclairé de M. de * * *, & 4 son amour
pour le travail: il l’a traduit 4 Saint Pétersbourg . . . "—Avis de U Editeur, p. x.

Des Vaches marines, pp. 446-454. Dela Baleine, pp. 455-462. 2

A comparison of this work with Grieve’s English translation, and the French translation
from Grieve, shows at a glance that Grieve’s rendering is greatly defective. All the plates
and maps of the original, the editor tells us, are here reproduced, some of them. however,
from new designs. The work forms vol. ii of the Voyage en Siberie of M. VAbbé Chappe
d’Auteroche, published by Debure at Paris in 1768.

\

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 461

1768. KRASHENINNIKOF, [S. P.]—Continued.
Muller refers to a French edition published in two volumes at Amsterdam in 1770 as having
been made directly from the Russian original. Is it other than a reprint of that of l’Abbé
Chappe d’Auteroche? [305.]
1769. [BANcROFT, EDwarpD.] An | Essay | on the | Natural History | of | Guiana, |
In South America. | Containing | A Description of many Curious Productions |
in the Animal and Vegetable Systems | of that Country. | Together with an
Account of | The Religion, Manners, and Customs | of several Tribes of its
Indian Inhabitants. | Interspersed with | A Variety of Literary and Medical
Observations. | In Several Letters | from | A Gentleman [Edward Bancroft]

of the Medical Faculty, | During his Residence in that Country. | — | —Ad res
pulcherrimas ex tenebris ad lucem erutas alieno | labore deducimur. | Seneca,
De brevitate vitae, cap. xiv. | — | London, | Printed for T. Becket and P. A.

De Hondt | in the Strand. MDCCLXIX. §°. 11. 2, pp. i-iv, 1-402,1.1.
Manatee or Sea-Cow, pp. 186-187. Original account. Of this work there is a German edi-
tion of same date (see next title), and also a Dutch translation from the English (Utrecht,
1782, 8°). [306. }
1769. BANcRorT, E. Naturgeschichte | von | Guiana | in | Sad-Amerika. | worinn |
von der nattrlichen Beschaffenheit und den vor- | nehmsten Naturproducten
des Landes, ingleichen der Re- | ligion, Sitten und Gebrauchen verschiedener
Stamme |.der wilden Landes-Einwolmer, Nachricht | ertheilet wird. | — |
In vier Briefen. | Von Eduard Bancroft, Esq. | — | Aus dem Englischen. | — |
Ad res pulcherrimas ex tenebris ad lucem eruras | alieno labore deducimur.

Seneca. | — | Frankfurt und Leipzig, | bey J. Dodsley und Compagnie, 1769.
8°, pp. i-x, 1. 1, pp. 1-248.
Manati oder Meerkuh, pp. 112,113. See last title. [307.]

1769. Fermin, P. Description | générale, historique, | géographique et physique | de
la | Colonie de Surinam, | Contenant | Ce qwil y a de plus Curieux & de plus
Remarquable, tou- | chant sa Situation, ses Rivieres, ses Forteresses; son |
Gouvernement & sa Police; avec les moeurs & les usa- | ges des Habitants
Naturels du Pais, & des Européens | qui y sont établis; ainsi que des Eclair-
cissements sur l’ee- | conomie générale des Esclaves Negres, sur les Planta- |
tions & leurs Produits, les Arbres Fruitiers, les Plan- | tes Médécinales, &
toutes les diverses Especes d’animaux | qu’on y trouve, &c. | Enrichie de Fi-
gures, & d’une Carte | Topographique du Pais. | Par | Philippe Fermin, | Doc-
teur en Médecine. | Tome Premier [et second]. | [Design.] A Amsterdam,

| Chez E. van Harrevelt. | MDCCLXIX. 2vols. 8°. Map and plates. Vol.
i, pp. i-xxiv, 1-252, map; vol. ii, ll. 2, pp. 1-352, pll. 3.

De l’Ichthyologie, ou Description des Poissons, vol. ii, chap. xxii, pp. 248-281. Le Marsouin,
pp. 250, 251,

The second volume of this work is largely zodlogical, but the only passage strictly citable
in the present connection is that above given. In the chapter ‘‘Des Quadrupedes” (vol. ii,
chap. xix, pp. 88-140) are two pages (/. ¢., pp. 122-124) on the ‘‘Veau marin,” in which the
author evidently describes the Common Seal (Phoca vitulina), in which he says: ‘‘Tel est le
Veou Marin, qu’on appelle improprement, dans le pays, Zee-Hond ou Zee-Kou.” This seems
to be a confused reference to the Manatee, or Sea-Cow, and, strangely, the only one in the
work. The author also describes ‘‘Buflles” (1. c., pp. £9, 90) as inhabitants of the country.
These two facts seem to show that the author’s zodlogical matter is not wholly trustworthy,
Yet Sabin cites Rich as saying: ‘One of the best books at the time it was written in regard to
the colonies,” which, doubtless, in other respects, may be true enough, (308. ]

1769. S., J. A. ‘“‘Stradavits Reyse ter Walvis-Vangst, rijmsgewijze beschreyen door
J. A. 8. Chirurgijn op het schip Zaandijker Hoop. Antwerpen, P. J. Parys.
NZGOT §4e%/2

‘Curious and rare.” Not seen; title at second hand. [309.]

1769-92. ‘‘PoRTE, DELA. Denieuwe Reisiger: of Beschryving van de oude en nieuwe
werelt. Uit het Fransch. Te Dordrecht, bij Abr. Blussé en zn. 1769-1792,
32 din. gr. 8°.”

“De walvisch en de walvischvangst, viii, pp. 213-218 enz.”
Not seen; title and reference from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 246, no. 3545. [310.j

462 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1770. CRANZ, Davip. David Cranz | Historie | von | Grénland | enthaltend | Die
Beschreibung des Landes und | der Kinwohner ete. | inbesondere | die | Ge-
schichte | der dortigen | Mission | der | Evangelischen Bruder | zu | Neu-
Herrnhut | und | Lichtenfels. | — | Zweyte Auflage. | — | Mit acht Kupferta-
feln und ein Register. | — | Barby bey Heinrich Detlef Ebers, | und in Leip-
zig | in Commission bey Weidmanns Erben und Reich. | 1770. 3 Theilen. 8°.
Th. i, ll. 19, pp. 5-812.

Von den See-Thieren, Th. i, pp. 140-160. For further remarks in relation to cetological
matter, see orig. ed., 1765, and the English ed. of 1767. |311.]

1770. ‘‘ JANSSEN, Jac. Merkwiirdige Reise, welcher mit dem Schiffe die Frau Elisa-
beth den 7 April nach Grénland auf den Wallfischfang gegangen, ete.
Hamburg, 1770. 4°. Met een plaat.”

‘‘Hiervan een kort Verslag in: Lindeman, Arktische Fischerei, bl. 46-48.”
Not seen; from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 289, no. 3487. [312.]

1770. “JaNssuN, Jac. Verhaal der merkwaardige reize met het schip: de vrouw Ma-
ria Elizabeth, den 7 April 1769, van Hamburg naar Groenland ter walvisch-
vangst uitgezeild, tot den 20 Nov. in het ijs bezet geweest, den 21*e™ dier
maand daaruit geraakt en den 13 Dec. dezzelfden jaars gelukkig weder te
Hamburg aangekomen. Uit het Hoogd. vertaald. Haarlem, 1770. 4°. 24
bladz. Meet eene plaat.”

Not seen; from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 239, no. 3488. Apparently a translation of the work
last above cited. [313.]

1770. ‘‘Prerersz., Fr. Omstandig journaal of reysbeschrijving op het schip ‘De
vrouw Maria,’ gedestineerd ter walvischvangst na Groenland, in den jaare
1769. (Amsterdam), K. van Rijschooten. (1770.) 49°.”

Not seen; title from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 245, no. 3538. [314.]

1770. ““Santx, G. vAN. Alphabetische naamlijst van alle de Groenlandsche en Straat-
Davissche commandeurs, die sedert het jaar 1700 op Groenland en sedert het
jaar 1719, op de Straat Davis voor Holland en andere provincién hebben
gevaren. Waarin men met eenen opslag kan zien, hoeveel visschen, vaten
spek en quardeelen traan yder commandeur uit Groenland en uit de straat
Davis heeft aangebragt en voor wat Directeurs dezelyen hebben gevaren.
Haarlem, J. Enschedé, 1770. Met titelplaat. 4°.”

“Dit exempl. is met de pen bijgewerkt tot het jaar 1802.”

Not seen; title and comment from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 247, no. 3550.

There appears to have been-a much earlier (anonymous?) edition of the ‘‘Naamlijst” (49,
Zaandam, 1753, q. v.).

Scoresby observes that this work, ‘‘notwithstanding the unpromising title, is in reality an
instructive work. It is from it, indeed, that the most interesting details of the success of
the Dutch fishery during a period of more than a century, included between 1669 and 1779,
are derived.”—Aretic Regions, ii, p. 155. [315.]

1771. Forster, J. R. A| Catalogue | of the | Animals | of | North America | Con-
taining, | An Enumeration of the known Quadrupeds, Birds, | Reptiles, Fish,
Insects, Crustaceous and | Testaceous Animals; many of which are New,
and | never described before. | To which are added, | Short Directions | for
Collecting, Preserving, and Transporting, | all Kinds of | Natural History
Curiosities. | By John Reinhold Forster, F. A. 8. | — |... [Motto.] | — | Lon-
don: | Sold by B. White, at Horace’s Head, in Fleet-Street. | — | M.DCC.
LXXI. 8°. pp.43. Frontispiece, pl. of Falco sparverius, Linn.

Classis iv. Fish. Section i. Cetaceous. A nominal list of 9spp., under English names. [316.]

1771. Forster, J. R. See OSBECK, PETER, 1771. (317.]

1771. OsBeck, Peter. A | Voyage | to | China and the East Indies, | By Peter Os-
beck, | Rector of Hasloef and Woxtorp, | Member of the Academy of Stock-
holm, and of the | Society of Upsal. | Together with a Voyage to Suratte, | By
Olof Toreen, | Chaplain of the Gothic Lion East Indiaman. | And | An Ac-
count of the Chinese Husbandry, | By Captain Charles Gustavus Eckeberg. |
Translated from the German, | By John Reinhold Forster, F. A. 8. | To which

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 463

1771. OsBECcK, PrtmrR—Continued.
are added, | A Faunula and Flora Sinensis. | In two Volumes. | Vol. I[-II]. |
London, | Printed for Benjamin White, | at Horace’s Head, in Fleet-street. |
M DCC LXXI.: 8°.
“SNoOwW-WHITE Dolphins (Delphinus Chinensis) tumbled about the ship; but at a distance
they seemed in nothing different from the common species, except in the white colour”
(vol. ii, p. 27).
Under the name Delphinus Orca (vol. i, p. 7) is a quotation from Egede in reference to the
““Northeaper’’! [318.]
1771. [PENNANT, T.] Synopsis | of | Quadrupeds | [By Thomas Pennant.] [Vignette. ]
Chester | Printed by J. Monk | MDCCLXXI. | M. Griffith Del’. R. Murray
Sct. [Engraved title-page.] 6°. pp.i-xxv, 1-382, pl. i-xxxi-+ xiii bis.
The author’s name does not appear on the title-page, but the ‘‘ Preface” is signed ‘‘ Thomas
Pennant, Downing, March 20, 1771.”
Manati, pp. 351-358. A general account of the Sirenians as then known, which were thought
to constitute a single species. Pennant’s references are here, however, mainly to Steller’s Sea-
Cow and the American Manatee. There is also reference to the ‘‘Sea Ape” and the “Beluga,”
the account of which, as here given, is a curious mixture of truth and fiction. (319.]
1771. RoBERTSON, J. Description of the blunt-headed Cachalot. < Philos. Trans.
Lond., 1x, art. xxvii, 1771, pp. 321-324, 1 pl.
The salsite represents the animal, the head, mad the head in transverse section of “* Physeter
Catodon Linnaei”’ = Physeter macrocephalus. [320.]
1771. ‘“TRAMPLER, J.C. Umstiindliche Beschreibung des Groénliindischen Walfisch-
fanges, ingleichen von den Ursachen und Eigenschaften des Nordlichts. Leip-
zic, Miller, 1771. 8°.”
Not seen; title from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 248, no. 3570. [321.]
1773. BONANNIO, P. P. Rervm Natvralivm | Historia | nempe | Qvadrvpedvm Insec-
torym Piscivm variorumqve marinorvm | Corporvm fossilivm Plantarvm exo-
ticarvm | ac praesertim | Testaceorvm | exsistentivm | in Mvseo Kircheriano |
edita iam | A P. Philippo Bonannio | nvne vero nova methodo distribvta notis
illvstrata | in tabvlis reformata novisqve observationibvs locvpletata | a
Johanne Antonio Battarra Ariminiensi | Philosophiae Professore. | Pars Prima
[et Segvnda] | [Vignette.] Romae MDCCLXXIII. | In typographio Zempelli-
ano | Aere Venantii Monaldini Bibliopolae. | — | Praesidvm Facvltate. 2°.
pp. i-xl, 1-260, pll. i-xlvii.
Piscis generis Cetacei, quem Capodoglio Itali appellant [= Physeter macrocephalus], i, pp.
157, 158, pl. xxxviii, figg. 34 (anim.), 35 (mand. infer.), 36 (vertebra). Description, with
measurements, and an original figure of a Cachalot 48 feet long, taken in the Mediterranean
18 April, 1715. [322.]
1773. MULLER, P.L.S. Des | Ritters Carl von Linné | Kéniglich Schwedischen, Leib-
arztes etc. ete. | vollstindiges | Natursystem | nach der | zwolften lateinischen
Ausgabe | und nach Anleitung | des hollandischen Houttuynischen Werks |
ig
Statius Muller | Prof. der Naturgeschichte zu Erlang und Mitglied der Rom.
Kais. | Akademie der Naturforscher ete. | Erster Theil. | Von den | siugen- |
den Thieren. | — | Mit 32. Kupfern. | — | Nurnberg, | bey Gabriel Nicolaus
Raspe, 1773. 8°. Il. 11, pp. 1-508, ll. 7, pll. i-xxxii.
II. Ordnung. Bruta.> Trichecus Manatus, pp. 174-176. Tab. xxix, fig. 3.
VII. Ordnung. Wallfischartige oder sAugende Seethiere. Cete. 1. Monodon Monoceros,
p. 477; 2. Balena Mysticetus, p. 481; 3. Balena Physalus, p. 491; 4. Balena Boops, p. 492;
5. Balena Musculus, p. 492; 6. Physeter Katodon, p. 497; 7%. Physeter Macrocephalus, p.
498; 8. Physeter Microps, p. 501; 9. Physeter Tursio, p. 503; 10. Delphinus Phocena, p. 504;
U4. Delphinus Delphis, p. 505; 12. Delphinus Orca, p. 506. Auch der Pflockfisch, p. 493;
der Knotenfisch, p. 493; der Nordkaper, p. 494; der Sabelfisch (Epée de Mer), p. 507; der
Morder (Killer), p. 507; der Blaser (Souffleur), p. 508. [323.]
1773. Piscator, Luprrtus. ‘Brief van Lubertus Piscator over de visscherij, die bij
een loterij vergeleken wordt.—Oorzaaken van derzelver afneemen.—W eder-
legging.—Middelen ter verbetering op de Walvischvangst.”
“Zie: De Koopman of bijdr. ter opbouw van Neérlands koophandel en zeevaard. Amst.;
1773, iv. No. 5, 12, 13, 25, 26.”
Not seen; from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 250, no. 3588. [324.]

464 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1773. SIBBALD, ROBERT. Phalainologia nova; | sive | Observationes | de | rarioribus
quibusdam Balznis | In Scotie Littus nuper ejectis: | in quibus, | nuper con-
spectze Baleenie per Genera & | Species, secundum Characteres ab ipsa | Natura
impressos, distribuuntur; | quedam nune primum describuntur; errores
etiam | cirea descriptas deteguntur; & breves de Dentium, | Spermatis Ceti,
& Ambre Grisex ortu, natura & | usu, dissertationes traduntur. | [By Sir
Robert Sibbald. Edited by Thomas Pennant. | — |

Mirac’lum ponti narrant ingentia Cete |
Viribus invictis, & vasta mole moventur. |
In littus pauca exiliunt, que corpore vasto |
Sunt.— | Oppianus de Pisce. lib. I. | — |

Edinburgi, | Typis Joannis Redi, M DC XCII. | Veneunt apud M. Ro-
bertum Edward, verbi divini ministrum, in | vico dicto, The Bishop’s Land
Closs. | Iterum impressi, Londini, | Apud Benj. White, in Vico Fleet-Street.
MDCCLXXIII. 8°. Ul. 2, p. 1-105, tabb. 1-3.

Observationes de Balznis quibusdam in Scotiz Littus nuper ejectis. Prefatio. De Balznis
in Genere, pp. 7-14. Sectio prima. De Balznis, quae Dentes in Ore habent, minoribus.
Preefatio de Dentatis in Genere, pp. 15-17. Caputi. De Balenis Minoribus in utraque Ma-
xill4 Dentatis, quae Orez vocantur, pp. 17-24. Caput ii. De Balenis Minoribus in Inferiore
Maxill4 tantum Dentatis, sine Pinn4 aut Spind in Dorso, pp. 24, 25. Caput iii. De Baleenis
omnium Minimis, incertz Classis, pp. 25, 26. Sectio secunda. De Balznis Majoribus, in Infe-
riore Maxill4 tantum Dentatis. Prfatio de hujusmodi Balenis in genere, pp. 27-30. Caput
i. De Baleena Macrocephald que Binas tantum Pinnas Laterales habet, pp. 30-33. Caput ii.
De Balend Macrocephala, que Tertiam in Dorso Pinnam sive Spinam habet, & dentes in Ma-
xilla inferiore Arcuatos Falciformis, pp. 33-43. Caputiii. De Balzena Macrocephala Tripinni,
qu in mandibuld inferiore dentes habet minus inflexos, & in planum desinentes, pp. 43-45.
Caput iv. De Spermate Ceti, pp. 45-52. Caputv. De oleo quod ex his Belluis paratur, pp.
52-54. Caput vi. De Dentibus harum Balenarum, pp. 54-57. Sectio iii. De Balenis Majori-
bus Laminas Corneas in Superiore Maxilla habentibus. Praefatio. De hujusmodi Belluis in
genere, pp. 58-64. Caputi. De Balenis hujusmodi Bipinnibus, tam que carent fistul4, quam
que eam habent, pp. 64-66. Caput ii. De Balenis Tripinnibus, que nares habent, in genere,
pp. 67-68. Caput iii. De Balendé hujusmodi Tripinni que rostrum acutum habet, & plicas in
Ventre, pp. 68-78. Caput iv. De Baleend Tripinni que maxillam infcriorem rotundam, & su-
periore multo latiorem habuit, pp. 78-84. Caputv. De Balena hujusmodi pregrandi in littus
Boénee nuper ejecta, pp. 84, 85. Caput vi. De laminis corneis, de plicis, & de oleo hujusmodi
Belluarum, pp. 85-93. Appendix. De iis que Balenis communia sunt. Prafatio, pp. 94, 95.
Caput i. De Pinguedine Balenarum, p. 96. Caput ii. De Carne harum Belluarum, p. 97.
Caput iii. De Balenarum priapo, p. 97. Caput iv. De Ambra Grised, pp. 98-104. Caput
ultimum. De tempore quo Balene maxime conspiciuntur, pp. 104, 105.

Tab. 1. Balzena Macrocephala. Balzna cum laminis corneis in ore. Vertebre caude, etc.

Tab. 2. Lamina cornea cum pilis. Dens Orc. Dens Baleenz Macrocephale Orcadensis.
Dens Macrocephale falciformis, etc.

Tab. 3. Balwna tripinnis maxilla inferiore rotunda.

Plate i, upper figure, is a very faulty representation of Physeter macrocephalus, the blow-
hole being at the posterior part of the head and the upper jaw rather small and pointed.
Plate i, lower figure, is a better representation of a Finner Whale, probably Dalenoptera ros-
trata. Plate ii, fig. of a blade of baleen of a Finner whale, of a much worn tooth, and a young
tooth of Physeter macrocephalus, ete. Plate iii, probably Physalus antiquorum.

The editio princeps of Sibbald’s ‘‘Phalainologia” (which I have been unable to see) ap-
peared in 1692 (4°, Edinburgh). The early systematists trusted implicitly in Sibbald, who
unfortunately described different examples of the common Cachalot as different species,
resulting in the introduction into systematic zodlogy of several nominal species, which were ~
not effectually weeded out till comparatively late in the present century. The confusion
resulting from Sibbald’s work may be considered as more than balancing the much really
new information he contributed to the subject. This is perhaps less his fault than that of
later compilers, who knew too little of the subject of which he wrote to have any power of _
discrimination, or even, in some cases, to understand the author whom they blindly followed.
(Of. Eschricht, ‘‘Recent Memoirs on the Cetacea,” Ray Soc., 1866, pp. 161-163.) [325.]

1774. ANON. The | Journal of a Voyage | undertaken by order of | His present Ma-
jesty, | For making Discoveries towards the | North Pole, | by the | Hon.
Commodore Phipps, | and | Captain Lutwidge, | in His | Majesty’s Sloops |
Racehorse and Carcase. | To which is prefixed, | An Account of the several

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 465

1774. ANoN.—Continued.
Voyages undertaken for | the Discovery of a North-east Passage to China |
and Japan. |— | London: | Printed for F. Newbery, at the Corner of St.
Paul’s | Church Yard. | — | MDCCLXXIV. 8. 1. 1, pp. i-xxviii, 29-113.
The author’s name is not given, but the work was apparently written by an officer of the
expedition. .
Smearingburgh harbour [Spitzbergen], p. 45. ‘A View of the Whale-fishery,” pl. facing p.
81. There are, however, only a few incidental and unimportant allusions to the Whale-
fishery in the text. [326.]
1774. ‘‘HooGErDUIN, Dirk Cornewissr. Singulieren of byzonderen Historién
wegens het verongelukken van het Groenlands Schip, de jufvrouwen Anna
Cornelia en Anna, waarop commandeerde D. C. Hoogerduin van de Helder,
gedestineerd na Groenland ter Wallevisvangst, met 45 zielen uit Texel gevaeren ;
in het gepasseerde jaer 1773 op den 8 April en naeen fatigante Rys te hebben
gehad, hetzelve schip op de te Huisrys, na alvorens duizende van gevaere te
hebbe ondergaen, eindelijk met drie sloepen op den 21 Aug. deszelfs jaers op
Egmond gestrand, waervan 29 man op een wonderbaerlijke wys het leven
hebben behouden en de rest verdronken; vervult met zeltzame en byna nooit
gehoorde gevallen. Amsterdam, W. A. Leeuwendaal. 1774. 4°.”
Not seen; from Bosgoed, op cit., p. 238, no. 3479. 5 [327.]
1774. Htrscu, Baron von. Beschreibung einiger neuentdeckten versteinten Theile
grosser Seethiere. < Der Naturforscher, iii, 1774, pp. 178-183. i
Ueber Gehirknocben und andere Knochen der Seekuh und einige Knochen yon Walfischen
bei Antwerpen entdeckt. ; [328.]
1774, ObxMELIN, A. O. [= EXQurMELIN, A. O.] Histoire | des | Adventuriers | Fli-
bustiers | qui se sont signalés dans les Indes; | Contenant ce qu’ils y ont fait
de remarquable, | avec la vie, les meeurs & les coutumes des Bou- | caniers,
& des habitans de S. Domingue & de | la Tortué; une description exacte de
ces lieux, | & un état des Offices, tant Ecclésiastiques que | Séculiers, & ce
gue les grands Princes de | ’Europe y possédent. | Par Alexandre-Olivier
Oexmelin. | Nouvelle Edition, | Corrigée & augmentée de l’Histoire des Pi- |
rates Anglois, depuis leur établissement dans | V’Isle de la Providence jusqu’a
present. | Tome Premier[-Quatriéme]. | [Design.] A Lyon, | Chez Benoit &
Joseph Duplain, | Pere & Fils. | — | Avec Privilege du Roi. | M. DCC. LXXIV.
A4Avols. 12°. Vol. i, ll. 6, pp. 1-394, 1.1. iis

Anatomie du Lamentin, i, pp. 372-376.
This edition is textually the same as that of 1744, qg. v., and appears to be identical with

that given by Sabin as published in 1775. [329.]
1774. Putrrs, C.J. A | Voyage | towards | the North Pole | undertaken | by His
Majesty’s Command | 1773 | — | By Constantine John Phipps | — | London;

Printed by W. Bowyer and J. Nichols, | for J. Nourse, Bookseller to His Ma-
jesty, | in the Strand. | MDCCLXXIV. 4°. pp. i-viii, 1-253, 1. 1, pll. i-xiv.
Mammalia, App., pp. 183-186.—Balena mysticetus, p. 185; Balena physalus, p. 184. There
is a short account of Smeerenberg, pp. 68,69. The cetological matter is unimportant.
There is a French translation (Paris, 4°, 1775, g. v.), and a German (Berne, 4°, 1777,

q- v.). [330.]
1774, ‘““WisBo, J. CANzius. Dissertatio de balaenarum piscatu. Lugd. Bat. 1774. 4°.”
Not seen; title from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 253, no. 3609. (331.]

1774-75. OLAFSsEN, EGGERT. Des | Bice-Lamands Eggert Olafsens | nnd des | Land-
physici Biarne Povelsens | Reise durch Island, | veranstaltet | von der Kénig-
lichen Societit der Wissenschaften | in Kopenhagen | und beschrieben | von

bemeldtem Eggert Olafsen. | — | Aus dem Danischen tibersetzt. | — | Mit 25
Kupfertafeln und einer neuen Charte fiber Island | versehen. | — | Erster
Theil. | — | Kopenhagen und Leipzig, | bey Heinecke und Faber. | 1774. 4°,

Erster Theil, ll. 8, pp. 1-328, pll. i-xxv, und Charte; zweiter Theil, 1775,
pp. i-xvi, 1-244, pll. xxvi-l.

Wallfische, Th. i, p. 35, §90; Vom Wallfische, Th. i, pp. 287-291, §§ 657-663; Wallfische,
Th. ii, p. 200, § 895. (332.]

30 GB

466 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

775. Puipps, C. J. Voyage | au Pole Boréal, | fait en 1773, | par ordre du Roi d’An-
gleterre, | par Constantin-Jean Phipps. | Traduit de Anglois. | [Design.] A

Paris, | : ,
Chez§ Saillant & Nyon, rue Saint Jean de Beauvais.
Pissot, Quai des Augustins, pres la rue Git-le-Ceur. |
— | M.DCC. LXXYV. | Avec Apprebation et Privilége du Roi. 4°. pp. i-xij,
1-257, 1. 1, pl. and maps.
Mammiféres du Spitsberg, pp. 187-190.—Balena mysticetus, Baleena physalus, p.190. [333.]

1775, [STAUNING, JORGEN.] Kort | Beskrivelse | over | Gronland. | [Af Jorgen Stau-

ning. ] | [Vignette.] — | Biborg, 1775. | Trykt udi det Kongelige privilegerede
Bogtrykkerie | ved C. H. Mangor. 8°. ll. 7, pp. 1-328, 1. 1.

Fierde Kapitel, Om See Dyrene, pp. 121-140, contains an account of the Cetacea. 1. Gron-
landske Hyaltisk, pp. 124-129 = Balena mysticetus; 2. Nordkapper, et Slags Hval, p. 129
=? B. biscayensis; 3. Fintisken, p. 129=Physalus antiquorum; 4. Jupiterfisk eller rettere
Gurbartas eller Gibbar, p. 130 = Balenoptera jubartes et gibbar, Lecépéde, etc., hence prob-
ably Physalus antiquorum; 5. Flogtisk, p.130=Megaptera longimana; 6. Knudefisk, p. 130
=? Balenoptera rostrata; ‘7. Eenhioerning eller Narhval, Monoceros, p. 131; 8. Snabelfisk,
p. 132=? [af Grenlenderne kaldes den Sigukitsok; ef. Fabricius, Faun. Groenl., p. 52]; 9.
Kaschelot eller Potfisk, p. 133 = Physeter macrocephalus ; 10. Hvidfisk, p.134—=? Beluga catc-
don; 11. Butskopper, p. 135 =? Orea gladiator; 12. Marsviin, p. 186 —Phocena communis ;
13. Delphin, p. 137 = Delphinus delphis; 14. Sveerdfisk, p. 137 = Orca gladiator. [334.]

11775. VALMONT DE BOMARE. Baleine, balena. <Dict. rais. universel d’ Histoire nat.,
i, 1775, pp. 438-463 (8° éd., 1775).

‘On ne s’attachera ici, suivant le plan qu’on s’est proposé, qu’a jeter un coup d’ceil général
sur les especes de baleines les plus curieuse, & sur celles dont on retire Je plus d’utilité. On
ne peut rien faire de mieux que de parler d’aprés le curieux Anderson, ainsi que Vont fait
tous ceux qui, depuis lui, ont traité des baleines”’ (pp. 438-489). The Baleines are termed
“faux poisson de mer.” f

General history, under vernacular names, of the species then known. Baleine de Groén-
land, pp. 441-446; Licorne de mer, ou Narhwal, pp. 446-448; Cachalot, ou la petite Baleine,
pp. 448-452; Péche des Baleines, pp. 455-456; Ennemis des Baleines, p. 456; Epée de mer de
Groénland, ou Poisson Empereur, p. 457; Espadon ou Poisson a scie, p. 458; Marsouin ou
Souffleur, p. 459; Dauphin, p. 460; Autres especes de Baleines, p. 462.

Note.—The Sirenia are treated in the article ‘‘ Vache marine,” tom. ix, p. 178, the Dugong
being the only species recognized, under which is included the African Manatee as well as
the American Manatee. ‘Le dugon est une fausse espece de morse de la mer de l'Afrique &
des Indes Orientales....”

There is an earlier (1764) ed. of Bomare not seen by me. [335.]
1776. ANON. Péche de la Baleine. <(Suppl. a VEncycel. ow Dict. rais. des Sci. 5 des Arts
et des Métiers, i, 1776, pp. 763, 764. [336.]

1776. [FABRICIUS, O.] <Miilleri Zoologie Danice Prodromus, 1776, pp. viii, ix.

Cetacea, p. viii, Balena Boops (—Icelandic, Hrafu-Reydur; Greenlandic, Keporkak) ;
Physeter tursio (= Balena albicans, Klein; Greenlandic, Pernak).

“Sequentia animalia, que impressis jam primis libelli paginis, suppeditabat venerabilis
Otho Fabricius,” ete., p. viii. [337.]

1776. MULLER, O. F. Zoologiz Danicze | Prodromus, | seu | Animalium | Danie et —
Norvegie indigenarum | characteres, nomina, | et | synonyma imprimis popu-
larinm. | Auctore | Othone Friderico Miiller, |. . . [=titles, 3 lines]. — | Im-
pensis Auctoris. | — | Havnie, | Typis Hallageriis. | Clo DCC LXXVI. &.
pp. i-xxxii, 1-282.

Cete, pp. 6-8, spp. 44-57 =14 spp. 1. Monodon Monoceros, p. 6: 2. Baleena Mysticetus, p. 6;
3. B. Physalus, p.7; 4. B. Musculus, p.7: 5. B. rostrata, p.7; 6. B. glacialis, p.7; 7 B. al-
bicans, p.7; S-» Physeter Catodon, p.7; 9. Ph. macrocephalus, p.7; 10. Ph. microps, p. 7; —
11. Delphinus Phocena, p.7; 1:2. D. Delphis, p.7; 13. D. Orca, p.8; 14. D. Orca [*]. [338.]

1776. [PENNANT, THOMAS.] British Zoology. | Vol. III. | Class III, Reptiles. | IV,
Fish. | — | Warrington: | Printed by William Eyres, | for Benjamin White,
at Horace’s Head, | Fleet-Street, London. | MDCCLXXYI. 8°. 11.4, pp.1-
-425, 11.3, pl. i-xii, xii?-lxxiii.

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 467

1776. [PENNaNT, THoMAS]—Continued.

1776.

Div. i. Cetaceous Fish = Cetacea, pp. 47-74, spp. 16-26=11 spp. 1. Common Whale, p. 50=
Balena mysticetus; 2. Pike-headed Whale, p. 56=? Physalus antiquorum ; $. Fin Fish, p. 57
=? Physalus antiquorum; 4. Round-lipped Whale, p. 58=? Physalus antiquorum; 5.
Beaked Whale, p. 59, pl. v, fig. 1—= Hyperoodon bidens; 6. Blunt-headed Cachalot, p. 61, pl. vi,
animal from Robertson= Physeter macrocephalus ; '7. Round-headed Cachalot, p. 63, pl. vii,
fig. 22, tooth; 8. High-finned Cachalot, p. 63 = Physeter macrocephalus ; 9. Dolphin, p. 65—=
Delphinus delphis ; 10. Porpesse, p. 69= Phocena communis; 11. Grampus, p.72— Orca
gladiator.

The references to the plates in the text do not correspond with the numeration on the
plates. (339.]
. “Artikler hvorefter Commendeurerne og Mandskabet paa Skibene, der
udsendes for den Gronlandske Handel og Fiskefangst, skulle rette sig (1776).
(Reglementen waarnaar de Kommandeurs zich te gedragen hebben. )”

Not seen; title from Bosgoed, J. ¢., p. 232, no. 3421. [340.]

1777. ERXLEBEN, J. C. P. Jo[hannus]. Christ[ianus]. Polyc[arpus]. Erxleben |

... [=titles, 5 lines] | Systema | Regni Animalis | per | Classes, Ordines, Ge-
nera, | Species, Varietates | cvm | Synonymia et Historia Animalivm. | — |
Classis I | Mammalia. | [Vignette.] |— | Lipsie | Impensis | Weygandia-
nis. | MDCCLXXVII. 8°. pp. i-xlviii, 1-636, 11.32, unpaged. Preface dated
Goettingae, mense Nouembri, CIoIg9CCLXXVI= 1776.

Collation: Dedicatio ad Georgio III, pp. iii-vi; Praefatio, pp. vii-x; Catalogus volumi-
num eorumque editionem quibus vsus sum, pp. Xi-xxviil; Synopses et diagnoses generum, pp.
xxix-xlviii; Species, pp. 1-628; Additamenta, pp. 629-631; Nomina Hvngarica mammalivm,
pp. 632-636; Index generum,1 p.+3 ll. unnumbered; Index synonymorvm, 28 ll. unpaged;
Index synonymorvm Graecorvm, et Index synonymorvm Ryssicorym, 3 ll. unpaged;
Errata, 1 p.

Trichechus (= Sirenia+ Walruses), pp. 593-600. 1. T. Rosmarus, pp. 5938-596; 2. T. Mana-
tus, pp. 596-599 (=genn. Manatus et Rhytina); 3. T. Dugung, p. 599. Species obscure
(=Bieluga, Steller, et Sea Ape, Pennant= sp. fict.), pp. 599, 600.

| Cetacea], pp. 601-628; genera 48-51—4; spp. 13, towit: 1. Balena Mysticetus, pp. 601-605;
2. B. Physalus, 605-607; 3. B. Boops, pp. 608, 609; 4. B. Musculus, pp. 609, 610; 5. B. gib-
bosa, pp. 610, 611; Species obscura, p. 611; 6. Physeter Catodon, pp. 611, 612; '7. P. macrocepha-
lus, pp. 612-614; S. P. microps, pp. 614, 615; 9. P. Tursio, pp. 615, 616; Species obscure (=
Beluga catodon ; Physeter macrocephalus = Spermaceti Whale of Dudley ; Anderson’s Second
species of Cachalot— Physeter macrocephalus), pp. 616, 618; 10. Delphinus Phocena, pp.
618-621; A. D. Delphis, pp. 624-623; 12. D. Orca, pp. 623-626; 13. Monodon Monoceros,
pp. 626-628.

Balena gibbosa, p. 610, sp. n.; not Serag Whale, Dudley, as usually stated, which is one
of the ‘‘Species obscure” not formally recognized, although some of the synonyms cited
under B. gibbosa may cover Dudley's Scrag Whale, which Erxleben cites (or the species based

on it) at p. 607, at the end of his account of his Balena physalus.

The author very justly observes: ‘“‘Cetorum species pauciores recte cognitae: videtur
horum historia denuo fere inchoanda” (p. 601). His treatment of the subject is judicious,
being superior, perhaps, to that of any other systematist of the eighteenth century. While
still retaining a few species proved later to be merely nominal, he relegated to the list of
“Species obscurz”’ several which had been currently recognized by previous compilers. [341.]

1777. ‘HERMANN, JOA. Tabula affinitatum animalium; brevi commentario illus-

trata. 4°. Argentorati, 1777.”
Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann. [342.]

1777. Purers, C. J. Reise | nach dem Nordpol. | Auf Befehl Ihro Kénigl. Grossbrit-

tannischen Majestit. | Unternommen im Jahr 1773. | Von C. J. Phipps, | aus
dem Englischen, | Mit | Zusétzen und Anmerkungen von Herrn Landvogt
[Samuel] Engel. | — | Mit Kupfern. | — | [Design.] Bern, | — | bey der typo-
graphischen Gesellschaft 1777. | 4°. 11.3, pp. i-x; 1.1, pp. 1-122; ll. 2, pp. 1-304;
1.1, maps and pll.

Mammalia [of Spitzbergen], pp. 95-97. 1. Balena mysticetus; 2. Balena physalus,
p. 97. (343.]

1777. Scorpout, J. A. Ioannis Ant. Scopoli | Philos. et Med. Doct. Caesareae Regiae-

qve | Maiestatis a consiliis in rebvs metallicis, | chemiae ac botanices Profes-
soris in | regio archigymnasio Ticinensi &c. | Introdvctio | ad | Historiam |
Natvralem | sistens | genera | Lapidvm, Plantarvm, | et | Animalivm | hac-

468 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1777. Scopout, J. A.—Continued.
tenvs detecta, | caracteribvs essentialibvs donata, | in tribvs divisa, | svbinde
ad leges natvrae. | [Vignette.]|— | Sur un plan nouveau, toutes connois-
sances anciennes | & nouvelles. Adanson. | — | Pragae | Apvd Wolfgangvm
Gerle, Bibliopolam. | MDCCLXXVII. 8°. 11.5, pp. 1-506, 11. 17.

Tribus xii, Kleinii (Mammalia). Gens i, Cetacea, p. 486, [genera] 428-431, viz: Balena
(=Wysticete auct. mod.), Physeter, Monodon, Delphinvs. Gens ii. Quadrvpedia. Divisio i,
Aqvatilia.—[Genus] 432. Manatvs, Rondelet, p. 490. [344.]

1778. ANon. “Echt historisch Verhaal zo uit de mond als pen, van drie zeelieden,
wegens het verongelukken van het schip, de Wilhelmina van de Helder, al-
sook de noodlottige en droevige ongelukken van nog negen andere schepen,
dewelke alle verongelukt zijn in Groenland, door de bezetting van het West-
ijs, in den jare 1777. Amsterdam, 1778. 4°. 36 bladz.”

Bosgoed, from whose work (op. cit., p. 249, no. 3575) the above title is taken, states that a
German translation appeared at Bremen in 1779, of which Lindeman gives an abstract in his
“ Arktische Fischerei,” pp. 37-46. See1778. ANON. [345.]

1778. CZENPINSKI, P. DE. Pauli de Czenpinski, | Nobilis Poloni Varsoviensis. | Dis-
sertatio | inauguralis | Zoologico-Medica, | sistens | totius Regni Animalis |
Genera, | in Classes et Ordines Linnzana | Methodo digesta, | Preefixa cuilibet

classiterminorum | explicatione. | [Vignette.]— | Vienne, | typisJoan Thom,
nob. de Trattnern, | Sac. Ces. Reg. Maj. Typog. et Bibl. | — | 1778. 8°. 11.4,
pp. 1-122, 1.1.
i. Cete, p. 114. Genera 1. Monodon; 2. Delphinus; 3. Physeter; 4. Balena. [346.]
1778. FERBER, —. [‘‘Bereitung des Wallraths.”] < Neue Beytrdge zur Mineralge-
schichte, i, 1778, p. 366.
Not seen; reference from Donndorff, Zool. Beytr., i, 1792, p. 777. [347.]

1778. ‘‘ JANSEN, MARTEN. Kort, doch echt verhael wegens het verongelukken van
zyn schip, genaemt: het Witte paard, en nog negen andere schepen, dewelke
alle verongelukt zijn in Groenlandt ten jaere 1777. Waarby nog copia van
een brief van commandeur Hidde Dirks Kat, aan zijn huisvrouw, geschreven
uit straat Davis. Amsterdam, Nic. Bijl. 1778. 4°. 18 bladz,”’

‘‘Hene andere uitgave, Leeuwarden, 1778. 4°. 23 bladz.”

Not seen; from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 239, no. 3486. [348.]

1778. [ROreR, JiRGEN.] ‘‘Wahrhafte Nachricht von den im Jahre 1777, auf den
Walfischfang nach Grénland aufgegangenen und daselbst verungliickten fiinf
Hamburger Schiffen gezogen aus dem Journal des Kiipers Jiirgen Roper, auf
dem Schiffe genannt Sara Cecilia, Kommandeur Hans Pieters. Altona, 1778.”

‘Lindeman geeft in zijne ‘Arktische Fischerei,’ bl. 49, een uittreksel van dit Journaal.”

Not seen; title and comment from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 251, no. 3596. [349.]

1778-83. ZIMMERMANN, E. A.W. Geographische | Geschichte | des Menschen, | und
der | allgemein verbreiteten vierfiissigen Thiere, | nebst einer hieher gehori-
gen | zoologischen Weltcharte, | von | E[berhard]. A[ugust]. W[ilhelm).
Zimmermann, | Professor am Kollegio Karolino zu Braunschweig. | — | Erster
Band. [Vignette.] — | Leipzig, | in der Weygandschen Buchhandlung | 1778.
8°, ll. 8, pp. 1-308. Mit ein Chart. Tabvla Mvndi | Geographico Zoologica |
sistens | Qvadrvpedes | hucusque notos sedibus suis adscriptos | edidit |
BE. A. W. Zimmermann. | Aug. Wilh. Knoch delineavit.

Achtzehnter Abschnitt. Der Manate, pp. 253-255.

[Zweiter Band.] Geographische | Geschichte | des Menschen, | und | der
vierfiissigen Thiere. | — | Zweiter Band. Enthilt ein vollstandiges Verzeich-
niss aller | bekannten Quadrupeden, | von | E. A. W. Zimmermann, | Professor
der Mathematik und Naturlehre am Kollegio Karolino | zu Braunschweig. |
| Vignette. ] — | Leipzig, | in der Weygandschen Buchhandlung. | 1780 8°.
ll. 4, pp. 1-482.

XLIII. Geschlecht. Das Walross, Trichechus. Enthalt das Wallross (T. Rosmarus), und der

Dugong (T. Dugung). XLIV. Geschlecht. Der Manate. Enthalt Der Manati von Kamt-
schatka (Manati gigas), und der kleinere Manati (Tvichechus Manatus, Linn.).

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 469

1778-83. ZIMMERMANN, E, A. W.—Continued.

1779,

1779.

1779.

1779.

1780.

[Dritter Band.] Geographische | Geschichte | des Menschen, | und der |
allgemein verbreiteten vierfussigen Thiere, | — | mit einer hiezu gehorigen
zoologischen. Weltcharte, | — | von | E. A. W. Zimmermann, | Professor der
Mathematik und Physik in Braunschweig und Mitglied | verschiedener ge-
lehrten Gesellschaften. | — | Dritter Band. | — | Leipzig, | in der Weygand-
schen Buchhandlung | 1783. 8°. Il. 5, pp. 1-278. [350.]
ANoN. ‘‘Historisch wahre Nachricht von dem Eland-und Drangsalen des im
Jahre 1777 auf den Walfischfang nach Grénland abgefahrenen, verungliickten
Schiffes ‘‘Wilhelmina” unter dem Commandeur Jakob Henrich Broertjes, aus
dem Hollindischen Tagebuch und miindlicher Erzihlung der drei Matrosen
Harm Henrich Kréger, Harm Henrich Kréger der Sohn, beide von Altenesch
im Delmenbhorstischen, und Kasten Kiilke aus Lessum, eine Meile von Bre-
men,—iibersetzt. Bremen, George Ludwig Forster. 1779.”

Not seen; title from Lindeman, Arktische Fischerei, 1869, p. 37. A German translation of
the Dutch ‘‘Echte historisch Verhael,” etc., 1778, q. v. [351.]

CuEMNIZ, T.H. Von der balaena rostrata oder dem Schnabelfische. < Beschaft.
d. Berlinischen Gesellsch. Naturf. Freunde, iv, 1779, pp. 183-189.
Hyperoodon rostrata. (352. ]
“GRAUMANN, PETR. BENED. CHSTI. Brevis introductio in historiam naturalem
animalium mammalium in usum auditorum, cui accedit nomenclatura omnium
hujus classis civium, una cum charactere generico et specifico, denominatione
germanica ac designatione iconum. 8°. Rostochii, 1779. pp. 90.”
Notseen; titlefromCarusand Engelmann. Cited by Donndorff, Zool. Beytr., i, 1792. [353.]
“WisgLkEs, R. Merkwaardig verhaal van Reinier Hijlkes als matroos, met het
schip: de hopende Visser, commandeur Volkert Jansz. ten jare 1777 na Groen-
land uitgevaren op de walvisvangst en aldaar met 9 andere schepen veronge-
lukt. Amsterdam. 1779. 4°. 11 bladz.”
Not seen; from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 239, no. 3484. [354.]
CLAVIGERO, F.S. Storia antica | del Messico | cavata da’ migliori storici Spa-
gnuoli, | eda’ manoscritti, e dalle pitture antiche deg) Indiani: | Divisi in dieci
Libri, | e corredata di carte geografiche, | e di varie figure: | e | Disserta-
zioni | Sulla Terra, sug]i Animali, e sugli abitatori del Messico. | Opera | dell

Abate | D. Francesco Saverio | Clavigero | — | Tomo I[-IV.] | — | [Design.]
In Cesena MDCCLXXX. | — | Per Gregorio Biasni all’ Insegna di Pallade |

Con Licenza de’ Superiori. 4°, 4 vols. Vol. i, pp. i-viii, 1-302, map, pll.;
vol. ii, pp. 1-276; vol. iii, pp. 1-260; vol. iv, pp. 1-331.
I] Manatio sia Lamentino, vol.i, pp. 100,101. See Cullen’s English transl. under 1787. [355.]

1780. FaBricius, O. Favna | Groenlandica, | systematice sistens | Animalia Groen-

landiae occiden- | talis hactenvs indagata, yvoad nomen | specificvm, triviale,
vernacvlymqve; synonyma avcto- | rvm plvrivm, descriptionem, locvm, vic-
tvm, genera- | tionvm, mores, vsym, captvramqve singyvli, provt | detegendi
occasio fyit, maximaqve parte secvn- | dvym proprias observationes | Othonis
Fabricii | Ministri Evangelii, qvondam Groen- | landis ad Coloniam Friderichs-
haab, posthac Norvagis | Drangedaliew, nvne vero Danis hopvnti ivtiae,
Mem- | bri Societatis Scientiarvm qvae est Hafniae. | [Vignette. ]— | Hafniae
et Lipsiae, | Impensis Ioanis Gottlob Rothe, | avlae atqve vnivers. Reg. Bib-
liopolae. | MDCCLXXX. 8°. pp. i-xvi, 1-452, pl. 1.

Cetacea, pp. 29-52, spp. 18-32, to wit: 1. Monodon Monoceros, p. 29; 2. Monodon Spvrivs,
p. 31 = Hyperoodon rostratus; 3. Balaena Mysticctvs, p. 32; 4. Balaena Physalvs, p. 35 =
Physalus antiquorum ; 5. Balaena Boops, p.86=? Physalus antiquorum ; 6. Balaena mvscvlvs,
p. 39= B. biscayensis ; 7. Balaena rostrata, p. 40—Balenoptera rostrata; S. Physeter macro-
cephalus, p. 41; 9. Physeter Catodon, p. 44 = Physeter tursio, L.; 10. Physeter microps, p. 44;
Li. Delphinvs Orca, p.46—= Orca gladiator; 12. Delphinvs Phocaena, p. 46 = Phoceena com-
munis; 13. Delphinvs Delphis, p. 48; 14. Delphinvs Tursio, p. 49 = Orca gladiator; 15.
Delphinvs albicans, p. 50 = Beluga catodon.

Monodon spurius, Balena rostrata, spp. nn. 15 spp., 12 valid. Synonymy, diagnoses, dis-
tribution, ete. [356.]

470 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1780. ‘‘GATTERER, CHPH. WILH. Jac. Breviarum zoologiae ParsI. Mammalia.
8 maj. Gottingae, 17380.”
Not seen; title from Carusand Engelmann. Cited by Donndorff, Zool. Beyér., i, 1792. [357.]
1780, Launay, VW. DE. Mémoire sur Vorigine des Fossiles accidentels des Provinces
Belgiques. <Mém. del’ Acad. imp. et roy. des Sci. et Bell.-Lett. de Bruxelles, ii,
1780, pp. 531-585.
Brief reference (p. 335) to remains of a supposed skeleton of a Crocodile, here identified as
that of an Orca, and also to other Cretacean remains. [358.]
1780. MANN, L’ Abbé. Mémoire sur l’Histoire naturelle de la Mer du Nord, & sur la
Péche qui s’y fait. < Mém. de V Acad. imp. et roy: des. Sci. et Bell.-Lett. de Bru-
xelles, 1i, 1780, pp. 157-220.
Cétacés, p. 197.
‘26. Les especes de poissons qui habitent ou qui fréquentent la mer du nord, sont les sui-
vantes, savoir:
“* Cete—le Cachelot.
‘* Balena—la Baleine.
“* Physeter—la Sédenette.
‘* Monoceros—le Narhwal.
‘*Ces quatres especes de poissons n’habitent point la mer du nord, mais ils y viennent
quelquefois de l’océan septentrional, surtout dans les hyvers rudes. On a eu l’exemple de
baleines jettées sur la cdte de Flandre” . . . (p.197). [359.]
780. ‘‘SERIONNE, A. DE. Hollands rijkdom, behelzende den oorsprong van den
koophandel, en van de magt van dezen staat; de toenemende vermeerdering van
deszelfs koophandel en scheepvaart, enz. Uit het Fransch vertaald. Vervol-
gens overgezien, merkelijk veranderd, vermeerderd en van verscheiden miss-
lagen gezuiverd door El. Luzac. Leyden, Luzac en van Dame, 1780. 4 dln.

OTe Scare
Noordsche visscherij en koophandel, i, pp. 345-350... Walvischvangst, ii, pp. 275-280.
Not seen; title and references from Boszoed, op. cit., p. 210, no. 3167. [360.]

1780. Wirry, L’Abbé DE. Mémoire sur les fossiles du Tournaisis, et les pétrifactions
en général, relativement 4 leur utilité pour la vie civile. <Mém. de Acad.
imp. et roy. des Sci. et Bell.-Lett. de Bruxelles, iii, 1780, pp. 11-44, pl. i-ii.
A reference of four lines to remains of ‘‘poissons marins . . . qili paroissent avoir appar-
tenu 4 des animaux cétacés”’ (p. 21). [361.]
1780-84. ‘‘Borowski, G. H. Gemeinniitzige Naturgeschichte des Thierreichs, darin-
nen die merkwiirdigsten und niitzlichsten Thiere in systemat. Ordnung be-
schrieben und alle Geschlechter in Abbildungen nach der Natur vorgestellt
werden. Mit den Kupfertaf. 1-228. Berlin und Stralsund, Lange, 1780-84.
odin or eos
“1, Bd. Singethiere. Mit 48 Kpfrtaf. 2. Bd. Wallfische, Vogel. Mit 48 Kpfrtaf. 3.
Vogel. Mit 48 Kpfrtaf. 4. Amphibien. Mit 36 Kpfrtaf. 5. Fische. Mit 42Kpfrtat.”

Notseen; title from Carus and Engelmann. Cited by Donndorft, Zool. Beytr.,i, 1792. [362.]
1780-84. ‘‘Giiil, FILIPPO SALVADORE. Saggio di Storia Americana, o sia Storia Na-
turale, Civile, e Sacra de Regni, e delle provincie Spanuole di Terra-ferma
nell America Meridionale. 4 vols. 8°. Roma, 1780, ’81, ’82, ’84.”
Not seen; title from Carusand Engelmann. Have seen this work referred to as containing
(vol. i, p. 84, fig. 1) an account of the Manatee, with a figure. [363.]
1731. E[Rixsson], J. Um Marsvina rekstr. < Rit dess Islenzka Lerdoms-Lista Felags
[ii], 1782, pp. 73-96.
I. Kap. Um adferd Medalfarar manna, pp. 73-85; II. Kap. Um adferd Fereyinga og Sunn-

mera, pp. 85-96. [364.]
781. FaBRIcius, OrHO. Om Hvalaaset. <_Nye Saml. Kong. Danske Videnskabers Sel-
skabs Skrifter, 1781, pp. 557-378 (i. e. 578), figg. 1-4. [365.]

1781. GRoNOviUS, LAUR[ENTIUS] THEOD[oRUS]. Zoophylacium | Gronovianum, |
exhibens | Animalia | Quadrupeda, Amphibia, | Pisces, Insecta, Vermes, |
Mollusca, Testacea, | et Zoophyta, | Quae in Museo suo adservavit, examini |
subjecit, systematice disposuit | atque descripsit | Laur. Theod. Gronovius,

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. A471

1781. GRONOVIUS, LauR[ENTIUS] THEOD[ORUS]—Continued.
J.U.D. | Civitatis Lugduno Batave Senator, Societatis physico- | medic
regi Londinensis, Basilzensis, | atque Hollandicx Socius. | Additis rarissi-
morum objectorum iconismis. | — | Lugduni Batavorum, | Apud | Theodorum
Haak et Socium | et | Samuelem et Johannem Luchtmans. | MDCCLXXXI.
[3 fase. paged continuously.] fol. 11. 5, pp. 1-380, ll. 10, pp. i-vi, pll. 21.
This is a reissue of the first and second fasc. of the Zoophylacii [pp. 1-236]+fasc. iii,
Vermes, ete., 1781, pp. 237-380.
The Cetacean matter is therefore the same as in the editio princeps, q.v., at 1763. [366. ]

1781. [PENNANT, THOMAS.] History | of | Quadrupeds. | Vol. 1 [II]. | [Coat of arms. ]
London. | Printed for B. White, Fleet Street. | MDCCLXXXI. 2 vols. 4°.
Vol. i, 1. 1, pp. i-xxiv, 1-284; vol. ii, 1. 1, pp. 285-566, ll. 7.
Sirenia, pp. 5386-545, to wit: 1. Whale-tailed Manati, pp. 536-539; 2. Round-tailed Manati,
pp. 540-544; 3. Sea Ape, pp. 544, 545. The first is primarily Steller’s Sea Cow; the second
inciudes both the American and African Manatees; the last is a sp. myth. [367.]

1781. ‘‘WESTERWOUT, J. DIBBETZ. Beknopte beschrijving der XVII Nederlandsche
provincién, waarin den oorsprong en opkomst dezer landen aangetoond wordt.
Nijmegen, Is. van Campen, 1781. gr. 8°.”

“.. . Visscherij; Haringvangst; Walvischvangst, pp. 467-486.”
Title and reference from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 213, no. 3188. (368. }

1782. Burron,[G. L. LECLERC DE.} Histoire | Naturelle, | générale et particuliére. |
Par M. le Compte [George Louis Leclerc] de Buffon, Intendant du | Jardin &
du Cabinet du Roi, de ’Académie | Frangoise, de celle des Sciences, &c. | — |
Supplément, Tome Sixieme. |— | [Arms.] A Paris, | de Imprimerie Ro-
yale. | — | M.DCCLXXXII. 4°. pp. i-viij, 1-405, i-xxv, pll. i-xlix.

Les Lamantins, pp. 381-384. Le grand Lamantin de Kamtschatka, 385-395. Le grand

Lamantin des Antilles, pp. 396-398. Le grand Lamantin de la mer des Indes, p. 399. Le
petit Lamantin d’ Amérique, pp. 400-402. Le petit Lamantin du Sénégal, pp. 403-405. [369.]

1782. DUHAMEL DU MoncEAvU, M. Traité Général | des Péches, | et | Histoire des
Poissons | qu’elles fournissent, | tant pour la subsistance dés hommes, | que
pour plusieurs autres usages | qui ont rapport aux Arts et au Commerce. | Par
M. Duhamel du Monceau, de Académie Royale des Sciences; |. . . [= titles,
3 lines]. | — | Suite de la Seconde Partie. | — | Tome Quatrieme. | [Design.]
A Paris, | Chez Veuve Desaint, Libraire, rune du Foin Saint-Jacques. | — |
M. DCC. LXXXII. | Avee Approbation, et Privilége du Roi. 4 vols. 2°.

Traité général des Péches et Histoire des Poissons, ou des animaux qui vivent dans l'eau,
Suite de la seconde Partie. Tomeiv. Dixieme Section. Des Poissons Cetacées, & des Am-
phibies. pp. 1-73, pl. i-xv.

Introduction, pp. 1, 2. Chap. i. De la Baleine, & des Poissons qui y ont rapport, pp. 2, 3.
Art. i. De la Baleine franche; Cete; Balena vulgaris, edentula, dorso non pinnato, Raii, pp.
4-9, pl. i, figg.1, 2. Art. ii. Des différents lieux ow l'on trouve des Baleines, pp. 9-11. Art.
iii. Détails relatifs aux Navires qn’on destine pour faire la péche des Baleines au Nord dans
les glaces, p. 11, pl. i, fig. 3, pl. iii, fig. 3. Art. iv. Détail sommaire des utensils nécessaires
pour la péche, pp. 11, 12, pl. ii. Art. v. De la disposition des glaces au Nord, pp. 12, 18.
Art. vi. De Ja nourriture des Baleines, p. 13. Art. vii. De la péche des Sardes, ou petites
Baleines, que je soupconne étre le Nord-Kaper, p. 14. Art. viii. Des endroits ot l’on fait les
Armements, p. 14. Art. ix. Surles gages des Equipages, pp. 14,15. Art. x. Etat des effets,
dont ceux qui forment l’équipage doivent se fournir pour faire une campagne de péche, p. 15.
Art. xi. De la Nourriture des Equipages, p. 15. Art. xii. De la péche des Baleines en géné-
ral, pp. 16-18. (§ 1. Des Harpons. §2. Des Lances. § 3. Des Crocs. § 4. Des Couteaux.)
Art. xiii. De la péche des Baleines, particulierement avec les harpons, pp. 18, 19. Art. xiv.
De l’Embarquement des Chaloupes, pp. 19, 20. Art. xv. De la maniere de lever le gras, ou
de découper les grandes Baleines pour en retirer ’huile, pp. 20, 21. Art. xvi. Méthode pour
retirer l’huile des Baleines, p. 22. Art. xvii. Sur la jauge des futailles, p. 23. Art. xviii. Des
différentes qualité & nature des huiles de Baleine, pp. 23, 24. Art. xix. Exposé sommaire
de la péche des Baleines en différents Parages, & de la péche accidentelle de ces poissons,
pp. 24-29. (§ 1. De la péche aux cétes de Biscaye, de Galice & de Saint-Jean-de-Luz. § 2. Le
la Péche aux Cétes d’Angleterre. §3. De la péche des Baleines par les Groenlandois. § 4.
De la péche en Schetland, ou Hithland. § 5. Dela péche en Norwege. § 6. De la péche de la
Baleine en Russie. §7. Dela péche par les Hollandois & Spitzberg. § 8. De la péche des
Baleines au Japon. §9. Dela péche des Baleines 4 la Corée. § 10. De la maniere de prendre

472

BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1782. DUHAMEL DU MoncgEau, M.—Continued.

les Baleines 4 la Floride, dans ]’Amérique Septentrionale, par les Sauvages du pays. § 11.
Description des Chaloupes qui servent pour prendre des Baleines dans les environs du Canada.
§ 12. Idée générale des péches qu’on fait 4 Sinigaglia, jolie petite Ville située au bord de la
Mer Adriatique.) Art. xx. Sur les ennemis des Baleines, pp. 29-31. Art. xxi. De l'Ambre
gris; Ambra grisea, pp. 31, 32.

Chap. ii. Des Cétaceés. Art. i. Du Cachalot, pp. 33-36. Art. ii. Des Souffleurs, pp. 36-37.
Art. iii. Des Marsouins, Tursio; en Breton Meroch; par quelques-uns, Souffleur, pp. 38-42.
(§ 1. Du grand Marsouin, que plusieurs nomment Soufleur, p. 41. §2. Du Marsouina museau
arrondi; Tursio ou Phocena, qu'on regarde comme le vrai Marsouin (figg. 5 & 6).) Art. iy.
Des Dauphins, pp. 42-45.

Chap. iii. Des Amphibies, p. 45. Art.i. Du Loup, Veau Marin, ou Phoque; Phoca, pp.
45-51. Art.ii. Description d@’un petit Phoque noir, 4 poil fin & ondé, pp. 51,52. Art. iii.
Dun petit Phoque, copié sur le dessein qui est dans 1’ Histoire Naturelle de M. de Buffon,
tome xiii, p.52. Art.iv. Lettre de M. Frameris, sur les Phoques qu’on prend dans les Mers
du Nord, pp. 52,53. Art. v. Description d’un Phoque qui avoit été péché dans notre Océan
Septentrional, & apporté a Dieppe en 1723, fig. 5,p.53. Art. vi. Description d’un Phoque
de la Mediterranée, envoyé de Marseille, pp. 53,54. Art. vii. De quelques Phoques, qu’on a
conservé vivans dans plusieurs endroits, pp. 54-56. Art. viii. Du Lamentin, pp. 56,57. Dela
péche des Lamentins, pp. 57-59. Art.ix. De la Vache marine, ou Poisson 4 la grande dent,
Morse d’'Islande & du Groenland; Odobenus, ou Rosmarus, pp. 59-61. Art. x. De plusieurs
autres Amphibies, & particuliérement du Lion Marin; Leo Marinus, p. 61.

Explication des planches, pp. 62-66. Notice géographique des principaux lieux dont il est
fait mention dans cette dixieme Section, pp. 67-70. Tabie Alphabetique, p.71. Table des
Chapitres et Articles, pp. 72,73. Errata, etc., p. 73.

Pl.i. Baleine franche,.fig. 1, méle; fig. 2, femelle; fig. 3, deux chaloupes qui poursuivent une
Baleine; figg. 4-6, fanons. Pl. ii. Instruments pour la péche des Baleines. PI. iii-viii.
Péche des Baleines. PL. ix, fig. 1, Cachalot d’Anderson; fig. 2,3, Souffleurs; fig. 4, Souffleur du
fleuve Saint-Laurent; fig. 5, Marsouin; fig. 6, Mulard de Rondelet; fig. 7, squélette de la
machoire inférieure d’un Cachalot. Pl.x. Des Marsouins,8 figg. Pll. xi, xii. Des Loups
Marins, ou Phoques. Pl. xiii. Du Lamentin et du Péche du méme. Pl. xiv. De la Vache
Marine: fig. 1, Vache Marine avec son petit; fig. 2, squelette d’une téte de Vache Marine; fig.
3, Tuerie de differents Cetacées. PI. xv, fig.1, Pescheurs Groenlandois; fig. 2, Lion Marin
avec sa Lionne; fig. 3, Cachalot Male.

Dukamel’s work was, for its time, a thorough presentation of the subject, relating, as its
title implies, to the subject of the fisheries rather than to the natural history of fishes, al-
though of importance in this relation, especially from the numerous original figures given.
Those of the Cetacea, however, are in part copies from those of earlier writers, some of them
more or less modified. His account of the Whalefishery, in relation to the capture and sub-
sequent treatment of the animals, is detailed and very fully illustrated in the plates, and
forms a valuable contribution to the history of the subject. [370.]

1782. LE GRAND D’Aussy. ‘‘Histoire de la vie privée des Frangais, depuis lorigine

de la nation jusqu’&’ nos jour. Paris, Imprimerie de Ph. D. Pierres. 1782.
3 dln. gr. 8°.”

Péche de la Baleine chez les Basques, ii, pp. 68-77.

Not seen; title and reference from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 237, no. 3465. ; [371.]

1782. Sr. JOHN [DE CREVECG@UR], J. Hector. Letters | from an | American Farmer; |

describing | certain provincial situations, | manners, and customs, | not gen-
erally known; | and conveying | some idea of the late and present | interior

circumstances | of the | British Colonies | in | North America. | — | Written
for the information of a Friend | in England, | By J. Hector St. John [de
Créveceur], | A farmer in Pennsylvania. | — | London, | Printed for Thomas

Davies in Russel Street, Covent- | Garden, and Lockyer Davis in Holborn. |

M DCC LXXxXII. 8°. 11. 8, pp. 1-318, 2 maps.

Letter v. Customary Education and Employment of the Inhabitants of Nantucket, pp.
150-158 (relates mainly to the Whalefishery of this island). Letter vi. Description of the
Island of Martha’s Vineyard; and of the Whale Fishery, pp. 159-176. Pp. 162-176 relate to
the Whalefishery, describing the character, size, and outfit of the vessels employed, the man-
ner of capturing Whales, ‘‘cutting in,” and care of the products, ete. At p. 169 is a list of
‘the names and principal characteristics of the various species of Whales known to these peo-
ple” of Nantucket; 11 species being enumerated and briefly described. There are also sta-
tistics of the Nantucket Whalefishery for the year 1769. [In the French ed. of 1767 the letter
about the Whalefishery is dated ‘‘ Nantucket, 17 Octobre 1772.’’]

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 473

1782. St. JOHN [DE CREVECGUR], J. HEcror—Continued.
A ‘New Edition, with an Accurate Index,” appeared in 1783, textually the same as the
present. There are also later editions in English (that of 1793 is given infra), and in French,
the author himself translating and publishing his ‘‘Letters” in that language in 1784 (q. v.;
see, also, under 1787). Also ef. Rich, Bibliotheca Americana Nova, p. 302. (372.]
1782-84. “Bock, Frrepr. Sam. Versuch einer wirtschaftl. Naturgesch. von Ost- u.
West-preussen. 5 Bde. Mit Kpfrn. gr. 8°. Dessau, 1782-84.”
Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann. Cited by Donndorff, Zool. Beytr., i, 1792, p.
782, [373.]

1783. “HERMANN, Joa. Tabula affinitatum animalium, per totum animale regnum
in tribus foliis exposita, olim academico specimine edita, nunc uberiore com-
mentario illustrata, cum annotationibus ad historiam naturalem animelium
augendam fascientibus. 4°. Argentorati, 1783.”

Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann. Cited by Donndorff and others. [374.]

1783. [LONDON SOCIETY FOR, etc.] [Gun Harpoons.] < Trans. London Soc. for En-
cour. Arts, Man., and Com, i, 1783, pp. 42, 215.

‘“Whale-Fishery,” p. 42 (announcement of the successful introduction of the gun har-
poon). ‘Gun for throwing Harpoons,” p. 215 (prize offered for improvement in its construc-
tion). ‘‘Harpoon to be thrown by a Gun,” p. 215 (prize offered for improvements in its con-
struction). These offers, as also a prize for the capture of Whales by use of the harpoon
gur, were annually renewed by the society for many years. See the society’s Trans., 1784
et seq. (375.]

1783. SCHWEDIAWER, F. X. An Account of Ambergrise. . . . <Philos. Trans. Lond.,
Ixxiii, pt. 1, art. xv, 1783, pp. 226-241.

A detailed account of nature, mode of occurrence, and use of ambergris and sperma-
ceti. [376.]

1784. BopparErRT, P. P. Boddaert med. doct.|... . [= titles, 7 lines] | Elenchus
Animalium. | Volumen I. | Sistens Quadrupedia hue usque nota, | eorumque
varietates. | Ad ductum Nature, quantum fieri potuit disposita. |— | . :
[=motto, 6 lines]. | — | Roterodami, | Apud C. R. Hake. | MDCCLXXXIV.
8°. pp.i-xxxvili, 1-174.

The Cetacea are not included. The Sirenia are: 1. Rosmarus Indicus, p. 169—Indian
Walrus, Pennant and Dugon, Buffon; 2. Manati Trichechus, p. 173—=The Broad-tailed
Manati, Pennant; 3. Manatus Balenurus, p. 173=Whale-tailed Manati, Pennant, there-
fore— Rhytina borealis. [377.]

1784. CHEMNITZ, T. H. Auszug aus einem Schreiben des Herrn Garnisonprediger
Chemnitz zu Coppenhagen, an den Herrn O. C. R. Silberschlag, vom 29sten

July, 1783. 5 Taf. Fig. 4bis7. <(Schriften der Berlinischen Gesellschaft na-
turforscher Freunde, v, 1784, pp. 463-469.

Account of the capture of a ‘‘Nordkaper” ‘‘etwa zwischen Neufundland und Issland,”
from the head of which were obtained examples of the Balanus polythalamius compressus,
the same being here described and figured, etc. [378. ]

1784. Foorp, HumpHREY. A short Account of the Invention of the Gun Harpoon,
which has been introduced into the Greenland Fishery, by means of the Re-
wards bestowed by the Society; the utility of which will be manifested, by
the Facts related in the following Letters. < Trans. London Soc. Encour. Arts,
Man., and Com., ii, 1784, pp. 191-222, pl.

Account of ‘‘an Harpoon to be fired from a Swivel Gun,” invented by Abraham Staghold,
in 1771, with a plate giving figures of the harpoon and gun, pp. 191-196. Six letters from
Captain Humphrey Foord, giving accounts of the capture of Whales by the Gun Harpoon,
and claiming premiums therefor, pp. 197-222. The account gives also the ‘‘length of bone”
and yield of oil of several of the Whales thus taken. {379.]

1784. ‘“‘Leske, NATHAN. Gtrr. Anfangsgriinde der Naturgesch. 1 Th. Allgem.
Natur- u. Thiergeschichte, mit 12 Kpfr. 2 Aufl. gr. 8°. Leipzig, 1784.”

Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann. Cited by Donndorff. The first edition is said
to have appeared in 1779. [380.]

1784 (circa). LICHTENBERG, GEO. CupH. Potfisch. < Mag. fiir Neuste aus der Phys. u.

‘ Naturg., ii, (17847), p. 204.
Not seen; title and reference based on Donndorff, Zool. Beytr., i, 1792, p. 777. (381 1

A474 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1784. [Sr. JOHN DE CREVEC@UR, J. HECTOR.] Lettres | d’un | Cultivateur | Ameri-
cain, | [J. Hector St. John Créveceur] Ecrites a W. S. Ecuyer, | Depuis l’An-
née 1770, jusqu’a 1781. | Traduites de ’Anglois par * * *. | Tome Premier | et
Second]. | [Design.] A Paris, | Chez Cachet, Libraire, rne & hétel Serpente.

|—|M. DCC. LXXXIV. 2vols. 8°. Vol. i, pp. i-xxiv, i-iv, 1-422, 1.1;
vol. ii, ll. 2, pp. i-iv, 1-400, 1.1. [The copy here collated (Harvard College
Library, 15332-22) contains manuscript corrections of numerous typographi-
cal errors and additions by the author, with his autograph. }

Septiéme Lettre. Péche de la Baleine, vol. ii, pp. 147-157.
This is a much altered and enlarged version, more or less changed throughout, rather than
a “translation,” as the title-page implies, of the ‘‘ Letters from an American Farmer” (Lon-
don, 1782), with a dedication to the Marquis de Lafayette, which is dated ‘‘New Yorck, 24
Septembre 1781,” and signed ‘‘L’auteur & Traducteur,” with, in manuscript, the word ‘‘Cre-
vecoeur”’ added in the copy examined. The matter relating to the Nantucket Whalefishery
is substantially the same as that of the English ed. of 1782 (g. v.), of which it is, however, by
no means a strict translation. [382.]
1784. “‘SCHNEIDER, J.G. Sammlung vermischter Abhandlungen zur Aufkliirung der

Zoologie und der Handelsgeschichte. Berlin, 1784. 8°.”
‘“Zie aldaar: Kritische Sammlung von alten und neueren Nachrichten zur Naturgeschichte
der Wallfische, nebst der Geschichte ihres Fanges und des damit verbunden Handels,
bl. 125-303.”
Not seen; title and comment from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 173, no. 2728. [383.]
1784-86. ANON. ‘‘De Walvischvangst met veele bijzonderheden daartoe betrek-
kelijk. Amsterdam en Harlingen, bij P. Conradi en V. van der Plaats, 1784-
86. 4dln. 4°.”
Not seen; title from Bosgoed (op. cit., p. 250, no. 3583), who gives as a new edition of this
work the Nieuwe beschrijving der Waljischvangst, etc., 1791, q. v. ; [384.]
1785. DAUBENTON, [L. J. M.] Observations sur un grand os qui a été trouvé en terre
dans Paris; et sur la conformation des Os de la téte des Cétacées. < Hist. de
VAcad. roy. des Sci. de Paris, ann. 1782 (1785), pp. 211-218, pll. iv—vi.
Pl. iv, téte d’un petit Cachalot; pll. v, vi, téte du Dauphin. [385.]
1785. ‘‘GATTERER, CHPH. WILH. Jac. Naturhist. A-B-C-Buch, od. Abbild. u. Be-
schreib. merkwurd. Thiere. 1785. 3 Aufl. 1799. Mit Kpfr. 8°.”
Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann. [386.]
1785. HALCROW, SINCLEAR. [Account of capture of a Whale by use of the Harpoon
Gun.] <Trans. London Soc. Encour. Arts, Man., and Com., iii, 1785, pp. 154-

157. [387.]
1785. Monro, A. The | Structure and Physiology | of | Fishes | explained, | and |

compared | with those of | Man and other Animals. | — | Illustrated with

Figures. | — | By Alexander Monro, M. D. | Fellow of the Royal College of

Physicians, | and of the Royal Society, | and | Professor of Physic, Anat-
omy, and Surgery, in the University | of | Edinburgh. | CE | Edinburgh: |
Printed for Charles Elliot, Edinburgh; And G. G. J. and J. Robinson, Lon-

don. | — | M, DCC, LXXXV. 2°. pp. 1-128, pll. i-xliv.
Of the Ear in Cetaceous Fishes, pp. 45, 46, 109-112, pl. xxxv, figg. 19 (‘‘Nose, mouth, ear,
and larynx of a Porpess”’). [388.]

1785. PONTOPPIDAN, C. Hval-og Robbefangsten | udi | Strat-Davis, ved Spitsbergen,
og under | Hilandet Jan Mayen, | samt | dens vigtige Fordele, | i Anledning |
af den Kongel. allern. Placat af 13 Octbr. 1784; | tilligemed | nogle oplysende
Efterretninger om Fangsten, Behandilings- | maaden, m. m. | ved | Carl Pon-
toppidan, | Kongel. Maj. virkelig Justiceraad og medadministrerende Direc-
teur | ved den Kongel. Islandiske, Finmarske, &c. &c. Handel. | [ Vignette. ]

| — | Hermed félger et Kobber. | — | Kigbenhavn 1785. | Trykt paa Sylden-
dals Forlag, | hos Frid. Wilh. Thiele. 8°. Il. 3, pp. 1-124. [389.]

1785. ‘‘WiTSEN, Nic. Noord en Oost Tartarijen; behelzende eene beschrijving van
verscheidene Tartersche en nabuurige gewesten, in de noorder en oostelijke
deelen van Azién en Europa. Zedert naauwkeurig onderzoek van veele Jaren,

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 475

1785. ‘‘ WiITsEN, Nic.—Continued.
en eigen ondervinding outworpen, beschreven, geteekent en in ’t licht gege-
ven. Tweede druk, nieuwe uitgaaf, verryckt met eene Inleiding (door P.
Boddaert) en met eene meenigte (105) afbeeldingen (platen en kaarten) ver-
sierd. Te Amsterdam, bij M. Schalekamp, 1785. 2dlIn. folio. ,

“Zie aldaar: Groenlandt; Nova-Zembla; Straet Davids; Waygats, bl. 45, 93, 762, 782, 832,
834, 892, 897-906, 915, 919-926, 928, 940, 951, waar tevens van de vischvangst, vooral van de wal-
visch- en walrusvangst gesproken wordt. Witsen heeft zich in zijne berigten dikwijls van
de mondelinge mededeelingen van walvischvaarders bediend. Verder: Visch in de Kas-
pische zee, bl. 614, 690. Visch in Siberié, bl. 787. Vischvangst in ’t Samoyeden-landt, bl. 955.
Haringvangst in Siberié, bl. 745.

“Vergelijk: Fr. Muller, Essai d’une bibliographie Néerlando-Russe, bl. 58, waar eenige
belangrijke bijzonderheden en eene naauwkeurige bibliographische beschrijving van dit werk
te vinden zijn.”

Not seen; title and references from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 252, no. 3607. [390.]

1785-88. ‘‘GOEZE, Jou. AuG. Epur. Niitzliches Allerley aus der Natur u. dem ge-
meinen Leben fiir allerley Leser. 6 Bde. 8°. Leipzig, 1785-88.”
‘“‘Neue verbess. Ausg. in 3 Bdn. 8. Leipzig, 1788.”

Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann. Cited by Donndorff. [391.]
1785-92. FiscumrR, F. C. J. Friedrich Christoph Jonathan Fischers | Geschichte |
des | teutschen Handels. | — | Der Schiffarth, Fischerei, Erfindungen, Kunste,

Gewerbe, Manufaktureno, | der Landwirthschaft, Polizey, Leibeigenschaft, des
Zoll- Muinz- | und Bergwesens, des Wechselrechts, der Stadtwirthschaft | und
des Luxus. | — | Erster [-Vierter] Theil. | — | Hannover, | in der Helwing-
schen Hofbuchhandlung. | 1785[-1792]. 4 vols. 8°. Theili, 1785; Theil ii, .
1785; Theil iii, 1791; Theil iv, 1792.
Wallfischfang, Theil iv, pp. 265-272.—Geschichte des Wallfischfangs, der seit der Altesten
Zeit von den Aussersten Nordischen Vélkern getrieben wird. Noch giebt es weder bey der
Hansa noch in Holland férmliche Wallfischjiger. Nachricht von Wallfischen, die auf die
Niederlindische Kiste gerathen sind. Erst gegen Ende des [sechzehnten] Jahrhunderts
fangen die Biscayer und Englinder an, auf den Wallfischfang auszugehen: und die Hol-
lander werden erst bey der versuchten Nordéstlichen Durchfarth mit dem Wallfischfange
bekannt. [392.]
1785. CamprER, P. Conjectures relative to the Petrifactions found in St. Peter's
Mountain, near Waestricht. < Philos. Trans. Lond., 1xxvi, pt. 2, art. xxvi, 1786,
pp. 443-456, pll. xv, xvi.
Descriptions and figures of various fossil remains, including bones and teeth of Phoceena
and Physeter and part of lower jaw of Squalodon. [393.]
1786. ‘‘Cranz, D. Hedendaagsche historie, of tegenwoordige staat van Groenland
en Straat Davids, benevens eene uitvoerige beschryving van de walvisch- en
robbenvangst. Amsterdam, 1785. 3vols. 8°. Maps and pll.”
“Exactly the same work as the preceding [Dutch ed. of 1767], only the title reprinted."
¥. Muller, Cat. Am. Books, 1877, no. 836. (394. ]
1786. [JARMAN, NATHANIEL, WILLIAM BROWN, and others.] [Letters and Certificates
in reference to the capture of Whales with the Gun-Harpoon.] < Trans. Lon-
don Soc. Encour. Arts, Man., and Com., iv, 1786, pp. 179-182. [395.1 _

1785. Monr, N. Fors¢g | til | en Islandsk | Naturhistorie, | med | adskillige oekono-

miske.samt andre | Anmorkninger, | ved | N[iels]. Mohr. | — | —— —Siquid
novisti rectius istis, | Candidus imperti; si non, his utere mecus. | Horat,
Epist. Libr. I. 6, | — | Kigbenhavn, | trykt hos Christian Friderik Holm, |

1736. 8°. pp. i-xvi, 1-414.
VII. Cete, Hvale, pp. 12-17, spp. 22-32. 1. Monodon monoceros; 2. Baleena Mysticetus ;
3. B. Physalus; 4. B. Boops; 5. B. Musculus; 6. B. Rostrata, p.13; 7%. Physeter Macro-
cephalus; 8. P. Microps; 9. Delphinus orca; 10. D. Phocena; 11. D. Delphis; 12. D.
Albisans, p. 14.
List with brief notes. [396.]

1787. CLAvIGERO, F. S. The | History | of | Mexico. | Collected from | Spanish and
Mexican Historians, | from | Manuscripts, and Ancient Paintings of the In-

476

BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1787. CLAVIGERO, F. 8.—Continued.

dians. | Illustrated by | Charts, and other Copper Plates. | To which are
added, | Critical Dissertations | on the | Land, | the Animals, | and Inhabit-
ants of Mexico. | By Abbé D. Francesco Saverio Clavigero. | Translated
from the Original Italian, | By Charles Cullen, Esq. | In Two Volumes. | Vol.
I [IL]. | London, | Printed for G. G. J. and J. Robinson, No. 25, Pater-noster
Row. | MDCCLXXXVII. 2vols. 4°. Vol. i, ll. 2, pp. iii-xxxii, 1-476, pll.
i-xxiv,map. Vol. ii, ll. 2, pp. 1-463.

The Manati or Lamentin, i, pp. 62, 63. The text gives but 10 lines to this animal, to which
are added foot-notes to the amount of 18 lines.

There is a second English 4° ed., London, 1807, with the same‘ pagination for the body of
the work. A later American reprint in 3 vols., 8°, appeared at Philadelphia in 1817, in which
the passage about the Manati or Lamentin occurs in vol. i, p. 83. There are German and
other translations given by bibliographers, not seen by me. [397.]

1787. [HOLLINGSWoRTH, 8.] The | Present State | of | Nova Scotia: | with a brief |

Account of Canada, | and the | British Islands | on the coast of | North Amer-
ica. | — | The Second Edition, corrected and enlarged. | Illustrated with a
map. |— |... . [= quotations, 3 lines]. | Edinburgh: | Printed for William
Creech, Edinburgh; | and sold by | T. Cadell, and G. Robinson & Co. Lon-
don. | — M, DCC, LXXXVII. 8°. pp. 1-6, vii—xii, 1-221.

On the importance of giving every possible encouragement to the Canadian Whale-fishery,

pp. 153-155. It is predicted that the Whale-fishery from Canadian ports ‘‘ will soon put an
end to that of Nantucket”! [398.]

1787. HUNTER, JOHN. Observations on the Structure and Oeconomy of Whales. < Phil.

Trans. Lond., \xxvii, pp. 371-450, pll. xvi-xxili. Read June 28, 1787.

{General Remarks], pp. 371-381; Of the Bones, pp. 381-386; Of the Construction of the
Tail, pp. 386,387; Of the Fat, pp. 387-394; Of the Skin, pp. 394-397; Of the Mode of catching
their Food [includes descriptions of the digestive organs], pp. 397-416; Of the Larynx, pp.
416-418; Of the Lungs, pp. 418-420; The Blow-hole, or Passage for the Air, pp. 420-426; Of
the Sense of Touch, p. 426; Of the Sense of Taste, pp. 426, 427; Of the Sense of Smelling,
pp. 428-430; Of the Sense of Hearing, pp. 430-437; Of the Organ of Seeing, pp. 437-441; Of
the Parts of Generation, pp. 441-446; Explanation of the Plates, pp. 447-450.

The observations relate to the following species: 1. ‘‘ Delphinus phocena, or Porpoise”; 2,3.
“‘Grampus,” two species, pll. xvi, xvii, animal; 4. ‘‘ Delphinus delphis, or Bottle-nose Whale,”
pl. xviii, animal; 45. Another, but of a different genus, having only two teeth in the lower
jaw = Hyperoodon, pl. xix, animal; 6. ‘‘Balena rostrata of Fabricius,” pl. xx, animal, pl. xxi,
external parts of generation, pl. xxii, one of the plates of whalebone, pl. xxiii, a perpendicular
section of several plates of whalebone; 7. ‘‘Balena mysticctus, or large Whalebone Whale”’;
8. ‘Physeter macrocephalus, or Spermaceti Whale”; 9. ‘‘Monodon monoceros, or Narwhale.”

These species are treated passim, under the sub-headings above given.

Hunter’s celebrated memoir was for many years the principal source of information respect-
ing the anatomy of Cetaceans, and is even still quotable. His observations were repeatedly
copied, more or less extensively, by many subsequent writers, and his figures were reproduced
in many of the older works, notably by Bonnaterre (1789), who faithfully copied all but one
(pl. xix), which he also reproduced with modifications, e. g., the insertion of the two teeth in
the lower jaw. k [399.]

1787. Monro, A. Vergleichung | des | Baues und der Physiologie der Fische | mit

dem | Bau deg Menschen und der tibrigen Thiere | durch Kupfer erlautert |
von | Alexander Monro. | — | Aus das Englischen tbersezt | und mit eignen
Zusitzen und Anmerkungen von P. Campern vermehrt | durch | Johann Gott-
lieb Schneider. | — | Leipzig, bey Weidmanns Erben und Reich, 1787. 4°.
ll. 4, pp. 1-192, 11. 2, pll. i-xxxiii.

Von dem Ohre der Wallfischarten, pp. 53, 54, 65-71, pl. xxv.

In this version the text is greatly increased and the plates much changed and reduced in
number. For the original ed., see1785. Monro, A. [409.]

1787. ‘Moor, MaarTEN. Journael van de reize naer Groenlandt, gedaen door com-

mandeur M. Mooi met het schip Frankendaal, behelzende zijne uitreize van
Amsterdam 22 April 1786, bezetting in het ijs, zedert den 10 Junij, het voor-
gevallene met de commandeurs H. C. Jaspers, M. Weatherhead, W. Allen en
Volkert Klaassen of Jung Volkert Knudsten, welke twee Engelsche comm.

)

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 477

1787. ‘‘Moo1, MAARTEN—Continued.
beide hunne schepen verloren hebben; de gelukkige verlossing van den Altoo-
naasvaarder Gottenburger en van hem M. Mooi, met veel aanmerkelyke by-
zonderheden. Amsterdam, David Weege, 1787. 4°. 71 blz.” *,
Not seen; title from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 243, no. 3518. [401.]
1787. St. JOHN DE CREVE CoEuR,[HEcToR]. Lettres | d’un Cultivateur | Américain
| addressées 4 Wm. S... on, Esq". | depuis ’Année 1770 jusqu’en 1786.—
Par M. St. John | De Creve Coeur, | Traduites de lAnglois, | Keen feelings
inspire resistless thoughts. | Tome I[-II1]. | [Vignette.] A Paris. | Chez Cu-
chet Libraire, Rue et Hétel Serpente. | 1787. 3 vols. 8°. Vol. i, front., engr.
title, pp. i-xxxij, 1-478, 1.1, map and 2 pll.; vol. ii, 1. 1, pp. 1-438, Ul. 3,
3 maps; vol. iii, lL. 1, pp. 1-592, 1 map and 1 pl.
Septiéme Lettre. Péche de la Baleine, pp. 153-163. :
Vols. iand ii appear to be the same as the two-volume edition of 1784, with the addition of
maps and of several pages of new matter at the end of each volume. Vol. iii is wholly addi-
tional. The matter relating to the Whalefishery is the same as that of the 1784 ed. (q. 2.),
except that the ‘‘lettre’”’ here bears the date ‘‘ Nantucket, 17 Octobre 1772.”’ [402.]
1788. ‘‘Batscu, AuG. Jon. GEO. Karn. Versuch einer Anleit. zur Kenntniss u. Ge-
schichte der Thiere u. Mineralien, fiir akad. Vorlesungen entworfen u. mit
den néthigsten Abbildgn versehen. 2 Thle. Mit 7 Kpfrtaf. gr. 8°. Jena
1788, ’89.”
‘1 Thl. Mit d. Kpfrtaf. 1-5, 1788. 2Thl. Besondere Geschichte der Insecten, Gewiirme
u. Mineralien. Mit den Kpfrtaf. 6 u. 7, 1789.”
Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann. Cited by Donndorff, Zool. Beytr., i, 1792. [403.]
1788. BLUMENBACH, J. F. D. Joh. Friedr Blumenbachs | der Med. Prof. ord. zu Gét-
tingen | Handbuch | der | Naturgeschichte. | — | Mit Kupfern. | — | Multa
fiunt eadem sed aliter. | Qvintilian. | — | Dritte sehr verbesserte Ausgabe. | — |
Gottingen, | bey Johann Christian Dieterich, | 1788. sm.8°. pp. i-xvi, 1-715,
pl. i-iii.
IX. Palmata, pp. 137-148. Includes Trichecus Manatus, p. 143.
XII. Cetacea, pp. 143-147. 1. Monodon Narwhal, p.144; 2. Balaena Mysticetus, p.144; 3.
B. Physalus, p.146; 4. Physeter Macrocephualus, p.146; 5. Delphinus Phocaena, p. 147; 6. D.
Delphis, p. 147; '7- D. Orea, p. 147. [404.]
1788. GMELIN, J. F. Carolia Linné, |... [= titles, etc.,4 lines] | Systema | Naturae |
per | Regna tria Naturae, | secundum | Classes, Ordines, | Genera, Species, |
cum | Characteribus, differentiis, synonymis, locis. | Tomus I. | — | Editio
decima tertia, aucta, reformata. | — | Cura | Jo[annis]. Frid[erico]. Gmelin, |
. .. [titles, 4 lines] | — | Lipsiae, 1788. | Impensis Georg. Emanuel. Beer. 8°.
7 ll. unpaged, pp. 1-500. Mammalia, pp. 1-232.
Stirenia [<ii Bruta], arranged under the genus Trichechus (pp.59-61). 1. T. Rosmarus=
Walruses, p.59; 2. 7. Dugong= Indian Walrus, Pennant, p. 60; 3. 7. Manatus, a. australis
(‘Habitat in mari africano et americano”), p. 60; 3a. T. Manatus, B. borealis (= Rhytina
gigas), p. 61.
Cete, pp. 222-232; genera 37-40—4; species 15, to wit: 1. Monodon Monoceros, p. 222; 2.
Balaena Mysticetus, p.223; 3. B. Physalus, p. 224; 4. B. Boops, p.225; 5. B. gibbosa, p. 225;
6. B. Musculus, p.226; 7. B. rostrata, p. 226; 8. Physeter Catodon, p.226; 9. P. macrocepha-
lus, p. 227; 10. P. microps, p. 228; 11. P. Tursio, p. 229; 12. Delphinus Phocaena, p. 229;
13. D. Delphis, p. 230; 14. D. Orca, p. 231; 15. D. Leucas, p. 232. [405.]
1789. “Brcustein, Jon. MatrH. Gemeinniitz. Naturgesch. Deutschlands, nach allen
3 Reichen. 4 Bde. Mit 65 Kpfr. gr. 8°. Leipzig, 1789-95.”
‘1, Bd. welcher die néthigen Vorkenntnisse u. die Geschichte der Siiugethiere enthiilt.
Mit 16 Kpfrtaf. 1789.”
Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann. An improved later edition is said to have
appeared in 4 vols. 1801-09 (Mammals, 1801). [406.]
1789. BONNATERRE, —. Tableau | Encyclopédique | et Méthodique | des trois Régnes
de la Nature, | Dédié et présenté a M. Necker, Ministre WEtat, | & Directeur
Général des Finances. | — | Cetologie. | — | Par M. ?Abbé Bonnaterre. |....
[= motto, 2 lines]. | [Vignette.] | A Paris, | Chez Panckoucke, Libraire, Hotel

A78

BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1789. BONNATERRE—Continued.

de Thou, rue des Poitevins. | — | M. DCC. LXXXIX. | Avee Approbation et
Privilége du Roi. | 4°. pp. i-xlj, 1-28, pll. 1-12. <Encyclopédie Méthodique,
tome 183.
Tome 183 of the Encyclopédie Méthodique also includes:
Tableau | Encyclopédique | et Methodique | des trois Régnes de Ja Nature.
| — | Quadrupédes et Cétacés. | Par MM. Daubenton et Desmarest. | [It bears
the same imprint as tome 182, and the date M. DCCCXXVI (1826)]. 4°. pli.
1-112, pll. suppl. 1-14=126 pll. See 1822. Drsmarsst, A. G. ;

“Te Recueil des planches de I’ Encyclopédie, destinées a représenter les principales espéces
de mammiferes, a été publié, sans texte, il y a environ trente ans.’”’ Avertissement, tome 182,
1820, p. v.

‘““Avertissement,” pp. iii-vi, reviewing the history and difficulties of the subject; ‘‘Intro-
duction,”’ pp. vii-xli, defining the ‘‘ Différences entre les cetacés et les poissons”’ (pp. vii, viii),
and describing in detail the different parts of the various types of Cetaceans (pp. viii-xx), their
distribution, migrations, habits, etc. (pp. xx-xxili), and the Whale-fishery, as carried on by
different nations (pp. xxiii-xxx). Then follows ‘'Précis anatomique des Cetacés, Avec
Yexplication de quelques mots techniques qu’on emploie ordinairement dans les descrip-
tions” (pp. xxxi-xl), with ‘‘ Table mephodique des Cetacés”’ (p. xli), giving the characters of -
the ‘‘Classes” and ‘‘ genres.”

Cetologie, pp. 1-28. Genn. 4; spp.26. Premiére Classe. Baleines. Ier. Genre. Baleine,
Balena. Linn.,p.1. 1. La Baleine-Franche, B. Mysticetus, p.1, pl. ii, fig. 1, from Martens =
Balena mysticetus ; 2. Le Nord-Caper, B. Glacialis, p.3=B. ‘‘biscayensis”; 3. Le Gibbar, B.
Physalus, p. 4, pl. ii, fig. 2, from Martens = Physalus antiquorum; 4. La Baleine-tampon, B.
Nodosa, p.5=? Balenoptera rostrata; &. La Baleine a bosses, B. Gibbosa, p.5— Agaphelus
gibbosus, Cope; 6. La Jubarte, B. Boops, p. 6, pl. iii, fig. 2, from Sibbald =? Megaptera longi-
mana; %- Le Rorgqual, B. Musculus, p. 7, pl. iii, fig. 1, from Sibbald =? Physalus antiquo-
rum; $. La Baleine a bec, B. Rostrata, p. 8, pl. iv, from Hunter= Balenoptera rostrata.

Seconde Classe. Monodons. I*.Genre. Monodon, Monodon. Linn., p.9; 9. La Narhwal,
M. Monoceros, p. 10, pl. v, tig. 1, animal, figg. 2,3, bidentate skull, from Cope=M. monoceros ;
10. L’Anarnak, WZ. Spurius, p. 11=? Hyperoodon bidens.

Troisiéme Classe. Cachalots. It. Genre. Cachalot, Phiseter. Linn., p.12; 11, Le Grand
Cachalot, P. Macrocephatlus, p. 12, pl. vi, fig. 1, pl. vii, fig. 2, original Physeter macrocepha-
lus; 12. Le petit Cachalot, P. Catodon, p. 14, pl. vi, fig. 4, tooth = Physeter macrocephalus-
juv.; 13. Le Cachalot trumpo, P. Trumpo, p. 14, pl. viii, from Robertson = Physeter macroce,
phalus; 14. Le Cachalot cylindrique, P. Cylindricus, p. 16, pl. vii, fig. 1, from Anderson=
Physeter macrocephalus ; 15. Le Cachalot Microps, P. Microps, p. 16—= Physeter macrocepha-
lus; 16. Le Cachalot Mular, P. Mular, p. 17, pl. viii, fig. 5, tooth = Physeter macrocephalus.

Quatriéme Classe. Dauphins. I. Genre. Dauphin, Delphinus. Linn.,p.18; 17%. Le
Marsouin, D. Phoceena, p. 18, pl. x, fig. 1, copy of an early figure; 18. Le Dauphin, D. Del-
phis, p. 20, pl. x, fig. 2, from Klein= Delphinus delphis; 19. Le Nésarnak, D. Tursio, p. 21,
pl. xi, figg. 1,2, from Hunter=Tursio truncatus; 20. L’Epaulard, D. Orca, p. 21, pl. xii,
fig. 1, from Hunter= Orca gladiator; 21. L’Epaulard ventru, p. 23, pl. xii, fig. 2, from Hun-
ter=? Orea sp.; 2:2. L’Epée de Mer, D. Gladiator, p. 23= Orca gladiator; 23. Le Bé-
luga, D. Albicans, p. 24= Beluga catodon; 24. Le Dauphin a deux dents, D. Bidentatus,
p. 24, pl. xi, fig. 3, from Hunter, altered = Hyperoodon bidens; 25. Le Butskopf, D. Butskopf, —
p. 25= H. bidens (not the Butskopf of the Dutch and Germans, which is an Orca); 26. Le
Dauphin féres, D. Feres, p. 27=? Orca gladiator.

Balena nodosa, Phiseter trumpo, P. cylindricus, P. mular, Delphinus bidentatus, D. buts-
kopf, D. feres, spp. nn. :

Systematic names are given to 25 species, 7 of them new. Bonnaterre’s memoir, although
essentially a compilation, became at once the authority on the subject, and was so recognized
till the appearance of Lacépéde’s work in 1804. With one exception (Physeter macrocephalus)
the figures of the animals are all copies from those of previous authors, notably Sibbald, An-
derson, and Hunter. The memoir, however, may be taken as the best presentation of the
general subject up to that date, and is especially important for the considerable number of
new names introduced. [407.]

1789? “Groot, J. J. Beknopt en getrouw Verhael, van de reys van Commandeur

Jeldert Jansz. Groot, uit Texel na en Groenlandt. Desselfs verblijf op de
kust van Oud-Groenlandt, nae het verongelukken van deszelfs onderhebbend
schip, voorgevallen in Anno 1777 en 1778. Amsterdam, Wed. van A. van Rij-

schooten en zn. 4°, (16 pag.).”
Not seen; from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 237, no. 3467. [408.|

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 479

1789. Merck, Henry. Mémoire sur les Cétacés. <Hist. et Mém. de la Soc. des Sei.
phys. de Lausanne, ii, 1784-86 (1789), pp. 339-344, pl. vii.

Pl. vii, fig. 1, crane de la baleine ordinaire; fig. 2, du monodon; fig. 3, du dauphin; fig. 4,

du physeter; figg. 5, 6, de une espéce de baleine inconnue [= Hyperoodon}. [409.]

1789. [WHEATLEY, JOHN, and others.] [Certificates of Capture of Whales by use of
the Gun-Harpoon.] < Trans. London Soc. Encour. Arts, Man., and Com., vii, 1789,
pp. 175-186.

Gives accounts of the capture of various Whales, with generally a statement of the “length
of bone”; one Whale is stated to have had ‘thirteen feet ten inch bone”; others had ‘‘ten
feet bone,” ‘‘eleven feet bone,” ete. [410.]

1790. ANDERSON, [—], and CoomBr [—]. <Anderson’s | Historical and Chronological
Deduction | of the | Origin of Commerce, | from the earliest accounts, | con-
taining | an History | of the | great commercial interests | of the | British
Empire, | to which is prefixed, | an introduction, | exhibiting | a view of the
ancient and modern state of | Europe; of the importance of our Colonies; |
and of the commerce, shipping, manu- | factures, fisheries, &c., | of | Great
Britain and Ireland; | and their influence on the landed interest. | with an |
Appendix, | containing | the modern politico-commercial geography of | the
several countries of Europe. | Carefully Revised, Corrected, and continued to
the year 1789, | By Mr. Coombe. | — | In six volumes. | Vol. I[-VI]. | — |
Dublin: | Printed by P. Byrne. | — | M.DCC.XC. 6 vols. 8°.

The treatment of the Whalefishery is chronological, and therefore runs through the work
and cannot be conveniently cited definitely. The references are generally brief, consisting of
summaries, necessarily at second-hand. Vols. i-iii contain the “ original part of the histori-
cal and chronological work of Mr. Anderson”’; vol. iv consists of the ‘‘Appendix” (pp. 1-208)
and “An Alphabetical and Chronological Index” (pp. 209-577) to Anderson’s work; vols. v
and vi contain the continuation by Mr. Coombe. The copious and well-arranged indexes
greatly facilitate reference to the subjects treated. [411.]

1790. “Bowens, Jac. Nauwkeurige beschryving der beroemde zeestad Oostende, van
haeren oorsprong af tot het jaar 1787. Brugge, J. de Busscher. 1790. 2 dln.
4°.”

‘“‘Zie aldaar: Oesterbank wanneer gemaakt. II, bl. 139. Reglementen raekende de vis-
scherijen binnen Oostende. I, bl. 21, 28, 30. II, 143. Acht walvisschen aangespoeld. I, bl.
17. Walvischvangst na Groenland, opgeregt te Brugge. II, bl. 37, 150.”

Not seen; title and comment from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 234, no. 3482. [412.]

1790-95. “‘DonnpvorrFr, Jon. Aug. Natur u. Kunst. Ein gemeinniitz. Lehr- u
Lesebuch. 4Bde. 8°. Leipzig, 1790-95.”

Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann. [413.]

1791. Anon.? [or JonG, H. DE, H. KorBet, and M. SauietH.] ‘‘Nieuwe Beschrijving
der Walvischvangst en der Haringvisscherij. Met XXII fraaije platen en
kaarten vercierd. Amsterdam, J. Roos, 1791. 4 dln. 4°.”

Not seen; from Bosgoed (op. cit., p. 250, no. 3584), who gives it as a new edition of ‘‘De
walvischvangst met veele bijzonderheden,” etc., 1784-86, q. v.

Scoresby gives this work as ‘‘door H. de Jong, H. Koebel, en M. Salieth.”—Arct. Reg., ii,
p. 153, note. There is a French translation by B. de Reste, Paris, 1799, entitled ‘‘ Histoire
des Péches,”’ etc., q. v. [414.]

1791. FAWKENER, W., and LoRDS OF THE COMMITTEE OF COUNCIL, etc. On the pro-
duction of Ambergris. A Communication from the Committee of Council ap-
pointed for the Consideration of all Matters relating to Trade and Foreign
Plantations; with a prefatory Letter from William Fawkener, Esq. to Sir Joseph
Banks Bart. P. R. S. SSA Trans. Lond., 1xxxi, pt. 1, art. ii, 1791, pp.
43-47,

Mainly a series of questions by the Council, with answers by Capt. Joshua Coffin,
examined by the Council in reference to the circumstances of his finding ambergris in a
Whale. [415.]

1791. Gumitta, J. Historia Natural, | Civil y Geografica | De las Naciones | Situadas
en las Riveras | Del Rio Orinoco, | Su Autor | El Padre Joseph Gumilla, |

480 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1791. GuMILLA, J.—Continued.
Misionero que fué de las Misiones del Orinoco, | Meta y Casanare. | Nueva Im-
presion: | Mucho mas correcta que las anteriores, y adornada con ocho | lémi-
nas finas, que manifiestan las costumbres y ritos de | aquellos Americanos. |
Corregido por el P. Ignacio Obregén, de los Clérigos Menores: | Tomo I. |
Barcelona: | En la Imprenta de Carlos Gibert y Tuté | Ato MDCCLXXXXI.
2 vols. sm. 4°. pp. i-xvi, 1-360, map and pll.
Variedad de peces y singulares industrias de los Indios para pescar; piedras y buesos medi-
cinales que se han descubierto en algunos pescados. Tom. i, cap. xxi, pp. 277-292.—Manati,
pp. 281-289. (See anted, edd. of 1745 and 1758.) [416.]
1791. [HutiLock, TyZack, JOHN WHEATLEY, and others.| [Accounts and Certificates
of taking Whales with the Gun-Harpoon.] < Trans. London Soc. Encour. Arts,
Man., and Com., ix, 1791, pp. 158-166. [417.]
1791. [LONDON Sootery, ete.| [Award of Premium for improved Gun Harpoon. ]
< Trans. London Soc. Encour. Arts, Man., and Com., ix, 1791, pp. 167, 168, pl. iv.
Account of ‘‘Mr. Charles Moore’s improved Harpoon Gun, with figures of the gun.” [418.]
1791. ‘‘Mearzs, J. Voyages | Made in the Years 1788 and 1789, | from China to the
N. W. coast of America: | with | an introductory narrative | of | a voyage |
Performed in 1786, from Bengal, | in the Ship Nootka. | To which are an-
nexed, | observations on the probable existence | of | a north west passage. |
And some account of | the trade between the north west coast of America |
and China; and the latter country and | Great Britain. | — | By John Meares,
Esq. | — | Vol. I [II]. | — | London: | printed at the Logographic Press; | and
sold by | J. Walter, No. 169, Piccadilly, oppesite Old Bond Street. | 1791. 2
vols. sm. 8vo. pp. i-xii, i-lxxii, 1-363, maps, pll. Vol. II, 2p. ll.,pp. 1-332 + 32
unpaged ll. (Appendix), maps.”
Not seen; title from Coues, Birds Col. Vall., App., 1878, p. 589. For reference to the ceto-
logical matter, see the French version under 1795. [419.]
1791. OVERBEEK, L. ‘‘Vinvis, gestrand tusschen Wijk aan Zee en Zandvoort. 1791.
Door L. Overbeek. br. folio.”
From Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 176, no. 2781. - [420.]
1791. REDACTEUR. Mémoire [par C. Cuvier] sur Vorgane de louie dans les cétacés.
p. 99. < Bull. de la Soc. philom., 1791, p. 99.

Notice. [421.]
1791 (cirea). SCHWEDIANER, —. [‘‘Ueber den Ursprung des Ambers.”] <Samml. zur
Phys. und Naturgesch., iii, (1791?), p. 336. Aus d. Phil. Trans., Ixxiii, pp. 226

et seqq.
Not seen; title based on a reference in Donndorff, Zool. Beytr., i, 1792, p. 777. voy
1792. BUFFON, [G. L. LECLERC DE]. Histoire | Naturelle | des | Quadrupedes.
| —| Par M. L. Compte de Buffon. | — | Tome septiéme. | Avec Planches.

| — | [Design.] Berne, | chez La Nouvelle Société Typographique. | — |
M.DCC.XCIf. 8°. ll. 2, pp. 5-296.
Les Phoques, les Morses et les Lamantins, pp. 136-203, Be xv-xvii. Le Dugong, pp. 181-
185. Le Lamantin, pp. 185-203, pl. xvii.
The text is the same as that of the original edition (1765, q. v.), with the omission of Dau-
benton’s anatomical observations. The additions made in the ‘“‘Supplément”’ (vol. vi, 1782)

are not included. [423.]
1792. DonNDORFF, J. A. Zoologische | Beytrige | zur | XIII. Ausgabe | des Linné-
ischen | Natursystems | von | Johann August Donndorff. | — | Erster Band. |
Die Siiugthiere. |— | Leipzig, | in der Weidmannschen Buchhandlung. |

1792. [Zweyter Band | Die Végel. | Erster Thiel, 1794. Zweyter Theil, 1795. ]
8°. pp. i-xx, 1-840, ll. 30.

Siebente [und letzte] Ordnung. Cete (Sdugende Seethiere), pp. 755-790. 1. Monodon Mo-
noceros, p. 755 (8. Spurius? Der Anarnak? p.760); ‘2. Balaena Mysticetus, p.761 (8. Islandica,
et y. Maior, p. 765); 3. B. Physalus, p.765; 4. B. Boops, p. 767; 5. B. Gibbosa, p. 769; 6. B
Musculus, p. 770; 7%. B. Rostrata, p. 772; 8. Physeter Catodon, p. 773; 9. P. Macrocephalua,

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 481

1792. Donnvorrr, J. A.—Continued.

p.774; 10. P. Microps, p.778; 11. P. Tursio, p.780; 12. Delphinus Phocaena, p.781; 13. D.
Delphis, p. 784; 14. D. Orca, p. 786; 15. D. Leucas, p. 789.

D. leucas, nom. sp. n. =D. albicans, Fabric.

Sirenia. All the then known Sirenians are arranged with the Walrus in the genus Triche-
chus, forming the second species, 7. Manatus, pp. 128-131. (424.]

For fullness and care in citation of bibliography this work is comparable with Erxleben’s

. Syst. Reg. Anim. No diagnoses are given of the species, but there is noteworthy commen-
tary in foot-notes.

1792. Kerr, Rosert. The | Animal Kingdom, | or | Zoological System, | of the
Celebrated | Sir Charles Linnzeus; | — | Class I. | Mammalia: | containing | a
complete Systematic Description, Arrangement, and Nomencla- | ture, of all
the known Species and Varieties of the Mammalia, | or Animals which give
suck to their Young; | being a translation of that part of the | Systema Na-
ture, | as lately published, with great improvements, | By Professor Gmelin
of Goettingen. | — | Together with | Numerous Additions from more recent
zoological writers, | and illustrated with Copperplates: | — | By Robert Kerr,
F. R. & A. SS. E. | Member of the Royal College of Surgeons, and of the Royal
Physical Society, | and Surgeon to the Orphan Hospital of Edinburgh. | — |
London: | Printed for J. Murray, N°. 32. Fleet-street; | and | R. Faulder,
Ne, 42. New Bond Street. | — | 1792. 4°. [Part I, Mammals. ] pp. i-xii, ll. 14,
pp. 1-400. The | Animal Kingdom, | or | Zoological System, | of the cele-
brated | Sir Charles Linnzus. | — | Vol. I, Part II. [Or] The | Animal King-
dom. | — | Class II. | Birds. 1.1, pp. 401-644, pll. 3?

* This is a rare work in American libraries. The only copy I have handled (that in the
library of the Boston Society of Natural History) is obviously imperfect, lacking pp. 433-468,
and apparently several of the plates, and ending abruptly with Corvus brachyurus (p. 376 of
Gmelin’s edition of the ‘‘Systema Naturz’’), with a catch-word for the next page. The plates
are unnumbered, and there is no list of them in the work, nor, apparently, any reference to
them in the text, so that the exact number cannot be given from the copy of the work at hand.
The figures on the plates, however, have numerals referring to the current number of the
species in the text. The work is an important one in respect to nomenclature, since a num-
ber of systematic names originated here which have been currently attributed to Shaw and
Turton. Cf. Oldfield Thomas, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., 5th ser., vol. iv, 1879, pp. 396-397.
Also, J. A. Allen, Hist. North Amer. Pinnipeds, 1880, p. 434.

It is noteworthy that a trinomial system of nomenclature was adopted by Kerr for the des-
ignation of varieties, as has recently been done by Schlegel, and still later by most American
ornithologists and mammalogists.

[Order] vii. Cete, pp. 355-365, spp. 785-808, pl. facing p. 355, spp. nn. 785, 796, 802, 805.

1. Monodon Monoceros, p. 355, fig.; 2. Balena Mysticetus, p. 356; Sa. B. Mysticetus groen-
landica, p. 356; 28. B. Mysticetus islandica (= Nordkapper, Egede, etc.), p. 357; 2y. B. Mysti-
cetus major, p. 357; 3. B. Physalis, p. 358; 4. B. Boops, p. 358; 5. B. gibbosa, p. 359; 5a. B.
gibbosa gibbo unico, p. 359; 58. B. gibboso gibbis sex, p. 359; 6. B. Musculus, p. 359; 7. B. ros-
trata, p. 360; 8. Physeter Catodon (= Beluga catodon), p. 360; 9. P. macrocephalus, p: 360, fig. ;
9a. P. macrocephalus niger, p. 369; 98. P. macrocephalus albicans (= Beluga catodon), p. 361;
10. P. microps, p. 361; 10a. P. microps falcidentatus, p. 361; 10 8. P. microps rectidenta-
tus, p. 362; 11. P. Tursio, p. 362; 12. Delphinus Phoceena, p. 362, fig.; 12a. D. Phocena
albus, p. 363; 128. D. Phocena fuscus, p. 363; 13. Delphinus Delphis, p. 363, fig.; 14. D.
Orca, p. 364; 14a. D. Orca ensidorsatus, p. 364; 15. Delphinus leucas, p. 364=15 spp. + 11
vair. [425.]

1792. WHEATLEY, JoHN. An Account of the Whales shot with the Harpoon-Gun, by
the undermentioned Harpooners, in the Ship Queen Charlotte, of London, under
my command, in Davis’s Straights this present year [1791]. < Trans. London
Soc. Encour. Arts, Man., and Com., x, 1792, pp. 238-241.

In the same connection is a list of premiums paid for the capture of Whaies with the har-
poon-gun in the year 1791 (p. 288), and certificates of capture relating to the same,(pp. 241-
245). [426.]

1793. Bett, Joun. Observations on throwing a Gun-Harpoon. < Trans. London Soc.
Encour. Arts, Man., and Com., xi, 1793, pp. 185-192, pl. v.

The “Observations” are preceded by a letter from Mr. Bell to the society and followed by
‘Description of the Plate of Mr. Bell’s improved Gun and Harpoon.” Fig. 1, the Gun fitted
for firing; fig. 2, the form of the Harpoon. [427.}

31GB

482 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1793. ‘‘DoNnNDoORFF, JoH. AUG.- Handbuch der Thiergeschichte. Nach den besten
Quellen u. neusten Beobachtungen zum gemeinniitz. Gebrauche. gr. 8°.
Leipzig, 1793.”

Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann. [428.]

1793. [LONDON SOCIETY, etc.] [Premium for] Gun for throwing Harpoons, [and for]
Taking Whales by the Gun-Harpoon. < Trans. London Soc. Encour. Arts,
Man., and Com., xi, 1793, pp. 335, 336.

These offers of premiums were annually renewed by the society for many years. See sub-
sequent volumes of the society’s Trans. [429.]

1793. “PasTEuR, J.D. Beknopte natuurlijke historie der zoogende dieren. Leyden,

Honkoop en Mortier, 1793. 3 dln. met pl. 89°.”
‘*Zie aldaar: iii, bl. 305-393: Zoogende waterdieren.”’
Not seen; title and comment from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 170, no. 2689. [430.]

1793, St. JOHN[DE CREVECEUR], J. HEcToR. Letters | froman | American Farmer, |
describing | certain provincial situations, | manners, and customs, | and con-

veying | some idea of the state | of the people of | North America. | — | Writ-
ten to a friend in England, | By J. Hector St. John, [de Créveceeur]. | A
Farmer in Pennsylvania. | — | Philadelphia: | From the Press of Matthew

Carey. | March 4,—M. DCC. XCIII. 12°. pp. i-vili, 9-240.

Substantially the same as the ed. prin., 1782, with, however, the omission of the maps and
the references to them. The ‘“‘letters” relating to the Nantucket Whalefishery, etc., are at
pp. 118-136. For the character of the matter see ed. of 1782. [431.]

1793. SINCLAIR, JOHN. The | Statistical Account | of | Scotland. | Drawn up from
the Communications | of the | Ministers | of the | Different Parishes. | — |
By Sir John Sinclair, Bart. | — | Volume Fifth. | ‘‘ Ad consilium de republica
dandum, caput est nosse rempublicam.” | Cicero de Orat. lib. ii. | — | Edin-
burgh: | printed and sold by William Creech; |... . [=5 lines, names of
other booksellers]. | — | M,DCC,XCIII. 8°. pp. i-vii, 1-591.

A “list of the different kinds of Fish, which are found in the river and frith of Clyde,”
pp. 535-538. A nominal list, including the following species of Cetaceans (p. 533): Blunt-
headed Whale, Physeter microps ; Grampus, or Bucker, Delphinus orca; Porpoise, or Pellock,
D. phocena. [432.]

1793-96. ‘‘ EBERT, Jou. Jac. Naturlehre (u. Naturgesch.) fiir die Jugend. 3 Bde.,
3 Aufl, 8°. Leipzig, 1793-96. (1,2 Aufl.,. 1776-87.)”
Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann. Cited by Donndorff and others. [433.1
1794. ANON. Progress of the Whale Fishery at Nantucket. < Coll. Mass. Hist. Soc.
for the year 1794, iii, 1794, p. 161.
A brief chronological history, 1690 to 1785. [434.]
1794. Macy, Z. A short Journal of the first settlement of the island of Nantucket,
with some of the most remarkable things that have happened since, to the
present time. By Zaccheus Macy. <Coll. Mass. Hist. Soc. for the year 1794,
iii, 1794, pp. 155-156 (7. e., 160).
Of the Whale Fishery, pp. 157, 158. A brief but important original account of the origin
of the Nantucket Whale-fishery. [4354]
1794. Pauuas, S. P., et J. B. LAMARCK: Voyages | du | Professeur Pallas, | dans
plusieurs Provinces | de Empire de Russie | et | dans l’Asie septentrionale; |
Traduits de allemand par le C. Gauthier | de la Peyronie. | Nouvelle édition, |
Revue et enrichie de Notes par les CC. Lamarck, profes- | seur de Zoologie au
Muséum national d’Histoire naturelle; | et Langlés, Sous-Garde des Manu-
scrits de la Biblio- | théque nationale, pour les Langues Arabe, Persane,

Tatare- | Mantchou, &c. | Tome Premier[-huiti¢me]. |— | A Paris, | Chez
Maradan, Libraire, rue du Cimetiére | André-des-Arcs, n°. 9. | — | L’An If de

la République [=1794]. 8vols.. 8°.

The title of vol. viii varies from the above by substitution of the following between ee
velle édition” and the number of the volume:

Appendix, | Contenant les descriptions des Animaux et des Végétaux obser-
vés | dans les Voyages du Professeur Pallas, et cités ou mentionnés | dans les

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 483

1794. PALuAs, S. P., et J. B. LamMarnck—Continued.
volumes précédens; | Avee des Notes et Observations par le C. Lamarck, |
Professeur de Zoologie au Muséum national d’Histoire naturelle.
“Description du Poisson blanc,” vol. vy, pp. 192-197 (par M. Pallas). ‘‘ Delphinus leucas
{Dauphin blanc], Le Bélouga de mer ou poisson blane, pl. lxxix,” vol. vxi, pp. 25, 26 (par M.
Lamarck), [436.]
1795. Forster, J. R. Faunula Indica | id est | Catalogus animalium | Indiae Orien-
talis | quae hactenus | Naturae curiosis | innotuerunt; | concinnatus | a |}
Joanne Latham, | Chirurgo Dartfordiae Cantii, | et | Hugone Davies, | pastore
in aber | provinciae Caernarvon, | Secundis curis editus, correctus et auctus |
a Joanne Reinholdo Forster, | LL. Med. et phil. D. et LL. AA. M. Med. Philos.
et imprimis Hist. Nat. | et Rei Metallicae. Prof. P. O. in Universitate | Lit-
teraria Halensi. | — | Halae ad Salam, | impensis Joannis Jacobi Gebaueri. |
CInIQCCLXXXXV. 2°. 11.3, pp. 1-38.
Ordo ix. Cete, p. 5=Trichechus Manatus, Trichechus Dugong. Phoca ursina, Delphinus
Phocaena, Delphinus Delphis. Merely a nominal list. [437.]
1795. HEARNE, S. A | Journey | from | Prince of Wales’s Fort in Hudson’s Bay, | to |
the Northern Ocean, | Undertaken | by order of the Hudson’s Bay Company, |
for the Discovery | of Copper Mines, A Northwest Passage, &c. | In the Years
1769, 1770, 1771, & 1772. | — | By Samuel Hearne. | — | London: | printed for
A. Strahan and T. Cadell: | And Sold by T. Cadell Jun. and W. Davies, (Suc-
cessors to | Mr. Cadell,) in the Strand. | 1795. 4°. pp. i-xliv, 1-458, map and
pli. i-viii.
Sea Unicorn, pp. 391, 392. Black Whale (three killed in 20 years as far south as Churchill
River), pp. 392, 393. White Whales, pp. 393-395.
There is a later edition, Dublin, 1796, 8°. Also translations in French (Paris, 1799, 2 vols.,
8°), Dutch (Hague, 1798, 2 vols., 8°), and German (Berlin and Halle, 1797, 8°). (See Sabin,
Bibl. Amer, viii, pp. 188, 189, nos. 31181-31186). [438.]
1795. MEARES, J. Voyages | de Ja Chine | a la céte Nord-Oust | d’Amerique, | faits
dans les années 1788 et 1789; | Précédés de la relation dun autre Voyage exé-
cuté en | 1786 sur Je vaisseau le Nootka, parti du Bengale; | D’un Recueil
Observations sur la Probabilité d’un | Passage Nord-Ouest; | Et d’un Traité
abrégé du Commerce entre la Céte Nord-Ouest et la Chine, etc. etc. | Par le
Capitaine J[ohn]. Meares, Commandant | le Vaisseau la Felice. | Traduits de
VAnglois | Par J. B. L. J. Billecocq, Citoyen Frangais. | Avec une Collection
de Cartes géographiques, Vues, Marin | Plans et Portraits, gravés en taille-
douce. | — | Tome premier[-troisitme]. |—| A Paris, | Chez F. Buisson,
Libraire, rue Hautefeuille, n°. 20. | — | An 3°. [1795] de la République. 3 vols.
8°. Vol.i, pp. i-xxiv, 1-391. Vol. ii, 1.2, pp.1-386. Vol. iii, II. 2, pp. 1-371.
La péche de la baleine est la branche de commerce la plus avantageuse qu’ofire la cote
nord-ouest d’Amerique, vol. i, pp. 163-166. Description de la maniére dont les naturels de
Nootka tuent la baleine, ete., vol. iii, pp. 21-24.
The copy of this work examined (Harvard College Libr.) lacks the collection of maps,
views, ete., called for in the title. [439.]
1795. ‘‘Savary, J. Dictionnaire universel de commerce, d’histoire naturelle et des
artsetmetiers. Nouvelle édition. Copenhague, C. A. Philibert. 1795. 5 dln.

folio.”
«|... Péche de la Baleine, i, bl. 310-316.”
Not seen; title from Bosgoed, op. cit., pp. 229, 247, nos. 3394, 3554. [440.]
1795. Waxcortt, S. A | New and complete | Natural History | of |
Quadrupeds, Reptiles, | Fossils, | Winds,
Beasts, Insects, Minerals, Sun,
Birds, Waters, Vegetables, Moon,
Fishes, Earth, Shells, Planets, &c., &e.

Containing | a New History and Description | of the several Classes and Spe-
cies of Animals which inhabit | The Air, the Earth, and the Water, | in the
several parts of the Universe. |. . . [=21 lines, giving further description of

A484

BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1795. WaucotTt, §.—Continued.

contents. ] | Forming an | Universal Display of Nature, | Animate and Iniani-
mate. |... [=3 lines]. | — | By Sylvanus Walcott, Esq., F. R. S. | Assisted
by many gentlemen of eminence. | — | Elegantly embellished with a superb
group of folio prints: | Representing several Thousand different Objects...
[=2 lines]. | — | London: | Printed for Alex. Hogg, No. 16, in Paternoster-
Row, and sold by all the Booksellers of | Bath, Bristol, . . . [=8 lines, names
of other towns in alphabetical order]. Nodate. fol. pp. 1-542, pll. i-clix [?]

The plates are not nearly all numbered; the number of the last one is clix. There is no
date on the title-page, but at the bottom of the frontispiece page is engraved in small letters:
Published March 21, 1795, by Alex. Hogg, No. 16 Paternoster Row.

Book IIt. A New and Complete History and Description of Fishes in general, pp. 200-
253, pll. lviii, lxi, Ixii, 4-3 pll. unnumbered. Chap. I. Natural History of Fishes of the Ceta-
ceous kind, viz.: The Whale and its varieties, the Cachalots, the Dolphin, the Grampus, and
the Porpus, pp. 202-206. i. Greenland Whale, pp. 202-204, pl. lxii, fig. 66. 2. Pike-headed
Whale, p. 204. 3. Round-lipped Whale, p. 204. 4. Cachalot, or Spermaceti Whale, pp. 204,
205. 5. Great-headed Cachalot. 6. Round-headed Cachalot, p. 205. '%. Dolphin, 8. Gram-
pus, and 9. Porpus, pp. 205, 206. There is a figure of the Narwhal, but apparently no descrip-
tion. The work is of most interest as a literary curiosity, being a popular compilation, of no
scientific value. [441.]

1796. ABERNETHY, J. Some particulars in the Anatomy of a Whale. < Philos. Trans,

Lond., [\xxxvi], pt. 1, art. ii, 1796, pp. 27-33.
On the structure and function of the lymphatic glands. [442.] °

1796. ‘‘PossELT, K. F. Ueber den Grénliindischen Wallfischfang, herausgegeben von

A, Niemann. Kiel,1796. 89°.”
Not seen; from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 246, no. 3546. [443.]

1796. STEDMAN, J.G. Narrative, | of a five years’ expedition against the | Revolted

Negroes of Surinam, | in Guiana, on the Wild Coast of | South America; | from
the year 1772, to 1777: elucidating the History of that Country, and | describ-
ing its Productions, Viz. | Quadrupeds, Fishes, Reptiles, Trees, Shrubs, Fruits,
& Roots; | with an account of the Indians of Guiana, & Negroes of Guinea. |
By Capt®. John]. GLabriel]. Stedman. | Illustrated with 80 elegant Engravy-
ings, from the drawings made by the Author. | — | Vol.1.[-I1]. | — | [Vi-
gnette.] .... [= quotation, 7 lines]. London. Printed for J. Johnson, S‘.
Paul’s Church Yard, & J. Edwards, Pall Mall. 1796. 2 vols. 4°. Engr.
title-page, maps and plates.

Manatee, vol. ii, p. 175, fig. pl. facing p. 176 (general description). [444.]

1796-1810. BLUMENBACH, J. F. Abbildungen | naturhistorischer Gegenstiinde | her-

ausgegeben | von | Joh. Fried. Blumenbach. | — | Nte 1-100. | — | Gottingen |
bey Heinrich Dieterich. | 1810 | [1796-1810]. 8°.

Cetaceen. No. 44, Monodon narhwal, text,2pp. ‘‘Die Abbildung stellt denjenigen Nar-
hwal vor, der 1736 in der Miindung der Elbe gestrandet war, und ist aus einem periodischen
Blatte jener Zeit, den Hamburgischen Berichten von gelehrten Sachen, genommen.”

No. 74. Balcena boops on plate, B. rostrata in text. Original figure of a specimen 52 fect
long stranded on the coast of Holland, between Sandfort and Wyk op Zee, in Dec., 1791. Also
figure of the head of another example, copied from Sibbald’s ‘‘ Phalainologia.”’

No. 84. Physeter macrocephalus. ‘‘ Hier diese Abbildung ist von dem meisterhaften srossen
aber seltnen Blatte genommen, worauf der vortrefiliche Kiinstler J. Saenredam den 60 Fuss
langen Pottfisch der im Dec. 1601 am Ufer yon Beverwyk gestrandet war, nach dem Leben
vorgestellt hat.” i

No. 94. Balena mysticetus, “aus Hesel Gerard’s descriptio geographica transitus supra
terras Americanas in Chinam.”

No. 95. Delphinus delphis. ‘‘Die Abbildung ist von einer trefflichen Zeichnung unsers
unvergesslichen G. Forster’s genommen.”

Higner Tafel ist mit zwei Seiten von Texte versehen: [445.]

1797. ABERNETHY, Jou. EHinige Eigenheiten in der Zergliederung des Wallfisches.

<Keil’s Arch. fiir Physiol., ii, 1797, pp. 232-239.
Uebersetzung aus der Phil. Trans. roy. Soc. London for 1796, pt. 1, pp. 27 et seqq. [446.]

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 485

797. “BORKHAUSEN, Mor. Batu. Deutsche Fauna, oder kurzgefasste Naturge-
schichte der Thiere Deutschlands. 1Thl. Siugethiere und Vogel. 68°.
Frankfurt a. M. 1797.”

Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann. [447.]
1797. Cuvier, G. Sur les narines des cétacés. < Bull. des Sci. par la Soc. philom.
de Paris, i, 1797, pp. 26-29. [448.]

1797. [Cuvirr, G.] Mémoire sur Vorgane de Vouie dans les Cétacés. < Bull. des
Sci. par la philom. de Paris, i, 1797, p. 99.
Extrait. [449.]
1798. CoLNETT, JAMES. A | Voyage | to the | South Atlantic | and round | Cape
Horn | into the | Pacific Ocean, | for the purpose of extending the | Sperma-
ceti Whale Fisheries, | and other objects of Commerce, by ascertaining | the
Ports, Bays, Harbours, and Anchoring Berths, | in certain Islands and Coasts
in those Seas, | at which the ships of the British merchants might be refit-
ted. | — | Undertaken and performed | By Captain James Colnett, | of the
Royal Navy, in the ship Rattler. | — | London: | Printed for the Author, | by
W. Bennett, Marsham Street, Westminster. |... . [3 lines, names of book-
sellers]. |— |1798. 4°. pp. i-iv, i-vi, i-xviii, 1-179, maps and plates.
Contains passim references to Whales seen or taken at various points, etc. Also a plate
giving an outline figure of ‘‘ Physeter, or Spermaceti Whale, Drawn by Scale, from one killed
on the coast of Mexico, August, 1793, and hoisted in on Deck,”’ giving the topography of the
animal with reference to manner of cutting in, ete. There is also a half-page of descriptive
text (engraved on the plate), with also reference to its food, habits, ete. The figure has been
many times copied in works relating to Whaling. [450.]
1798. Cuvier, [G.] Ueber die Nasenlécher und das Geruchsorgan der Cetaceen;
aus einer yom B, Cuvier im Nationalinstitut vorgelesenen Abhandlung. Mag.
Eneyel. < Voigts Mag. der Naturkunde, i, St. 3, 1798, pp. 34-40.
; Uebersetzung aus Magas. encycl. de Millin, iii, 1797, pp. 299. [451.]
1798. CuviER, G. Tableau | élémentaire | de Histoire naturelle | des Animaux. |
Par G. Cuvier, | de l'Institut national de France, |... . [titles, 7 lines]. | — |
A Paris, | Baudouin, Imprimeur du Corps législatif et de | ’Iustitut national,
place du Carrousel, N°. 662. | An 6. [=1798.] 8°. pp. i-xvi, 1-710, pll. i-xiv.
Des Mammifeéres, pp. 83-179: Mammiféres Amphibies (pp. 170-173) = Pinnipedia + Sirenia.
Sirenia: 1. Trichecus dugong, p. 172; 2. Trichecus manatus, p. 173.
Mammiféres Cétacés = Cetacea (pp. 173-179): 1. Delphinus phocena; 2. D. delphis;
3. D. orca, p. 175; 4. Physeter macrocephalus (=‘‘Le cachalot trumpo, Bonnaterre, Encycl.,
planches des cétacés, pl. 8, f.1”); 5. P. maximus, sp. n. (=‘‘idem., ibid., pl. 7, fig. 2”’), p. 176;
6. Balena mysticetus, L., p. 177; '7. B. physalus ; 8. Monodon, p.178.
Physeter maximus, sp. n. [452.]
1798. [Lonpon Society, etc.] [Premiums offered for ‘‘Taking Porpoises” and for
“Oil from Porpoises.”] < Trans. London Soc. Encour. Arts, Man., and Com.,
xvi, 1798, pp. 84, 85. :
These offers of premiums were annually renewed for a considerable period. See later vols.
of these Trans. [453.]
1798. THuNnBURG, C. P. Beskrifning | pa | Svenske Djur. | — | Férsta Classen, | om |
Mammalia | eller Daggande Djuren, | af | Carl Peter Thunburg, | Riddare af
Kongl. Maj: ts Wasa-Orden, | Medicinze och Botanices Professor | i Upsala. |
[Vignette.] | — | Upsala, | Tryckt hos J. F. Edman, K. Acad. Boktr. | 1798.
8°, ll. 6, pp. 1-100.
Cete, pp. 96-100. 1. Balena mysticetus, p. 96; 2. B. physalus, p. 97; 3. Physeter macro-
cephalus, p. 98; 4. Delphinus phocena; 5. D. Orca, p. 99. [454. ]
1799. Anon. ‘Histoire des péches, des découvertes et des établissemens des hollan-
dois dans les mers dn Nord. Onuvrage traduit du Hollandois par B. de Reste.
Avec des notes, (28) cartes et figures. Paris, Vve. Nyon, 1799. 3dIn. 8°.”
“*Eene vertaling van het werk: De Walvischvangst, Amst. 1784 [qg. v.]. Vermeerderd met
aanteekeningen eu cene hislorische verhandeling over Groenland en IJsland, volgens Crantz
{sic], Egede, de la Peyrére, Horrebow e. a.”’
Not seen; title and comment from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 244, no, 3528, [455.]

A86 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. .

1800. Burron, [G. L.] Lecierc [Compte de, et C. S. SonNINI]. Histoire Natu-
relle, | Generale et Particuliere, | Par Leclere de Buffon; | Nouvelle Edition,
accompagnée de Notes, et dans laquelle | les Supplémens sont insérés dans le
premier texte, 4 la | place qui leurconvient. L’on y a ajouté Vhistoire | natn-
relle des Quadrupédes et des Oiseaux découverts | depuis la mort de Buffon,
celle des Reptiles, des Poissons, | des Insectes et des Vers; enfin, histoire des
Plantes dont | ce grand Naturaliste n’a pas eu le tems de s’occuper. | Ouvrage
formant un Cours complet d’Histoire Naturelle; | Redige Par C. 8. Sonnini, |
Membre de Plusieurs Sociétés Savantes. | Tome Trente-Quatriéme. | [ Mono-
eram.] A Paris, | de L’Imprimerie de F. Dufart. | — | An VIII. [1800.] 8°.
]]. 2. pp. 1-324, 1.1.

Le Dugon, pp. 184-189 (note par Sonnini, p. 184). Le Lamantin, pp. 190-196 (note par Son-
nini, p. 191). Le Grand Lamantin du Kamtschatka, pp. 197-211 (note par Sonnini, p. 197).
Le Grand Lamantin des Antilles, pp. 212-226 (néte par Sonnini, p. 212). Le grand Lamantin
de la mer des Indes, pp. 327-330 (note par Sonnini, p. 327). Le Petit Lamantin d’Amérique, pp.
231-239 (note par Sonnini, pp. 238, 239). Le Petit Lamantin du Sénégal, pp. 240-246).

The matter here given is that of the original edition (1765, q. v.), followed by that of the
‘“Supplément” (vol. vi, 1782, g. v.), with notes on the nomenclature of the species by Sonnini.

[456.]

1800. LaTREILLE, [P. A.]. Exposition methodique des Quadrupédes, Specialement
mentionnés dans cette édition de Histoire Naturelle de Buffon. < Hist. nat.
de Buffon, édit. de Sonnini, xxxvi, an VIII (1800), pp. 251-321.

Onziéme Ordre. Les Cétacées, pp. 288, 289. Genn.: Manatus, Delphinus, Physeter, Monodon.,
Balena. [457.]

1800. Marum, M. van. Beschryving van het Bekkeneel van een jongen Walvisch,
geplaatst in het Naturalien Cabinet van deeze maatschappy. <Natuurk. Verh.
van de Holl. Maatsch. der Wetensch., Haarlem, i. Deel, ii. Stuk, pp. 199-202, pl. v.

Description and figure of a skull of a newly-born Balena mysticetus. [458.]
1800. Nott, 8. B. J. Tableau historique | de la Péche | de la Baleine; | Par S. B, J.
Noél, |... . [= titles, 7 lines]. | — | A Paris, | Chez Fuchs, Libraire, maison
de Cluny, | rue des Mathurins. |— | Thermidor an VIII. [1800.] 8°. pp.
1-108.

Vues générales sur l’antiquité de la péche de la Baleine, pp. 3-22. Etat présent des péches
de la Baleine chez les diverses nations d’Europe et d’Amérique, qui s’en occupeut, pp. 23-52.
Réflexions sur les moyens de ranimer en France cette Wranche précieuse d’économie maritime,
pp. 53-96. Preuves et Tableaux relatifs 4 la péche de la Baleine, pp. 97-108. [459. |

An historical work of well-known value.

1800. Rrrzrus, A. J. Faunae Suecicae | a Carolo & Linné Equ. | inchoatae | Pars
prima | sistens | Mammalia, Aves, Amphibia | et Pisces Sueciae | quam | recog-
novit, emendavit et auxit | Andreas Joannes Retzius | in Academia Lundensi
Historiae Naturalis, | Oeconomiae et Chemiae Professor R. O. | — | Cum Tabula
aeri incisa. | — | Lipsiae MDCCC. | Apud Siegtried Lebrecht Crusium. 8°.
pp. i-x, 1-362, pli. col. (Pringilla flavirostris et F. lutensis).

Cete, pp. 48-51. 1. Monodon Monoceros, p. 48; 2. Balaena Mysticetus; &. B. Physalus,
p. 49; 4. Physeter macrocephalus; 5. Delphinus Phocaena, p. 50; 6. D. Orca, p. 51. [460.]

1800. V., C. Sur les Ossemens fossiles de la Montagne de St. Pierre, pres Maéstricht,
par Adr. Camper. < Bull. de la Soc. philom. de Pais, ii, no. 42, an 8 de la Re-
pub. (1800), p. 142.

Extrait de cette mémoire, signé ‘‘C. V.” [461.]

1800-01. SHaw, GrorGE. General Zoology | or | Systematic Natural History | by |
George Shaw, M.D. F.R.S. &c. | With plates | from the first Authorities and
most select specimens | Engraved principally by | M'. Heath. | [ Vignette. ]
Vol. I[-II, each in 2 parts.] Part 1. | Mammalia. | — | London Printed for G.
Kearsley, Fleet Street. | 1800[-1801]. 2vols.in 4 parts. 8°. The whole work
comprises 14 yols., 1800-1826.

Vol. i, pt. 1, 1800, 1. 1 (engr. title-page), pp. i-xiii, 1. 1, pp. 1-248, pll. i-Ixix + Ixvini*; pt. 2, 1800,
pp. i-viii, 249-552, pll. Ixx-exxi. Vol. ii, pt. 1, 1801, 1. 1 (engr. title-page), pp. i-vi, 1-226, pll.
exxii-clxy; pt. 2, 1801, pp. i-vi, 1. 1, pp. 229-560, pll. clxvi-cexxxii- xciv*.

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 487

1800-01. SHaw, Grorar—Continued.

Trichechus, Walrus [=Sirenia + ‘‘Arctic Walrus”’], vol. i, pt. 1, 1800, pp. 233-248, 1. Tri-
chechus Dugong, p. 239; %. Trichechus Borealis [=Ithytina borealis mainly), pp. 240-244; 3.
Trichechus Australis [= Manatus australis], pp. 244, 245, pl. Ixix; 4. Trichechus Manatus, pp.
245-248 (includes also, as ‘‘var.,”’ Trichechus Olusii, from the West Indies; V'richechus Ama-
zonius, from South America; and Trichechus ? Hydropithecus, or Steller’s ‘‘Sea-Ape.”

Order Cete. Whales, or Fish-formed Mammalia, vol. ii, pt. 2, 1801, pp. 471-560, pll. eexxv-
ecxxxii. 1. Mfonodon Monoceros, pp. 473-476, pl. eexy, animal and skull; 2. Monodon Spu-
rius, pp. 476, 477, from Fabricius; 3. Balwna IMysticetus, pp. 478-499, pl. cexvi, animal—plate
and most of the text from Martens; 4. Balena Physalus. pp. 490-491, pl. ecxxvii, lower fig.,
animal, from Martens; 5. Balena Boops, pp. 492-494, pl. cexxvii, lower fig.; 6. Balena
Gibbosa, p.494; '7- Balena Musculus, p. 495; 8. Baleena Rostrata, p. 496; 9. Physeter Macro-
cephalus, pp. 497-500, pl. eexxviii, animal, two figg., from Sehreber; 10. Physeter Catodon, p.
501; 11. Physeter Microps, p. 502; 12. Physcter Tursio, p. 503; 13. Delphinus Phocena, pp.
504-506, pll. cexxix, lower fig., animal, pl. cexxx, animal laid open to show internal organs, pl.
xxxi, skull, skeleton, and fore limb; 14. Delphinus Delphis, pp. 507-512, pl. cexxix, upper
fig., animal; 15. Delphinus Orca, p. 513, pl. cexxxii, lower fig., animal; 16. Delphinus Bidens,
p. 514, from Hunter; 17. Delphinus Tostratus, p. 514; 18. Delphinus Leucas, pp. 515, 516,
pl. cexxxii, upper fig., animal. Appendix to Whales. pp. 517-560, abridged version of Hunter's
celebrated memoir on the anatomy of Whales. See 1787. IUNTER, J.

Delphinus bidens, p. 514, sp. n.—=Bottle-nose Whale of Dale, hence Delphinus bidentatus,
Bonnaterre, 1789; Delphinus rostratus, p. 514, sp. n., locality unuknown, but ‘‘supposed to
inhabit the Indian Ocean’”’; species indeterminable.

The history of the Sirenia and Cetacea is, like most of that part of the work relating to
Mammals, purely a compilation. {451.]

1802. Anon. A Calculation of the State of the Cod and Whale Fisheries, belonging
to Massachusetts in 1763: copied from a Paper published in 1764. <Coll.
Mass. Hist. Soc., viii, 1802, pp. 202, 203.

A statistical table, less than a page in length. The following is all that relates to Whale-
fishing: ‘'180 sail of Whale-fishing vessels, the exportation to Great Britain amounting, in oil
and bone, to £123,366 06” (p. 203). [462.]

1802. Burron, [G. L.] LecLerc Dg, [ef C.S. Sonnin1]. Histoire naturelle, | générale
et particuliére, | par Leclere de Buffon; | Nouvelle Edition, accompagnée de
Notes, et dans laquelle | les Supplémens sont insérés dans le premier texte, 4
la | place qui leur convient. L’on y aajouté Vhistoire | naturelle des Qnadru-
pédes et des Oiseaux découverts | depuis la mort de Buffon, celle des Reptiles,
des Poissons, | des Insectes et des Vers; enfin, l’histoire des Plantes, dont | ce
grand Naturaliste n’a pas eu le tems de s’occuper. | Ouvrage formant un Cours
complet d’Histoire Naturelle; rédigé par C. 8S. Sonnini, | Membre de plusieurs
Sociétés savantes. | Tome trente-quatriéme. [Les Phoques, les Morses, et les
Lamantins.] | [Monogram.] A Paris, | de ’Imprimerie de I’. Dufart | — |
An X. [1802]. 8°. Il. 2, pp. 1-316, pll. cexxxii—cexxxy.

A reissue of the An VIII edition, with only, so far as relates to the body of the work, a
change of date on the title-page, but the ‘“‘Exposition méthodique” by Latreille (see 1800.
LATREILLE) is printed in smaller type and occupies 7 less pages (pp. 251-314), thus giving to
the volume a different collation. [463.

1802. “Giiipert, J. Emm. Abrégé du systéme de la Nature de Linné; histoire
des Mammirzétres ou des Quadrupedes et Cétacés; contennant 1° la tra-
duction libre du texte de Linné et de Gmelin; 2° ’extrait des observations de
Buffon, Brisson, Pallas et autres céiébres zoologistes; 3° anatomie comparée
des principales espéces; le tout relatif aux Quadrupedes et aux Cétacés les
plus curieux et les plus utiles. Avee porir.et 18 pl. in-8. Lyon, an X (1802),
ou 1805, Matheron et Co.”

Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann. [464. }

1802. Kirin, J.T. ‘‘Ichthyologia, seu Historiae piscinm naturalis quinque missus.
Cui accedit Ichthyologia MWeiniana enodata, sive index rerum ad Historian

, piscium naturalem, cum synonymis recentissimorum systematicorum Artedi,
Linnaei, Gmelini, Blochii, ete. explicatam. Lipsix, in libraria Gleditschiana.

1802. 4°. Met 53 platen.”
Not seen; title from Losgoed, op. cit., p. 10, no. 113. [465.]

A88s BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1802. OzERETSKOVSKY, N. De speciebus systematicum genus Trichechi constituenti-
bus. <(Nov. Act. Acad. Scien. imp. Petropolitane, xiii, 1802, pp. 371-375.
Chiefly about the relationship of the Walrus, Steller’s Sea Cow, and the Dugong. _[4€6.
1803. CAMPER, PIERRE. Qiuvres | de Pierre Camper, | qui ont pour objet | histoire]
naturelle, { la physiologie | et ’anatomie comparée. | [| Trad. par Henri J. Jan-
sen.] |— | Tome premier [-troisitme]. |—]|A Paris, | Chez H. J. Jansen,
rue des postes, No. 6, | prés de Vestrapade. | — | An XI.—1803. 3 vols. 8°.
Vol. i, pp- 1-civ, 1-392; vol. ii, pp. 1-503; vol. iii, pp. 1-502. Avee une
Atlas des planches en-fol.
Conjectures sur les ee trouvées deme Ja Montagne de §.-Pierre prés de Mexs-
tricht, tom. i, pp. 357-377, pll. vi, vii, (Vertébres et dents de Cetacés, ete.). Du Dugon du
Comte de Buffon, tom. iii, pp. 479-491, pl. vii, figg. 2, 3, animal. [467.]
1803. ‘‘GRUBER,J.G. Beschreibung von Grénland und Spitsbergen mit den Wundern
der Natur- und Menschenwelt um den Nordpol. Zurich und Leipzig, 1803. 4°.”
Not seen; title from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 237, no. 3468. [468 ]
1803. RoxBurGuH, [W.] An account of a new Species of Delphinus, An Inhabitant of
the Ganges. < Asiatic Researches, vii, 1803, pp. 170-174, pl. iii.
Delphinus gangeticus, sp. n., p. 171. [469.]
1804. Bory DE Sr. VINCENT, J. B. G. M. Voyage | dans | les quatre principales
iles | des mers d’Afrique, | fait par ordre du Gouvernement, | pendant les an-
nées neuf et dix de la | République (18 Avec l’Histoire de la ‘Tra-
versée du Capitaine Baudin jusqu’an Port- | Louis de Ile Maurice. | Par
J[Lean]. BLaptiste]. GLeorge]. M[arie]. Bory de S*-Vincent, | Officier d’Ktat-
major; Naturaliste en chef sur la | Corvette le Naturaliste, dans VExpédition
de | Déconvertes commandée par le Capitaine Baudin. | Avee la Collection de
58 Planches, grand in-4°., dessinées sur les lieux par VAuteur, | et gravées
en taille-douce | Tome Premier [Seconde et Troistme]. | — | A Paris, | Chez
F. Buisson, Imprimeur-Libraire, rue ae n°. 20. | An XIII. (1804.)
8°. Tom. 1'¢, pp. i-xvi, 1-412; tom. 2°, 1]. 2,pp. 1-431; tom. 3°, ll. 2, pp. 1-473.
Cétacés, passim: Delphinus phocena, de se chasse aux poissons volans et de se meceurs,
etc., tom. i, pp. 88,89; description de dauphin [= Delphinus Boryi, Desm.?], pp. 104-106; Ba-
lena physalus, Linn., pp. 145, 146; ‘tun bane de dauphins... plusieurs milliers,” tom. iii, p.
293; dauphins trés-gros, pp. 293, 294.
Contains nothing of importance relating to Cetaceans. [470.]
1804. Fr—p. [=F rortiep, L. F. von]. Tabelle der Unterordnungen, Geschlechten und
Gattungen der Wallfische. Von Lacepede. < Voigt’s Mag. der Naturk., vii,
1804, pp. 445-450.
‘* Aus einem so eben erschiencnen Werke von Lacepede, und vom Hrn. Prof. Froriep mit-
getheilt.”"—Siehe op. cit., p. 475. [471.]
1804. Lactrrpr, [BERN. GERM. ETIENNE]. Histoire naturelle | des Cétacées, |
dediée a Anne-Caroline La Cepéde: | par le Citoyen La Cepede|.... [=ti-
tles, 11 lines.] | —|A Paris, | Chez Plassan, Imprimeur-Libraire, | Rue de
Vaugiard, N° 1195. | —| L’an XII de la République [1804]. 4°. pp. i-xsliv,
1-329, pll. i-xvi. (PU. vi, vii, xi, xii, xiv, xvi, désignées d’aprés nature. )
Dédicace, p. vy. Table des Articles, pp. vi-viii. Avertissement, et explication de quelques
planches, pp. ix,x. Vue général des Cétacées, pp. xi-xxxili. Tableau des ordres, genres et
espéces de Cétacées, pp. xxxv—xliy. ;
Les Baleines, pp. 1-113. 1. La Baleine franche (Balena mysticetus), pp. 1-102, pl. i, fig. 1
(Vaprés Martens). 2. La Baleine Nordcaper (Balena nordeaper), pp. 103-110, pll. ii, iii,
(d’aprés Bachstrom; fig. = Balena mysticetus). 3. La Baleine noueuse (Lalena nodosa),
pp. 111,112. 4. La Baleine bossue (Galena gibbosa), p. 113.
Les Baleinoptéres, pp. 114-141. 5. La Baleinop:ére gibvar (Balenoptera gibbar), pp. 114-
119, pl. i, fiz. 2 (d@’aprés Martens). 6G. La Baleinoptére jubarte (Balenoptera jubaries), pp.
120-125, pl. iv, fig. 1. 7%. La Baleinoptére rorqual (Balenoptera rorqual), pp. 126-133, pl. i,
fig. 3, animal, pl. vy, fig. 1 (‘‘ gravé d’aprés un dessin de Jacques Quine), pl. vi, téte osseuse,
pl. viii, vertébres cervicales et autres vertébres et fanons (pll. vi-vili d’aprés nature). S-
La Baleinoptére museau-pointu (Balenoptera acute-rostrata), pp. 134-141, pl. vill, figg. 1, 2,
animal, fig. 3, machoire supérieure.

.

ALLENS BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 489

1804. Laciekpr, [Bern. Germ. Erinnne]J—Continued.

Les Narwals, pp. 142-163. 9. Le Narwal vulgaire (Narwalus vulgaris), pp. 142-158, pl. iv,
fiy. 3. 10. Le Narwal microcéphale (Narwalus microcephalus), pp. 159-162, pl. v, fig. 2, ani-
mal, d aprés un dessin par W. Brand), pl. ix, fig. i, téte osseuse. 11. Le Narwal Anderson
(Narwalus Andersonianus), p. 163. .

Les Anarnaks, p. 164. 12. L’Anarnak groenlandoise (Anarnak Groenlandicus), p. 164.

Les Cachalots, pp. 165-218. 1:3. Le Cachalot macrocéphale (Catodon macrocephalus), pp.
165-211, pl. x, fig. 1, animal (Vaprés Bonnaterre), pl. xi, téte osseuse, pl. xii, vertébres et
edte (pll. xi, xii d’aprés nature). 14. Le Cachalot trumpo (Catodon trumpo), pp. 212-215, pl.
x, fig. 2 (d’aprés Robertson). 15. Le Cachalot svineval (Catodon svineval), pp. 216, 217, pl.
ix, fig. 2, téte osseuse [= Globiocephalus melas]. 16. Le Cachalot blanchatre (Catodon albi-
cans) [= Beluga catodon], p. 218.

Les Physales, pp. 219-226. 17. Le Physale eylindrique (Physalus cylindricus), pp. 219-
226, pl. ix, fig. 3 (d’aprés Anderson).

Les Physétéres, pp. 227-242. 18. Le Physétére microps (Physeter microps), pp. 227-235.
19. Le Physétére orthodon (Physeter orthodon), pp. 236-238. 20. Le Physétére mular (hy-
seter mular), pp. 239-242.

Les Delphinaptéres, pp. 243-249. 21. Le Delphinaptére béluga (Delgkina eters beluga),
[= Beluga catodon], pp. 243-248. 22. Le Delphinaptére sénedette (Delphinapterus sene-
detta), p. 249.

Les Dauphins, pp. 250-317. 23. Le Dauphin vulgaire (Delphinus vulgaris), pp. 250-286, pl.
xiii, fig. 1, animal, pl. xiv, fig. 1, téte. 2@4. Le Dauphin marsouin (Delphinus phocena), pp.
287-297, pl. xiii, fig. 2; pl. xiv, fig. 2, squelette (pl. xiv d’aprés nature). ‘25. Le Dauphin orque
(Delphinus orca), pp. 298-301, pl. xv, fig. 1, pl. xvi, crane (danrés nature). 26. Le Dauphin
gladiateur (Delphinus gladiator), pp. 302-305, pl. v, fig. 3. @@. Le Dauphin Nesarnack (Del-
phinus nesarnack), pp. 307, 308, pl. xv, fig.2. 28. Le Dauphin diodon (Delphinus diodon), pp.
309,310. 2%. Le Dauphin ventru (Delphinus ventricosus), p. 311, pl. xv, fig. 3 (d’aprés Hunter).
30. Le Dauphin férés (Delphinus feres), pp. 312,313. 31. Le Dauphin de Duhamel (Delphi-
nus Duhamel), pp. 314, 315. 32. Le Dauphin de Péron (Delphinus Peronii), p.316. 33. Lo
Dauphin de Commerson (Delphinus Commersoni), pp. 317, 318.

Les Hypéroodons, pp. 319-324. 34. L’Hypéroodon butskopf (Hyperoodon butskopf), pp.
319-324, pl. xv, fig. 3

Table SInnAUGtGne: pp. 325-329.

The text is an elaborate compilation; the figures of the animals, with the two or three
above-noted exceptions, are copies; all the osteological figures, except one, are original.
Viewed in the light of to-day, the work is astriking commentary on the poverty of the author's
resources, and on the inexact information of the times in all that related to the history of
Cetacea. Compared with Bonnaterre’s work (1789), the number of species is greatly increased,
while the generic nomenclature differs to a very large degree, through the introduction of new
genera and the substitution of new names for others. The prominent feature is therefore the
classification, which, considering the state of Cetological knowledge at this time, is entitled to
praise. Its weakness lies in the recoznition of a large number of species now known to be
nominal or fictitious, but which, supported by Lacépéde’s endorsement, figured prominently
for many years in the works of later compilers.

Lacépéde’s new genera are the following: 1. Balenoptera, 2. Narwalus (=Monodon),
3. Anarnak (based on Monodon spurius, Fabr.), 4. Catodon (ex Artedi?), 5. Physalus,
6. Delphinapterus, and, 7. Hyperoodon. Mis new specific designations are: 1. Balenoptera
gibbar (= Balena physalus, Linn.), 2. Baleenoptera jubartes (= Galena boops, Linn.), 3. Bale-
noptera acuto-rostrata (=Balena rostrata, Miill.), 4. Narwalus vulgaris, 5. N. microcepha-
lus, 6. N. Andersonianus (=Monodon monoceros), '%. Anarnak groenlandicus (= Mono-
don spurius, Fabr.), S. Catodon svineval (= Globiocephalus melas), 9. Physeter orthodon,
10. Delphinapterus beluga (= Beluga catodon), 11. Delphinus vulgaris (=D. delphis), 12
Delphinus nesarnack (=D. turgio, Fabr.), 13. Delphinus diodon (= Hyperodon butzkopf), 14.
Delphinus ventricosus (=? Grampus griseus), 15. Delphinus Duhameli, sp. u., 16. Delphinus
Peronii (= D. leucorhamphus, Péron, Ms.), sp.n., 17%. Delphinus Commersoni (ex Commersen,
Ms.), sp. n.

Besides the Sonnini version of 1804 (q. v.), Tacépade’s Hist. nat. de C-tacés was republished
in 1805, in two vols. 12°, in the 90 vol. 12° ed. of Buffon, forming vols. 89, 99; in Lacépéde's
8° ed. of Buffon published in 1819 (not seen by me), and in later editions of the same. Also
in the collected works of Lacépéde (ed. Desmarest, 11 vols. $°, 1826-31), and in the later editions
of his works published in 1830, 1836, 1839, and 1844 (not seen by me). Cf. Carus and Engel-
mann, Bibliotheca hist. nat., i, 1846, p. 332. (472.]

1804. SonNINI [DE MannoncourtT], C. [N.] S. Histoire naturelle, | générale et par-
ticuliére, | des Cétacées. | Ouvrage fasaint suite & Histoire naturelle, géné-
rale | et particulitre, composée par Leclere de Buffon, et | mise dans un nouvel
ordre par C[HARLES]. [NICOLAS] S[IGISBERT]. SONNINI [DE MANNONCOURT],

490

BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. :

1804. SonnrinrI [DE MANNONCOURT], C. [N.] S.—Continued.

1804.

avec | des Notes et des Additions. | Par C. S. Sonnini, | Membre des plusieurs
Sociétes savantes | et littéraires. | [Monogram.] A Paris, | de Imprimerie

de F. Dnfart. | — | An XII [=1804]. 5°. pp. 1-446, pll. i-v.
Vue générale des Cetacées, pp. 5-30; Tableau des Ordres, Genres et Espéces de Cétacées,
pp. 31-42. ;

Les Baleines, pp. 43-192. 2. La Baleine franche (Galena mysticetus), pp. 43-179, pl.i. 2.
Le Nordeaper (Balena nordcaper), pp. 180-188. 3. La Baleine noueuse (Balena nodosa),
pp. 189,190. 4. La Baleine bossue (Balena gibbosa), pp. 191, 192.

Les Baleinoptéres, pp. 193-226. 5. Le Gibbar (Balenoptera gibbar), pp. 193-199, pl. ii,
fig. 1. 6. La Jubarte (Balenoptera jubartes), pp. 200-207. 7%. La Baleinoptére rorqual
(Balenoptera rorqual), pp. 208-217. S. Le Museau-pointu (Balenoptera acuto-rostraia),
pp. 218-226.

Les Narwals, pp. 227-251. 9. LeNarwal vulgaire (Narwalus vulgaris), pp. 227-245, pl.
ii, fig. 2. 10. Le Narwal microcéphale (Narwalus microcephalus), pp. 246-25). 11. Le Nar-
wal Anderson (Narwalus andersonianus), p. 251.

Les Anarnaks, pp. 252, 253. 12. L’Anarnak Groenlands (Anarnak groenlandicus), pp.
252, 253.

Les Cachalots, pp. 254-319. 13. Le Cachalot macrocéphale (Catodon macrocephalus),
pp. 254-311, pl. iii, fig. 1. 14. Le Cachalot trumpo (Catodon trwmpo), pp. 312-316. 15.
Le Cachalot svineval (Catodon svineval), pp. 317,318. 16. Le Cachalot blanchatre (Catodon
albicans), p. 319.

Les Physales, pp. 320-328. 17. Le Physale cylindrique (Physalus cylindricus), pp. 320-
328, pl. iii, fig. 2.

Les Physétéres, pp. 329-346. 18S. Le Physétére microps (Physeter microps), pp. 329-338.
19. Le Physétére orthodon (Physeter orthodon), pp. 339-342. 20. Le Mular (Physeter mu-
lar), pp. 343-346.

Les Delphinaptéres, pp. 347-355. 21. Le Beluga (Delphinapterus beluga), pp. 347-353.
22. Le Sénedette ee senedette), pp. 354, 355.

Les Dauphins, pp. 356-437. 23. Le Dauphin yulgaire (Delphinus vulgaris), pp. 356-399,
pl. iv, fig.1. 24. Le Peta atte (Delphinus phocena), pp. 400-412, pl. iv, fig. 2. 25. L’Orque
(Delphinus orca), pp. 413-417. 26. Le Dauphin gladiateur (Delphinus gladiator), pp. 418-422
247. Le Nésarnack (Delphinus nesarnack), pp. 423-425, pl. v, fig. 1. 28. Le Diodon (Del-
phinus diodon), pp. 426, 427, pl. v, fig. 2. 29. Le Dauphin ventru (Delphinus ventricosus),
pp. 428,429. $38. Le Dauphin férés (Delphinus feres), pp. 430-432. 31. Le Dauphin de
Duhamel (Delphinus Duhameli), pp. 433,434. 32. Le Dauphin de Péron (Delphinus Pero-
nit), p. 435. 38. Le Dauphin de Commerson (Delphinus Commersonii), pp. 486-437.

Les Hypéroodons, pp. 438-444. 34. Le Butskopf (Hyperoodon butskopf ), pp. 438-444.

Although this work bears the same date (an XII) as Lacépéde’s Hist. nat. des Cétacées
(see 1804. LachPhpE), it is merely a slightly abridged version of that work, with here and
there slight additions. Although the text is mostly inclosed in marks of quotation, I fil to
find any acknowledgment of the source. The work is currently attributed, however, to Son-
nini. The arrangement of the matter, the number of species treated, their order of succes-
sion and nomenclature, are identical in the two works. [473.]

‘““WIEDEMANN, C. R. W. Beschreibung des Schiidels vom Lamantin oder Ma-

nati. <Wiedemann’s Arch. fiir Zool. und Zoot., iv, 1804, pp. 67-77.”

Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann. [474.]

1805. CARLISLE, ANTHONY. The Physiology of the Stapes, one of the Bones of the

Organ of Hearing; deduced from a comparative View of its Structure, and
Uses, in different Aree atse < Philos. Trans. anes [xcv], pt. 2, art. xi, 1805,
pp. 198-210, pl. iv.

The plate gives figures of the stapedes and columelle of various intaaIy including Phoca
vitulina, Phocena communis, and Odobenus rosmarus. [475.]

1805. Hotmes, A. American Annals; | or | a Chronological | History of America |

from its Discovery in MCCCCXCII to MDCCCVI. | In two Volumes. | By
Abiel Holmes, D. D. A. A. S. S. H. S. | Minister of the First Chureh in Cain-

bridge. | Suum quaque in annum referre. | Tacit. Annal. | — | Vol.
I | Comprising a period of Two Hundred Years. | — | Cambridge, Printed and
Sold by W. Hilliard. | — |] 1805. 2 vols. 8°.

The title of vol. ii differs from the above as follows:
Vol. II. | Comprising a Period of One Hundred and Fourteen Years.
Whale-fishery in 1730, vol. ii, p. 125—a brief statement embraced in 6 lines. Also brief

reference to Morse-fishing and Whale-fishing in the Gulf of St. Lawrence in 1593, vol. i, p. 133.
[476.]

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 491

1805. MacruEerson, D. Annals | of | Commerce, | Manufactures, Fisheries, and Nav-
igation | with | brief notices of the Arts and Sciences connected with them. |
Containing the | Commercial Transactions | of the | British Empire and other
Countries, | from the earliest accounts to the meeting of the Union Parlia-
ment in January 1801; | and comprehending the most valuable part of the late
Mr. Anderson’s History of Commerce, viz. from the year 1492 | to the end of
the reign of George II, King of Great Britain, &c. | With a large Appendix, |
containing |
Chronological Tables of the Sover- | A Chronological Table of the prices of
eigns of Europe, | Tables of the al- | Corn, &c. and | A Commercial and
terations of money in England and | Manufactural Gazetteer of the | Uni-
Scotland, | ’ ted Kingdom of Great Britain and Ire-

land |
With a general chronological Index. | The Antient Part composed from the most
authentic Original Historians and Public Records, | printed and in Manuscript,
and the Modern Part from Materials of unquestionable | Authenticity (mostly
unpublished) extracted from the Records of Parliament, | the Accounts of
the Custom-house, the Mint, the Board of Trade, the | Post-Office, the Kasi-
India Company, the Bank of England, | &c. &c. | By David Macpherson. | — |

In Four Volumes. | — | Vol. I [-IV]. | —| Printed for Nichols and Son, .. .
[=nearly 4 lines of names of booksellers]. | London; | and for Mundell and
Son, Edinburgh. | — | 1805. 4 vols. 4°.

The chronological arrangement of the work precludes reference to special topics, since the
same subject may be briefly mentioned in many places. A very detailed and thorough index,
however, renders the matter readily accessible, and to this index the present writer would
refer the investigator of matters relating to the Whalefishery and kindred topics. The worl
is one of great research and labor, and is standard authority on the subjects treated. [477.]

1806. Dumirin, A. M.C. Zoologie analytique, | ou | Méthode naturelle | de | Classi-
fication des Animaux, | rendue ‘plus facile | a Vaide de Tableanx synop-
‘ tiques; | Par A[ndré]. M[arie]. Constant Daméril, |... . [titles, 6 lines of
smalltype]. Parvased apta. | — | Paris | Allais, Libraire, quai des Augustins,

No. 39. | — | M. DCCC. VI. 8°. pp. i-xxsii, 1. 1, pp. 1-344.

XIIIe. Famille, Amphibics [= Pinnipedia-+ Sirenia], pp. 26,27. Genera 3, under French
and Latin names, viz: 1. Phoca, 2. Trichecus, 3. Dugong, 4. Manatus.

X1IVe. Famille, Cétacés, pp. 28,29. Gencra 19, under French and Latin names, viz: 1.
Balena, 2. Balenoptera, 3. Narwhalus, 4. Ananarcus, 5. Catodon, 6. Phylasus (sic), 7+ Phy-
seterus, 8. Delphinaptcrus, 9. Delphinus, 10. Hyperodon. [478.]

1806. TuRTON, W. A general | System of Nature, | through the | Three Grand King-
doms | of | Animals, Vezetables, and Minerals, | systematically divided | into
their several | Classes, Orders, Genera, Species, and Varicties, | with their

| Habitations, Manners, Economy, Structure, and Peculiarities. | By Sir
Charles Linné: | Translated Gmelin, Fabricius, Willdenow, &c. | Together
with | Various Modern Atrangements and Corrections, derived from the |
Transactions of the Linnean and other Societies, as well as from the Classical
| Works of Shaw, Thornton, Abbot, Donovan, Sowerby, Latham, Dillwyn |
Lewin, Martyn, Andrews, Lambert, &c. &c. | with a life of Linne, | Appro-
priate Copper-plates, and a Dictionary explanatory of the Terms which |
occur in the several Departments of Natural History, | by William Turton,
M. D. | Fellow of the Linnean Society, Author of the Medical Glossary, &e.

&c. |—| In Seven Volumes. | — | Animal Kingdom.—Vol. I. | Mammalia.
Birds. Amphibia. Fishes. |— | London: | Printed for Lackington, Allen,
and Co. | Temple of the Muses, Firesbury-Square. | — | 1806. 8°. pp. i-vil,

1-944. (‘Printed by Voss and Morris, Castle-Street, Swansea. 1800,” p. 943.)

Order vii. Cete, pp. 127-130. 1. Mfonodon Monoceros, 2. Balena Mysticetus, p. 127; 3. B.
Physalus, 4. B. Boops, 5. B. Gibbosa, 6. B. Musculus, 7. B. Rostrata, S. Physeter Catodon,
9. P. Macrocephalus, p. 128; 10. P. Microps, 11. P. Tursio, 12. Delphinus Phocena, 13. D.
delphis, p. 129; 14. D. Orca, 15. D. Leucas, p. 130. Short, nearly worthless, descriptions,
and no references to previous authors.

492 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1806. Turton, W.—Continued.
Sirenia: 1. Trichechus Durong (sic), 2. T. Manatus, with var. 1. Australis (= African and
American Manatees), var. 2. Borealis (= Rhytina borealis), var. 3, Siren (fabulous), pp. 36,
37. The following complete transcript of the account of the Zrichechus Manatus Sirenus is a
sufficient commentary on the character of the work :

“3. Siren. Ears erect, sharp-pointed. Inhabits the north-west coast of America, swims
around ships with antic gestures. Head resembling a dog; eyes large; lips whiskered: body
thick, round, tapering downwards; tail divided into 2 unequal lobes ; length about 5
feeueuy 479. ]
1807. Homn, E. Observations on the structure of the different Cavities, which con-
stitute the Stomach of the Whale, compared with those of ruminating Animals,
with a View to ascertain the Situation of the digestive Organ. < Philos. Trans.
Lond., [xevii], pt. 1, art. iv, 1807, pp. 97-102, pli. iii, iv.
Investigation based on ‘‘a Delphinus Delphis of Linnaeus, or small bottlenose whale of
Mr. Hunter.” [489.]
1808. ANon. A Short and true Account of Forty-two Persons [Whalers] who per-
ished by shipwreck near Spitzbergen, in the year 1646. < Pinkerton’s Coll.
Voy. and Traw., 1, 1808, p. 535. [481.]
1808. ANON. Third Voyage of the Dutch and Zealanders, by the North, along Nor-
way, Moscovy, and Tartary, to pass to the kingdoms of Cathay and China,
by permission of the Council of the city of Amsterdam, 1596. . < Pinkertou’s
Coll. Voy. and Trav., i, 1808, pp. 90-127.
*‘Newly translated from the Recueil des Voyages, qui ont servi a l’etablissement ct aux
progrez de la Compagnie des Indes Orientales. Tom. i, p. 55.”
Whales described, pp. 93,94. Wery good description of the Northern Right Whale. [482 ]
1808. Bacstrom, 8. Account of a [Whaling] Voyage to Spitzbergen in the Year
1780. By S. Bacstrom, M. D. <Pinkerton’s Coll. Voy. and Trav., i, 1808, pp.
614-620.
From Phil. Mag., July, 1799. 5 [483.]
1808. BLuMenBaAcdH, J. F. Mannel | d’Histoire naturelle, | traduit de VAllemand, | De
J. Fr. Blumenbach, Professeur & ’ Université | de Gottingue. | Par Soulange

Artaud. | Avec figures. | — | Multa fiunt eadem, sed aliter, | Quintilian. | — |
Tome Premier. | [Monogram.}] | A Metz, | Chez Collignon, Imprimeur-Li-
braire. |. . . [=Names of 3 other publishers. ] | — | An XI.—1803. 8°. pp.

i-xvi, 1-526.
Trichechus manatus, p. 164, Les Cétacées (Cetacea), pp. 165-169. A translation of one of the
early editions, but which is not stated. The matter relating to the Cetacea is substantially
the same as that of the 3d ed., 1788, g. v. [484.]
1808. Lenms, K. An Account of the Laplanders of Finmark, their language, man-
ners, and religion,by Knud Lecms, Professor of the Laplandic, with the notes
of Gunner, Bishop of Drontheim,-and a Treatise, by Jessen, on the Pagan Re-
ligion of the Finns and Laplanders. <Pinkerton’s Coll. Voy. and Trav., i,
1808, pp. 376-490.
Chap. xiii, Of the Fishery, pp. 431-446. Contains a short account of the Whales and
Whalefishery of Finmark, pp. 431-433.
The original edition of Leems (not seen by me) was published in Danish and Latin at
Copenhagen in 1767, 4°, with plates. [485.]
1808. Purprs, C. J. A voyage towards the North Pole, undertaken by his Majesty’s
command, in 1773, by Constantine John Phipps. <Pinkerton’s Co&. Voy. and
Trav., i, 1808, pp. 538-594.
Natural history, pp. 578-585. Balena Mysticetus, Balena Physalus, p. 579 (=7 lines of no
importance). [486.]
1808. TrEpDEMANN, D. F. Zoologie. | — | Zu seinen Vorlesungen entworfen | von | D.
Friedrich Tiedemann, | Professor der Anatomie und Zoologie an der Univer-
sitiit zu | Landshut. | — | Erster Band. | Allgemeine Zoologic, Mensch und
Siiugthiere. | — | Landshut, in der Weberschen Buchhandlung. | — | 1808.
8°. pp. i-xvi, 1-610, 1. 1. ;
XII. Ordnung. Fischartige Siugthiere. Wallfische. Cetacea (Cetacés), pp. 557-585.
Generalities, 557-570; genera and species, pp. 570-585. 1. Balaena mysticetus, 2. B. islan-

1808.

1808.

1809.

1809.

1809.

1809.

1809.

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 493

TIEDEMANN, D.'I'.—Continued.
dica (Nordkaper); %. Der Wallfisch mit einem Hécker, B. nodose, p. 571; 4- B. gibbosa,
5. Balaenoptera gibbar, G. B. rostrata, p. 572; '%- B. boops, 8. B. rorqual, p. 573; 9. Nar-
walus vulgaris (= Monodon-monoceros), 10. N. nvicrocephalus, 11. N. Andersonianus, p. 574;
12. Anarnacus groenlandicus, p. 575; 13. Oatodon macrocephalus, p. 576; 14. C. albicans,
15. C.trumpo, 16. CO. svineval, p.577; 1%. Physalus cylindricus, p. 518; 18. Physeter microps,
19. P. orthodon, 20. P. mular, p. 579; 21. Delphinapterus beluga, 22%. D. senedetta, p. 680;
23. Delphinus delphis, 24. D. phocaena, p. 531; 25. D. Orea, 26. Der Delphin mit der hohen
Riickenflosse, p. 582; 2%. D. tursio, 28. D. diodon, 29. D. Bonnaterrei, sp. n. (=le dauphia
féres, Bonnaterre), p. 583; 39. D. ventricosus, 31. D. Duhamelii, 32. D. Peronii, 33. D.
Oomersonii, 34. Typeroodon butzkopf, p. 584.
Delphinus Bonnaterrei, sp. n., p. 585. Genn. 11, spp. 34.
Number of speciesand nomenclature same as Lacépéde’s, excepting “1D. Bonnaterret.”’ [487.]
WittouGcuby, H. The Voyages of Sir Hugh Willoughby, Richard Chancelor,
and others, to the Northern parts of Russia and Siberia. <Pinkerton’s Coll.
Voy. and Trav., i, 1808, pp. 1-80.
From Hackluyt’s Voy. and Trav. [483.]
ABErnetiy, J. Some Particularsin the Anatomy ofa Whale. <Philos. Trans.,
abridged by Hutton, Shaw and Pearson, 1665-1800, xvii (1791-1796), 1809,
pp. 673-677.
From Philos. Trans. Lond., 1xxxvi, 1796, pp. 27 et seqq., q. v- [489.]
Anon. Of the New American Whale-Kishing about Bermudas. < Philos.
Trans., abridged by Hutton, Shaw and Pearson, 1655-1800, i (1655-1672),
1809, pp. 6, 7.
From Philos. Trans. Lond., i, no. 1, 1665, p. 11, q. v. [499.]
Anon. A further Relation of the Whale-Fishing about the Bermudas, and on
the Coast of New-England and New-Netherland. <Philos. Trans., abridged
by Hutton, Shaw and Pearson, 1655-1800, i (1665-1672), 1809, p. 46. [With
supplementary note. ]
From Philos. Trans. Lond., i, no. 8, 1665, p. 132, q. v. [491.]
Anon. Description de la Piece d@’Ambregris que la Chambre d’Amsterdam
a reeue des Indes Orientales, pesant 182 Livres; avec un petit Traité de
son Origine et de sa Vertu, par Nicolas Chevalier, a Amsterdam chez l’Auteur,
1700. 4°. <Philos. Trans., abridyed by Hutton, Shaw and Pearson, 1665-
1800, iv (1694-1702), 1809, p. 500.
From Philos. Trans. Lond., xxii, no. 262, 1700, p. 573, q. 7. Sec 1700. CuevatiEr, N. [492.]
Borin, [R.] On Ambergris. < Philos. Trans., abridged by Hutton, Shaw and
Pearson, 1665-1800, ii (1672-1683), 1809, pp. 94, 95. [With suppl. foot-note. ]
Trom Philos. Trans., Lond., vii, no. 97, 1673, pp. 6118-6115, q. v. [493 j

. Boyzrston, —. Ambergris found in Whales. < Philos. Trans., abridged by

Hutton, Shaw and Pearson, 1665-1800, vii (1724-1734), 1809, p. 57.
Irom Philos. Trans. Lond., xxxilti, no. 385, 1724, p. 193, ¢. v. [494.]

. “Cortesi. Sugli Secletri dun Rhinoceronte afric. et d’una Balena. Milan,

1809.”

Not seen; title from Van Beneden, Oss. foss. des environs d’ Anvers, ii, 1880, p. 17. [495.]

. Cuvier, G. Sur Vostéologie du Lamantin, sur la place qu» le Lamantin et le

Dugong doivent occuper dans la méthode naturelle, et sur les os fossiles de
Lamantins et de Phoques. <dAnn. du Mus. @ Hist. Nat., xiii, 1893, pp. 273-
312, pl. xix.

Historique, pp. 273-282; Art. I. Du lamantin d’Amerique, pp. 282-293; Art. IL. Desespéces
nominales du petit lamantin des Antilles et du-Jamantin des Grandes Indes, pp. 293, 294;
Art. III. Du lamantin du Sénégal, pp. 294-296; Art. LV. Du prétendu lamantin du Nori, de
Steller, pp. 296-299; Art. V. Dudugong, pp. 300-302; Art. VI. Ossemens fossiles de lamantins,
pp. 303-309; Art. VII. De quelques os de phoques trouvés avec ceux de lamantins, dans le
département de Meine-et-Loire, ct des prétendus os de morse gunozces par qu lques natura-
listes, pp. 809-312. Pl. xix, Ostéologie des lamantins ct da dugong.

This celebrated memoir marks an epoch in the literary history of the Sirenia. After giving
a dctailed history of the views respecting the afiinities of these animals entertained by pre-

A94 \. BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1809. Cuvier, G.—Continued.
vious writers, including the absurdities of mermaids and mermen, the author closes his his-
torical résumé by stating that the Sirenia form three distinct genera, the Lamantins (of which
he recognizes two species), the Dugong, and Steller’s Sea-Cow, and that these three genera
constitute a separate family, very diffurent from the Seals. with which they had been previ-
ously placed, and a little nearer to the Cetacea than the Pachyderms are to the Carnivores.
Buffon’s four species of Lamantin he reduces to two. Then follows en account, with figures,
of the osteology of the Brazilian Manatee; a comparison of the skulls of the’ African and
American Manatees, and a résumé of the distinctive structural features of Steller’s Sea-Cow,
whereby it is generically separated from the Dugong and Manatees. Cuvier’s results agree
closely with the modern interpretation of the affinities and generic rclations of these animals.
It was left, however, for Desmarest to bestow technical names upon the species here first
clearly distinguished, Cuvier throughout his memoir employing only the French vernacular
names. [496.]

1809. Cuvier, G. Sur les Lamantins et les Os fossiles de ces animaux. < Nouv.
Bull. des Sci. par la Soc. Philom., no. 24, Sept. 1809, pp. 395, 396.
, - Extrait d’ Ann. du Mus. d’ Hist. Nat., xiii, pp. 273-312. Sec last title. [497.]
1809. DupLEY, P. An Essay on the Natural History of Whales; with a particular
Account of the Ambergris found in the Sperma Ceti Whale. <Philos. Trans.,
abridged by Hutton, Shaw and Pearson, 1665-1800, vii (1724-1734), 1809, pp.
78-84.
T'rom Philos. Trans. Lond., xxxiii, no. 387, 1725, pp. 256-269, q. v. [498.]

1309. Epiror. The Editor’s Account, with Observations, of Experiments on Am-
bergris, made by Mr. John Browne, F. R. S§., and by Mr. Ambrose Godfrey
Hanckewitz, F. R. S. To which are subjoined Dr. Neuman’s Vindicatory
Remarks. < Philos. Trans., abridged by Hutton, Shaw and Pearson, 1665-
1800, vii (1724-1734), 1809, pp. 668, 659.

From Philos. Trans. Lond., xxxviii, no. 435, 1735, p. 487. See 1735. NEUMANN, C. [499.]

1809. EpmonpstTon, A. A | View | of the | Ancient and Present State | of the | Zet-
land Islands; | ineluding their | Civil, Political, and Natural -History; | An-
tiquities; | and | An Account of their Agriculture, Fisheries, Commerce, | and

the state of Socicty and Manners, | By | Arthur Edmondston, M. D. | — | In
. two volumes. | — | Vol. I [-II]. | — | Edinburgh: | Printed by James Ballan-
tyne and Co. | For Longman, Hurst, Rees, and Orme, London; and | John
Ballantyne and Co. Edinburgh. | — | 1809. 2 vols. 8°. Vol. i, pp. i-xiv, 1-

364, with map; vol. ji, pp. i-vii, 1-345.

The Zetlands not so favorable a point from which to carry on the Whale Vishery as sup-
posed, vol. i, pp. 290-293. Of Whales and Wrecks. Section I, Of the Division of Whales,
vol. ii, pp. 154-174. Tishes [= Pisees + Cetacea], vol. ii. pp. 296-316. 4. Balena Mysticetus,
2. Balena Boops, 3. Balena Musculus, 4. Physeter Catodon, 5. Physeter. Microps, 6.
Physeter Tursio, p. 398; %- Delphinus Phoewna, p. 399; 8. Delphinus Orea; D. Balena ros-
trata, Pontoppidan [= ‘‘ Delyhinus melas, Traill”’], p. 300; 10. Ionodon Aonoceros, pp. 301,
302. A Monodon monoceros ‘trun on shore in Weesdale-vow in Zetland in September, 1808.”
Vast multitudes of Ca’ing Whales are noted as appearing regularly on the coast. The cther
notes relating to Cetacea. are of little importance. [500.]

1809. FAWKENER, W. On the Production of Ambergris. A Communication from the
Committee of Council appointed for the Consideration of all Matters relating
to Trade and Foreign Plantations; with a prefatory Letter from William
Fawkener, Esq., to Sir Joseph Banks, Bart., P. R. 8. <Philos. Trans.,
abridged by Hutton, Shaw and Pearson, 1665-1800, xvii (1791-1796), 1809,
pp. 6-8.

From Philos. Trans. Lond., \xxxi, 1791, pp. 43-47, q. v. |501.]

1809. Hamp, J. H. A Description of the same Narhwal [as mentioned in Dr. Stei-
gertahl’s communication]. . .. . <Philos. Trans., abridged by Hutton, Shaw

and Pearson, 1635-1800, viii (1735-1743), 1809, p. 161.
From Philos. Trans. Lond., x1, no. 447, 1738, pp. 149, 150, q. v. [502.]

1809.

1809.

1809.

1809.

1809.

1809.
1809.

1809.

1809.

1809.

1809.

1810.

1810.

4

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 495

Hunter, J. Observations on the Structure and Economy of Whales. < Philos.
Trans., abridged by Hutton, Shaw and Pearson, 1665-1800, xvi (1785-1790),
1809, pp. 306-351, pl. 5.

From Philos. Trans. Lond., 1xxvii, pt. 2, art. xxxviii, 1787, pp. 371-450, pll. xvi-xxiii, q. v.
[503.]

Leuwinnorck, [A. VAN]. Concerning the Flesh of Whales, and the Crystal-
line humour of their Eye. < Philos. Trans., abridged by Hutton, Shaw and
Pearson, 1655-1800, v (1703-1712), 1809, pp. 155-157.

From Philos. Trans. Lond., xxiv, no. 293, 1704, pp. 1723-1730, q. v. [504.]

NrumMAN, C. On Ambereris..... <Philos. Trans., abridged by Hutton, Shaw
and Pearson, 1665-1800, vii, (1724-1734), 1809, pp. 661-663.

From Philos. Trans. Lond., no. 433, 1734, p. 344, ete., g. v. [595.]

Ray, J. Account of the Dissection of a Porpoise. <Philos. Trans., abridged
by Hutton, Shaw and Pearson, 1665-1800, i Cp bea 613); 1809, pp. 639-643. [With
supplementary note. ] f
From Philos. Trans. Lond., vi, no. 76, 1671, p. 2274, etc., g. v. [506.]
ROBERTSON, J. Description of the Blunt-headed Cachalot. < Philos. Trans.,
abridged by Hutton, Shaw and Pearson, 1665-1800, xiii (1770-1776), 1809,
pp. 57-59, pl. 1, fig. 6.
From Philos. Trans. Lond., 1x, 1771, art. xxvii, pp. 321-324, q. v. ; [507.]
ScHWEDIAWER, [F. X.] An Account of Ambergris. < Philos. Trans., abridged by
Hutton, Shaw and Pearson, 1655-1800, xv (1781-1785), 1809, pp. 389-396.

’ From Philos. Trans. Lond., \xxiii, art. xv, 1783, pp. 226-241, ¢g. v. [508.]
SIBBALD, R. Description of the Pediculus Ceti, &c. < Philos. Trans., abridged
by Hutton, Shaw and Pearson, 1665-1800, v (1703-1712), 1809, pp. 317, 318.

From Philos. Trans. Lond., xxv, no. 308, 1707, pp. 2314-2317, q. v. [509.]

SrarrorD, R. Of the Tides at Bermudas, also Whales, Spermaceti.....
<Philos, Trans., abridged by Hutton, Shaw and Pearsoa, 1665-1800, i (1663—
1672), 1809, pp. 283, 284.

From Philos. Trans. Lond., iii, no. 46, 1668. pp. 792-795, q. v. [510.]

STEIGERTANL, Dr. Of a Narhwal or Unicorn Fish [ Monodon monoceros], taken in
the River Ost, in the Duchy of Bremen. < Philos. Trans., abridged by Hut-
ton, Shaw and Pearson, 1665-1800, viii (1735-1743), 1809, pp. 160, 161, pl. 6,
fig. 1.

From Philos. Trans. Lond., x1, no. 447, 1738, pp. 147-149, q. v. [511.]

TRAILL, THOMAS STEWART. Description of a new Species of Whale, Delphinus
melas. <Nicholson’s Journ. Nat. Phil., Chem., and Arts, xxii, Feb., 1809, pp.
81-83, pl. iii.

Ninety-two Whales of this species were driven ashore in Scapay Bay, in Pomona, one of the
Orkneys, in December, 1806, at which time the drawing was taken by James Watson, esq.
Account of the external characters and habits of the now well-known “ Blackfish.” {512.]

Tyson, E. Phocena; or, The Anatomy of a Porpus, dissected at Gresham Col-
lege; with a preliminary Discourse concerning Anatomy, and a Natural His-
tory of Animals. < Philos. Trans., abridged by Hutton, Shaw and Pearson,
1665-1800, 11 (1672-1583), 1809, pp. 500, 501.

From Philos. Collections, no. 2, p. 87. See 1681. Tyson, E. [513.]

Aupers, J. A. Underségelse over Eenhidrningens (Monodon Narwal) Hierte.
< Kongel. Danske Videnskab.-Sels. Skrivter for aar 1808, 3° Rek., v, 1810, pp. 179-
183. [514.]

LEDRU, A.-P., ef [C. N.S.] Sonnint. Voyage | aux Hes | de Ténériffe, | 12 Trinité,
Saint-Thomas, | Sainte-Croix et Porto-Ricco, | exécuté par ordre du Gouverne-
ment Frangais, | Depuis le 30 Septembre 1796 jusqu’au 7 Juin 1798, sous la |
Direction du Capitaine Baudin, pour faire des Recherches | et des Collections
relatives 4 Histoire Naturelle; | Contenant | Des Observations sur le Climat,
le Sol, la Population, | Agriculture, les Productions de ces Iles, le Caractere,
les | Mewurs et le Commerce de leurs Habitants, | Par André-Pierre Ledru, |

496

A

BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. :

1810. Lepru, A.-P., et [C. N. S.] Sonnrnr—Continued.

L’un des Naturalistes de ’Expedition, Membre de la Société des Arts | du
Mans, de Académie Celtique de Paris, du Musée de Tours, | Ex-Professeur de
Législation prés l’Ecole Centrale de la Sarthe. | Ouvrage accompagné de Notes
et d’Additions, | Par M. [C. S.] Sonnini. | Avee une trés-belle Carte gravée
par J. B. Tardieu, d’aprés Lopez. | Tome Premier [et Second]. | A Paris, |
Chez Arthus Bertrand, Libraire, rune Hautefeuille, n°. 23. | — | 1810. 2 vols.,
8°. Vol. i, 1, 1. pp. i-xlvij, 1-315, 1. 1; vol. ii, 1. 1, pp. 1-324, 1.1. Map.
Dauphin (Delphinus delphis Linn.), p. 2 (par Ledru), pp. 24-27 (par Sonnini). Marsouin
(Delphinus phocena L.), p. 214 (par Ledru), pp. 221-224 (prr Sonnini). Combat entre une
Baleine (Le Gibbar, Balena physalus L.) et Scie (Squalus pristis L.), pp. 217, 218 (par Ledvu),
Le Gibbar, pp. 220, 221 (par Sonnini). Le Lamantin (Manatus australis Gm.), p. 258 (par
Ledru), pp. 294, 295 (par Sonnini). [515. |

1810. Pron, [Francots], et [CHARLES ALEXANDER] Le LEsuER. Notice sur ’habi-

tation des Animaux Marins. <Ann. du Mus. d Hist. nat., xv, 1810, pp. 287-292.
Balena mysticetus, p. 288. [516.]

1810. VinorG, E. [Supplementary note to J. A. Alber’s ‘‘Underségelse over Eenhiér-

ningens (MZonodon Narwal) Hierte.”] <Kongel. Danske Videnskab.-Selsk.
Skrivter, for aar 1898, v, 1810, pp. 183, 184. ~ [517.]

1811, ANon. A Description of the Ferve Islands, containing an Account of their Sit-

uation, Climate, and Productions; together with the Manners and Customs
of the Inhabitants, their Trade, &c. By the Rev. G. Landt. <Quar. [ev.,
iv, 1811, pp. 333-342.

Contains a few lines (pp. 338, 339) respecting the dread of the Feroese fishermen of Whales,

and their method of driving them away by the use of unpleasant oders, as castoreum and vil
of juniper! [518.]

1811. ANon. ? [Renaupot, Abbé, translator.] An Account of the Travels of two Mo-

hammedans through India and Chiva in the Ninth Century. Translated from
the Arabic by the Abbé Renaudot. <Pinkerton’s Coll. Voy. and Trav., vii, —
1811, pp. 179-230.

Of Ambergris, pp. 222, 223. Ambergris is cast upon the coast of the Indian Ocean, and
is also found floating on the surface of the sea. ‘‘When a certain fish of the Whale kind,
called Tol, sees these floating lumps, he swallows the same, and is killed thereby.” Then
men seize the dead whale and tow it ashore and take out the Ambergris. [519.]

1811. FLEMING, Joun. Description of a Small-headed Narwal, cast ashore in Zetland.

< Mem. Wern. Soc. Nat. Hist., i, 1811, pp. 131-148, 1 pl.

A short diagnosis, with synonymy of Monodon vulgaris and M. microcephalus. The plato
gives two figures of I. microcephalus. [520.]

1811. G. Recherches d@’anatomie comparée sur les dents, par 1. C. Cuvier. < Bull. de

la Soc. Philom. de Paris, iii, 1811, No. 62, pp. 155*-169* (7. e., 265-269).
Dans le dugong et le narval, p. 165. [521.]

1811. HerausGeBer. E. Home iiber einige Higenthiimlichkeiten des Gehérorgans des

Wallfisches (Balaena mystiéetus). (Ausden Philosoph. Tr., 1811, p. i.) <Deut-
sches Archi f. d. Physiol., iii, 1817, pp. 137-139.
Auszug. [522.]

1811. InuicerR, C. Caroli Iligeri D. | Acad. Reg. Scient. Berolinens. et Bavaricae

sod. | Museo Zoologico Berolin. Praefecti, | Professoris extraod. | Prodromus |
Systematis | Mammalium et Avium | additis | Terminis zoographicus utrius-
que Classis, | eorumque | versione Germanica. | — |. . . . [= Motto, 3 lines. ]
| — | Berolini | Sumptibus C. Salfeld | 1811. 8°. pp. i-xviii, 1-302.

Sirenia, pp. 140, 141. Genera, 1. Manatus, 2. Halicore, 3. Rytina. 2 et 3 genn. nn.

Cete, pp. 141-144. . Balaena (Linn. et auct. var.]; 2. Ceratudon (ex Briss. = Monodon,
Linn., Diodon, Storr, Narwalus, Lacép.); 3. Ancyclodon [gen. n.=Anarnacus, Lacép.}; 4.
Physeter [Linn. et auct. var.]; 5. Delphinus [Linn. et auct. var.]; 6. Uranodon |gen. n.= Hy-
peroodon, Lacép.}. Cum charac. gener. [523. |

1811. Kzmprer,E. The History of Japan. By Engelbert Kempfer, M. D. Physician

to the Dutch Embassy to the Emperor’s Court; and translated from his orig-

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 497

1811, Kamrrrr, E.—Continued.
inal Manuscript, in the German Language, never before printed. By J. G.
Scheuchzer, F. R. 8. And a Member of the College of Physicians, London.
<Pinkerton’s Coll. Voy. and Trav., vii, 1811, pp. 652-821.

Chap. VIII. Of Fish and Shells, pp. 705-712. At pp. 706, 707 is a short account of ‘‘several
sorts of whales,” to wit: 1. Sebio, ‘‘the largest fish of the Whale kind,—probably Balena
mysticetus, 2. Awo sangi or kokadsura, a small gray or ash-colored whale, probably Jthach1-
anectes glaucus, 3. Nagass, ‘‘twenty to thirty fathoms long,” 4. Sotoo-kadsura, 5. Moko,
“three or four fathoms in length,” 6. Iwasikura, “that is, sardin’s-eater,”—doubtless a
Balenoptera. The Satsijfiko, also mentioned, may be an Orca, but as described is certainly a
myth.

The original work, of which merely an extended abstract is here given, was published
in 1727 (London, fol.). The Appendix, containing the observations on Ambergris, is omitted.

For notice of the original work, see Addenda, 1727. K“@MPFER. (624.]

1811. MarspeN, W. The | History of Sumatra, | containing an account of | the Gov-
ernment, Laws, Customs, and Manners | of | the Native Inhabitants, | with | a
description of the Natural Productions, | and a relation of the | Ancient Polit-

ical State of that Island. | — | By | William Marsden, F. R. 8. | — | The third
edition, with corrections, additions, and plates. | — | London: | Printed for
the Author, | by J. M’Creery, Black-Horse-Court, | And sold by | Longman,
Hurst, Rees, Orme, and Brown, Paternoster-Row. |— | 1811. 4°. pp. i-viii,
1-479, ll. 4.

Diiyong or Sea Cow, p. 122. Grampus Whale (Delphinus sp.), p. 122. {525.]

1811. NEILL, Patrick. Some account of a Fin-Whale stranded near Alloa. < Mem.
_ Wern. Soc. Nat. Hist., i, 1811, pp. 201-214.

Identified as Balenoptera acuto-rostrata. [526.]

1811. PARKINSON, J. Organic Remains of a Former World. | — | An | Examination
of the Mineralized Remains | of the | Vegetables and Animals | of the | Ante-
deluvian World; | generally termed | Extraneous Fossils. | — | By James Park-

inson. | In three volumes. | [Vignette.] The third Volume; | containing | the

Fossil Starfish, Echini, Shells, Insects, Amphibia, Mammalia, &c. | — | Lon-

don: | Printed by Whittingham and Rowland, | Goswell Street; | and pub-
lished by Sherwood, Neely, and Jones, Paternoster-Row; |... . [=3 lines,
names of other publishers.] | — | 1811. 4°. pp. i-xvi, 1-479, pll. i-xxii.
Vol. i, The Vegetable Kingdom, 1820; vol. ii, The Fossil Zoophytes, 1808.
“Oete, or Ceti,” and ‘‘Amphibia” (= Pinnipedia-+ Sirenia], vel. iii, pp. 309, 310, pl. xx, fig.
1 (supposed Cetacean tooth). [527.]
1811. ScorrmsBy, W., jr. Account of the Balena mysticetus, or Great Northern or
Greenland Whale. <Mem. Wern. Soc. Nat. Hist., i, 1811, pp. 578-586, 1 pl.
Description, measurements, and habits. [528.]
1811. ZIMMERMANN, E. A. W. Die | Erde und ihre Bewohner | nach | den neuesten
Entdekkungen | — | Ein Lesebuch fir Geographie, Vélkerkunde | Produkten-
lehre und den Handel | von | Eberhard]. A[ugust]. W[ilhelm]. Zimmer-
mann. | —| Dritter Theil. | Die westliche arctische Welt. | — | Mit einem
Titelkupfer und einer Karte. | — | Leipzig bei Gerhard Fleischer dem Jin-
gern. | 1811. 8°. pp. i-viii, 1-327.
Die grossen Fischereien der arctischen Erde.—1) Der Wallfischfang, pp. 239-261. 1. Der
gemeine Wallfisch (Balaena Mysticctus), p. 241-245. 2. Der Finnfisch (Balaena Physalus
L.), p. 245. 3. Der Nordkaper, Das Breitmaul (Balaena Musculus), pp. 245, 246; [4.) Der
Cachelot oder Pottfisch (Physeter macrocephalus), pp. 246, 247. [5.] Der Narwal (Monodon
Monocaros), p. 248. [Wallfischfang], pp. 249-261. (The Seal-fishery is treated, pp. 261-
266.) [529.]
1812. C., F. [=Cuvier, Fréprric]. Description des Cétacés échoués dans la baye
de Paimpol; par M. G. Cuvier. < Nouv. Bull. de la Soe. Philom. de Paris, iii,
5¢ année, no. 56, mai 1812, pp. 69-91.
Extrait. [530.]

268B

498 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1812. C., F. [=Cuvirr, FrREpERIC]. Notice sur une espéce de Dauphin observée dans
la mer glaciale; par M. Fréminville, lieutenant de vaisseau. < Nouv. Bull.
de Sci. par la Soc. Philom. de Paris, iii, 5° année, no. 56, mai 1812, p. 71.
Extrait. [631.]
1812. Cuvier, [G.]. Rapport fait & la classe des Sciences mathématiques et physi-
ques, sur divers Cétacés pris sur les cétes de France, principalement sur ceux
qui sont échoués prés de Paimpol, le 7 janvier 1812. <Ann. du Mus. d Hist.
nat., Xix, 1812, pp. 1-16, pl. i.

Remarques générals sur les espéces de la famille des Dauphins, qui sont divisé de la
maniére suivante: Ie. Les Delphinaptéires (Lacép.); Ile. Les Marsouins; III. Les Dauphins
proprement dits; 1V°. Les Hyperoodons.

Delphinus griseus, Delphinus globiceps, Delphinus dubius, spp. nn., p. 14.

Pl. i, Delphinus griseus, D. globiceps (2 figg.), D. Aries ? [532.]

1812. Home, EverarD. An Account of some Peculiarities in the Structure of the
Organ of Hearing in the Balena Mysticetus of Linneus. < Philos. Trans. Lond.,
[cii], pt. 1, art. iii, 1812, pp. 83-89, pll. i, ii.
Description of the membrana tympani, with figures of the external and internal parts of
the organ of hearing. [533.]
1812. La Hontan, Baron de. Travels in America, ete. <Pinkerton’s Coll. Voy. and
Trav., xiii, 1812, pp. 254-273.
Reprinted from the second English ed., London, 1735, 2 vols., 89°.
The Cetacean matter is at pp. 356, 357. See 1703. LA HONTAN. [534.]
1813. Homr, EverarD. On the Tusks of the Narwhale. < Philos. Trans. Lond., [ciii],
pt. 1, art. xviii, 1813, pp. 126-130, pl. vii.

Figures are given of the young skull of a male Narwhal, a female skull, milk tusks, lower

jaw, and section of a full-grown tusk. [535.]
1813. ScorEsBy, WILLIAM, jr. Account of the Balena Mysticetus, or Great Northern

or Greenland Whale. (Illustrated by an Engraving.) < Annals of Philos., i,

1813, pp. 51-55, pl. 1. ;

Reprinted from the Mem. Wern. Soc., vol. i, p. 578 et seqq., q. v. [536.]
1814. BLUMENBACH, J. F. Handbuch | der | Naturgeschichte | von | Joh. Fried. Blu--
menbach. | — | Multa fiunt eadem sed aliter. | Quintilian. | — | Neunte Aus-

gabe. | — | G6ttingen, 1314. | Bei Heinrich Dieterich. 8°. pp. i-xiv, 1-754,

S20 Np La

IX. Cetacea, pp. 134-137. 4 genera, 6 species. The eighth order, Palmata, includes Tri-
chechus, of which the Manatees form the second ‘‘species” (Lrichechus Manatus, p. 134), the
habitat being given as the rivers and sea coasts of the warmer parts of the earth. [537.]

1814, Lewis, M., and W.CxLarke. History | of | The Expedition | underthe command
of | Captains Lewis and Clark, | to | the sources of the Missouri, | thence |
across the Rocky Mountains | and down the | River Columbia to the Pacific
Ocean. | Performed during the years 1804-5-6. | By order of the | Government
of the United States. | Prepared for the press | by Paul Allen, Esquire. | In
two Volumes. | Vol. I [II]. | Philadelphia: | Published by Bradford and Ins-
keep; and | Abm. H. Inskeep, Newyork. | J. Maxwell, Printer. | 1814. 2 vols.
8°. Vol. i, pp. i-xxvill, 1-470, maps; vol. ii, pp. i-ix, 1-522, maps.

‘This is-the editio princeps of the authentic narrative.” Coues (Bull. U. S. Geol. and Geog.
Surv. Terr., 2d ser., no. 6, Feb. 8, 1876, pp, 417-444) gives a detailed account of the different
editions and versions of this important work, with a commentary on its zodlogical matter.

At pp. 105-111 are passing references to a stranded Whale met with near the mouth of the
Columbia River, the skeleton of which (p. 111) was found to measure 105 feet in length. At
p. 196, same volume, is a short account of ‘‘the whale” and ‘‘the porpoise.”’ I omit reference
to the numerous subsequent editions. [538.]

1814. RAFINESQUE, C. 8. Précis | des découvertes et travaux | somiologiques | de
Mr". C. 8. Rafinesque Schmaltz. | entre 100 et 1814 | Ou choix raisonné de ses
principales Découvertes | en Zoologie et en Botanique, pour servir | d’intro-

x

duction & ses ouvrages | futurs |— | De Linné le génie il a choisi pour

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 499

1814. Rarinrsqun, C. §.—Continued.
guide. | — | Palerme | Royale Typographie militaire. | 1814. | Aux dépens de
VAuteur. 16° (4° by sig.). pp. 1-56.

“TIT. G. Erropon (Cétacé). Plusieurs dents 4 la machoire supérieure, aucune & l’infé-
rieure; aucune nageoire dorsale, 6vents réunis sur la téte.

“5. Bpiodon urganantus. Corps oblong, attenué postérieurement: museau arrondi, ma-
choire supérieure un peu JAE) longue, dents égales obtuses.—Obs. Ce Cétacé fut pris vers
1790 sur les cédtes de la Sicile, j’en ai eu le dessin. Dans ma Mastolozie Sicilienne je fixerai
et décrirai plusieurs autres Cétacés des mers de la Sicile, figurés par Mongitore, je les ai nommé
Delphinus dalippus, Physeter wurganantus, Oxypterus mongitori N. G. i deux nageoires dor-
sales, &¢c.”” p. 13.

The above isa full transcript of that portion of this rare work relating to Cetaceans. [539.]

1815. ANON. Notes on Nantucket, August Ist, 1807. <(Coll. Mass. Hist. Soc., 2d ser.,
iii, 1815, pp. 19-38.

Hunting of Seals, Whale Fishery, pp. 29,30. Number of vessels employed in Sealing and

Whaling, and where cruising. [540.]

1815. ANON. Size of the Whale. < Ann. of Philos., vi, 1815, pp. 74, 75.
A propos of a statement by W. Scoresby (op. cit., i, 1813, 51-55) on the size of the Whale is
here cited Capt. Clarke’s measurement of a Whale’s skeleton near the Columbia River, ‘105
feet in length.” (See 1814. Lewis, M., and W, CLARKE.) (641.]

1815. BLAINVILLE, H. pr. Note sur J’existence des nerfs olfactifs dans le dauphin, et,
par analogie, dans les autres Bet. <Bull. des Sci., par la Soc. Philom.,
1815, pp. 193-195. (542.]

1815. HuBBarD, WILLIAM. The General History of New England, from the first dis-
covery thereof, till the year 1680. <(Coll. Mass. Hist. Soc., 2d ser., vols. v, vi,
1815, pp. 1-676.
Whales killed on the south side of Long Island, near Southhold, vi, pp. 668, 659,673. [543.]
1815. IntiaEerR, [C.]. Ueberblick der Siiugthiere nach ihrer Vertheilung iiber die
Welttheile. <Abhandl. d. Kin. Akad. d. Wissens. in Berlin, 1804-1811 (1815),
pp. 39-159.

Oete und Sirenia passim. Die Ordnung Natantia enthilt 2 Familien (Sirenia und Cete), 9
Gattungen und 47 Arten (p. 52). Strenia, 7 Arten; Cete, 40 Arten (p. 53).

Of the ‘'40”’ spp. of Cete cnumerated in his several tables of distribution a considerable
proportion are nominal, they including such names as Monodon microcephalus and M. an-
dersonianus, Ancylodon anarnak, Physeter orthodon, cylindricus, trumpo, etc., Delphinus
senedetta, ventricosus, feres, etc.; in addition to a Delphinus bidens we have Hyperodon re-
tusus. There isalsoa *‘ Manatus? Simia,” a Manatus fluvialis, and M. Sphaerurus, in addition
to IL. australis. There is also a Rytina cetacea as well as a Iytina borealis. The lists are, so
far at least as the Cete and Sirenia are concerned, worthless conglomerations, which, as in

- the case of other groups treated in the same connection, appear to contain some names coined
for the occasion, without descriptions or textual references. The paper may be safely ig-
nored so far as Cetology is concerned. (544. ]

1815. ScorrsBy, WILLIAM, jr. Description of the Woaps: and Observations on the

Size of the Whale. < Annals of Philos., vi, 1815, pp. 318, 314.
In reply to previous remarks in the Annals (1. c., p. 74) on the size of the Whale. [545.]

1815-18. ‘‘LaInG, JoHN. Voyage to Spitsbergen; containing a full description of that
country, of the zoology of the North, and of the Shetland isles, with an ac-

count of the Whale-fishery. ordiars 1815-1818. 8°.”
Not seen; from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 240, no. 3497. [546.]

1816. BLAINVILLE, H. Dr. Prodrome @yne nouvelle distribution systematique du
régne animal. < Bull. de la Soc. Philom. de Paris, 1816, pp. 105-124.
Mammiféres, p. 109. Sous-Classe Ire. Monodelphes, IlI*° degré ou Ordre, les Eden-
tés s?§ NODS 2 oon lala ates Edentés
Anormaux, pour nager.- Cétac’s? [547.]
1816. G[ERADIN], 8. Baleine. <Diet. des Sci. Nat., iii, 1816, pp. 417-468.
[Considérations générales], pp. 417-482. 1. La Baleine franche (Balena mysticetus, Linn.),
pp. 433-438. 2. La Baleine nord-caper (Balena mysticetus, Linn., var. B. édit. de Gmelin),
pp. 438, 439. 3. La Baleine noueuse (Balena nodosa, Lacép.), pp. 439,440. 4. La Baleine
bossue (Balena gibbosa, Lacép.), p. 440. 5. La Baleinoptére gibbar (Balenoptera gibbar,

500

BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1816. G[Eraprn], §8.—Continued.

Lacép.), pp. 441, 442. 6. La Baleinoptére jubarte (Balenoptera jubartes, Lacép.), pp. 442-444.
7. La Baleinoptére rorqual (Balenoptera rorqual, Lacép.), pp. 444,445. 8S. La Baleinoptére
museau-pointu (Baleenoptera acuto-rostrata, Lacép.), pp. 446,447. [Sur les organs du sens,
des mceurs et de Péche des Baleines, etc.], pp. 447-468.

We find here again the curious myth about the Indians of Florida capturing Whales by
getting astride them and plugging their blowholes with conical pieces of wood, ete., here bor-
rowed from Duhamel. See 1590. AcosTa, J. DE, and 1602. DE Bry. [548.]

1816. Pirkin, T. A | Statistical View | of the | Commerce | of the | United States of

America: | its connection with | Agriculture and Manufactories: | And an Ac-
count of the | Public Debt, Revenues, and Expenditures | of the | United
States. | With a brief Review of the Trade, Agriculture, and | Manufactories
of the Colonies, previous to | their Independence. | Accompanied with Table
illustrative of the | Principles and Objects of the Work. |— | By Timothy
Pitkin, | a Member of the House of Representatives of the United States, |
from the State of Connecticut. | — | Hartford: | Printed by Charles Hosmer.
| — | 1816. 8° pp. i-xii, 1-407, i-xx.

The Whale Fishery, pp. 4247. Table no. viii. State of the Whale Fishery in Massachu-
setts, from 1771 to 1775, inclusive, p.78. Table no. ix. State of the Whale Fishery, from 1787
to 1789, both inclusive, p. 79. Table no. x. Whale Oil—gallons, p. 80. Table no. x—continued.
Spermaceti Oil—gallons, p. 81.

A succinet history of the American Whalefishery, with statistica tables of its pro-
ducts. : [549.]

1816-17. Viney, —, et [A. G.] DESMarEstT. [Des Baleines, des Baleinoptéres, des Ca-

chalots et des Dauphins.] <(Nouv. Dict. d Hist. Nat., iii, 1816, pp. 164-201 ;
iv, 1816, pp. 525-534; ix, 1817, pp. 146-180.

This is a joint production by Virey and Desmarest, written mainly, however, by Virey, —
under the words ‘‘ Baleine,”’ ‘‘ Baleinoptera,”’ and under the same words with various specific
modifications, signed respectively ‘‘ Virey”? and ‘“‘Desm.” In the list of authors facing the
title-page of the several yolumes of the Nouv. Dict., ete., the articles on ‘‘Les Quadru-
pédes, les Cétacés et les Animanx fossiles,” are said to be written by Desmarest, and Virey is —
stated to have written ‘‘Les articles généraux de |’ Hist. nat., particuliérement de 1 Homme,
des Animaux, de leur structure, de leur physiologie et de leurs facultés.”’ In the following
collation each author’s share in the work is indicated.

Baleine, Balena, generalities of the subject, 4nd account of the species, pp. 161-194, signed.
Virey. 1. Balena mysticetus, Linn., pp. 168-183, pl. ex], fig. 1, juv., fig. 2, ad. from Scoresby;
2. Balena glacialis, Bonn., pp. 183-185; 3. Balena gibbosa, Linn. et Bonn., pp. 185-186; de la
Péche de la Baleine, pp. 186-194. Thus far by Virey. Then follows a nominal list of six
species under French names, by Desmarest.

Baleinoptére, Balcenoptera, pp. 194-201, mostly by Virey, with the interpolation of para-
graphs by Desmarest. 1. Balenoptera gibbar, Lacép., pp. 195-196, by Virey; 2. Balenop-
tera jubartes, Lacép., B. boops, Gmel., pp. 196-198, by Virey; 3. Balcnoptera rorqual, Lacép. ;
B. musculus, Gmel., p. 198, partly by Desmarest and partly by Virey; 4. Balwnoptera acuto-
rostrata, Lacép., Baleena rostrata, Gmel., p. 200, partly by Desmarest and partly by Virey.

Cachalot, Physeter, t. iv, 1816, pp. 525-534, signed, ‘‘ Virey et Desm.”’ General history of the
group, pp. 525-532; 1. Physeter macrocephalus, Shaw, pp. 532, 533; 2. Physeter trumpo, Bonn.,
pp. 533; 3. Physeter catodon, Linn. et Bonn., pp. 533, 534.

Dauphin, Delphinus, t. ix, 1817, pp. 146-180, partly by Virey and partly by Desmarest.
External characters and general history (the first paragraph signed ‘‘Desm.,”’ then about
four pages signed ‘‘Virey,”’ and about another page signed ‘‘B. V.”), pp. 146-151; [1
Sous-genre, Delphinoryhnchus, Blainv.). 1. * Delphinus Geoffrensis, Blainv., pp. 151, 152;
2. *Delphinus coronatus [Fréminville], pp. 152, 153; 3. *Delphinus Shawensis, Blainv. (D.
rostratus, Shaw), pp. 153, 154; 4. Delphinus Pernettensis, Blainy., p. 154; [2° Sous-genre, Del-
phinus, Blainy.]. 5. * Delphinus delphis, pp. 154-158; 6. D. chinensis, Osbeck, p.158; '7. *D.
dubius, Cuv., p. 158; 8. *D. tursio, Bonn., p. 158; 9. D. tursio, Fabr., p. 159; 10. *D. ros-
tratus, Cuv., p. 160; 11. *D. orea, p. 161; 12. D. feres, Bonn., p. 162; 13. D. canadensis,
Blainv., p. 163; 14. D. Bertini, Duhamel, p. 163; [3° Sous-genre, Oxypterus, Rafines.]. 15.
O. Mongitori, Rafines., p.163; [4° Sous-genre, Phocena, Cuv.]. 16. *Delphinus phocena, Linn.,
p. 163; 17. D. Peronii, Lacép., p. 165; 18. D. Commersonii, Lacép., p. 166; 19. *D. gladia-
tor, Lacép., p, 166; 29. D. grampus, Hunter, p. 168; 21. *D. griseus, Cuv., p. 169; 22. 4D.
ventricosus, Blainv., p. 169; 23. *D. globiceps, Cuy., p. 170; 24. Dauphin de Risso, Cuv., D.
aries? p. 172; [5° Sous-geure, Delphinopterus, Lacép.]. 25. D. leucas, Gmel., p. 173; (6?
Sous-genre, Heterodon, Blainv.]. 26. Anarnacus groenlandicus, Lacép., p. 175; 2%. D. Chem-
nitzianus (Baleena rostrata, Chemn.), p.175; 28. D. edentulus, Schreb., p. 175; 29. D. biden-

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 501

1816-17. Virry, —, ef [A. G.] DesmMarnstT—Continued.
tatus, Hunter, p. 176; 30. Hyperodon Butskopf, Lacép., p. 176; 31. D. Sowerbensis, Blainv.,
p.177; 32. Epiodon urganantus, Rafines., p.177; 33. *D. densirostris, sp.n., p. 178 (based on
a fragment of upper jaw); Dauphins fossiles, p. 179; French names of Dolphins, pp. 179,
180.

Species 1-25 are described by Virey, with the interpolation of a short paragraph by
Desmarest in the account of no. 19, p. 167; species 26 to 33, as well as the remaining pages
of the article, are by Desmarest.

Delphinus densirostris, Desm., sp. 0., p. 178. The 14 species marked with an asterisk, the
authors state (p. 151, note), are those whose validity is considered to be well established.
In concluding, they state (p.178): ‘‘ Pour rectifer convenablement la synonymie de ces espéces,
de nouveaux reneignemens nous sont absolument indispensables” ; and for this purpose in-
vite travelers and naturalists to give special attention to their descriptions, and direct atten-
tion to points to be observed.

In these articles the compilers have brought the subject thoroughly up to date; they not
only include the species described since the time of Lacépéde, but reject afew admitted by
that author. Although strictly a compilation, it well represents the state of the subject at
this date. [550.]

1816-29. Cuvier, F. Dictionnaire | des | Sciences naturelles. | —| Planches. | 2¢
Partie: Regne organisé. | Zoologie. |— | Mammiféres. | Par | M. Fréderie
Cuvier, | Membre de l’Académie des sciences, chargé en chef de la Ménagerie
royale. | — | Paris, | F. G. Levrault, libraire-éditeur, rue de la Harpe, n°. 81, |
Méme maison, rue des Juifs, n°. 33, & Strasbourg. | 1816-1829. 8°. pp. 1-13,

pli. col., i-e.

Cétacés (=Sirenia-+ Cete), pl. xevi, fig. 1, Lamantin; pl. xevii, fig. 1, Dugong des Indes,
fig. 2, Delphinorhynque (= Platanista) ; pl. xeviii, fig. 1, Dauphin vulgaire, fig. 2, Heterodon
a deux dents; pl. xcix, fig. 1, Narwal vulgaire, fig. 2, Cachalot macrocéphale; pl. ¢, fig. 1,
Baleine franche (altered from Martens?) fig. 2, Baleinoptére Rorqual.

The plates themselves are not numbered, but in the ‘‘table des planches” (p. 4-13) these
are numbered consecutively from 1-100, with a list of the names engraved on the plates and
reference to the volume and page of the Dictionnaire where the species are describe. [551.]

1817. Cuvier, G. Le | Régne animal | distribué | d’aprés son organisation, | pour
servir de base a Vhistoire naturelle des ani- | maux et Wintroduction a V’ana-
tomie comparée. | Par M. le Chet. Cuvier, | .... [titles, 5 lines]. | Avec Fi-
gures, desinées d’aprés nature. | Tome I, | contenant | introduction, les Mam-
miféres et les Oiseaux. | Chez Deterville, Libraire, rue Hautefeuille, n°. 8.

| — | De Vimprimerie de A. Belin, | 1817. 8°. pp. i-xxxvii, 1-540.

This is the editio princeps of the celebrated Regne animal.

Huitieme Ordre des Mammiféres. Les Cétacés, pp. 271-287.

Les Cétacés herbivores=Sirenia; genera 1. Manatus, p. 273, 2. Halicore, p.274, 3. Ry-
tind, p. 275; species not formally designated.

Les Cétacés ordinaires=Cetacea: Les Dauphins (Delphinus, L.), pp. 277-280. Les Dau-
phins proprement dits (Delphinus, Cuv.), pp. 277,278. I. Delphinus delphis, L., p. 278; 2.
D. rostratus, Shaw, p. 278; 3. D. tursio, Bonn., p. 278. Les Marsouins (Phocena, Cuy., gen.
n.), p. 279; 4. Le Marsouin commun (D. Phocena, L.), p. 279; 5. L’Epaulard (D. orca et D.
gladiator, Lacep.), p. 279. Les Delphinaptéres (Lacep.); 6. Le Beluga ou Epaulard blane
(D. leucas, Gm., D. albicans, Fabr.), p. 280; Les Hyperoodons (Lacep.), p. 280; [%- D. eden-
tulus, Schreb.], p. 280. Les Narwals (Monodon, L.), pp. 280-282; 8. Monodon monoceros,
Lin., p. 281. Les Cachalots (Physeter, L.), pp. 282-284; [9. Cachalot macrocéphale de Shaw
et de Bonn. non le macrocéphale de Linné], p. 283. Les Physétéres (Lacep.), p. 284 [no species
formally recognized]. Les Baleines (Balena, L.), pp. 284-286; 10. La Baleine franche (B.
mysticetus, L.), pp. 285, 286; 11. Le Nord-Caper (BZ. glacialis, Wein), p. 286. Les Balénoptéres
4 ventre lisse, pp. 287,288; 12. Le Gibbar (Balena physalus, L.), p. 287. Les Balénoptéres
& ventre plissé, p. 287; 13. La Jubarte des Basques (Bal. boops, L.), p. 287.

Phocena, gen. n., p. 279.

The treatment of the Cetacea here presented is strongly in contrast with that of Bonna-
terre, Lacépéde, and their followers, and even with that of still earlier systematists. While
Cuvier rejects many of the fictitious species of the early authors, recognizing but a single
species of Narwhal, and sagaciously hinting at the existence of only a single species of Ca-
chalot, he runs to the opposite extreme among the Fin-Whales, rejecting species as too
vaguely known that have since proved well-founded. We have here the foreshadowing of
the wholesome conservatism later displayed by the author in his treatment of the Sirenians
and Cetaceans in his Ossemens fossiles. [552. ]

502 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1817. DesMAREsT, A. Dugong. <Nouwv. Dict. d@ Hist, Nat., ix, 1817, pp. 603-604.
Résumé of its affinities as variously maintained by previous authors, with the recognition
’ of the single species ‘‘ Zrichecus dugong, Gmel. [553.]

1817. DesMaREST, A.G. Lamantin. < Nouv. Dict. d@ Hist. Nat., xvii, 1817, pp. 258-
254.

Generalities, pp. 258-261; Species, 262, 263; Lamantins fossiles, pp. 263-264. Spp. 2, Man-

atus americanus et I. senegalensis, Desm. [554.]

1817. DesMaREsST, A.G. Mammalogie. < Nouv. Dict. d’Hist. Nat., xviii, 1817, pp.
483-542.

History, including synopsis of classifications, pp. 483-526; external characters, pp. 526-542.
[555.]

1817. Epiror. Narrative of a Voyage to Hudson’s Bay, in His Majesty’s Ship Rosa-
mond, containing some Account of the North-eastern Coast of America, and
of the Tribes inhabiting that remote Region. By Lieut. Chappell. < Quart.
Rev., xviii, 1618, pp. 199-223. Map.

Review of the work. Contains a paragraph (p. 212) on Whales struck with the harpoon
on the coast of Spitzbergen and afterward killed in Davis Strait. [556 .]

1817. G[ERARDIN], 8S. Cachalot. < Dict. des Sci. Nat., vi, 1817, pp. 38-83.

[Considérations générales], pp. 38-44. Premiére famille, Les Narwals, Narwali, pp. 44-49.
1. Le Narwal vulgaire (Monodon monoceros, Linn.), pp. 45-48. ‘2. Le Narwal microcéphale
(Narwalus microcephalus, Lacép.), p. 48. 3. Le Narwal andersonien (N. andersonianus),
p. 49. Deuxiéme famille. Les Anarnaks, Anarnaci, pp. 49,50. 4. L’Anarnak groenlandois
(Anarnak grenlandicus, Lacép.). p. 49. Troisiéme famille. Les Cachalots proprement dits,
Catodontes, pp. 50-59. 5. Le Cachalot macrocéphale (Physeter macrocephalus, Gm.), pp. 50-
56. 6. Le Cachalot trumpo (Catodon macrocephalus, Gm.), pp. 56-58. ‘7. Le Cachalot svi-
neval (Physeter catodon, Gm.), p. 58. 8S. Le Cachalot blanchatre (Catodon macrocephalus,
Var. B., Gm.), p. 58. Quatriéme famille. Les Physales, Physali, pp. 59-61. 9. Le Physale
eylindrique (Physalus cylindricus, Lacép.), pp. 59-61. Cinquitme famille. Les Physétéres,
Physeteres, pp. 61-65. 10. Le Physétére mycrope (P. mycrops, Gm.), pp. 61, 62. 11. Le
Physétére orthodon (B. mycrops, Var. B., Gm.), pp. 63, 64. 12. Le Physétére mular (P. tur-
sio, Gm.), pp. 64, 65. Sixiéme famille. Les Delphinaptéres, Delphinapteri, pp. 65-67. 13. Le
Delphinaptére béluga (Delphinapterus lewcas, Gm.), pp. 65-67. 14. Le Delphinaptére sené-
dette (Delphinapterus senedetta, Lacép.), p. 67. Septiéme famille. Les Dauphins, Delphini,
pp. 67-81. 15. Le Dauphin vulgaire (Delphinus delphis, Gm.), pp. 68-71. 16. Le Dauphin
marsouin (D. phocena, Gm.), pp. 71-74. 17. Le Dauphin orque (D. orca, Gm., Var. A.),
pp. 74,75. 18. Le Dauphin gladiateur (D. orca, Gm., Var. B.), pp. 75-77. 19. Le Dauphin
nésernack (D. nesarnack, Lacép.). p. 77. 20. Le Dauphin diodon (D. diodon, Lacép.), p. 78.
21. Le Dauphin ventru (D. ventricosus, Lacép.), p. 78. 22. Le Dauphin férés, D. feres.
Lacép.), p. 79. ‘3. Le Dauphin de Duhamel (D. Duhamelii, Lacép.), p. 79. 24. Le Dau-
phin de Péron (D. Peronii, Lacép.), p. 80. 25. Le Dauphin de Commerson (D. Commersoni,
Lacép.), p. 81. Huitiéme et derniére famille des cachalots. Les Hypéroodons, Hyperoodon-
tes, pp. 81-82. 26. L’Hypéroodon butskopf (D. orca, Gm., Var. C.), pp. 81-83.

A compilation, mainly from Lacépéde, whose nomenclature is followed. The species are
the same as those recognized by Lacépéde. [557.]

1817. [Mr1Liar, or MILLER, JAMES.] Cetology. <Encyel. Brit., 5th ed., v, 1817, pp.
327-360, pll. exl, exli.

Chap. i. Of the Classification and Natural History of Cetaceous Fishes, pp. 328-341. Chap.
ii. Of the Anatomy and Physiology of Cetaceous Fishes, pp. 341-353. Chap. iii. Of the Whale
Fishery, pp. 353-359.

The genera recognized are, i, Balena, ii, Monodon, iii, Physeter, iv, Delphinus. The species
are the following: 1. Balena Iysticetus, pp. 329, 330, pl. exl, fig.1. 2. Balena Glacialis, pp.
330, 331. 3. Balena Physalus, p.331. 4. Balena Nodosa, p.331. 5. Balena Gibbosa, p. 332.
6. Balena Boops, p. 332. 7%. Balena Musculus, p. 333. 8. Balena Bostrata [sic], p. 333.
9. Monodon Monoceros, p. 334, pl. exl, fig. 2. 10. Monodon Spurius, p. 336. 11. Physeter
Macrocephalus, pp. 334, 335, pl. exl, fig.3. 1%. Physeter Catodon, p. 336. 1:3. Physeter
Trumpo, p. 336. 14. Physeter Cylindricus, p. 337. 15. Physeter Microps, p. 337. 16. Phy-
seter Mular, p. 337. 17. Delphinus Phocena, p. 338. 18. Delphinus Delphis, pp. 338, 339.
19. Delphinus Tursio, p. 339. 20. Delphinus Orea, p. 339, pl. exl, fig.4. 21. Delphinus
Gladiator, p.310. 22. Delphinus Leucas, p.340. 23. Delphinus Bidentatus, p.340. 24. Del-
ohinus Butskopf, pp. 340, 341. 25. Delphinus Feres, p. 341.

Pl. exli gives views in profile of two skulls of Whales, and views of baleen from side,
above, etc. The 4 figures of Whales given in pl. cxl are copies of well-known figures.

1817.

1818.

1818.

1818.

1818.

1818.

1818.

1318.

1818.

1818.

1818.

1818.

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 503

[ MILLAR, or MILLER, JAMES ]—Continued.

This article appeared originally in the 4th ed. of the Zncycl. Brit. (1810), according to the
preface of the present (5th) ed., and is by the editor, Dr. James Millar. It is as fair a pre-
sentation of the subject as could be expected from a writer merely qualified to glean from
respectable sources. 558. |

BLAINVILLE, [H.] DE. Mammiferes, Mammalia. <Nouv. Dict. @ Hist. Nat.,
xix, 1818, pp. 1-152. [559.]
Desmarest, A. E. Mammifores fossiles. < Nouv. Dict. d’ Hist. Nat., xix, 1818,
pp. 152-156. (560.
Desmarest, A. E. Narwhal, Narwhalus. <Nowv. Dict. d Hist. Nat., xxii, 1818,
pp. 224-228.
Species: 1. Narwhalus vulgaris, Lacép., p. 224; 2. N. microcephalus, Lacép., p.227; 3. N.

andersoni, Lacép., p. 228. [561.]
EGepr, Hans. A | Description of Greenland. | By Hans Egede, | who was a
Missionary in that country | for | twenty-five years. |— | A New Edition.

| —| With an | Historical Introduction | and | a Life of the Author. | Ilus-
trated | with a map of Greenland, and numerous engravings on wood. | See-
ond Edition. | [Vignette.] London: | Printed for T, and J. Allman, | Frances
Street, Hanover Square; | W. H. Reid, Charing Cross; and Baldwin, Cradock
and Joy, | Paternoster Row. | 1818. 8°. pp. i-cxviii, 1-225, map and wood-
cuts.
Chap. vi. Of the Greenland Sea Animals, and Sea Fowls and Fishes, pp. 66-99. Cetaceans
are treated pp. 66-82.
For the editio princeps, see 1741. [562.]
Fapsricius, Orwo. , Zoologiske Bidrag. <Kongel. Danske Videnskab.-Selsh..
Skrivter, vi, Deel 1 (for 1809-1810), 1818, pp. 57-138.
2det Bidrag. Om Stub-Hvalen, Balena Boops, Linn., pp. 63-83. [563.]
FABRICIUS, Orro. Nojogtig Beskrivelse over Grénlendernes Landdyr-, Fugle-
og Fiskefangst med dertil hérende Redskaber. <Kongel. Danske Videnskab.-
Selsk. Skrivter, vi, Deel 2 (for 1811-1812), 1818, pp. 231-272.
Ul. Fiskefangst og dertil hérende Redskaber, pp. 253-272. Hvalfangst, pp. 253-256. [564.]
FREMINVILLE, [C. P. DE LA Porx DE.] Sur une nouvelle espéce de Dauphin.
< Bull. des Sci. par la Soc. philom. de Paris, 1818, pp. 67, 68.
Delphinus globiceps ? [565. ]
HERAUSGEBERS. Ueber den Bau des Beluga (Delphinus albicans Linn. Delphi-
napterus beluga Lacépede). Von Barclay. (Aus Thomson’s Annals of Philoso-
phy. Vol. ix, p. 233 ff.) <Deutsches Archiv f. Physiol., iv, 1818, pp. 296-298.
Auszug. [566.]

Home, E. A description of the teeth of the Delphinus Gangeticus. < Philos.
Trans. Lond., [eviii], pt. 2, art. xxi, 1818, pp. 417-419, pl. 20.
Figures of the upper and under jaws and of isolated teeth. [567.]
“Kat, H. D. Dagboek eener reize ter walvisch en- robbenvangst, gedaan in
1777. en 1778. Haarlem, Wed. P. Loosjes, 1818. 8°. Met ecene Kaart en
portret.”
Not seen; from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 240, no. 3493. [568. ]

Lac&épkpr, [B. G. Er.]. Note sur des Cétacées des mers voisines du Japon.
<Mem. du Mus. @ Hist. nat., iv, 1818, pp. 487-475.

Baleena japonica, Balceena lunulata, Balenoptera punctulata, Balenoptera nigra, Baleenop-
tera ceerulescens (p. 473), Baleenoptera maculata, Physeterus sulcatus (p. 474), Delphinus niger
(475), spp. nn.

“Les dessins coloriés d’aprés lesquels j'ai décrit ces huit espéces de cétacées japonois, ont
été communiqués au Muséum royal d'Histoire naturelle, par M. Abel de Rémusat, membre
de l Académie des Inscriptions et Belles-Lettres. Ils présentent pour les caractéres distine-
tifs, une grande netteté, et tous ces signes de l’xuthenticité et de l’exactitude que les zoolo-
gistes sont maintenant si accoutumés 4 reconnoitre; et voici les traits particuliers de ces huit
espéces”’ (p. 469).

This highly reprehensible piece of work has received just condemnation at the hands of
most writers who have had occasion to treat of the Cetacea of the Japan seas, and the spe-

5O4 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1818, Lactépmpr, [B. G. Et.]—Continued. 2
cies, when not wholly ignored, go to swell the list of those which are indeterminable. Allow.
ing that the drawings wete reasonably correet, which is far from probable, the characters
drawn from them are so vague and general that the diagnoses are valueless as a scientific
basis. There is, furthermore, no assurance that the drawings were even attempts at fac-
simile representations of natural objects. With the nine species described six years later by
‘Chamisso from Japanese wooden models, and those described by Rafinesque, Lesson, and
others, from observation of animals swimming in the sea, they form altogether a fine rubbish
pile, but one which need give little trouble, since the species are quite unworthy of any at-
temp at recognition, only showing to how great a depth of folly the vanity of authorship may
sometimes lead. [569.]
1818. O'REILLY, B. Greenland, | the | Adjacent Seas, | anal | the North-west Passage
| to | the Pacific Ocean, | illustrated in a voyage to Davis’s Strait, | during
the Summer of 1817. | — | With charts and numerous plates, | from drawings
of the author taken on the spot. | — | By | Bernard O’Reilly, Esq. | — | Lon-
don: | printed for Baldwin, Cradock, and Joy, | 47, Paternoster-Row. | — |
1818. Ly. 4°. pp. i-vili, 1-293, pll. i-xvili--3 charts.

Chap. v, Arctic Zoology, pp. 96-148. Monodon Monoceros, pp. 104-107. ‘ Balena Mysti-
cetus (the common Whale),’’ pp. 107-130, pl. x, fig. 3, transverse section of body at lumbar
region, fig. 4, section of tail, fig. 5, animal, fige. orig. ‘‘Balena Mysticetus (the finner),” pp.
130,131. Delphinus Orca, pp. 132-134. Delphinus Leucas, pp. 134, 135, pl. x, fig. 1. There
are incidental allusions to other species at pp. 181, 182.

Although the author was not without opportunity of observing the northern Cetacea, and
especially the Balena mysticetus, he contributes nothing of importance to the subject, but
on the other hand, displays gross ignorance respecting many points touched upon. The
name Balena mysticetus is first employed in its correct sense (p. 107), but later, doubtless by
inadvertence, is used to designate ‘‘the finner Whale.’”’ From one who describes the ‘‘Sword
Grampus” as having the dorsal fin long ond bony, growing ionger with age, ete., and who.
states that the Balena mysticetus ‘‘received its specific name from the Scriptural record of
the adventure of Jonas,” little can be expected in the way of new information. [570.]

1818. SAaBYE, Hans EGEpE. Greenland: | being | Extracts from a Journal | kept in
that Country | in the Years 1770 to 1778. | By Hans Egede Saabye, | Formerly
ordained Minister in the Districts of Clanshayn and Christianshaab; | now
Minister of Udbye, in the Bishopric of Fiihnen; and | Grandson of the cele-
brated Hans Egede. | (Now first published.) | — | To which is prefixed | An
Introduction; containing some | Accounts of the Manners of the Greenlanders,

| and of the | Mission in Greenland; | with various interesting information
respecting | the Geography, &c., of that Country; | And illustrated by a |
Chart of Greenland, | By G. Fries. | — | Translated from the German. | — |
London: | Printed for Boosey and Sons, | 4 Broad Street, Royal Exchange,
| —|1818. 8°. pp. i-viii, 1-293.

There is a short account of the Whalefishery, as carried on by the Greenlanders, at pp. 29,
30. Reference to trade in ‘‘unicorn horns,” p. 161. Chapter xiii. The Whale found, pp. 190-
195, recounts the behavior of the Greenlanders on finding a Whale, and their manner of pro.
cedure in saving its products.

For the ed. prin. see 1741. Besides the German edition of this work, of which the present
is a translation, a Dutch version appeared in 1818. See Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 247, no. 3552. [571.]

1819. ANON. Skeleton of a Whale found in Clackmannanshire. < Blackwood’s Edin.
Mag., v, 1819, p. 737.

Rasa of the exhumation of the skeleton, with measurements of some of the principal
bones. t [572.]

1819. ANspacH, L. A. A | History | of the | Island of Newfoundland: | containing a

| Description of the Island, | The Banks, the Fisheries, | and | Trade of New-
foundland, | and the | Coast of Labrador. | Illustrated with Two Maps. | — |
By the | Rev. Lewis Amadeus Anspach, | Late a Magistrate of that Island
and Missionary for the District | of Conception Bay. | — | London: | Printed
for the Author, | And Sold by T. and J. Allman, Princes-Street, Hanover- |
Square; and J. M. Richardson, 23, Cornhill, opposite | the ional Exchange.
| —] 1819. 8°. pp. i-xxvili, 1-512.

Contains, pp. 396-399, a short notice of the Whale-fishery formerly carried on along the

eastern coast of North America. [573.]

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 505

1819. ARNAULT, M. Sur les coquilles et des ossements fossiles, découverts et observés

° dans les environs d’Anvers. < Ann. générales des Sci. phys., ii, 1819, pp. 124-
128. 5

Trois vertébres énormes; ‘‘elles furent évidemment celles de quelque cétacée de la plus

grande taille” (p. 127). [574.]

1819. BALD, Robert. Notice respecting the discovery of the Skeleton of a Whale on
the Estate of Airthrey, near Stirling, the property of Sir Robert Abercromby,
Baronet. <Wdinb. Philos. Jowrn., i, no. 2, art. xxxii, 1819, pp. 393-396.
Particulars of the finding and exhumation of a skeleton ‘‘which is evidently that of a
Whale,” which ‘‘appears to have been about 72 feet in length.” [575.]
1819. CoRTESI, GIUSEPPE. Saggi Geologici | degli Stati di Parma e Piacenza | Dedi-
cati | a Sua Maesta | la Principessa Imperiale | Maria Luigia | Arciduchessa
d’ Austria | Duchessa | di Parma Piacenza Guastalla ece. ecc. | dal guidice |
Giuseppe Cortesi | Professore Onorario | di Geologia | Piacenza | Dai Torchj
del Majno | MDCCCXIX. 4°. Il. 4, pp. i-x, 1-165, pll. i-vii.
Articolo IV. Degli Scheletri di Balene e di altri Cetacei, pp. 45-67, pll. ii-iv.
Description (p. 48) and figure (pl. ii, fig. 1, skull) of a fossil Dolphin, which later was
named Delphinus Cortesiti by Desmoulin, and a fossil Whale (p. 61, pl. v, fig. 1, skeleton),

afterwards named Balena Cortesii by Desmoulins. [576.]
1819. DesMaAREST, A. G. Rytine, Rytina, Ill. <Nouwv. Dict. @ Hist. nat., xxix, 1819,
pp. 573-576. [577.]

1819. ‘‘HELLWIG, Jon. Cor. Lupw. Tabellarische Uebersicht der Ordnungen, Fa-
milien u. Gattungen der Siiugethiere, nach Illigers prodromus system. Mam-
mlium, mit Aufftihrung aller Arten, welche der Verf. nach den Schreberschen
Siiugthieren u. nach den Werken Anderer zu seinen Gattungen zog, in 65 Ta-
bellen. gr. 8°. Helmstiidt, 1819.”

Not seen: title from Carus and Engelmann. [578.]

1819. HUMBOLDT, ALEXANDER VON. Voyage | aux Régions Equinoxiales | du Nou-
veau Continent, | fait en 1799, 1800, 1801, 1802, 1803 et 1804, | par Al. de
Humboldt et A. Bonpland; | rédigé | Par Alexandre de Humboldt. | Avec
deux Atlas, | qui renferment, ’un les vues des Cordilléres et les monumens
des peuples indigénes | de ?Amérique, et autre des cartes géographiques et

physiques. | — | Tome [premier, ] second [et troisiéme]. | — | A Paris, | Chez

N. Maze, Libraire, rue Git-le-Coeur, Ne. 4. | — | [1814,] 1819 [1825]. Vol. ii,

311, pp. 1-722. 3vols. 4°. Vol. i, 1814; vol. ii, 1819; vol. iii, 1825.
Souffleurs, ii, pp. 201, 202. Manati ou Lamantin, ii, pp. 226-228, 606. [579.]

1819. ‘‘MATTHIESEN. Ein Steindruck [Balaenoptera rostrata]. Hamburg, 1819.”
Not seen; reference from Reichenbach, Walthiere, p. 22, note. [580.]

1819. Ps—EuDON. Journal | of a| Voyage of Discovery, | to the | Arctic Regions, |
performed between the 4th of April and the 18th of | November, 1818, | in His
Majesty’s Ship Alexander, | W[illiaJm Edw[ard]. Parry, Esq., Lieut. and
Commander. | — | By an officer of the Alexander. | — | London: | Printed for
Richard Phillips; by G. Sidney, Northumberland-street, Strand. | [No date.
“March 15, 1819” in MS.] 8°. pp. i-viii, 1-104, map, and pll. i-iii. The
signature mark is ‘‘ Voyages and Travels, No. 1, Vol. I.”

Appendix, No. viii. <A brief Sketch of the Quadrupeds, Birds, and Fishes, seen by those
employed on the late Expedition to Davis’ Straits and Batlin’s Bay, pp. 99-104.

‘“‘Fishes”’ (i.e., Cetacea and Pinnipedia!), p. 1041. Balena mysticetus, Balena Physalus,
Phoca, Monodon Monoceros. Brief remarks on each. At pp. 42-44 is given a rather detailed
account of the “female fish”’ (Balena mysticetus) taken by 2 Hull whaler, giving account of
external characters, baleen, measurements, etc. [S81.]
1819. Ross, J. A | Voyage of Discovery, | made under the orders of the Admiralty,

| in | His Majesty’s ships | Isabella and Alexander, | for the purpose of | ex-
ploring Batfin’s Bay, | and inquiring into the probability of a | North-west
Passage. | — | By John Ross, K. 8. Captain Royal Navy. | — | London: | — |

506 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1819. Ross, J.—Continued.
John Murray, Albemarle-street. | — | 1819. 1vol. 49°. Il. 2, pp. i-xl, 1-258,
11., pp. i-cxliv, maps, plates.
iuenien ii. Zoological Memoranda. Mammalia, pp. xli-xlvii.
Balena Mysticetus, pp. xlvi, xlvii. Description of a specimen 46 feet long. No other Ceta-
cean mentioned. [$82.]
1819. Ross, J. A | Voyage of Discovery, | made under the orders of the Admiralty, |
in | His Majesty’s Ships | Isabella and Alexander, | for the purpose of | Ex-
ploring Baffin’s Bay, | and enquiring into the probability | of a | North-West
Passage. | — | By John Ross, K. 8. Captain Royal Navy. | — | Second edition.
| In two volumes. | Vol. I[-II]. | — | London: | Printed by Strahan and
' Spottiswoode, Printers-Street; | for Longman, Hurst, Rees, Orme, and Brown,
| Paternoster Row. | 1819. | 2 vols. 8°. Vol. i, pp. i-lxix, 1-265, 1 double
map; vol. ii, pp. i-ii, 1-258, 1 double plate.
Appendix no. iv. Zoological Memoranda, vol. ii, pp. 145-179. Mammalia, pp. 145-153.
See the 4° ed. (last title). [583.]
1819. ScoRESBY, WILLIAM, jr. Remarks on the Size of the Greenland Whale, or Ba-
lena Mysticetus, designed to show that this animal is found of as great dimen-
sions in the present day as at any former period since the establishment of
the whale-fishery. < Edinb. Philos. Journ., 1, 1819, pp. 83-88. [584.]

1820. ANON. Grdsse des gr5ulindischen Wals, Balena mysticetus L. <Isis von Oken,
vi, 1820, pp. 506, 507.
Auszug aus Edinb. Phis. Journ., i, 1819, pp. 83-88. [585.]

1820. CAMPER, PirnrrE. Observations Anatomiques | sur | la structure intérieure et
le squelette | de plusieurs espéces | de Cétacés. | Par Pierre Camper, |...
[= titles, 4 lines. ] | Publiées par son fils, Adrien-Gilles Camper, |. . . [=titles,
3 lines]. | Avec des Notes par M.G. Cuvier, |... [=titles,1 line]. | Onya
ajouté un Atlas composé de 53 Planches, dont 3 sont en couleur, | Ouvrage
qui peut faire suite aux Annales et Mémoires du Muséum | d’ Histoire naturelle,
et aux Recherches sur les Ossemens | fossiles des Quadrupédes, par M. Cu-
vier. | — | Paris, | Chez Gabriel Dufour, Libraire, | Rue de Vaugirard, N°.
34. | — | 1820. 4°. Il. 2, pp. 1-218.

The Atlas has the following title:

Recueil de Planches | pour servir | aux observations anatomiques | sur | la
structure intérieure et le squelette | de plusieurs espéces | de Cétacés, | Par
MM. Camper, Pere et Fils. | cinquante-trois»planches, dont trois en cou-
leur. | — | A Paris, | Chez Gabriel Dufour, Libraire, | Rue de Vaugirard, N°.
34. | — | 1820. 2°. Il. 2, pll. i-lii. [1. 2, Table. ]

Discours préliminaire, pp. 1-8. Observations anatomiques, ete. Premiére Partie. Cha-
pitre premier. Vues générales sur la nature des Cétacés, pp. 9-18. Chapitre II. Sur la Classi-
fication des Cétacés, pp. 18-25. Chapitre III. Sur les Cétacés du premier ordre, ou Cétacés
a fanons, pp. 26-41. Chapitre 1V. Sur la Forme extérieure et la Structure des parties inté-
rieures de la Baleine franche, pp. 41-52. Chapitre V. Sur la Structure de l’appareil digestif,
circulatoire et sexuel, ainsi que sur quelques Particularités du squelette, pp. 52-58. Chapitre
VI. Sur l’Ostéologie du crane des Baleines, pp. 58-73. Chapitre VII. Sur Vostéologie d’un
Baleinoptére Gibbar, Physalus de Linné, pp. 74-77. Chapitre VIII. Sur l’Ostéologie du crane
dun Cétacé que nous croyons étre le Baleinoptére Museau pointu, ou Balena rostrata de
Linné, pp. 78-86. Note génerale sur la premiére partie, pp. 86, 87.

Seconde Partie. Chupitre I*t. Sur la Classification du second ordre, ou du genre du Cacha-
lot, pp. 88-94. Chapitre II. Sur l’Ostéologie du crane des Cachalots, pp. 94-110.

Troisiéme Partie. Sur les Cétacés du troisiéme ordre, ayant les machoires supérieures et
inférieures armées de dents. Chapitre I. Sur les Dauphins en général, pp. 111-114. Cha-
pitre II. Surlapremiére famille des Dauphins, ou les Narwals, pp. 114-118. Chapitre III. Sur
LVOstéologie du crane du Narwal monodon, pp. 118-121. Chapitre IV. Sur le crane du Nar-
wal édenté, du Musée royal de France, pp. 121-124. Chapitre V. Sur les Dauphins armés de
dents dans les mAchoires supérieures et inférieures, pp. 124-126. Chapitre VI. Sur l’Oudre,
pp. 126-130. Chapitre VII. Observations anatomiques sur le Dauphin vulgaire, pp. 181-141.
Chopitre VIII. Description anatomique du Dauphin Marsouin, Delphinus Phoceena, pinna in

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 507

1820. CamrErR, Pizsrre—Continued.
dorso una, rostro brevi obtuso de Brisson, pp. 142-157. Chapitre IX. Sur la Structure du
Crane des diverses familles de Cétacés, considérée dans ses rapports avec celle du crane de
VYHomme, pp. 157-163.

Explication des Planches, pp. 164-216. Table des chapitres contenus dans cet ouvrage, pp.
pp. 217, 218.

Sujets figurées: Embryon d’une baleine franche, pll. i-iii; crane d’une jeune baleine franche,
pll. iv-vi; profile du créne d’une autre baleine, dans laquelle on a conservé les fanons, pl. vii;
de Vorgane de Vouie des baleines, pll. viii, ix; m&choires inférieures d’une baleine, pl. x; le
erdne d’un Baleinoptére Gibbar (Physalus de Linné), pll. xi, xii; crane du baleinoptére museau
pointu (Balena rostrata de Linné), pli. xiii-xvi; crane d’un cachalot conservé dans Je choeur
de l’église de Schevelinge, proche la Haye, pll. xvii, xx-xxii; crane d’un cachalot macrocé-
phale, pll. xviii, xix; ostéologie del’oreille du cachalot, pll. xxiii-xxvi; les mAchoires inférieures
d'un cachalot, pl. xxvii; vertébres cervicales d’un cachalot et l’atlas d’une baleine, pl. xxviii;
erdne du narwal, pll. xxix—xxxi; créne d’un narwal édenté, pll. xxxii-xxxiv; crane d'un
dauphin vulgaire, xxxv-xl; vertébres cervicales des plusieurs espéces de dauphins, pl. xli;
vertébres cervicales d’un marsouin, et d’une vertébre cervicale d’un grand cétacé du Musée
britannique, avec quelques vertébres lombaires, sacrées, etc. d’un dauphin vulgaire, pl.
xlii; myologie de lextrémité pectorale du dauphin vulgaire, pl. xliii; les épanles de diffé-
rentes espéces de cétacés, ainsi que les os du bras du dauphin vulgaire, pl. xliv; le dauphin
marsouin, en profil et ouvert, pll. xlv—xlvii; la structure des narines, de l’eil et de larynx,
du dauphin marsouin, pl. xlviii; crine du marsouin, pl. xlix; téte d’un marsonin, pl. 1; cer-
veau d’un marsouin nouveau-né, pl. li; profil d’un fetus male du marsouin; les parties
sexuelles d’un foetus femelle; osselets: pelvienne; portion supérieure du tube alimentaire;
Vomoplate, tous du méme espéce, pl. lii; analogie du crane des cétacés avec celui de homme,
etc., pl. liii. (586. ]

1320. Donovan, E. The | Natural History | of | British Quadrupeds; | ccnsisting of
coloured figured, | accompanied with | Scientific and general descriptions, |
of all the species that are known to inhabit | the British Isles: | including |
as well those found in a wild as in the domesticated state; | and also such as
are | clearly authenticated to have been originally indigenous, but are now |
extirpated, or become extremely rare; the whole arranged in systematic order,
after the manner of Linnzeus. | — | By E. Donovan, F. L. 8. W.S. | Author
of the Natural Histories of British Birds, Fishes, Insects, Shells, &c. | — | In
three volumes, | Vol. I[ II, III]. | — | London: | Printed for the Author: and
for F. C. and J. Rivington, 62, St. Paul’s Church-yard, and 3, Waterloo-Place,
Pall-Mall. | — | 1820. 8°. pll. i-lxxii, with several unpaged folios of text to

f each.
. 1. Balena rostrata, pl. xxiv, and 1 p. of text. 2. Balena physalus, pl. xxxy, and 3 pp.
of text. 4. Delphinus orca, pl. lvii, and 3 pp. of text. 5. Delphinus ? bidens, pl. lxvii, and
3 pp. text. ‘ [587.]

1820. Gotpruss, G. A. Handbuch | der | Zoologie. | Von | Georg August Goldfuss, |
. ..[=titles, 11 lines, and monogram. ] | Zweite Abtheilung. | — | Nurnberg, |
bei Johann Leonhard Schrag. | 1820. <Handbuch | der Naturgeschichte, |
Zum Gebrauch | bei Vorlesungen. | Von | Dr. G[Lotthilf]. H[einrich von].
Schubert. | —| Dritter Theil. | Zweite Abtheilung. | — | Nurnberg, | bei
Johann Leonhard Schrag. | 1820. | 8°. pp. i-xxiv, 1-510.

Systematische Uebersicht der Gattungen, pp. v-xxiv (Cete and Sirenia, p. xix,—list of
genera and subgenera).

Erste Ordnung, Cete, Walle, pp. 360-336. 1. Balaena mysticetus, 2. Balaenoptera rostrata,
3. B. boops, 4. Physeter (Physalus) gibbosus, 5. Physeter (Catodon) macrocephalus, 6. Phy-
seter (Physeter) Microps, '7. Ancylodon groenlandicus, 8. Ceratodon monoceros, 9. Delphinus
(Hyperoodon) bidens, 19. D. (Delphinapterus) Leucas; 14. D. (Delphinus) Delphis, 12. D.
(Phocaena) Phocaena, 13. D. (Phocaena) Orca ; =6 genera, 7 subgenn., 13 spp.

Zweite Ordnung. Sirenia, Sirenen, pp. 336-339, 1. Rytina Stelleri, 2. Manatus australis,
3. Halioone (lege Halicore) indica. [588.]

1820, Home, E. Onthe milk tusks, and organ of hearing of the Dugong. < Philos.
Trans. Lond., [ex], pt. 2, art. ix, 1820, pp. 144-155, pll. xti-xiv.

The plates give profile and basilar views of the skull, section of the tusk, milk dentition,

lower jaw, incisors, and section of molars. [589.]

508

1820.

1820.

1820.

1820.

1820.

1820.

BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

Home, E. Particulars respecting the anatomy of the Dugong, intended as a
Supplement to Sir T. S. Raffles’ Account of that animal. < Philos. Trans. Lond.,
[ex], pt. 2, art. xx, 1820, pp. 315-323, pll. xv—xxxi.

The observations were made on a young female, and the viscera of a male, eight feet long.
Pl. xxv, animal; pll. xxvi, xxvii, stomach, tongue,-and cecum; pl. xxviii, heart; pl. xxix,
part of trachea and portion of lungs; pl. xxx, sexual organs; pl. xxxi,‘sternum and pelvic
bones. [590.]

“KOHLER, Fr. GOTTL. Reise ins Hismeer und nach den Kiisten von Grénland
und Spitsbergen im Jahre 1801, und Beschreibung der Wallfischfang. Leipzig,
ea, Ee”

Not seen; from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 240, no. 3494. [591.]

“KOHLER, FR. GoTry. Reis naar de IJszee en naar de kusten van Groenland
en Spitsbergen, in het jaar 1804. Benevens eene beschrijving van de walvisch-
vangst. Naar het Hoogduitsch. Te Amsterdam, bij J. C. van Kesteren 1820.

or. 8°07
Not seen; from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 240, no. 3495. Apparently a translation of the last,
although the date of the voyage is in the one case 1801, and in the other 1804. [592.]

RAFFLES, T. 8. Some account of the Dugong. < Philos. Trans. Lond., [cx],
pt. 2, art. xiii, 1820, pp. 174-182.
External characters, anatomy, and habits. ; [593 ]
RANZANI, CAMILLO. Elementi | della | Storia naturale | dei Mammiferi | dell’
abate | Camillo Ranzani | Professore di Mineralogia, e di zoologia | nella pon-
tificia Universita | di Bologna. |— | Volume Primo [Secondo e Terzo, mut.
mut. ]. | — | Bologna. | — | Per le Stampe di Annesio Nobili | 1820. 8°. pp.
1-736, 1. 1, pll. i-xiii (the three volumes are continuously paged).

Ordine ottavo de Cetacei, pp. 668-708. :

Famiglia prima. De Cetacei erbivori, pp. 670-677. 1. Manatus americanus, p. 673; Be
Hatlicore Dugong, p. 674; 3. Rytina Stelleri, p. 676.

Famiglia seconda. De Cetacei carnivori, pp. 677-708. 1. Delphinus Geoffrensis, p. 682; 2
Delphinus coronatius, p. 682; 3. Delphinus D:lphis, p. 683; 4. Delphinus Tursio, p. 685; 5.
Delphinus Mongitori, p. 686; 6. Delphinus Phocaena, p. 687; ‘7. Delphinus Beluga, p. 688;
8. Delphinus Urgananius, p. 689; 9. Delphinus Diodon, p. 690; 29. Ceratodon vulgaris, p. .
691; 11. Physeter macrocephalus, p. 695; 12. Balaena Mysticetus, p. 701 (pl. xiii, fig. 1); 13.
Balaena Fisalis, p. 705; 14. Balaena Boops, p. 706. [594.]

ScorrsBy, W., jr. An | Account | of the | Arctic Regions, | with a | History and
Description | of the | Northern Whale-Fishery. | By W[illiam]. Scoresby Jun.
F. R. S. E. | llustrated by Twenty-four Engrayings. | In Two Volumes.

| — | Vol. I [-I1]. | — | Edinburgh: | Printed for Archibald Constable and
Co. Edinburgh: | and Hurst, Robinson & Co. Cheapside, London. | — | 1820.

2vols. 8°. Vol. i, pp.i-xx, 1-551-+1-82 and frontisp.; vol. ii, pp. i-vili, 1-
574, pll. i-xxii (including maps)-+xii.*

A Sketch of the Zoology of the Arctic Regions, i, pp. 446-551. Sect. I. A Description of
Animals, of the Cetaceous Kind, frequenting the Greenland Sea, pp. 449-501. 1. Balena
Mysticetus, pp. 449-478, pl. xii, fig. 1, 2, xii [bis]; 2. Balenoptera Gibbar, La Cepéde; B. Phy-
salis of Linné, pp. 478-482. &. Balena Rorqual (La Cepéde) Balena Musculus of Linné, or
Broad-nosed Whale, pp. 482, 483. 4. Balenoptera Jubartes (La Cepéde)—Balena Boops of
Linné, or Finner of the Whale-fishers, pp. 484, 485.. 5. Balenoptera Acuto-rostrata (La
Cepéde) — Balena rostrata of Linné, or Beaked Whiile, pp. 485, 486, pl. xiii, fig. 1. G. Monodon
Monoceros (Linné) — Narwal, or Unicorn of. the Whnulers, pp. 486-495, pl. xii, fig. 3, pl. xv, figg.
1,2. %. Delphinus Deductor (Lraill)—Ca’ing or Leading Whale, pp. 496-500, pl. xxii, fig.1. S.
Delphinapterus Beluoaw (La Cepéde) — Delphinus leucas of Linné; Beluga of Pennant, or
White Whale of the fishers, pp. 500, 501, pl. xiv.

Pl. xvi, Medus, &c., (7. e., ‘‘ Whale’s Food”’). Pll. xvii, xix—xxii, Instruments and Appara-
tus used in the Whalefishery.

Account of the Northern Whale-Fisheries, &c., ii, pp. 1-537. Chap. i. Chronological His-
tory of the Northern Whale-Fisheries, pp. 1-95. Chap.ii. Comparative View of the Origin,
Progress, and Present State of the Whale-Fisheries of the different European Nations,
pp. 96-171. Chap. iii. Situation of the Early Whale-Fishery,—Manner in which it was
conducted,—and the Alterations which have subsequently taken place, pp. 172-186. Chap.
iv. Account of the Modern Whale-Fishery, as conducted at Spitzbergen,pp. 187-381. Chep.

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY~ OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 509

1820. ScorrsBy, W., jr.—Continued.

v. Account of the Davis’ Straits Whale-Iishery, and a comparison with that of Greenland,
with Statements of Expences and Profits of a Fishing Ship, pp. 382-396. Chap. vi. Methods
of Extracting Oil and Preparing Whalebone, with a Description of these Articles, and
remarks on the uses to which the several products of the Whale-Fishery are ap-
plied, pp. 397-437. Chap: vii. Narrative of Proceedings on board of the Ship Esk, during
a Whale-Fishing Voyage to the coast of Spitzbergen, in the year 1816, pp. 438-488.
Appendix, pp. 489-558.—I. Abstract of the Acts of Parliament at present in force for
the Regulation of the Whale-fishery of Greenland and Davis’ Straits, pp. 491-505. 11.
Some Remarks on the most advantageous Dimensions of a Whale-Ship, [and] Further No-
tices respecting the Fortifications of a Greenland Ship, pp. 506-509. III. Schedule of the
Principal Vishing Apparatus necéssary for a Ship, of 300 tons burden or upwards, intended
to be employed in the Greenland Trade, pp. 509-511. IV. ... Manner of Mustering the Crew
of Whale-Ships... pp. 512-518. V. Account of a Trial respecting the right of the Ship Ex-
periment, toa Whale struck by one of the Crew of the Neptune; Gale v. Wilkinson, pp. 518-
521. WI. Signals used inthe Whale-fishery, pp. 521-525. VII. Account of Some Experiments
for determining the Relations between the Weight and Measure, in certain quantities of
W hale-Oil, pp. 525-528. VIII. Some account of the Whale Fishery conducted in the Southern
Seas, pp. 529-537. IX. On the Anomaly in the Variation of the Magnetic Needle, as observed
on Ship-board, pp. 537-554. X. Explanation of the Plates, pp. 554-558.

Scoresby’s Arctic Regions is well known as one of the most important contributions to the
history of the Greenland Whale (Balena mysticetus) and the Northern Whale-fishery extant,
and as the source whence many later writers on the subject have largely derived their mate-
rials. His figures of the Greenland Whale are the best published prior to 1874, and those of
the Narwhal are also excellent. Those of the other species were copied from previous
writers, and his brief notices of the other Cetaceans he describes were mostly given at
second hand, and indicate that he knew little about them from personal observation. His
four species of Balenoptera are ali to be referred to Physalus. antiquorum, 2uct. (= Ba-
lenoptera musculus). His nomenclature is that of Lacépéde. Failing to recognize the
Nordkaper (Baleena biscayensis of recent European cetologists) as a distinct species, he has
confounded its history, in his historical summary of the Northern Whale-fishery, with that
of Balena mysticetus. Not meeting with the former, for now obvious reasons, in any of his
Whaling expeditions, he was very naturally led to disbelieve in its existence as a species

distinct from the Greenland Whale. [595.]
1821. BLumEeNnBacH, J. F. Handbuch | der | Naturgeschichte | von | Joh. Fried.
Blumenbach. | — | Multa fiunt eadem sed aliter. | Quintilian. | — | Zehnte
Ausgabe. | — | Gottingen, | in der Dieterichschen Buchhandlung. | 1821. sm.

8°. pp. i-xiv, 1-814, pll. i, ii.

VIII. Palinata, pp. 131-136. Trichechus Manatus, p. 136.

Cetacea, pp.137-140. 1. Monodon Narwhal, p.137; 2. Balena Mysticetus, p. 137; 3. B.
Rostrata, p. 138; 4. Physeter Macrocephalus, p. 139; 5. Delphinus Phocaena, p. 139; 6. D.
Delphis, p. 140; 7% D. Orea, p. 140.

- B. Rostrata replaces B. Physalus of the early editions, and the textis greatly changed. [596.]

1821. Bowpicu, T. E. An Analysis | of the | Natural Classifications | of | Mamma-
lia, | for the use of | Students and travellers. | By T. Edward Bowdich, Esq. |
Conductor of the Mission to Ashantee, Member of the Wettervian Society of
Natural History. | — | Paris, | Printed by J. Smith. | — | 1821. 8°. pp. i-iv,
5-115, pl. i-xv (osteology). ;

“The first part (pp. 5-89] of the text is a translation of almost all but the specific descrip-
tions of the Mammiferes of Cuvier’s Régne Animal, ... interwoven with additions from his
Comparative Anatomy, Fossil Remains, the works of Frederic Cuvier, Dumeril, etc... .
The second part contains a general outline of the system of Illiger....” (p. iv).

Order VIII. Cetacea, pp. 84-89, 105, pl. xii, skulls of Balena boops and Physeter macroce-
phalus ; pl. xiii, fig. 3, skull of Dugong; pl. xiv, fig. 6, skull of American Manatee, fig. 7, do. of
African Manatee. [597.]

1821. DELAVOIPIZRE, —. Faits | relatifs | a la | Péche de la Baleine, | Par Mr. De-
lavoipiére, Capitaine frangais du Navire-Baleinier La Cérés, du Havre. | — |
Au Havre, | Chez Stanislas Faure, Imprimeur du Roi. | — | 1821. 8°. pp.
1-30. é

Différence qui existe entre les Baleines, et le moyen de les reconnaitre, p. 3. De la Baleino

proprement dite, pp. 3,4. De la Baleine 4 bosse, p.4. Dela Baleine a aileron, p. 5. Du Cacha-

lot, p. 6. Parages et saison oh se trouvent plus communément les poissons dont on extrait

Vhuile, pp. 6-8. Armement des piroques, pp. 8-10. Dela poursuite, p.11. De lattaque, pp.

510 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1821. DELAVoIPIERE—Continued.
12-15. Del’amarrage, p.15. Observation 4l’égard du Cachalot, p.16. De lamarrage a bord,
pp. 16-19. Maniére de découper la Baleine, p. 19. Disposition des caillornes et courans des
garans, pp. 20-22. Maniére de faire l’Huile,—Extraction du Sperme et des Fanons, pp. 22-26.
Attaque de la Baleine dans les baies, pp. 26-28. Remarques sur la péche, pp. 28-30. [598.]

1821. Epirors. Analysis of a Journal of a Voyage for the Discovery, &c. of a
North-West Passage from the Atlantic to the Pacific, in the years 1819-20.
By Captain W. E. Parry, R.N., F. R.S. Lond. 1821, 4to., p. 479, with 20 Plates
and Charis; and of A Journal of a Voyage of Discovery to the Arctic Regions.
By Alexander Fisher, Surgeon, R. N. 8vo. pp. 320. <Hdinb. Philos. Journ.,
v, no. 9, art. xxviii, 1821, pp. 177-196.

A review of the works containing incidental references to Arctic Cetacea, including a
description of musical sounds made by the Beluga (p. 181). See 1821. FIsuErR, A. [599.]

1821. Epirors. Clay-slate Axe found ina Whale. < Edinb. Philos. Journ., iv, no. 7,
1821, p. 216, pl. 3, fig. 11.

Apparently the head of an Esquimaux lance, cut out of the blubber of a Whale in Davis’s

Strait. [600.]

1821. FisHEer, A. A | Journal | of a | Voyage of Discovery | to the | Arctic Regions, |
in | His Majesty’s ships | Hecla and Griper, | in the years 1819 & 1820. | — |
By | Alexander Fisher, Surgeon R. N. | — | Fourth edition, corrected. | Lon-
don: | Printed for | Longman, Hurst, Rees, Orme, and Brown, Paternoster-
Row. 13821. 8°. pp. i-xi, 1-320, chart, map, and cuts.

Notices of Cetacea passim, to wit: Baleena Physalus, p. 23; Balena Mysticetus, p. 31; Be-
luga or White Whale, pp. 72-74; Monodon Monoceros, pp. 74, 83-87 (cut, p. 84, external char-
acters, and anatomical observations). :

The ‘Journal’, though rarely cited in zodlogical literature, is worthy of attention, con-
taining many intelligent observations in natural history, and especially in reference to birds

. and Mammals. In regard to the latter, particularly important is the account of the Walrus

(pp. 38-48, with a cut), which gives weight and detailed measurements of a specimen taken;

also those of the Polar Bear (pp. 44-46, cut and measurements), and the Musk-Ox (pp. 249-253,

259, cut, measurements, external characters, and habits). [601.]

1821. Homn, E. An account of the skeletons of the dugong, two-horned rhinoceros,

and tapir of Sumatra, sent to England by Sir Thomas Stamford Raffles, Governor

of Bencoolen. < Philos. Trans. Lond., [cxi], pt. 2, art. xviii, pp. 268-275, pll.

XX-XXIV.

Dugong, pp. 268-269; Pl. xx, skeleton of a female. [602.]

1821. JAMESON, WILLIAM. Narrative of a Voyage to Davis’ Straitsin 1820. < Edinb.
Philos. Journ., v, 1821, pp. 309-318.

A passing reference to Delphinus leucas (p. 312) and a short description of Monodon monoe-
ceros (p. 317). {603.]

1821. MonraGcu, GEorGE. Description of a Species of Delphinus which appears to be
new. < Mem. Wern. Soc. Nat. Hist., iii, 1821, pp. 75-82, 1 pl.

Description of Delphinus truncatus. Figures are given of the head and teeth. [604.]

1821. NEILL, PATRICK, and [JOHN] BaRcLAy. Account of a Belugia, or White Whale,
killed in the Frith of Forth. <Mem. Wern. Soc. Nat. Hist., iii, 1821, pp. 371-
394, 2 pli.
Description, measurements, and anatomy. [Also separate.] [605.]
1821. Rarries, T.S. Deseriptive Catalogue of a Zoological Collection, made on ac-
count of the Honourable East India Company, in the Island of Sumatra and
its Vicinity, under the Direction of Sir Thomas Stamford Raffles, Lieutenant-
Governor of Fort Marlborough; with additional Notices illustrative of the
Natural History of those Countries. < Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., xiii, pt. 1, art.
Xvii, 1821, pp. 239-274.
On page 272 are five lines on ‘‘ Halicora Dugong.” [606.]
1821. RarrLes, TUOMAS STAMFORD. Some Account of the Dugong. <Philos. Mag.,
lvii, 1821, pp. 341-346.
External characters and anatomy. [607.]

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 511

1821. Rarrres, Tuomas [Stamrorp]. Einige Nachrichten fiber den Dugong.
<Froriep’s Notizen aus dem Gebiete der Natur- und Heilkunde, i, no. 8, Sept.
1821, pp. 113-117.
Aus den Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. Lond. for 1820, pt. ii, pp. 174-182. [608.]
1821. Rossity, — and RossEt, [E. P.E.]. Analysis of Mr. Scoresby’s Account of the
Arctic Regions, being a Translation of the Official Report of MM. Rossily and
nil Rossel, to Baron Portal, Minister of the French Marine. <Hdinb. Philos.
Journ., iv, no. 8, art. vili, 1821, pp. 285-294.
Includes remarks on the Whale-fishery of the Arctic Seas. [609.]
1822. C., F. [Cuvimr, F.] Lamantin. < Dict. des Sci. nat., xxv, 1822, pp. 169-173.
Le Lamantin d’Amérique (Manatus americanus), pp. 171,172. Le Lamantin du Sénégal
(IM. senegalensis), p. 172. Lamantin (foss.), pp. 172, 173. [610.]
1822. Demarest, A. G. Mammalogie | ou | déscription des espéces de Mamméifres.—
Premiere Partie, | contenant les ordres des Bimanes, des Quadrumanes et des
Carnassiers. | Par M. A. G. Desmarest, | Professeur de Zoologie A Ecole royale
d’Economie rurale et vétérinaire d’Alfort; . . . [= additional titles, 3 lines].
| —| A Paris, | Chez M™* Veuve Agasse, Imprimeur-Libraire, rue des Poite-

vins, n° 6. | — | 1820. | 4°. pp. i-viij, 1-276. | — | Seconde Partie, | contenant
les ordres des Rongeurs, des Edentés, des Pachydermes, des Ruminans | et des
Cétacés. |... A Paris, |...|—| 1822. 4°. pp. i-viij, 277-556 = Encyclo-

pédie methodique, tome 182. 4°. 1820. (See 1789. BONNATERRE.)

Huitiéme Ordre. Cétacés, Cete, pp. 506-530. Premiére Famille, Cétacés herbivores.
Sirenia, pp. 506-511. 1. Manutus americanus, p. 507; 2. Manatus Senegalensis, p. 508, de
Halicore indicus, p. 509; 4. Stellerus borealis, p. 510.

Seconde Famille, Cétacés ordinaires, Ccte, pp. 511-530. Ire Division, Cétacés a petite téte.
1. Delphinus [ Delphinorhynchus) Gcoffroyi [= D. Geoffrensis, Blainy.}, p. 512. 2. D. [Delphi-
norhynchus] coronatus, p. 512. 3. D. [| Delphinorhynchus] gangeticus, p. 513. 4. D. [Delphi-
norhynchus| Pernettyi (=D. Pernettiensis, Blainv.],p.513. 5. D. {[Delphinus] Boryi (‘‘espéce
nouvelle’), p. 513. 6. D. [D.] delphis, p. 514. ‘7% D. [D.] sinensis, p. 514. 8. D. [D.]
dubius [= Dauphin douteux, Cuv.], p. 514. 9. D.[D.] tursio, p.514. 10. D. [D.] nesarnac,
p. 515. 11. D.[D.) niger (Lacép.), p.515. 12. D. [D.] rostratus, p.515. 13. D. | D.] orca,
p. 515. 14. D. [D.] feres, p. 516. 15. D. [D.] canadensis [=Dauphin blane du Canada,
Duhamel= Beluga catodon], p. 516. 16. D. (D.) Bertini [Dauphin de Bertin, Duhamel],
p. 516. 17. D. [Oxypterus] Mongitori, p.516. 18. D. [Phocena] phocena, p.516. 19. D.
[Ph.] Peronii, p. 517. 20. D. [Ph.] Commersonii, p. 517. 2ie D. [Ph.] gladiator, p. 517.
22. D. [Ph.|) grampus, p. 517. 23. D. [Ph.] griseus, p.518. 24. D. [Ph.] ventricosus, p.
518. 25. D. [Ph.] globiceps, p. 519. 26. D. [Ph.] Rissoanus [= Dauphin de Risso, Cuy.], p.
620. 27. D. [ Delphinapterus] leucas [= Beluga catodon), p. 520. 28. D. | Heterodon) anarna-
cus, p. 521. 29. D. [H.] Chemnitzianus (= Balena rostrata, Chemnitz) = Hyperoodon butz-
kopf, auct. recent.), p. 520. 30. D. [H.] Hunteri [=D. bidentatus, Hunter], p.521. 31. D.
[H.] edentulus, p. 521. 32. D. [H.] hyperoodon [= D. butskopf, Bonnaterre], p. 521. 33. D.
[H.] Sowerbyi [= D. Sowerbensis], p. 521. 34. D. [H.| epiodon [= Epiodon urganantus,
Raf.], p.521. 35. Monodon monoceros, p.523. 86. M. microcephalus, p.523. 37. IM. ander-
sonianus, p. 523. 38. Physeter [Catodon] macrocephalus, p. 524. %9. P. [C.] trumpo, p. 524.
40. P.[C.] catodon [Bonnat. = Catodon svineval, Lacép.], p. 525. 41. P. [Physalus] cylin-
dricus, p.525. 42. P. [Physeter] microps, p.525. 43. P.[P.] orthodon, p.526. 44. P. [P.]
mular, p. 526. 45. P. (P.] sulcatus (Lacép.), p.526. 46. Balena [Balena) inysticetus, p. 527.
47. B. [B.) glacialis, p. 527. 48. B.[B.] nodosa, p. 527. 49. B. [B.] gibbosa, p. 528. 50.
B.[B.) japonica (Lacép.), p. 528. 51. B.[B.] lunulata (Lacép.), p.528. 52. B. [Balenop-
tera] gibbar, p. 528. 53. B. [Balenop.) boops, p. 528. 54. B. [Balenop.) musculus, p. 529.
55. B. (Balenop.) rostrata, p. 529. 56. B. [Balenop.] punctata (Lacép.), p. 529. 57. B.
[Balenop.] nigra (Lacép.), p. 529. 58. B. [Balenop.) cerulescens (Lacép.), p. 529. 59. B.
[Balenop.] maculata (Lacép.), p. 530.

Delphinus Boryi (p. 513), DB. dubius (p. 514), D. Bertini (p. 516), D. canadensis (p. 516), D.
Rissoanus (p. 519), spp. nn., D. Hunteri (p.520), D. hyperoodon (p. 521), D. epiodon, nomm. nn.

“Le tableau de ordre des cétacés que nous allons tracer, est particuliérement destiné &
faire connoitre les progrés de Vhistoire naturelle de ces animaux, depuis l’époque o& Bonna-
terre (1789) a publié sa description des planches de Cétologie. Nous ne ferons qu’indiquer
trés-sommairement les espéces dont il a rapporté les caractéres, en renvoyant i son texte et
en indiquant ses figures. En un mot, le travail de Bonnaterre ne doit pas étre considéré
comme un double emploi du nétre; mais celui-ci doit l’étre, au contraire, comme son complé-
ment”’ (p. 506, note 1).

512

1822.

1822.

1822.

1822.

1822.

1822.

1822.

1822.

1822.

1823.

BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

DEMAREST, A. G.—Continued.

The plan here unfolded the author carried ont in detail, every species added since the date
of Bonnaterre’s work being apparently included, regardless of its merits. Although many
new specific names were introduced, only one species (Delphinus boryi) was given as ‘‘espéce
nouvelle.” Few of those described by Bonnaterre are here redescribed, or only briefly so,
the author adding: ‘‘Drscrip. Voyez la Cétologie de Bonnaterre, loc. cit.,”” to which work refer-
ence is always duly made. ‘ [611.]

Desmourins, A. Cachalot. < Dict. class. d Hist. nat., ii, 1822, pp. 615-619.

Cachalot, Physeter; generalities, pp. 615-617; species, pp. 617-619. 1. Physeter [Catodon
Lacép.] macrocephalus, Shaw, p. 617; 2. Catodon macrocephalus, var. B. Bonn. (= Physeter
gibbosus, Schreb., pl. 338), p. 618; B. Ph. catodon, L., p. 618; 4. Ph. australianus, Quoy, p
318; 5. Ph. [Physeter] microps, Schreb., pl. 339, p. 618; 6. Ph. Tursio ou mular, p. 619; 7.
Ph. sulcatus, Lacép., p. 619.—The Cachalot’s are divided into two groups or genera, as above.—
Catodon, spp. 1, 2,and Physeter, spp. 3-7. Thearticle is an indiscriminate compilation. [612.]

Epirors. Extracts from Dr. Hibbert’s Description of the Shetland Islands.
< Edinb. Philos. Journ., vi, no. 11, art. vii, 1822, pp. 240-255.
Account of the pursuit and capture of a drove of Whales [Globiocephatus melas], pp. 240-
243. [613.]
Homer, EVERARD. Ueber die Eigenthimlichkeiten, wodurch sich de Manati
der Westindischen Meere von dem Dugong-der Ostindischen unterscheidet.
<Froriep’s Notizen, ii, Jun. 1822, pp. 260, 261.

Aus den Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. Lond. (614.]
Mansy, G. W. Journal | of a | Voyage to Greenland, | in the year 1821. | — |
With graphic illustrations. | By George William Manby, Esq. | — | London: |

Printed for G. and W. B. Whittaker, | 13, Ave-Maria Lane. | 1822. 4°. pp.
vii, 143, maps, pll., and woodcce.

Remarks upon the Failure which has for some years attended the Whale-Fishery; with
Considerations for removing the Obstacles which have occasioned the same. Appendix, pp.
123-143, numerous cuts of gun-harpoons and other harpoons, etc. Account of the common
Greenland Whale (Balena Mysticetus) and *‘of the early state of the fishing,” pp. 29-37, with
euts. Also allusions to whaling and to the habits of various Cetaceans passim. Plate facing
p- 60, ‘‘A boat going on the tail of a Whale”; plate facing p. 61, ‘‘A Whole upsetting a boat”;
plate facing p. 81, ‘‘ Lancing the Whale.”’

A German translation was published at Leipzig in 1823, and a Dutch version ot Amsterdam
in 1825. [615.]

Mount, —. Mourt’s Relation. <(Coll. Mass. Hist. Soc., 2d ser., ix, 1822, pp.
26, 73.

Cape Cod ‘‘a place of good fishing; for we saw daily great whales of the best kind for oil
and bone come close aboard our ship, and in fair weather swim and play about us; at
p. 36. This relates to the first visit of the Puritans to Massachusetts Bay in 1620. [616.]

. PRESIDENT AND COUNCIL OF NEW ENGLAND. A brief Relation of the discovery

and plantation of New England: . . . <Coll. Mass. Hist. Soc., 2d ser., ix,
1822, pp. 1-25
Originally published in London, 1622
‘‘Ambergris, [and] great numbers of whales along the coast,” p. 20. (617.]
[Ricc1o, ANTONIO, et autres]. Les Pécheurs | étrangers, | domicilies et station-
nés | & Marseille, | a MM. les Députés des Départemens. 8°. 1]. 1, pp. 16.

Le brochure est signée par Antonio Riccio, Joseph Vila et cinque autres, Billard, Avocat.
Marseille, le 6 Aotit 1822 [618.]

Rvupoupui, D. K. A. Dine ior Bemerkungen tiber Balaena rostrata.
< Abad. d. phys. Kl. d. .-P. Akad. d. Wissensch. zu Berlin, 1820-1821 (1822),
pp. 27-40, pll. i-v.

Pl. i, Skelet, pll. ii-iv, Schidel, pl. v, Kehlkopf, Rippe, Schwanzwirbelbein, u.s.w. [619.]
WuatTTon, W. R. [Note respecting the capture of a female Monodon monoceros
in the North Seas in 1821.] <Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., xiii, pt. 2, 1822, p. 620.

[620.]

BAER, IK. E. von. De | Fossilibus Mammalium Reliquiis | in | Prussia | adja-
centibusque regionibus | repertis. | — | Dissertatio, | quam | ad Professoris
ordinarii munus | in Academia Albertina | rite capessendum | scripsit | Ca-
rolus Ernestus a Baer |. . . [=titles, 4 lines]. | — | Cum icone. | — | Regio-
mounti 1823. | In Libraria Academica. sm. 4°, 1. 1, pp. 1-38, 1. 1, pl.

§ 8. Cetorum reliquize fossiles, pp. 34, 35. [621.]

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 513

1823. Cuvier, G. Recherches | sur les | Ossemens fossiles, | oti ’on rétablit | les
caractéres de plusieurs animaux | dont les révolutions du Globe détruit les
especes; | Par M. le Bo. G. Cuvier, | .. . [= titles, 5 lines.] | Nouvelle Edi-

tion, | entitrement refondue, et considérablement augmentée. | — | Triom-
phante des eaux, du trépas et du temps, | La terre a cru revoir ses premiers
habitants. | Delille. | — | Tome cinquieme, I'¢. partie, | contenant les rougeurs,

les étentés, et les mammiféres marins. | Paris, | Chez G. Dufour et EH. d’Ocagne,
Libraires, | Quai Voltaire, N°. 13. | Kt a Amsterdam, chez les mémes. | 1823.
4°, ll. 2, pp. 1-405, pll. i-xxvii.

Chapitre II. Des Lamantins et des genres qui appartiennent a la méme famille, pp. 235-
271, pll. xix, xx. Premiére Section. Des Espéces vivantes et de leur Ostéologie, pp. 235-265,
Article premiére. Dulamantin d’Amerique et de son ostéologie, pp. 242-253. Article II. Des
espéces nominales du petit lamantin des Antilles et du lamantin des Grandes-Indes, p. 254.
Article III. Du lamantin du Sénégal, pp. 254-256, Article IV. Du prétendu lamantin du
nord de Steller, pp. 256-259. Article V. Du dugong, pp. 259-265.

Section II. Ossemens fossiles de Lamantins pp., 266-271.

Pl. xix, Lamantins et Dugong. Pl. xx, Ostéologie du Dugong. Lamantin d' Amérique, pl.
xix, fig. 1, squelette; figg. 2, 3, crane; figg. 8-10, los de Voreille; fig. 11, une de ces dents;
fige. 14-16, avant-bras; figg. 17, 18, humérus. Lamantin du Sénégal, pl. xix, figg. 4, 5, crane.
Dugong, pl. xix, figg. 6, 7, crane; pl. xx, fig. 1, squelette; figg. 2-4, crane; figg. 5, 6, humérus;
figg. 9-11, avant-bras; figg. 12-14, l’os de l’oreille; fig. 15, atlas. Lamantin fossile, pl. xix, fig.
12, vertébre; figg. 22, 23, partie supérieure du crane; figg. 19-21, avant-bras. Pl. xix contenant
aussie (figg. 24-28) os fossiles des phoques.

[Chapitre ILis a reprint of thesame author's memoir entitled ‘‘Sur l’Ostéologie du Lamantin,”’
etc., published originally in tome xiii (1809) of the Annales du Musium d'Histoire naturelle,
(pp. 273-312) with the omission of Article vii, and the addition of new matter (the additions
occurring at pp. 244-248, 261-265, 270, 271, with alterations at p. 266, of the Ossemens fossiles.)
Pl. xx is also added, but pl. xix is the same as pl. xix of the Annales, 7. c.]}

Chapitre III. Des Ossemens de Dauphins, pp. 273-318. Premiére section. Des Dauphins
vivans, pp. 273-308. Article premier. Détermination des espéces de dauphins. §1. Les dau-
phins & bec, pp. 275-280. §2. Les dauphins 4 téte obtuse, pp. 280-287. §3. Les dauphins sans
dorsale ou delphinaptéres de M. de Lacépéde, pp. 387-389. Article II. Ostéologie comparative
des différentes espéces. §1. Téte de dauphins, pp. 290-302 [remarques générales, pp. 290-295;
Delphinus delphis ou le dauphin vulgaire, p. 295, pl. xxi, figg. 9,10, crane; Le Delphinaptére a
museau blane ou dauphin de Péron, p. 295, pl. xxi, figg.5,6,crane. Le frontatus, p. 296, pl.
xxi, figg. 7, 8, crane, pl. xxiii, figg. 6-8, coupes transversales du museau. Le tursio, p. 296, pl.
xxi, figg. 3,4, crdne. Le marsouin, p. 296, pl. xxi, figg. 1,2, crane. Le griseus, p. 297, pl. xxiii,
figg.1,2, crane. Le grampus ou épaulard, p. 297, pl. xxii, figg. 3, 4, crane. Le globiceps, p. 297,
pl. xxi, figg. 11-13, crane. Le beluga (D. leueas), p. 297, pl. xxii, figg. 5, 6, crane. Le dauphin
du Gange, pp. 298-300, pl. xxii, figg. 8-10, crane. Principales dimensions des diverses tétes de
dauphins, p. 302.] $2. Dureste du squelette des dauphins, pp. 303-308. [Le Dauphin vulgaire,
pp. 303-305, pl. xxiii, fig. 23, atlas, fig. 25, quatriéme cervicale, fig. 26, huitiéme cervicale, fig. 27,
deuxiéme lombaire, fig. 28, neuviéme lombaire, fig. 29, quatriéme caudale, fig. 18, omoplate, fig.
22,humérus. Le tursio, p. 305, pl. xxiii, fig. 17, omoplate. Le globiceps, p. 305, pl. xxiii, fig. 16,
omoplate. Le griseus, p. 306, pl. xxiii, fig. 15, omoplate. Le marsouin, p. 306, pl. xxiii, fig. 13,
omoplate ; le dauphin du Gange, p. 307, pl. xxiii, fig. 19, omoplate. Le lewcorhamphus, p. 307,
pl. xxiii, fig. 20, omoplate. Principales dimensions de quelque squelette de dauphins, p. 308.]
Section II. Des Dauphins fossiles. Article premier. D’un dauphin voisin de lU'épaulard et du
globiceps, dont le squelette a été déterré en Lombardie, pp. 309-312, pl. xxiii, fig. 1, squelette,
fig. 2, téte en dessous, fig. 3, sternum, fig. 15, os styloidien. Article II. D’un dauphin A longue
symphyse de la machoire inférieure, détervé dans une faluniére du département des Landes,
pp. 312-315, pl. xxiii, fige. 4, 5, mAchoire; figg. 9-11, un fragment du méme. Article IIT. D’un
dauphin fort voisin de ’espéce commune, trouvé également dans les faluniéres du département
des Landes, p. 316. Article TV. D’un dauphin dont une portion de machoire supérieure a été
trouvée dans calcaire grossier du département de Ll’ Orne, pp. 317, 318, pl. xxiii, fig. 38.

Chapitre IV. Des Ossemens de Narwals, d’Hyperoodon et de Cachalots, pp. 319-357. Pre-
miére Section. Des Espéces vivantes, pp. 319-348. Article premier. Des Narwals. §1. De-
scription de l’animal, pp. 319-322. §2. Ostéologie, pp. 322, 323, pl. xxii, fig. 7, crane. Article IT.
De V'Hyperoodon. §1. Caractéres extérieurs, pp. 324-326. § 2. Ostéologie, pp. 326-328, pl.
xxiv, figg. 19-21, crane, fig. 23, omoplate. Article III. Des Cachalots, pp. 328-348. §1. Réca-
pitulation des caractéres indiqués pour leurs espéces; incertitude de ces caractéres [histori-
que et critique], pp. 328-342. §2. Ostéologie des Cachalots. 1°. De la Téte, pp. 342-346, pl.
xxiv, figg. 1-5, crane. 2°. Du reste du squelette, pp. 346-348, pl. xxiv, fig. 13, atlas, fig. 12, les
six autres vertébres cervicales, fig. 15, la deuxiéme dorsale, fig. 16, la neuviéme dorsale, fig. 17, la

30 GB

514

BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1823. CuviER, G.—Continued.

troisiéme lombaire, fig. 18, quatriéme lombaire, fig. 11, omoplate; fig. 14, hnmérus et avant-bras,
figg. 6-10, machoire inférieure, exemplaires différens. Section II. Des Ossemens fossiles de
Narwals et de Cétacés voisins des Hyperoodons et des Cachalots, pp. 349-357. Article
premier. Fragmens fossiles de Narval, pp. 349,350. Article IJ. Sur une téte pétrifiée de
Cétacé d’un genre inconnu, voisin des cachalots et des hyperoodons, trouvée sur la céte de
Provence, pp. 350-352, pl. xxvii, fig. 3, crane. [Cette espéce est nommé Ziphius cavirostris.]
Article III. Sur des tétes du genre caractérisé dans l'article précédent, complétement pétri-
fiées, déterrées en creusant les bassins d’Anvers, pp. 352-356, pl. xxvii, figg. 4-6, crane. [Cette
espéce est nommée Ziphius planirostris.) Article lV. D’un morceau qui indique une espéce
voisine des précédentes, mais 4 museau plus allongé, pp. 356-357, pl. xxvii, figg. 9, 10, partie du
rostre. [Cette espéce est nommée Ziphius longirostris. ]

Chapitre V. Des Ossemens de Baleines, pp. 359-396. Premiére Section. Des Espéces vi-
vantes, pp. 359-388. Article premier. Détermination des espéces, pp. 360-370 [historique et
critique]. Article II. Ostéologie. §1. De la téte, pp. 370-377, pl. xxvi, figg. 1-4, crane de ror-
qual du Cap; fig. 5, crane de rorqual de la Méditerranée; fig. 6, crane de rorqual de la mer du
Nord; pl. xxv, figg. 1-4, crane d’une baleine proprement dite d’aprés un jeune individu du
Cap; figg. 5-8, d’aprés un adulte de la méme espéce; figg. 9-11, d’aprés un adulte du Groén-
land; pl. xxvii, figg. 10-15, os de l’oreille d’aprés l’espéce du Cap. §2. Dureste du squelette.
1°, Dans les baleines proprement dites, pp. 378-381, pl. xxvi, fig. 13, vertébres cervicales, fig.
14, quartriéme dorsale, fig. 15, onziéme dorsale, fig. 16, premiére lombaire, fig. 17, une des pre-
miéres caudales, fig. 11, sternum, fig. 7, omoplate, fig. 23, humérus, avant-bras et manus—toutes
les figures d’aprés la grande baleine du Cap; fig. 18, vertébres cervicales d’aprés une autre
espéce, fig. 8, omoplate, d’aprés de baleine franche. 2°. Dans les rorquals, pp. 381-385, pl.
XXVi, fig. 19, atlas, fig. 21, quatriéme cervicale, fig. 9, omoplate, fig. 22, humérus et os de na-
geoire, toutes les figures d'aprés le rorqual duCap; [quelques observations sur los du bassin et
sur l’os hyoide des cétacés], pp. 385-388, pl. xxvi, fig. 24, os du bassin d’aprés le rorqual, fig, 25,
os du bassin d’aprés la grande baleine, pl. xxv, fig.12,0s hyoide d’aprés Jes dauphins, fig. 14,
os hyoide d’aprés la grande baleine du Cap, fig. 15, os hyoide d’aprés le cachalot d’Audierne(?).
Section II. Des Baleines fossiles, pp. 389-396. Article premier. D’une baleine du sous-genre
des rorquals, dont il a été déterré deux squelettes en Lombardie, pp. 390-292, pl. xxvii, fig. 1,
squelette, copiée de M. Cortesi. Article II. D’un fragment considérable de téte de Baleine
déterré dans le sein de la ville de Paris, pp. 393-396, pl. xxvii, fig. 16.

Résumé de cette septiéme partie, pp. 397-399. Addition importante a cette septiéme partie
[relative au Delphinus frontatus, nommé a p. 278], p. 400.

Delphinus frontatus, pp. 278, 296, 400, D. griseus, p. 284, note 1, p. 297, spp. nn.; Ziphius cavi-
rostris, p. 352, Z. planirosiris, p. 356, Z. longirostris, p. 357, gen. et spp. DD.

Cuvier, in his classic memoir on the recent and fossil Cetacea, thoroughly sifted the litera-
ture of the subject, critically separating, for the first time, the few grains of wheat from the
vast amount of chaff that had already accumulated, placing the subject on a solid basis, be-
sides adding, in both his plates and text, a large amount of new and well-considered informa-
tion respecting the osteology of the species. In his historical résumé, no less than in the
technical portions of the work, is seen the hand of the master. Unfortunately, however, for
the nomenclature of the subject, the species are largely treated under simply vernacular
names, but they may be easily identified with their proper systematic cognomens. <A single
new genus (Ziphius) with three new species, and two or three new species referred to Del-
phinus, are for the first time defined, while the untenability of various nominal species is
clearly shown. In some instances, however, he appears to have overstepped the bounds of
judicious criticism, but not to the extent claimed by Dr. J. E. Gray, who says that Cuvier, in
examining previous authorities, approached ‘‘the work with a predisposition to reduce the
number of species, which his predecessors had described, to the smallest number... To
make this reduction: first, he believes that the Hump-backed Whale, of Dudley, is only a
whale that has lost its fin, not recognizing that the Cape Rorqual, which he afterwards de-
scribed from the fine skeleton now shown in the inner court of the Paris Museum, is one of
this kind; secondly, that the Black-fish [Physeter Tursio, Gray], and the Sperm Whale are
the same species; an error which must have arisen from his not having observed that Sib- '
bald had figured the former, for he accuses Sibbald of twice describing the Sperm Whale;
and when he came to Schreiber’s [sic] copy of Sibbald’s figure, he thinks the figure represents
2 Dolphin which had lost its upper teeth, overlooking the peculiar form and posterior posi-
tion of the dorsal fin, and the shape of the head, which is unlike that of any known Dolphin.
This mistake is important, as it vitiates the greater part of Cuvier’s criticism on the writings
of Sibbald, Artedi, and others, on these animals.”— (Cat. Mam. Brit. Mus., pt. i, Cetacea,
1850, 3. Cf. also Gray, J. ¢., p. 54.)

Gray’s criticism, however, lacks the support of the best modern Cetologists, who discard
Gray’s Physeter Tursio, based on Sibbald as above, and still known only from Sibbald’s figure
and description, and the grotesque figure of Bayer’s Mular. He for the first time reduced
the Cachalots to a single species,—a conclusion amply sustained by laterinvestigators. [622.].

~

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 515

1823. DresSMOULINS, ANTOINE. Cétacés. < Dict. class. d’Hist. nat., iii (Cad—Ché),

1823.

1823, pp. 411-417.

General account of the order, according to the classification of G. Cuvier (Iégne Animal,
tome i). Contains a correction of the article Baleine (op. cit., t. ii, p. 165), and adds the fol-
lowing, previously described (Ifém. du Muséum, t. iv) by Lacépéde from Japanese paint-
ings: 14. Balanoptera punctata; 15. Bal. nigra; 16. Bal. cerulescens; 147. Bal. macu-
lata, p. 417. [623.]

“EBERT, Frz. Das Thierreich. Tine belehrende Darstell. der bekannten leben-
den Geschépfe der Erde. 4 Thle. Mit 8 Kpfrtaf. 8°. Wien, 1823.”

Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann. [624.]

1823. Epitors. [Vertebra of a Whale found near Dingwell. ] faint. Philos. Journ.,

ix, no. 17, art. xxii, 1823, p. 185.
Notice (10 lines) in a report of the Proceedings of the Royal Society of Edinburgh for March
27, 1823. (625. ]

1823. FLEMING, JOHN. Gleanings of Natural History, gathered on the Coast of Scot-

land during a voyage in 1821. <Ldinb. Philos. Journ., viii, no. 16, art. x, 1823,
pp. 294-303.

Mentions seeing Balenoptera rostrata, p. 303. [626.]

1823. Homr, Evrrarp. Lectures | on | Comparative Anatomy; | in which are ex-

plained | the Preparations | in | the Hunterian Collection. | — | Illustrated
by Engravings. |— | To which is subjoined, | Synopsis Systematis Regni
Animalis, | nunc primum ex ovi modificationibus propositi. | — | By Sir Eve-
rard Home, Bart. | V.P.R.S. F.S.A. F.L.S. |... [= titles, 8lines]. | — | In
Four Volumes. | Vol. III [-IV]. | London: | Printed for Longman, Hurst, Rees,
Orme, and Brown, | Paternoster-Row. | 1823. 4°. Vol. iii, text, 1.1, pp. i-
xvii, 1. 1, pp. 1-586; vol. iv, plates, pp. i-viii, 1. 1, pu. i-clxxi, Sv with an
“Senna leaf.

The whole work consists of 6 vols., 3 of text and 3 of plates, published as
follows: vol.i, ii, 1814; vols. iii, iv, 1823; vols. v, vi, 1828.

Cetacea and Sirenia, passim, in lectures Fifth, Sixth, Seventh, Ninth, and'T'enth. The fol-
lowing is a list of the plates relating to these groups:

Pl. xvii, jaws of Delphinus gangeticus; pll. xxi-xxiii, skull and teeth of Dugong; pll. xxiv,
xxv, tongue, stomach, and cecum of Dugong; pl. xxvi, stomach of Manatee; pl. xxvii, cecum
of Manatee; pl.1, heart of Dugong; pl. li, portion of trachea and section of lungs of Dugong;
pl. lii, Dugong (animal); pl. liii, sternum and pelvis; pl. liv, skeleton of Dugong; pl. lv,
Manatee (animal); pl. lvi, skeleton of Manatee; pl. c, ear bone of Balena mysticetus, external
view; pl. ci, do., internal view; pl. cxvi, uterus and penis of Dugong.

The plates here noted all first appeared in the Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. London. See Homr,
E., at 1818, 1820, and 1821. (627. ]

1823. JoNKAIRE, M.DE LA. Notice géologique sur les environs d’Anvers. <Mém. de

1823.

la Soc. @ Hist. Nat. de Paris, i, 1823, pp. 110-126.

Ossemens de Cétacés, p. 117: (628.]
“ManbBy, G.W. Journal | of a | Voyage to Greenland, | in the year 1821. | With
graphic illustrations. | — | By George William Manby, Esq. | — | The Second

Edition. |.London: | Printed for G. and W. B. Whittaker, | Ave-Maria Lane.
| — | MDCCCXXIIL lvol. 8vo. pp. xi, 225, maps, pll., and woodcee.”

A reprint in 8° of the 4° edition of 1822. Not seen; title from Coues, Bds. Col. Vall., p.
606. For notice of cetological matter see supra, 4° ed., 1822. [629.]

1823. ScoRESBY, WILLIAM, jr. Journal | of a Voyage to the | Northern Whale-fish-

ery; | including | researches.and discoveries on the Eastern Coast | of | Green-
land, | made in the Summer of 1822, in the ship | Baftin of Liverpool. | By |
William Scoresby, Junior, | F. R. 8. E., M. W. S. &c. &e. | commander. | — |
Edinburgh: | Printed for Archibald Constable and Co. Edinburgh: | and
Hurst, Robinson and Co. Cheapside, London. | — | 1823. 8°. pp. i-xliii, pp.
1-472, pl. i-viii.

List of Animals met with on the Eastern Coast of Greenland, with Notes and Memoranda.

I, Mammalia, pp. 416-420. Cetacea, 1. Balena Mysticetus, 2. B. gibbar, 3. Monodon Mono-
ceros, p. 420.

516 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1823. ScORESBY, WILLIAM, jr.—Continued.

Whalefishery and Whales, passim, in text, to wit: A Whale captured, p. 41; Narwhals,
pp. 75, 76; capture of Whales, pp. 123-130, 134-136; Narwhal taken,—description of the ani-
mal, including measurements, p. 132; further account of the Narwhal, including its anatomy,
pp. 136-142, figg. at pp. 140, 141, illustrative of structure of blow-hole; anatomy of the Whale,
pp. 148-158, figg. showing structure of blow-holes at pp. 152, 153; Whales taken, pp. 285-290.

[630.]
1824. Anon. Udtog af en Dagbog, holdet paa en Rejse i Grénland i Sommeren 1823.
<Orsted, Tidsskrift for Naturuidenskaberne, 1824, no. 9, pp. 271-289, no. 10, pp.

1-35.
References passim to various Cetaceans, e. g., no. 10, pp. 2, 4, 20, 26, 29, etc. [631.]

1824. Anon. A Voyage to Cochin China. By John White, Lieutenant in the United

States Navy. <Mdinb. Rev., xli, 1825, pp. 123-142.
An extended review of the work (see 1824. WHITE, J.), containing, at pp. 136-142, some
account of the Southern Whale Fishery. (632.]

1824. CHAMISSO, ADELBERTUS Dr. Cetaceorum maris Kamtschatici imagines, ab
Aleutis e ligno fictas, adumbravit recensuitque Adelbertus de Chamisso, Dr.
<Nov. Act. Phys.- med. Acad. Ces. Leop.- Carol. Nat. Curios., xii, 1, 1824, pp.
249-260, pll. xvi-xx; xii, 2, p. 873 (corrigenda).

1. Balaena Kuliomoch, pp. 249-256, pl. xvi, fig. 1 (¢. ¢., pl. xvii, fig. 3). 2. Balaena Abugu-
lich, pp. 256, 257, pl. xvi, fig. 2 (7. e., pl. xvii, fig.1). 3. Balaena Mangidach, p. 257, pl. xvii, fig. 3
(t. é., pl. xvi, fig.1). 4. Balaena Agamachtschich, pp. 257, 258, pl. xviii, fig.4. 5. Balacna Alio-
moch vel Aliama, p. 256, pl. xviii, fig.5. 6. Balaena Tschickagluk, p. 257, pl. xix, fig.6. ‘7.
Physeter Agidagich vel Agdagjach, pp. 257, ‘'260” (v. e., 258), pl. xix, fig.7. 8. Ancylodon ?
Alugninich, pp. ‘261, 262,” pl. xx, fig.8. 9. Delpinus [sic] Aguluch, p. 260, pl. xx, fig. 9.

A more barbarous piece of work was doubtless never perpetrated in natural history than
the burdening of Cetology by Chamisso with nine ‘‘species” of Cetaceans based on wooden
images made by the Aleuts. In the light of present knowledge of the Cetacea of the Japan
seas most of them may be determined generically, mainly, however, on the basis of exclu-
sion. The delineations and descriptions are of interest as showing the proficiency of sav-
ages in carving natural objects in wood, but as diagnoses of actual species they are not enti-
tled to recognition, and the barbarous names by which they are specifically designated may
well drop from the system as indeterminable synonyms. A page of errata in the second part
of the volume shows that the references in the text to the first three figures are erroneous,
while, to further complicate the citation of the paper, pp. 256 and 257 and p. 260 are duplicated,
while there are no pp. 258 and 259.

Balaena Kuliomoch (fig. iii, not fig. i, as given in the text) relates quite evidently to
some species of Balena. Balena Abugulich (fig. i, not fig. ii,as given in the text), Balena
Mangidach (fig. ii, not fig. iii, as given in the text), and Balena Agamachtschich (fig. iv), all
apparently relate to Fin-Whales. The size of the pectoral fin in Balena Aliomoch (fig. v)
seems to indicate that itis a species of Megaptera. Balena Tschikagluck (fig. vi) is unrecog-
nizable even generically ; it may, however, relate to Rhachiancctes. Physeter Agidagich (fig.
vii) has a general resemblance only to Physeter. The Ancylodon? Alugninich (fig. viii) is un-
recognizable. Delp{h]inus Aguluch (fig. ix) is apparently some species of Orca. [633.]

1824. Cuvier, G. Sur la détermination des diverses espéces de Baleines vivantes.
< Ann. des Sci. nat., ii, 1824, pp. 27-41.

Extrait de Recherches sur les Ossemens Fossiles, v, pp. 360-370. [634.]

1624. DresM[ARE]sT, [A. G.] Revue et representation d’images sculptées en bois par
les habitans des iles Aléoutes, représentant diverses espéces de Cétacés des
mers du Kamtschatka; par A. de Chamisso; av. 5 pl. litogr. (Nov. Acta Acad.
Cas. Leop. Carol. Nat. Cur., to. xii, 1° partie). <Férussac’s Bull. des Sci. nat.,
lii, 1824, pp. 70-75.

Résumé. [635.]

1824. DESMOULINS, A. Dauphin. < Dict. class. d’ Hist. nat., v, Cra—D, 1824, pp. 348-351.

Dauphin, Delphinus: generalities, pp. 348-353; species, pp. 353-361. 1. Delphinus Delphis,
L., p. 363; 2. D. Tursio, Fabr., p. 354; 3. D. frontatus, Cuv., p. 354; 4. D. Bredanens?s,
Cuv., p. 355; 3. D. coronatus, Frém., p.355; 6. D. gangeticus, Lebeck, p.355; 7%. D. dubius,
Cay., p. 356; 8. D. Boryi, Desm., p. 356, pl. exli, fig. 1 (original); 9. D. Phocena, L., p. 557
(i. €., 357); 10. D. Orea, Fabr., p. 557 (i. e., 357); 11. D. griseus, Cuv., p. 557 (i. €., 357); 1:26
D. globiceps, Cuv., p. 358; 13. D. Leucas, Pall., p. 358; 14. D. Peronii, Lacép. (= D. leuco-
rhamphus, Péron), p. 359; 15. Dauphin Rhinocéros, Quoy et Gaim., p. 359; 16. Dauphin

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. BLT

1824, Drsmouuins, A.—Continued.
crucigére, Quoy.et Gaim., p. 359; 17. Dauphin albigére, Quoy et Gaim., p. 360; 18. Dauphin
de Cortési, Cuv. (foss.), p. 360; 19. Dauphin & longue symphise, Cuyv. (foss.), p. 360; 20.
(not named], foss., p. 861; 21. [not named], foss., p. 361.

Tho genus Delphinus is divided into three sections, to wit, ‘‘t Dauphins a bec,” including
spp. 1-8; ‘“ttDauphins 4 téte obtuse,” spp. 8-12; ‘‘tttDauphins sans dorsale, Delphinap-
téres de Lacépéde,”’ spp. 18, 14. Numbers 15-17 (I-I11 in the original) are entered incerte cedis,
between spp. 14-and 15 of the original article; and then follow ‘‘Dauphins fossiles,’”’ spp. 18-21
(15-18 in the original). (636. ]

1824. DrsmMouULINS, A. Dugong, Trichechus Dugong,Gmel. < Dict. class. d’ Hist. nat.,
v, Cra-D, 1824, pp. 640, 641, pl. exli, fig. 2. [637.]

1824. D. [? Desmoutins, A.] De V’existence du nerf olfactif ou ethmoidal dans les Ba-
leines; par A. Desmoulins. (Dict. class. d@ Hist. nat., t. 2, art. Baleine.) <Pérus-
sac’s Bull. des Sci. nat., 11, 1824, pp. 362, 363. [638.]
1824. Eprrors. Habits of the Whale. < Edinb. Philos. Journ., xi, no. 21, 1824, pp.
220, 221. she
Note on the occurrence of a Whale in the St. Lawrence River, near Montreal. ~—([629.]
1824. Epirors. Notice in regard to a Fossil Whale discovered in Dunmore Park.
< Edinb. Phil. Journ., xi, no. 21, 1824, p. 220.
Its position similar to that of Airthrie; estimated length, ‘'70 or 75 feet.” (See infra, 1824.
KEDDOCH.) [640.]
1824, ErcuwaLp, EK. Observationes nonnull circa fabricam Delphini Phocenae aeta-
tis nondum provectae. <Mém. de V Acad. imp. des Sci. de St.-Pétersbourg, v®
sér., ix, 1824, pp. 431-452. [641.]

1824, FABER, [FRIEDRICH]. Udtog af en Skrivelse fra Regiments-qvarteermester og
Auditeur Faber til Prof. Reinhardt, dateret Horsens d. 28 Juli 1824. <Orsted,
Tidsskrift for Naturvidenskaberne, iv, no. 10, 1824, pp. 110-118.

A slight reference to Balena Boopsatp.110. . [642.]

1824. HARLAN, RICHARD. On a species of Lamantin resembling the Manatus Senega-
lensis (Cuvier) inhabiting the Coast of East Florida. <Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci.
Phila., iii, 1824, pp. 390, 394, pl. xiii, figg. 1-3.

Manatus latirostris, sp. n., based on ‘‘two skulls, two ribs, and a strip of skin, seven feet
six inches in length, half an inch thick.” Skulls described in detail, with figures (pl. xiii,
figg. 1-3), and compared with skulls of M. americanus (pl. xiii, fig. 5) and WM. senegalensis
(pl. xiii, fig. 4). No characters are found in the skull to separate MW. latirostris from M.
senegalensis, but the name latirestris is proposed for adoption in case further investigation
should reveal external differences sufficient to separate the Florida Manatee from the
African ! [643.]

1824. HERAUSGEBER. Rudolphi; anatomische Bemerkungen tber Balaena rostrata.
<Lsis von Oken, xiv, 1824, pp. 620, 621.

Auszug aus Abhandl. d. phys. Classe d. k. p. Acad. d. Wissen. zu Bertin, 1820-1821 (1822),
pp. 27-40. (644.]

1824. Herauscesrr. Uber die Strecken, welche die Walfische durchschwimmen.
<Froriep’s Notizen aus dem Gebiete der Natur- und Heilkunde, viii, no. 8, Sept.,
1824, pp. 121, 122.
Abstract aus Hr. Baron vom Zach's Correspondence astronomique, géographique, hydro-
graphique et statistique, ix, no. 1, 1823, p. 95. (645.]
1824, Keppocu, —. Further particulars in regard to the Fossil Whale of Dunmore.
< Edinb. Philos. Jowrn., xi, no. 22, 1824, pp. 415-417.
A letter supplementing an editorial communication in the preceding number, giving a de-
tailed account of the situation of the skeleton. (646.]}

1824. Knox, [ROBERT]. Anatomische Beobachtungen iiber die Milchgefiiss im Seehund
und Wal, aus Briefen von Dr. Knox an Dr. Duncan. <Froriep’s Notizen aus
dem Gebiete der Natur- und Heilkunde, viii, no. 4, August, 1824, pp. 49-53.

Uebersetzet aus Edindurgh Med. and Surg. Journ., July, 1824, p. 23. [647.]
4

518 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1824. RaInE, THoMas. Noticeinregard to Macquarie Island. < Edinb. Philos. Journ.,
xi, no. 21, art. iii, 1824, pp. 46-50.

Reference (p. 49) to ‘‘the black or proper whale,” and to the ‘fish called by whalers the

Killer,” which “‘is said to kill its prey by goring it in the belly with its dorsal fin, which is

sharp, and sometimes from 8 to 10 feet long, shaped like a scythe.” (648.]

1824, SaBrne, E. A | Supplement | to | the Appendix of Captain Parry’s Voyage for

the | Discovery of a North-West Passage, | in the years 1819-20. | Contain-

ing | an account of the subjects | of | Natural History. | — | London; | John
Murray, Albemarle-street. |— | MDCCCXXIV. 4°. ll. 5, pp. clxxxiii-ccex,
pl. 6.

Mammalia, by Edward Sabine, pp. elxxxiii-excii.

Monodon monoceros, p. excii (short description of a specimen killed). [649.]

1824. SCHLEEP, [B. C.] Einige zoologische Bemerkungen. < Isis von Oken, xv, 1824,
pp. 891-899.
Delphinus phocaena, p. 892. Die Schwanzflosse horizontal und nicht vertical war (!) wie
Block und Bechstein gesagt haben. [650.]
1825. BLAINVILLE, H. DE. Note sur un cétacé échoué au Havre, et sur un ver trouvé
dans sa graisse. <Nouv. Bull. des Sci. de la Soc. philom. de Paris, 1825, pp.
139-141.
Caractéres externes, etc., d’un cétacé sans nom scientifique. [651.]
1825. BLAINVILLE, H. pr. Uber ein bei Havre gestrandetes fischartiges Siiugethier
und einen in dem Speck desselben gefunden Wurm. <_Froriep’s Notizen, etc.,

xii, No. 256, Dec. 1825, pp. 212-214. [652.]
1825. BLUMENBACH, J. F. Handbuch | der | Naturgeschichte | von | Joh. Fried.
Blumenbach. | [Vignette.] Eilfte rechtmasige Ausgabe. | — | Géttingen,

1825. | In der-Dieterich’schen Buchhandlung. 8°. pp. i-xii, 1-668, pll. i, ii.
Trichechus manatus, p.112. Cetacea, pp. 113-115. Genn. 4, spp. 7. Text substantially the
same as in the 10th ed., 1821, q. v. |653.]
1825. Cuvier, F. Des | Dents des Mammiféres, | considérées | comme caracttres
zoologiques. | Par M. F. Cuvier. | — | Le Cabinet d’anatomie formé par M. G.
Cuvier, | au Jardin du Roi, pouvait seul donner Vidée et | fournir les matériaux
de cet ouvrage. | [Monogram.] | F. G. Levrault, Editeur, 4 Strasbourg, | et
rue de la Harpe, N°. 81, 4 Paris. | Le Normant, rue de Seine, N°. 8, a Paris. |
1825. 8°. pp. i-lv, 1-258, 1.1, pll. i-ciii + iii bis, xi bis, xxii bis, xxxiv bis,

Ixxxvi bis, xci bis, xciii bis=cx.

Cétacés herbivores, pp. 236-239. Pl. xcvi, Manatus americanus ; pl. xevii, Halicore dugong.

C-tacés piscivores, pp. 240-246, pll. xevili-ciii. Pl. xeviii, Delphinus sp.; pl. xcix, D. gange-
ticus; pl.c, ‘‘Marsouins”’; pl. ci, Grampus sp.; pl. cii, Monodon monoceros; pl. ciii, Physeter
macrocephalus.

The descriptions are brief; there are no textual references to the plates, nor is there any
exact indication of what species are figured.. The work is of little importance in reference
to Cetaceans. [654.]

1825. CuviER, G. Recherches | sur les | Ossemens fossiles, | oti on rétablit | les carac-
teres de plusieurs animaux | dont les réyolutions du Globe ont détruit les
especes; | Par M. le Bo. G. Cuvier, |... [=titles, 5 lines]. | Troisiéme
Edition. | — | Triomphante des eaux, du trépas et du temps, | La terre a cru
revoir ses premiers habitants. | Delille. | — | Tome Premier [—Cinquiéme]. |
[Seal.] Paris, | Chez G. Dufour et E. D’Ocagne, Libraires, Quai Voltaire, N°.
13. | Et a Amsterdam, chez les méme. | 1825. 4°. 11.2, pp. 1-405, pll. i-xxvii.

This is apparently a reissue of the ‘‘Nouvelle Edition,” 1823, q. v., from the same plates,
with a new title-page, altered as above. [655.]

1825. DesM[ARE]sT, A.G. Sur une nouvelle espéce de Lamantin, qui ressemble au
Manatus senegalensis de M. Cuvier, et habite les cétes de la Floride orientale;
par M. R. Harlan. (Journ. of the Acad. Nat. Sc. of Philadelph., vol. iii, no. 13,
mai 1824.) <Férussac’s Bull. des Sci. nat., iv, 1825, pp. 106-108.

Résumé. : [656.]

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 519

1825. Epirors. Remains of a Fossil Whale brought from the Apennines, by Lord
Glenorchy. <dinb. Philos. Journ., xiii, no. 26, 1825, p. 385. [657.]

1825. F. Lamantine. Edinb. Journ. Sci., ii, 1825, p. 186.
7H, »~P
A brief abstract of Harlan’s paper (Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci., Philadelphia, iii, pp. 390 et seqq.)
on Manatus latirostris. (See 1824. HAnRvan, R.) (658. }

1825. HARLAN, RIicHARD. Fauna Americana: | being | a Description | of the | Mam-
miferous Animals | inhabiting North America. |—| By Richard Harlan,
M.D. |... [= titles, 6 lines]. | — |. . . [=motto, 3 lines]. | — | Philadel-
phia: | published by Anthony Finley. | J. Harding, Printer. | 1825. 8°, pp.
i-x, 11-320.

“Order Ceta” (pp. 274-301) includes: ‘‘1. Family Cctacea Herbivora, Sirenia” (pp. 274-281),
and, ‘‘2. Family Octa, or Whales proper” (pp. 281-301).

Sirenia: 1. Manatus latirostris, p. 277; %. Fossil Manatus, p. 278; 3. Stellerus borealis,
p. 279.

Cetacea: 1. Delphinus |Delphynorhynchus] coronatus, p. 282; 2. Delphinus [Delphinus]
delphis, p. 284; 3. Delphinus [Delphinus] canadensis |—Beluga catodon], p. 285; 4. Del-
phinus [Phocena] phoceena, p. 286; 5. Delphinus [Phocena) gladiator, p. 286; 6. Delphinus
|Phocena] grampus [=D. orca auct.], p.287; 7. Delphinus [| Delphinapterus] leuwcas [=Beluga
catodon]), p. 288; 8. Delphinus [Heterodon] anarnachus, p. 289; 9. Monodon monoceros, p. 290;
10. Monodon microcephalus, p. 291; 11. Physeter [Catodon] macrocephalus, 294; 1:2. Phy-
seter [Catodon] trumpo,p. 294; 13. Balena | Balena) mysticetus, p. 292; 14. Balena[Ba-
lena] glacialis, p. 297; 15. Balena [| Balena] nodosa, p. 298; 16. Balena [Balenoptera)
gibbar, p. 299; 17. Balena [Balenoptera] boops, p. 300; 18. Balena [ Balenoptera) rostrata,
p. 301.

The matter relating to the Cetacea is wholly compiled. There is no “internal evidence”
that specimens were examined in any case, but the general subject is intelligently handled.

[659.]

1825. HARLAN, RicHarD. Notice of the Pleisiosaurus and other Fossil Reliquiz, from
the State of New Jersey. <Journ. Acad, Nat. Sci. Phila., iv, pp. 232-236, pl.
RVs aul

First notice of the Cetacean remains, here erroneously referred to a Saurian, which be-
came later the basis of Priscodelphinus harlani, Leidy. Cf. Leidy, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci.,
Phila., 1851, p. 326. [660.]

1825. LATREILLE, [P. A.] Familles | naturelles | du Régne Animal, | exposées suc-
cinctement et dans un ordre analytique, | avec Vindication de leurs genres, |
Par M. [Pierre André] Latreille, | Membre de |’Institut (Académie royale des

Sciences), de la Légion-d’Honneur, etc., etc. | — |. . . [= motto, 5 lines]. | — |
Paris j J.-B. Bailliére, Libraire, | Rue de ’Ecole de Médecine, Ne 14. | Bau-
douin fréres, Rue de Vangirard, N° 36. | — | 1825. 8°. 11. 3, pp. 1-570. a

Onziéme Ordre, Cétacés. Cetacea, pp. 64,65. Premiére Famille, Herbivores, Herbivora
(=Sirenia). Seconde Famille, Souffleurs, Hydraula (= Cetacea). Genera enumerated
under French names — Herbivora, 3 genn.; Hydraula, 2 primary unnamed divisions, each
with two unnamed subdivisions; genn. 10. (661.]

1825. LYNGBYE, Cur. Von dem Fange der Meerschweine auf den Ferroe-Inseln,
nebst einem Beitrag zur Naturgeschichte derselben. <(Iroriep’s Notizen, etc.,
xii, no. 245, Okt. 1825, pp. 33-41.

Chiefly about the Grindelwalen, of which two species are distinguished, differing in size.
Measurements of these are given at p. 40, as well as also of ‘‘ Balena rostrata.” There isa
detailed account of their external characters, etc. [662.]

1825. Ricuarpson, J. Appendix | to | Captain Parry’s Journal | of a | Second Voy-
age | for | the discovery of a Northwest Passage from | the Atlantie to the
Pacific, | performed in | his Majesty’s Ships Fury and Hecla, | in | the years

1821-22-23. | — | Published by authority of the Lords Commissioners of the
Admiralty. | — | London: | John Murray, | Publisher to the Admiralty and
Board of Longitude. |— | MDCCCXXY. 4°. Il. 2, pp. 1-432. >Zoological

Appendix.—No. I. Account of the Quadrupeds and Birds, by John Richard-
son, M. D., M. W. 8. pp. 287-399.

Mammalia, pp. 288-341. Balena mysticetus, p. 336. Monodon monoceros, p. 336. Delphi-
napterus beluga, p. 337. [663.]

520

1825.

1825.

1825.

1825.

1826.

1826.

1826.

1826.

1826.

1826.

BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

“ROSENTHAL, F. C., et F. HorNscHuuH. De Balenopteris quibusdam ventre
sulcato distinctis; epist. gratul. ad J. F. Blumenbachium, 4 maj. Gryphis-
wald., Koch, 1825.”

Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann. [664.]

“Scoresby, W. Tagebuch einer Reise auf den Wallfischfang, tibers. von Kries,
1825. pp. 178.”

Not seen. See the original English edition of 1823. [665.]

THAARuP, F. Statistisk Udsigt | over | den danske Stat |i Begyndelsen af
Aaret 1825. | — | Som Haandbog for Forretningsmeend og Bejiledning for |
Statistikens Dyrkere. | — | Af | Fr[ederick]. Thaarup. | Statsraad. | —|*..
[=quotation, 9 lines]. | — | Kjpbenhavn. | Forlagt af Fr. Brummer. | Trykt
hos C. Grebe. | 1825. 8°. pp. i-xxiv, 1-739, og tab. i-xxxviii.

Marsvinet, Delphinus phocaena, pp. 200-202. Hvalfisk-Fangst, pp. 380, 381, 660. [666.]

THOMPSON, J. L. Bottle-nose Whales. <dinb. Philos. Journ., xiii, no. 26,
1825, p. 389.

Short description of two specimens, male and female, stranded in East Lothian, Scotland;
the female contained two fetuses. [667.]
Anon. Whale killed in the River St. Laurence, 600 miles from the Sea.

< Edinb. New Philos. Journ., [i], 1826, pp. 193-195.
Account of a species of ‘‘Finner,” 42 feet 8 inches in length, captured near Montreal;
“Extract of a letter from Montreal, dated September 13, 1823.” j [668.]
Baer, [K. E. von]. Ueber den Brauntisch (Delphinus phocaena) ... (Als Vor-
liufer einer vollstandigen anatomischen Monographie dieses Thiers.) <Jsis
von Oken, xix, 1826, pp. 807-811. [669.]
BaER, [K. E. von]. Die Nase der Cetaceen erliutert durch Untersuchung der
Nase des Braunfisches (Delphinus phocaena). <Isis von Oken, xix, 1826, 811-
847, pll. v, vi. [670.]
Barer, [K. E. von]. Nachtragliche Bemerkung fiber die Riechnerven des
Braunfisches. <Isis von Oken, xix, 1826, p. 944. {671.]

. BAKKER, G. Eenige woorden over de waarde der ondervinding, ter geleide van

Wwaarnemingen over Wormen, bijzonder in het hart en de luchtvaten van
Bruinvischen [Delphinus phocaena]. < Bijd. tot de natuurk, Wetensch., i, 1, 1826,
pp. 449-475." [672.]
““BLOCQUEL, Sim. Ichthyologie de la jeunesse, ou beautés de Vhistoire natu-
relle des Poissons, Cétacés et Crustacés. Avec 60 fig. in-16°. Lille et Paris,
1826.”
Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann. [673.]

BuFron, [G. L. LECLERC] DE, et [G.] Cuvier. OEuvres | complétes | de Buf-
fon | mises en ordre et précédées d’une notice historique | par M. A. Richard, |
rofesseur agrégé a la Faculté de Médecine de Paris; | Suivies de deux Vo-
lumes | sur les progrés des Sciences physiques et naturelles | depuis Ja mort. de
Buffon, | par | M. le Baron Cuvier, | Secrétaire perpétuel de Académie ro-
yale des Sciences. | [Medallion.] A Paris | Chez Baudouin Freres, Editeurs, |
Rue de Vaugirard, N° 17, | et chez N. Delangle, Editeur, | Rue du Battoir, Ne
19. | — | M. DCCC. XXVI. 8°. ll. 3, pp. 1-350.

Les Phoques, les Morses, et les Lamantins, pp. 188-334. Le Dugong, pp. 294-297. Le La-
mantin, pp. 297-313. Surles Lamantins, pp. 313-316. Le Grand Lamantin du Kamtsehatka, Stel-
lurus borealis, Cuv., pp. 316-326. Le Grand Lamantin des Antilles, Manatus Americanus
Desm., pp. 326-329. Le Grand Lamantin de la Mer des Indes {= Dugong], p.329. Le Petit
Lamantin d’ Amérique, pp. 330-332. Le Petit Lamantin du Sénégal, Manatus Senegalensis
Desm., pp. 332-334.

In this edition we have the text of the original edition (1765, g. v.), with the omission of the
references to authorities, followed by the text of the Supplement (1782, q. v.), with here also
omission of reference to authorities. There are a few brief notes by the editor, signed ‘‘ A. R.”

[674.]

DesM[ARE]sT, [A. G.]. Note sur un Cétacé échoué a Havre, et sur un Ver
trouvé dans la graisse; par M. H. de Blainville. (Bull. dela Soc. philom., sept.
1825.) <érussac’s Bull. des Sci. nat., vii, 1826, pp. 370-373. |675.]

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 521

1826. DrumMMoND, H. H. Notice regarding Fossil Bones of a Whale discovered in the
District of Montieth. < Mem. Wern. Soc. Nat. Hist., v, pt. ii, 1826, pp. 440, 441.
Brief description of the remains, which are not specifically determined. [676.]
1826. Epirors. Whale-Fishery at Van Dieman’s Land. <Zdinb. New Philos. Journ.,
[i], 1826, p. 396.
Initiation of the enterprise at Van Dieman’s Land, May, 1824. [677.]
1826. Lusson, R. P. Indication de quelques Cétacés nouveaux observés dans le vo-
yage autour du monde de la corvette la Coquille. <I érussac’s Bull. des Sci.
nat. et de géol., vii, 1826, pp. 373, 374.
Delphinus bivittatus, D. superciliosus, D. leucocephalus, D. lunatus, D. minimus, D. malaya
nus, p. 313; D. maculatus, Delphinapterus Peronii, p. 298.
The ‘‘indications” are very brief, and, in some cases, so general as to be valueless. See
next title for further comment respecting these species. [678.]
1826. Lesson, R. P., and P. GarNnor. Voyage | autour du Monde, | Exécuté par
Ordre du Roi, | Sur la Corvette de Sa Majesté, La Coquille, pendant | les an-
nées 1822, 1823, 1824 et 1825, | sous le Ministére et conformément aux instruc-
tions de S. E. M. le Marquis | de Clermont-Tonnerre, Ministre de la Marine; |
Et publié sous les auspices | de son Excellence M& le Cte de Chabrol, | Mini-
stre de la Marine et des Colonies, | Par M. L[ouis]. I[sidore]. Duperrey, | Ca-
pitain de Frégate, Chevalier de Saint-Louis et Membre de la Légion d’Hon-
neur, | Commandant de VExpedition. | — | Zoologie, | Par MM. [René Pri-
mevére] Lesson et [Prosper] Garnot. |— | Tome Premier.—1'¢ Partie. |
[Seal.] Paris. | Arthus Bertrand, Libraire-Editeur, | Rue -Hautefeuille, N°
23. | — | 1826. 4°. Tome Premier, 1'¢ Partie, ll. 2, pp. i-iv, 1-360. Tome Pre-
mier = 2° Partie, 1828, ll. 2, pp. 361-743. Tome Second=1* Partie, 1830, 11.
2, pp. 1-471. Tome Second=2¢ Partie, 1830, ll. 2, pp. i-xii, 1-319, 1-155.
Atlas 2°, 1826. Engraved title-page, ll. 4, pll., mammiféres, 1-9; Oiseaux,
10-50 + 21%, 31>is, 35>is; Reptiles, 1-7; Poissons, 1-38; Mollusques, 1-16; Crus-
tacés, 1-5; Insectes, 1-21-+ 14s; Zoophytes, 1-16.
Chap. IV. Observations générales sur quelques Cétacés, par R. P. Lesson, pp. 177-186. 1.
Delphinus bivittatus, sp. n., p. 178, pl. ix, fig. 3; described and figured from specimens seen
Swimming in the sea! 2. Delphinapterus Peroni, p. 179, pl. ix, fig. 1—Delphinus peronii
Lacép.= Delphinus leucorhamphus, Péron; description and figure of a specimen taken. 3.
Delphinus superciliosus, sp. n., p. 181, pl. ix, fig.2. 3. Physeter macrocephalus, p.182. 4. Del-
phinus lunatus, sp. D., p. 183, pl. ix, fig.4; described and figured from specimens seen swim-
ming in the sea! 5. Delphinus maculatus, sp. n., p.183, not figured; described from speci-
mens seen Swimming in the sea! 6. Delphinus leucocephalus, sp.n., p. 184, described from
examples seen in the sea! 7%. Delphinus malayanus, sp. n., p. 184, pl. ix, fig.5; described and
figured from a specimen captured. 8. Delphinus minimus, sp. n., p.185; described from ani-
mals seen in the sea. : [679.]
1826. MAckENZzIE, G. S. Notice respecting the Vertebra of a Whale, found in a Bed
of bluish clay, near Dingwall [Scotland]. < rans. Roy. Soc. Edinb., x, pt. 1,
art. v, 1826, pp. 105, 106.
A short communication concerning the position in which the bone was found and the ma-
terial inclosing it. [680.]
1826. O. [= OKEN, LORENZ]. Schlussworte an den Herausgeber der Isis [zu yon Baer’s
“‘Die Nase der Cetaceen” u.s. w.] <Jsis von Oken, xix, 1826, pp. 840-842.
Of. 1826. Barr, K. E. von. (681.]
1826. PANDER, Cur., und E. D’ALTON. Die Skelete | der Robben und Lamantine, |
abgebildet und verglichen | von | Dr. Chr[istian Heinrich]. Pander und Dr.
E[duard] d’Alton. | — | — | Bonn, | in Commission bei Eduard Weber, 1826.
ob], 2°. ll. 2, pp. 1-10, pll. i-vii. <Vergleichende Osteologie, von Pander
und d@’Alton, 1821-1831.
Die Lamantine, pp. 8-10, pl. v, (das Skelet des Dugong, Halicore indica). Auch pl. vi, das
Skelet eines jungen Narwals (Monodon monoceros). Pl. vii, Schiideln vom Delphinus (Del-
phinus Phocaena, D. delphis, D. leucas). [682.]
1826. PREvosT, CONSTANT. Mammiféres fossiles. < Dict. class. d’ Hist. nat., x, Macl-
Mn, 1826, pp. 127-129. [683.]

522 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1826. Risso, A. Histoire naturelle | des principales productions | de | ?Europe méri-
dionale | et particuli¢rement de celles des environs | de Nice et des Alpes mari-
times; | par A. Risso, |. . . [= titles, 7 lines]. | Servandis et instruendis via- -
toribus. | Tome Troisiéme. | — | A Paris, | Chez F.-G. Levrault, Libraire, |
Rue de la Harpe, N. 81; | et méme Maison, Rue des Juifs, N. 33, a Strasbourg, |
1826. 8°. ll. 2, pp. i-xvi, 1-480, figg. 1-50, en 16 pll., sans numeros.

Enumeration des Mammiféres, Oiseaux et Reptiles des Alpes maritimes, suivie de l’histoire
naturelle des Poissons de la Méditerranée qui frequentent leurs cétes et qui vivent dans le
golfe de Nice=tom. III. Mammiféres, pp. 1-25.—Ordre cinquiéme, Cétacée, pp. 21-25.—Del-
phinus delphis, D. tursio, p. 21; D. Bayeri, p. 22; D. globiceps (fig. 1), D. Risso (Cuy.), (fig. 2),
p. 23; D. Desmaresti, p. 25, fig. 3.

Delphinus Desmaresti, sp. D. [684.]

1826. Ross, J: C. Journal | of a | Third Voyage for the discovery of a | North-west
Passage | from the Atlantic to the Pacific; | performed in the years 1824-25, |
in His Majesty’s Ships | Hecla and Fury, | under the orders of | Captain Wil-
liam Edward Parry, R.N., F. R.S., | and commander of the expedition. | — }

Illustrated by plates and charts. | — | Published by authority of the Lords
Commissioners | of the Admiralty. | — | London: | — | John Murray, | pub-
lisher to the Admiralty, and Board of Longitude. | — |] MDCCCXXVI. 1 vol.

4°, pp. i-xxvili, 1-186, 1 1., 1-151, maps, pll., and woodce. >Appendix.
Zoology. By Lieut. James Clark Ross.
Mammalia, pp. 92-95. Balena mysticetus, p.94. Monodon monoceros, p. 94. [685.]

1826. SainT-HinaireE, Is. G. Lamantin, Wanatus. < Dict. class. d Hist. nat., ix, Io-
Macis, 1826, pp. 177-181.
General history of the group, pp. 177-180; species, 180,181. 1. Manatus americanus, Desm..,
p- 180; 2. I. Senegalensis, Desm., p. 180; Lamantins fossiles, pp. 180, 181.
M. latirostris, Harlan, is considered as not well distinguished. [686.]

1826. Sarnt-HinaireE, Is. G. Mammalogie, Mammalogia. < Dict. class. d’ Hist. nat.,
x, Macl—Mn, 1826, pp. 63-73.
Historique. [687.]
1826 (circa?). SLUYTER, D. ‘‘Vinvisch, in 1826 gestrand, naar H. Schlegel door D.
Sluyter. br. folio.”
From Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 176, no. 2782. [688.]

1826. VROLIK, W. Waarneming van Wormen, in de Long-aders en Slagader, de tak-
ken ‘der Luchtpijp en de Longzelfstandigheid van eenen Bruinvisch, (Delphi-
nus phocaena). <Bijd. tot de natuurk. Wetensch., i, 1, 1826, pp. 77-84. —[689.]

1827. ALDERSON, J. An Account of a Whale of the Spermaceti Tribe, cast on shore
on the Yorkshire Coast, on the 28th of April, 1825. < Trans. Camb. Philos. Soc.,

ii, pt. 2, art. xv, 1827, pp. 253-266, pll. xii-xiv.
External measurements and description of internal parts of a male specimen. Two views
of the animal (pl. xii), skull (pl. xiii), side view of skull, eye, etc. (pll. xiv). [690 ]

1827. ANON.? ‘‘Tets over de Walvisch-vangst in de Zuidzee en den Indischen Oceaan.
<Nederl. Hermes. Tijdschr. v. kooph. en zeev., 1827, no. 2, bl. 44-60.”
Not seen; title from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 250, no. 3589. [691.]

1827. AN@N.? ‘De Groenlandsche en Straat Davidsche Walvischvangst. <Nederl.
Hermes. Tijdschr. v. kooph. en zeey., 1827, no. 4, bl. 39-55.”
Not seen; title from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 250, no. 3589. [692.]

1827. BorrarpD, [P.]. Manuel | d’Histoire | naturelle, | comprenant | les trois regnes
de la nature; | ou | généra complet des animaux, des végétaux | et des mi-
néraux; | par M. [Pierre] Boitard. | —| Premiére Partie [et seconde par-
tie]. | — | Paris, | Roret, Libraire, Rue Hautefeuille, | au coin de celle du
Battoir, | 1827. 12°.

Les Cétacés (i, pp. 45-49)= Sirenia+ Cete. Briefly mentioned under (mostly) French
generic names; species enumerated passim, under the Latin names then current. [693.]

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 523

1827. Dresm[anrnst, A. G.]. Rytine; Rytina, Tl. <Dict. des Sci. nat., xlvi, 1827, pp.
476, 477. [694.]
1827. Eprrors. Professor Harlan on the Mammalia of North America. <Ldinb.
Journ. Sct., vi, 1827, p. 328.
Brief notice of Harlan’s Fauna Americana, 1825, q. v. [695.]
1827. EDMONSTONE, LAWRENCE. On the Origin of the Power of suspending Respira-
tion, possessed by Aquatic Mammalia and Birds. <Philos. Mag., 2d ser., ii,
1827, pp. 126-130.

Relates mostly to Seals, but contains a paragraph of 7 lines about Whales. [696.]}

1827. Faber, [FrimDERICH]. Ueber das Blasen der Wale. <JIsis von Oken, 1827,
858-860.

Gegen Baer, Isis von Oken, 1826, Heft 8. [697.]

1827. Gray, J. E. Description of the Skulls of two apparently undescribed Species
of Dolphins, which are in the British Museum. < Phil. Mag. or Ann. of Chem.,
Math., Astr., Nat. Hist., and Gen. Sci., ii, 1827, pp. 375, 376.

Delphinus (Delphinapterus ?) Kingii, p. 375; Delphinus intermedius, p. 376. (698.]

1827. Lesson, R.-P. Manuel | de | Mammalogie, | ou | Histoire naturelle | des Mam-
miféres, | Par Réné-Primeverre Lesson, |. . . [= titles, 11 lines in small type].
Multa paucis. | —| Paris, | Roret, Libraire, rue Hautefeuille, | au Coin de
celle du Battoir | 1827. 12°. pp. i-xv, 1-442.

VIIIe Ordre. Les Cétacées ou Bipédes, Cet, pp. 401-432. ite Tribu. Les Herbivores, pp.
401,402. Genre CCX VIII*--CCXX* [=3 genn.]. Espéces 1049*-1053e [—=5 spp.]. 2° Tribu.
Les Souffleurs (Hydraula) ou Cétacées ordinaires piscivores, pp. 404-432. Genres CCXXI-
CCXXXIT [—12 genn.]. Espéces 1054°-1124e [=70 spp.]. Heterodon dalei, sp. n.

Sirenia: 1. Manatus americanus, Cuv.; 2. M. senegalensis, Cuv.; 3. M. latirostris, Har-
lan; 4. Halicore dugong, F. Cuv.; 5. Stellerus borealis, Desin.

Cetacea: Delphinorhyneus, Blainv., 4 spp.; Delphinus, L., 18 spp.; Oxypterus, Rafinesque,
2 spp.; Phoceena, Cuvier, 11 spp.; Delphinapterus, Lacép., 3 spp.; Heterodon, Blainv., 7 spp.;
Monodon, L.,3spp.; Catodon, Lacép., 4 spp.; Physalus, Lacép.,1sp.; Physeter, Lacép., 4 spp. ;
Balena, L.,6spp.; Balenoptera, Lacép., 8spp. Cétacées décrits par M. de Chamisso, d’aprés
des images sculptées en bois par les habitans des iles Aléoutiennes, pp. 429-432, 9 spp., not
technically named.

“‘ Wonsieur, L’excellent Traité de Mammatlogie que vous avez rédigé pour I’Encyclopédie, et
ou vous avez coordonné avec autant d’habileté que de savoir les connaissances zoologiques
modernes, a été mon principal guide. En suivant toutes les divisions de l’ouvrage fonda-
mental et justement célébre du régne animal, vous y avez rattaché avec soin tous les tra-
vaux modernes nationaux et étrangers. . . .’’—Dédication, 1 M. A. G. Desmarest, pp.

vii, viii.
Like the rest of the ‘‘Manuel,” the part devoted to the Cetacea is an indiscriminate com-
pilation, useful mainly as giving a list of the species described up to this date. [699.]

1827. [Lesson, R. P.] Atlas | de | Mammalogie, | ou | Histoire naturelle | des Mam-
miféres; | composé de 80 planches | Représentant la plupart des Animaux
déscrits dans | le Manuel de Mammalogie et dans celui d’ Histoire naturelle. | [By
Réne Primevéro Lesson.] — | Paris, | Roret, Libraire, rue Hautefeuille, | au
Coin de Celle du Battoir, | 1827. 12°. pp.1-16, pll. 1-80. Deux éd.: d’une
avec figures noires, de l’autre avec figures coloriées.

Cetacea, pll. lxxvi-lxxx. Pl. Ixxvi, fig. 1, le Marsouin (Phocena communis) ; fig. 2, le Dau-
phin (Delphinus delphis) ; fig. 3, le Dauphin 4 2 Dents (Heterodon hunteri). Pl. Ixxvii, fig. 1,
le Gibbar (Balenoptera gibbar); fig. 2, la Jubarte (B. jubartes); fig. 3, le Narval (Monodon
monoceros). Pl. lxxviii, fig. 1, le Trumpo (Catodon trumpo); fig. 2, le Microps (Physeter mi-
crops); ’Epaulard (Phocena grampus). PI. 1xxix, la Baleine franche (Balena mysticetus).
Pl. Ixxx, fig. 1, le Rorqual (Balenoptera rorqual) ; fig. 2, la Baleine 4 bec (Balena acuto ros-
trata); fig. 3, le Grand Cachalot (Catodon.macrocephalus).

None of the figures are new, being simply reduced copies from Sibbald, Martens, Hunter,
ete. [700. j

1827. **LinpEN, P. J. VAN DER. Notice sur un squelette de Balénoptére. Lue 4 la
Soe. des Scienc. médic. et natur. de Bruxelles et publiée séparément. Bru-
xelles, 1827. 89°.”

Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann, Bibl. Hist. nat., ii, p. 1312. [(701.]

524 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY,

1827. PANDER, Cur. [H.], und E. D’ALTON. Die | Skelete der Cetaceen, | abgebilded
und beschrieben | von | Dr. Chr. [H.] Pander und Dr. KE. d’Alton. | — | — |
Bonn, | In Commission bei Eduard Weber. | 1827. obl. 2°. ll. 2, pp.'1-10,
pll. i-vi. <Vergleichende Osteologie, von Pander und d’Alton, 1821-1831.
Einleitung, pp. 1-3. Vergleichende Beschreibung des Skeletes der Walfisshartigen, pp.
3-9. Erklirung der Kupfertafeln, p. 10. ;
Pl. i, Skelet des Braunfisches (Delphinus phocaena). PI. ii, pl. iii, figg. a-d, Skelet des
schnabelkiefrigen Walfisches (Balaena rostrata). PI. iii, figg. e, f, Hand und Brustbein vom
Jupiterfisch (Balaena boops). Pl. iv, figg. a-d, Schidel vom grénlandischen Wale (Balaena
mysticetus) ; figg. e. f., die finf Hals- und drei Riickenwirbel, Shulterblatt, Ober,- und Vorder-
arm vom Jupiterfisch. Pl. v, figg. a. b., Schidel des Narwales; figg. c, c,¢,Schidel des Butz-_
wales (Hyperoodon edentulus); figg. d, e, Shulterblatt und Ober- und Vorderarm yom Pott-
fisch (Physeter macrocephalus). {702.]
1827. ‘‘“ROSENTHAL, FR. Cur.,u.F. HoRNscuucH. Einige naturhistorische Bemerken.
iiber die Walle, nebst 1 (lithogr.) Abbild. Dem Hrn. Landrath u. ersten
Biirgermeister Dr. 8. J. Meyer zur Feier seines 50jahr. Amts-Jubiliums gewid-
med. gr. fol. Greifswald, 1827 (Koch).”
Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann. [703.]
1827. SamntT-Hr1LaireE, Is.G. Narval, Monodon. < Dict. class. d Hist. nat., xi, Mo—Nso,
1827, pp. 439-443.
History, affinities, and critical remarks on the nominal species of earlier authors, all the
species previously described being referred to one, the Monodon monoceros. [704.]
1827. TIEDEMANN, F. MHirn des Delphins mit dem des Menschen vergleichen.
<Tiedemann u. Treviranus, Zeitschr. fiir Physiologie, ti, H. 2, 1827, pp. 251-
263, pl. xii. E [705.]
1827. TrmrDEMAN, F. The Brain of the Common Dolphin compared with that of Man.
< Edinb. New Philos. Journ., [iii], 1827, pp. 296-298.
Abstract from Zeitschr. fiir Physiologie, ii, p. 251, g. v. [706.]
1828. Barr, [K. E. von]. Noch ein Wort fiber das Blasen der Cetaceen. < Isis von
Oken, 1828, pp. 927-931.
Gegen Faber, Isis, 1827, Bd. xx, p. 858. [707.]
1828. [Brooxess, J.] ‘‘A prodromus of a Synopsis Animalium, comprising a cata-
logue raisonné of the zoological collection of Joshua Brooks. 8°. London,
1828.”
Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann.
As cited by J. E. Gray (Cat. Cetacea Brit. Mus.) appears to contain matter of some impor-
tance in relation to Cetacea. [708.]
1828. ‘‘DuBaR, J. Ostéographie de la Baleine echouée a l’Est du port d’Ostend, le 4
Nov. 1827; précédée d’une notice sur la découverte et la dissection de ce cétacé.
Bruxelles, Laurent fréres, 1818. 8°. Met 13 platen.”

Not seen; title from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 161, no. 2544. ‘ : [709.]

1828. Epirors. Fossil Rib of a Whale, discovered in Diluvium near Kemp Town,
Brighton. <Ldinb. New Philos. Journ., [v], 1828, pp. 198, 199. [710.]

1828. GopMAN, J. D. American | Natural History. | — | Vol. III. | Part I.—Mastol-
_ ogy. | —| By John D. Godman, M. D.|. . . [=titles, 4 lines]. | — | Phila-
delphia: | Carey, Lea & Carey—Chestnut street. | — | 1828. [Vols. I, II, 1826. ]

8°. 11. (engraved title-page), pp. 1-264.

Order VIII. Cete, pp. 39-145.—Family I, Sirenia, pp. 39-55. 1. Manatus Americanus,
p. 48, pl. facing p. 43, fig.3; 2. Stellurus Borealis, p. 49.

Family If. Cet, pp. 55-145.—1. Delphinus Delphis, p. 59, pl. facing p. 59; 2. D.Gladiator,
p. 67; Fabulous History of the Dolphin, pp. 72-80; 3. Monodon Monoceros, p. 81; pl. facing
p. 43, figg. 1, 2, from Scoresby; 4. Physeter Macrocephalus, p. 94; 3. Balena Mysticetus,
p. 98, pl. facing p. 98, from Scoresby; 6. Balana Physalis, p. 134; '7. Balena Musculus, p. 141;
8. Balena Boops, p. 142; 9. Balena Rostrata, p. 144.

The Whale Fishery, pp. 145-237, pl. facing p. 160, Instruments used in the Capture of the
Whale, from Scoresby. y f

A compilation, mainly from Scoresby, without acknowledgment and generally without cita-
tion of authorities. The account of the Right Whale, of the Narwhal, and of ‘‘The Whale
Fishery,” is from Scoresby’s ‘‘Arctic Regions.” The latter is a transcript from Scoresby,

x cee Vel i, foo 1 OP (lof & age )-

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 9525

1828. Gopman, J. D.—Continued.
vol. ii, pp. 207-310, with the omission of a few paragraphs and additions from other parts of
Scoresby’s work, the reprint including most of the sub-headings and the foot-notes, without
stating the source from which the matter was appropriated. (711.]

1828. Gray, J. E. PartI.] [Price 7s. | Spicelegia Zoologica; | or | Original figures
and short Systematic Descriptions | of | New and Unfigured Animals. | By
John Edward Gray, F. G. 8S. M.R.S.L. | Honorary Member of the Philo-
sophical Society of Colchester, Corresponding Member of the Maclurean Ly-
ceum, &c., &c. | — | London: Published by Treiittel, Wiirtz and Co., Soho
Square; and W. Wood, Strand. | [1828.] 4°. pp.1-8,pll.i-vi. [The title
occupies the upper fourth of the first page. The date (‘‘British Museum, |
July 1, 1828”) occurs at the bottom of p. 8.]

Mammalia, pp.1,2. Family Delphinide. Subgenus Delphinus,p.1. 1. Delphinus longi-
rostris, p.1; %- Delphinus Capensis, p. 2, pl. ii, fig. 1, animal. Subgenus Grampus, p.2; 3. Del-
phinus (Grampus) acutus, p.2; 4. Delphinus (Grampus) Heavisidit, p. 2, pl. ii, fig. 6, animal;
5. Delphinus (Grampus) obscurus, p. 2, pl. ii, fig. 2, animal (young), fig. 3, animal (adult), figg.
4,5,skulls. Subgenus Beluga, p.2. Subgenus Phocena, p. 2.

Delphinus longirostris, p.1; D. Capensis, D. (Grampus) acutus, D. (Grampus) Heavisidii,
D. (Grampus) obscurus, p. 2, spp. nn.

To the subgenus Delphinus are referred, besides D. longirostris and D. capensis, ‘ D. Del-
phis, leucorhamphus, dubius, frontatus, and Tursio (D. truncatus, Montagu in Wern. Trans.,
iii, 3),” p.2. To the subgenus Grampus are referred, besides the new species here de-
scribed under this section, ‘‘D. griseus, Cuv., D. Grampus, Linn., D. globiceps (which is the
D. melas of Traill, the D. deductor of Scoresby),” p. 2. The subgenus Beluga ‘‘is formed by
the D. leucas, Pall.,” p.2. The subgenus Phocena, ‘‘comprehending the D. Phocena of
Linné,” p. 2. These subgenera, like the species, are followed by the letter ‘‘n.”’ (=nobis).

This work, announced to appear in parts, was not continued beyond Part I. (712.]

1828. HaGELstamM, —. On the Regions of Perpetual Snow in Norway and Sweden.
< Edinb. New Philos. Journ., [v.], 1828, pp. 305-308.

_ Contains a reference to the abundance of Whales on the coast of Nordland. (713.]

1828. HaRwoop, J. Communication on the Structure and Economy of the Greenland

Whale, made at the Royal Institution of Great Britain. < Quart. Journ. of
Science, xxvi, 1828, pp. 10-24. (‘‘To be continued.”)

A popular general account of Baleena mysticetus, based largely on the author’s own obser-
vations. At the close of the paper are the words ‘‘To be continued,” but the remainder
appears not to’ have been published. , (714.]

1828. ‘‘ LINDEN, P. L. VAN DER. Notice sur un squelette de Baleinoptére exposé &
Bruxelles en Juin et Juillet 1828; in-8°. Bruxelles, 1828.”
Not seen; title from Van Beneden. (Of. 1827. LINDEN, P. J. VAN DER. Can this be the
same work? (715.]
1828. L[vroTtH]., S.G. Recherches anatomiques sur quelques organes des Cétacés;
par W. Rapp. (Naturwissenschaftl. Abhandl.; Tom. I, 2° cah., 1827, pag.
259.) <Férussac’s Bull. des Sci. nat., xiv, 1827, pp. 253, 254.
Résumé. (716.]
1828. RépactEuRS. Sur le phénoméne du soufflage chez les Cétaces; par M. Faber.
(Isis, 1827, Tom. xx, n°. 10, pag. 858.) <Férussac’s Bull. des Sci. nat., xiv,
1828, pp. 282, 253.
Résumé. {717.]
1829. ‘‘BERNAERT, MATHIEU BENOIT FELIX. Notice sur la Baleine échouée prés
dOstende le 5 novembre 1827, et sur les fétes données par M. Kessels, 4 l’ocea-
sion de la prise de possession au nom de 8. M. le roi des Pays-Bas du sque:
lette de ce cétacé, in-8. Paris. 1829, imp. dela Normant, 1829. (64 pag.) ”
Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann. (718. }
1829..BRANDT, J. F., und J. T. C. Ratzespurc. Medizinische Zoologie | oder |
getreue | Darstellung und Beschreibung | der | Thiere, | die | in der Arznei-
mittellehre in betracht kommen, | in systematischer folge herausgegeben |
von | J. F. Brandt and J. T. C. Ratzeburg, | Doctoren der Medizin und Chi-
rurgie, berechtigten Arzten zu Berlin, Docenten an der Friedrich-Wilhelms- |

526 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1829. BRANDT, J. F., und J. T. C. RATZEBURG—Continued.
Universitit daselbst, Mitgliedern und Ehrenmitgliedern mehrerer Gelehrten-

Gesellschaften, etc. |= | Erster Band. | Mit 24 Kupfertafeln unter XXIII
Nummern. | = | Berlin | bei den Verfassern und in Commission bei A. Hirsch-
wald. | = | Gedruckt in der Druckerei der Kéniglichen Academie der Wissen-

schaften und bei Trowitzsch und Sohn. | 1829. | Der Titel des ersten Bandes
wird ausgeschnitten und dieser dafiir eingeklebt. | 4°. pp.i-iv, 1-198, pll.i-
XXili+-iv® and one unnumbered = 25.

Cetacea, pp. 90-134, pll. xii-xvi. Physeter macrocephalus, pp. 91-94, pl. xii, fig. i, fem. (nach
Bonnat.), fig. 2, mas (nach Jonston), pl. xiii, Schidel (nach Cuvier). Physeter Trumpo, pp. 94-99,
pl. xiv, fig. 1 (mach Robertson). Physeter polycyphus, p. 99, pl. xiv, fig. 1 (aus Freycinets Voy.).
Die Cachalot-Anatomie, pp. 99-104. Die Verbreitung der Pottwalle, pp. 104-106. Die Le-
bensart der Pettwalle, pp. 106-108. Sperma ceti und Amber, pp. 108-111. Balaena Mysticctus,
pp. 111-116, pl. xiv, fig. 4, fem. et juy. (nach Scoresby), pl. xvi, fig. 3, Schddel (fig. orig.). Ba-
lacna Boops, pp. 116-118. Balaena rostrata, pp. 119-122, pl. xv, fig. 3, fem. (nach dem Steindruck
von Matthiessen), fig. 4,mas (nach Rosenthal), pl. xvi, fig. 1, Skelet, figg. 24, Schiidel (fige.
orig.). Balaena longimana, pp. 122-124, pl. xvi, figg. 5-8 (Schnauzentheils des Schidel, Kopte
und Barten—figg. orig.). Die Verbreitung der Walle, pp. 125-127. Die Lebensart der Walle,
pp. 127-132. Der Nutzen der Walle, pp. 132,133. Das Fischbein, pp. 133, 134. Erklirung der
Kupfertafeln, pp. 134, 135.

Zweifelhaftere Arten: Physeter cylindricus, p. 95, pl. xii, fig.3 (nach Anderson). Physeter
catodon, p.95. Physeter orthodon, p.98. Physeter 2 pl. xiv, fig. 3 (aus Colnett’s Voy.). |

Other species incidentally noticed in foot-notes are: Balaena glacialis, Balaena nodosa,
Balaena gibbosa, Balaena japonica, Balaena lunulata, p. 114, Balaena punctata, Balaena
nigra, Balaena physalus, Balaena musculus, p. 117.

The synonymy and bibliography of the species formally treated are given in great full-
ness, as are the external characters and anatomy, so tar as then known; also their geograph-
ical distribution, habits, and products. Many of the figures are original, and those copied
have the originals explicitly indicated. Especially noteworthy is the figure of the skull of
Balena mysticetus, from the specimen in the Berlin Museum. Notwithstanding the large num-
ber of nominal species of Cachalots admitted, this treatise is one of muchimportance. As

already said, the bibliographical references are very full. [719.]
1829. C[uUvIER]., F. Zoologie=Mammalogie. <(Dict. des Sci. nat., lix, 1829, pp.
357-519.

XTe Ordre. Les Cétacés, pp. 514-519. Ite Famille. Les Cétacés herbivores. Genres:
1. Manatus, 2. Halicon [sic—Halicore], 3. Rytina. Tle Famille. Cétacés piscivores.
Genres: 1. Delphinus, 2. Delphinorhynchus, 3. Phocena, 4. Delphinopterus [sic], 5. Hy-
peroodon. I1l* Famille. Les Narvals. Genre: Monodon. IV* Famille. Les Cachalots.
Genre: Physeter. V® Famille. Les Baleines. Genre: 1. Balena, 2. Balenopterus [sic].

Famm. 5; genn. 13. [720.]

1829, CuvieR, [G.]. Le | Régne Animal | distribué d’aprés son organisation, | pour
servir de base | a Vhistoire naturelle des Animaux | et d’introduction a l’anato-
mie comparée. | Par M. le baron Cuvier, |. . . [=titles, 5 lines] | avec figures
dessinées d’aprés nature. | Nouvelle Edition, revue et augmentée. | Tome I.

| — | Paris, | Chez Déterville, Libraire, | rue Hautefenille, N°. 8; | et chez
Crochard, Libraire, | cloitre Saint-Benoit, N°. 16. | — | 1829. 8°. pp. i-xxxviii,
1-584.

Neuviéme ordre des Mammiféres. Les Cétacés, pp. 281-298.

Les Cétacés herbivores= Sirenia, pp. 283-285. The same as in the first edition (see 1817.
CUvVIER, G.) save the addition of a few words to the account of the Dugong.

Les Cétacés ordinaires = Cetacea, pp. 285-298.—‘‘I] n’est point de famille de mammiféres
plus difficile & observer, et dont les des ¢riptions soient plus incomplétes et la synonymie plus
vacillante que celle des cétacés. J’ai cherché & ne donner que des espéces authentiques”
(p. 287, note 1). Much new matter is now added, and the number of species is considerably
increased; the fabulous or very uncertain basis of others is pointed out. The species recog-
nized may be indicated as follows: 1. Delphinus delphis L., 2. D. tursio Bonnaterre, p. 287;
3. D. dubius Cuv.,sp.n., 4. D. frontalis Duss., 5. D. frontatus Cuv., 6. D. plumbeus Duss.
=D. malaianus Less. et Garn.), 7. D. velox Duss., 8. D. longirostris Duss., 9. D. microp-
terus Cuv., p. 288; 10. D. rostratus Cuv., 11. D. gangeticus Roxb., p. 289; 12. D. phocena
L. (12-17 form the genus Phocena Cuy.), 13. D. capensis Duss.; 14. D. orca, 15. D. gladi-
ator, p. 289; 16. D. aries Risso, 17. D. globiceps, p. 290; 18. D. leucas Gm. (18-20 are given
as Delphinaptéres); 19. D. leucorhamphus Péron, 20. D. phoccenoides Duss., p. 291

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 527

1829. Cuvirr, [G.]—Continued.
21. Hyperoodon (D. edentulus Schreb.), p. 292; 22. Monodon monoceros L., p. 292; 23.Phy-
seter (cachalot macrocéphale de Shaw et Bonnaterre, n’est pas de Linné), p. 294; 24, 25. Les
Physétéres de Lacép., deux espéces, microps et tursio ou mular), p. 295; 26. Balena mysti-
cetus, p. 296; 27. B. physalus L., 28. B. boops L., 29. B. musculus L., p. 298.

In foot-notes are mentioned the following species, which are considered as indications of
what may exist, but which are not sufficiently known to be introduced into the work: 1. D.
albigena Quoy et Gaym., 2. D. superciliosus Less. et Garn., 3. D. cruciger Quoy et Gaym.,
4. D. bivittatus Less. et Garn., 5. D. lunatys Less. et Garn., p. 288, note 2. D. griseus
is referred to D. aries Risso., p. 290, note 1.

Other species are criticised and rejected, as notably ‘‘le dauphin & deux dorsales” of Ra-
finesque and the D. rhinoceros Quoy et Gaym., ‘‘ce qui peut faire craindre quelque illusion
d'optique,” p. 291, note 3.

Compare G. Cuvier (Recherches sur les ossemens fossiles) at 1823, where the Cuvierian spe-
cies here mentioned were first named. [721.]

1829. DrsNoyers, J. Observations sur un ensemble de dép6ts marins plus récens que
les terrains tertiaires du bassin de la Seine, et constituant une Formation
géologique distincte; précédées d@’un Apercu de la non simultanéité des bas-
sins tertiaires. < Ann. des Sci. nat., xvi, 1829, pp. 171-214, 402.

Mammiféres marins (Lamantin, Dauphin; Dugong, Rorqual, Baleine et Cachalot), pp.
446-448. |'722.]

1829, Epirors. An enormous Whale. <Loudon’s Mag. Nat. Hist., i, 1829, p. 283.
Brief notice of the ‘‘Ostend Whale,” the skeleton of which was prepared by M. Kessels of
Ghent, exhibited there and in London. From New Monthly Mag., no. xcii, p. 357. See 1832.
DEWHURST. [723.]
1829. HARLAN, RICHARD. Description of a new species of Grampus, (Delphinus, Cuy.)
inhabiting the coast of New England. <Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., vi, pt.
‘i, 1829, pl. 51-53, pp. i, fig. 3.
D. intermedius, sp.n. (= Globiocephalus melas) ; Salem Harbor, Mass. [724.]
1829. HARWOOD, [JOHN]. Hands of the Whale. <Loudon’s Mag. Nat. Hist., ii,
1829, p. 487.

Popular account—ten lines. [725.]
1829. HoLi, FrieDRICH. Handbuch | der | Petrefactenkunde, | von Friedrich Holl |
Mitglied der Academia Truentina zu Ascoli. | — | Mit | einer Hinleitung |

tiber die | Vorwelt der organischen Wesen | auf der Erde, | von | Dr. Ludwig
Choulant | Professor an der chirurg. medicin. Akademie | zu Dresden | — |

Erstes [—viertes] Biindchen | — | — | Dresden, | P. G. Hilscher’sche Buchhand-
lung. | — | 1829. <Allgemeine | Taschenbibliothek | der | Naturwissen-
schaften. |—| Neunter Theil. |— | Handbuch der Petrefactenkunde. |

Erstes Biindchen. | Dresden, | P. G. Hilscher’sche Buchhandlung. | — |
1829, sm. 8°. pp. i-vili, 1-115.

The four ‘‘Bandchen” are paged consecutively (pp. 1-489) with interpolated ‘title-pages
for vol. ii-iv. Bindchen iii and iv are dated 1830. The title-pages of vol. ii-iv differ from
that of the first by the omission of the second [Einleitung] portion of the title.

Manatus fossilis, p. 69; Delphinus Delphis, D. Bordae, D. platyrhynchus Cuy., D. stenorhyn-
chus Cuv., p. 70; Ziphius cavirostris Cuv., Z. longirostris Cuy., D. planirostris Cuy., Monodon
monoceros, p. 711; Physeter, p. 71; Balaena, p. 72. (726.]

1829. HUNTER, Prercivat. A Male Spermaceti Whale, Physéter Catddon (katd, be-
low, odous, atooth; teeth in lower jaw only) Lin. <Loudon’s Mag. Nat. Hist.,

li, 1829, pp. 197, 198.
Brief account of a specimen taken near Whitstable, south coast of England, Feb. 15, 1829.

(727.]

1829. Knox, [Robert]. Notice regarding the Osteology and Dentition of the Dnu-
gong. <Edinb. Journ. of Sci., i, n. s., no. 1, 1829, pp. 157, 158. (728.]

1829. Lesson, R. P. Rytine ou Stellere, Rytina. <Dict. class. d Hist. nat., xv, Rua-S,
1829, pp. 25-28. (729.]

1829. Mayer, [F. J. C.] Ueber die Geruchsnerven des Delphins. < Froriep’s Noti-
zen, XXiv, no. 516, Mai 1829, p. 150. (730.]

528 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1829. MorrEeNn, CHartesF. A. Over de Balaenoptera rostrata van Fabricius en beoor-
deeling der Werken, welke over een Dier dezer sort, den 4den November 1827,
ten oosten van de haven van Ostende gestrand, uitgegeven zijn. < Bijd. tot
de Natuurk. Wetenschap., iv, 1829, pp. 52-84, fig. 2 (p. 60, tongheen). L731.)

1829. R&pDACTEURS. Mémoire sur un Cétacé échoué le 27 novembre 1828, sur la cé6te
dépendante de la commune de Saint-Cyprien (Pyrénées-orientales); par MM.
Farines et Carcassonne. In-8°, de 27 pages, Perpignan; 1829, Tastu, Avec
une planche représentant la téte de l’animal au trait. <érussac’s Bull. des
Sci. nat., xix, 1829, pp. 349, 350.

Résumé. é 2 [732.]

_ 1829. R&pacrEuRsS. Notice sur un Cachalot (Physeter macrocephalus L.), trouvé sur
la eéte du York-shire, le 28 avril 1825, avec fig.; par James Alderson. (Trans-
act. of the Cambridge Philosoph. Society; ii, 1827, p. 253.) <Férussae’s Bull. des
Sci. nat., xvii, 1829, pp. 282, 283.

Résumé. [733.]

1829. REDACTEURS. Description d’une nouvelle espéce de Dauphin [ Delphinus inter-
medius]; par M. R. Harlan. (Journ. of the Acad. of Nat. Sci. of Philadelphia ;
Tom. vi, cah. 2, p. 51,1827.) Avecl fig. <Férussac’s Bull. des Sci. nat., xviii,
1829, pp. 261, 282.

Résumé. [734.]

1829. R&pAcTEURS. Sur deux tétes osseuses de Dauphin appartenant 4 des espéces
probablement non décrites; par J. E. Gray. (Philos. Magaz. and Annals of
Philos.; nov. 1827, p. 375.) <Férussac’s Bull. des Sci. nat., xviii, 1829, p. 282.

Résumé.—Delphinus Kingti, Gray, et D. intermedius, Gray (non Warlan). [735.]

1829. SmirH, A. Additions a la zoologie du Sud de VAfrique. <Férussac’s Bull. des

Sci. nat., xvili, 1829, pp. 272-278.
Tradue. du Zoological Journal, no. 16, Jan.-—May, 1829, pp. 433 et seqq.
Phocena Homeit, p. 276. [736.] °

1829. Srrrn, C.G.D. Handbuch | der | Naturgeschichte | fiir | die gebildeten Stande,
Gymmnasien | und Schulen, | besonders in Hinsicht auf Geographie | ausgear-
beitet | von | D. Christian Gottfried Daniel Stein, | ... [titles, 4 lines]. |
Erster [Zweiter] Band. | — | Dritte verbesserte und vermehrte Auflage. | Mit
135 Abbildungen aut 15 Kupfertafeln. | — | Leipzig, 1829. | T. C. Hinrichsche
Buchhandlung. 8°. Erster B., pp. i-viii, 1-382, 1. 1; zweiter B., ll. 2, pp.
i-xxxii, |. 1, pp. 1-274, pll. i-xv.

Achte Ordnung, ... Palmata, pp. 78-83. Trichecus (pp. 82, 83) includes the Sirenians.

Neunte Ordnung, . . . Cetacea, pp. 83-87, pl. iv, figg. 28-32. Genn. 4; spp. 10. [737.]

1829. THompPson, THOMAS. Physeter catodon. <Loudon’s Mag. Nat. Hist., ii, 1€29, p.
477, fig. 114.

Original figure of a specimen cast on the Holderness coast in 1825; its skeleton is reported
to be in the possession of Sir Clifford Constable, and was later described by Beale (Nat. Hist.
Sperm Whale, 1889, q. v.). [738. ]

1829. Woops, Henry. Capture of a Cachalot on the South Coast. <Loudon’s Mag.
Nat. Hist., 11, 1829, 198-202.

Particulars of its capture, dimensions, and external characters, mainly from the observa:
tions of Mr. John Gould of the Zoological Society. The skeleton was presented to the mu-
seum of the Zoological Society by Messrs. Enderby and Sturge, ‘‘but government having
put ina claim to the ‘royal fish,’ the whole proceeds of it are under arrest, and the bones
now lie whitening on the shore”’ (p. 200). (739.]

1829. YARRELL, WILLIAM. Notes on the internal appearance of several Animals ex-
amined after death, in the collection of the Zoological Society. <Zoolog.
Journ., iv, Jan., 1829, pp. 314-322.

Note on the anatomy of Phocena.communis at pp. 318, 319. ['740. ]
1829-30. Fiscurr, J. B. Synopsis | Mammalium. | —| Auctore | Joanne Baptista
Fischer, | Med. et Chir. Doctore. | — | Stuttgardtiae | Sumtibus, J. G. Cot-

tae | MDCCCXXIX. 8°. pp. i-xlii, 1-528.

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 529

1829-30, Fiscner, J. B.—Continued.

Addenda, Emendanda et Index | ad | Synopsis | Mamalium. | — | Auctore }
Joanne Baptista Fischer, | Med. et Chir. Doctore. | — | Stuttgardtiae, | Sum-
tibus J. G. Cottae. | MDCCCXXX. 1.1 (bastard title), pp. 829-456, 657-752.
Tabb. i-vii, inter pp. 666, 667, Pp. “329” et seqq. ad p, ‘£456” Addend., etc.,
Jege 529-656.

P. ii, motto; p. iii, Dedicatio; pp. v-x, Praefatio; pp. xi-xxii, Catalogns voluminum earum-
que editionum, quae in hoc opere citantur; pp. xxiii-xlii, Conspectus Ordinum et Generum;
pp. 1-527; Addenda et Emendata, pp. ‘'329”’ (i. ¢., 529)-666; tab. i-vii, Conspectus distribu-
tionis Mammalium geographicx; pp. 667-745, Index; pp. 747-752, Corrigenda.

Octe. A. Artubus anticis apparentibus brachiiformibus posticis compedibus, pp. 501-504.
=Sirenia. 1. Manatus australis, p. 501; 2. UW. senegalensis, p. 502; 3. Halicore Dugung, p.
503; 4. Rytina Stelleri, p. 504. Species dubiae: WM. latirostris Harl., M.? Hydropithecus
Shaw, p. 502.

Cete. B. Pinnis Pectoralibus. Artubus, ete., pp. 504-527, 455” (i. e., 655)-657. = Cetacea.
A. Delphinus Geofroyi Desm., p. 504; 2. D. coronatus Fremin., p. 505; 3. D. Bredanensis
Cuv., p. 505; 4. D. macrogenius, sp. n., p. 505; 5. D. Gangeticus Lebeck, p. 506; 6. D. longi-
rostris Gray, p. ‘'455” (i. ¢., 655); ‘7%. D. velox Dussum., p. ‘'455” (i. ¢., 655); 8. D. Boryi
Desm., p. 506; 9. D. Delphis Linn., p. 506; 10. D. eruciger Q. et G., p. 507; 11. D. macu-
latus L. et G., p. 507; 12. D. dubius Cuv., p. 508; 13. D. frontalis Dussum, p. ‘'455” (i. e.,
655); 14. D. Tursio Fabr., p. 508; 15. D. niger La Cép., p. 508; 16. D. Malayanus L. et
G., p. 508; 17%. D. plumbeus Dussum., p. ‘'455” (7.e., 655); 18. D. lunatus L. et G., p. 509;
19. D. minimus L. et G., p. 509; 20. D. Rhinoceros Q. et G., p. 509; 21. D. Phocena
Linn., p. 509; 22. D. Dussumieri (=D. capensis Dussum.), p. ‘'456” (t. @, 656); 23. D.
Homei (=Phocena Homei A. Smith), p. “456” (i. ¢., 656); 24. D. leucocephalus L. et G..,
p. 510; 25. D. bivittatus L. et G., p. 510; 26. D. superciliosus L. et G., p. 510; 27. D. acu-
tus (= Grampus acutus Gray), p. 456” (i. e., 656); 28. D. Heavisidu (Grampus Heavisidit
Gray), p. $456” (i. e., 656); 29. D. obscwrus (= Grampus obscurus Gray), p. 456” (7. ¢., 656)’;
30. D. Orca Linn., p. 511; 31. D. griseus Cuy., p. 512; 82. D. Harlani (=D. intermedius
Harlan), p. ‘'456” (i. e., 656); 33. D. globiceps Cuv., p. 512; 34. D. Cortesit (fossil), p. 512;
35. D. leucas Pallas, p. 513; 3G. D. Peronti La Cép., p. 513; 37. D. phocenoides Dussum.,
p. 657; 38. D. Datei p. 514; 39. D. capensis Gray, p. 657; 40. D. Hyperoodon Desm., p.
515; 41. D.? spurius (= Monodon spurius Fabr.), p. 515; 42. Monodon monoceros Linn.,
p. 516; 43. Physeter macrocephalus Shaw; ? B Trumpo, ? y Catodon, p. 518, 44. Ph. polycy-
phus Q. et G., p. 518; 45. Ph. cylindricus Bonnat., p. 519; 46. Ph. Tursio Linn., ? 8 Microps,
p. 519 ? y Orthodon, p. 520; 47. Ph. sulcatus La Cép., p. 520; 48. Balaena Mysticetus Linn.,
p. 5212 B Glacialis, p. 522; 49. B. australis Desmoul., p. 522; 50. B. Japonica La Cép., p.
522: 51. B. lunulata La Cép., p. 522; 52. B. Physalus Linn., p. 523; 53. B. borealis (= B;
rostrata Rudol.), ? a Boops Linn., p. 524 ? 8 Musculus Linn., ? y Rostrata ‘‘Miill.,” p. 525.
54. B. Antiquorum (= Rorqual dela Mediterranée, Cuv.), p. 525; 55. B. Lalandii (= Rorqual
du Cap de Bonne Espérance Cuv.), p. 525; 56. B. Quoyt (=B. rostrata australis Desmoul.),
p. 526; 5%. B. punctulata Desm., p. 526; 58. B. nigra Desm., p. 526; 59- B. caerulescens,
Desm., p. 526; 60. B. maculata Desm., p. 526; 61. B. Cuviert Desmoul. (fossil), p. 527; 62.

. B. Oortessii Desmoul. (fossil), p. 527.

Species dubiae: 1. Delphinus canadensis Desm., p. 505; 2. D. Pernettyt Desm., p. 507; 3.
D. albigena Q. et G., p.507; 4. D. Mongitort Desm., p. 509; 5. D. intermedius Gray, p. 511;
6. D. Rissoanus Desm., p. 512; '%- D. Peres Bonnat., p.513; 8. D. Kingii Gray, p. 514; 9. D.
Epiodon Desm., p. 515; 10. Balaena nodosa Bonnat., p. 525; 11. B. gibbosa Erxl., p. 520.

Delphinus macrogenius, p. 505; D. Dussumieri, p. “456” (i. e., 656); D. Cortesii, p. 512; D.
Harlani, p. 456” (i. e., 656); D. Dalei, p. 514; Balaena borealis, p. 524; B. Quoyi, p. 526,
nomm. spp. nn.

62 spp. verze; 11 spp. dubia; 7 spp. nn, (741.]

1829-32. Fiscuer, G. Prodromus Petromatognosiae animalium systematicae, conti-
nens bibliographiam animalium fossilium. < Nouv. Mém. de la Soc. imp. des
Nat. de Moscou, i, 1829, pp. 301-3874; ii, 1832, pp. 95-277, 447-458.
In Pars II, Monographia Animalium fossilium, mammals oceupy ii, pp. 100-129. [742.]
1830. ““Brescuet, GILBERT. Organ auditif du Marsonin, Avec. 1 pl. in-4°. Paris
1838. (11 pag.)”
Not seen. (743. |
1830, Curex, H. H. On the natural history of the dugong (Halicore indicus Desm.),
the mermaid of early writers; and particularly on the differences which occur
in its dental characters. < Edinb. Journ. Nat. and Geol. Sci., i [1829], 1830, p.
161-172. [744.]

54 GB

530 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. |

1830. Companyo, L. Mémoire descriptif | et | Ostéographie | de | la Baleine, ;
échouée | sur les cétes de la mer, prés de Saint Cyprien, | Département des
Pyrénées-orientales, | Le 27 Novembre 1828, | Par L. Companyo, Docteur en
Médecine, | Membre du Comité central de Vaccine, Membre correspondant de
la Société | linnéenne de Paris. | Avec figures dessinées d’aprés nature. |
[Vignette.] A Perpignan, | Chez J. Alzine, Imprimeur du Roi. | 1880. 4°.
pp. 1-71, pll. i-v.

Avant-Propos, pp. 3-8. Premiére Partie. Chap. Ie. Considérations générales sur les Cé-

tacées, pp. 9-14. Chap. II. Notice historique, pp. 15-18. Chap. II. Description, pp. 19-22.

. Chap. IV. Détermination, pp. 23-31. Seconde Partie. Ostéographie. Chap. It. Généralités,

pp. 32-34. Chap. Il. De la téte, pp. 34-46. Chap. III. Du trone, pp. 47-58. Conclusions, pp.

59-68. Explication des planches, pp. 69-71. Pl. i. Profil de la téte. Pl. ii. Ensemble de la

téte. Pl. iii. Base du crane, mAchoire inférieure. Pl. iv. Os hyoide, axis, atlas; sturnum,
cétes. Pl. v. Omoplates, os pelvien, nageoires pectorales.

‘““Nous pensons donc que la Baleinoptére que nous avous observée est un jeune individu de

la Baleinoptere Rorqual” (=Balena musculus, Linn.), p. 23. (745. ]

1830. G., A. Natural History of the Neighborhood of Cromer [Norfolk, Engl. ].
<Loudon’s Mag. Nat. Hist., iii, pp. 155-158.

At p. 157 is a notice of the capture of two Baleen Whales, with a statement of their meas-

urements. [746. ]

1830. JONKAIRE, A. DELA. ‘‘Considérations sur la Péche de la Baleine. Paris, 1830.
go.”

Not seen. See Foreign Quart. Rev., vii, 1831, pp. 355-370, for an extended review of this

“respectable pamphlet.” [747.}

1830. Kaup, J. Versuch einer natirlichen Eintheilung der Siugethiere. <Jsis von
Oken, 1830, pp, 799-802. j
Sirenien, p. 801. (748.]
1830. KNox, [R.], and [D.] BrewsTER. Notice regarding the nature of a peculiar
Structure observed in the Second Stomach of certain Cetacea, generally con-
sidered as simply glandular, but seemingly analogous to the Electric Organs
of the Torpedo and Gymnotus ... To which is annexed the Microscopical
Examination of the Structure by Dr Brewster. < Edinb. Journ. of Sci., iii,
n. s., no. 6, 1830, pp. 325-328.

Based principally on the Porpoise. [749.]
1830. KuHN, [J.] Description de ’appareil mammaire du Marsouin (Delphinus Pho-
cena). <Férussac’s Bull. des Sci. nat., xxii, 1831, pp. 322, 323. . [750.]

1830. Quoy, J. R. C., et P. GArmarD. Voyage | de découvertes | de | Astrolabe |
exécuté par ordre du Roi, pendant les Années 1826-1827-1828-1829, | sous le
Commandement | de M. J. Dumont D’Urville | — | Zoologie | par | MM.
[Jean René Constant] Quoy et [Paul] Gaimard. | — | Tome Premier. | — |
Paris | J. Tastu, Editeur-Imprimeur, | N° 36, Rue de Vaugirard. | 1830. 8°.
pp. i-l, 1-268. Avec un Atias de 200 Planches an moins.

Cétacées, pp. 149-152, pl. xxviii, Delphinus Nove-Zealandie (sp.n.) et D. obseurus. [751.]

1830. Rapp, W. Beitriige zur Anatomie und Physiologie der Wallfische. < Meckel’s
Archiv f. Anat. u Phys., 1830, pp. 358-368.

Hauptsiachlich iiber Delphinus phocena. [752.]

1830. ROUSSEAU, EMMANUEL. Sur l’Existence de moustaches chez les foetus de Dau-
phins et de Marsouins. < Ann. des. Sci. nat., xxi, 1830, pp. 351, 352. 7

“Tels sont les Dauphins et les Marsouins, qui alors portent au- dessus de la lévre supé-
Tieure une ligne de poils raides, prolongée sur les eé6tés, et y formant une petite paire de
_ moustache.” £ [753] -

1830. WAGLER, JOH. Natiirliches System | der | Amphibien, | mit | vorangehender
Classification | der | Siiugthiere und Végel. | Ein | Beitrag zur vergleichen-—
den Zoologie. | Von | Dr. Joh. Wagler, | Professor der Zoologie und Mitglied
der Kéniglichen Akademie der | Wissenschaften in Miinchen. | — | [Motto. |
| — | Mit Kupfern und einer Verwandtschaftstafel. | — | Miinchen, Stutt-

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 531

1830. WAGLER, Jonu.—Continued.
gart und Tiibingen. | In der J. G. Cotta’schen Buchhandlung. pee 8°,
‘pp. i-vi, 1-354.

Mammalia. Ordo XVI. Ceti, Walle, pp. 32-35, 53, 54. Familia I. Hedraeoglossi. <A. O.
naribus anticis in rostri apice. Genus 1. Manatus Rondel., p.32; genus 2. Halicore Mlig., p.
33; genus 3. Rytina Illig., p. 33. B. OC. naribus superiis in rostri basi. Genus 4. Balena
Linn., p. 33; genus 6. Physeter Linn., p. 33; genus 7. Oetus (species: Delphinus globiceps
Cuy.), p. 33; genus 8. Delphis (= Beluga), p. 34; genus 9. Tursio [=Delphinapterus Less. |
(species: Delphinus Peronii Cuv.), p. 34; genus 10. Nodus [= Heterodon Less.] (species:
Delphinus edentulus Schreb.), p. 34; genus 11. Ceratodon Briss. [=Monodon Linn.], p. 34;
genus 12. Orca (species: Delphinus bidentatus Hunt.), p. 34; genus 13. Phocaena, Cuv., p.
34; genus 14. Delphinus Linn., p. 35; genus 15. Platanista [=Susu Less.], (species: Del-
phinus gangeticus), p.35. Hedraeoglossi, fam. n. (= Sirenia et Cete), p. 32.

Cetus (p. 33), Delphis, Tursio, Nodus, Orca (p. 34), Platanista (p. 34), genn. nn.

Critical remarks respecting various genera and species of authors are given in foot-notes.

[754.]

1830. WaTSON, J. F. Annals | of | Philadelphia, | being a collection of | Memoirs,
Anecdotes, & Incidents | of the | City and its Inhabitants | from | The days
of the Pilgrim Founders. | Intended to preserve the recollections of Olden
Time, and | to exhibit society in its changes of manners and | customs, and
the city in its local changes | and improvements. | To which is added | An
Appendix, | containing | Olden Time Researches and Reminiscences of | New
York City. | — | ‘‘Oh! dear is a tale of the olden time!” | — | ‘‘Where peep’d
the hut, the palace towers; | Where skimm’d the bark, the war-ship lowers: |
Joy gaily carols, where was silence rude; | And cultur’d thousands throng the
solitude.” | — | By John F. Watson, | Member of the Historical Society of
Pennsylvania. | — | Philadelphia, | E. L. Carey & A. Hart; | New York, | G.
& C. & H. Carvill. | 1830. | 8°. pp. i-xii, 1-740-++ 1-78 pll.

Whales and Whalery, pp. 667-668. On the early Whalefishery of the Delaware, with
records of the stranding or capture of Whales in the river down to 1809. [755.]

1831. ANON. Considérations sur la Péche de la Baleine. Par A. de la Jonkaire.
<for. Quar. Rev., vii, 1831, pp. 355-370.

An extended account, in part statistical, of the ‘‘ progress and present state of the Whale
Fishery,’’ apropos of the appearance of the brochure, the title of which forms the caption of
the paper. [756.]

1831. C., F. D. Notice sur Vostéologie et la dentition du Dugong; parle Dt. Knox.
(Edinb. Journ. of Sct., i, 1829.) <Férussac’s Bull. des Sci. nat., xxv, 1831, p. 350.
Résumé. [757.]
1831. CRAIGIE, DAvID. Observations on the History and Progress of Comparative
Anatomy. . . . Section III. Early Zootomical Authors to Eustachius, 1501-

1576. <Hdinb. New Philos. Journ., [xi], 1831, pp. 42-56.

Contains an extended critical résumé of Belon’s account of the anatomy of the Dolphin as
given in that author’s ‘‘L’Histoire Naturelle des Estranges Poissons Marins, avec la vraie
Peincture et Description du Daulphin et de plusieurs autres de son espece. Paris 1551,” q. v.

i} [758.]
1831. Cuvier,G. The | Animal Kingdom | arranged in conformity with its orzaniza-
tion, | by the Baron Cuvier, | Perpetual Secretary to the Royal Academy of
Sciences, etc. etc. etc. | — | The Crustacea, Arachnides and Insecta, | by P.
A. Latreille, | member of the Royal Academy of Sciences, ete. etc. ete. | — |
Translated from the French, | with Notes and Additions, | by H. M’Murtrie,
M. D. &c. &e. | — | In four volumes, with plates. | Volume I. [Mammals
and Birds.] | New York: | G. & C. & H. Carvill. | MDCCCXXXI. 8. pp.
i-xxxii, 1-448, 1. 1, pli. i-iv.

Order ix. Cetacea (= Sirenia-+ Cete), pp. 202-214.

This is a scholarly translation of the ‘‘nouvelle édition”’ (1829), g. v. Says the translator:
‘“‘An immaculate book is perhaps rather to be wished for than expected, and that errors should
have crept into the Régne Animalis not at all surprising. These I have endeavoured to cor-
rect, not by erasure or altering the text (those cases always excepted where the mistake was
evidently and purely typographical), but by note, either on the page itself or in the appendix.
Thus, whatever has been added, nothing has been taken away, and the text of my author
remains as I found it” (pp. v, vi). [759.]

532 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1831. GopMan, Joun D. American | Natural History. | — | Vol. III. | Part I1—Mas-
tology. | — | By John D. Godman, M. D. |. . . [= titles, 4 lines]. | Second
Edition. | Philadelphia: | Stoddart and Atherton, 60, N. Front Street. | 1831.
8°. pp. 1-264, 9 plates, cuts.

Order viii. Cete; Cetaceous Animals, pp. 37-237. For analysis and comment see the ed.
prin., 1828, with which this is textually identical. [760.}

1831. Graves, R. J. An account of a Peculiarity not hitherto described in the Ankle,
or Hock-joint of the Horse; with Remarks on the Structure of the Vertebras
in the Species of Whale, entitled Delphinus Diodon. < Trans. Roy. Irish Acad.,
xvi, pt. 2, 1831, pp. 85-91.

On the separation of the vertebral epiphyses in maceration, and the degree of union useful
as an index of the age of the animal among Cetaceans, pp. 88-91.

Reprinted in Edinb. Journ. Sci., new ser., iv, 1831, pp. 47-52, and in Edinb. New Philos.
Journ., [x], 1831, pp. 59-64. . [761.]

1831. JOHNSTON, GEORGE. Some account of a Whale stranded near Berwick-upon-
Tweed. < Trans. Nat. Hist. Soc. of Northumberland, Durham and Newcastle
upon Tyne, Vol. I, 1831, pp. 6-8, pl. I.

Account of the external characters and figure of a specimen apparently referable to Me-
gaptera longimana; believed by the author to be the Balena Boops of Turton’s ‘‘British
Fauna.” [762.]

1831. Knox, [Rosert]. Notiz ther die Natureiner eigenthtimlichen Structur, welche
im zweiten Magen gewisser Cetaceen beobachtet worden ist und die man in
der Regel als bloss drisiger Beschaffenheit betrachtet hat, die aber offenbar
den electrischen Organen des Torpedo und Gymnotus analog ist; mitgetheilt
in einem Briefe yon Dr. Knox. Demselben ist beigefigt die mikroscopische
Untersuchang der Structur von Dr. Brewster. <lroriep’s Notizen, xxix, no.
629, Jan. 1831, pp. 193-196.

Aus Brewster's Edinburgh Journ. Sct., new ser., no. 6, July, 1830. See 1830. Knox, R. [763.]

1831. Knox, R. Observations to determine the Dentition of the Dugong; to which
are added Observations illustrating the Anatomical Structure and Natural
History of certain of the Cetacea. <Trans. Roy. Soc. Hdinb., xi, pt. 2, art.
Xxiii, 1831, pp. 389-417, pl. xv.

[Preliminary remarks on the osteology and dentition of the Dugong], pp. 389-397. The
zoological arrangement of the Dugong, pp. 398-400. True Cetacea, pp. 400, 401. Skeleton or
the Narwhal, pp. 401-404. Delphinus phoceena, pp. 404, 405. Other specimens of the genus
Delphinus, pp. 405, 406. Of the size of the Foetus of the Cctacea at the time of birth, pp. 406-
413. Digestive Organs, pp. 413-416. The plate represents the cranium of adult and young
Narwhal, the atlas dentata and third cervical vertebra of the Narwhal, the tooth and gastric
cavities. [764.]

1831. Lunz, H.O. Naturgeschichte | der | Saugethiere, | nach Cuvier’s Systeme bear-
beitet | von Dr. Harald Othmar Lenz, | Lehrer an der Erziehungsanstalt zu
Schnepfenthal. |— | (Preis: 1 Thlr. oder 1 fl. 48 fr. Rhnl.) | — | Gotha, |
Beckersche Buchhandlung. | 1831. 8°. pp. 1-324.

Neunte Ordnung der Siugethiere: Fischsingethiere.—Cctacea, pp. 294-306.

Sirenia: 3 genera, 4 species. Cetacea, 4 genera, 24 species, to wit: Delphinus, 14 spp.;
Monodon, 1 sp.; Physeter, 3 spp.; Balena, 6 spp. The notices of the species are very short;
the references relate only to figures. The technical names are marked for accent and their
etymology is given. Evidently prepared for use as a concise hand-book of Mammalogy. [765.]

1831. Less[ONn]., [R. P.]. Quelques détails sur un cétacé échoué prés Berwich [sic],
sur la Tweed; par Georges Johnston. (Trans. of the nat. hist. society of
Northumberland; part I, tom. I, pag. 6, avec une planche.) <érussac’s
Bull. des Sci. nat., xxvii, 1831, pp. 184-186.

Résumé. [766. ]

1831. M’MurtTrRIE, H. See 1831, CUVIER, G.

1831. MANTEL, Mr., of Lewes. Large [Baleen] Whale recently found in the Channel

near Brighton [England]. <Loudon’s Mag. Nat. Hist., iv, 1831, pp. 163, 164.
[767.]

\

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 533

1831. M[ANTEL?], G. Some Account of a Grampus (Delphinus Orca) recently cap-

tured in Lynn Harbour [England]. <(Loudon’s Mag. Nat. Hist., iv, 1831, pp.
338-341, fig. 56.

Description and figure of the specimen. [768. |

1831? Patuas, P.[8.]. Zoographia | Rosso-Asiatica, | sistens | omnium animalium |

1831.

in extenso Imperio Rossico | et | adjacentibus maribus observatorum | recen-
sionem, domicilia, mores et descriptiones, | anatomen atque icones plurimo-
rum. | Auctore | Petro [Simones] Pallas, | Eq. Aur. Academico Petropoli-
tano. |— | Volumen Primum. | — | — | Petropoli | in officina Caes. Acade-
miae Scientiarum impress. MDCCCXI. | Edit. MDCCCXXXI. 3 vols. 4°,

with folio atlas. Vol. i, ll. 2, pp. i-xxii, 1-568, ll. 2.

Imperii Rossici Animalia Lactantia, i, pp. 1-296. Ordo VII. Cetacea (= Sirenia-+ Cetacea),
pp. 271-296, pil. “!xxx-—xxii,” spp. 142-151. 1. Manatus borealis, p. 272, pl. xxx; 2. Delphinus
Leucas, p. 273, pll. xxxi (auditus organum), xxxii; 3. Delphinus Delphis, p. 284; 4. Delphi-
nus Phocaena, p. 284; 5. Delphinus Orca, p. 285; 6. Physeter macrocephalus, p. 287; '7. Ba-
laena Physalus, p. 289; 8. Balaena Boops ? p. 291; 9. Balaena Musculus, p. 293; 10. Cera-
todon Monodon, p. 295.

At p. 286 three species of Physeter are mentioned under Aleut names, and at p. 288 six
species of Balaena. These are cited by Chamisso (Nov. Act. Acad. Oaes. Leop.-Carol. Nat.
Curios., xii, 1, 1824, pp. 249-260), who refers to volume and page of Pallas’s work, showing
that this portion of the work, at least, was accessible to Chamisso as early as 1824, although
not commonly recognized as “published” till 1831. On this point see Coues, Birds Col. Val-
ley, 1878, p. 615. {769.]

“SANDIFORT, G. Bijdragen tot de ontledkundige Kennis der Walvisschen.

< Nieuwe Verhandl. der eerste Klasse van het Nederl. Inst., 3 D. , 1831, pp. 223-
270, pill. 5.”

This important memoir I have been unable to see. Title from Carus and Engelmann. (770. ]

1831. Smiru, A. Beytrage zur Naturgeschichte von Sud BEG <Usis von Oken, 1831,

pp. 1359-1362.
Uebersetzung aus der Zoological Journal, iv, no. xvi, 1829, pp. 483 et seqq.
Phocaena homeii, p. 1362. (771.]

1831. SNELLING, W.J. The | Polar Regions | of the | Western Continent Explored; |

embracing a | Geographical Account | of | Iceland, Greeuland, the Islands of
the Frozen Sea, | and the | Northern Parts of the American Continent, | in-
eluding | a particular description of the Countries, the Seas, In- | habitants,
and Animals of those Parts of the World; | also, a minute account of the Whale
Fisheries, | and the dangers attending them; | with remarkable adventures of
some of the Whale Fishers, | descriptions of Mount Hecla, and the other vol-
canoes of Iceland; | [Vignette.] Together with the | Adventures, Discoveries,
Dangers, and Trials | of | Parry, Franklin, Lyon, and other Navigators, | in

those Regions. | — | By W[illiam]. J. Snaline g, | author of Tales of the North-
west. | — | Illustrated by a map and engravings. | — | Boston: | Printed for
W. W. Reed. | —| 1831. 8°. 11.2 (title-pages), pp. i—xii, 1-501.

Chap. iii. Early History of the Whale Fishery.—Of the Manner in which a Whale Ship is
manned.—The Crow’s Nest.—W hale Boats.—Implements used in the Whale Fishery.—W hale
Killing.—Danger of Striking, pp. 77-82. Chap. iv. Further Account of Whale Killing.—
Length of Time required to kill a Whale.—Character of the Whaleman.—Anecdotes of the
Greenland Fishery, pp. 82-88.

Appendix, pp. 485-501,—being an account of the Mammals, with numerous cuts, forming
8 pll. (not all zodlogical), entitled ‘‘Illustrations for Polar Region,’ with references to the
descriptions of the species inthe text. The Narwal, pp. 494, 495. Thereisa cut of a *‘Sperma-
ceti Whale.”

‘““The object of this work ...is.. . to give the reader a condensed account of what is
known of the northern regions of the new world, from the Jatest and best authorities. To
this end the compiler has availed himself of the writings of Henderson, Crantz, Parry, Frank-
lin, Richardson, Kotzebue, and others, and, in many instances, has used their own words.’ —
Author's preface. (772.]

1831. Sprx, Jom[ANN] Bapt[istT] von, und Cart FRIEDR. PHIL. VON MARrTIUs,

Reise | in |. Brasilien | auf Befehl Sr. Majestiit | Maximilian Joseph I. | Kénigs

-von Baiern | in den Jahren 1817 bis 1820 | gemacht | von | weiland Dr. Joh,

Bapt. von Spix, |... [=titles, 3 lines] | und | Dr. Carl Friedr. Phil. von

534 ‘BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1831. Sprx, JoH[ANN] BaptT[istT] von, et al.—Continued.
Martius, |... [= titles, 4 lines.] | [Erster—] Dritter und letzter Theil, | bear-
beitet und herausgegeben von | Dr. C. F. P. von Martius. | Mit sieben Blittern
Charten und zwei Tafeln Abbildungen. | — | Miinchen, [1823-]1831, | bei dem
Verfasser. Leipzig, in Comm. bei Friedr. Fleischer. 3 vols. 4°. mut. mut.
Vol. iii, pp. i-lvi, 883-1388.
Vol. i, 1823; vol. ii, 1828; vol. iii, 1831.
Delphin vom Amazonas (Delphinus amazonas, sp. n.), pp. 1118-1120, 1133. Lamantin oder
Manati (Manatus americanus), pp. 1121, 1122. [774.]
1832. BRonN, H.G. Delphinus(Palaontologie). <Ersch und Gruber’s Allgem. Encyklop.
der Wissensch. und Kinste, Erste Sect., xxiii, 1832, pp. 420-422.
4 spp. [775.]
1832. CUVIER, F., et Dr. DUMEZILLE. Histoire naturelle | des | Mammiféres, | Par M.
F. Cuvier, | Membre de l’Institut (Académie royale des Sciences), ete. | et | Le

Docteur Dumezille. | —'| Tome premier [et second]. | — | Paris, | Rue et place
Saint-André-des- Arts, N°30. | — | 1832. 12°. Vol.i, pp. 1-108; vol. ii, 1.1, pp.
1-100.

Dixiéme ordre. Les Cétacés, vol. ii, pp. 48-56. [776.]

1832. DEWHURST, HENRY WILLIAM. Observations on the Zoology and Comparative
Anatomy of the Skeleton of the Balendéptera Rérqual, or Broad-nosed Whale,
now exhibiting at the Pavilion, King’s Mews, Charing Cross. <Loudon’s Mag.
Nat. Hist., v, 1832, pp. 214-233.

Generai History of the Whale Tribe, pp. 214-219; History of the Balendéptera Rérqual, pp.
219-233. This is the ‘‘Ostend Whale,” found floating dead Novy. 4, 1827, between the coasts
of England and Belgium, prepared under the direction of M. Kessels and exhibited at Ghent,
London, and elsewhere, and which was the subject, in part or wholly, of several earlier me-
moirs. [777.]

1832. “Marec, —. Dissertation sur la péche de la baleine, faisant suite 4 celle sur
la péche de la morue, pour servir 4 la discussion du projet de loi présenté, sur
Vune et autre péches 4 la chambre des Députés. Paris, Giraudet. 1832. 4°.”

Not seen; title from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 242, no. 3509. [778.]

1832, MEYER, HERMANN VON. Palaeologica | zur | Geschichte der Erde | und | ihrer
Geschépfe. | Von | Hermann von Meyer, |... [=titles, 4 lines]. | — | — |
Frankfurt am Main. | Verlag von Siegmund Schmerber. | 1882. 8°. pp. i-
xii, 1-560.

Cetaceen, pp. 98-100. Manatus (Lamantin) fossilis, Cuv., p. 98; Delphinus Cortesii, D.
macrogenius, D. , D. longirostris, p. 99; Monodon fossilis (?) Cuy., p. 99; Ziphius cavi-
rostris, Cuv., p. 99; Z. planirostris, Cuv., Z. longirostris, Cuy., p. 100; Balena Cuvieri, Des-
moul., B. Oortesti, Desmoul., p. 100. [779.]

1832. RAFINESQUE, C. 8. Remarks on the Monthly Journal of Geology and Natural
Science of G. W. Featherstonaugh, for May, 1832, (but only published in
July.) <Atlantic Journ., i, no. 3, autumn of 1832, pp. 110-114.

““As to the bone called Nephrosteon, I acknowledge that it may be the Epiphysis of a
Whale, as Dr. H[arlan}. did tell me in 1831, after my pamphlet was published. But it is,
perhaps anew Whale, since he could not find it in Cuyier’s (ossemens fossiles). Nephrosteon
is however a very good name, and may become specific” (p. 112). Cf. Harlan, Trans. Geol.
Soc. Penn., i, pt. i, 1834, p. 75. [780.]

1832. ROSENTHAL, FRIEDRICH CHRISTIAN. Uber die Barten des Schnabel-Walfisches
(Balaena rostrata). <Abhandl. der Kon. Akad. der Wissensch. zu Berlin, 1829
(1832), pp. 127-182, pl. i-v. [781.]

1832. Rupotput, [D. K. A.]. Uber Balaena longimana. <Abhandl. d. phys. Kl. d. ~
Kon. Akad. d. Wissensch. zu Berlin, 1829 (1832), pp. 133-144, pll. i-y.

Osteologische. Pl. i, Skelet; pll. ii, iii, Schidel; pl. iv, linker Beckenknochen in nat.
Grosse; pl. v, der Walfisch selbst. {782.]

1€32. ScHUBLER, [G.?]. [Ueber Fossilen aus der Molasse von Baltringen.] < Jahrb.
fiir Mineral., Geogn., Geol. und Petrefakt., iii, 1832, pp. 79, 80.

Bruchstiicke cines Unterkiefers einer Balaena, p. 79. d [783.]

1832.

1832.

1833.

1823.

1833.

1833.

1833.

133.

1833.

1833.

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 535

THACHER, J. History | of the | Town of Plymouth[, Mass.]; | from its first
settlement in 1620, to | the year 1832. | — | By James Thacher, M. D., A. A.S.,
&e. | — | ‘Ask thy fathers, and they will show thee; thy elders, and they
will tell thee.” | — | Boston: | Marsh, Capen & Lyon. | 1832. 6°. pp. i-xi,
12-382, map, and frontispiece.

Whales at Plymouth, p.20. Whale Fishery, pp. 343, 344. (784.]

THon, D. Delphinus Linné (Mammalia), Delphin. <Ersch und Gruber’s
Allgem. Encyklop. der Wissensch. und Kinste, Erste Sect., xxiii, pp. 413-420.
Twenty-cight species are given, divided among 6 subgenera, as follows: Delphinorhynchus
Lacép., 4 spp.; Delphinus Blainv., 10 spp.; Oxypterus Raf., 2 spp.; Phocena Cuv., 7 spp.;
Delphinapterus Lacép., 2 spp.; Hyperoodon, 2 spp. [785.|
Branpt, J. F. Uber den Zahnbau der Stellerschen Seekuh (Rytina Stelleri)
nebst Bemerkungen zur Charakteristik der in zwei Unterfamilien zu zerfil-
lenden Familie der pflanzenfressenden Cetaceen. <Mém. de Acad. imp. des
Sci. de St.-Pétersbourg, vie sér., ii, 1833, pp. 103-118, pl.
Halicoreae, Rytinec, tribb. nn. (786.]
[BRESCHET, GILBERT, et VAUSELLE. Observations anatomiques sur la téte
@une baleine.] < Nouv. Bull. des Sci., publié par la Soc. philom de Paris, Ann.
1833, 4¢ sér., ii, 1833, p. 82. (787. ]
D’OrpiGNy, A. Notice sur un nouyean genre de Cétacé, des riviéres du centre
de Amérique méridionale. < Nouv. Ann. du Mus. d Hist. nat., iii, 1834, pp.
28-36, pl. iii.
Inia boliviensis, gen. et sp.n.,p. 31. Pl. iii, fig.1, vu de profil; fig. 2, téte osseuse; fig. 3,
dents. [788.]
Durrtnoy, —. [Note sur la découverte récente faite par M. Harlan, dans
Amérique, de plusieurs nouvelles espéces de Sauriens fossiles,] <Bull. Soc.
géol. de France, iv, 1833-34, pp. 123, 124.
Basilosaurus (=Zeuglodon, Owen), p. 124. (789. ]
Epirors. Antediluvian Ambergris. <Edinb. New Philos. Journ., xv, 1833, p.
398.

Said to occur in the clay ironstone of the coal-formation near Bathgate, Burntisland. [790.]

“FIsscHER, J. F. VAN OVERMEER. Bijdrage tot de kennis van het Japansche
Rijk. Met platen. Amsterdam, J. Muller, 1833. 4°.”
“ Zie aldaar: De walvisch en andere visschen. bl. 217-18.”
Not seen; title from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 163, no. 2572. (791.
LECOMTE, JULES. Pratique | de la Péche | de la Baleine | dans | les Mers du
Sud. |—| Par Jules Lecomte. | Redacteur en chef du Navigateur. | [Vi-
gnette.] Paris. | Lecomte et Pougin, Editeurs, | Quai des Augustins, 49. |
Bachelier, Libraire éditeur, méme quai..| — | 1833. 8°. pp. i-xvi, 1-280.
Coup-d’ceil historique sur la péche de la Baleine, depuis les premiers essais jusqu’a nos
jours, pp. ix-xvi. De la Coque du Navire, pp.1-14. Observations sur le gréement, pp. 15-18.
Du matériel, pp. 19-28. Suite du matériel, pp. 29-35. Des vivres et secours médicaux, pp.
36-43. Du personnel, pp. 44-47. Travaux du mer, pp. 48-58. Suite des travaux de mer, pp.
59-66. Anatomie de la Baleine (de la franche), pp 67-85. Des autres espéces de Baleines,
pp. 86-102 (du Cachalot, pp. 86-94; de la Baleine & aileron=La Baleinoptére gibbar de Lacé-
péde, pp. 95-97; de la Baleine a bosse, p. 97; le Soufleur, p. 98; du Requin, du Dauphin gladia-
teur et de l’Espadon, pp. 99-102). Lieux de péche, pp. 103-125. Suite des Parages de péche,
126-136. Introduction A la péche, pp. 137-140. De la péche, pp.141-171. De la mantuvre
des piroques, pp. 172-179. De l’amarrage de la Baleine, pp. 180-196. Des autres travaux, pp.
197-219. Del’emploi ultérieur de l’huile de Baleine, pp. 220-223. Lois et ordonnances sur la
péche de la Baleine, pp. 224-278. [792.]
LESLIE, [JOHN], [ROBERT] JAMESON, and HuGH MurRRAyY. Harper’s Stereotype
Edition. | — | Narrative | of | Discovery and Adventure | in the | Polar Seas
and Regions: | with illustrations of their | Climate, Geology, and Natural
History: | and an account of | the Whale-Fishery. | — | By Professor [John]
Leslie, Professor [Robert] Jameson, | and Hugh Murray, Esq. F. R. S. E
| — | New-York: | Printed by J. & J. Harper, 82 Cliff St. |. . . [=six lines,

536. - BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1833. LESLIE, [JoHN], [ROBERT] JAMESON, and HuGH MurRAy—Continued.
names of booksellers]. | — | 1833. 12°. Prelim. title-page, with vignette
‘‘Perils, attending the Whale-Fishery,” pp. i—viii, 9-373, map, and cuts.=The
Family Library, no. xiv.
Chap. ii. Animal and Vegetable Life in the Polar Regions, pp. 53-82.—Cetacea, pp. 55-61,—
a popular compiled general account of ‘‘the Whale” (Balena mysticetus), Finner Whales,
the Cachalot and ‘‘ Narwal,” with a cnt (facing p. 57) entitled ‘‘ Whale with its Cub, Narwal,
te.,”’ the principal figures from Scoresby. :

Chap. ix. The Northern Whalefishery, pp. 297-351; cuts of harpoons, lance, ete., p. 315.
Based largely on Scoresby’s account of the Northern Whalefishery.

There are later reprints from the same stereotype plates, the title-page only modified: The
work appeared originally at Edinburgh (8°, Oliver and Boyd), as vol. i of the Hdinburgh
Cabinet Library (not seen by me), probably in 1832 or 1833, of which the Harper edition is a
literal reprint. A fifth Edinburgh edition appeared in 1845, and a German translation in 1834.
See BOSGOED, op. cit., p. 241, no. 3501. [793.]

1833. Lesson, [R. P.]. Allgemeine Bemerkungen tber einige Wale. < Isis von Oken,
1833, pp. 42, 43. :
Uebersetzung aus ‘‘ Voyage autour du monde exécuté par ordre du Roi sur la Corvette La
Coquille pendant les années 1822-1825, Zoologie par Lesson, cap. 4, p.177.’’ [794.]
1833. MrEYEN, F.J.F. Beitrige zur Zoologie, gesammelt auf einer Reise um die
Erde. Zweite Abhandlung. Siugethiere. < Nova Acta Phys.-med. Aad.
Ces. Leop.- Carol. Nat. Curios., xvi, p. 1i, 1833, pp. 549-610, pll. xl—xlvi.
Delphinus coeruleo-albus, sp. n., pp. 609, 610, pl. xliii, fig.2. Gegend des Rio de la Plata,

[195.]

1833, PARKINSON, JAMES.. Organic Remains of a Former World. | — | An Examina-
tion of the | Mineralized Remains of the Vegetables and Animals | of the |
Antediluvian World; | generally termed extraneous fossiles. | — | By James

Parkinson. | In three Volumes. | [Vignette.] Encrinus. Stone Lilly. | The
third Volume; | containing | the fossil Starfish, Echini, Shells, Insects, Am-
phibia, Mammalia, &c. | Second Edition. | — | London: | M. A. Natali, 24,
Tavistock-Street, Covent-Garden. | — | M. DCCC. XXXIII. | T. Combe,
Junior, Gallowtree-gate, Leicester. 4°. Frontispiece, 1.1, pp. ix—xii, ll. 2, pp.
1-467, ll. 2-1. 8, pl. i-xxii. |
A few remarks about Cetaceans and Sirenians occur at pp. 321, 322,and a tooth presumid
to be Cetacean is figured in pl. xx, fig. 1. [796]
1833. ROUSSEL DE VAUZEME. [Présentation d’un modéle en platre d’un fetus de
Baleine extraite en sa présence du sein de sa mére, aux environs de Vile
Tristan @Acunha.] <JL’Jnstitut, 1*° ann., no. 13, 10 aotit 1833, p. 106.
Avec remarques historiques. [797.]
1833. SAINT-HILAIRE, BouRJOT. Considérations sur le nerf facial, dans ses rapports
avec les évents, et sur son influence dans V’acte de la respiration chez le mar-
souin. <L’Jnstitut, 17 ann., no. 32, 21 déc. 1833, p. 266.
Résumé. . [798.]
1833. SAMPSON, WILLIAM. Notice of a Cetaceous Animal supposed to be new to the
American coast. <Am. Jour. Sci. and Arts, xxv, 1833, pp. 301-303, fig.
“‘ Phoceena globiceps” — Globiocephalus melas. Short description and figure of the animal,
with synonymy and general remarks. [799.]
1833. SERRES, MARCEL DE. Mémoire str la question de savoir si des animaux terres-
tres ont cessé d’exister depuis l’apparition de Vhomme, et si Vhomme a été
contemporain des espéces perdues, ou du moins qui ne paraissent plus avoir
de représentans sur la terre. < Bibl. univ. des Sci. et Arts, lili, 1853, pp. 277-314.
II. Des étres réels et actuellement existans, répresentés ou sculptés sur les monumens
antiques, et’ dont on peut reconnaitre les espéces, pp. 295-314.—Mammiféres marins ou Cé-
tacés, p. 303 (Lrichechus manatus. Le lamantin d’Afrique. Delphinus delphis, Balena
mysticetus) . : [800.]
1833. ‘‘StewaLp, H. von. De cranii formatione in Delphino Phocaena. Cum 2 tab.
Dorpati, 1833. 8°.”
Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann. [801.]

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 537

1833-34. T.-C. [=Tutioporr Coctrau.] Baleine. < Dict. pittoresque d Hist. nat. et
des Phénom. de la Nature, i, livrr. xlvi, xlvii [18347], pp. 365-373.

[Observationes générales], pp. 365-368, 370-373. [Espéces]: 1. Balena mysticetus, p. 368,
pl. xxxix, fig.1; 2. B. Physalus, p. 368; 3. B. Boops, 4. B. Musculus, 5. B. rostrata, 6.
B. nodosa, p. 369. [ 802. ]

1833-34. P. G. [=PauL GENTIL.] Cachalot, Physeter. <Dict. pitloresque @ Hist. nat.
et des Phénom. de la Nature, i, livr. 1xx [1884?], pp. 557-559.

[Observations générales], pp. 557-559. [Espéces]: q. Le Grand Cachalot, Physeter macro-
cephalus, p. 559, pl. lxiii, fig.1; 2. Cachalot trumpo, Catodon macrocephalus, p. 559; 3. Cacha-
lot australasien, p.559; 4. Physeter microps, p.559; 5. Physeter tursio ou mular, p. 559; Ge
Cachalot sillonné, p. 559. (893.

1834. Anon. Animal and Vegetable Physiology considered with reference to Natural
Theology. By Peter Mark Roget, M.D. <Zdinb. Rev., 1x, 1835, pp. 142-179.

A review of the work, giving, at p. 171, an extract from it describing the “Filter of the
Whaie,” or the ‘‘curious contrivance” of the Whale-bone Whales by which they are ena-
bled to capture their food. ; [804. ] :

1834. [BENNETT, E. T. On the structure and use of the Monotrematic glands, and
particularly on those glands in the Cetacea.] <Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1834,
pp. 26, 27.
A brief résumé of the views of Geoffroy Saint-Hilaire on this subject. [805.]
1834. BRESCHET, G., ef ROUSSEL DE VAUZEME. Recherches anatomiques et physiolo-
giques sur les appareils tégumentaires des animaux, < dun. des Sct. nat., 2°
sér., Zool., ii, 1834, pp. 167-238, 321-370, 2 pli.

Cétacés passim. [806.]

1834. Broneiart, ALEX., ef F. CUVIER. Rapport fait 4 Académie des sciences sur un
Mémoire de M. Christol ayant pour objet de ramener au genre Dugong les
débris fossiles que M. G. Cuvier avait rapprochés des Hippopotames. <dAnn.
des Sci. nat., 2° sér., i, Zool., 1834, pp. 282-290.

Sur /’Hippopotame moyen de G. Cuvier. See 1834. CHRISTOL, J. DE. [807.]
1834. CHauvin, —. [Sur les mamelles de Cétacé.] <JL’ Institut, 2° ann., no. 48, 12
avril 1834, p. 118. [808.]

1834. [CHRISTOL, J. DE.]. Extrait d’un Mémoire intitulé: Comparaison de la popula-
; tion contemporaine des mammiféres de deux bassins tertiaires du département
de V’Hérault, presenté & VAcadémie des Sciences de Paris, le 24 février
1834, par M. J. de Christol. <L’Jnstitut, 2° ann., no. 42, 1 mars 1834, pp.
75, 76. [809. }

1834. CHRISTOL, JULES DE. Mémoire sur le Moyen Hippopotame fossile de Cuvier,
replacé au genre des Dugongs. <Ann. des Sci. nat., 2° sér., ii, Zool., 1834,
pp. 257-277, pl. xiii.

Halicore Cuvierii, gen. et sp. n., p. 274= Hippopotamus medius, Cuvier. Pl. xxiii, ma-
choire inférieure ef} molaires de Moyen Hippopotame fossile de Nantes (Hippopotumus me-
dius, Cuv., Halicore Cuvierii, Christol); machoire inférieure et molaires de Dugong fossile de
Montpellier (Halicore Cuvierii, Christol); téte et machoire inférieure de Dugong vivant, et

d’Hippopotame, etc. {810.]
1834. Dewnurst, H. W. The | Natural History | of the | Order Cetacea, | and the |
oceanic inhabitants | of the | Arctic Regions. | — | By William Henry Dew-
hurst, Esq., |... [= titles, etc., 10 lines]. | — |... [=mottoes, 7 lines].

| — | Illustrated with numerous lithographic | and wood engravings. | — |
London: | Published by the Author, | 16, William Street, | Waterloo Bridge
Road. | — | MDCCCXXXIV. 8°. ll. 2, pp. i-xx, 1-331.

Natural History of the order Cetacea, pp. 1-204. Order I. Edentatx, or Toothless Cetacea.
General history and character of Whales, pp. 10-15. 1. Balena mysticetus,* pp. 15-85. 2.
Balena islandica vel nordcaper, pp. 86-91. 3. Balenoptera gibbar, pp. 92-97. 4. Balenop-
tera acuto-rostrata, pp. 97-101. 5. Balenoptera jubartes, pp. 101-107. 6. Balanoptera rorqual,
pp. 107-129.

* The specific names are in all cases capitalized, both in the text and on the plates.

538

BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1834. DEwHuURsST, H. W.—Continued.

Order Il. Predentate Cetacea, or those with teeth only in the anterior part of the upper
jaw, pp. 130, 131. @. Monodon monoceros, pp.131-142. 8. Monodon microcephalus, pp. 142-
144. 9. Arnanacus groénlandicus, pp. 145, 146.

Order III. Subdentate Cetacea, or those having teeth only in the lower jaw, p. 147.
10. Physeter macrocephalus, pp. 148-157. U1. Physeter cetadon [sic], p.158. 12. Physeter
trumpo, pp. 159-160. 13. Physeter cylindricus, p. 161. 14. Physeter microps, pp. 162-164.
15. Physeter mular,p.164 16. Physeter bidens sowerbyi, pp. 165-167. 1%. Physeter gib-
bosa, p. 168.

Order IV. Ambidentate Cetacea, or those having teeth in both jaws, p. 169. 48. Del-
phinus phoceana {sic] communis, pp. 170-174. 19. Delphinus didelphis [sic], pp. 174-178. 20.
Delphinus orca communis, pp. 178-181. 21. Delphinus gladiator, pp.181,182. 22. Delphinus
bideniatus, p.182. 23. Delphinus feres,p.183. 24. Delphinus tursio, p.184. 25. Hyperoo-
don butskopf, vel Delphinus deductor, pp. 185-190. 26. Delphinapterus beluga, pp. 190-193.

Conluding observations on the Cetacea, pp. 194-204.

The book closes with a fitting and diagnostic ‘*Appendix”’ devoted to ‘‘ Testimonials, Cer-
tificates, Letters, etc., etc.,” which, as the saying is, ‘‘should be seen to be appreciated.”

Besides numerous wood-cuts, there are plates of the following species, none of them origi-
nal, and most of them are even poor copies—almost too poor to render the originals from
which they were taken recognizable in them: Balena muysticetus, Balena islandica, Bale-
noptera gibbar, pl. to face p. 15. Balenoptera acuto-rostratus, pl. to face p. 97. Balenoptera
jubartes and Balenoptera rorqual, pl. to face p. 107. Skeleton of Baleenoptera rorqual, pl. to
face p. 115. Monodon monoceros (two figures), pl. to face p. 131: Physeter macrocephalus
and Physeter microps, pl. to face p. 148. Physeter cylindricus, pl. to face p. 161. Physeter
bidens sowerbyi, pl. to face p. 165. Physeter gibbosa, pl. to face p. 169. Delphinus didelphis
{stc] and Delphinus phoceana [sic], pl. to face p.170. Skull and Skeleton of Porpoise (too
wretched for criticism), pl. to face p. 174. Delphinus orca communis, pl. to face p. 178. Del-
phinus gladiator and Delphinus tursio, pl. to face p. 184. Delphinus deductor and Delphinus
bidens, pl. to face p. 185. Delphinapterus beluga, pl. to face p. 190.

From the standpoint of systematic zoology, the present work merits little consideration ;
it contains, however, a modicum of information based on the author’s own observations,
which in some degree redeems it from being merely an indiscriminate compilation, which is,
however, its general character. [811 ]

1834. DUMERIL, [AUGUSTE]. Extrait d’un rapport fait & Académie des Sciences par

M. Duméril sur un mémoire ayant pour titre: Considérations sur le nerf
fascial et sur son influence dans Vacte de la respiration chez le Marsouin; par
Bourjot Saint-Hilaire. <Ann. des Sci. nat., 2° sér., ii, Zool., 1834, pp. 255-
207. [812.]

1834. Dumirin, [A. M. C.].- Rapport fait 4 VAcadémie des Sciences par M. Duméril,

sur un Mémoire intitulé: Description d’un organe vasculaire découvert dans
les cétacés, suivie de quelques considérations sur la respiration chez ces ani-
maux et chez les Amphibies, par M. G. Breschet. <Ann. des Sci. nat., 2° sér.,
li, Zool., 1834, pp. 376-380.

Voici les conclusions du mémoire de M. Breschet par les rédacteurs, loc. cif.,p.379. [813.]

1834. [DumErRIL, A. M. C.]. Rapport verbal sur une lettre de M. le Piez, D. M. 4

Sainte-Germain-en-Laye, relative 4 ’anatomie du marsouin; lu 4 la séance de
VAcadémie royale des sciences du lundi § février 1835. <Ann. des Sci. nat.,
2¢ sér., ii, Zool., 1834, pp. 380-382. (814.]

1834. DumirRiL, [A.M.C.], F. Cuvizr et [J.B.] Dumas. [Rapport sur les organes

génitaux externes du Delphinus globiceps, d’aprés les piéces adressées par M.
Le Maott.] <L’ Institut, 2° ann., no. 48, 12 avril 1834, p. 117. [815.]

1834. Epwarps, H. Mitne. Elémens | de Zoologie, | ou | Legons | sur ’anatomie, la

physiologie, | la classification | et les mcurs des Animaux, | par | H. Milne
Edwards, | Docteur en Médecine, | Professeur d’Histoire naturelle au Collége
royal de Henri IV | et 4 l’Kcole centrale des Arts et Manufactures. | — |
Paris. | Chez Crochard, Libraire, | Place de ’Ecole de Médecine, N. 13. | — |
1834. 8°. pp.i-viii, 1-1066,1.1. Numerous cuts in the text.

Ordre des Cétacés, pp. 468-486. Famiile des Cétacés herbivores, pp. 471,472. Famille des
Cétacés ordinaires ou Souffieurs, pp. 471-486. Divisée en 1. Tribu des Delphiniens; 2. Tribu
des Cétacés 4 grosse téte.

A brief review of the genera and species, mostly under French names. [816.]

18314.

1834.

1834,

1834

1834.

1834.

1834.

1834.

1834.
1834.

1834.

1834.

1834.

1834,

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 539

FELT, J. B. History | of | Ipswich, Essex, and Hamilton. |— | By Joseph B.
Felt. |— | Magno usui est memoria rerum gestarum. | Sallust. | — | Cam-
bridge: | Printed by Charles Folsom. | 1834. 8°. pp. i-xvi, 1-304.

Whaletishery engaged in at Ipswich, 1707, on a small scale, p. 109. [817.]

“ GEOFFROY-SAINT-HILAIRE, ETIENNE. Philosophie anatomique: fragmens sur
la structure et les usages des glands mammaires des Cétacées.. Avec 2 pl. in
8°. 88pp. Paris, 1834, Deville-Cavellin.”

Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann. (818.]

Haran, RicHarp. Notice of Fossil Bones found in the Tertiary Formation of
the State of Louisiana. < Trans. Am. Phil. Soc., 2d ser., iv, 1834, pp. 597-403,
pl. xx, figg. 1, 2.

First account of the Cetacean (then supposed to be Saurian) genus Basilosaurus. Basilo-
saurus gen. u., p. 403. Pl. xx, vertebra, fragment of jaw, etc. . [819.]

HARLAN, RICHARD. Critical notices of various organic remains hitherto dis-
covered in North America. < Trans. Geol. Soc. Pennsylvania, i, pt.i, Aug., 1834,
pp. 46-112.

“Order Cetacea,” pp. 73-75. Genus Manatus, p. 73. ‘‘Cetacca proper,” pp.74,75. Re-
mains of Spermaceti Whale from an estuary at mouth of Mississippi River= Megistosaurus,
Godman, Ms. Neophrosteon, Raftinesque, affirmed to have been founded on an epiphysis of a
Whale vertebra, p. 75. [820.}

Haran, R. Critical Notices of various Organic Remains hitherto discovered
in North America. <Zdinb. New Philos. Journ., xvii, 1834, pp. 342-362, xviii,

pp. 28-40.
Order Cetacea, xvii, pp. 361, 362. Genus Basilosaurus, xviii, pp. 29-31.
From advance sheets of the Trans. Geol. Soc. Penn., i, pt. 1, 1834, q. v. (821. ]

Knox, Ropert. Observations on the Anatomy of the Rorqual (a Whalebone
Whale of the largest magnitude), drawn up from the dissection of a specimen
found dead off North Berwick. <Hdinb. New Philos. Journ., xvi, 1834, pp.
181, 182.

Abstract of a paper having this title read before the Royal Society of Edinburgh, March
18, 1833. [822.]

Le Maovt, [E.] [Détails relatifs aux vingt-neuf Dauphins (Delphinus globi-
ceps) échoués sur les cétes de Bretagne.] <L’Institut, 2° ann., no. 43, 8 mars
1844, pp.77, 78.

Voyez aussi op. cit., pp. 95, 102. 117. [823.]

Lr Maotrt,[E.] [Surles Dauphins (D. globiceps) échoués sur les sillons de Tal-
bert.] <JL’Institut, 2° ann., no, 46, 29 mars 1844, p. 102.

Sur la vérification des observations. [824.]

MiItnre-EDWwarps, H. See 1834. EDwarps, H. MILNE.

““TYORBIGNY, A. Notice sur un nouveau genre de Cétacé, des riviéres du centre
de VAmérique Méridionale. Avec une planche. Paris, 1834. Jules Didot
Painé. 4°. pp. 9.”

Not seen; title at second hana. [825.]

D’ORBIGNY, A. Nouveau genre de Cétacé. <L’ Institut, 2 ann., no. 62, 19 juillet
1834, p. 240.

Inia Boliviensis, D’Orb. [826.]

REDACTEURS. (Observations sur ’anatomie du Rorqual par M. Robert Knox. ]
<P Institut, 2° ann., no. 61, 12 juillet 1834, p. 224.

Résumé. (827.}

ReEvDAcTEURS. [Rapport sur le dissection d’un jeune Rorqual (Balena rostrata),
accompagné de quelques observations sur l’anatomie d’un fetus de Mysticetus,
par le Dr. Knox.] <L’Jnstitut, 2° ann., no, 74, 11 octr. 1834, p. 336.

Résumé. (828.]

ROUSSEL DE VAUZEME. Note sur les Polypes qu’on trouve sur les fanons des
Baleines. <Ann. des Sci. nat., 2 sér., Zool., i, 1834, 331-333, pl. ix. [829.]

540

1834,

1834.

1834.

1834.

1834,

1834.

1834.

1834.

1834,

1834.

1834.

1834.

1835.

1835.

1835.

BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

R[O]USSEL DE VAUZEME. Ueber die an den Barten der Walfische vorkommen-
den Polypen. <Hroriep’s Notizen, xliii, no. 925, Dec. 1834, pp. 5-7, fige.
3 A-7 A. [830.]
ROUSSEL DE VAUZEME. Anatomie (un fetus de Baleine. <L’Instilut, 2° ann.,
no. 69, 6 sept. 1834, pp. 289, 290. [831.]

ROUSSEL DE VAUZEME. Recherches anatomiques sur un fetus de Balaine.
<Ann. des Sci. nat., 2° sér., 11, Zool., 1834, pp. 125-127.
Extrait du Journ. de UV Institut. [832.]
SAINT-EITLAIRE, GEOFFROY. Lecture des anciens en ce qui touche la naissance
et la premiére éducation des Cétacés. <L’Institut, 2° ann., no. 40, 15 févr.
1834, p. 54.
Résumé. (833. ]
SAInT-HILAIRE, GEOFFROY. Anatomie des glandes mammaires d’un marsouin,
observée sur un sujet venu de Honfleur. <L’Institut, 2° ann., no. 45, 22
mars 1844, pp. 95, 96.
Avyee discussion au sujet par MM. de Blainville, M. de Serres et G. St.-Hilaire. (834. ]
SAINT-HILAIRE, GEOFFROY. ‘Traité physiologique ou l’on considére Vemploi
des diverses parties des glandes mammaires des Cétacés. <L’Institwt, 2° ann.,
no. 46, 29 mars 1844, pp. 102, 103. [835.]
SAINT-HILAIRE, GEOFFROY. Mémoire sur les glandes mammellaires pour établir
que les Cétacés n’allaitent point comme a V’ordinaire leurs petits, et qu’ils
pourraient s’en tenir 4 les nourrir de mucus hydraté! < Ann. des Sci. nat., 2°

sér., i, Zool., 1834, pp. 174-188. [836.]
SAINT-HILAIRE, GEOFFROY. Extrait de deux écrits sur la lactation des Cétacés.
<Ann. des Sci. nat., 2° sér., Zool., 1834, pp. 188-192. [837.]

SERRES, [M. DE], e¢ BoURJOT SAINT-HILAIRE. Considérations sur le nerf facial et
sur son influence dans l’acte de la respiration chez le Marsouin. <P Institut,
2¢ ann., no. 76, 25 oct. 1834, pp. 347, 348. [838.]

ety CHARLES U. Geological observations upon Alabama, Georgia and
Florida. < Amer. Journ. Sci. and Arts, xxv, 1834, pp. 162-173.

Mention of fragments of teeth and bones of Manatus americanus from Suannee Spring in

Florida, p. 164. [839.]
TRAILL, [T.S.]. On some of the Cetacea. <Hdinb. New Phil. Journ., xvii, 1834,
pp. 177-180.

On the questions, ‘‘1. Have the Cetacea mammce? 2. If they have, do they secrete milk?
3. Have they a nipple? And, 4. Do the young derive their nourishment from the teats?”’ in
reference to the positions taken by von Baér and Geoffroy St.-Hilaire. Dr. Traill answers
these questions affirmatively, adducing proofs. He also gives measurements of his ‘‘ Delpht-
nus Deductor” from the manuscript notes of Mr. James Watson, correets a misprint in the
measurements given by him in his original description of the species, and affirms that the
Delphinus globiceps of ‘‘the French savans”’ is only his ‘‘D. Deductor.”” There ‘is also a cor-
rection of the measurements of ee Rostrata given by peor (Arct. Reg. ) from Watson’s
notes. [840.]

[WituiaMs, J. R.] The Whale Fishery. < North Amer. Rev., xxxviii, 1834,
pp. 84-115.
Deyoted mainly (pp. 94-115) to a general history of the American Whale Fishery. [841.]
Barr, K. E.v. Uber das Gefiiss-system des Braunfisches. < Nova Acta Phys.-
med. Acad. Ces. Leop.-Carol. Nat. Curios., XVii, p- i, 1835, pp. 394-408, pl. xxix.
[842.]
“BEALE, THOMAS. A few Observations on the Natural History of the Sperm
Whale, with an account of the rise and progress of the Fishery and of the
modes of pursuing, killing and cutting that animal. London, 1835. 8°.”
Not seen. [843.]
CHRISTOL, JULES DE. Comparaison de la population contemporaine des Mam-
miféres de deux bassins tertiaires du département de V’Hérault. < Ann. des
Sci. nat., 2° sér., iv, Zool., 1835, pp. 193-238.
Mammiféres marins, pp. 216-220. Lamantin, p. 216. [844.]

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 5A

1835. Dummrin, [A. M. C.]. [Surune lettre par M. Lepiez dans laquelle il donnait les
détails anatomiques d’une Marsouin femelle.] <L’ Institut, 3° ann., no. 92,
11 févr. 1835, pp. 46, 47. [845.]

1835. DuverNoy, [G. L.]. Tableaux des ordres, des familles et des genres de Mam-
miferes, adoptés pour le cours de zoologie de la Faculté des Sciences. <Mém.
de la Soc. du Mus. d@ Hist. nat. de Strasbourg, ii, 1835, Mém. K K, 10 pp., avee 5

feuilles grosses.
(Manatuse ....... . M. americanus.

Ordre xiv. Amphibies trirémes. ; Bas ees Bd EID COTE satel al) subse te eel UGIUN Gg
amantns * 5 z
(Rytina. ...... . - [R.] borealis.
(lreFamille. Les (Delphinus ....... . ~ D. delphis.
Dauphines, Delphinorhynque ... . . + D. micropterus.
I eel BRL hid! RBS eo Soke BULGE
JUPHOCcena@ he tens) wis) 9) -- COMMMUNIS:
ake Hyperoodon ... ... . . H. Butzkopf.
USGS ER Sees Te gus olike Nokia Wen velo aoteeen
2e Famille. (Platanista. . . .... . . P. gangeticus.
Les Cachalots . . Physeter. . . . +.» + + » « P. macrocephalus.
3° Famille ; Balena ...... «+ « - B. mysticetus.
| Les Baleines THOM BB Ooo 6 eo etetsni pre

1835. DuvERNOY, G. L. Plusieurs notes sur quelques ossemens fossiles de Alsace et
du Jura. <Mém. de la Soc. du Mus. d@ Hist. nat. de Strasbourg, ii, 1835, Mém.
E E, pp. 12, avec 1 pl.
I. Sur un Cétacé fossile, voisin des Dugongs et des Lamantins, trouvé 2 Redersdorf, dans
le Département du Haut-Rhin, pp. 1-9, figg. 1, 2. [847.]
1835. DuverNoy, [G. L.]. [Sur le squelette d’un Cétacé fossile découvert dans une
carriére de Reedersdorf, village du département du Haut-Rhin.] <L’Institut,
3° ann., no. 126, 7 oct. 1835, pp. 326, 327.
Its affinities, not fully determined by the author, appear to be Sirenian. [848.]
1835. Epirors. Descriptive Catalogue of the Preparations in the Anatomical De-
partment of the Museum of the Royal College of Surgeons in Ireland.
< Edinb. New Philos. Journ., xviii, 1835, pp. 369-372.
Extra¢ts from Dr. Houston's ‘‘ Descriptive Catalogue of the Preparations in the Anatomi-
cal Department of the Royal College of Surgeons of Ireland,” ‘here taken from the Dublin
Journ. of Med. and Chem. Science, vi, no. xviii, p. 435, respecting the respiration of diving
animals, as exemplified in the Cetacea, Seals, the Otter, etc. |849.]

1835. Gerv. [=PavuL Gervais.] Dugong, Halicore. <Dict. pittor. @ Hist. nat. et des
Phénom. de la Nature, ii, 1836, livr. elv, pp. 595-596.
Halicore indicus. [850.]

1835. Gerv. [=PavuL GeRvaIs.] Dauphin, Delphinus. <Dict. pittor. d’ Hist. nat. et des
Phénom. de la Nature, ii, 1835, livrr. Ix, Ixi, pp. 477-483.

[Observations générales], pp. 477-479. [Espéces]: 1. Delphinus (Delphinorhynchus) Geof-
Froyi, p. 479; 2. D. (D.) coronatus, p. 479; 3. D. (D.) gangeticus, p. 479; 4. D. (D.) pernet-
tensis, p. 479; 5. Delphinus Boryi, p. 479; 6. D. delphis, p. 480, pl. exxxv, fig. 9; 7+ D. sinen-
sis, p. 480; S. D. dubius, p. 480; 9. D. tursio, p. 480; 10. D. Bayeri, p. 480; 11. D. orca,
p. 480; 12. D. (Oxypterus) mongitori, p. 481; 13. D. (O.) rhinoceros, p. 481; 14. D. (Plata-
mista) rostratus Shaw (D. gangeticus, Lebeck), p. 481; 15. D. (Inia) bolivensis, p. 481; 16.
D. (Phocena) phocena, p. 481; 17. D. (Ph.) grampus, p. 482; 18. D. (Ph.) rissoanus, p.
482; 19. D. (Delphinapterus) leucas, p. 482, (voy. aussi, tome i, p. 425); 20. D. (D.) sene-
detta, p. 482; 21. D. (D.) Peronii, p. 482; 22. D. (Heterodon) ananarcus, p. 482; 23. D.
(H.) Hunteri, p. 482; 24. D. (H.) edentulus, p. 482; 25. D. (H.) butskopf, p. 483; 26. D.
(H.) sowerbensis, p. 483. (851.]

1835. HARLAN, R[1cHARD]. Medical | and | Physical Researches: | or | original me-
moirs | in | medicine, surgery, physiology, geology, zoology, and | compara-

tive anatomy. | Illustrated with plates, containing 160 figures. | — | By R.
Harlan, M. D., F. L. 8. Lond., |... [=titles, 12lines.] | — |... [= quotation,
6 lines.] | —| Philadelphia: | Printed by Lydia R. Bailey, | No. 26 North

BY Fifth Street. | 1835. 8°. pp. i-xxxix, 9-653, 1. 1, pll. (unnumbered).
1. Description of a new Species of Manatus, or Sea Cow [Manatus latirostris}, inhabiting
the coast of East Florida, pp. 68-71, pl. —, fig. 1, skull in profile; fig. 2, lower jaw; fig. 3, an-

542 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1835. HARLAN, R[ICHARD ]—Continued.
terior portion of skull from above; fig. 4, do. of Manatus senegalensis ; fig. 5, do. of M.
americanus, auct.

2. Description of the Delphinus intermedius—a new Species of Grampus, inhabiting the
Coast of New England, pp. 72, 78, fig. of animal.

3. Observations on a large Skeleton recently disinterred from the mouth of the Missis-
sippi River, pp.76,77. Identified as Physeter macrocephalus.

4. Revised Catalogue of the Mammiferous Animals of North America, pp. 78-83. Order
Cetacea: First family, Sirenia, or Herbivorous Whales, spp. 2 (Manatus latirostris, Stellurus
borealis); second family, Whales proper, genn. 4, spp. 14.

5. Critical Notices of various Organic Remains hitherto discovered in North America,
pp. 253-313. Order Cetacea, pp. 278-280 (fossil remains of Manatee and Spermaceti Whale).
Genus Basilosaurus, Harlan, pp. 282-283.

6. Observations on the Fossil Bones [of Basilosaurus] found in the Tertiary Formation i in
the State of Louisiana. Originally communicated to the American Philosophical Society,
pp. 337-343. [852.]

1835. HARLAN, RicHaRD. [Announcement of the digcavert of Basilosaurus.] < Bull.
Soc. géol. de France, iv (1833, 1834), 1835, p. 124.

Ten lines,—abstract of a verbal communication. [853.]

1835. HARLAN, RICHARD. Description of the remains of the Basilosaurus, a large
fossil marine animal, recently discovered in the horizontal limestone of Ala-
bama. <Trans. Geol. Soc. Penn., i, 1835, pp. 348-357, pll. xxii-xxiv.

Cetacea ‘‘proper,” pp. 74,75. ‘‘The ‘New Fossil Genus’ of Rafinesque, named ‘ Nephro-
steon,’ (Vid. Atlantic Journal), and the bone on which the genus is constructed . . . has
no other foundation than one of these epiphyses from the remains of a recent spermaceti
whale,” p. 75. Basilosaurus, pp. 77-80, pll. xxii-xxiv. Plesiosaurus (—Priscodelphinus,
Leidy), p. 77. [854.]

1835. HERAUSGEBER. Knox, besonderer Bau im 2ten Magen gewisser Wale... .
<Isis von Oken, 1835, pp. 302, 303.
Auszug aus dem Edinburgh Journ. Sci., iii, 1830, pp. 325-388. [855. ]
1835. HERAUSGEBER. Alderson, iber einen minnlichen Walrath-Wal, der Ende
April 1825 an die Kiiste von Yorkshire geworfen wurde. < Isis von Oken,
1835, pp. 1006-1008.
Auszug aus Trans. Cambridge Phil. Soc., i, 1822, pp. 253-266, pll. xii-xiv. [856. ]
1835. HERAUSGEBER. Harlan: iiber einige neue Arten fossiler Saurier (Bull géol.,
1833, iv, 124). <Neues Jahrb. fiir Mineral., 1835, p. 737.
Basilosaurus. ‘ [857.]
1835. HERAUSGEBER. Knox, tber die Knochen und das Zahen des Dugongs.
<Isis von Oken, 1835, p. 290.
Auszug aus dem Edinburgh Journ. Sci., i, 1829, pp. 157, 158. [858.]
1835. HERAUSGEBER. Einige Beobachtungen tber die Naturgeschichte des Pott-
fisches, ec. Vom Chirurgen T. Beale. <(Froriep’s Notizen, xliv, No. 961, Mai
1835, pp. 230-232.
Uebersetzung aus ‘' The Literary Gazette.” [859.]
1835. Kaup, J. J. Das | Thierreich | in seinen Hauptformen | systematisch beschrie-
ben | von | Dr. J. J. Kaup, | Mitglied der K. K. Leopoldinischen Akademie in
Bonn, der naturforschenden Gesellschaften in Moskau, Ztrich, Mannheim ete.
| — | [Mit in den Text eingedruckten | Abbildungen | von | L. Becker und
Ch. Schiler, | unter Mitwirkung | von | Wilhelm Pfnor. | — | Drei Bande.]
Erster Band. | Naturgeschichte der Menschen und der Siiugethiere. | Mit 180
in den Text eingedruckten Abbildungen. | — | Darmstadt, 1835. | Verlag von
Johann Philipp Diehl. 8°. ll. 2, pp. i-xxxy, 1-452, 1. 1.

Vierter Stamm. Dritte Ordnung. Delphine. Cetacea (incl.), pp. 372-376. 1. Monodon
Monoceros, p. 373, fig.; 2. Delphinapterus leucas, p. 375; 3. Phecaena vulgaris, p. 375; 4. Ph.
Orca, p. 375; 5. Delphinus Delphis, p. 576.

Fiinfter Stamm. Zweite Ordnung. Pflanzenfressende Walthiere. Cetacea herbivora,
Sirenia, pp. 426430. 1. Halicore Dugong, p. 428, fig.; 2. Manatus americanus, p. 429; Be
Rytina Stelleri, p. 430.

Fiinfter Stamm. Dritte Ordnung. Wale. Hydraula, pp. 431-445. 1. Physeter mactoce-
phalus, p. 433, fig.; 2. Balaena Mysticetus, pp. 434-445, fig.; 3. B. Physalua, p. 445.

Phocena vulgaris, nom. sp. 2., p. 373. [860.1

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 543

1835. KNox, [R.]. Account of the Dissection of a Young Rorqual, or Short Whale-
bone Whale, (the Balena Rostrata of Fabricius); with a few Observations
on the Anatomy of the Fetal Mysticetus. <Hdinb. New Philos. Journ., xviii,
1835, pp. 197-199.
Abstract of a paper read at the meeting of the Royal Soc. Edinb., April 21, 1834. [861.]
1835. KNox, RoperT. Section eines jungen Nordkapers (Balaena rostrata, Fabr.),
nebst anatomischen Beobachtungen ricksichtlich eines Fétus der B. Mysticetus.
<Froriep’s Notizen, xliii, No. 935, Feb. 1835, pp. 164-165.
Aus L’ Institut, no. 74, 11. Oct. 1834. [862.]
1835. Kistrr, H.C. Beytrige zur Naturgeschichte der Insel Sardinien. <Jsis von
Oken, 1835, pp. 75-85.

Cetacea, p. 85 (Delphinus phocaena). [863.]

1835. Kiistpr, H.C. Beobachtungen tiber das Wasserausspritzen der Cetaceen. <JIsis
von Oken, 1835, pp. 85-87. [864.]

1835. Lenz, H. O. Gemeinnitzige | Naturgeschichte, | von | Dr. Harald Othmar
Lenz, | Lehrer an der Erziehungsanstalt zu Schnepfenthal. | — | Erster Band:
Saugethiere. | Mit Acht Tafeln Abbildungen. | — | Gotha, | Beckersche Buch-

handlung. | 1835. 8°. pp. i-vi, 1-450, pll. i-vili.

Neunte Ordnung der Saugethiere. Fischsiugethiere, Octacea, pp. 426-440, pl. vii, figg. 59-62.

Erste Familie . . . Herbivora (—Sirenia): 1. Manatus australis, p. 427; 2. M. senega-
lensis, p. 427; 3. Halicore cetacea, p. 428; 4. Rhytina Stelleri, p. 428.

Zweite Familie . . . Hydraula (=Cetacea): 1. Delphinus Delphis, p. 428, fig. 59; 2.
D. Tursio, p. 429; 3. D. Phocena, p. 429; 4. D. Orea, p. 429; 5. Monodon monoceros, p. 430,
fig. 60; 6. Physeter macrocephalus, p. 432, fig. 61; ‘7% Balena Mysticetus, p. 433, fig. 62; 8.
B. Physalus, p. 440; 9. B. rostrata, p. 440. (865. ]

1835. LEPIEZ. Sce suprd, 1835. DuM#REL, in L’ Institut, 1835, no. 92, pp. 46, 47.

1835. Macy, O. The | History of Nantucket; | being a compendious Account of the
first | Settlement of the Island by the English, | together with the | Rise and
Progress | of the | Whale Fishery; | and other historical facts relative to
said | Island and its Inhabitants. | In Two Parts. | — | By Obed Macy. | — |
. . . [=quotation, 3lines.] | Boston: | Hilliard, Gray, and Co. | — | 1835. 89°.
pp. i-xi, 1-300, map and cut.

Whales and the Whale Fishery are noticed passim in Part I, as follows: pp. 27-33, 36-38,
50-55, 68-72, 110-117, 119-134, 187-145, 149-151, 154-172, 208-216. Adventures of two whalemen
(Part Il), pp. 219-221. Description of the outfit and cruise of a Sperm Whale ship, pp. 221-
228. The Right Whale, p. 229. Description of a sixty-barrel Sperm Whale, pp. 229-232, pl.
(Physeter or Spermaceti Whale, copied from Colnett’s ‘‘ Voy. to South Atlantic and Pacific
Ocean” (18 ,q.v.). Progress of the Whale Fishery at Nantucket, pp. 232-234 (‘‘from the His-
torical Society's Collection”). Produce of the Whale Fishery carried on at Nantucket, between
the years 1804 and 1834, inclusive, p. 235 (statistical table). Accounts of the loss of various
whaling ships, pp. 236-253. Proposal from the French government to the people of Nantucket
to remove to Dunkirk, pp. 253-259. (866. ]

1835. MULDER, CLAAS. Over de tanden van den Narwal of Eenhoorn (Monedon Mono-
ceros L.). <(Van der Hoeven en de Vriese’s Tijdsch. voor Natuw'l. Gesch. en Phys.,
ii, 1835, pp. 65-100, pl. ii. ‘
The number, development, and functions of the teeth, treated historically and critically.
“Bij het ontleden van mijne meergemelmelde voorwerpen, heb ik weerzijds in de bovenkaak
eenen tand ontdekt, zoodat daardoor de analogie van Narwal met Dolfijnen verstekt, de over-
gang geleidelijker wordt” (pp. 107, 108).
The plate gives figures of the tusks and back teeth of 2 fetal and an adult specimen, and
of the tusk, with sections of the latter. (867. ]
1835. Prez. [=Lepinz.] Ueber ein Meerschweinweibchen (Delphinus phocaena).
<Froriep’s Notizen, xliii, No. 940, pp. 243, 244.
Anatomische Bemerkungen. Aus l'Institut, 3° ann., 1835, pp. 46, 47. (See 1835. DUMERIL.)
[868.]
1835. REID, JoHN. Einige Beobachtungen ricksichtlich der Structur der Gekrés-
drisen bei Balaenoptera rostrata. <(Froriep’s Notizen, xliii, No. 933, Feb. 1835,
pp. 209-211,
Aus Edinb. Med. and Surg. Journ., No. cxxii, Jan. 1, 1835. bes [869. ]

5A4 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1835. Ross, J. C. Appendix | to the | Narrative | of a | Second Voyage in search | of
a | North-west Passage, | and of a | Residence in the Arctic regions | during
the years 1829, 1830, 1831, 1832, 1833. | By | Sir John Ross, C. B., K. 8. A.,
K. C. S., &c. &e. | Captain in the Royal Navy. | Including the reports of |
Commander, now Captain, James Clark Ross, R. N., F. R.S., F. L. S., &e. |
and | the discovery of the northern magnetic pole. | —| London: | A. W.
Webster, 156, Regent street. | — | 1835. 4to. pp. i-xii, 1-120, i-ciii, pll.
Zoology, by James Clark Ross, pp. vii-c.
Delphinapterus Beluga, p. xxii; Monodon Monoceros, p. xxii; Balena Mysticetus, pp. xxiii,
xxiv. There are valuable notes regarding the last two. [870.]
1835. SHARPEY, [W.]. Observations on the Anatomy of the Bloodvessels of the Por-
poise. <Rep. Brit. Ass. Adv. Sci., 4th meeting, Edinburgh, 1834 (1835), pp.
682, 683. (871.]

1835. SwaInson, W. The | Cabinet Cyclopedia. | Conducted by the | Rey. Dionysius
Lardner, LL.D. F.R.S.L. & E. | MRL A. F.R.A.S. F.L.S. F.Z.S. Hon.
F.C.P.C. &c. &e. | assisted by Eminent Literary and Scientific Men. | — |
Natural History. |— | A Treatise | on | the Geography and Classification |
of | Animals. | By | William Swainson, Esq. A.C.G. | Honorary Member of
the Cambridge Philosophical Society, | and of several Foreign Academies.

| — | London: | Printed for Longman, Rees, Orme, Brown, Green, & Long-
man, | Paternoster-Row; | and John Taylor, | Upper Gower Street. | 1835.

8°. pp. i-vil, 1-367, 1.1.
Part II. On the Rise and Progress of Systematic Zodlogy (pp. 122-223), treats of the prin-
cipal systems of classification, with critical remarks thereon from the quinarian.standpoint.
[872.]

1835. THACHER, JAMES. History | of | the Town of Plymouth, [Mass. ] | from its first
Settlement in 1620, | to the present time: | with a concise | History of the
Aborigines | of New England, | and their Wars with the English, &c. | By
James Thacher, M.D. A.A.S. | ‘Ask thy fathers and they will show thee;
thy elders and they will tell | thee.” | Second Edition, enlarged and cor-

rected. | — | Boston: | Marsh, Copen & Lyon. | 1835. 8°. pp. i-iv, 1-16++-13-
401, map.

Whales in Plymonth Bay, p.21. Whale Fishery, pp. 317, 318.

For first ed. see 1832. [873.]

1835. Tirestus, [G.W.]. Die Wallfische. <JIsis-von Oken, 1835, pp. 709-752, 801-828.

Cete herbivora, pp. 709-719.

[Aechten Cetaceen], pp. 719-752, 801-828. Spec.1. Der weisse Delphin aus Canada, p. 721;
Sp. 2. D. coronatus Fréminville, p. 721; Sp. 3. D. bredanensis Cuv., p. 721; Sp. 4. D. macro-
genius [Cuy.], eine fossile Species, p. 721; Sp. 5. D. gangeticus Lebeck, p. 721; Sp. 6. D. boryt,
p. 722; Sp. 7. Delphinus delphis Linn., p. 722; Sp. 8. D. eruciger, p. 722; Sp. 9. D. maculatus
Lesson et Garnot, p. 722; Sp. 10. D. dubiws Cuv., p. 722; Sp. 11. D. Tursio Fabricii, p. 722;
Sp. 12. D. niger Lacép., p. 723; Sp. 13. D. malayanus Lesson et Garnot, p. 723; Sp. 14. D.
lunatus Less. et Garn., p. 724; Sp. 15. D. minimus Less. et Garn., p.724; * D. Bertini Desm ,
p. 724; *D. Mongitort Desm., p. 724; Sp. 16. D. monoceros, Rhinoceros Quoy et Gaimard, p.
724; Sp.17. D. Phocaena Linn., p. 724; Sp. 18. D. leucocephalus Less. et Garn., p. 724; Sp.
19. D. bivittatus Less. et Garn., p. 724; Sp. 20. D. superciliosus Less. et Garn., p. 725; Sp. 21.
D. orca Fabric., p. 725; *D. intermedius Gray, p. 726; Sp. 22. D. griseus Cuy., p. 726;
*D. rissoanus, p. 726; Sp. 23. D. globiceps Cuv., p. 726; Sp. 24. D. cortesii, p. 726; *D. feres,
p. 726; Sp. 25. D. leucas Pallas, p. 728; Sp. 26. D. Peronti Lacép., p. 730; * D. Kingit Gray,
p. 730; Sp. 27. D. dalei, p. 730; Sp. 28. D. hyperoodon Desm., p. 731; Sp. 29. D.? spurius,
p. 731; *D. Bpiodon Desmar., p. 731; Monodon monoceros Linn., p. 731; Monodon microce-
phalus Lacép., p. 734; Monodon Andersonianus Lacép., p. 734.

Thiere, deren Kopf sehr gross und voluminés ist und daher mit dem K6rper in keinem
Verhiltnisse stcht. A. Physeteres, Blaser. 1) Cachalot Lacép. Cetac. Catodon, p. 735; 2)
Ziphius cavirostris, p. 735; 3) Catodon macrocephalus, pp. 736-739; 4) Der Trumpo der Ber-
muden Brown, p. 739; 5) Catodon polycyphus, p. 739; 6) Catodon suineval, p. 739; 7) Physalus
cylindricus Lacép., p. 740; 8) Physeter microps Lacép., p. 740; Die zweyte Art der Caschelote
[Physeter microps], pp. 740-743; Die dritte Species der Caschelote [Ph. tursio Linn.], p. 743;
Die vierte Species der Caschelote, p. 744. Ambra grisea, Ambergries der Kanfleute, pp. 745-
747. Vom Walrath oder Sperma ceti der Kaufleute und Apotheker, pp. 747-751.

Von den eigentlichen Walfischen mit Barten, pp. 801-820. Der gemeine grénlindische

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPIIY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 545

1835. Tixestus, [G. W.]—Continned.
Walfisch, Balaena mysticetus Linn., pp. 801-807; Die zweite Species, der Finnfisch (Palaena
physalus Linn.), pp. 807-810; 3. Spec., Balaena Boops, pp. 810-813; 4. Spec., Der Nordkaper,
Balaena musculus, pp. 814-816; 5. Spec., Schnabelfisch, Balaena rostrata, pp. 816-819; 9)
Physeter orthodon Lacép., p. 819; 10) Physeter mular Lacép., p. 820; 11) Physeter suleatus
Lacép, p. 820. ; ‘

Balaenae. Eigentliche Walfische mit Barten in den Kieferbeinen. .. . A. Walfische ohne
Rickenflossen und ohne Buckel. 12) Balaena mysticetus Linn., p. $20; 13) Balaena glacialis
Klein, p. 821. B. Walfische, die einen oder meherer Buckel auf dem Ricken haben. 14)
Balaena nodosa Bonnaterre, p. 821; 15) Balaena gibbosa Bonnaterre, p. 821; 17) Balaena lunu-
lata, p. 821. Die Gattung Balaenoptera des Lacépéde fuhrt eine Rickenflosse. A. Keine
Falten (?) weder unter dem Bauche noch unter Kehle. 18) Balaenoptera gibbar Lacép., p.
822. B. Walfische mit Falten, die unter dem Bauche und der Kehle der Linge nach fortlaufen.
19) Balaenoptera jubarte Lesson, p. 822; 20) Balaenoptera acuto-rostrata Lacép., p. 822; 21)
Balaenoptera musculus Pallas, p. 822; 22) Balaenoptera punctata Lacép., p. 823; 23) Balae-
noptera nigra Lacép., p. 823; 24) Balaenoptera coerulescens Lacép., p. 823; 25) Balaenoptera
maculata Lacép., p. 823.

Pallas russische Walfische oder Cetaceen [6 spp.], pp. 824-826 [and the following:] B. Die
Blaser, Physeteres. Springer, pp. 826-827; C. Ancylodon Illiger. Lesson Man. de Mammal.,
pag. 432, p. 827; D. Delphin, p. 828.

Of the many bad pieces of cetological composition there are few more worthless, viewed
from the stand-point of to-day, than this pretentious compilation of some fifty closely printed
pages of Oken’s Isis ; even Lacépéde’s and Chamisso’s baseless species, described respectively
from Japanese drawings and Aleut carvings in wood, to say nothing of many other purely
nominal species, being here formally introduced. The literal transcription of the sub-head-
ings and specific names above given renders further comment needless. [874.]

1835-36. CuviER, F. Cetacea. < Todd’s Cyclopedia of Anatomy and Physiology, vol. i,
1835-36, pp. 562-594, fie. 246-279.

At the end of the paragraph giving the ‘‘Bibliography”’ occurs the following: ‘‘ (The pre-
ceding article has been derived from the work last named in the Bibliography, with the addi-
tion of the extracts from Mr. Hunter’s papers and the other passages between brackets.)”
The work ‘“last named” here referred to is ‘‘ Cuvier, Fr. Histoire naturelle des Cétacés, 8vo.
Paris, 1836.’’ The bracketed passages not from Hunter, giving the classification and charace-
ters of the group (pp. 562-564), and some other passages, are presumably by the editor, Dr.
Robert B. Todd.

Tribe I. Phytophaga: Manatus (2 spp.), Halicore (2 spp.), Rytina (1 sp.).

Tribe Il. Zoophaga: Family Delphinide, with genn. Delphinorhynchus, Delphinus, Inia,
Phocena, Monodon, Hyperoodon, Platanista. Family Catodontide, with genn. Catodon, Phy-
seter. Family Balenide, with genn. Balenoptera, Balena.

The Zoophaga are divided into two groups, A and B, group A consisting of the Delphi-
nide, and group B of the Catodontide and Balenide. (875. ]

1835-39. JAGER, G. F. Ueber die | Fossilen Siugethiere | welche | in | Wiirtemberg |
aufgefunden worden sind | von | Med. Dr. Georg Fried. Jiiger, |. . . [=titles,
8 lines. ] | [Erste Abtheilung.] | — | Stuttgart, | Bei Carl Erhard. | 1835.

[Oder] Uber die | Fossilen Siingethiere, | welche | in | Wiirtemberg | in ver-
schiedenen Formationen | aufgefunden yyorden sind, | nebst | geognostischen
Bemerkungen iiber diese Formationen | von | Med. Dr. Georg Fried. Jiiger |...
[=titles, 11 lines.] | [Zweite Abtheilung. ] | — | Stuttgart, | BeiCarl Erhard. |
1839. 2°. Abth. I, ll. 3, pp. 1-70, 1.1, pll. i-ix. Abth. I, ll. 2, pp. 71-212,
1. 1, pll. x-xx.

[N. B.—In ‘‘Bermerkung fiir den Buchbinder,”’ affixed to the wrapper of Abth. II, the
author directs the second of the above-given titles (which is that of Abth. II) to be used in
binding as that of the completed work. .

Dedication to George Cuvier, 1. 3; Vorrede, 1. 4; Vorwort zu der Zweiten Abtheilung, 1. 5,
erste Seite; Inhalts-Anzeige, 1. 5, zweite Seite; Einleitung, pp. 1, 2; I. Die Ueberreste von
Siiugethieren aus der Molasse Oberschwabens, pp. 3-10, 71. II. Die Ueberreste von Siuge-
thieren aus den Bohnerzgruben der schwiibischen Alb, pp. 11-59, 71-79. III. Die Ueberreste
von Siiugethieren aus dem Siisswasserkallk bei Steinheim, pp. 59-70. IV. Die Ucberreste von
Siiugethieren in der Héhle bei Erpfingen, pp. 80-94. V. Ueberreste von Siiugethieren aus
der Schellershéhle bei Wittlingen, pp. 94-98. VI. Ueberreste von Siiugethieren aus dem
weicheren Kalktuife der schwibischen Alb und aus der in ihm gebildeten Héhle bei Seeburg,
pp. 98-105. WII. Die Ueberreste von Siiugethieren der Diluvial- und iilteren Alluvial-Porma-
tion, pp. 105-182. VIII. Ueberreste von Siiugethieren im Torf, pp. 1838-197. VII (i. ¢., LX).

30 G B

546 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1835-39. JAGER, G. F.—Continued.
Ueberreste von Siugethiere aus alten Grabhiigeln und Gritbern, p. 197. WIII (t. e., X). Dio
Ueberreste von Séiugethiere in dem neueren Alluvialboden, pp. 197-200. Resultate, pp. 200-
212. Erklirung der Tafeln und Druckfehler, 1 1.

Cetaceen, pp. 4-7. Figg.: pl. i, figg. 4-28, spp. incog., aus der Molasse; pl. ix, figg. 1-6,
Cetaceum (sp. incog.), aus der Molasse.

The remains of Cetaceans here described and figured are inet definitely referred to either
species or genus, though some are thought to be referable to Ziphius, others to Physeter, Del-
phinus, ete. - [876. ]

1835-44. ‘‘BrEaLE, THomMAS. The Natural History of the Sperm Whale and a Sketch
of a South-Sea Whaling Voyage. London, J. van Voorst, 1835-44. 89°.”

Not seen; title at second hand. [877.]

1836. BAER, CAROLO Ern. A. Delphini Phocaenae anatomes sectio prima. < Bull.
sci. de V Acad. imp. des Sci. de St.-Pétersbourg, i, 1836, pp. 26-28.

Extrait en langue frangais du mémoire de cet titre publié dans les Mém. del’ Acad. imp. de

St.-Pétersb. [878.]
1836. Baur, [C. E.] pz. Sur le prétendu passage de l’eau par les évents des Cétacés.
< Bull. sci. de V Acad. imp. des Sci. de St.-Pétersbourg, i, 1836, pp. 37-40.

Historique et critique. ‘‘ Voila, Messieurs, l’histoire d’une idée que je crois fausse, et que
s’est conservée dans la zoologie par l’autorité des anciens, par la rareté de Ja connaissance de
Ja langue allemande parmi les autres peuples qui cultivent les sciences, par l’empressement
des Allemands 4 apprendre toutes les langues et 4 consulter la littérature de toute 1’Europe,
et par les mésentendus d’un traducteur.” (p. 40.) [879. ]

1836. Barr, [K. E.] von. Ueber das Gefasssystem des Braunfisches (Delphin. Pho-
caena). <(Froriep’s Notizen, 1, No. 1081, Sept. 1836, pp. 37-39, fig. 33. [880.]
1836. BENEDEN, [P. J.] VAN. Observations sur les caractéres spécifiques des grands
cétacés, tirés de la conformation de Voreille osseuse. La des Sci. nat., 2°
sér., Zool., vi, 1836, pp. 158, 159. ca
1836. BENEDEN, [P. J.] vAN. Os de Voreille considéré comme ayant une valeur carac-
téristique dans les Cétacés. <L’Institut, 4¢ sér., no. 177, 28 sept. 1836, p. 318.
[882.]
1836. BENNETT, FREDERICK DEBELL. Notes on the Anatomy of the Spermaceti
Whale (Physeter macrocephalus, Lac.). <Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1836, pp.
127-129.
Dentition, structure of the eye, ete. [883.]-
1836. ‘‘BopEL NIJENHUIS, J. T. Over de walvischaardige dieren, op de kusten van
Nederland yan de vroegste tijden of gestrand of gevangen.”
“Zie: Algem. konst en letterbode. 1836, i, bl. 153, 163, 331.” :

Not seen; title from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 158, no. 2500. [884.]

1836. ‘Bruns, V. Disquisitiones de nervisCetaceorum cerebralibus. Ttibingen, 1836.
ey

Not seen; title from Carus and Engelmann. [885.]

1836. Caucuy, [F. P.]. [Rapport sur un os fossile trouvé 4 Tuyvenberg.] < Bull.
de V Acad. roy. des Sci., etc., de Bruxelles, iti, 1836, pp. 42, 43.

Remarques Dem oataies au rapport par M. le professeur nite’ (Voyez 1836. Fou-

MANN.) [886. ]

1836. CuvinR, F. De VHistoire | naturelle | des Cétaceés, | ou | Recueil et examen
des Faits | dont se compose )’Histoire naturelle de ces Animaux; Par M. F.
Cuvier, | de ’Académie des Sciences, de la société de Londres ete. | Paris. |
Libraire encyclopédique de Roret, | Rue Hautefeuille, N° 10bis. | — | 1836.
8°. Jl. 2, pp. i-lii, 1-416, pll. i-xxii.

Discours préliminaire. Considérations générales sur Vhistoire naturelle des Cétacés, pp.
i-lii. 7

Des Cétacés herbivores [Sirenia] en général, pp. 1-6.—Les Lamantins—Manatus, p. 6;
1. Manatus americanus, pp. 7-21; 2. Manatus Senegalensis, pp. 21-25; 3. Manatus latiros-
tris, pp. 25-26; Mesures comparatives des tétes des trois espéces de Lamantins, p. 27; Les
Dugongs—Halicore, pp. 27,28; 4. Halicore Indicus, pp. 29-38, 375, 376, pll. iv, v, vi; Rytina,
pp. 38-40; 5. Rytina borealis, pp. 41-71, 376 (une traduction du mémoire de Steller, sans
aucun retranchement), pp. 376, 377.

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 547

1836. Cuviur, F.—Continued.

Des Dauphins en général, pp. 73-113, 377; Les Delphinorhynques—Delphinorhyncus, pp.
113, 378; 1. D. micropterus [Blainy.], pp. 114-117, pl. ix, fig. 1; 2. D. Coronatus [Fréminv.]},
pp. 117-120; 3. D. Frontatus, pp. 120-122; Les Dauphins proprement dits—Delphinus, pp.
122, 128, pl. x, fig. 1, skull; 4. D. delphis |Linn.], pp. 123-142; 5. D. twrsio|Bonn.), pp. 142-147;
6. D. Capensis [Gray], pp. 147-148; '%. D. superciliosus [Less. et Garnot], pp. 148, 149: 8. D.
novee Zelandic [Quoy et Gaim.], pp. 149, 150; 9. D. malayanus (Less. et Garnot], pp. 150, 151;
16. D. plumbeus [Dussum.], pp. 151-153; 11. D. dubius [G. Cuv.], pp. 153,154; 12. D. velox
[Dussum.], pp. 154,155; 13. D. frenatus [F. Cuy.), pp. 155, 156, pl. x, fig. 1; 14. D. rostatus
(sic), [G. Cuv.], pp. 156-158, pl. x, fig. 2; 15. D. cephalorhyncus [sp. n. =D. heavisidii, Gray,
1828], pp. 158, 159; 16. D. Desmaresti [Risso], pp. 159-161; 17. D. hastatus [sp. n. =D. hea-
visidii, Gray, 1828], pp. 161, 162; 18. D. obscurus [Gray], pp. 162-164; B29. D. Peroniit
[Lacép.], pp. 164-166, pl. xv, fig. 2; Les Inias— Inia, pp. 166,167; 20. J. Boliviensis [D’Orb.]},
pp. 167-170, pl. x bis; Les Marsouins— Phocena, pp. 170,171; 21. P. communis |Linn.], pp.
171-177; 22. P. orca [Wagl.], pp. 177-182; 23. P. griseus [Less.], pp. 182-186; 24. P. com-
pressi caudata [Less.], pp. 186-190; 25. P. globiceps [G. Cuv.], pp. 190-196, 379; 26. P. ris-
sonnus (sic), [G. Cuv.], pp. 196-199, pl. xiii, fig. 6; 27. P. leucas [Pallas], pp. 199-211; Des
Dauphins dont l’existence comme espéce est douteuse (—29 spp.), pp. 212-230, 381—voyez
sous, p. 379; Les Narvals— Monodon, p. 230; 28. M. monoceros [Linn.], pp. 230-240, 380, pl.
Xvi, figg. 2,3; Les Hypéroodons— Hyperoodons, pp. 240, 241; 29. H. Butzkopf [Bonnat.],
pp. 241-251, pl. ix, figg. 1-3, pl. xvii, fig. 1; Les Platanistes— Platanista, pp. 251, 252; 30. P.
gangeticus [Leheck], pp. 252-257, pl. viii, fig. 2, pl. xviii, fig. 1-3 ; Des Cachalots en général
— Physeter, pp. 259-286; 31. P. macrocephalus [Linn.]), pp. 286-302, 381-386, pl. xix, figg. 1-3;
Des Baleines en général— Balena, p. 303; Les Rorquals—Rorqualus [gen. n.], pp. 303-321;
32. R. Boops [Albers], pp. 321-334, 886, 387; 33. R. musculus [Linn.], pp. 334-347 (conte-
nent une traduction d’une mémoire de M. Companyo); 34. &. antarciicus [sp. n. = Balena
lalandi, Fisch.], pp. 347-354; Les Baleines—Balena, pp. 354-361; 35. B. antarctica [sp.
n.=B. wustralis, Desmoul.], pp. 361-364; 36. B. mysticetus [Linn.], pp. 364-375.

Additions et corrections, pp. 375-891. Le Dugong, pp. 375, 376; Le Stellére, pp. 376, 377;
Anatomie des Dauphins, pp. 377,378; Le Delphinorhynque douteux, p. 378; 37. Delphinus
ceruleo-albus [Meyeu], pp. 378, 379; 3S. Le Dauphin de Bory [D. Bory?], p. 379 [voyez p. 217];
Le Marsouin globiceps [Ph. globiceps], pp. 379, 880; Du Narval, p. 380; Hyperoodon dans la
Méditerranée, p. 381; Dauphins douteux, p. 881; Cachalots, pp. 381-386; Ambre gris, p. 386;
Le Rorqual jubarte, pp. 386, 387; Rorquals et Baleines douteuses, pp. 388-391 (relatives 4 des
quelques baleines de Pallas dans sa Zoog. Rosso-Asiat.); Baleine dans le Fleuve Saint-
Laurent, p. 391; Baleine du Cap, p. 391.

Table chronologique des ouvrages ou se trouvent les notions diverses qui servent au
jourd’hui de fondement 4 Vhistoire naturelle des Cétacés, pp. 392-405, titles 1-165+ 12 inter-
pol., et 1-10=187; Table alphabétique des auteurs, avec les numéros de renvoi 4 la table
chronologique des ouvrages, pp. 407-409.

Table des matiéres, pp. 411-413; Errata, pp. 415, 416.

Espéces douteuses. I. Delphinus senedetta, Lacép. ex Rondelet, p. 212; 2. D. sinensis,
Desm. ex Osbeck, p. 218; 3. D. Pernettyi, Desm., pp. 213, 214; 4. D. canadensis, Desm. ex-
Duhamel, pp. 214,215; 5. D. Bertini, Desm. ex Duhamel, p. 215; 6. D. spurius vel anar-
nacus, O. Fabr., pp. 215, 216; 7%. D. ventricosus, Bonnat. ex Hunter, pp. 216, 217; 8. D. Coin-
mersonii, Lacép. ex Commerson, p. 217; 9. D. Boryi, Desm. ex Bory, pp. 217, 218 [voyez p.
379 ou ce dauphin est admetté étre une espéces distincte]; 10. D. Sowerbyi, Desm. ex
Blainy., p. 218; 11. D. épiodon, Rafinesque, pp. 218, 219; 12. D. feres, Bonn., pp. 219-221;
13. D. niger, Lacép., p. 221; 14. D. longirostris, Gray, 15. D. acutus, Gray, 16. D. inter-
medius, Gray, 17. D. kingii, Gray, p. 122; 18. D. troncalus (sic), Montaigu, pp. 222, 223;
19. Le Globiceps de Risso, p. 223; 20. D. Bayeri, Less. ex Risso, pp. 224, 225; 21. O[xyp-
terus]. mongitori, Rafinesque, p. 225; 22. D. cruciger, Quoy, 23. D. bivitatus, Quoy, pp.
225-227; 24. D. albigenus, Quoy et Gaim., p. 227; 25. D. rhinoceros, Quoy et Gaim., pp.
227, 228; 26. D. lunatus, Less., p. 228; 2%. D. maculatus, Less., p. 228, 229; 28. D. leuco-
cephalus, Less., p. 229; 29. D. minimus, Less., pp. 229-230.

Espéces nouveaux: 1. Delphinus cephalorhyncus, p. 158; 2. D. hastatus, p. 161 (tout
deux= D. heavisidi, Gray, 1828); 3. Rorqualus antarcticus, p. 347 = Balena lalandi, Fisch.,
1829; 4. Balena antarctica, p. 361—B. australis, Desmoul., 1822.

Genre nouveau, Rorqualus, p. 303—= Balenopteride, auct. mod.

Espéces admette, 38; espéces doutouses, 28.

The work, as the title indicates, is a critical digest and compendium of the literature of
the Cetacea as then existing. Nearly everything of value relating to the various species is
noted, and often special papers are given nearly in full. The large number of species con-
sidered as of doubtful existence indicates a judicious conservatism on the part of the author
rarely exhibited by his predecessors. [887 ]}

548 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1836. CuviER, G. Recherches | sur les | Ossemens fossiles, | ot ’on rétablit les carac-
téres | de plusieurs animaux dont les révolutions du Globe | ont détruit les
espéces; | par | Georges Cuvier. | Quatriéme Edition, | Approvée et adoptée
par le Conseil royal de V’Instruction publique. | Triomphante des eaux, du
trépas et du temps, | La terre a cru revoir ses premiers habitans. | Delille. |
Tome Huititme, Deuxieme Partie. | [Seal.] Paris. | Edmond d’Ocagne, Edi-
teur, | 12, Rue des Petits-Augustins. |... [names of 4 other publishers. ] |
1836. 8°. ll. 3, pp. 1-332. Atlas, 4°, pll. 220-228. :

The title of the wrapper has, after ‘‘Quatriéme Edition,” in addition to the above:
Revue, et completée | Au moyen de notes additionelles et d’un supplément |

laissés par Auteur. |

‘Les additions qui se trouvaient 4 la fin de chacun des volumes des précédentes éditions,
sont classées par ordre de mati¢res; et, lorsque le sujet s’y préte, les faits nouveaux recueillis
par M. Georges Cuvier sont joints au texte, mais en note seulement, afin de conserver au
texte son intégrité. Le plus grand nombre de ces faits cependant est destiné 4 trouver place
dans le Supplément dont M. Cuvier avait préparé tous les matériaux, et que M. Laurillard
ajoutera aux Recherches sur les os fossiles.”—Extrait de l’ Avis de l’éditeur, which also states
that the plates were retouched for this edition. The prospectus states, ‘‘M. Frédéric Cuvier,
de l'Institut, s’est chargé de suivre la réimpression de l’ouvrage de son frére.”

Tome Huitiéme, Deuxiéme Partie, contains chapters II and III of the Nouvelle édition
(1823), g.v. The additions consist of (1) note 1 to p. 86 (7 lines), respecting Delphinus fron-
tatus, signed ‘‘Fréd. Cuy.”; (2) note to p. 121 (5 lines), explaining the substitution of the
word rostratus for frontatus, also signed ‘‘ Fréd. Cuy.”’; (3) this note is followed by the ‘‘ Ad-
dition 4 Vhistoire des dauphins vivans,” appearing at the end of the volume in the earlier
editions, with verbal changes in the first paragraph; (4) note (3 lines, signed ‘‘F. Cuv.”) re-
ferring to the note at p. 121; (5) note (1 line, signed ‘‘Laur.”) supplementing the text; (6)
note (14 lines, no signature), entitled ‘‘Sur le Rorqual de la mer Adriatique au cabinet de
Bologne.”

The references in the text to the plates are changed to correspond with their reissue with
consecutive numbering.

This Quatriéme édition of the Ossemens fossiles contains (Tome premier, 1834, pp. i-xxiv)
“Observations préliminaires, par M. I'rédéric Cuvier,” and ‘*Eloge de M. Le Baron Cuvier,
par C.-L. Laurillard” (loc. cit., pp. 1-78). The Atlas is accompanied by a detailed explanatory
table of the plates, an important desideratum which the other editions lack. [888. ]

1836. CuvimR, GEorGES. Le | Régne animal | distribué | d’aprés son organisation, |
pour servir de base & l’Histoire naturelle des Animaux, | et d’introduction 4
Anatomie comparée, | par | Georges Cuvier. | — | Edition | accompagnée de
planches gravées, | représentant | les types de tous les genres, | les caractéres
distinctifs des divers groupes et les modifications de structure | sur lesquelles
repose cette classification; | par | une réunion de disciples de Cuvier, | MM.
Audouin, Blanchard, Deshayes, Alcide D’Orbigny, Dozére, Dugés, Duvernoy,
Laurillard, | Milne Edwards, Roulin et Valenciennes. | — | Paris | Fortin,
Masson et Cie, Libraires, | Successeurs de Crochard, | Place de l’Kcole-de-
Médecine, N. 1. | —- | Imprimé. chez Paul Renouard, | Rue Garanciére, n. 5.
[1836 et seqg.] 20 vols. 4°.

Les Mammifeéres. | — | Avec un Atlas, | par MM. | Milne Edwards, Lauril-
lard, et Roulin. | Texte, 1. 1, pp. i-xxxvi, 1-350; Atlas, pll. i-e, coloriées.

Les Cétacés herbivores, pp. 329-331, pl. xevi. Les Cétacés ordinaires, pp. 331-346, pll.
x¢vil-c. "

Pl. xevi, fig. 1. Trichechus manatus, Linn., fig. orig.; fig. 2. Halicore Dugong (animal,
daprés MM. Hombron et Jacquinot; squelette et crane, d’aprés Cuvier, Oss. fos.). Pl. xevii,
fig. 1. Delphinus Delphis (fig. orig.); fig. 2. D. Globiceps (d’aprés une planche de Risso, Hist.
nat. de VHurope mérid., t. ili); fig. 3. D. Phoceena (fig. orig.). Pll. xeviii-xcix, Appareil
soufflant du Marsouin. Pl. ¢, fig. 1. Balena mysticetus, Linn. (d’aprés Scoresby, Arct. Ieg.,

t. ii, pl. xii).
The text appears to be unchanged from that of the edition of 1829. [889.]
1836. DuMorRTIER, Bb. C. Mémoire sur le delphinorhyngue microptére échoué 4 Os-
, tende. Lu & la séance du 5 novembre 1836. < Nouveaux mém. de V Acad. roy.

des Sci. et Belles-lettres de Bruxelles, xii, 1839, pp. 13, pll. 3.

Sur les caractéres extérieurs et anatomiques du Delphinorhynchus micropterus. PA. i,
vu de céte; pl. ii, son squelette; pl. iii, appareil hyoide, oreille osseuse, systéme urinaire, le
ceur, et la queue. [890.]

1836.

1836.

1836.

1836.

1836.

1336.

1836.

1836.

1836.

1836.

1836.

1836.

1836.

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 549

EpiTrortaL. The Black Whale. <Ldinb. Phil. Journ., xx, 1836, pp. 208, 209.
On the diminution in numbers of Balena mysticetus. A brief general statement of_tho
matter, with an extract of 16 lines accredited to ‘‘ Ross’s Voyage.” {891.]
FouMann, [V.], c([F. P.] Caucuy. [Rapport sur deux fragmens dun os fossile
trouvés & Tuyvenberg.] <L’Jnstitut, 4° ann., no. 150, 23 mars 1836, p. 95.
Fragment de vertébre d’un Cétacé. (892. ]
FouMAnn, [V.]. Rapport sur un os fossile trouvé ’ Tuyvenberg.] < Bull. de
UV Acad. voy. des Sci., etc., de Bruxelles, iii, 1836, pp. 40-42.
Un fragment d’une vertébre d’un Cétacé du genre Balena. [893.]

. Gery. [=PauLt Grervais.] Lamantin, Manatus. < Dict. pitlor. @ Hist. nat. et

des Phénom. de la Nature, iv, 1836, livr. eclxxxii, pp. 331-333.
1. Manatus americanus, p. 331, pl. celxxxviii, fig. 3; 2. MW. senegalensis, p. 332; 3. I. lati-
rostris, p. 332. [894. ]

. GerV. [=PavuL GreRVAIS.] Mammalogie ou Mastologie. < Dict. pittor. d Hist.

nat. et des Phénom. de la Natnre, iv, 1836, livr. eeexvii-ccexx, pp. 614-640.
Cétacés, passim. Mammiféres de France, pp. 639, 640. Cétacés, 1. Delphinorhynchus
sa‘onicus, Less.; %. Delphinus micropterus; 3. D. delphis; 4. D. tursio; 5. D. deductor oa
globiceps; 6. D. edentulus, Schreb.; 7%. Physeter macrocephalus; 8. Lalena musculus; 9. B.
rostrata. (895. ]
HERAUSGEBER. Harlan; kritische Bemerkungen tiber einige bisher in Nord-
Amerika gefundene organische Uberbleibsel (nach dem Aushiingebogen der
Transactions of the geological Society of Philadelphia, vol. i, in James. Edinb. n.
phil. Journ., 1834, xvii, 342-362; F. f.). <Neues Jahrb. fiir Mineral., 1836, pp.
99-109.
Manatus und eigentliche Cetaceen, p. 104; Basilosaurus, p. 106. [896. ]
Jacos, A. On thestructure of the Mammary Glands in the Cetacea; with Ob-
servations on the mechanism of the Mouth and Soft Palate, as applied by the
Young Animal in Sucking. <Fifth Report British Assoc. Adv. Sci. (Dublin
meeting, 1835). Notices of Com., 1836, pp. 86, 87. [897.]
Lremaovr, [E.]. Sur la nageoire dorsale du delphinus globiceps (Cuvier).
<Compte rendu de V Acad. des Sci., ii, 1833, p. 65. [898. ]

MuLpEr, CLAas. Een word over het werk van Geoffroij Saint-Hilaire, den titel
voerende: Fragmens sur la structure et les usages des glands mammellaires
des Cétacés. Paris, 1834. 8°. avec 2 pl.in4°. < Van der Hoeven en de Vriese’s
Tijdssch. voor Naturl. Gesch. en Phys., iti, 1836, ii, pp. 41-—. [839.]

Rapp, Win. Bemerkungen uber die Gehorwerkzeuge der Cetaceen. <Froriep’s

Notizen, xlix, No. 1064, Juli 1836, pp. 116-121.

Auszug. {900.]

Ravin, F. P. Oservations anatomiques sur les les Fanons, sur Jeur mode d’in-
sertion entre eux et avec la membrane palatine. <Ann. des Sci. nat., 2° séx.,
Zool., v, 1836, pp. 266-278, pl. xi.

Sur les fanons de ‘‘ Balenoptera acuto-rostrata, Lacépéde.” [901.]

Rfpacteurs. Histoire naturelle des Cétacés, par M. Frédérie Cuvier. < Ann.
des Sci. nat., 2° sér., Zool., v, 1836, p. 379.

Notice. [902.]

Repactnurs. [M.K.E. von Baer. Sur Vanatomiedu marsouin.] <L’Institut,
4° ann., no. 177, 7 décem. 1836, pp. 401, 410.

Résumé. [903.]
Ropert, [C.]. [Note sur quelques particularités observées dans le squelette Wun
Lamantin du Sénégal.] <L’Institut, 4° ann., no. 153, 18 avril 1836, p. 114.

[904.]

RoBERT, [C.]. Lettre de M. Robert sur les spirules, sur le Jamentin du Sénégal
et sur l’existence, dans cette méme région de l’Afrique, de hyéne tachetée.
<Ann. des Sci. nat., 2° sér., Zool., v, 1836, pp. 226, 227; Comp. rend. de V Acad.
des Sci., ii, 1836, pp. 362-364.

Donné quelques particularités dans le squelette d'un Lamantin du Sénégal. [905. ]

550 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1836. Satacroux, A. Noveaux Elémens | d’Histoire Naturelle | contenant | La
- Zoologie, la Botanique, | la Minéralogie et la Géologie, | par A. Salacroux |
Docteur en Médecine de la Faculté de Paris, | Professeur d’Histoire naturelle
au Collége de Saint-Louis, | Membre de la Société des Sciences naturelles de
France. | Avec 44 planches gravées sur acier et représentant | prés de 400
sujets. | — | Paris | Germer Baillitre, Libraire-Kditeur, | Rue de VEcole de
Médecine, No. 13 (bis). |... [=names of 5 other booksellers.] | 1836. sm.

8°. pp. i-vil, 1-970, pll. i-xliv.

Xe Ordre.—Cétacés, pp. 188-203, pl. xi. Ire Famille. Cétacés herbivores, pp. 190,191. Ie
Famille. Cétacés souffleurs, pp. 191-203. Divisée en Ke Tribu, Delphinoides avee genres
Delphinus, Phocaena, Monodon; Ile Tribu, Macrocéphales, avec genres Physeter, Balena.
Les espéces ne sont pas spécialement indiquées. [905.]

1836. VANBENEDEN. [=BENEDEN, P. J.VAN.] Caractéres spécifiques des grands
cetacés, tirés de la conformation de Voreille osseuse. <(Compl. rend. de V Acad.
des Sci., iii, 1836, pp. 400, 401. (906.]

1837. BELL, Tuomas. A | History | of | British Quadrupeds, | including the Cetacea. |
By | Thomas Bell, F.R.S. F.L.S. V.P.Z.S. |... [=titles, 3 lines.] | [Vi-
gnette.] | Illustrated by nearly 200 woodcuts. | London: | John Van Voorst, 1,
Paternoster Row. | M.DCCC.XXXVII. 8°. pp. i-xvili, 1-526.

Cetacea, pp. 452-526. General Structure, pp. 452-462. Spp. 1. Delphinus delphis, p. 463 ;
2. D. tursio, p. 469; 3. Phoceena communis, p. 473; 4. P. orca, p. 477; 5. P. melas, p. 483;
6. Beluga leucas, p. 489; 7%. Hyperoodon butzkopf, p. 492; 8. Diodon sowerbeei, p. 497; 9.
Monodon monoceros, p.500; 10. Physeter macrocephalus, p. 506; 11. P. tursio, p. 512; 12.
Balena mysticetus, p. 514; 13. Balenoptera boops, p. 520.

Except Physeter tursio, allthe species are represented in wood-cuts, and include the skulls
of seven species, as well as the animal. The text forms a carefully prepared account of
the species as then known.

Sirenia,—notice at p. 525 of stranding of specimens of the Manatee (‘t Manatus borealis”’) on
the British coast, from Stewart and Fleming. {907.]

1837. BENNETT, F. De BELL. On the Natural History of the Spermaceti Whale (Phy-
seter macrocephalus). < Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1837, pp. 39-42.
General account of habits. . [908.]

1837 (circa)., BONAPARTE, C. L. Synopsis | Vertebratorum Systematis | A Charolo L.
Bonaparte Muxiniana Principe 8. L. S. ete. ete. | Societati Linnaeanae ex-
hibiti | die septima Noy. 1837 [title occupying upper third of page 1]. 8°.
pp. 1-30. [Apparently a separate publication. ]

In the “Index Familiarum et Subfamiliarum,”’ p. 7, is the following:
Ordo 4. Cete. (Natantia.)

9. Manatidae. 18. Manatina.

10. Delphinidae. 19. Delphinina. 20. Monodontina.

11. Physeteridae. 21. Physeterina.

12. Balaenidae. 22. Balaenina. [909.]

1837. ‘‘ BRESCHET, [G.], ef ROUSSEL DE VAUZEME. Nouvelle recherches sur la struc-
ture dela peau. Paris, 1837.”
Tiré des Ann. des Sci. nat., 2° sér., Zool., ii, 1834, pp. 167-238, 321-370? Voyez 1834. BRESCHET
et ROUSSEL DE VAUZEME.
Cétacés, passim. Not seen; title at second hand. [910.]
1837. BURMEISTER, H. Handbuch | der | Naturgeschichte. | Zum Gebrauch bei Vor-
lesungen | entworfen | von | Hermann Burmeister | . . . [ titles, 6 lines.] | — |
Berlin, 1837. | Verlag von Theod. Chr. Friedr. Enslin. 8°, in zwei Abtheilun-
gen, 1. 1 (general title-page), pp. i-xxvi, 1-858.
Cetacea, pp. 791-793. Divided into 3 families — Balaenodea, Delphinodea, Sireniformia.
Genera briefly characterized, with an enumeration of the species.
“‘ Hyperoodon verus (Butskopf), atl. Ozean,” nom. sp. n., p. 792. [911.]
1837. G., Z. Narval, Monodon. <Dict. pittor. d’ Hist. nat. et des Phénom. de la Nature,

v, 1837, livr. eeexciv, pp. 591, 592.
Narvalus vulgaris Lacép., Monodon monoceros, Lin. [912.]

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 551

1837. Genv. [= Paut Gervalis.] Mammifores fossiles. < Dict. pittor. d Hist. nat. et des
Phénom. de la Nature, v, 1837, livy. ecexxi, pp. 1-5.
Cétacés, passim. [913.]

1837. ‘“‘Graau, W. A. Narrative of an Expedition | to the | East Coast of Green-
land, | sent by order of the King of Denmark, | in search of | the lost colo-
nies, | under the command of | Capt" W. A. Graah, of the Danish Royal Navy, |
Knight of Dannebrog, &c. | — | Translated from the Danish, | by | the late
G. Gordon Macdougall, F. R. 8S. N. A., | for the | Royal Geographical Society
of London. | With the | original Danish chart completed by the Expedition.
| —| London: | John W. Parker, West Strand. | — | M.DCCC.XXXVII. 1
vol. 8yvo. pp. xvi, 199, map.”

Not seen; title from Coues, Birds Col. Vall., App., 1878, p. 624. The Appendix is said to
contain zodlogical matter. (914.]

1837. HERAUSGEBER. G. Fr. Jiiger: iiber die fossilen Stingethiere, welche in Wiirt-
temberg aufgefunden worden sind. Erste Abtheilung. Stuttgart, 1835, 70
pp. und 9 lithogr. Tafeln in Fol. < Neues Jahrb. fiir Mineral., Geogn., Geol.
und Petrefakt., 1837, pp. 731-740.

Auszug. (915.]

1837. HERAUSGEBER. [Bemerkungen iiber die Anatomie des Pottfisches (Physeter
macrocephalus).] <Froriep’s Neue Notizen aus dem Gebiete der Natur- und Heil-
kunde, iv, No. 18, Dec. 1837, pp. 273-275.

Abstract von Bemerkungen des Hrn. Debell Bennett's in Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1836, pp.
127-129, [916.]

1837. (CO QETING, W. The | Natural History | ofthe | Ordinary Cetacea | or | Whales. |
[By Sir William Jardine, Bart., F. R. S., ete.] Illustrated by thirty-two col-
oured plates, | numerous wood- dant ately memoir | and portrait of Lacepede. |
Edinburg: | W. H. Lizars, 3, St. James’ Square; | 8. Highley, 32, Fleet Street,
London; and W. Curry, jun. and Co. Dublin. | 1837. [Or,] The | Naturalist’s
Library | conducted by | Sir William Jardine, Bart. | F. R.S8.E., F. L.S.,
&c. &c. | Mammalia. | Vol. VI. | On the | Ordinary Cetacea | or | Whales. |
“Ah! pour les peindre, il faudroit le pinceau de Buffon.” | Lacépede. |...
[=imprint asabove.] sm. 8°. pp. i-xvi, 17-264, pll. i-xxix-+iv*, frontispiece
(portrait of Lacépéde), and engraved title-page (figures of Narwal) = 382 pll.
Figg. in text.

Title-pages, four in number, pp. i-viili; Advertisement, pp. ix-xii; Contents, pp. xiii-xv;
Memoir of M. le Comte de Lacépéde, pp. 17-32; Introduction, pp. 33-42; Comparative Anatomy
_of the Cetacea, pp. 43-75; the Greenland Whale (Balena Mysticetus, Linn.), pp. 76-93, pl. ii; the
Northern Whale Fishery, pp. 93-98 (pl. iii, whale’s food) ; Proceedings and dangers in capturing
the Whale (pp. 99-121, pll. iv, iv*); Whale of the Southern Seas (Balena Australis, Desmoul.),
pp. 122-124; Rorqualus Borealis, Cuy., pp. 125-141, pl. v, animal, pl. vi, skeleton; the Lesser
Rorqual (Rorqualus Rostratus), pp. 142-146, pl. vii; Rorqual of the Southern Seas (Rorqualus
Australis, Cuv.), pp. 146-150; Fossile Rorquals, ete., pp. 150-153; the Spermaceti Whale (Phy-
seter Catodon, Linn.), pp. 154-169, pl. viii (from Robertson), pl. ix (from Beale); [South Sea
Fishery], pp. 169-180, pl. x, Dying Struggles of the Spermaceti Whale (from Beale) ; the Hetero-
dons, p. 181; the Narwhal, or Sea Unicorn (Narwhalus), pp. 182-190, pl. xi (from F. Cuvier), and
Vignette, p. iii; Diodons, or Two-teethed Whales, pp. 191-193— Diodon Desmaresti (p.191),
Diodon Sowerbi (p.192), pl. xii; Hyperoodon Honjloriensis, pp. 194-197, pl. xiii; Aodons— A.
Datei, Less., pp. 198-200, pl. xiv (from F. Cuvier); Xiphius—X. Planirostris (fossil), p. 201;
Third Subdivision, pp. 202, 203; the Beluga, or White Whale (Beluga), pp. 204-209, pl. xv;
Delphinapterus Peronii, pp. 210, 211, pl. xvi, from Quoy and Gaim.; the Deductor, or Ca’ing
Whale (Globiocephalus Deductor or Melas), pp. 212-219, pl. xvii, from Scoresby; the Globioce-
phalus Rissii, p. 219, pl. xviii, from F. Cuvier; Fossile Globiceps, pp. 220, 221; the Common
Porpoise (Phocena Communis), pp. 222-227, ot xix, fig. 1, from F. Cuvier; the Porpoise of
the Cape of Good Hope (Phocena Capensis Dussm.), p. 227, pl. xix, fig. 2, from F. Cuvier;
the Grampus (Phocena Grampus), pp. 228-232, pl. xx; the P{hocena]. Griseus, pp. 233, 234,
pl. xxi, from D'Orbigny; the Striped Porpoise (P{hoceena). Bivittatus), pp. 234, 235, pl. xxii,
fig. 2; Genus Delphinus, pp. 236-238; the Common Dolphin (Delphinus Delphis, Linn.), pp.
238-243, pl. xxiii, from Cuvier; Pernetty’s Dolphin (Delphinus Pernettii, Desm.), pp. 244-246,
pl. xxiv; Lead-coloured Dolphin (Delphinus Pluwmbeus, Dussm.), p. 246, pl. xxv, fig. 1; the
Bridled Dolphin (Delphinus Frenatus, Dussm.), p. 247, pl. xxv, fig. 2; Delphinus Supercilio-

552 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1837. JARDINE, W.—Continued.
sus, Less., pp. 248, 249, pl. xxvi, from Less. and Garn.; the Fuenas of the Chilians, p. 250, pl.
xxii, fig. 2; Delphinus Youngii (Fossile), p. 251; Reiners were of Breda (Delphinorhynchus
Bredanensis, Less.), p. 252, pl. xxvii, from Cuvier; the Soosoo of the Ganges (Soosoo Gange-
ticus, Less.), pp. 254-256, pl. xxviii; the Soosoo of M. De Borda (Soosoo Bordati, Fossile, Cuv.),
p. 257; I[nia]. Boliviensis, D’Orbigny, Fr. Cuvier, pp. 259-261, pl. xxix; the Rhinoceros
Whale (Oxyptcrus Rhinoceros, Less.), pp. 262-263, cut, from Quoy and Gaimard.

A popular general account of the Cetacea.

About 32 species are described and figured, arranged in 17 genera. The figures are copied
from those of previous authors, sometimes more or less altered in position, and embellished
with ‘‘appropriate scenery.’ In many cases the original sources are indicated. The tech-
nical names above given in parentheses are those adopted in the table of contents; these
generally correspond with the first name given in the body of the work in the lists of synon-
yms of the species, and the authority above added to the name 1s thence derived. [917.]

1837. McCuttocu, J. R. A | Dictionary, | practical, theoretical, and historical, |
of | Commerce | and’| Commercial Nayigation: | Illustrated with Maps and
Plans. | By J[ohn]. R[amsey]. McCulloch, Esq. | A New Edition. | Corrected
and improved: | With an enlarged Supplement, | containing many new Arti-
cles, and bringing down the information | contained in the work to | Decem-
ber, 1836. |— |... [=4 lines, quotation.] | — | London: | Printed for |
Longman, Rees, Orme, Brown, Green, and Longman. | MDCCCXXXVII.
Large 8°. pp. i-xvi, 1-1269,-+-1-118.

Whalebone, p. 1238. Whale (Common) [Balaena mysticetus], p. 1238. Whale-Fishery,
pp. 1238-1245. Whale Fishery (Southern), Suppl., p. 116. Whale Fishery (Northern),
Suppl., p. 117. [918.]

1837. PuscH, GEORG GOTTLIEB. Polens Paliiontologie | oder | Abbildung und Be-
schreibung | der | vorziiglichsten und der noch unbeschriebenen Petre-
fakten aus den | Gebirgsformationen in Polen, Volhynien und den Karpa-
then | nebst | einigen allgemeinen Beitrigen zur Petrefaktenkunde und
einem Versuch zur | Vervollstiindigung der Geschichte des europiiischen
Auer-Ochsen. | Von | Georg Gottlieb Pusch, | Mtinzmeister zu Warschan,
ehemaligen kénigl. polnischen Bergrath und Professor, Mitglied einiger
gelehrten Gesellschaften | zu Moskau, St. Petersburg, Paris, Dresden, Bres-
lau, Bonn und Altenburg. |—| Mit Abbildungen auf 16 lithographirten
Tafeln. | — | — | Stuttgart. | E. Schweizerbart’s Verlagshandlung. | 1837.
4°, pp. i-xili, 1-218.

Fossile Ueberreste von Wirbelthieren, pp. 167, 168. Riickenwirbel eines Meer-Sdugthiers

(pp. 167, 168, pl. xv, fig. 4) aus Jurakalk. Wahrscheinlich ein Cetaceen-Wirbel. [919.]
1837. Rapp, W. Die Cataceen | zoologisch-anatomisch dargestelt | von | Wilhelm
Rapp, Professor der Anatomie in Tibingen. | — | Mit Abbildungen. | — |

Stuttgart und Tiibingen, | Verlag der J. G. Cotta’schen Buchhandlung. |
1837. 8°. 1.1, pp. i-vi, 1-182, 1. 1, pll. i-viii.

Geschichtliches, pp. 3-20. I. Zoologischer Theil, pp. 21-58.

A. Pflanzenfressende Cetaceen (Sirenia, l.). 1. Manatus americanus Desmar., p. 25 (1.
senegalensis et latirostris, spp. dub.); 2. Halicore indica Desmar., p. 26; 3. Stellurus borealis
Desmar., p. 27.

B. Aechte Cetaceen. 1. Delphinus delphis Linn., p. 29; 2. D. longirostris Dussumier, p.
30; 3. D. velox Dussumier, p. 30; 4. D. Tursio Bonnat., p. 31; 5. D. capensis Gray, p. 31;
G6. D. plumbeus Dussumier, p. 32; 7%. D. superciliosus Lesson et Garnot, p. 32; 8. D. frena-
tus Dussumier, p. 32; 9. D. coeruleo-albus Meyen, p.33; 10. D. rostratus Cuv., p.33; 11. D.
dubius Gray, p.33; 12. D. Boryi Desmar., p.34; 13. D. lunatus Lesson et Garnot, p. 34;
14. D. Novae Zeelandiae Quoy et Gaimard, p. 34; 15. D. (Phocaena) globiceps Cuv., p. 34;
16. D. (Ph.) Rissoanus Cuv., p.36; 17. D. (Ph.) griseus G. Cuy., p. 36; 18. D. (Ph.) Pho-
caena Linn., p.36; 19. D. (Ph.) hastatus Fr. Cuvier, p.37; 20. D. (Ph.) eruciger Quoy et
Gaimard, p.38; 21. D. (Ph.) bivittatus Lesson et Garnot, p.39; 22. D. (Ph.) compressicauda
Lesson, p. 39; 23. D. (Ph.) obscurus Gray, p.39; 24. D. (Ph.) gladiator (=D. orea Fabr. non
Linn.), p.39; 25. D. (Delphinorhynchus) Geoffroyi Desmar., p. 40; 26. D. (D.) coronatus
Fréminville, p. 40; 27%. D. (D.) micropterus Cuv., p.40; 28. D. (Platanista) gangeticus Le-
beck, p. 41; 29. D. (Inia) Boliviensis d’Orbigny, p. 42; 30. .D. (Delphinapterus) leucas Pallas,

42; 31. D. (D.) leucorhamphus Péron, p.43; 32. D. (D.) phocaenoides Dussumier, p. 43;
33. D. (Heterodon) Dalei Lesson, p. 44; 34. D. (H.) Desmaresti Risso, p.45; 38. Monodon

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 553

1837. Rapp, W.—Continued.

1837.

1837.

1837.

1837.

1837.

1837,

1837.

1838.

monoceros Linn., p.46; 36. Physeter macrocephalus Shaw, p. 49; 37. Balaenoptera borealis
Lesson, p. 52; 38. B. longimana, p.55; 39. Balaena mysticctus Liun., p.55; 40. Balaena
antarctica Less., p. 58,—=spp. 40.

II. Anatomischer Theil, pp. 59-179. Von den Knochen, pp. 61-78. Von den Muskeln, pp.
79-91. Auge, pp. 92-97. Gehdrorgan, pp. 98-104. Nasenhohle, pp. 105-109. Allgemeine Be-
deckungen, pp. 110-114. Nervensystem, pp. 115-123. Verdauungswerkzeuge, pp. 124-145.
Athmungswerkzeuge, pp. 146-152. Harnwerkzeuge, pp. 153-155. Gefiisssystem, pp. 156-168.
Werkzeuge der Fortpflanzung, pp. 169-176.

Erklarung der Abbildungen, pp. 181,182. Erste Tafel, Eines 13 Par. Zolllangen Fétus des
Dugong (Halicore Indica). Zweite Tafel, Delphinus Oapensis, Gray. Dritte Tafel, Del-
phinus hastatus F. Cuy. Fig. A, von der Scite; fig. B, von unten. Vierte Tafel, Skelot
eines erwachsenen, miinnlichen Delphinus delphis aus dem mittelliindischen Meere. Fiinfte
Tafel, Skelet eines Delphinus Phocaena aus der Nordsee. Sechste Tafel, Der Magen der
Delphine in den verschiedenen Lebensperioden; drei Figuren. Siebente Tafel, Niere von
Delphinus delphis und eines fast reifen Fotus des Dugong. Achte Tafel, Herz des Dugong-
Fotus. Alle Figuren sind nach der Natur.

The historical introduction traces briefly the history of the subject from the time of per
totle to date, with copious references to the literature in foot-notes.

Theil I gives a carefully prepared synopsis of the species, with brief diagnoses, the prin-
cipal synonymy, and references to the more important works relating to the species. Theil
II is devoted to a general account of the anatomy of the Sirenians and Cetaceans, largely
from original investigation. The eight plates are based on material studied by the au-
thor. {920.]

Ratake, [M. H.]. Bemerkungen tiber ein angeblich bei Tannenberg gefun-
denes Schulterblatt eines Wallfisches. < Preuss. Provinz.-Bldtter, xviii, 1837,
562-565. [921.]

RAVIN, [F. P.]. Anatomische Beobachtungen tber die Barten, tiber deren Ein-
figungsweise in Bezug auf einander und auf die Gaumenhaut. <roriep’s
Neue Notizen, i, No. 3, Jan. 1837, pp. 33-40, figg. 16-25.

Aus Ann. des Sci. Nat., 2° sér., v, 1836, pp. 266-278, 1 pl. [922.]

REpDAcTEUR. [Notes sur ’anatomie de la Baleine au sperma-ceti (Physeter ma-
crocephalus, auct.), principalement sur sa dentition et sa structure ainsi que
VYaspect que présentent ses parties molles, par M. Debell Bennett.] <L’Jnsti-
tut, 5¢ ann., no. 221, novembre 1837, p. 359.

Résumé. [923.]

RICHARDSON, J. Report on North American Zoology. <ep. 6th Meeting Brit.
Ass. Adv. Sci. for 1836, v, 1837, pp. 121-224.
Ord. Cetacea, pp. 161, 162. Nominal list of 19 species of Sirenia and Cetacea. [924.]

“Suckow, G. A. Osteologische Beschreibung des Walles [ Balaena mysticetus].
Mannheim, C. Lamina, 1837. 4°. 5 pll.”
Not seen; title at second hand. [925.]

VANBENEDEN, [P. J.]. [== BENEDEN, P. J. VAN]. On the Specific Characters
of the larger Cetacea, as deduced from the Conformation of the Bones of the
Ear. <Ldinb. New Philos. Journ., xxii, 1837, p. 198.

From Compte Rendu, iii, 1833, pp. 400, 401. (926. ]

Vrouk, W. Ontleedkundige aanmerkingen over den Noordschen Vinvisch
(Balaenoptera rostrata), in de maand September desjaars 1835 te Wijk aan
Zee gestrand. < Vander Hoeven en de Vriese’s Tijdssch. voor Natuurk. Gesch. en
Phys., iv, 1837-38, pp. 1-24.

On various points in its anatomy. (927.]

Anon. Notices of some of the specimens of natural history, which were col-
lected during the voyage of the Morrison to Lewchew and Japan. < Chinese
Repository, vi, 1838, pp. 406-417.

Globiocephalus Rissii, pp. 411-413. Description of external characters with a page of ana-
tomical observations. [928.]

554 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1838. BAER, K. E. von. Untersuchungen tiber die ehemalige Verbreitung und die
giinzliche Vertilgung der von Steller beobachteten nordischen Seekuh (fytina,
Ml.). < Bull. de? Acad. imp. des Sci. de St.-Pétersbourg, iii, 1838, pp. 355-359.
Extrait en langue francais du mémoire de cet titre, imprimé dans les Mém. de la méme
acad. [929.]
1838. BENNETT, F. DEBELL. Ueber Physeter macrocephalus, besonders sein Gebiss.
<Tsis von Oken, 1838, pp. 217, 218.
Auszug aus Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., iv, 1836, pp. 127-129. [930.]
1838. BLAINVILLE, M. H. DE. Sur les Cachalots. < Ann. frang. et étrang. d@ Anat. et
de Phys., ii, 1838, pp. 335-337, pl. x.
Physeter breviceps, sp. n. (p. 337), pl. x, crane. [931.]
1838. BRESCHET, G. Apercu descriptif de Yorgane auditif du Marsouin (Delphinus
phocena L.). <Ann. des Sci. nat., 2° sér., Zool., x, 1838, pp. 221-229, pl. v.
1° Conduit auditif externe. 2° Ostympanal. 3° Cavitédutympan. 4° Oreille interne ou
labyrinthe. [932.]
1838. BRONN, HEINRICH GEORG. Lethaea Geognostica, | oder | Abbildungen und Be-
schreibungen | der | fiir die Gebirgs-Formationen bezeichnendsten | Verstei-
nerungen, | mit | lithographirten 47 Quart., 1 Folio-Tafel und 2 Tabellen, |

von | Heinrich Georg Bronn, |. . . [=titles, 7 lines.] | -— | Zweite Auflage. |
Zweiter Band, | das Kreide- und Molassen-Gebirge enthaltend. | — | Stutt-
gart. | E. Schweizerbart’s Verlagshandlung. | 1838. 8°. Il. 2, pp. 545-1346,
Il. 2.

Cetacea, pp. 1175-1177, pll. xliii, fig.6. Ziphius planirostris, p. 1176, pl. xliii, fig. 6. [933.]

1838. GLuGE, [THGOPHILE]. Sur la terminaison des nerfs.—1° Sur leur terminaison
dans la peau de la baleine. < bull. de V Acad. roy. des Sci. et Belles-lett. de
Bruzelles, v, 1838, pp. 20-25. , [934.]

1838. HUMBOLDT, ALEXANDER VON, und A. F, A. WIEGMANN. Ueber den Manati des
Orinoko. <Wiegmann’s Arch. fiir Naturgesch., 1838, Bd. i, 4. Jahrg., pp. 1-10,
pli. i, ii.

Aus dessen franzésischen Manuscripten iibersetzt mit Bemerkungen vom Dr. A. F. A.
Wiegmann. Sehe HUMBOLDT, A. v., Voyog. aux rg. équinoz., vi, p. 235, pll.

Detailed account of its external characters, with measurements, of the mouth parts, and
some account of its digestive tract, food, and habits. Pl. i gives views of the animal in pro-
file and from below; pl. ii, of the mouth, of the head from above and in profile, and an ideal
longitudinal section of the body. [935.]

1838. Kaup, J. J. [Ueber Zihnen von Halytherium und Pugmeodon aus Flonheim. }
< Neues Jahrb. fiir Mineral., 1838, p. 319, pl. ii, D. figg. 1, 2, C. figg. 1, 2.

o
Halytherium dubium ; Pugmeodon Schinzit. [936.]
1838. Kaup, J.J. [Ueber Zahnen von Halitherium.] < Neues Jahrb. fiir Mineral., 1838,
p. 536. [937.]

1838. ‘‘Knox, F. J. Catalogue of Anatomical Preparations illustrative of the Whale,
by F. J. Knox, Conservator of the Museum in Old Surgeons’ Hall. 8°.
Edinburgh, 1838.” :

Not seen; title and commentary here following from Gray (Cat. Mam. Brit. Mus., pt. i,
Cetacea, 1850).

“In 1828 Mr. I’. J. Knox, the Conservator of the Museum of the Old Surgeons’ Hall in
Edinburgh, published a catalogue of the Anatomical preparations of the Whale, in which he
gives many interesting details on the anatomy of the Balena maximus and B. minimus,
which had been stranded near Edinburgh, of the feetus of B. mysticetus from Greenland, and
of Delphinus Tursio (D. leucopleurus), D. Delphis and Phoceena communis, Soosoo gangeticus,
and Halicore Indicus; but the paper has been very generally neglected or overlooked,”’ (oc.
cit., p. 3).

“Mr. Knox (Cat. Prep. Whale) gives the best account of the development, position and
distinction between the baleen of the Whales of the North Sea which has come under my
observation” . .. (loc. cit., p. 7).

‘But the pamphlet in which these observations were published, being a mere guide to the

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 555

1838. ‘‘ Knox, F. J.”—Continued.
exhibition, has been overlooked, and I could only procure a copy last year after great trouble,
and from the family of the author” (loc. cit., p. 21).
Dr. Gray makes frequent quotations from this paper, which seems to be one of consider

able importance. [938.]

1838. Mryer, Herm. vy. [Halianassa.] <WNeues Jahrb. fiir Mineral., 1838, p. 667.
Halianassa, gen. n., zwischen Halicore und Manatus. [939.]
1838. OxEN,[L.]. Allgemeine | Naturgeschichte | fiir | alle St4nde, | von | Professor
Oken. | — | Siebenten Bandes zweyte Abtheilung, | oder | Thierreich, vierten
Bandes zweyte Abtheilung. | Siiugthiere 1. | — | Stuttgart, | Hoffmann’sche

Verlags-Buchhandlung. | 1838. 8°. pp. i-viii, 689-1432. :

Zweyte Stuffe. Obere Haarthiere. Vierte Ordnung. Hufthiere. [—Die Walfische,
Schweine und Rinder.] 10. Zunft. Die Wale oder Walfische, pp. 993-1115.

Historische Bemerkungen, pp. 995-1012.

A. Die fleischfressenden Wale (= Cetacca), pp. 1012-1091. a. Die Grossképfe. I. Genus.
Die Bartenwale. 1. Balena mysticetus, pp. 1014-1036; 1b. Nordcaper (B. glacialis, muscu-
lus), pp. 1036-1039; 1c. B. australis, p. 1039; 2. B. physalus, boops, musculus, rostrata, pp.
1039-1047.

II. Genus. Die Pottfische ... Physeter, pp. 1047, 1048. 1. Ph. macrocephatus, pp. 1049-1058.

. 1b. Ph. polycyphus, p. 1058.

C. Die Dinnkopfe, p.1059. IIT. Genus... Monodon,p.1059. 1. M. monoceros, pp. 1059-
1067. IV. Genus... Delphinus, pp. 1067-1070. a. Die Spitzképfe. 1. D. Delphis, p. 1070;
2. D. tursio, orca L., pp. 1070-1072; 3. D. gangeticus, p.1072. b. Stumpfképfe; 4. D. pho-
ceend, pp. 1072-1074; 5. D. aries, gladiator, orca, Fabr., pp. 1074-1078; 6. D. melas, globiceps,
pp. 1078-1085; [7.] D. leucas, albicans (Beluga), pp. 1085-1088; [8.] D. rostratus sive edentulus
(Hyperoodon), pp. 1088-1091.

B. Die pflanzenfressenden Wale (=Sirenia), pp. 1091-1115. V. Genus... Manatus.
1. UM. borealis (Rytina), pp. 1091-1098; 2. Manatus atlanticus, Trichechus manatus, pp.
1098-1106; 3. Die ostindische oder der Dujong (Halicore), pp. 1106-1115; 4. Dinotherium
gigantewm, p. 1115.

Genn. Cetac., 4; spp. 11.

The references to writers of the 15th to the 18th centuries are especially full, as well as to
the still earlier classic authors. Only the more important species are treated at length.
Several species are in some cases obviously confounded under the same specific designation.

[940.]

1838. OWEN, [R.]. [On the Anatomy of the Dugong.] <Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond.
1838, pp. 28-45.
Digestive Organs, pp. 29-34; Circulating System, pp. 34-36; Respiratory System, pp. 36-39;
Uropoietic System, p. 39; Generative System, pp. 30, 40; Osseus System, pp. 40, 41; Denti-
tion, pp. 41-43; Measurements of cranium, p. 44: external measurements and measurements
of intestines, p. 45. (941.]

1838, SeRRES, MARCEL DE. Note sur les animaux des terrains marins supérieurs dé-
couverts dans le solimmergé des environs de Montpellier. < Ann. des Sci. nat.,

2° sér., Zool., ix, 1838, pp. 281-292.
Mammiféres marins, pp. 285, 286. 1° Lamantins (Manatus Cuv.), 2? Dauphin & longue
symphyse, Cuvier, 2" bis. Dauphin trés voisin du Dauphin ordinaire (Delphinus Delphis), p.
285; 3° Dugong (Halicore medius), 4° Baleine (Balena), 5° Cachalots (Physeter), 6° Rorqual,
p. 286. [942.]

1838. THOMPSON, WILLIAM. Upon the Identity of Hunter’s Delphinus bidentatus,
Baussard’s Hyperoodon MHonfloriensis, and Dale’s Bottle Head Whale.
<Charlesworth’s Mag. Nat. Hist., 11, 1838, pp. 221-223.

All referred to Hyperoodon honjfloriensis (=H. bidens); brief account of the external charac-

ters and osteology of a specimen stranded at Hull, England. (943.]
1838, TRAILL, [T. S.]. Ueber einige Dinge bey den Cetaceen. <Jsis von Oken, 1833,
pp. 46, 47.

Auszug aus Uebersetzung aus Edinburgh New Phil. Journ., vol. xvii, 183, p. 177. [944.]

1838. TraiLt, [T. S.]. Ueber den Bau und die Verrichtung der Milchdrisen der
Wale. < Isis von Oken, 1838, pp. 47, 48.
Auszug aus dem Edinburgh New Phil. Journ., xvii, p. 263. [945.]

556 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

188. VroLik, W. Note surl’anatomie d’une Baleinoptere a bec (Baleenoptera rostrata)
échouée au mois de septembre de l’année 1835 sur les cétes de la Hollande, pres
du village de Wijk aan Zee. <Ann. des Sci. nat., 2° sér., Zool., ix, 1838, pp.
65-77. .

Description des viscéres de l’animal du sexe féminin. [946.]

1838. VROLIK, [W.]. Ueber die Anatomie einer Balaenoplera rostrata, die im Septbr.
1835 an der Hollandischen Kiuste strandete. <roriep’s Neue Notizen, vii, No.
152, Sept. 1838, pp. 304-313, 325-327. [947.]

1838. WATERHOUSE, G. R. Catalogue | of | the Mammalia | preserved in | the Mu-
seum | of | the Zoological Society | of London. | G. R. Waterhouse, | curator.

| — | Second edition. |— | London: | Printed by Richard and John E.
Taylor, | Red Lion Court, Fleet Street, | 1838. 8°. pp. 1-68.
Order IV, Cetacea, 4 spp., including Halicore Dugong. [948. j

1838. WATERHOUSE, [G. R.]. On a new Species of the genus Delphinus. < Proc.
Zool. Soc. Lond., 1838, pp. 23, 24.

Delphinus jitzroyi; external characters; measurements by Charles Darwin. ‘“ Habitat,

Coast of Patagonia, lat. 42° 30’ (April). {949.]

1838. WiEGMANN, A. F. A. [Ueber den amerikanischen Manati.] < Wiegmann’s
Arch. fiir Naturgesch., 1838, Bd. i, 4. Jahre., pp. 10-18.

Supplement to a paper entitled ‘‘Ueber den Manati des Orinoko,” by A. von Humboldt

(see 1838. HUMBOLDT, A. VON), translated from French MSS. of A. von Humboldt. The trans

lation is annotated by the translator. The supplement is devoted to a discussion of the num-

ber of species of Manati inhabiting the coasts and islands of America, maintaining ‘‘dass der

Manati Siidamerika’s von denen der westindischen Gewidsser specifisch verschieden ist.”” A

paragraph is also devoted to the etymology of the word Manati. [950. ]

1838. ‘‘ ZIMMERMANN, W. T. A. W. De zee, hare bewoners en wonderen. Uit het
Hoogd. Amst., 1838. 2dlIn. 8°.
““Zie aldaar: De walvische en de walvischvangst. 3e stuk. bl. 120-164.”
Not seen; title and reference from Bosgoed, op. cit., p. 253, no. 3614. [951.]

1838-39. KR@YER, HENRIK. Nogle Bemerkninger med Hensyn til Balznoptera ros-
trata. <Kr@yer’s Tidsskrift, ii, 1838-39, pp. 617-638, fig. in text, p. 627.
Synonymy, external characters (with detailed measurements), and osteology. [952.]
1839. A., M.S. Recherches sur la structure et la formation des dents des Squaloides.
< Rev. zool., 1839, pp. 369-370.
Analyse d’un mémoire de cet titre par M. Owen, presenté 4 |’Acad. roy. des Sci. de Paris,
séance du 16 décembre 1839. [953. ]
1839. ANoN. The Natural History of the Sperm Whale, &c. &c. To which isadded,
a Sketch of a South-Sea Whaling Voyage. By Thomas Beale, Surgeon.
<.Quart. Kev., |xiii, 1839, pp. 318-341, cuts.
Review of the work, with copious extracts. [954. ]
1839. ANoN. Histoire | naturelle | des Animaux | les plus remarquables de la classe
des Mammitéres | (Quadrupédes et Cétacés); par | un Naturaliste du Mu-
séum; | Ornée de soixante figures d’Animaux, | Dessinées et gravées par C.
Franc, peintre @histoire naturelle. | [Vignette.] Paris, | 4 la Libraire de
Piété, d’Education, Sciences, | Arts; et Magasin d’Objets Pieux | de J. Samson,
rue de Sévres, 17. | 1839. 129°. 11.2, pp. i-vili, 1-232, pl. i—xii.
Mammiféres édentés. §$ii. Cétacés, pp. 126-139, pl. vi, fig. 6, Dauphin, pl. visi, Cachalot.
[955.]
1839. BONAPARTE, C. L. Prodromus systematis Mastozoologie Caroli luciani Bona-
parte Muxiniani Principis. 8°. pp. 1-13.
The copy examined, although apparently complete, has neither title-page, imprint, nor
date. :
Ordo 4. Cete, pp. 4,5,=Familia 9, Manatide. Subfamilia 18, Manatina. Familia 10, Del-
phinide. Subfamilial9, Delphinina. Subfamilia 20, Monodontina. Familia1l, Physeteride.

Subfamilia 21, Physcterina. Familia 12, Balenide. Subfamilia 22, Balenina. Cum charic-
teribus. : [956. ]

1839,

1839.

1839.

1839.

1839,

1839.

1859.

1839.

1839.

1839.

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. Sat

BRUNO, GIOVANNI DomeENtco. Illustrazione di un nuovo Cetaceo fossile,
<Mem. della Reale Accad. delle Scienze di Torino, ser. 2, i, 1839, pp. 143-160,
pli. i, ii.

Part of skull, numerous vertebri, ribs, etc., ofa Sirenian. Ohierotherium, gen. n., p. 160.

(957. ]

Desm., E. [=?Desmarest, E.]. Stellére, Stellurus. <Dict. pittor. d Hist. nat.
et des Phénom. de la Nature, ix, 1839, livr. delxii, p. 173.

Stellurus [=Rhytina] borealis. (958. ]

DumortigER, B. C. Mémoire sur le Delphinorhynque microptére échoué 4 Os-
tende. <Now. Mém. de V Acad. roy. des Sci. et Belles-lett. de Bruxelles, xii,
1839. 17 pp. 3 pll.

Caractéres externes et ostéologiques, et sur les organes internes. Pl. i, Delphinorhynque
microptére, vude céte. Pl.ii, Son squelette. Pl. iii, Appareil hyoide, oreille osseuse, syst¢me
urinaire, le cceur, la queue, vue en dessus. [959.]

Epirors. The Natural History of the Sperm Whale. By Thomas Beale... .
London, Van Voorst, 1839. <Charlesworth’s Mag. Nat. Hist., iii, 1839, pp.
249-252,

Review of the work. [960.]

HARLAN, [R.]. Notice sur le Basilosaure et sur le Batrachiosaure. < Ann. des
Sci. nat., 2° sér., Zool., xii, 1839, p. 221.

Basilosaurus, ‘‘un noveau genre de Sauriens.” Voyez 1839. OWEN, R. Sur le genre Basilo

saurus, Harlan. [961.]

HARLAN, RicwarpD. [Sur le Basilosaurus.] < Bull. Soc. géol. de France, x, 1839,
p. 89.

In an abstract of a letterto M. Verneuil. Doubts Basilosawrus being a true Saurian. [962.]
Haran, [RicwarpD]. [Sur les affinités du Basilosaurus, etc.] <Bull. Soc. géol.
de France, x, 1839, p. 91. [963.]
HERAUSGEBER. R. Harlan: tiber die Entdeckung des Basilosaurus und des
Batrachiosaurus (Lond. Edinb. Phil. Mag., 1839, xix, 302). <Neues Jahrb. fiir
Mineral., Geogn., Geol. und Petrefakt., 1839, pp. 622, 623.
Auszug. (964. ]
HERAUSGEBER. R. Owen: Beobachtungen tiber die Zihne des Zeuglodon, Har-
lan’s Basilosaurus ([ Lond. Edinb. Phil. Mag., 1839], 8. 302-307). <Newes Jahrb.
yiir Mineral., Geogn., Geol. und Petrefakt., 1839, pp. 623-626.
Auszug. [965.]
LEIBLEIN, V. Grundziige | einer | methodischen Uebersicht | des | Thierrei-
ches | nach seinen Classen, Ordnungen, Familie’n und | Gattungen, nebst

Aufziihlung ihrer Haupt- | Reprisentanten. | — | Ein Leitfaden beim zoologi-
schen Studium. | Von | V. Leiblein, |. . . [=titles, 5 lines.] | — | Erstes
Bindchen. | Der Mensch und die Saugethiere. | — | Wiirzburg. | InCommission
der Stahel’schen Buchhandlung. | — | 1839. <Berichte | vom | zoologischen

Museum | der kéniglichen | Julius-Maximilians Universitiit | zu Wiirzburg, |
enthaltend | eine methodische Uebersicht der Thiere | dieser Sammlung. |
Vom | Conservator dieses Attribut’s | Prof. Dr. V. Leiblein. | — | Erster Be-
richt. | Eine kurze Geschichte des zoologischen Museum’s, nebst | Aufriss der
Anordnung im Allgemeinen, und die | Aufziihlung der Siiugethiere umfassend.
| — | Wiirzburg. | Druck der Carl Wilhelm Becker’schen Universitiits-Buch-
druckerei. | — | 1839. 8°. Il. 4, pp. 1-182.

Il. Wassersiiugethiere. IX. Ordnung. Cetacea. Fischzitzthiere.

A. Pflanzenfressende, Herbivora. 1. Fam. Halicorea, Sirener. 2. Fam. Rytinea, Borken-
walle.

B. Fleischfressende, Carnivora. 3. Fam. De|l]phinoidea. Delphine. 4. Fam. Balaenodea,
Bartenwalle.

Sirenia:—1. Manatus americanus, 2. M. Senegalensis, 3. Halicore Dugong, p. 165; 4.
Rytina Stelleri, p. 167. (Between Halicore and Ihytina is interpolated the extinct genus
Dinotherium.) ;

Cetacea:—1. Delphinus Delphis, 2. D. Phocaena, 3. D. cruciger, 4. D. albigena, 5. D.
gangeticus, p. 168; 6. Oxypterus Mongitori, 7. O. Rhinoceros, 8. Delphinapterus leucorham-

558

1839.

1839.

1839.

1839.

1839.

1839.

1839.

1839.

1839.

1839,

1839.

1840.

1840.

BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

LEIBLEIN, V.—Continued. :
phus, 9. Epiodon Urganantus (Raf.), 19. Ancylodon groenlandicus (= Monodon spurius,
Fabr.), 11. Monodon Monoceros, p. 169; 1. Physeter macrocephalus, 13. P. polycyphus,
14. P. Trumpo, 15. P. cylindricus, 16. Mular (Klein) Tursio, 17. M. microps, p. 170; 18.
Balaena Mysticetus, 19. Balaenoptera Physalus, 20. B. longimana, 21. B. rostrata, p.171.

[966.]
Meyer, Herm. v. [Pugmeodon Schinzii Kaup gehort zu Halianassa Studeri
Meyer.] <Neues Jahrb. fiir Mineral., 1839, p. 77. [997.]

MEYER, HERMANN Vv. Die fossilen Saiigethiere, Reptilien und Vogel aus den
Molasse-Gebilden der Schweitz. <Neucs Jahrb. fiir Mmeral., 1839, pp. 1-9.
Cetaceen, p. 4: Halianassa Studeri, H. v. Meyer, und ein ungestimmt Genus. [968.]
MITCHELL, T. L. Three Expeditions | into the interior of | Eastern Australia; |
with descriptions of the recently explored region of | Australia Felix, and of
the present Colony of New South Wales: | Major TL homas]. L[ivingston].
Mitchell, F. G.S. & M.R.G.S. | Surveyor-General. | [Vignette.] Second

Edition, carefully revised. | — | In two volumes. | Vol. I [-II]. | London: |
T. & W. Boone, New Bond Street. | MDCCC XXXIX. 2 vols. 8°. pll.and
maps.

Whale Fishery, ii, p. 241; A Whale-chase, pp. 242, 243. [669. ]

OwEN, R. Recherches sur la structure et la formation des dents des Squaloides,
et application des faits observés 4 une nouvelle théorie du développement des
dents. <(Ann. des Sci. nat., 2° sér., Zool., xii, 1839, pp. 209-220, pl. ix. [970.]

OweEN, R. Observations sur les dents du Zeuglodon (Basilosaurus du Dt. Harlan).
<Ann. des Sci. nat., 2° sér., Zool., xii, 1839, pp. 222-229.
Zeuglodon, gen. n. = Basilosaurus, Harlan. [971.]
Owen, [R.]. Ueber die Zihne des Zeuglodon, Harlans Basilosaurus. <Isis von
Oken, 1839, pp. 602-604.
Uebersetzung aus dem London and Edinburgh Phil. Mag. and Journ. Sci., xiv, April, 1839,
p. 302. [972.]
OWEN, RICHARD. Ueber die Zihne des Zeuglodon, Basilosaurus des Dr. Harlan.
<Froriep’s Neue Notizen, x, no. 210, Mai 1839, pp. 177-182.
Aus London and Edinb. Phil. Mag., xiv, April, 1839, p. 302. [973.]
OWEN, RICHARD. Observations on the teeth of the Zeuglodon, Basilosaurus of
Dr. Harlan. <Charlesworth’s Mag. Nat. Hist., iii, 1839, pp. 209-213.
From Proc. Geol. Soc. Lond.; iii, 1838-42 (1839), pp. 24-28.
Shows the genus Basilosaurus to be Mammalian and not Saurian, and ‘‘proposes to sub-
stitute for the name of Basilosaurus that of Zeuglodon” (p. 213). [974.]
RICHARDSON, WILLIAM. On the Fossil Remains of Cetacea. <Charlesworth’s
Mag. Nat. Hist., iii, 1839, pp. 98, 99.
Account of Cetacean vertebre from the brick earth of Herne Bay, Kent, England. [975.]
THompson, B. F. History of Long Island; | containing | An Account | of the |
Discovery and Settlement; | with other | important and interesting matters |
to the | Present Time. | By Benjamin F. Thompson, | Counsellor at Law. |...
[= quotation, 5 lines.] | New York: | Published by E. French, 146 Nassau
Street. 1839. 8°. pp. i-x, 11-536, 2 pil.
Whaling business of Southampton (Sag Harbor), pp. 221-224. A brief, partly statistical,
account. : . [976. ]
Barr, K. E. von. Untersuchung tiber die ehemalige Verbreitung und die giinz-
liche Vertilgung der von Steller beobachteten nordischen Seekuh (#ytina I11.).
<Mém. de V Acad. imp. des Sci. de St.-Pétersbourg, vie sér., Sci. Nat., iii, 1840,
53-80. [977.]
BENNETT, F. DEBELL. Narrative | of a | Whaling Voyage | round the Globe, |
from the year 1833 to 1836. | Comprising sketches of | Polynesia, California,
the Indian Archipelago, | etc. | With an Account of | Southern Whales, the
Sperm Whale Fishery, | and | the Natural History of the Climates visited. |
By | Frederick Debell Bennett, Esq. F. R. G. 8. | Fellow of the Royal College
of Surgeons, London. | In two Volumes. | Vol. I [-II]. | London: | Richard

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SIRENIA. 559

1840. BENNETT, F. DeBELL—-Continued.
Bentley, New Burlington Street, | Publisher in Ordinary to Her Majesty. | — |
1840. 2vols. 8°. Vol.i, pp. i-xv, 1-402; vol. ii, pp. i-vii, 1-395. Map, wood-
cuts, and a fronticepiece plate to each volume.

Vol. i contains a Zodlogical Appendix, nearly 100 pp. of which are devoted to Cetaceans,
to wit:

Chap. I. General Remarks on Whales, pp. 145-152. Chap. If. Whales of the Southern
Oceans (general aud anatomical description of the Cachalot, or Sperm Whale [‘' Oatodon ma-
crocephalus, Lacep.”], its diseases, deformities. and parasites), pp. 153-170, fig. Chap. IIT. Nat-
ural history and habits of the Cachalot; Geographical distribution of the species; Natural
indications of its places of resort, pp. 171-183. Chap. IV. Historical notice of Sperm Whale
Fishery; commercial details; eauipmest of vessels, etc., pp. 184-201. Chap. V. Pursuit and
capture of the Sperm Whale, pp. 202-212. Chap. VI. Dangers of the Sperm Whale Fishery,
pp. 213-222. Chap. VII. Commercial products of the Sperm Whale Fishery, pp. 223-228.
Chap. VIII. Southern Whales (concluded), pp. 229-241.—Balena Australis, Desm., pp. 229-
231. Balenoptera sp. (Humpback of southern whalers), pp. 231, 232. Phocena sp. (Black
Fish of South Sea whalers), pp. 233-235, fig. Delphinus Peronii Lacép., pp. 235-237, fig. Del-
phinus delphis, pp. 237, 288. The Grampus, p. 238. Fin-backs, Cow-fish, and Killers, pp.

239-240.
There are also in vol. i various references to Sperm Whales and other Cetaccans, relating
mainly to their capture. (978. ]

1840. CHRISTOL, J. DE. Recherches sur divers ossemens fossiles attribués par Cuvier
a deux espéces d’Hippopotames et rapportés au Métaxytherium, nouveau
genre de Cétacés de la famille des Dugongs. <ev. zool., 1840, p. 283.
Résumé par d'auteur d’un mémoire de ce titre. [979.]
1840. CurRisToL, J. DE. Recherches sur divers ossements fossiles attribués par Cuvier
& deux Phoques, au Lamantin, et 4 deux espéces d’Hippopotames, et rap-
portés au Metaxytherium, noveau genre de Cétacé de la famille des Dugongs.
<LI’ Institut, 8° ann., no. 552, 24 sept. 1840, pp. 322, 323.

Résumé. [980.]
1840. Conran, T. A. On the Geognostic position of the Zeuglodon, or Basilosaurus
of Harlan. < Am. Journ. Sci. and Arts, xxxviii, 1840, pp. 381, 382. [981.]
1840. [Dana, Ricwarp H., Jr.] Two Years | Before the Mast. | A | personal narra-
tive of | Life at Sea. |—|...[=poetry, 6 lines.] | — | New York: | Har-

per & Brothers—82 Cliff Street. | — | 1840. 12°. pp. 1-482.

Breathing of ‘‘shoals of sluggish whales and grampuses,” near Falkland Islands, de-
scribed, p. 36. Whales off San Pedro, Lower California, pp. 169, 170.
There are numerous later editions. In that of 1876, the passages above cited occur at pp.
30 and 156, 157. [982.]
1840. Denny, Henry. Sketch of the Natural History of Leeds and its vicinity for
Twenty Miles. <Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., v, July, 1840, pp. 382-396.
Occurrence of Delphinus Phocena and Delphinus Orca, recorded, p. 386. [983. ]
1840. Eptrors. [Notice of an extinet Dolphin, Delphinus karsteni, Yon Olbers.]
<Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., v, May, 1840, p. 151.
Based on a skull from near Biinde, Westphalia. [984. ]
1840. E1cHWALD, Ep. Notice sur l’opuscule qui a pour titre: Le Monde primitif de
la Russie. < Bull. de la Soc. imp. des Nat. de Moscou, 1840, pp. 473-487.
Delphinus priscus, pp. 474, 481-483. [985.]
1840. EicuHwaLp, Epuarp. Die] Urwelt BReslande. | durch Abbildungen erleu-
tert | von | Eduard Eichwald, | der Phil., Med. und Chir, Dt, Akademiker
und gelehrten Secretarien | der St. Petersburgischen Med. Chir. Akademie

u.s. w. | Erstes Heft. | — | Aus den Schriften der kaiserlichen St. Petersbur-
gischen mineralogischen Gesellschaft besonders abgedruckt. |— | Mit 4
lithographischen Tafeln. |— | Aus dem russichen uebersetzt. | — | St.

Petersburg. | Gedruckt in der Druckerei des Journal de Saint-Pétersbourg.
| —| 1840. 4°. Il. 2, pp. 1-106, pll. i-iv.
II. Beschreibung einiger Knochen des Ziphius priscus, pp. 25-53, pll. i, ii (Wirbelbeine,
zwei Bruchstiicke des Unterkiefers, ein Bruchstiick der ersten Rippe, und Fingerknochen).
Ziphius priscus, sp. D. [986.]

560 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1840. Escuricut, [D. F.]. [Over Delphinernes og Sxlhundes Karsystemer.] < ér-
handlingar vid det af Skandinaviska Naturforskare och Lakare hdllna Mote %
Gothberg ar 1839 (1840), pp. 135, 136. j [987.]

1840. Gossz, P. H. The | Canadian Naturalist. | A Series of conversations | on the |
Natural History of Lower Canada. | By | P[hilip]. H[enry]. Gosse. | Cor.
Mem. of the Nat. Hist. Soc. of Montreal, and of the | Lit. and Hist. Sec. of
Quebec. | [Vignette.] ‘‘Every kingdom, every province, should have its
own monographer.” | Gilbert White. | Illustrated by forty-four Engravings. |
London: John Van Voorst, 1, Paternoster Row. | M. DCCC. XL. 8°. pp. i-

xii, 1-372.
Observations on the habits of Delphinus canadensis (= Beluga catodon) and D. delphis at
pp. 171-174. ; [988.]

1840. GraTEeLovp, [J. P. S. pr]. Description | dun fragment de.machoire fossile, |
D’un genre nouveau de reptile (Saurien), de taille gigantesque, | voisin de
VIguanodon, trouvé dans le Grés marins, 4 Léognan, | prés Bordeaux (Gi-
ronde); | Par le docteur Grateloup. 8°. pp. 1-8, 1pl. [Bordeaux, le 1 mai
1840. Imprimerie d’H. Gazay, rue Gouvion 15. ]

Squalodon, gen. n., p.8. This is the original place of description of the genus Squalodon,
here regarded as Saurian, but later identified as Cetacean, and the basis of the Squalodon
grateloupt, auct. [989.]

1840. GraTELOouP, [J. P. S. pr]. Considérations générales sur la Géologie et la
Zoologie fossile de la commune de Léognan, prés Bordeaux. Discours pro-
noncé d Voceasion de la féte linnéenne célébrée le 25 juin 1840. < Act. Soe.
linn. de Bordeaux, xi, 1840, pp. 335-346.

Squalodon, gen. n., p. 346. Also refers to the occurrence of remains ‘‘des Dauphins et au-

tres Cétacés.” [990.]

1840. HarLaNn, [RicHarp]. [On the Discovery of the Basilosaurus and the Batra-
chiosaurus.] < Proc. Geol. Soc. Lond., i, 1840, pp. 23, 24. .

Abstract. [991.]

1840. HrrausaeBrer. E. Eichwald: die Urwelt Russlands durch Abbildungen er-
liiutert, Heft I, 73 SS, 8° mit 4 lithogr. Tafeln, auf Kosten der mineralog.
Gesellsch. in Petersb. 1840. < Neues Jahrb. fiir Mineral., Geogn., Geol. und
Petrefakt., 1840, pp. 731, 732.

Notiz. [992. ]

1840. Herauscesrer. G. D. Bruno: Beleuchtung eines neuen fossilen Cetaceum.
(Mem. d. Accad. di Turino, Class. Mat. Fis. B, 1 [20 Seiten] tab. 1, 2.)
< Neues Jahrb. fiir Mineral., 1840, pp. 496-501.

Auszug. [993.]

1840. HERAUSGEBER. Harlan: iiber einige fossile Wirbelthiere Nord Amerika,
(Bullet. géol., 1839, x, 89,90). < Neues Jahrb. fiir Mineral., 1840, pp. 741, 742.

Enthalt Bemerkungen iiber Basilosaurus, p. 741. [994. ]

1840. Jounson, [H.]. Ueber den flaschennasigen Walfisch (Hyperoodon). < _Iroriep’s

_ Neue Notizen aus dem Gebiete der Natur-und Heilkunde, xv, No. 4, Juli 1840,
Pp. 58.

External measurement, etc., of a specimen taken near Liverpool. [995 ]

1840. JoHNSON, HENRY. Bottle-nosed Whale. <Ann.and Mag. Nat. Hist., v, Julys
1840, pp. 361, 362. Communicated, with a note, by Wm. Thompson.

Description of a specimen of Hyperoodon butzkopf taken near Liverpool, Feb., 1840. [996.]

1840. Kaur, J. J.» Notizen iiber die fossilen sogenannten Gras-fressenden Wale.
< Neues Jahrb. fiir Mineral., ete., 1840, pp. 673-676.

Gegen Christol (Ann. des Sci. nat., 1834, ii, 257) tiber den Cuvierschen Hippopotamus
medius und H. dubius. Synonymie yon Halitherium Cuviert Kaup und Halicore Cuviert
Christol, p. 675.

Pontotherium, gen. n. = Cheirotherium Christol, ein schon vergebenen Name. Manatus fos-
silis Cuvier= Pugmeodon Schinzii Kaup. [997.]

ALLEN’S BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CETACEA AND SJRENIA. 561

\1840. Keyseriine, A. Grar, und J. H. Buasius. Die | Wirbelthiere | Europa’s. |

Von | A. Graf Keyserling und Professor J. H. Blasius. | — | Erstes Buch: |
Die unterscheidenden Charactere. | — | Braunschweig, | Druck und Verlag
von Friedrich Vieweg und Sobn. | — | 1840. 8°. Il. 4, pp. i-xeviii, 1-248.

Systematisches Verzeichniss der Europdischen Saugethiere, pp. i-xxiv. COetacea, pp. xxii-
Xxiv, spp. 158-175 —=18 spp.

Erstes Buch. Die unterscheidenden Charactere, pp. 1-248. Siugethiere, pp. 3-75. Ce-
tacea, pp. 72-75. Genn. 57-65, spp. 158-175.' 1. Delphinorhynchus coronatus; 2. D. microp-
terus; 3. D. Delphis; 4. D. rostratus; 5. D. Tursio; 6. Phocaena communis; %. Ph.
Orca; 8. Ph. Melas; 9. Ph. Rissoana; 10. Ph. grisea; 11. Delphinapterus Leucas; 12.
Heterodon diodon; 13. H. Desmarestii; 14. Ocratodon Monodon; 15. Physeter macroce-
phalus; 16. Balaenoptera longimana; 1%. B. Boops; 18. Balaena Mysticetus. [998. }

1840. [LANMAN, JAMES H.]. The American Whale Fishery. <Hunt’s Merchants’
Mag., iii, 1840, pp. 361-394, cuts.

An outline history of the Whale fishery as conducted in the United States, recounting its

origin and progress, with an account of modes of capture (giving cuts of the implements

used), and the preparation of the products. [999.]
1840. Mryvrer, Herm. v. [Ueber Halianassa-Reste.] <Neues Jahrb. fiir Mineral.,
ete., 1840, p. 587 (6 Zeilen). [1000. ]

1840. Meyer, Herm. v. [Ueber Cheirotheriwm Bruno und Squalodon Grateloup. |
< Neues Jahrb. fiir Mineral., etc., 1840, pp. 587, 588.

Oheirotherium subapenninum ist Halianassa (—Halitherium). Squalodon ist nicht ein
Saurier-Genus, wie Grateloup glaubt, aber ein fleischfressenden Zetazeen. [1001.]
1840. NORDMANN, ALEXANDER VON. Voyage | dans la | Russie Méridionale | et la
Crimée, | par la Hongrie, la Valachie et la Moldavie. | Exécuté en 1837, sous
la direction | De M. Anatole de Demidoff, | par MM. de Sainson, le Play, Huot,
Léveillé, Raffet, Rousseau, de Nordmann et du Ponceau; | Dédié aS. M. Nicolas
Jer, Empereur de toutes les Russies. | Tome premier [ —-quatriéme]. | [Arms. ]
. Paris, | Ernest Bourdin et C2, Editeurs, | 51, Rue de Seine Saint-Germain. | — |
1840[-1842]. 4 vols. 4°. Vols. i, iii, 1840; vols. ii, iv, 1842. Avec Atlas in

fol. 3
Observations sur la Faune Pontique, [par A. von Nordmann], —vol. iii, 1840.—Catalogue
raisonné des Mammiféres de la Faune Pontique, ibid., pp. 9-65.—Cetacea: 1. Delphinus Pho-
cena, p. 64. 2. Delphinus tursio, p. 65. 3. Delphinus delphis, p. 65. [1002.]
1840. OwEN, RicHaRD. Observations on the Teeth of the Zeuglodon, Basilosaurus of
Dr. Harlan. <Proc. Geol. Soc. Lond., i, 1840, pp. 24-28.
Abstract. [1003.]

1840. Scuinz, H. Europiiischen Fauna | oder | Verzeichniss der Wirbelthiere |
Europa’s | von | Dr. Heinrich Schinz |... [= titles, 8 lines.] | — | Erster
Band. | Siiugethiere und Végel. | — | Stuttgardt. | C. Schweizerbarts Verlags-

handlung. j 1840. 8°. pp. i-xxiv, 1-448.

Achte Ordnung. . . Cetasea (sic), pp. 90-96. 1. Delphinus Delphin (sic), p. 91; 2. Del-
phinus Tursio, p. 91; 3. Delphinus phocaena, p. 91; 4. Delphinus griseus Cuv., p. 92; 5. Del-
phinus Rissoanus, p.92; 6. Delphinus globiceps, p. 92; '7- Delphinus Feres Bonnat., p. 93; S-
Delphinus Dalei, p. 93; 9. Delphinus Epiodon (=Epiodon Urganantus, Rafin.), p. 93; 10.
Delphinus leucas, p. 94; 11. Monodon Monoceros, p. 94; 12. Physeter Tursio, p. 94; 13.
Physeter macrocephalus, p. 95; 14. Balaena physalus, p. 95; 15. Balaena Boops, p. 96;

16. Balaena musculus, p. 96. [1004. ]
1840. Serres, Marcet pr. [Note sur la découverte d’un squelette entier de Metaxy-
therium.] <L’ Institut, 8° ann., no. 360, 19 nov. 1840, p. 392. [1005.]

1840. SwreTING, R. H. Dimensions and Description of a supposed new species of
Balenoptera, stranded at Charmouth Beach, February 5, 1840. <Charles-
worth’s Mag. Nat. Hist., iv, 1840, pp. 341-343.

Balenoptera tenuirostris, sp. n. Account of its external characters and brief notice of its
skeleton. (1006. ]

1840. SWEETING, R. H. Notes relating to a female Rorqual Whale (Balenoptera boops
of authors). <Proc. Zoél. Soc. Lond., 1840, pp. 11,12. Ann. and Mag. Nat.
Hist., vi, Dec., 1840, pp. 301, 302.

Brief account of external characters and osteology. Communicated by W. Yarrell. [1007.]

36 GB

562 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

1840. SwrereTine, R. H. Ona Species of Balenoptera stranded on Charmouth Beach.
<Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., vi, Sept., 1841, p. 72. ‘
Correcting errors in former communications (see Charles. Mag. Nat. Hist., iv, 1840, pp.
341-343) on the same specimen, and stating his conviction ‘that it is nothing more nor less”
than the Rorqual, Balenoptera boops. , [1008.]
1840. THOMPSON, WILLIAM. Note on the Occurrence at various times of the Bottle-
nosed Whale (Hyperoodon Butzkopf, Lacep.) on the coast of Ireland; and on
its nearly simultaneous appearance on different parts of the British coast in
the autumn of 1839. <Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., iv, Feb., 1840, pp. 375-381.
Account of the capture of seven individuals at different times and places, with notice of
habits, dimensions, etc. [1009.]
1840. THOMPSON, WILLIAM. Additions to the Fauna of Ireland. < Ann. and Mag.
Nat. Hist., v, March and June, 1840, pp. 6-14, 245-257.
Notice of the occasional stranding of herds of Delphinus melas, Traill, p. 6. [1010.]
1840. Vrowik, W. Anatomische Bemerkungen uber den nordischen Finnfisch (Ba-
lenoptera rostrata), welcher im Sept. 1835. zu Wyk aan Zee gestrandet ist.
<sis von Oken, 1840, pp. 370-372.
Auszug aus Tijdschrift for natuurlijke Geschiedeniss, uitgegeven door van der Hoeven en
de Briese, iv, 1837. [1011.]
1840. WILDE, —. Wie das Junge der Cetaceen, wihrend es an den Zitzen hangt,
athmen kénne? < Froriep’s Newe Notizen, xv, No. 316, Juli 1840, pp. 121, 122.
Beantworten der Frage. |[1012.]
1840. YARRELL, W. See 1840. SWEETING, R. H., title no. 1007.

1840-45. OWEN, RICHARD. Odontographpy; | or, a | Treatise | on the | Comparative
Anatomy of the Teeth; | their physiological Relations, Mode of Development, |
and | Microscopic Structure, inthe | Vertebrated Animals. | By Richard Owen,
F.R.S. |. . . [= titles, 2 lines.] | Volume I. | — | Texte. | [Volume II | — |
Atlas | containing one hundred and sixty-eight Plates.] | — | London: | Hip-
polyte Bailliere, Publisher, | Foreign Bookseller to the Royal College of Sur-
geons. | 219, Regent Street. | Paris: J. B. Bailliére Libraire de ’ Académie de
Médecine. | Leipzig: T. O. Weigel, | 1840-1845. Roy. 8°. pp. i-xx, 1. 1, pp.
i-lxxiv, 1-655. Atlas, Roy. 8°. pp. 1-37, pll. 1-150, + 1bis, 2bis, 62bis, 62ter, ©
63bis, 63ter, 64bis, 64ter, 65bis, 65ter, 70bis, T3bis, 75bis, 87bis, 89bis, 113bis,
119bis, 122bis = 168.

Teeth of Cetacea, pp. 845-372, pll. Ixxxvii, IxxxviiA., ]xxxviii, lxxxix, lxxxix A., xci-xcvii
(includes Sirenia). Pl. lxxxvii, Narwhal, skull, two examples, male and female, from below,
after Home. Pl. lxxxvii A., Balenoptera boops (‘‘Balena” on plate), fig. 1, alveolar groove
of foetal specimen, figg. 2-6, teeth, nat. size, from Eschricht; fig. 7, Platanista, lower jaw,
and two detached teeth, the latter nat. size. Pl. lxxxviii, fig. Hyperoodon, beak from below,
fig. orig.; fig. 2, Delphinus delphis, part of lower jaw, fig. orig. Pl. lxxxix, Cachalot (Physeter
macrocephalus), lower jaw and teeth, figg. orig. Pl. lxxxix, ibid., mag. sections of tooth, fig.
orig. Pl. xci, Zeuglodon cetoides, mag. sections of tooth, figg. orig.

Sirenians, pp. 364-372, pll. xcii-xevii; Halicore, pp. 364-371; Manatus, p. 371; Halitheriwm,
p.372. Pl. xcii, Dugong (‘‘ Halicore indicus’’), lower jaw, fig. orig. Pl. xciii, ibid., fig. 1, upper
jaw; fig. 2, part of lower jaw; figg. 3-6, teeth; figg. from Home. Pl. xciv, ibid., transverse
section of molar, fig. orig. Pl. xev, ibid., section of tusk, fig. orig. Pl. xevi, figg. 1-3, Ma-
natus americanus, teeth. Pl. xcvii, Halitheriwm brocchii, fragment of upper jaw, part of
lower jaw, and detached teeth. {1013. |

Art. XIX.—New Moths, with Partial Catalogue of
Noctuz.

By A. R. Grote, A. M.

From the tender green of the young grass in spring time, to the
hard and brilliant red of the autumn leaf, the moths carry upon their
wings nature’s palette, full of colors the most various and beautiful.
Like flying flowers, stem-forsaking when the sun takes the day from
the circling earth, they haunt the darkness with unquiet wings. The
human mind dwells with pleasure, from an esthetic point of view, upon
their various tints and forms. As objects of scientific inquiry, they are
interesting for the curious changes they undergo and for their structure
and habits. In studying their distribution we find that they depend
upen soil, vegetation, and climate, and that they even suggest and con-
firm observations made upon the probable past condition of the earth’s
surface by their presence in particular localities. The importance of
studying them is not diminished by their frail appearance and brief
lives. Indeed, they have additionally attracted a class of writers whose
minds seem to be fitted for very different occupation, and it is to be
hoped that they may even succeed in giving a fresh illustration of the
fairy tale of Beauty and the Beast.

TRIPUDIA BASICINEREA 0. 8.

Head, thorax, and base of fore wings gray. Primaries washed out,
wardly, beyond the middle, with light leather brown. A media curved.
broad, velvety black line, broken above. Reniform round, concolorous, a
little paler brown. Subterminal line irregular, waved, fuscous. .A dark
brown terminal line. A pale line at base of blackish fringes. Costal
dots. Hind wings pale fuscous; beneath stained with ochery, with
double, vague, common lines. Arizona, B. Neumoegen. Expanse 20
mil.

Larger than the two other species quadrifera of Zeller and flavofasci-
ata of Grote. The latter is probably described recently by Mr. Hy-
Edwards as Oribates versutus.

EUCLIDIA INTERCALARIS N. 8.

2. Gray, dusty, color of erechtea. Fore wings with four median tri-
gonate black patches separated by the veins, and a median gray shade
563

564 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

broadening below where it joins the pale, even t. p. line which is near
the margin. Subterminal line even, pale, near the margin. On s. t.
field two or three costal black dots and a black line above internal
angle. A black dash on internal margin near the base. Hind wings
fuscous gray, with two exterior pale lines. Body gray. The median
vein and the spaces between veins 3 and 5 on median space of primaries
shaded with gray. Beneath gray without markings.

New Mexico, Professor Snow, No. 874. Hxpanse, 31 mil. The four
median black patches are unequal in size and shape.

“PYRRHIA Hubner.

Dr. Speyer is with myself of opinion that this is a valid genus, the
species differing decidedly from Chariclea, in vestiture and armature.
While there is but one European species, we have three from the terri-
ritory east of the Rocky Mountains. These are: Haprimens Walker
(Bull. B. S. N.S. I, pl. III, fig. 5), which seems to stand nearest the
European form; Angulata Grote (id. loc. fig. 6), which has been com-
paratively described by Dr. Speyer under the name of “‘ Exprimens”;
and Stitla Grote (North American Entomologist I, 45), which is the
largest, handsomest, and most intensely colored. The pattern of orna-
mentation is the same in all four forms, while our two species of
Chariclea, Triangulifera, and Pernana, have a very different style of
marking and exactly follow the European type of the genus, Delphinit.

EULINTNERIA 0. g.

The neuration is given, Trans. Am. Ent. Soc., 1872, 106. Male with
a cut in the primary wing on outer margin; female with entire wings.
Male antenne simple, ciliate; palpi three times as long as the “ front,”
curved upwards. Ocelli present. ‘ Front” flat. Eyes naked and legs
unarmed, as always in the Deltoids. Professor Lintner suggests that
our species does not belong to Tortricodes, and, in this opinion, | name
the genus for him. Type: Tortricodes bifidalis Grote.

Geometride.
EUCATERVA VARIARIA Grote.

This geometrid genus and species, which I have elsewhere character-
ized, I again call attention to on account of the difference in the length
of the male and female labial palpi. In both sexes they are longer than
usual in the group, in the male, longer, curved, projecting upwards and -
forwards, linear, closely scaled, ringed black and white. In the female,
similar in appearance, shorter, pointed, and perhaps slenderer. The
body is rather stout; the female abdomen thick and vermiform. The
species seems to be allied to Caterva catenaria, a species I am unwilling
to refer to Zerene, but which Dr. Packard has characterized under this

No. 3.) GROTE ON MOTHS, CATALOGUE OF NOCTU. 565

name, which belongs to a European species, differing structurally in my
opinion. Catenaria is numerous in the fall as a moth, and has been
mistaken for the white cabbage butterfly by unskilled observers. It is
a pretty moth; the larva feeds on weeds not of economical importance.
Hucaterva variaria is smaller, more like Cleora pulchraria in size. The
male is white, speckled, and clouded with fuscous, the dark shades
forming two mesial bands on the forewings, which leave the costal
region white and freer from black speckles. The outer blackish band
is straight; the inner curved. There is a black discal mark. Singu-
larly enough, as I have stated, there are two varieties of the female.
The male antenne are feathered, the female simple. One of the vari-
eties is white with black dots sparsely and irregularly displayed, mass-
ing a little on exterior border, and with the fringes (as in the male)
black dotted. The other form has a black shade extending over pri-
maries, leaving the costal region white, as also the inner margin. The
body is white. There are no ocelli. The female antenne fine and
blackish. The white thorax shows some black speckles, especially on
the collar. This Arizonian insect, taken at Tucson, and of which Mr.
Neumoegen’s collection contains many examples, is one of the most
interesting Geometrids recently discovered.

The following are the additions to our list of the North American
species of Agrotis given in Bull. U. 8. Geol. Surv. vol. vi, No. 1:
Pastoralis Grote, Can. Ent. 7, 68. Vane.; Colo.; Arizona.

N. B.—<Accidentally omitted from the former list.

Quarta Grote, Bull. U. 8S. Geol. S., vi, 258. California.
Washingtoniensis Grote, Bull. U. 8S. Geol. S., vi, 259. Washington Ter.
Immiata Grote, Bull. U. S. Geol. S., vi, 259. Texas.
Docilis Grote, Bull. U. 8. Geol. S., vi, 259. Colorado.
Viralis Grote, Bull. U. 8S. Geol. 8., vi, 260. Nebraska.
Semiclarata Grote, Can. Ent. 13, 132. Washington Ter.
Colata Grote, Can. Ent. 13,131. Oregon.

Esurialis Grote, Can. Ent. 13, 131. Washington 'Ter.
Nanalis Grote, Can. Ent. 13, 131. Nevada; Montana.
Repentis G. and R., Trans. Am. Ent. Soc. 1, pl. 7; Agr. Cochranii Riley,

Eastern and Middle States to California.

N. B.—This must be a distinct species from Messoria of Harris, as
I have shown Papilio 1, 126.

Messoria Harris, Ins. Inj. Veg. Ist ed. 324. “ Massachusetts.”
Havile Grote, Papilio 1, 76; Butler, id., 169. California.

N. B.—I have shown that this form is most probably distinct from
our eastern Clandestina.

Clodiana Grote, Papilio 1, 76. Washington Ter.

I append here the descriptions of Guenée’s under Agrotis, not recog-
nized by me, in the hope that it may lead to the identification of the
species.

566 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL.

Agrotis spissa Guen., Noct. 1, 261.

This greatly resembles Crassa, but the species is smaller (35 mil.), of
a grayish-brown testaceous, the veins darker and relieved by a slightly
paler ground, especially the median and its last branch; markings like
Crassa, but there is a great disproportion between the two stigmata;
the t. p. line forms a dash entering below the fourth inferior nervule;
and on the inner margin, below the submedian vein, it is elongated in
such a way as to touch the top of the mark formed by the extra-basal
line; the cuneiform marks of the s. t. line are more regular and more
equal; the hind wings are darker and more uniform. .

Am. Sept. Coll. Bdv. Two bad specimens.

Noctua ochrogaster Guen. Noct. 1, 237.

A little larger than plecta, which it resembles in markings. Thered of
the primaries is paler, the subterminal is well marked by a deep blackish
shade. The terminal dots are rounded and separate; the fringe is cut
by a dark line; the stigmata are larger; the reniform less constricted,
and the median vein is equally white. The hind wings have a very
distinct series of rounded terminal dots. The collar is ochery white, as
also the abdomen, which is without any reddish anal tuft.

Am. Sept. Coll. Bdy. One male.

Noctua elimata Guen., Noct. 1, 333. 40 mil.

Fore wings pale ashen, much mixed with pale violaceous red, all the
lines visible, of the former color, preceded and separated by shades of
the latter tint, especially the subterminal line, which is very sinuous
and irregular; the t. p. line is denticulate; the t. a. line forms three
large teeth, all marked on costa by a deep brown mark. The two stig-
mata well defined, pale, separated inferiorly by a dark line; the orbi-
cular contiguous to the t. a. line; the reniform large and regular, the
terminal space ashen. Hind wings of a uniform dark gray with the
fringe paler and more reddish. Beneath the four wings are reddish.
Antennae of the male strongly pectinate. Female larger but similar.
Georgia. Coll. Doubleday. Caterpillar having nearly the same colors
as the moth, that is to say, the dorsal region and subdorsal are reddish,
the lateral ashen, without well defined lines, and only showing some
slightly darker subdorsal markings. Head ocher yellow. Collar dark
brown. Feet concolorous. Abbot represents it on chrysanthemum.
Chrysalis light red, with the membrane covering the wings mixed with
greenish.

Agrotis tesselloides n. 8S.

This is the Californian representative of tessellata; of this latter 1 am
indebted to Professor Lintner for a series of nine selected specimens
showing its range of variation. Six specimens of tesselloides agree
among themselves and differ by the paler, more purply gray tint of the

No. 3.] GROTE ON MOTHS, CATALOGUE OF NOCTUZ. 567

primaries without black shading on cell (as to which tessellata varies)
and the hind wings are of a more uniform tint throughout. The gray,
discolorous stigmata are smaller, the transverse lines more distinct, the
t. a. more waved. A single specimen differs by the very large stigmata,
the orbicular lying over costal region to edge, the median shade marked
on cell, the collar dark in front; it may be a distinct species. Tessel-
loides-is the same size as its Eastern ally, and Mr. Edwards’s number
for the Havilah specimens is 6513. The variety is numbered 6544.

Agrotis pellucidalis n. s.

This form is closely allied to rudens, but differs by the absence of the
longitudinal black dashes on fore wings. Hind wings pellucid white.
Head and base of collar ochery. Fore wings pale brownish, with the
markings in blackish fuscous. T. a. line black, interrupted, perpendic-
ular, with the concolorous clariform faintly outlined attached. Half
line double, black, divided by a diffuse pale shade in the middle. TT. p.
a double series of black venular dots, the inner series partially connected
by a dentate black line. Reniform with an interior fuscous black solid
lunule. Costa dark shaded. Terminal space dark, intruding twice on
the pale ground color, opposite cell and again about internal angle. A

dark costal mark before s. t. line. Fringes dotted with fuscous. Hz-
panse, 30 mil. Hab.—Texas.

The relationship of this smaller species with annexa and malefida is
evident. The color of the head is not uniform in the two specimens be-
fore me.

I have given, in the last volume of this bulletin, an extract from the
new list of North American Noctuide on which I am at work. I here
correct that and continue to the genus Apatela. This latter genus will
undoubtedly be found to include diverse types as soon as the larva
are known and studied in connection with the perfect insect. I have
given, in the Bulletin of the Buffalo Society of Natural Sciences, vol. 1,
p. 78, an outline of some of these divisions. We shall probably use
Tricna for the type of psi, occidentalis, tritona, grisea, lobeliwv, etc.;
Acronycta must be used for species congeneric with the European
leporina; Megacronycta for Americana; Apatela for species congeneric
with the European aceris; Lepitoreuma for our ovata and _ allies,
Jochecra for funeralis, while Hulonche must be used for oblinita, lanceo-
laria and insolita. To this latter group xyliniformis and edolata are
related. Other types will be probably afforded by spinea, innotata, and
brumosa. I do not agree with Mr. Butler that any of these insects are
Bombycide ; the larve affect Bombycidous types, but I believe that in
this group the free embryonic stages have submitted to independent
variation, while the gray colors and habits of the perfect insects have
proved sufficiently useful to be conserved. Before this division can be
made, comparison with European forms must be entered on and decided
characters in the moths must be discovered.

568 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

I have recently again catalogued the N. Am. Bombycic (which pre-
cede the Nonfasciate) in the pages of the ‘*Canadian Entomologist,”
and either in this magazine or the “‘ Bulletin of the U.S. Geol. Survey,”
or in * Papilio,” I have given lists of the principal genera of Nonfasciate,
so that there is a good deal of material on hand for the issuance of the
New List of the Family. Such genera catalogued by me are, for in-
stance, Oncocnemis, Hadena, Mamestra, Polia, Agrotis, Plusia, Graphi-
phora, Eustrotia, Spragueia, Thalpochares, Tarache, etc. In the list of
Agrotis (Bull. U. S. Geol. Surv. 6, p. 158) there should be a section sign
(§) after digna. ‘This list, while as complete as I could make it, is not
intended as the best Uh regard to the arrangement of the species; the
' only name I have been able to find omitted is pastoralis.

NOCTU & Linn.
NONFASCIATZ Borkh.

DICOPINA.

In this section are grouped genera with the head sunken, squamation
rough or thick, male antenne pectinate, legs unarmed except fore tibie,
which have a pipet claw, eyes naked, labial palpi short, ocelli present.
The species appear usually early in the year; the Siren: hibernates.

EUTOLYPE Grote (1874).

Rolandi Grote, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil. 198, 1874; Copipanolis ver-
nalis Morr. P. B.S. N. H.133, Dec. 1874. Eastern States to Texas.

DIcopPis Grote (1874).

Muralis Grote, 6th Ann. Rep. Peab. Acad. Sci. 27. Eastern States to
Texas.

Electilis Morr. Pr. Bost. 8. N. H. 115, Oct. 1875. Penn. The type is
in Mr. Tepper’s coll.; it seems very close to Muralis, but I have not
compared the two.

Thaxterianus Grote, Bull. B.S. N.S. 2,196. Massachusetts; Texas.

Damalis Grote, Bull. U. 8. Geol. Surv. 5, 208. California.

Depilis Grote, Papilio, 1, No. 4. Massachusetts; Ohio.

COPIPANOLIS Grote (1874).
Cubilis Grote, 6th Ann. Rep. Peab. Acad. Sci. 30. Eastern States to
Texas.
BOMBYCOIDEA.
AUDELA Walker.

Acronyctoides Walk., Can. Nat. Geol. 6, 37; Grote, Can. Ent. 9, 27; Pan-
thea leucomelana Morr. Proc. Ac. N.S. Phil. 428, 1875; Grote, B. U.
S. G. Surv. 4, 169. Canada; Western N. Y.; Maine.

No 3.] GROTE ON MOTHS, CATALOGUE OF NOCTUZ. | 569
PLATYCERURA Packard (1864).

Furcilla Pack., Proc. Ent. Soc. Phil. 374, 1864. Larva on White Pine,
Lintn. Ent. Con. 3, 131, with figure. Canada; Eastern and Middle
States.

CHARADRA Walker (1865).

Propinquilinea Grote, Trans. Am. Ent. Soe. 4, 293, pl. 1, fig. 96; Goodell.
Papilio, 1,15. Hastern and Middle States; larva on the White Birch
and Walnut.

Deridens Guenée, Noct. 1, 35, pl. 3, fig. 8; Acronycta circulifera Walk.,
709; Charadra contigua Walk. Sup. 446; G. & R. Trans. Am. Ent.
Soc. 2, 86; Lintn. Ent. Con. 3, 157 (larva). Canada to Southern
States. Larva on Oak (Thaxter).

Dispulsa Morr. Proc. Bost. Soe. N. H. 213, 1875. Texas.

Palata Grote, Can. Ent. 12,258; 9? Papilio, 1,153. Colorado; Arizona.

RAPHIA Hiibner (1816).

Abrupta Grote, Proc. Ent. Soc. Phil. 2, 336, pl. 8, fig. 3, 1863. Eastern
and Middle States.

Frater Grote, Proc. Ent. Soc. Phil. 2, 435, pl. 9, fig. 7, 1864; Saligena
personata Walk. Sup. 606 (1865). Eastern and Middle States. Larva
on Poplar (Thaxter).

FERALIA Grote (1874).

Jocosa Guenée, Noct. 1, 37; Grote, B. B. 8S. N.S. 2, 58. Eastern and
Middle States. Varies by being suétused with black.

MoMAPHANA Grote (1875).

Comstockt Grote, B. B. S. N. 8, 2, 59; Stett. Ent. Zeit. 195, 1875. New
York; Buffalo, collected by Prof. Kellicott.

DIPHTHERA Hiibner.

Fallax H.-S. Exot. 80, fig. 211. Eastern, Middle, and Southern States.

HARRISIMEMNA Grote (1873).

Trisignata Walk., C. B. M. Noct. 29; Notodonta sexguttata Harris in Ent.
Cor. pp. 174-5, figs. 24-5. The curious larva, with long thoracic hairs,
and a habit of vibrating the body, from which it is called the “zig-
zag” caterpillar, lives on lilac, and bores into wood to pupate, cover-
ing up the orifice by which it entered, so that it is not noticed. Can-
ada to Middle States.

570 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI
CERMA Hiibn. (1818).

Cora Hiibn., Zutr. 14, figs. 59, 60. Canada to Georgia. Is this Guenée’s
Chariptera festa? Guenée does not know this; he makes hebraea the
type of Grammophora, but thinks cora may prove congeneric, and so
includes it. Grammophora falls before Polygrammate according to the
rule of priority. The difference seems to me unessential between this
and Bryophila, but Cerma cora and Harrisimemna trisignata are struct-
urally distinct and differ from Bryophila or Polygrammate. The dark~
lines on the paler ground of the primaries give rise to the idea of rela-
tionship, which has caused authors to use Grammophora in a wide and
loose sense. Ido not see how the term can be retained for any spe-
cies, but if used it must be at the expense of Hiibner for his species.
Walker incorrectly referred trisignata to it, a moth whose habits,
larva, and structure are quite peculiar, and unlike any other member
of the group. Harris called the species a Notodontian; his name,
though given earlier, was not issued until after Walker’s, in his pos- _
thumous papers. Ihave named the genus after him, and to still further
ally his name with the insect, which he was the first to at all ade-
quately observe, I propose to call the species Harris’s Zigzag moth,
in the vernacular.

POLYGRAMMATE Hiubn. (1816).

Hebraicum Hiibn. Zutr. 1, 10, figs. 25-6; Grammophora hebrea Guen.,
Noct. 1, 30, pl. 3, fig. 5. Middle States.

MICROCOELIA Guen. (1852).

Fragilis Guen., Noct. 1, 34. Canada to Middle States.

ae aie Guen., Noct. 1, 34; ease Proc. Ent. Soc. Phil. 3, 78, pl. 2,
fig, 2; G. & R., Tr. Am. Ent. Soc. 2, 195, pl. 3, fig. 69.

var. Obliterata Grote, Proc. Ent. Sing. Phil. 3, 79; G..& Boj ir Am:
Ent. Soc. 2, 195, pl. 3, fig. 70. Canada to lbieanan.

BRYOPHILA Tr.

Lepidula Grote, 6th Ann. Rep. Peab. Ac. Sci. 27. Canada to Middle

States.

t Corticosa Guen., Noct. 1, 30.

“Size of glandifera. Fore wings dense, squamous, varied with green-
ish white, light brown and black, and the lines all black. Basal space
of the first color, with the half-line and a spot on internal margin black.
Median space brown gray, slightly mixed with fulvous (fauve) on the
disc; terminal space white, spotted with brown. Subterminal line very
black, and very much waved, and nearly parallel with the transverse
posterior line. Fringe whitish, cut with black marks. Hind wings na-
creous white, with a blackish shade commencing at anal angle and
hardly reaching over half of the border. Abdomen white beneath. Body

No. 3.] GROTE ON MOTHS, CATALOGUE OF NOCTUA. 571

rather stout. Antenne long. Two specimens. Coll. Bdy. Am. Sept.”

This description, which I have translated, will not apply to any form

known to me. It is opposed to lepidula both in color and markings of

fore wings and color of hind wings.

Teratophora H.-S., Exot., fig. 213; Hrastria inscripta Walk., C. B. M.
Noct. 808. Canada to Middle States.

Nana Hiibn., Zutr. 1, figs. 53-4. “Georgia.”

CHYTONIX Grote (1874).

Palliatricula Guen., Noct. 1, 26. Canada to Middle States.

Taspis Guen., Noct. 1, 209; Grote List, 14. Same localities as Pallia-
tricula, of which it may be the ¢ or a varietal form; notwithstanding
Guenée’s separation the two are closely allied.

Sensilis Grote, Papilio 1, 49. Eastern and Middle States. This genus
is more robust and hadeniform than Bryophila, the body tufted; the
thoracic scales are flattened, not like Hadena in this respect. It is
peculiar from the white dot attached to t. p. line, in Palliatricula
absorbed by the white shade of median space.

APATELA Hiibn., Tentamen.
§ Tricna Hiibn. (1816),

‘Occidentalis G. & R., Proc. Ent. Soc. Phil. 6,16. Canada to Southern
States. Represents in our fauna the European Psi; the larva has
been described by Mr. Saunders, and is quite distinct.

Morula G. & R., Tr. Am. Ent. Soe. 2, 196, pl. 3, fig. 75; Lint. Ent. Con.
3, 137 (larva). Apple. Canada to Middle States. .

Lobelic Guen., Noct. 1, 44; Coquill., Papilio 1, 6 (larva). Burr Oak.
According to Guenée, Abbot represents the larva on Lobelia. Guenée
describes from specimens, and his description agrees with our species,
but not the larva. Texan specimens are large, and sometimes with a
faint ocher tinge to the primaries. This %s the largest of the group,
but not so stout as Americana and allies. Canada to Texas.

Thoracica Grote, N. Am. Ent. 1, 94. Colorado.

Furcifera Guen., Noct. 1, 44. Middle and Eastern States.

Hasta Guen., Noct. 1, 45. Middle and Eastern States.

t Telum Guen., Noct. 1, 45.

“This resembles the two preceding species, but is more oblong, and
the markings of the hind wings below is very different. 45 mil. Fore
wings narrow, oblong, produced at apices, of an ashen gray much ob-
scured by powdering, the median lines separate, fine, the stigmata tied
and only well marked inferiorly. The fringe neatly cut. Hind wings
of a very dirty whitish gray, a little iridescent, the margin and the
veins much stained with black, beneath of a slightly nacreous white,
with a basal dash, a strong cellular spot, a thick interrupted line, and

572 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

distinct terminal dots, all black. One male. Am. Sept.” I do not

identify this description.

t Spinigera Guen., Noct. 1, 45.

“Shape and appearance of Furcifera. Fore wings of an ash gray
powdered with blackish, with the markings indeterminate. Basal line
very fine and joining the extra-basal. Orbicular small, rounded. Reni-
_ form very large, soiled with blackish. 'T. p. line well marked, denticu-
late, black, fine, but shaded largely although vaguely with brownish ;
a series of small terminal points. Fringe hardly cut. The inferior
transversal dash running to a fine point but more visible than the rest.
Hind wings of a yellowish gray, nearly concolorous, beneath yellowish
white, with a discoidal line and the lunules little. marked. New York.
Coll. Doubleday. Two males in bad condition, which perhaps renders
the above description incomplete.” In collections the name “ Spinigera”
is attached to specimens which are probably the same as Pallidicoma, -
which has the t. p. line denticulate, but acutely so, and shaded with
white, and belongs to a different group from this which Guenée puts in
his genus Semaphora the equivalent of Tricna.
ee Hiibn., Zutr., 107-8; Guen., Noct. 1, 42. Canada to Southern

tates.

Faleula Grote, Can. Ent. 9, 86; Coquill., Papilio 1, 6; Larva on hazel.
This is distinguishable from Tritona by the bright brown edging of
the thoracic tuft behind; the dash at internal angle does not cross or .
indent. the transverse posterior line. In this it resembles parallela.

Grisea Walk., C. B. M. Noct., 56;? pudorata Morr., Ann. N. Y. Lye. 93,
1875. Canada to Middle States. Mr. Morrison thinks that Guenée’s
tritona may not be Hiibner’s. His description of pudorata agrees
fairly with grisea as determined from notes of mine on the B. M. Coll.
There is some variation probably in tone of secondaries, for Mr. Mor-
rison calls the hind wings of tritona “yellow.” My specimens have
the wings different shades of fuscous, with, perhaps, a faintly yellow-
ish tinge.

Parallela Grote, Can. Ent. 9,53. Colorado; Texas.

Albarufa Grote, Proc. Bost. Soc. N. H., 239, 1874; Walkert Andrews,
Can. Ent. 9,98. Hastern and Middle States.

tInterrupta Guen., Noct. 1, 46; Am. Sept. This is described with the
caterpillar from a drawing of Abbot’s. It would be a good thing if
the drawings (which I believe are either in Boston or in the coll.
British Museum), which have been made the basis of descriptions by
Guenée, could be published. I hardly think the species can be rcog-
nized without such help.

Vinnula Grote, Proc. Ent. Soc. Phil. 2, 436, pl. 9. fig. 2.. Canada to
Middle States.

Paupercula Grote, Proc. Acad. N.S. Phil. 197, 1874. Texas.

No. 3.] GROTE ON MOTHS, CATALOGUE OF NOCTUZ. 573
§.

Harveyana Grote, Proc. Ac. N.S. Phil. 418, 1875. Middle States.

Clarescens Guen., Noct.1, 54. Eastern and Middle States.

Connecta Grote, Bull. B.S. N.S. 1, 79. Middle States.
tLonga Guen., Noct. 1, 54.

§.

Innotata Guen., Noct. 1, 50; Graefii Gr., P. E. Soc. Phil. 2, 68, pl. 3,
fig. 6. Hastern and Middle States.

§.
Dentata Grote, Can. Ent. Canada; Eastern States.

§.
Radcliffes Harvey, Bull. B.S. N. S. 2,270. Eastern and Middle States.

§.

Quadrata Grote, Bull. B. 8S. N. S. 2,154. Missouri; Nebraska. Mr.
Dodge has, I believe, reared this fine species from the larva.

§ Acronycta Ochs. (1816). |

Tota Grote, N. Am. Ent. 1,10. Texas.

Felina Grote, Bull. U. S. Geol. Surv. 5, 208. California. Mr. Hy. Ed-
wards probably describes the larva of this on p.5 of his No. 16,
found on Poplars.

Lepusculina Guen., Noct. 1, 46; Populi Riley, 2d Mo. Rep., 119 (larva).
Middle and Western States.

§ Megacronycta Grote (1873).

Americana Harris, Ins. Ing. Veg. 1st ed. 317; 3rd ed. 435; hastulifera
Guen., Noct. 1, p. 47. Harris describes the larva on elm, chestnut,
and maple. Prof. Riley also describes it, and his description agrees
well with Harris’s. This larva agrees fairly with that figured by Ab-
bot and Smith as identical with the European Aceris on pl. 93. I
refer the student to Bull. Buff. Soc. Nat. Sci. 1, 154, for a discussion of
the probably correct synonymy. What species is intended by Abbot
under hastulifera is not known. Coquillett describes the larva of
Americana found on Red Oak, Papilio 1,6. Guenée’s name acericola
is based on the figure of the imago given by Abbot on pl. 93. Per-
haps the larva varies, but it is strange if Abbot’s two plates of has-
tulifera and aceris represent the same species. The imago which
Abbot calls hastulifera looks in the figure like Americana, but the
caterpillar does not agree with our descriptions.

5TA BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

Dactylina Grote, Proc. B. 8. N. H. 16, 239. Canada to Middle States.
This fine species is undoubtedly distinct from Americana; the hind
wings of the female are white.

Insita Walk., C. B. M. Noct. 61. Eastern and Middle States. This is
also a large species with the hind wings white in both sexes. The
fore wings are also quite white; the dash at internal angle is variable

as in Americana.
§. Merolonche Grote.

Spinea Grote, Bull. B. S. N.S. 3, 78, pl. 4, fig. 7. California. The egg
and young larva are described by Mr. Hy. Edwards, p. 3 of his No.
26. This is a paler and slightly more compact species, head closely
applied to the globose thorax, than lwpini, from which it differs by the
t. p. line being a little drawn in opposite the cell and a dash on median _
space crossing the shade on submedian fold.

Lupint Behr Ms., Grote, Bull. B. 8. N. 1, 79; 3, pl. 4, fig. 10. Califor-
nia. This species is of a dark blue gray, the t. p. line more dentate
and without the pale mark at internal angle and the submedian dark

dash of spinea.
§ Apatela Hiibn.

Rubricoma Guen., Noct.1, 48. Western and Southern States. Guenée
describes the larva, from an unpublished drawing, on a species of
6 Rhus.”

Luteicoma G. & R., Tr. Am. Ent. Soc. 3,179, pl. 2, fig. 83. Western
and Middle States.

Pallidicoma Grote, Bull. U. S. Geol. Surv. 4, 169. Eastern and Middle
States.

§.

Brumosa Guen., Noct. 1, 52; Verrillii G. & R., Tr. Am. Ent. Soe. 3, 178,
pl. 2, fig. 82. Canada to Middle States.

Distans Grote, Can. Ent. 11, 38. Canada.

Subochrea Grote, Bull. B.S. N. 8. 2,153. New York; Canada. I have
taken several specimens of this fine species near Buffalo, in June.

Superans Guen., Noct. 1, 53. Eastern and Middle States.

Persuasa Harvey, Bull. B.S. N.S. 2, 271. Eastern States to Texas.

Perdita Grote, Can. Ent. 6,154. California.

Afjlicta Grote, Proc. Ent. Soe. 2, 438, pl. 9, fig. 4. Middle to Southern
States.

Noctivaga Grote, Proc. Ent. Soc. 2, 437, pl. 9, fig. 3. Canada to Middle

States.
Jochecera Hiibn. (1816).

Funeralis G. & R., Proc. Ent. Soc. Phil. 6, pl. 4, fig. 10; americana

Harris in Ent. Cor. 313, pl. 3, fig. 3 (larva); Lintn. Ent. Con. 3, 135,
larvaon Elm. This species,represents the European alni in our fauna.
The name americana is posthumous and of later date than funeralis ;
it is besides used for another species.

No. 3.] GROTE ON MOTHS, CATALOGUE OF NOCTUZ. 575

§ Lepitoreuma Grote (1873).

Ovata Grote, Bull. B. 8. N.S. 1, 80, pl. 2, fig. 14. Eastern and Middle

States.

Exilis Grote, Proc. Acad. N.S. Phil. 197, 1874. Middle States.
Hamamelis Guen., Noct. 1, 52; Goodell, Can. Ent. 9, 61. Larva on

Chestnut. Guenée gives the larva on Hamamelis Virginiana. His

description is comparative with Rumicis. This species varies very

much in color and somewhat in size. I have examined a very large

series, but without finding intermediate specimens between it and the

dark and smaller increta or the pale and still smaller dissecta.
Haesitata n. s.

Two specimens from Pennsylvania are as large as the largest Hama-
melis, and differ by the primaries being of a purely dull and pale bluish
gray without any admixture of yellowish or olivaceous. The usual
dark shading on sub-basal and subterminal spaces is reduced to a mini-
mum. The hind wingsarevery dark. The dash at base of primaries is
reduced. This form is easily recognized but may not be a distinct
species. In my collection.

Inereta Morrison, Proce. Bost. Soc. N. H. 131, 1874. Eastern and Mid-
dle States.
Dissecta G. & R., Tr. Am. Ent. Soc. 6,178. Canada to Middle States.

§Arctomyscis Hiibn. (1816).

Sperata Grote, Bull. Buff. S. N.S. 1, 81, pl. 2, fg.1. Eastern and Mid-

dle States.
§ Mastiphanes Grote.

Edolata Grote, Papilio 1, 153. Arizona.

This is one of the finest forms in the genus. It is larger than «ylini-
formis, shaded diffusely with dead black longitudinally on fore wings,
which are cut by the whitish, strongly-toothed t. p. line. The hind
Wings are white. I have seen a large number of perfectly coinciding
examples in Mr. Neumoegen’s collection, to whom I am indebted for
two types in my own. The tegule are shaded with black.

Extricata n. s.

g¢ 9. Hind wings white in both sexes, showing in the ¢ a slight in-
dication of a mesial band marked on costa. Size, large; the g expands
38, the ¢ 46 mil. Very close to xyliniformis, but with a fine basal
dash; the mark at internal angle obsolete. The t. p. line is denticu-
late, white-edged, not shaded with black. The terminal black dashes
distinct. The orbicular is moderate, ringed, concolorous; the reniform
indistinct, shaded with dusky. The t. p. line is thrown out as in its
ally. It is to be regretted that M. Guenée did not give fuller details,
because there are several species in which the t. p. line is thrown out
and the:wings long. I have identified xyliniformis, which has been
reared by Professor Riley, on account of the soiled hind wings of the

576 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

e and the strong internal.dash. Three specimens from Texas, Bel-

frage. This may be in collections under Guenée’s name. The basal

dash is very fine, irregular; the tegule are edged within with blackish;

this form is allied to edolata, and is more distinctly marked than xylina-

formis. Belfrage’s numbers are 68 3, 699 9.

Xyliniformis Guen., Noct. 3, 400; Riley, 5th Mo. Report, p. 126 (larva).
Western and Southern States.

Lithospila Grote, Proc. Bost. Soc. N. H. 240, 1874; check list of Noct.,
pl. 1, fig. 2. Eastern and Middle States.

§Hulonche Grote (1873).

Oblinita Abb. & Sm. Ins. Ga. 2, 157, pl. 94. Southern States.

Mr. Thaxter has drawn my attention to the fact that the northern
form may be distinct. Although I am not prepared to admit it, and it
may be that the larva varies, careful breeding is needed to be quite
sure of the name we give our northern species.

Lanceolaria Grote, Proc. Ac. N.S. Phil. 418, 1875. Massachusetts.
Insolita Grote, Bull. B.S. N.S. 1, 82. Pennsylvania.

Under the generic name Cyathissa, I would separate the Bryophila
percara of Mr. Morrison from that genus on account of the notch in the
external margin of primaries and the differing proportions, the narrower
wings. It is evidently not congeneric with Lepidula and the European -
types of Bryophila. I restore Treitschke’s name to this latter genus
because Hubner’s term has been diversely used, and to reintroduce it
might cause confusion. I am prepared to surrender every point where
a strict enforcement of priority might inure to the detriment of our
science. I hope that the anti-Hubnerists will accept the few genera
which I have felt obliged to introduce, such as Lithophane, which are
unobjectionable in every way.

In explanation of my synonymy I draw attention to my corrections
of the redescriptions in the ‘ Missonri Reports” of some of our common
Noctuide. Nospecimensof these were submitted to me for identification,
nor am I credited with such work in the reports. I determined Agrotis
scandens in the first report as a new species, which at the time it was.

Acronycta populi of Riley is Guenée’s Lepusculina; I made the cor- .
rection in my earliest list (1873, p. 79). Prodenia autumnalis Riley is
the corn-bud worm of Abbot, who figured the moth in all stages in the
Insects of Georgia. It is figured under Abbot’s name of Frugiperda
also by Hubner. In the Bulletin of the Buffalo Society of Natural
Sciences, vol. i, p. 81, this correction is ‘made by me nearly ten years
ago. Xylina cinerea of Riley is Lithophane antennata of Walker. I
made this correction in the Bull. U. S. Geol. Surv. vol. v, No. 2, in 1879,
assisted by Professor Fernald’s identification of Walker’s type in the
British Museum. I am also of opinion, and have expressed it, that
Amphipyra conspersa is an aberration of Pyramidoides. The identifica-

No. 3.) GROTE ON MOTHS, CATALOGUE OF NOCTUZ. Ee

tions of Subgothica or Jaculifera in the same reports is incorrect, Tricosa
being illustrated, at least in part (wood-cut). Also ““Commeline” is not
that species. The identifications of our Noctuidew in the Missouri Re-
ports are, generally speaking, unfortunate, and have been made without
sufficient acquaintance with the group. Finally, I believe that Brassice
will prove identical with the European N2, and that it may have been
introduced like the White Cabbage Butterfly. The peculiar structure
of the male seems to be the same in American and European examples.
Professor Riley is quite wrong in contradicting my separation of the
West Indian and South American Satellitia from our Philampelus pan-
dorus; my course is latterly approved by Butler, and Dr. Boisduval also
considers the two quite different. I have, as early as 1872, in the Trans.
Am. Ent. Soe., p. 28, discussed these mistakes.

Sinee the publication of the list of the species of Botis found in North
America, Bull. U. 8S. Geol. and Geogr. Surv., 675, 1878, the following
have been described :

Botis commortalis Grote, Can. Ent. 13,233, 1881. Havilah, California.
Botis oscitalis Grote, Can. Ent. 12,36. Maine; Ohio.
Botis oppilatis Grote, Can. Ent. 12, 36. Maine; Massachusetts.

NorEe.—Botis dissectalis, described in the same paper, should be re-

ferred to submedialis.

Botis dapatis Grote, Can. Ent. 13,17. California.

Botis lethalis Grote, Can. Ent. 13, 33. California.

Botis vacunalis Grote, Can. Ent. 13, 33. Sierra Nevada, California.
Botis turmalis Grote, Can. Ent. 13, 34. Colorado Rio.

Botis rufifimbrialis Grote, Can. Ent. 13, 34. Massachusetts.
Botis flavinotalis Grote, Can. Ent. 13, 34. Pennsylvania.

Botis annaphilalis Grote, Can. Ent. 13, 34. Havilah, California.
Botis capitalis Grote, Bull. U. 8. Geol. Surv. 6, 272. Florida.
Botis fissalis Grote, Bull. U. S. Geol. Surv. 6, 273. New York.
Botis augustalis Grote, Bull. U. 8. Geol. Surv. 6. 273. Colorado.
Botis toralis Grote, Papilio 1, 178. New Mexico.

Nove.—In this same paper I have given a note on Volupialis, col-
lected reeently by Professor Snow in New Mexico.

BoTIs FLAVOFASCIALIS n. S.

Thorax and base of primaries olivaceous, shading to yellowish. Me-
dian field of primaries purple, bounded outwardiy by the t. p. line, which
is exserted over median nervules. Discal points not discernible without
the glass; the reniform indicated by a darker mark. Subterminal space
yellow. Terminal space purple, rather wide, of even width. Fringes
blackish. Hind wing sub peliucid, pate, with fuscous terminal line and
line at base of pale fringes. Beneath legs and body pale, the wings
faintly reflecting upper surface. New Mexico, Prof. Snow, No. 876.

37 G B

578 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

Expanse 21 mil. This form is easily recognizable by the clear yellow
subterminal field, contrasting with the broad vinous terminal space and
the purple median field projected over median veinlets; above the ex-
serted portion of t. p. line the subterminal space is narrower. It
resembles onythesalis in disposition of colors on fore wings, but the pur-
ple terminal field is wider; the hind wings are discolorous, the colors of
primaries more intense, and. defining clearly the separate fields of the
wing. The colors are darker than in laticlavia or cinerosa.

_BOTIS WASHINGTONALIS 0. S.

The shape is like fodinalis, apices produced subfaleate, pointed; bone
white or soiled whitish, sprinkled with fuscous; wings broad. A fus-
cous apical shade; corta fuscous to reniform. T. p. line formed of little

scallops, with a suleation below median vein. A fuscous shade extending
' to costa over reniform spot. Anterior line angulate. A square, partly
open spot just beyond the line and remote from the reniform, the orbi-
cular. Preapical costal dots. <A distinct series of terminal dots on both
wings. Hind wings concolorous; an incomplete line, distinct beneath
where is a discal point, and one beyond it, near the base and costa.
Markings beneath distinctly repeated; the spots on cell of fore wings
distinctly filled in with fuscous. Length of fore wing, 14 mil. Three
specimens. Washington Territory. Mr. Morrison

Art. XX.—New Moths, primcipalliy collected by Mir.
Roland Thaxter in Maine, with motes on noxious
species amd remarks om classification.

By A. R. Grote.

While Pennsylvania and its chief city, Philadelphia, hold classic
ground which has witnessed the labors of the early writers in America
on Entomology, sucaz as Haldeman, the elder Le Conte, Melsheimer, and
Say, Massachusetts and Boston are no less to be remembered, with Cam-
bridge, where Harris collected and wrote. In fact most of the older
States had their entomologist, not a “State entomologist,” but some one
who made himself felt in the then small but growing literature of our
science during the first half of the present century. Randall in Maine:
Kirtland in Ohio; Drs. Morris in Maryland, Fitch in New York, Leonard
in New Hampshire, are instances that occur to one in writing. Ner will
Jaeger, D’Urban, and Oemier be forgotten, or Peck, to whom Harris was
indebted for early inspirations. From early sympathy, rather than asso-
ciation, I have belonged to the eastern circle of “enemies of the net.” I
have wandered along the lanes of Cambridge, about the university
grounds and again walked the paths cf Boston Common, beneath the
elms, sub tegumine ulmi, before I grew to man’s estate, and conjured up
the figure of Dr. Harris studying Ceratomia.* I could never think of Dr.
Harris as “ furtively boxing” his captures. There was something quiet
and earnest bound up with my idea of the man and his work, which pre-
cluded the notion that he cared for what might be thought, by passers-
by, of his oceupation. Yet he must have been unobtrusive, if not timid,
by nature. Still less can Iythink of him armed, cap-a-pie, ike the mod-
ern or English collector. Isupposed then, and still think, that few noted
his going and coming, on those walks which furnished facts for his let-
ters to the Rev. Dr. Leonard or to Doubleday. He seemed to me te
have been very different from Say, a slower and more eareful man, equal
to his state. An unattractive hero, perhaps, with the same conserva-
tive ideas as the mass of his fellow-townsmen. Yet, to me, he was
greatly worthy of veneration, and [ was undecided whether he were the

*The odd way in which “HH”, for “ Harris,” was afterward turned into a contrac-
tion for “‘ Hubner,” I have written about elsewhere. Dr. Clemens made no original
compilation of the literature of the Sphingid@ in his “synopsis” of that family, and

Dr. Morris only copies Clemens.
579

580 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. V1.

more remarkabie, or Thoreau by Waiden Pond. Thoreau and his
school stood outside of Evolution, and the Derivative philosophy of na-
ture; and it surprises one that it should have been so. With his knowl
edge of the classics, it is strange that Thoreau overlooked Democritus
and Lucretius. The facts all ran before his eyes, and he took them up
singly, as the bit of sky on the blue-bird’s back ; but he went no further
with his discovery. The New England blue-bird, or its Mayflower bloom,
stood in relation with some fact that was true by the banks of the Ganges,
for Thoreau. He fitted them into Some eternities reflected from the
Bhagvat-Gheeta; meanwhile they were fading with the season and fight-
ing the struggle for existence in the Concord woods. Nature bas to be
studied frem small point to small point. Thus are the fine chains of
reasoning made, which, presently, some one will cast over the Rocky
Mountains and bring down a. land-slide of results—so mueh of the world
captured. Thoreau threw aside ail his weapons and refused this world’s
fight. Oe wasa poet of Nature because he did not understand Nature ;
she was perpetually strange to him. Matter was the miracle fer Tho-
reau; Mind the every-day affair. He was satisfied when his thoughts
had untied themselves and fled from the matter which gave them birth.
He admired their tenuous appearance, far off and disappearing, follow-
ing the doves behind the clouds. Bunt meanwhile Dr. Harris was find-
ing the curious larvee with. horn-like ridges on the thorax, which were
feeding on the elm trees of the Common. He knew that this was a re-
markable variation of the usualiy smooth Sphingid larval form, some-
thing “notin the books.” He ecalied the insect Ceratomia, and put it
in the books, where it must stay for future generations to study over.
This is some of the philosophy of facts that must be pursued to diseover
the succession in place and time. Thoreau stood aloof from it; by so
much superior to the eternal procession, and yet by so much the loser
and out of sympathy with humanity and the direction where its inquiry
and progress were to lie.

By a good many threads of thought Entomology attaches itself to
general Lterature. I remember reading in Dr. Fitch’s ‘ Reports,”
his speculation that the “great caterpillar” of Indian tradition, sung
ot by Longfellow in “ Hiawatha,” was that of Muprepia americana, au
insect now thought to be identical with the European Caja. But the
description does not fit that species nearly as well as it does the black,
hairy caterpillar, with its deep searlet rings, of Hepantheria seribonia.
This is commonly found in the spring, pupating beneath Jogs and stoves
in May and June. If, indeed, we are to take the name literally, the
strictly American genus Lepantheria seems more appropriately to be
noted; and, as‘its larva is, probably, the handsomest and most striking -
of its group, it would not unlikely catch the eve of the Indians.

I can fancy how long Entomologists will be glad that Dr. Harris lived,
as I have every day since I knewit. Itis not only his excellent Hnglish,
his staid, unflippant style, that makes his “ Repoit” so readabie. It is

No. 3.] GROTE ON MOTHS OF MAINE. DOLe

the spirit of cultivated observation that pervades his page and makes
it young and modern always. Perhaps not so much modern, as alive
and quite well. Some of us are not so well, with the printer’s ink hardly
dry. Professor Riley finds some fault at my quoting Dr. Harvris’s orig-
inal ‘‘ Report”; but for all these reasons it is a favorite ‘‘ Report” with
me, although I do not think the descriptions of Noctuide in it are aceu-
rate enough, or full. As to this fact, the early descriptions are all scant,
while the known kinds are still few.

The Eastern Entomologists are, I believe, all fond of Harris’s mem-
ory, and he seems to have left behind him a good reputation. The Boston
Society published his Correspondence, and this is very readable. From
a scientific view the new names for Moths in it, all poorly founded, should.
have been omitted from the book. It was a mistake to publish them
without the specimens at hand and some one to tell the editor what they
now were to be called. The resurrected names, I fear, are not only past
reviving, but past recognition.

My old leather-backed *‘ Report” is now the book I most often iake
down, open, and read. I do not see what I could have done without it,
when I only had the more gorgeous Flint edition. My copy was once Dr.
- Fitch’s, and will be some one else’s in turn. I hope my true kin, the —
entomologists, will keep it going from one to another down the coming
years. It contains also the “ Descriptive Catalogue” from Silliman’s
Journal. Dr. Harris has written the date, 1835, on its title page; an
“extra” title page, evidently. It is an “ Author’s copy,” bearing above,
also in Dr. Harris’s handwriting, “Asa Fitch, from the author.” Cne of
those “extras” which the Rev. Mr. Hulst appears to think does not con-
stitute publication, as against the “number” of an amateur antedated.
It is paged by itself, but on the reverse of the title, on the second page,
Dr. Fitch (I think) has written: “‘p. 282, in Silliman’s Journal, vol. 56.”

As illustrating the uncertainty which one often feels, whether the
position given to an aberrant form is the true one, J may cite a written
remark, in my copy, to the description of Psychomorpha epimenis, on
page 39. Dr. Fitch has written in ink over Dr. Harris’s own words ip
lead pencil: “A Noctua, genus Brephos? (Harris’s correction).” But
we know that this is, in effect, no correction, and that the insect was —
properly named at first. Some time I may give more notes on this copy
of Dr. Harris’s “Report,” &e. It is no wonder I am fond of the book.
It is nicer than many of the later “Reports,” which I occasionally re-
ceive, on its subject; although our information on ‘* Noxious insects” is,
to-day, so much fuller, more practical, and thus more valuable.

All specimens of Moths from the Eastern States bring up thoughts
of Dr. Harris and, indeed, the great thinkers of the region whence they
come. Undoubtedly the face of the country, its fauna, flora, and cli-
mate, influence its productions, its learned men among other. So there
is nothing inconsequent in my digression, which -t leave to consider
the specimens before me, and whieh have been chiefly sent by my friend,
Mr. Roland Thaxter, making part of his collections.

582 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [ Vol. VI.

Ichthyura strigosa u. 8.

82. Allied to americana of Harris. The pre-apical stain is yellow-
ish; the white mark curved and rather even and narrow. Lines much
as in allies. This form is distinguishable by a succession of short black-
ish interspaceal dashes, situate subterminally ; one, opposite the disk,
extending backward to the middle of the cell, and two shorter, on the
succeeding interspaces above it; there is also a blackish mark below,
between veins 3 and 4. The dark fringes finely eut with pale. Hind
wings fuscous. Beneath the blackish streaks reappear. They distin-
guish this form, of which Mr. Thaxter has reared several specimens, from
larvee found on Poplar, at Kittery Point, Me. The tborax is marked as

“usual in this genus.

Agrotis gularis Grote.

Mr. Thaxter has taken turris and gularis in coitu ; thus my former
suspicion that the ochery turris was only a variety of the dark red
gularis is verified. The latter seem to be usually the males. Kittery
Point, Me., and Newtonville, Mass.

Agrotis dapsilis n. s.

Whitish-gray. Forewings rather shert and broad. Thorax thickly
haired. Eyes naked. Forewings and thorax whitish-gray. Inner me-
dian line represented by black dots on the veins. Orbicuiar a minute
det. Reniferm a narrow, biackish, curved streak. T.p. line detted.
S.t. space a little darker on costa; s. t. line a dark, faint, uneven shade.
A dotted line before the pale fringe. Hind wings pale fuscous gray,
with a darker fuscous shade band before the margin and faint mesial
line. Beneath, hind wings whitish; forewings fusceus with obliterate
markings. Florida; Mr. Thaxter.

Hadena misera n. s.

This species, with naked eyesand unarmed tibize, has a slight, discolor-
ous, thoracic crest, and the dersum of abdomen is feebly tufted. It has
the appearance of Perigea luxa, but is smaller, more compact. Of the
same fuscous color, dark, and with inconspicuous markings. Thereniform
moderate, discelorous, yellowish, the other stigmata hardly indicated.
Lines lost, except the waved, rusty yellow subterminal. Costa dotted
with pale yellowish. Hind wings nearly concolorons dark fuscous, paler
than forewings. Beneath, fuscous; hind wings paler, irrorate, with dot
and extra mesial line. The head, collar, and tegule, blackish fuscous,
like forewings. Abdomen like hind wings. The disk of thorax some-
what rusty and paler. Jilinois; also, I have somewhere seen a specimen
from New York. Apparently not common. August. —

Perigrapha trarsparens 0. s.
2. Eyeshairy. Tibiaunarmed. Vestiture of the body rathershagey.
Abdomen untufted. Thorax with a ridge down the center. Head a

Nv. 3.) GROTE ON MOTHS OF MAINE. 583

little sunken. Apex of primaries sharp; outer margin lightly curving
in below apices; full inferiorly. Russet-brown, somewhat thinly scaled
on the wing. Forewings reddish-brown, nearly concolorous; reniform
a vague black shade. Lines wanting. The veins are a little marked
with black in place of t. p. line, and show exceedingly minute pale dots
terminally. Hind wings subdiaphonous, fuscous. Thorax and head
like forewings. Outline of normalis. Secondaries with the hind mar-
gin indented subapically ; beneath with discal dot. The color beneath
is uniform, reddish fuscous, with veins marked on both wings. Wash-
ington Territory. In my Collection. In form the relationship to the
Californian erythrolita is evident.

Tapinostola orientalis n. s.

Size smaller than Senta defecta ; wings narrower; apices somewhat
blunt, yet determinate. Eyes naked. Abdomen (of the female) short
and plump, untufted. Head close to the thorax, roughly haired; labial
palpi somewhat dependent. Clypeus smooth. Forewings of the usual
heliophiloid tints. Veinspale. Subcostaland median veins lined with-
in on the cell finely with black. Submedian interspace above the fold
pale yellowish. T. p. line indicated by a black dot on submedian fold,
a smaller one between 2 and 3, and faint traces of others superiorly.
A fine, black terminal line cut by the whitish nervules. Hind wings
lighter at base, pale, with a light fuscous terminal shade; extra-mesial
line indicated. Beneath, without markings, pale; a dot on hind wings;
veins marked. Two specimens, Kittery Point, Me. Collection of Mr.
Thaxter. This cannot be variena, on account of the dotted t. p. line.

Nonagria subflava Grote.

A specimen agreeing with my type, but a very little smaller, has
been taken by Mr. Thaxter at Newtonville, Mass. My type is from
Northern I[llinois.

Scopelosoma moffatiana n. s.

This species, captured in the autumn on oak leaves by Mr. Moffat,
of Kingston, I have formerly regarded as the same as graefiana. Mr,
Thaxter thinksitis differentand calls my attention to the following points:
It is generally larger; more richly colored, being of a reddish-orange,
while grafieana is yellow. The transverse lines are blackish, not red,
and more uneven; the t. a. line arched in moffatiana. The hind wings
are suffused with red in the new species, and I find that the mesial line
is more even. Taken with ceromatica. Mr. Moffat has captured many
rare Lepidoptera; among the Noctuide, I note especially Arzama
diffusa. Ihave supposed that moffatiana was fresh, autumnal, gracfiana,
and figured if as such in my essay, incorrectly.

This discovery that the type of graefiana is the Fall form, and that it
is always to be distinguished from moffatiana by its yellow ground
cotor, red lines, which are also straighter and, perhaps, thicker, as well

584 BULLETIN UNIFED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VL.

as the paler hind wings, leads me to recall all the instances where I
have erred in my estimate of varietal characters in the group. I find
that I have made almost as many mistakes one way as the other; thus
I feel sure that there is not an overplus of “species” as the names.
stand in the books. There are a few varieties still held distinet in
all probability, such as gentilis and perbellis, evicta and vomerina,
but the proportion of such cases is very small indeed; and it must be
remembered that even in Europe, where they have studied the fauna
so much longer and mere carefully, discoveries affecting the stand-
ing of certain forms are yet making.

Platysenta angustiorata n. s.

é. Eyes naked. Body linear, narrow, slender; abdomen a little
flattened, untufted. Front without projection. Labial palpi exceeding
the head; second article squamose; third rather long with appressed
vestiture. Wings silky. Forewings fuscous gray, darker terminally.
A basal blackish dash below median vein. One on the cell before the
small reniform, which consists of two black points ringed with pale.
Lines wanting. Legs unarmed, concolorous with the rest of the ap-
pendages and body. Hind wings pale at base, with broad blackish
terminal band. Beneath both wings with broad black borders. Colo-
rado. This species cannot be a Caradrina, from the well-sized terminal
article of the labial palpi. Itis about the size of atriciliata, differing
in color, but like it in the ornamentation, or rather want of it. I can-
not believe that Guenee’s videns is atriciliata. The insect is like a Car-
adrina, but not agreeing with Leucania. The slender form, naked eyes,
ete., should prevent any idea that in Platysenta we have to do with a
noctuid related to Heliophila. It will, I think, be found that the genus
comes nearer to Caradrina than any other.

Anchocelis digitalis n. s.

Size small. Wings entire; apices pointed. Head, sunken, hairy.
Eyes naked; strongly lashed; somewhat ovate or narrowed. Tongue
not as strong as usual. Front with a transverse elevation. Legs with
the tibiz unarmed, pilose. A neat, compact noctuid, with the orna-
mentation not unlike Teniocampa'modifica. Bright brown. The median
space darker, contrasting, v-shaped, confined by the two pale, narrow,
even, median Jines, converging to internal margin where they nearly
meet; stigmata obsolete. The renitorm alone discernible; figure-of-s
shaped, made of two dark spots, annulate with pale. The wings are a
little silky. Hind wings blackish, with paler, brownish fringes. Anal
tuft brownish; beneath paler, with double common lines and discal
marks on both pair. Orono, Maine; Mrs. Fernald.

This beautiful little noctuid differs in the pointed primaries from the
genus Anchocelis; it agrees in the naked, lashed eyes, and in laving a
clypeal protuberance. It is related to the genera about Tewniscampa.
The body is rather shaggy, the thorax is straight-haired, and there seems

No. 3.] GROTE ON MOTHS OF MAINE. 585

to be a slight tuft behind the collar. While the clypeal projection does
not accurately correspond to the structure of lunosa, as given by Lederer,
still I kiow of no genus where the bright-looking and Cistinetly marked
species is better placed for the moment. The abdomen is not tufted; it
exceeds the hind wings. Theantenne are simple, ciliate. The absence
of all distinct lines or marks on primaries, except the two median lines
inclosing the darker V-shaped median space, should make the species

easily recognizable.

Plusia surena 0. s.

Allied to ampla and epigea. No reddish or brown stains. Fore-
wings whitish gray and black, silky; t. p. line rivulous, without promi-
nent indentations. Metallic mark an open V; the outer limb a little
uneven, silvery, narrow, surmounting a black patch or shade filling the
median field below. S. t. line preceded by a black shade, a little irregu-
lar, black. Reniform upright, black-ringed, not constricted. Orbicular
small, oblique, finely ringed. Hind wings yellowish fuscous, rather pale,
with a moderately broad terminal band. Thorax gray. Orono, Maine;
Mrs. Fernald’s collection.

I am much indebted to Mrs. Fernald for specimens of moths from
the neighborhood of Orono, collected with great care by herself. The
‘fauna of Maine is of exceeding interest. Not only is it the home of
three such rarities as Platysamia columbia, Eusmerinthus cerisyi, and
Catocala coelebs, but several species occur there originally described
from the Pacific coast, such as Agrotis atrifera and Botis fodinalis, while
Syneda allent has been recently again described from the West as sazea,
as Mr. Hy. Edwards informs me. Space does not ailow me to write
further on the subject, but local lists from Orono will be among the most
interesting from any locality, as is evident from Mrs. Fernald’s ecap-
tures, upon whom the occupation of the entomologist sits charmingly.

The families of Moths catalogued in my “ New Check List” I am dis-
posed to consider of equivalent value, yet the tendency among students
of the suborder has been to increase the number of family groups. It
must be admitted that the lower subfamily (Glaucopes) of the Zyganidee
is closely allied in structure to the Arctiide. The errors of Dr. Bois- ©
duval and myself in certain instances show the fact. In the larval state
Dr. Packard has discussed the points in which Ctenucha approaches
Aretia. The effect of limiting the family groups by certain single char-
acters has led to the breaking up of the Bombycide into family groups,
which destroy the unity offered by points of form. We have now such
speculations as that of Mr. Butler to consider as to the afiinity of Cossus
with Castnia. For my part, while I strongly urge the importance of
founding the genera on absolute characters of structure, I would be led
by considerations drawn from the criteria of rank in Hexapoda in decid-
ing the relative position of family and subfamily groups. The long and

heavy abdomen is decisive, I think, of the low position and mutual rela-

586 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

tionship of Cossus and Hepialus, within the Bombyces. We have sur-
viving in this group a number of types now comparatively isolated; in
arranging them we must be governed by general considerations of this
kind. The relationship is net-like, and the survival is unequal. The
Notodontians may be held to be nearer the Noctuide, but I should not
arrange them last on this account; if, by position, we indicate a higher
or lower structure, we are bound to finish the Bombyces with the Hepiali,
with naked larve and short antenne in the moth. Nor can I, on account
of the hairy larve, place any of the Apatela-like genera of the Noctuide
among the Bombyces. I have explained the characters which have
influenced my arrangement of the genera of Noctwide. There is a
general tendency in the increasing breadth of wing and common coior-
ing of both wings towards the Geometrid type. To a certain extent the
sequence is broken by the Deltoids. Yet the higher genera of this
group are not separable by structure from the lower forms of the
Fasciate. It needs only the comparison of Homopyralis and Pseudaglossa
to show this. On the other hand, the limit between the lower Deltoids
and the Pyralide is difficult to define; certainly, I have been puzzled
to locate such a genus as Derectis. The neuration must guide us; yet
how uncertain this character often is, has already been felt by observers.
The result of my own studies has been to insist on the present sequence
of the families, interpolating the Geometride between the Noctuide and
Pyralide. As to the genera, I would keep the Apateloid genera in the
Noctuide ; from which family I think it also unadvisable to separate
the Cymatophorina of Herrich-Schaeffer. In studying a species with
the view of locating it in any family, we must be guided by the relative
form and, as shown by Dr. Packard, the /acies, in addition to the balance
of single structural features. Such consist in the structure of the eyes,
antenne, mouth parts, neuration, and genitalia; the presence of ocelli,
the character of the vestiture, the pattern of marking and color must
be ascertained. After all this, a certain tact, which is the result of
experience, must be depended upon to successfully place the species.
A special discussion of the different forms catalogued by me would be
too lengthy and out of place. I would merely endeavor to interest the
reader and lead him to investigate the many questions which are not
finally answered. The time is coming when our classifications will be
ereatly influenced by a knowledge of extra-limital forms. The student
of a group as represented throughout the globe must be relied upon to
place correctly the species in a single fauna. For this reason MM..
Boisduval and Guenée have been, and now Mr. Butler and Professors
Speyer and Zeller are, in the best position to give a weighty opinion.
The Sphingide of the world in the cabinet of the British Museum attord
their describer many facts which influence the arrangement of the North
American species. It was not without a survey of this and other large
collections that I adopted the present arrangement of our forms. I was
glad to find that our earlier Synonymical Catalogue offered main points

No. 3.] GROTE ON MOTHS OF MAINE. 587

which Mr. Butler could accept, when he considered the Sphinges from
all the continents.

Of the few changes made in my “New Check List,” I find space to
notice my reference of Crocota to the Arctiide, based on the presence
of ocelli and the structure of the larva described by Mr. Saunders.
Again, Dr. Bailey has drawn attention to the characters of Cossus
centrensis; in doing so the structural differences offered by robinie
become apparent, and justify a different name for that species and
allies. In the Sphingide I have taken Dr. Boisduval’s term for our
genus, of which gaurw is the type, Mr. Butler having shown that
Proserpinus is untenable. If we divide Sphinx, as now restricted, we
may use Hiibner’s terms Lethia and Agrius, for which, in my list of
1873, I have proposed types included by Hiibner. But it seems to me
difficult to find sufficiently strong characters, and I have left the genus
undivided, with ligustri as type. The European convolvuli, on the other
hand, I would refer to Phlegethontius. The changes in the Noctwide
have almost all been made originally in other papers. I have reduced
the number of species and genera as much as possible. Both the
moth of Platycerura and the larva, observed by Mr. Thaxter, offer
characters which appear to me to warrant its location with the Bomby-
coid Noctuide, such as Charadra (an American genus distinct from the
European Trichosea ludifica, and Audela, and not with the Notodont-
ians. On the other hand, Hdema seems to me to be decidedly a Bom-
bycid, although it has been suggested that it belongs to the Noctuidae,
by European authorities. Among the curious resemblances between
the lower Zygenide and the Arctiide is the similarity between Ctenu-
cha and Huchetes. The stone-gray or mouse-color of the wings of the
darker Huchates forms, such as egle, recalls Ctenucha, and the red
stripes of Spraguet and the yellow of abdominalis, though not similarly
placed, remind one of the ornamentation of certain forms of Cienucha.
It is owing to a coincidence of outline and color that I believe I made
an error in describing abdominalis as a Zygeenid, a good many years
ago.

The study of the Noctuide gives important hints as to the derivation
of species, to which I have called attention by the method of varia-
tion between “ representative” species, and the fact that the larval stage
affords evidence here and there of independent modification. The lar-
vee of psi, tridens, and occidentalis all differ, while the moths are much
alike and, perhaps, cannot be separated always with certainty ; yet the
American form differs apparently a little more than do the two Euro-
pean ones, occupying the same territory, from each other. Ail cases of
imagos differing but slightly must be held as showing a closer relation-
ship, a nearer epoch of disintegration in time, than is expressed by ge-
neric association. We have no name forsuch groups of individuals, in-
termediate between species and varieties, not forming genera, as we now
understand genera to depend on similarity of structure alone. As

588 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

‘usual, in a multiform and plastie group, like the Bombyces, whose blood
we can trace in groups like the Glaucopidians, which we now separate
from them, the difference having grown to be a large one, we shall find
more clearly proofs of such a condition of groups of individuals. I pro-
pose to call them Progenera. An example is, for instance, Dutana ;
also Ichthyura, Nadata, Clisiocampa, Orgyia (and Hucronia as a division
of Hemileuca, if we are obliged to admit Newnagent into Hemileuca, as
I believe). Other instances will occur to the student. The species of
such Progenera stand in a nearer connection than usual; with some of
the forms the interbreeding may not have become suspended. In the
butterflies Grapta and Lasilarchia (I use this term for the American
Eros, Arthemis, Proserpina, Ursula, Dissippus, excluding the Californian
forms, and thus, perhaps, as a division of Liminitis) are instances of
Progenera. Subgenera are smaller assemblages of species in a genus,
agreeing in some minor peculiarity of structure. They, are not groups
of coincident forms varying Jess among themselves than is the rule with
“species,” while yet not “varieties,” being more distinct and true. In
the study of such groups, particularly in that of Basilarchia, as I have
elsewhere pointed out, lie immense possibilities in the direction of as-
certaining the causes of so much diversity in the Lepidoptera.

INSECTS INJURIOUS TO VEGETATION.

Bugonia subsignaria Hiibner.

This whitish Geometrid used to. be so common in Brooklyn, when I
went to school there in 1857 and subsequently, that the horse-chestnuts,
elms, and maples, the latter especially, beeame completely defoliated,
and the brown measuring worms used to hang down and cover the
sidewalks, ultimately to the great discomfort of the passers by. I have
seén ladies come into the house with as many as a dozen of the worms
on their skirts and crawling over their clothes. Nervous persons were
much frightened in discovering the disagreeable-looking but harmless
caterpillar on their garments. At the same time the worms or Alypia
8-maculata and Thyreus Abbott were very common on the grape vines.
Also the larvee of Deidamia inscripta, Hudryas unio, and Chamyris cerin-
thawerecommon. In New York, as well, some trees about the old Post-
office, on Nassau streef, were similarly affected by the larve of HE. sub-
signaria. The advent of the English sparrow changed all this. The
naked brown larve of subsignaria disappeared before them. Gradu-
ally all the other naked larvee became scarce or disappeared. Orgyia
leucostigma, with its hairy uneatable larvee, became more common. In
Buffalo, where this was always common and the naked larvee were rare
or unknown, the English sparrow did no good as a destroyer of the
caterpillars on the city shade trees. When I lived in Amity street,
Brooklyn, about 1859, I remember to have found on our small grape
vine, in the contracted back yard to the usual brown-stone house, the
larve ot most of the species here mentioned, as well as Mveryx cherilus

No. 3.] GROTE ON MOTHS OF MAINE. 589.

*

and myron, so plentiful was insect life before the English sparrows
came. Thyreus Abbotii was so common that its large larvzee could be
found almost by the hundred. The native birds were undoubtedly di-
minished by the attacks of domestic animals and boys, to allow of such
a multiplication of caterpillars. I think those were golden days for the
Lepidopterists, looking back on them now. How much their bright-
ness in retrospect owes to other causes, in my own case, is a matter of
trite philosophical inquiry and conclusion.

LARVA AFFECTING THE PINE.

Citheronia sepulcralis Grote.

This large moth was found on the yellow pine, in the larval condition,
by the late Mr. James O. Treat, in Massachusetts. On an unpublished
plate, painted by Abbot, the moth is represented, but not the earlier
stages of the insect. This plate is in the British Museum Collection.
The moth has been reared in numbers by Mr Koebele in Florida. In
all stages it is as distinct from regalis, as any two forms in one genus can
possibly be. I notice it here, to correct a remarkable statement by Dr.
Packard in his excellent and very useful Report on Insects injurious to
Forest and Shade Trees, that it may be a variety of regalis. It has been
found not uncommonly about Atlanta, Ga., and, I believe, on small per-
simmon bushes as well as the pine. Specimens reared by a collector
there, were forwarded to a well-known collector of Reading, Pa. There
can be no doubt that the species are abundantly distinet. I collecteda
very few C. regalis larvee about Atlanta on the cotton plants. The two
larvee differ on comparison; that of regalis is differently colored, larger,
and with longer horns. In my opinion there is no doubt of their distinct
character.

Tetralopha diluculella Grote.

This species infests the terminal twigs of the pine in its larval state.
Professor Comstock gives a description of the larva and pupa collected
in Florida on Pinus teda. The insect is found as far north as New
York. Ihave given a scientific sketch of the group to which I refer this
species and its genus. It is a new subfamily of Pyralide, which I call
Epipaschie, after the typical genus founded by the late Dr. Clemens. It
is chiefly characterized by a basal tegumentary extension to the male
antenna.

Pinipestis Zimmermani Grote.

I have described the larva and moth of Pinipestis Zimmermani, Grote,
in the Bulletin of the Geological Survey, Vol. [V, No. 5. The genus
may not be distinct from Dioryctria; but the European moth has not
the raised scales on forewings, and the neuration varies somewhat. I
dug out from pine trees these larve in the winter; and at different times
Mr. Zimmerman, of Erie County, New York, who first drew my atten-
tion to the insect and for whom I named it, brought me specimens.

590 BULLETIN UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. [Vol. VI.

These were pinkish compared with the larve I found in June beneath
the gummy mass of exuded sap, and which pupated in July. I could
not carry the winter larve through, but they are undoubtedly the same
species. Professor Kellicott, I believe, at first doubted this, but after-
wards came to my original opinion. The species is, then, single brooded.
It is very destructive and spreads in nurseries among imported pines.
As it affects the branches and is protected by the gum, I do not think
that anything can be done except digging the larve out with the knife,
which is tedious and, except under peculiar circumstances, an ee
able and difficult process.

LARVA AFFECTING THE HICKORY.

Phycis caryze Grote, Papilio I, 13.

This species was discovered by Mr. Coquillett, of Ill. The larva
burrows into the branches of the pignut hickory, Carya porcina. ‘The
larva spins a thin web around the footstalks of the leaves which grow
near the terminal end of the branch, and then burrows into the termi-
nal bud and wood of the first year’s growth.”

Phycis angusella Grote, North Am. Entomologist I, 51.

This species has been reared from larve boring into the leaf-stems ot
the hickory on Long Island by Mr. Akhurst. The specimens of the
moth which I have examined proved to beall males. It may be known
by the continuous black dash on the under side of hind wings along costa.
I use the typical generic term Phycis of Haworth for the species for-
merly separated under Acrobasis.

Phycis demotella Grote, Papilio I, 14.

This moth, of which I only know the male, and not as yet the larva,
has a shorter black mark on secondaries beneath, not connected with
base of wing, and a narrow streak on median vein. Head and thorax
pinkish white, as also base of wings. Taken with angusella at West
Farms by Mr. James Angus. I think the larve feeds on Hickory.

LARVA AFFECTING THE LOCUST.

Salebria contatella Grote.

This species was bred from larve found on Robinia pseudacacia, in
the Department of Agriculture grounds at Washington. It draws the
leaves together, the side of one to that of another, according to Profes-
sor Comstock, in whose valuable report for 1880 an account of the in-
sect will be found, p. 261, et seg. The variety 5-punctella was also bred
from the same larve. This variety seems to arise, as I have stated, by
the outer line of the t. a. line, becoming resolved into dots. My iigure,
in the Am. Ent., is the least exact on the plate, the figures on which,
otherwise, were accurately transferred to the stone and finely engraved
upon it.

No.3] GROTE ON MOTHS OF MAINE. 591,

LARVA AFFECTING THE CABBAGE.

Plusia dyaus Grote.

This species has been reared from larvze found on cabbage. I have
seen no account of it, however. I believe it will be found on other
plants more commonly and not principally on cabbage like Plusia ni, a
Kuropean form of peculiar structure, which I think may have been intro-
duced into this country much as the White Cabbage-butterfly. Although
the American specimens have been described as distinct, I regard them
as the same as the European species.

Botis repetitalis (rote.

Specimens of the larva of this species were received by Professor
Comstock, when Entomologist to the Department of Agriculture, from Dr.
A. Oemler, of Savannah, found feeding on cauliflower. It is described
on page 270 of the report for 1880, which latter is one of the finest and
most scientifically valuable documents ever issued by the department,
of which I have any knowledge.

Geometride.

After comparing European specimens with our own, I have made the
two following changes in our lists:

Glaucopteryx Inventaraia, Gr.
Gl. Cesiatat Butler, Papilio I, 222.

Scotosid Indubitata, Gr.
Se. dubitatat Harvey, Bull. Buff. 8S. N.S. I., Pl. XI, fig. 7.

Psi,

ae.

3

A

2 '
+ P
Be, +e
ates eer 6
1
a I Na oy
‘
pak
‘ rt i, or
, =
4 ae ‘Wes,
,
, 1
y is
|
the 33
Ni ae :
’
ts J
ft
‘ a a+
,
4 * L
ely * ‘
wha 4 .
. or 4, !
. ‘£ ;
« ei
“ {Aine .
its * 7
2 N
ay t
ee os
i ‘ yee
7 i
x ' Se gery
i Aire
.
{
» i
’ ;
» . .
{ ; e
\ y aul
ae
ti \s x
* pens "
‘
i ‘ } f th)
« % “Al Rilo iat
: 1 . 1 ch napeep?

INDEX TO VOL. VI.

Abies
concolor 10, 14
subalpina 10, 14
Accipiter 243
Acronycta 573
Actodromas 247
Adenocaulon bicolor 19
Aichmophorus occidentalis 251
AX lurodon
hyznoides 388
saevus 387
wheelerianus 388
AXsalon columbarius 242
athyia 250
Agelzeus 230
Agrotiphila 164
Agrotis 154, 155, 156, 157, 158, 159, 160, 161,
162, 163, 164, 258, 259, 260, 565, 506,
567, 582
apicalis 153
cloanthoides 153
rubefactalis 154
Aix sponsa 250
Allen, Joel Asaph:
‘Preliminary List of Works and Papers
relating to the Mammalian Orders
Cete and Sirenia 399
Ammoconia 164
Ampelis 219, 220
Amphicyon 178
Amphispiza 226
Anas boseas 249
Anchocelis digitalis 584
Anicla 157
Annotated List of the Birds of Nevada, by
W. J. Hoffman, M. D. 203
Anorthura troglodytes pacificus 215
Anthus ludovicianus 215
Anytus 164
Apatela 571, 574
Aphelocoma 234
Aquila chrysaétus canadensis 244
Arachnida 293
Archibuteo lagopus sanctijohannis 244
Arctomyscis 575
Arctostaphylos pungens 18
38 GB

Ardea herodias 246
Ardetta exilis 246
Asio 241
Astragalinus 223
Audela 568
Auriparus flaviceps 213
Bathyopsis fissidens 194
Bernicla 249
Betula occidentalis 10, 16
Bibliography of publications relating to
Birds of Nevada 252
Birds of Nevada, Annotated List of the,
by W. J. Hoffman 203
Botaurus lentiginosus 246
Botis 272, 273, 577
flavofascialis 577
washingtonialis 578
Bouteloua 26
Bryophila 570
Buchloé dactyloides 26
Buteo 243
Calamodon cylindrifer 184
Calamospiza bicolor 228
Calochortus 19
Calypte costa 237
Campylorhynchus brunneicapillus 214
Canace obscura 245
Canis brachypus 389
Carpodacus 222
Castor 368, 370
Cathartes aura 244
Catherpes mexicanus conspersus 214
Centrocercus urophasianus 245
Centrophanes lapponicus 224
Centurus uropygialis 240
Cercocarpus
ledifolius 10, 15
parvifolius 20
Cerma 570
Certhis familiaris rufa 214
Ceryle 240
Chamepelia passerina 245
Characteristics of the herbaceous and
shrubby vegetation of the Recky
Mountain forest region 17
Charadra 569
593

594

Charadrius sheppardianus 83

Chaulelasmus streperus 24

Chen hyperboreus albatus 249

Choetura vanxi 233

Chondestes grammica strigata 224

Chordeiles 233

Chrysomitris pinus 224

Chytonix 571

Cinelus mexicanus 210

Circus hudsonins 243

Citheronia sepulcralis 589

Clangula 250

Clastes 184

Coccyzus americanus 241

Colaptes 240

Coleogyne ramosissima 22

Coleoptera 291

Coloreodon ryderanus 173

Columba fasciata 244

Composite 19

Conanthus 23 =

Contopus 235, 236

Cope, E. D.:

On a Wading Bird from the Amyzon
Shales 83

On some new Batrachia and Reptilia
from the Permian Beds of Texas 79

On the Canidz of the Loup Fork
Epoch 387

On the Numravide and Canide of the
Miocene Period 165

On the Vertebrata of the Wind River
Eocene Beds of Wyoming 183

Review of the Rodentia of the Mio-
cene Period of North America 301

Copipanolis 563

Corvus 2382, 233

Coryphodon 194

Cotile riparia 221

Coturniculus passerinus perpallidus 224

Cowania Mexicana 20

Crocodilus 184

Cypseloides niger borealis 238

Cypselus saxatalis 237

Dafila acuta 249

Dendrocyena fulya 249

Dendreca 217

Dermatemys 184

Dicopis 568

Didymictis 190, 191

Dimetrodon

cruciger 82
semiradicatus 80
Diphryx prolatella 273
Diphthera 569

INDEX TO VOL. VI.

Diptera 291
Dolichonyx oryzivorus 229
Dytes nigricollis californicus 252
Echinosciurus 305 ;
Ectopistes migratoria 244
_Empidonax 236
Entoptychus 37
QHoscuirus 304
Eremochloe 23
Eremophila
alpestris 234
alpestris, osteology of, 119
dorsal vertebre, sternum 131
hyoid arch 127
lower mandible 128
pelvic limb 144
sacral vertebra, pelvis 155
scapular arch 138
skull 120
spinal column, cervical portion 129
upper extremity 140
Ereunetes pusillus 247
Ericoma cuspidata 26
Erismatura rubida 260
Esthonyx 185, 186
Eneaterva variaria 564
Euclidia interealaris 563
Eugonia subsignaria 588
Eulintneria 564
Eulonche 576
Eumys 376
lockingtonianus 176
Eurinorhynchus pygmeus 256
Eutheca mora 257
Eutolype 568
Falco peregrinus nevius 242
Feralia 569
¥ernaldia 274
Florissant, Colorado, between South and
Hayden Parks, The Tertiary Lake-
basin at, by Samuel H. Scudder 279.
Frasera 19
Fulica americana 248
atra 256
Fuligula rufina 256
Fulix 250
Funambulus 305
Funisciurus 306
Galecynus 180
Gallinago media wilsoni 246
Genus sciurus, Revision of the, by Dr. E.
L. Trouessart 301
Geococeyx californianus 241
Geosciurus 307
Geothlypis 217

INDEX TO VOL. VI.

Glycosma 19
Glyptopleura 23
Gortyna 267, 268
Harrisii 268, 276
Gray, Asa, and Joseph D. Hooker:
On the Vegetation of the Rocky Mount-
ain Region, &c. 1
Grayia 23
Grote, A. R.:
New Moths, principally collected by
* Mr. Roland Thaxter, in Maine, with
notes on noxious species, and re-
marks on classification 579
New Moths, with partial catalogue of
Noctue 563
North American Moths, with a pre-
liminary catalogue of the species
Hadena and Polis 257
Preliminary list of the North Amer-
ican species of Agrotis, with de-
scriptions 149
Grus canadensis 248
Guiraca ccerulea 223
Gymuokitta cyanocephala 233
Gymnoptychus 364
Hadena 260, 261, 262
misera 582
Ilalizéius leucocephalus 244
Ilarporhynebus 210
Harrismemna 569
Helioseuirus 306,
Helminthophaga 216
cincinnatiensis 256
Heliscomys 375
Hemiptera 292
Hermidiuin 23
Herodias alba egretta 246
Hesperochiron 19
Hesperocichla nxevia 209
Hesperomys 376
Heterocampa Chapmanii 258
Heterosciurus 204
Hicrofalco mexicanus polyagrus 242
Hirundo erythrogastra 220
Hoffman, Dr. W. J.:

Annotated List of the Birds of Ne-

vada 203
Hooker, Joseph D., and Asa Gray:
Cn the Vegetation of the Rocky
Mountain Region, &c. 1
Himantopus mexicanus 248
Hy:enocyon 181
Hylocichla 208
Hymenoptera 290
Hyopsodus 126

Hyracotherium 198, 199
Ichthyura strigosa 582
Icteria virens longicauda 217
Icterus 231
Icticyon 181
Ictops 192
Ischryomys 366
Jochecera 574
Junco oregonus 226
Juniperus
Californica 10, 15
occidentalis 10, 15
pachyphlea 19, 15
Virginiana 10, 14
Lambdotherium 196
Lanius 219
ludovicianus, osteology of, 351
pelvis and the pelvic limb 355
scapular arch and pectoral limb 356
skull 351
sternum 354
vertebral column 353
hyoid arch 353
Lanivireo 218, 219
Larix occidentalis 10, 14
Larus 251
Lathosea 270
Lepidoptera 290, 291
Lepitoreuma 575
Lepus 384, 385
Leucosticte 223
Lewisia 19
Litoprosopus futilis 271
Lophodytes 251
Lophophanes inornatus 212
Lophortyx 245
Loup Fork Epoch, On the Canide of the,
by E. D. Cope 387
Loxia 222
Luceria 262
Macroxus 305
Mammalian Orders, Cete and Sirenia,
Preliminary List of Works and
Papers relating to the, by Joel
Asaph Allen 399
Mareca americana 249
Mastiphanes £95
Megacronycta 573
Melanerpes formicivorus bairdi 256
torquatus 240
Melospiza 226, 227
Meniscomys 365
Mergus 250
Merolonche 574
Merula migratoria propinqua 208

596

Miacis 189, 190

Microthene whitneyi 242

Microcoelia 570

Microsyops 188

Mimus polyglottus 209

Molothrus ater 229

Momaphana 569

Munroa squarrosa 26

Myiadestes townsendi 211

Myiarchus cinerascens 235

Myiodioctes 217

Mylagaulus 373, 374

Myriapoda 294

Nannosciurus 304

Neecundo aceroides 9, 15

Neosciurus 305

Nettion carolinensis 249

Neuroptera 293

New Moths, principally collected by Mr.
Roland Thaxter in Maine, with
notes on noxious species and re-
marks on classification, by A. R.
Grote 579

New Moths, with partial catalogue of
Nocture, by A. R. Grote, A. M. 553

Nimravus

confertus 172
gomphodus 171

Nitrophila 23

Noctua 566, 568

Nonagria subflava 583

North American Moths, with a prelimin-
ary catalogue of the species Hadena
and Polia, by A. R. Grote 257

North American Species of Agrotis, with
descriptions, Preliminary List of
the, by A. R. Grote 149

Nyctale acadica 242

Nyctiardea grisea nevia 246

Numenius longirostris 247

Oedemasia eximia 275

Oligia 265

Olor buecinator 248

Omphalocera 271, 272

On a Crayfish from the Lower Tertiary
Beds of Western Wyoming, by A.
S. Packard, jr. 391

On a Wading Bird from the Amyzon
Shales, by E. D. Cope 83

On some new Batrachia and Reptilia from
the Permian Beds of Texas, by E.
D. Cope 79

On the Canidz of the Loup Fork Epoch,
by E. D. Cope 387

INDEX TO VOL. VI.

On the Nimravide and Canide of the
Miocene Period, by E. D. Cope 165

On the Vertebrata of the Wind River
Eocene Beds of Wyoming, by E.
D. Cope 183

Oreortyx picta plumifera 245

Oreoscoptes montanus 209

Orotherium 199

Orthoptera 293

Orthosia 269, 270

Oryctes 23

Osteology of Eremophila alpestris, by
Rk. W. Schufeldt 119

Osteology of Lanius ludovicianus excubi-
torides, by R. W. Shufeldt, M. D.
sol

Osteology of Speotyto Cunicularia var.
Hypogea, by R. W. Shufeldt 87

Osteology of the North American Tetra-
onide, by R. W. Shufeldt 309

Oxyechus vociferus 246

Oxytheca 23

Pachnobia 167

Pachynolophus 197

Paciculus 377

Packard, jr., A. S.:
On a Crayfish from the Lower Ter-

tiary beds of Western Wyoming
391

Palecheerus platyops 174

Paleolagus 381

Palaeosyops borealis 196

Pandion haliaétus carolinensis 243

Pantolestes secans 187

Pantylus cordatus 79

Pappichthys 184

Parasciurus 305

Parus montanus 212 ;

Passerculus sandwichensis alaudinus 224

Passerella 227

Passerina amcena 228

Pediccetes phasianellus columbianus 245

Pelecanus erythrorhynchus 251

Pelidna alpina americana 247

Pelycodus 187

Peraphyllum ramosissimum 20

Perigrapha transparens 582

Petrochelidon lunifrons 220

Phalacrocorax dilophus 251

Phalenoptilus nuttalli 238

Phainopepla nitens 211

Phenacodus 199, 200

Phycis 590

Physaria 23

INDEX TO VOL. VI.

Pica
rustica hudsonica 233
Engelmanni 10, 13
pungens 10, 14
Picicorvus columbianus 233
Picoides arcticus 239
Picus 239
Pinipestis Zimmermani 589
Pinus
aristata 10.12
contorta 10, 12
edulis 10, 13
flexelis 10,13
monophylla 10, 13
ponderosa 10, 11
Pipilo 227
Placosaurus 184
Platycerura 569
furcilla 258
Platysenta augustiorata 584
Platyspermum 23
Plegadis guarauna 246
Plesiarctomys 184
Pleuraphis Jamesi 26
Pleurolicus 380
Plusia surena 585
Podiceps holbélli 252 ®
Podilymbus podiceps 252
Polia 266, 267
Polioptila 211, 212
ealiforniaca 256
Polygrammate 570
Pocecetes gramineus confinis 224
Populus
angustifolia 9, 16
balsamifera 9, 16
Tremonti 10, 16
monilifera 10, 16
tremuloides 10, 16
trichocarpa 10, 16
Porzana 248
Preliminary List of the North American
Species of Agrotis, with descrip-
tions, by A. R. Grote 149
Preliminary List of Works and Papers
relating to the Mammalian Orders
Cete and Sirenia, by Joel Asaph
Allen 399
Prionopteryx olivella 274
Progne subis 220
Protolabis prebensilis 175
Protopsalis tigrinus 193
Prunus Andersonii 21
Psaltriparus 213

597

Psecadia semiopaca 275
Pseudanarta 255
Pseudoglaea decepta 271
Pseudotsuga Douglasii 10, 13
Purshia 23
tridentata 20
Pyranga 221
Pyrocephalus rubinius mexicanus 237
‘Pyrrhia 564
Querquedula 249
Rallus virginianus 248 |
Raphia 569
Recurvirostra americana 248
Regulus 212
Reithrosciurus 304
Remarks on the distribution of Vegetation
in Nevada as affecting that of the
Avi-Fauna 204
Review of the Rodentia of Miocene Period
of North America, by E. D. Cope, N.
A. § 361
Revision of the Genus Sciurus, by Dr.
E. L. Trovessart 301
Rhinosciurus 305
Rhyacophilus solitarius 247
Rocky Mountain forest region, Character-
istics of the herbaceous and shrubby
vegetation of the 17
Rocky Mountain Region, The Vegetation
of, by Asa Gray and Joseph D.
Hooker 1
Rodentia of the Miocene Period of North
America, Review of the, by E. D.
Cope, N. A. S. 361
Salebria contatella 590
Salpinctes obsoletus 214
Sayornis sayi 235
Sciurus 363
ballovianus 177
Scolecophagus cyanocephalus 232
Scopelosoma mofiatiana 583
Scops asio 241
Scudder, Samuel H.:
The Tertiary Lake-basin at Florissant.
Colorado, between South and Hay-
den Parks 279
Selasphorus 237
| Setophaga ruticilla 218
Shepherdia rotundifolia 20
| Shufeldt, R. W.:
Osteology of Eremophila alpestris 119
| Shufeldt, R. W.:
Osteology of Lanius ludovicianus ex-
cubitorides 351

598

Shufeldt, R. W.—Continued.
Osteology of Speotyto Cunicularia,
Hypogea &7
Osteology of the North American Tet-
raonidee 309
Sialia 210
Sitta 213, 214
Sidalcea candida 19
Spatula clypeata 249
Speotyto cunicularia hypogea 242
Speotyto cunicularia var Hypogza, Os-
teology of 87
dorsal vertebree, sternum 97
hyoid arch 92
lower mandible 93
pelvic limb 112
sacral vertebre, pelvis 102
scapular arch 106
skull 87
spinalcolumn, cervical portion 94
upper extremity 109
Spermosciurus 306
Sphyrapicus 239
Spirea 21
Spizella 225
Sporobulus airoides 26
Steganopus wilsoni 247
Stelgidopteryx serripennis 221
Stellula calliope 237
Sterna 241
Sturnella neglecta 230
Stypolophus strenuus 192
Symphemia semipalmata 247
Syuthyris 19
Tachycineta 220, 221
Tamiasciurus 306
Tantulus loculator 246
Tapinostola orientalis 583
Telmatodytes palustris paludicola 215
Temnocyon 179
Tetradymia 23

INDEX TO VOL. VI.

Tetralopha diluculella 589
Tetraonidie, osteology of the North Amer-
ican 309
pelvis and the pelvic limb 340
scapular arch and pectoral limb 335
skull 311
sternum 329
vertebral column 323
The Tertiary Lake-basin at Florissant,
Colorado, between South and Hay-
den Parks, by Samuel H. Scudder
279
The Vegetation of the. Rocky Mountain
Region and a Comparison with that
of other parts of the World, by
Asa Gray and Joseph D. Hooker.
Thryomanes bewicki spilurus 215
Tinnunculus sparyerius 243
Townsendia 19
Trizena 571
Tricardia 23
Tripudia basicinerea 563
Trochilium simulans 257
Trochilus alexandri 237
Troglodytes aédon parkmanni 215
Trouessart, Dr. E. L.:
Revision of the Genus Sciurus 301
Tyrannus 235
Vaseya comata 26
Vertebrata of the Wind River Eocene
Beds of Wyoming, On the 183
Vesperugo anemophelus 184
Vireo belli 219
Vireosylva gilva swainsoni 218
Xanthocephalus icterocephalus 229:
Xenopicus albolarvatus 239
Xerus 307
Zamelodia melanocephala 228
Zenaidura carolinensis 245
Zonotrichia 225

BURL E PING Norse) Olga val

-

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

ART. XVIII.—Preliminary list of the works and papers relating to the
Mammalian orders of Cete and Sirenia. By Joel Asaph
Allen. pp. 397-568.

ART. XIX.—New Moths. with partial catalogue of Noctue. By A.R.
Grote. pp. 563-579.

ART. XX.—New Moths, principally collected by Mr. Roland Thaxter
in Maine, with notes on noxious species, and remarks
on classification. By A. R. Grote. pp. 579-590.